NATIONAL BUILDING CODE

OF INDIA 1983
GKOUf I- t’AK.TS II If1 I V V a n d X
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
GROUP 1
PART 11 ADMINISTRATION
PART III DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL BUILDING
REQUIREMENTS
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
PART V BUILDING MATERIAtS
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

MANAKBHAVAN,9BAHADURSHAHZAFARMARG, N E W D E L H I -
SP 7(l): 1983
FIRST PUBLISHED DECEMBER 1970

FIRST REVISION APRIL 1984

FIRST REPRINT MAY 1992

0 BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

UDC $9 : 006.76

THE NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 1983 WAS ADOPTED BY THE BUREAU OF
INDIAN STANDARDS (THEN INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTION) ON 26 DECEMBER 1983,
AFTER THE DRAFT FINALIZED BY THE GUIDING COMMITTEE FOR NATIONAL
BUILDING CODE HAD BEEN APPROVED BY THE CIVIL ENGINEERING DIVISION
COUNCIL.

PRICE Rs 250.00

PRINTED IN INDIA AT KAPOOR ART PRESS, MAYAPURI INDUSTRIAL AREA, NEW DELHI 110064 AND
PUBkISHED BY BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARC, NEW DELHI 110002
FOREWORI:)

Consrructinn programmes a r e i n t e r w o v e n iti a large measure in ali sectors of

development. br it housing, transport. industry. irrigation, power. agriculture,
educati<m or health. (‘onstruction, both public and private. accounts for about fifty
percent of the total outla\/ in ant: Plan. Half of the total money spent onconstruction
activitic\ i:, speilt on buiidinps i’or residential. illdustrial. commercial. administrative,
educational. medical, municipal and entertalnrnent 1Ise.j. It is estimated that about
half :)I the rota1 outlay on buildings would be on housing. lna Five-Year Plan of, say,
KS I 560 biiiion, about KS 7X0 billion would he spent on consti uction generally, of
which about Rs 390 billion would be on buildings ot val’ioils tl’pes and occupancies. lt
is impel-ativc that tor such a large national investment, optimum return\ are assu:cd and
was!age in construction is a\;oidcd.
Soon after the Third Plan. the Plannmg CommisGon decided that the whole gamut o!
operations involved in construction. such as administrative. organissti~~nal, fin:t.lcial
and technical aspects. bc studied in depth. F o r [his stlld!,. ;I I%nei of I,\pcrt\ ua.s
appointed in 1965 by the Planning C‘\mrnission and it> rccommendatlons are found iri
the ‘Report on Economics in Constructinn <..(>si>’ published in 1968.

One of the facets of’buildiq construction. namci!. conttoilingand regulat!ng buildings

through municipal byelaws and departmental handbooks recei\,ed the atrentlon of the
Panel and a study of thqsc regulatory practices I-evealsd thirt some of the prcvaiiing
methods of construction are outmoded; some designs arc o\,erburdcneci with satet!
factors and there arc other design criteria \vhlch. in the light of newer techmquch anh
methodologieb. could be rationalized; and bullding byclaws and repulation~ of
municipal bodies which largely regulate the building activit! In the country whrrevrr
they exist, were outdated. They did not cater to the UIL’ of neu buiidlng materials and
the latest developments in buildrng designs and construction techniclues. It alscl became
clear that these codes and byelaws lacked uniformity and they were mol-e often than not
‘specification oriented’ and not ‘performance oriented’.

.fhese studies resulted m a recommendation tha: a National Building Code be prepared

to unify the building regulations throughout the country for use by government
departments, municipal b o d i e s a n d other c o n s t r u c t i o n agencies. ~The Indian
Standards Institutmn was entrusted bythe Planning Commission with the preparation
of the Nationai t3uilding Code. For fulfilling this task a Guiding Committee for the
preparation of 111~ Code. was set up by the Civil Engineering Ditision Council in
1967. T!iis Comrniticc. in turn, set up I8 :,pecialist panels to prepare th2 various parts
of the Code. ‘The Guidil ;g Committee and its panels were constituted with architects.
:own planners. material:; experts. structural, construction, electrical illumination, air-
conditioning, acoustics and puhi!c health engineers. These experts were drawn irorn
the Central and State Ciovcrnmen:\. local bodies. professional institutions and private
agencies. The first vcrsior: oi the Code wan puh!ished in 1970.

After the National Building Code was publishcti in 1970. a vigorous implementation
drive was launched by the ISI to propagate the conrents and use 01’ the Code among all
concerned in the field of planning, desiguinp and COtIStillCtiOtl activities. FOI- this.
State-wise implementation conferences wet-c organilcd with the participation of the
leading engineers, architects. town planners. administrators, buildirq material
manufacturers. building and plurnblng services installation dgcncirs, cuntractorz, etc.

These conferences have been useful in getting across the conteiits of the Code to t!le
interests concerned. .These conferences have also heiped in the eatabli>hment of
Action Committees to look into the actual irnpiementation work carried out by the
construction departments. local bodies and other agencies in different State.<. The
Action Committees reprcscnting all Interests in individual States met reguiarly to
review and consider the action required leading to the actual adoption of the
Code. The main actions taken by the Action Committees were tc’ revise and
modernize their existing regulatory media, such as specifications, handbooks. manuals,
etc. as well as building byelaws of local bodies like municipalities at tit>- and town levels,
zilla parishads, panchayats and development authorities, so as tobrivg them in line with
the provisions contained in the National Building Code. Arlsmg out ot this,
considerable progress has been made by most of the states in revising their building
byelaws with the assistance of ISI.
Some of the byelaws of corporations, municipalities and other local bodies in the States
of Maharashtra, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, Andhra Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh,
Rajasthan, Bihar, West Bengal, Union Territory of Delhi, Madhya Pradesh and
Haryana were redrafted to bring them in line with National Building Code and
submitted to the respective Governments. These are under various stages of
consideration.
Some of the State Construction Departments like Public Works Departments have set
up Cells to look into the revision of PWD Specifications and Codes to align them with
the National Building Code and other related Indian Standards.
In spite of the best efforts by all concerned to implement the Code, the revised building
byelaws ‘finalized in many states have not yet been adopted by the concerned
implementing/enforcing agencies due to procedural bottlenecks. Efforts are necessary
at Government level to overcome the difficulties in revising buildingbyelaws and PWD
specifications and adopting them in practice, reflecting the present state of knowledge
on various aspects of building construction.
Since the publication in 1970 of the National Building Code, a large number of
comments and useful suggestions for modifications and additions to different parts and
sections of the Code were received as a result of use of the Code by all concerned, and
revision work of building byelaws of some states. In addition, a number of Indian
Standards have been prepared over the past 13 years and a large number of Indian
Standards on which some parts/sections of the Code were based have undergone
substantial modifications, particular mention may be made of the revisions to Concrete
Code, Earthquake Code and Masonry Code. The revised version of the National
Building Code has been prepared taking into consideration all the aspects mentioned
above.

The National Building Code is a single document in which,like a network, the

information contained in varicus Indian Standards is woven into a pattern of continuity
and cogency with the interdependent requirements of sections carefully analyzed and
fitted in to make the whole document a cogent continuous volume. A continuous
thread of ‘preplanning’ is woven which, in itself, contributes considerably to the
economies in construction particularly in building and plumbing services.

The Code contains regulations which can be immediately adopted or enacted for use by
various departments, municipal administrations and public bodies. It lays down a set
of minimum provisions designed to protect the safety of the public with regard to
structural sufficiency, fire hazards and health aspects of buildings; solong as these basic
requirements are met, the choice of materials and methods of design and construction is
left to the ingenuity of the architect and the engineer. The Code also covers aspects of
administrative regulations, development control rules and general building
requirements; fire protection requirements; stipulations regarding materials and
structural design; rules for design of electrical installations, lighting, air-conditioning
and lifts; regulation for ventilation, acoustics and plumbing services, such as water
supply, drainage, sanitation and gas supply; measures to ensure safety of workers and
public during construction; and rule’s for erection of signs and outdoor display
structures.
Some other important points covered by the Code include ‘industrialized systems of
building’ and ‘architectural control’. The increase in population in the years to come
will have a serious impact on the housing problem. It has been estimated that the
urban population of India will double itself in the next two decades and consequently at
least as much additional accommodation as is now available has to be provided during
this period. Speed of construction is thus of dn utmost importance and special
consideration has to be given to industrialized systems of building. With increased
building activity, it is also essential that there should be some architectural control in the
development of our cities and towns if creation of ugliness and slum-like conditions in
our urban areas is to be avoided.
The changes incorporated in the present Code have been specified in the Foreword to
each part/section of the Code. Some of the important changes are: addition of
VI
development control rules, requirements for greenbelts and landscaping including
norms for plantation of shrubs and trees, special requirements for low income housing;
tire safety regulations for high rise buildings; revision of structural design section based
on new and revised codes, such as concrete codes (plain and reinforced concrete andpre-
stressed concrete), Earthquake Code, Masonry Code; addition of outside design
conditions for important cities’ in the country, requirements relating to noise and
vibration, air filter. automatic control, energy conservation for air-conditioning; and
guidance on the design of water supply system for multi-storeyed buildings.

The Code as now published is the second version representing the present state of
knowledge on various aspects of building construction. The process of preparation of
the Code has thrown up a number of problems; some of them have been answered fully
and some partially. Therefore, a continuous programme is envisaged by which
additional knowledge that is gained through technological evolution,users’views over a
period of time pinpointingireas of clarification and coverage and results of research in
the field, would be incorporated in to the&ode from time to time to make it a living
document. It is proposed to bring out changes to the Code periodically.

Provision of the Code will serve as a model for adoption by PWDs and other
government construction departments, local bodies and other construction agencies.
Existing PWD codes, municipal byelaws and other regulatory media could either be
replaced by the National Building Code or suitably modified to ‘cater to local
requirements in accordance with the provisions of the Code. Any difficulties
encountered in adoption of the Code cou!d be brought to the notice of the Guiding
Committee fsr Corrective Actiori.

This publication farms part of the Natiohal Building Code of India 1983 and
Contains the following Parts:

Part 11’ Administration

Part III Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements

Part IV Fire Protection

Part V Building Materials

Part X Signs and Outdoor Display Structures

The information contained in this publication will essentially serve the town planner
and the architect in dealing with the development and building schemes from the
early stages of planning.
Guiding Committee for National Building Code, BDC64
CHAIRMAN
MAJ-GEN HARKIRAT SINGH
W-S1 Greater Kailash - I, New Delhi 110 048
MEMBERS
IX B. M. AH U J A
SHRI V. ASRANI PA H A L A J
SHRI J. P. BAJAJ
SHRI SASXDARAN (Alternate)
S HRI B ALWANT SINGH
S HRJ J. R. BHALLA
SHRJ M. S. BHATJA
Sari H. U. B~JLAN~
S HRJ H. K. YADAV(A/ternare)
SHRJ C. S. CHANDRASEKHARA
S HRJ R. CHANNABASAPPA
?&RI A. CHATTERJl
CHIEF ENGXNEER (BUILDINGS )
S UPERINTENDING ENGINEER
(I’ AND D CIRCLE) (Afrernate)
CHIEF ENGINEER (DESIGNS)
SUPERJN?‘ENDING ENGINEER (Aftrmore)
%RI D N. CHOPSA
REPRESENTING
Indian Institute of Technology, New Delhi
Corporation of Madras, Madras
The Institution of Surveyors, New Delhi
In personal capacity (N-29 Panchshila Park,
New Delhi 110 017)
The Indian Institute of Architects, Bombay
In personal capacity (A-21 36 Sufdarjang Encfcve,
New Delhi 110 016)
Housing and IJrban Development Corporation
Ltd, New Delhi
Institute of Town Planners (India), New Delhi
Corporation of Bangalore, Bangalore
Tariff Advisory Committee (Delhi Regional
Committee). Bombay
Public Works Department, Govt of Tamii Nadu
Central Public Works Department (Central
Designs Organizationj. New Delhi

SHR~ D. S.DESAJ
PROF DJNESH MOHAN

SHR~ 2. C. MANGAL (Alternate)

DJRECT~R Schooi <:I’ ‘Planning and .4rchi:ecture, NW Delhi
DIRECTOR (CIVIL E&xxi) R a i l w a y Board (Ministr\i of Railu~y-,)
ADDITIONAL DIRECTOR (G) (,4Irernare)
DIRECTQR STANT,IR.DS (C~vrr.) Reseaixh, Prsigns & Standards Org”ni;vt::o;l
(Mmijtry oi Rai!ways), I uckvw
DIRECTOR (ENGG SERVICES &PROJECTS ) Municipal Corpo:atiGn of Greater Bombay,
Rrlmbay
CITY ENGINEER (Afrernu!c)
SHRJ J. DURAI RAJ in p e r s o n a l c a p a c i t y (Cf, 141 Sa:yo Mtarg,
New Delhi I!0 02f)
GEN‘ERAL SECRE TARY The Institution of Fire Engineers India, New Delhi
SHRI S. S. GILL Public Wcrks Department, Government of Punj?b
SHR; V. K. GUPT~ Engineer-in-Chief’s dranch, Army Headquarters,
New Delhi
SHRI K. DEV.~RAJAN (Afrernare)
SHRI IV. JAG.~NNATH Steel Authority of India Limited. Yey~, !)elhi
SHR~ J. C. K.4pcR Danf~~ss (India) Limited, Bombay
DP R. K. GLlpTA (Ai!ermm)
SIJKI A. C KH.L\ZAVU~I Regional Research Laboraiory (CSIR), Jcwllat
SHK! P. KRISHYW North Eastern (Younci!. Shillong

Vlli
MEMBERS
SHKI M. z. K~IKIEN
SHKI D. S. HARPALANI (Alternate)
S HRI MADAN MO H A N
S HRI M AHENDRA R A J
S HRI A. D. PAVATE (Alrernufe)
S HRI G. C. MATHIJR
SHRI M. M. M ISTRY (Alternare)
S HRI G. D. MA T H U R
D R S. MAUDGAL
S HRI P. N. ME H R O T R A
S HRI G. B. MEWON
S HRI K. K. NA M B I A R
S HRI R. NATRAJAN
SHRI’ M. D. PATEL
S HRI I. K. MODI (Mrernafe)
P RESIDENT
S HRI A.N. BAJAJ (Alternate)
S HRI V. RA G H U
S HRI A. RAMAN
S HRI D. RAGURAMAN (Alternate)
S HRI N. V. RAMAN
S HRI Z ACHARIA G EORGE (Alternate)
S HRI B. J. RAMRAKHIANI
SHRI V. S. RANE
SHRI B. K. ROY
SHRJ D. P. R OY C H O W D H A R Y
S HRI 8. P. GHOZH (Alternare)
SHRI T. K. SARAN
S HRI T. S. RATNAM (Alternate)
S HRJ H. J. SHAH
S HRI R. G. GA N D HI (_Alrernate)
S HRI R. L. SURI
SHRI M. TH Y A G A R A J A N
SHRI B. T. UNWAL~.A
SHRI Y. K. M EHTA (Alternate)
Brig D. R. KATHURIA (Alternate)
D R !-I. C. VISVESVARAYA
REPRESENTING
Tata Consulting Engineejs. Bombay
Directorate GeneraI of Factory Advice Service and
Labour Institute, Bombay
The Association of Consulting Engineers (India),
New Delhi
National Buildings Organization, New Delhi
Town and Country Planning Organization,
New Delhi
Department of Science & Technology, New Delhi
In personal capacity (/!-lo1 Anand L’ihar.
New Delhi I10 092)
Ministry of Home Affairs
In personal capacity (Rnmnnala~~u,lS First Crescertt
Park, Gandhi Mapar. A$.lar, Mndras 600 020)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi
Public Works Department, Government of Gujarat
Forest Research Institute and Colleges, Dehra Dun
Ministry of Works & Housing (CPHEEO)
National Environmental Engineering Research
Institute (CSIR), Nagpur
Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR),
Madras
In personal capacity (5/3 Eust Pate1 Nagar, New
Delhi 110 008)
Public Works & Housing Deparanent, Goxrnment
of Maharashtra, Bombay
Corporation of Calcutta, Calcutta
Public Works Department, Government of
West Bengal
Bureau of Public Enterprises (Ministry of Finance),
New Delhi
Builders Association of India, Bombay
Suri & Suri Consulting Acoustical Engineers,
New Delhi
Indian institute of Public Administration,
New Delhi
‘1 he Concrete Associationof India, Bombay and
Institution of Engineers (India), Calcutta
The Concrete Association of India, Bombay
Institution of Engineers (India), Calcutta
Cement Research lnstitute of India, New Delhi
MEMBERS REPRESENTING
SHRI D. AJITHA SIMHA, Deputy Director
General [Former Director (CivEn& 1 Director General, ISI (Ex-officio Member)
SHRI G. RAMAN, Director (Civ Engg)

FORMER SECRETARY
SHRI D. AJITHA SIMHA
Deputy Director General [Former Director (Civ Engg)],ISI
SECRETARY
SHRI G. RAMAN
Director (Civ Engg),ISI
JOINT SECRETARY
SHRI J. VENKATARAMAN
Sr. Deputy Director (Civ Engg),ISI

Panel for Administration, Development Control Rules

and General Building Reqirements, BDC 64: Pl

CONVENER REPRESENTING

SHRI H. U. BIJLANI Housing & Urban Dxloprnent Corpomtion Limited,

New Delhi
MEMBERS
S HRI V. SURESH (Alternate to
Shri H. U. Bijlani) Housing & Urban Development Corporation
Limited, New Delhi
S HRI V. A. ANANDADOSS Ministry of Health, Family Planning, Works&
Urban Development, New Delhi
S HRI J. R. BHALLA The’ Indian Institute of Architects, Bombay
CHIEF ARCHITECT Central Public Works Department, ‘New Delhi
S ENIOR A RCHITECT (H & TP)II
(Alternate)
C ITY E NGINEER Municipal Corporation of Greater Bombay,
Bombay
DEPUTY CITY ENGINEER (Alternate)
S HRI G. DA-~-~ARI Madras Metropolitan Development Authority,
Madras
S HRI J. D. GOYAL Municipal Corporation of Delhi, Delhi
S HRI P. S. GUJRAL Directorate General of Civil Aviation, New Delhi
S HRI T. N. GUPTA Central Building Research Institute (CSIR),
Roorkee
S HRI V. K. MATHUR (Alternate)
S HRI J IVAN Duly The Institute of Engineers (India), Calcutta
JOINT D IRECTOR Railway Board (Ministry of Railways)
S HRI A. C. KHOSLA The Institute of Surveyors, New Delhi
S HRI S. K. KOGEKAR (Alternate)
S HRI M. L. MAINI Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters
S HRI B. D. KSHIRSAGAR (Alternate)
S HRI G. C. MATHUR National Buildings Organization, New Delhi
S HRI M. M. MISERY (Alternate)
S HRI G. D. MATHUR Town & Country Planning Organisation,
New Delhi
S HRI .N. RANGANATHAN Institute of Town Plaimers (India), New Delhi
S HRI B IMAL KRISHNA R O Y The Corporation of Calcutta, Calcutta
Panel for Fire Protection. BDC 64:P2
CONVENER
S HRI P. N. ME H R O T R A In personnel capacitty (B-61 38-I S a f d a r j a n g
Enclave, New Delhi 110 029)

MEMBERS
D R G N. BA D A M I Central Building Research Institute (CSJR).
Roorkee
SHRI GOPAL KRISHAN (Alternate)
SHRI A. CHAITERJI Tarrif Advisory Commitee (Delhi Regional
Committee, New Delhi), Bombay
SHRI S. M. DESAI State Bank of India, Bombay
G ENERAL S ECRETARY The Institute of Fire Engineers (India), New Delhi
SHRI S. GHOSH National Fire Service College (Ministry of Home
kffairs), Nagpur
SHRI M. R. K AMATH h4ather & Platt Ltd, Bombay
SHRI K. R. EASWARAN (Alternate)
SHRI G. B. M&o\ Ministry of Home Affairs
SHRI V, B. NI~CAM Municipal Corporation of Greater Bombay
(Bombay Fire Brigade), Bombay
SHRI G. N.. SHET(;IRI (Altrmate)
SHKI Y. P. PVNDOL Indian Hotels Company Limited, Bombay
SHRI D: D. PCRAWARE Indian Prtro-Chemical Corporation Limited,
Nagpur
SHRI SATISH K~MAR Forest Research Insritute & Colleges, Dehra Dun
SHRI S. S. L. SHAHMA Municipal Co:poration of Delhi (Delhi Fire
Service), Delhi
SHRI VIJAY KUMAR Central Labour Jnstitute (Ministry of Labour),
Bombay
SHRI R. K. GPrir,~(Alternute)
Panel for Burlding Materials, BDC 64:P3

CON I’ENER

SHRI T. S. VEUAWR~ C&&al Public Works Department (Central Designs

Organisation), New Delhi
MEMBERS
SHRI A. N. BAJAJ Forest Research Institute & Colleges, Dehra bun
SHRI J. K. CH~US Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters
SHRI A. K. CHOPRA(A/lernate)
DEPUTY DIRECT-OK S'r%NLiAKDs (B&S) I. Research Designs & Standards Organization
(Ministry of Railways), Lucknow
SHRI R. N. GREW% The Concrete Association of India, Bombgy
'SHRI Y. K. MEHTA (A;ternafe)
B RIG HARISH CHANDRA Builder’s Association of India, Bonibay
SHRI S. A. Rum (Aho-nate)
D R H. N. J~GAIXESH Indian Plywood Industry Research Institute,
Bangalore
SHRI K. DAMWXRAIV (,4Itmzare)
SHRI MA N O H A R IAN_ JAW All Jndia Brick & Tile Mantifacturers Federation,
New Delhi
SHKI D. P, CHAUHA (,dlfernate)
SHRI K . S. LA:!I.Y The Indian Plywood Manufacturing Co Ltd.
Dandeli
LT-COL (RET~) G. B. SINGH (Alternate)
S HRI N. MACEDO Lime Manufacturers Association of India, Delhi
SHRI MO H A N RAI Central. Building Research Institute (CSIR),
Roorkee

XI
MEMBERS REPRESENTING

SHRI KRJSHAN L~L (Afrernate)

SHRI B, K. PANTHAKY
SHRI P. V. NAIK (Allernare)
DR A, V. R. RAC)
S HRI J. SUN GllrTA.(&ternale)
SHRI P. J. TARAPOREVALA
D R S. P. VE R M A
The Hindustan Construction Co Ltd, Bombay
National Buildings Organization, New Delhi
Hindustan Steel Limited, Bhilai
Directorate General of Technical Development,
New Delhi

Panel for Sign and Out Door Display Structures, BDC 64:P17
COh’ VENER
SHRI J. R. BHALLA Indian Institute of Architects, Bombay
MEMBERS
CITY ENGINEER Municipal Corporation of Greater Bombay,
Bombay
D EPUTY CmY ENGINEER (AItemate)
SRIMATJ GUL M. E NGINEER Selvel publicity and consultants Pvt Ltd, Bombay
SHRI. K. S. NICHOLSON (Alrernare)
SHR~ J. D. GOVAL Municipal Corporation of Delhi, Delhi
SHRI RAJENDRA JAIN Aaren Advertising Private Ltd, Bombay
S HRJ Y. K. JAIN (Alrerrzare)
SHRI B. N. RAHALKAR Town and Country Planning Organization
(Ministry of Works & Housing). New Delhi
T HE SECRETARY Delhi Urban Arts Commision, New Delhi
SHRI M. S. SIALI institute of Town Planners (India), New Delhi
The National Building Code of India consists of the following Parts and Sections:

PART I DEFINITIONS
PART II ADMINISTRATION
PART III DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND
GENERAL BllILDING REQUIREMENTS
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
PART V BUILDING MATERIALS
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Section I Loads
Section 2 Foundations
Section 3 Wood
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
Plain and Reinforced Concrete
Prestressed Concrete
Section 6 Steel
Section 7 Prefabrication and Systems Building
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES
Section 1 Lighting and Ventilation
Section 2 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Air-conditioning and Heating
Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control
Section 5 Installation of Lifts and Escalators
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES
Section 1 Water Supply
Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation
Section 3 Gas Supply
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
PART II ADMINISTRATION

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD ... 2

SECTION 1 GENERAL
1. SCOPE ... 3

2. TERMINOLOGY ... 3

3. APPLICABILITY OF THE CODE ... 4

4. INTERPRETATION ... 5
5. ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS, METHODS OF DESIGN AND
CONSTRUCTION. AND TESTS ... 5
SECTlON 2 ORGANIZATION AND ENFORCEMENT
6. DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING INSPECTION ... 5

7. POWER AND DUTIES OF BUILDING OFFICIAL ... 6

8. BOARD OF APPEALS ... 7

9. VIOLATIONS AND PENALTIES ... 7

10. POWER TO MAKE RULES ... 7

SECTION 3 PERMIT AND INSPECTION

11. DEVELOPMENT/ BUILDING PERMIT ... 7

f2. APPLICATION FOR DEVELOPMENT/BUILDlNG PERMIT ... 8

13. RESPONSlBlLlTlES AND DUTIES OF THE OWNER ... 12

14. INSPECTlON ... 12

1.5. UNSAFE BUILDING ... 13

16. DEMOLITION OF BUILDINGS ... 13

17. VALIDITY ... 13

18. ARCHITECTURAL CONTROL ... 13

APPENDfXA GUIDE FOR THE QUALlFlCATlONS A N D

COMPETENCE OF LICENSED ARCHITECTS,
ENGINEERS, STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS,
SUPERVISORS AND TOWN PLANNERS ... 14

APPENDtX B FORM FOR FIRST APPLICATION TO DEVELOP,

ERECT, RE-ERECT OR TO MAKE ALTERATION
-IN ANY PLACE IN A BUILDING ... 16

APPENDIX C FORM FOR SUPERVISION ... 17

APPENDIX D FORM FOR SANCTION OR REFUSAL OF

DEVELOPMENT/BUILDING PERMIT ... 17

APPENDIX E FORM FOR NOTICE FOR COMMENCEMENT ... 18

APPENDIX F FORM FOR COMPLETION CERTIFICATE ... 18

APPENDIX G FORM FOR OCCUPANCY PERMIT ... 19

PART II ADMINISTRATION II-

1
PART II ADMINISTRATION

0. FOREWORD
0.1 A need for codifying and unifying administrative provisions in different
development control rules and buildingbyelaws had been felt particularly in regard to
the applicability of the Code, desirable qualifications for the enforcing Authority and
the representative of the owner and responsibilities and duties of the Authority and the
owner.
It is expected that the town and country planning department will coordinate the
administrative provisions of this part and the same given in the State Town and
Country Planning Acts.
0.2 This part recommends the setting up of a ‘Board of Appeal’. The ‘Board of Appeal’
gives the owner/architect an opportunity to defend the schemes which are based on
conventional or new methods of design and-construction or using new materials, which
have been otherwise rejected by the Authority.
0.3 This part also emphasizes the need for setting up an Art Commission for
metropolitan areas to safeguard existing aesthetics in the event of new schemes
proposed for buildings of public importance or buildings coming up in an important
area or monumental buildings. The Commission can assist the civic authorities in
reviewing plans for development from the stand point of assuring good taste and
regard for often threatened natural beauties.
0.3.1 The Commission can serve as a means whereby the government and public
bodies and individuals could get advice on artistic questions in connection with
building schemes.
0.4 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. As a result of implementing this
part in rewriting buildingbyelaws and development control rules of some municipal
corporations and municipalities, some useful suggestions have emerged. These have
been incorporatedin this revised version to the extent possible.
0.5 The significant changes in this part includes the new administrative provisions
related to development control rules, additional information to be furnished/ indicated
in the building plan for multistoreyed and special buildings and modified provisions
regarding submission of building plans by Government Departments to the Authority.

II- 2 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

SECTION 1 GENERAL
I. SCOPE
1.1 Short Title- This Code is called the
National Building Code, hereinafter referred
to as ‘the Code’.
1.2 This part covers the administrative
aspects of the Code, such as apphcabthty,
organization of building department for
enforcement of the Code, procedure for
obtaining development and building permits
and responsibility of the owner.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.0 For the purpose of this part, the following
definitions shall apply.
ACCESSORY U SE - Any use of-the premises
subordinate to the principal use and
customarily incidental to the principal use.
A L T E R A T I O N -A change from one
occupancy to another, or a structural change,
such as an addition to the area or height, or
the removal of part of a building, or any
change to the structure, such as the
construction of, cutting into or removal of any
wall, partition, column, beam, joist, floor or
other support, or a change to or closing of
any required means of ingress or egress or a
change to the fixtures or equipment.
A PPROVED - Approved by the Authority
having jurisdiction.
AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION - The
Authority which has been created by a statute
and which, for the purpose of administering
the Code/ Part, may authorize a committee or
an official to act on its behalf; hereinafter
called the ‘Authority’.
B UILDING - Any structure for whatsoever
purpose and of whatsoever materials
constructed and every part thereof whether
used as human habitation or not and includes
foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs,
chimneys, plumbing and building services,
fixed platforms, verandah, balcony, cornice
or projection, part or a building or anything
affixed thereto or any wall enclosing or
intended to enclose any land or space and
signs and outdoor display structures. Tents
SHAMIANAHS, tarpaulin shelters, etc,
erected for temporary and ceremonial occas-
ions with the permission of the Authority
shall not be considered as building.
B U I L D I N G , H EIGHT OF - The vertical
distance measured, in the case of flat roofs,
PART I I ADMiNISTRA.TION
from the average level of the ground around
and contiguous to the building or as decided
by the Authority to the highest point of the
building adjacent to the street walls; and in the
case of pitched roofs, up to the point where the
external surface of the outer wall intersects the
finished surface of the sloping roof, and in the
case of gables facing the road, the midpoint
between the eaves level and the ridge.
Architectural features serving no other
function except that of decoration shall be
excluded for the purpose of measuring
heights.
B UILDING L INE -The line up to which the
plinth of a building adjoining a street or an
extension of a street or on a future street may
lawfully extend. It includes the lines
prescribed, if any, in any scheme. The building
line may change from time to time as
decided by the Authority.
CONVERSION - The change of occupancy or
premises to any occupancy or use requiring
additional occupancy permit.
D EVELOPMENT - ‘Development’ with
grammatical variations means the carrying
out of building, engineering, mining or other
operations in, or over, or under land or water,
or i.n the use of any building or land, and
includes redevelopment and layout and
subdivision of any land; and ‘to develop’shall
be construed accordingly.
DRAIN - A conduit or channel for the car-
riage of storm water, sewage or otherused
water.
DRAINAGE - The removal of any liquid by a
system constructed for the purpose.
LICENSED ARCHITECT, ENGINEER, STRC’CTU-
RAL E NGINEER; SUPERVISOR, T OWN P LAN-
NER - A qualified architect/engineer/
structural engineer/supervisor/ town
planner who has been licensed by the
Authority.
O CCUPANCY OR USE G ROUP -The principal
occupancy for which a building or a part of a
building is used or intended to be used; for
the purposes of classification of a building
according to occupancy, an occupancy shall
be deemed to include the subsidiary
occupancies which are contingent upon it.
O CCUPIER -Occupier includes any person
for the time being, paying or liable to pay rent
or any portion of rent of the building in
respect of which the ward is used, or
compensation or premium on account of the
occupation of such building and also arent-
free tenant, but does not includea lodger, and
II- 3
the words ‘occupy’ and ‘occupation’ ‘do not
refer to the lodger.
An owner living in or otherwise using his own
building shall be deemed to be the occupier
thereof.
O PERATIONAL C ONSTRUCTION - A
construction put up by Government Depart-
ments for operational purposes (see12.1.1.1).
O WNER -The person who receives the rent
for the use of the land or buildingor would be
entitled to do so if it were let out. It also
includes:
4 An agent or trustee who receives such rent
on behalf of the owner;
b) A receiver, executor or administrator or a
manager appointed by any court of
cdmpetent jurisdiction to have the charge
of, or to exercise the rights of the owner;
cl An agent or trustee who receives the rent
of or is entrusted with or is concerned
with any building devoted to religious or
charitable purposes; and
d) A mortgagee in possession.
PERMIT- - A permission or authorization in
writing by the Authority to carry out work
regulated by the Code.
ROAD - See ‘Street’.
R OAD L INE - See ‘Street Line’.
ROOM HE I G H T - The vertical distance
measured from the finished floor surfact= to
the finished ceiling surface. Where a finished
ceiling is not provided, the underside of the
joists or beams or tie beams shall determine
the upper point of measurement for
determining the head room.
SANCTIONELI PLAN -The set of plans a n d
specifications submitted under the Code in
connection with a building and duly approved
and Fanctioned by the Authority.
S ERVICE R OAD 7 A road/lane provided at
the rear or side of a plot for service purposes.
S E T- BACK LINE - A line usually parallel to
the plot boundaries and laid down in each case
by the Authority, beyond which nothing can
be constructed towards the site boundaries.
S ITE (PLOT) --A parcel (piece) of land
enclosed by definite boundaries.
STREET- Any means of access, namely,
highway, street, lane, pathway, alley, stair-
way, passageway, carriageway, footway,
square, place or bridge, whether a thorough-
fare or not, over which the public have a right
of passage or access or have passed and had
acceqq uninterruptedly for a specified period,
whether existing or proposed in any scheme
and includes all bunds, channels, ditches,
storm-water drains, culverts, sidewalks, traf-
fic islands, roadside trees and hedges, retain-
ing walls, fences, barriers and railing within
the street lines.
STREET LEVEL OF G RADE -The officially
established elevation or grade of the centre
line of the street upon which a plot fronts and
if there is no officially ectablished grade, the
existing grade of the street at its mid-point.
S T R E E T L INE -The line defining the side
limits of a street.
To E RECT - To erect a building means:
a) to erect a new building on any site
whether previously built upon or not;
b) to re-erect any building of which
portions above the plinth level have been
pulled down, burnt or destroyed; and
c) conversion from one occupancy to
another.
U NSAFE B UILDING - Unsafe buildings are
those which are structurally unsafe, insanitary
or not provided with adequate means oizgress
or which constitute a fire hazara or are
otherwise dangerous to human life or whichig
relation to existing use constitute a hazard to
safety or health or public welfare, by reason of
inadequate maintenance, dilapidation or
abandonment.
3. APPLICABILITY OF THE CODE
3.I Parts I to X and their sections of the
Code shall apply to all buildings described
in 3.2 to 3.8.
3.2 Where a building is erected, the Code
applies to the design and constructidn of the
building.
3.3 Where the whole or any part of the build-
ing is removed, the Code applies to all parts of
the building whether removed or not.
3.4 Where the whole or any part of the build-
ing is demolished the Code applies to any
remaining part and to the work involved in
demolition.
3.5 Where a building is altered (see 12.4 and
12.4.1), the Code applies to the whole building
whether existing or new except that the Code
applies only to part if that part is completely
self contained with respect to facilities and
safety measures required by the Code.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
3.6 Where the occupancy of a building is
changed the Code applies to all parts of the
building affected by the change.
3.7 Where development of land is undertaken
the Code applies to the entire development of
land.
3.8 Exisring Buildings/ Development -
Nothing in the Code shall require the removal,
alteration or abandonment, nor prevent con-
tinuance of the use or occupancy of an exist-
ing building/development, unless in the
opinion of the Authority, such building/de-
velopment constitutes a hazard to thesafety of
the adjacent property or the occupants of the
building itself.
4. INTERPRETATION
4.1 The heading which appears at the begin-
ning of a clause or sub-clause of the Code shall
be deemed to be a part of such clause or
sub-clause respectively.
4.2 The use of present tense includes the
future tense, the masculine gender includes
the feminine and the neuter, the singular
number ‘includes the plural and the plural
includes’ the singular. The word ‘person’
includes a corporation as well as an individ-
ual; writing includes printing and typing and
‘signature’ includes thumb impression made
by a person who cannot write if his name is
written near to such thumb impression.
5. ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS,
METHODS OF DESIGN AND
CONSTRUCTION, AND TESTS
5.1 The provisions of the Code are not
intended to prevent the use of any material or
method of design or construction not specifi-
cally prescribed by the Code, provided any
such alternative has been approved.
5.2 The Authority may approve any such
alternative provided it is found that the pro-
posed alternative is satisfactory and conforms
to the provisions of relevant parts regarding
material, design and construction and that
material, method, or work offered is, for the
purpose intended, at least equivalent to that
prescribed in the Code in quality, strength,
compatibility, effectiveness, fire and water
resistance, durability and safety.
5.3 Tests - Whenever there is insufficient
evidence of compliance with the provisions of
the Code or evidence that any material or
method of design or construction does not
conform to the requirements of the Code or in
order to substantiate claims for alternative
materials, design or methods of construction,
the Authority may require tests sufficiently in
PART II ADMINISTRATION
advance as proof of compliance. These tests
shall be made by an approved agency at the
expense of the owner.
5.3.1 Test methods shall be specified by the
Code for the materials or design or construc-
tion in question. If there are no appropriate
test methods specified in the Code, the
Authority shall determine the test procedure.
For methods of test for building materials,
reference may be made to Part V Building
materials.
5.3.2 Copies of the results of all such tests
shall be retained by the Authority for a period
of not less than two years after theacceptance
of the alternative material.
SECTION 2 ORGANIZATION AND
ENFORCEMENT
6. DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING
INSPECTION
6.1 The department of building inspection
shall be created and the executive official in-
charge thereof shall be known as building
official.
6.2 Appointment - The building official
shall be appointed by the Authority.
6.3 Organization -The building official
shall appoint such number of officers,
technical assistants, inspectors and other
employees as shall be necessary for the
administration of the Code and as authorized
by the Authority.
6,4 Delegalisn of Powers -The Authority
of the building official may designate an
employee or employees who shall exercise all
the powers of the official during the
temporary absence or disability of the
building official.
6:5 Qualification of Building Official - To
be eligible for appointment, the building offi-
cial shall be a licensable Engineer or Structu-
ral Engineer or Architect or Town Planner
whose qualifications shall not in any case be
less than those prescribed in Appendix A.
6.5.1 In small local bodies having insufficient
funds to appoint such offtcials with the above
qualifications, two or three such bodies could
join together and have one qualified building
official.
6:6, Qualifications of Assistant - No person
shall be appointed as Assistant unless he has
got the qualifications prescribed in Appendix
A for a licensed Supervisor.
II-
5
6,7 Restriction on Employees - No official
or employee connected with the Department
of Building Inspection except one whose only
connection is that of a member of the Board of
Appeals, established under 8 shall be engaged
directly or indirectly in a work connected with
the furnishing of labour, materials or
appliances for the construction, alteration or
maintenance of a building, or the preparation
of plans or of specifications thereof unless he
is the owner of the building; nor shall such
officer or employee engage in any work which
conflicts with his official duties or with the
interests of the Department.
6.8 Officers Not Liable for Damage - Any
official of the Authority shall not render him-
self liable personally and he shall be relieved
from all personal liabilities for any damage
that may accrue to persons or property as a
result of any act required or permitted in the
discharge of his official duties. Any suit insti-
tuted against any officer or employee.because
of an act performed by him ‘in the official
discharge of his duties and under the provi-
sions of the Code shall be defended by the
legal representative of the Authority until the
final termination of the proceedings. In no
case shall the official or any of his subordinate
employees liable for costs in any action, suit or
proceeding that may be instituted in pursu-
ance of the provisions of the Code and any
official of the department of building inspec-
tion acting in good faith and without malice
shall be free from liability for acts performed
under any of the provisions or by reasons of
any act or omission in the performance of his
official duties connected therein.
6.9 Records - Proper records of all applica-
tions received, permits and orders issued,
inspections made shall be kept and copies of
all papers and documents connected with the
administration of its duties shall be retained
and all such records shall be open to public
inspection at all appropriate times.
7. POWER AND DUTIES OF BUILDING
OFFICIAL
7.0 The building official shall enforce all the
provisions of the Code and shall act on any
question relative to the mode or manner of
construction and the materials to be used in
the erection, addition, alteration, repair,
removal, demolition, installation of service
equipment and the location use, occupancy
and maintenance of all buildings except as
may otherwise be specifically provided.
7.1 Application and Permits - He shall
receive all applications and issue permits
(see 12.11) for the erection and alteration of
buildings and examine the premises for which
such permits have been issued and enforce
compliance with the Code.
7.2 Building Notices and Orders - He shall
issue all necessary notices or orders to remove
illegal or unsafe conditions, to require the
necessary safeguards during construction, to
require adequate exit facilities in existing
buildings arid to ensure compliance with all
the requirements of safety, health and general
welfare of the public as included in the Code.
7.3 Right of Entry- Upon presentation of
proper credentials and with advance notice,
the building official or his duly authorized
representative may enter at any reasonable
time any building or premises to perform any
duty imposed-upon him by the Code.
7.4 Inspection - He shall make all the
required inspections or he may accept reports
of inspections of authoritative and recognized
services or individuals; and all reports of
inspections shall be in writing and certified by
a responsible officer of such authoritative ser-
vice or by the responsible individual or engage
any such expert opinion as he may deem
necessary to report upon unusual technical
issues that may arise, subject to the approval
of the Authority.
7.5 Construction Not According to Plan
- Should the building official determine at
any stage that the construction is not proceed-
ing according to the sanctioned plan or is in
violation of any of the provisionsofthe Code,
or any other applicable Code Regulation, Act
or Byelaw, he shall notify the owner, and all
further construction phall be stayed until cor-
rection has been effected and approved.
73.1 Should the owner fail to comply with
the requirements at any stage ofconstruction,
the Authority is empowered to cancel the
building permit issued and shall cause notice
of such cancellation to be securely posted
upon the said construction, if the owner is not
traceable at his address given in the notice.
Posting of such a notice shall be considered
sufficient notification of cancellation to the
owner thereof. No further work shall be
undertaken or permitted upon such construc-
tion until a valid building permit thereafter
has been issued. If the owner, in violation of
the notice for cancellation, continues the con-
struction, the Authority may take all neces-
sary means to stop such work.
7.6 Modification - Wherever practical diffi-
culties are involved in carrying out any provi-
sion of the Code, the building official may
vary or modify such provisions upon applica-
tion of the owner or his representative pro-
vided the spirit and intent of theC0d.e shall be
observed and public welfare and safety be
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
assured. The application for modification and
the final decision of the building official shall
be in writing and shall be officially recorded
with the application for the permit in the per-
manent records of the Department of Build-
ing Inspection.
7.7 Occupancy Violations - Wherever any
building is being used contrary to provisions
of the Code, the building official may order
such use discontinued and the building or por-
tion thereof, vacated by the notice served on
any person, causing such use to be discon-
tinued. Such person shall discontinue the use
within 10 days after receipt of such notice or
make the building or portion thereof, comply
with the requirements of the Code.
8. BOARD OF APPEALS
8.1 In order to determine the suitability of
alternative materials or methods of design or
construction and to provide for reasonable
interpretation of the provisions of the Code, a
Board of Appeals consisting of members who
are qualified by experience and training and
to pass judgement upon matters pertaining to
building construction, shall be appointed by
the Authority. The building official shall be an
ex-officio member and shall act as secretary to
the Board. The Board shall adopt reasonable
rules and regulations for conducting its inves-
tigations and shall render all decisions and
findings in writing to the building official with
a duplicate copy to the appellant and may
recommend such modifications as are
necessary.
9. VIOLATIONS AND PENALTIES
9.1 Offences and Penalties- Any person
who contravenes any of the provisions of the
Code or any requirements of obligations
imposed on him by virtue of the Code, or who
interferes with or obstructs any person in the
discharge of his duties, shall be guilty of an
offence and the Authority shall levy suitable
penalty.
NOTE - The penalty may be in the form of collection of
arrears of tax.
9.2 In the case of buildings coming up in the
vicinity of an aerodrome, violation of height
restriction laid down by Directorate General
of Civil Aviation, shall be demolished at the
expense of the owner and reduced to bring to a
level within permissible height.
9.3 The licensed architect/ engineer/ structu-
ral engineer/ supervisor/ town planner
shall be. responsible for supervision of the
construction and for the completion certifi-
cate; in the event of violation of the provisions
of the Code he shall be liable to penalties as
prescribed by the Authority including cancel-
lation of licence.
PART II ADMINISTRATION
9.4 Further Obligation of Offender - The
conviction of any person for an offence under
the provision of 9.1 shall not relieve him from
the duty of carrying out the requirements or
obligations imposed on him by virtue of the
provisions of the Code; and if such require-
ments or obligations are not complied with in
accordance with an order made under
provisions of 9.1, the Authority under the
provisions of the Code may, if necessary and
advisable, enter upon the premises in respect
of which a conviction has been made and
carry out at the expense of the convicted
person, the requirements or obligations
referred to in the said order and the expense, if
not paid on demand, may be recovered with
cost in a court.
9.5 Conviction No Bar to Further Prosecu-
tion-The conviction of any person under
the provisions of this part for failing to
comply with any of the said requirements or
obligations shall not operate as a bar to
further prosecution under this part for any
subsequent failure on the part of such person
to comply.
10. POWER TO MAKE RULES
10.1 The Authority may make rules forcarry-
ing out the provisions and intentions of the
Code provided that any rule shall not be in
direct conflict or nullify any of the provisions
of the Code.
SECTION 3 PERMIT AND
INSPECTION
11. DE V E L O P M E N T/ BUILDING
PERMIT
11.1 Permit Required - No person shall
carry out any development, erect, re-erect or
make alterations or demolish any building or
cause the same to be done without first
obtaining a separate permit for each such
development/ building from the Authority.
No permits shall, however, be required for
works referred to in 12.4.1.
11.2 Pre-code Development/ Building Per-
mit - If any development/ building, permit
for which had been issued before the com-
mencement of the Code, is not wholly com-
pleted within a period of three years from the
date of such permit, the said permission shall
be deemed to have lapsed and fresh permit
shall be necessary to proceed further with the
work in accordance with the provisions of the
Code.
II- 7
12. APPLICATION FOK DEVELOP- 12.2.1 SIZES OF D R A W I N G S HEETS A N D
MENT/ BUILDING PERMIT R ECOMMENDED N OTATION FOR COLOURING
PLANS
12.1 Notice - Every peison who intends to
develop,,erect, re-erect or make alterations in 12.2.1.1 The size of drawing sheets shall be
any place in a building shall give notice in any of those specified in Table 1.
writing to the Authority of his said intention
in the prescribed form (see Appendix B) and ---------------~-
such notice shall be accompanied by plans TABLE 1 DRAWING SHEET SIZES
and statements in triplicate as required under
12.2 and 12.3 except for special buildings S L DESIG- TRIMMED SIZE UNTRIMMED SIZE.
(high rise, non-residential) where additional No. NATION Min
copies may be submitted as desired by the (1) (2) (9 (4)
Authority (See P663). mm mm
1) A0 841 X 1189 880 X 1 230
12.1.1 Regarding submission of plans by 2) Al 594X 841 625 X 880
Government Departments, the procedure 3) A2 420X 594 450X 625
shall be as given m 12.1.1.1 and 12.1.1.2. 4) A3 297X 420 330X 450
5) A4 210X 297 240x 330
6) A5 148 X 210 165 X 240
12.1.1.1 The operational construction of the
Government, whether temporary or perman-
ent, which is necessary for the operation,
maintenance, development or execution of 12.2.1.2 The plans shall be coloured as speci-
any of the following services may be exempted fied in Table 2.
from the point of view of the byelaws:
12.2.2 K EY P LAN - A key plan drawn to a
4 Railways; scale of not less than 1 in 10000 shall be
b) National highways; submitted along with the application for a
National waterways; development/ building permit showing the
2) Major ports; boundary locations of-the site with respect to
neighbourhood landmarks. The minimum
e) Airways and aerodromes;
0 Posts and telegraphs, telephones, wire- dimension of the key plan shall be not less
less, broadcasting, and other like forms than 75 mm.
of commdnications;
g) Regional grid for electricity; and 12.2.3 S ITE P LAN -The site plan sent with
h) Any, other service which the State an application for permit shall be drawn to a
Government may, if it is of opinion that scale of not less than 1 in 500 for a site up to
the operation, maintenance, develop- one hectare and not less than 1 in 1000 for a
ment or execution of such service is site more than one hectare and shall show:
essential to the life of the community, by
notification. declare to be a service for a) the boundaries of the site and of any con-
the purpose of this clause. tiguous land belonging to the owner
thereof;
the position of the site in relation to
12.1.1.2 However the following construc- b) neighbouring street;
tion of the Government departments do not
come under the purview of operational con- cl the name of the streets in which the build-
struction for the purpose of exemption under ing is proposed to be situated, if any;
12.1.1.1. d) all existing buildings standing on, over or
under the site including service lines;
New residential building (other than
gate lodges, quarters for limited essen- e) the position of the building and of all
tial operational staff and the like), roads other buildings (if any) which the appli-
and drains in railway colonies, hospi- cant intends to erect upon his contiguous
tals, clubs, institutes and schools, in the land referred to in (a) in relation to:
case of railways; and 1) the boundaries of the site and in case
A new building, new construction or where the site has been partitioned, the
new installation or any extension the- boundaries of the portion owned by the
reof in the case of any other services. applicant and also of the portions
owned by others;
1L .2 I n f o r m a t i o n A-ccompan.r’ing 2) all adjacent street, buildings (with
Notice --The notice shall be accompanied number of storeys and height) and pre-
the key plan, site plan, building plan, services mises within a distance of 12 m of the
plans, specifications and certificate of super- site and of the contiguous land (if any)
vision as prescribed in 12.2.2 to 12.2.6. rl?feired to in (a); and

II- 8 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 TABLE 2 COLOURING OF PLANS
(Clause 12.2.1.2)

SL IT E M S ITE PI_AN BUILDING PLAN

NO. \ , L \
White Plan Blue Print Ammonia White Plan Blue Print Ammonia
Print : Print
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

i) Plot lines Thick black Thick black Thick black Thick black Thick black Thick black
Green - -
ii) Existing street Green Green
- _ -
iii) Future street, Green dotted Green dotted Green dotted
if any
- - -
iv) Permissible build- Thick dotted Thick dotted Thkiccotted
ing lines black black
v) Open spaces No colour No colour No colour No colour No colour No colour
vi) Existing work Black (outline) White Blue Black White Blue
vii) Work proposed Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow
to be demo- hatched hatched hatched hatched hatched hatched
lished
viii) Proposed work Red filled in Red Red Red Red Red
(see Note 1)
xi) Drainage and Red dotted Red dotted Red dotted Red dotted Red dotted Red dotted
sewerage work
x) Water supply Black dotted Black dotted Black dotted Black dotted Bl;;kdotted Blaccdotted
work thin thin thin thin

NOTE 1 - For entirely new construction this need not be done; for extension of an existing work this shall apply.
NOTE 2 1 For land development, subdivision, layout, suitable colouring notations shall be used which shall be indexed.

3)if there is no street within a distance
of 12m of the site, the nearest existing
street;
0 the means of access from the street to the
building, and to all other buildings (if
any) which the applicant intends to erect
upon his contiguous land referred to in
(a);
g) space to be left about the building to
secure a free circulation of air, admission
of light and access for scavenging
purposes;
h) the width of the street (if any) in front
and of the street (if any) at the side or near
the buildings;
3 the direction of north point relative to the
plan of the buildings;
k) any physical features, such as wells.
drains, etc; and
ml such other particulars as may be pres-
cribed by the Authority.
12.2.4 S U B - D I V I S I O N / LA Y O U T P LAN - ln
the case of development work, the notice shall
be accompanied by the sub-division/layout
plan which shall be drawn on a scale of not less
than I : 500 containing the following:
a) Scale used and north point;
b) The location of all proposed and existing
roads with their existing/proposed/
prescribed widths within the land;
c) Dimensions of plot along with building
lines showing the setbacks with dimen-
sions within each plot;
d) The location of drains, sewers, public
facilities and services, and electrical lines,
etc;
e) Table indicating size, area and use of all
the plots in the sub-division/ layout plan;
A statement indicating the total area of
0
the site, area utilized under roads, open
spaces for parks, playgrounds, recrea-
tion spaces and development plan reser-
vations, schools, shopping and other
public places alongwith their percentage
with reference to the total area of the site
proposed to be subdivided; and
g) In case of plots which are subdivided in
built-up areas in addition to the above,
the means of access to the sub-division
from existing streets.
22.2.5 BU I L D I N G P L A N -The plan of the
buildings and elevations and sections accom-
panying the notice shall be drawn to ascalt?of
1 : 100. The plans shall:
a) include floor plans of all floors together
with the covered area clearly indicating
the size and spacings of all framing
members and sizes of rooms and the

PART II ADMINISTRATION
 position of staircases, ramps and
liftwells;
b) show the use or occupancy of all parts of
the building:
cl show exact location of essential services,
for example, WC, sink, bath and the
like;
4 include sectional drawings showing
clearly the sizes of footings, thickness of
basement wall, wail construction, size
and spacing of framing members, floor
slabs and roof slabs with their materials.
The section shall indicate the heights of
building and rooms and also the height
of the parapet; and the drainage and the
slope of the roof. At least one section
should be taken through the staircase;
e) show all street elevations;
f-J indicate details of served privy, if any;
g) give dimensions of the projected por-
tions beyond the permissible building
line;
h) include terrace plan indicating the drain-
age and the slope of the roof; and
j) give indications of the north point rela-
tive to the plan.
12.2.5.1 BUILDING PLAN FOR MULTISTOREYED,
SPECIAL BUILDINGS - For multistoreyed
buildings which are more than 15 m in height
and for special buildings like educational,
assembly, institutional, industrial, storage
and hazardous and mixed occupancies wrth
any of the aforesaid occupancies having area
more than 500 m*, the following additional
information shall be furnished/ indicated in
the building plan in addition to the items given
in 12.2.5 as applicable:
Access to fire appliancesj vehicles with
details of vehicular turning circle and
clear motorable accessway around the
building;
b) Size (width) of main and alternate stair-
cases alongwith balcony approach, cor-
ridor, ventilated lobby approach;
cl Location and details of lift enclosures;
4 Location and size of fire lift;
Smoke stop lobby/door, where
e)
provided;
Refuse chutes, refuse chamber, service
duct, etc;
g) Vehicular parking spaces;
h) Refuse area, if any;
3 DETAILS OF B UILDING SERVICES-Air-
conditioning system with position of fire
dampers, mechanical ventilation system,
electrical services, boilers, gas pipes, etc;
k) Details of exits including provision of
ramps, etc, for hospitals and special risks;
n-4 Location of generator, transformer and
switchgear room;
4 Smoke exhauster system, if any;
Details of fire alarm system network.
P)
q) Location of centralized control, con-
necting all fire alarm systems, built-in
fire protection arrangements and public
address system, etc;
Location and dimensions of static water
storage tank and pump room alongwith.
fire service inlets for mobile pump and
water storage tank;
Location and details of fixed fire protec-
tion installations such as sprinklers, wet
risers, hose-reels, drenchers, COZ instal-
lation, etc; and
Location and details of first-aid fire fight-
-ing equipments/ installations.
12.2.6 S E R V I C E S P L A N S - The services
plans shall include all details of building and
plumbing services, and also plans, elevations
and sections of private water supply and sew-
age disposal system, if any (see Part VIII
Building services and Part 1X Plumbing
services).
12.2.7 SPECIFICATIONS - Specifications,
both general and detailed, giving type and
grade of materials to be used, duly signed by
the licensed architect/ engineer/ structural
engineer/ supervisor shall accompany the
notice (see Appendix B).
12.2.8 S UPERVISION - The notice shall be
further accompanied by a certificate in the
prescribed form (see Appendix C) by the
licensed architect/ engineer/ structural
e n g i n e e r / supelvisorj t o w n p l a n n e r
(see Appendix A) undertaking the supervision
(see 9.3.)
12.3 Prepararion and Signing o f
Plans - The licensed architect: engineer/
supervisor/ town planner shall prepare and
duly sign all plans (see Appendix A) and shall
indicate his name, address, qualification and
licence number as allotted by the Authority.
Wherever stipulated by the Authority, the
structural plans and details shall also be pre-
pared and duly signed by the licensed structu-
ral engineer (see A-2.3.1). The plans shall also
be duly signed by the owner indicating his
address. The type and volume of buildings-
/development work to be undertaken by the
licensed professionals may generally be as in
Appendix A.
12.3.1 The services (building and plumbing
services) plans for buildings identified
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
in 12.2.5.1 shall be prepared and signed by allowed to re-submit it without any fees after complying
with all the objections raised by the Authority within a
competent persons having suitable qualifica- period of one year from the date of rejection after which
tions (see Appendix A). fresh fees shall have to be paid.

12.4 Notice for Alteration Only - When the 12.7 Duration’ of Sanction - The sanction
notice is only for an alteration of the building once accorded shall remain valid up to three
(see 3.5), only such plans and statements, as years. The permit shall be got revalidated
may be necessary, shall accompany the notice. before the expiration of this period.Revalida-
tion shall be subject to the rules then in force.
12.4.1 No notice and building permit is neces-
sary for the following alterations, and thelike 12.8 Deviations During Construction - If
which do not otherwise violate any provisions during the construction of a building any
regarding general building requirements, departuie (excepting for items as given in
structural stability and fire safety require- 12.4.1) from the sanctioned plan is intended to
ments of the Code: be made (see 7.5), sanction of the Authority
shall be obtained before the change is made.
4 Opening and closjng of a window or The revised plan showing the deviations shall
be submitted and the procedure laid down for
door or ventilator;
the original plan heretofore shall apply to all
b) Providing intercommunicationdoors; such amended plans except that the time limit
cl Providing partitions; specified under 12.11.1 shall be three weeks in
Providing false ceiling; such cases.
d)
e) Gardening; 12.9 Revocation of Permit - The Authority
f-l White washing; may revoke any permit issued under the provi-
ia Ke-tiling
Painting;
and re-roofing; sions of the Code, wherever there hasbeenany
h) false statement or any misrepresentation of
d Plastering and patch work; any material fact in the application on which
k) Ke-flooring; the permit was based.
ml Construction of sunshades on one’s own
land; and
12.10 Qualifications of Architects/ Engi-
n) Ke-erection of portions of buildings neers/ Structural Engineers/ Sueprvisorsl
damaged by earthquake or other natural Town Planners/ Services Personnel -
calamities, to the same extent and speci- Architects, engineers, structural engineers,
fication as existed prior to such damage. supervisors, and town planners referred to
under 12.2.7, 12.2.8 and 12.3 shall be licensed
12.5 Notice for Land Adjoining the Govern- by the Authority as competent. to do the
ment or Corporate Bodies Formed Under the work for which they are employed. A guide
Statute - In case of a notice of intention to for the equivalent technical qualifications and
erect, re-erect or make alteration in a building professional experience required for such
or to make or enlarge any structure abutting licensing with the Authority is given in
on property maintained by Public Works Appendix A. In case of services, qualifications
Department, Defence or other Government for services personnel shall be as given in A-3.
Departments, the notice and plan shall be in
sufficient numbers to enable the Authority to 12.11 Grant of Permit or Refusal-The
forward one set each to the appropriate Authority may either sanction or refuse the
departments for report before the permission plans and specifications or may sanction them
is granted; the government department shall with such modifications or directions as it
report to the Authority within two weeks from may deem necessary and thereupon shall com-
the date of the receipt of the notice and plans municate its decision to the person giving the
whether or not they have any objection to the notice (see Appendix D).
proposed construction. If no reply is received
within two weeks by the Authority,. from the 12.11.1 The building plans for buildings iden-
Government Department the notice and plans tified in 12.2.5.1 shall also be subject to the
shall be deemed to have been sanctioned. scruitiny of the Fire Authority and the sanc-
tion through building permit shall be given by
12.6 Fees - No notice as referred to in 12.1 the Authority after the clearance from the Fire
shall be deemed valid unless and until the Authority.
penon giving notice has paid the fees to the
Authority and an attested copy of the receipt 12.11.2 If within 30 days of the receipt of the
of such payment is attached with the notice. notice under 12.1 of the Cbde, the Authority
fails to intimate in writing to the person, who
NOTE -The fees may be charged in terms of area df has given the notice, of its refusal or sanction,
layout/total floor area of the building. In the event of a
building/development permit is not issued, the fees so the notice with its plans and statements shall
paid shall not be returned to the owner, but he shall be be deemed to have been sanctioned; provided

PART II ADMINISTRATION IY
the fact h immediately brought to the notice
of the Authority in writing by the person who
has given notice and having not received any
intimation from the Authority within fifteen
days of giving such written notice. Subject to
the conditions mentioned in this clause,
nothing shall be construed to authorize any
person to do anything in contravention of or
against the terms of lease or titles of the land
or against any other regulations, byelaws or
ordinance operating on the site of the work.
12.11.3 In the case of refusal, the Authority
shall quote the reason and relevant sections of
the Code which the plans contravene. The
Authority shall as far as possible advise all the
objections to the plans and specifications in
the first instance itself and ensure that no new
objections are raised when they are re-
submitted after compliance of earlier
objections.
12.21.4 Once the plan has been scrutinized
and objections have been pointed out, the
owner giving notice shall modify the plan to
comply with the objections raised and re-
submit it. The Authority shall scrutinize the
re-submitted plan and if there be further
objections, the plan shall be rejected.
13. RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES
OF THE OWNER
13.1 Neither the granting of the permit nor
the approval of the drawings and specifica-
tions, nor inspections made by the Authority
during erection of the building shall in any
way relieve the owner of such building from
full responsibility for carrying out the work in
accordance with the requirements of the Code
(see 9).
13.2 Every owner shall:
4 permit the Authority to enter the building
or premises for which the permit has been
granted at any reasonable time for the
purpose of enforcing the Code;
bl submit a document of ownership of the
site;
cl obtain, where applicable, from the
Authority, permits relating to building,
zoning? grades, sewers, water mains,
plumbing, signs, blasting, street occu-
pancy, electricity, highways,,and all other
permits required in connection with the
proposed work;
d) give notice to the Authority of the inten-
tion to start work on the building site (see
Appendix E);
e) give written notice to the Authority
regarding completion of work described
in the permit (see Appendix F); and
“-12
f) obtain an occupancy permit (see Appen-
dix G) from the Authority prior to any:
1) occupancy of the building or part the-
reof after construction or alteration of
that building or part, or
2) change in the class of occupancy of any
building or part thereof.
13.2.1 TEMPORARY O CCUPANCY - Upon
the request of the holder of the permit, the
Authority may issue a temporary certificate of
occupancy for a building or part thereof,
before the entire work covered by permit shall
have been completed, provided such portion
or portions may be occupied safely prior to
full completion of buildingwithout endanger-
ing life or public welfare.
13.3 Documents at Site
13.3.1 Where tests of any materials are made
to ensure conformity with the requirements of
the Code, records of the test datashall be kept
available for inspection during the construc-
tion of the building and for such a period
thereafter as required by the Authority.
13.3.2 The person to whom a permit is issued
shall during construction keep:
a) posted in a conspicuous place on the
property in respect of which the permit
was issued, a copy of the building per-
mit; and
b) a copy of the approved drawings and
specifications referred to in 12 on the
property in respect of which the permit
was issued.
14. I N S P E C T I O N
14.1 Generally all construction or work for
which.a permit is required shall be subject to
inspection by the Authority and certain types
of construction involving unusual hazards or
requiring constant inspection shall have con-
tinuous inspection by special inspectors
appointed by the Authority.
14.2 Inspection, where required, shall be
made within 7 days following the receipt of
notification, after which period the owner will
be free to continue the construction according
to the sanctioned plan. At the first inspection,
the Authority shall determine to the best of its
ability that the building has been located in
accordance with the approved site plans. The
final inspection of the completion of the work
shall be made within 21 days following the
receipt of notification [see 13.2 (e)] for the
grant of occupancy certificate.
14.3 When inspection of any construction
operation reveals than any lack of safetypre-
NATiONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
cautions exist, the Authority shall have right
to direct the owner to stop the work imme-
diately until the necessary remedial measures
to remove the violation of safety precautions
are taken.
14.4 Periodic inspections of buildings after
completion shall be made by the Fire Autho-
rity to ensure compliance with the provisions
of fire protection requirements (see Part IV
Fire protection).
15. UNSAFE BUILDING
15.1 All unsafe buildings shall be considered
to constitute danger to public safety and shall
be restored by repairs or demolished or dealt
with as otherwise directed by the Authority.
IS.2 Examination of Unsafe Building ~ The
Authority shall examine or cause to be exami-
ned every building reported to be unsafe or
damaged, and shalt make a written record of
such examination.
15.3 Notice to Owner, Occupier - Whenever
the Authority finds any building or portion
tHereof to be unsafe, it shall, m accordance
with established procedure for legal notice,
give to the owner and occupier of such build-
ing written notices stating the defects thereof.
This notice shall require the owner ror the
occupier within a stated time either to com-
plete specified repairs or improvements or to
demolish and remove the building or portion
thereof.
15.3.1 The Authority may direct in writing
that the building which in his opinion iq dan-
gerous, or has no provision for exit if caught
fire, shall be vacated immediately .or within
the period specified for the purpose; provided
that the Authority concerned shall keep a
record of the reasons for such action with him.
If any person does not comply with the orders
of vacating a building, the Authority may
direct the police to remove the person from
the building and the police shall comply with
the orders.
15.4 Disregard of Notice - In case the owner
or occupier fails, neglects, or refuses to
comply with the notice to rep&r or to demo-
lish the said building or portion thereof, the
Authority shall cause the danger to be removed
whether by demolition or repair of .the
building, or portion thereof 01; otherwise.
15.5 Cases of Emergency - In case of emer-
gency, which, in the opinion of the Authority
involves imminent danger to human life or
health, the decision of the Authority shall be
final. The Authority shall forthwith or with
such notice as may be possible promptly cause
PART II ADMINISTRATION
such building or portion thereof to be ren-
dered safe or removed. For thiy purpose, the
Authority may at once enter such structure or
land on which it stands, or abutting land or
structure, with such assistance and at such
cost as may be deemed necessary. T h e
Authority may also get the adjacent ctructures
vacated and protect the public by an approp-
riate fence or such other mean5 as may be
necessary.
1.6 Costs - Costs incurred under 15.4
and 15.5 shall be charged to the owner of the
premises involved. Such costs shall be charged
on the premises in respect of which or for the
benefit of which the same have been incurred
and shall be recoverable as provided under the
laws (see Note).
16. DEMOLITION OF BUILDING
16.1 Before a building is demolished, the
owner shall notify all utilities having service
connections within the building, such as
water, electric, gas, sewer and other connec-
tions. A permit to demolish a building shall
not be issued until a release iq obtained from
the utilities stating t’hat their respectivecervice
connections and appurtenant equipment,
5uch as meters and regulators have been
removed or sealed and plugged in a safe
manner.
17. VALIDITY
17.1 Partial Invalidit~,~~ In the event any
part or provision of the Code is held to be
illegal or void. this shall not have the effect of
making void or illegal any of the otherpart5 or
provisions thereof, which may or shall be
determined to be legal, and it ThaII be pre-
sumed that the Code wou1.d have been passed
without cuch illegal or invalid parts or
provisions.
17.2 Segregation of Invalid Provisions --
Any invalid part of the Code shall be segre-
gated from the remainder of the Code by the
court holding such part invalid, and the
remainder shall remain effective.
17.3 Decisions Involving Existing Build-
ings - The invalidity of any provision in any
clause of the Code as applied to existing build-
ings and structures shall not be held to effect
the validity of such section in its application to
buildings hereafter erected.
18. ARCHITECTURAL CONTROL
18.1 Compliance with the provisions of the
Code is adequate for normal buildings. But
23
for major public building complexes or build-
ings coming up in an important area or monu-
mental buildings in metropolitan cities the
aesthetics of the whole scheme may also have
to be examined, vis-a-vis existing structures.
In addition, any development which may mar
the general characteristics and environment of
historical, architectural or other monuments
should also be subject to the provisions of this
clause.
Norm ~~~ This clause IS Intended to cover very few struc-
tures to come up in the vicinity of other declared, histori-
cally important structures. and the scrutiny shall be
limited to the r.rrernalarchirec~rura/fearure.c only so as to
ensure an aesthetic continuance of the existing structures
with the new.
18.2 The Authority may appoint’ an Art
Commission for examining schemes of such
buildings. This Commission may consist of
elite of city, such as an architect, engineer,
scu!ptor, painter, writer, landscape specialist
and laymen.
18.3 The Commission may work in the fol-
lowing manner:
APPENDIX A
(Clauses 2.0, 6.5, 6.6, 9.3, 12.2.8, 12.3 and 12.10)
GUIDE FOR THE QUALIFICATIONS AND COMPETENCE OF LICENSED
ARCHITECTS, ENGINEERS, STRUC TURAL ENGINEERS, SUPERVISORS AND
TOWN PLANNERS
A-l. ESSENTIAL KEQUIREMENTS
A-f. 1 Every building work for which permis-
sion is sought under the Code shall be
designed and supervised by a licensed archi-
tect/engineer/structural engineerjsupervi-
sor,‘town planner. Qualifications which an
architect or engineer or structural engineer or
supervisor or town planner shall have before
he is registered by the local body and permit-
ted to practice within the local body’sjurisdic-
tion are given in A-2.1 to A-2.5. The
competence of such licensed personnel is also
indicated in A-2.1.1 to A-2.5.1.
A-2. QUALIFICATIONS FOR ARCHI-
TECTS, ENGINEERS, STRUCTURAL
ENGINEERS, SUPERVISORS AND e) Certificate of supervision for develop-
TOWN PLANNERS ment of land of area up to 1 hectare..
A-2./ Architecr - The minimum qualifica-
tions f-or an architect shah be the Associate
Membership of the Indian Institute of Archi-
tects or such degree or diploma which makes
him eligible for such membership or such
qualifications as listed in the Architects Act
1972, and shall be registered with the Council
of Architecture under the Act.
tt.14
a) The Commission may select only the
important buildings as in 18.1 and
examine the same. The person responsi-
ble for the schemes, say an architect or
an engineer, may examine either alone
or with the owner. A study of the plans,
elevations, models, etc, should be made.
The architect should explain in general
terms the purposes which the building is
to serve and the main conditions which
have influenced him in preparing the
design.
b) The Commission after full discussion,
may communicate their decision in writ-
ing to the parties concerned. The Com-
mission may recommend a change in the
whole scheme or suggest modifications
in the existing scheme.
18.4 The Art Commission should also be
charged with advising the city government, on
schemes which will beautify the city and add
to its cultural vitality.
A-2.1.f C O M P E T E N C E - T - h e L i c e n s e d
Architect shall be competent to carryout the
work related to the building permit as given
below and shall be entitled to submit:
__
a ) All plans and information connected
with building permit.
b) Structural details and calculations
for residential buildings on plot up to
500m’ and up to three storeys or 11 m in
height.
c) Certificate of supervision and comple-
tion of all buildings.
d) All plans and related information con-
nected with development permit of
area up to 1 hectare.
A-Z.2 Engineer - The minimum qualifica-
tions for an engineer shall be the Corporate
Member of Civil Engineering Division of the
Institution of Engineers (India) or such degree
or diploma in civil, municipal or structural
engineering which makes him eligible for such
membership.
NATlONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
A-2.2.1 C OMPETENCE - The licensed engi- architecture or engineering equivalent to the
neer shall be competent to carryout the work minimum qualification prescribed for recruit-
related to the building permit as given below ment to non-gazetted service by the Govern-
and shall be entitled to submit: ment of India plus 5 years experience in
building design, c o n s t r u c t i o n a n d
a) All plans and information connected supervision.
with building permit.
A-2.4.1. COMPETENCE - The licensed super-
b) Structural details and calculations of visor shall be entitled to submit:
buildings on plot up to 500 m2 and up to
5 storeys or 16 m in height. a) all plans and related information con-
c) Certificate of supervision and comple- nected with building permit for residen-
tion for all buildings. tial buildings on plot up to 200 m* and
d) All plans and related information con- up to two storeys or 7.5 m in height; and
nected with development permit of area b) certificate of supervision for buildings
up to 1 hectare. in (a).
e) Certificate of supervision for develop- A-2.5 Town Planner - The minimum quali-
ment of land of area up to one hectare. fication for a town planner shall be the Asso-
A-2.3 Structural Engineer - The minimum ciate Membership of the Institute of Town
qualifications for a structural engineer shall Planners or post-graduate degree or diploma
be graduate in civil engineering of recognized in town and country planning which makes
Indian or foreign university, or Corporate him eligible for such membership or recog-
Member of Civil Engineering Division of nized by the Public Service Commissions for
Institution of Engineers (India) or equivalent the post of Assistant Town Planner.
overseas institution, and with minimum 3 ,4-2.5.1 COMPETENCE - The licensed town
years experience in structural engineering
practice with designing and field work. planner shall be entitled to submit:
No rE - The 3 years experience shall be relaxed to2 years a) all plans and related information con-
in the case of post graduate degree of recognized lndian or nected with development permit of all
foreign university in the branch ofstructural engineefing. areas; and
In case of doctorate in structural engineering, the expe-
rience required would be one year. b) certificate of supervision for develop-
ment of land of all areas.
A-2.3. I C OMPETENCE - The licensed struc-
tural Engineers shall be competent to submit A-3. SERVICES PERSONNEL
the structural details and calculations for all A-3.1 - For buildings identified in 12.2.5.1,
buildings and supervision. the work of building and plumbing services
shall be executed under the supervision of
A-2.3.Z.Z In case of buildings having special competent personnel. The qualification. for
structural features, as decided by the Autho- licensed electrical engineer and plumbers for
rity, which are within the horizontal areas carrying out the work of electrical installa-
and vertical limits specified in A-2.1.1(b), tions and water supply, drainage and sanita-
A-2.2.1(b) and A-2.4.1(a) shall be designed tion installations respectively shall be as given
only by structural engineers. in Part VIII Building services, Section 2 Elec-
trical installations; Part IX Plumbing servi-
,4-2.4 Supervisor - The minimum qualifica- ces, Section 1 Water supply, and Section 2
tions for a supervisor shall be qualification in Drainage and sanitation.

PART II ADMINISTRATION
 APPENDIX B
(Clause 12.1)
FORM FOR FIRST APPLICATION TO DEVELOP, ERECT, RE-ERECT OR TO MAKE
ALTERATION IN ANY PLACF IN A BUILDING

To

........................................

Sir,
1 hereby give notice that 1 intend to develop, erect. re-erect or to make alteration in the
building No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . oni in Plot No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in Colony/ Street . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M
. OHALLA/ BAZAR,: Road . . . . . . . .._.................. City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and
in accordance with the building code of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part II, Clauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and1
forward herewith the following plans and specifications in triplicate duly signed by me and............
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Architect! Engineer/ Structural Engineer/Supervisor; Town
Planner. Licence No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . who will supervise its erection.

(name in block letters)

I. Key plan

2. Site plans

3. Sub-division. layout plan

4. Building plans

5 . Services~plans

6. Specifications, general and detailed*

7. Ownership title

1 request that the development, construction may be approved and permission accorded to
me to execute the work.

Signature of Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Name of the Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(in block letters)

Address of Owner...................................................................
....................................................................

...................................................................

/htcJ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‘

*A format may be prepared by the Authority for direct use

,P NA,,ONAL BVILDING CODE OF INDIA

 APPENDIX C
(Clause 12.2.8)

FORM FOR SUPERVISION

1 hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection or material alteration in/of
building No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or the. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on/in Plot No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
in Colony/ Street . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MOHALLA/ ... BAZARl Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
out under my supervision and I Certify that
City. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . shall be carried
all the materials (type and grade) and the workmanship of the work shall be generally in
accordance with the general and detailed specifications submitted along with, and that the work
shall be carried out according to the sanctioned plans.
Signature of Architect/ Engineer/ StructuralEngineer/ Supervisor/ TownPlanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name of Architect/ Engineer/ Structural Engineer/ Supervisor/ Town Planner_...........................
(in block letters)
Licence No. of Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner..............
Address of Architect/ Engineer/ Structural Engineer/ Supervisor/ Town Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
Dare.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX D
(Clause 12.11)

FORM FOR SANCTION OR REFUSAL OF DEVELOPMENT/ BUILDING PERMIT

To
.......................................................................
.......................................................................
.......................................................................
.......................................................................
Sir,
With reference to your application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
for grant of permit for the development, erection, reerection or material alteration in the building
No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on/in Plot No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in
Colony/Street . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MOHALLAIBAZAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I have to inform you that the sanction has been granted/ refused by the Authority on the following
grounds:
1.
:*
4:
2:
Office Stamp.. ................................. Signature of the Authority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Office (Communication) No.. ............. Name, Designation and Address
of the Authority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..a
Date ..................................
.................................................
..................................................

PART II ADMINISTRATION II-17

 APPENDIX E
[(Clause 13.2 (d)]

FORM FOR NOTICE FOR COMMENCEMENT

I hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection. or material alteration in/ of
building No.. ..................... or the.. .................... on/in Plot No.. ........................... in
Colony/Street.. ...: .... ................................... MOffALLA/ BAZARi Road.. ................................
............................................... City.. .........................................will be commenced on.. ...............
as per your permission, vide No...........................................dated ..........................................
under the supervision of.. .......................................... Licensed Architect/ Engineer/ Structural
Engineer/Supervisor/ Town Planner, Licence No...................................... and in accordance
with the plans sanctioned, vide No.. ..........................................dated.. .....................................
Signature of Owner........................................................
Name of Owner..............................................................
(in block letters)
Address of Owner...........................................................
...........................................................
...................... . ......................... ...........
Date.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX F
[( Cluuse 13.2(e)]

FORM FOR COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

1 hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection or material alterationinI of

building No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ .,............. oni in Plot No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
in Colony/ Street . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MOHALLA,
.. BAZAR/ Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..............................C . ity.,........................................... has been supervised by me and has been
completed on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .according . to the plans sanctioned, vide No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The work has been completed to my best satisfaction. the
workmanship and all the materials (type and grade) have been used strictly in accordance with
general and detailed specifications. No provisions of the Code, no requisitions made, conditions
prescribed or orders issued thereunder have been transgressed in the course of the work. The land
is fit for construction for which it has been developed or redeveloped or the building is fit for use
for which it has been erected, re-erected or altered, constructed and enlarged.

1 hereby also enclose the plan of the building completed in all aspects.
Signature of Architect/ Engineer/ Structural Engirieer/ Supervisor/ Town Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name of Architect/ Engineer/ Structural Engineer/ Supervisor/Town Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(in block letters)
Licence No. of Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner..............
Address of Architect/ Engineer/ Structural Engineer/ Supervisor/ Town Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

...................................
Signature of the owner
Date.. .....................

28 NATIONAL. MJILDINC CODE OF INDIA

 APPENDIX G
[(Clause 13.2(f)]

FORM FOR OCCUPANCY PERMIT

The work of erection, re-erection or alteration in/of building No...................................

or the.. ....................................... oni in Plot No............................. in Colony/ Street.................
.............................. MOHALLAI BAZAR/Road.. ........................................... City.....................
completed under the supervision of........................................ Architect/ Engineer/ Structural
Engineer/ Supervisor, Licence NO.. ................................ has been inspected by me. The building
can be permitted/not permitted for occupation subjected to the following:

One set of completion plans duly certified is returned herewith.

Signature of the Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Office stamp
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PART II ADDMIUISTRATIOU
The National Building Code of India consists of the following Parts and Sections:

PART 1 DEFINITIONS
PART II ADMINISTRATION
PART III DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND
GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
PART V BUILDING MATERIALS
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Section 1 Loads
Section 2 Foundations
Section 3 Wood
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
Plain and Reinforced Concrete
Prestressed Concrete
Section 6 Steel
Section 7 Prefabrication and Systems Building
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES
Section 1 Lighting and Ventilation
Section 2 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Air-conditioning and Heating
Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control
Section 5 Installation of Lifts and Escalators
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES
Section 1 Water Supply
Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation
Section 3 Gas Supply
PART S SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES
NATIONAL BUlLLING CODE
PART III DEVELOPMENT
CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL
BUILDING REQUIREMENTS

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS

0. FOREWORD ... 2

1. SCOPE ... 4

2. TERMINOLOGY ... 4

3. LAND USE CLASSIFICATION AND USES PERMITTED -.. 7

4. MEANS OF ACCESS ... 7

5. COMMUNITY OPEN SPACES AND AMENITIES ... 9

6. REQUIREMENTS OF PLOTS ... 10

7. CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS ... 11

8. OPEN SPACES (WITHIN A PLOT) ... 11

9. AREA AND HEIGHT LIMITATIONS ... 14

10. OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES ... 16

11. GREENBELTS AND LANDSCAPING ... 16

12. REQUIREMENTS OF PARTS OF BUILDINGS ... 17

13. RAT-PROOFING AND TERMITE-PROOFING OF

BUILDINGS ... 22

14. LIGHTING AND VENTILATION ... 22

1.5. AIR-CONDITIONING AND HEATING ... 22

16. SOUND INSULATION ... 22

17. HEAT INSULATION ... 22

18. PROVISION OF LIFTS ... 22

19. LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS ... 22
APPENDIX A CIVIL AVIATION REQUIREMENTS FOR
CONSTRUCTION IN THE VICINITY OF AN
AERODROME ... 23

APPENDIX B OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES ... 28

APPENDIX C GUIDE FOR PLANTATION OF SHRUBS,

TREES AND GREENERY ... 29

APPENDIX D SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOW INCOME

HOUSING ... 30

APPENDIX E SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANNING

OF PUBLIC BUILDINGS MEANT FOR USE OF
PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED ... 32

P A R T Ill D E V E L O P M E N T CONTROL HCLES AND GENERAL BI’ILDINC REQUIREMENTS ill- 1

 PART III DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND
GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS

0. FOREWORD
0.1 This part covers development control rules, including such aspects as subdivision
and layout rules, land use classifications, open spaces, area and height limitations,
means of access, and parking spaces; this part also covers the general building
requirements, such as the requirements of parts of buildings, provision of lifts, etc.
It is expected that for proper coordination and enforcement of the development
control rules and general building requirements, the departments concerned, namely,
the town planning department and the building department, will coordinate the total
development and building activity at both organisational and technical levels.

Ill- 2 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

0.2 Particular attention is invited toTable 3 on floor area ratio(FAR) limitations. It is
emphasized that the floor area of a single storey building is limited in absolute terms by
the type of construction and occupancy class. Also, it has been established by work
abroad that the absolute floor areas for different types of construction and different
occupancies have a definite ratio among them. The ratios as recommended in the
American Iron and Steel Institute publication 1961, ‘Fire protection through modern
building codes’ have been generally adopted in this part and Table 3 has been
developed on this basis. Table 3 is repeated in Part IV Fire protection also for
convenience of reading.
0.2.; Limitation of areas and heights of buildings is achieved in this country by
specifying it in terms of floor area ratio (FAR) or floor space index (FSI). The
significance of the contribution of different types of construction giving different fire
resistances has not been taken cognizance of in specifying FAR for different
occupancies, in the present develapment control rules and municipalbyelaws of the
country. Table 3, therefore, gives the comparative ratios ofFAR between types of
buildings and occupancy classes and these have been specified mainly from the fire
protection aspect of buildings. To arrive at the actual FAR for different buildings
coming up in different areas, the Authority should further modify them, by taking into
consideration other aspects like density of any area, parking facilities required, the
traffic load (road width) and the services available. The heights of buildings shall also
be regulated, keeping in view the local fire fighting facilities.
0.2.2 The trend in the foreign codes is to allow an increase in the area and height of
buildings for increase in frontage above 25 percent of the perimeter of the building and
the installation of an automatic sprinkler system in the building.
0.23 It is particularly to be borne in mind by the Authority that the ratios are
definitive and it can assess the particular FAR for a type of construction andfor,an
occupancy and establish a new table, but retaining the comparative ratios as given in
Table 3.
0.3 Keeping in view the needs of low income housing, to cater to Economically
Weaker Sections of Society (EWS) and Low Income Group (LIG), whose monthly
family income is below Rs. 350 and 600 respectively, the requirements on planning,
design of layout/ shelter have been rationalised and the same are provided in this part.
This will contribute significantly in the massive housing programmes undertaken for
the low income sector. This information is based on the provisions ofIS:8888-1978
Guide for requirements of low income housing.
0.4 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. As a result of incorporation of
this part in the revised development control rules and buildingbyelaws of some
municipal corporations and municipalities, some useful suggestions have emerged.
These have been incorporated in this revised version to the extent possible.
0.5 The major revisions in the part are:
4 addition of development control rules giving guidance on means of access,
community spaces and other aspects required for planning layouts.
b) addition of provisions regarding plot sizes and frontage for different types of
buildings, such as detached, semi-detached, row type and specialhousing schemes.
cl requirements of open spaces for other occupancies, such as educational,
institutional, assembly, industrial buildings, etc have been included.
4 provisions relating to interior open space have been elaborated, including
requirements for ventilation shaft.
e) requirements of open spaces for group housing development have been covered.
f-J requirements of off-street parking spaces have been covered.

ia requirements for greenbelts and landscaping including norms for plantation of

shrubs and trees have been covered.
h) requirements of certain parts of buildings, such as loft, store room, garage,
basement, chimney, parapet, cabin, boundary wall, wells, septic tanks,office-cum-
letter box room, meter room have been included.
j) special requirements of low income housing have been covered (see 0.3)

P-T 01 DEVELOIMMT CONTROL RULES AND GENEUAL DUILDMG IteQ~EMFHTS III- 3

1. SCOPE
1.1 This part deals with the development con-
trol rules and general building requirements
to ensure health and safety of the public.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.0 For the purpose of this part, the following
definitions shall apply.
ACCESSORY USE - Any use of the premises
subordinate to the principal use and custom-
arily incidental to the principal use.
A LTERATION -A change from one occu-
pancy to another, or a structural change, such
as an addition to the area or height, or the
removal of part of a building, or any change
to the structure, such as the construction of,
cutting into or removal of any wall, partition,
column, beam, joist, floor or other support,
or a change to or closing of any required
means of ingress or egress or a change to the
fixtures or equipment.
A PPROVED - Approved by the Authority
having jurisdiction.
A U T H O R I T Y H AVING
J URISDICTION -I-he
Authority which has been created by a statute
and which for the purpose of administering
the Code/Part may authorize a committee or
an official to act on its behalf; hereinafter
called the ‘Authority’.
B ALCONY --- A horizontal projection,
including a handrail or balustrade, to serve as
passage or sitting out place.
B ASEMENT OR C ELLAR -The lower storey
of a building below or partly below ground
level.
BUILDING - Any structure for whatsoever
purpose and of whatsoever materials
constructed and every part thereof whether
used as human habitation or not and includes
foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs,
chimneys, plumbing and building services,
fixed platforms, verunduh, balcony, cornice
or projection, part of a building or anything
affixed thereto or any wall enclosing or
intended to enclose any land or space and
signs and outdoor display structures. Tents,
shamiunuhs, tarpaulin shelters, etc, erected
for temporary and ceremonial occasions with
the permission of the Authority shall not be
considered as building.
B UILDING, HEIGHT OF -The vertical dis-
tance measured in the caseof flat roofs, from
the average level of the ground around and
contiguous to the building or as decided by
the Authority to the highest point of the
Ill-
4 NATIONAL DUILDINC
building adjacent to the street wall; and in the
case of pitched roofs, up to the point where
the external surface of the outer wall inter-
sects the finished surface of the sloping roof;
and in the case of gables facing the road, the
mid-point between the eaves level and the
ridge. Architectural features serving no other
function except that of decoration shall be
excluded for the purpose of measuring
heights.
B UILDING L INE -The line up to which the
plinth of a building adjoining a street or an
extension of a street or on a future street may
lawfully extend. It includes the lines pres-
cribed, if any, in any scheme. The building
line may change from time to time as decided
by the Authority.
C ABIN - A non-residential enclosure
constructed of non-load bearing partition.
C ARPET A REA -The covered area of the
usable rooms at any floor level (excluding the
area of the wall).
C H H A J J A - .4 sloping or horizontal
structural overhang usually provided over
openings on external walls to provide
protection from sun and rain.
C HOWK OR C O U R T Y A R D -A space
permanently open to the sky, enclosed fully or
partially by building and may be at ground
level or any other level within or adjacent to a
building.
CHOWK, INNER -A chowk enclosed on a9
sides.
CHOWS, OUTER - A chowk one of whose
sides is not enclosed.
COOKING ALCOVE - A cooking space having
direct access from the main room without any
inter-communicating door.
C OVERED A REA - Ground area covered by
the building immediately above the plinth
level. The area covered b the followmg in
the open spaces is exclu3ed from covered
area (see Table 3):
a) Garden, rockery, well and well structures,
plant nursery, waterpool, swimming pool
(if uncovered), platform round a tree,
tank, fountain, bench, chubutru with open
top and unenclosed on sides by walls and
the like;
b) Drainage culvert, conduit, catch-pit, gully
pit, chamber, gutter and the like;
c) Compound wall, gate, unstoreyed porch
and portico, slide, swing, uncovered
staiicase, ramps areas covered by chhu@
and the like; and
CODE OF INDIA
d) Watchmen’s booth, pumphouse, garbage
shaft, electric cabin or sub-stations, and
such other utility structures meant for the
services of the building under
consideration.
NOTE - For the purpose of this part, covered area equals
the plot area minus the area due for open spaces.
D E N S I T Y -The residential density is
expressed in terms of the number of dwelling
units per hectare.
NOTE - Where such densities arc expressed exclusive of
community facilities and provision of open spaces and
major roads (excluding incidental open spaces), these will
be net residential densities. Where these densities are
expressed taking into consideration the required open
space provision and community facilities and major
roads, these would be gross residential densities at
neighbourhood level, sector level or town level, as the case
may be. The provision of o en spaces and community
facdities will depend on tRe size of the residential
community.
Incidental open spaces are mainly open spaces required to
be left around and in between two buildings to provide
lighting and ventilation.
D E T A C H E D B U I L D I N G - A building
detached on all sides.
D EVELOPMENT - ‘Development’ with
grammatical variations means the carrying
out of building, engineering, mining or other
operations, in, or over, or under land or water,
on the making of any material change, in any
building or land, or in the use of any building,
land, and includes redevelopment and layout
and subdivision of any land; and ‘to develop’
shall be construed accordingly.
D RAIN -A conduit or channel for the
carriage of storm water, sewage or other used
water.
D WELLING UNIT/IENEMENT - An inde-
pendent housing unit with separate facilities
for living, cooking and sanitary requirements.
EXIT - A passage, channel or means of egress
from any building, storey or floor area to a
street or other open space of safety.
FIRE SEPARATION - The distance in metres
measured from any other building on the site,
or from other site, ‘or from the opposite side of
a street or other public space to the building
for the purpose of preventing the spread of
fire.
F LOOR -The lower surface in a storey on
which one normally walks in a building. The
general term ‘floor’ unless specifically
mentioned otherwise shall not refer to a
‘mezzanine floor’.
FLOOR AREA RATIO (FAR) - The quotient
obtained by dividing the total covered area
?MT III DEVELOPMENT CONJaOL PIJLES AND GENERAL BUILDING
(plinth area) on ill floors by the area of the
plot:
Total covered area of all floors
FAR =
Plot area
G A L L E R Y -An intermediate floor or plat-
form projecting from a wall of an auditorium
or a hall providing extra floor area, addi-
tional seating accommodation, etc. It shall
also include the structures provided for seat-
ing in stadia.
G ARAGE, PRIVATE -A building or a portion
thereof designed and used for parking of
private owned motor driven or other vehicles.
GARAGE , PUBLIC -A building or portion
thereof, other than a private garage, designed
or used fo. repairing, servicing, hiring, selling
or storing or parking motor driven or other
vehicles.
GROUP HOUSING - Group or multi-storeyed
housing for more than one dwelling unit,
where land is owned jointly (as in the case of
co-operative societies or the public agencies,
such as local authorities or housing boards,
etc) and the construction is undertaken by one
Agency/ Authority.
H ABITABLE R OOM -A room occupied or
designed for occupancy by one or more
persons for study, living, sleeping, eating,
kitchen, if it is used as a living room, but not
including bathrooms, water-closet
compartments, laundries, serving and storage
pantries, corridors, cellars, attics, and spaces
that are not used frequently or during
extended periods.
LEDGE OR TRND - A shelf-like projection,
supported in any manner whatsoever, except
by means of vertical supports within a room
itself but not having projection wider than
one metre.
LIFT - An appliance designed to transport
persons or materials between two or more
levels in a vertical or substantially vertical
direction by means of a guided car platform.
LOFT - An intermediary floor between two
floors on a residual space in a pitched roof,
above normal floor level with a maximum
height of 1.5 m and which is constructed or
adopted for storage purposes.
MEZZANINE FLOOR - An intermediate floor,
between two floors, above ground level,
accessible only from the lower floor.
OCCUPANCY OR U SE G ROUP -The principal
occupancy for which a building or a part of a
building is used or intended to be used; for the
REQUIREMENTS llLW
purposes of classification of a building
according to occupancy; an occupancy shall
be deemed to include subsidiary occupancies
which are contingrnt upon it.
OPEN SPACE --- An area, forming an integral
part of the plot. left open to the sky.
SOIt- .I he open space shall be the minimum distance
measured between the front. rear and side of the building
and the respective plot boundaries. ‘The front. rear and
ride of the building shall be the point of the building
nearest to the boundary. Where permitted, the average
open space shall be the average of the minimum and
maximum of such an open space.
O PEN S P A C E , FR O N T --- An open space
across the front of a plot between the building
line and the front boundary of the plot.
O PEN S PACE, REAR - An open space across
the rear of a plot between the rear of the
building and the rear boundary of the plot.
O PEN S PACE, SIDE -- An open space across
the side of the plot between the side of the
building and the side boundary of the plot.
O WNER -The person who receives the rent
for the use of the land or building or would be
entitled to do so if it were let out. It also
includes:
4 an agent or trustee who receives such rent
on behalf of the owner;
b) a receiver, executor or administrator or a
manager appointed by any court of
competent jurisdiction to have the charge
of, or to exercise the rights of the owner;
cl an agent or trustee who receives the rent of
or is entrusted with or is concerned with
any building devoted to religious or
charitable purposes; and
4 a mortgagee in possession.
P ARAPET -- A low wall or railing built along
the edge of a roof or floor.
P A R K I N G S P A C E -An area enclosed or
unenclosed, covered or open, sufficient in
size to park vehicles, together with a drive-
way connecting the parking space with a
street or alley and permitting ingress or
egress of the vehicles.
P ARTITION - An interior non-load bearing
barrier, one storey or part-storey in height.
Pt.lh I H - The portion of a structure between
the surface of the surrounding ground and
surface of the floor, immediately above the
ground.
P LINTH A REA --The built up covered area
measured at the floor level of the basement or
of any storey.
Ill- 6
P O R C H -A covered surface supported on
pillars or otherwise for the purpose of
pedestrian or vehicular approach to a
building.
R OAD -See ‘Street’.
R OAD L INE -See ‘Street Line’.
R O O M H E I G H T --The vertical distance
measured from the finished floor surface to
the finished ceiling surface. Where a finished
ceiling is not provided, the underside of the
joists Qr beams or tie beams shall determine
the upper point of measurement.
Row HOUSING/ROW TYPE B UILDING - A
row of buildings, with only front, rear and
intericr open spaces where applicable.
S E M I- D E T A C H E D B UILDING - A building
detached on three sides.
SERVICE ROAD - A road/lane provided
adjacent to a plot for service purposes.
S E T- BACK L INE - A line usually parallel to
the plot boundaries and laid down in each case
by the Authority, beyond which nothing can
be constructed towards the plot boundaries.
SI I E (Pt.or) ~~~~ A parcel (piece) of land
enclosed by definite boundaries.
S ITE. CORNER -A site at the junctions of
and fronting on two or more intersecting
streets.
S I T E. DEPTH OF -The mean horizontal
distance between the front and rear site
boundaries.
SITE, DOUBLE FRONTAGE - A site, having a
frontage on two streets. other than a corner
plot.
INTERIOR OR T ANDEM - A site access
SITE .
to which is by a passage from a street whether
such passage forms part of the site of not.
STAIRCOVEK - A structure with a covering
roof over a staircase and its landing built to
enclose only the stairs for the purpose of pro-
viding protection from weather and not used
for human habitation.
S TOREY -The portion of a building included
between the surface of any floor and the sur-
face of the floor next above it, or if there be no
floor above it, then the space between any
floor and the ceiling next above it.
S TOREY. TOPMOST - The uppermost storey
in a building whether constructed wholly or
partly on the roof.
NATIONAL BUILDWC CODE OF INDIA
S T R E E T - Any
means of access, namely, -Residential with
highway, street, lane, pathway, alley, shop lines at
stairway, passageway, carriageway,footway, ground floor (Rz)
square, place or bridge, whether a b) Commercial zone -Local commercial
thoroughfare or not, over which the public area (Cl)
have a right of passage or access. or have
passed and had access uninterruptedly for a -District commercial
specified period, whether existing or proposed area (Cl)
in any scheme, and includes all bunds, c) Industrial zone -Service industries
channels, ditches, storm-water drains, (II)
culverts, sidewalks, traffic islands, roadside
trees and hedges, retaining walls, fences, -General industries
barriers and railings within the street lines. (12)
-Special industries
S TREET LEVEL OR G RADE - The officially (13)
established elevation or grade of the central d) Green zone
line of the street upon whtch a plot fronts and
if there is no officially established grade: the e) Special reserva-
existing grade of the street at its mid-point. tions
S TREET L INE -The line defining the side 3.2 The various building uses and occupan-
limits of a street. cies (see 7) permitted on the various zones
shall be as given in the Master Plan.
To ABUT -- To abut on a street such that any
portion of the building is on the road 3.3 Uses to be in Conformity with the
boundary. Zone - Where the use of buildings or pre-
mises is not specifically designated on the
T OWER-LIKE S TRUCTURES -Structures shall Development Plan, it shall be in conformity
be deemed to be tower-like structures when with the zone in which they fall.
the height of the tower-like portion is at least
twice the height of the broader base at ground 3.4 Uses as Speclyically Designated on
level. Development Plan - Where the use of a site
is specifically designated on the Development
VERANDAH -A covered area with at least Plan, it shall be used only for the purpose so
one side open to outside with the exception designated.
of 1 m high parapet on the upper floors to be
provided on the open side. 3.5 Non-conforming Uses - No plot shall be
put to any use, occupancy or premises other
VOLUME pro PLOT AREA RATIO (VPR)- The than the uses identified in 3.1, except with the
ratio of volume of building measured in cubic prior approval of the Authority.
metres to the area of the plot measured in
square metres and expressed in metres. 4. MEANS OF ACCESS
W A T E R - CLOSET (WC) -A water flushed 4.1 Every building/plot shall abut on a pub-
plumbing fixture designed to receive human lic/ private means of access like streets/ roads
excrement directly from the user of the duly formed.
fixture. The term is used sometimes to
designate the room or compartment in which 4.2 Every person who erects a building shall
the fixture is placed. not at any time erect or cause or permit to
erect any building which in any way
W INDOW -An opening to the outside other encroaches upon or diminishes the area set
than a door which provides all or part of the apart as means of access required in the Code.
required natural light or ventilation or both to No building shall be erected so as to deprive
an interior space. any other building of the means of access.
4.3 Width of Means of Access -The resi-
3. LAND USE CLASSIFICATION AND dential plots shall abut on a public means of
LJSES PERMITTED access like street/road. Plots which do not
abut on a street/road shall abut/front on a
3.1 Lund Use Classification - The various means of access, the width and other require-
land use classifications may be as indicated ments of which shall be as given in Table 1.
below:
In no case, development on plots shall be
a) Residential zone -Purely residential permitted unless it is accessible by a public
(RI) street of width not less than 6 m.

CONTROL RULES AND CENFSAL BUILDING RFQUIIIEMWTS Ill-

7
PART 111 DEVELDPMENT
 4.3.4 In the interest of general development
TABLE i WlDTH AND LENGTH OF of an area, the Authority may require the
MEANS OF ACCESS
(Clause 4.3) means of access to be of larger width than that
required under 4.3 and 4.3.1.
SI. No. W IDTH OF L E N G T H OF
M EANS OF M EANS OF
A CCESS ACCESS
4.3.5 In existing built-up areas in the case of
plots facing street/means of access less than
(1) (2) (3) 4.5m in width, the plot boundary shall be
m m shifted to be away by 2.25 m from the central
i) 6.0 75 line of the street/means of accessway to give
ii) 7.5 150 rise to a new street/means of accessway of
iii) 9.0 250 4.5 m width.
iv) 12.0 400 4.4 The means of access shall be levelled,
v) 18.0 1000 metalled, flagged, paved, sewered, drained,
vi) 24.0 above channelled, lighted, laid with water supply
1000 line and provided with trees for shade to the
NOTE - If the development is only on one side of the satisfaction of the Authority free of
means of access, the prescribed widths may bereduced by encroachment by any structure or fixture so as
I m in each case. not to reduce its width below the minimum
required under 4.3 and shall be maintainedin
43.1 OTHER B UILDINGS - For all industrial a condition to the satisfaction of the
buildings, theatres, cinema houses, assembly Authority.
halls, stadia, educational buildings, markets,
other buildings which attract large crowd, the 4.4.1 If any private street 01 any other means
means of access shall not be less than the of access to a building is not levelled, metalled,
following: flagged or paved, sewered, drained, chan-
Width of nelled, lighted or laid with water supply line 01
Length of provided with trees for shade.to the satisfac-
Means of Means of
A ccess tion of the Authority, who may, with the sanc-
Access tion cif the Authority, by written notice
m m require the owner OI owners of the several
premises fronting or adjoining the said street
12.0 200 of other means of access or abutting thereon
01 to which access is obtained through such
15.0 400 street 01 other means of access or which shall
18.0 600 benefit by works executed, to carry out any or
more of the aforesaid requirements in such
24.0 above manner as he shall direct.
600
4.4.2 If any structure or fixture is set upon a
Further, in no case shall the means of access means of access so as to reduce its width below
be lesser in width than the internal accessways the minimum required, the Authority may
in layouts and subdivision. remove the same further and Iecovet the
4.3.2 P A T H W A Y S -The approach to the expenses so incurred from the owner.
buildings from road/street/ internal means of
access shall be through paved pathway of 4.5 Access from Highwa)ps/ I m p o r t a n t
width not less than I .5 m, provided its length Roads- No premises other than highway
is not more than 30 m. amenities like petrol pumps, motels,etc,shall
have an access direct from highways and such
4.3.2.1 In the case of special housing schemes other roads not less than 52 m in width, which
for low income group and economically the Authority with the approval of the High-
weaker section of society developed up to two way Authority shall specify from time to time.
storeyed row/cluster housing scheme, the The Authority shall maintain a register of
pedestrian pathway width shall be 3 m subject such roads which shall be open to public
to provisions of 9.4.1(a). The pedestrian inspection at all times during office hours. The
pathway shall not serve more than 8 plots on portion of such roads on which direct access
each side of the pathway; the length of the may be permitted shall be as identified in the
pathway shall be not more than 50 m. Development Plan. However, in the case of
4.3.3 The length of the main means of access existing development on highways/other
shall be determined by the distance from the roads referred to above, the operation of this
farthest plot (building) to the public street. clause shall be exempted. These provisions
The length of the subsidiary accessway shall shall, however, be subject to the provisions of
be measured from the point of its origin to the the relevant State Highway Act, and National
next wider road on which it meets. Highway Act.
8 NATIONAL BLII.DING CODE OF INDIA
Ill-
4.6 For high rise buildings and buildings
other than residential, the following
additional provisions of means of access shall
be ensured:
a) The width of the main street on which the
building abuts shall not be less than 12 m
and one end of this street shall join
another street not less than 12 m in width’.
b) The approach to the building and open
spaces on all its sides up to 6 m width and
the layout for the same shall be done in
consultation with the Chief Fire Officer of
the city and the same shall be hard surface
capable of taking the weight of fire engine,
weighing up to 18 tonnes. The said open
space shall be kept free of obstructions
and shall be motorable.
c) The main entrance to the plot shall be of
adequate width to allow easy access to the
fire engine and in no case shall it measure
less than 4.5 m. The entrance gate shall
fold back against the compound wall of
the premises, thus leaving the exterior
accesswai within the plot free for
movement of fire service vehicle. If the
main entrance at the boundary wall is built
over, the minimum clearance shall be
4.5 m.
4.7 Cul-de-sacs giving access to plots and
extending from 150 to 275 m in length with an
additional turning space at 150 m will be
allowed only in residential areas, provided
cul-de-sacs would be permissible only on
straight roads and further provided the end of
cul-de-sacs shall be higher in level than the
level of the starting point of such dead end
road. The turning space, In this case shall
be not less than 81 rn* m area, with no
dimension less than 9 m.
4.8 Intersection cf Roads - For intersection
junctions of roads meeting at right angles as
well as other than right angles, the rounding
off or cut off or splay or similar treatment
shall be done, to the approval of the
Authority, depending upon the width of
roads, the traffic generated, the sighting angle,
etc,to provide clear sight distance.
4.9 The building line shall be set back at least
3 m from internal means of access in a layout
of buildings in a plot subject to provisions
of 8.2.1.
5. COMMUNITY OPEN SPACES AND
AMENITIES
5.1 Residential and Commercial Zones - In
any layout or sub-division of land measuring
0.3 hectare of more in residential and com-
mercial zones, the community open spaces
PART 111 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL
shall be reserved for recreational purposes
which shall as far as possible be provided in
one place or planned out for the use of the
community in clusters or pockets.
5.1.1 The community open spaces shall be
provided catering to the needs of area of
layout, population for which the layout is
planned and the category of dwelling units.
The following minimum provision shall be
made:
a) 15 percent of the area of the layout, or
b) 0.3 to 0.4 ha] 1000 persons; for low income
housing the open spaces shall be
0.3 ha/ 1000 persons.
5.2 No recreational space shall generally be
less than 450 m*.
5.2.1 The minimum average dimension of
such recreational space shall be not less than
7.5 m; if the average width of such recreational
space is less than 24 m, the length thereof shall
not exceed 2.5 times the average width. HQW-
ever, depending on the configuration of the
site, commonly open spaces of different
shapes may be permitted by the Authority, as
long as the open spaces provided set-ve the
needs of the immediate community contigu-
ous to the open spaces.
5.2.2 In such recreational spaces, a single
storeyed structure as pavilion or gymnasia up
to 25 m2 in area may be permitted; such area
may be excluded from FAR calculations; no
toilet block shall be permitted.
5.3 Each recreational area and the structure
on it shall have an independent means of
access. Independent means of access may not
be insisted upon if recreational space is
approachable directly from every building in
the layout. Further, the building line shall be
at least 3 m away from the boundary of recrea-
tional open space.
5.4 Industrial Zones - in the case of sub-
division of land in industrial zones of area
0.8 hectare or more, 5 percent of the total area
shall be reserved as amenity open space which
shall also serve as a general parking space;
when such amenity open space exceeds
1500 m’, the excess area could be utilized for
the construction of buildings for b a n k s ,
canteens, welfare centres and such other
common purposes considered necessary for
the industrial user, as approved by the
Authority.
5.4.1 In all industrial plots measuring
1000 m2 or more in area, 10 percent of the
total area shall be provided as an a2menity
open space to a maximum of 2500 m . Such
an amenity open space shall have a means of
BUILDING REQUIREMMTS III-
9
access and shall be so located that it could be oullding shall, if the Authority so requires, be
conveniently utilized as such by the persons effectively drained by surface water drains or
working in the industry. other means.

5.5 Other Amenities--- In addition to com- 6.3.1 The written approval of the Authority
munity open spaces, the layouts shall provide shall be obtained for connecting any subsoil
for the following, depending on the magni- or surface water drain to a sewer.
tude of the settlement and as decided by the
Authority: 6.4 Distance from Electric Lines -~ No
verandah, balcony, or the like shall be allowed
a) Educational Nursery school, primary to be erected or re-erected or any additions or
facilities school, middle school, alterations made to a building within the
high school or college distances quoted below in accordance with the
as applicable. current Indian Electricity Rules and its
b) Health facility C l i n i c , h e a l t h c e n t r e , amendments from time to time between the
dispensary or hospital, building and any overhead electric supply
as applicable. line:
c) Commercial Booth, shops, convenience
facility, inclu- shopping centre, local
ding shopping shopping centre, or zonal Verticaily Horizon-
facility shopping centre. as appli- tarry
cable. m m
d) Communica- Post office, post and tele- 4 Low and medium 2.5 I.2
tion facilities graph office, police post, voltage lines and
and essential police station, fire station service lines
services
bj High voltage lines 3.7 1.2
e) Social, com- Religious building, com- up to and includ-
munity and m u n i t y h a l l (mangal ing I1 000 V
cultural faci- karyafa, ka!~w7anlatlda-
lities pam. harat g h a r , etc),
Cl Higfi voltage lines 3.7 2.0
above 1 1 000 V
welfare centre, cinema. and up to and in-
cluding 33000 V
NO it. ~~ The requirements of essential amenities for low
income housing shall be as given in Appendix B. d) Extra high voltage 3.7 2.0
lines beyond (plus0.3m (plus 0.3 m
5.6 Every layout or subdivision shall take 33000 v for every for every
into account the provisions of development additional additional
plan and if the land is affected by any 33000 V 33000 v
reservation for public purposes, the Authority and part and part
may agree to adjust the location of such thereof) thereof)
reservations to suit the development.

6. REQUIREMENTS OF PLOTS 6.5 Distance of site from the normal edge of

water course, area m?y be specified by the
6.1 No building shall be constructed on any Authority, keeping in view the normal
site, on any part of which there is deposited maximum flood. tide level.
refuse, excreta or other offensive matter
objectionable to the Authority, until such
refuse has been removed therefrom and the 6.6, Size of f lots
site has been prepared or left in a manner
suitable for building purposes to the satisfac- 6.6.1 RESIDENTIAL -- Each plot shall have a
tion of the Authority. minimum size,: frontage corresponding to the
type of development as given below:
6.2 Damp Sites - Wherever the dampness of T,,pe of Plot Six Frontage
a site or the nature of the soil renders such Development
precautions necessary, the ground surface of
the site between the walls of any building m’ m
erected thereon shall be rendered damp-proof Detached building above 250 above 12
to the satisfaction of the Authority. Semidetached building 125-250 8to 12
R o wtype
building so- 125 4.5 to 8
6.3 Surface Water Drains -- Any land
passage or other area within the curtilage of a NOTE -- For low income housIng see Appendix B.

lll.lo NATIONAI. BlllLDlNC CODE OF INDIA

6.6.1.1 The minimum size of the site for
group housing development shall be as given
in the Master Plan and local development
control rules.
6 . 6 . 2 I N D U S T R I A L -The size of the plot
shall not be less than 300 m’ and its width shall
not be less than 15 m.
6.6.3 OTHER LA N D U SES -The minimum
size of plots for buildings for other uses like
business, educational, mercantile, assembly
(cinema theatre), mangal karyaluya, petrol
filling station, etc, shall be as decided by the
Authority subject to 6.6.3.1 to 6.6.3.3.
6.6.3.1 ASSEMBLY HALLSjclNEMA THEA-
TRES-- The minimum size of plot for
assembly buildings/cinema theatres used for
public entertainment with fixed seats shall be
on the basis of seating capacity of the building
at the rate of 3 m’ per seat.
6.6.3.2 MANGAL KARYALA~AIKALYANA
MAND,4PAM,'BARAT CHAR/COMMUNITY
HALLS -The size of plot shall not be less
than 1000 m2.
6.6.3.3 PETROL FILLING STATION - The size
of the ‘plot shall not be less than:
a) 31 x 17 m in the case of petrol filling
station with kiosk without service bay,
and
b) 37 x 31 m in the case of pt?trOl filling
station with service bay.
7. CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS
7.0 Buildings are classified based on occu-
pancy and types of construction.
7.1 For the purpose of the Code, the
following shall be the occupancy classification
and types of construction; for more detailed
information, reference may be made to 3 of
Part IV Fire protection.
7.1. I OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION
a) Residential
b) Educational
c) Institutional
d) Assembly
e) Business
f) Mercantile (will include both retail and
wholesale stores)
g) Industrial (will include low, moderate and
high fire hazards)
h) Storage
j) Hazardous
PART III DEVELOPMENT C O N T R O L RULES AND GENmAL CUltDING REQIIIEEM~TS
7.1.2 T YPES OF C ONSTRUCTION
a) Type 1
b) Type 2
cl Type3
d) Type 4
8. OPEN SPACES (WITHIN A PLOT)
8. I General - Every room intended for
human habitation shall abut on an interior or
exterior open space or an open Vera&ah open
to such interior or exterior open space.
8.1.J The open spaces inside and around a
building have essentially to cater for the light-.
ing and ventilation requirements of the rooms
abutting such open spaces, and in the case of
buildings abutting on streets in the front, rear
or sides, the open spaces provided shall be
sufficient for the future widening of such
streets.
8.1.2 O PEN S PACES S EPARATE FOR E A C H
B UILDING OF WING -The open spaces shall
be separate or distinct for each building and
where a building has two or more wings, each
wing shall have separate or distinct open
spaces for the purposes of lighting and
ventilation of the wings.
However, separation between accessory and
main buildings more than 7 m in height shall
not be less than I.5 m; for buildings up to 7 m
in height no such separation shall be required.
8.2 Residential Buildings
8.2.1 E XTERIOR O PEN S P A C E S
8.2.1.1 FRONT OPEN SPACE
a) Every building fronting a street shall have
a front space, forming an integral part of
the site as below:
Front Open Space, Width of Street
Min Fronting ihe Plot
m m
1.5* up to 7*5*
7.5 to 18
;I; 18 to 30
6.0 Above 30
*For buildings up to a maximum height 7 m.
NOTE - In case a building abuts two or more streets, the
value of open spaces is to be based on the average width of
streets, subject to a minimum of 1.8 m for cases (ii). (iii)
and (iv)above.
b) For streets less than 7.5 m in width, the
distance of the building (building line)
shall be at least 5 m from the centre line of
the street (see 4.3.5).
NOTE -This limiting distance has to be determined by
the Authority for individual road/street widths taking
into account the traffic flow.
UY
8.2.1.2 REAR OPEN SPACE 8.2.3 The open spaces mentioned in 8.2.1.1
to 8.2.1.3 s h a l l b e f o r r e s i d e n t i a l
Every residential building shall have a rear buildings up to a height of 10 m.
open space, forming an integral part of the
site, of an average width of 3 m and at no 8.2.3.2 For buildings of height above 10 m,
place measuring less than 1.8 m, except the open spaces (side and rear) shall be as
that in the case of a back-to-back-site, the given in Table 2. The front open spaces for
width of the rear open space shall be 3 m increasing heights of buildings shall be
throughout. Subject to the condition of governed by 9.4.1(a).
free ventilation, the open space left up to
half the width of the plot shall also be
taken into account for calculating the TABLE 2 SIDE AND REAR OPEN SPACES FOR
average width of the rear open space. For DIFFERENT HEIGHTS OF BUILDINGS
plots of depth less than 9 m, for buildings
up to 7 m in height, the rear open space (Clause 8.2.3.1)
may be reduced to 1.5 m.
H EIGHT S IDE AND R E A R
i%. OF O PEN S PACES TO B E
b) REAR OPEN SPACE TO EXTEND B UILDINGS L EFT A R O U N D
WALL -The
T H R O U G H O U T T H E RE A R B UILDING
rear open space shall be co-extensive with
(1) (2) (3)
the entire face of the rear wall. If a building m m
abuts on two or more streets, such rear
open space shall be provided throughout 9
the face of the rear wall. Such rear wall ii)
iiij
111I8 :
6
shall be the wall on the opposite side of the iv) 21 7
face of the building abutting on the wider VI 24
street unless the Authority directs vi) t:
otherwise. vii) :i IO
viii) 35 II
ix)
Xj 4
45 1:
8.2.1.3 SIDE OPEN SPACE xij
xii) 50 and above 1:
a) Every semi-detached and detached
building shall have a permanently open air NOTE I - For buildings above 24 m in height, there shall
space, forming an integral part of the site be a minimum front open space of 6 m.
as below: N O T E 2 - W h e r e rooms do not derive light and
ventilation from the exterior open space, the width of
9 For detached buildings there shall be a such exterior open space as given in co1 3 may be reduced
minimum side open space of 3 m on by I m subject to a minimum of 3 m and a maximum of 8
both the sides. m. No further projections shall be permitted.
N OTE - For detached residential buildings up NOTE 3 - If the length or depth of the building exceeds
to 7 m in height on plots with a frontage less than 4Om, add to col 3 ten percent of length or depth of
I2 m (sce6.6.l). one of the side openspaces may building minus 4.0 m.
be reduced to I.5 m.
ii) For semi-detached buildings, there
shall be a minimum side open space of 8.2.3.2 For tower-like structures (seed), as an
3 m on one side. alternative to 8.2.3.1, open spaces shall be as
below:
N OTE - For semidetached buildings up to
7 m in height on plots with a frontage less than a) Up to a height of 24 m, with one set-back,
9m (see 6.6.1). the side open space may be the open spaces at the ground level, shall
reduced to I.5 m. be not less than 6 m;
iii) For row-type buildings, no side b) For heights between 24 m and37.5 m with
open is required. one set-back, the open spaces at the
b) In the case of semi-detached buildings, ground level, shall be not less than 9 m;
the open spaces provided on one side cl For heights above 37.5 m with two set-
shall be as in 8.2.1.3 and all habitable backs, the open spaces at the ground level,
rooms shall abut either on this side open shall be not less than 12 m; and
space or front and rear open spaces or an 4 The deficiency in the open spaces shall be
interior open space (see 8.2.5). made good to satisfy 8.2.3.1 through the
set-backs at the upper levels; these set-
8.2.2 The provisions of 8.2.1.2and 8.2.1.3are backs shall not be accessible from
not applicable to parking lock-up garages up individual rooms/flats at these levels.
to 3 m in height located at a distance of7.5 m
from any street line or front boundary of the 8.2.4 The front open space would govern the
plot. height of the building (see 9.4).

**P NATIONAL MJILDINC CDDD OF INDIA

8.2.5 I NTERIOR O PEN S P A C E S
a) INNER C O U R T Y A R D-- In case the whole
of one side of every room excepting bath,
WC and store room is not abutting on
either the front, rear or side(s) open
spaces, it shall abut on an inner courtyard.
whose minimum width shall be 3 m.
Further, the inner courtyard shall have an
area, throughout its height, of not less
than the square of one-fifth the height of
the highest wall abutting the courtyard,
Provided that when any room (excluding
staircase bay, bathroom and water-closet)
is dependent for its light and ventilation
on an inner courtyard, the dimension shall
be such as is required for each wing of the
building.
Where only water closet and bath room
are abutting on the interior courtyard, Ihe
size of the interior.courtyard shall be in
line with the provision for ventilation
shaft as given in 8.2.5(b).
b) V E N T I L A T I O N S H A F T- For ventilating
the spaces for water closets and bath
rooms, if not opening on to front, side,
rear,and interior open spaces, these shall
open on to the ventilation,shaft, the size of
which shall not be less than the values
given below:
Height of Size of Minimum Size
Buildings Ventilation of Shaft
Shaft
m m* m the building shall be not less than 6 m;
up to 10 1.2 o-9
12 I.2
18 ;:; 1.5
24 54
;:i
30 8.0
Above 30 9.0 3.0
N O T E I- For buildings of height above 30 m, a
mechanical ventilation system shall be installed besides
the provision of minimum ventilation shaft.
NOTE 2 - For fully air-conditioned residential buildings
for lodging purposes, the ventilation shaft need not he
insisted upon, provided the air-conditioning system
works in an uninterrupted manner; also, provided there is
an alternative source of power SUpply.
c) OUTER COURTYARD- The minimum
width o f t h e o u t e r c o u r t y a r d ( a s
distinguished from its depth) shall be not
less than 2.4 m. If the width of the outer
courtyard is less than 2.4 m, it shall be
treated as a notch and the provisions of
outer courtyard shall not apply. However,
if the depth of the outer courtyard is more
than the width, the provisions of 8.1.2
shall apply for the open spaces to be left
between the wings.
PMT ill DLVELCWMMPPIT CONTROL RULES AND CENmAL SUILDMC IttCQUlREMUWS
8.2.6 J OINT O PEN A IR S P A C E- Every such
interior or exterior open air space, unless the
latter is a street, shall be maintained for the
benefit of such building exclusively and shall
be entirely within the owner’s own premises.
8.2.6.1 If such interior or exterior open air
space is intended to be used for the benefit of
more than one building belonging to the same
owner, the width of such open air space shall
be the one specified for the tallest building as
specified in 8.2.3 abutting on such open air
space.
8.2.6:2 If such interior or exterior open air
space is jointly okned by more than one
person, its width shall also be as specified
in 8.2, provided every such person agrees in
writing to allow his portion of such joint open
air space to be used for the benefit of every
building abutting on such joint open air space
and provided he sends such written consent
to the Authority for record. Such common
open air space shall thenceforth be treated as
a permanently open air space required for the
purposes of the Code. No boundary wall
between such joint open air space shall be
erected or raised to a height of more than
2.0 m.
8.3 Other Occupancies
8.3.1 Open spaces for other occupancies shall
be as below;
a) E D U C A T I O N A L BUILDINGS-E~~~~~ for
nursery schools, the open spaces around
b) I N S T I T U T I O N A L BU I L D I N G S- The open
spaces around the building shall be not
less than 6 m; and
c) S S E M B L Y B U I L D I N G S- T h e o p e n
A
space at front shall be not less than 12m
and the other open spaces around the
building shall be not less than 6 m.
N OTE - However, if assembly buildings are
permitted in purely residential zones, the open
spaces around the building shall be not less than
12m.
d) BUSINESS, MERCANTILE AND STORAGE
BUILDINGS -The open spaces around
the building shall be not less than 4.5 m.
Where these occur in a purely residential
zone or in a residential with shops Iine
zone the open spaces may be relaxed.
e) I N D U S T R I A L B U I L D I N G S- T h e o p e n
spaces around the building shall be not
less than 4.5 m for heights up to 16 m,
with an increase of the open spaces of
0.25 m for every increase of 1 m or
fraction thereof in height above 16 m.
N O T E -Special rules for narrow industrial plots
in the city, namely plots less than I5 m tn wrdtb,
and with appropriate set-backs from artain
streets and highways, shall be applicable.
nil3
f) HAZARDOUS O C C U P A N C I E S- The
open spaces around the building shall be
as specified for industrial buildings [see
8.3.2(e)]
8.4 Exemption to Open Spaces
8.4.1 P ROJECTIONS INTO O PEN SPACES-
Every open space provided either interior or
exterior shall be kept free from any erection
thereon and shall be open to the sky, except as
below:
a) Cornice, roof or weather shade not more
than O-75 m wide;
b) Sunshades over windows/ventilators or
other openings not more than0.75 m wide;
Canopy at first floor level, but not to be
4 paved and channelled according to the
used as a sitout with clearance of l-5 m
between the plot boundary and the
canopy;
4 Projected balcony at higher floors of
width not more than O-9 m; and
e) Projecting rooms/ balconies [see (d)] at
alternate floors such that rooms of the
lower two floors get light and air and the
projection being not more than the height
of the storey immediately below.
However, these projections into open spaces
shall not reduce the minimum required open
spaces.
8 . 4 . 1 . 1 A C C E S S O R Y B U I L D I N G- T h e
following accessory buildings may be
permitted in the open spaces:
a) In an existing building, sanitary block of
2.4 m in height subject to a maximum of
4 m2 in the rear open space at a distance
of l-5 m from the rear boundary may be
permitted, where facilities are not
adequate.
b) Parking lock up garages not exceeding
2*4m in height shall be permitted in the
side or rear open spaces at a distance of
7.5 m from any road line or the front
boundary of the plot; and
cl Suction. tank and pump room each up to
2.5 m* in area.
8.4.2 P ROJECTJON INTO STREEI
8.4.2.1 In existing built-up or congested
areas, no projection of any sort whatsoever,
except sunshades (see 8.4.2.3) extending more
than 23 cm. below a height of 4.3 m, shall
project over the road or over any drain or over
any portion outside the boundaries of the site,
provided the projection arising out of the
vertical part of the rain-water spouts
projecting at the road level or the water pipe
may be permitted in accordance with the
drainage plan.
Id4
8.4.2.2 PORTICOS IN EXISTING DEVELOPED
AREA - Porticos in bazar areas of existing
developed areas may be permitted to project
on road land subject to the following
limitations:
a) Porticos may be allowed on such roads
leaving a minimum clear space of 18 m
between kerbs;
b) The porticos shall not be less than 3 m.
wide;
4 Nothing shall be allowed to be
constructed on the portico which shall
be used as an open terrace;
4 Nothing shall be allowed to project
beyond the line of arcades; and
e) The space under the portico shall be
directions of the Authority.
8.4.2.3 SUNSHADES OVER WINDOWS AND
VENTJLATORS - Projections of sunshades
over windows or ventilators in existingbuilt-
up or congestedareas when permitted by the
Authority shall fulfil the following conditions:
No sunshade shall be permitted over the
road or over any drain or over any
portion outside the boundaries of the
site below a height of 2.8 m from the
road level;
b) Sunshades provided above a height of
2.8 m from the ground level shall be
permitted to project up to a maximum
width of 60 cm, if the road over which
they prcject exceeds 9 m in width; and
cl No sunshade shall be permitted on roads
less than 9 m in width or on roads having
no footpaths.
8.5 Limitations to Open Spaces
8.5.1 S AFEGUARD A GAINST R EDUCTION OF
O PEN S PACE - NO construction work on a
building shall be allowed if such work oper-
ates to reduce an open air space of any other
adjoining building, belonging to the same
owner to an extent less than what is prescribed
at the time of the proposed work orto reduce
further such open space if it is already less
than that prescribed.
8.5.2 A DDITIONS OR E XTENSIONS TO A
BUILDING- Additions or extensions to a
building shall be allowed, provided the open
spaces for the additions/extensions satisfy 8.2
after such additions/extensions are made.
9. AREA AND HEIGHT LIMITATIONS
9.2 General- The limitation of area and
height of buildings of different occupancy
classes and types of construction shall be
achieved by specifying it in terms of FAR,
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
which shall take into account the various TABLE 3 COMPARATIVE FLOOR AREA RATIOS
aspects that govern in specifying FAR as FOR OCCUPANCIES FACING ONE PUBLIC
given below: STREET OF AT LEAST 9 m WIDTH
a) Occupancy class; (Clause 9.2 )
b) Types of construction; OCCUPANCY T YPE OF CONSTRUCTION
C LASSIFICATION r
c) Width of street fronting the building and Type1 Type2 Type3 Type4
the traffic load;
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
d) Locality where the building is proposed
and the density; Residential UL 2.0 1.4 1.0

e) Parking facilities; hducational UL 2.0 1.4 1.0

f) Local fire fighting facilities; and Institutional UL 1.5 1.0 0.8

Assembly UL 1.c 0.7 0.5
g) Water supply and drainage facilities.
Business UL 2.9 2.3 1.6
9.2 The comparative FAR’s for different
occupancies and types of construction are as Mercantile 8.0 1.8 1.4 1.0
given in Table 3 and the Authority shall select Industrial 7.5 1.9 1.6 1.3
a basic FAR for one occupancy and a type of Storage (see Note 4) 6.0 1.5 1.3 I.0
construction and arrive at the FAR values for
other combinations taking into account the Hazardous (see Note 4) 2.8 1.1 0.9 NP
other local factors (see 9.1). UL - Unlimited.
9.2.1 UNLIMITED A REAS - The minimum NP - Not Permitted.
fire separation on all sides of buildings of N OTE 1 -This table has been prepared, takin into
unlimited areas (see Table 3) and of Type 1 account the combustible content in the dt #Iferent
construction shall be 9 m. occupancies as well as the fire resistance offered by the
type of construction (see Part IV Fire protection).
9.3 Street Widrh - The area limits shall NOTE 2 - This table shall be modified by the Authority,
apply to all buildings fronting on a street or taking into account the other aspects as given below
public spa%. not less than 9 m in width (see 9.1):
accessible to a public street. a) Density in terms of dwelling units/ hectare;
b) Traffic considerations;
9.4 Height Limit-The height and number
of storeys shall be related to FAR and the c) Parking spaces;
provisions of 8. d) Local fire fighting facilities; and
e) Water supply, drainage and sanitation requirements.
9.4.1 Where a building height is not covered NOTE 3 -The FAR specified may be increased by 20
by Table 3, the maximum height shall be percent for the following:
limited according to the width of the street as a) A basement or cellar and space under a building
follows: constructed on stilts and used as a parking space, and
air-conditioning plant room used as accessory to the
a) The maximum height of building shall not principal use;
exceed 1.5 times the width of road b) Electric cabin or substation, watchman’s booth of
abutting plus the front open space; maximum size of 1.6 m2 with minimum width or
diameter of 1.2 m, pumphouse, garbage shaft, space
b) If a building abuts on two or more streets requited for locatton of fire hydrants, electric fittings
of different widths, the building shah be and water tanL;
deemed to face upon the street that has the c) Projections and accessory buildings as specifically
greater width and the height of the exempted (see 8.4.1); and
building shall be regulated by the width of
that street and may be continued to this d) Staircase room and lift rooms above the topmost
storey. architectural features; and chimneys and
height to a depth of 24 m along the elevated tanks of dimensions as rmissibk under the
narrower street subject to conformity Code; the area of the lift shaft s/G 11 be taken only on
of 8; and one floor.
c) For buildings in vicinity of aersdromes, NOTE 4 - In so far as single stomy storage and haxardous
provisions of 9.5 shall apply. occupancies are concerned, they would be further
governed by volume to plot area ratio (VPR), to be
decided by the Authority.
9.4.2 HEIGHT EXCEPTIONS
the roof of building upon which they are
9.4.2.1 ROOF STRUCTURES - The following erected:
appurtenant structures shall not be included
a) Roof tanks and their supports;
in the height of the building unless the
aggregate area of such structures, including b) Ventilating, air-conditioning, lift rooms
pent-houses, exceeds one-third of the area of and similar service equipment;
c) Roof structures other than pent-houses;
and
d) Chimneys and parapet walls not exceeding
I m in height.
Y.5.3 Butcheries. tanneries and solid waste
disposal sites shall not be permitted within
IO km from the aerodrome reference point.
Y.6 Group Housing

9.4.2.2 Except in buildings where automatic 9.6.1 Group housing development may
sprinkler equipment is a requirement in normally and preferably be in multistoreyed
accordance with Part IV Fire plotection, all blocks; it shall not be a customary
structures of Type 1, ‘Type 2 and Type 3 subdivision of land into streets and plots.
construction designed for industt ial, business,
mercantile, low or moderate hazard storage Y.6.Z No limit to floors and height shall be
occupancies may be erected 6 m higher than applicable, but the coverage and ~IOOI alea
specified in Table 3 when equipped with an ratio for WI ious densities may be as given in
approved one-source automatic sprinkler lable 4 unless otherwise provided in the
system. Master Plan and local development control
rules.
9.5 Restrictions i n t h r C’icinit.v o/’
Aerodromes --~
TABLt 4 FLOOR AREA RATIO AND COVERAGE
9 . 5 . 1 FOI buildings in the vicinity of FOR GROUP HOUSING
aerodromes, the maximum height of such SI GROSS M AXIMUM FLOOH
buildings shall be decidedin consultation with No RESIIXN~IAL COVEKAtiE AR E A
the Civil Aviation Author-ities. ‘This shall be DENSIIV IN PERCENT R ATIO
regu!ated by the rules fol giving no objection PERSONS/
HECTARE
certificate for construction of buildings in the
vicinity of aerodromes of DirectorateGeneral (1) (2) (3) (4)
of Civil Aviation,, which are given in 1) I25 25 0.75
Appendix A. However, the latest rules of ii) 250 30 1.25
Directorate General of Civil Aviation stiall be
iii) 425 33; 1.50
followed in all cases of buildings coming up in
the vicinity of an aerodrome. iV) 500 35 1.75
v) 625 35 2.00
9.5.1.1 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f 9.5.1 n e w
buildings, structures which rise to 30 m or NOTE ~ The coverage shall be calculated on the basis of
the whole area reserved for group housing after
more in height and are to be located within deductmg:
20 km of the aerodrome reference point, shall
be constructed only ii no objection certificate a) The area of any highway, any road up to 25 m and
maior residential roads of 18 m wtdth around the
has been obtained from the Directorate g&p housing area (residential street, loop street, cul-
General of Civil Aviation. de-sac, service lanes and footpaths shall not be
deducted);
9.5.1.2 In the case of buildings to be erected in b) The area of school (excluding sites for nursery schools)
the vicinity of defence aerodromes, the and other community facilities within the group
maximum height of such buildings shall be housing area; and
decided by the Defence Authority (see 12.5 of c) The open spaces, except playgrounds and totlots of
Part Ii Administration). local nature.
9.5.2 This will apply specially to new
constructions, overhead HT/ LT lines, tele-
phone/telegraph lines, factories, chimneys, 10. OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES
wire/TV antennas.
10.1 The off-street parking (on-site parking)
9.5.2.1 No new chimneys or smoke producing spaces in a plot to be provided shall be in
factories shall be constructed within a radius accordance with Appendix B. The spaces
of 8 km from the aerodrome reference point given in Appendix B shall be considered by
(ARP). the Authority in conjunction with the
Development Rules, in force, if any.
9.5.2.2 Ovei-head HT/ LT lines ox telephone-
/telegraph lines shall not be permitted in the 11. GREENBELTS AND LANDSCAPING
approach/take-off climb axeas within 3 000 m
of the inner edge of these areas.
11.1 General - Greenbelts and landscaping
9.5.2.3 A 3 m margin shall be allowed in new including plantation of shrubs and trees help
constructions for wireless/TV antennas, cool- to certain extent in enhancing the
ing towers and mumties. environmental quality.

,,P NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF I N D I A

11.1.1 Planting of trees in streets and in open
spaces should b e done carefully to take
advantage of both shades and sunshine
without handicapping the flow of natural
winds. rheir advantage for abating glare and
for providing cool and/ or warm pockets in
developed areas should also be taken.
11.1.2 Where relief from noise is to be
provided by means of greenbelts, these may be
of considerable width and be landscaped. The
extent of relief that may be derived from the
above may be estimated only after considering
other environmental factors. Strong leafy
trees may be planted to act as noise baffles.
Shrubs or creepers may also be planted for
additional protection between tree trunks;
artificial mounds and banks should be formed
wherever practicable.
Il.2 Norms for Planting of Shrubs and Trees
11.2.1 Suitable provisions may be made for
greeneries including plantation of shrubs and
trees as a part of environmental protection in
general. This aspect shall be taken care of
from the initial stage of town and country
planning, zoning and planning o f
development of particular area and group
housing. Finally, this. aspect shall also be
taken into account in planning individual
building of different occupancies. A guide for
the quantum of plantation of shrubs, trees and
other greenery in different occupancies and
community spaces is given in Appendix C.
11.2.2 The types of plants, the distance
between trees/plants from the building and
the distance between plants shall be carefully
worked out keeping in view the structural
safetv and aesthetic requirements of
buildjngs.
11.3 Trees shall be numbered area-wise, plot-
wise and road-wise by the concerned
authority and they shall be checked
periodically.
I I .4 Cutting and pruning of trees in public as
well as private areas shall be suitably
regulated. Trees shall be cut only after
obtaining the permission of the Authority
designated for this purpose.
1 2 . KEQUIREMENTS O F P A R T S O F
BUILDINGS
12.1 Plinth
12.1.1 M AIN B UILDINGS -The plinth or any
part of a building or outhouse shall be so
located with respect to the surrounding
ground level that adequate drajnage of the
site is assured. The height of the plinth shall be
PAiT III D E V E L O P M E N T C O N T R O L RULFS A N D G E N E R A L
not less than 4.5 cm from the surrounding
ground level.
12.1.2 1~1.~~10~ CO U R T Y A R D S - Every
interior courtyard shall be raised at least 15
cm above the level of the centre of the nearest
street and shall be satisfactorily drained.
12.2 Habitable Rooms
12.2.1 H EIGHT --The height of all rooms for
human habitation shall not be less than 2.75 m
measured from the surface of the floor to the
lowest point of the ceiling (bottom of slab). In
the case of pitched roof, the average height of
rooms shall not *be less than 2.75 m. The
minimum clear head room under a beam,
folded plates or eaves shall be 2.4 m. In the
case of air-conditioned rooms, a height of not
less than 2.4 m measured from the surface of
the floor to the lowest point of air-
conditioning duct or the false ceiling shall be
provided.
12.2.1 .I ‘The requirements of 12.2.1 apply to
residential, business and mercantile buildings.
For educational and industrial buildings, the
following minimum requirements apply:
a) Educational Ceiling height 3.6 m for
buildings all regions; in cold
regions, 3 m.
b) Industrial Ceiling height 3.6 m,
Buildings except when air-condi-
tioned, 3 m (Factory
Act 1948 and rules
therein shall govern
such heights, where
applicable).
12.2.2 SIZE ~~ The area of habitable room
shall not be less than 9.5 m’, where there is
only one room with a minimum width of
2.4-m. Where there are two rooms, one of
these shall not be less than 9.5 m- and the
other not less than 7.5 m’, with a minimum
width of.2. I m.
12.3 Kitchen
12._J.l HEIGHT -The height of a kitchen
measured from the surface of the floor to the
lowest point in the ceiling (bottom slab) shall
not be less than 2.75 m, except for the portion
to accommodate floor trap of the upper floor.
12.3.2 SIZE - The area of a kitchen where
separate dining area is provided, shall be not
less than 5.0, rn- with a minimum width of
1.8 m. Where there is a separate store, the area
of the kitchen mav be reduced to 4.5 m’. A
kitchen, which is i&ended for use as a dining
area also, shall have a floor area of not less
than 7.5 m’ with a minimum width of 2.1 m.
BCILDINC REQL’IREMFATS 111-l’
12.3.3 O T H E R R E Q U I R E M E N T S - Every
room to be used as kitchen shall have:
a) unless separately provided in a pantry,
means for the washing of kitchen utensils
which shall lead directly or through a sink
to a grated and trapped connection to the
waste pipe;
b) an impermeable floor;
cl a flue, if found necessary; and
4 a window or ventilator or opening of size
not less than as specified in 14.1.2 subject
to increase in area of opening in
accordance with Note 3 of 14.1.2.
12.4 Bathrooms and Water-Closets
12.4.1 H EIGHT - The height of a bathroom
or water-closet measured from the surface of
the floor to the lowest point in the ceiling
(bottom of slab) shall not be less than 2.m.
12.4.2 SIZE -The size of a bathroom shall
not be less than 1.5 X I.2 m or 1.8m2. The floor
area of water-closet shall be I.1 m* with a
minimum width of 0.9 m. If bath and water-
closet are combined, its floor area shall not be
less than 2.8 mz with a minimum width of
1.2 m.
12.4.3 O T H E R R E Q U I R E M E N T S -- E v e r y
bathroom or water-closet shall:
4 be so situated that at least one of its walls
shall open to external air;
b) not be directly over or under any room
other than another water-closet, washing
place, bath or terrace, unless it has a
water-tight floor;
cl have the platform or seat made of water-
tight non-absorbent material;
d) be enclosed by walls or partitions and the
surface of every such wall or partition
shall be finished with a smooth impervious
material to a height of not less than I m
above the tloor of such a room;
e) be provided with an impervious floor
covering, sloping towards the drain with a
suitable grade and not towards verandah
or any other room; and
f) have a window or ventilator, opening to a
shaft or open space, of area not less than
0.3 m’ with side not less than 0.3 m.
12.4.4 No room containing water-closets
shall be used for any purpose except as a
lavatory and no such room shall open directly
into any kitchen or cooking space by a door,
window or other opening. Every room
containing water-closet shall have a door
completely closing the entrance to it.
J8
12.5 Ledge or TAND/ Lo)
12.5.1 HEIGHT - It shall have a minimum
head-room of 2.2 m.
12.S.2 SIZE - A ledge or rand in a habitable
room shall not cover more than 25 percent of
the area of the floor on which it is constructed
and shall not interfere with the ventilation of
the room under any circumstances.
f2.5.3 LOFI’ -The maximum height of loft
shall be 1.5 m. A loft, if provided, on a
kitchen, shall not exceed 25 percent ofthe area
of the kitchen, leaving a minimum headroom
of 2.2 m for kitchen under loft. On bathroom,
water-closet and corridor, the loft can be 100
percent.
12.6 Mezzanine Floor
12.6.1 H EIGHT - It shall have a minimum
height of 2.2 m.
12.6.2 SIZE - The minimum size of the
mezzanine floor, if it is to be used as a living
room, shall not be less than 9.5 m*. The
aggregate area of such mezzanine floor in a
building shall in no case exceed one-third the
plinth area of the building.
12.6.3 OTHER RE Q U I R E M E N T S - - A m e z -
zanine floor may be permitted over a room or
a compartment provided:
a) it conforms to the standards of living
rooms as regards lighting and ventilation
in case the size of mezzanine floor is 9.5m2
or more (see 14.1.2);
b) it is so constructed as not to interfere
under any circumstances with the
ventilation of the space over and under it;
cl such mezzanine floor is not subdivided
into smaller compartments;
d) such mezzanine floor or any part of it shall
not be used as a kitchen; and
e) in no case shall a mezzanine floor be
closed so as to make it liable to be
converted into unventilated compartments.
12.7 Store Room
12.7.1 HEIGHT - The height of a store room
shall be not less than 2.2 m.
1 2 . 7 . 2 SIZE -The size of a store room,
where provided in a residential building, shall
be not less than 3 m’.
12.8 Garage
12.8.1 HE I G H T -The height of a garage
shall be not less than 2.4 m.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
12.8.2 SIZE ~~ .I-he size of garages shall be as
below:
a) PRlVATE CARAGE ~~ 2.5 x 5.0 m, Ikfin;
and
b, PUBLIC GARAGE - Based on the number
of vehicles parked, etc (see 10).
12.9 Basement
12.9.1 The basement shall not be used for
residential purposes.
12.9.2 The constt.uction of the basement shall
be allowed by the authority in accordance
with the land use and other provisions speci-
tied under the Development Control Rules.
12.9.2.1 The basement to be constructed
within the prescribed set-backs and prescribed
building lines and subject to maximum cover-
age on floor 1 (entrance floor) may be put to
only the following uses:
a) Storage of household or other goods of
ordinarily combustible material;
b) Strong rooms, bank cellars, etc;
c) Air-conditioning equipment and other
machines used for services and utilities of
the building; and
d) Parking spaces.
12.9.3 The basement shall have the following
requirements:
4 Every basement shall be in every part at
least 2.4 m in height from the floor to the
underside of the roof slab or ceiling;
b) Adequate ventilation shall be provided for
the basement. The ventilation
requirements shall be the same as required
by the particular occupancy according to
byelaws. Any deficiency may be met by
providing adequate mechanical
ventilation in the form of blowers, exhaust
fans, air-conditioning systems, etc;
4 The minimum height of the ceiling of any
basement shall be 0.9 m and the
maximum, 1.2 m above the average
surrounding ground level;
4 Adequate arrangements shall be made
such that surface drainage dues not enter
the basement;
d The walls and floors of the basement
shall be watertight and be so designed
that the effects of the surrounding soil
and moisture, if any, are taken into
account in design and adequate damp
proofing treatment is given; and
r) The access to the basement shall be
separate from the main and alternative
staircase providing access and exit from
PART Ill DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL BUILDING
higher floors. Where the staircase is
continuous in the case of buildings served
by more than one staircase, the same shall
be of enclosed type serving as a fire
separation from the basement floor and
higher floors. Open ramps shall be
permitted if they are constructed within
the building line subject to the provision of
(6).
12.10 Chimneys-The chimneys shall be
built at least 0.9 m above flat roofs, provided
the top of the chimneys is not below the top of
the adjacent parapet wall. In the case of slop-
ing roofs, the chimney top shall not be less
than 0.6 m above the ridge ofthe roof in which
the chimney penetrates.
12.11 Parapet - Parapet walls and handrails
provided on the edges of roof terraces, bal-
cony, varandah, etc shall not be less than
1.05 m and not more than 1.20 m in height
from the finished floor level.
12.12 Cabin -The size of cabins shall not be
less than 3.0 m*. The clear passages within the
divided space of any floor shall not be less
than 0.75 m and the distance from the farthest
space in a cabin to any exit shall not be more
than 18.5 m. In case the subdivided cabin does
not derive direct lighting and ventilation from
any open spaces/mechanical means, the
maximum height of the cabin shall be 2.2 m.
12.13 Boundary Wall
12.13.1 The requirements of the boundary
wall are given below:
4 Except with the special permission of the
Authority, the maximum height of the
compound wall shall be 1.5 m above the
centre line of the front street. Compound
wall up to 2.4 m height may be permitted if
the top 0.9 m is of open type construction
of a design to be approved by the
Authority.
b) In the case of a corner plot, the height of
the boundary wall shall be restricted to
0.75 m for a length of 10 m on the front
and side of the intersections and the
balance height of 0.75 m if required in
accordance with (a) may be made up of
open type construction (through railings)
and of design to be approved by the
Authority.
cl However, the provisions of (a) and (h) are
not applicable to boundary walls of jails.
In industrial buildings, electric
substations, transformer stations,
institutional buildings like sanitoria,
hospitals, industrial buildings like
workshops, factories and educational
buildings like schools, colleges, including
hostels. and other uses of public utility
RFiQUDWMMTS Ill-
1 9
 undertakings height up to 2.4 m may be
permitted by the Authority.
12.14 Wells - Wells, intended to supplv
water for human consumption or domestic
purposes, where provided, shall comply with
the requirements of 12.14.1 and 12.14.2.
12.14.1 LO C A T I O N -The well shall be
located:
4 not less than 15 m from any ash pit, refuse
pit, earth closet or privy and shall be
located on a site upwards from the earth
closet or privy;
b) not less than 18 m from any cess pit
soakway or borehole latrine and shall be
located on a site upwards from the earth
closet or privy;
cl that contamination by the movement of
sub-soil or other water is unlikely; and
d) not under a tree or otherwise it should
have a canopy over it, so that leaves and
twigs may not fall into the well and rot.
12.14.2 R EQUIREMENTS -The well shall:
a) have a minimum internal diameter of not
less than 1 m;
b) be constructed to a height not less than
I m above the surrounding ground level.
to form a parapet or kerb and to prevent
surface water from flowing into a well. and
shall be surrounded with a paving
constructed of impervibus material which
shall extend for a distance of not less than
I .8 m in every direction from the parapet
from the kerb forming the well head and
the upper surface of such a paving shall be
sloped away from the well;
c) be of sound and permanent construction
@ucca) t h r o u g h o u t . T e m p o r a r y o r
exposed (kufcha) wells shall be permitted
only in fields or gardens for purposes of
irrigation; and
d) have the interior surface of the lining or
walls of the well be rendered impervious
for a depth of not less than 1.8 m measured
from the level of the ground immediately
adjoining the well-head.
12.15 Septic Tanks-Where a septic tank is
used for sewage disposal, the location. design
and construction of the septic tank shall
c o n f o r m t o r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 12.15.1
and 12.1.5.2.
12.15.1 L OCATION OF S EPTIC T ANKS AND
S~HSUKFACE ABSORPTION S YSTEMS - A
subsoil dispersion system shall’not be closer
than 18 m from any source of drinking water,
such as well, to mitigate the possibility of
bacterial pollution of water supply. It shall
also be as far removed from the nearest
111-20
habitable building as economically feasible
but not closer than h m, to avoid damage to
the structures.
12.1.5.2 REQUHEMENTS
4 DIMENSIONS OF. SEPTIC’ TANKS - Septic
tanks shall have a minimum width of 75
cm, a minimum depth of 1 m below the
water level and a minimum liquid capacity
of I ml. The length of tanks shall be 2 to 4
times the width;
b) Septic tanks may be constructed of
brickwork. stone masonry, concrete or
other suitable materials as approved by
the Authority;
cl Under no circumstances shall effluent
from a septic tank be allowed into an open
channel drain or body of water without
adequate treatment;
The minimum nominal diameter of the
pipe shall be 100 mm. Further. at
junctions of pipes in manholes, direction
of flow from a branch connection shall not
make an angle exceeding 45” with the
direction of flow in the main pipe;
e) ‘l-he gradients of land drains. under-
drainage as well as the bottom of
dispersion trenches and soakways shall be
between I:300 and 1:400;
Every septic tank shall be provided with
ventilating pipe of at least 50 mm
diameter. The top of the pipe shall be
provided with a suitable cage of mosquito-
proof wire mesh.
The ventilating pipe shall extend to a
height which would cause no smell
nuisance to any building in the area.
Generally. the ventilating pipe may extend
to a height of about 2 m. when the septic
tank is at least 15 m away from the nearest
building and to a height of 2 m above the
top of the building when it is located closer
than 15 m;
When thedisposal ofseptic tank effluent is
g)
to a seepage pit, the seepage pit may be of
any suitable shape with the least cross-
sectional dimension of 90 cm and not less
than 100 cm in depth below the invert level
of the inlet pipe. The pit may be lined with
stone, brick or concrete blocks with dry
open joints which should be backed with
at least 7.5 cm of clean coarse aggregate.
The lining above the inlet level should be
finished with mortar. In the case of pits of
large dimensions, the top portion may be
narrowed to reduce the size of the RCC
cover slabs. WheTe no lining is used,
specially near trees, the entire pit should
be filled with loose stones. A masonry ring
may be constructed at the top of the pit to
prevent damage by flooding of the pit by
NATIONAL BI‘ILDINC CODE OF INDIA
 surface runoff. The inlet pipe may be
taken down a depth of 90 cm from the top
as an anti-mosquito mean:re; and
h) When the disposal of the septic tank
effluent is to a dispersion trench, the
dispersion trench shall be 50 to IOOcm
deep and 30 to 100 cm wide excavated to a
slight gradient and shall be provided with
15 to 25 cm of washed gravel or crushed
stones. Open jointed pipes placed inside
the trench shall be made of unglazed
earthenware clay or concrete and shall
have a minimum internal diameter of 75 to
100 mm. Each dispersion trench shall not
be longer than 30 m and trenches shall not
be placed closer than 1.8 m.
_13_. 16 Office-cum-Letter Box Room - In the
case of multistoreyed multifamily dwelling
apartments constructed by existing and
proposed Cooperative Housing Societies or
Apartment Owners Associations, limited
companies and proposed societies, an office-
cum-letter box room of dimension 3.6 X 3 m
shall be provided on the ground floor. In case
the number of flats is more than 20, the
maximum size of the office-cum-letter box
room shall be 20 m2.
12.16.1 B USINESS B UILDINGS - Provision
shall be made for letter boxes on the entrance
floor as per the requirements of the postal
department.
12.17 M e t e r R o o m s - For all buildings
above 15 m in height and in special
occupancies, like educational, assembly,
institutional, industrial, storage, hazardous
and mixed occupancies with any of the
aforesaid occupancies having area more than
500 m’ on each floor, provision shall be made
for an independent and ventilated meter
(service) room, as per requirements of electric
(service) supply undertakings on the .ground
floor with direct access from outside for the
purpose of termination of electric supply from
the licensee’s service and alternative supply
cables. The door/doors provided for the
service room shall have fire resistance of not
less than two hours.
12.18 Staircase
12.18.1 The minimum clear width, minimum
tread width and maximum riser of staircases
for buildings shall be as given in 12.18.1.1
to 12.18.1.3 (seealso Part IV Fire protection).
12.18.1.1 MINIMUM WI DTH -The minimum
width of staircase shall be as follows:
a) Residential buildings (dwellings) 1.0 m
NOTE-For row housing with 2 storeys, the mini
mum width shall be 0.75 m.
b) Residential hotel buildings 1.5 m
PART III DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND CENERRAL BUILDING
c) Assembly buildings like 1.5 m
auditoria, theatres and
cinemas
d) Educational building 1.5 m
up to 24 m in height
more than 24 m in height
e) Institutional buildings 2.0 m
up to 10 beds
more than 10 beds 2.0 m
f) All other buildings 1.5 m
12.18.1.2 MINIMUM TREAD -The minimum
width of tread without nosing shall be 25 cm
for residential buildings. The minimum width
of tread for other buildings shall be 30 cm.
12.18.1.3 MAXIMUM RISER -The maximum
height of riser shall be 19 cm for residential
buildings and 15 cm for other buildings and
these shall be limited to 15 per flight.
12.18.2 The minimum head-room in a
passage under the landing of a staircase shall
be 2.2 m. The minimum clear head-room in
any staircase shall be 2.2 m.
12.19 Roofs
12.19.1 The roof of a building shall be so
constructed or framed as to permit effectual
drainage of the rain-water therefrom by
means of sufficient rain-water pipes of
adequate size, wherever required, so
arranged, jointed and fixed as to ensure that
the rain-water is carried away from the
building without causing dampness in any
part of the walls or foundations of the
building or those of an adjacent building.
12.19.2 The Authority may require rain-
water pipes to be connected to a drain or sewer
to a covered channel formed beneath the
public footpath to connect the rain-water pipe
to the road gutter or in any other approved
manner.
12.19.3 Rain-water pipes shall be affixed to
the outside of the external walls of the
building or in recesses or chases cut or formed
in such external walls or in such other manner
as may be approved by the Authority.
12.20 Special requirements of low income
housing shall be as given in Appendix D. For
detailed information in this regard, reference
may be made to the accepted standards
[III(l)*].
12.21 The special requitements for planning
of buildings keeping in view the needs of the
l in this part, where reference, is made to ‘accepted
standards’ or ‘good practice’ in relation to design,
testing, construction procedure or other information,
the appropriate document listed at the end of this part
may be used as a guide to the interpretation of this terms
3 1
*I
REQUlilEMENTS III-
physically handicapped, applicable particu-
larly to public buildings meant for their use,
are given in Appendix E.
13. RAT-PROOFING AND TERMITE-
PROOFING OF BUILDINGS
Z3.1 Every building or part thereof that is
designed or intended for use as a dwelling or
for the handling, storage or sale of foodstuffs
shall conform to the requirements as given
in 13.2 and 13.3.
13.2 Every such building unless supported on
posts shall have continuous foundation walls,
extending from at least 60 cm below ground
level to at least 15 cm above ground level or
shall have a continuous floor of masonry or
reinforced concrete or other equally effective
rat-proof materials.
13.3 All openings in such foundations or
floors, windows and drains, and all junctions
between foundation walls and building walls
shall be effectively rat-proofed, that is,
windows and doors shall be tight fitting, and
other openings shall be securely covered with
rat-proof screening or grillage or shall be
tightly closed with metal sheeting, concrete or
other equally effective rat-proof material.
13.4 Termite control in buildings is very
important, as the damage likely to be caused
by termites to wooden structures of buildings
and other household articles like furniture,
clothing, stationery, etc, is considerable.Anti-
termite measures in buildings shall be taken in
accordance with good practice [111(2)].
14. LIGHTING AND VENTILATION
14.1 The lighting and ventilation
requirements for different uses and
occupancies are,covered in Part VIII Building
services, Section 1 Lighting and ventilation.
14.1.2 LIGHTING AND V ENTILAT I O N OF
ROOMS*-Rooms shall have, for the
admission of light and air, one or more
openings, such as windows and ventilators,
opening directly to the external airor into an
open verandah with a maximum width of
2.4 m.
14.1.2 Notwithstanding the area of openings
obtained through 14.1, the minimum
aggregate area (see Notes 1 to 3) of such
openings, excluding doors inclusive of frames,
shall be not less than:
a) one-tenth of the floor area for dry hot
climate;
b) one-sixth of the floor area for wet hot
climate;
c) one-eighth of the floor area for
intermediate climate; and
m-22
d) one-twelfth of the floor area for cold
climate.
N OTE I-If a window is partly fixed, the openable area
shall be counted.
N OTE 2 -No portion of a room shall be assumed to be
lighted, if it is more than 7.5 m away from the opening
assumed for lighting that portion.
N OTE 3 --The area of opening as given in (a) to (d)
above shall be increased by 25 percent in the case of a
kitchen. [see 12.3.3(d)]
1.5. AIR-CONDITIONING AND HEATING
15.1 For information regarding design,
construction and installation of air-
conditigning and heating systems, reference
may be made to Part VIII Building services,
Section 3 Air-conditioning and heating.
16. SOUND INSULATION
16.1 For information regarding the desired
noise levels and sound insulation in different
occupancies, reference may be made to Part
VIII Building services, Section 4 Acoustic and
sound insulation.
17. i-IEAT INSULATION
17.1 For information on recommended limits
of thermal transmittance of roofs and walls
for different parts of ttie country and heat
transmission losses due to differentconstrue
tions, reference may be made to good practice
[111(3)*].
18. PROVISION OF LIFTS
18.1 Provision for lifts shall be made for
buildings more than 15 m in height. Planning
and designing of lifts shall be done in
accordance with the provisions given in
Part VIII Building services, Section 5
Installation of lifts and escalators.
19. LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF
BUILDINGS
19.1 Lightning protective system requires to
be installed on all buildings and structures
vulnerable talightning strokes owing to their
height or exposed situtation, buildings of
public of strategic importance, buildings of
public resort, buildings housing valuable
materials, ancient monuments, observatories,
etc. For information regarding details of
various factors that affect the risk of the
structure being struck, the consequential
effects of a stroke and other details, reference
may be made to Part VIII Building services,
Section 2 Electrical installation.
- - - - - -
* In this part, where reference, is made to ‘accepted
standards’ or ‘good practice’ in relation to design,
testing, construction procedure or other information,
the appropriate document listed at the end of this part
may be used as a guide to theinterpretation of this terms.
NATtONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 APPENDIX A
(Clause 9.5.1)

CIVIL AVIATION REQUiREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION IN THE

VICINITY OF AN AERODROME

A-O. GENERAL A-l. PROHIBITED AREA

A-O.1 For the purpose of this Appendix, the
following definitions shall apply.
A-O. 1.1 A EKODROME R EFERENCE P O I N T
(ARP) -This is a designated point, which is
established in the horizontal plane at or near
the geometric centre of the landing area.
A-0.1.2 A PPROACH F UNNEL - See Fig. 1.
A-0.1.3 ELEVAT-ION OR R EDUCED L EVEL --
This is the vertical distance of a point or a
level, on or affixed to the surface of the earth,
measured from the mean sea level.
A-O. 1.4 TRANSITIONAL AREA - It is an area
which is below a specified surface sloping
upwards and outwards from the edge of the
approach funnel and from a line originating at
the end of the inner edge of each approach
area, drawn parallel to the runway centie line
in the direction of landing (see Fig. 1).
A-0.1.5 RUNWAY STRIP - See Fig. 1.
A-l.1 No building or structure shall be
constructed or erected, or no tree shall be
planted, on any land within the limits
specified in A-l.2 and A-l.3 in respect of the
aerodromes listed in A-3 and in respect of the
aerodrome at Trivandrum.
A-l.2 For the Aerodromes Listed in A-
3 - These requirements shall be applicable
for the land enclosed in approach funnels of
the runway with a maximum distance of
360 m measured frcm each runway and along
the extended centre line of the runway. For
the purpose of this clause, the requirements of
approach funnel and an instrument runway
shall be as given in A-1.2.1 to A-1.2.3.
A-1.2.1 Approach funnel in the case of an
instrument runway means the area in the
shape of an isosceles trapezium having the
longer parallel side 4800 m long (2400 m on
either side of the extended centre line of the
runway) and smaller parallel side 300 m long
(150 m on either side of the extended centre

t
SURFACE
r RUNWAY

1 A Instrument Runway

fR&4..~~~AL
APPRnACH K

I B Non-Instrument Runway

All-dimensions are in metres.

Fig. I Runway

PART 11, DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULE.3 AND GMERRAL BUIL.L)INC REQUlREMF3TS u1.23
 line of the runway) where the smaller and height specified in Tables 5 and 6 shall be
longer parallel sides are placed at a distance of constructed or erected, or no tree which is
60 m and I5 060 m. respectively, from the end likely to grow or ordinarily grows higher than
of the runway and at right angles to the the height specified in the Tables 5 and 6, shall
extended centre line. be planted, on any land within a radius of
20 km from ARP of the aerodromes listed
A-f 2.2 In the case of a non-instrument run- in A-3, excluding the land covered by A-1.2.
way, the approach funnel means the area in
the shape of’ an isosceles trapezium having
the longer parallel side 1800 m long (900 m on l-ABLE S H E I G H T R E S T R I C T I O N W I T H
RESPECT TO APPROACH FUNNELS
either side of the extended centre line of the (Clauses A-2. I onJ A-2. I. I)
runway) and smaller parallel side 180 m long SI_ ARE* MAXIMUM
(90 m on either side of the extended centre line Yu PFKMISSIRLE ttEIGHT
of the runway), where the smaller and longer AROVE -rHE Et EVATION
parallel sides are placed at a distance of 60 m OF IHL >h’FAKESl
RUSWA~ END
and 6540 m, respectively, from the end of the
runway and at right angles to the extended (1) (2) (3)
centre line. Thereafter, the trapezium is fol- m
lowed by a contiguous rectangular area of that I) More than 360 m but
width for the remainder of the length up to a not exceekilng 5 IO m 6
distance of 15 060 m from the end of the ii) More than 510 m but
runway. not exceedinp 660 m Y
Iii) Mbre than 660 m hut
A-1.2.3 An instrument runway is a runway not exceeding 8 IO m 12
served by visual and non-visual aid or aids IV) More than 810 m but
providing at least directional guidance ade- not exceeding Yho m I5
quate for a straight in approach and intended v) More than 960 ‘11 but
for the operation of aircraft using instrument not excecdmg I I IO m _ IX
approach procedures. vi) More than I1 IO m but
not exccedtng 126U m 21
A-l._. For the Aerodrome at Trivandrum - vii) More than I260 m but
These requirements shall be applicable for the not exceeding I410 m 24
land enclosed in approach funnels of all run- vlil) hlore than I410 m but
not exceeding I f.60 m 27
ways with a maximum distance of
304.80 m, measured from each runway and I X) Mow than I560 m 30
along extended centre line of the runway, and
the land enclosed in a belt of 30.48 m width 7~ABI.E 6 HEIGHJ R E S T R I C T I O N W I T H
outside the operational boundary of the aero- RESPEC r TO TRANSITIONAL AREA
drome. For the purpose of this clause, the (Clause .4 -2.1 ancl “t-2.1,.7)
requirements of approach funnel and opera- Sl. DI\I~\CE FK~U THF MAYIM~‘~~ PEKMIS-
tional boundary shall be as given in A-1.3.1 No I~FK BOC’\IIARY ot rttE VRL r HEIU~ AROVE
‘~~HA\;SIIIOV~~ AK E A ’ ,“t Et EV4IIOU Ot 1Ht
and A-1.3.2. %‘t~~ltlFO bWVE ARP

A-l.3 I Approach funnel means the area in (1) (2) (3)

m
the shape of an isosceles trapezium having the
longer parallel side of kngth 4724.4m i) Ilp to a dlsrancc of 21 m
(2 362.2 m on either side of the extended centre ii) More than 21 m hut 3
line of the runway) and smaller parallel side of not exceeding 42 m
152.4 m (76.2 m on either side of the extended Iii) More than 42 m but 6
centre line of the runway) where the smaller not exceeding 63 m
and longer parallel sides are placed at a dis- iv) More than 63 m but 9
tance of 60.9 m and 15301 m, respectively, not exceeding 84 m
from the end of the runway and at right angles v) More than 84 m but I2
to the extended centre line. not exceeding 105 m
vi) More than IO5 m but 15
A-f..?.? Operational boundary means an area lot exceeding 126 m
enclosed between parallel lines ata’ distance of vii) More than 126 m but I8
not exceeding 147 m
152.4 m on either side of the centre line of the
runways or 30.4 m from the boundary fencing viii) More than 147 m but ?I
not exceeding 168 m
of the aerodrome, whichever is greater.
ix) More than 168 m but 24
not exceeding 189 m
A-2. HEIGHT RESTRICTION
x) More than 189 m but 27
not exceeding 210 m
A-2.1 For the Aerodromes Listed in A-3 - 30
xi) More than 210 m
No building or structure higher than the

111-24 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 A-2.1.1 Table 5 gives the height restriction
with respect to approach funnels and shall be
applicable for the land enclosed in the
approach funnels of all runways where distan-
ces are measured from each end of the run-
way, along extended centre lineofthe runway.
A-2.1.2 Table 6 gives height restriction with
respect to transitional area and shall be
applicable for the land enclosed in the
transitional area of all runways at an
aerodrome listed in A-3 where distances are
measured from the associated runway strip
and the edge of the associated approach
funnels, forming the inner boundary of the
transitional area and along a line at right
angles to the centre !ine of the runway.
A-2.2 For the Aerodrome at Wvandrum -
No building or structure higher than the
height specified in Table 7 shall be constructed
or erected, or no tree which is likely to grow or
ordinarily grows higher than the height speci-
fied in Table 7, shall be planted, on any level
within a radius of 20 km from ARP of the
aer odrome at Tr ivandrum, excluding the land ,
coveled by A-1.3.
A-3. AERODROMES
A-3./ A list of aerodromes indicating runway
directions, runway and elevations and ARP
elevations is given in Table 8.

TABLE 7 HEIGHT RESTRICTION

(Clause A-2.2)

SL A REA M AXIMUM PERMIT

No. SIBLE HEIGHT A BOVE
GROUND L~vm
(1) (2) (9
m
i) The area lying between the coastline and the Chakai canal other than specified in A-1.3. 3
ii) The area lying in a belt of 457.2 m width between the Eastern Bank of the Chakai canal 6
and a line running parallel to this canal ior the entire length.
iii) A parallel belt of 762 m width running East of area (ii) above. 15.2
iv) A parallel belt of 609.6 m width running East of area (iii) above. 24.3
v) Rest of the area extending up to 20 km from ARP 30.4

TABLE 8 RUNWAY DIRECTIONS, RUNWAY END ELEVATIONS AND

ARP ELEVATIONS FOR AERODROMES
(Clause A-3. I)

co, AERODROME ARP R U N- RUN- S L AERODROME ARP RUN- RU N-

ELEVA- WAY WAY E N D No. E LEVA- WAY WAY EN D
TION No. ELEVA- TION No. ELEVA-
TION
TION

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
m m m m

I) Ahmadabad 55 I4 5 ) Aurangabad 581 582

:: 513.5
:: 54
23 56
6 ) Belgaum 758 08 755
26 141
2) Agartala I4 05 I2
23 14.5

:: 13.5 13.5 7) Balurghat 24 09 24

27 23

3) Akola 305 :: 303

303 8) Bangalore 888 09R 875
21L 881
4) Amritsar 229 07 229 09L 876
25 230 2lR 882.5

:: 230 229 (Continued)

PART III DEVELOPME NT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL BUILDING ItFZjlJIilEMMTS

24
11l--u
 TAB1 E 8 RUNWAY DIRECTIONS. RUNWAY END El.EVAl-IONS AND
ARP ELEVATIONS FOR AERODROMES-Conrcl
SL AERODROME ARP RUN. RU N- f-h AtKODKOMF ARP RlIN RUS-
No. ELEVA WAY WAY EN D NO EI.FIVA WA\ WAY Exr>
noN No E L E V A- ilO\ No EI.ELA-
TION 710%

(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
m m m m
9) Vadodara 37 04 36.5 22) Delhi (Palam) 227 219
22 37.5 :: 236.5
09 36.5 09 220
27 38.7 27 229

10) Behala 2.6 3.5 23) Delhi (Safdarjung) 212 215

3.5 212

1 I) Bhavnagar 5.4 07 II 24) Dibrugarh 109.5 05 109

25 6 23 109.5

12) Bhopal 523 06 522.5 25) Gauhati 48 03 49

24 521 21 48
521.5
2 523
26) Gaya I10 108
:: 115.5
13) Bhubaneshwar 44.5 05 33 01 109
23 41.5 19 III
38
:4 37
27) Hyderabad 531 09 530
27 522
14) Bhuj 18.5 05 81.5 531
23 14.5 :“2 528
:; :;.5 28) lndore 561 07 563.5
25 559.5
15) Bilaspur 274 06 270
24 282 29) Jabalpur 495 06 480
276 24 494.5
:: 269
30) Jaipur 385 I5 389.5
16) Bombay (Juhu) 3 08 384.4
:.5 :; 383.7
Z 27 381.3
22 ;::
2.5
:: 2.5 31) Jhansi 236 236.5
:: 236.5
17) Bombay (Santacruz) 8 09
27 1: 32) Jharsuguda 228 06 228.20
II 24 229. I4
:‘: 1.5
33) Kailashadar 27.5 03 28.5
18) Calcutta 5.3 OIL 4.8 21 21.5
19R
OIR : 34) Kamalpur 39 01
l9L 4.5
I9 1:
19) Chakulia 129 08 135 35) Kandla 29
26 05 29
132 23 29
130
:: 127
3 6 ) Kanpw I25 125
05 402 124.5
20) Coimbatorc 396
23 391
37) Keshod 49.5 05 50.5
23 50.5
21) Coach-Bchar 41.5 04 41.5
22 41.5 2
IConrinuedl

I*,-26 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 TABLE 8 RUNWAY DIRECTIONS, RUNWAY END ELEVATIONS AND
ARP ELEVATIONS FOR AERODROMES- Conrd

.‘I AFKOI)KOUI RCX- S L A E R O D R O M E ARP RUN- R U N-

ho WAY EN D No E L E V A- WAY WAY EN D
ELEVA- TION No. E L E V A-
IIOZ TION

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

m m m m
38) Khajuraho 217.4 5
01
19
222
210
58) Porbandar
Fi 6.7
4.5
39) Kolhapur 607 07 59) Port Blair 6 04 3.66
25 ZE 22 17.8
60) Raipur 313.6 06
40) Kota 273 272 24 ::
:: 272
61) Rajahmundry 45 05
4 1 ) Kulu 1084 1089 23 E
3Y 1088
62) Rajkot 134 133
42) Khowai 29 128.5
:: :; 130
4 3 ) Lalitpur 367 368.5 133.5
:: 363 646 654
6 3 ) Ranchi
44) Lilabari loo.2 04 101.5 632.5
22 101.5 319 316.5
64) Satna
4 5 ) Lucknow 122 09 122 316
27 122 65) Sholapur 418 478.5
01 122 478
19 123
66) Silchar 102 98.5
46) Madras 10.5 07 107.5
25 E.5
6 7 ) Tiruchchira’ppalli 85 15
:: *z
47) Madurai 136.30 09 G
27 f! 27
‘138.5 68) Tanjore 76
:: 136 :“2 ::.5
48) Malda 24 07 76.5
::, E.5 25 74.5
49) Mangalore 102 69) Tirupati 103 106.4
E :; 102
50) Muzaffarpur 53 70) Tulihal (lmphal) 774.5 04 773.5
:; :: 22 775
5 1 ) Mysore 715.5 05 720
710 7 1) Udaipur 509 08 511.5
: 717.5 26 508
27 708 72) Varanasi 80 09
52) Nagpur 308.5 09 27
27 E
315 73) Vijayawada 21 08
:: 307 26 ::.5
53) Panagarh 73 74) Vishakhapatnam 3
54) Panna 425
:: ::
435.80
!i:
09
4
2
4
:: 410.35 27
55) Passighat 155.5 156.5 ii
36
4’
4
:: 153
56) Patna 51 7 5 ) Warmgal 285

233
!Z ::
z.5
57) Pantnagar 234
234 z.5

PART Ill DEVELOPMENT CONTROL PIJLCS AND GCNPAL BUILDING R~IJRDl~ ,,l.*7
 APPENDIX B
(Clause 10.1)
OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES
B-I. The spaces to be left out for off-street
parking as given in B-2 to B-3 shall be m
addition to the open spaces left out for
lightmg and ventilation purposes as given in
14. However, one row of car parking may be
provided in the front open space of 12 m
without reducing the clear vehicular
accessway to less than 6 m.
B-l.1 Further 50 percent of the open spaces
required around buildings under 8 may be
allowed to be utilized for parking or loading
or unloading spaces, provided that a
minimum distance of 3.6 m around the
building shall be kept free from any parking,
loading or unloading spaces.
B-2. Each off-street parking space provided
for motor vehicles (cars) shall not be less than
13.75 m’ in area, and for scooters and cycles
the parking spaces provided shall not be less
than 1.25 m* and 1.00 m2.
B-3. For buildings of different occupancies,
off-street parking space for vehicles shall be
provided as stipulated below:
a) MOTORV EHICLES - Space shall be pro-
vided as specified in Table 9 for parking
motor vehicles (cars).
b) O THER T YPES OF VEHICLES - For non-
residential building, in addition to the
parking areas provided in (a) above, 25
to 50 percent additional parking space
shall be provided for parking other types
of vehicles and the additional spaces

TABLE 9 OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES

[CIau.re B-3 (a)]
SL No. cb33JPANCY O NE C AR P A R K I N G S PACE FOR EVERY
P.
Pooulation between Ponulation
- -r----~---- Population ’
200’000 to 1oooooo 5ooooto less than
200000 50000
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
1) Residential
i) Multi-family a) 2 tenements having carpet area 101 to - -
200 m*
b) 1 tenement exceeding 201 mr carpet -
area
ii) Lodging establishments, 4 guest rooms 8 12
tounst homes and hotels,
with lodging accommodation
2) Educational* 70 m2 carpet area or fraction thereof of -
theadministrative office area and public
service areas
3) Institutional (Medical) 10 beds (Private) 15 (Private) 20 (Private)
IS beds (Public) 25 (Public) 30 (Public)
4) i) Assembly 25 seats 80 120
halls, cinema theatres
ii) Restaurants Up to first 20 seats nil; one for every 40 60
additional 20 seats
iii) Marriage halls, 200 mr plot area 400 600
community halls
5) i) Business off&s and titms 100 m* carpet area or fraction thereof 200 300
for private business
ii) Public or semi-public offtces 2QO m* carpet area or fraction thereof 300 500
6) Mercantilet 100 mr carpet area or fraction thereof 200 300
7) Industrial 200 mr carpet area or fraction thereof 300 400
8) storage 500 m2 floor area or part thereof - -
*Norm 1 --In the case of auditoria for educational buildings, parking space shall be provided as per Sl No. 4.
tNorx I-For plots up to 100 m*, as in the case of shops, parking spaces need not be insisted on.
NO= 3 - For other institutions, transpott/communication centre, parking space requirement shall be assessed based on
the propod building.
NOB 4 - The requirements for off-street parking for metropolitan cities with opulation more than 4 00 000 shall be
broadly W on column (3) and appropriately adapted to suit the increased t raffpIC generated, the traffic pattern as well as
the nature of vehicles in the city.

NATIONAL IWILDING CODE OF INDIA

 required for other vehicles shall be as
decided by the Authority. keeping in
view the nature of traffic generated in
the city.
B-4. Off-street parking space shall be pro-
vided with adequate vehicular access to a
street; and the area of drives, aisles and such
other provisions required for adequate
manoeuvering of vehicle shall be exclusive of
the parking space stipulated in these rules.
off-street parking requirements under these
rules, subject to the approval of the Authority.
B-6. In addition to the parking spaces pro-
vided for buildings of mercantile (commer-
cial), industrial and storage type at the rate of
one such space of 3.5 X 7.5 m, for loading and
unloading activities, for each I 000 m* of floor
area or fraction thereof, shall be provided.
B-7. Parking spaces shall be paved and
clearly marked for different types of vehicles.

B-5. If the total parking space required by B-8. In the case of parking spaces provided in
these rules is provided by a group of property basements, at least two ramps of adequate
ownets for their mutual benefits, such use of width and slope shall be provided, located
this space may be construed as meeting the preferably at opposite ends.

APPENDIX C
(Clause 11.2.1)

GUIDE FOR PLANTATION OF SHRUBS, TREES AND GREENERY

C-l. The norms for plantation of shrubs, iii) 100 trees

trees and other greeneries for residential, per hectare
educational, institutional and industrial of total
occupancies shall be as follows: land area.
SI. Occupant.)* P l o t S i z e Greenery IO b e iv) 40 percent
No. tn’ Planted, Min of the per-
a) Residen- For smaller For every 50 missible
tial plots (smal- families create open space
ler than one small com- to be covered
200 m’), munity space,of by greenery.
EWS hous- about 100 m- Noir Landscape proposal shall be got approved from
ing, slum where clumps the local Authority alongwith the buildmg plan for group
areas and of trees may be housing schemes.
the like planted so as to
provide shade
b ) Educa- i) I25 trees per
and improve tional and
the quality of hectare.
institutional ii) 50 percent
environment.
of the per-
200 and i) 10 percent missible open
above of open space for
space to be greenery.
left unpaved
for greenery NOTE - Landscape proposal shall be got approved from
with at the local Authority alongwith the building plan.
least two
small/ med-
ium trees c) Industrial 300-I 000 5 trees for 300 m’
up to plot plot area and 2
area of trees for every
500 m’. additional In0 m*
ii) An addi- area.
tional one Above I 000 i) 150 trees
tree for per hectare.
every 100 m* ii) 20 percent
area of plot of the per-
or part missible
thereof open space
above 500 rn! for greenery.

DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND CEN~M BUILDING REQUIREMENTS Ill-29

No I E I ~- For industrial plots. it is advisable to have peri-
pheral plantation to minimile pollution especially air and
noise pollution.
No1 E 2 --Large polluting industry should be separated
from the neighbouring residential area by a thick green
belt which should occupy an area of about 15 percent of
the Industrial area.
NOIE 3-- Landscape proposal shall be got approved
from the local Authority alongwith the buildlnp plan.
C-2. For other occupancies namely assembly,
business, mercantile, the quantum of greenery
shall be planned taking the development as a
whole. However, a minimum of 50 trees shall
be provided per hectare; 25 percent of the
permissible open should be covered by
greenery such as shrubs, grass and suitably
landscaped.
C-3. COMMUNITY SPACES
C-3. I Community Open Spaces -The open
spaces.to be left in the total development of
the area are covered in 5. These open spaces
should be suitably landscaped. A minimum of
125 trees per hectare shall be provided.
C-3.2 Roads in a Development Plan-Trees
shall. be provided on either side of the road or
on both sides depending upon the width of the
roads, the location of building along the road
side and other considerations. However,
minimum one tree for every 10 m shall be
provided.

APPENDIX D
(Clause 12.20)

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOW INCOME HOUSING

D-l. GENERAL
7ABLE IO MAXIMUM DENSITIES F O R
D-1.1 These requirements cover the planning LOW INCOME HOUSING
(C‘lousr O-2.2)
and general building requirements of low
income housing developed as clusters (see SL No D ENSITY IN D W E L L I N G No. OF
0.3, and Table 10). The requirements regard- UHITS: ha FOR PLINTH STOREYS
ing layout planning of low income housing A REA O F U NIT OF
I A
colonies are applicable to public agenciesl 20 ml 30 m’
government bodies. The requirements on
(1) (2) (3) (4)
design and construction of buildings for low
income housing in approved layouts are appli- i) 130 85 I
cable to public agencies/government bodies ii) 250 I70 2
or private builders. iii) 300 225 3
iv) 350 260 4

D-l.2 In these planning standards, the gen-
eral master plan requirement for community
open spaces estimated at 0.3 ha for thousand
persons is provided; road areas are worked
out between 10 and 20 percent of the site area;
one nursery school of 0.1 ha is provided for a
population of 1500 and shoppiyg centres at 4
shops per thousand population are also
covered. It would, therefore, be seen that even
for apparently high densities, the basic
requirements and community facilities are
also taken care of.
D-l.3 It is emphasized that this typeofdevel-
opment should apply to clusters of 400 dwel-
ling units, so distributed in the development
under consideration as to maintain the overall
densities of the master plan for the area (See
Note 1 of Table 10.).
v) 400 300 5
N OTE I - These densities are applicable to a cluster of
dwellings up to 400, with a family of 5 members.
N OTE 2 - V e r t i c a l i n c r e m e n t a l h o u s i n g s h a l l b e
permitted in single ownership plot.
N OTE 3 -These densities include provision for open
spaces, convenience-shopping, nurs&y, and all internal
roads and pathways, but do not include peripheral road
around the- cluster.
NOTE 4 - The minimum density shall be 75 percent of the
above.
D-2. PLANNING
D-2.1 TI*pe of Development - The type of
development for low income housing shall be
plotted development as row housing, flatted
development as row housing/ block
development as group housing.

u1-30 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

D-2.2 Densir,, - The maximum density, in
dwelling units/ hectare, shall be as givkn in
Table 10.
D-2.3 Size of Plot/ Plinth Area - The
minimum plot size shall be as follows, with
coverage not exceeding 75 percent.
Minimum Type of Development
Plot Size
Incremental housing with one
30 m2
room, cooking space and
combined bath and WC on
ground floor and future extension
of one room and a bath on the first
floor/ ground floor.
40 m2 Two roomed house on each floor
for group housing/ individual
ownership house.
NOTE I -The minimum size’of plots takes Into account
the need of incremental housing. In the case of cities
(other than metropolitan cities) with population less than
0.5 million, the size of the plots may be increased by
33; percent.
NOTE 2 - In exceptional cases in metropolitan cities with
population more than I million, the si7e of plots may be
brought down to 25 m’ in the cases of low income house
colonies hated in congested areas or in areas as decided
by the Authority.
than 6.5 m* with a minimum width
of 2. I m, provided the total area of
both the rooms is not less than 16 m2.
In the case of incremental housing to
be developed as a future two-roomed
house, the total area of rooms to be
provided in the initial and later stages
should not be less than 16m2.
b) WC/ B ATH R O O M
9 The size of independent water-closet
shall be 0.9 X 1.0 m;
ii) The size of independent bath shall be
I.0 X 1.2 m; and
iii) The size of combined bath and water
closet shall be I.0 X 1.8 m and this
may be permitted in a one-roomed
house.
cl K ITCHEN -The size of a cooking alcove
serving as cooking space shall not be less
than 2.4 m* with a minimum width of
1.2 m. The size of individual kitchen
provided in a two-roomed house shall not
be less than 3.3 m2 with a minimum width
of 1.5 m.
4 B A L C O N Y - The minimum width of
individual balcony, where provided, shall
be 0.9 m.

D-3.4 Min@um Height - The minimum

D - 2 . 3 . 1 M INIMUM F R O N T A G E - T h e m i n - height of rooms/spaces shall be as follows:
imum frontage of the plot shall be 3.6 m in
width. a) Habitable room 2.6 m
NOTE - The minimum frontage of 3.6m isdesirable. For b) Kitchen 2.4 m
an economical layout, group housing appears to be a c) Bath/ WC 2.2 m
good solution. But if plotted development is to be 2.1 m
adopted and if there are occasions when sufficient
d) Corridor
frontage is not available, the same may be reduced to 3 m.
D-3.4.1 In the case of sloping roofs, the
D-2.4 Height of Building- The height of average height of roof for habitable rooms
building shall not exceed 15 m. shall be 2.6 m Bnd the minimum height at
NOTE - For buildings up (0 the height of IS m, there is no eaves shall be 2.0 m.
need lo provide lifts.
D-3.5 Lighting and Ventilation -- T h e
D-3. GENERAL BUILDING openings through windows, ventilators and
REQUIREMENTS other openings for lighting and ventilation
shall be as per 14.1.2.
D-3.1 The requirements of parts of buildings
shall be as in D-3.2 to D-3.7. NoTE - The windows and other openings shall abut on
to open spaces either through areas left open within the
plot (see D-3.3) or the front, side and rear spaces rovided
D-3.2 Plinth -The minimum height of in the layouts which shall be deemed to be suf9. lcient for
plinth shall be 30 cm from the surrounding light and ventilation purposes.
ground level.
D-3.6 Steirs - The following criteria shall be
D-3.3 Size of Room adopted for internal individual staircase:
a) HA B I T A B L E R O O M
a) M INIMUM W I D T H
9 In the case of a one-roomed house,
the size of the multipurpose room, 1) 2 storeyed-straight 0.60 m
including space for cooking, shall be 2) 2 storeyed-winding 0.75 m
not less than 12.5 m* with a minimum 3) 3 or more storeyed-straight 0.75 m
width of 2.4 m. 4) 3 or more storeyed-winding 0.90 m
ii) In the case of a two-roomed house, b) R ISER 20 cm,
the size. of a room shall not be less MUX

PART Ill DEVELOPMENT CONTROL ItULEs AND GENFitAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS

C) TR E A D
1) 2 storeyed 22.5 cm,*
Mlh
2) 3 storeyed or more 25 cm,
Min
d) HEAD ROOM - The minimum clear head
room shall be 2.1 m.
* NOTE-This could be reduced to 20 cm as the clear
tread between pcrpends, with possibility of open riser as
well as nosing and inclined riser 10 have an effective
going of 22.5 cm.
D-3.7 Circulation Area - The circulation
area on any floor including staircase, shall not
exceed:
a) 2.0 m*/unit where four dwelling units are
grouped around a staircase; and
b) 4.0 m*/unit where two dwelling units are
grouped.
D-4. ROADS AND PATH-WAYS
D-4. I The area under roads and pat h-ways in
such housing p ‘ects shall normally not
exceed 20 percerit‘9c-
o the total land area ofthe
project.
Access to the dwelling units, particularly
where motorised vehicles are not normally
expected shall be by means of paved foot-
paths with a right of way of 6 m and a path-
way of 2 m only. The right of way shall be
adequate to allow for the plying ofemergency
vehicles and also for road side drains and
plantation.
APPENDIX E
(Clause 12.21)
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANNING OF PUBLIC BUILDINGS
MEANT FOR USE OF PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED
E-O GENERAL
E-O.1 For the purpose of this Appendix, the
following definitions shall apply.
E-O. 1. I ACXNG - Those manifestations of
the aging processes that significantly reduce
mobility, flexibility, co-ordination, and
perceptiveness but are not accounted for in
the categories mentioned in E-0.2.2.
E-0.1.2 D I S AB I L I T I E S
E-0.1.Z.f D I S A B I L I T I E S O F INCO-ORDI-
NATION - Faulty co-ordination or palsy
from brain spinal, or peripheral nerve injury.
111.32
Where motorable accessways are not
provided and pedestrian pathways are
provided, the minimum width of such
pedestrian path-way shall be 3 m, which shall
not serve more than 50 m and eight plots on
each side of the.pathway.
D-5. OTHER REQUIREMENTS
D-5.1 One water tap per dwelling unit may be
provided, where adequate drinking water
supply is available. If supply is inadequate,
public hydrants shall be provided. In the
absence of piped water supply, it could be
done through hand pumps.
D-5.2 The infrastructural services shall be
provided before the plots are handed over to
individual owners.
D-6. SITE AND SERVICES SCHEMES
D-6./ The developed plot sizes shall be as
per D-2.3. Services would have to be laid by
the Agency concerned as per the provisions of
the Code. In so far as roads and’path-ways are
concerned, they could also be in line withD-4.
D-6.2 Site and services schemes shall provide
for the following:
a) The infrastructural needs for a permanent
housing, depending upon requirements;
b) A service sanitary core in the plot; and
c ) P e r m i s s i o n t o alloti t e m p o r a r y
construction on the plot.
No it - A skeletal structure of columns and roof or a
developed plinth may be nrovided. where feasible.
E-0.1.2.2 H E AR ING DISABILITIES - Deafness
or hearing handicaps that might make an
individual insecure in public areas because he
is unable to communicate or hear warning
signals.
E-0.1.2.3 NON-AMBULATORY DISABILITIES-
Impairments that, regardless of cause or man-
ifestation, for all practical purposes, confine
individuals to wheelchairs.
E-0.1.2.4 SEMI-AMBULATORY DISABILITIES-
Impairments that cause individuals to walk
with difficulty or insecurity. Individuals using
braces or crutches, amputees, arthritics, spas-
tics, and those with pulmonary and cardiac ills
may be semi-ambulatory.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
E-0.1.2.5 SIGHT DISABILITIES - Total blind-
ness or impairments affecting sight to the
extent that the individual functioning in pub-
lic areas is insecure or exposed to danger.
E-0.1.3 R A M P S.
R AMPS WITH GRADIENTS -
Because the term ‘ramp’ has a multitude of
meanings and uses, its use in this text is clearly
defined as ramps with gradients (or ramps
with slopes) that deviate from what would
otherwise be considered the normal level. An
exterior ramp, as distinguished from a ‘walk’,
would be considered an appendage to a
building leading to a level above or below the
existing ground level. As such, a ramp shall
meet certain requirements .similar to those
imposed upon stairs.
E-0.1.4 W ALK, W ALKS - Because the terms
‘walks’ ‘walks’ have a multitude of meanings
and uses, their use in this standard is clearly
defined as a predetermined, prepared-surface,
exterior path-way leading to or from a
building or facility, or from one exterior area
to another, placed on the existing ground level
and not deviating from the level of the existing
ground immediately adjacent.
E-l. SITE DEVELOPMENT
E-1.1 Almost any building can be made
accessible to handicapped persons by so plan-
ning the site that the terraces, retaining walls
and winding walks are used effectively.
E-1.1.1 Site development is the most effective
means to resolve the problems created by
topography, definitive architectural designs
or concepts, water table, existing streets, and
typical problems, singularly or collectively, so
that ingress and egress to buildings by physi-
cally disabled may be facilitated while pre-
serving the desired design and effect of the
architecture.
E-l .2 Waiks
E-1.2.1 Public walks shall be at least 120 cm
wide and shall have a gradient not greater
than 5 percent.
E-1.2.1.1 It is essential that the gradient of
walks and driveways be less than that
prescribed for ramps, since walks would be
devoid of handrails and kerbs and would be
considerably longer and more vulnerable to
the elements. Walks of near maximum grade
and considerable length should have level
areas at intervals for purposes of rest and
safety. Walks or driveways should have a non-
slip surface.
E-1.2.2 Such walks shall be of a continuing
common surface not interrupted by steps or
abrupt changes in level.
PART 111 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND CENFBAL
E-1.2.3 Wherever walks cross other walks,
dirveways, or parking lots they should blend
to a common level.
E-1.2.3.1 This requirement, does not require
the elimination of kerbs, which, particularly if
they occur at regular intersections, are a dis-
tinct safety feature for all of the handicapped.
particularly the blind. The preferred method
of meeting the requirement is to have the walk
incline to the level of the street. However, at
principal intersections, it is vitally important
that the kerbs run parallel to the street, up to
the point where the walk is inclined, at which
point the kerb would turn in and gradually
meet the level of the walk at its highest point.
A less preferred method would be to gradually
bring the surface of the driveway or street to
the level of the walk. The disadvantage of this
method is that a blind person would not know
when he has left the protection of a walk has
entered the hazards of a street or driveway
(see Fig. 2).
max. GRADIENT 1 IN 10
KERB max. 2+5cm H I G H
Fig. 2 Suitable Method of B l e n d i n g
Pavement and Roadway Surfaces
E-1.2.4 A walk shall have a level platform at
the top which is at least 130 X 150 cm, if a door
swings out onto the platform or toward the
walk. This platform shall extend at least 30 cm
beyond each side of the doorway.
E-1.2.5 A walk shall have a level platform at
least 90 cm deep and 150 cm wide, if the door
does not swing onto the platform ort.owards
the walk. This platform shall extend at least 30
cm beyond each side of the doorway.
E-l.3 Parking Lots
E-1.3.1 Spaces that are accessible and
approximate to the facility should be set aside
and identified for use by individuals with
physical disabilities.
E-1.3.2 A parking space open on one side,
allowing
. . . . room
. . for. individuals in wheelchairs
or indivrduals on braces and crutches to get in
and out of an automobile onto a level surface,
suitable for wheeling and walking, is
adequate.
E-1.3.3 Parking spaces for individuals with
physical disabilities when placed between two
‘BUILDING RWUIREMEPITS ru.33
conventional diagonal or head-on parking
spaces should be 3.6 m wide.
E-l .3.4 Care in planning should be exercised,
so that individuals in wheelchairs and individ-
uals using braces and crutches are not com-
pelled to wheel or walk behind parked cars.
E-1.3.5 Consideration should be given to the
distribution of spaces for use by the disabled
in accordance with the frequency and persist-
ence of parking needs.
E-1.3.6 Walks shall be in conformity
with E-i.2.
E-2. BUILDINGS
E-2.1 Ramps with Gradients- Where ramps
with gradients are necessary or desired, they
shall conform to the following requirements:
(see Fig. 3).
E-2.1.1 A ramp when provided shall not have
a slope greater than 1 in 12.
E-2.1.2 A ramp shall have handrails on at
least one side, and preferably two sides, that
are 80 cm beyond the top and bottom of the
the ramp, that are smooth, and that extend
30 cm beyond the top and bottom of the ramp.
RECESS ENTRANCE DOOR
\r
IN E X P O S E D POSlTlON 7
150X I SO cm min.
LEVEL PLATFORM
ALTERNATIVE STEPPE
APPROACH WHERE RAMP
GRADIENT EXCEEDS I IN I2
TREAD min. 30 cm RISERS
max. IS cm
Fig, 3 Example of Ramped Approach
Itt-34
NOTE 1- Where handrails are specified to be of heights
other than 80 cm, it is recommended that two sets of
handrails be installed to serve all people. Where major
traffic is predominantly children, particularly physically
disabled children, extra care should be exercised In the
placement of handrails, in accordance with the nature of
the facility and the age group or groups being serviced
(see ulso E-3).
NOTE 2 _ Care should be taken that the extension of the
handrails is not in itself a hazard. The extension may be
made on the side of a continuing wall.
E-2.1.3 A ramp shall have a non-slip surface.
E-2.1.3. I The provision of non-slip surfaces
on ramps greatly assists the handicapped per-
sons with semi-ambulatory and ambulatory
disabilities. Non-slip surfaces are provided by
many standard finishes and materials. The
surfaces of the concrete ramps can be made
non-skid by brooming the surface or by finish-
ing with an indenting roller.
E-2.1.4 A ramp shall have a level platform at
the top which is at least 180 X 180 cm, if a door
swings out onto the platform or toward the
ramp. This platform shall extend at least
30cm beyond each side of the doorway (see
Fig. 4).
E-2.1.5 Each ramp shall have at least 180 cm
of straight clearance at the bottom.
n c __
yyp KERB T O E X P O S E D S I D E O F
EXTEND HANDRAIL AT HEAD
H A N D R A I L S min. 91.0 c m
ABOVE RAMP LEVEL
E X T E N D H A N DR A I L AT
FOOT OF RAMP
RAMP PREFERRED max.
GRADIENT I IN 12min. W I D T H
150.0 cm max. LENGTH 90.0 cm
WHERE RAMP GRADIENT
EXCEEDS I IN 12
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE Of INDIA

I
4 RAMP
UP OR
DOWN
Ftg. 4 Lel~el A r e a s R e q u i r e d a t Ed (!/
Ramps Leading to Doorways
E-2.1.6 Ramps shall have level platforms at
9.5 m intervals for purposes of rest and safety
and shall have platforms wherever they turn.
E-2.2 Entrance5
E-2.2. I At least one primary entrance to each
building shall be usable by individuals m
wheelchairs (see Fig. 5A) and shall be
indicated by a sign (see Fig. 5B).
E-2.2.2 At least one entrance usable by
individuals in wheelchairs shall be on a level
that would make the elevators accessible.
E-2.3 Doors and Doorways
E-2.3.1 Doors shall have a clear opening of
not less than 80 cm when open and shall be
operable by a single effort.
E-2.3.1.1 Two-leaf doors are not usable by
those with disabilities defined in E-0.1.2.3and
E-0.1.2.4 unless they operate by a single effort,
or unless one of the two leaues meets the
requirements of E-2.3.1.
E-2.3./.2 It is recommended that all doors
have kick plates extending from the bottom of
the door to at least 40 cm from the floor, or be
made of a material and finish that would
safely withstand the abuse they might receive
f r o m c a n e s , c r u t c h e s , w h e e l c h a i r foot-
platforms, or wheelchair wheels.
r \
K:-_‘.3.2 I he floor on the lnstdc and outslde of
each doorway shall be level for a distance of
15Ocm from thcdoorin thcdirecticlnthedoor
swings and shall extend 30 cm beyond each
jade of the door.
E-2.3._? Sharp Inclines and abrupt changes In
Icvcl shall be a\olded at doorsills. As much ax
possible. thresholds shall be flush with rhe
floor.
E-2.3.3./ ( ‘ a r c s h o u l d b e t a k e n 111 t h e
selection. placement and setting of door
clo\crs so that they do not pre\‘ent the uhe of
door> bk t h e physIcally diahlcd. I IIIIC-del;t)
door closer\ arc recommended.
E - 2 . 3 . 3 . 2 A u t o m a t i c doors that otherwise
conform to 1Y-2.3.l. E-2.3.2 and E-2.3.3 tire
very satisfactorv.
k..-2.4 Starrs - S t a i r s w h e n m a d e 111 w o o d
shall conform to accepted standards [I I l(4)].
with the following additional considerationb.
E-2.4.l Steps in stairs that might require use
by those with disabilities defined in E-U. 1.2.4
and E-U./..?._5 or by the aged shall not hate
abrupt (square) nosing (SW Fig. 6A).
E-2.4.1.1 Individuals with restrictions in the
knee, ankle, or hip, with artificial legs, long
leg braces. or comparable conditions cannot,
without great difficulty and hazard, use steps
with nosing as illustrated in Fig. 6A. but may
safely and with minimum difficulty use steps
with nosing as illustrated in Fig. 6B. Open
risers should not be recommended.
E-2.4.2 Stairs shall have handrails 80 cm high
as measured from the tread at the face of the
riser. A desirable shape of the handrail is given
in Fig. 7.
ORANGE (LUMINOUS COLOUR)

\ / A

&“lTE &LACK
Fig. SA Plan of Doors Suitable for the Whalchair Bound Fig. SB Sign for use at the Entrances

NOTE - Because entrances also serve as exits, some being particularly Important in case ofan emergency, and because the
proximity of such exits to all parts of buildings and facilities, in accordance with their design and function, isessential, it is
preferable that all or most entrances (exits) should be accessible to, and usable by, individuals in wheelchairs and
individuals with other forms of physical disability herein applicable.

Fig. 5 Entrances

PART III DEVELOPMENT CONTROI RCLES AND GENERAL WILDING REQUIREMENTS

N O T E- Where handrails arc speclficd to be of heights
other than 80 cm, it is recommended that two sets of
handrails be installed to serve all people. Where traffic is
predominantly children, particularly physically disabled
children, extra care should be exercised in the placement
of handrails in accordance with the nature of the facihty
and the age groups being serviced. Dual handrails maybc
necessary as illustrated in Fig. 6C.
hazard. The extension may be made on the
side of a continuing wall. At right angle junc-
tion of walls and at landing levels, the han-
drails should be rounded off to minimize the
hazards due to sharp projecting corners (see
Fig. 8).

PROJECTING NOSINGS

NOT RECOMMENDED WITH

PROJECTIONS MORE THAN
2.5 cm

6A

r 16.5 cm max.

1 7 r24.Ocmmin.

N OTE -Where codes specify handralls to be at heights

other than 80 cm. it IS. recommended that fwo sets of
1 handrails be installed to serve all people. Wheretraflic IS
predominantly children, particularly physvzaliy disabled
children, extra care should be exercised m the placement
2.5 cm of handrails in accordance with the nature of the faclhty
and the age group or groups being serviced D u a l
RECOMMENDED handrails may be necessary as Illustrated m Fig hC.
6B Fig. 7 Suggested Details for Handrail

30.5cm MINT rEXTEND H A N D R AIL A l

STAIRCASE

FOR ADULTS

CONTINUOUS HANDRAIL
AROUND LANDING

FOR CHILDREN
4 Fig. 8 Example of Staircase Plan for
Ambulant L%abled

E-2.4.4 The common formula for calculation

Fig. 6 Stairs
E-2.4.3 Stairs shall have at least one handrail
that extends at least beyond the top step and
beyond the bottom step.
E-2.4.3.1 Care should he taken that the
extension of the handrails is not in itself a
of treads and risers shall be 1 tread + 2 risers=
60 cm. Steps should, wherever possible, and in
conformity with existing step formulae, have
risers that do not exceed 17 cm. The treads
may have non-slip surface.
E-2.5 Floors
E-2.5.1 Floors shall have a non-slip surface.
E-2.5.2 Floors on a given storey shall be of a
common level throughout or be connected by
a ramp in accordance with E-2.1.1 to E-2.1.6.

NATION7.L BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

E-2.5.2.1 There shall not be a difference
between the level of the floor of q corridor ark
the level of the floor of the toilet r-ooms.
E-2.5.2.2 There shall not be a difference
between the level of the floor of a corridor and
the level of a meeting room, dining room, or
any other room, unless proper ramps are
provided.
E-2.6, Toilet Rooms- It is essential that an
app1 opr iate number of toilet rooms, in accor-
dance with the nature and use of a specific
building or facility, be made accessible to, and
usable by, the physically handicapped.
E-2.6.1 Toilet rooms shall have space to
allow traffic of individuals in wheelchairs
(see Fig. 9 and 10).
E-2.6.2 Toilet rooms shall have at least one
toilet stall for the ambulant disabled (see Fig.
I1 and 12), that:
a) is 90 cm wide;
b) is at least 140 cm, preferably 150 cm
deep;
4 has a door (where doors are used), that
is, 80 cm wide and swings out;
4 has handrails on each side, 78 cm high
and parallel to the floor, 3.8 cm clear-
ance between rail and wall, and fastened
securely at ends and centre; and
d has a water closet with the seat 50cm
from the floor.
NOTE- The design and mounting of the water closet is of
considerable importance. A wall-mounted water closet
with a narrow understructure that recedes sharply is most
desirable. If a floor mourited water closet must be used, it
should not have a front that is wide and perpendicular to
the floor at the front of the seat. The bowl should be
shallow at the front of the seat and t&n backwards more
than downwards to allow the individual in a wheelchair to
get close to the water closet with the seat of the
wheelchair.
E-2.6,3 Toilet rooms shall have wash basins
with narrow aprons, which when mounted at
standard height are usable by individuals in
wheelchairs; or they shall have wash basins
mounted higher, when particular designs
demand, so that they are usable by individuals
in wheelchairs.

WASH HAN0 BASIN WITH

TOWEL DISPENSER OVER
RIM A7 Sl.Ocm ABOVE FLOOR

IS?-Ocm MIN OR ISZ~Ocm WHERE

OEPTM IS LESS IHAN 17%ocm OR
&BOOR IN ALTERNATIVE POStlION

HORIZONTAL PULL RAJL

lslroelmlwGEs

All dimensions in cmtimctrcs.

Fig. 9 Suggested Plan WC Comparrmenf for rho Wheelchair Bound

?ARf III D E V E L O P M E N T CONTltOLPULES AND CENmAL BUILDING REQUlREMMTS l2’

 .!,II
-1 ./.I!
I

I. !I.
I(
4

.I’ PAPER TOWEL !I

I I - VERTICAL RAIL

83.5 TO 12Y.5 cm
rOIl.ET --jy ABOVE FLOOR
0 c PAPFK
C b

1
R A I L A T 28.Ocm PULL RAIL AT
A B O V E W C SEAI- BASIN RIM A T
78.0 cm 107.0 cm
A B O V E Fl .OOR ABOVE FLOOR

WC SEAT AT
50.0 cm

ABOVE FLOOR

I-

Fig. 10 Section Through WC Compartment for (he Wheelchair Bound

~63.5 cm MN PREFERRED

~0/;
~TOILET PAPER
TOILET PAPER
HOLDER
p ~I~ORI~ONTAL RA I L AT
26.0cm 28.0 cm ABOVE
- VERlKAL RAIL
03.5 TO 120*5cm
33.0 CI W C SEAT L E V E L AWVE CLOOO

-VERTICAL RAIL
1293cm MlGbl

-r)ECOYMNDED
EXTENSION TO
MORIZONTAL RAIL

/-WORlZONTAL PULL
RAIL

Fig. 11 Suggested Plan WC Compartment Fig. 1.2 Section Through WC Compartment

for the Ambulant Disabled for the Ambulant Disabled

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

E-2.6.3.1 The drain pipes and hot-water pipes
under a lavatory shall be covered or insulated
so that a wheelchair individual without sensa-
tion will not burn himself.
E-2.6.4 Some mirrors and shelves shall be
provided above the wash basins at a height as
low as possible and not more than 1 m above
the floor, measured from the top of the shelf
and the bottom of the mirror.
E-2.6.5 Toilet rooms for men shall have wall-
mounted urinals with the opening of the basin
48 cm from the floor, or shall have floor-
mounted urinals that are on level with the
main floor of the toilet room.
E-2.6.6 Toilet rooms shall have an approp-
riate number of towel racks, towel dispensers,
?**t fl DRVRLDPMl!NT CONTROL RULES A N D CF.NORAL RUILDINC REQUlREMk’JWS
and other dispensers ‘and disposal units
mounted not higher than 1 m from the floor.
E-3. DESIGNING FOR CHILDREN
E-3.1 The dimensions given in this Appendix
are for adults of average stature. In designing
buildings for use by children, it may be neces-
sary to alter some dimensions, such as height
of handrails, in accordance with accepted
standards [III (5)].
E-4. For additional information regarding
other facilities and conveniences required in
buildings meant for use of physically handi-
capped, reference may be made to accepted
standards [III (6)].
11l-39
 LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records’ those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and
‘accepted standards’ in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standard shall be adoptedat the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listedmay be used
by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
Code.

In thefollowing list the number appearing in the first column within parentheses indicates the
number of the reference in this Part.

(I) IS: 8888-1978 Guide for requirements of (4) IS: 1634-1973 Code of practice for design
low income housing
(2) IS:63 13 Code of practice for anti-termite
measures in buildings:
(5)
IS:6313 (Part I)-1971 Part I Construc-
tional measures
IS:6313 (Part. II)-1971 Part II Pre-
constructional chemical treatment
measures
IS:6313 (Part-III)-1971 P a r t 111
Treatment for existing buildings
(6)
(3) lS:3792-I978 Guide for heat insulation
of non-industrial buildings (first
revision)
and construction of wood stairs in
houses first revision)
IS:4838 Anthropometric dimensions for
school children:
IS:4838 (Part I)-1969 Part I Age
group 5 to 1 I years
IS:4838 (Part-II)-1969 Part II Age
group 12 to 16 years
IS:4963- 1968 Recommendations for
buildings and facilities for the
physically handicapped

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF I N D I A

The National Building Code‘of India consists of the following Parts and Sections:

PART I DEFINITIONS
PART II ADMINISTRATION
PART III DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND
GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION -
PART V BUILDING MATERIALS
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Section I Loads
Section 2 Foundations
Section 3 Wood
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
Plain and Reinforced Concrete
Prestressed Concrete
Section 6 Steel
Section 7 Prefabrication and Systems Building
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES
Section I Lighting and Ventilation
Section 2 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Air-conditioning and Heating
Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control
Section 5 Installation of Lifts and Escalators
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES
Section .I Water Supply
Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation
Section 3 Gas Supply
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION

Bl:REAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS

0. FOREWORD ... 2
1. SCOPE ... 4
2. TERMINOLOGY ... 4
3. CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS BASED ON
OCCUPANCY . . .. s
4. TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION ... 9
5. FIRE ZONES ... 9
6: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF ALL INDIVIDUAL
OCCU PANClES ... IO
7. EXIT REQUIREMENTS ... 28
8. REQUIREMENTS OF RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
(GROUP A) ... 31
Y. REQUIREMENTS OF EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS
(GROUP B) ... 33
10. REQUIREMENTS OF INSTITUTIONAL BUlLDlNGk
(GROUP C) .., 34
II. REQUIREMENTS OF ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS
(GROUP D) ... 35
12. REQUIREMENTS OF BUSINESS BUILDINGS
(GROUP E) ... 38
I3. REQUIREMENTS OF MERCANTILE BUILDINGS
(GROUP F) ... 39
14. REQUIREMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
(GROUP G) ... 40
1.5. REQUIREMENTS OF STORAGE BUILDINGS (GROUP H) ... 42
16. REQUIREMENTS OF BUILDINGS FOR HAZARDOUS
lJSES (GROUP J) ... 43
APPEND/X A FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR
BUILDINGS MORE THAN ISm IN HEIGHT ... 44
APPEND/X B GUIDELINES FOR SELECTION OF FIRE
DETECTORS ... 50
APPEND/X C FIRE PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS FOR
VENTING IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS ... 54
APPEND/X D GUIDELINES FOR FIRE DRILL AND
EVACUATION PROCEDURES FOR HIGH
RISE BUILDINGS ... 60

?ANT Iv FINI rNolImloN lv-

1
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION

0. FOREWORD
0.1 This part of the Code deals with safety from fire and explosion. It specifies the demarcation of
fire zones, restrictions on construction of buildings in each fire zone, classification of buildings
based on occupancy, types of building construction according to fire resistance of the structural
components and other restrictions and requirements necessary to minimize danger to life from
fire, smoke, fumes or panic before the buildings can be evacuated. The Code recognizes that safety
of life is more than a matter of exits and accordingly deals with various matters which are
considered essential to the safety of life.
0.2 Fire protection techniques have to be based on the fire behaviour characteristics of different
materials and structural elements of buildings. The activities pursued by the occupants of
buildin@ must also be taken into consideration for assessing the extent of hazards and methods
should then be devised by which the hazards could be minimized. An indefinite combination of
variable is involved in the phenomenon of fire, all of which can not be quantified. The
requirements of this Code should, therefore, be taken as a guide and an engmeering design
approach should be adopted for ensuringafire safe design for buildings. It would also be necessary
for this purpose to associate qualified and trained fire protection engineers with the planning of
buildings, so that adequate fne protection measures could be incorporated in the building design
right from the beginning.
0.3 Absolute safety from fire is not attainable in practice. The objective of this part is to specify
measures which will provide that degree of safety fromfire which can be reasonably achieved. The
Code endeavours to avoid requirements which might involve unreasonable hardships or
unnecessary inconvenience or interference with normal use and occupancy of buildings, but insists
upon compliance with minimum standards for fire safety necessary in public interest.

Iv- 2 NATIONAL UJU5lNG CODE OF INDIA

 ,

0.4 This part does not cover general fire prevention. Nor does it cover the prevention ofacctdental
personal injuries during the course of normal occupancy of buildings.
0.5 This part recognizes that panic in a building on tire may be uncontrollable, but dealswith the
potential panic hazard through measures designed to prevent the development of panic.
Experience indicates that panic seldom develops even in the presence of potential danger, so long
as occupants of buildings are moving towards exits which they can see within a reasonable distance
and with no obstructions or undue congestion in the path of travel. However, any uncertainty as to
the location or adequancy of means of egress, the presence of smoke or fumes and the stoppage of
travel towards the exit, such as may occur when one person stumbles and falls on stairs, may be
conducive to panic. Danger from panic is greater when a large number of people are trapped in a
confined area.

0.6 Experience has shown that concealed spaces within a building such as space between ceiling
and false ceiling, horizontal and vertical ducts,etc. tend to act as flues/ tunnels during a fire.
Provision should, therefore, be made to provide fire stopping within such spaces.
0.7 Nothing in this part of the Code shall be construed to prohibit better types of building
construction, more exits or otherwise safer conditions than the minimum requirements specified
in this part.
0.8 Compliance with this part shall not be construed as eliminating or reducing the necessity for
other provisions for safety of persons using a building or structure under normal occupancy
condittons. Nor shall any provision of this Code be construed as requiring or permitting.any
addition that may be hazardous under normal occupancy conditions.
0.9 One of the major points brought out in this part is the limitation of heights and areas of
buildins based on fire saety of the occupants. Individual municipal corporations are free to alter
Table 2 based on local conditions, but the ratios of areas as maintained in the table for different
occupancies and types of construction shall be adhered to.
0.10 Advantage has been taken of the developments, particularly in tire resistance rating of
materials, designating types of construction in a rational manner and relating the area1imitatior.s
of different occupancies to dtfferent types of construction. In-the light of the above, thebaste
Indian Standards on fire safety are to be revised to conform to the latest developments in this field.
0.11 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. As a result of implementationofthis part,
some useful suggestions have emerged. These have been incorporated in this revision to the extent
possible. The major changes in this revision are:

a) A table has been included giving the fire resistance ratings for various types of construction
for structural and non-structural members.

b) The requirements for wet riser, wet riser-cum-downcomer, automatic sprinklerinsta!lation,

high pressure water spray or foam generating system, etc, for buildings more than 15 m in
height have been included.

cl S rinkler concession given for travel distance and capacity of exits has been withdrawn to
a!ford greater safety to the occupants of a building.

4 The requirements of fire detection/extinguishing system for each occupancy group have
been elaborated to cover various areas in particular occupancy.

e) Fire.protection requirements for buildings more than 15 m in height have been included in
Appendix A.

r) Guidelines for selection of various types of fire detectors for installation in different
occupancies have been included in Appendix B.

B) Fire protection considerations for venting in industrial buildings have been covered in
Appendix C.
h) Guidelines for fire drill and evacuation procedures for high rise building have been included
in Appendix D.

hat Iv Ftu rBolxcnon IV-

3
1. SCOPE
1.1 This part covers the requirements of fire
protection of buildings through classification
of buildings based on occupancy, type of
construction, and their requirements.
1.2 This part also covers the exit
requirements for all occupancies.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.0 For the purpose of this part, the following
definitions shall apply:
A U T O M A T I C F IRE D ETECTING AND A L A R M
SYSTEM -An arrangement of automatic fire
detectors, such as a fuse working at a given
temperature, a thermostat or a fluid filled tube
or an electronic device, for detecting an
outbreak of fire, and sounders and other
equipment for automatic transmission and
indication of alarm signals without manual
intervention. The system also has provision
for testing of circuits and, where required for
the operation of auxiliary services.
AUTOMATIC S PRINKLER S YSTEM - A n
arrangement of piping, sprinklers and
connected equipment designed to operate
automatically by the heat of fire and to
discharge water upon that fire and which may
also simultaneously give automatic audible
alarm.
B UILDING -Any structure for whatsoever
purpose and of whatsoever materials
constructed and every part thereof whether
used as human habitation or not and includes
foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs,
chimneys, plumbing and building services,
fixed platforms, verandah, balcony, cornice
or projection, part of a building or anything
affixed thereto or any wall enclosing or
intended to enclose any. land or space and
signs and outdoor display structures. Tents,
shumiunuhs, tarpaulin shelters, etc, erected
for temporary and ceremonial occasions with
the permission of the Authority shall not be
considered as building.
B U I L D I N G . HE I G H T O F- T h e v e r t i c a l
distance measured in the case of flat roofs,
from the average level of the ground around
and contiguous to the building or as decided
by the Authority to the highest point of the
building adjacent to the street wall; and in the
case of pitched roofs, up to the point where the
external surface of the outer wall intersects the
finished surface of the sloping roof; and in the
case of gables facing the road, the mid-point
between the eaves level and the ridge.
Architectural features serving no other
function except that of decoration shall be
excluded for the purpose of measuring
heights.
IV-
4 NATKbNAL BUlLoIwC CXVDC O F I N D I A
C OMBUSTIBLE M A T E R I A L -A material is
combustible if it burns or adds heat to a fire
when tested for non-combustibility in
accordance with good practice [(IV(l)]*.
C OVERED AREA-Ground area covered by
the building immediately above the plinth
level. The area covered by the following in the
open spaces is excluded from covered area
(see Table 2):
4 garden, rockery, well and well structures,
plant nursery, waterpool, swimmingpool
(if uncovered), platform round a tree,
tank, fount&n, bench, chubufru with
open top and unenclosed on sides by
walls and the like;
b) drainage culvert, conduit, catch-pit, gully
pit, chamber, gutter arid the like;
c) compound wall, gate, unstoreyed porch
and portico, slide, swing, uncovered
staircases, ramp areas covered by chhuju
and the like; and
d) watchman’s booth, pumphouse, garbage
shaft, electric cabin or sub-stations, and
such other utility structures meant for the
s e r v i c e s o f the building under
consideration.
NOTE - For the purpose of this part, covered area equals
the plot area minuk the area due for open spaces in the
plot.
DOWNCOMER -A wet riser fed from an
overhead tank installed on the building.
D RY R ISER - A vertical water ,nain inside a
building, not normally connected to a water
main or an automatic stationary pump, with
an inlet or inlets at street level,.through which
water can be pumped by fire service pumps to
hydrant outlets or hose reels at various floors.
F IRE E XIT-A way out leading to an escape
route.
F IRE R E S I S T A N C E ( CR I T E R I A O F ) - F i r e
resistance is a property of an element of
building construction and is the measure of its
ability to satisfy for a stated period some or all
of the following criteria: (a) resistance to
collapse, (h) resistance to flame penetration,
ahd (c) resistance to excessive temperature
rise on the unexposed face.
F IRE S EPARATION -The distance in metres
measured from any other building on the site,
or from other site, or from the opposite side of
street or other public space to the building for
the purpose of preventing the spread of fire.
---_-_
l In this part where reference is made to ‘good practice’
in relation to design, testing, construction procedures
or other information, the appropriate document listed
at the end of this part may be used as a guide to the
interpretation of this term.
FlkE TOWER -An enclosed staircase which
can only be approached from the various
floors through landings or lobbies separated
from both the floor areas and the staircase by
fire-resisting doors, and open to the outer air.
F IRE W A L L-A fire resistance rated wall,
having protected openings, which restricts the
spread of fire and extends continuously from
the foundation to at least I m above theroof.
F LOOR A REA R ATIO (FAR)--The quotient
obtained by dividing the total covered area
(plinth area) on all floors by the area of the
plot:
Total covered area of all floors
FAR = - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Plot area
HIGH RISE B UILDING -A building in which a
‘stack effect’ is created by a fire and in which
fire fighting can not be carried out from
outside with the fire appliances available with
the fire services. For the purpose of this part,
all buildings more than 15m in height shall be
considered as high rise buildings.
H ORIZONTAL E X I T-An arrangement which
allows alternative egress from a noor area to
another floor at or near the same level in an
adjoining building or an adjoining part of the
same building .with adequate fire separation.
O CCUPANCY OR U SE G ROUP --The principal
occupancy for which a building or a part of a
building is used or intended to be used: fort he
purposes of classification of a building
according to the occupancy. an occupancy
shall be deemed to include subsidiary
occupancies which are contingent upon it.
P LINTH AREA-The built-up covered area
measured at the floor I9vel of the basement or
of any storey.
ROOF EXITS -A means of escape on to the
roof of a building; but acceptable only where
the roof has access to it from the ground. The
exit shall have adequate cut-off within the
building from staircase below.
SJTE (PLOT)-- A parcel (piece) of land
enclosed by definite boundaries.
TRAVEI DISTANCE-The distance to be
travelled from point in a building to a
protected escape route. external escape route
or final exit.
V ENTILATION -Supply of outside air into, or
the removal of inside air from an enclosed
space.
V E N T I N G , FIRE -The process of inducing
heat and smoke to leave a building as quickly
as possible by such paths that lateral spread of
tire and heat is checked, fire fighting
operations are facilitated and minimum fire
damage is caused.
V O L U M E T O PLO’I AKEA RAIIO (VPR)-The
ratio of volume of building measured in cubic
metres to the area of the plot measured in’
square metres and expressed in metres.
WFI RISK -~ A charged vertical water main
inside a building, connected to a water main
or an automatic stationary pump and fitted
with internal hydrants landing valves, hose
reels for tapping water at various floors.
NOII For definitions 01 other Icrms. referenceshall be
made I u good prac~ we [ I V(Z)].
3. CLASSIFICA-I‘ION OF BUILDINGS
BASEDONOC‘CUPANCY
3. I Gene& Class{/icotio,t - All buildings,
whether existing or hereafter erected, shall be
classified, according to the use or the
character of occupancy. in one of the
following groups:
Group A Residential
Group B Educational
Group C Institutional
Group D Assembly
Group E Business
Group F Mercantile
Group G lqdustrial
Group H Storage
Group J Hazardous
3.1.1 M i n o r .occupancy i n c i d e n t a l t o
operations in another type of occupancy shall
be considered as part of the main occupancy
and shall be classified under the relevant
group for the main occupancy.
Examples of buildings in each group are
given in 3.1.1.1 to3.1.1.9.
3./././ GKOI!P A RESIDE~II’IAL BUILDINGS -
These shall include any building in which
sleeping accommodation is provided for
normal residential purposes, with or without
cooking or dining or both facilities, except
any building classified under Group C.
Buildings and structures under Group A shall
be further subdivided as follows:
Subdivision A-l Lodging or rooming houses
Subdivision A-2 One-or two-family private
dwellings
Subdivision A-3 Dormitories
Subdivision A-4 Apartment houses (flats)
Subdivision A-5 Hotels
a) SUBDIVISION A-l LODGING OR
ROOMING HOUSES - These shall
I”.5
 include any building or group of build-
ings under the same management, in
which separate sleeping accommodation
for a total of not more than 15 persons, on
transient or permanent basis, with or
without dining facilities, but without
cooking facilities for individuals, is
provided.
A lodging or rooming house shall b e
classified as a dwelling in Subdivision A-2
if no room in any of its private dwelling
units is rented to more than three persons.
b) SUBDIVISION A-2 ONE- OR TWO-FAMILY
PRIVATE DWELLING -These shall
include any private dwelling which is
occupied by members of a single family
and has a total sleeping accommodation
for not more than 20 persons.
If rooms in a private’dwelling are rented
to outsiders, these shall be for
accommodating not more than three
persons per room.
If sleeping accommodation for more than
20 persons is provided in any one
residential building, it shall be classified
as a building in Subdivision A-3 or A-4 as
the case may be.
~-3 DORMITORIES - These
4 SUBDIVISION
shall include any building in which group
sleeping accommodation is provided,
with or without dining facilities, for
persons who are not members of the same
family, in one room or a series of closely
associated rooms under joint occupancy
and single management, for example,
school and college dormitories, students*
and her hostels and military barracks.
4 SUBDIVISION A-4 APARTMEN-F HOUSES
(.FLATS) - T h e s e s h a l l i n c l u d e a n y
building or structure in which living
quarters are provided for three or more
families, living independently of each
other and with independent cooking
facilities, for example, apartment houses,
mansions and chawls.
d SUBDIVISION A- S HOTELS -These shall
include any building or group of
buildings under single management, in
which sleeping accommodation, with or
without dining facilities, is provided for
hire to more than 15 persons who are
primarily transient, for example, hotels,
inns, clubs and motels.
3.1.1.2 GROUP B EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS
-These shall include any building used for
school, college or day-care purposes involving
assembly for instruction, educatron or
recreation and which is not covered by Group D.
IV-
6 N A TI ONAL BUIUHNG CODE OF,
3. J. 1.3 GROUP C INSTlTUTlONAL BUILDINGS
-These shall include any building or part
thereof, which is used for purposes, such as
medical or other treatment or care of persons
suffering from physical or mental illness,
disease or infirmity; care of infants,
convalescents or aged persons and for penal
or correctional detention in which the liberty
of the inmates is restricted. Institutional
buildings ordinarily provide sleeping
accommodation for the occupants.
Buildings and structures under Group C shall
be further subdivided as follows:
Subdivision C-l Hospitals and sanatoria
Subdivision C-2 Custodial institutions
Subdivision C-3 Penal and mental institutions
SUBDIVISION C-l HOSPITALS AND
SANATORIA -This subdivision shall
include any building or a group of
buildings under single management,
which is used for housing persons
suffering from physical limitations
because of health or age, for example,
hospitals, infirmaries, sanatoria and
nursing homes.
SUBDIVISION C-2 CUSTODIAL INSTITUTIONS
b)
-This subdivision shall include any
building or a group of buildings under
single management, which is used for the
custbdy and care of persons, such as ,
children, convalescents and the aged, for
example, homes for the aged and infirm,
convalescent homes and orphanages.
cl SUBDIVISION C-3 PKNAL AND MENTAL
INSTlTUTlONS-This subdivision shall
include any building or a group of
buildings under single management,
which is used for housing persons under
restraint, or who are detained for penal or
corrective purposes, in which the liberty of
the inmates is restricted, for example, jails,
prisons, mental hospitals, mental
sanatoria and reformatories.
3.1.1.4 GROUP D ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS-
These shpll include any building or part of a
building, where groups of people congregate
or gather for amusement, recreation, social,
religious, patriotic, civil, travel and similar
purposes, for example, theatres, motion
picture houses, assembly halls, auditoria,
exhibition halls, museums, skating rinks,
gymnasiums, restaurants, places of worship,
dance halls, club rooms, passenger stations
and terminals of air, surface and marine
public transportation services, recreation
piers and stadia, etc.
Buildings under Group D shall be further
subdivided as follows:
INDIA
Subdivision D-l Buildings having a
theatrical stage and fixed seats for over 1000
persons
Subdivision D-2 Buildings h a v i n g a
theatrical stage and fixed seats for less than
I 000 persons
Subdivision D-3 Buildings without a stage
having accommodation for 300 or more
persons but no permanent seating
arrangement
Subdivision D-4 Buildings without a stage
having acommodation for less than 300
persons
S u b d i v i s i o n D - 5 A l l o t h e r structurers
designed for assembly of people not covered
by subdivisions D-l -to D-4 _
4 S~JBDIVISION D- I --This subdivision shall
include any building primarily meant for
theatrical or operatic performances and
exhibitions and which has a raised stage,
proscenium curtain, fixed or portable
scenery or scenery loft, lights, motion
picture booth, mechanical appliances or
other theatrical accessories and
equipment and which is provided with
fixed seats for over 1000 persons.
b) SUBDIVISION D-~--This subdivision shall
include any building primarily meant for
use as described for Subdivision D-l, but
with fixed seats for less than 1000 persons.
cl SUBDIVISION D-3 -This subdivision shall
include any building. its lobbies, rooms
and other spaces connected thereto,
primarily intended for assembly of people,
but which has no theatrical stage or
theatrical a n d o r c i n e m a t o g r a p h i c
accesories and has accommodation for
more than 300 persons, for example,
dance halls, night c l u b s , halls for
fncidental picture shows, dramatic,
theatrical or educational presentation,
lectures or other similar purposes, having
no theatrical stage except a raised
platform and used without permanent
seating arrangement; art galleries,
museums, lecture halls, libraries,
passenger terminals; and buildings used
for educational purposes for less than 8
hours per week.
SUBDIVISIOF; D-4-This subdivision shall
4
include any building primarily intended
for use as described in Subdivision D-3.
but with accommodation for less than 300
p e r s o n s .
e) SUBDIVISION ~-5 -This subdivision shall
include any building meant for outdoor
assembly -of people not covered by
D-4, for example,
Subdivisions D-l to
grandstands. stadia. amusement park
stands and circus
structures. reviewing
tents.
3.1.1.5 GROUP E BUSINESS BUILDINGS~
These shall include any building or part of a
building which is used for transaction oc
business (other than that covered by Group F
and parts of buildings covered by 3.1.1); for
keeping of accounts and records and similar
purposes, professional establishments, service
facilities, etc. City halls, town halls, court
houses and libraries shall be classified in this
group so far as the principal function of these
is transaction of public business and keeping
of books and records
Business buildings shall be further sub-
classified as follows:
Subdivision E-l Offices, banks, professional
establishments, like offices of architects,
engineers, dcctors, lawyers, etc.
Subdivision E-2 Laboratories, research
establishments and test houses.
Subdivision E-3 Computer instatlations.
3.1.1.6 GROUP F MERCANTILE BUILDINGS --
These shall include any building or part of a
building, which is used as shops, stores,
market, for display and sale of merchandise,
either wholesale or retail.
Mercantile buildings shall be further sub-
classified as ‘follows:
Subdivision E-1 Shops, stores, markets with
area up to 500 m’.
Subdivision F-2 Underground shopping
centres, departmental stores with area more
than 500 m2
Storage and service facilities incidental to the
sale of merchandise and located in the same
building shall be included under this group.
3.1.1.7 GROUP G INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS-
These shall include any building or part of a
building or structure, in which products or
materials of all kinds and properties are
fabricated, assembled, manufactured or
processed, for example, assembly plants,
laboratories, dry cleaning plants, power
plants, pumping stations, smoke houses,
laundries, gas plants, refineries: dairies and
saw-mills.
Buildings under Group G shall be further
sub-divided as follows:
Subdivision G-l Buildings used for low
hazard industries
Subdivision G-2 Buildings used for moderate
hazard industries
Subdivision G-3 Buildings used for high
hazard industries.
The hazard of occupancy, for the purpose of
the Code, shall be the relative danger of the
start and spread of fire, the danger or smoke
or gases generated, the danger of explosion or
I\;- 7
other occurrence potentially endangering the
lives and safety of the occupants of the
buildings.
Hazard of occupancy shall be determined by
the Authority on the basis of the character of
the contents and the processes or operations
conducted in the building, provided, however,
that where the combustibility of the building,
the flame spread rating of the interior finish or
other features of the building or structure are
such as to involve a hazard greater than the
occupancy hazard, the greater degree of
hazard shall govern the classification.
Where different degrees of hazard of
occupancy exist in different parts of a
building, the most hazardous of those shall
govern the classification for the purpose of
this Code, except in as far as hazardousareds
are segregated or protected as specified in the
Code.
4 SUBDIVISION G-I --This subdivision shall
include any building in which the contents
are of such low combustibility and the
industrial processes or operations
conducted therein are of such a nature that
there are no possibilities for any self-
propagating fire to occur and the only
consequent danger to life and property
may arise from panic, fumes or smoke, or
fire from some external source.
b) SUBDIVISION G -2-This subdivision shall
include any building in which the contents
or industrial processes of. operations
conducted therein are liable to give rise to
a fire which will burn with moderate
rapidity and give off a considerable
volume of smoke, but from which neither
toxic fumes nor explosions are to be
feared in the event of a fire.
4 SUBDIVISION ~-3 -This subdivision shall
include any building in which the contents
or industrial processes or operatrons
conducted therein are liable to give rise to
a fire which will burn with extreme
rapidity or from which poisonous fumes
or ex losions are to be feared in the event
of a Pire.
3.1.1.8 GROUP H STORAGE BUILDINGS-
These shall include any building or part of a
building, used primarily for the storage or
sheltering (including servicing, processing or
repairs incidental to storage) of goods, wares
or merchandise (except those that involve
highly combustible or explosive products or
materials), vehicles or ammals, for example,
warehouses,‘ cold storage, freight depots,
transit sheds, storehouses, truck and marine
terminals, garages, hangars (other than
aircraft repair hangars), grain elevators, barns
and stables.
Storage properties are characterized by the
presence of relatively small number of persons
Iv-
8 NATIONAL
in proportion to the area, Any new use which
increases the number of occupants to a figure
comparable with other classes of occupancy
shall change the classification of the building
to that of the new use, for example, hangars
used for assembly purposes, warehouses used
for office purposes, garage buildings used for
manufacturing.
3.1.1.9 GROUP J HAZARDOUS BUILDINGS-
These shall include any building or part of a
building which is used for the storage,
handling, manufacture or processing of highly
combustible or explosive materials or
products which are liable to burn with
extreme rapidity and/or which may produce
poisonous fumes or explosions; for storage,
handling, manufacturing or processing which
involve highly corrosive, toxic or noxious
alkalis, acids or other liquids or chemicals
producing flame, fumes and explosive,
poisonous, irritant or corrosive gases; and for
the storage, handling or processing.of any
material producing explosive mixtures of dust
which result in the division of matter into tine
particles subject to spontaneous ignition.
Examples of buildings in this class’are those
buildings which are used for:
4 Storage, Ynder pressure of more than
;i r[rnrn and in quantities exceeding
of acetylene, hydrogen,
illuminating and natural gases, ammonia,
chlorine, phosgene, sulphur dioxide,
carbon dioxide, methyloxide and all gases
subject to explosion, fume or toxic
hazard, cryogenic gases, etc;
b) Storage and handling of hazardous and
highly flammable liquids, rocket
propellants, etc;
cl Storage and handling of hazardous and
highly flammable or explosive materials,
other than liquids; and
4 Manufacture of artificial flowers,
synthetic leather, ammunition, explosives
and fireworks.
3.2 Any building not covered by the above
shall be classified in the group which most
nearly resembles its existing or proposed use.
3.3 Where change in the occupancy of any
building places it in a different group or in a
different subdivision of the same group, such
building shall be made to comply with the
requirements of the Code for the new group or
its subdivision.
3.4 Where the new occupancy of abuilding is
less hazardous, based on life and fire risk, than
its existing occupancy, it shall not be
necessary to conform to the requirements of
the Code for the new group or its subdivision.
3.5 A certificate of occupancy shall be
necessary, as required under Part II
UlLWNC CfODE OF lwolA
Administration, before any change is effected
in the character of occupancy of any building.
4. TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION
4.0 General- The design of any building and
the type of materials used in its construction
are important factors in making the building
resistant to a complete burn-out and in
preventing the rapid spread of fire, smoke or
fumes, which may otherwise contribute to the
loss of lives and property.
The fire resistance of a building or its
structural elements is expressed in hqurs
against a specified test load which is expressed
in k cal/ m , and against a certain intensity of
fire. The fire-resistance test for structure shall
be done in accordance with good practice
[IV(2)]. For the purpose of the Code, the types
of construction according to fire resistance
shall be classified into four categories,
namely, Type I Construction, Type 2
Construction, Type 3 Construction and
Type4 Construction. The fire resistance
ratings for various types of construction for
structural and non-structural members
should be as given in Table I.
For buildings above 15 m in height non-
combustible materials shall be used f o r
construction (see also 5.6 and 5.7).
4.1 The fire resistance ratings of various
building components shall conform to
accepted standards [W(4)]*.
5. FIRE ZONES
5.1 Demarcation-Thecity orareaunder the
jurisdiction of the Authority shall, for the
l In this part where reference is made to ‘accepted
standards’ in relation to material specification, design,
testing or other information, the appropirate document
listed at the end afthis part may beused asa guideto the
interpretation of this term.

TABLE 1 FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS (IN HOURS)

S TRUCTURAL E LEMENT T YPE OF C ONSTRUCTION

1) Exterior walls rT~pe 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4‘

Fire separation less than 3.7 m Bearing 4 2 2 I
Non-Bearing 2 I1 I I
Fire separation of 3.7 m or more but kss Bearing 4 : 2 I
than 9 m
Non-Bearing I I I
I’?

Fire separation of 9 m or more Bearing 4 2 2 I

Non-Bearing . I I I I
2) Fire walls and party walls 4 2 2 2
3) Fire separation assemblies 4 2 2 2
4) Fire enclosures of exitways, exitway hallways 2 2 2 2
and stairways
5) Shaft other than exitways, elevator hoistways 2 2 2 2
6) Exitway access corridors I I I I
7) Vertical separation of tenant spaces I I I I
8) Dwelling unit separations I I I I
Non-bearing partitions -At least half an hour-
9) Interior bearing walls, bearing partitions, Supporting more 4 2 2 2
columns, girders, trusses (other than roof than one floor
trusses) and framing
Supporting one 3 If I I
floor only

Supporting a roof 3 I$ I I
only
IO) Structural members supporting wail 3 Ii I I
I I) Floor construction, including beams 3 1; I I

12) Roof construction, in&din beams, trusses Smorleaainheight 2 I$ I I

and framing arches and roof deck to lowest member
More than 5 m but I I I I
lessthan6.7min
height to lowest
member
6.7 m or mote in 0 0 0 0
height to lowat
member

?ARt IV FIRE PROTECTION IV-

9
purpose of the Code, be demarcated into
distinct zones, based on fire hazard inherent in
the buildings and structures according to
occupancy (see 3), which shaI1 be called the
‘Fire Zones’.
5.2 Number and Designation of Fire Zones
5.2.1 The number of fire zones in a city or
area under the jurisdiction of the Authority,
depends upon the existing layout, types of
building construction (see 4), classification of
existing buildings based on occupancy (see 3)
and the expected future development of the
City or area. Ih large cities or areas, three fire
zones may be necessary, while in smaller ones
one or two may be adequate..
5.2.2 The fire zones shall be made use of in
land use development plan and shall be
designated as follows:
a) Fire Zone No. I,
b) Fire Zone No. 2, and
c) Fire Zone No. 3.
5.2.2.1. FIRE ZONE NO. I -This shall comprise
areas having residential (Group, A),
e d u c a t i o n a l ( G r o u p B ) , institutlonal
(Group C) and assembly (Group D), small
business (Subdivision E-l) and retail
mercantile (Group F) buildings, or areas
which are under development for such
occupancies.
5 2 2.2 FIRE ZOKE NO. z ~-This shall comprise
&iness (Subdivisions E-2 and E-3) a n d
industrial b u i l d i n g s (Subdiiisions G - l
and (i-2). except high hazard industrial
buildings (Subdivision G-3) or areas which
are under development for such occupancies.
5.2.2.3 FIRE Z ONE No. 3-This shall comprise
areas having high hazard industrial buildings
(Subdivision G-3), storage buildings
(Group H) and buildings for hazardous uses
(Group J) or areas which are under develop-
ment for such occupancies.
5.3 Change in the Fire Zone Boundaries-
When the boundaries of any fire zone are
changed, or when it is intended to include
other areas or types of occupancies in any fire
z&e, it shall be done by following the same
procedure as for promulgating new rules or
ordinances or both.
5.4 Overlapping Fire Zones
5.4.1 When any building is so situated that it
extends to more than one fire zone, it shall be
deemed to be in the fire zone in which the
major portion of the building-or structure is
situated.
5.4.2 When any building is so situated that it
extends equally to more than one fire zone, it
shall be deemed to be in the fire zone having
more hazardous occupancy buildings.
l”-lo
5.5 Temporary Ruildings
5.5.1 Temporary buildings shall be permitted
only in Fire Zones No. I and 2, as the case may
be, according to the purpose for which these
are to be used, by special per&t from the
Authority for a limited period and subject to
such conditions as may be imposed in the
permit.
5.5.2 Such buildings shall be’ completely
removed on the expiry of the period specified
in the permit.
5.6 Restrictions. on lhe Type of Construction
for New Buildings
5.6.1 Buildings erected in Fire Zone No. I
shall conform to construction of Type 1, 2, 3
or 4.
5.6.2 Buildings erected in Fire Zone No. 2
shall conform to construction of Type I, 2
or 3.
5.6.3 Buildings erected in Fire Zone No. 3
shall conform to construction of Type 1 or 2.
5.7 Restrictions on Existing Buildings-The
existing buildings in any fire zone shall not be
required to comply with the requirements of
the Code unless these are altered, or in the
opinion of the Authority, such building
constitutes a hazard to the safety of the
adjacent propeity or the o&pants of the
building itself. In the event of alteration, it
shall be necessary to obtain permission of the
Authority for such alteration consistent with
fire hazard (see Part II Administration).
6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF ALL
INDIVIDUAL OCCUPANCIES
6.1 General- All buildings shall satisfy
certain requirements which contribute,
individually and collectively, to thesafety of
life from fire, smoke, fumes and panic arising
from these or similar causes. There are,
however, certain general principles and
common requirements which are applicable
to all or most of the occupancies. They are
given in 6:2 to 6.18.
6.1. I EX C E P T I O N S AND D EVIATIONS -
Exceptions and deviations to the general
provisions of requirements of individual
occupancies are given as applicable to each
type of ocupancy in 8 to 16. In case of
practical difficulty or to avoid unnecessary
hardship, without sacrificing reasonable
safety, the Authority may grant exemptions
from the Code.
6.2 Maximum Height- Every building shall
be restricted in its height above the ground
level and the number of storeys, depending
upon its occupancy and the type of
construction. The height shall be measured as
specified in Part III Development control
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
rules and general building requirements. The
maximum permissible height for any
combination of occupancy and types of
construction should necessarily be related to
the width of street fronting the building, or
floor area ratios and the local fire iig,hting
facilities available.
6,3 Fkwr Area Ro~io — The comparative
floor area rat ios f’or different occupancies
and types of construction are given in Table
2. (see ah Part J“ll Ekveiopmertt control
rules and general building requirements).
6.3. / Each portion of a building, which is
separa~ed by sm.: or more continuous fire
resisting walls, having a fire resistance of not
less than 4h. extending from thelouncfatiort to
I m above the root’ at ail points, may be
considered to be a separate building for the
calculation of maximum permissible height
and floor area, provided openings, if any, in
the separating wall, are also protected by fire
assemblies of 4 h.
6.4 Open Spawr — The open spaces arou d
or inside a building shall conform to the
requirements of Part III Developmerrt control
rubx and general building requirements.
4.4,1 For high r[se buildings the foilowirtg
additional provisions of means of access to the
building shall be ensured (see Part 111

“i’.4tK.E 2 COMPARA”riVE FLOOR AREA RATIOS FOR OCCUPANCIES FACING

ONE Pl,i BLIL’ S’I”R EE.[“.4T LEAST 9 m WlfXf H
(c’krlm’ 6..1)

‘1y% i Type 2 T ypc 3 “1-}pe4’

Educatirrna} UL 20 I .4 I ,0
Imtittstimral ~lL 1.5 1,0 0.8

.Assembly UL I .0 u? (1.5

Bisirress ~L ~.Q 2.3 ! .6

indmtriai 7.5 1.9 16 1.3

Storage {se? Note 4! 6.0 !.5 ;.3 I.0
Hazarstcms(SPP!fole 4} 2.0 I.i 09 NP
U L– L%dirnited.
NP– Not permitted

NOTE1-- Ttrc FAR wslucs given im this table are subwct tc overall rmtrwtions on the hti~ghti of buildings m the case of
educational, institwiorrnl. awembly, slorage and hazardous occupancies as specif;ed m COI 3 of Tisbk 3.

Now. 2 -– This tabte has been prepared, taking ho account the combustible content m the di[feretv occupancies as weH as
the fire reslsta nee offered by the type of construction

NOTE 3-- This table sho~id be modified by the Authority. taking into accourrtskc rxhcr aspects as given below:

a) Denst!y in terms ot dwdlirrg units per hecsare;

b} Trraffii considmstlons:
c) Parking spaces:
d) -Local fire fighting factlitics: and
e} Water supply. drainage and samtation requirements.

!WSTE 4 ..- The FAR values speciticd m tftk tabk may be irtcreascrj by 20 peram for the folfowirsg services:

a; A basement or cellar. space under a hsi!digg constructed on stilts arsdused as a parkirsgspace and .air+onditionirtg
pkm room used as accessory to the prmclpal use:

b) Watchrnan”s booth. umphottse, garbage ~haft, ekctric cabin or substation and other utility structures rrmsntfor the
serwces of Ihe bud‘z Ing under cons]dcrattort;

c) Projections and accessory huiidirrgs as specifically exempted under the Codq and

d} Staircase room and lift rooms above the topmost storey: architectural fea(urex and chimneys and elevated ranks of
dimensions as permissible under the Code; the area of the tift shaft shall be taken only on one ffoor.

NOI E 5 — In so far as sirtg[e sttwcy rdorage and hazardous ocqancres are concerned. they woufd be further governed by
whmse m plot area ratIo (VPRI to be decided by the Authority.

. -—

PAl~ SV FtW ?ROTECS’SON ,V 11

Development control rules and general
building requirements):
4 The width of the main street on which the
building abuts shall not be less than 12 m
and one end of this street shall join
another street not less than 12 m in width;
b) The road shall not end in a dead end;
cl The compulsory open spaces around the
building shall not be used for parking; and
4 Adequate passageway and clearances
required for fire fighting vehicles to enter
the premises shall be provided at the main
entrance; the width of such entrance shall
be not less than 4.5 m. If an arch or
covered gate is constructed, it shall have a
clear head-room of not less than 5 m.
6.5. Mixed Occupancy- When any building
is used for more than one type of occupancy,it
shall conform to the requirements for the
most hazardous of the occupancies. If mixed
occupancies are separated by a separating
wall of 4 h fire rating, the occupancies shall be
treated individually.
6.6. Openings in Separating Walls and
Floors- At the time of designing openings in
separating walls and floors, particular
attention shall be paid to all such factors as
will limit fire spread through these openings.
6.6.1 For Types 1 to 3 construction a door-
way or opening in a separating wall on any
floor shall be limited to 5.6 m* in area with a
maximum height of 2.75 m and a maximum
width of 2.1 m. The wall openings shall be
protected with fire-resisting doors or steel
rolling shutters conforming to accepted
standards [IV(S)]. All openings in the floors
shall be protected by vertical enclosures
extending above and below such openings,
the walls of such enclosures having a fire
resistqnce of not less than 2 hand all openings
therein being protected with a fire-resisting
assembly having a fire-resistance rating as
specified in 6.8.
6.6.2 Type 4 construction. openings in
the separating walls or floors shall be
fitted with 2 h fire-resisting assemblies.
6.6.3 Openings in walls/floors which are
necessary to be provided to allow cables/
electrical wirings/ telephone cables/ plumbing
and fixtures, etc, shall be protected by
enclosures in the form of ducts/ shafts having
a fue’resistance not less than 2 h. Medium and
low voltage wiring running in shafts/ducts,
shall either be armoured type or run through
metal conduits. Further the space between the
conduits and the walls shall be filled in by a
filler material, compressed asbestos fibre
mixed with cement or any other material
having fire resistance rating of not legs than
one hour.
1”!2
NOTE-In the case of buildings where it is necessary to
lower or lift heavv machinervl goods from one floor to the
other, it may be-necessary ii Frovide larger openings in
the floor. Such openings shall be provided with
removable covers which shall have the same strength and
fire resistance as the floor.
6.7 Electrical Installations - For
requirements regarding electrical installations
from the point of view of fire safety, reference
may be made to good practice[IV(6)] (see also
Part VIII Building services, Section 2
Electrical installations).
6.8 Fire Stop or Enclosure of all
Openings-W here openings are permitted,
they shall not exceed three-fourths the area of
the wall in’ the case of an external wall and
they shall be protected with fire-resisting
assemblies or enclosures having a fire
resistance equal to that of the wall or floor in
which these are situated. Such assemblies and
enclosures shall also be capable of preventing
the spread of smoke or fumes through the
openings so as to facilitate the safe evacuation
of building in case of a fire.
6.9 Fire Detecting and Extinguishing
S y s t e m - In buildings of such size,
arrangement or occupancy that a fire may not
itself provide adequate warning to occupants,
automatic fire detecting and alarm facilities
shall be provided, where necessary, to warn
occupants oft he existence of fire, so that they
may escape,. or to facilitate the orderly
conduct of fire exit drills.
6.9.1 The fire detecting and extinguishing
system shall conform to accepted standards.
N O T E-Heat sensitive fire detectors for use in an
automatic fire alarm system shall conform to accepted
standards [IV(7)] and the automatic fire alarm system
using such detectors shall be installed in accordance with
good practice [IV@)].
6.9.2 The requirements of fire detection and
alarm systems are covered for each occupancy
under 8 to 16; attention is also drawn to such
requirements in case of high rise buildings
(above I5 m in height) as given in
Appendix A.
6.9.3 Guidelines for selection of various types
of fire detectors for different occupancies are
given in Appendix B.
6.10 Fixed Fire Fighting Installations
6.10.1 All buildings depending upon the
occupancy use and height shall be protected
by wet riser, wet riser-cum-downcomer,
automatic sprinkler installation, high
pressure water spray or foam generating
system, etc, in accordance with the provisions
of6.10.2 to 6.10.9.
6.10.2 The wet riser installations shall
conform to accepted standards. The typical
NATICNAL BUILOING CODB O F MM*
requirements of wet riser/ wet riser-cum-
downcomer installations and capacity of
water storage tanks and fire pumps shall be as
specified in Table 3. The typical arrangements
of wet riser-cumdowncomer and wet riser
installations are shown in Fig. I to 5. The wet
riser shall be designed for zonal distribution
ensuring that unduly high pressures are not
developed in risers and hose pipes.
6. JO.3 First-aid fire fighting appliances shall
be provided and installed in accordance with
accepted standards [lV(9)]. The fire fighting
equipment and accessories to be installed in
butldings for use in fire fighting shall conform
to accepted standards [IV( IO)].

TABLE 3 TYPICAL FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS/REQUIREMENTS

(Clause 6.10.2)
SL T YPE OF THE R EQUIREMENTS
No. BUILDING/OCCUPANCY A
, \
Type of Water Supply Pump Capacity
installation I
-iGz-Gz Near the Under- At the Terrace
ground Static Tank ground :taantt Level
Tank

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

9 Residenriol Buildings
0) Ladging or room-
ing houses (A-I),
dormitories (A-J)
and hotels (A-5)

I) Up to IS m in Nil 50 two Nil Nil Nil

height litrcs
N OTE- NO pro-
visions are
necessary for
dormitories
housing less
than 25 per-
sons.

2) Above I5 m One wet riser-cum- 100000 2itE 2400 tit=? per 900 litres per minute
in height but downcomer per litres mmute pvmg a giving a pressure
not exceed- I 000 rn’ floor area. pressure not less not less than
ing 24 m. The riser shall be than 0.3 N/mm’. at 0.3 N/mm* at the
fully charged with the topmost topmost hydrant.
adquate pressure tiydrant.
at all times, and shall
be automatic in
operation.

3) Above 24 m One wet riser-cum- 100000 20 000 i) 2 400 litres per 900 litres per minute
in height but downcorner per litres litres minute giving a giving a pressure
not exceed- I Ooo m* floor area. pressure not. tess not less than
ing 35 m. The riser shall be than 0.3 N/mm2. 0.3 N/mm’ at the
fully char@ with The pump pro- topmost hydrant.
adecprate pressure vided will be of
all ttmcs. and shall multi-stage type
be automatic in with suctton and
operation. delivery sires not
lessthan IScm
dia with low
kvel riser
up to IO storeys
and high level riser
delivery for
upper floors.
ii) A standby pump
of equal capacity
shall be provided
on alternative
source of supply.

PART Iv FUE ?RORcTMJN Iv_13

 ---
T A B L E 3 TYPICAL l-IKE J-IGH 1 ING INS I‘Al.LAl lC)NS KtQUlKtMtN fS C'onrd

SL ~1 YPF C~I- l.HE KtJJlllH1MIN,\

No. kklILUINti;&‘ClJl’AN(‘Y
, 1

l ype o! water Supply t%lrnp Capauty

mstallatlon , - - -
’ U n d e r ? Tarracr -Nrarthe Cl ndrr- At the Terrace
ground Starlc I anh Kround Static Level
Tank .i an k

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

4) At-love 35 nl One WC1 ilSel’-CUl”- I50 uuo NII i) 2 4otJ htrcs per Nil
u, kelght but downcw,ncr per hires mtn311e gwmg a
not exceed- 1 000 m’. lloor area. prrbaulr not les2
mg W rn. ‘Ihe riser shall b e than 0.3 N’, mm’.
fully charged wnh I he pump pro-
adqua!r prtslure vided wdl be of
at all times, .md mulrl-at;cg!c 1ype
shall be automatic with suction a n d
lls operation. delivery sues
not ic>s than I5 cm
dla with low kvel
riser up to 10
storcys and high
level riser deli-
veiy lor upper
Iloors.

ii) A standby pump

ol equal capacity
shall be provi-
ded on alter-
nallve source
of supply
5) Above 6U m One wei r*ser-cum- 2w wu Nil i) 2 400 litres per Nil
in height but downcomer per htres minute giving a
not exceed- I WJ m2 floor area. pressure not less
ing 92 m I he riser shall be than 0.3 N/mm*.
fully charged with The pump pro-
adequate pressure vided will be of
at all times, and multi-stage type
shall be automatic with suction and
in opcratlon. delivery WCS
not less than I5 cm
dia with low level
riser up to I5
storeys and hrgh
level riser deli-’
very for upper
floors.
ii) A standby pump
of equal capacity
shaJl be provi-
ded on alter-
native source
of supply
6) Above 92 m One wet Tlser-cum- 250 000 Nil i) 2 400 litres Nil
in height downcomer per htrcs pier, mmute
I WO m* floor gwmg a pressure
area. The riser shall not less than
be fully charged 0.3 N/mm’.
with adequate prcs- The pump provi-
sure at all times. ded will be of
and shall be automa- multi-stage type
tic tn operation. with suction and
delivery sizes
not less than
I5 cm dia with
low level
riser up to
I5 storeys and
high level
riser delivery

N A T I O N A L BUIUMNC CODE W WDIA

 TABLE 3 TYPICAL FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS/REQUIREhlENTS- Conrd

SL T YPE OF THF REQUIREMENTS

No. BUILDIHG/~KUPANCY
, A .
Type of Water Supply Pump Capacity
installation A
Under- Tarrace Near the Under- At the Terrao?
ground Static Tank ground Static Level
(1) (2) (3) T#k (5) Tf#k (7)

for upper
noors up to
60 m. Anotha
pump of equal
performance with
a break tank
of IZoo
litres capa-
city at 75 m
level and set
of ball valves
lo supply
the tank with
at least 2 400
litres per
minute from the
first pump.
Alternatively, a
multistage,
multi-outlet
pump may be
Installed.
ii) A standby
pump of equal
capacity shall
be provided on
alternative
source of supply.
b) One or IWO
,fomr!r @vote
dwellmp (A -2)
ond oportmenr
houses (/7ors)
(A-4)
I) up to I5 rn Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil
in height

Note-One
or two family
private dwel-
lmg ahove
I5 m in
hieght shall
not be per-
mltted

2) Above ISm One wet riser-cum- Nil 10 ooo Nil 450 litres per
in height but downcomer with litres
not exceed- provision of fire
ing 24m. service inlet
only near ground at the topmoat
level per I 000 m’ hydrant.
floor area

3) Above 24 m
in height but
not exceed-
ing 35 m
-with shop- One wet riser-cum- 50 000 20 000 I 800 litres par 9O(j litra pa mioute
pmg area up downcomer per lilres litm minute giving a giving a pfesurc
lo 250 m2 I 000 m* floor area. preuurc not I? not 3ar thr
and res- The riser shall be than 0.3 N/mm 0.3 N/mm at the
tricting the fully charged with at the topmost topmou hydrant.
shopping adequate pressure hydrant.

PART IV FIRE PROTECTION

 T A B L E 3 T Y P I C A L F I R E F I G H T I N G INSTALLATIONS~REQUIREMENTS- Conld

!sL T YPE OF THE R~OUIKEMEMS

No. B U I L D I N G ! OCC~JPANCY
1

Type of Water Supply Pump Capacity

installation l

Under- Tarrace Near the Under- At the Terrace

ground Static Tank ground Static Level
Tank Tank

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

areas to at all times. and shall
the ground be automatic in
floor only. operation.
-with shop- One wet riser-cum- 100 000 20 006 2 400 litres per 900 litres per minute
ping area downcorner per lit rcs litres minute giving a giving a pressure not
exceeding I 000 m’ floor area. pressure not less less than 0.3 N/mm”
250 m.‘. The riser shall be than 0.3 N mm- at the topmost
fully charged with at the topmost hydrant.
adequate pressure hydrant.
at all times. and shall
be automatic in
operation.
4) Above 24 m One wet riser-cum- 50 000 20 000 I 800 litres per 450 litres per minute
in height but downcomer per lures litres minute giving’s giving a pressure not
not exceed- I 000 m’ floor area. pressure not less less than 0.3 N, mm’
ing 45 m. The riser shall be the 0.3 Nj mm’ at at the topmost
fully charged wtth the topmost hydrant.
adequate pressure hydrant.
at all times. and shall
be automatic in
operatton.
5) Above 45 m One wet riser-cum- 109000 20 000 2 400 litres per 900 litres per minute
in height but downcomer per In res lrtres mtnutr giving a giving a pressure not
not exceed- I 000 m’ floor pressure not less less than 0.3 N; mm*
ing 60 m. area. The riser shall than 0.3 N mm- at the topmost
be fully charged with at the topmost hydrant.
adequate pressure hydrant.
at all times, and
shall be automattc
in operation.
6) Above 60 m One wet riser-cum- I50 000 20 000 2 400 litres per 900 litres per minute
in heignt but downcomer per lit res lnres minute giving a giving a pressure
not exceed- I 000 m’ floor pressure not less not less than
ing 92 m. area. The riser shall than 0.3 Ni mm- 0.3 N/ mm2 at the
be fully charged at the topmost topmost hydrant.
with adequate pre- hydrant. The pump
ssure at all times. provided should be
and shall be auto- of multistage type
matic in operatton. with suction and
N OTE -Apart- delivery sizes not
ment houses less than I5 cm dia
(flats) above with low level riser
92 m shall not up to I5 storeys
be permitted. and high level riser
delivery for upper
floors.

ii) Educotionol (B) and

Instirulional (C)
Buildings
a) UptoISmin Nil 50 000 Nil Nil Nil
height litres

b) Above I5 m in One wet riser-cum- Nil 20 000 Nil 450 litra per minute
height but not downcomer per litres giving a pressure not
exceeding 24 m. I 000 m2 floor area. less than 0.3 N/mm’
The riser shall be at the topmost
fully charged with hydrant.
adequate pressure at
all times and shall
be rutomatic in
opefrtion.

( Conrinuedj

NATIONAL. l UlwFlC CODE OF WdA

 ~~-
TABLE 3 TYPICAL FIRE FIGHTING lNSTALLATIONS/REQUlREMENTS- &t&
SL T YPE OF THE R EQUIREMENTS
No. BUILDING/OCCUPANCY
1
Type of Water Supply Pump Capacity
installation m , A ,
Near the Under- At the Terraa
ground Static Tank ground Static LCVCI
Tank Tank

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

c) Above 24 m in One wet riaer-cum- 1OOcilO 20000 i) 2 400 litrcs per 900 litres per minute
height but not downcomer per litres litres minute giving a giving a pressure not
exceeding 35 m. I Ooo m2 floor pressun not less less than 0.3 N/mm2
area. The riser shall than 0.3 N/mm’. at the topmost
be fully charged with The pamp hydrant.
NOTE - Educa- adequate pressure at provided shall
tional and insti- all times and shall be be of multistage
tutional build- automatic in opera7 type with suction
ings above 35m tion. and delivery
in height shall sizes not less than
not be permitted. 15 cm dia with low
level riser up to 10
storeys and high
level riser ddi-
very for upper
floors.
ii) A standby pump
of qua1 capacity
shall be provided
on alternative
source of supply.
iii) Assemh~.v (D) Build-
ings

a) Up 10 15 m in Nil 50 000 Nil Nil Nil

height litres
b) Above I5 m in One wet riser-cum- 100000 2 $I0 litreT per sp9 litres per minute
height but not downcomer per litres ‘?tI r? mmute glvtng a lvmg a pressure noI
exceeding 24 m. I 000 m’ floor pressure not less fess than 0.3 N/mm
area. The riser shall than 0.3 N/mm’ at the topmost hydrant.
be fully charged with ,
the topmost hydrant.
adequate pressure at
all times. and shall be
automatic in opera-
tion.
c) Above 24 m in One wet riser-cum- 100 000 20 ooo i) 2 400 litres per 900 litres per minute
height but not downcomer per litres litres minute giving a giving a pressure not
exceeding 35 m. I 000 m’ floor area. pressure not less less than 0.3 N/mm2
The riser shall be fully than 0.3 N/mm*. at the topmost
charged with ade- The pump pro- hydarant.
quate pressure at all vided will be of
times, and shall be multi-stage type
automatic in with suction and
operation. delivery sizes not
NOTE ~- less than I5 cm
Assembly build- dia with low level
ings above 35 m riser up lo IO
in height shall storeys and high
not be per- level riser delivery
mitted. for upwr floors.
ii) A standby pump
of qua1 capacity
shall be provided
on alternative
source of supply.
iv) BMness (I?) h&r-
conrile (F) ond Iw-
dusrrital (6)
B&&W@
a) Up lo I5 m in Nil 50000 Nil Nil Nil
height litres
(Continued)

?ART IV F I R E NtOTECTlON w-1

 TABLE 3 TYPICAL FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS;REQUIREMENTS- Conrd

SL T YPE OF THE R EQUIREMENTS

No. BU~LDING/O~CUPANCY
, \
Type of Water Supply Pump Capacity

instdlatiOn 7IzfYz ’ Near the Under- At the Terrace

ground Static Tank ground Static Level
Tank Tank

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7

b) Above I5 m in One wet riser-cum- 100000 20 000 2 400 litres per 900 litres per minute
height but not downcomer per litres litres minute giving a giving a pressure not
exceeding 24 m. I 000 m* floor area. pressure not !ess less than 0.3 N/mm’
The riser shall be fully than 0.3 N/mm’ at at the topmost
charged with ade- the topmost hydrant.
quate pressure at all hydrant
times, and shall be at
automatic in opera-
tion.
c) Above 24 m in One wet riser-cum- 1ooooo 20 000 i) 2 400 litres per 900 litres per minute
height but not downcomer per litres litres minute giving a giving a pressure not
exceeding 35 m. I 000 m’ floor area. pressure not less, less than 0.3 N/mm’
The riser shall’be fully than 0.3 N/mm- at the topmost
charged with ade- The pump provi- hydrant.
quate pressure at all ded will be of
tima, and shallbe at multi-stage type
automatic in opera- with suction and
tion. delivery sires not
less than 15 cm
dia with low level
riser up to IO
storeys and high
level riser deliv-
ery for upper
floors.
ii) A standby pump
of equal capacity
shall be povided
on alternative
source of supply.

d) Above 35 m in One wet riaer-cum- l50000
height but not downcomer per
exceeding 60 m. I Ooo m* floor area.
The riser shall be fully
charged with adc-
quate pressure at all
ttmea. and shah be
automatic in opera-
tion.
Nil i) 2 400 litres per Nil
litres minute giving a
pressure not less
than 0.3 N/mm’.
The pump provi-
ded will be of
multi-stage type
with suction and
delivery sizes not
less than I5 cm dia
with low level
riser up to IO
rtoreys and high1
evel delivery for
upper floors.
ii) A standby pump
of equal capacity
shall be provided
on alternative
source of supply.

e) Above 60 m in One wet riser-cum- 2fK) 000 Nil i) 2 400 litres per Nil
height but not downcomer per litres minute giving a
exceeding 92 m. I Ooo m* floor area. pressure not less
The riser shall be fttllv than 0.3 N/mm’
charged with ade- ‘The pump provi-
quate pressure at a11 ded will be of
ttmes, and shall be multi-stage type
automatic in opera- with suction and
tion. delivery sixes not
less than I5 cm
dia with low kvel

(Conrinued)

NATtDNAL. BUIWNC CODa OF INDIA

 TABLE 3 TYPICAL FIRE F I G H T I N G
SL TYPE OF THE
NO. BIJILDISU/~CCUPASCY
Type of
installation ,
ground Static
(1) (2)
f) Above 92 m in One wet riser-cum- 250 ow
height downcomer per
I 000 m’floor ara.
The riser shall be fully
charged with ado
quate pressure at all
times, and shall be
automatic in opera-
tion.
VI Storage (If) md
Hazarabus Q&it&
ings
a) Upto 15min One wet riser-cum- 100000
height downcomer per
I 000 m’floor area.
The riaet shall be fully
charged with ade-
quate pressure at all
tunes, and shall be
automatic in opcra-
tion.
NOTE-Hazardous
buildings above
IS tn in height
sziytlmt be per-
?Mt IV I’IRI PitOlUTKlN
INSTALLATIONS/REQUIREMENTS- Conrd
R EQUIREMENTS
Water Supply Pump Capacity
Under- Tarrace Near the Under- At the Terrace’
Tank ground Static LCVCI
Tank Tank
(4) (5) (6) (7)
riser up to I5
storeys and high
level riser delivery
for upper fIoors.
ii) A standby pump of
equal capacity
shall be provided
on alternative
source of supply.
Nil i) 2 400 litres per Nil
litres minute giving a
pressure not less
than 0.3 N!mm’.The
pump provided
will be of multi-
stage type with
suction and deli-
very sizes not less
than I5 cm dia
with low level riser
up to I5 storeys
and high level riser
delivery for upper
floors up to 60 tn.
Another pump of
equal perfor-
mance with a
tank of I? 000
litres capacity at
75 m level and a
set of ball valves to
supply the tank
with at least 2 400
litres per miriute
from the first
pump. Alterna-
tively. a multi-
stage, multi-outlet
pump may be
installed.
ii) A standby pump
of equal capacity
shall be provided
on alternative
source of supply.
20 ooo I 800 litres per 450 litres per minute
litms litres minute giving a giving a pressure not
pressure not kss kss than 0.3 N/mm’
than 0.3 N/mm’at at the topmat
the topmost hydrant.
hydrant
(Continued)
d9
 TABLE 3 TYPICAL FIRE FIGHTING INS1 AL.1.A.I-IONS,‘KEOl’IKEMENl’S- (‘onId

Sr 7’YPF Ot THE Kt~l.IKFM1-sI~

No. Br:ILl~!hl;!‘~-CIJPANCY
-----__ --_-_ 9
Type of Water :iupply I’ump C‘ap‘raty
i n s t a l l a t i o n _ ,--fl- 1
Lndrr- I arrace Ircear the Under- At the Terrace
ground Static Tank ground Starrc 1 eve1
Tank Tank

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

b) Ahnve 15 m in One wet rirer-cum- 100 000 20 000 2 400 lures per t/(K) lnrrs per mmule
help’zt but not downcomer per litres lures minute gtvmg a giving a pressure not
c*.cced:r;)r 24 “1. I 00 m’ floor area. pressure not iehs less than 0.3 N, mm
%c riser chall he fully !han 0.3 N mm.’ at at the topmost
charged with adc- the topmost hydrant.
qurte pressure at all hydrant.
times. and shall bc
automdttc in opera-
tion.
Norr-Storage
buildin@ above
24 m m hetqht
shall not be per-
mitted.
No?t I - Where more than one riser is requtred because of large floor area, the quantity of water recommended in this
table shal! be proportionately Increased.

NOPE 2 -- Any of the above categories may mcorporate an automatic sprinkler! drencher system. rf the risk 15: such that it
requires installation ofsuch protective methods. Wheresprinkleridrcncher system is installed, water requuementsforsuch
installations shall be in addition to those indicated in this Table.

Notr: 3 - A minimum of tw’o hydrants shalt be provided withm the courtyard.

NATE 4 ~- Wet riser-cumdowncomer is an arrangrment for fire ftghting wtthin the buildmg by means of vertical rtsing
mains no! IA\ than IO0 mm internal dia wtth hydrant outlets and hose rcei on each floor/ landing connected to a terrace
!ank for fire fighting purpose, through a booster pump, check valve and a non-return valve near the tank-end and a fire
pump, gate and non-return valve, over the underground static tank. AYtre servtcc tnlet at ground level fitted wtth a non-
return valve shall also be provided to the rising mam for charging it by fire services pump in case of failure of static fire
pump over the underground static tanks.

NOTE 5 - The performance of pumps specified above shail be at revolutions per mmutc not exceeding 3 000.

NOI t 6 -- 7 he terrace tank and pttrnp need not be provtded if theautomatic pump at ground level can be maintained lo the
satisfaction of the !ocal fire brigade.
NOTF 7 - The above quantities of water shall be exclustvely for fire fightmg and shall not be utilized for domestrc or other
use.
Norm 8 ~-~ Size of the riser shail be as under (in:ernal diameter):

a ) Aparrmenr lroust~~

i) up to 45 m -- 100 mm with single! twin hydrant outlet and hose reel on each lloor.

ii) above 45 to SS m - IS0 mm with twin hydrant outlets and hose reel on each floor.

iii) above 85 to 165 m - 200 mm with twm hydrant ou:iets and hose reel on each floor.

b) Buildings orher rhon opar!mennr houses

9 up to 24 m - 100 mm with singfe/twm hydrant outlet and hose reel on each floor.

tt) above 24 to 85 m - 150 mm with twin hydrant outlets and hose reel on each floor.

iii) above 85 m to 165 m - 200 mm with twin hydrant outlets and hose reel on each floor.

Nor E 0 -- A facility to boost up water pressure in the riser directly from the mobile pump shall also be provided on the wet
riser system with a suitable fire service inlets (collecting head with 2 numbers of 63 mm inlets for IOOmm risingmainand4
numbers of 63 mm in!ets with check valves for 150 mm dia rising main) with check valve and a gate valve.
NOTE 10 -- Internal diameter of rubber hose for hose reel shall be minimum I2 mm. A shut-off branch with nozzle of5 mm
size shall be provided.
I% IE I I - An arrangement of alternative source of power supply shall be provided to drive pumps, etc,in case of failure of
normal power supply.
No~t I2 - For typical layout of wet riser-eumdowncomer and wet riser installations. see Fig. I to 5.

w20 NATIONAL NILMNC CODE OF tNOlA

 rAIR_ R E L E A S E
I VALVE
CHECK
VA LV E,
.NON-RETURN
VALVE
S E R V I C E - -
INLET 1177
Fig. I Typical Arrangement of Wet Riser- cum-Downcomerfor Apartment Houses Above I5 m
hut not Exceeding 24 m in Height
6.10.4 In addition to wet riser wet riser-
cum-downcomer. first-aid hose reels shall be
installed on all the floors of buildings above
15 m and shall conform to accepted standards
[IV( I I)]. The first-aid hose reel shall be
connected to one of the female couplingsof
twin couplings of landing valves of the wet
riser installations by means of adapter.
6.10.5 ST A T I C W A T E R S T O R A G E T A N K S- A
satisfactory supply of water for the purpose of
fire fighting shall always be available in the
form of underground static storage tank with
capacity specified for each building with
arrangements of replenishment by main or
alternative source of supply at the rate of I 000
litres per minute. When this is not practicable,
PART IV F I R E PROTECTION
TERRACE TANK FOR
FIRE FIGHTING/DOMESTIC
SUPPLY
the capacity of static storage tank(s) shall be
increased proportionately in consultation
with the local fire brigade.
The static storage water supply required for
the above-mentioned purpose shall entirely be
accessible to the fire engines of the local fire
service. Provision of suitable number of
manholes shall be made available for
inspection, repairs and insertion of suction
hose, etc. The covering slab shall be able to
withstand the vehicular load of I8 tonnes.
The domestic suction tank connected to the
static water storage tank shall have an
overflow capable of discharging 2250 litres
per minute to a visible drain point from which
,v?l

AIR RELEASE
VALVE
FIRE SERVICE
CHECK VALVE
Fig. 2 Typic01 Arrangement of Wet Riser- cum-Downcomer for Apartment Houses Exceeding
24 m in Height
by a separate conduit the overflow shall be
conveyed to a storm water drain.
4 To prevent stagnation of water in the
static water storage tank, the suction tank
of the domestic water supply shall be fed
only through an overflow arrangement to
maintain the level therein at the minimum
specified capacity (see Fig. 6).
b) The static water storage tank shall be
provided with a fire brigade collecting
breaching with 4 number 63 mm dia (2
number 63 mm dia for pump with capacity
I 400 litres, minute) instantaneous male
IV-
22
TERRACE TANK FOR
FIRE FIGHTING/
SLUICE AND
CHECK VALVE
rPUMP
UNOER-
TANK
mlets arranged in a valve box at a suitable
point at street level and connected to the
static tank by a suitable fixed pipe not less
than 15 cm in dia to discharge water into
the tank when required at the rate of
2250 litres per minute.
6.10.6 A UTOMATIC SPRINKLERS-Automatic
sprinklers shall be installed in:
a) basements used as car parks or for
storage occupancy, if the area exceeds
200 m-.
b) multi-level basements used as car parks,
and for housing essential services
NATIONAL l Ull.DlNC CODE OF WDIA

FLOOR 9
11 m
-SLUICE AND
CHECK V&VE
URN
CHECK VALVE
TANK
Fig. 3 7jpical Arrangement of Wet-Riser
System for Buildings other than Apartment
Houses Abo\,e 35 m in Height
ancillary to a particular occupancy or for
storage occupancy.
cl any room or other compartment of a
building exceeding 500 m’ except as in (g)
(see Note).
4 departmental stores or shops, if, the
aggregate floor area exceeds 750 m‘.
e) all non-domestic floors of mixed
occupancy which constitute a hazard and
are not provided with staircases
independent of the remainder of the
buildings.
godowns and warehouses as considered
necessary.
on all floors of tkbuildings other than
residential buildings, if the height of the
building exceeds 45 m (see Note).
h) dressing rooms, scenery docks, stages and
stage basements of theatles.
?MT N PIRL PROlUXION
AIR RELEASE
f VALVE
BALL VALVE
F L O O R 14
FLOOR 9
FLOOR 3
Fig. 4 Topical Arrangement qf Wet Riser
System for Buildings other than Apartment
Houses above 35 m in Height
NOTE -- It is desirable that all high rise building should
be fully sprinklered irrespective of their heI ht and
occupancy. If selective sprinklering is adopted. t1 ere IS a
real danger of a fire starting on one of the lower
unsprinklered floors gathering momentum spreading
upwards from floor to floor through the unsprinklacd
floor and reaching the first sprinklered floor as a fully
developed fire. In such an event, the sprinklers can be
rendered useless/ ineffective.
6.10.7 AUTOMATIC H IGH V ELOCITY W A T E R.
S PRAY OR E MULSIFYING S YSTEM - A u t o -
matic high velocity water spray or emulsifying
system shall be provided for protection of
indoor transformers as applicable in
accordance with A-1.16 of Appendix A,
and I I .20 of accepted standards [ lV( l2)]
6.10.8 F IXED F OAM INSTALLATION -Fixed
foam generating system shall be provided for
protection of boiler rooms with its ancillary
storage of furnace oils in basement.
We23

LEVEL
TANK
Fig. 5 Typical Alternate Arrangement of
Wet Riser System for Buildings other than
Apartment Houses Above 35 m in Height
6,10.9 CA R B O N D I O X I D E F IRE E X T I N G U I -
SHING S YSTEM -Fixed carbon dioxide fire
extinguishing installation shall be provided in
accordance with good practice [IV( 13)] on
premises where water or foam can not be used
for fire extinguishing because of the special
nature of the contents of the buildings/areas
to be protected. For some special fire risk,
carbon dioxide may not be suitable and it may
be necessary to provide BCF(Bromochloro-
difluoromethane) - Halon 1 21 I or BTM
(Bromochlorotrifluoromethane) - Halon
1 301. These types of installations may be
provided instead of carbon dioxide
installation. The use of these types of
installations should, however, be restricted to
cases where it is unavoidable because
chemicals are not available indigenously.
6.10.10 Fire fighting equipement shall be
suitably located and clearly marked by
illuminated signs, wired to an independent
electrical circuit on an alternate source of
supply.
NOTF - This provision shall not apply to occupancies
A-.? and A-4 up to I5 m in height.
,“34
6.11 Air-Conditioning and Ventilation -Air-
conditioning and ventilation requirements of
different rooms/areas in any occupancy shall
be as given in Part VIII Building services,
Section 1 Lighting and ventilation and
Section 3 Air-conditioning and heating.
6.11.1 Air-conditioning and ventilating
systems shall be so installed and maintained as
to minimize the danger of spread of fire,
smoke or fumes thereby from one floor or fire
area to another, or from outside into any
occupied building or structure (seeA-1.17)
6.11.2 Air-conditioning and ventilating
systems circulating air to more than one floor
or fire area shall be provided with dampers
designed to close automatically in case of fire
and thereby prevent spread of fire or smoke.
Such a system shall also be provided with
automatic controls to stop fans in case offire,
unless arranged to remove smoke from a fire,
in which case these shall be designedto remain
in operation.
6. J I .3 Air-conditioning system serving large
places of assembly (over IO00 persons), large
departmental stores or hotels with over 100
rooms in a single block shall be provided with
effective means for preventing circulation of
smoke through the system in the case of a fire
in air filters or from other sources drawn into
the system even though there is insufficient
heat to actuate heat sensitive devices
controlling fans or dampers. Such means shall
consist of approved photo-electric or other
effective smoke sensitive controls, or if
approved by the Authority, ma be manually
operated controls ?n cases wITere qualified
personnel responstble for operation of
controls are continuously on duty while the
premises are occupied.
6.12 Smoke Venting
6.12.1 Smoke venting facilities, where
required for safe use of exits in windowless
buildings, underground structures, large area
factories or where required by other
provisions of the Code, shall be automatic in
action.
612.2 Natural draft smoke venting shall
utilize roof vents or vents in walls atOr near
the ceiling level; such vents shall be normally
open, or, if closed, shall be designed for
automatic opening in case of fire, by release of
heat sensitive elements, such as fusible links;
breakage of glass, or melting of pbstk Under
the influence of heat; or by other approved
means.
6.123 Where smoke venting facilities are
installed for purposes of exit safety in
accordance with the requirements of the
Code, these shall be adequate to prevent
NATIONAL UllLDlNG CODE OF INDIA
 PRIME
MOVER FIRE PUMP

.SUCT ION

OVERFLOW
-I AND VENT
TOWN
MAIN SUPPLY
G.L ___---.I G.L.
//I\_
.- - - - -
/SEPARATION WALL

,/DOMESTlC
WATER SUPPLY
TANK (OTHER THAN
DRINKING WATER I

:OOT VALVES

6A With Negative Suction

DOMESTIC WATER
SUPPLY TANK
(OTHER THAN
DRINKING WATER 1

FIRE
FIGHTING
SLUICE TANK
VALVE -, SLUICE VALVE
i
TO -
DOMESTIC FIRE
PUMP SUCTION
I CLC M1”ll.V
‘RIME
HOLE WITH
BOLTED COVER

G.L.
I .*, .

68 With Positive Suction

Fig. 6 Typical Arrangementfor Providing Combined Fire Fighting and Domestic Water Storage
Tank

?AllT IV FIRE PROTECTION *V-25

dangerous accumulation of smoke during the
period of time necessary to evacuate the area
served, using available exit facilities with a
margin of safety to allow for unforeseen
contingencies. It is recommended that smoke
exhaust equipment should have a capacity of
approximately a 5-min air change. Where
mechanical venting is employed, it shall be
firesafe.
6.12.4 The discharge apertures of all natural
draft smoke vents shall be so arranged as to be
readily susceptible to opening by fire service
personnel.
6.12.5 Power operated smoke exhausting
systems may be substituted for natural draft
vents only by specific permission of the
Authority.
6.13 Hearing-Installation of chimney and
heating apparatus shall conform to good
practice [IV( 14)].
6.14 SpeAal Hazards-In addition to the
factors covered by 6.2 LO 6.13 there are cetain
aspects, applicable to particular occupancies
only, which may affect the spread of fire,
smoke or fumes and thus the safe evacuation
of the building in case of fire. Some such
aspects are:
4 interior finish and decoration;
b) seating, aisles, railings and turnstiles in
places of assembly;
4 service equipment and storage facilities in
buildings other than storage buildings;
and
d) hazards on stage, in waiting spaces,
projection booths, etc, in theatres and
cinemas.
6.15 Surface Finishes
6.15.1 The use of flammable surface finishes
on walls (including external facade of the
buitding) and ceilings affects the safety of the
occupants of a building. Such finishes tend to
spread the fire and even though the structural
elements may be adequately fire resistant,
serious danger to life may result. It is,
therefore, essential to have adequate
precautions to minimize spread of flame on
wall, facade of building and ceiling surfaces.
The finishing materials used for various
surfaces and decor shall be such that the flame
spread rating shall not be more than the values
given in 6.15.2 and in addition shall not
generate toxic smoke/fumes.
6.15.2 The susceptibility to fire of various
types of wall surfaces is determined in terms of
the rate of spread of fire. Based upon the rate
of spread of fire, surfacing materials shall be
,,L26
considered as divided into four classes as
follows:
CLASS I SURFACES OF VERY L O W F L A M E
SPREAD -Those surfaces on which not more
than 19 cm effective spread of flame occurs.
CLASS 2 SURFACES OF L O W F L A M E
SPREAD-Those surfaces on which the
effective spread of flame neither exceeds 30
cm during the first 1.5 min nor exceeds a final
value of 60 cm.
CLASS 3 SURFACES OF MEDIUM FLAME
SPREAD-Those surfaces on which the
effective spread of flame neither exceeds
30 cm‘ during the first 1.5 min nor exceeds
85 cm during the first 10 min.
C L A S S 4 SURFACES OF RAPID FLAME
SPREAD-Those surfaces on which the
effective spread of flame exceeds 30 cm during
the first 1.5 min or exceeds 85 cm during the
first 10 min.
6.1.5.3 The situation under which materials
falling into various classes shall be used in
building construction is given below:
Class I Class 2 Class 3
May be used bay be used Should be used
in any situ- in any situ- only in living
ation ation, except rooms and bed-
on walls, rooms (but not
facade of the in rooms on the
building and roof) and only
ceilings of as a lining to
staircases and solid walls and
corridors partitions. Not
on staircases
or corridors
or facade of
the building
NOTE - Panelling (lining) shall be permitted in a limited
area. It shall not be permitted in a vestibule.
6.1.5.4 Materials of Class 4 which include
untreated wood fibre-boards may be used as
ceiling lining, provided the ceiling is at least
2.4 m from the top surface of the floor below,
and the wall surfaces conform to requirements
of Class [see Note under 6.15.31. Class 4
materials shall not be used in kitchens,
corridors and staircases. Some types contain
bitumen and, in addition to risk from spread
of fire, emit dense smoke on burning; such
materials shall be excluded from use under
these conditions and shall also not be used for
construction of ceiling where the plenum is
used for return air in air-conditioned buildings.
6.15.5 When frames, walls, partitions or
floors are lined with combustible materials,
the surfaces on both sides of the materials
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
shall conform to the appropriate class,
because there is considerable dangrr from
fire starting and rapidly spreadrng within the
concealed cavity unknown to the occupants
whose escape may he hampered there by. For
detailed information on materials and details
of construction with their fire-resistance
rating, reference may be made to accepted
standards [I V(4)].
6.16 Glazing
6.16.1 Building of Types I to 4 construction
shall employ one of the two types of glazing
described in 6.16.2 and 6.16.3 except that
Type 4 construction may have the alternative
of hardwood sashes or frames or both.
6.16.2 Wired glass shall comply with the
following requirements:
a) THICKNESS O F - G L AS S-The thickness of
glass shall be not less than 6.5 mm.
b) EMBEDDED WIRE N E T T I N G - E m b e d d e d
wire netting shall be not largerthan 2.5 cm
mesh.
c) SIZE OF SQUARES OF GLASS--The area
shall not exceed 2 500 cm’.
4 S.GHES AND FRA.M~s--T~~ s a s h e s o r
frames or both shall be entirely of iron or
other suitable metal securely bolted or
keyed into the walk except in the case of
panels in internal doors. ..
e) SETTING OF GLASS-The panels of &SS
shall be set in rebates or grooves not less
than 6.5 mm in width or depth, with due
allowance for expansion, and shall be
secured by hard metal fastenings to the
sashes or frames independently of any
lead, cement or putty used for weather-
proofing purposes.
6.16.3 Electra-copper glazing shall comply
with the following requirements:
_ shall be provided with a. minimum capacity
4 Thickness of glass shall be not less than
6.5 mm.
b) Size of squares of glass shall not exceed
100 cm’.
cl SECTIONAL LIGHTS -The square glasses
to be formed by electro-coppef glazing
into sectional lights shall not exceed
0.37 m* in area.
d)l SASHES AND FRAMES-The sashes or
frames or both shall be entirely of iron or
other hard metal, securely bolted or keyed
into the wall, except when in panels in
internal doors.
e) FIXING OF SECTIONAL LIGHTS-The
sectional lights shall be set in rebate or
?A#1 I V FMlI: ?RORCTlON
grooves not less than 6.5 mm in width or
depth, with due allowance for expansion
and shall be secured by hard metal
fastenings to the sashes or frames
independently of any lead, cement or
putty used for weather-proofing purposes.
6.16.4 No wall opening exceeding 5 m* shall
be deemed capable of efficient protection by
wired glass or electro-copper glazing.
6.16.5 CA S E M E N T - Hard metal casements,
not exceeding 0.8 m2 fitted with wired glass or
electro-copper glazing in accordance
with 6.16.2 and 6.16.3, secured to the frames
by hard metal hinges not more than 60 cm
apart and by fastenings at top, centre and
bottom shall be permissible.
6.17 Skylights
6.17.1 Wired glass for skylights or monitor
lights shall comply with the following
requirements:
4 Thickness of glass shall be not less than
6.5 mm;
b) Embedded wire netting shall be not larger
than 2.5 cm mesh;
cl F R A M E S AN D GLAZtNC--The f r a m e
shall be continuous and divided by bars
spaced at not more than 70 cm cclltres.
The frame and bars shall be of iron or
other hard metal, and supported on a
curb either-of metal or of wood covered
with sheet metal. The glass shall be
secured by hard metal fastenings to the
frame and bars independently of any
lead, cement or putty used for weather-
proofing purposes.
6.17.2 No skylight opening exceeding 5 m*
shall be deemed capable ofefficient protection
by wired glass.
6.18 fire Lifrs- Where applicable, fire lifts
for 8 passengers and fully automated with
emergency switch on ground level. In
general, buildings over 15 m in height shall be
provided with fire lifts [see ,4-1.5(q)].
6.18.1 In case of fire, only fireman shall
operate fire-lifts. In normal course, it may be
used by other persons.
6.18.2 Each fire lift shall be equipped with
suitable inter-communication equipment for
communicating with the control room on the
ground floor of the building.
6.18.3 The number and location of fire lifts in
a building shall be decided after taking into
consideration various factors like building
2
population, floor area. section of building any floor area or the occupant load shall be
(compart’mentation), etc. based on the actual number of occupants, but
in no case less than that specified in Table 4.
7. EXIT REQUIREMENTS
TAB1.F 4 OCCUPANT LOAD

SL GH0U P OF OCCUPANT
No OCCLl PAhCY LOAD. F L O O R
7.1.1 An exit may be a doorway; corridor;
A REA IN
passageway(s) to an internal staircase, or m*/ PFWSON
external staircase, or to a v e r a n d a h o r
terrace(s), which have access to the street, or (1) (2) (3)
to the roof of a building or a refuge area. An
9 Residential 12.5
exit may also include a horizontal exit
leading to an adjoining building at the same ii) Educational 4
level. iii) Institutional 158
7.1.2 Lifts and escalators shall not be iv) Assembly:
considered as exits. a) with fixed or loose seats 0.6*
and dance floors
7.2 General b) without seating facilities 1.5t
including dining rooms
7.2.1 Every building meant for human
v) Mercantile:
occupancy shall be provided with exits
sufficient to permit safe escape of occupants, a) street floor and sales 3
basement
in case of fire or other emergency.
b) upper sale floors
vi) Business and industrial 10”
7.2.2 In every building exits shall comply
w.ith the minimum requirements of this part, vii) Storage 30
except those not accessible for general public viii) Hazardous 10
use.
*Occupani load m dormitory portions of homes for the
7.2.3 All exits shall be free of obstructions. aged. orphanages. insane asylums. etc. where sleeping
accommodation is provided. shall becalculated at not less
than 7,s m’ gross floor area, person.
7.2.4 No building shall be so altered as to
reduce the number, width or protection of tThe gross floor area shall include, m addition to the
exits to less than that required. main assembly room or space1 any occupied connecting
room or space in thesame storey or in the storeys above or
below, where entrance IS common to such rooms and
7.2.5 Exits shall be clearly visible and the spaces and they are available for use by the occupants of
routes to reach the exit shall be clearly marked the assembly place. No deductions shall be made in the
and sign posted to guide the population of the gross area for corridors. closets or other subdivisions; the
floor concerned. Signs shall be illuminated areashall includeall spaceserving the particular assembly
occupancy.
and wired to an independent electrical circuit
on an alternative source of supply.
7.3.1 M E Z Z A N I N E -The occupant load of a
NOTE-This provision shall not apply to A-2 and A-4
occupancies up to I5 m in height. mezzanine floor discharging to a floor below
shall be added to that floor occupancy and the
7.2.6 Where necessary, adequate and reliable capacity of the exits shall be designed for the
illumination shall be provided for exits. total occupancy load thus established.

7.2.7 Fire-resisting doors (see 6.6.1) shall be 7.4 Capacir,, of Exits

provided at appropriate places along the
escape routes to prevent spread of fire and
smoke, and particularly at the entrance to lifts
and stairs where a ‘funnel or flue effect’may be
created, inducing an upward spread of fire.
7.2.8 All exits shall provide continuous
means of egress to the exterior of a building or
to an exterior open space leading to a street.
7.2.9 Exits shall be so arranged that they may
be reached without passing through another
occupied unit.
7.3 Occupant Load-For determining the
exits required. the number of persons within
7.4.1 The unit of exit width, used to measure
the capacity of any exit, shall be 50 cm. A
clear width of 25 cm shall be counted as an
additional half unit. Clear widths less than
25cm shall not be counted for exit width.
7.4.2 Occupants per unit exit wid,th shall be in
accordance with Table 5.
7.4.3 H ORIZONTAL E XIT A L L O W A N C E -
When horizontal exit is provided in buildings
of mercantile, storage, industrial, business
and assembly occupancies, the capacity per
storey per unit width of exit of stairways in

l”-28 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

Table 5 may be increased by 50 per cent; and requirement of different occupancies in
in buildings of institutio-nal occupancy it may 8 to 16.
be increased by 100 percent.
7.6.2 All buildings which are more than 15 m
in height and all buildings used as
TABLE 5 OCCUPANTS PER UNIT EXIT WIDTH educational, assembly, institutional,
SL. GROUP OF N U M B E R OF;OCCUPANTS industrial, s t o r a g e a n d h a z a r d o u s
No. O C C U P A N C Y ‘Stairways Ramps Doors‘ occupancies and mixed occupancies with any
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) of the aforesaid 1 occupancies. having area
9 Residential 25 50 75 more than 500 m- on each floor shall have a
25 50 75
minimum of two staircases. They shall be of
ii) Educational
enclosed type; at least one of them shall be on
iii) Institutional 25 50 75
external walls of buildings and shall open
iv) Assembly 40 50 60 directly to the exterior, interior open space or
v) Business 50 60 75 to an open place of safety. Further. the
vi) Mercantile 50 60. 75 provision or otherwise of alternative staircase
60 75
shall be subject to the requirements of travel
vii) Industrial 50
distance being complied with.
viii) Storage 50 60 75
ix) Hazardous 25 30 40 7.7 Doorways

7.5 Arrangement of Exits 7.7.1 Every exit doorway shall open into an
enclosed stairway, or a horizontal exit of a
7.5.1 Exits shall be so located that the travel corridor or passageway providing continuous
distance on the floor shall not exceed the and protected means of egress.
distance given in Table 6.
7.7.2 No exit doorway shall be less than
TABLE 6 TRAVEL DISTANCE FOR OCCUPANCY
IOOcm in width. Doorways shall be not less
ANDTYPEOFCONSTRUCTION than 200 cm in height.
SL GROUP OF 7.7.3 Exit doorways shall open outwards,
NO. OCCU PANCY
that is, away from the room, but shall not
l&2 3&4
obstruct the travel along any exit. No door,
(1) (2) (3) (4) when opened, shall reduce the required width
m m of stairway Y)r landing to less than 90 cm;
overhead or sliding doors shall not be
9 Residential 22.5 22.5
installed.
ii) Educational 22.5 22.5
iii) Institutional 22.5 22.5 NoTE-I~ the case of buildings where there is a central
corridor, the doors of roomsshall open inwards to permit
iv) Assembly 30.0 30.0 smooth flow of traffic in the corridor.
v) Business 30.0 30.0
vi) Mercantile 30.0 30.0
7.7.4 Exit door,shall not open immediately
upon a flight of stairs; a landing equal to at
vii) Industrial 45.0 30.0 least the width of the door shall be provided in
viii) Storage 30.0 30.0 the stairway at each doorway; the level of
ix) Hazardous 22.5 22.5 landing shall be the same as that of the floor
which, it serves.
7.5.2 The travel distance to an exit from the 7.7.5 Exit doorways shall be openable from
dead end of a corridor shall not exceed half the side which they serve without the useof a
the distance specified in Table 6, except in key.
educational, assembly and institutional
occupancies in which case it shall not 7.7.6 R EVOLVING D O O R S
exceed 6 m.
7.5.3 Whenever more than one exit is 7.7.6.1 Revolving doors shall not be used as
required exits, except in residential, business
required for any room space or floor of a
and mercantile occupancies, but shall not
building, exits shall be placed as remote from constitute more than half the total required
each other as possible and shall be arranged to door width. In mercantile buildings where
provide direct access in separate directions
there is a possibility of congregation of a large
from any point in the area served. number of people (more than 200), revolving
7.4 Number of Exits doors shall not be permitted.

7.6. I G E N E R A L -The general requirements 7.7.6.2 Where the revolving doors provided
of number of exits shall supplement the are completely made of glass (plate glass), a

PART IV FIRE PROTECTION ,V9

red circle or emblem or logo at 1.5 m level
above sill shall be painted on the glass. The
thickness of the glass shall be not less than
12 mm.
7.8 Corridors and Passageways
7.8.1 Exit corridors and passageways shall be
of width not less than the aggregate required
width of exit doorways leading from them in
the direction of travel to the exterior.
7.8.2 Where stairways discharge through
corridors and passageways, the height of
corridors and passageways shall be not less
than 2.4 m.
7.9 Internal Staircases
7.9.1 Interior stairs shall be constructed of
non-combustible materials throughout.
7.9.2 Interior staircase shall be constructed as
a self-contained unit with an external wall
constituting at least one of its sides and shall
be completely enclosed.
7.9.3 A staircase shall not be arranged round
a lift shaft unless the latter is totally enclosed
by a material of fire-resistance rating as that
for type of construction itself.
7.9.4 Hollow combustible construction shall
not be permitted.
7.9.5 No gas piping shall be laid in the
stairway.
7.9.6 Notwithstanding the detailed provision
for exits in accordance with 7.3, 7.4 and 7.5,
the following minimum width shall be
provided for staircases:
4 Residential buildings (dwellings) I.0 m
NorE--- For row housing with 2 storeyes, the width
shall be 0.75 tn.
b) Residential hotel buildings 1.5 m
c) Assembly buildings like
auditorium, theatres and
cinemas 1.5 m
d) Educational buildings.
i) Up to 24 m in height 1.5 m
2.0 m
ii) More than 24 m in height
e) institutional bdildings like
hospitals.
i) Up to 10 beds 1.5 m
ii) More than IO beds 2.0 m
f-l All other buildings 1.5 m
w-30
7.9.7 The minimum width of tread without
nosing shall be 25 cm for internal staircase of
residential buildings. This shall be 30 cm for
assembly, educational, institutional. business
and other buildings. The treads shall be
constructed and maintained in a manner to
prevent slipping.
7.9.8 The maximum height of riser shall be
19 cm for residential buildings and 15 cm for
other buildings and the number shall be
limited to 15 per flight.
7.9.9 Hand rails shall be provided at a
minimum height of 100 cm to be measured
from the baseofthemiddleofthetreadstothe
top of the hand rails. Further, the gap between
the two verticals shall not exceed 30 cm. This
gap shall be reduced to 15 cm where children
are likely to use the staircase.
7.9.10 The number of people in between floor
landings in staircase shall not be less than the
population on each floor for the purpose of
design of staircase.
7.10 Fire E,scapes or External Stairs
7.10.1 Fire escapes shall not be taken into
account in calculating the evacuation time of a
building.
7.102 All fire escapes shall be directly
connected to the ground.
7.10.3 Entrance to the fire escape shall be
separate and remote from the internal
staircase.
7.10.4 Care shall be taken to ensure that the
wall opening or window opens on to or close
to a fire escape.
7.10.5 The route to the fire escape shall be
free of obstructions at all times.
7.10.6 The fire escape shall be constructed of
non-combugible materials, and any doorway
leading to the fire escape shall have the
required fire resistance.
7.10.7 No staircase, used as a fire escape, shall
be inclined at an angle greater than 45” from
the horizontal.
7.10.8 Fire escape stairs shall have straight
flight not less than 75 cm wide with 2Ocm
treads and risers not more than 19 cm. The
number of risers shall be limited to 15 per
flight.
7.10.9 Hand rails shall be of a height not less
than 100 cm.
7.10.10 SPIRAL FIRE ESCAPE-The use of
spiral staircase shall be limited to low
NATIDNAL BUILDING CODE OF I N D I A
occupant load and to a building not exceeding 7.13.2 The enclosure of fire towers shall be
9 m in height unless they are connected to constructed of walls with a 4 h fire-resistance
platforms, such as balconies and terraces to rating without openings other than the exit
allow escapes to pause, doorways, with platforms, landings and
balconies of not less than 3 h fire-resistance
A spiral fire escape shall be not less than 150 ratulg.
cm in diameter and shall be designed to give
adequate headroom. 7.14 Ramps
7.1 J Roof Exit--In all buildings over three 7.14.1 Kamps shall comply with all the
storeys in height where the slope of the roof is applicable requirements for stairways
less than 20 degrees, direct access to the roof regarding enclosure, capacity and limiting
shall be provided from the street by means of a dimensions except where specified in 8 to 16
stairway. Where roofs are used as roof for special uses and occupancies.
gardens or for other habitable purposes,
sufficient stairways shall be extended to them
to provide the necessary exit facilities required 7.142 The slope of a ramp shall not exceed 1
for such occupancy. in 10. In certain cases steeper slopes may be
permitted but in no case greater than 1 in 8.
NOTE--This does not apply to A-2 and A-4 occupancies
up to 15 m m height.
7.14.3 For all slopes exceeding 1 in 10 and
wherever the use is such as to involve danger
7. I2 Horizontal Exirs of slipping, the ramp shall be surfaced with
approved non-slipping material.
7.12. J The width of horizontal exit shall be
same as for the exit doorways (see 7.7).
8. REQUIREMENTS OF
RESlDENTlAL BUILDINGS
7.12.2 A horizontal exit shall be equipped (GROUP A)
with at least one fire door of self-closing type.
8.1 In addition to the general requirements
7.12.3 Floor area on the opposite or refuge specified in 6 for the type of construction and
side of a horizontal exit shall be sufficient to occupancy group and the exit requirements
accommodate occupants of the floor areas given in 7, the requirements given in 8.2
served, allowing not less than 0.3 m2/ person. to 8.4.10 shall be complied with. The
The refuge area into which a horizontal exit capacity of any open mezzanine or balcony
leads shall be provided with exits adequate to shall be added to the capacity of the floor
meet the requirements of this part. At least below for the purpose of determining exit
one of the exits shall lead directly to the capacity.
exterior of the building or to a street.
8.2 Fire Detection/ Extiqguishing System
-The requirements specified in 8.2. J to 8.2.5
7.12.4 Where there is a difference in level shall apply to normal buildings of low rise
between connected areas fat horizontal exits, nature (up to 15 m in height). Requirements
ramps, not more than 1 in 10 in slope shall be for high rise buildings (above 15 m in height)
provided; steps shall not be used. shall be in accordance with Appendix A. For
information regarding alarm systems
7.12.5 Doors in horizontal exits shall be (see Appendix B).
openable at all times from both sides.
8.2. J O CCUPANCY S UBDIVISION A - l
LODGINC~ OR R OOMING H O U S E S
7.13 Fire Tower-Fire towers are the Fire Detec-
preferred type of escape route for storeyed Height i Area of
Occupancy tion/ Extingui-
buildings and their application shall be shing System
considered as the safest route for escape. Their
number, location and size shall depend on the a) Up to 2 storeys Not required
building concerned, and its associated escape
routes. b) 3 storeys and above
i) Area of each floor
less than 300 m*. Not required
7.13. J In every mercantile, industrial,
business, assembly buildings other than ii) Area of each floor ManuaHy opera-
theatres, institutional and residential more than 300 m* ted electric fiie
buildings, over 6 storeys or 25 m in height, at with central corri- alarm (MOEFA)
least one required means of egress shall be a dor and rooms on
fire tower. either side.

?ART IV FIRE PROTECTION ,VPl

8.2.2 O CCUPANCY SUBDIVISWN A-2 O NE OK
T w o F A M I L Y P R I V A T E DWELLINGS - Not
req u ired.
8.2.3 O C C U P A N C Y S U B DIVISION A-3
DOKMITOKIES - Requirements laid down in
8.2.1 shall be followed.
8.2.4 O C C U P A N C Y W~S~I~ISION A-4
A PARTMENT HOUSES (FLA-I S) -- Not
required.
8.2.5 O C C U P A N C Y S UBDIVISION A-5 H O - I - E L
-Manually operated fire alarms and a u t o -
matic fire alarm systems shall be provided if a
building has more than 2 storeys; or if the
area per floor exceeds 300 m2. Where the
entire building is sprinklered, the automatic
detectors may not be required.
8.3 Exit Facilities
8.3.1 In a d d i t i o n t o reqwements f o r
occupancy Subdivision A-2 (see 8.3.2). the
following shall be provided for occupancy
Subdivision A-l:
4 Every sleeping room above the street !loor
shall have access to two separate means of
exit, at least one of which shall consist of
an enclosed interior stairway or a n
exterior stairway, or a fire escape or
horizontal exit all so arranged as to
provide a safe path of travel to the outside
of the building without traversing any
corridor or space exposed to an
unprotected vertical opening.
b) Any sleeping room below the street floor
shall have direct access to the outside of
the building.
8.3.2 For occupancy Subdivision A-2 of
more than two rooms, every occupied room,
excluding areas used solely for storage, shall
have at least two means of exit, at least one of
which shall be a door or a stairway providing a
means of unobstructed travel to the outsid’e of
the building or street or grade level and not
more than one of which may be a window. No
room or space shall be occupied which is
accessible only by a ladder, folding stairs or
through a trap door. The following further
provisions shall be made:
a) All locking devices which would impede
or prohibit exit, such as chain type bolts,
limited opening sliding type locks and
burglar locks which are not disengaged
easily by quick-releasing catches, shall be
prohibited. All closet door latches shall be
such that even children may open the
doors from inside. All bathroom door
locks or fasteners shall be designed t o
I”?*
permit the opening of the locked or closed
door from the outside in an emergency
without the use of a special key.
b) Every below-street-level sleeping room
shall have direct access to the outside of
the building.
8.3.3 For occupancy Subdivision A-3, the
following provisions shall apply:
All dormitories, except those mentioned
at 8.3.5, shall ha.ve exits so arranged that,
from any sleeping room or open aormitory
sleeping area, there shall be access to two
separate and distinct exits in different
directions with no common path of travel
unless the room or space is subject to
occupancy by not more than 10 persons and
has a door opening directly to the outside of
the building at street or grade level, or to an
outside stairway in which case one means of
exit may be accepted.
8.3.4 For occupancy Subdivision A-4, the
following provisions shall apply:
4 Every individual living unit covered by
occupancy Subdivision A-4 shall comply
with the requirements for occupancy
Subdivision A-2 in respect of exit.
b) Every living unit shall have access to at
least two separate exits which are remote
from each other and are reached by travel
iii different directions, except that a
common path of travel may be permitted
for the first 6m (that is, a dead-end
corridor up to 6m long may be
permitted) provided that single exit may
be permitted under any of the conditions
given under(c).
c) Any building not more than two storeys in
height with no basement, or in case there is
a basement and with street floor level not
more than 2.5 m above grade at any point
next to the building, excluding driveways,
not more than 10 percent of the perimeter
shall be subject to the condition that the
access to the basement is only from the
exterior of the building if the basement
contains a heating plant, group storage,
ineinerator room or paint shop or other
hazardous occupancy.
4 At least half of required exits shall
discharge. direct to the outside of the
buildings; any other exits shall be the same
as required for hotels.
8.3.5 For occupancy Subdivision A-5, the
following provisions shall apply:
a) Not less than two exits, as remote from
each other as practicable, shall be
NATIONAL WIlJlING CODE OF INDIA
 accessible from every floor, including
basements occupied for hotel purposes,
except as a single exit as permitted in (b)
below. Exits and ways of access thereto
shall be so arranged that they are
accessible in at least two different
directions from every point in any open
area, or from any room door.
b) Any room or section with an outside door
at street or grade level may have such
outside door as a single exit, provided no
part of the room or area is more thanI5 m
from the door measured along the natural
path of travel.
8.3.5.1 Where stairways or other exits serve
two or more upper floors, the same stairway
or other exit required to serve any one upper
floor may also serve other upper floors, except
that no inside open stairway or ramp may
serve as a required egress facility from more
than one floor.
N O T E-Under this provision, if the second and third
floors were each required to have three stairways. the
second floor may use thestairways servingthe third floor,
so that thetotal number ofstairways required is three. not
six.
8.3.6 B ASEMENT EXITS
8.3.6.1 Basements occupied for hotel
purposes shall have exits arranged in
accordance with 8.3.5.
8.3.6.2 Basement exits shall be sufficient to
provide for the capacity of the basement as
determined in accordance with 8.1; in no case
shall there be less than two independent
basement exits.
8.3.6.3 Basements or sub-basements not open
to the public and used only for heating
equipment, storage and service operations
(other than kitchens which are considered
part of the hotel occupancy shall have exl,ts
appro riate to the actua 1 occupancy, m
actorc_?ante with other ap licable provlslons
of the Code, or in case oP mixed occupancy
where there may be doubt as to which other
section is apphcable, such basements shall
have exits determined on the basis of lesser
exit capacity.
8.4 Special Hazards
8.4.1 Flammable liquids for household
purposes shall be kept in tightly stoppered or
sealed containers. For the limits of quantities
of flammable liquids to be allowed in various
occupancies, reference may be made to
appropriate regulations.
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
8.4.2 No stove or combustion heater shall be
located directly under or immediately at the
foot of stairs or otherwise so located as to
block escape in case of malfupctioning of the
stove or heater.
8.4.3 All kitchen exhaust fans, where
provided, shall be fixed to an outside wall or
to a duct of non-combustible material which
leads directly to the outside. The ducts must
not pass through combustible materials.
8.4.4 All wiring shall be done in accordance
with Part VIII Building services, Section 2
Electrical installations.
8.4.S Where television is installed, all
outdoor antennae shall be properly grounded
and protected from lightning (see Part VIII
Building services, Section 2 Electrical
installations).
8.4.6 Doors leading into rooms in which
flammable liquids are stored or used shall be
as in 6. Such assembly shall be self-closing and
shall be posted with a sign on each side of the
door in 25 mm high block letters stating
‘FIRE DOOR- KEEP CLOSED’.
8.4.7 Where a boiler room is provided or a
central heating plant is installed, which uses
solid or Ii uid fuel, it shall be separated from
the rest o;i the building by a separation wall
with all openings protected as in 6.
8.4.8 Room containing high pressure boilers,
refrigerating machinery, transformers or
other service equipment subject to possible
explosion shall not be located directly under
or adjacent to exits. All’such rooms shall be
effectively cut off from other parts of the
building and shall be provided with adequate
vents to the outer air.
8.4.9 All rooms or areas of hazardous
occupancy, in addition to those hereinbefore
mentioned, shall be segregated or shall be
protected as may be directed by the enforcing
Authority where, in the opinion of the
enforcing Authority, fire, explosion or smoke
therefrom js likely to interfere with safe egress
from the building.
8.4.10 For detailed information regarding
hazardous petroleum products, reference may
be made to the Petroleum Act 1934
9. REQUIREMENTS OF
EDUCATIONAL BUILDlNGS
(GROUP B)
9.1 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 6 for type of construction and
IV-33
occupancy group and exit requirements given
in 7, .the requirements iti 9.2 to 9.4.5 shall be
complied with.
9.2 Buildings intended for educational
occupancy shall not be used for any
hazardous occupancy.
9.3 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing System
-The requirements specified in 9.3.1 shall
apply to normal buildings of low rise nature
(up to 15 m in height). Requirements for high
rise buildings (above I5 m in height) shall be
in accordance with Appendix A.
9.3.1 Educational buildings above two
storeys having an area of more. than
1000 m*/floor shall have manually operated
electrical fire alarm (MOEFA).
9.4 Exit Facilities -In addition to the
provisions in 7, the following shall be
provided.
9.4.1 Exits, in accordance with 7, shall be so
arranged that at least two separate exits are
available in every floor area. Exits shall be as
remote from each other as practicable and so
arranged that there are no pockets or dead
ends of appreciable size in which occupants
may be trapped.
9.4.2 Every room with a capacity of over
100 persons in area shall have at least two
doorways as remote from each other as
practicable. Such doorways shall provide
access to separate exits, but may open upon a
common corridor leading to separate exits in
opposite directions.
9.4.3 Exterior doors shall be operated by bars
or some other panic hardware device, except
that doors leading from classrooms directly to
the outside may be equipped with the same
type lock as is used on classroom doors
leading to corridor, with no provision
whatsoever for locking against egress from the
classroom.
9.4.4 S PECIAL H AZARD
9.4.4.1 Storage of volatile flammable liquids
shall be prohibited and the handling of such
liquids shall be restricted to science
laboratories only.
9.4.4.2 Each building shall be provided with
an approved outside gas shut-off valve
conspicuously marked, where applicable. The
detailed requirements regarding safe use of
gas shall be as specified in Part 1X Plumbing
services, Section 3 Gas supply.
1v_34
9.4.4.3 All exterior openings in a boiler room
or rooms containing central heating
equipment, if located below openings in
another storey or if less than 3 m from other
doors or windows of the same building, shall
be protected by a fire assembly as in 6. Such
assemblies shall bc fixed, automatic or self-
closing. Provisions of 8.4.7 shall also apply to
this group of occupancy.
9.4.5 EXCEPTION AND DEVIATION
9.4.5.1 Gymnasiums and similar occupancies
may have running tracks of wood or
unprotected steel or iron.
9.4.5.2 In gymnasiums and in multi-purpose
school rooms having an area not greater than
300 m’, 25-mm nominal tight tongue-and-
grooved or 20-mm plywood wall covering
may be used in the inner side in lieu of fire-
resistance plaster.
9.4.5.3 A building which will have only the
first floor accessible to not more than 20
pupils at any time, may be used for school
purposes with the following exceptions:
a) Exterior walls or parts of walls which are
less than 90 cm from adjacent property
lines shall have no openings therein.
b) Classrooms may have only one exit not
less than 90 cm wide.
10. REQUIREMENTS OF
INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS
(GROUP C)
10.1 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 6 for type of construction and
occupancy group and the exit requirements
given in 7, the following requirements shall be
complied with.
10.2 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing System
-The requirements specified in 10.2.1 shall
apply to normal buildings of low rise nature
(up to 15 m in height). Requirements for high
rise buildmgs (above 15 m in height) shall be
in accordance with Appendix A.
10.2.1 In hospitals, manually operated
electrical fire alarm (MOEFA) system and
automatic fire alarm system (see Appendix B)
shall be provided with sounders/ indicators,
located in the duty room, so that only the duty
personnel receive the warning.
10.3 Exit Facilities-In addition to the
provisions of 7, the following requirements
shall be complied with.
NIATMmAL BUILDING CODE OF I N D I A
10.3.1 In buildings or sections occupied by
bed-ridden patients where the floor area IS
over 280 m , facilities shall be provided to
move patjents in hospital beds to the other
side of a smoke barrier from any part of such
building or section not directly served by
approved horizontal exits or exits from the
first floor (floor 2) of a building to the outside.
10.3.2 Not less than two exits of one or more
of the following tv es shall be provided for
every floor, incluing basement, of every
building or section:
a) Doors leading directly outside the
building;
b)’ Stairways;
c) Ramps; and
d) Horizontal exits.
10.3.3 All required exits which serve as egress
from hospital or infirmary sections shall be
not less than 150 cm in clear width, including
patient bedroom doors. to permit
transportation of patients on beds, litters, or
mattresses. The minimum width of corridors
serving patients* bedrooms in- buildings shall
be 240 cm. For detailed information on
recommendations for buildings and facilities
for the physically handicapped, reference may
be made to good practice [IV( 15)].
10.3.4 Revolving doors shall not be counted
as required exits and shall not be installed,
except in situations, such as revolving doors
at a main entrance where they are not subject
to emergency exit use by patients.
10.3.5 Efevators constitute a desirable
supplementary facility, but arenotcounted as
required exits.
10.3.6 Each storey in which 35 or more
atients are housed.shgll be divided into at
Peast two compartments by smoke barriers
and the Authority may require storeys
housing a lesser number of patients to be
divided into compartments when, in its
judgment, such division is essential to the
protection of the patients.
10.3.7 Doors in smoke barriers shall be so
installed that these may normally be kept in
open position, but will close automatically or
may be released manually to self-closing
action. Corridor door openings in smoke
barriers shall be not less than 150cm in width.
Provision shall also be made for double swing
single/double leaf type door.
10.3.8 Exits and other features for penal and
mental institutions, and custodial institutions
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
shall be the same as specified for hospitals, in
so far as applicable. Reliable means shall be
provided to permit the prompt release of
inmates from any locked section in case of fire
or other emergency.
10.3.9 Wherever any inmates are confined in
any locked rooms or spaces, adequate guards
or other personnel shall be contmuously on
duty or immediately available to provide for
release of inmates or for such other action as
may be indicated in case of fire or other
emergency.
10.3.10 No building constructed in whole or
in part of combustible materials shall be used
to combine inmates in cells or sleeping
quarters, unless automatic sprinkler
protection is provided.
10.3.11 All buildings or sections ofbuildings
in penal and mental institutions used for
manufacturing. storage or office purposes
shall have exits in accordance with the
provisions of the Code for those occupancies.
IO.4 Special Hazards
10.4.1 No combustible material of any kind
shall be stored or used in any building or
section thereof used for institutional
occupancy, except as necessary to normal
occupancy and use of the building.
10.4.2 Storage of volatile flammable liquids,
such as chloroform, eth I alcohal,,spirit, etc,
shah not be allowed andythe handhng of such
hqutds shall not be ermitted in quantities
more than 5 litres. pFhe handling of such
liquids byunauthorized persons shall also not
be permuted.
1 0 . 5 E x c e p t i o n a n d D e v i a t i o n - It is
reco nized that in institutions or part of
but!3. mgs housmg various types of psychiatric
patterns, or used as penal and mental
mstttuttons, it is necessary to maintain locked
doors and barred windows; and to such extent
the necessary provision in other sections of
the Code requiring the keeping of exits
unlocked may be waived. Ft is also recognized
that certain types of psychiatric patients are
not capable of seeking safety without
adequate guidance. In buildings where this
situation prevails, reliable means for the rapid
release of occupants shall be provided, such as
the remote control of locks, or by keying all
locks to keys commonly used by attendants.
II. REQUIREMENTS OF ASSEMBLY
BUILDINGS (GROUP D)
Il. I In addition to the general requirements
specified in 6 for type of construction and
IV-35
occupancy group and the exit requirements
given in 7, the requirements in 11.2 to 11.7.4
shall be complied with.
1 I.2 Mixed Occupant:,.-- Places of assembly
in buildings of other occupan,cy, such as
ballrooms in hotels, restaurants m stores and
assembly rooms m schools, shall be so
located, separat’ed or protected as to avold
any undue dan er to the occupants of the
place of assembfy from a fire originating in
the other occupancy or smoke therefrom.
1 1 . 4 . 1 . 1 Every place of assembly of
subdivision D-l shall have at least four
separate exits as remote from each other as
practicable.
1 1 . 4 . 1 . 2 E v e r y p l a c e o f assemblv of
Subdivision D-2 shall have at leasi two
separate exits as remote from each other as
practicable and if of capacity over 600, at least
three exits shall be provided with each exit not
less than of 2 unit widths.

11.3 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing System - 1 1 . 4 . 1 . 3 Every place of assembly of

The requirements specified in 1 1 . 3 . 1 Subdivisions D-3, D-4 and D-5 shall have at
to 11.3.5 shall apply to normal buildings of least two means of exit, consisting of separate
*exits or doors leading to a corridor or other
low rise nature (up to 15 m in height). spaces giving access to two separate and
Requirements for high rise buildings (above independent exits in different directions,
15m in height) shall be in accordance with except that for places of assembly having a
Appendix A. capacity of less than 100 persons, one 2-unit
doorway may be permitted in rooms where no
11.3.1 Occupancy SIJ~WIVIS~~N D-1 part of the room is more than 15 m from the
doorway, measured along the line of travel,
and the doorway leads directly outside the
Details of Fire Detection/ Ex- building at grade level or leads to a corridor or
Occupancy tinguishing System other space giving access to two separate and
a) Stage Automatic sprinkler independent exits.
b) Auditoria Automatic fire alarm
system (see Appendix 11.4.2 Clear aisles not less than 1.2 m in
B) width shall be formed at right angles to the
c) Corridor, green Automatic fire alarm line of seating in such number and manner
rooms s stem (see Appendix that rio seat shall be more than seven seats
I& away from an aisle. Rows of seats opening on
d) Canteen Automatic fire alarm to an aisle at one end only shall have not
svstem (see Appendix more than seven seats. Under the conditions,
B) where all these aisles do not directly meet the
e) Storage Automatic fire alarm exit doors, cross-aisles shall be provided
s stem (see Appendix parallel to the line of seating so as to provide
B; direct access to the exit, provided that not
11.3.2 O CCUPANCY SUBDIVISION D-2- more than one cross-aisle for every 10 rows
Requirements laid down in 11.3.1 shall be shall be required. The width of cross-aisles
shall be a minimum of I m. Steps shall not be
followed. placed in aisles to overcome differences in
levels, unless the gradient exceeds 1 ih IO.
11.3.3 O CCUPANCY SUBDIVISION D-3-
Automatic fire alarm system (see Appen-
dix B). 11.4.3 The fascia of boxes, balconies and gal-
leries shall have substantial railings not less
than 65 cm high above the floor. The railings
11.3.4 O C C U P A N C Y S U B D I V I S I O N D-4- at the end of aisles extending to the fascia shall
Automatic fire alarm system (see Appendix B). be not less than 75 cm high for the width of the
aisle or 90 cm high at the foot of steps.
11.3.5 OCCUPANCY SU B D I V I S I O N D-5- 11.4.4 Cross-aisles except where the backs of
Manually operated electrical fire alarm seats on the front of the aisle project 60 cm or
system (MOEFA). more above the floor of the aisle, shall be
provided with railings not less than 90 cm
1 I .4 Exit Facilities high.

11.4.1 Every place of assembly, every tier or
balcony, and every individual room u!$d as a
place of assembly shall have exits sufficient to
provide for the total capacity thereof as
determined in accordance with 7.
11.4.5 No turnstiles or other devices to
restrict the movement of persons shall be
installed in any place of assembly in such a
manner as to interfere in any way with the
required exit facilities.

,“-36 NATIONAL BUIl.DINC CODE OF INDIA

11.4.6 In theatres and similar places of public
assembly where persons are admitted to the
building at a time when seats are not available
for them and are allowed to wait in a lobby or
similar space until seats are available, such use
of lobby or similar space shall not encroach
upon the required clear width of exits. Such
waiting shall he restricted to areas separated
from the required exitways by suhstantial
permanent partitions or fixed rlgid railing not
less than IOS cm high. Exits shall be provided
for such waiting spaces on the basis of one
person for each 0.7 m- of waiting space area.
Such exits shall he in addition to the exits
specified for the main aurlitorlum area and
shall conform in construction and
arrangement to the general rules of exits given
ahove.
11.4.7 No display or exhibit shall he so
installed or operated as to interfere In any wal
with access to any required exit, or with any
required exit sign.
All displays or exhibits of combustible
material or construction and all hooths and
temporary construction in connection
therewith shall be so limited in combustibility
or protected as to avoid any undue halard of
fire which might endanger occupants before
they have opportunity to use the available
exits, as determined by the authority.
,1.4.8 No mirrors shall be placed in or
adjacent to any exitway in such a manner as to
confuse the direction of exit.
11.4.9 Places of assembly in buildings of
other occupancy may use exits common to the
place of assembly and the other occupancy.
Provided the assembly area and the other
occupancy are considered separately. each has
exits sufficient to meet the requirements of the
Code.
11.4.10 E x i t s s h a l l b e s u f f i c i e n t f o r
simultaneous occupancy of both the places of
assembly and other parts of the building,
unless the Authority determines that the
conditions are such that simultaneous
occupancy will not occur.
11.4.11 For any place of assembly under
Subdivision D-l, at least half the required
means of exits shall lead directly outdoors or
through exitways completely separated from
exits serving other parts of the building.
Zi.4.12 For detailed information regarding
cmema buildin s, reference may be made to
good practice [PV( 16)].
11.5 Lighting-No open flame lighting
I’ART IV FIRE. PitOlECTlON
devices shall be used in any place of assembly,
except in the following cases:
a) Where necessary for ceremonial purposes,
the enforcing Authority may permit open
flame lighting under such restrictions as
are necessary to avoid danger of ignition
of combustible materials or injury to
occupants.
h) Candles may be used on restaurant tables
if securely supported on non-combustible
bases and so located as to avoid danger of
ignition of comhustihle materials.
cl Open flame devices may be used on stages
where they are a necessary part of
t h e a t r i c a l p e r f o r m a n c e . provided
adequate precautions, satisfactory to the
Authority, are taken to prevent ignition of
combustible materials.
II 6 Special Hazards
11.6.1 1 ‘he decorations of places of assembly
shall be of non-tlammahle materials. Fabrics
and papers used for sudh purpose shall be
treated with an effective flame-proofing
material. Stage settings made of combustible
materials shall likewise be treated with flame-
proofing materials.
11.6.2 Seats in places of public assembly,
accommodating more than 300 persons, shall
be securely fastened to the floor, except as
permitted in 11.6.3. All seats in balconies and
galleries shall be securely fastened to the floor,
except that in nailed-inenclosures, boxes with
level floors and having not more than I4 seats,
the seats need not be fastened.
Il.6.3 Chairs not secured to the floor may be
permitted in restaurants, night clubs and
other occupancies where the fastening of seats
to the floor may be impracticable, provided
that in the area used for seating, excluding
dance floor. stage, etc. there shall be not more
than one seat for each I .4 m’ of floor area and
adequate aisles to reach exits shall be
maintained at all times.
11.6.3.1 Rows of seats between aisles shall
have not more than I4 seats.
11.6.3.2 Rows of seats opening on to an aisle
at one end only shall have not more than 7
seats.
11.6.3.3 Seats without dividing arms shall
have their capacity determined by allowing 45
cm per person.
11.6.4 The spacing of rows of seats from back
to back shall be neither less than 85 cm norless
w3’
than 70 cm plus the sum of the thickness of the
back and inclination of the back. There shall
be a space of not less than 35 cm between the
back of one seat and the front of the seat
immediately behind it as measured between
plumb lines.
11.6.5 Rooms containing high pressure
boilers, refrigerating machinery of other than
domestic refrigerator type, large transformers
or other service equipment subject to possible
explosion shall not be located directly under
or adjacant to the required exits. All such
rooms shall be effectively cut off from other
parts of the building and provided with
adequate vents to the outer air.
11.6.6 All rooms or areas used for storage of
any combustible materials or equipment, or
for painting, refinishing, repair or similar
purposes shall be effectively cut off from
assembly areas or protected with a standard
system of automatic sprinklers. They shall be
located away from staircases.
II .6.7 Every stage equipped with fly galleries,
gridirons and rigging for movable theatrc-
type scenery, shall have a system of automatic
sprinklers over and under such stage areas or
spaces and auxiliary spaces, such as dressing
rooms, store rooms and workshops. and the
proscenium opening shall be provided with a
fire-resisting curtain, capable of withstanding
a lateral pressure of 4 kN/m* over the entire
area. The curtain shall have an emergency
closing device capable of causing the curtain
to close without the use of power and when so
closed, it shall be reasonably tight against the
passage of smoke.
11.6.8 The stage roof of every theatre using
movable scenery or having a motion picture
screen of highly combustible construction
shall have a ventilator or ventilators in or
above it, openable from the stage floor b y
hand and also opening by fusible links or
some other approved automatic heat actuated
device, to give a free o ning equal to at least
one-eighth the area ofe the floor of the stage.
11.6.9 Where automatic sprinkler protection
is not provided, the proscenium wall of every
theatre using movable scenery of decorations
shall have, exclusive of the proscenmm
opening, not more than two openiq+s entering
the stage, each not to exceed 2 m and fitted
with self-closing fire check doors..
11.6.10 Every place of assembly in which
projection of motion pictures by light is made
shall have the projection apparatus enclosed
in a fire-resistmg fixed booth according to
good practice[lV( 1611, except that such booth
w-38
shall not be required where no nitrocellulose
motion picture film is used.
11.6.11 Automatic smoke vents shall be
installed above the audotorium of theatres,
including motion picture houses, with vent
area equal to not less than 3- I j 3 percent of the
floor area of the auditorium, including the
sum of the floor areas of all balconies,
galleries, boxes and tiers. It may be desirable
to provide a large number of small vents
rather than a small number of large vents.
11.7 Exception and Deviation
11.7.1 Where boilers or central heating plants
using liquid or solid fuel are located at grade
level, these may be separated from the
remainder of the building by a separating wall
with openings protected.
I I .7.2 Gymnasiums and similar occupancies
may have running tracks constructed ofwood
or unprotected steel or iron.
11.7.3 The underside of continuous steel deck
grand stands when erected outdoors need not
be fire-protected when occupied for public
toilets.
11.7.4 A fire-resistive ceiling is not required
in a one-storey building having an open-frame
roof.,
12. REQUIREMENTS OF BUSINESS
BUILDINGS (GROUP E)
12.1 In addition to the general requirement!
specified in 6 for type of construction ano
occupancy group and the exit requirements
given in 7, the requirements in 12.2 to 12.5.1
shall be complied with.
12.2 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing System-
The requirements specified in 12.2.1 to 12.2.3
shall apply to normal buildings of low rise
nature (up to 15 m in height). Requirements
for high rise buildings (above IS m in height)
shall be in accordance with Appen-
dix A.
1 2 . 2 . 1 O C C U P A N C Y S U B D I V I S I O N E- 1
( EXCEPT O FFICE B UILDING )
Details of Fire Detection/ Extin
Occupancy guishing System
Buildings more Automatic fire alarm
than 2 storeys system (see Appen-
with floor area dix B).
above 500 mZ/
storey.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
12.2.2 O C C U P A N C Y SUBDWNON E-2 12.4 Special Hazards

Derails of Fire Detecti&/ Extin- 12.4.1 No storage of flammable liquids shall

Occupancy guishing Sysrem
a) Laboratory with Fixed automatic
delicate instru- CO2 fire extinguish-
ments ing system or
automatic fire alarm
system (see Appen-
dix B)
b) Solvent storage Automatic foam ins-
tallation or automa
tic CO2 fire extin-
guishing system
c) Flammable liquid Automatic foam
installation or auto-
matic COZ fire extin-
guishing system
12.2.3 O CCUPANCY SUBDIVISION E-3
Derails of Fire Detection/ Extin-
Occupancy guishing System
a) Area of computer Automatic fire alarm
installations system (see Appen-
dix B)[BCF fixed
fire extinguishing
installation
b) Space under false Automatic fire alarm
ceiling(floor) system (see Appen-
dixB)
c) Space above false Automatic fire alarm
ceiling system(see Appen-
dix B)
d) Electrical switch Automatic fire alarm
board system(see Appen-
dix B),/BCF fixed
fire extmguishing
installation
be allowed in Group E occupancies and the
handling and use of gasoline, fuel oil and
other flammable liquids shall not be
permitted, unless such use and handling
complies with the appropriate regulations.
12.4.2 Every boiler room or room containing
a central heating plant using solid or liquid
fuel shall be separated from the rest of the
building by a separating wall. Every boiler
room or room containing a central heating
plant which burns gas as a fuel shall be
adequately separated from the rest of the
building.
12.5 Exception and Deviation
12.5.1 Basements used only for storage,
heating. any other service equipment, and not
for office occupancy, shall conform to exit
requirements for Group H occupancies in all
respects.
13. REQUIREMENTS OF MERCANTILE
BUILDINGS (GROUP F)
13.1 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 6 for types of construction and
occupancy group and the exit requirements
given in 7, the,.additional requirements in 13.2
to 13.5 shall be complied with.
13.1.1 MIXED O CCUPANCY - NO dwelling
unit shall have its sole means of exit through
any mercantile occupancy in the same
building, except in the case of a single family
unit where the family operates the store.

12.3 Exit Facilities-In addition to the 1 3 . 2 F i r e Deteclionl E_vtinguishing Svs-

provisions of 7, the requirements given tern-The requirements specified in 13.2.1
under 12.3.1 and 12.3.2 shall be complied to 13.2.2 shall apply to normal buildings of
with. low rise nature (up to 15 m in height).
Requirements of high rise buildings (above 15
m in height) shall be in accordance with
12.3.1 In the case of mezzanines or balconies Appendix A.
open to the floor below, or other unprotected
vertical openings between floors, the
population of the mezzanine or other 13.2.1 OIXWPANCY SUBDIVISION F-l
subsidiary floor level shall be added to that of
the main floor for the purpose of determining Derails of Fire Detection/ Extin-
the required exits, provided, however, that in Occupanq guishing System
no case shall the total number of exit units be a) Whole sale estab- Automatic sprinklers/
less than that required if all vertical openings lishments: ware- automatic fire alarm
were enclosed. houses, transport system (see Appen-
booking agencies dix B)
12.3.2 Not less than two exits shall be
provided for every floor, including basements b) Other premises Automatic fire alarm
occupied for office purposes or uses incidental system (see Appen-
thereto. dix B)

?A@1 IV FIRE PROTECTION w-39

 13.2.2 O CCUPANCY S UBDIVISION F-2
Details of Fire Detection/ Extin-
Occupancy guishing System
Retailers
a) Shopping lines Automatic fire alarm
with central system (see Appen-
corridors open dix B)
to sky
b) Shopping area Automatic sprinklers
inside buildings to automatic fife
with area more system (see Appen-
than 500 sqm dix B) with venting
on each floor facilities
c) Underground Automatic sprinklers
shoping centres
13.3 Exit Facilities-In addition to the
provisions of 7, the following requirements
shall be complied with.
13.3.1 In the case of mezzanines or balconies
open to the floor below, or other unprotected
vertical openings between floors, the
population or area of the mezzanine or other
subsidiary floor level shall be added to that of
the main floor for the purpose of determining
the required exits, provided, however, that in
no case shall the total number of exit units be
less than that required if all vertical openings
were enclosed.
13.3.2 At least two separate exits shall be
accessible from every part of every floor,
including basements; such exits shall be as
remote from each other as practicable and so
arranged as to be reached by different paths of
travel in different directions, except that a
common path of travel may be permitted for
the first 15 m from any point.
13.4 Special Hazards
13.4.1 Requirements specified in 12.4.1 shall
be applicable to all Group F occupancies also.
13.4.2 Hazardous areas of mercantile
occupancies shall be segregated or protected.
13.4.3 In self-service stores, no check-out
stand or associated railings or barriers shall
obstruct exits or required aisles or appraoches
thereto.
13.4.4 Open-air mercantile operations, such
as open-air markets, gasoline filling stations,
roadside stands for the sale of a farm produce
and other outdoor mercantik operations shall
be so arranged and conducted as to maintain
free and unobstructed ways of travel at all
w40
times to permit prompt escape from any point
of danger in case of fire or other emergency,
but no dead-ends in which persons might be
trapped due to display stands, adjoining
buildings, fences, vehicles or other
obstructions.
13.4.5 If mercantile operations are conducted
in roofed-over areas, these shall be treated as
mercantile buildings, provided canopies over
individual small stands to p r o t e c t
merchandise from the weather shall not be
constructed to constitute buildings for the
purpose of the Code.
13.5 E x c e p t i o n a n d D e v i a t i o n - A n y
mercantile occupancy, where goods of a
highly hazardous nature are predominant,
shall be considered under Group J occupancy
for the purpose of the Code.
14. REQUIREMENTS OF
INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
(GROUP G)
14.1 In addition to the general
requirements specified in 6 for type of
construction and occupancy group and the
exit requirements given in 7. the requirements
in 14.2 to 14.5 shall be complied with.
14.2 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing Sys-
tem - The requirements specified in 14.2.1
to 14.2.3 shall apply to normal buildings of
low rise nature (up to 15 m in height).
Requirements of high rise buildings (above 15
m in height) shall be in accordance with
Appendix A.
14.2.1 O C C U P A N C Y S UBDIVISION G-l - N o t
required.
14.2.2 OWUPANCY SUBDIVISION G-2
Details af Fire Detection/ Extin-
Occupancy guishing System
a) Area up to 750 m* Automatic fire alarm
system (see Appen-
dix B)
b) Area above 750 m* Automatic sprinklers/
automatic fire
alarm system (see
Appendix B)
24.2.3 OC C U P A N C Y S U B D I V I S I O N G - 3 -
See 14.3.4.3(d).
14.3 Exit Facilities--ln addition to the
provision of 7, the following requirements
shall also be complied with.
14.3.1 Not less than two exits shall be
provided for every floor or section including
NATJONAL B U I L D I N G C O D E O F WDlA
basements used for industrial purposes or uses
incidental thereto.
14.3.2 In buildings used for alrcraft assembly
or other occupancy requiring undivided floor
areas so large that the.distances from points
within the area to the nearest outside walls
where exit doors could be provided are in
excess of 45 m, requirements for distance to
exits may be satisfied by providing stairs
leading to exit tunnels or to overhead
passageways. I n c a s e s w h e r e s u c h
arrangements are not practicable. the
Authority may, by special ruling, permit other
exit arrangements for one-storey buildings
with distances in excess of the maximum
distances specified in 7, if completely
automatic sprinkler protection is provided
and if the heights of ceiling curtain boards and
roof ventilation are such as to mimmize the
possibility that employees will be overtaken
by the spread of fire or smoke within 180 cm of
the floor level before they have time to reach
exits, provided, however, that in no case may
the distance of travel to reach the nearest exit
exceed 120 m where smoke venting is required
as a condition for permitting distances of
travel to exits in excess of the maximum
otherwise allowed.
14.3.3 SPECIAL H AZARDS
14.3.3.1 In any roum in which volatile
flammable liquids are used or stored, no
device generating a glow or flame capable of
igniting flammable vapour shall be installed
or used.
Such a room shall be provided with a suitably
designed exhaust ventilation system (see
Appendix C). To ensure safety from fire due
to short circuit, faulty electrical connection or
some similar cause, proper care shall be taken
in designing electncal. installations in such
room (see Part VIII Building services, Section
2 Electrical Installations).
14.3.3.2 The storage, use and handling of
gasoline, fuel oil and other flammable liquids
shall not be permitted in any Group G
occupancy unless it complies with regulations
pertaining to Petroleum Act 1934.
14.3.3.3 Every boiler room or room below the
first floor containing a heating plant shall be
adequately separated from the rest of the
buildings.
14.3.3.4 For requirements regarding
electrical generating and distribution stations,
reference may be made to good practice
rww.
14.3.4 EXCEPTION AND D EVIATION
14.3.4.1 Basements used only for storage,
heating and other service equipment, and not
PART IV FIRE P R O T E C T I O N
subject to industrial occupancy, shall have
exits in accordance with the requirements of
Group H occupancies.
14.3.4.2 The following exceptions shall apply
to specia! purpose industrial occupancies:
4 Exits need be provided only for the
persons actually employed; spaces not
subject to human occupancy because of
the presence of machinery or equipmept
may be excluded from consideration.
b) Where unprotected vertical openings are
necessary to manufacturing operations,
these may be permitted beyond the limits
specified for industrial occupancy,
provided every floor level has direct access
to one or more enclosed stairways or other
exits protected against obstruction by any
fire in the open areas connected by the
unprotected vertjcal openings or smoke
therefrom.
14.3.4.3 The following exceptions shall apply
to high hazard industyial occupancies: _ _
a) Exits shall be so located that it will not be
necessary to travel more than 22.5 m from
any point to reach the nearest exit.
b) From every point in every floor area, there
shall be at least two exits accessible in
differenb directions; where floor areas are
divided into rooms, there shall be at least
two ways of escape from every room,
however small, except toilet rooms, S O
located that the points of access thereto
are out of or suitably shielded from areas
of high hazard.
c) In addition to types of exits for upper
floors specified for Group G occupancies,
slide escapes may be used as required exits
for both new and existing buildings.
4 All high hazard industrial occupancies
shall have automatic sprinkler protection
or such other protection as may be
appropriate to the particular hazard,
including explosion, venting for any area
subject to explosion hazard, designed to
minimize danger to occupants in case of
fire or other emergency before they have
time to utilize exits to escape.
14.4 For detailed information onfire safety
of ceriain individual (specific) industrial
occupancies reference may be made to good
practice [ IV( 17)].
14.5 Fire protection considerations for
venting industrial occupancies shall be as in
Appendix C.
w41
15. REQUlREMENTS OF STORAGE
BUlLDlNGS (GROUP H)
15.1 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 6 for type of constructlon and
occupancy group and the exit requirements
given in 7, the requirements in 15.2 to IS.5
shall be complied with.
IS.2 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing Qstem -
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s s p e c i f i e d i n 15.2.1
shall apply to normal buildings of low rise
nature (up to 15 m in. height). Requirements
of high rise buildings (above 15 m in height)
shall be in accordance with Appendix A.
15.2.1 Automatic sprinklers are prohibited
where water reactive material is kept and
hence automatic detectors shall be provided.
1 5 . 3 E x i t F a c i l i t i e s - I n addition to the
provisions of 7, the following requirements
shall also be complied with.
15.3.1 Every building or structure used
for storage. and every section thereof
considered separately, shall have access
to at least one exit so arranged and located
as to provide a suitable means of escape
for any person employed therein and,in any
room or space exceeding 1400 m- gross
area, or where more than 10 persons may
be normally present, at least two separate
means of exit shall be available, as remote
from each other as practicable.
15.3.2 Every storage area shall have access to
at least one means of exit, which can be readily
opened. This shall not be subject to locking so
long as any persons are inside and shall not
depend on power operation.
IS. 3.3 The following special provisions shall
apply to parking garages of closed or open
type, above or below ground, but not to
mechanical parking facilities where
automobiles are moved into and out of
storage mechanically which are not normally
occupied by persons and thus require no exit
f cihties. Where repair operations are
c!l nducted, the exits shall comply with the
requirements of Group G occupancies in
addition to compliance with the following:
a) Where both parking and repair operations
are conducted in the same building, the
entire building shall comply with the
requirements for Group G occupancies,
unless the parking and repair sections are
effectively separated by separation walls.
b) Every floor of every closed parking garage
shall have access to at least two separate
means of exit, so arranged that from any
point in the garage the paths of travel to
1w42
the two means of exit shall be in different
directions, except that a common path of
travel may be permitted for the first 15 m
from any point.
d On the street floor, at least two separate
exit doors shall be provided, except that
any opening for the passage of
automobiles may serve as a means of exit,
provided no door or shutter is installed
thereon. Street floor exits in closed
garages shall be so arranged that no point
m the area is more than 30 m from the
nearest exit, or 45 m in the case of garages
protected by automatic sprinklers,
distance bein measured along the natural
path of trave.f
4 On floors above the street, at least two
means of exit shall be provided, one of
which shall be an q!Ictosed stairway. The
other means of egress may be a second exit
of any of the types, or in a ramp type
garage with open ramps not SUbJeCt to
closure, the ramp may serve as the second
means of exit.
9 Upper floor exits inclosed garagesshall be
so arranged that no point in the area shall
be more than 30 m from the nearest exit
other than a ramp on thesame floor level,
or 45 m in the case of garages protected by
automatic sprinklers.
0 On floors below. the street (either
b a s e m e n t o r o u t s i d e undergr.ound
garages) at least two exits shall be
‘@ovided, not counting any automobile
ramps, except that for garages extending
only one floor level below the street’, a
ramp leading direct to the outside may
constitute one required means of exit. In
garages below street level, e&its shall be so
arranged that no part of the area shall be
more than 30 m from the nearest stair exit.
g) If any gasoline pumps are located within
any closed parkin garage, exits shall be so
located that travefaway from the gasoline
pump in any direction shall lead toan exit,
with no dead-end. in which occupants
might be trapped by fire or explosion at
any gasoline pump. Such exit shall lead to
the outside of the building on the same
level, or downstairs; no upward travel
shall be permitted unless direct outside
exits are available from that floor and any
floor below (as ‘in the case of a basement
garage where the grade is one storey or
more lower at the rear than at the street).
15.3.4 Exits from aircraft hangars (storage or
servicing areas) shall be provided at intervals
of not more than 45 m on all exterior walls of
aircraft hangars. ‘There shall be a minimum of
two exits serving each aircraft storage or
servicing area. Horizontal exits through
interior fire walls shall be provided tit intervals
NATIDNAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
of not more than 30 m. ‘Dwarf’ or ‘smash’
doors in doors accommodating aircraft may
be used to comply with these requirements.
All doors designated as exits shall be kept
unlocked in the direction of exit travel while
the area is occupied.
15.3.5 Exits from mezzanine floors in aircraft
storage or servicing areas shall be so arranged
that the maximum travel to reach the nearest
exit from any point on the mezzanine shall not
exceed 22.5 m. Such exitsshall lead directly to
a properly enclosed stairwell discharging
directly to the exterior or to.a suitably cut-off
area or to outside fire escapestairs.
25.3.6 The following special provisions shall
apply to grain elevators:
a) There shall be at least one stair tower from
basement to first floor and from the first
floor to the top floor of workhouse
enclosed in a dust-tight non-combustible
shaft.
b) Non-combustible doors of self-closing
type shall be provided at each floor
landing.
cl An exterior fire escape of the stair or
basket ladder type shall be provided from
the roof of the workhouse to ground level
or to the roof of an adjoining annexe with
access from all floors above the first.
4 An exterior fire.escape ofeither the stair or
basket ladder type shall be provided from
the roof of each storage annexe to ground
level.
15.4. Special Hazards- Requirements
specified in 14.3.3 to 14.3.3.4 shall apply to
Group H occupancies also.
15.5 Exception and Deviatibn- Every area
used for the storage of hazardous
commodities shall have an exit within 22.5 m
of any point in the area where persons may be
present or 30 m where automatic sprinkler
protection is provided.
16. REQUIREMENTS OF BUILDINGS
FOR HAZARDOUS USES (GROUP J)
16.1 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 6 for type of construction and
occupancy group and the exit requirements
given in 7, the requirements in 16.2 to 16.4
shall be complied with.
16.2 Fire Detection/ Extinguishing Sys-
tem-The requirements specified in 16,2.1
shall apply to normal buildings of low rise
nature (up to I5 m in height). Buildings above
15 m in height shall not be permitted for
hazardous occupancy.
PAR.T IV FIRE PROTECTION
Z6.2.1 Hazardous buildings shall have
combustible vapour detectors/explosion
suppression systems/ automatic sprinklers,
depending on the situation.
16.3 Exit Facilities- Requirements specified
in 7 and 14.3.4.3 shall apply to Group J
occupancies also.
16.4 Special Hazards-The following
requirements shall apply to all Group J
occupancies, as applicable:
4 Each building where gas is employed for
any purpose shall be provided with an
approved outside gas shut-off valve
conspicuously marked. The detailed
requirements regarding safe use of gas
shall be as specified in Part IX Plumbing
services, Section 3 Gas supply.
b) Each boiler room or room containing a
heating plant shall be separated from the
rest of the building by a separating wall.
c) In any room in which volatile flammable
liquids are used or stored, no device
generating a spark, or glow flame capable
of igniting gasoline vapour shall be
installed or permitted unless it is enclosed
in a flame-proof enclosure.
4 The use, handling, storage and sale of
gasoline, fuel oil and other flammable
liquids shall-not be permitted in Group J
occupancies unless such use, handling,
storage add sale is in accordance with
appropriate legislation in force.
4 All openings in exterior walls except wall
vents shall be protected by a fire assembly
as in 6,and they shall be fixed, automatic
or self-closing. Wall vents having an area
of not less than 100 cm’ each shall be
placed in the exterior walls near the floor
line, not more than 180 cm apart
horizontally. Each building shall he
provided with a power driven fan exhaust
system of ventilation which shall be
arranged and operated so as to produce a
complete change of air in each room every
3 min.
Each machine in dry-cleaning
establishments which uses flammable
liquid shall have an adequate steam line
directly connected to it, so arranged as to
have the steam automatically released to
the inside of each machine should an
explosion occur in the machine.
Equipment or machinery which generates
or emits combustible or explosive dust or
fibres shall be provided with an adequate
dust collecting and exhaust system, unless
the building or portion thereof housing
such machmery is provided with an
automatic fire extinguishing system.
l”-43
 APPENDIX A
(Clauses 6.9.2, 8.2, 9.3, 10.2, 12.2, 13.2, 14.2, IS.2 and 16.2)
FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR BUILDINGS
MORE THAN 15 m IN HEIGHT
A-O. GENERAL
A-O. I In addition to the provisions of Part IV
Fire protection. the Authority may insist on
suitable protection measures in a building
more than 15 m in height.
A-l. CONSTRUCTION
A-l.1 All materials of construction in load
bearing elements, stairways and corridors and
facades shall be non-combustible.
A-f.2 The interior finish materials shall not
have a flame spreadability rating exceeding
Class 1 (see 6.15.2).
A-l.3 The internal walls of staircase shall be
of brick or reinforced concrete with a
minimum of 2 h fire rating.
A-l.4 The staircase shall be ventilated to the
atmosphere at each landing and a vent at the
top; the vent openings shall be of 0.5 m’ in the
external wall and the top. If the staircase
cannot be ventilated, because of location or
other reasons, a positive pressure of 50 Pa
shall be maintained inside. The mechanism
for pressurizing the staircase shall operate
automatically with the fire alarm. The roof of
the shaft shall be I m above the surrounding
roof. Glazing or glass bricks shall not be used
in the staircase.
A-l.5 L.J~~s -- General requirements of lifts
shall be as follows:
a) Walls of lift enclosures shall have a fire
rating of 2 h; lift shafts shall have a vent at
the top of area not less than 0.2 m*.
b) Lift motor room shall be located
preferably on top of the shaft and
separated from the shaft by the floor of the
room.
cl Landing doors in lift enclosures shall have
a fire resistance of not less than half an
9) F IRE L IFTS - Following details shall
hour.
4 The number of lifts in one lift bank shall
not exceed 4. Individual shafts in a bank
shall be separated by a wall of 2 h fire
rating.
d Lift car door shall have a fire resistance
rattng of 1 h.
IV-
44
0 For buildings above 15m in height.
collapsible gates shall not be permitted for
lifts and shall have solid doors with fire
resistance of at least I h
g) If the lift shaft and lobby is in the core of
the building, a positive pressure between
25 and 30 Pa shall be maintained in the
lobby and a positive pressure of 50 Pa
shall be maintained in the lift shaft. The
mechanism for pressurisation shall act
automatically with the fire alarm; it shall
be possible to operate this mechanically
also.
h) Exit from the lift lobby, if located in the
core of the building, shall be through a
self-closing smoke stop door of half an
hour Fire resistance.
d Lifts shall not normally communicate
with the basement; if, however, lifts are in
communication, the lift lobby of the
basements shall be pressurised as in (g),
with self-closing door as in (h).
k) Grounding switch(es), at ground floor
level, shall be provided to enable the fire
service to ground the lifts.
m) Telenhone or other communication
facihties may be provided in lift cars for
building of 30 m in height and above.
Communication system for lifts shall be
connected to fire control room for the
building.
4 Suitable arrangements such as providing
slope in the floor of lift lobby, shall be
made to prevent water used during fire
fighting, etc. at any landing from entering
the lift shafts.
P) A sign shall be posted and maintained on
every floor at or near the lift indicating
that in case of fire, occupants shall use the
stairs unless instructed otherwise. The
sign shall also contain a plan for each floor
showing the location of the stairways.
apply for a fire lift:
To enable fire servtces personnel to
reach the upper floors with the
minimum delay, one or more of the
lifts shall be so designed so as to be
available for the exclusive use of the
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 firemen in an emergency and be
directly accessible to every
dwelling/ lettable floor space on each
floor.
ii) The lift shall have a floor area of not
less than 1.4 m*. It shall have loading
capacity of not less than 545 kg (8
persons/lift) with automatic closing
doors.
iii) The electric supply shall be on a
separate service from electric supply
mains in a building and the cables run
in a route safe from fire, that is,
within the lift shaft. Lights and fans
in the elevators having wooden
panelling or sheet steel construction
shall be operated on 24 volt supply.
iv) In case of failure of normal electric
supply, it shall automatically trip
over to alternate supply. For
apartment houses, this changeover of
supply could be done through
manually operated changeover
switch. Alternatively, the lift should
be so wired that in case of power
failure; it comes down at the ground
level and comes to stand-still with
door open.
The operation of a fire lift is by a
v)
simple toggle or two-button switch
situated in a glass fronted box
adjacent to the lift at the entrance
level. When the switch is on, landing
call-points will become inoperative
and the lift will be on car control only
or on a priority control device. When
the switch is off, the lift will return to
normal working. This lift can be used
by the occupants in normal times.
vi) The words ‘FIRE LIFT’ shall be
conspicuously displayed in
fluorescent paint on the lift landing
doors at each floor level.
vii) The speed of the fire lift shall be such
that it can reach the top floor from
ground level within I min.
A-l.6 Basements
A-1.6.1 Each basement shall be separately
ventilated. Vents with cross-sectional area
(aggregate) not less than 2.5 percent of the
floor area .spread evenly round the perimeter
of the basement shall be provided in the form
of grills or breakable stallboard lights or
pavement lights or by way of shafts.
Alternatively, a system of air inlets shall be
provided at basement floor level and smoke
outlets at basement ceiling level. Inlets and
extracts may be terminated at ground level
with stallboard or pavement lights as before,
but ducts to convey fresh air to the basement
floor level have to be laid. Stallboard and
PART IV FIRE ?ROTECTlON
pavement lights should be in positions easily
accessible to the fire brigade and clearly
marked ‘SMOKE OUTLET’or ‘AIR INLET’
with an indication of area served at or near the
opening.
A-1.6.2 The staircase of basements shall be of
enclosed type having fire resistance of not less
than 2 h and shall be situated at the periphery
of the basement to be entered at ground level
only from the open air and in such positions
that smoke from any fire in the basement shall
not obstruct any exit serving the ground and
upper storeys of the building and shall
communicate with basement through a lobby
provided with fire resisting self-closin doors
of 1 h fire resistance. If the travel d:tstance
exceeds 18.50 m, additional staircases shall be
provided at proper places.
A-1.6.3 In multi-storey basements, intake
ducts may serve all basement levels, but each
basement and basement compartment shall
have separate smoke outlet duct or ducts.
A-1.6.4 Mechanical extractors for smoke
venting system from lower basement levels
shall also be provided. The system shall be of
such design as to operate on actuation of heat
sensitive detectors or sprinklers, if installed,
and shall have a considerably superior
performance compared to the standard units.
It shall also have an arrangement to start it
manually.
A-1.6.4.1 Mechanical extractors shall have
an internal locking arrangement, so that
extractors shall continue to operate and
supply fans shall stop automatically with the
actuation of fire detectors.
A-1.6.4.2 Mechamcal extractors shall be
designed to permit 30 air changes per hour in
case of fire or distress call. However, for
normal operation, only 28 air changes or any
other convenient factor can be mamtained.
A-1.6.4.3 Mechanical extractors shall have
an alternative source of supply.
A-1.6.4.4 Ventilating ducts shail be
integrated with the structure and made out of
brick masonry or RCC as far as possible and
when this duct crosses the transformerareaor
electrical switch board, fire dampe.rs shall be
provided.
A-1.6.5 Kitchens working on gas fuel,
departmental stores, and shops shall not be
permitted in basement/sub-basement.
A-1.6.6 If cut outs are provided from
basements to the upper floors or to the
atomosphere, all sides cut out openings in the
basements shall be protected by sprinkler
heads at closed spacing so as to form a water
curtain in the event of a fire.
wv45
A-l.7 Openable windows on external walls
shall be fitted with such locks which can be
opened by a fireman’s axe.
A-l.8 All floors shall be compartmented with
area not exceeding 750 m- by a separation wall
with 2 h fire rating, for floors wrth sprinklers
the area may be increased by 50 percent. in
long buildings, the fire separation walls shall
be at distances not exceeding 40 m. For
department stores, shopping centres and
basements, the area may be reduced to 500 m2.
Where this is not possible, the spacings of the
sprinklers shall be suitably reduced.
A-l.9 Service Ducts
a) Service ducts shall be enclosed by walls
and doors, if any, of 2 h fire rating; if ducts
are larger than I m2, the floor should seal
them,, but provide suitable openings for
the popes to pass through, wrth the gaps
sealed.
b) A vent opening at the top of the service
shaft shall be provided between one-
fourth and one-half of the area of the
shaft.
A-f. 10 Refuse chutes shall have outlet at l-east
I m above roof level and they shall have an
enclosure wall of non-combustible material
with fire resistance of not less than 2 h, They
shall not be located within the staircase
e n c l o s u r e o r s e r v i c e s h a f t s , o r air-
conditioning shafts; inspection panel and
doors shall be tight fitting with I h fire
-resistance; the chutes should be as far away as
possible from exits.
A-l. 1 I For all buildings except multi-family
dwellings, refuge area of not less than 15 m’
shall be provided on the external walls as
cantilever projection or in any other manner
(which will not be covered in FAR) in
accordance with the following:
a) For floors above One refuge area on the
15 mandupto floor immediately
24m above 18 m.
b) For floors above One refuge area on the
24 m and up to floor immediately
36 m above 24 m.
c) For floors above One refuge area per
36 m F;myoors above
A-1.12 Electrical services shall conform to
the following:
a) The electric distribution cables/ wir-
ing shall be laid in a separate duct. The
duct shall be sealed at every alternative
floor with non-combustible materials,
having the same fire resistance as that of
the duct. Low and medium voltage wiring
I”-46
running in shaft and in false ceiling shall
run in separate conduits.
Water mains, telephone lines, inter-corn
lines, gas pipes or any other service line
shall not be laid in the duct for electric
cables.
c) Separate circuits for water pumps, lifts,
starrcases a n d c o r r i d o r hghting a n d
blowers for pressurising system shall be
provided directly from the main switch
gear panel and these circuits shall be laid
in separate conduit pipes, so that fire in
one circuit will not affect ihe others.
Master switches controlling essential
service circuits shall be clearly labelled.
d) Tbe inspection panel doors and any other
opening in the shaft shall be provided with
air-tight fire doors having fire resistance of
not less than 2 h.
e) Medium and low voltage wiring running
in shafts, and within false ceiling shall run
in metal conduit. Any 230 V wiring for
lighting or other services, above false
ceiling, shall have 660 V grade insulation.
The false ceiling, including all fixtures
used for its suspension, shall be of non-
combustible material.
An independent and well ventilated
service from shall be provided on the
ground floor with direct access from
outside or from the corridor for the
purpose of termination of electric supply
from the licensees’ service and alternative
supply cables. The doors rovided for the
service room shall have PIre resistance 01
not less than 2 h.
If the licensees agree to provide meters on
upper floors, the licensees’ cables shall be
segregated from consumers’ cable by
providing a partition in the duct. Meter
rooms on upper floors shall not -open into
staircase enclosures and shall be ventilated
directly to open air outside.
A-1.13 Gas supply shall conform to the
following:
a) T O W N GAS:L.P. GA S S U P P L Y P I P E S
- Where gas pipes are run in the building,
the same shall be run in separate shafts
exclusively for this purpose and these shall
be on external walls, away from the
staircases. There shall be no
interconnection of this shaft with the rest
of the floors. LPG distribution pipes shall
always be below the false ceding. The
length of these pipes shall be as short as
possible. In the case of kitchen cooking
range area, apart from providing wood,
covering the entire cooking range, the
exhaust system should be designed to take
care of 30 m’ per minute per m2 of hood
NATIONAL BUILDING COD2 OF INDIA
 rejected area. It should have grease
Ivapours
?llters using metallic grease to trap oil
escaping into the fume wood.
No~~-_or d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n o n aas oioe
installations, reference may be made to_Pari iX
Plumbing services, Section 3 Gas supply.
b) All wiring in fume hoods shall be of fibre
glass insulation. Thermal detectors shall
be installed into fume hoods of large
kitchens for hotels, hospitals, and similar
areas located in high rise buildings.
Arrangements shall be made for
automatic tripping of the exhaust fan in
case of fire. If LPG is used, the same shall
be shut off. The voltage shall be 24 V or
100 V dc operated with external rectifier.
The valve shall be of the hand re-set type
and shall be located in an area segregated
from cooking ranges. Valves shall be
easily accessible. The hood shall have
manual facility for steam or carbon
dioxide gas injection, depending on duty
condition.
C) Gas meters shall be housed in a suitably
constructed metal cupboard located in a
well ventilated space? keeping in view the
fact that LPG is heavier than air and town
gas is lighter than air.
A-1.14 Staircase and corridor lights shall
conform to the following:
4 The staircase and corridor lighting shall be
on separate circuits and shall be
independently connected so as it could be
operated by one switch installation on the
ground floor easily accessible to fire.
fighting staff at any time irrespective of the
position of the individual contra! UI the
light points, if any. It should be of
miniature circuit breaker type of switch so
as to avoid replacement of fuse in case of
crisis.
b) Staircase and corridor lighting shall also
be connected to alternative supply as
defined in A-1.15 for buildings exceeding
24 m in height. Forassembly, institutional
buildings of height less than 24 m, the
alternative source of supply may be
provided by battery continuously trickle
charged from the electric mains.
cl Suitable arrangements shall be made by
installing double throw switches to ensure
that the lighting installed in the staircase
and the corridor does not get connected to
two sources of supply simultaneously.
Double throw switch shall be installed in
the service room for terminating t h e
stand-by supply.
4 Emergency lights shdll be provided in the
staircase/corridor.
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
A-f. f5 A stand-by electric generator shall be
installed to supply power to staircase and
corridor lighting circuits, fire lifts, the stand-
by fire pump, pressurisation fans and blowers,
smoke extraction and damper systems in case
of failure of normal electric supply. The
generator shall be capable of taking starting
current of all the machines and circuits stated
above simultaneously. If the stand-by pump is
driven by diesel engine, the generator supply
need not be connected to the stand-by pump.
Where parallel HV/LV supply from a
*separate sub-station is provided with
appropriate transformer for emergency, the
provislon of generator may be waived in
consultation with the Authority.
A-1.16 Transformers shall conform to the
following: /
a) A sub-station or a switch-station with
apparatus having more thah 2 000 litres
of oil shall not ordinarily be located in the
basement where proper oil drainage
arrangements cannot be provided. If
transformers are housed in the building
below the ground level, they shall
necessarily be in the first basement in a
separate fire resisting room of 4 h rating.
The room shall necessarily be at the
periphery of the basement. The entrance
to the room shall be provided with a fire
resisting door of 2 h fire rating. A curb
(sill) of a suitable height shall be provided
at the entrance in order to prevent the
flow of oil from a ruptured transformer
into other parts of the basement. Direct
access to the transformer room shall be
provided, preferably from outside. The
switch gears shall be housed in a room
separated from the transformer bays by a
fire resisting wall with fire resistance’ of
not less than 4 h.
b) The transformer, if housed in basement.
shall be protected by an automatic high
velocity water spray system.
cl In case the transformers are housed in the
basement. totally segregated from other
areas of the basements by 4 h fire resisting
wall/ walls with an access directly from
outside, they may be protected by carbon
d i o x i d e o r B C F (Bromochlorodi-
fluoromethane) or BTM (Bromotriff-
uoromethane) fixed installation system.
4 When housed at ground floor level,
it/they shall be cut off from the other
portion of premises by fire resisting walls
of 4 h fire resistance.
e) Oil filled transformers shall not be housed
on any floor above the ground floor.
f-l Soak pit of aproved design shall be
provided where the aggregate oil capacity
,F
 of the a paratus does not exceed 2 000
litres. Wgere the oil capacity exceeds 2 000
litres, a tank of RCC construction of
capacity capable of accommodating the
entire oil of the transformers shall be
provided at a lower level to collect the oil
from the catch-pit in case of emergency.
The pipe connecting the catch-pit to the
tank shall be of non-combustible
construction and shall be provided with a
flame-arrester.
A-l. 17 Air-conditioning shall conform to the
following:
4 Escape routes like staircases, common
corridors, lift lobbies, etc, shall not be
used as return air passage.
b) The ducting shall be constructed of
substantial gauge metal in accordance
with good practice [lV( 18)].
cl Wherever the ducts pass through Iire walls
or floors, the opening around the ducts
shall be sealed with fire resisting materials,
such as asbestos rope, vermiculite
concrete, etc.
4 As far as possible, metallic ducts shall be
used even for the return air instead of
space above the false ceiling.
e) The materials used for insulating the duct
system (inside or outside) shall be of non-
combustible materials. Glass wool shall
not be wrapped or secured by any material
of combustible nature.
Area more than 750m2 on individual floor
shall be segregated by a fire wall and
automatic fire dampers for isolation shall
be provided (see g).
g) Air ducts serving main floor areas,
corridors, etc, shall not pass through the
staircase enclosure.
h) The air-handling units shall be separate
for each floor and air ducts for every floor
shall be separate and in no way
interconnected with the ducting of any
other floor.
3 If the air-handling unit serves more than
one floor, the recommendations given
above shall be complied with in addition
to the conditions given below:
9 Proper arrangements by way of
automatic fire dampers working on
fusible link for isolating all ducting at
~ee;a~~or from the mam riser shall
ii) When the automatic fire alarm
operates, the respective airhandling
units of the air-conditioning system
shall automatically be switched off.
l”-48
k) The vertical shaft for treated fresh air shall
be of masonry construction.
ml Where plenum is used for return air
passage, ceiling and its fixtures shall be of
non-combustible material.
n) The air filters of the air-handling units
shall be of non-combusitble materials.
P) The air-handling unit room shall not be
used for storage of any combustible
materials.
4) Inspection panels shall be provided in the
main trunkmg to facilitate the cleaning of
ducts of accumulated dust and to obtain
access for maintenance of fire dampers.
r) No combustible material shall be fixed
nearer than 15 ‘cm to any duct unless such
duct is properly enclosed and protected
with noncombustible material (glass
wool or spunglass with neoprene facing
enclosed and wrapped with aluminium
sheeting) at least 3.2 mm thick and which
would not readily conduct heat.
s) F IRE D AMPERS
I) These shall be located in conditioned
air ducts and return air ducts/passages
at the following points:
i) At the fire separation wall,
ii) Where ducts/passages enter the
central vertical shaft,
iii) Where the ducts pass through
floors, and
iv) At the inlet of supply air duct and
the return air duct of each
compartment on every floor.
2) The dampers shall operate auto-
matically and shall simultaneously
switch off the air-handling fans.
Manual operation facilities shall also
be provided.
NOTE - For blowers, where extraction system
and dust accumulators areused, dampersshall be
provided.
3) Fire/smoke dampers (for smoke
extraction shafts) for buildings more
than 24 m in height.
For apartment In non-ventilated
houses lobbies/ corridors
operated by fusi-
ble link an’d
manual control.
For other On operation of
buildings smoke detection
system and manual
control.
~YAT,~PIAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 4) Automatic fire dampers shall be so
arranged so as to close by gravity in
the direction of air movement and to
remain tightly closed open operation
of a fusible link.
A-1.18 Provisions of boiler and boiler rooms
shall conform to Indian Boiler Act. Further.
the following additional aspects may be taken
into account in the location of boiler/ boiler
room:
a) The boilers shall not be allowed in sub-
basement, but may be allowed in the
basements away from the escape routes.
b) The boilers shall be installed in a fire
resisting room of 4 h fire resistance rating,
and this room shall be situated on the
periphery of the basement. Catch-pits
shall be provided at the low level.
4 Entry to this room shall be provided with a
composite door of 2 h fire resistance.
4 The boiler room shall be provided with
fresh air inlets and smoke exhausts
directly to the atmosphere.
e) The furnace oil tank for the boiler, if
located in the adjoining room shall be
separatd by fire resisting wall of 4 h rating,
The entrance to this room shall be
provided with double composite doors. A
curb of suitable height shall be provided at
the entrance in order to prevent the flow of
oil into the boiler room in case of tank
rupture.
Foam inlets shall be provided on the
external walls of the building near the
ground level to enable the fire services to
use foam in case of fire.
A-2. PROVISION OF FIRST-AID FIRE
FIGHTlNG APPLIANCES
A-2.1 The first-aid fire fighting equi merit
shall be provided on all floors, mcPudmg
basements, lift rooms, etc, in accordance with
good practice [W(9)] in consultation with the
Authority.
A-2.2 The fire fighting appliances shall be
distributed over the building in accordance
with good practice [W(9)].
A-3. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A-3.1 All buildings with heights of more than
15 m shall be equipped with manually
operated electrical fire alarm (MOEFA)
system and automatic fire alarm system (see
Appendix B). However, apartment and offict
buildings between 15 m and 24 m in height
may be exempted from the installation of
automatic fire alarm system provided the
local fire brigade is suitably equipped for
?MT IV FlllE PROTFCTlON
dealing with fire above 15 m hei ht and in the
opinion of the Authority, such%uilding does
not constitute a hazard to the safety of the
adjacent property or occupants of the
building itself.
A-3.2.1 Manually operated electrical fire
alarm system shall be installed in a building
with one or more call boxes located at each
floor. The call boxes shall conform to the
following:
a) The location of call boxes shallbe decided
after taking into consideration the floor
plan with a view to ensuring that one or
the other call box shall be readily
accessible to all occupants of the floor
without having to travel more than
22.5 m.
The call boxes shall be of the ‘break-glass’
b)
type where the call is transmitted
automatically to the control room without
any other action on the part of the person
operating the call box. The mechanism of
operation of the call boxes shall preferably
be without any moving parts. However,
where any moving part is incorporated in
the design of the call box, it shall be of an
approved type, so that there shall be no
malfunctioning of the call box.
d All call boxes shall be wired in a closed
circuit to a control panel in the control
room in accordance with good practice
[W(8)], located as per A-5, so that the
number/zone where the call box is
actuated is clearly indicated on the control
panel. The circuit shall also include one or
more batteries with a capacity of 48 h
normal working at full load. The battery
shall be arranged to be continuously
trickle-charged from the electric mains.
The circuit may be connected to
alternative source of electric supply as
defined in A-1.15.
4 The call boxes shall be arranged to sound
one or more sounders so as to ensure that
all appropriate occupants of the desired
floor (s) shall be warned whenever any call
box is actuated.
e) The call boxes shall be so installed that
‘they do not obstruct the exitways and yet
their location can easily be noticed from
either direction. The base of the call boxes
shall be at a height of 1 m from the floor
level.
A-3.1.2 The installation of call boxes in
hostels and such other places where these are
likely to be misused shall as far as possible be
avoided. Location of call boxes in dwelling
units shall preferably be inside the building.
Nom I - Several types of fire detectors are available in
the market, but the application of.each type is limited and
w49
has to be carefully considered in relation to the type ot
risk and the structural features of the building where they
are to be installed. For guidelines for selection of Crr
detectors reference may be made to Applmdix B.
NOTE 2 - No automatic detector shall be required in any
room or portion of building which is equipped with an
approved installation of automatic sprinklers.
A-4. LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF
BUILDINGS
A-4.Z The lightning protection for buildings
shall be provided as given in Part VIII Building
services, Section 2 Electrical installations.
A-5. CONTROL ROOM
A-5.1 For all buildings over 15 m in height
and apartment buildings with a height of 30 m
and above, there shall be a control room on
the entrance floor of the building with
communication system (suitable public
address system) to all floors and facilities for
receiving the message from different floors.
Details of all floor plans along with the details
of fire fighting equipment and installations
shall be maintained in the control room. The
control room shall also have facilities to detect
the fire on any floor through indicator boards
connectin : fire detecting and alarm systems
on all floors. The staff incharge of the control
room shall be responsible for the maintenance
of the various services and fire fighting
equipment and installations.
~-6. CARETAKER FOR RESIDENTIAL,
HOTELS, BUSINESS, MERCANTILE,
INDUSTRIAL, STORAGE AND
HAZARDOUS BUILDINGS WITH
HEIGHT MORE THAN 45 m
A-6.1 A qualified Fire Officer with
experience of not less than 3 years shall be
APPENDIX B
(Clauses-6.9.3 and 8.2)
GUIDELINES FOR SELECTION OF FIRE DETECTORS
B-I. GENERAL
El. I Various types of fire detectors are
available for installation in buildings intended
for different occupancies. However, no single
detector is suitable for universal application.
Great care must, therefore, be exercised while
selecting fire detectors.
52. CHOICE OF FIRE DETECTORS
82.0 Fire detectors mav respond to any one
w5*
appointed as a caretaker who will be available
on the premises at all times.
A-6.2 The Fire Officer shall:
a) maintain the fire fighting_ equipment in
good working condition at all times.
b) lay out fire orders and fire operational
plans.
d impart training to the occupants of the
buildings in the use of fire lighting
equipments provided on the premises and
keep them informed about the fire
emergency evacuation plan.
4 keep proper liaison with city Fire Brigade.
A-7 HOUSE KEEPING
A-7.1 To eliminate fire hazards, good house
keeping, both inside and outside the building,
shall be strictly maintained by the occupants
and/or the owner of the building.
A-8. FIRE DRILLS AND FIRE ORDERS
A-8.1 Fire notices/orders shall be prepared
to fulfil the requirements of tire fighting and
evacuation from the buildings in the event of
fire and other emergency. The occupants shall
be made thoroughly conversant with their
action in the event of emergency, by
displaying fire notices at vantage points. Such
notices should be displayed prominently in
broad lettering.
For guidelines for fire drills and evacuation
procedures for high rise buildings, see
Appendix D.
or other of the manifestations of combustion,
such as the generation of heat, smoke and
flames.
B-2.1 Heat Detecrors-There are two main
classes of heat-sensitive detectors. One is the
‘point’ or ‘spot’ type of detector which is
affected by the limited area of hot gas layer
immediately adjacent to it. The other is the
‘line’ type of detector which is sensitive to the
effect produced by heated gases along any
portion of the detector line.
NATIONAL WILDING CODE OF INDIA
There are two main types of heat detectors in
each class. One type is designed to operate
when the temperature of the heat sensitive
element is raised to a predetermined level. It is
referred to as ‘fixed temperature heat
detector’.
The other type is designed to operate when the
rate of rise of temperature exceeds a
predetermined value. It will also operate at a
predetermined temperature. 11 is referred to as
‘rate of rise heat detector’.
Heat setsitive detectors shall conform to
accepted standards [1V(7)].
B-2.2 Smoke Detectors-There are three
distinct types of smoke detectors. One type
depends upon the absorption or scattering of
visible or near-visible light by the combustion
product. It is referred to as ‘optical smoke
detector’.
The second type depends upon the effects of
the combustion products on ionization
currents within the detector. It is referred to as
‘ionization chamber smoke detector’.
The third type is sensitive to carbon monoxide
or other products of combustion. It is termed
‘chemically sensitive smoke detector’.
B-2.3 Flame Derecrors - These are designed
to respond to radiation emitted by flames.
B-3. APPLICATION
B-3.1 Since fires in practice invariably
produce both heat and smoke, detectors
which respond to these are accepted as the
best general purpose fire detectors.
B-3.1. I FI X E D T E M P E R A T U R E H E A T
D ETECTORS -These are particularly suitable
for use where ambient air temperatures are
high and/or may rise and fall rapidly over
short periods.
B-3.1.2 R ATE OF R ISE H EAT D E T E C T O R S
-These are particularly suitable where the
normal ambient air temperature is low and/ or
may vary over a wide range slowly. These
detectors operate due to the abnormally sharp
rise in temperature due to a fire. They are
liable to give false alarms at ambient
temperatures approaching 43O C and should
not be used where ambient temperatures
approach 43°C. Such tire detectors do not
conform to the recognised standard
specifications and should not be used alone,
but only as supplements to the fixed
temperature type fire detectors. They are
useful in low ambient temperatures where the
temperature remains in the neighbourhood of
4o’c.
PART IV FIRE PROWCTDN
B-3.1.3 S MOKE DLTECTORS IN G ENERAL -
These should be used (JT& at places where the
ambient temperature varlt$ within the limits
of 0°C to 38°C. Beyond this temperature
range, smoke detectors are not satisfactory.
B-3.1.4 O P T I C A L S MOKE D E T E C T O R S -
These will not respond to the invisible smoke
from a clear burning fire but will respond
quickly to smoke which is optically dense.
This type of detectors can be used only in dust-
free and clean atmospheres. Deposits of
atmospheric dust and dirt on the sensitive
surface of the photo sensitive element and/or
the exciter lamp will impair the efficiency of
the detector in course of time.
B-3.1.5 I O N I Z A T I O N C H A M B E R S M O K E
D E T E C T O R S -These respond quickly to
invisible smoke from a clear burning fire, but
may respond slowly to optically dense smoke.
This type of detector can be used only in dust-
free and humidity controlled atmospheres.
False alarms may be caused by smoke and
other fumes, dusts (including slow
accumulations of dust and disturbed aerial
dusts), fibres, steam and condensation
produced by normal processes, activities and
the environment, by vehicle engines and insect
infestation. Self-cleaning ovens may cause an
ionization detector to operate. Very fast air
flows, for example, in a warehouse exposed to
windy conditions, could cause some
ionization smoke detectors to give false
alarms.
Presence of explosive gas mixtures can cause
explosions.
Ionization type smoke detectors do not give
t i m e l y warnmg or may fail in smokes
produced by burning materials like polyvinyl
chloride (PVC).
B-3.1.6 C H E M I C A L L Y S E N S I T I V E S M O K E
D ETECTORS -They have a chemically coated
sensitive element that reacts to the presence of
carbon monoxide or other products of
combustion present in smoke. Depositing of
dust or moisture affects the operation of the
sensitive element and can cause the detector to
give false or no alarms. These detectors may
not be suitable for residential occupancies.
B-3.2 Where there are production processes
which produce smoke in a manner which
would operate smoke detectors, an alternative
detector should be used or an operational
routine established to avoid unwanted alarms.
B-3.3 The fact that combustion is not always
accompanied by flame restricts the
application of flame detlctors. Another factor
is that radiation from flames travels in straight
lines and a clear line of sight is desirable,
although reflected radiation may actuate a
w51
 installed in the ridges of the waffles. Where
detector. Flame detectors are, therefore, used
detectors are installed inside the waffles, each
mainly in special applications and to
waffle shall be treated as a separate
supplement heat and smote detectors.
compartment and the provision of accepted
B-4. SITING OF DETECTORS-GENERAL standards [IV(8)] shall apply in each ccise.
R-4. I Coverage
B-4.1.1 Every portion of the building(s)
should be covered and each effectively
enclosed space should be considered
separately for this purpose in accordance with
the limits of spacing for the type(s) of
detectors concerned. Voids not more than250
mm (see Note below B-4.6.f) in height need
not necessarily have independent coverage.
Small lavatories and water-closets need not
have independent coverage, but may rely
upon that provided in a lobby common
thereto.
B-4.2 Sectioned Room
B-4.2.1 Rooms divided into sections by walls,
partitions or storage racks (including stacks in
the libraries and archives) reaching to within
300 mm of the ceiling or where goods might be
stacked in defined areas to a corresponding
height, shall have detectors for each section or
passageway.
B-4.3 Flue-like Openings and Other
Openings
B-4.3.1 Hoists, elevators and similar flue-like
openings, windows, doors, ventilators and
inlet ducts of an air-conditioning system shall
be covered by a detector within 1.5 m at the
top for every 2 m of their width or part
thereof.
B-4.3.2 Each inlet to the return air ducts of an
air-conditioning system shall have a detector
mounted on its centre. If this inlet is oblong or
continuous, there shall be a detector every 2
m, or part of it along and within 250 mm of the
opening.
B-4.4 Staircases
B-4.4.1 These shall be covered by detectors
on each floor.
54.5 Lantern Lights
84.5.1 All lantern lights shall be covered by
detectors.
B-4.6 Waffles
B-4.6.1 In case of ceilings with waffle
construction, the spacing given in accepted
standards [IV(8)] shall be reduced up to 75
percent for depth of waffles between 20 and
50cm and up to 50 percent for depth of
waffles above 50 cm, where the detectors are
NOTE-Ceilin@ with waffles or beams/joists 25 cm in
depth shall beconsidered as having even surfaces. Normal
detector coverage shall be followed in such cases.
B-4.7 Beams
B-4:7.1 If the ceiling is intersected by beams
more than 25 cm in depth, each bay formed by
successive beams in the ceiling shall be treated
as a separate compartment and fire detectors
shall be installed in accordance with good
practice [IV(8)] in each such compartment.
B-5. OTHER STRUCTURAL FEATURES
B-5.1 Structural features, particularly roofs
and ceilings, which require consideration
depending to some extent on the type of
detectors concerned are referred to in the
clauses dealing with the siting of those
detectors.
B-6. HEIGHT COWSIDERATIONS
B-6.1 The degree of cover afforded by heat
sensitive detectors falls sharply as their height
above the floor level increases. Generally,
where roof heights exceed 9 m, heat sensitive
detectors should not be used unless the
ambient conditions are likely to adversely
affect the performance of smoke sensitive
detectors.
B-7. SPECIAL COVERAGE
B-7.1 The use to which any room, area or
void is to be put, or its structural features, may
necessitate the installation of additional
detectors.
B-8. SITING OF HEAT SENSITIVE
(POINT) DETECTORS
B-8.1 Position Relative to Ceiling
B-8.1.1 Detectors shall be so mounted that
their heat sensitive elements are positioned
not less than 25 mm and not more than 150
mm below the ceiling or underside of the roof.
B-8.2 Limits of Spacing
B-8.2.1 Spacing for heat sensitive detectors
shall be m accordance wtth good practice
UW3)l.
B-8.3 Ceilings
B-8.3.1 Where ceilings are crossed by beams,
girders or other structural features, having a
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF’ INDIA
depth of 250 mm or more, detectors $a11 be
installed in each ‘part’ formed between such
features as specified in accepted standards
r IV(Q].
B-8.4 Single Truss and Norrh Light Roofs
B-8.4.1 One row of detectors shall be sited
along the apex of each roof or bay. These and
any further detectors needed to cover the
area shall be spaced in accordance with good
practice [IV(g)].
B-8.5 Floor Openings
B-8.5.1 Detectors shall be so sited that at
least one on each floor is suitably placed with
1.5 m of hoists, elevators, stairways, wall-
holes and similar openings to the floor above.
B-8.6 Lunrern L.ighrs
B-8.6.1 Detectors fitted in lantern lights shall
be protected from direct sunlight. Since such
situations are liable to rapid temperature
variations due to combinations of solar and
internal heating, fixed temperature type
detectors should be used.
B-8.7 HOI Situations
B-8.7.1 In kitchens, boiler houses, furnace
kiln rooms and the like, where height and/or
suddenly rising temperatures are likely, only
fixed temperature type of detector shall be
used. If ambient temperatures are likely to
exceed 43OC, its nominal operating
temperatures may need to be greater than is
permitted in accepted standards [IV(7)]. In
this case, a specially set version of detector,
normally complying with that standard.
should be used; the maximum operating
temperature setting should not exceed
117oc.
B-8.8 Vibration Combined with Rapid
Temperature Change
B-8.8.1 If detectors have t,o be fitted where
they will be subject to shock and/or vibration
and may also experience rapid temperature
changes (for example in covering hoist
apertures), a fusible alloy fixed temperature
type shall be used. Vibration coinciding with
rising (although not dangerously rising)
temperatures could induce false alarms from
other types.
B-9. SITING OF HEAT SENSITIVE LINE
DETECTORS
B-9.1 Hear sensitive line detectors are
affected by the same phenomenon as heat
sensitive point detectors and the guidance
given above should be followed.
?ART IV FIRE PROTECTION
B-10. SITING OF SMOKE SENSITIVE
DETECTORS
B - 1 0 . 1 In a building, the greatest
concentration of smoke (invisible or visible)
will, generally, collect at the highest parts of
enclosed areas. It is here, therefore, that
smoke detectors should normally be sited.
They shall be so mounted that their sensing
area is not less than 25 mm or more than 600
mm below the roof or ceiling, except as may
be indicated by site tests.
B-10.2 The maximum area which a smoke
detector may satisfactorily cover is the same
as recommended for heat sensitive detectors,
but the maximum distance between two
smoke detectors can be 20 percent more than
that recommended for heat detector.
However, the actual spacing will depend upon
site tests with reference to the air flow pattern
in the protected space.
N~~-_There is no Indian Standard specification for
smoke sensitive detectors at present. It is roposed to
bring out a standard specification for smo f:e detectors
and the present Code of Practice will be suitably amended
to cover smoke detectors also.
B-10.3 The area which a smoke detector may
cover is, however. affected by many factors,
only some of which are mentioned in the
following clauses.
B-10.3.1 Where a room or space to be
protected is divided into sections by walls,
partitions or,storage racks (including stacks in
libraries and archives), each section or
passageway shall be protected separately
(see B-4.2.1). In the case of storage
racks, additional rows of detectors shall be
provided on the racks for every 2 m height
or part thereof. The detectors being not more
than 3 m apart in each row, these shall be
staggered in the adjacent rows.
B-10.3.2 If the building is provided with
mechanical ventilation system, and, in any
area, this system results in more than IO air
changes per hour, significant dilution of the
smoke will take place and a definite air flow
pattern may be established. Additional
detectors become necessary to cover the
ventilation inlet and exhaust openings
(see B-4.3).
B-10.3.3 It is necessary to use additional
detectors to monitor the smaller extract ducts,
windows, ventilations and other openings.
This may also be accomplished with the aid of
sampling devices. Additional detectors may
be required in rooms with a high rate of air
change in order to cope with the air flow
pattern and the dilution of the combustion
products.
B-10.3.4 Inlet ducts shall also be monitored
by a detector within 1.5 m of the duct.
,“?3
B-10.3.5 Inlet of each return air duct shall
have a detector mounted in its centre. In case
the plenum above a false ceiling is used for
return air, the opening for the return air shall
have a detector every 2 m or part thereof of its
length within 250 mm of the opening.
B-10.3.6 There are not many buildings in
which the mechanical ventilation system is
run continuously. It is most important,
therefore, that smoke detectors in such
buildings are so sited that they will detect fire
when the mechanical ventilating system is
switched off as well as when it is operating.
B-10.3.7 Warm air collects naturally under
ceilings and in the apex of pitched roofs. In
some circumstances, this warm air can form
what is usually known as a heat barrier to the
products of combustion, rising from a small
fire which is producing little change in the
ambient condition. The combustion products
from such a fire will spread out below the heat
barrier in the same way as they do beneath the
ceiling or an apex of a pitched roof. The siting
APPENDIX C
(Clause 14.5)
FIRE PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS FOR VENTING
IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
C-l. APPLICATION AND SCOPE
C-f.1 The provisions given below are
applicable only to single-storey industrial
buildings (factories and storage buildings)
covering large floor areas without subdividing/
separating wails which are usually designed
to meet modern production methods.
C-l.,? The requirements of fire and explosion
venting of industrial buildings, as dealt with in
this section, fall under two categories:
a) Smoke and fire venting, and
b) Explosion relief vents
C-2. SMOKE AND FIRE VENTING
C-2.1 The basic considerations to be kept in
mind while formulating the design and other
requirements for smoke and fire vents are as
given in C-2.1.1 to C-2.1.20.
C-2.1.1 The smoke and hot combustion pro-
ducts from a fire, being lighter than the sur-
rounding air, tend to rise and on reaching the
roof or ceiling spread out (mushroom) on all
sides and form a layer which floats on top of
the cold air beneath. In the absence of vents,
ws4
of detectors should be arranged to take this
into account.
B-10.4 Among other factors which can
establish temporary or permanent conditions
which have their effect on the siting of smoke
detectors are:
a) the various forms of overhead heating;
b) air cooled equipment with the exhaust air
blowing out into the room or factory area;
cl roofs or ceilings of unusual shape or
special construction;
d) deep beams.
e) lofty buildings, that is, buildings with
areas above 10 m and up to about 30 m
in height;
r) staircases;
B) canteens and restaurants,
h) plant rooms;
j) ambient air currents.
this laver becomes nroeressivelv deener until
the whole building-is 8lled w&h hoi smoky
gases. The time consumed for this to happen
may be only a few minutes, depending on
variables like, type of material on fire, process/
storage conditions involved, etc.
C-2. I.2 The hot gases at the roof level moved
by convection currents contribute to rapid
lateral spread of fire.
C-2.1.3 The provision of properly designed
and suitably located vents in adequate
number helps the speedy removal of smoke
and hot gases, thereby preventing spread of
fire, besides reducing risks of explosion of
unburnt gases and reducing damage to the
contents and structure of the building by heat
and smoke. In addition, they facilitate fire
fighting operations, and minimise personal
hazards to the firemen.
C-2. I .4 The time taken for accumulation of
smoke and hot gases within a building on fire
being very short, the venting devices installed
shall be designed to operate in the early
stages of the fire, and must be automatic so as
to ensure speed and efficiency in their
operation.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
C-2.1.5 The smoke and fire venting system
shall be designed in such a manner as to keep
the temperature of the combustion products
from the fire as low as possible, preferably
below approximately 150” C.
C-2.1.6 Automatic venting systems are com-
plementary to the fire extinguishing systems,
and automatic sprinklers, where provided,
should operate before the operation of the
vents; otherwise, venting may delay sprink1c.r
operation.
C-2.1.7 It is easier to vent a building of smoke
than clear it of smoke once it has been filled.
C-2.f .8 Venting is particularly desirable in
large area industrial buildings or warehouses,
windowless buildings, underground struc-
tures or in areas housing hazardous opera-
tions. Automatic fire vents shall be provided
for all industrial occupancies (including stoi-
age buildings) classified as medium hazardSC
above having floor areas exceeding 750 m,
irrespective of whether they are compart-
mentalized or not.
C-2.1.9 These provisions do not cover other
aspects, of ventilation (or lighting) designed
for regulation of temperature within a building
for personal comfort or meeting process
needs.
C-2.1.10 Similarly, fire and smoke venting
requirements as given here under are also not
applicable to multi-storey buildings, as their
requirements are different and more complex.
C-2.1.11 It is difficult to determine precise
venting requirements on account of the many
variables involved. For instance, the rate of
combustion varies appreciably according to
the nature, shape, size and packaging of the
combustible materiali as well as the size,
height and disposition of the stacks of
materials.
C-2.1.12 In indytrial buildings of floor area
less than 750 m and I~sed as low fire hazard
occupancies, conventional ventilators fitted
high up near the eaves of the external walls
may serve as vents for smoke and hot gases,
rovided care is taken to ensure that they are
f:ept open at all times or are designed to open
automatically in case of fire.
C-2.1.13 Extinction of fires by closing the
doors and windows is not likely in the case of
industrial buildings because of their large size,
where sufficient air to sustain the fire at least
in the initial stages can be expected to be
present.
C-2.1.14 Of the two types of building
ventilation, namely, vertical and horizontal,
vertical ventilation is the one commonly
PART IV FIRE PROlUTlON
adopted in the case of single-storey industrial
buildings.
C-2.1.1.5 Since 70 to 80 percent of heat
produced in a fire is convective heat, the
ventilation system has to be suitably designed
to ensure early outflow of the heat and thereby
minimize fire spread.
C-2.1.16 Combustible roof linings should be
avoided, as they themselves will contribute to
the spread of fire, thereby multiplying the
venting problems.
C-2. I. I7 A wind blowing across a flat roofor
a roof with a pitch under 40” produces a
negative pressure, that is, it tends to draw
gases out of the building and so aids venting of
hot gases. Wind blowing across a roof of pitch
greater than 40’ will draw gases out on the
leeward side, but oppose outward flow on the
windward side of the roof.
C-2.1.18 For vents to work at full efficiency,
the area of the inlets for co’ld air entering the
compartment must equal at least the total area
of the vents. Ideally. the inlets should be as
close to the ground as possible.
C-2.1.19 Where roof vents are installed in a
single-storey building any neighbouring
buildings, particularly those of more than one
storey, will be subject to some degree of
exposure hazard either from flying birds or
radiation, or both, as a result.
C-2.1.20 If vknts are to be installed. the size,
design, number and disposition of the vents
and the associated roof screens/ curtain
boards have to be assessed after careful
analysis of the various factors stated underC-
2.1.11 above, as well as other related factors
like type of building construction, nature and
height of roof, process hazards, exposure
hazard, etc.
C-2.2 Venring Area
C-2.2.1 The estimated requirements for
ventilation are largely based on the assumed
build-up of the fire from the time of initial
outbreak to the time of effective fire fighting
action by tire brigade.
C-2.2.2 The vent area required to be provided
shall be approximately proportional to the
perimeter of the fire area, because the
entrained air forms the bulk of the vented
gases.
C-2.2.3 The effective area shall be the
minimum cross-sectional area through which
the hot gases must flow out to the atmosphere.
C-2.2.4 No consideration shall be given to the
increased air movement obtained by powel;
operated fans, since it must be assumed thatin
P
 the event of fire, power will be interrupted, or
fans damaged by heat.
C-2.2.5 The total vent tireas to be provided
shall be as per the following ratios of eftective
area of vent openings to floor area for various
occupancy classifications indicated:
a) Low heat release content I:150
(Subdivision G-l)
b) Moderate heat release con- I:100
tent (Subdivision G-2)
c) High heat release content I:30 to 1:50
(Subdivision G-3)
C-2.3 Qpes of Venrs
C-2.3.1 Venting shall be accomplished by
any of the types, such as monitors, continu-
ous gravity vents, unit type vents or sawtooth
roof skylights.
C-2.3.2 Where monitor type vents are
installed, wire glass or metal panels shall be
used only if the sash is arranged to open
automatically.
C-2.3.3 The use of plain thin glass for venting
shall be avoided on account of its
unpredictable behaviour during fire.
However, if glass or other suitable plastic
sheet materials with early disintegration
characteristics are used, they should be
designed for automatic operatibn.
C-2.3.4 Where monitors or unit type vents
are used, the panels shall be hinged at the
bottom and designed to open automztically.
Both sides of the vents should be designed to
vent simultaneously to ensure that their
effectiveness at the time of fire is not in any
way impeded by wind direction.
C-2.3.5 Where movable shutters are provided
for continuous gravity vents, these shall open
automatically in the event of fire.
C-2.3.6 Unit type vents shall be of relatively
small area, ranging between I, and 9 m :
having light weight metal frames and housing
with hinged dampers which shall be designed
for both manual and automatic operation.
C-2.3.7 Sawtooth roof skylight shall be
considered as satisfactory for venting
purposes only when designed for automatic
operation.
C-2.3.8 Likewise, exterior wall windows shall
not be reckoned as satisfactory means for
venting of fire gases and smoke. in industrial
buildings. However, they may be reckoned as
additional means of venting when, they are
located close to the eaves and are provided
with ordinary glass or movable sash arranged
for both manual and automatic operation.
C-2.3.9 Baffles shall not be installed inside
vents, as they greatly reduce the effective area
for venting.
C-2.4 Vent Operation
C-2.4.1 The vents shall be automatic in
operation, unless where specified in these
provisions that they shall be designed for both
manual and automatic operation.
C-2.4.2 The release, mechanism shall be
simple for operation and independent of
electrical power, since electrical services may
be interrupted by fire.
C-2.4.3 The automatic operation of vents
shall be achieved by actuation of fusible links
or other types of heat and smoke detectors, or
by interlocking with operation of sprinkler
system or any other automatic fire
extinguishing system covering the area.
Following their release, the vents shall be
designed to open by a system of counter-
weights and associated equipment utilizing
the force of gravity or spring loaded levers.
C-2.4.4 Automatic fire alarm system, where
installed, shall be coupled to the automatic
vents to ensure simultaneous operation.
C-2.4.5 Automatic sprinklers, where
installed, shall operate before the vents open
order to avoid any likely delay in sprinkler
operation. However, heat actuated devices
used for vent release shall be suitably shielded
from sprinkler discharge so that water does
not delay their action.
C-2.4.6 Premises where height of roof apex is
10 m or more or where the materials handled
or stored have high smoke producing
characteristics, in addition io fusible links, the
vent release mechanism shall be interlinked to
smoke actuated automatic fire detectors to
ensure early operation of vents.
C-2.4.7 Non-corrosive materials shall be used
for hinges, hatches and other related parts to
ensure long fail-safe operation of the vents.
C-2.4.8 In case of any doubts regarding the
types of vents required to be installed for any
particular occupancy, authorities having
jurisdiction shall be consulted.
C-2.5 Size, Spacing arid Disposition of Vents
C-2.5.1 Vents shall be correctly sited to
ensure their functional efficiency. Ideally,
they shalrbe sited at the highest point in each
area to be covered.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OP INDIA
 C-2.5.2 They shall, as far as possible, be
located immediately above the risk to be
protected so as to allow free and speedy
removal of smoke and other combustion
products in the event of fire.
C-2.5.3 The mimmum dimension for an
effective vent opening shall be not less than
1.25 m in any direction.
C-2.5.4 The spacing of the individual vent
shall be based on the principle that more
number of well distributed smaller vents are
more effective than less number of badly
located larger vents.
C-2.5.5 The maximum spacing between vents
for the three occupancy classifications shall be
as follows:
4 Low heat relese content - 45 m between
centres
b) Moderate heat release content- 36 to
37 m between centres.
c) High heat release content- 22.5 to 30 m
between centres, depending on the severity
of fire potential.
C-2.5.6 Vents shall be placed in a sheltered
situation where advantage can be taken of the
prevailing wind. The design of the vent shall
be such as to produce a suction effect. A wind
blowing across a flat roof or one with a pitch
below 40” produces a negative pressure, that
is, it tends to draw gases out of the building
and so aids venting of hot gases. Wind
blowing across a roof of pitch greater than 40”
will draw gases out on the leeward side, but
oppose outward flow on the windward side of
the roof.
C-2.5.7 Low level inlets, with total area not
less than ,the total area of vents, shall be
provided to permit outside air to be drawn rn
to aid automatic venting. These inlets, which
may be in the form of doors, windows or such
other openings, shall be designed for manual
operation when desired.
C-2.6 Roof Screens or Curtain Boards
C-2.6.f Industrial buildings with large areas
and having no subdivision/separating walls
limiting the area of individual compartments
to 750m’ or less, .jhall be provided with roof
screers or curtain boards.
These screens which extend from the roof
downwards at specific intervals not only
prevent lateral spread of heat and smoke in
the event of fire below, but substantially assist
in early operation of automatic sprinklers and
vents.
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
C-2.6.2 They shall be of sheet metal or may
other substantial non-combustible material
strong enough to withstand damage by heat or
impact.
C-2.6.3 They shall be resonably gas-tight,
although small openings for passage of pipes,
conduits, etc. shall be permitted.
C-2.6.4 They shall extend down from the
roof/ceiling for a minimum depth of 2.2 m.
Around specil hazards, the depth shall be 4 m.
Where roof/ceiling height exceeds 15 m they
shall extend down to within 3 m of the floor.
For pitched/sawtoothed roofs, they shall
extend down to truss level dividing the roof
into compartme’nts.
C-2.6.5 In moderate hazard occupancies, the
distance between the screens/curtain boards
shall not exceed ‘ij m and the curtained areas
shall be limited to a maximum of 4 500 m’.
C-2.6.6 In high hazard occupancies, the
distance between screens shall not exceed 30
m and the curtained area shall be limited to
750 m2.
C-2.6.7 The curtained roof area shall be so
arranged that they, effectively aid in the
venting of smoke and hot gases through the
automatic vents provided in each area.
C-2.6.8 In sprinklered buildings, the screens
shall preferably be so located as to coincide
with the individual sprinkler system areas.
C-3. EXPLOSION RELIEF VENTS
C-3.1 Industrial premises where combustible
dusts can accumulate or where flammable
gases, vapours or mists in explosive
concentrations may be present are constantly
exposed to explosion hazards. Pressures
developed by such explosions may be of the
order of 7XlO’Pa and ordinary buildings will
not be able to withstand the shock of such
pressures. Hence, such buildings require
explosion relief vents for preventing
structural damage.
C-3.2 Basic Principle/ Considerations
C-3.2.1 Most ordinary building walls will not
withstand a sustained internal pressure as
great as 6.9X103Pa. Hence, explosion relief
vents for buildings must be designed to
operate at pressures well below those ai which
the building walk will fail.
C-3.2.2 There is a rise in pressure during an
explosion within an eticlosure even with open,
unobstructed vents, and any delay in opening
the venting devices increases that pressure.
P
C-3.2.3 Structural damage can be minimized
by locating hazardous opertions or equipment
outside of buildings and cut off from other
operations by a pressure resisting wall. Such
isolated processes or equipment shall be
housed in single-storey buildings properly
vented and-a device provided at the inlet of the
collector which will prevent an explosion
from blowing back through the duct work and
into the building.
C-3.2.4 Where highly hazardous opertions
cannot be located outside of main buildings,
they shall be segregated by pressure resisting
walls and each such unit shall be ventilated
outdoors. External walls may. be or heavy
constrction if equipped with surtable vents or
high-weight panels which blow out easily.
C-3.2:5 Operations or equipment involving
explosion hazards shall not be permitted in
basements or areas partially below grade.
C-3.2.6 Fire can be expected to follow an
explosion in most occupancies, so that any
fixed fire extinguishing equipment, like
sprinklers, if installed, shall be such that only
the minimum damage is caused to it.
C-3.2.7 For a given material, the finer the
particle size of the dust, the more violent is the
explosion. Some materials, such as aluminim
powder, hydrogen, and acetylene, are difficult
to vent effectively due to the rapid rate of
pressure rise. Some slow burning materials,
such as coal dust in a confined space, may do
much damage because of the longer duration
of their presence. Some dusts, such as
magnesiusm, titanium and zirconium and
several metal hydrides may react with and
ignite in some common inert gases, such as
nitrogen and carbon dioxide.
C-3.2.8 The maximum explosion pressure in
a vented structure decreases as the size of the
vent increases, but is independent of the
rupturing pressure of a diaphragm.
C-3.2.9 The most effective vent for the release
of explosion pressures is an unobstructed
vent opening.
C-3.2.10 Pressure required to rupture
diaphragms of the same area and material
directly varies with the thickness of the
material.
C-3.2.1 1 The slower the rate of pressure rise,
the more easily can the explosion be vented.
C-3.2.12 ‘The degree of venting required is
directly proportional to the degree of
explosion hazard.
C-3.2.13 Experience has shown that most
explosions of dusts, vapours and gases do not
19
involve a large part of the total volume ofthe
enclosure, and frequently occure near the
upper or lower limits of the explosive range.
Consequently, such explosions are relatively
weak compared with the optimum.
C-3.2.14 Rectangular unrestricted vents are
as effective as square vents of equal area.
C-3.3 Types of Explosion Relief Vents
C-3.3.1 The explosion relief vents shall be
any one or more of the following types,
depending on individual requirements as
assessed by the Authority. Open or
unobstructed vents, louvres, open roof vents,
hanger-type doors, building doors, windows,
roof or wall panels or movable/fixed sash.
C-3.3.2 The effect or external wind pressure
or suction on these devices shall be taken into
consideration while designing and selecting
the type of vents, since wind pressures may
reach over 2XIO’Pa in severe wind storms.
C-3.3.3 The type of vent for explosion relief
for any occupancy shall be selected with life
safety as the primary aim followed by
minimum damage to property.
C-3.3.4 Where large hanger type doors or
metal curtain doors in side walls are used as
vents care shall be taken to ensure that they
are kept wide open during operations.
C-3.3.5 Where weather hoods are used to
cover roof vents, they shall be as light as
possible and lightly attached so as to enable
them to be blown off quickly when an
explosion occurs.
C-3.3.6 Doors and windows when used as
explosion vents shall be installed to swing
outwards. Doors shall have friction, spring 0’
m a e n a t i c l a t c h e s t h a t w i l l functron
aut&atically to permit the door to open
under slight Internal pressure.
C-3.3.7 Movable sash shall be of the top or
bottom hinged or projected type. These shall
be equipped with a latch or friction device to
prevent accidental opening due to wind action
or intrusion. Such latches or locks shall be
well maintained.
C-3.3.8 Fixed sash shall be set in place with
very light wall anchorages, or, if tight, shall be.
securely fitted and glazed with plastic panes in
plastic putty.
C-3.3.9 Where the process is such that the
whole of a building or a room may be
involved, it may be desirable to arrange for a
lightly costructed wall or roof to collapse and
thus avert the worst effects of an explosion.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF MD!.4
C-3.4 Design, Size and Disposition of Vents
C-3.4. I The required area of ex lesion vents
shall ordinarily depend on tRe expected
maximum intensity of an explosion in the
occupancy, the strenght of the structure, the
type of vent closure and other factors.
C-3.4.2 Venting shall be planned in such a
manner as to prevent injury to personnel and
damage to explosures. In congested locations,
substantial ducts or diverters shall be
provided to direct the blast.
C-3.4.3 When ductwork is used, the ducts
shall be of sufficient strength to withstand the
maximum expected explosion pressure.
C-3.4.4 Where explosions ‘are likely within
duct and piping syst.ems, they shall be vented
by the use of suitable diaphragms designed to
blow out at a predetermined pressure. There
shall be no physical connection between
ductwork system for more than one collector.
C-3.4.5 In large structures, the position of
vents shall be relative to the point of origin of
explosion, when it can be determined.
C-3.4.6 Where relatively slow explosions
involving coal dust, chlorinated solvents, etc,
are involved, light, hinged swinging panels
may be preferred to diaphragm type of vents.
C-3.4.7 Obstructions of any kind blocking
the vents from the risk ccvered shall be
avoided, particularly where risks of rapid
violent explosions are present.
C-3.4.8 Counter-weights add to the inertia of
the vents and so shall be avoided.
C-3.4.9 Various relieving devices, including
devices actuated by detonators, shall start to
open at as low a pressure as possible. They
shall bz of light construction, so that full
opening can be quickly attained.
C-3.4.10 Vents shall be of such size and
design as to prevent rupture of the protected
device or apparatus.
C-3.4.11 Skylights or monitors with movable
sash that will open outwards, or fixed sash
containing panes of glars or plastic that will
blow out readily under pressure from within,
can be used to supplement wall vents or
windows, provided resistance to their
displacement or opening is kept as low as
consistent w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r
structural strenght.
C-3.4.f2 Flexible plastic sheets when used for
vent closures shall be installed in slotted
frames in such a way that pressure from within
bulges the sheets and releases them from the
holding frame.
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
C-3.4.13 Fragile sheets made of +hc, when
used for vent closures, shall be thm sheets tht
will crack or rupture under less pressure than
single strength glass. For this reason w of
transparent or trauslucent plastic sheets Is
more advantageous instead ofglass in window
sash.
C-3.4.14 If closed vents are uSed, they shall be
larger in area than unenclosed vents to
provide equivalent exp!osion pressure relief.
C-3.4.15 Small enclosures, such as machines,
shall be vented more enerously than
buildings, because if an expfosion occurs in a
machine, its entire volume may he involved.
C-3.4. I6 Vents for the protection of buildings
and equipment shall be installed on the
following basis.
C-3.4.16.J Small1 enclosures of less than
30 m’, machines and ovens of light cons-
truction-l 000 cm’ for each 0.3 to 0.9 m3.
C-3.4.16.2 For small enclosures of more
substantial construction having reasonably
high bursting strength-l 000 cm2 for each
0.9 m’.
C-3.4.16.3 Fairly large enclosures of 30 to
700 m3, such as bins silos rooms stora$
tanks, etc - 1 000 cd* for &ch 0.9 ;o 1.5 m
In these cases,.attempt shall be made to th;
extent possible to predict the likely point of
origin of the explosion in relation to the vent.
C-3.4.16.4 Large rooms and buildings over
700 m’ containing hazardous equipment
comprising a small fraction of the entire
volume:
a) For heavy reinforced concrete, walls-
100 cm* for each 2.25m3.
b) For light reinforced concrete. brick or
wood construction - 1000 cm* for each
1.65 to 2.25 m’.
c) For lightweight construction, such as
prefabricated panels - 1000 cm* for each
1.5 to 1.65 m .
C-3.4.16.5 Large rooms or building over
700 m3 containing hazardous equipment
comprising a large part of the entire volume of
a room or building shall % vented as
generously as possible IO00 cm for each 0.3
to 1.05 m .
C-3.4.16.6 In order to obtain these ratios, the
size of the building or room must be limited.
For some hazardous materials, such as
hydrogen,acetylene, carbon disulphide, etc.
these limits are extremely low.
,V.59
C-3.4.17 Emphasis shall always be placed on
segregating hazardous areas by means of
firewaILs or separating walls to prevent spread
of fire.
APPENDIX D
(C‘lause A-8.1)
GUIDELINES FOR FIRE DRILL AND EVACUATION PROCEDURES
FOR HIGH RISE BUII DlNGS’(ABOVE I5 m IN HEIGHT)
,9-l. IN’I‘IIODC~CTION
I>-/./ In case of a fire in a high rise building,
safe evacuation of its occupants may present
serious problems unless a plan for orderly and
systematic evacuation is prepared in advance
and all occupant:, are well drilled in the
operation of such plan. These guidelines are
intended to assist them in this task.
D-2. ALARMS
D-2.1 .Any person discovering fire, heat or
smoke shall immediately report such
condition to the fire brigade. unless he has
personal hnowledge that such a report has
been made. No person shall make, issue, post
or maintain any regulation or order, written
or verbal, that would require any person to
take any unnecessary delaying action prior to
reporting such condttion to the fire brigade.
D-3. DRILLS
D-3.1 Fire drills shall be conducted, in
accordance with the Fire Safety Plan, at least
once every three months for existing buildings
during the first two years after the effective
date of these rules, or for new buildings during
the first two years after the issuance of the
certificate of occupancy. Thereafter, fire drills
shalt be conducted at least once every six
mom hs.
D-3.2 All occupants of the buildi .g shall
participate i n t h e f i r e d r i l l . .iowever,
occupants of the building. other than building
service employees, are not required to leave
the floor or use the exits during the drill.
D-3.3 A written record of such drills shall be
kept on the premises for a three year period
and shall be readily available for Fire Brigade
inspection.
D-4. SIGNS AND PLANS
D-4.1 Signs at Liff Landings - A sign shall
he posted and maintained in a conspicuous
w60
C-3.4. I8 Interior walls of light construction,
such as tile, shall be avoided in hazardous
locations, since they can cause injuries to
personnel in the event of an explosion.
place on every floor at or near the lift landing
in accordance with the requirements,
indicating that in case of fire, occupants shall
use the stairs unless instructed otherwise. The
sign shall contain a diagram showing the
location of the stairways except that such
diagram may be, omitted, provided signs
containing such diagram are posted in
conspicuous places on the respective Boor.
A sign shall read “IN CASE OF FIRE, USE
STAIRS UNLESS INSTRUCTED
01 HER WISE”. l‘he’lettering shall be at Least
1.25 cm block letters in red and white
background. Such lettering shall be properly
spaced to provide good legibility. The sign
shall be at least 25 X 30cm. where the diagram
is also‘ incorporated in it and 6.25X25cm
where the diagram is omitted. In the latter
case, the diagram sign shall be at least 20X
30cm. The sign shall be located direct!yabove
a call-button and squarely attached to the wall
or partition. The top of the sign shall not be
above 2 m from the floor level.
D-4.2 Floor Nurnheri~!g Signs- A sign shall
be posted and maintained within each stair
enclosure on every floor, indicating the
number of the floor, in accordance with the
requirements given below.
The numerals shall be of bold type and at least
7.5cm high. The numerals and background
shall be in contrasting colours. The sign shall
be securely attached to the stair side of the
door.
D-4.3 Stair and Elevator Ident$carion
Signs-Each stairway and each elevator back
shall be identified by an alphabetical letter. A
sign indicating the letter of identification shall
be posted and maintained at each elevator
landing and on the side of the stairway door
from which egress is to be made, in
accordance with the requirements given
below.
The lettering on the sign shall be at least
7.5cm high, of bold type and of contrasting
colour from the background. Such signs shall
be securely attached.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
D-4.4 S:air &v:II~\- .Tiprr.\ ~- A sign shall bc
posted and maintained on each floor within
each stairway and on the occupancy side of
the stairway whcrc required. Indicating
whether re-entry is provided into the building
and the floor where such re-entry is provided.
in accordance with the requirements given
bclou.
The lettering and numerals ol the signs shall
be at least 1.3cm high of bold type. I he
lettering and background shall be of
contrastIng colours and the signs bhall be
securely attached approxlmatcly 1.5 m above
the floor level.
D - 4 . 5 Fire command station shall be
provided with floor plan of the building and
other pertinent information relative to the
service equipment of the building.
D-5. FIKE SAFETY PLAN
D-5. I A format for the Fire Safety Plan shall
be as given in D-8.
D-5.2 The applicable parts of’ the approved
Fire Safety Plan shall be distributed to all
tenants of the building by the building
management when the Fire Safety Plan has
been apprpved by the Chief Fire Officer.
D-5.3 Phe applicable parts of the approved
Fire Safety Plan shall then he distributed b)
the tenants,to all their employees and by the
building management to all their building
employees.
D-5.4 Where the owner of the building is also
an occupant of the building, he shall be
responsible for the observance of these rules
and the Fire Safety Plan in the same manner
as a tenant.
D-5.5 In the event there are changes from
conditions existing at the time the Fire Safety
Plan for the building was approved. and the
changes are such so as to require amending the
Fire Safety Plan, within 30 days after such
changes, an amended Fire Safety Plan shall be
submitted to the fire brigade for approval.
D-6. FIRE COMMAND STATION
~-6.1 A Fire Command Station shall be
established in the lobby of the building on the
entrance floor. Such command station shall
be adequately illuminated.
D-7. COMMUNICATIONS AND FIRE
ALARM
D-7.i A means of communication and fire
alarm for use during fire emergencies shall be
provided and maintained by the owner or
person in charge of the building.
PART IV FIRE ?ROTECTlON
D-8. t-IKE SAFETY PLAN FOKMA-1
D-X. I Buildirlg A ddrtvs
Street and Pin Code Number . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-8.2 Purpose und Objective
D-8.2.1 1’11 KPOSE ---To establish method of
systematic. safe and orderly evacuatibn of an
area or building by and of its occupants in
case of t’i;-e or other emergency, in the least
possibie ttme, to a safe area by the nearest
safe mea~~s of egress; also the use of such
available fire appliances (including sounding
or alarms) as may have been provided for
controlling or extinguishing fire and
safeguarding of human life.
D-8.2.2 OBJECIWE --To provide proper
education as a part of continuing employee
indoctrination and through a continuing
written programme for all occupants, to
ensure prompt reporting of tire, the response
of fire alarms as designated, and the
immediate initiation of fire safety procedures
to safeguard life and contain fire until the
arrival of t.he Fire Brigade.
D-8.3 Fire Safety Director
ii) Name
b) Regularly a_ssigned employment-Title
c) Regularly assigned location
d) How is ‘he notified when at regular
location?
e) How is he notified when not at regular
location?
f) Normal working hours
g) Duties of Fire Safety Director-see
D-9.1
D-8.4 Deputy Fire Safety Dirertor
4 Name
b) Regularly assigned employment-Title
cl Regularly assigned location
4 How is he notified when at regular location?
e) How is he notified when not at regular
location?
fl Normal working hours
g) Duties of Deputy Fire Safet} Director -
see O-9.2
;l$ieire Wardens and Deputy Fire
4 Are their names on Organisation Charts
for each floor and/or tenancy?
b) Submit typical completed Organisation
Chart for Fire Dnll and Evacuation
Assignment.
I”31
c) Duties of Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire
Wardens - see D-9.3
D-8.6 Building Evacuation Supervisor
4 Name
b) Regularly assigned employment - -1 itle
c) Regularly assigned location
4 How is he notified when at regular
location?
How is he notified when not at regular
location?
Normal working hours
Duties of Building Evacuation
Supervisor -see D9.4
D-8.7 Fire Party
a) Submit a completed Organization Chart
for Fire Parties naming person in charge,
and his title in the building.
b) Indicate standards of selection from
building employees based on background
and availabllity.
4 How are they notified?
4 How are they notified when they are not at
their regular locations‘?
4 Means of responding
0 Duties bf each member of Fire
Party - see O-9.5
D-8.8 Occupants Instructions-Distribution
of instructions to all tenents, tenents’
employees and building employees -
see D-9.6.
D-8.9 Evacuation Drills
a) Frequency of drills
b) How conducted?
c) Participation. Who participated? How‘?
d) Controls and supervision
e) Recording of details of drills
D-8.10 Fire Command Station
a) Location
b) Requirements
1) Adequate illumination
2) _ Adequate communication to
mechanical equipment room gnd
elevator control room on each floor
3) Copy of Fire Safety Plan
4) Copy of Building Information Form
5) Representative floor plans showing
location of signs, floor remote
station, communications, etc.
,.62
D-8. I I Signs
a). Signs at elevator landings. Floor diagrams
b) Floor numbering
C) Stairway identification
d) Elevator idcntitication
e) Stair re-entry
D - 8 . 1 2 F i r e Preventation und F i r e
Protection Programme See D-9.7.
D-8.l3 B u i l d i n g /rtformatio~r Form - -
See D-9.8.
D - 8 . 1 4 Kepresentati\le Floor Plan -
See D-9.9.
D-8.15 Fire Safer,. Plan Prepared h_is -~
See D-9.10.
a) Date when prepared
b) D.ate when revised
D-9. DUTIES
D-9.1 Fire Safety Director’s Duties
D-9.1.1 Be familiar with the written Fire
Safety Plan providing for fire drill and
evacuation procedure in accordance with
orders on the subject.
D-9.1.2 Select qualified building service
emplpyees for a Fire Party and orgamze, train
and supervise such Fire Brigade.
D-9.1.3 Be responsible for the availability
and state of readiness of the Fire Party.
D-9.1.4 Conduct fire and evacuation drills.
D-9.1.5 Be responsible for the designation
and training of a Fire Warden for each floor,
and sufficient Deputy Fire Wardens for each
tenancy in accordance with orders on the
subject.
D-9.1.6 Be responsible for a daily check for
the availability of the Fire Warden and
Deputy Wardens, and see that up-to-date
organization charts are posted.
N OTE - If
the number of Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire
Wardens in the building is such that it is impractical to
individually contact each one daily. a suggested method
to satisfy the requirement is to make provisions for the
Fire Warden, or a Deputy Fire Warden in the absence of
the Fire Warden, to notify the Fire Safety Director when
the Fire Warden or required number of Deputy Fire
Wardens are not available. In order to determine the
compliance by the Fire Warden and Deputy FIZZ
Wardens, when this method is used, the Fire Safety
Director shall make a spot check of several different
floors each day.
D-9.1.7 Notify the owner or some other
person having charge of the building when
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
any designated individual is neglecting his
responsibilities contained in Fire Safety Plan.
The owner or the other personirrcharge of the
building shall bring the matter to the attention
of the firm employing the individual. If the
firm fails to correct the condition, the Fire
Department shall be notified by the
owner/ person in charge of the building.
D-9.1.8 In the event of fire, shall report to the
Fire Command Station to supervise, provide
for and coordinate:
4 Ensure that the Fire Department has been
notified of any fire or fire alarm.
b) Manning of the Fire Command Station.
c) Direction of evacuating procedures as
provided in the Fire Safety Plan.
4 Reports on conditions on fire floor for
information of Fire Department on their
arrival.
e) Advise the Fire Department Officer in
charge in the operation of the Fire
Command Station.
D-9.1.9 Be responsible for the training and
activities of the Building Evacuation
Supervisor.
D-9.2 Deputy Fire Safety Director’s Duties
D-9.2.1 Subordinate to the Fire Safety
Director
D-9.2.2 Perform duties of Fire Safety
Director in his absence.
D-9.3 Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire
Wardens Duties-The tenant or tenants of
each floor shall, upon request of the owner or
person in charge of buildings, make
responsible and dependable employees
available for designation by the Fire Safety
Director as Fire Warden and Deputy Fire
Wardens.
D-9.3.1 Each floor of a building shall be under
the direction of a designated Fire Warden for
the evacuation of occupants in the event of
fire. He shall be assisted in his duties by the
Deputy Fire Wardens. A Deputy Fire Warden
shall be provided for each tenancy. When the
floor area of a tenancy exceeds7OOm’ of
occupiable space, a Deputy Fire Warden shall
be assigned for each 700m* or part thereof.
D-9.3.2. Each Fire Warden and Deputy Fire
Warden shall be familiar with the Fire Safety
Plan, the location of exits and the location
and operation of any available fire alarm
system.
D-9.3.3 In the event of fire, or fire alarm the
Fire Warden shall ascertain the location of the
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
fire, and direct evacuation of the floor in
accordance with directions received and the
following guidelines:
4 The most critical areas for immediate
evacuation are the fire floor and floors
immediately above.
Evacuation from the other floors shall be
instituted when instructions from the Fire
Command Station or conditions indicate
such action. Evacuation should be via
uncontaminated stairs. The Fire Warden
shall try to avoid stairs being used by the
Fire Department. If this is not possible, he
shall try to attract the attention of the Fire
Department Personnel before such
personnel open the door to the fire floor.
b) Evacuation to two or more levels below
the fire floor is generally adequate. He
shall keep the Fire Command Station
informed regarding his location.
4 Fire Wardens and their Deputies shall see
that all occupants are notified of the fire,
and that they proceed immediately to
execute the Fire Safety Plan.
4 The Fire Warden on the fire floor shall, as
soon as practicable, notify the Fire
Command Station of the particulars.
e) Fire Wardens on floors above the fire
shall, after executing the Fire Safety Plan,
notify the Fire Command Station of the
means being used for evacuationaud any
other particulars.
0 In the event that stairways serving fire
floor and/or floors above are unusable
due to contamination or cut off by fire
and/or smoke or that several floors above
fire involve large numbers of occupants
who must be evacuated, consideration
may be given to using elevators in
accordance with the following:
1) If the elevators servicing his floor
also service the fire floor, they shall
not be used. However, elevators may
be used if there is more than one bank
of elevators, and he is-informed from
the Fire Command Station that one
bank is unaffected by the fire.
2) If elevators do not service the fire
floor and their shafts have no
openings on the fire floor, they may
be used, unless directed otherwise.
3) Elevators manned by trained
building personnel or firemen may
also be used.
41 In the absence of a serviceable
elevator, the Fire Warden shall select
the safest stairway to use for
evacuation on the basis of the
location of the fire and any
W63
 information received from the Fire
Command Station. The Fire Warden
shall check the environment in the
stairs prior to entry for evacuation. If
it is affected by smoke, alternative
stair shall be selected, and the Fire
Command Station notified.
5) The Fire Warden shall keep the Fire
Command Station informed of the
means being employed for
evacuation by the occupants of his
floor.
g) Ensure that an alarm has been
transmitted.
D-9.3.4 ORGANISATION CHART FOR F I R E
D RILL AND E VACUATION A SSIGNMENT - A
chart designating employees and their
assignments shall be prepared and posted in a
conspicuous place in each tenancy and on
each floor of a tenancy that occupies more
than one floor and a copy shall be in the
possession of the Fire Safety Director.
D-9.3.5 Have available an updated listing of
all personnel with physical disabilities who
cannot use stairs unaided. Make
arrangements to have these occupants assisted
in moving down the stairs to two or more
levels below fire floor. If it is necessary to
move such occupants to a still lower level
during the fire, move them down the stairs to
the uppermost floor served by an uninvolved
elevator bank and than remove the street
floor by elevator. Where resistance is required
for such evacuation, notify Fire Safety
Director.
D-9.3.6 Provide for Fire Warden
identification during fire drills and fires, such
as using armband, etc.
D-9.3.7 Ensure that all persons on the floor
are notified of fire and all are evacuated to
safe areas. A search must be conducted in the
lavatories to ensure all are out. Personnel
assigned as searchers can promptly and
efficiently perform this duty.
D-9.3.8 Check availability of applicable
personnel on Organisation Chart and provide
for a substitute when the position on a chart is
not covered.
D-9.3.9 After evacuation, perform a head
count to ensure that all regular occupants
known to have occupied the floor have been
evacuated.
D-9.3.10 When alarm is received, the Fire
Warden shall remain at a selected position in
the vicinity of the communication station on
the floor, in order to maintain communication
with the Fire Command Station and to receive
and give instructions.
t”*64
D-9.4 Building Evacuation Supervisor’s
Duties - A Building Evacuation Supervisor
is required at all times other than normal
working or business hours when there are
occupants in the building and there is no Fire
Safety Director on duty in the building.
D-9.4.1 He shoQld be capable of directing the
evacuation of the occupants as provided by
the Fire Safety Plan.
D-9.4.2 During fire emergencies, the primary
responsibility of the Building Evacuation
Supervisor shall be to man the Fire Command
Station, and the direction and execution of
the evacuation as provided in the Fire Safety
Plan.
a) The Building Evacuation Supervisor’s
training and related activities shall be
under the direction of the Fire Safety
Director in accordance with these rules,.
and the Fire Safety Plan. Such activities
shall be subject to Fire Department
control.
D-9.5 Fire Party Duties - On receipt of an
alarm for iire the Fire Party shall:
4 report to the floor below the fire to assist
in evacuation and provide information to
the Fire Command Station.
after evacuation of fire floor, endeavour
b)
to control spread of fire by closing doors,
etc.
c) atiempt to control the fire until arrival of
the Fire Department, if the fire is small
and conditions do not pose a personal
threat.
4 leave one member on the floor below the
fire to direct the Fire Department to the
Gre location and to inform them of
conditions.
9 on arrival of the Fire Depariment, the
Fire Party shall report to the Fire
Command Station for additional
instructions.
fl have a member designated as runner, who
shall know the location of the nearest
telephone, and be instructed ib its use.
Such member shall immediately upon
receipt of information that there is a fire
or evidence of fire, go to the telephone,
transmit an alarm and await the arrival of
the Fire Department and direct such
department to the fire.
NOTE - A chart designating employees and their
assignments shall be prepared.
D-9.6 Occupants ’ Instructions
a) The applicable parts of the approved Fire
Safety Plan shall be distributed to all
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 tenants of the building by the building
management when the Fire Safety Plan
has been approved by the Fire
Commissioner.
b) The applicable parts of the approved Fire
Safety Plan shall then be distributed by
the tenants to all their employees and by
the building management to all their
building employees.
cl All occupants of the building shall
participate and cooperate in carrying out
the provisions of the Fire Safety Plan.
D-y.7 Fire Prevention and Fire Protection
l’rogrumme
4 A plan for periodic formal inspections of
each floor area, including exit facilities,
fire extinguishers and house keeping shall
be developed. A copy of such plan be
submitted.
b) Provision shall be made for the monthIy
testing of communication and alarm
systems.
D-9.8 Building Information Form - It shall
include the following information:
a) Building address,. _ _ _ . . Pin Code . . . . . . .
b) O w n e r o r p e r s o n i n - c h a r g e o f
b u i l d i n g - Name, Address and
Telephone Number.
cl Fire Safety Director and Deputy Fire
Safety Director’s Name, and Telephone
Number.
4 Certificate of occupancy. Location where
posted, or duplicate attached.
4 Height, area, class of construction.
f-l Number, type and location of fire stairs
and/or fire towers.
g) Number, type and location of horizontal
exits or other areas of refuge.
h) Number, type, location and operation of
elevators and escalators.
j) Interior fire alarms, or alarms to central
stations.
k) Communications systems and/or walkie
talkie, telephones, etc.
m) Standpipe system; size and location of
risers, gravity or pressure tank, fire pump,
location of siames connections, name of
em loyee with certificate of qualification
anB number of certificate.
n) Sprinkler system; name of employee.with
Certificate of Fitness and certificate
PART I V FIRE PJIOTECTION
number. Primary and secondary water
supply, fire pump and areas protected.
P) Special extinguishing system if any,
components and operation.
q) Average number of persons normally
employed in building. Daytime and night
time.
r) Average number of handicapped people in
building. Location. Daytime and night
time.
s) Number of persons normally visiting the
building. Daytime and night time.
t) Service equipment such as:
1) Electric power. primary, auxiliary;
2) Lighting, normal, emergency, type
and loca.tion;
3) Heating. type, fuel, location of
heating unit;
4) Ventilation -with fixed windows,
emergency means of exhausting heat
and smoke;
5) Air Conditioning Systems - Brief
description of the system, including
ducts and floors serviced;
6) Refuse storage and disposal;
7) Fire ‘fighting equipment and
appliances. other than standpipe and
sprmkler system;
8) Other pertinent building equipment.
u) Alterations and repair operations, if any,
and the protective and preventive
measures necessary to safeguard such
operations with attention to torch
operations.
v) Storage and use of flammable solids,
liquids and/ or gases.
w) Special occupancies in the building and
the proper protection and maintenance
thereof. Places of public assembly,
studios, and theatrical occupancies.
D-9.9 Representative Floor Plan-A floor
plan, representative of the majority or the
floor designs of the entire building, shall be at
the Command Post, in the main lobby, under
the authority of the Fire Safety Director. One
copy of a representative floor plan shall be
submitted to the Fire Department with the Fire
Safety Plan.
D-9.10 Fire Safety Plan - In planning,
evaluate the individual floor layouts, the
population of floors, the number and kinds of
exits, the zoning of the floor by area and
occupants. Determine the movement of traffic
l”-65
by the most expeditious route to an
appropriate exit and alternative route for each
zone, since under fire conditions one or more
exits may not be usable. This format is to be
used in the preparation of the Fire Safety
Plan.
Nothing contained in this Fire Safety Plan
format is to be construed as all inclusive. All
rules and.other requirements are to be fully
complied with.
1>-9. I I Personal Fire lnwuction Card - All
the occupants of the building shall be given a
Personal Fire Instruction Card giving the
details of the floor plan and exit routes along
with the instructions to be followed in the
event of fire. A typical Personal Fire Instruc-
tion Card shall be as follows:

PERSONAL FIRE
INSTRUCTION CARD

I 1
1 SEAL ]

NAME OF THE ORGANIZATION

ADDRESS OF THE ORGANIZATION

I

DESIGNATION:

FLOOR NO:

FIRE WARDEN

“-66 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

INSTRUCTIONS: IF YOU DISCOVER A FIRE:
I. Break the glass of the nearest push button
FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY YOU fire alarm, and push the button.
SHOULD KNOW
2. Attack the fire with extinguishers
I. Two push button fire alarm boxes are provided on your floor. Take guidance
provided per floor. You should read the from your Wardens.
operating instructions.
3. Evacute if your Warden asks you to do so,
2. Y o u s h o u l d r e a d t h e o p e r a t i n g
instructions on the body of the fire IF YOU HEAR EVACUATION
extinguishers provided on your floor. INSTRUCTIONS:
3. The nearest exit from your table. I. Leave the floor immediately by the
south/north staircase.
4. Your assembly point on ground floor
(check with your Fire/Dy. Fire Warden. 2. R e p o r t t o y o u r W a r d e n a t y o u r
predetermined assembly point outside the
building.
5. FOR YOUR OWN PROTECTION YOU
SHOULD REPORT TO YOUR Do not try to use lifts.
FIRE/DEPUTY FIRE WARDEN
Do not go to cloakroom.
a) If any exit door/ route is obstructed by
loose materials, goods, boxes, etc. Do not run or shout.
b) If any staircase door, lift lobby door Do not stop to collect personal
does not close automatically, or does belongings.
not close completely.
7. Keep the lift lobby and staircase doors
c) If any push button fire alarm point, or shut.
fire extinguisher is obstructed,
damaged or apparently out of order. YOUR ASSEMBLY POINT IS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NORTH
19 18 17 16

Y)

BLOCK NO. 2
l

t;;
2
z
BLOCK NO. I
l

CI

6 5 4 3 2 I M
SOUTH

(*To indicate appropriate plan of building concerned)

 LIST OF STANDARDS
The foNoh*ing list records those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and
accepted standards’ in the fulfifment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standard shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may be used
by the AuthoritJq as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
Code.
In (he follonin~ list the number appearing in the first column within parentheses indicates the
number qf the reference in this part.
(1) IS :3808-1979 Method of test f o r
non-combustibility of building
materials yirst revision)
(2) 1s : 8757-1978 Glossary of terms
associated with fire safety.
(3) IS : 3809-197Y Fire resistance test of
structures (first revision)
(4) IS : 1642-196O* Code of practice for fire
safety of buildings (general): Materials
and details of construction
(5) IS: 3614 (Part I)-1966 Specification for
fire check doors: Part I Plate, metal
covered and rolling type
(6) IS : 1646-1982 Code of practice for fire
safety of buildings (general): Electrical
installations first revision)
(7) IS : 2175-1977 Specification for heat
sensitive fire detectors for use in
automatic electric fire alarm system
first revision)
(8) IS: 2189-1976 Code of practice for
installation of automatic fire alarm
system using heat sensitive type fire
detectors (first revision)
(9) 1S:2190-1979 Code of practice for
selection, installation and maintenance
of portable first-aid fire appliances
(second revision)
IS : 2217-1982 Kecommenc!ations for
providing first-aid fire fighting
arrangements in public buildings (first
revision)
(10) IS : 636-1979 Specification for fire
fighting hose rubber lined or ruberized
fabric lined, woven-jacketed (second
revision)
- - - -
‘Ulldcr revision
lv_6*
IS : 884-1969 ‘Specification for first-aid
hose reel for fire fighting (for fixed
installations)
I S : 901-1975 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
c o u p l i n g s , dduble male and doule
female, instantanieous pattern, for fire
fighting (second revision).
IS : 902-1974 Specification’ for suction
hose couplings for fire fighting purposes
(second revision)
IS : 903-1984 Specification for fire hose
tielivery couplings, branch pipe, nozzles
and nozzle spanner (third’ revision)
(under print)
IS : 904-1983 Specification for two-way
and three-way suction collectings heads
for fire fighting purposes ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS : 905-1980 Specification for delivery
brcechings dividing and collecting,
instantaneous pattern, for fire fighting
purposes (second revision)
IS : 906- I972 Specification for branch
with revolving head for fire fighting
purposes (second revision)
IS : 907-1984 Specification for suction
strainers, cylindrical and hose types, for
fire fighting purposes (second revision)
(under print)
1s : 908-1975 Specification for fire
hydrant, stand post type ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS: 909-1975 Specification for
underground fire hydrant, sluice valve
type (second revision)
1s : 9 lo-1980 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
combined key for hydrant, hydrant
cover and lower valve (second revision)
IS : 926-l 970 Specification for fireman’s
axe (first revision)
IS : 927-198 I Specification for fire
hooks (second revision)
IS : 928- I984 Specification for fire bells
(second revision) (under print)
IS : 930- I977 Specification for wooden
extension ladders for fire brigade use
(first revision)
lS:931-1973 Specification for wheeled
fir6 escape (firsr revision)
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INCHA
IS: 933-1976 Specification for portable
chemical fire extinguisher, foam type
(second revision)
IS : 934-1976 Specification for portable
chemical fire extinguisher, soda acid
type (third revision)
IS : 937- I98 I Specification for washers
for water fittings for fire fighting
purposes (second revision)
IS : 939- 1977 Specification for snatch
block for use with fibre rope for fire
brigade use first *revision)
IS : 940- I976 Specification for portable
chemical fire extinguisher, water type
(gas pressure) (second revision)
IS : 94 I- I977 Functional requirements
for blowers and exhauster for fire
fighting (first revision)
IS : 942-1982 Specification for 275-
I/min portable pump set for fire
fighting (second revision)
IS : 943-1979 Specification for 680-
1 / min trailer pump for fire brigade use
(second revision)
IS: 944-1979 Specification for I 800-
1 / min trailer pump for fire brigade use
(second revision)
IS : 946-1977 Functional requirements
for motor fire engine (/irst revision)
IS : 947- I%0 Specification for towing
tender for trailer pump for fire brigade
use
IS : 948- I983 Specification for water
tender, type A, for fire brigade use
(second revision)
IS : 949-1967 Specification for
emergency tender for fire brigade use
and rescue tender for general purposes
first fevision)
IS : 950- 1980 Specification for water
tender, type B for fire brigade use
(second revision)
IS : 952-1969 Specification for
fognozzle for fire brigade use
IS : 954-1974 Functional requirements
for carbon-dioxide tender for fire
brigade use @rst revision)
IS : 955-1980 Specification for dry
powder tender for fire brigade use wrst
revision)
IS : 957-1967 Specification for control
van for fire brigade use
IS : 1941 (Part I)-1976 Functional
requirements for electric motor sirens:
Part I AC 3 phase 50 Hz, 415 V type
(second revision)
IS : 2097-1983 Specification for foam
making branch (fkst revision)
IS: 2171-1976 Specification for
portable fire extinguishers, dry powder
type (second revision)
IS: 2175-1977 Specification for, heat
sensitive fire detectors for use in
automatic electric fire, alarm system
(jkst revision)
IS : 2298-1977 Specification for single-
barrel stirrup pump for fire fighting
purposes (second revision)
IS : 2546-1974 Specification for
galvanized mild steel fire bucket (/it-St
revision)
IS : 2696- 1974 Fut&onal requirements
for I 125-I /min light fire engine first
revision)
IS : 2745-1983 Specification for
firemen’s helmets (second revision)
IS : 2871-1983 Specification for branch
pipe, universal, for fire fighting
purposes first revision)
IS : 2878- 1976 Specification for
portable fire extinguishers, carbon-
dioxide type (first revision)
IS : 2930- 1980 Specification for hose
laying tender for fire brigade use(j?rst
revision)
IS: 3582-1984 S ecification for basket
strainers for fptre fighting purposes
(cylindrical type) (j?rst revision) (under
print)
IS : 4308Ll982 Specification for dry
powder for fire fighting flist revision)
IS : 457 I- 1977 Specification for
aluminium extension ladders for fire
brigade use first revision)
1s : 4643-1984 Specification for suction
wrenches for fire brigade use first
revision) (under print)
IS : 4861-1984 Specification for dry
powder for fighting fires in burning
metals first revision) (under print)
IS : 4927-1968 Specification for unlined
flax canvas hose for fire fighting
IS : 4928-1968 Specification for quick
closing clack-valve for centrifugal pump
outlet
IS : 4947-1977 Specification for gas
cartridge for fire extinguishers (first
revision)
IS : 4989-1974 Specification for foam
compound for producing mechanical
foam for fire fighting (first revision)
IS : 5131-1969 Specification fordividing
breeching with control, for fire brigade
use
IS : 5290-1983 Specification for landing
valve (second revision)
IS : 5486-1969 Specification for quick
release knife
IS : 5490 Specification for refills for
portable fire extinguishers and chemical
fire engines:
IS : 5490 (Part I)-1977 Part I For
soda acid portable Iire extinguishers
wrst revision)
IS: 5490 (Part II)-1977 Part II For
foam type portable fire
extinguishers (first revision)
IS: 5490 (Part III)-1979 Part III For
soda acid chemical fire enginesCfirst
revision)
IS : 5490 (Part IV)- 1979 Part IV For
foam chemical fire engines (first
revision)
IS : 5505-1969 Specification formulti-
edged rescue axe (non-wedging)
IS : 5506 1979 Specification for 50-l
capacity chemical fire engine, soda acid
type first revision)
IS : 5507-1979 Specification for 50-l
capacity chemical fire engine, foam type
@St revision)
IS : 5612 Specification for hose-clamp
and hose-bandages far fire brigade use
IS:5612 (Part I)-1977 Part I Hose
clamps first revision)
IS: 5612 (Part II)-1977 Part II Hose
bandages first revision)
IS : 5714-1981 Specification for
hydrant, stand-pipe for fire fighting
first revision)
IS : 6026-1970 Specification for hand
operated sirens
IS : 6067- 1983 Functional requirements
for water tender, Type ‘X’ for fire
brigade use cfirsf revision)
IS : 6234- 197 1 Specification for
portable fire extinguishers, water type
(constant air pressure)
IS : 8090-1976 Specification for
coupling branch pipe, nozzle, used in
hose reel tubing for fire fighting
IS : 8096- 1976 Specification for fire
beater
IS : 8149-1976 Functional requirements
for twin CO2 fire extinguishers (trolley
mounted)
IS: 8423-1977 Specification for
controlled percolating hose for fire
fighting
IS :‘8442-1977 Functional requirements
for stand post type water monitor fire
fighting
IS : 9972-1981 Specification for
automatic sprinkler heads
p NATIDNAL
IS : 10204-1982 Specification for
portable fire extinguisher mechanical
foam type
IS : 10460- 1983 Functional requirements
for small foam tender for fire brigade
use
IS : 10474 1983 Specification for 150
litre capacity chemical fire engine, foam
type
IS : 10658-1983 Specification for higher
capacity dry powder fire extinguisher
(trolley mounted)
IS : 1984 Specification for
extended branch pipe for fire fighting
(under print)
IS : 1984 Specification for
portable fire extinguisher BCF type
(under print)
IS : 1984 Functional requirements
of dry powder tender 2 000 kg capacity
(under prinrJ
IS : 1984 Specification for
bromochlorodifluor.omethane (Halon)
(under print)
(11) IS : 884- 1969 Specification for first-aid
hose reel for fire fighting (for fixed
installation)
(12) IS : 3034-1981 Code of practice for fire
.safety of industrial buildings: Electrical
generating and distributing stations
(/Zrst r e v i s i o n )
(13) I$ : 6382-1984 Code of ractice for
design and installation ofPtxed carbon
dioxide fire extinguishing systemyirst
revision) (under print)
(14) IS : 1645-1960 Code of practice for fire
safety of buildings (general): Chimneys,
flues, flue pipes and hearths
IS:l647-1960 Code of ractice for fire
safety of buildings Qgeneral): Non-
.electric lighting equipment, oil and gas
heaters and burners of small capacity
IS: 1649- 1962 Code of practice for
design and construction of flues and
chimneys for domestic heating
appliances
( 15) IS : 4963- 1968 Recommendations for
buildings and facilities for the physically
handicapped
(16) IS : 4878-1968 Byelaws for construction
of cinema buildings
(17) IS : 1646-1982 Code of practice for fire
safety of buildings (general): Electrical
installations (jIrst revision)
IS :2726-1964 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings: Cotton
gining and pressing (including cotton
seed delintering factories)
-~ocmDlA
IS :3034-198 I Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial bui!dings: Electrtcal
generating and distrrbutmg stations
(first revision)
IS :3058-1965 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial burldings: Viscose
rayon yarn and/ or staple fibre plants
lS:3079-1965 Code of practice for fire
safet of industrial burldings: Cotton
text1Ie mills
lS:3594-1967 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings: General
storage and warehousing including cold
storages
IS: 3595-1967 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings: Coal
Pulverizers
lS:3836-1979 Code of practice for fire
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
safety of industrial buildings: Jute mills
first revision)
I S :4209-1966 C o d e o f s a f e t y f o r
chemical laboratories
IS :4226-1967 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings:
Aluminium powder factories
IS :4886-1968 Code of ractice for ftre
safety of industrial kildings: T e a
factories
IS 6329- 197 I Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings: Saw mills
and wood works
IS :9 109-1979 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings : Paint and
Varnish factories
(18) IS : 655-1963 Specification for metal air
ducts (revised)
The National Building Code of India consists of the following Parts and Sections:

PART I DEFINITIONS
PART II ADMINISTRATION
PART 111 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND
GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1V FIRE PROTECTION ’
PART V BUILDING MATERIALS
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Section 1 Loads
Section 2 Foundations
Section 3 Wood
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
Plain and Reinforced Concrete
Prestressed Concrete
Section 6 Steel
Section 7 Prefabrication and Systems Building
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES
Section 1 Lighting and Ventilation
Section 2 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Air-conditioning and Heating
Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control
Section 5 Installation of Lifts and Escalators
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES
Section I Water Supply
Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation
Section 3 Gas Supply
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
PART V BUILDING MATERIALS

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS

0. FOREWORD ... 2

1. SCOPE ... 3

2. MATERIALS ... 3

3. NEW OR ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS ... 3

4. USED MATERiALS ... 4

5. STORAGE OF MATERIALS ... 5

6. METHODS OF TEST ... 6

PART V BUILDING MATERIALS V- 1

 PART V BUILDING MATERIALS

0. FOREWORD
0.1 Ensuring the quality and effectiveness of building materials used in the construction and
their storage are as important as the other phases of building activity like planning, designing
and constructing the building itself.
0.2 This part, therefore. lists the Indian Standards for all materials used in building
construction, in vogue. The methods of tests, to ensure the requirements demanded of the
materials in the various situations, are also included.
0.3 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. This revision. incorporates the up-to-date
list of acceptable Indian Standards specifications andmethods of tests given at the end of this
part of the Code.
0.4 This part does not preclude the use of new or alternative building materials, provided it is
proved by authentic tests that the new material is effective and suitable for the purpose intended.
0.5 A reference to SP:21-1983 Summaries of Indian Standards for Building Materials (under
print) may be useful. This publication gives the Summaries of Indian Standards covering various
building materials, fittings and components except standards relating to paints.

V-
2 NATtONAL DUILDINC CODE O F INMA
1. SCOPE
1.1 ThispartoftheCodecoversthemimmum
requirements of building materials, and
criteria for accepting new or alternative
building materials.
2. MATERIALS
2.1 Every material used in fulfilment of the
requirements of this part, unless otherwise
specified in the Code or approved, shall
conform to the specifications issued by the
Indian Standards Institution. In the case of
materials where Indian Statidards are not
available, the same shall conform to the
specifications issued by the recognized
authority. A list of acceptable Indian
Standard specificatiohs is given at the end of
this part of the Code.
N OTE---The list given at the end of this part of the Code
would be augmented from time to time by amendments,
revisions and addittons. The Authority shall take
coanisance of such amendments and revisions. The latest
vekion of a specification shall, as far as possible, be
adopted at the time of enforcement of this part of the
Code.
3. NEW OR ALTERNATIVE
MATERIALS
3.1 The provisions of this part are not
intended to prevent the use ofany material not
specifically prescribed. Any such material
may be approved provided it is shown to be
satisfactory for the purpose intended and at
least the equivalent of that required in this
part in quality, strength, effectiveness, fire
resistiveness, durability, safety, maintenance
and compatibility.
3.2 Approval in writing shall be obtained by
the owner or his agent before any new,
alternative or equivalent material is used. The
Authority shall base such approval on the
principle set forth in 3.1 and shall require that
tests be made (see 6. I) or sufficient evidence or
proof be submitted. at the expense of the
?MT V BUILDING MATERIALS
owner or his agent, to substantiate any claim
for the proposed material.
N OTE -For interpretation of the term ‘Authority’
(see also 6. I), the definition of ‘Authority having
jurisdiction’ given in Part II Administration shall apply.
4. USED MATERIALS
4.1 The use of used materials may not be
precluded provided these meet the minimum
requirements of this part for new materials
(see Part II Administration).
5. STORAGE OF MATERIALS
5.1 All building materials shall be stored on
the building site in such a way as to prevent
deterioration or the loss or impairment of
their structural and other essential properties
(see Part VII Constructional practices and
safety).
6. METHODS OF TEST
6.1 Every test of material required in this part
or by the Authority shall be carried out in
accordance with a standard method of test
issued by the Indian Standards Institution. In
the absence of methods of tests where Indian
Standards are not available, the same shall
conform to the methods of tests issued by the
recognized authority. A list of acceptable
Indian Standard methods of tests is given at
the end of this part of the Code. Laboratory
tests shall . . be conducted by recognized
laboratories acceptable to the Authority.
6.1.f The manufacturer/ supplier shall satisfy
himself that materials conform to the
requirements of the specifications and if
requested shall supply a certificate to this
effect to the purchaser or his representative.
When such test certificates are not available,
the specimen of the material shall be tested
and the cost thereof should be borne by the
manufacturer/ supplier if the material does
not conform to the specification after,such
tests. If the material is found acceptable the
purchaser will bear the cost of such tests.
 LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and
‘accepted standards’ in the fuljilment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standardshall beadoptedat the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listedmay be used
by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
Code.
In thefollowing list the number appearing in thefirst column within parentheses indicates the
number of the reference in this Part.

General IS : 2645 1975 Specification for integral

IS: 1911-1967Scheduleofunitweightsof
building materials (first revision)
Cetrlen: a.nd Concrete
4 .%GKEGATES
IS : 383’1970 Specification for coarse and
fine aggregates from natural sources for
concrete (second revision)
IS : 650- 1966 Specification for standard
sand for testing of cement (first revision)
IS : 2386 Methods of test for aggregates
for concrete:
IS : 2386 (Part I)- 1963 Part 1 Particle
size and shape
IS: 2386 (Part II)-1963 Part 11
Estimation of deleterious materials
and organic impurities
IS:2386 (Part III)-1963 Part III
Specific gravity, density, voids,
absorption and bulking
cement waterproofing compounds(first
revision)
IS : 3466- I967 Specification for masonry
cement firs/ revision)
IS : 6452-1972 Specification for high
alumina cement for structural use
IS : 6909-1973 Specification for
supersulphated cement
IS : 8041-1978 Specification for rapid
hardening Portland cement (first
revision)
IS : 8042-1978 Specification for white
Portland cement (first revision)
IS : 8043- 1978 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
hydrophobic Portland cement Cfi’rst
revision)
IS : 8 I I2- 1976 Specification for high
strength ordinary Portland cement
c) CEMEN-T A N D C O N C R E T E S A M P L I N G

IS : 2386 (Part IV)-1963 Part IV ANDM ETHODS OF T E S T

Mechanical properties
IS : 5 I6- I959 Methods of test for strength
IS : 2386 (Part V)-1963 Part V of concrete
Soundness
IS : 1199-1959 Methods of sampling and
IS: 2386 (Part VI)-1963 Part VI analysis of concrete
Measuring mortar making properties
of fine aggregates IS : 2770 (Part I)-1967 Methods oftesting
IS: 2386 (Part VII)-1963 Part VII bond in reinforced concrete: Part 1 Pull-
Alkali aggregate reactivity out test
IS: 2386 (Part VIII)-1963 Part VIII lS:3085-1965 Methods of test for
Petrographic examination permeability of cement mortar and
concrete
IS : 2430-1969 Methods of sampling of
aggregates for concrete IS : 3535-1966 Methods of sampling
hydraulic cement
IS : 9 IO3- I979 Specification for
admixtures for concrete IS
:
IS : 9 I42- 1979 Specification for artificial
lightweight aggregates for concrete
masonry units
b) CEMENT
IS : 269-1976 Specification for ordinary
and low heat Portland cement (third
revision)
IS : 455 1976 Specification for Portland
slag cement (third revision)
IS : 1489-1976 Specification for Portland
pozzolana cement (second revision)
v-4
 IS : 9013-1978 Method of making, curing
and determining compressive strength of
accelerated cured concrete test specimens
IS: 9284-1979 Method of test for
abrasion resistance of concrete
d) PRECAST C ONCRETE P R O D U C T S
IS : 2 185 Specification for concrete
masonry units:
IS:2185(Part I)-1979 Part I H o l l o w
and solid concrete blocks (semnd
revision)
IS : 2185(Part II)-1983 Part II Hollow
and solid lightweight concrete blocks
IS:2185 ( P a r t Ill)-1984 P a r t 111
Autoclaved cellular (aerated) concrete
blocks (under print)
IS : 4 9 9 6 - 1 9 8 4 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
reinforced concrete fence posts (firs/
revision) (under print)
IS: 5751-1984 Specification for precast
concrete coping blocks first re\lision)
(under print)
IS : 5758-1984 Specification for precast
concrete kerbs (first revision) (under
print)
IS : 5820-1970 Specification for precast
concrete cable covers
I S : 6072-1971 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete
wall slabs
I S : 6073-1971 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete
floor and roof slabs
IS : 6441 Methods of test for autoclaved
reinforced cellular concrete products:
IS:6441 ( P a r t I)-1972 P a r t I
Determination of unit weight or bulk
density and moisture content
IS:6441 ( P a r t II)-1972 P a r t I I
Determination of drying shrinkage
I S : 6 4 4 1 ( P a r t IV)-1972 P a r t I V
Corrosion protection of steel
reinforcement in autoclaved cellular
concrete
IS:6441 ( P a r t V ) - 1 9 7 2 P a r t V
Determination of compressive
strength
IS:6441 ( P a r t VI)-1973 P a r t V I
Strength, deformation and cracking of
flexural members subject to bending-
short duration loading test
IS:6441 (Part VII)-1973 P a r t V I I
Strength, deformation and cracking of
flexural members subject to bending-
sustained loading test
IS:6441 (Part VIII)-1973 Part VIII
PART V BUILDING MATERIALS
Loading tests for flexural members in
diagonal tension
IS:6441 ( P a r t IX)-1973 P a r t I X
Jointing of autoclaved cellular
concrete elements
IS : 6523- 1983 Specification for precast
reinforced concrete door and window
frames (/i-W revision)
IS : 9872- 198 I Specification for precast
concrete septic tanks
IS : 9893- 198 I Specification for precast
concrete blocks for lintels and sills
e) AS B E S T O S C E M E N T P R O D U C T S
IS : 459-1970 Specification for
unreinforced corrugated and semi-
corrugated asbestos cement sheets
(second revision)
IS : I592- 1980 Specification for asbestos
cement pressure pipes (second revision)
IS: 1626 Specification for asbestos
cement building pipes and pipe fittings.
gutters and gutter fittings and roofing
fittings:
1S : 1626 (Part I)-1980 Part I Pipes and
pipe fittings yirsf revision)
IS: 1626(Part II)-1980 Part JIGutters
and gutter fittings (/Trsf revision)
I S : 1 6 2 6 ( P a r t Ill)-1981 Part III
Roofing accessories (first revision)
IS : 2096-1966 Specification for asbestos
cement flat sheets
IS : 2098- I964 Specification -for asbestos
cement building boards
lS:5913-1970 M e t h o d s o f t e s t f o r
asbestos cement products
IS : 6908-1975 Specification for asbestos
cement pipes and fittings for sewerage
and drainage
IS-: 7639-1975 Method of sampling
asbestos cement products
IS : 9627-1980 Specification for asbestos
cement pressure pipes (light duty)
f) CO N C R E T E P I P E S
IS : 458- I97 I Specification for concrete
pipes (with and without reinforcement)
(second revision)
I S : 784- 1978 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
prestressed concrete pipes (including
fittings) Y;rst revision)
IS : 1916-1963 Specification for steel
,cylinder reinforced concrete pipes
IS: 3597-1966 Methods of test for
concrete pipes
v-
5
 IS : 4350-1967 Soecification for concrete
porous pipes for under drainage
IS : 73 19- 1974 Specification for
perforated concrete pipes
IS : 7322-1974 Specification for specials
for steei cyiinder reinforced concrete
pipes
Pozzolanas
IS : 1344- I981 Specification for calcined
clay pozzoiana (second revision)
IS : 1727-1967 M e t h o d s o f t e s t f o r
pozzoianic materials (first revision)
IS : 38 l2- I98 1 Specification for fly ash for
use .as pozzoiana and admixture yi:rsr
revision)
IS: 6491-1972 Method ofsamplingflyash
Building Limes
IS : 712-1973 Specification for building
limes (second revision)
IS: 1624-1974 Method of field testing of
building lime (pirs! revision)
IS,: 2686-1977 Specification for cinder
aggregates for use in lime concrete firsf
revision)
IS : 3068-1975 Specification for broken
brick (burnt-ciay) coarse aggregates for
use in lime concrete first revision)
IS : 3115-1978 Specification for lime
based blocks (jirssr revision)
IS : 3 l82- 1975 Specification for broken
brick (burnt clay) fine aggregates for use
in lime mortar cfirst revision)
IS : 4098-1983 Specification for lime-
pozzolana mixture lfirsr revision)
IS : 4 I39- I976 Specification for sandlime
bricks first revision)
IS:6932 (Parts I to X)-IV73 Method of
tests for building limes
I S : 6Y32 ( P a r t I)-1973 P a r t I
Determination of insoluble residue,
loss on ignition, insoluble matter,
silicon dioxide, ferric and aluminium
oxide, calcium oxide and magnesium
oxide
IS:6Y32 ( P a r t II)-1973 P a r t I I
Determination of carbon dioxide
content
I S : 6 9 3 2 ( P a r t III)-I973 Part III
Determination of residue on slaking of
quicklime
I S : 6 9 3 2 ( P a r t IV)-1973 Part IV
Determination of fineness of hydrated
lime
“-6
IS : 6932 (Part V)- I 9 7 3 P a r t V
Determination of unhydrated oxide
IS: 6932 (Part VI)-1973 Part VI
Determination of volume yield of
quicklime
I S : 6 9 3 2 ( P a r t VII)-1973 Part VII
Determination of compressive and
transverse strength
IS:6932 (Part VIII)-1973 Part VIII
Determination of workability
I S : 6 9 3 2 ( P a r t IX)-1973 Part IX
Determination of soundness
IS : 6932 (Part X)-1973 Part X
Determination of popping and putting
of hydrated lime
IS:6932 (Part XI)-1983 Method of test
for building limes: Part XI
Determination of setting ttme of hydrated
lime
IS : 10360-1982 Specification for lime
pozzolana concrete blocks for paving
IS: Specification for quick
setting lime pozzolana mixture (under
print)
Stones
I S : I I21 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
determination of strength properties of
natural building stones:
I S : I121 ( P a r t I)-1974 P a r t I
y Compressive strength Cfirsr revision)
IS: I I21 ( P a r t ii)-1974 P a r t I I
Transverse strength yirst revision)
I S : II21 ( P a r t Iii)-1974 P a r t I I I
Tensile strength cfirsf revision)
IS: II21 (Part IV)-1974 Part IVShear
strength first revision)
IS : I I22- 1974 Methods for determination
of true specific gravity of natural building
stones (first revision)
IS : 1123-1975 Method of identification
of natural building stones (first revision)
I S : I 124-1974 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
determination of water absorption.
apparent specific gravity and porosity of
natural building stones (first revision)
I S : 1125-1974 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
determination of weathering of natural
building stones (/irsf revision)
I S : 1126-1974 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
determination of durability of natural
building stones yi:rsr revision)
IS : I l27- 1970 Recommendations for
dimensions and workmanship of natural
building stones for masonry work (first
revision)
I S : I 128-1974 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
limestone (slab and tiles) (first revision)
NATIONAI. BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 IS : 1130- 1969 Specification for marble
(blocks, slabs and tiles)
IS : 1706-1972 Method of determination
of resistance to wear by abrasion of
natural building stones yirst revision)
IS : 3 3 1 6 - 1 9 7 4 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
structural granite (firsr revision)
IS : 3620-1979 Spedification for laterite
stone block for masonry firsr revision)
IS : 3622-1977 Specification for sand
stone (slabs and tiles) (first revision)
lS:4121-1967 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
determination of water transmission rate
by capillary action through natural
building stones
IS : 4122-1967 Method of test for surface
softening of natural building stones by
exposure to acidic atmospheres
IS : 4348- 1973 Methods of test for
determination of permeability of natural
building stones (first revision)
IS:5218-1969 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
toughness of natural building stones
IS:5640-1970 M e t h o d o f t e s t f o r
determining the aggregates impact value
of soft coarse aggregates
IS : 6250- 198 1 Specification for roofing
slate tiles yi:rst revision)
IS:7779 Schedule for properties and
availability of stones for construction
purposes:
IS : 7779 (Part I/Set I.)-1975 Part I
Gujarat State, Section I Availability
of stones
IS : 7779 (Part I/ Set 2)- I975 Part 1
Gujarat State, Section 2 Engineering
properties of building stones
IS:7779 (Part I/Set 3)-1975 Part 1
Gujarat State, Section 3 Engineering
properties of stone aggregates
IS:7779 (Part lI/Sec I)-1979 Part II
Maharashtra State. Section I
Availability of stones
IS: 7779 (Part II/Set 2)-1979 Part 11
Maharashtra State, Section 2
Engineering properties of building
stones
IS : 7779 (Part 111 Set 3)-1979 Part 11
Maharashtra State. Section 3
Engineering properties of stone
aggregates
IS:7779(Part IlI/Sec2)-1980PartlII
Tamil Nadu State, Section 2
Engineering properties of building
stones
IS:7779(Part III/Sec3)-1980 Part 111
Tamil Nadu State. Section 3
?AET V B U I L D I N G MATPIIALS
Engineering properties of stone
aggregates
IS : 9394- 1979 Specification for stone
lintels
Clay Products for Building
a) BL O C K S
IS : 3952-1978 Specification for burnt
hollow b!ocks for walls and partitions
cfirst revision)
b) BR I C K S
IS : 1077-1976 Specification for common
burnt clay building bricks (thirdrevision)
IS : 2117-1975 Guide for manufacture of
hand-made common burnt clay building
bricks (secor?d revision)
IS : 2 I8@ 1970 Specification for heavy-
duty burnt clay building bricks (first
revision)
IS : 2222-1979 Specification for burnt
clay perforated building bricks (second
revision)
IS : 269 I- I972 Specification for burnt
clay facing bricks (first re~~i.~ion)
IS : 3495 (Parts 1 to IV)-1976 Methods of
test of buryt clay building bricks Isecond
re\Gon)
I S : 3 4 9 5 ( P a r t I)-1976 P a r t I
Determination ofcompresfive strength
(second rr\Ys!on)
1s : 349‘5 (Part !I)-1976 P a r t I I
Determination of water absorption
(semnd re\tision)
IS:3495 ( P a r t Ill)-1976 P a r t 111
Determination o f effloren\cence
(second revi.Fion)
IS: 3 4 9 5 ( P a r t IV)-!976 P a r t I V
Determination of warpage (second
revision)
IS : 3583-1975 Specification t’or burnt
clay paving bricks (Ji’rst re\Vsion)
IS : 4885-1968 SoecificaTion for sewer
bricks
IS : 5454-1978 Methods for sampling of
clay building bricks (first revision)
IS : 5779- 1970 Specification for burnt
clay soling bricks
IS : 6165-1971 Dimensions for special
shapes of clay bricks
c ) JALLIES
IS : 7556- 1975 Specification for burnt
clay jallies
d ) TILES
IS : 654- 1972 Specification for clay
roofing tiles, Mangalore oattern (.remnd
revision)
V-
7
 IS : 1464-1973 Specification for clay ridge
and ceiling tiles (first revision)
IS : 1478- 1969 Specification for clay
flooring tiles wrsf revision)
IS : 2690 Specification for burnt clay flat
terracing tiles:
IS : 2690 (Part I)-1975 Part 1 Machine
made (jlrst revision)
IS : 2690 (Part II)-1975 Part II Hand
made firer revision)
IS : 3367-1975 Specification for burnt
clay tiles for use in lining irrigation and
drainage works firsr revision)
IS : 3951 Specification for hollow clay
tiles for floor and roofs:
IS : 3951 (Part I)-1975 Part 1 Filler
type yirsl revision)
I S :3951 ( P a r t II)-1975 P a r t I I
Structural type firsr revision)
IS : 8920- 1978 Methods for sampling of
burnt clay tiles
Gypsum Building Materials
IS : 2095- I982 Specification for gypsum
plaster boards
IS: 2542 Methods of test for gypsum
plaster, concrete and products:
IS:2542 (Part I/Sections I to l2)-
1978 Part 1 Plaster and concrete (first
revision)
IS:2542(Part II/Sections I tog)-1981
Part II Gypsum products (first
revision)
IS: 2547 Specification for gypsum
building plaster:
IS: 2547 (Part I)-1976 Part 1
Excluding premixed lightweight
plaster (/ksf revision)
I S : 2 5 4 7 ( P a r t II)-1976 Part II
Premixed lightweight plaster (/ksf
revision)
IS : 2849- 1983 Specification for non-load
bearing gypsum partition blocks (solid
and hollow types) (f?rsr revision)
IS : 8272-1976 Specification for gypsum
plaster for use in the manufacture of
fibrous plaster boards
IS : 8273-1976 Specification for fibrous
gypsum plaster boards
IS : 9498-1980 Specification for inorganic
aggregates for use in gypsum plaster
Timber
a) TIMBER CL A S S I F I C A T I O N
IS : 3Y9- I963 C l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f
v- 8
commercial timbers and their zonal
distribution (revised)
IS : 1150-1976 Trade names and
abbreviated symbols for timber species
(second revision)
IS : 4970-1973 Key for identification of
commercial timber first revision)
b) T I M B E R T E S T I N G
IS : 1708-1969 Methods of testing small
clear specimens of timber (jkst revision)
IS: 1900-1974 Method of testing wood
poles yirst revision)
IS : 2408-1963 Methods of static tests of
timbers in structural sizes
IS: 2455-1974 Methods of sampling of
model trees and logs for timber testing
and their conversion first revision)
IS : 4907-1968 Method of testing timber
connectors
IS : 6874-1973 Methods of test for round
bamboos
IS: 8242-1976 Methods of test for split
bamboos
IS : 8292-1976 Methods for evaluation of
working qualities of timber under
different operations
IS:-8720-1978 Methods of sampling of
timber scantlings from depots and their
conversion for testing
IS : 8745-1978 Methods of presentation
of data of physical and mechanical
properties of timber
IS : 10420-1982 Method of determination
of Sound absorption coefficient of timber
by standing wave method
1S : 10754-1983 Method of determination
of thermal conductivity of timber
C) CO N V E R S I O N AND G RADING
IS : l90- 1974 Specification for coniferous
sawn timber (baulks and scanolings)
(third revision)
IS : 1326-1976 Specification for non-
coniferous sawn timber (baulks and
scantlings) (fksf revision)
IS: 1331-1971 Specification for cut sizes
of timber (second revision)
IS : 2372-1963 Specification for timber
for cooling towers
IS : 3337-1978 Specification for bakes
for general purposes (first revision)
IS: 3364 Method of measurement and
evaluation of defects in timber:
IS :,3364 (Part I)-1976 Part I Logs
first revision)
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 IS:3364 ( P a r t II)-1976 P a r t I I
Converted timber (/?rsr revision)
1%: 5966 1970 Specification for non-
coniferous timber in converted form for
general purpose
d) STRIJCTURAL TIMBER AND TEST
IS : 3629-1966 Specification for
structural timber in building
IS : 489 I- 1968 Specification for preferred
cut sizes of structural timber
1s : 4924 Method of test for nail jointed
timber trusses:
IS : 4924 (Part I)- I968 Part I
Destructive test
lS:4924 (Part II)-1968 Part II Proof
test
Bitumen and Tar Products
IS : 73-1961 Specification for paving
bitumen (revised)
IS : 212- 1983 Specification for crude coal
tar for general use (second revision)
IS : 2 15-l 98 I Specification for road tar
(second revision)
IS : 2 I6- I96 I Specification for coal. tar
pitch (revised)
IS : 217-1961 Specification for cutback
bitumen (revised)
IS: 218-1983 Specification for creosote
oil for use as wood preservatives(second
revision)
IS : 454-1961 Specification for Drgboi
type cutback bitumen (revised)
IS: 702-1961 Specification for industrial
bitumen (revised)
IS: 1201-1978 to 1220-1978 Methods for
testing tar and bituminous materials (/Tut
revision)
IS: 1201-1978 Sampling (first
revision)
IS: 1202-1978 Determination of
specific gravity (first revision)
IS : I203- 1978 Determination of
penetration first revision)
IS: 1204-1978 Determination of
residue of specified penetration Vi’rsr
revision)
IS: 1205-1978 Determination of
softening point (j?rst revision)
IS : 1206 Determination of viscosity:
IS: 1206 (Part I)-1978 Part I
Industrial viscosity yirst revision)
IS: 1206 (Part II)-1978 Part I)
Absolute viscosity (/i’r.v/ revision)
MAIT V BUILDING MATERIALS
1s: 1206 (Part III)-1978 Part’ 111
Kinematic viscosity (first revision)
IS : 1207-1978 Determination of
equiviscous temperature (EVT) (first
revision)
IS : 1208- I978 Determination of
ductility yi:rst revision)
IS : 1209-1978 Determination of flash
point and fire point (/k-St revision)
IS : 1210-1978 Float - test ( f i r s t
relsision)
IS : 12 I I-1
978 Determination of water
content (Dean and Stark method)
(fksr revisioh)
1s : 1212-1978 Determination of loss
of heating first revision)
IS : 1213-1978 Distillation test (first
revision)
IS : I2 14- 1978 Determination .of
matter insoluble in benzene wrst
revision)
IS: 1215-1978 Determination of
matter insoluble in toluene (first
revision)
IS: 1216-1978 Determination of
solubility in carbon disulphide or
trichloroethylene (first revision)
IS: 1217-1978 Determination’of
mineral-matter (ASH) flrsr re\ision)
IS: 1218-1978 Determination of
phenols Cfirst revision)
IS: 1219-1978 Determination of
naphthalene (first revision)
IS : 1220- I978 Determination of
volatile matter content (f?rst revision)
IS : 3 I 17-1965 Specification for bitumen
emulsion for roads (anionic type)
IS : 8887- I978 Specification for bitumen
emulsion for roads (cationic type)
IS: 9381-1979 Methods for testing tar
and bituminous materials: Determination
of FRAASS breaking point of bitumen
IS: 9382-1979 Methods for testing tar
and bituminous materials: Determination
of effect of heat and air by thin film oven
test
IS: 1051 l-1983 Method for determination
of asphaltenes in bitumen by
precipitation with normal haptane
IS : 10512-1983 Method for determination
of wax content in bitumen
Floor Coverings and Other Finishes
a ) GENERAL
IS: 777-1970 Specification for glazed
earthenware tiles first rr~i,vio~~)
V-
9
 IS : I237- I980 Specification for cement
concrete flooring tiles (/%W revision)
IS : 1542-1977 Specification for sand for
plaster (/?sr revision)
IS : 2333-198 I Specification for plaster of
Paris firer revision)
IS : 3461-1980 Specification for P V C
asbestos floor tiles (/i~r~l revision)
IS : 3462- 1979 Specification for flexible
PVC flooring (/irsr revision)
IS : 3463- 1966 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
polyst,yrene wall tiles
IS : 3464-198‘1 Methods of test for plastic
flooring and wall tiles (f?rsr revision)
IS :4456 Methods of test for chemical
resistant mortars:
IS : 4456 (Part I)-1967 Part I Silicate
type and resin type
IS:4456 ( P a r t II)-1967 P a r t I I
Sulphur type
IS : 4457- 1982 Specification for ceramic
unglazed vitreous acid resistant tiles (f?rsr
revision)
IS : 4832 Specification for chemical
resistant mortars:
1s: 4832 (Part I)-1969 Part I Silicate
type
IS : 4832 (Part II)- 1969 Part II Resin
type
IS:4832 ( P a r t Ill)-1968 P a r t I l l
Sulphur type
IS : 4860- 1968 Specification for acid-
resistant bricks
b) FLOORING C OMPOSITIONS
IS : 657- I982 Specification for materials
for use in the manufacture of magnesium
oxychloride flooring compositions
(second revision)
IS: 9162-1979 Methods oftestsfor resins,
hardners, and epoxy resin composition
for floor topping
IS : 9 I97- 1979 Specification for epoxy
resin composition for float topping
IS: 10032-1982 Methods of test for
materials for use in the preparation of
oxychloride flooring compositions
C) LINOLEUM
IS : 653- I980 Specification for linoleum
sheets and tiles (secortd revision)
IS: 9704-1980 Methods of tests for
linoleum sheets and tiles
d) RUBBER F LOORING
IS : 809-1970 Specification for rubber
“_lO
flooring materials for general purposes
yirsr revision)
e) B I T U M I N O U S F L O O R I N G
IS: 1195-1978 Specification for bitumen
mastic for flooring (second revision)
IS : 8374- I977 Specification for bitumen
mastic, anti-static and electrically
conducting grade
IS : 9510-1980 Specltlcatlon for bitumen
mastic acid-resisting grade
Waterproofing and Damp- proofing
Materials
IS : I322- 1982 Specification for bitumen
felts for waterproofing and damp-
proofing (third revision)
IS : I580- 1969 Specification for
bituminous compound for waterproofing
and caulking purposes (f&w revision)
IS : 3037-1965 Specification for bitumen
mastic for use in waterproofing of roofs
IS : 3384- 1965 Specification for bitumen
primer for use in waterproofing and
damp-proofing
IS : 587 I- 1970 Specification for bitumen
mastic for tanking and damp-proofing
IS : 7193-1974 Specification for glass
libre base coal tar pitch and bitumen felts
Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings
a) G E N E R A L
IS : 77 I Specification for glazed fire-clay
sanitary appliances:
IS : 77 I (Part I)- 1979 Part I General
requirements (second revision)
IS : 771 (Part II)-1979 Part II Specific
requirements of kitchen and
laboratory sinks (second revision)
IS:771 (Part lli/Sec I)-1979 Part III
Specific requirements of urinals,
Section I Slab urinals ( s e c o n d
revision)
1s : 771 (Part HI/Set 2)-1979 Part Ill
Specific requirements of urinals,
Section 2 Stall urinals ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS:771 ( P a r t IV)-1979 P a r t I V
Specific requirements of post mortem
slabs ((second revision)
IS : 771 (Part V)-1979 Part V’Specific
requirements of shower trays (second
revision)
IS:771 (Part VI)-1979 Part. VI
Specific requirements of bed pan smks
(second revision)
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 I S : 7 7 1 ( P a r t VII)-1981 P a r t V I I
Specific requirements of slop sinks
(second revision)
IS : 772- 1973 Specification for general
requirements of enamelled cast iron
sanitary appliances (seCond revision)
IS : 773- 1984 Specification for enamelled
cast iron water-closets railway stock type
(fhird revision) (under print)
IS : 774-1984 Specification for flushing
cisterns for water-closets and urinals
(valveless siphonic type) (fourth revision)
(under print)
IS : 775-1970 Specification for cast iron
brackets and supports for wash basins
and sinks (second revision)
IS : 778-1984 Specification for gunmetal
gate, globe, and check valves for general
purposes (third revision) (under pritil)
IS : 780-1984 Specification for sluice
valves for waterworks purposes (50 to 300
mm size) (sixrh revision) (under print)
IS : 781-1984 Specification for cast
copper alloy screw-down bib taps and
stop valves for water services (fhird
revision) (under print)
IS : 782- I978 Specification for caulking
lead (third revision)
IS : 804- 1967 S ecification f o r
rectangular presses steel tanks first
revision)
IS : 1700- 1973 Specification for drinking
fountains first revision)
IS: 1701-1960 Specification for mixing
valves for ablutionary and domes:ic
purposes
IS ; 1703-1977 Specification for ball
valves (horizontal plunger type) including
floats for water supply purposes (second
revision)
IS : 17 I l-1984 Specification for self-
closing taps (second revision) (under
prim)
IS : 1726 Specification for cast iron
manhole covers and frames:
IS : 1726 (Part I)- 1974 Part 1 General
requirements (second revision)
IS : I726 (Part II)- 1974 Part II Specific
requirements of heavy duty ctrcular
type (second revision)
IS: 1726 (Part Ill)-1974 Part 111
Specific requirements of heavy duty
d o u b l e trtangular type ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS: 1726 (Part IV)-1974 Part IV
Specific requirements of MD circular
type (second revision)
IS : I 726 (Part V)- I974 Part V Specific
PART V IIUILDINC MATERIALS
requirements of MD rectangular type
(second revision)
IS : 1726 (Part Vl/Sec I)-1974 Part VI
Specific requirements of LD
rectangular type, Section I Single seal
(second revision)
IS: 1726 (Part Vl/Sec 2)-1974 Part VI
Specific requirements of LD
rectangular type, Section 2 Double
seal (second revision)
IS: 1726 (Part VIl/Sec I)-1974 Part
VII Specific requirements of LD
square type, Section 1 Single seal
(second revision)
IS: 1726 (Part VII/Set 2)-1974 Part
VII Specific requirements of LD
square type, Section 2 Double seal
(second revision)
IS : 179% 1982 Specification for pillar
taps for water supply purposes (second
revision)
I S : 2326- 1970 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
automatic flushing cisterns for urinals
first revision)
IS : 2548 Specification for plastic seats
and covers for water-closets:
I S : 2 5 4 8 ( P a r t I)-1983 P a r t 1
Thermoset seats and covers (fourth
revision)
I S : 2 5 4 8 ( P a r t II)-1983 Part II
Thermoplastic s e a t s a n d c o v e r s
Vourth revision)
IS : 2556 Specification for vitreous
sanitary appliances (vitreous china):
IS : 2556 (Part I)- 1974 Part I General
requirements (second revision)
IS : 2556 (Part II)-1981 Part II Specific
requirements of wash-down water-
closets (third revision)
IS:2556 ( P a r t Ill)-1981 P a r t I I I
Specific requirements of squatting
pans (third revision)
I S : 2 5 5 6 (Part IV)-1972 Part IV
Specific requirements of wash-basins
(second revrsion)
IS : 2556 (Part V)- 1979 Part V Specific
requirements of laboratory sinks
(second reyision)
IS : 2256 (Part Vl/Sec I)-1979 Part VI
Spectftc requirements of urinals,
Sectton I Bowl type (third revision)
IS : 2556 (Part VI/Set 2)-1974 Part VI
Specific requirements of urinals,
Section 2 Half stall urinals ( s e c o n d
revis@)
IS : 2556 (Part VI/Set 3)-1974 Part VI
Specific requirements of urinals,
Section 3 Squatting plates ( s e c o n d
revision)
v_ll
 IS:2556(Part VI,Sec4)-1974Part VI
Specific requirements of urinals,
Section 4 Partition slabs (second
revision)
IS: 2556 (Part VliSec 5)-1974 Part VI
Specific requirements of urinals,
Section 5 Waste fittings (set-anti
revision)
IS:2556(PartVI;‘Sec6)-1974PartVI
Specific requirements of urinals,
Section 6 Water spreader for half stall
urinals (second revision)
IS:2556 (Part VII)-1973 P a r t V I I
Specific requirements of half-round
channels (second revision)
IS:2556 (Part VIII)-1973 Part VIII
Specific requirements of siphonic
wash-down water-closets (second
rmlision)
IS:2556 ( P a r t IX)-1979 P a r t I X
Specific requirements of bidets(rhirJ
re\i.\ion)
IS : 2556 (Part X)- 1974 Part X Specific
requirements of foot rests (second
revision)
I S : 2 5 5 6 (Part XI)-1979 Part Xl
Specific requirements of shower rose
(fi’rsr re\lision)
IS:2556 (Part XII)-1973 P a r t X I I
Specific requirements of floor traps
IS:2556 (Part XIII)-1973 Part XIII
Specific requirements of traps for
squatting pans
IS: 2556 (Part XIV)-1974 Part XIV
Specific requirements of integrated
squatting pans
IS: 2556 (Part XV)-1974 Part XV
Specific requirements of universal
water-closets
IS : 2692- 1978 Specification for ferrules
for water services (first revision)
IS : 2906-1984 Specification for sluice
valves for water works purposes (350 to
I 200 mm size) (rhird revision) (under
print)
IS : 2963- 1979 Specification for non-
ferrous waste fittings for wash-basins and
sinks (firsf revisioit)
IS : 3004-1979 Specification for plug
cocks for water supply purposes firsr
revision)
IS : 3042-1965 Specification for single
faced sluice gates (200 to I 200 mm size)
IS : 331 I-1979 Specification for waste
plug, and accessories for sinks and wash-
basins first revision)
IS : 3489- 1 9 6 6 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
enamelled steel bath tubs
“_l*
IS : 3950- 1979 Specification for surface
boxes for sluice valves first revision)
IS : 4038- 1979 Specification for I foot
valves for water works purposes (first
revision)
IS : 4346-1982 Specification for washers
for water taps for cold water services (firs?
revision)
IS:5219 (Part I)-I%9 Specification for
cast copper alloy traps: Part I ‘P’and ‘S’
traps (50 to 300mm size)
IS : 53 I2 (Part I)- 1984 Specification for
swing check type reflux (non-return)
valves : Part I Single door pattern (first
revision) (under print)
IS: 5961-1970 Specification for cast iron
gratings for drainage purposes
IS: 641 I-1972 Specification for gel-
coated glass fibre reinforced polyester
resin bath tubs
IS : 723 I-1984 Specification for plastic
flushing cisterns (valveless siphonic type)
for water-closets and urinals (/irsr
revision) (under print)
IS : 87 I8- 1978 Specification for vitreous
enamelled steel kitchen sinks
IS : 8727- 1978 Specification for vitreous
enamelled steel wash-basins
IS : 893 I-1978 Specification for cast
copper alloy fancy bib .taps and stop
valves for water services
IS : 8934- 1978 Specification for cast
copper alloy fancy pillar taps for water
services
IS : 9338- 1984 Specification for cast iron
screw-down stop valves and stop and
check valves for water works purposes
(first revision) (under prinr)
IS : 9739-198.1 Specification for pressure
reducing valves for domestic water supply
IS : 9758- I98 I Specification for flush
valves and fittings for water-closets and
urinals
I S : 9762- I98 1 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
polyethylene floats for ball valves
IS : 9763- 198 I Specification for plastic
bib taps and stop valves (rising spindle)
for cold water services
b) WATER M E T E R S
IS : 779- I978 Specification for water
meters (domestic type) (fifth revision)
IS : 2 lO4- 198 I Specification for water
meter boxes (domestic type) ( f i r s t
revision)
IS : 2373- I98 I Specification for water
meters (bulk type) (rhird revision)
NATIONAL WILDING CODE OF INDIA
 IS : 6784-1984 Methods for testing of
water meters (domestic type)(firsr
revision) (under print)
c) PI P E S AND FHTINGS
IS : 404 (Part I)- 1977 Specification for
lead pipes: Part I For other than
chemical purpose (second revision)
IS : 407-198 I Specification for brass tubes
for general purposes (third revision)
IS : 65 I - I980 Specification for salt-glazed
stoneware. pipes and fittings (fourfh
revision)
IS : 1230-1979 Specification for cast iron
rain water pipes and fittings ( s e c o n d
revision)
I S : l536- 1 9 7 6 Soecification f o r
centrifugally cast (ipun) iron pressure
pipes for water, gas and sewage (secotxl
Fevision)
IS : 1537-1976 Specification for vertically
cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and
sewage (first revision)
I S : 1538 ( P a r t s I t o XXVIII)-1976
Specification for cast iron fittings for
pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
(second revision)
IS: 1538 (Part I)-1976 Part I General
requirements (second revision)
IS : 1538 (Part II)-1976 Part II Specific
requirements for sockets and spigots
of pipes (second revision)
I S : 1538 ( P a r t Ill)-1976 P a r t I l l
Specific requirements for sockets of
fittings (second revision)
I S : 1538 ( P a r t IV)-1976 P a r t I V
Specific requirements for flanges of
pipes and fittings (second revision)
IS : I538 (Part V)- 1976 Part V Specific
requirements for raised flanges
(second revision)
I S : 1538 ( P a r t VI)-1976 P a r t V I
Specific requirements for standard
flange drilling of flanged pipes and
fittings (second revision)
I S : 1538 (Part VII)-1976 Part VII
Specific requirements for flanged
sockets (second revision)
IS: 1538 (Part VIII)-1976 Part VIII
Specific requirements for flanged
spigots (second revision)
I S : 1538 ( P a r t IX)-1976 P a r t I X
Specific requirements for collars
(second revision)
IS : I538 (Part X)- 1976 Part X Specific
requirements for double socket bends
(second revision)
PMT V BUILDING MATRIALS
IS: 1538 (Part XI)-1976 Part XI
Specific requirements for tees, all
sockets (second revision)
IS: 1538 (Part XII)-1976 Part X I I
Specific requirements for double
socket tee with flanged branch (sec~onti
revision)
IS: 1538 (Part XIII)-1976 Part XIII
Specific requirements for crosses, all
sockets (second revision)
IS: 1538 (Part XIV)-1976 Part XIV
Specific requirements for double
socket tapers (second revision)
IS: 1538 (Part XV)-1976 Part XV
Specific requirements for caps (second
revision)
IS: 1538 (Part XVI)-1976 Part XVI
Specific requirements for plugs
(secon& relision)
IS: 1538 (Part XVII)-1976 Part XVII
Specific requirements for bell mouth
pieces (second revision)
I S : 1 5 3 8 ( P a r t XVlll~-1976 Part
XVIII Specific requirements for
double flanged bends (secondrevision)
IS: 1538 (Part XIX)-1976 Part XIX
Specific requirements for all flanged
tees (second revision)
IS: 1538 (Part XX)-1976 Part XX
Specific ‘requirements for all flanged
crosses (second revision)
IS: l5j8 (Part XXI)-1976 Part XXI
Specific requirements for double
flanged tapers (second revision)
IS: 1538 (Part XXII)-1976 Part XXII
Specific requirements for split puddle
or body flanges (second revision)
IS: 1 5 3 8 (Part XXIII)-1976 Part
XXI11 Specific requirements for blank
flanges (second revision)
I S : 1 5 3 8 ( P a r t XXIV)-1982
Specification for cast iron fitting for
pressure pipes for water, gas sewage :
Part XXIV Specific requirements for
all flanged radial tees (secondre\ision)
IS : I592- I980 Specification for asbestos
cement pressure pipes (second revision)
IS : 1626 Specification for asbestos
cement building pipes and pipe fittings,
gutters and gutter fittings and roofing
fittings :
IS : 1626 (Part I)- 1980 Part I Pipes and
pipe fittings yirsr revision)
IS: 1626 (Part II)-1980 Part II Gutters
and gutter fittings yirsr revision)
I S : 1 6 2 6 ( P a r t Ill)-1981 Part Ill
Roofing accessories (f?rsr revision)
23
 IS : 1729-1979 Specification for sand cast
iron spigot and socket soil, waste and
ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories
yirsr revision)
IS : I879 (Parts I to X)- 1975 Specification
for malleable cast iron pipe fittings firsr
revision)
IS : 1879 (Part I)- 1975 Part I General
requirements first revkion)
IS : 1879 (Part II)- 1975 Part 11 Specific
requirements for elbows (first revision)
I S : 1 8 7 9 (.Part Ill)-1975 P a r t Ill.
Specific requirements for tees (first
revision)
I S : 1 8 7 9 ( P a r t IV)-1975 Part IV
Specific requirements for crosses (first
revision)
IS : 1879 (Part V)- 1975 Part V Specific
requirements for bends (firsr revision)
I S : 1 8 7 9 ( P a r t VI)-1975 Part VI
Specific requirements for sockets (first
revision)
I S : 1 8 7 9 ( P a r t VII)-1975 Part VII
Specific requirements for bushing and
hexagon nipples (first revision)
IS: 1879 (Part VIII)-1975 Part VIII
Specific requirements for backnuts
(first revision)
I S : 1 8 7 9 ( P a r t IX)-1975 Part IX
Specific requirements for caps and
plugs (firsf revision)
IS : I879 (Part X)- 1975 Part X Specific
requirements for unions first revision)
I S : 3006-1979 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
chemically resistant salt-glazed
stoneware pipes and fittings ( f i r s t
revision)
IS : 3076- 1984 Specification for low
density polyethylene pipes for potable
water supplies (second revision) (under
print)
IS : 3486-1966 Specification for cast iron
spigot and socket drain pipes
IS : 3589- 198 I S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
electrically welded steel pipes for water,
gas and sewage (150 to 2 000 mm nominal
size) (firsr revision)
IS: 3597-1966 Methods of tests for
concrete pipes
IS : 3989- 1 9 7 0 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and
socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes,
fittings and accessories yirsr revision)
IS : 4350-1967 Specification for concrete
porous pipes for under drainage
1s : 4984- I978 Specification for high
density polyethylene pipes for potable
“-14
water supplies, sewage and industrial
effluents (second revision)
IS : 4985- 198 I S p e c i f i c a t i o n for,
unplasticized PVC pipes for potable
water supplies (firsl revision)
IS : 5504-1969 Specification for spiral
wetded pipes
I S : 5 5 3 1 ( P a r t s 1 to Ill)-1977
Specification for cast iron specials for
asbestos cement pressure pipes for water,
gas and sewage first revision)
IS : 553 1 (Part I)-1977 Part I General
requirements (first revision)
IS : 553 1 (Part II)-1977 Part II Specific
requirements for cast iron plain-end
bends; plugs, reducers and crosses
(ffrsr revision)
I S : 5 5 3 1 ( P a r t Ill)-1977 Part Ill
Specific requirements for cast iron
plain-end flanged spigots, tees and
wyes yirst revision)
IS: 5913-1970 Methods of test for
asbestos cement products
IS : 6 163- 1 9 7 8 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
centrifugally cast (spu I) iron low pressure
pipes for water, gas and sewage (/%-a
revision)
IS : 64 18-197 1 Specification for cast iron
and malleable cast iron flanges for
general engineering purposes
IS : 6908- 1975 Specification for asbestos
cement pipes and fittings for sewage and
drainage
IS: 7181-1974 Specification for
horizontally cast iron double flanged
pipes for water, gas and sewage
I S : 73’19-1974 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
perforated concrete pipes
IS : 7322- 1974 Specification for specials
for steel cylinder reinforced concrete
pipes
IS : 7639-1975, Method of sampling
asbestos cement products
IS : 7834 Specification for injection
moulded PVC socket fittings withsolvent
cement joints for water supplies :
IS: 7834 (Part I)-1975 Part I General
requirements
IS : 7834 (Part II)- I975 Part I I Specific
requirements for 45” elbows
I S : 7 8 3 4 ( P a r t Ill)-1975 Part, 111
Specific requirements for 90’ elbows
IS:7834 ( P a r t IV)-1975 P a r t I V
Specific requirements for 90’ tees
IS : 7834 (Part V)- 1975 Part V Specific
requirements for 45” tees
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 IS: 7834 (Part Vl)-1975 Part VI
Specific requirements for sockets
lS:7834 ( P a r t VII)-1975 P a r t VII
Specific requirements for unions
13:7834 (Part Vlll)-1975 Part VII1
Specific requirements for caps
IS : 8008 Specification for injection
moulded high density polyethylene
(HDPE) fittings for potable water
supplies :
IS : 8008 (Part I)- 1976 Part I General
requirements
IS : 8008 (Part I I)- I976 Part II Specific
requirements for 90” bends
I S : 8 0 0 8 ( P a r t Ill)-1976 Part 111
Specific requirements for 90” tees
I S : 8 0 0 8 ( P a r t IV)-1976 Part IV
Specific requirements for reducers
IS : 8008 (Part V)- I976 Part V Specific
requirements for ferrule reducers
IS:8008 ( P a r t VI)-1976 P a r t V I
Specific requirements for pipe ends
IS:8008 (Part VII)-1976 Part VII
Specific requirements for sandwich
flanges
IS : 8 3 2 9 - 1 9 7 7 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
centrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron
pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
IS : 8360 Specification for fabricated high
density polyethelene (HDPE) fittings for
potable water supplies :
IS : 8360 (Part I)- 1977 Part I General
requirements
IS : 8360 (Part II)- 1977 Part II Specific
requirements for 90” tees
IS:8360 ( P a r t Ill)-1977 P a r t 111
Specific requirements for 90” bends
IS : 8794-1978 Specification for cast iron
detachable joints for use with asbestos
cement pressure pipes
IS :, 9523-198.0 Specification for ductile
iron fittings for pressure pipes for water,
gas and sewage
IS : 10124 Specification for fabricated
PVC fittings for potable water supplies :
1S : 10124 (Part I)-1982 Part I General
requirements
IS: 10124 (Part II)-1982 Part II
Specific requirements for cement
couplers
IS: 10124 (Part Ill)-1982 Part III
Specific requirements of straight
reducers
IS : 10124 (Part IV)-1982 Part IV
?MT V BUlLDING MATERlAW
Specific requirements for end caps
IS: 10124 (Part V)-1982 Part V
Specific requirements for 90” tees
IS:10124 ( P a r t V I ) - 1 9 8 2 P a r t V I
Specific requirements for flanged tail
piece with metallic flanges
IS: 10124 (Part Vll)-1983 Specific
requuements for threaded couplers
IS: I0124 (Part Vlll)-1982 Part VIII
Specific requirements for 90” bends
IS:10124 ( P a r t IX)-1982 P a r t I X
Specific requirements for 60” bends
IS: 10124 ( P a r t X ) - l 9 8 2 P a r t X
Specific requirements for 45” bends
IS: 10124 (Part XI)-1982 Part XI
Specific requirements for 30” bends
IS: 10124 (Part X11)-1982 Part X11
Specific requirements for 22$ bends
IS: 10124 (Part XIII)-1982 Part Xl11
Specific requirements for I 1% bends
Builder’s Hardware
IS : 204 Specification for tower bolts :
IS:204 (Part 1)-197X Part 1 Ferrous
metals Cfourfh wvision)
IS:204 (Part II)-1978 Part II N o n -
ferrous metals (/iourth revision)
IS : 205-1978 Specification for non-
ferrous metal butt hinges (third revision)
IS: 206-1981 Specification for tee a‘nd
strap hinges (third re\lision)
IS : 208-1979 Specification for door
handles (rhird rel~r’,iu!:)
IS : 28 I- I973 Specification for mild steel
sliding door bolts for use with padlock
(second revision)
IS : 362- 1982 Specification for parliament
hinges Cfourth re\>ision)
IS : 363- I976 Specification for hasps and
staples (rhird re\!ision)
IS : 364-1970 Specification for fanlight
catch (second re\jision)
IS : 452- 1973 Specification for door
springs, rat-tail type (second re\,ision)
IS : 453- I973 Specification for double-
acting spring hinges (second re\aision)
IS : 729- I979 Specification for drawer
locks, cupboard locks and box locks
(third revision)
IS: 1019-1974 Specification for rim
latches (second re\!ision)
IS: 1341-1981 Specification for steel butt
hinges vourrh revision)
“_15
 IS : 1823-1980 Specification for floor
door stoppers (third re\,ision)
IS: 1837-1966 Specification for fanlight
pivots (/i’rsl rr\V.riorl)
IS : 2209- lY76 Specification for mortice
locks (vertical type) ([hit-d re\Vsion)
IS : 268 I - I979 Specification for non-
ferrous metal sliding door bolts for use
with padlocks (.vrc~nd rm~ision)
IS : 3564-lY75 Specification for door
closers (hydraulically regulated) (.w~wI~
re\Vsion)
IS : 38 l8- I97 I S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
continuous (piano) hinges (/?r.st ret~ision)
IS : 3828- 1966 Specification for ventilator
chainc
IS : 384% I Y66 Specification for steel
backflap hinges
IS : 3847-1966 Specification for mortice
,llght latches
IS : 462 I- 1975 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
indicating bolts for use in public baths
and lavatories (jir.s/ tmti.,iorl)
IS : 4Y48- 1974 Specification for welded
steel wire fabric for general use (/i’r.s/
rr\~r.sion)
IS : 4Y92- I975 Specification for dool
handles for mortice locks (vertical type)
Cfirsr tw~ision)
IS: 5187-1972 Specification for flush
bolts (firsr re\!i.sion)
IS : 5 8 9 9 - 1 9 7 0 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
bathroom latches
IS : 5930-1970 Specification for mortice
latch (vertical type)
IS : 63 I5- 1971 Specification for floor
springs (hydraulically regulated) for
heavy doors
IS : 63 I8- 197 I Specification for plastic
window stays and fasteners
IS : 6343-1982 Specification for door
closers (pneumatically regulated) for light
doors weighing up to 40 kg@rst revision)
IS : 6602- 1972 Specification for ventilator
poles
IS : 6607- 1972 Specification for rebated
mortice locks (vertical type)
IS : 7 l96- I974 Specification for hold fast
IS : 7197-1974 Specificatioti for double
action floor springs (without oil check)
for heavy doors
IS : 7534-1974 Specification for mild steel
locking bolts with holes for padlocks
“16
IS : 7540- 1974 Specification for mortice
dead locks
IS : 8756- 1978 Specification for ball
catches for use in wooden almirah
IS : 8760- 1978 Specification for mortice
sliding door locks, with lever mechanism
IS : 9 lO6- I979 Specification for rising
butt hinges
IS : 9 I3 I- 1979 Specification for rim locks
IS : 9460- 1980 Specification for flush
drop handle for drawer
IS : 9899- I98 I Specification for hat, coat
and wardrobe hooks
IS : 100 I9- I98 I Specification for steel
window stays and fasteners
IS : 10090-1982 Specification for
numericals
IS : 10342- I982 Specification for curtain
rail system
a) PLY wool)
IS : 303- I975 Specification for plywood
for general purposes (second revision)
IS : I328- I082 Specification for veneered
decorative plywood (second revision)
Is: 1734 (Parts I to 20)-1983 Method 01
test for plywood (second revision)
I S : 1734 ( P a r t I)-1983’Part I
Determination of density and
moisture content (second revision)
I S : 1 7 3 4 ( P a r t 2)-1983 P a r t 2
Determination of resistance of dry
heat (.second raGion)
I S : 1 7 3 4 ( P a r t 3)-1983 P a r t 3
Determination of fire resistance
(second revision$
IS: 1734 (Part 4)-1983 Part 4 Deter-
mination of glue shear strength
(second revision)
IS : 1734 (Part 5)- 1983 Part 5 Test for
adhesion of plies (second revis@)
IS: 1734 (Part 6)-1983 Part 6
Determination of water resistance
(second revision)
IS: 1 7 3 4 (Part 7)-1983 Part 7
Mycological test (second revision)
IS:1734 ( P a r t 8)-1983 Part 8
Determination of pH value (second
revision)
IS: 1734 (Part \9)-1983 Part 9
Determination of tensile strength
(second revision)
NATIDNAL BUILDING C O D E OF INDIA
 IS : 1734 (Part IO)-1983 P a r t IO
D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f compiesbive
strength (sec,on/J rel*ision)
IS: 1734 (Part 1 I)-1983 Part I I
Determination of static bending
strength (second re\-ision)
IS: 1 7 3 4 ( P a r t 12)-1983 P a r t 1 2
Determination of scarf joint strength
(second revision)
IS: 1734 (Part l3)-1983 P a r t I3
Determination of panel shear strength
(second revision)
IS: 1734 (Part l4)-1983 P a r t 14
Determination of plate shear strength
(second revision)
IS: 1734 (Part IQ-1983 P a r t I5
Central loading of plate test (second
revision)
IS: 1734 (Part l6)-1983 P a r t 16
Vibration of plywood plate test
(second revision)
IS: 1734 (Part l7)-1983 Part I7 Long
time loading test of plywood strips
(second revision)
IS: 1734 (Part l8)-1983 P a r t I8
Impact resistance test on the surface of
plywood (.second re\si.sion)
I S : 1734 ( P a r t l9)-1983 P a r t 19
Determination of nails and screws
holding power (sc>cond re\~i.sion)
IS: 1734 (Part 20)-1983 Part 20
Acidity and alkalinity resistance test
(second re\-ision)
IS : 4990- 198 I Specification for plywood
for concrete shuttering work (fit-x/
re\Vsion)
IS : 5509-1980 Specification for lire
retardant plywood (fi’rst re\‘ision)
I S : 5539-1969 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
preservative treated plywood
IS:73 l6- 1974 Specification for decorative
plywood using plurality of veneers for
decoratice faces
b ) PARTIC‘LE BOARDS AND FIBKE BOARDS
IS : 1658- 1977 Specification for fibre
hard boards (sewnd relhion)
IS : 1659-1979 Specification for bloch
boards (second revision)
IS: 2380 (Parts I to XXI)-1977 Methods
of test for wood particle boards and
boards from other lignocellulosic
materials (first revision)
I S : 2 3 8 0 ( P a r t I)-1977 P a r t I
Preparation and conditioning of test
\peclniens (fir7I tw~i~inn)
PART V BUILDING MATERIAL!5
IS:2380 ( P a r t II)-1977 P a r t II
Accuracy of dimensions of boards
(firsf rerlision)
IS:2380 ( P a r t Ill)-1977 P a r t JH
Determination of moisture content
and density (first revision)
IS:2380 ( P a r t IV)-1977 P a r t I V
Determ’ination of static bending
strength (modulus of rupture and
modulus of elasticity’ in bending) first
revision)
IS:2380 (Part V)-1977 Part V
Determination of tensile strength
p e r p e n d i c u l a r t o s u r f a c e (j’irsf
revision)
I S : 2 3 8 0 ( P a r t VI)-1977 Part V:
Determination of tensile strength
parallel to surface yirsr re\*i.sion)
IS: 2380 (Part VII)-1977 Part VII
Determination of compression
perpendicular to the plane of the board
firs! revision)
IS:2380 (Part VIII)-1977 Part VIII
Compression parallel to surface test
first re\ision)
I S : 2 3 8 0 ( P a r t 1X)-1977 Part IX
Determinatiop of resistance to shear in
plane of the board yirst re\*i.sion)
IS : 2380 (Part X)-l977 Part X Falling
hammer impact test flrsr revision)
I S : 23dO ( P a r t XI)-1977 P a r t X l
Surface hardness (/hi revis@)
IS : 2380 (XII)-1977 Part XII Central
loading of plate test (first revision)
IS:2380 (Part Xltt)-1977 Part XIII
Long time loading bending test (firs/
re\i.sion)
IS:2380 (Part XIV)-1977 Part XIV
Screw and nail withdrawl test (first
revision)
IS: 2380 (Part XV)-1977 Part XV
Lateral nail resistance (/hr re\vision)
IS : 2380 (Part XYt)-I977 Part XVI
Determination of water absorption
Vim re\+.sion)
IS: 2380 (Part XVII)-1977 Part XVII
Determination of swelling in water
Virsr revision)
IS: 2380 (Part XVIII)-1977 P a r t
XVIII Determination of mass and
dimensional changes caused by
moisture changes (firsf revision)
lS:2380 (Part XIX)-1977 Part XIX
Durability cyclic test for interior use
first revision)
IS : 2380 (Part XX)-1977 Part XX
v.l’
 Accelerated weathering cyclic test for
exterior use first revision)
1s: 2380 (Part XXI)-1977 Part XXI
Planeness test under uniform moisture
content (first revision)
IS : 2380 (Part XXII)- 198 1 Method of test
for wood particle boards and boards from
other lignocellulosic materials : Part
XXII D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f s u r f a c e
glueability test
IS : 2380 (Part XXIII)-1981 Method of
test for wood particle boards and boards
from other lignocellulosic materials : Part
XXIII Vibration tests for particle boards
IS : 3087-1965 Specification for wood
particle boards (medium density) for
general purposes
IS : 3097-1980 Specification for veneered
particle boards (firsf revision)
IS : 3 129- 1965 Specificaiion for particle
board for insulation purposes
IS : 3308- 198 I Specification for wood
wool building slabs first revision)
IS : 3348-1965 Specification for fibre
insulation boards
IS : 3478-1966 Specification for high
density wood particle boards
c) WO O D- BASED L A M I N A T E S
IS : 3513 Specification for high and
medium density wood-based laminates
(compreg):
1333513 (Part Ill)-1966 P a r t 1 1 1
General purposes
IS:3513 ( P a r t IV)-1966 P a r t I V
Sampling and tests
IS:9307 (Parts I to VIII)-1979 Methods
of tests for wood-based structural
sandwich construction
IS : 9307 (Part I)- 1979 Part I Flexure
test
IS:9307 ( P a r t II)-1979 P a r t I I
Edgewise compression test
IS:9307 (Part III)-1979 P a r t 1 1 1
Flatwise compression test
IS : 9307 (Part IV)-1979 Part 1V Shear
test
IS : 9307 (Part V)-1979 Part V Flatwise
tension test
IS:9307 ( P a r t V I ) - 1 9 7 9 P a r t V I
Flexure creep test
IS: 9307 (Part VII)-1979 Part VII
Cantilever vibration test
IS:9307 (Part VIII)-1979 Part VIII
Weathering test
“_l*
4 ADHESIVES
IS : 848-1974 Specification for synthetic
resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic
and aminoplastic) (first revision)
IS : 849- 1957 Specification for cold
setting case in glue for wood
IS : 851-1978 Specification for synthetic
resin adhesives for construction work
(non-structural) in wood yirsr revision)
IS : 852- 1969 Specification for animal
glue for general wood-working purposes
(first revision)
IS : 4835- 1979 Specification for polyvinyl
acetate dispersion-based adhesives for
wood (first revision)
IS : 9188-1979 Specification for adhesive
for structural laminated wood products
for use under exterior exposure
condition
Doors and Windows
a) W OODEN DOOK AND W INDOW F R A M E S ,
AND S H U T T E R S
IS : 1003 Specification for timber
panelled and glazed shutters:
IS: 1003 (Part I)-19’J7 Part 1 Door
shutters (second revi.pion)
I S : 1 0 0 3 ( P a r t II)-1983 Part II
Window and ventilator shutters
, (second revision)
IS : 1826-1961 Specification for Venetian
blinds for windows
IS : 2191 Specification for wooden flush
door shutters (cellular and hollow core
type):
IS: 2191 (Part I)-1983 Part I Plywood
face panels (fourth revision)
IS: 2191 (Part II)-1983 Part 11 Particle
board face panels and hardboard face
panels (third revision)
IS : 2202 Specification for wooden flush
door shutters (solid core type):
IS : 2202 (Part I)-1983 Part I Plywood
face panels Vourth revision)
IS : 2202 (Part II)-‘1983 Part II Particle
board face panels and hardboard face
panels (rhird revision)
IS :4020-1967 Methods of tests for
wooden flush doors: Type tests
IS : 4121-1983 Specification for timber
door, window and ventilator frames
(second revision)
IS : 4962- 1968 Spetification for wooden
side sliding doors
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 IS : 6198.-1983 Specification for ledged,
braced and battened timber door shutters
(jTrst revision)
b) M ETAL L&OR AND W I N D O W F R A M E S ,
AND SHUTI-ERS
IS : 1038-1983 Specification for steel
doors, windows and ventilators (third
revision)
IS : 1361-1978 Specification for steel
windows for industrial buildings (/irsr
revision)
IS: 1948-1961 Specification for
aluminium doors, windows and
ventilators
IS: 1949-1961 Specification for
aluminium windows for industrial
buildings
IS : 4351-1976 Specification for steel door
frames (first revision)
IS : 6248-1979 Specification for metal
rolling shutters and rolling grills (first
revision)
IS : 7452-1982 Specification for hot rolled
steel sections for doors, wmdows and
ventilators yirsr revision)
IS : 1045 I- 1983 Specification for steel
sliding shutters (top hung type)
IS: 10521-1983 Specification for
collapsible gates
Concrete Rein/&-cement
IS: 43.2 Specification for mild steel and
medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn
steel wire for concrete reinforcement:
IS : 432 (Part I)- 1982 Part I Mild steel
and. medium tensile steel bars (third
revision)
IS:432 .(Part II)-1982 Part 11 Hard
drawn steel wire (third revision)
IS : 1139- 1966 Specification for hot rolled
mild steel, medium tensile steel and high
yield strength steel deformed bars for
concrete reinforcement (revised)
IS : 1566-1982 Specification for hard
drawn -steel wire fabric for concrete
reinforcement (second revision)
IS: 1785 Specification for plain hard
drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete:
IS : 1785 (Part I)-1983 Part I Cold
drawn stress-relieved wire (second
revision)
IS: 1785 (Part II)-1983 Part II As-
drawn wire yirst revision)
IS : 1786- 1 9 7 9 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
coldworked steel high strength deformed
FART V BUILDING MATERLALS
bars for concrete reinforcement (second
revision)
IS : 2090-1983. Specification for high
tensile steel bars used in prestressed
concrete (first revision)
IS : 6003- 1983 Specification for indented
wire for prestressed concrete (first
revision)
IS : 6006-1983 Specification for uncoated
stress - relieved strand for prestressed
concrete (first revisron)
Steel
4 GENERAL
IS : I 136- 1958 Preferred sizes for wrought
metal products
IS : 1137-1959 Thicknesses of sheet and
diameters of wire
IS : 1762 Code for designation of steels:
IS : 1762 (Part I)-1974 Part I Based on
letter symbols (firsf revision)
IS : 1762 (Part II)- 1974 Part 11 Based
on numerals for industrial and
commercial purposes cfirsf revisidn)
(under preparation)
IS : 2049-1978 Colour code for the
identification of wrought steel for general
engineering purposes (first revision)
IS : 7598- IF74 Classification of steels
b) STRUCTURAL STEEL.
IS : 226- I975 Specification for structural
steel (standard quality) (/iqih revision)
IS: 961-1975 Specification for structural
steel (high tensile) (second revision)
IS : 1977- 1975 Specification for structural
steel (ordinary quaiity) (second revision)
IS : 2062-1984 Specification for weldable
structural steei (third revision) (under
prmt)
IS : 2830- 1975 Specification for carbon
steel billets. blooms and slabs for re-
rolling into structurai steel (standard
quality) first revision)
IS :.283 I-1975 Specification for carbon
steel billets, blooms and siabs for re-
rolling into structural steel (ordinary
quality) (second revision)
IS : 8500-1977 Specification for weldable
structural steel (medium and high
strength qualities)
C) S HEET AND S TRIP
IS : 277-1977 Specification for galvanized
“9
 steel sheets (plain and corrugated) (rhird
revision)
IS : 412-1975 Specification for expanded
metal steel sheets for general purposes
(second revision)
IS : 1079-1973 Specification for hot rolled
carbon steel sheet and strip (rhird
revision)
IS : 4030-1973 Specification for cold
rolled carbon steel strip for general
engineermg purposes (fkst revision)
IS : 7226 1974 Specification for cold
rolled medium, high carbon and low alloy
steel strip for general engineering
purposes
d) B A R S, R O D S, W IRE AND W IRE RODS
IS : 280-1978 Specification for mild steel
wire for general engineering purposes
(third revision)
IS : 1148-1982 Specification for hot rolled
steel rivet bars (up to 40mm diameter)
for structural purposes (third revision)
IS : 1149-1982 Specification for high ten-
sile steel rivet bars for structural purposes
(third revision)
IS : 2591-1982 Dimensions for hot rolled
bars for threaded components (second
revision)
IS : 7887- 1975 Specification for mild steel
wire rods for general engineering
purposes
e) PL A T E S
IS : 3502- 1966 Specification for s&eel
chequered plates
f) TUBES AND TUBULARS
IS : 1161-1979 Specification for steel
tubes for structural purposes (third
revision)
IS: 1239 Specification for mild steel
tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel
fittings:
IS : i 239 (Part I)- 1979 Part 1 Mild steel
tubes Vourth revision)
IS: 1239 (Part II)-1982 Part 11 Mild
steel tubulars and other wrought steel
pipe fittings (third revision)
IS : 4270- 1983 Specification for steel
tubes used for water wells yirst revision)
IS : 45 16 1968 Specification for elliptical
mild steel tubes
IS : 4923-1968 Specification for hollow
mild steel sections for structural use
20
Light Metals and Their Allo_vs
IS : 733-1983 Specification for wrought
aluminium and aluminium alloys, bars,
rods and sections for general engineering
purposes (third revision)
IS : 737-1974 Specification for wrought
aluminiuin and aluminium alloys, sheet
and strip lfor general ecgineering
purposes) (second revision)
IS : 738-1977 Specification for wrought
alummium and altiminivm alloy drawn
tube for general engineering purposes
(second revision)
IS : 1254-1975 Specification for corru-
gated aluminium sheet (second revision)
IS : 1285-1975 Sepcification for wrought
aluminium and aluminium alloys,
extruded round tube and hollow sections
(for general engineering purposes)
(second revision)
IS : 7094-1973 Specification for
aluminium and aluminium alloys welded
tubes for general engineering purposes
Structural Shapes
a) S TRUCTURAL S H A P E S
IS : 808- 1964 Specification for rolled steel
beam, channel and angle sections
(revised)
IS : 8 I l-1965 Specification for cold-
formed light gauge structural steel
sections (revised)
IS : I 173-1978 Specification for hot-
rolled and slit steel tee bars (second
revision)
IS : 1852- 1979 Specification for rolling
and clotting tolerances for hot-rolled steel
products (third revision)
IS : 23 14-1963 Specification for steel
sheet piling sections
IS : 3443-1980 Specification for crane rail
sections (/k-s1 revision)
IS : 3908-1966 Specification for
aluminium equal leg angles
IS : 3909- I966 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
aluminium unequal leg angles
IS : 392 I- 1966 Specification for
aluminium channels
IS : 3954- 1967 Specification for hot rolled
steel channels sections for general
engineermg purposes
IS : 3964- 1980 Specification for light rails
yirst revision)
IS : 5384-1969 Specification for
aluminium l-beams
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 IS : 6445- 197 1 Specification for
aluminium tee sections
b) DIMENSIONALSTANDARDS
IS : 808 (Part I)- I973 Dimensions for hot-
rolled steel beams : Part I MB series
(second revision)
IS: 808 (Part II)-1978 Dimensions for
hot-rolled steel column: Part II SC series
(second revision)
IS:808 (Part III)-1979 Dimensions for
hot-rolled steel beams, channel and angle
sections: Part 111 Channel, MC and MCP
series (second revision)
IS: 808 (Part V)-1976 Dimensions for
hot-rolled steel sections : Part V Equal leg
angles (second revision)
IS:808 (Part VI)-1976 Dimensions for
hot-rolled steel sections : Part VI Unequal
leg angles (second revision)
IS : 1730 Dimensions for steel plate, sheet
and strip for structural and general
engineering purposes:
IS : 1730 (Part I)-1974 Part 1 Plate
first revision)
IS: 1730 (Part II)-1974 Part II Sheet
(first revision)
IS : 1730 (Part Ill)- 1974 Part 111 Strip
yirsr revision)
IS : 173 I- 1971. Dimensions for steel flats
for structural and general engineering
purposes first revision)
IS : 1732- I972 Dimensions for round and
square steel bars for structural and
general engineering purposes wrsf
revision)
IS : 2673- I979 Dimensions for wrought
aluminium and aluminium alloys,
extruded round tube (first revision)
IS : 2676- 198 1 Dimensions for wrought
aluminium and aluminium alloys, sheet
and strip first revision)
IS : 2678-1972 Dimensions for wrought
aluminium,and aluminium alloys, drawn
tube (/%sr revision)
IS : 3965 198 1 Dimensions for wrought
aluminium and aluminium alloys, bar,
rod and section (first revision)
IS : 6477- 1983 Dimensions for wrought
aluminium and aluminium alloys,
extruded hollow sections
Welding Elecrrodes and Wires
IS : 8 14 Specification for covered
electrodes far arc welding of sfructural
steels:
PART V BUILDING MATERIALS
IS : 814 (Part I)-1974 *Part I For
welding products other than sheets
Vourrh revision)
IS : 814 (Part II)-1974 Part. II- For
welding sheets uourth revision)
IS : 8 15 1974 Classification and coding of
covered electrodes for metal arc welding
of structural steels (second revision)
IS : 1278-1972 Specification for fillerrods
and wires for gas welding ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS : 13951982 Specification for low and
me,dium alloy steel covered electrodes for
manual metal arc welding(third revision)
IS : 3613-1974 Acceptance tests for wire-
flux combinations for submerged-arc
welding of structural steel (jirsr revision)
IS : 4972- 1968 Specification for resistance
spot-welding electrodes
IS : 6419-1971 Specification for welding
rods and base electrodes for gas shielded
arc welding of structural steel
IS : 6560-1972 Specification for molyb-
denum and chromium-molybdenum low
alloy steel welding rods and base
electrodes for gas shielded arc welding
IS : 7280- 1974 Specification for base wire
electrodes for submerged-arc welding of
structural steels
IS : 8363-I976 Specification for bare wire
electrodes for electroslag welding of steels
Bolts, Nuts and Fasteners Accessories
IS : 207-1964 Specification for gate and
shutter hooks and eyes (revised)
IS : 45 l-1972 Technical supply conditions
for wood screws (second revision)
1s : 723- 1972 Specification for steel
countersunk head wire nails (second
revision)
IS : 724-1964 Specification for mild steel
and brass cup, ruler and square hooks
and screw eyes (revised)
IS : 725- 196 1 Specification for copper
wire nails (revised)
IS : 730-1978 Specification for hook bolts
for corrugated sheet roofing (second
revision)
IS : I 120-1975 Specification for coach
screws (first revision)
IS : I363 1967 Specification for black.
hexagonal bolts, nuts and lock nuts (dia 6
to 39 mm) and black hexagonal screws
(dia 6 to 24 mm) (first revision)
IS : 1365- 1978 Specification for slotted
countersunk head screws (third revision)
“_21
 IS : I366- I982 Specification for slotted
cheese head screws (dia range 1.6 to
20 mm) (sect& revision)
IS : I367 Technical supply conditions for
threaded steel fasteners:
IS : I367( Part I)- 1980 Part I
Introduction and general information
(second revision)
I S : 1 3 6 7 ( P a r t II)-1979 Part II
Products grades and tolerances
(second revision)
I S : 1 3 6 7 ( P a r t Ill)-1979 Part III
Mechanical properties and test
methods for bolts, screw; and .nuts
with full loadability (second revisiionj
I S : 1 3 6 7 ( P a r t V)Y1980 P a r t V
Mechanical properties and test
methods for set screws not under
tensile stresses (second revision)
I S : 1 3 6 7 ( P a r t VI)-1980 Part VI
Mechanical properties and test
methods for nuts with specified proof
loads (Second re\,ision)
IS: 1367 (Part VII)- 1980 Part VII
Mechanical properties and test
methods for nuIs without specified
proof loads (swond re\fision)
IS: 1 3 6 7 . ( P a r t IX)-1979 Part IX
Surface discontinuities of bolts, screws
and studs (sewntl re\*ision)
IS : I367 (Part X)- 1979 Part X Surface
discontinuities on nuts (sec,onc/
re\~ision)
IS: 1367 (Part XII)-1981 Part XII
Phosphate coatings on threaded
fasteners (.sc~~,7t/ tw~ision)
IS: 1367 (Part XIII)-1983 Part XIII
H o t d i p gal\aniired c o a t i n g s o n
threaded fasteners (.vrc~mc/ re\li.sion)
IS: 1367 (Part XVI)-1979 Part XVI
Designation system and symbols
(second revision)
I S : 1367 ( P a r t XVIII)-1979 P a r t
XVIII Marking and mode of delivery
(.~~~~~ti~l re\~i.siotl)
IS: 2016-1967 Specification for plain
washers (second tw~i.sion)
IS : 2389- I968 Specification for precision
hexagon bolts. screws, nuts and lock nuts
(dia range 1.6 to 5 mm) (/i’r.sr re\lision)
IS : 2585-1968 Specification for black
square bolts and nuts (dia range 6 to
39 mm) and black square screws (dia
range 6 to 24 mm) (first revision)
IS : 2687-1975 Specification for cap nuts
(fi’r\r w\~tsion)
22
IS : 3063- 1972 Specification for single
coil rectangular section spring washers
for bolts, nuts and screws (first revision)
IS : 3468-1975 Specification for pipe nuts
first re\Gion)
IS : 3757-1972 Specification for high
tensile friction grip bolts (first revision)
IS : 4206- 1967 Dimensions for nominal
lengths, and thread lengths for bolts,
screws and studs
IS : 4762-1968 Specification for worm
drive hose clips for general purposes
IS : 5369- 1975 General requirements for
plain washers and lock washers (first
revision)
IS : 5372-1975 Specification for taper
w a s h e r f o r c h a n n e l s (ISMC) (firsr
revision)
IS : 5373-1969 Specification for square
washers for wood fastenings
IS : 5374- 1975 Specification for taper
w a s h e r s f o r l - b e a m (ISME)) (firs,
revision)
IS : 5624- 1 9 7 0 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
foundation bolts
I S : 6 I I3- l9jO S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
aluminium fasteners for building
purposes
IS : 66 IO- 1972 Specification for heavy
washers for steel structures
IS : 6623- 1972 Specification for high
tensile friction grip-nuts
IS : 6639-1972 Specification for hexagon
bolts for steel structures
IS : 6649- 1972 Specification for high
tensile friction grip washers
IS : 6733- I972 Specification for wall and
roofing nails
IS : 6736-1972 Specification for slotted
raised countersunk head wood screws
IS : 6739-1972 Specification for slotted
round head wood screws
IS : 6760-1972 Specification for slotted
countersunk head wood screws
IS : 8033- 1976 Specification for round
washers with square hole for wood
fastenings
IS : 84 l2- 1977 Specification for slotted
countersunk head bolts for steel
structures
IS : 8822- 1978 Specification for slotted
mushroom head roofing bolts
IS : 8869- I978 Specification for washers
for corrugated sheet roofing
NATIONAL. BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 IS : 891 I-1978 Specification for slotted
raised countersunk head screws
IS: 10238-1982 Specification for step
bolts for steel structures
Screw Threads and Rivets
IS : 554-1975 Dimensions for pipe threads
where pressure tight joints are required
on the threads (second revision)
IS: 1929-1982 Specification for hot
forged steel rivets for hot closing (12 to 36
mm diameter) (first ‘revision)
IS : 2155-1982 Specification for cold
forged solid steel rivets for hot closing (6
to 16 mm diameter) (fkst revision)
IS : 2643 Dimensions for pipe threads for
fastening purposes:
IS : 2643 (Part I)-1975 Part I Basic
profile and dimensions (/%-St revision)
IS : 2643 (Part II)-1975 Part 11 Tole-
rances virst revision)
I S : 2643(Part Ill)-1975 P a r t III
Limits of sizes (first revision)
IS : 2907-1964 Specification for non-
ferrous rivets (1.6 to IO mm)
IS : 2998- 198 I Specification for cold
forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to
I6 mm diameter) first revision)
IS : 10102-1982 Technical supply condi-
tions for rivets
Wire Ropes and Wire Products
IS : 278-1978 Specification for galvanized
steel barbed wire for fencing (/bird
re\~ision)
IS : I835- 197.6 Specification for steel wire
for ropes (third re\~ision)
IS : 2 140- 1978 Specification for stranded
galvanized steel wire for fencing (/i‘rst
re\si.sion)
I$ : 2266-1977 Specification for steel wire
ropes for general engineering purposes
(secoml re\~ision)
IS : 2365-1977 Specification for steel wire
suspension ropes for lifts, elevators and
hoists vi’/..sf re\~i.sion)
tS: 2721-1979 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
galvanized steel wire chain link fences
(first re\,ision)
IS: 3121-1981 Specification for rigging
screws and stretching screws ( f i r s t
re\+sion)
IS : 6594- 1977 T e c h n i c a l s u p p l y
conditions for wire ropes and strands
(/i’rsr re\~i.vion)
PART V BUILDING MATERIALS
Glass
IS : 2553- 197 1 Specification for safety
glass (second revision)
1: : 2835- I977 Specification for flat
transparent sheet glass (second revision)
IS : 3438- 1977 Specification for silvered
glass mirrors for general purposes @rst
revision)
IS : 5437- 1969 Specification for wired and
figured glass
Fillers, Stoppers and Putties
IS : 1 lo-1968 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for
enamels, for use over primers (f?rst
revision)
IS : 345-1952 Specification for wood
filler, transparent, liquid
IS : 4 I9- 1967 Specification for putty for
use on window frames (first revision)
IS : 42 I-1953 Specification for jointing
paste, for bedding mouldings on coaching
stdck
IS : 423- I96 I Specification for plastic
wood, for joiners’ filler (revised)
IS : 424-1965 Specification for plastic
asphalt (relvised)
IS : 3709- I966 Specification for mastic
cement for bedding of metal windows
IS : 7 164- 1973 Specification for stopper
Water Rased PairIts
IS : 427- I965 Specification for distemper.
dry, colour as required (retVised)
IS : 428- I969 Specification for distemper,,
oil emulsion, colour as required (first
re\lision)
IS : 5410-1969 Specification for cement
paint, colour as required
IS : 541 I Specification for plastic
emulsion paint:
IS:541 I (Part I)-1974 P a r t I F o r
interior use
IS:5411 (Part II)-1972 Part II For
exterior use
Read,, Mixed Paints and Enamels
IS : 101-1964 Methods of test for ready
m i x e d p a i n t s a n d e n a m e l s (sec,ond
re\~ision)
IS : 102-1962 Specification for ready
mixed paint. brushing. red lead. non-
setting, priming (re\lisedI
“23
 IS : 104-1979 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, zinc chrome,
priming (second revision)
IS: 109-1968 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, priming, plaster,
to Indian Standard colours No. 361 and
63 I (j?rst revision)
IS : I I I-1950 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, undercoating,
exterior, to Indian Standard colours No.
101, 216, 352, 358, 443 and 632
IS : I 12-1950 Specification for ready
mixed paint, spraying, undercoating,
exterior, to Indian Standard colours No.
101, 2 16, 352, 358, 443 and 632
IS : I 13-1950 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, undercoating,
interior, to Indian Standa,rd colours No.
101, 216, 352, 358, 443 and 632
IS : I l4- 1950 Specification for ready
mixed paint, spraying, undercoating,
interior, to Indian Standard colours No.
101, 216, 352, 358, 443 and 632
IS : I 15-1950 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, undercoating,
exterior. matt finish, to Indian Standard
colours No. 352 and 632
IS : I 16- 1950 Specification for ready
mixed paint, spraying, undercoating,
exterior, matt finish, to Indian Standard
colours No. 352 and 632
IS : I I7- I964 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing exterior,
semi-gloss, for general purposes, to
Indian Standard colours-Light Co/ours
No. 101. 102. 174, 216, 217, 275281,352,
353;354, 358, 361, 364,365,384,385.386,
387. 388. 397,442,443.628,629,630,63 I,
693. 694 and 697; Dark Colours No. 103,
104. 169, 2 19, 278,280,283,359,360,362,
363. 410, 444. 632, 635 and 692 (revised)
IS : I20- I962 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing, semi-
gloss, for general purposes, to Indian
Standard colours No. 537, 538, 540, 541,
570 and 574 (revised)
IS : I2 I-1962 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing, semi-
gloss, for general purposes, to Indian
Standard colour No. 414 (revised)
IS: 122-1962 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing, semi-
gloss, for general purposes, to Indian
Standard colours No. 41 I, 412 and 413
(revised)
I$ : 123-1962 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing, semi-
gloss, for general purposes, to Indian
Standard colours No. 445, 446, 448,449,
$4
451 and 473; and red oxide (colour
unspecified) (revised)
IS : 124 Specification for ready mixed
paint, brushing, finishing, semi-gloss, for
general purposes:
IS : I24 (Part I)-1976 Part I (second
revision)
IS : 124 (Part II)-1979 Part II (second
revision)
IS: 124 (Part Ill)-1979 Part III
IS : I26- I962 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing,
exterior, semi-gloss, for general purposes,
to Indian Standard colour No. 671
(revised)
IS : 127-1962 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing,
exterior, semi-gloss, for general purposes,
white (revi.sed)
IS : 128-1962 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing, semi-
gloss, for general purposes, black
(revised)
IS : 129-1950 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing interior,
oil gloss, for general purposes, to Indian
Standard colours No. 101, 102, 103, 104,
169, 2 16, 2 17. 2 19,352,353,354,358,359,
360, -36 I, 362,363.364,4 IO, 443,444,628,
629, 630, 63 I, 632, 633, 634 and 635
IS : 133-1975 Specification for enamel,
interior (a) undercoating, (b) finishing
(second revision)
IS : 137-1965 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, matt or egg-shell
flat, finishing, interior, to Indian
Standard colour, as required (revised)
IS: 155-1950 Specification for r e a d y
mixed paint, brushing, matt, black, for
use on wood
IS : 156-1950 Specification for ready
mixed paint. brushing, for use on floors,
colour as required
IS : 158-1981 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, bituminous,
black, lead-free, acid, alkali, and heat
resisting (rhird revision)
IS : 162-1950 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, fire resisting
silicate type, for use on wood, colour
as required
IS : 168- 1973 Specification for ready
m i x e d p a i n t , a i r - d r y i n g stmi-
glossy/ matt, for general purposes
(second revision).
IS : 290-1961 Specification for coal tar
black paint (revised)
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF MD&A
 IS : 341-1973 Specification for b l a c k
Japan, Types A, B and C wrst revision)
IS : 64 I- 1964 Specification for ready
mixed’paint, brushing, finishing, interior,
semi-gloss, for general purposes, white
(revised)
IS: 871-1956 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing, egg shell
gloss, for interior use, to Indian Standard
colours---Class A No. 218 and Class B
No. 221
IS : 872- I956 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing, egg shell
gloss, for interior use, to Indian Standard
colours No. 4 12 and 4 13
IS : I 188-1957 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, oil gloss, genuine
zinc oxide, for general purposes
IS : 1232- 1964 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, yellow ochre,
semi-gloss, for general purposes (revised)
IS : 2074- 1979 Specification for ready
mixed paint, red oxide-zinc chrome,
priming (fksf revision)
IS : 2075 1979 Specification for ready
mixed paint, stoving, red oxide-zinc
chrome, priming @rsr revision)
IS : 2 3 3 9 - 1 9 6 3 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
aluminium paint for general purposes, in
dual container
IS : 2932- 1974 Specification for enamel,
synthetic, exterior, (a) undercoating,
(b) finishing wrsf revision)
IS : 2933-1975 Specification for enamel,
exterior (al undercoating, (b) finishing
yirsr ret&k)
IS : 3536- 1966 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, wood primer,
pink
IS : 3537-1966 Specification for ready
mixed paint, finishing, interior f o r
general purposes, to Indian Standard
colours
IS : 3539-1966 Specification for ready
mixed paint, undercoattng, for use under
oil finishes, to Indian Standard colours,
as required
IS : 3585- 1966 Specification for ready
mixed paint. aluminium, brushing,
priming, water resistant, for wood work
IS : 3678- 1966 Specification for ready
mixed paint, thick white, for lettering
IS : 8662-1978 Specification for enamel,
synthetic, exterior. (a) undercoating,
(b) finishing, for railway coaches
IS : 9862-1981 Specification for ready
mixed paint. brushing, bituminous black,
PART Y BUILDING MATERIALS
lead free, acid, alkali, water and chlorine
resisting
Tkinners and Solvents
IS : 82- 1973 Methods of sampling and test
for thinners and solvents for paints first
revision)
IS : 324-1959 Specification for ordinary
denatured spirit (revised)
IS : 533- 1973 Specification for gum spirit
of turpentine (oil of turpentine) (/irsr
revision)
Varnishes and Lacquers
IS: 19?-1969 Methods of sampling and
test for varnishes and lacquers (first
revision)
IS : 337-1975 Specification for varnish,
finishing, interior first revision)
IS : 340- 1978 Specification for varnish,
mixing*(firsl revision)
IS : 346-1952 Specification for varnish,
spirit, clear, hard.
IS : 347-1975 Specification for varnish,
shellac, for general purposes (first
revision)
IS : 348-1968 Specification for French
polish (fk!r revision)
IS : 349-1955 Specification for lacquer,
cellulose, nitrate, clear, finishing, glossy
for metal (f?rsr revision)
IS : 524-1968 Specification for varnish,
finishing, exterior, synthetic (firsl
revision)
IS : 525-1968 Specification for varnish,
finishing, exterior and general purposes
firs1 revision)
IS : 642- I963 Specification for varnish
medium for aluminium paint (revised)
Thermal Insulation Mareriak
I S : 3144-1981 Methods of test for
mineral wool thermal insulation material
vrst revision)
I S : 3 3 4 6 - 1 9 8 0 Methods for the
determination of thermal conductivity of
thermal insulation materials (two slab,
guarded hot-piate method) first revision)
1s : 3677- 1 9 7 3 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal
insulation (firsr revision)
IS : 3 6 9 0 - 1 9 7 4 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
unbonded glass wool for thermal
insulation ylrsf revision)
“_25
 IS : 467 I - I968 Specification for expanded
polystyrene for thermal insulation
purposes
lS:5688-1982 M e t h o d s o f t e s t f o r
preformed block-type and pipe-covering
type thermal insulation @rst revision)
lS:5724-1970 M e t h o d s o f t e s t f o r
thermal insulating cement
IS : 6598- 1972 Specification for cellular
concrete for thermal insulation
IS : 7509-1974 Specification for thermal
insulating cement (type 750)
IS: 7510-1974 Specification for thermal
insulating cement (type 350)
IS : 8 I54- I976 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
preformed calcium silicate insulation (for
temperature up to 6SO°C)
IS: 8183-1976 Specification for bonded
mineral wool
IS : 9350-1980 Specification for thermal
insulating cement (type 950)
IS : 9403-1980 Method of test for thermal
conductance and transmittance of built
up sections by means of guarded hot box
IS : 9489-1980 Method of test for thermal
conductivity of materials by means of
heat flow meter
13:9490-1981 Method for determination
for thermal conductivity of insulation
materials (water calorimeter method)
IS : 9742- 198 I Specification for sprayed
mineral wool thermal insulation
IS : 9743- I98 I Specification for thermal
insulation finishing cements
Plastics
IS: 1998-1962 M e t h o d s o f t e s t f o r
thermosetting synthetic resin bonded
laminated sheets
IS : 2036-1974 Specification for phenolic
laminated sheets (/First revision)
IS : 2 0 4 6 - 1 9 6 9 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
decorative thermosetting synthetics resin
bonded laminated sheets (first revision)
I S : 2076- 198 I S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
unsupported flexible vinyl film and
sheeting ‘(jkst revision)
IS : 2508- 1984 Specification for low
density polyethylene films ( s e c o n d
revision)(under print)
IS : 6307- 197 I Specification for rigid
PVC sheets
IS : 9766- 198 I Specification for -flexible
PVC compound
“3
Conductors and Cables
IS : 694- I977 Specification for PVC
insulated cables for working~voltages up
to and including I 100 volts ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS : 1554 Specifictation for PVC insulated
(heavy duty) electric cables:
IS: 1554 (Part I)-1976 Part I For
working voltages up to and including
I 100 volts (second revision)
IS: 1554 (Part II)-1981 Part I1 F o r
working voltages from 3.3 kV up to
and including I I kV (first revision)
I S : 1596-1977 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
polyethylene insulated cables for working
voltages up to and including II00 volts
(second revision)
IS : 4289-1967 Specification for lift cables
IS : 7098 Specification for cross-linked
polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed
cables:
IS : 7098 (Part I)- 1977 Part I For
working voltage up to and including
IIOOV
IS : 7098 (Part II)-1973 Part 11 For
working voltages from 3.3 kV up to
and including 33 kV
IS : 9968 Specification for elastomer-
insulated cables:
IS : 9968 (Part I)-198 I Part I For
working voltages up to and including
IIOOV
IS: 9968 (Part II)-1981 Part II For
working voltages from 3.3 kV up to
and including I I kV
1s : Methods of test for
cables
Electrical Wiring Fittings and Accessories
IS: 371-1979 Specification for ceiling
roses (secotrcl re\$ision)
IS : 374- 1979 Specification for electric
ceiling type fans and regulators (third
relision)
IS : 4 18-1978 Specification for tungsten
filament general service electric lamps
(third revision)
IS : I258- I979 Specification for bayonet
lamp holders (second re\vision)
IS : l293- I967 Specification for three-pin
plugs and socket-outlets first revision)
IS : I534 (Part I)- I977 Specification for
ballasts for fluorescent lamps : Part I For
switch start circuits (second revision)
I S : I777- I978 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
industrial luminaire with metal reflectors
(,/ir.vt rr\,i.\/f~rl)
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 IS : 1947-1980 Specification for flood
lights (firs/ revision)
IS : 2086- 1983 Specification for carriers
and bases used in re-wirable type electric
fuses up to 650 volts (second revision)
I S : 2148-1981 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
flameproof enclosures for electrical
apparatus (second revision)
IS : 2206 Specification for flameproof
electric lighting fittings:
IS : 2206 (Part I)- I984 Part 1 Well glass
and bulkhead types ($rsr revision)
(under print)
IS : 2206 (Part II)-1976 Part II Fittings
using glass tubes
1S : 22 15-l 983 Specification for starters
for fluorescent lamps (third revkion)
IS : 24 l2- 1975 Specification forlink clips
for electrical wiring first rfwision)
IS : 2418 Specification for tubular
fluorescent lamps for general lighting
service:
I S : 2 4 1 8 ( P a r t I)-1977 P a r t I
Requirements and tests first revision)
I S : 2 4 1 8 ( P a r t II)-1977 P a r t I I
Standard lamp data sheets yirsr
revision)
I S : 2 4 1 8 ( P a r t Ill)-1977 Part Ill
Dimensions of G-5 and G-I 3 bi-pin
caps (f?rsr revision)
IS:2418 (Part IV)-1977 Part IV Go
and no-go gauges for G-5 and G-13
bGpin caps yirst revision)
IS : 2509- 1973 Specification for rigid non-
metallic conduits for electrical
installations (first revision)
IS : 2667-1976 Specification for fittings
for rigid steel conduits for electrical
wiring (jhr revision)
IS : 2675-1983 Specification for enclosed
distribution fuseboards and cutouts for
voltages not exceeding I OOOV (second
revision)
I S : 3287- I965 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
industrial lighting fittings with plastic
reflectors
IS : 3323- 1980 Specification for bi-pin
lamp holders for tubular fluorescent
lamps (firsf revision)
IS : 3324- I982 Specification for holders
for starters for tubular fluorescent lamps
Cfirst revision)
IS : 34 I9- I976 Specification for fittings
for rigid non-metallic conduits (first
re\lision)
IS : 3480-1966 Specification for flexible
PART V BUILDING MATERIALS
steel conduits for electrical wiring
IS : 3528- 1 9 6 6 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
waterproof electric lighting fittings
IS : 3 5 5 3 - 1 9 6 6 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
watertight electric lighting fittings
IS : 3837-1976 Specification f o r
accessories for ri id steel conduits for
electrical wiringcii rrsi revision)
IS : 3854-1966 Specification for switches
for domestic and similar purposes
IS : 4012-1967 Specification for dust-
proof electric lighting fittings
IS: 4013-1967 Specification for dust-
tight electric lighting fittings
IS : 4064 SpecificaJion for air-break
switches, air-break disconnectors, air-
break switch-disconnectors and fuse-
combination units for voltages not
exceeding I 000 V ac or I 200 V dc:
IS : 4064 (Part I)- 1978 Part I General
requirements (first revision)
IS : 4064 (Part II)- 1978 Part II Specific
requirements for the direct switching
of individual motors yirsr revision)
IS:4160-1967 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
interlocking switch socket outlet
IS: 46 I5- 1968 Specification for switch
socket-outlets (non-interlocking type)
IS : 4649- I968 Specification for adaptors
for flexible steel conduits
IS : 4949-1968 Specification for 2-amp
switches for domestic and similar
purposes
IS : 5 0 7 7 - 1 9 6 9 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
decorative lighting outfits
IS: 5133 Specification for boxes for
enclosures of electrical accessories:
IS : 5 I33 (Part I)-1969 Part I Steel and
cast iron boxes
IS: 5133 (Part II)-1969 Part II Boxes
made of insulating materials
IS : 6538-1971 Specification for three-pin
plugs made of resilient material
IS : 6946-1973 Specification for flexible
(pliable) non-metallic conduits for
electrical installations
IS : 8 0 3 0 - 1 9 7 6 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
luminaires for hospitals
IS : 8 8 2 8 - 1 9 7 8 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
miniature, air-break circuit-breakers for
voltage not exceeding 1000 V
IS: 9224 Specification for low voltage
fuses:
IS : 9224 (Part I)-1979 Part I General
requirements
v_2’
 I S :9224 (PM II)-1979 P a r t I I IS: 10322 Specification for luminaires:
Supplementary requirements for fuses IS: 10322 (Part I)-1982 Part I General
for industrial ,applications requirements
IS :9224 (Part IV)-1980 Part IV IS: 10322 (Part II)-1982 Part II
Supplementary requirements forfuse- Constructional requirements
links for the protections of semi-
conductor devices IS : Specification for conduits for
electrical installations:
IS : 9737 (Part I)-1980 Specification for
conduits for electrical installations: Part I IS: (Part I)- Part I Rigid plain
General requirements conduits of insulating materials
IS : 9926298 1 Specifiiation for fuse wires IS: (Part II)- Part II Pliable
used in rewirable type electric fuses up to self-recovering conduits of insulating
650 volts materials

NATIONAL WILDING CODE OF INDIA

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION 1 LOADS

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS

0. FOREWORD
1. SCOPE
2 DEADLOAD
3. IMPOSEDLOAD
4. WINDLOAD
5. SElSMlC LOAD
6. SNOWLOAD
7. SPECIALLOADS
8. LOADCOMBINATIONS
APPENDIX A ILLUSTRA~TIVFEXAMPLESHOWlNGREDUCTlON OF
UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED IMPOSED FLOOR LOADS
IN MULTESTORtYED BUILDINGS FOR DESIGN OF
COLUMNS
APPENDIX B NOTATIONS
A PPENDJX C BASlCWlNDSPEEDATlOm HEIGHTFOR SOME
lMPORTANTCITIES/TOWNS
A PPENDJX D CHANGES1NTERRAINCATEGORlES
APPENDJX E EFFECTOFACLIPORESCARPMENTONTHE
EQUIVALENT HEIGHT ABOVE GROUND (k3FACTOR)
APPENDIX F WINDFORCEONClRCULARSECTIONS
A PFENDJX G BASIC HORIZONTAL SEISMIC COEFFICIENTS FOR
SOMElMPORTANTTOWNS/CITiES
4 PPi5NDJX H SPECTRAOFEARTHQUAKE

?APT Vl slWJtTUU4L DESIGN--SKI-ION I LOADS

0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section covers the various loads and forces which are to be taken into account for
structural design of buildiqs. The various loads thk are covered under this section are dead load,
imposed load, wind load, seismic load, snow load, special loads and load combinations.
0.2 National Building Code of India was first published in 1970 and revised in 1983. The present
revision is intended to bring this section in line with the following latest Indian Standards:

IS : 1893-l 894 Criteria for earthquake resistantde&n of structures Cfourth reviMn)

IS : 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Code of practice for design loads (other thanearthquake) for build-
ings and structures: Part 2 Imposed loads (second revision)
IS : 875 (Part 3) - 1988 Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for build-
ings and structures: Part 3 Wind loads(second revision)
IS : 875 (Part 4) . 1987 Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for build-
ings and structures: Part4 Snow loads (secondtevfrfo?)
IS : 87.5 (Part 5) - 1987 Code of practice for design loads.(other than earthquake) for build-
ings and structures: Part 5 !+ecial loads and load combinations (secondrevision)
IS : 1893-l 984 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structure(.J~urth revision)
03 This section has to be read together with Sections 2 to 7 of Part VI Structural Design.
2
W-l- MTIONAL BuIlMwo M 01 INnA
1. SCOPE
1.1 This section cpvers basic design loads to be
assumed in the design, of buildings. The
imposed Gads, wind loads, seismic loads, snow
loads and other loads, which are specified here-
in, are minimum working loads which should be
taken into consideration for purposes of design.
1.2 T,his section does not take into considera-
tion loads incidental to construction.
2. DEAD LOAD
2.1 Assessment of Dead Load - The dead
load in a building shall comprise the weight of
all walls, partitions, flools and roofs, and shall
include the weights of all other permanent
constructions in the building and shall conform
to good practice [VI-l(l)] *
3. IMPOSED LOAD
3.1 This clause covers imposed loads+ (live
loads) to be assumed in the design of buildings.
The imposed ,loads specified herein ire
minimum loads which should, be taken into
consideration for the purpose of structural
safety of buildings.
NXTE - This section does not cover dctailcd pro-
visions for loads incidental to construction and
special
cases of vibration. such as movinp nlxhincry. heavy
acceleration from cranes, hoists and the like. Such
loads shall bc dealt \\ith individually in each USC’.
3.2.1 For the purpose of imposed loads
specified herein, the following defiinitions shall
apply :
IMPOSED LOAD ~ The load assumed to be
produced by the intended use or occupancy of
a building including the weight of movable
partitions, distributed and concentrated loads,
loads due to impact and vibration, and dust
loads but excluding wind. seismic, snow and
other loads due to temperature changes, creep,
shrinkage, differential settlement. etc.
O CCUPANCY OR Usk GROUP-The principal
occupancy for which a building or part of a
building is used or intended to be used; for the
purpose of classification of a building according
to occupancy, an occupancy shall be deemed to
l In this section. where referertcc is made to ‘good
practice’ in relation to dcsitm, testing, conxtruction
procedures and other information. the appropriate
document listed at the end of the section may be
used as a guide to the interpretation of this term.
.t The word ‘imposed load’ is used throughout instead
of ‘live load’ which is synonymous.
include subsidiary occupancies which are
contingent upon it. The occupancy classifica-
tion is given in the following groups:
A S S E M B L Y B U I L D I N G S ’- These shall include
any building or part of a building where groups
of people congregate or gather for amusement,
recreation, social, religious, patriotic, civil.
travel and similar purposes: for example,
threatres, motion picture houses, assembly
halls, city halls, marriage halls, town halls.
auditoria, exhibition halls, museums, skating
rinks, gymnasiums, restaurants (also used as
assembly halls), I)laces of worship, dance halls,
club rooms, passenger stations and terminals
of air, surface and other public transportation
services, recreation piers and stadia, etc.
B U S I N E S S B UILDINGS - These shall include
any building or part of a building, which is used
for transaction of business (other than that
rovered by mercantile buildings); for keeping
of accounts and records for similar purposes:
offices, banks, professional establishments.
court houses, and libraries shall be classified in
this group so far as principal function of
these is transaction of public business and the
keeping of books and records.
OI’FICE BUILDIN GS -The buildings primarily
to be used as an office or for office-purposes:
‘office purposes’ include the purpose of
administration, clerical work. handling money.
telephone and telegraph operating, and
operating computers, calculating machines,
‘clerical work’ includes writing. book-keeping,
sorting papers. typing, filing, duplicating,
punching cards or tapes, drawing of matter
for publication and the editorial preparation of
matter for publication.
EI)I!C’ATIONAL BU I L D I N G S - These shall
include any building used for school, college or
day-care purposes involving assembly for
instruction. education or recreation and which
is not covered by assembly buildings.
INDUSTRIAL BU I L D I N G S -- These shall
include any building or a part of a building or
structure, in which products or materials of
various kinds and properties arc fabricated.
assembled or processed like assembly plants,
power plants, refineries, gas plants, mills.
dairies, factories, workshops. etc.
INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS - These shall
include any building or a part thereof, which
is used for purposes such as medical or other
treatment in case of persons suffering from
physical and mental illness. diseaseoc infirmity;
care of infants, convalescents or a(ged persons
and for penal or correctional detention in
which the liberty of the inmates is restricted.
Institutional buildings ordinarily provide
sleeping accommodation for the occupants. It
3
w-1.
 includes hospitals, sanitoria, custodial
institutions or penal institutions like jails,
prisons and reformatories.
M E R C A N T I L E BUILDINGS - These shall
include any building or a part of a building
which is used as shops, stores, market for
display and sale of merchandize either whole-
sale or retail. Office, storage and service
facilities incidental to the sale of merchandize
and located in the same building shall be
included und& this group.
R E S I D E N T I A L B U I L D I NGS - These shall
include any building in which sleeping
accommodation is provided for normal
residential purposes with or without cookingor
dining or both facilities (except buildings
under institutional buildings). It includesone or d) impact factor, if any.
multi-family dwellings, apartment houses
(flats), lodging or roominghouses, restaurants,
hostels, dormitories and residential hotels. NOTE 4 ~ While selecting a particular loading, the
DWELLINGS - These shall include any
building or part occupied by members of single/
multi-family units with independent cooking
facilitit%. These shall alsq include apartment
houses (flats).
STORAGE BUILDINGS - These shall include
any building or part of .a building used
priniarily for the storage or sheltering of goods,
wares’ or merchandize, like warehouses, cold
storages, freight depots, transity sheds, store
houses, garages, hangers, truck terminals,
grain elevators, barns and stables.
3.3 Imposed Loads on Floors Due to Use and
Occupancy
3.3. I I MPOSED L O A DS - The imposed loads
to be assumed
in the design of buildings shall be
the greatest loads that probably will be
produced by the intended use or occupancy,
but shall not b’e less than the equivalent
flnimum loads specified in Table 1 subject to
any reductions permitted by 3.3.2.
Floors shall be investigated for both the
uniformly distributed load (UDL) and the
corresponding concentrated load specified in
Table 1, and designed for the most adverse
effects but they shall not be considered to act
simultaneously. The concentrated loads
specified in Table 1 may be assumed to act over
an area of 0.3 x 0.3 m. However, the concen-
trated loads need not be considered where the
floors are capable of effective lateral distribli-
tion of this load.
All other structural e l e m e n t s s h a l l b e
investigated for the effects of uniformly
distributed loads on the floors specified in
Table 1.
4
Ml-
NOTE I - Where;in Table I, no values are given for
concentrated load, it may be assumed ‘that the
tabulated distributed load is adequate for design
purposes.
NOTE 2 - The loads s ecified in Table 1 ate
equivalent uniformly distrltuted loads on the plan
area and provide for. normal effect of im act and
acceleration. They do not take into consdetation
P
special concentrated loads and other loads.
hkXE I - Where the use of an area or floor is not
provided in Table 1; the imposed load due to theke
and occupancy of ‘such ‘an area shall be detetminbd
from the analysis of loads resulting from:
a) weight of the probable assembly of persons;
b) weight of the tobable accumulation of equip-
ment and turns&mg;
c) weight of the piobable storage materials; and
possible change in use ot occupant of the building
should be kept in view. Designers should not
necessarily select in every case the lower loading
appropriate to the first occupancy. In doing this they
might introduce considerable restrictions in the use
of the building at a later date, and thereby reduce its
utility.
b&E 5 - The loads specified herein, which ate based
on estimations. may be considered as the characteristic
loads for the purpose of limit state method of design
till such time statistical data are established based on
load surveys to be conducted in the country.
WTE 6 - When an existing building is altered by
an extension in height or area, all existing structural
Darts affected by the addition shall be strengthened
where necessary,. and all new structural parts shall be
designed to meet the tequitements for building thete-
after erected.
NOTE 7 - The loads specified in the section does not
include loads incidental to construction. Therefore,
close supervision during, construction is essential
to ensure that overloading of the building due to loads
by way of stacking of building materials or use of
equipment (for example, cranes and trucks) during
construction or loads which may be induced by floor
io ooot ptop ing in multi-stoteyed construction. does
not I)EC”*. l-Vowever .If construction loads were of
short duration, permissible increase in stresses in the
case of working stress method or permissible decrease
in load factors in limit state method. as applicable to
relevnnt design codes, may be allowed for.
NOTE 8 - The loads in Table 1 ate grouped together
as applicable to buildings having separate principal
occupancy or use. For a building with multiple
occupancies, the loads appropriate to the occupancy
with comparable use shall be chosen from other
occupancies.
NOTE 9 - Regarding loading on lift machine rooms
including storage space used for repairing lift
machines, designers should go by the tecommenda-
tions of lift manufacturers for the present.Regarding
loading due to false ceiling. the same should be
considered as imposed loads on the roof/floor to
which it is fixed.
N4lloNu wuDING coo&I op IwDlA
 TABLE 1 IMPOSED FLOOR LOADS FOR DIFFERENT OCCUPANCIES

S L OLTUVANCYCLASSIFICATION U NIFORMLY D I S TR I B U T E D CONCENTRATED

No. LOAD (UDL) LOAD
(1) 12) (3) (4)

i) Residential Buildings kN/m2 kN

a) Dwelling houses: .
1) All rooms and kitchens 2.0 1.8

2) ToiJet and bath rooms 2.0

3) Corridors, passages, staircases includ- 3.0 4.5

ing fine escapes and store rooms
.\
4) Balconies 3.0 1.5 per metre run concen-
trated at the outer edge

b) Dwelling units planned and executed

m accordance with IVI-i(2))* only:
1) Habitable rooms, kitchens, and toilet 1.5 1.4
and bath rooms
2) Corridors, passages and staircases 1.5 1.4
including fiie escapes
3) Balconies 3.0 1.5 per metre run concen-
trated at the outer edge

c) Hotels, hostels, boarding houses, lodging

houses, dormitories and residential
clubs:
1) Living rooms, bed rooms and dor- 2.0 1.8
mitories
2) Kitchen and laundries 3.0 4.5

3) Billiards room and public lounges 3.0 2.7

4) Store rooms 5.0 4.5

5) Dining rooms, cafeterias and res- 4.0 2.7

taurants
6) Office rooms 2.5 2.1

7) Rooms for indoor games 3.0 1.8

2.0 _
8) Baths and toilets
9) Corridors, passages staircases includ- 3.0 4.5
ing fine escapes and lobbies as per the
floor serviced (excluding stores and the
like) but not less than

IO) Balconies Same as rooms to which 1.5 per metre run concen-
they give access but with trated at the outer edge
a minimum of 4 .O

d) Boiler rooms and plant rooms 5.0 6.7

_ to be calculated but not less than

(Continued)

5
hltTnslRvcnm*l. DES~G%SIMXION I UMDS w-1.
 TABLE I IMPOSED FLOOR LOADS FOR DIFFERENT OCCUPANCIES - Contd.

s& OC C U P A N C Y C L A S S I F I C A T I O N U NIFORMLY D ISTRIBUTED C~NCENTHATEO

LOAD (UDL) LOAD

(I) (2) (3) (4)

kN/m2 kN
e) Garages :
1) Garage floors (including parking area 2.5 9.0
and repair workshops) for passenger
car‘s_and vehicles not exceeding 2.5
tonnes gross weight, including access
waysand ramps to be calculated but
not less than

2) Garage floors for vehicles not exceed- 5.0 9.0

ing 4.0 tonnes gross weight (including
access ways and ramps) to be
calculated but not less than

ii) Educational Bu;l&ng~

a) Class rooms and lecture rooms 3.0 2.1

(not used for asscmbiv purposes)

b) Dining rooms, cafetertas and restaurants 3.0’ 2.7

c) Offices, lounges and stalf rooms 2.5 2.1

d) Dormitories 2.0 2.1

e) Projection rooms 5.0

f) Kitchens 3.0 4.5

P) Toilets and bath rooms 2.0

h) Store rooms 5:o 4.5

j) L.ibrartes and archives.

11 Stack room/stack area 6 . 0 kN/m’ for a mmt- 4.5
mum hetgQt of 2.2 mt
2.0 kN/m per metrr
height beyond 2.2 m
2) Reading rooms 4.0 4.5
Iwithout qxtrate storage)

I) Reading rooms 3.0 4.5

(will1 separate storage)

k) Ihkr roon~s a n d p l a n t r o o m s t o b e 4.0 4,s

calculated but not less than

m) Corridors. pasuftes. Iohhies, staircases 4.0 4.5

including fire escapes -- as per the
floor serviced (wtthout accounting
for sturage and prolectton rooms) hut
not less than

n) Balconies Same as rooms to which 1.5 per metre run con-

they give access but centrated at the outct
with a minimum ot edge
4.0
ui) lnstirurional Burldrngs

a) Bed rooms, wards, dressing rooms, 2.0 1.8

dormitories and lounges

b) Kttchens, l a u n d r i e s a n d l a b o r a t o r i e s 3.0 4.5

(Conrimed)

ii
w-l- w-iow lUlLDING CODE OF INDIA
 ,~~ ~~ .-
TABLE i IMPOSED FLOOR LOADS FOR DIFFERENT &cUPAN~IES - c0ntd

S L QCCIJPANCYCLASSIFICATION U NIFORMLY D ISTRIBUTED CONCENTRATED

No. LoADKJDL) LOAD

(1) (2) (3) (4)

kN/m' iCN

cl Dining rooms, cafeterias and restaurants 3.0' 2.1 .

d) Toilets and bathrooms 2.0

C) X-ray rooms, operating rooms and 3.0 4.5
general storage areas - to be calculated
but not less than

.f) Office rooms and O.P.D. rooms 2.5 2.1

d) Corridors, passages, lobbies and stair- 4.0 4.5
cases including fire escapes - as per the
floor serticed but not less than
h) Boiler rooms and plant rooms to be 5.0 4.5
calculated but not less than
j) Balconies Same as rooms to which 15 per mehe NII c o n -
they give access but centrated at the outer
with a minimum of
4.0
iv) Assembly Building
Assembly areas : 4.0
I) With fixed seats+ 5.0
2) Without fixed seats 5.0

b) Restaurants (subject to assembly), 4.0

museums and art galleries and gymnasia

cl Projection rooms 5.0 -

d) Stages 5.0 4.5

d Office rooms, kitchens and laundries 3.0 4.5

0 Dressing rooms 2.0 1.8

B) Lounges and billiards rooms 2.0 2.1

h) Toilets and bathrooms 2.0

i) Corridors, passages and staircases 4.0 4.5

including fire escapes
k) Balconies Same as rodms to which 1.5 per mctm run con-
they give access but centrated at the other
with a minimum of edge
4.0
m) Boiler rooms and plant rooms including 7.5 4.5
weight cf machinery
n) Corridors, passages subject to loads 5.0 4.5
greater than from crowds, such as wheeled
vehicles, trolleys and the like. Corridors,
staircases and passages in grandstands

v) Business and office Buildings

(see also 3.2. I)
a) Rooms for general use with separate 2.5 2.7
storage
(Continued)

7
rAKTvlmnm DESIGN-SECTION I L0ADS HI-
 TABLE 1 IMPOSED FLOOR LOADS FOR DIFFERENT 0CCUPANCII:S

k, OC~UI'ANCYCLASS~F~CATION U NIFORMLY DIS~KI~S\JTI;I~

LOAD (UDL)

(1) (2) (3)

kNlm2
b) Rooms without separate storage 4.0
c) Banking halls 3.0
d) Business computing machine rooms 3.5
(with fixed computers or similar
equipment)

e) Records/fdes store rooms and storage 5.0

space

0 Vaults and strong rooms ~- to be calcu- 5.0 4.5

lated but not less than

R) Cafeterias and dining rooms 3.0. 2.7

h) Kitchens 3.0 2.7

j) Coriidors, passages, lobbies and stair- 4.0 4.5

cases including fire escapes - as per the
floor serviced (excluding stores) but not
less than
k) Bath and toilets rooms 2.0
m) Balconies Same as rooms to which 1 .S per metre *un con-
t h e y give access b u t centrated at the outer
with a mInimum of’ edcc
4 .o
n) Stationary stores 4.U tor each metre ol 9.0
storage height

p) Boiler rooms and plant rooms ro be 5.0 6.1

calculated but not less than

q) Libraries .+a Sl No. (ii)

vi) Mercantile Buildirvgs

a) Retall shops 4.0 3.6

b) Wholesale shops to be calculated but 6.0 4.5

not less than

Office rooms 2.5 2.1

Dining rooms, restaurants and cafeterias 3.0* 2.7
Toilets 2.0
Kitchens and laundries 3.0 4.5
Boiler rooms and plant rooms - to be 5.0 6.7
calculated but not less than

h) Corridors, passages, stair-cases including 4.0 4.5

fir: escapes and lobbies

i) Corridors, passages. staircases subject to 5.0 4.5

loads greater than from crowds, such as
wheeled vehicles. trolleys and the like

W Balqonies Same as rooms to which 1.5 per metre run con-

they give access but centrated at the outer
with a minimum of edge
A.0
(Conrinued)

8
\nr- N4lloN4L mJnDINo cuok OF INDIA
 TABLE 1 IMPOSED FLOOR LOADS I-OR DIII’ERENT OCCUPANCIES - Cortrd

O CCUPANCY C LASSIFICATION U N I F O R M L Y DISTRIBUTEI) C~N~;;;;.ATFD

%I LOAD fUDL)

(1) (2) (3) (4)

kN/m2 kN
.
vii) brdusrrial Buildings

a) Work areas without machinery/ 2.5 4.s

equipment
*
b) Work arcas with machinery/equipment

1) Light dur) 5.0 4.5

T O be calculated
2) Mediu n1 duty 7.0 45
but not less than
3) Heavy dury In.0 4,s
I
C) Boiler rooms and plant rooms -to be 5.0 h.7
calculated but not less than

d) Cafeterias and dining rooms 3.0’ 2.1

e) Corridors, passages and staircaFes 4.0 4.5
including fiie cscapcs

f) Corridors. passages. stairi-ascs subicc! IO 5.0 4.5

machine loads and wheeled vehiclrr - to
bc calculated but not less than

F) Kitchens 3.0 45

h) Toilets and balhrooms 5 70

viii) SruraKe BuildinKs

Storage rooms (other rhan cold storage) 14 kN/m2 p e r e a c h 7.0
and warehouses -to be calculated based metro ofxror+e hcieht
on the bulk density ol materials stored wirh 3 rnlnlmunl ol‘
but not less than 7.5 kN/rn’

bt Cold storage - to be rulcula~rd but not 5.0 kN/m2 p e r e a c h Y.0

less than mctre ot’btorage helghr
\\ilh a nlinirnunl ot
IS kN/nl2

Corridors, passages and sraircasc5 4.n 1.5

including fire escapes-as per the floor
serviced but not less than

d) Corridors, p a s s a g e s subjerr ro loads 5.0 4.s

greater than from crowds. such ac
whcclcd vehicles, trollcyr and the like

e) l%oilcr rooms and plant rooms 7.5 4.5

l Wheieunrcstrictcd assembly of persons is anticipated, the value of UDL should be increased to 4.0 kN/m2
+
With fixed seats’ implies that the removal of the seatmg and the use of the space for other purposes is
improbable. ‘Ilre maximum likely load in this case is, therefore, closely controlled.

%‘he loading in industrial buildings(workshopsand factories) varies considerably and so three lotidings under
the terms ‘light’, ‘medium’ and ‘heavy’ are introduced in order to allov, for more economical designs bur
the terma have no special meaning in themselves other .thall the imposed load for which the relevant floor
is designed. It is, however, important particularly in tie case of bea.vy weight loads, to assess the actual
loads to ensure that they are not in excess of 10 kN/m ; in case whcrc they are in excess. the design sll~ll
be based on the actual loadings.

)For Niouamachanical handling equipment which arc used lo transport goods, as in warehouses, workshops,
*ore rooms. etc. the actual load coming from the use of such equipment shall be ascertained and design
hould cater to ulch loads.
- -

9
mkrnm- DBSIGN-SELllOIy I LOADS VI.1
.?.3.1.1. LOAD APPLICATION - The uniformly
distributed loads specified in Table 1 shall be
applied as static loads over the entire floor area
under consideration or a portion of the floor
area whichever arrangement produces critical
effects on the structural elements as provided in
respective design codes.
ln the design of floors, the concentrated loads
arc considered to be applied in the positions
which produce the maximum stresses and
where deflection is the main criterion in the
positions which produce the maximum
deflections. Cbncentrated load, when used for
the calculation of bending and shear, are
assumed to act at a point. When used for the
calculation of local effects such as crushing or
punching, they are assumed to act over an
actual area of application of 0.3 x 0.3 m.
.<..{.I.-7 LOADS DUE TO LIGHT PARTITIONS -
In office and other buildings, where actual
loads due to light partitions cannot be assessed
at the time of planning the floors and the
supporting structural members shall be designed
to carry, in addition to other loads, uniformly
distributed loads per square metre of not less
than 33.33 percent of weight per metre run of
finished partitions, subject to a minimum of
lkN/m*, provided total weight of partition
walls per m2 of the wall area does not exceed
1.5 kN/m* and the total weight per metre
length is not greater than 4.0 kN.
3.3.2 R E D U C T I O N IN IMPOSED L OADS ON
F L O O RS
3.3.2.1 I:OR IFLOOR SUPPORTING STRUCTURAL
MEMBltRS - Except as provided for in 3.3.2.1
(a), the following reductions in assumed total
imposed loads on floors may be made in design-
ing columns, load bearing walls, piers, their
supports and foundations.
NUUI her of Floors Reduction in Total
(Including the Roof) Distributed Imposed
to be Carried by Load on All Floors
Mem her Under to be Carried by the
Consideratiun Member IJnder
Consideration
Percent
1 0
2 10
3 20
4 30
5 to IO 40
Over IO SO
a) No reduction shall be made for any plant
or machinery which is specifically allowed
for, or for buildings for storage purposes,
10
VI-l-
warehouses and garages. However, for
other buildings, where the floor is designed
for an imposed floor load of 5.0 kN/m* or
more, the reductions shown in 3.2.1 may
be taken provided that the loading assumed
is not less than it would have been if all the
floors had been designed for 5.0 kN/m2
with no reductions.
NOTE - In case if the reduced load in the
lower floor is lesser than the reduced load in
the up er floor, then the reduced load of the
K will be adopted.
upper oor
b) An example is given in Appendix A illustra-
ting the reduction of imposed loads in a
multi-stgreyed building in the design of
column members.
3.3.2.2 FOR BEAMS IN EACH FLOOR LEVEL -
Where a single span of beam, girder or truss
supports not less than 50 m2 of floor at one
general level, the imposed floor load may be
reduced in the design of the beams, girders or
trusses by 5 percent for each 50 m2 area,
supported subject to a maximum reduction of
15 percent. However, no reduction shall be
made in any of the following types’ of loads:
a) any superimposed moving load,
b) any actual load due to machinery or similar
concentrated loads,
c) the additional load in respect of partition
walls; and
d) any impact or vibration.
N OTE - The above reduction does not apply to
beams. girders or trusses supporting roof loads.
3.3.3 P OSTING OF F LOOR C A P A C I T I E S -
Where a floor or part of a floor of a building
has been designed to sustain a uniformly distri-
buted load exceeding 3.0 kN/m2 and in
assembly, business, mercantile, industrial or
storage buildings, a permanent notice in the
form shown below indicating the actual
uniformly distributed and/or concentrated
loadings for which the floor has been structural-
ly designed shall. be posted in a conspicuous
place in a position adjacent to such floor or on
such part of a floor.
DESIGNED IMPOSED FLOOR LOADING
Concentrated . . . . . . . . . kN
Label Indicating Designed Imposed
Floor Loading
i%OTE 1 - The lettering of such notice shall be
embossed or cast suitably on a tablet whose least
dimension shall not be less than 0.25 m and located
not less than 1.5 m above floor level with lettering of a
minimum size of 25 mm.
NATtoNAl. llnlnlNc COOL OF ItaL
 NOTI: 2 - If a concentrated load or a bulk load has to
oc~py 3 definite position on the floor, the same
could also be indicated in the Iable.
3.4 Irrrpost~I Loads OII RooJi
3.4.1’I~~os~D LOADS ONVARIOUS TYPES
01: ROOI:S - On flat roofs, sloping roofs and
curved roofs. the imposed loads due to use and
occupancy of the buildings and the geometry of
the types of roofs shall be as given in Table 2.
3.4. I. I Roofs
of buildings used for promenade
or incidental
to assembly purposes- shall be
designed for the appropriate imposed floor
loads given in Table I for the occupancy.
3 . 4 . 2 C O N C E N T R A T E D LOAD ON ROOF
COVER IN G S - To provide for loads incidental
to maintenance, unless otherwise specified by
the Engineer-in-Charge, all roof coverings (other
than glass or transparent sheets made of fibre

TAHLF 2 IMPOSLD LOADS ON VARIOUS TYPWOI~ ROol:S

(Clause 3.4. I)

SL TY t’t. OF ROOI IMPOSEI) LOAI) MI+IASUKI:IJ M I N I M U M IMPOSEDbAD

No ON PLAN AUKA M EASURED ON P L A N
(1) (2) (3) (4)

1) I 121. sloping or curved roof ~.irh

slopes up 10 a n d i n c l u d i n g IO
degrees

ti) Access provided I5 kN/m’ 3.75 kN uniformly distributed

over any span of one mctre
width of the roof slab and 9 kN
uniformly distributed over the
span of any beam or truss or
wall

b) Access n o t provldcd t-wept 0.75 kN/m2 1.9 kN uniformly distributed

for maintendnce o v e r a n y spanlof one metre
width of the roof slab and 4.5
kN uniformly distributed over
the span of any beam of truss
or wall

il) Sloping roof with slope sreater I:ur roof membrane sheets or Subject to a minimum of 0.4
than IO drgrees purlins 0.75 kN/m2 less kN/m2
0.02 kN/m2 for every degree
increase m s l o p e o v e r IO
deprcr\

iii) Curved root with slope of line
obtained by Joining springing
point to the crown with the horl-
iontal. g r e a t e r t h a n 10 dzgrecq
(0.75 - 0.52 Cu’) kN/m2 Subject to a minimum of 0.4
kN/m2
where
a = II/l
h = hrlpht of the highest point
of the structure measured
from its sprinpine.; and

I = chord wrdth of the roof if

singly curved and shorter
of the two sides if doubly
curved

Alternatively, where structural

analysis can be carried out for
curved roofs of all slopes in a
simple manner applying the
laws of statistics, the curved
roofs shall be divided into
minimum 6 equal segments
and for each segment imposed
load shall be calculated appro-
priate to the slope of xhe
chord of each segment as given
in (i) and (ii)

NOTE 1 - The loads given above do not include loads due to snow, rain, dust collection, etc. The roof shholt be
designed for imposed loads given above or for snow/rain load, whichever is grater.

N OTE 2 - For special types of roofs with highly permeable and absorbent materi& the contingancy of toof
material increasing in weight due to absorption of moisture shall be provided for.

11
?ARTvlslm~ DESIGN-SMDN 1 WADS Wl-
glass) shall be capable of carrying an incidental
load of Q.90 kN concentrated on an area of
12.5 cm2 so placed as to produce maximum
stresses in the covering. The intensity of the
concentrated load may be reduced with the
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge, where it is
ensured that the roof coverings would not be
traversed without suitable aids. In any case,
the roof coverings shall be capable of carrying
the loads in accordance with 3.4. I, 3.4.3, 3.4.4
and wind load.
3.4.3 LO A D S DUE TO RAIN - On surfaces
whose positioning, shape and drainage system
are such as to make accumulation of rain water
possible, loads due to such accumulation of
water and the imposed loads for the roof as
given in Table 2 shall be considered separately
and the more critical of the two shall be
adopted in the design.
3.4.4 DUST LOAIIS - In areas prone to settle-
ment of dust on roofs (example, steel plants,
cement plants), provision for dust load equiva-
lent to probable thickness of accumulation ot
dust may be made.
3.4.5 Lords ON M E M B E R S S U P P O R T I N G
ROOF CO V E R I N G S - Every member of the
supporting structure which is directly support-
ing the roof covering(s) shall be designed to
carry the more severe of the following loads
except as provided in 3.4.5.1:
a) The load transmitted to the members from
the roof covering(s) in accordance with
3.4.1. 3.4.3 and 3.4.4: and
b) An incidental concentrated load of 0.90 kN
concentrated over a length of 12.5 cm
placed at the most unfavourable positions
on the member.
NOTE - Where it is ensured that the roofs would be
traversed only with the aid of planks and ladders
capable of distributing the loads on them to two or
more supporting members, the intensity of concen-
trated load indicated in 3.4.5 Cb) may be reduced to
0.5 kN with the approval of the Engineer-inCharge.
3.4.5.1 Ln case of sloping roofs with slope .
greater than IO’, members supporting the roof
purling% such as trusses, beams, girders, etc,
may be designed for two-thrrds of the imposed
load on purlins or roofing sheets.
3.S Imposed Horizontal Loads on Parapets and
Balustrades
3.5.1 PAPAPETS. PA R A P E T W A L L S AND
BALUSTRAD ES - Parapets, parapet walls and
balustrades, together with the members which
give them structural support, shall be designed
for the minimum loads given in Table 3.These
are expressed as horizontal forces acting at
handrail or coping level. These loads shall be
considered to act vertically also but not simul-
taneously wit! the horizontal forces. The values
given in Table 3 are minimum values and where
values for actual loadings are available, they
shall be used instead.
3 . 5 . 2 G R A N D S T A N D S A N D THE LI K E
Grandstands, stadia, assembly platforms, review-
ing stands and’ the like shall be designed to
resist a horizontal force applied to seats of
0.35 kN per linear metre along the line of seats
and 0.15 kN per linear metre perpendicular to
the line of the seats. These loadings need not be

TABLE 3 HoRlZONTAL LOADS ON PARAYLIX, PARAPET WALLS AND BALUSTKAD~S

(Clause 3.5.1)
SL US.A(; I‘ AREA INTE NSITY OF I~uK~LoNTAL WAI>
No kN/rn KtJN

(1) (2) (3)

i) Light access stairs, gangways and the like not more than l-l.25
600 mm wide

ii! Light access stairs, gangways and the like, more than 0 35
600 mm wide; stairways, landings. balconies and parapet
walls (private and part of dwell&s)

iii) All other stairways, landings and balconies and all parapets 0.75
and handrails to roofs iexcept those subject to over-
crow&q covered under (vi)]

iv) Parapets and balustrades in place of assembly, such as 2.25

theatres. cinemas, churches, schools, places of entertain-
ment, sports and buildings likely to be overcrowded

NOTE - in the case of gaurd parapets on a floor of multi-storeyed car park or crash barriers provided in certain
buildings for tire escape, the value of imposed horizontal load (together with impact load) may be determined.
applied simultaneously. Platforms without seats
shall be designed to resist a minimum hori-
zontal force of 0.25 kN/m2 of plan area.
3.6 Loading Effects.Due to Impact and Vibra-
tion - The crane loads to be considered under
imposed loads shall include the vertical loads,
eccentricity effects induced by vertical loads,
impact factors, lateral and longitudinal braking
forces acting across and along the crane rails
respectively.
3.6.1 I M PA CT AL L OWANCE FOR L I F T S.
H OISTS AND M ACHINERY - T h e i m p o s e d
loads specified in 2.3.1 shall be assumed to
include adequate allo%uxe for ordinary impact
conditions. However, for structures carrying
loads which induce impact or vibration, as far
as possible, calculations shall be made for
increase in the imposed load due to impact or
vibration. In the abince of sufficient data for
such calculation, the increase in the imposed
loads shall be as follows:
Srructures Impact
Allowance,
Percenr
Min
a) For frames supporting lifts 100
and hoists
b) For foundations, footings 40
and piers supporting lifts
and hoisting apparatus
20
c) For supporting structures
and foundations for light
machinery, shaft or motor
units
d) For supporting structures SO
and foundations for recipro-
cating machinery or power
units
3.6.2 CONCENTRATED IMPOSED LOADS
WITH I MPACT AND V I B R A T I O N ~~ Concen-
trated imposed loads with impact and vibration
which may be due to installed machinery shall
be considered and provided for in the design.
The impact factor shall not be less than 20 per-
cent which is the amount allowable for light
machinery.
3.6.2.1 Provision shall also be made for carrying
any concentrated equipment loads while the
equipment is being installed or moved for
servicing and repairing.
3.6.3 I M P A C T A L L O W A N C E S F O R C R A N E
G I R D E R S ~ For crane gantry girders and
supporting columns, the impact allowances
(given in table on page VI-1 - 14) shall be deemed
to cover all forces set up by vibration, shock from
slipping of slings, kinetic action of acceleration,
and retardation and impact of wheel loads.
PART n !TrRucTuRAL DESIGN--SWllON , UlADS
Forces specified in (c) and (d) shlilf be consi-
dared as acting at the rail leve! and being
appropriately transmitted to the supporting
system. Gantry girders and their vertical
supports shall be designed on the assumption
that either of the horizontal forces in (c) and
(d) may act at the same time as the vertical
load.
b&lTE - See /v1-1(3)] for classification (Class 1 IO
IV) of cranes.
3.6.3.1 OVERLOADING FACTORS IN CRANE
SUPPORTING STRUCTURES - For all ladle
cranes and charging cranes where there is
possibility of overloading from production
considerations, an overloading factor of 10 per-
cent of the maximum wheel loading shall be
taken.
.{.6.4 C RA N E LoAD COMBINATIONS - I n
the absence of any specific indications. the load
combinations shall be as indicated below.
.?.6.4. I Vt RTKAL LOADS In an aisle. where
more than one crane is in operation or has
provision for more than one crane in future, the
following load combinations shall be taken for
vertical loading:
a) Two adjacent cranes working in tanden)
withfull load and with overloading accord-
mg to 3,6..?(a); atid
For l o n g s p a n gantries. w h e r e more t h a n
one crane can come m the span, the girder
shall be designed for one crane fully loaded
with overloading according to J’ 6.J (a)
plus as many loaded cranes as can be
accommodated on the span but without
raking Inlo account ovelloading according
to 3.6..{(a) tu give the maximum effect.
~.~.~..?LG~EKAL SUKGL~. F o r d e s i g n o f
columns *and foundations, supporting crane
girders, the followmg crane combinations shall
be considered:
FOR SINGLE BAY I,RAMES - Effect Of
a)
one crane in the bay kiving the worst effect
shall be considered for calculation of surge
force, and
b) F O R M U L T I- R AY F R A M E S ~ Effect
of two cranes working, one each in any of
two bays in the cross-section to give the
worst effect, shall be considered for
calculation of surge force.
3 6 4..? TRACTIVF I:OR<‘b.
a) Where one crane is in operation with no
provIsIon for future crane, tractive force
from only one crane shall be taken.
13
WI-
 Impact Alhvance for Crane Girders (Z7ause _?.6.3!
Type of Load
a) Vertical loads for electric overhead
cranes
5) Vertical loads for hand operated cranes
c) Horizontal forces transverse to rails:
1) For electric overhead cranes with
trolley havmg rigid mast for suspen-
sion of lifted weight (such as. soaker
crane. stripper crane. etc )
2) Fur all other electric overhead cranes
and hand operated cranes
d) Horizontal traction forces along the rails
for overhead cranes, either electrically
operated or hand operated
b) Where more than one crane is in operation
or there is provision for future crane,
tractive force from two cranes giving maxi-
mum effect shall be considered.
bkITE - Lateral surge force and longitudmal tractrve
force acting across and alone the crane rail rcspccrtvel)
shall not be assumed to art simultaneously. However.
if there is only one crane in the bay, the lltetal a n d
longitudinal forces may act together simultaneously
wth vertical loads.
4. WIND LOADS
4.1 General - This clause gives wind forces
and their effects (static and dynamic) that
shoqld be taken ihto account when deslgrung~
buildings. structures and components thereof
14
Additional Load
~ 25 percent of maximum static loads for
crane girders for all class of cranes
_ 25 percent for columns supporting
Class III and Class IV cranes
- 10 percent for columns. supporting
Class I and Class Ii cranes
No additional load for design of founda-
tions
10 percent of maximum wheel loads for
crane girders only
10 percent of weight of crab and the
weight lifted by the cranes, acting on
any one crane track rail, acting in
either direction and equally distributed
amongst all the wheels on one side of
rail track
For frame analysis, this force, caiculated
as above, shall be applied on one side
of the frame at a time in either direc-
tion
- 5 percent of weight of crab and the
weight lifted by the crnnes, actmg on
any one crane track rail, acting in
either direction and equally distri-
buted amongst the wheels on one side
of rail track
For the frame analysis. the force
calculated as above shall beapplied on
one side of the frame at a time in
either direction
- 5 percent of all static wheel loads
NOTE I - It i s b e l i e v e d t h a t ulttmately w i n d l o a d
e s t i m a t i o n wdl be made by taking Into a c c o u n t t h e
r a n d o m v a r i a t i o n ot w m d s p e e d wrth rtme, b u t
avadablr throrrtrcal m e t h o d s have n o t m a t u r e d
sufflcrentlv at nrcsent tar u s e m rnc Secrlon. I‘or t h i s
r e a s o n . srattc &nd method of load e s t i m a t i o n ,which
lmphes a s t e a d y w i n d s p e e d , whiL+ has proved to he
sattsfactbry for n o r m a l . short and he;~vy structures, I S
glren m 4 _i a n d 4 . 6 . H o w e v e r , a b e g i n n i n g h a s b e e n
m a d e t o t a k e a c c o u n t o f thr r a n d o m n a t u r e o f t h e
wind speed by requiring that thr along-wind or drag
load on structureswhich are prune to wmd i n d u c e d
o s c i l l a t i o n s , b e alsu dotermmed b y r h e g u s t f a c t o r
m e t h o d (SW 4 X ) a n d t h e m’,re r e v e r e o f t h e fwo
e s t i m a t e s bu taken for derlpn
structures or their components. wch a s c o m e tclll
buildines chimney%. Iattlced toucr\. cwling tward%.
tranvnik~un Lo*.verc. puycd ma\tC. c o m m u n i c a t i o n
towers, long \pn bridge\. parrAly or complctsly Aid
faced antenna dish. etc. which reqtlire investigation 01
wind inducr’ed osrillations. In ideniifying and ._nalyzing
such strucwcs. 7 shall be followed.
No II, 2 - In the USC‘ of tall sIruc1ufc’i \vi1h unsym-
m e t r i c a l pcomstry. rhc designs m a y II;IVS to bc
chcckcd tar torsional cltccts due to wind pwwre.
4.1.1 Wmd i s a i r i n m o t i o n r e l a t i v e t o t h e
surface of the earth. The primary cause of wind
is traced to earth’s rotation arid diffcr.ences in
terrestrial radiation. The radiation cffe& are
p r i m a r i l y responsible f6r c o n v e c t i o n either
upwards or downwards. The WIIIJ generally
blows horizontal to the ground at high wind
speeds, Since vertical componcii1s of atmos-
pheric motion are relatively small, the term
‘wind’ denotes almost exclusively the horizontal
wind, vertical winds are always identified as
such. The wind speeds are assessed with the aid
of anemometers or anemographs which are
i n s t a l l e d nt meteorological ohsclvatories a t
h e i g h t s gemrally varyir!g t’rcm IO to 30 nictres
above ground.
4.1.~ Very strong winds (greater than 80 km/h)
are generally associated with cyclonlc storms,
thunderstorms, dust storms or vigorous
monsoons. A feature of the cyclonic storms
over the Indian area is that they rapidly weaken
after crossing the coasts and m o v e a s
depressions/lows inland. The influence of a
severe storm after srriking the coast does nor. in
general, exceed about 60 kilometres, though
sometimes, it may extend even up to 120
kilometres. Very short duration hurricanes of
very high wind speeds called bai Boisoki or
Norwesters occur fairly frequently during
summer months over North-Eastern India.
4.1.3 The wind speeds recorded at any locaiity
are extremely variable and, in addition to
steady wind at any time, there are effects of
gusts which may last for a few seconds. These
gusts cause increase in air pressure but their
effect on the stability of the building may not
b e s o i m p o r t a n t ; often, g u s r s a f f e c t o n l y
part of the building and the increased local
pressures may be more than balanced by a
momentary reduction in the pressure elsewhere.
Because of the inertia of the building, short
period gusts may not cause any appreciable
increase in stress in the main components of the
building, although the walls, roof sheeting and
individual cladding units (glass panels) and their
supporting members, such as purlins, sheeting
rails and glazing bars may be more seriously
affected. Gusts can also be extremely important
for the design of structures with high slenderness
ratios.
WIT VI mmRAL DEHGN-SECTION 1 WADS
4.1.4 The liability of a building to h i g h w i n d
pressures depends not only upon the geogrs
phical l o c a t i o n a n d p r o x i m i t y o f o t h e r
obstructions to air flow but also upon the
characteristics of the structure itself.
4./..i The effect of wind on the structure as a
whole is determined by the combined action of
external and internal pressures acting upon it.
In all cases, the calculated wind loads act
normal to the surface to which they apply.
4.1.6 Buildings shall. also be designed with due
attention to the effects of wind on the comfort
of people inside and outside the buildings.
4. I. 7 The stability calculations of the building
as a whole shall be done considering the
combined effect, as well as separate effects of
imposed loads and wind loads on vertical
surfaces. roofs and other parts of the building
above the general I oaf level.
4.2 h’0rariorr.c The notations to be followed,
unless otherwise specified in relevant clauses
under wind loads. are given in Appendix B.
4.i. I F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f w i n d l o a d s , t h e
following definilions shall apply.
ANCLI, 01 ATTACK - A n g l e b e t w e e n t h e
direction of wind and a reference axis of the
structure.
BK L A 11’1 ti Breadth means hoI irontul dirncn-
sion of the building measured normal to the
direction of wind.
N)TI? Hrcad1l1 2nd depth 3rc dmlt~nwmr mrasurcd
in relatu)n to tlw directjon <)I the wnd. whcrc;l’i Irngh
and width arc dlmrnsionu rclnlcd (0 t h e 1~1~11
Dt:PTIi Depth means the horizontal dimen-
sion of the building measured in the direction
of the wind.
Dt. VI. LOPI~.D Hk I(;HT -- D e v e l o p e d heidlt iS
the h e i g h t o f u p w a r d p e n e t r a t i o n o f t h e
velocity profile in a new terrairi. At large.fetch
lengths, such penetration reaches the gradient
height above which the wind speed may be
taken to be cons:ant. At lesser fetch lengths. a
velocity profile of a smallet height but similar
to that of the fully developed profile of that
terrain category has to be taken, with the
additional provision that the velocity at the top
of this shorter profile equals that of the
unpenetrated earlier velocity profile at that
height.
EF’FECTIVL.: F R O N T A L AK EA -The p r o j e c t e d
area of the structure normal to the direction of
the wind.
15
VI-I.
ELEMENT ok SURFACE ARI.A -- The area of
surface over which the pressure coefficient is
taken to be constant.
FORCE COEFFIClliNT - A n o n - d i m e n s i o n a l
coefficient such that the total wind force on a
body is the product of the force coefficient,
the dynamic pressure of the incident design
wind speed and the reference area over which
the force is required.
No’rI: - H’llrn the lorce is i n the direction o f the
incidcnr wind. the non-dimcnuional rocfticicnt will bc
catlcd 3s drap cocfticirnt. When the force is perpcndi-
cular to the d i r e c t i o n o f incrdrnt w i n d . the non-
dzmensional cocfficicnt w i l l hc csllcd a s ‘Iilk
coefficient‘.
G R O U N D ROUGHNI Ss - The nature of the
earth’s surface as influenced by small scale
obstructions such as trees and buildings (as
distinct from topography) is called ground
roughness.
GUST - A positive or negative departure of
wind speed from its mean value. lasting for not
more than say 2 minutes over a specified
interval of time.
PI, AK GUST -. Peak gust or peak gust speed is
the wind speed associated with the m a x i m u m
amplitude.
I I,.TCti LI,.N<;TH ~ Fetch length is the distance
measureil along the wind from a boundary at
which a change in the type of terrain occurs.
When the changes in terrain lypcs are
encountered (such as the boundary of a t o w n
or city. forest. etc ), the wind profile changes in
character but such changes arc gradual and start
a t g r o u n d l e v e l . spreading or penetrating
uvards with increasing fetch length.
GRADII~NT lit~.IGH’!’ G r a d i e n t h e i g h t i s the
height above the mean ground level at which
the gradient wind blows as a result of balance
among pressure gradient force, coriolis force
and centriftlgal force. For the purpose of this
section. the gradient height is taken as the
height above the mean ground level above
which the variation of wind speed with height
need not be considered.
MI AN GROUND LI;VFL ~~ T h e m e a n g r o u n d
level is the average horizontal plane of the area
enclosed by the boundaries of the structure.
PRESSURt; C0l.l I ICtkNT ~~ P r e s s u r e c o e f f i -
cient is the ratio of the difference between the
pressure acting at a point on a surface and the
static pressure of the incident wind to the
design wind pressure, where the static and
design wind pressures are determined at the
height of the point considered after taking into
account the geographical localion, terrain
cohditions and shielding effect. The pressure
16
U-l-
coefficient is also equal to [ I-( VP/ V,)2 1, where
VP is the actual wind speed at any point on the
structure at a height corresponding to that of
VZ.
NOTI PoGtivc sign ot the pressure c o e f f i c i e n t
indicates prebsurc acting towards the surface and
ncpative sign indicates prcrsure acting away from the
surt’ilcc.
RtTLlRN pt.RIOD R e t u r n p e r i o d i s t h e
number of years, the reciprocal of which gives
the probability of extreme wind exceeding a
given wind speed in any one year.
S H I E L D I N G EI:I:F.CT S h i e l d i n g effect o r
shielding refers to the condition whe[c wind has
to pass along some structure(s) or structural
element(s) located on the upstream wind side,
before meeting the structure or structural
element uru_ier consideration. A factor called
shielding factor’ is used to account for such
effects in estimating the force on the shielded
structures.
SUCTION - Suctions means pressure less than
the atmospheric (static) pressure and is taken to
act away from the surface.
S O L I D I T Y RATIO S o l i d i t y r a t i o i s e q u a l t o
the effective area (projected area of all the
individual elements) of a frame normal to the
wind direction divided by the area enclosed by
the boundary of the frame normal to t h e w i n d
direction.
NOTI,. Solidity rtirio is.tn he calculated for individual
frames.
Tt:RRAIN CATEGORY -- T e r r a i n c a t e g o r y
means t h e c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e surface
irregularities of an area which arise from natural
or construc’ted features. The categories are
numbered in increasing order of roughness.
vL:LOClTY PROt.ILE - The variation of the
horizontal component of the atmospheric wind
speed at different heights above the mean
ground level is termed as velocity profile.
T O P O G R A P H Y - The nature of the earth s
surface as influenced by the hill and valley
configurations.
4.4 Wind Speed and Pressure
4.4.1 N A T U R E01: WI N D I N A T M O S P H E R E -
In general, wind speed in the atmospheric
boundary layer increases with height from zero
at ground level to a maximum at a height called
the gradient height. There is usually a slight
change in direction (Ekman effect) but ths IS
ignored in the section. The variation with
height depends primarily on the terrain
conditions. However, the wind speed at any
height never remains cbnstant and it has been
found convenient to resolve its instantaneous
magnituile into an average or mean value and a
fluctuating component around this average
value. The average value depends on the
averaging time employed in analyzing the
meteorological data and this averaging time
varies from a few seconds to several minutes.
The magnitude of the fluctuating component of
the wind speed, which is called as gust, depends
on the averaging time. In generai, smaller the
averaging interval, greater is the magnitude of
the gust speed.
4.4.2 BASIC WIND S PEED -- Figure 1 gives
basic wind speed map of India. as applicableto
10 m height above mean ground level for
different zones of the country. Basic wind
speed is based on peak gust velocity averaged
over a short time interval- of about 3 seconds
and corresponds to mean heights above ground
level in a open terrain (Category 2). Basic wind
speeds presented in Fig. 1 have been worked
out for a SO-year return period. Basic wind
speed for some important cities/towns is also
given in Appendix C.
4.43 D E S I G N W IND S P E E D ( 4 ) - The basic
wind speed (rb:) for any site shall be obtained
from Fig. 1 and shall be modified to includethe
following effects to get V,, design wind speed
at any height for the chosen structure:
a) risk level;
b) terrain roughness, height and size of
structure; and
c) local topography.
It can be mathematically expressed as follows:
Vz = Vbkrk,k3
where
design wind speed at any height z in
m/s; .
%= basic .wind speed in m/s (Fig. 1);
kl = probability factor (risk coefficient)
(4.4.3.1);
k,= terrain, height and structure size factor
( (4.4.3.2); and
5= topography factor (4.4.3.3).
MTE ~ Design wind speed up to 10m height from
mean ground level shall be considered constant.
4.4.3.I.RISK COEFFICIENT (k,l - Figure 1
(see p. W-I-93) gives basic wind speeds for
terrain category 2 as applicable at 10 m above
ground level based on SO-yeqr mean return
period. The suggested life period to be assumed
in design and the corresponding kt factors for
different classes of structure for the purpose of
design is given in Table 4. In the design of all
buildings and structures, a regional basic wind
speed having a mean return period of 50 years
shall be used except as specified in the note of
Table 4.

TABLE 4 RISK COEFFICIENTS FOR DIFFERENT CLASSES OF STRUCTURES

IN DIFFERENT WIND SPEED ZONES
(Clause 4.4.3. I)
M EAN P H O B A B L E k, FACTOR FOR B ASIC W IND SPEED
D ESIGN L IFE OF (m/s) OFA
CLASS OF STRUCTURE \
STyEyR;R~ IN r
33 39 44 41 50 55

All general buildings and structures 50 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Temporary sheds, structures such as those 5 0.82 0.76 0.73 0.71 0.70 0.67
used during construction operations (for
example, form-work and falsework).
structures during construction stages and
boundary walls

Buildings and structures presenring a low 25 0.94 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.89
degree of hazard to life and property in
the event of failure, such as isolated
towers in wooded areas, farm buildings,
other than residential buildings
Important buildings and structures, such 100 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.07 1.08 1.08
as hospitals, communications buildings/
towers and power plant structures
 TABLE 4 RISK CQEFFICIENTS FOX DIFFERENT CLASSES OF STRUCTURES IN
DlFFERENT WIND SPEED ZONES - cvnrd.
(clause 4.4.3.1)

kl = XN,P -
X 50.0.63 A + 4B
___-.._ -
l n ( I-PN)

.
when
Iv = mean probable design life of structure in years;

PN - risk level in N consecutive years (prob@lity that the design wind speed is exceeded at leant once in
I successive years). nominal value = 0.63;
XNY = extreme wind speed for given values of N and PN ; and
ho, 0.823 * extreme wind speed for N = 50 years and PN = 0.63
A as+d B are coeffkients having the following values for different basic wind speed zones:

Zone A B

33 m/s 83.2 9.2

39 m/s 84.0 14.0
44 m/s 88.0 18.0
47 m/s 88.0 20.5
50 m/s 88.8 22.8
55 m/s 90.8 23.3

bbTE - The factor kl is based on statistical concepts which take accountof the degree of reliability required and
period of time in years during whichthere will be exposure to wind, that is. life of the structure. Whatever wind
speed is adopted for design purposes, there isalways a probability (however small) that it may be exceeded in a
storm af esceptional violence; the greater the period of years over which there will be esposure to the wind,the
greater is the probability. Hi er return petids ranging from 100 to 1 000 years (implying lower riskleveli in
araociation with greater perio$ of axpoau?e may have to be selected.for exceptionally important structures, such
as nuclenr power reactors and satellite communication towers. Equation given below may be used in suchcasts to
ertimah kl factors fur different periods of txposure and chosen probability of exceedence (risk level). The
probabtiity level of 0.63 is normally considered sufficient for design of buildings and structures against wind
effeetr md the values of kl contsponding to this risk level are given in Table 4.

d.d.j.2 TERRAIN, HEIGHT AND STRUCTURE CATEGORY I ~ Exposed o p e n t e r r a i n

SIZE FACTOR (k2)
a ) TLlRRAIN - &?lection of t&rain categories
shall be made with due regard to the effect
of the obstruction which constitute the
gKWlld surface roughness. T h e t e r r a i n
category Used in the hesign of a structure
may vary depending on the direction of
wind under consideration. Wherever suffi-
cient meteorological information is available
about the nature of wind direction. the
, orientation of any building or structure
m4y be suitably planned.
Tannin, i n w h i c h a stxeific s t r u c t u r e
rtimik, shall be assessed ai being one of the
M&wing terrain categories:
with few or no obstructions and in which
the average height of any objects surround
ing the structure is less than 1 .S m.
kTk. - This category includes open sca<w\t\
and tlat treeless plains.
C A T E G O R Y z - Open terrain with well
scattered obstructions having heights
generally between 1.5 and 10 m.
APE - This is the criterion for measurement ol
regional basic wind speeds and includes airfield\.
o<en parklands and .undevelopcd sparsely built.
up outskirts of towns a’nd suburbs. Open land
adjacent to sea coast may also be classified a~
calrgory 2 due to roughness of largesea waves 11
high winds.
 CATEGORY 3 - Terrain with numerous
closely spaced obstructions having the size
of buildings-structures up to 10 m in height
with or without a few isolated tall
strucfures.
N O TE1 - This category includes well wooded
areas and shrubs, towns and industrial areas fully
b) VARIATION OF WIND SPEED WlTH
or partially developed.
NOTE 2 - It is likely that the next hisher
category than this will not exist in most design
situations and that selection of a more severe
category will be deliberate.
N OTE 3 - Particuiar attention must be-given to
the performance of the obstructions in areas
affected by fully developed tropical cyclones.
Vegetation, which is likely to be blown down or
defoliated, cannot be relied upon to maintain
Category 3 conditions. Where such situation ma
exist, either an intermediate category w1t.E
velocity multipliers midway between the values
for Categories 2 and 3 given in Table 2, or
Category 2 should be selected having due regard
to local conditions.
CATEGORY 4 - Terrain with nunierous
large high closely spaced obstructions.
N0TE - Thiscategory includes large city centres,
generally with obstructions above 25 m and well
developed industrial complexes.
HEIGHT
FOR DIFFERENT SIZES OF STRUCTURE IN
DIFFERENT TERRAINS (ka FACTOR)-
Table 5 gives multiplying factors (ks) by
which the basic wind speed given in Fig.1
shall be multiplied to obtain the wind
speed at different heights, in each terrain
category for different sizes of buildings/
structures.
The buildings/structures are classified into
the following three different classes depend-
ing upon their size :
CLASS A - Buildings and/or their
components, such as cladding, glazing,

TABLE 5 kz FACTORS TO OBTAIN DESIGN WIND SPEED VARIATION WITH HEIGHT IN

DIFFERENTTERRAINS FOR DIFFERENT CLASSES OF BUILDINGS STRUCTURES
~CIoure 4.4.3.2 (b)]
H&ht TERRAIN TERRAIN TERRAIN TERRAIN
(d CATEGORY 1 C ATEGORY 2 C ATEGORY 3 CATEGORY 4
Class Class Class

A B C A B C--A B C.-A B C’

10 1.0s 1.03 0.99 1.00 0.98 0:93 0.91 0.88 0.82 0,8O 0.76 0.67
”
15 1.09 1.07 1.03 1.05 1.02 1.97 0.97 0.94 0.87 0.80 0.76 0.67
20 1.12 1.10 1.06 1.07 1.05 1 .oo 1.01 0.98 0.91 0.80 0.76 0.67
30 1.15 1.13 1.09 1.12 1.10 1.04 1.06 1.03 0.96 0.97 0.93 0.83
50 1.20 1.18 1.14 1.17 1.15 1.10 1.12 1.09 1.02 1.10 1.05 0.95
100 1.26 1.24 1.20 1.24 1.22 1.17 1.20 1.17 1.10 1.20 1.15 1.05
150 1.30 1.28 1.24 1.28 1.25 1.21 1.24 1.21 1.15 1;24 1.20 1.10
200 1.32 1.30 1.26 1.30 1.28 1.24 1.27 1.24 1.18 1.27 1.22 1.13
250 1.34 1.32 1.28 1.32 1.31 1.26 r.29 1.26 1.20 1.28 1:24 1.16
300 1.35 1.34 1.30 1.34 1.32 1.28 1.31 1.28 1.22 1.30 1.26 1.17
350 1.37 1.35 1.31 1.36 1.34 1.29 1.32 1.30 1.24 1.31 1.27 1.19
400 1.38 1.36 1.32 1.37 1.35 1.30 1.34 1.31 1.25 1.32 1.28 1.20
450 1.39 1.37 1.33 1.38 1.36 1.31 1.35 1.32 1.26 1.33 1.29 1.21
500 1.40 1.38 1.34 1.39 1.37 1.32 1.36 1.33 1.28 1.34 1.30 1.22

NOTE 1 - See 4.4.3.2 (b) for definitions of class A, class B, class C structures.
WoTE 2 - Intermediate values may be obtained by linear interpolation, if desired. It is permissible to assume
constant wind speed between two heights for simplicity.

rAlsnmucnmu SON I IDAD8

19
U-l-
 roofing, etc. having maximum dimension
(greatest horizontal or vertical dimension)
less than 20 m.
CLASS B - Buildings and/or their
components, such as cladding, glazing,
roofing, etc. having maximum dimension
(greatest horizontal or vertical dimension)
between 20 and SO m.
CLASS C - Buildings and/or their
components, such as cladding, glazing,
roofing, etc, having maximum dimension
(greatest horizontal or vertical dimension)
greater than 50 m.
c) TERRAIN CATt-.GORIFS IN RI:LATION TO
THE DIR~:CTION 01' WIND - The terrain
category used in the design of a building
may vary depending on the direction of
wind under consideration. Where sufficient
meteorological information is available, the
basic wind speed may be varied for specific
wind direction.
d) CHANGES IN TFRRAINCATECORIES-
The velocity profile for a given terrain
category does not develop to full height
immediately with the commencement of
that terrain category, but developsgradually
t o height (h,) , which increases with the
fetch or upwind distance (x).
1) FETCH AND DEVELOPED HEIGHT
RELATIONSHIP -The relation between
the developed height (II,) and the fetch
(x) for wind-flow over each of the four
terrain categories may be taken as given
in Table 6.
2) For ibuildings; of heights greater than
the developed height ( (h,) in Table 6,
the velocity profile may be determined
in accordance with the following.
i) The less or least rough terrain; or
ii) The method described in Appendix D.
4.4.3.3TOPOGRAPHY (kg FACTOR) - The
basic wind speed Vb given in Fig. 1 takes
account of the general level of the site above
sea level. This dpes not allow for local topo-
graphic features, such as hills, valleys, cliffs,
escarpments or ridges, which can significantly
affect wind speed in their vicinity. The effect
of topography is to accelerate wind near the
summits of hills or crests of cliffs, escarpments
or ridges and decelerate the wind in valleys or
near the foot of cliffs. steep escarpments or
ridges.
The effect of topography will be significant at
a site when the upwind slope 6 is greater than
about 30, and below that the value of k3 may
be taken to be equal to 1 .O. The value of k3 is
confined in the range of 1 .O to ,I .36 for slopes
greater than 3’. A method of evaluating the
value of k, for values greater than 1.0 is given
in Appendix E. It may be noted that thevalue
of k, varies with height above ground level at a
maximum near the ground, and reducing to 1 .O
at higher levels,
4.4 Ijrsigtl Wind Pressure - The design wind
pressure at any height above mean ground level
shall be obtained by the following relationship
between wind pressure and wind velocity:

TABLE 6 FETCH AND DEVELOPED HEIGHT RELATIONSHIP

[ CIoust 4.4.3.2 (b)]

LXVFLOPED HE I G H T . h, IN M ETRES
, --I
Terrain Terrain Terrain Terrain
5-Y @) Category 1 Category 2 Category3 Category 4
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

0.2 12 20 60

0.5 20 30 95

I 25 45 130

2 35 65 190

5 60 100 300

0 80 140 450

20 120 200 500

SO 180 390 500

w-1. 20 NAllONAL BUllDING I-ODE OP INDIA

 pz = 0.6 V,’
where
pz = design wind pressure in N/m’ at
height 2, and
5 = design wind velocity m m/s at height
2
NATE - The coefficient 0,6 (in SI units) in the above
formula depends on a number of factors, and mainly
on the atmospheric pressure and air temperature. The
value chosen corresponds to the average appropriate
Indian atmospheric conditions.
44.1 W IND V E L O C I T Y -
OF F S H O R E
Cyclonic storms form far away from the sea
coast gradually reduce in speed as they approach
the sea coast. Cyclonic storms generally extend
up to about 60 kilometres inland after striking
the coast. Their effect on land is already ref-
lected in basic wind speeds specified in Fig. 1.
The influence of wind speed off the coast uptp
a distance of about 200 kilometres may be
taken as 1 J5 times the value on the nearest
coast in the absence of any definite wind data.
4.5 Wind Pressures and Forces on Buildings/
structure
45.1 GENERAL - The wind load on a build-
ing shall be calculated for:
a) the building as a whole;
b) individual structural elements as roofs and
walls; and
c) individual cladding units including glazing
and their flings.
45.2 PR E S S U R E C O E F F I C I E N T S - T h e
pressure coefficients are always given for a
particular surface or part of the surface of a
building. The wind load acting normal to a
surface is obtained by multiplying the area of
that surface or its appropriate portion by the
pressure coefficient (C,) sod the design wind
pressure at the height of the surface from the
ground. The average values of these pressure
coefficients for some building shapes are given
in 4.5.2.2 and 4.5.2.3.
Average values of pressure coefficients are given
for critical wind directions in one or more
quadrants. In order to determine the maximum
wind load on the building, the total load should
be calculated for each of the critical directions
shown from all quadrants. Where considerable
variation of pressure occurs over a surface, it
has been subdivided and mean pressure
coefficients given for each of its several parts.
In addition, areas of high local suction(neg$ve
pressure concentration) frequently occurring
?*ltr VI lrrpucrUR4L D&BICN-S-ON I LOAD.5
near the edges of walls and roofs are separately
shown. Coefficients for the local effects should
only be used for calculation of forces on these
local areas affecting roof sheeting, glass panels
and individual cladding units including their
fuctures. They should not be used for calculat-
ing force on entire structural elements such as
roof, walls or structure as a whole.
NOTE 1 - The pressure coefficients given in the
different tables have been obtained mainly from
measurements on models in wind tunnels. and the
great majority of data available have been obtained in
conditions of relatively smooth flow. Where sufficient
field data exist as in the case of rectangular buildings,
values have been obtained to allow for turbulent tlow.
NOTt.. 2 - In recent years, wall glaring and cladding
design hns been a source of major concern. Although
of less consequence than collapse of the main
structures, damage to glass can be hazardous and cause
considerable financial losses.
NOTE 3 I’or pressure coefficients for structures not
covered herein, reference may be made to specialist
literature on the subject or advise may be sought
from specialists in the subject.
4.5.2.1 WIND LOAD ON INDIVIDUAL MEMBERS
When calculating the wind load on individual
structural elements such as roofs and walls, and
individual cladding units and their fittings, it
is essential to take account of the pressure
difference between opposite faces of such
elements or units. For clad structures, it is,
therefore, necessary to know the internal
pressure as well as external pressure. Then the
wind load, P (in N) acting in a direction normal
to the individual structural element or cladding
unit is:
F = (C,, -Cpe) A pd
where
= external pressure coefficient;
c pi = internal pressure coefficient;
A = surface area of structural element
or cladding unit in m* ; and
pd = design wind pressure in N/m2
NOTE I - If the surface design pressure varies with
height, the surface areas of the structural clement may
be subdivided so that the specified pressures are taken
over appropriate areas.
NOTI? 2 - Positive wmd load indicates the force
acting towards the structural element and negative
away from it.
4.5.2.2 E X T E R N A L PRESSURE COEI~I’ICIENTS
a) WALLS -The average external pressure
coefficient for the walls of clad buildings
of rectangular plan shall be as given in
Table 7. In addition, local pressure concen-
tration coefficients are also given.
21
Vl.1.
 TABLE 7 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (Cp,, FOR WALLS OF RECTANGULAR CLAD
BUILDINGS
-r-
BUILDIN
HEIGHT
RAT10
BUILDING
PLAN
RATIO
IE LEVATION PL A N llN~
.NGL: E
9
l- A
CP,FORSURFACE

-I-
B C D
LOCAL

*
c
a
egreel .
. 7 0 +0.7 -0.2 -0.5 -0.5
<$&-2 0
‘3 90 -0.5 -0.5 +0.7 - 0 . 2
-0.8

f<& 4
La 1 *b.
0 D
B
0

90
+0.7

-us
-0.2.

-0.5
-0.6 -0.6

+0.7 - 0 . 1
-1.0

cl 8
C
0 +0.7 -0.2 -0.6 -0.6
1<$&2 cm* -1.1
90 -0.6 -0.6 +0.7 - 0 . 2 5
0
+<+G- C

Il cl
0 +0.7 1.3 -0.7 -0.7
c?& B -1.1
90 -0.5 -0.5 +0.7 - 0 . 1
n

!El 0
c 0 +0.8 -0.2! -0.8 -0.8
@cl?. -1.2
0
90 -0.8 -0.8 +0.8 - 0 . 2 5
D

-$<h<
W
C 0 +0.7 -0.4 -0.7 -0.7

0
-1.2
90 -0.5 -0.5 +0.8 - 0 . 1
h e

0 +0.9: -1.85 - 0 . 9 -m0.9

I 3
-=- -1.25
H’ 2 90 -0.8 -0.8 +0.9 - 0 . 8 5
c - T -

h
-=a
H’

I
1,
-= 1 .o
w

--
w
- 2
4
h n

0
8
-0

90

90
0
-0.7
+0.9:

+0.8:

-0.7:
~0.25

-0.7

-0.75

-0.75
-0.7 -0.7
w.93 -1.25

-0.75 -0.75

+0.8 a - 0 . 7 5
-1.25

-1.25

NOTP - 11 IS the height to eaves 01 parapet,, I is the gieater horizontal dimension of a building and w is the lesser
horizontal dimension of a building.

b) PITCHED ROOFS 01: RECTANGULAR CLAD
BUILDINGS - The average external
pressure coefficients and pressure concen-
tration coefficients for pitched roofs of
retangular clad building shall be as given in
Table 8 Where no pressure concentration
coefficients are given, the average co-
efficients apply. The pressure coefficients
on the underside of any over-hanging roof
shall be taken in accordance with4.5.2.2(g),
NOTE 1 - T h e p r e s s u r e concentration s h a l l b e
assumed to act outward (suction prtssure) _at the
ridges, eaves, cornices and 90 degree corners of roofs.
MTE 2 - The pressure conccntrstion shall not be
included with the net external pressure when comput-
ing overall loads.
c) M O N O S L O P E ROOi,S 01: RF’Z’TANGULAR
CLAD BUILDINGS The average pressure
coefficient and pressure concentration
coefficient for monoslope (lean-to) roofs
of rectangular clad buildings shall be as
given in Table 9.
d) CANOPY ROOFS W I T H ?4 < h/w< 1 and
l< L/w < 3 - The pressure coefficients
are given in Table 10 and 11 separately for
monopitch and double pitch canopy roofs
such as open-air parking garages, shelter
areas, outdoor areas, railway platforms,
stadiums and theatres. The coefficients
take account of the combined effect of the
wind exerted on and under the roof for all
wind directions; the resultant is to be taken
normal to the canopy. Where the local
coefficients overlap the greater of the two
given values should be taken. However, the
effect of partial closures of one side and
or both sides, such as those due to trains,
buses and stored materials shall be foreseen
and taken into account.
The solidity ratio $ is equal to the area of
obstructions under the canopy divided by
the gross area under the canopy, both areas
normal to the wind direction. I$ = 0 repre-
sents a canopy with no obstructions under-
neath. 4 = 1 represents the canopy fully
blocked with contents to the downwind
eaves. Values of C, for intermediate solidi-
ties may be linearly interpolated between
these two extremes, and apply upwind of
the position of maximum blockage only.
Downwind of the position of maximum
blockage the coefficients for 4 = 0 may be
used.
In addition to the pressure forces normal
to the canopy, there will be horizontal
loads on the canopy due to the Wmd
pressure on any fascia and to friction over
the surface of the canopy. Fbr any wind
direction, only the greater of these two
mal-nlrnt~ DESIGN-SEXYION I LOADS
.
forces need be taken into account. Fascia
loads should be calculated on the area of
the surface facing the wind, using a force
coefficient of 1.3. Frictional drag should
be calculated using the coefficients given in
4.5.3.1.
NOTE - Tables 12 to 17 may be used to pet internal
and estcrnal p r e s s u r e cocfiicients for pirchcs and
troughcd free roofs for some specific CPSLS for which
asnect ratios and roof slones have been snccificd.
Gwever, while using Tat&i 12 to 17 any &nificant
departure from it should be invest@tcd carefully. No
increase shall bc made for local effects elrept. as
indicated.
e) C URVED RoOl:S --For curved roofs, the
external pressure coefficients shall be as
given in Table 18. Allowance for local
effects shall be made in accordance with
Table 8.
f-1 P I T C H E D A N D S A W - TOOTH ROOFS 01,
M U L T I - S P A N B U I L D I N G S - For pitched
and saw-tooth roofs of multi-span buildings,
the external average pressure coefficients
and pressure concentration coefficients
shall be as given in Tables 19 and 20
respectively, provided that all spans shall
be equal and the height to the eaves shall
not exceed the span.
NOTI. - Evidence on multi-span buildings is fragmen-
tary. Any departure given in Tables 19 and 20 should
be investigated separately.
d PRESSURE COEt’I~ICIENTS ON OVERHANGS
I.ROM ROOFS ~ The pressure coefficients
on the top overhanging portion of the
roofs shall be taken to be the same as that
of the nearest top portion of the non-
overhanging portion of the roofs. The
pressure coefficients for the underside
surface of the overhanging portions shall be
taken as follows and shall be taken as
positive if the overhanging portion is on
the windward side:
1) 1.25, if the overhanging slopes;
2) 1 .O, if the overhanging is horizontal; and
3) 0.75, if the overhanging slopes upwards.
For overhanging portions on sides other
than windward side, the average pressure
coefficients on the adjoining walls may be
used.
h) CYLINDRICAL STRUCTURES - For the
purpose of calculating the wind pressure
distribution around a cylindrical structure
of circular cross-section, the value of
external pressure coefficients given in
Table 21 may be used provided that the
Raynolds numtier is greater than 10 000.
They may be used for wind blowing
normal to the axesof cylinders having axis
23
w-t-
TABLE 8 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS(Cpel FOR PITCHED ROOFS OF RECTANGULAR CLAD
BUILDINGS

T
--
B UILDING H E I G H T ROOF WIND WIND I L~~ALC~EFFICIENT~
RATIO ANGLE ANGLEB ANGLE tq
O0 9o”
mM
EF GH EC FH
t - r
degrees

-0.8 -0.4 -0.8 - 0 . 4 -2.0 -2.0 I _

-0.9 -0.4 -0.8 -0.4 -1.4
-1.2 -0.4 -0.8 -0.6 -1.4
-0.4 -0.4 -0.7 -0.6 -1.0
0 -0.4 -0.7 -0.6 -0.8
+0.3 -0.5 -0.7 -0.6 t-i
+0.7 -0.6 -0.7 -0.6
c
-0.8 -0.6 -1.0 -0.6 -2.0 -2.0 -2.t1 -
-0.9 -0.6 -0.9 -0.6 -2.0 -2.0 -1.2 -1.0
-1.1 -0.6 -0.8 -0.6 -2.0 -2.0 -1.5 -1.2
-m0.7 -0.5 -0.8 -0.6 -1.5 -1.5 _1.! -1.0
-0.2 -0.5 -0.8 -0.8 -1.0 -1.0
+0.2 -0.5 -0.8 -0.8
+0.6 -0.5 -0.8 -0.8

0 -0.7 -0.6 -0.9 -0.7 -2.0 -2.0 -2.t) -

5 -0.7 -0.6 -0.8 -0.8 -2.0 -2.0 -1.2 -1.0
10 -0.7 -0.6 -0.8 -0.8 -2.0 -2.0 -1.: -1.2

L-r-
20 -0.8 -0.6 -0.8 -0.8 -1.5 I -1.5 -l.!i -1.2
30 -1.0 -0.5 -0.8 -0.7 - 1.5
40 -0.2 -0.5 -0.8 -0.7 -1.0
50 +0.2 -0.5 -0.8 -0.7
60 +0.5 -0.5 [- 0 . 8 -0.7 1

NOTE 1 - h is the height to caves or parapet, w is the lesser horizontal dimension of a building.
NOTE 2 - Where no local coefficients are given the overall coefficients apply.

l-----i
KEY PLAN
y;horo.l5w,
whichever is the lesser
 TABLE 9 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS(Cpe) FOR MONOSLOPE ROOFS FOR RECTANGULAR
CLAD BUILDINGS

y = h or 0.15 w, whichever is the lesser.

-L--?b !%TE - Ark Hand area L refer to the whole quadrant.

OVERALL COEFFICIENTS

ROOF 1 WIND ANGLE 6

T T
ANGLE
a O0 4s” 90” 135’ 180°
degree H L H L H&L H L H L

52
.$ .!j
aaE
u!:

5 -1.0 -0.5 -1.0 -0.9 -0.5 -0.9 -1.0 -0.5 -1.0

10 -1.0 -4.5 -1.0 -0.8 -0.5 -0.8 -1.0 -0.4 -1.0
15 -0.9 -0.5 -1.0 -0.7 -0.5 -0.6 -1.0 -0.3 -1.0
20 -0.8 -0.5 -1.0 -0.6 -0.9 -0.5 -0.5 -1.0 -0.2 -1.0
25 -0.7 -0.5 -1.0 -0.6 -0.8 -0.5 -0.3 -0.9 -0.1 -0.9
30 -0.5 -0.5 -1.0 -0.6 -0.8 -0.5 -0.1 -0.6 0 -0.6

1
ROOF
ANGLE LOCAL CO E F F I C I E N T S C,,
-_

Ht H2 Ll L2 H L

-2.0 -1.5 -2.0 .-1.5 -2.0 -2.0

-2.0 -1.5 -2.0 -1.5 -2.0 -2.0
-1.8 -0.9 -1.8 -1.4 -2.0 -2.0
-1.8 -0.8 -1.8 -1.4 -2.0 -2.0
-1.8 -0.7 -0.9 -0.9 -2.0 -2.0
-1.8 -0.5 -0.5 -0.5 -2.0 -2.0
. -

NOTE - k h the hei@ to caves at lower side, I is the grcntet horizontal dimension of.a buildin and w is the lesser
horizontal dimension of a buildi.
 ThBLE 10 PRESSUKE C0WIXII:NT.S FOR FREE STANDING MANOSLOPED ROOFS

Roof angle

2F-i._I l cP

Section

Key plan

Solidif) ratio Muim~m (htg~d +VC) md minimum (brgest de) preslwe mfficimr

‘II I em ISa
0 t 0.2 +05 + I.8 + I.1
5 + 0 4 + 0.8 + 2.1 t 1.3
IO + 0.5 + I.2 t 2.4 + 1.6
All values of
I5 4 + 0.7 + 1.4 + 2.7 + I.8
20 + 0.8 l I.7 + 2.9 1 II

13
25 + I.0 7 2.0 + 3.1 i 2.3
30 + I.2 4 2.2 + 3.2 t 2.4 _ _...
- I.3 - 1.4
0
- I.8 - I.9
- 1.7 - I.8
5 - 2.2 - 2.3 -
4=0 : 0.9 _ I.5 - 2 0 -2.1
IO 4= I - I.1 - ?.I - 2.6 - 2.7
4=0 - I I - I.8 - 2.4 2.5
I5
4= I - I.4 -23 - 2.9 - 3.0
- 2.8 - 2.9
20
- 3.1 - 3.2

T-
- 3.2 - 3.2
25
- 3.5 - 3.5
4=0 1.8 - 3.0 -- 3.8 - 3.6
30
4=l - I.8 - 3.0 - 3.8 -- 3.6

For monopitch canopies the antrt of pft~un Wvuld be taken IO act at 0.3~ from the windward edw.
 TABLE 11 PRESSURE COEFFKIENTS FOR FREE STANDING DOUBLE SLOPED ROOFS
‘kl
Roof angle

+va roof BegIs

Key Wan
Sectton

Solidity ratio Mwimom (largest +ve) and minimum (lugat -vc) prumre radficitnt~
~ ~~-
OWdl
raelTlcics1r
-

0
- 20 + 07 + 0.8 t I.6 + Oh
- IS + 0.5 +ofl + I! + 0.7
- IO + 0.4 + 0.6 * 1.4 + OR
- 5 t 0.3 * OS i I.5 + 0.8
45 All cdues of + 0.3 + 0.6 + I.R ( + I.3
+ IO aJ + 0.4 + 0.7 f I.R * II
+ I5 + 0.4 + 0.9 +I.9 jt II
+ 20 -c 0.6 * I I .v IY : A I.5
+ 25 TO7 + I.2 * 1.9 - I6
+ 30 A 0.9 - 1.3 -t 1.9 1 - I.6
- ___~__
0-0 - 07 09
- 20 : _ 13
aJ= I j - 0 9 j~l.2 -1.7 i - I9
I : ~~ __I_.____~__.___
a=0 - 0.6 i-08 i~1.Z i-l.6 i-06
- I5
a= I j - 0.8 ]-II
) 1.7 / - 1.9 j - !?
@=O - 0.6
- 10
@= I I - 0.8
uJ=o - 0.5
-5
@=I - 0.8
@=O - 0.6
+5
CD= I - 0.9
@=O - 0.7
+ IO
@= I - I.1 - 1.4 -- 2.0 - I8 - 2.4
.--._____
*=o - 0.8 - 0.9 - I 7 - 1.4 - I.8
+ I5
@=I - 1.2 - I.5 - 2.2 - I.9 - 2.8
@=O - 0.9 - 1.2 - I.8 - 1.4 - 2.0
+H)
@=I - 1.3 - 1.7 - 2.3 - I.9 - 3.0
@=O - I.0 -1.4 -1.9 - 1.4 - 2.0
+ 25
@*I - I.4 - I.9 - 2.4 - 2.1 - 3.0
+=0 - 1.0 - 1.4 - 1.9 - 1.4 - 2.0
+30
@=I - 1.4 - 2.1 _ 2.6 - 2.2 - 3.0
L
Ench slope o f I duopitch
minbmmt aW&kntr, l d the who
cmffkimt with the. otbcr
be taken to act nt the centrc of each slope.
 TABLE 12 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (TOP& BOTTOM) FOR PITCHED ROOFS, Q = 30’

fii$$T
I
I
C’&. G' ; h= D5d

b=ld

b- d --+
a = 30°
8 ,= 0’~45’, D, D’, E, E’ full length
0 = 90°,D,D’,E,E’partiengthb’

P R E S S U R E C O E F F I C I E N T S. C,

D D’ E E’ End Surfaces
8
C C’ G G’

0” 0.6 -1.0 -0.5 -0.9

45= 0.1 -0.3 -0.6 -0.3
GO” -0.3 -0.4 -0.3 -0.4 -0.3 0.8 0.3 -0.4
- - - - -
45O For i: Cp top = - 1 .O; C, bottom = -0 2
90” Tangentmlly acting friction: R90° = 0.05 pd.&

2R
VI-l. NAlloKu DullDING coot 0) I?0lA
TABLE 13 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (TOP& BOTTOM) FOR PITCHED FREE ROOFS. a = 30’ WITH
EFFECTS OF TRAIN OR STORED MATERIALS

Tb'= d

1
b=Sd

Q: = 3o”
Effects of trains OI stored materials:
8” = O”-45’,
4 CT 13S”-180°, D , D ’ . E, E’full lehgth
ed S 90”) D. D’ , E, E: part length 6’

-
P R E S S U R E C O EF FICIENTS , cp

D’ E E’ End Surfaces
8 D
C C’ G G’

O0 0.1 -0.7 0.9

45O -0.1 ::58 -0.8 0.5
9$
180° -0.4
-0.3 -0.5
0.6 --0.4 0.4 -0.6 -0.5 -0.3 0.8 0.3 -0.4

90°
4s” Forj:Cptop= - 1 5; Cp bottom = 0.5
Tangentially acting friction: Rgo’ = 0 . 0 5 Pd.&

29
w-1.
 TABLE 14 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (TOP & BOTTOM) FOR PITCHFD FREE ROOFS, Q = 10”

-f
b'=d

0” L --- 1

C
i-----d ------I Q = lo*
0 = 0°-45’,D,D’.E,E’fuUlength
0 = 90°, D, D’ , E, E’ part length b’

.---_ ---.----~.~~~---- _____----- _

P R E S S U R E C O E F F I C I E N T S. Cp,
I I I I

IIt7
D D’ 1 F 1 E’ ] End Surfaces
I9

0
-1.0
4s. -0.3
90° -0.3
-_ - -
For fC top = 1 .O, C’p. bottom = 0 4
Tangen#aBy acting frictton. Rgo3 = 0.1 P&d
1 _..- _-._-__---

30
Hl-
 L

- TABLE 15 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (TOP & BOTTOM) FOR PITCHED FREE ROOFS Q = 10’ WlTU
EFFECTS OF TRAIN OR STORED MATERIALS

a = loo
Effects of trains or stored materials:
8 = O”-45’. 135’-180°, D, D* , E, E’ full length
8 = 90O. D, D’, E. E’ part length b’

I PRETSURE COEFFICIENTS , Cp

8 D P E E’ End Surfaces

C C’ c G’
0” -1.3 0.8 -0.6 0.7
4s” -0.5 0.4 PG.3 0.3
90” -0.3 0 a.3 0
180’ -0.4 -0.3 PO.6 -0.3 -0.4 0.8 0.3 -0.6
,
O0 Forf:CPtop= -1.6;Cpbottom=U.9
o”-180” Tangentmlly acting friction: Rc,~‘= 0.1 P@

rMTn muclwtw- DESIGN-SEXlION I UMDS w.,_31

 TABLE 16 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS FOR TABLE 17 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTSFOR
FOR TROUCHED FREE ROOFS, Of = IO” TROUGHED FREE ROOFS, a = 10, WITH
EFFECTS OF TRAINS OR STORED MATERIALS

t
b/=d

Roof slope LI = lo0

8 = 0*-45’, D. D’ , E, E’ full length
@ = 909, D, D’ , E. E’ part length b’
-tiL_ l----i
Roof Slope Q = 10’
f

Effects of trains or stored materials:

@ = O”-45’. or 135’-180’. D, D’, E, E’ full length
8 = 90°, D, D’ , E, E’ part length b’
PmssuuE C~EFFICIENTS.C~ PRES~URECOEFFICIENTS,C~
6 0. I I I
D D’ E E’

4
0” 0.3 -0.7 0.2 -0.9
45' O -0.2 0.1 -0.3 0,”
45
9o” -0.1 0.1 -0.1 0.1 9o"
MO0
O0 FOI j: Cp top = 0.4; cp b,tton = -1.5
o=-9o” Tangentially acting fnctlon: O0 ForfiCptop= -1.l;Cpbottom=0.9
R90 ' = 0.1 p,,.bd o"-180" Tangentially acting friction:
Rggo= 0.1 pd.ti
I -

32
W-1. N4noNAL DulLDIN CODK OF ImlA
 TABLE 18 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS FOR CURVED ROOFS

(a) Roof Springing from Ground Level

WIND
-

(b) Roof on Elevated Structure

,CENTf?AL HALF(C)
WINDWARD

NOTE - When the wind is blowing

normal to thegable ends, C,, may
be taken as equal to -0.7 for tht-
full width of the roof over a length
THIS LINE TO BE of l/2 from the gable ends and
TREATED AS AN -0.5 for the remaining portion.
EXTENSION OF
VERTICAL SUPPORIS
(c) Doubly Curved Roofs

H h
;- > 0 . 6 a n d 7 >I).6

Values of C, C, and C,

_~...___ -_-_____.
H/I c
0.1 -0.8
0.2 -0.9
0.3 - 1 .o
0.4 -1.1
0.5 -1.2

33
mRtnnaucnmAL DESIGN-SlWflON I LOWS VI-l.
TABLE 19 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS (Cpe) FOR PITCHED ROOFS OF MULTISPAN
BUILDINGS (ALL SPANS EQUAL WITH h > w’

y.h orO.11~
Roof plan whichever is
the lesser
h,= h,=h

WINI) FIRST SPAN FIKST iNTFK OrtiteR 1NIk.H. I:NI) SP A N

A NGLE MF.I~IATI MEI)IATk.
SPAN SPAN
*
e ,
,a
( r
a b c d

degrees
0 ~-0.9 -0.6 .-0.4 -0.3

-1.1 J.I.6 0.4 -0.3 -0.3 --&_I n.3 0.4

-0.7 -0.6 0.4 0.3 0.3 -0.3 -.n 1 - 0.5 h -2.0 -1.5

0.2 -0.6 0.4 -0.3 0.2 -0.3 -0.2 -0.5

+0.3 -0.6 0.6 0.4 -0.2 -r-t.4 -0.2 -0.5

~~~ __~ i
-

Root WINI) I)ISTANCF:

AN(iLI’ ANGLE

degrees dcprrrs
up to 4 5 90 0,X -0.6 -0.2
 TABLE 20 EXTERNALPRESSURECOEFFICIENTSCp,FORSAW-TOOTH ROOFSOFMULTI-SPAN
BUlLDINGS (ALL SPANS EQUAL) WITH h 9 w’

y=h orO.lw
wh!chcvcr is
. .
the,lcsscr

WIND F IRST S PAN FIRSTINTER- OTHERINTER- ENDSPANS LOCAL

ANGLE MEDIATE MEDIATE COEFFICIENT
SPAN SPANS

8 -T-a b C m n

degrees
0 +0.6 -0.7 -0.7 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 -0.3
-2.0 -1.5
180 -0.5 -0.3 -0.3 -0.3 -0.4 -0.6 -0.6 -0.1 -l
J

WIND ANGLE DISTANCE

A
9 t 7
ht hz h,
degrees
90 -0.8 -0.6 -0.2

270 Similarly, but handed

Frictional drag: when wind angle fl = 0’ horizontal forcer due to frictional drag are allowed for in the above
vahJes;

when wind angle 8 = 90” allow for frictional drag in accordance with 4.5.3.1.
NOTE - Evidence on these buildings is fragmentary and any depnttures from the cam g&en should be
investigated separately.
 TABLE 21 EXTERNAL PRESSURE DlSTRlBUTlON COEFFICIENTS AROUND
CYLINDRICAL STRUCTURES

.. ~__ .~.~_
Pos~~loNoF ~KESSUHECOEFFICI~~NT,C~,
PERIYHEKY. (3 h
r \
IN DEGREES h/D = 25 h/D= 7 h/D = I
- -
0 1.0 1.0 I.0
15 0.8 0.8 0.8
30 0.1 0.1
4s -0.9 -::i -0.7
60 -1.9 -1.7 -I .2
75 -2.5 -2.2 - I .6
90 -2.6 -2.2 -1.7
105 1;:; -1.7 -1.2
120 -0.8 -0.7
135 -0.7 -0.6 -0.5
150 -0.6 -0.5 PO.4
165 -0.6 -0.5 -0.5
180 -0.6 -0.5 -0.4

36
W-l- NAlloNAl. IuIlDlNc COOE OF INpA
 normal to the ground plane (that is.
chimneys and silos) and cylinders having
their axis parallel to the ground plane (that
is, horizontal tanks) provided that the
clearance ‘between the tank and the ground
is not less than the diameter of the cylinder.
h is the height of a vertical cylinder or
length of a horizontal cylinder. Where
there is a free flow of air around both ends,
Ir is to be taken as half the length when
calculating h/II ratio.
In the calculation of the resultant load on
the periphery of the cylinder, the value of
fpi shall be taken into account. For open
ended cylinders, Cpi shall be taken as
follows:
1) -0.8, where h/D is not less than 0.3;
and
2) - 0.5, where h/D is less th&I 0.3.
j) ROOl:S A N D B O T T O M 01 CYLINI)KICAL
I-L.L~VATI~D STRL’CTUHL- The external
pressure coefficients for roofs and bottoms
of cylindrical elevated structures shall bc
as given in Table 22 (see also Fig. 2).
The total resultant load (f) acting on the
roof of the structure is given by the
following formula :
P= 0.785 /I* (pi Cp,.Pd)
The resultanf of Y for roofs lies at 0.1 II
from the centre of the roof on the
windward side.
k) COMBIN1.D KOOl:S AND K0Ol.S WITH A SKY
L I G H T - The average external pressure
coefficients for combined roofs and roofs
with a .sky light are shown in Table 73.
m)GKANDSTANDS - The pressure coeffi-
cients on the roof (top and bottom) and
rear wall of a typical grandstand roof,
which is open on three sides, is given in
Table 74. The pressure coefficients ale
valid for a particular ratio of dimensions
as specified in Table 24, but may be used
for deviations‘up to 20 percent. In general,
the maximum wind load occurs, when the
wind is blowing into the open front of the
stand causing positive pressure under the
roof and negative pressure on the roof.
’ n) UPPER SURI:ACF’ 01, KOUND SILOS AND
T ANKS ~~ The pressure coefficients on the
upper surface of round silos and tanks
standing on ground shall be as given in
Fig. 2.
PAIT VI SlllDCnJRAL DESIGN-SIWIION 1 LOADS
p) SPH liRES .- The external pressure coeffi-
cients for spheres shall be as given in
Table 25.
4..5.‘..? INTLRNAL, PRI:SSURE COEI’I-ICIl34TS -
Internal air pressure in a building depends upon
the degree of permeability of the cladding. to
the flow of air. The internal air pressure may be
positive or negative depending on the direction
of flow of air in relation to the openings in
the buildings.
a) In the case of buildings w.here t.he claddings
permit the flow of air with openings not
more than about 5 percent of the wall area
but where there are no large openings. it is
necessary to consider the possibility of the
internal pressure being positive or negative.
Two design conditions shall be examined.
one with an internal pressure coefficient of
HI.2 and another with an internal pressure
coefficient of -0.3.
The internal pressure coefficient isalgebrai-
tally added to the external pressure coeffi-
cient and the analysis, which indicates
greater distress of the member, shall be
adopted. In most situations, a simple
inspection of the sign of the external
pressure will at once indicate the proper
sign of the internal pressure coefficient to
be taken for design.
i%)l I Tbr tCrti1 nornl.ll lwmwbility rclatcs t o th.
11uw of nir conmonly allorded by the rladdinps not
only 1brouFh the open windows snd doors. but 31s)
throupb tbc slit< round the clowd u indcw~ Itnd-door\
Jnd through chimneys, vcntikttork ;tnd through the
jomts bcturcn rwl coverings. tbc to131 olwn xc3
being lrss ihan 5 pcrccnt of fhc ilrc3 (11 the wll\
loving the opcnintzs.
h ) IIUILDINGS WITII M I I)lllM A N D L.AK(;I~
OPI NIN(; s - Buildings with medium and
large openings may also exhibit clther
pc6itivc or negative Internal p r e s s u r e
depending upon the clireclion of wind.
Bulldings with medium openings between
about 5 to 20 percent of wall area shall be
examined for an internal pressure coeffi-
cient of +O.S and later with an internal
pressure coefficient of O.S. and the
analysis which produces greater distress of
the members shall be adopted. Buildings
with large openings. that IS, openings larger
than 20 percent of the wall area shall he
exammed once with an internal prcssule
coefficient of +0.7 and again with an
internal pressure coefficient of -0.7, and
the analysiswhich produces greater distrecc
on the members shall be adopted.
Buildings with one open side or openings
exc_eqding 20 percent of wall area may be
assumed to be subjected to internal posi-
tive pressure or suction similar to thqse
37
vl.1.
 ----
TABLE 22 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEIWCIENTS FOR ROOFS AND BOTTOMS Or:
CYLINDRICAL BUILDINGS

DIRECTION 1
- s-e=OslD
OF WIND CPe

&
I
I
I
‘Pe
(d)
(h) I
I 1

(cl

Cok:bkIcI1;N-r 01; EXTERNAL PKESSURE, C,,

S T R U C T UR E A C C O R D I N G TO SHAPE

a,b&c d

H/D Roof (Z/W- I Roof Bottor

0.5 -0.65 1 .oo -0.75 -0.8

1.00 -1.00 1.25 -0.75 -0.7
2.00 -1.00 1.50 -0.75 -0.6

Total Force Acting on the Roof of the Structure. P = 0.785 Dz (pi -- cwpd)

The mukant of P lies eccentrically, e = O.lD

0.20 <h <30
tona<O-2

PLAN

(For force coefficient corresponding to shell portion see Table 23)

Fig. 2 External Pressure Coefficients on the Upper Roof Surface of Singular Circular
Standing on the Ground

39
WI-
UMDS
 I

TABLE 23 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS, C,,, FOR COMBINED ROOFS AND ROOFS
WITH A SKY Llf%T

a) Combirred Roofs

0 -6 .

04

C‘.2
0 .!3

0
“I_
‘+e
h2

-0 -2
’ hl_,.$
,-Cpc’
b2
4
I1 ’ DIRECTION 1 C/+d 01 RECTION 2

- G.6 I
,
I

VALUES OF C,,
_-
I PORTION D IRECTION 1 D IRECTION :

/al -
From the Diagram -1

cpe = -0.5, hl< 1.5

hz I
-0.4
hl
b Cpe = -0.7, - >I.S
“2

1 c and d 1 SeeTable 5

e See Claw 4.5.2.2(g)

conrinued
 .

TABLE 23 EXTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS. Cpe FOR COMBINED ROOFS AND ROOFS
WITI4 A SKY LIGHT - Conrd.

b) ROOFS WITH A SKY LIGHT

.

WIND

L- -,b, -- &-b2-;

41
?ArrvlslnDcnJmAL DESIGN-SECllOH 1 LOA D S y(l .
 TABLE 24 PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS AT TOP AND BOTTOM ROOF OF GRAND STANDS OPEN
THREE SlDES (ROOF = 5’)
(h:b:l = 0.8 : 1 r2.2)

I
h
FRONT AND BACK OF WALL

8 J- K L M
O0 l .9 -0.5 +0.9 -0.5
45O +0.8 0.6 +0.4 -0.4
13s” -1.1 * +O.6 ml.0 +0.4
___-__-__- -
180° -0.3 +0.9 -0.3 +0.9
L
60’ M,-CpofK=-1.0

Lb4
(Shaded area to scale)

TO? & BOTTOM OF ROOF

_~ 1
A8 B C D E
__--.- ,. ~___~
O0 -1.0 +0.9 -1.0 to.9 -le.7
_~.___ _--..
45O PI.0 +0.1 -0.7 +0.4 -0.5
.~ ~-~-
135O 0.4 I .I -0.7 -1.0 -0.9
1 80° PO.6 -0.3 -0.6 -0.3 -0.6
- -
45O
r--- MH - Cp (top) = - 2.0, __- -.
45O MR - C,, (bottom) = + 1.0

42
w.1. NATIONAL BUllDING CODE OF INDU
TABLE 25 EXTERNAL PRESSURE DlSTRlBUTlON COEFFICIENTS AROUND.SPHERlCAL STRUCTURES

mSlTlON OF ~RIPHERY, c lx I&MARKS

8 IN DEGREES

+1.0 Cf = 0.S for DY, < 7

1:
30
+0.9
+o.s
=0.2 fOrDvd 2 7
45 0.1

60 -0.1
75 -1.1
90 -1.2
105 PI.0
120 0.6
135 m-o.2

150 W.l
165 +0.3
180 +0.4
I._

43
?mnmucnJRu DESIGN-SEllON I LOADS Wl-

for buildings with large openings. A few
examples of buildings with one sided
openings are shown in Fig. 3 indicating
values of internal pressure coefficients
with respect to direction of wind.
c) In buildings with roufs bu! no walls, the
roofs will be subjected to pressure from
both inside and outside, and the recom-
mendations shall be as given in 4.5.2.2.
4.5.3 FORCE C OEFFICIENTS -- ‘The value of
force coefficients apply to a building or struc-
ture as a whole, and when multiplied by the
effectwe frontal area, A, of the building or
structure and by design wind pressure. Pd give
the total wind load on that particular building
or structure.
t.‘- CfAcpd
where F‘ is the force acting in a dircctinn
specified in the respective !ablcs and (‘r is the
force coefficient for the building.
bk_ITI: 1 - The value ot the force coefficient differs
for the wind acting on different faces of a building or
structure. In order to determine the critical load, the
total wind load should be calculated for each wind
direction.
No’1 t-. 2 - If surface design pressure varies with height,
the surface area of the hulldinglstructure may be sub-
drvided s o t h a t specified prcnsurrv a r c taken over
appropriate are3s.
Irh)TE 3 - In tapered buildings/structures, !he force
coctficients shall b e appllcd a f t e r cuhdivldinp tilt
butlding/$tructure i n t o ruitablc number :rf strips and
the I,>ad tin each strip calculated ~nd~r~tlu.~ll~. taklntz
the :irc:l of each strip as /I,.
M)II 1 1.orce coefficients f o r atrucfurz\ n o t
covcled herein, referrnce m3y hr made to specialist
htcr.lture on the subject or adv~<e may be sought from
spcc IJiIsts in the qubiact.
J.?..?.I I KIC‘TIONAL l)KA(; In certain
hulldIngs of special shape. a force due to fric.
tional drag shall be taken unto account, in
sdditlon to those loads speclfled 111 d..?.?. For
rectangular clad buildings. this addition is
d d
necessary only where the ratio or IS gfcarer
h b
than 4. ‘I‘tu i’rictional dreg f o r c e . F’ in the
direction
of the wind plven hy the following
formulae:
The first term in each case gives the drag vn the
roof and the second on the walls. The value of
C; has the following values:
44
L
c; = 0.01 for smooth surfaces without
corrugations or ribs across the wind
direction;
c; = 0.02 for surfaces with corrugations
across the wind direction;
r; = 0.04 for surfaces with ribs across the
wind d/rection.
For other buildings, the frictional drag has been
indicated,
where necessary, in the tables of
pressure coefficients and force coefficients
4 CLAD BCJILDINGS 01: UNIFORM SECTION -
The overall force coefficients for rectangu-
lar clad buildings of uniform section with
flat roofs in uniform flow shall be as given
in Pip. 4 and fol other clad buildings of
unifnrm section (without projections,
except where cjtherwise shown) shall be
as given II\ I able LO.
b) B U I L D I N G S OF CIRCULAR S H A P E S -~
Force coefficients for buildings of circular
cross-section shall be as given in Table 27.
(JN Fig. 5 and Appendix F)
P’orce
c) I OW W A L L S A N D H O A R D I N G S -
coefficients for low walls and hnardings
less than IS m high shall be as given in
Table 27 provided the height shall be
measured from the ground to the top of
the walls or hoarding, ahd provided that
for walls or hoardings above the ground the
clearance between the wall or hoarding and
the ground shall be not less than 0.25 times
the vertical dimension of the wall or hoard-
ing.
To allow for obhyue winds the design shall
alscr be checked for the net pressure norinal
to the surfact’ varying linearly from a
maximum of I .7 c’~ at the up wind edge to
II .44 C-f at the ti~1v11 u 111d etlgt*
The wind toad oil appurtenances and
supports for haardings shall be accounted
f o r separate/v by II<::~? ih? :iPprlJpria!r 1101
 L

...

(a) FOR f <l (b) F O R f >l

W I N D q +&8 4
0

(Arrows indicate direction of wind flow)

c) FOR+ = 1, USE AVERAGE VALUES

Fig. 3 Large Opening in Buildings (Values of Coefficient of Internal Pressure)

(with top closed}

45
Wl-
 - .

PLAN

F = Cf P.j bh
0 05 1.0 l-5 2.0 2.5 30

a
/b----

b) Values of C‘t verses alb for h/h -C I

Fig. 4 Force Coefficients for Rectanp~lar Clad Ruildings in Uniform Hort

46
W-l-
 TABLE 26 FORCE COEFFICIENTS Cf FOR CLAD BUlLDINGS OF UNIFORM SECTION
(ACTING IN THE DIRECTION OF WIND)

_~
PLAN SHAPE vcib cf FOR HEIGHT/BREADTH RA T I O
-- -

1
m2/s
up to 1 2 5 10 20
H
____--- - - - - -_

All surfaces < 6

0.7 U.7 0’ 0.8 (I.9 1.0

Rough or with :1.2

p r o j e c t i o n s >‘ 6
_-_-_- __._

I
-
Smooth >‘6 0.5 0.5 O.! 0.5 (I.5 0.6
(set atso Appendix C)
________----_--.~.--~~~ ~~ - - - - - - -

0.5 0.5 O.! 0.5 (I.6 0.6

-_ -

0.2 0.2 0.: (I.2 0.2 0.2

-

0.8 0.X 0.’ II.1 1.3 1.7

. -

0.8 0.8 0.’ 1 1.1 1.5

-_cd-_ - - _. .

c3 r <4 0.6 0.6 0.c (j.8 1.1D

b/d= 1
r/b = l/3
P4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0 .5 0.5
-

<IO 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 1 .O 1.0 1.3I

- - - - -

310 0.s 0.5 0.5 0.5 0 .6 0.6 0.6,

__--
d-- 1
< 3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0 .3 0.3 0.4i
b/d = 112 -~ - -
r/b = l/2
3.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0 .3 0.3 0.3

_ -

All 0.5 D.5 0.5 0.5 0 .6 0.6 0.7

values

-- -

All 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.1 1 .2 1.5 1.9/

values

- d
~Conrinued)

47
Ml-
 -‘. I

..a

TABLE26 FORCECOEFFICIENTSCfFORCLAD BUILDINGSOF UNIFORM SECTION

(ACTING IN THE DIRECTION OF WIND)- Contd.

PLAN SHAPE vd! cf FOR HEIGHT/BREADTH RA T I O

m2/i up to 2 10 20 m

H
_-

- T All surfaces < 6 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.6
b .
b/d= 2 - - L
r / b = 114
-0 36 0.5 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6
J-
L
-t-f <
-6 J, -
I- d -

-0 4
IO 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.5
r
F/O = l/3
310 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6
va
____~ _ ~__

0.9 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.6

0.9 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.6

r / b =
<
114 -
11 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2
-
311 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5

-~

r / b = l/12 All 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.4

values

-a t
b
-I_
b

I
r/b=

r/b = 114
1148 Au
vnluea

<8
0.7

0.7
0.7

0.7
0.8

0.8
0.9

0.9
1.0

1.0
-
1.1

1.1
-
1.3

1.3
,8 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5

- Lp
48
U-l- NAnomLwuDaNoamKo1aNbu
 TABLE 26 FORCE COEFFICIENTS Cf FOR CLAD BUILDINGS OF UNIFORM SECTION
(ACTING IN THE DIRECTION OF WIND) - mnrd.

- -______
FLAN SH A P E

~--_ Vdb

m=/s up to
1%
cf FOR
-L-

I
HEIGHT/BREADTH RAT I O
.-
2 5 10 20 0
-1
.

B._ ##<r/b
< !/12
AU
values
1.2 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.7 2.1

-ci
-
< 12 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3
12ssided ________ -.-
PdY&Wfl

L-l
312 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.1

d
_

-0
Octagon All i I.0 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.4
values

-0 Hexagon
All
VfllUC!
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3

- -
1.4 1.4

- - -
1.5

MTE - Structures that, because of their size and the design wind velocity, are in the supercritical flow regime
may need further calculation to ensure that the greatest loads do not occur at some wind speed below the
maximum when the flow will be subcritical.
The coefficients are for buildings without projections, except where otherwise shown.
In lhis table Vdb is used as an indication of the airflow regime.

49
?MT Vl SRlJCKMW, DKSICN-SECllON 1 LOADS Ml-
 .

TABLE 27 FORCE COEFFICIENTS FOR LOW WALLS OR HOARDINGS (< 15 m HIGH)

I
,

ABOVE GROUND h.,cmht ONE EDGE ON GROUND

(Wind hormal to face)

WIDTH TOHEIGHT RATIO. b/h I D RAG COEFFICIENT,~~

Wall above ground I Wall on ground

From 0.5 to 6 From 1 to 12 1.2

10 20 1.3
32 1.4
:: 40 1.5
40 80 1.7.’
60 120
80 or more 160 or more : :::
I I
 .
I
1
f
l*L
FOR 3r1#<R,<105, ” El.2
t*22
i 1
1*2. I
I I
l-T-I-----1--6,0, I I-I I I
1-o
I I I I I

t
0.8

c f = ORAG COEFFICIENT
0.2 -
I I ’
----EXTRAPOLATE0
0H I I I 1 . I .
105 2 L 5 6 8 ?06 2 3 L 5 6 8 107 2 3 L 5 6 0 lOa
Re -
Cf
Fig. 5 Variation of - with R, < 3 x lo4 for Circuiar Sections
I +2-E
D
 pressure coefficients. Allowance shall be
made for the shielding effects of one
element or another.
d) SOLID CIRCULAR SHAPES MOUNTED ON A
SURFACE - The force coefficients for
solid circular shapes mounted on a surface
shall be as given in Fig. 6.
4.6 Dynamic Ejfccts
4.6.1 G ENERAL - Flexible slender structures
and structural elements shall be investigated to
ascertain the importance of wind induced
oscillations or excitations along and across the
direction of wind.
In general the following guidelines may be used
for examining the problems of wind induced
oscillations:
a) Buildings and closed structures with a
height to minimum lateral dimension ratio
of more than about 5.0; and
b) Buildings and closed structures whose
natural frequency in the first mode. *is
less than 1 .O HZ.
Any building or structure which does not
satisfy either of the above two criteria shall be
examined for dynamic effects of wind.
NOTE 1 - The fundamental time period (73 may
either be established by experimental observations on
similar buildings or calculated by any rational method
of analysis. In the absence of such data, T may be
determined as foltows for multi-storeyed buildines:
a) For moment resisting frames without bracing or
shear walls for resisting the lateral loads
T=o.ifl
where
n = number of storeys including basement storeys.
b) For all others
7 = 0.09 H
G-
where
H = total height of the main structure of the
building in metres, and
d = maximum base dimension of building in
metres in a direction parallel to the adplied
wind force.
!%T1: 2 - If preliminary studies indicate that wind-
induced oscillations are likely to bestgnificant. investi-
gations should be persued with the aid ol’ analytical
methods or, if necessary, by means of wind tunnel
tests on models.
52
M-l-
NOTE, 3 - Cross wind motions may be due to the
lateral nustiness of the wind. unsteady wake flow (for
exampli , vortex sheddingj. negative aerodynamic
damping or to a combination of these effects. These
cros&wi;ld motions can become critical in the design
of tall building structures.
NOTE 4 - Motions in the direction of the wind
(known also as buffeting) are caused by fluctuating
wind force assdciated with gusts. The excitations
depend on the gust energy available at the resonant
frequency.
hk3TE 5 - The wake shed from an upstream body
may intensify motions in the direction of the wind,
and may also affect crosswind motions.
h&IrTL 6 -- The designer must be aware of the tollow-
ing three forms of wind induced motion which are
characterized by increasing amplitude of oscillation
with increase of wind speed.
il) GALLOPING - Galloping is transverse oscilla-
tions of some structures due to the development
of aerodynamic forces which are in phase with
the motion. It ischaracterized by the progressively
increasing jmplitudc of transverse vibration with
increase of wind speed. The cross-sections which
arc particularly prone to this type of excitation’
include the following:
I) All structures with non-circular cross-sections,
such as triangular. square, polygons, as well as
angles, crosses and T-sections.
2) Twisted cables and cables with ice encrupta.
tions.
b) IFLUTTER - Flutter is unstable oscillatory
motion of a structure due to coupling between
aerodynamic force and the elasticdeformation of
the structure. Perhsos the most common form is
the oscillatory motion due to combined bending
and torsion. Although oscillatory motions iri
each degree of freedom may be damped, insta-
bility can set in due to energy transfer from
one mode of ocscillation to another, and the
structure is seen to execute sustained or divergent
oscillation< with a type of motion which is a
;onrbination of the indivtdual modes of motion.
Such energy tratlsfer takes place when the natural
frequencies of the modes, taken individually,
are close to each other (ratio brintr typically less
than 2.0). f,lutter can set in at wind speedsmuch
less than those required for ckciting the individual
modes of motton. Long span suspension bridge
decks or any member of a structure with large
values of d/f (where d is the depth of a structure
or structural member parallel to wind stream and
I ir the least lateral dnnension of a member) are
prone to low speed flutter. Wind tunnel testing is
requtred to determine critical flutter speeds and
the likely structurJI response. Other types of
flutter arc stngle degree of freedom stall flutter,
lortional ftutter. r’tc.
CJ ‘OVALLING - This walled structures with open
ends’ at one or both ends. such as oil storage
tanks, and natural draught cooling towers, Trr
which the -ratio of the diameter of minimum
lateral dirneitston to the wall thickness is of the
order of 100 ot more, are prone to ovalling
oscillations. Thcsc oscillations are characterized
by periodic radial deformation of the hollow
structure.
NOTE 7 - Buildings and structres that may be
subjected to serious wind excited oscillations require
careful investigation. It is ,to be noted that wind
induced oscillations may occur at wind speeds lower
than the static design wind speed for the location.
NATIONAL BUllDING CODE OF INDIA
SlDE E L E V A T I O N OESCRlQTlON O F S H A P E .
Cf

CIRCULAR DISC 1.2

-IIl

HEMISPHERICAL 1.4
BOWL

HEMISPHERICAL o-4
BOWL

HEMISPHERICAL
SOL ID l-2
/
dii!

0-S FOR VdD e j

SPHERICAL O-2 FOR \bD*'
so1 IO

Fig. 6 Force Coefficients for Solid Shapes Mounted on a Surface

NOT&? 8 - Analytical methods for the response of
dynamic structures to wind loading can be found in
the following publications :
1) Engineering Science Data, Wind Engineering
sub-series (4 volumes), London, ESDU Inter-
national.
2) ‘Wind Engineering in the Eighties’. Construc-
tion Industry Research and Information
Association, 1981. London.
3) ‘Wind Effects on Structures’ by E Simiu and
R . H . Scanlan. John Wiley and Sons, New
York. 1978.
4) Supplement to the National Building Code of
Canada, 1980. NRCC, No. 17724. National
Research Council of Canada, Ottawa. 1980.
5) Wind Forces on Structures by Peter Sachs.
Pergamon Press.
6) Flow Induced Vibration by Robert D. Clevins.
Von Nostrand Reinfold CO .
MTE 9 - In assisting wind loads due to such
dynamic pllenomenonasRalloping, flutter and ovalling,
if the required information is not available either in
the references of Note 8 or other literature, specialist
advice shall be sought, including experiments on
models in wind tunnels.
4.6.2 MOTION D UE TO V ORTEX S H E D D I N G
4.6.2.1 S L E N D E R S T R U C T U R E S - FOr a
structure, the shedding frequency,7 shall be
determined by the following formula :
s”d
where
S = Strouhal number,
vd= design wind velocity, and
b = The breadth of a structure or struc-
tural. members in the horizontal plane
normal to the wind direction.
a) C I R C U L A R S T R U C T U R E S - For struc-
tures circular in cross-section :
S = 0.20 for by, not greater than 7, and
S= 0.25 for bV, greater than 7.
b) R E C T A N G U L A R S T R U C T U R E S ~ For
structures of rectangular cross-section:
S = 0.15 for all values of b V, .
MTt. I - Significant cross wind motions may be
produced by vortex shedding if the natural frequency
of the structure or structural element is equal to the
frequency of Ihe vortex shedding within the range of
expected wind velocities. In such cases, further
analysis sh$uld be carried out on the basis of references
given in Note 8 of 4.6.1.
M)Th: 2 Unlined welded steel chutney stacks and
similar structures are prone to excitation by vortex
bhedding.
54
VI.l-
MTE 3 - Intensification of the‘ effects of periodic
vortex shedding has been reported in cases where two
or more similar structures are located in close
proximity, for example, at less than 206 apart, where
b is the dimension of the structure normal to the wind
MTE 4 - The formulae given in 4.6.2.1. (a) and
4.6.2.1 (h), are _vaIid for infinitely long cylindrical
structures. The value of S decreases slowly as the ratio
of length to maximum transverse width decreases; the
reduction being up to about half the value, if the
structure is only three times higher than its width.
Vortex shedding need not be considered if the ratio of
length to maximum transverse width is less than 2.0.
Factor (GEF) Method
4 . 7 . 1 AP PL I C A T I O N ~ Only the method of
calculating ldad along wind or drag load by
using gust factor method is given in the section
since methods for calculating load across-wind
or other components are not fully matured for
all types of structures. However, it is permissible
for a designer to use gust factor method t6
calculate all components of load on a structure
using any available theory. However, such a
theory must take into accpunt the random
nature of atmospheric wind speed.
NnrE - It may be noted that investigations f o r
various types of wind induced oscillations out lined in
4.6 are in no wa related to the use of ust factor
method given in 4y.7, although study of 4.8.IS n e e d e d
for using gust Fdctor method.
W I N D ~ Use of the
4 . 7 . 2 HO U R L Y M E A N
existing theories of gust factor method require
a knowledge of the maximum of the wind
speeds averaged over one hour at a particular
site. Hourly mean wind speeds at different
heights over different terrains is given in
Table 28.
NoTr;. - It must also be recognized that the ratio of
hourly mean wind (tIMW) to peak gust (PC;) given
In Table 28 may not be obtainable in India since
extreme wind occurs mainly due to cyclones and
thunderstorms, unlike in UK and Canada where the
mechanism is fully developed pressure system. HOW-
ever Table 28 may be followed at present for the
estimation of the hourly mean wind speed till more
reliable values become available.
4.7.2.1 VARIATION OF HOURLY MEAN WIND
S P E E D W I T H. H E I G H T - T h e v a r i a t i o n o f
hourly mean wind speed with height shall be
calculated asfollows:
where
V, = hourly mean wind speed in m/s at
height 2,
Vb = regional basic wind speed in m/s,
(see Fig. l!
kl = probability factor (Table 4),
k, = terrain and height factor
(Table 28), and
k3 = topography factor (Chuse 4.4.3.3).
NATIONAL mJllDlNo cara. OF ININA
 - ~-.-- --- -~___-
TABLE 28 HOURLY MEAN WIND SPEED F,\C;‘OR k2 IN DIFFERENT
TPRRAINS FOR DIFFERENT HElGHTS
(Clause 4.7 2)
Height TEKHAIN
cm) h
( I
Category 1 Category 2 Catepory 3 Category 4

(1) .(2) (3) (4) (5) .

10 0.78 0.67 0.50 0.24

15 0.82 0.72 0.55 0.24
20 0.85 0.75 0.59 0.24
30 0.88 0.79 0.64 0.34
SO 0.93 0.8.5 0.70 0.45
1ou 0.99 0.92 G.79 0.57

150 I.03 0.96 0.84 0.64

200 I .Oh 1.00 0.88 0.68
250 1.08 1.02 0.91 0.72
300 I .OY 1.04 0.93 0.74
350 1.1 1 I .06 0.95 0.77
400 1.12 1.07 0.97 0.79
450 1.13 1 .ua 0.98 0.81
SO0 1.14 1 .n9 rJ.99 0.82
--__.~ ~~~ _._~~ ~~

.#.7..3 A L O N G W I N D L_OAI) - Along w i n d l o a d I = a roughness Factor which is dependent

on a structure on a strip area ( .I,) at any height on the size of the structure in relation
(Z) is given by: to the ground roughness.

The value of ‘gri-’ is given in Fig. 7.

Where
H is a background factor indicating a measure
1.; = a l o n g w i n d l o a d on the struclurc’ at 01 t h e s l o w l y v a r y i n g c o m p o n e n t o f Ihe
a n y h e i g h t i! corresponding to strip fluctuating wind load and is obtained from
area A c, f:ig. 8.

c‘, = force coefficicnl for the b u i l d i n g . Y is a measure oi the resonant corr~po-

nent of the,fluctuating wind load.
A,. = effective frontal area considered for
1. is a measure of the available enecpv in the
the structure at beighl Z.
wind stream at the natural frequency of the
71, = design pressure a t h e i g h t % d u e lo structure (SW Fig. 9 ) .
mean hourly wind obtained as s is size reduction tac!or (HP Fig. 10).
0.6 and
v~(N,+T~*), F is the damping coefficient (as a fraction
peak load of critical damping) of the structure (S E E
c; = gust factor = ~~- ~-- and is given Tahle 29).
by : mean load
r; - - -
G-l +g(.r.
+4)2+7
where
dl B( I
I and is to be accounted only
for buildings less than 75 m
high in terrain category 4 and
for buildings less than 25 m
gr = p e a k f a c t o r defined a s t h e r a t i o o f high in terrain categor;’ 3, and
the expected peak value to the root is to be taken as zero in all
mean value of a fluctuating load, and other cases.

5 5
\4-l-
 ’ \ \i\,
,\; ) \
\I
/
I
J Y
\ ’t \ ‘, \
I’ \\\\/”
/ If \ /I

VALUES OF L,,
 Czh/Lh
Fig. 8 background Factor B
 vh

OS
O-6

o-4
0.3

0.2
v) 0.15

g 0.04
F O-03
5
0 0.02
g 0,
i
: O-01 -
z 0.006.
0~005 . CY b
‘= Clh
0004.
0003 +
@OO2 *

w
Q-1 0.2 . . 2.0

REDUCED
4-o 6-O

FREQUENCY,
10 20

F,-
Cr'P
40 60 100 200 LOO 600

jh

Fig. 1’0 Size Reduction Factor S

59
Ml-
In Fig. 8 and 10. 5. SEISMIC LOAD
CYb Czf, h 5.1 General Principles
h = - a n d F, = ___
Gh Cl 5.1. I Earthquake shocks cause a movement of
ground on which the structure is situated; This
where movement causes the structure to vibrate.The
vibrations may be resolved in any three
C,= lateral correla$on constant which perpendicular directions and the design of
may be taken a$10 in the absence of
precise load data; structures, made safe for the components
more
vibrations in the three directions acting
simultaneously, shall be considered safe unless
c, = longitudinal correlation constant
which may be taken as 12, in the otherwise specifically stated. The predominant
absence of more precise load data: direction of vibration is horizontal.

b = breadth of a structure normal to the

wind stream;
height of a structure;
hourly mean wind speed at height Z:
natural frequency of the structure in
the fundamental mode; and
a measure of turbulence length scale
(see Fig. 7).
TABLE 29 SUGGESTtD VALUES OF
DAMPING COEFFICIENT
5.1.2 T h e vibration intensity of ground’
expected at any bcation depends upon the
magnitude of earthquake, the depth of focus,
the distance from the epicentre and the strata
on which the structure stands. The important
structures shall be designed for ‘the maximum
vibration Intensity expected at the place.
5.1.3 The response of the structure to the
ground vibration is a function of the nature of
foundation soil; materials, form, size and mode
of construction of the structure; and the
duration and the intensity of ground motion.
This section specifies design acceleration for
structures standing on soils which will not
conslderably settle or slide appreciably due to
vibration lasting for a fe’w seconds.
j.1.4’ In the case of structures designed for
horizontal seismic force only it shall be
considered to act in any one direction at a time.
Where both horizontal and vertical seismic
forces are taken Into account, horizontal
force in any one direction at a time may be
consldered simultaneously with the vertical
force as specified in .i. 4.S.

5.1.5 The vertical selsmlc coefficient shall be

considered only in the case of structures in
which stability is a criterion of design or for
overall stability except as otherwise stated in
the relevant clauses.

The peak acceleration along the wind direction 5.1.6 Though the basis for the design of
at the top of the structure is given by tllc different types uf structures is covered in this
following formula: section, it is.not implied that structural analysis
should be made in every case. There might be
cases of less importance and relatively small
structures for which no analysis need be made,
provided certain simple precautions are taken in
the construction. For example, suitably
proportioned diagonal hracmgs in the vertical
pan& of steel and concrete structures add to
where the resistance of frames to withstand earthquake
forces. Similarly, in highly seismic areas,
construction of a type which entails heavy
debiis and consequent loss of lif’e and property,
such as masonry, particularly mud masonry and
Y = mean deflection at the positlon rubble masonry, should be avoided in preference
where the acceleration is required. to conStruction of a type which is known to
60
Vl-l- NATIONAL WILDING CODE OF INDu
withstand seismic effects better, such as 5.4.2.1 Unless otherwise stated, the basic
construction in light weight materials and well seismic coefficients ‘(a,) and seismic zone
braced timber-framed structures. For the factors (F,,) in different zones ihall be taken as
specified features of design and construction of given in Table 30 and Appendices G and H.
earthquake resistant of buildings of conven-
tional types reference may be made to good 5.4.2.2The design seismic forces shall be
practice [VI- l(4)] . computed on the basis of importance of the
structure and its soil-foundation system.
5.2 Assumptions - The following assumptions
shall be made in the earthquake resistant
design of structures: TABLE 30 VALUES OF BASIC SEISMIC COEFFI-
CIENTS AND SElSMlC ZONE FACTORS IN
DIFFERENT ZONES
Earthquake causes impulsive ground
motion which is complex and irregular in (CZauses5.4.2.1, 5.4.2.3and 5.4.5)
character, changing in period and amplitude
each lasting for small duration. Therefore, SL Z O N E M ETHOD
No. No.
resonance of the type. as visualized under
seismic Coefficient Response SpCCtNm
steady state sinusoidal excitations will not Method Method (see
occur as it would need time to build up Basic Horhontal Appendix H)
such amplitudes; and Seismic Coeffi- Seismic Zone I’actor
cient, for Average Accelera-
tion Spectra to be
Earthquake is not likely to occur a0 Used with l,~g. 12. &,
simultaneously with wind or maximum
flood or maximum sea waves. (1) (2) (3) (4)

i) V 0.08 0.40

ii) IV 0.05 0.25

5.3 Permissible Increase in Stresses
Iii) III 0.04 0.20

5.3.1 PER~~ISS~BLE INCREASE IN M A T E R I A L iv) II 0.02 0.10

S TRESSES - Whenever earthquake forces are
conside’red along with other normal design
forces, the permissible stresses in materials, in
the elastic method of design, may be increased
by one-third provided that for steels having a
definite yield stress; for steels without a
definite yield point, the stress will be limited
to 80 percent of the ultimate strength. In case
of limit state design, the appropriate partial
safety factors given in relevant sections shall be
used.
5.3.2 P E R M I S S I B L E I N C R E A S E IN AL
A B L E B EARING P RESSURE OF S For
OILS ~~
permissible increase in allowable bearing pressure
of soils, referenae may be made to Part VI
Structural design, Section 2 Foundations.
v) I 0.0 1 0.05
NOTE I or underground structures and foundations
at 30 m depth or below, the basic seismic cpefficient
may be taken as 0.5 a*; for structures placed between
ground level and 30 m depth, the* basic seismic
coefficient may be linearly interpolated between s
and 0.5 ~0.
The seismic coefficients according to 5.4.2. I for some
important towns and cities are given in Appendix G.
L O W-
5.4.2.3 The design values of horizontal seismic
coefficient, ah in the Seismic Coefficient and
Response Spectrum methods shall be computed
as given by the following expresiions:
a) In seismic coefficient method

5.4 Design Seismic Coefficient for Different

Zones
b) In response spectrum method
44
5.4.1For the purpose of determining the seismic (Y,, =pIF, -
where 8
forces, the country is cla&fied into five zones
as shown in Fig. 1 1.’
fl=a coefficient depending upon the soil-
5.4.2 Depending on the problem, one. of the foundation systems (see 5.4.31,
following two methods may be used for
computing the seismic force: I=a coefficient depending upon the
importance of the structure (see 5.4.4),
a) Seismic coefficient method, and
b) Response spectrum method. l same as existmg Fig. 13

61
PART VI SIRUCIWRAL DESIGN-SlXlldN 1 IBM!? W-l.

a0 = basic horizontal I seismic ccdfficient as
given in Table 30,
Fo=seismic zone fadtor for averag? accelera-
tion spectra as given in Table 30, and
s,
- =average acceleration coefficient as read
g from Fig. 12 for Appropriate natural
period and clamping of the structure.
5.4.3 To take into account the soil-foundation
systems on which the structure is founded, a
factor /3 for various cases is given in Table 3 1.
5.4.4 The importance factor /I) for various
categories of structures shall be as given in
Table 32.
5.4.5 The vertical seismic coefficient where
applicable (see 51.5) may be taken as half of
the horizontal seismic coefficient as indicated
in 5.4.2. In important structures where there is
a possibility of amplification of vertical seismic
coefficient, dynamic analysis is preferable. In
that case F. values in Table 30 should be
multiplied by 0.5.
5.5 Design Live t’oads
5.5.1 For various loading classes as specified in
Table 1, the horizontal earthquake force shall
be calculated for the full dead load and the
percentage of imposed loads a5 given below:
Imposed. Floor Load Percentage of Design
Imposed Load
Up to 3 kN/m’ 25
Above 3 kN/m’ and 50
for garage, light Bnd
heavy
MJOTE 1 - The percentage of imposed load given
above shall also be used for calculating stresses due to
vertical loads for & mbmmg with those due to earfh-
quake forces. Under the carthquakc c.ondition, the
whole frame may bc assumed as loaded with imposed
load escept the roof.
N)TF 2 ~ The proportions of the imposed load
indicated above tor calculatine the hoiizontal seismic
forces arc applicable to averag‘e conditions. Where the
probable lbadr at the time of an earthquake are more
accurately asse$scd. the d e s i g n e r m a y alrer t h e
proportions indicated or ,even replace the entire
imposed ioad proporrlons by the actual assessed load.
62
VI.1.
.
NOTE 3 - If the imposed load is assessed instead of
taking the above proportions for calculating horii’i
earth uake force, only that part of the im osed load
shall %e considered which possesses mass. I!arthquake
force shall not be applied on impact effects.
5.5.2 For calculating the earthquake for& on
roofs, the imposed load may not be considered.
5.6 Design Criteria for Multi-Storeyed Ruildings
The criteria for design o,f multi-storeyed
buildings shall 5e as follows:
a) In case of buildings with floors capable of
providing rigid horizontal diaphragm action,
a separate building or any block of a
building between two separation sections
shall be analyzed as a whole for seismic
forces according to 5.1.4. The total shear
in any horizontal plane shall be distributed
to various elements of lateral forces
resisting system assuming the floors to be
infinitely rigid in the horizontal plane. In
buildings having shear walls together with
frames, the frames shall be designed for at
least 25 percent of the seismic shear.
b) In case of buildings where floors are not
able to provide the diaphragm action as in
(a), the building frames behave indepen-
dently; and may be analyzed frame by
frame with tributory masses for seismic
forces according to 5. I .4.
c) The following methods are recommended
for various categories of buildings in
var’ouS zones’ (see Table on page VI-I- M,
d) Check for drift and ,torsion according to
5.6.3 and 5.6.4 is desirable for all
buildings, being particularly necessary in
cases of buildings greater in height than
40 m.
MTt, I - For buildings having irregular shape and/or
irregular distribution of mass and ,stiffentrs in
horizontal and/or vertical plane it is desirable to carry
out modal analysis usinp response spectrum method
(seealso Note 2 below 5.6.1.1).
NOrt 2 For multi-storeyed buildings. it is assumed
that the storey heights arc more or less uniform
ranging between 2.7 and 3.6 m. In exceptional cases,
where one 6r two-storey heights have to be up to 5 m.
the applicability of the clause is not vitiated.
NATIONAL IIUiIDING CODR OF INDIA
 [Recommended Methods of Analysis (see Cluuse 5.6 c)]
Building Height Seismic Zones Recommended Metlwd

Greater than 40 m Ill, IV and V Detailed dynamic analysis (either

modal analysis or time history
analysis based on expected ground
mot&n- for which special studies
are required). For preliminary
design, modal analysis using res-
ponse specturm method may be
employed

Greater than 90 m I and II Modal analysis using response spec

trum method.

Greater than 40 m and ASS zones Modal analysis using response

up to 90 m spectrum method. Use of seismic
coefficient method permitted for
Zones 1, II and Ill

Lessthan4Om All zones Modal analysis using response

spectrum method. Use of seismic
coefficient method permitted in
all zones
-
TABLE 31 VALUES OF fl FOR DIFFERENT SOIL-FOUNDATION SYSTEMS

K7ause 5.43)

‘I‘YI’E Of SOIL VALUES OF fl FOR

ik MAwiLY ~NSTI-
TUTING THE
F’OUNDATION. )\
’ Piles Passing Piles not Raft Founda- Combined Isolated RCC Well )
Throukh Covered lions of Isolated Footings Founda-
Any Soil. Under col. RCC Foot- Without Tie tions
but Resting (3) ings with Tie Beams or Un-
on Soil Beams reinforced
Type 1 Strip I‘ounda-
tions

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

i) Type I Rock or 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 I.0

Hard suils

ii) Type II Medium 1.0 1.0 1.0 1 .o 1.2 1.2

soils

iii) Type 111 Soft 1.0 1.2 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.5
SOilS

~=a coefficient defining the flexibility of

structure with the increase in number of
5.6.1.1 The base shear vg is given by the storeys depending upon fundamental
following formula : time period T(see Fig. 13).
VE=KCah W ah=design seismic coefficient as defined in
5.4.2.3 (a),
where
W=TotaS dead load + appropriate amount
K =performance factor depending upon the of live load as defined in 5.5, and
structural framing system and brittle-
ness or ductility of construction (see T=fundamental time period of the building
Table 32), in seconds (see Note 1).
64
Hl- wllopuL BullDlK CUDC or IrnlA
 NOTE 1 - no fundamental time period may either
be established by experimental observations onslmilar
buildlqs or ulcufatai .by any rational method of
analysis. In the absence of such data, T may be
determined as follows for multi-storeyed buildings :
a) For moment resisting frames without bracing or
shear walls for resisting the lateral loads
T= 0.1 n
Where
n = number of storeys including basement stoteyr.
d =maximum base dimension of building in
met-es in a direction parallel to the applied
seismic force.
MTE 2 - The above clause shall not apply to the
buildings of the type shown in Fig. 14. For such
buildings, modal analysis shall be carried out.
.

b) For all others

T_ 0.09H
6
where
H= total hclght of the main structure of the
bullding above the ground level inmetres, and

PERlOO IN SEC0105 BUILDING WITH FLEXIBLE

F I R S T STOREV

Fig. 13 C Versus Period BUILDING IN

HILLV A R E A

TABLE 32 VALUES OF IMPORTANCE FACTOR, 1

Fig. 14 Buildings in Which Clause 5.6.1.1
(clause 5.4.4) shall not be Applicable
S TRUCTURE VALUE OF
%. IM~~P;.-;;E 5.6.1.2Distribution of forces along with the
(see Not;) height of the building is given by the following
formula:
(1) (2) (3)
i) Containers of inflammable 2.0
or poimnous gases ‘Of
liqurds
ii) Important service and com- 1.5
munity structures, such
as hospitals; water towers
and tanks; schools; im-
portant power houses;
munumental structures where
emergency buildings like
telephone exchanges and
fire brigade; large assem- Qi =lateral forces at roof or floor I.
bly structures like cine-
mas, assembly halls and
subway stations V H =base shear as worked out in 5.6.1.1;

iii) All others 1.0 Wi =load (dead load + appropriate amount

live load) of the roof or any floor i
(see Note);
NOTE - The values of importance factor, I given in
this table are for guidance. A designer may choose
suitable values depending onthe importance based on
economy, strategy and other considerations. hi =height measured from the base of
- - building to the roof or any floor i; anu
65
rARTvlsmttlcnmAL DESIGN-SECI’ION 1 LOADS Vl-l-
 TABLE 33 VALUES OF PERFORMANCE FACTOR,K
(C&use 5.6.1.1)

SL !~RUCTURALFRAMINGSYSTEM VALUEOF REMARKS

NO. PE;W~U&AN$E

(1) (2) (3) (4)

i) a) Moment resista@ frame with appropriate 1.0 -
ductility details %s given in good practice .
[VI-(s)] in reinforced concrete or steel

b) Frame as above withR.C. shear walls or
steel bracing members designed for
ductility
i;) a ) l-tame as in (i) (a) with either steel
bracing members or plain or nominally
reinforced concrete infiil panels
b) Frame as in (i) (a) in combination with
masonry infills
1.0 These factors will apply only if the
steel bracing members and the infill
panels are taken into tinsidantkm
in stiffness as well lateralstrength
1.3 calculations provided that the
frame acting alone will be able tb
resist at least 25 percent of the
design seismic forces
1.6
1

iii) Reinforced concrete framed buildings [Not 1.6 -

covered by (i) or (ii) above)

n =number of storeys including the base- VB = cah(w, + 9Wr)

ment floors, where the basement
walls arc not connected with grodnd Qi = Vg “”
floor deck or the basement walls are r-n
not fitted between building columns, c wi4
but excluding the basement floors 1-I
where they are so connected.
MITF - In calculating. Wi. the weight of walls and
Vj= ‘5Qi
columns m any storey is assumed to be shared half and 1-j
half between the roof or floor at top and the floor or
ground at bottom. and all weights are,assumed to be where
lumped at the levei of the roof or any floor i. Vj =shear in jth storey.
5.6.1.SThe force and shear distributions for a NOTE - For other notations, ser X6.1.1 and X6.1.2.
ten-storeyed building are illustrated in Fig. 15.
Example: 5.6.2 MODAL A NALYSIS - The load acting
at any floor level i due to the mode of vibrating
For a ten-storeyed building in Fig. 15 : Qi(rl is given by the following equation:
i-7

Fig. 1.5 Force and Shear Distrtbution for Ten-Storeyed Building

66
w-1. NMloNu wmDlNG caw 01 mm

where
K =sameasdefiiedin 5.6.1.1,
W, -weight of the floor i as given in 561.2,
=mode shape coefficient obtained from
free vibration analysis at floor i,
G =mode participation factor,
oh =design horizuntal seisnuc coefficient
as defined in 5.4.2.3 (b), and
r =reptesents rrh mode.
5.6.2.Z The mode participation factor C, may
be given by’the following equation:
i-n
C Wi #i(l)
c,
where
$ rjd. f i(‘) same as defined in 5.62.
= total number of storeys as defined
in 5.6.1.1.
5.6.2.2 The shear force, Vi, acting in floor level
t, may be obtained as follows:
where
Vi = absolute value of maximum shear at
the ith storey in the rth mode; the
value of 7 shall be as given below:
Hefght, H Y 5.8.3 For industrial structures and frame
@I
Upto 20 0.40
40 0.60
0.80
z 1.00
NOTE - For intennediatr heights of buMWs, value
of rrnay be obtained by linear interpolation.
5.6.2.3The total’load at Q, and Qi acting at
roof level n and floor level i will be computed
from the following equations respectively:
Qn = Vn
Qi =vi- I$+1
The overturning moments at various levels of
the building may be computed by using the
aboye roof and floor level forces.
5.63 D~lpr - The maximum horizontal
rehftive displacement due to earthquake forces
between two successive floors shall not exceed
OEfitErs the difference in levels between
.
5.6.4 TORSION OF B UILDINGS - Provision
shall be made for the increase in shear resulting
MRn8ntmt&u DIuQluDcnONluMw
from the horizontal torsion due to an
eccentricity between the centre of mass aud the
ccntre of rigidity. The design eccentricitv shall
be taken as 1 5 times the computed ecccntr;city
between the centre of mass and the centre of
rigidity. Negative torsional shears shall be
neglected.
5 . 7 Type ot’ Construcrion - F o r d i f f e r e n t
types of construction adopted, the construc-
tional details and the appropriate design criteria
to be adopted shall be in accordance with good
practice [W-1(4)].
5.8 Miscellaneous
‘58.1 Towers, tanks, parapets, smoke stacks,
chimneys and other vertical cantilever
projections Atached to buildings and projecting
above the roofs shall be designed for five times
*the horizontal seismic coefficient specified in
5.4.2.1. However, compound walls need not be
designed for increased seismic coefficient
except where the environmental circumstances
indicate that their collapse may lead to serious
consequences.
5.8.2 All horizontal projections like cornices
and balconies shall be designed to resist a
vertical force equal to five ttmes the vertical
seismic coefficient specified in 5.4.5 multiplied
by the weight of the projection.
NDTE - The increased seismic coefficients specitied
in 5.811 and 5.8.2 are for designing the projecting part
and its connection with the main structure. For the
design of the main stiucture such increase need not
be considered
structures of large spans and heights, modal
analysis using response spectrum method is
recommended.
5.9. Elevated Structures
5.3.1 GENERAL
5.9.1. I The elevated structures covered by these
provisions include elevated tanks, refinery
vessels and stacklike structures, such as
chimneys of normal proportions that are not
covered under 5.8. In the case of the elevated
structures of unusual proportions, more
detailed studies shall be made.
59.2 EL E V A T E D TOWER-SUPPORTFD
TANKS
5.9.2.1 For the purpose of this analysis,
elevated tanks shall be regarded as systems with
a single degree of freedom with their mass
concentrated at their centres of gravity.
5.9.2.2 The damping in the system may be
assumed as 2 percent of the critical for steel
67
W-l-
structures and 5 percent of the critical for
concrete (including masonry) structures.
5.9.2.3 The free period T, in seconds, of such
structures shall be calculated from the following
formula:
quakes are considerably less in magnitude as
compared to impulsive pressures and its effect
is a sloshing of the water surface. For the
purpose of design only the impulsive pressure
may be considered.
4 RECTANGULAR C0NTAINER
The pressure at any location x (fee Fig. 16)
is given by:

where
A = the static horizontal deflection at
the top of the tank under a static
horizontal force equal to a weight
W acting at the centre of gravity of The pressure on the wall would be:
tank. In calculating the period of
steel tanks, the members may be
assumed to be pinjoined with only
the tenslle members of the bracing
regarded as active in carrying the
loads. No pretension shall be The pressure on the bottom of the tank
assumed in the bracing rods; and would be:
8= acceleration due to gravity.

5.9.2.4 The design shall be worked out .both pb= ahwh fi

when the tank is full and when empty. When 2
empty, the weight w used in the design (see
5.9.2.3) shall consist of the dead load of the
tank and one-third the weight of the staging. where
When full, the weight ‘of contents is to be
added to the weight under empty condition.
x,y,l and h are as defined in Fig. 16 and w
is the Unit Weight of water, and oh for
5.9.2.5 Using the period T as calculated tanks located on towers is to be taken as
in 5.9.2.3 and appropriate damping, the given by response spectrum method and
spectral acceleration shall be read off from the for those located
average acceleration spectra given in Fig. 12. . . on ground correspond-
coefficient method
The design seismic coefficient, oh shall be $e 5.‘,P2.355?
calculated as in 5.423 (b).
b) CIRCULAR CONTAINER - The pressure
5.9.2.6 The lateral force shall be taken equal on the wall would be:
to:

where
oh = design seismic coefficient as given The pressure on the bottom of the tank on a
in 5.9.2.5, and strip of width- 2/r (see Fig. 16). would be:
b.1 = weight as defined in 5.9.2.4.

This force shall be assumed to be applied at the

centre of gravity of the tank. horizontallyin the
plane in which the structure is assumed to
oscillate .for purposes of carrying out the lateral
load analysis.

5.9.2. PHYDRODYNAMIC PRESSURE IN TANKS- where

When a tank,containing fluid vibrates the fluid
exerts impulsive and convective pressures on x, y, 1’ and h are as defined in Fig. 16 and
the tank. The convective pressures during earth- l w and oh are as defined& (a).
48
W-l- NAnouu mJnDlNG coot 01 MM*
 F”1
5.10 Stackljke Structures

5.10. I Stadcliie structures are those in which

tzzl
the mass and stiffnem is more or kss uniformly
distributed along the height. Cantilever
structures like chimneys and refinery vessels are
examples of such structures (see Note).

NOTE - Such structures will not include structures

like refinery columns resting on frames. bins and RECTANGULAR TANK (PLAN)
kypcrbotic cooling towers. Modal analysib will be
necessary in such cases.

510.2 Period of free vibration, T, of such

structures,whenfmed at base, shall be calculated
from the following formula:

where
c, = coefficient depending upon the
slenderness ratio of the structure
given in Table 34,
wt = total weight of structure inchuliig
weight of lining and contents above CIRCIJLAR’ T4NK (PLAN)
the base,
h’ = height of structures above’ the base,
E; = modulus of elasticity of material of
the structural shell,
A = area of cross-section at the base of
the structural shell, and
g = accckration due to gravity.

E LE VAT ION
TABLE 34 VALUES OF ct AND tv
(Clauses 5.10.2 and 5.10.6) Ftg. 16 Rectangukrr and CLYrcubr Water Tank8
RATIO
k
1; 14.4 1.02
5.10.4 The design shear forot V, for such
structures at a distancex’ from the top, shall be
15 ZE i*t; calcukted by the following formula :
ii 41.2 30.4 1:25 1.30
3: 65.0 56.0 1.39 1.35

t: 73.8 82.8 1.43 1.47

50 or more 1.8k 1.50

where
where

k = ratio, h’fr,: and c,= coefficient depending on sknder-

r, = radius of gyration of the structural sbeli at
the base section.
5.10.3 Using the period T, as indicated
in 510.2, the horizontal seismic coefficient
ah shall be obtained from the spectrum given
in Fig, 12 and as in5.4.2.3 (b).
nest ratio k given in Tabk 34,
q,= design horizontal teismic coeffident
deter&red in accordance with
s.Io.J,and
w, and h’ are same as defined in 5.10.2.
5.10.5 The design bending mement, M, at a
distance x’ from top shall be calculated by the
following formula :
49
Hl-

h= height of centre of gravity of
structure above base. Other notations
are the same as given in 5.10.2 and
5.10.4.
6. SNOW LOAD
6.1 This clause deals with snow loads on roofs
of buildings. Roofs should be designed for the
actual load due to snow or for the imposed
loads specified in Part 2 Imposed loads, which-
ever is more severe.
NOTE - Mountainous regions in northern parts of
India are subjected to snow fall.
In India, part of Jammu and Kashmir (Baramulah
District. Srinagar District, Anantnag District and
Ladakh District); Punjab and Himachal, Pradesh
Chamba. Kulu. Kinnaur District. Maham District.
kiandi District, Sinnur District and Shnla District);
and Uttar Pradesh (Debra Dun District, Tehri Garhwil
District, Almora District and Nainital District?
experience snow fall of varying depths two to three
times in a year.
6.2 Notations
(Dimensionless) - Nominal values of
the shape coefficients, taking into
account snow drift, sliding snow, etc,
with subscripts, if necessary.
Ii (metres) - Horizontal dimension with
numerical subscripts, if necessary.
ht (metres) - Vertical dimensions with
numerical subscripts, if necessary.
fli (degrees) - Roof slope.
so y;s~ca;] - Snow load on ground.
$i S - Snow load on roofs.
6.3 Snow Load in Roof(s)
6.3. I The minimum design snow load on a roof
area or any other area above ground which is
subjected to snow accumulation is obtained by
multiplying the snow load on ground, s,, by the
shape coefficient p, ,’ as applicable to the
particular roof area considered:
s= psa
where
s = design snow load in Pa on plan area
of roof,
u = shape coefficient (see 5.4), a n d
so1 ground snow lord in Pa (1 Pa-l N/m’)
NOTE - Ground snow load at any place depends on
the crltlal combination of the maximum depth of
undisturbed aggregate curnulatlve snow fall and its
Hl-70
average density. In’duc course the characteristic snow
load on ground for different regions will bc included
based on studier Till such time the users of this
code are advised to contact either Snow and
Avalanches Study Establishment Wefence Research
and Development Organization), Manali (HP) or
Indian Meteorolo;ricaJ Department. UhfD). rune in
the absence of any specitic information for any
location.
6.4 Shope Coefficients
6.41 G E N E RA L PRINCI P LES ~ In perfectly
calm weather, falling snow would cover roofs
and the ground with a uniform blanket of
snow, and. the design snow load could be
considered as a uniformly distributed load:
Truly uniform loading conditions, however, ?re
rare and have usually only been observed in
areas that are sheltered on all sides by high
trees, buildings, etc. In such a case, the shape
coefficient would be equal to unity.
In most regions, snow-falls are accompanied or
followed tiy winds. The winds will redistribute
the snow, and on some roofs, especially multi-
level roofs, ,the accumulated drift load may
reach a murtiple of the ground load. Roof,
which are sheltered by other buildings,
vegetation, etc, may collect more snow load
than the ground level. The phenomenon is of
the same nature as that illustrated for multilevel
roofs in 6.4.2.4.
So far sufficient data are not available to
determine the shape coefficient on a statistical
basis. Therefore, a nominal value is given.
A representative sample of roofs is shown
in 6.4.2. However, in special cases such as strip
loading, cleaning of the roof periodically by
deliberate heating of the roof, etc, have to be
treated separately.
The distribution of snow in the direction
parallel to the caves is assumed to be uniform.
6.4.2 (see p. 71 to 75)
6.4.3 SH A P E C O E F F I C I E N T S I N A R E A S
E XPOSED TO W IND - The shape coefficients
given in 6.4.2 and Appendix J may be reduced
by 15 percent, provided the designer has
demonstrated that the following conditions are
fulfilled :
The building is located in an exposed
location such as open level terrain with
only scattered buildings, trees or other
obstructions so that the roof is exposed to
the winds on all sides and is not likely to
become shielded in the future by obstruc-
tions higher than the roof within a distance
from the building equal to ten times the
height of the obstruction above the roof
level; and
6.4.2 Shape Coeftlcients for SelectedTjjes of Roots
6.4.2.1 Simple Flat and Simple Pitched Roofs
Monopitch Roofs (Positive Roof Slope)*

p, = 0.8

6.4.2.2 Simple or Multiple Pitched Roofs Two-Sp;;no;; Multispan

(Negative Roof Slope)
I 1

I
o’< pc d

3t+6(
t-

L- p>SO’
d

*For arymmctrica! simple Pitched roofs. each ride of ‘tbc roof shall be treated as one half of correspoadi~
symmetrical roofs.
71
WIT VI SlRu(TIvItAL DIBIGN-SiWl-lON I WADS W.1.
 6 .

6.4.2.3 Simple Curved Roofs

The following cases 1 and 2 must be examined:

t
CASE 2

Restriction:
Pm c 2.3
N==Oif@>W

72
W-l-
 6.4.2.4 hhitilevei Roofs*

PI = 0.8

P, = IlS LIW
where
113 - due to sliding
/fu = due to wind
1, = Yrt but IS restricted as follows:
5m<I,< I5m
I,+/, kh
L&n! =-7< ~
so
with the restriction 0.8 L jr,, < 4’0

where
h is in metrcs
SO is in kilopaxals ( kilonewtons per square metce )
h = 2 kN,‘m*
h z 15” : I,, is determined from an additional load amounting to 50 percent of the maximum tot;ll load on the
adjacent slope of the upper roof;. and IS distributed linearly as shown on the figure.
l?#< 15O:fls = 0

*A more extensive formula for jrr is described in Appendix A.

tlf 1, < I,. the coefficient /A is determined by interpolation between or, and or-.
fThc load on the upper roof is calculated according to 6.4.2.1 or 6.4.2.2.

73
?ARl 11 SlRL!CWRAL DESIGN--SUTIOS I LOADS VI-l-
6.4.2.5 Complex Multilevel Roofs
.

1, - 2rh,: 1, - 26,: p, = 0’8

RUtliCtioll:
5 m < Is < 15 m;
Sm<b<lsm;
CII and Cw ( Irr + h h w a@latcd according to 6.4.11.6.4.2.2 and 6.4.2.4.

74
W-l-
6.4.2.6 Roofs with Local Projections and Obstructions

& is in mates
jO ir in kilopascds (kiloncwtons per S$BR met@
k - 2 kN/m’
PI - 0’8
I - M
Restrictiin5:
0’8 < k < 2.0
Sm<I< ISm

7 / Tlns c l a u s e g i v e s guiclallce o n loads a n d
l o a d eftecls due tt) tcmpclature c h a n g e s , so11
and hydrostatic pt’essures. mrernally generating
s t r e s s e s (due IO c r e e p , shrmkage. d i f f e r e n t i a l
s e t t l e m e n t . ctc ). acctdental l o a d s . etc, 10. b e
considered in the design of buildings as appro-
priate. This clause also includes guidance on
l o a d comhinaflons. The nature ot l o a d s t o be
c o n s i d e r e d 1’01 a particular situation 15 10 h e
b a s e d o n cngineermg ludgement (SW U/VI -3 6).
7.2 7’crirpcrururc~ I:/~cY~~v
7 ? / kxpansion and contraction due to changes
In t e m p e r a t u r e of the materials 0I’ a sf~ucture
shall be considered m destgn. Provision shall be
made either to relieve the stress hy the provlslon
of expansion/contraction joints m a c c o r d a n c e
w i t h g o o d p r a c t i c e [Vi-S(5)] o r d e s i g n t h e
s t r u c t u r e to c a r r y a d d i t i o n a l slrcsscs due to
t e m p e r a t u r e e f f e c t s a s sppropi tare t o t h e
problem
7.3. I. I Tile temperature range varies f o r
different regions and under different dlurmal
and seasonal conditions. The absolute
maximum and nunimum temperature which
m a y b e e x p e c t e d i n d i f f e r e n t localities In t h e
c o u n t r y a r e i n d i c a t e d m Appendix A a n d
Appendix B of Part VI Section 6 respectively.
T h e s e f i g u r e s m a y b e u s e d f o r g u i d a n c e II~
assessing the maximum varlatmns of tempera-
ture.
‘2. l.2 T h e t e m p e r a t u r e , indicaled are the a i r
temperatures in t h e s h a d e . T h e rang? of
variation In t e m p e r a t u r e o f t h e b u i l d i n g
m a t e r i a l s may be appreciably greater or less
than the variation of air temperature and is
influenced by the condition of exposure and
the rate at which the materials composing
the structure absorb or radiate heat. This
76
W-l-
d i f f e r e n c e i n temperafure varlatrons o f t h e
material and air should he given due constdeld-
tion.
1, j.3 T h e strucrural a n a l y s i s nlust take
/._.
account of changes of the mean (thr.ough the
section) temperature in relation to the initial
temperaturC(sf) and the temperature gradient
through the section.
a) It should be borne III mind that the changes
o f m e a n t e m p e r a t u r e i n relation to t h e
initial, are liable to differ as between one
structural element and another in buildings
or structures. ;IS for example, between the
external walls and the inlernal elements of
a building. The distribution of temperature
t h r o u g h .seclion of s i n g l e - l e a f s t r u c t u r a l
e l e m e n t s n~ay be assumed linear for the
purpose of analyzes.
b ) T h e effect (II m e a n remperature c h a n g e s
t,, a n d I?. and the temperature gradients
i*L a n d P: In the Ilot a n d c.Y~IcI ~rasons f o r
single-leal s t r u c t u r a l elenients s h a l l b e
evaluated on the basis of analytical
principles.
; f I In tt1c dqql of5tructriles 01‘ p a r t s o r
srructures b e l o w g r o u n d Icvcl such 3s rctallllng
w a l l s a n d o t h e r w a l l s II> haselnent f l o o r s . the
p r e s s u r e e x e r t e d by the soil 01 ware1 or bolh
s h a l l b e d u l y a c c o u n t e d for on the basis 01
e s t a b l i s h e d theories. Due allowance shall he
made f01 possible surcharge from stationary or
movmg loads. When a p o r t i o n or whole of‘ the
s o i l IS below the free wafer sur-face, the lateral
e a r t h pIessure shall bc evaluated for weight of
,c)il dlmmlshed b y b u o y a n c y and t h e f u l l
hydrostatic pressure.
: 3. I. I AIL foundation slabs and other footings
sublected to water pressure shall be designed tcr
resist a uniformly dlstrlhuted LIplift equal to th(
t’ull h y d r o s t a t i c p r e s s u r e . (‘ticcklng of over.
turnrng of foundation under s u b m e r g e d
condition sllall b e d o n e corlsiderrng huoyarl t
weight of f o u n d a t i o n
7 .?.I While determining the lateral soil pressure
on c o l u m n l i k e s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s \uch a s
NATIONAL ~rnLDlm; CODE OF IhTm
pillars which rest in sloping soils, the width of
the member shall be taken as follows (WC Fig.
17):
Ratio oJ’ EJJktiw
Widrh to Actuul
Width
Less than 0.5 ni 3.0
Beyond 0.5 111 :~ntl 3.0 to 1.0
up to I Ill
Beyond I m _ 2.0
The relieving pressure of soil in I’ront of the
structural member concerned may generally not
be taken into account.
-f
L
2b TO 3b
Fig. 17 Sketch Showing .5[Tectitie Width 41
Pillar for Calculating Soil Pressure
7.3.3 Safe-guarding of structures and structural
members against overturning and horizontal
sliding shall be verified. Imposed loads having
favourable effect shall be disregarded for the
purpose. Due consideration shall be given to the
possibility of soil being permanently or
temporarily removed.
7.4 Fatigue
7.4.1 GENERAL - Fatigue cracks are usually
initiated at points of high stress concentration.
These stress conct?ntrations may be caused by
or associated with holes (such as bolt or rivet
holes in steel structures), welds includingstray
or fusions in steel structures, defects in
materials. and local and general changes in
geometry of members. The cracks usually
propagate, if loading is continuous.
where there is such loading cycles. sudden
changesof shape of a member or part of a
member, especially in regions of tensile stress
and/or local secondary bending, shall be
avoided. Suitable steps shall be taken to avoid
critical vibtations due to wind and other causks.
?fl VI SIWMTlJRAL DESlCN..SeCnON I UlADS
7.4.2 Where necessary, permissible stresses shall
be reduced to allow for the effects of fatigue
Allowance for fatigue shall be made F-s
combinations of stresses due to dead load 7:‘
imposed load. Stresses due to wind and ear’
quakes may be ignored when fatigue is beirle
considered, unless otherwise specified inrelev3r.r
codes of practice.
Each element of the structure shall be designed
for the number of stress cycles of each
magnitude to which it is estimated that the
element is liable to be subjected during the
expected life of the structure. The rjurnber of
cycles of each magnitude shall be estimated in
the light of available date regarding the probable
frequency of occurrence of each type of loading.
NW1,. - A p a r t from the general obscrvlltions mndc
hcrcin, the section is unable to provide an)’ precise
guidance in estimating the probabilistic behaviour and
rqonsc of structures of variou* tvpes aricme out ot
rcpctitivc loading alqxoachin,(7 f,ltiguc condition< i n
structural tncmbers,loint~. materials. et;.
7..5 Stmcrurcl Suji,fj, lhrittg Cottstruction
7.5.1 All loads required to be carried by the
structures or any part of it due to storage or
positioning of construction materials and
ercetion equipment ir&luding all loads due to
operation ofsuch equipment, shall be considered
as erection loads. Proper provision shall be
made, including temporary bracings ,to take
care of all stresses due ,to erection loads. T!le
structure as a whole and all parts of structure in
conjunction with the temporary bracings shall
be capable of sustaining these erection loads,
without exceeding the permissible stresses
specified in respective codes of practice. Dead
load. wind load and such parts of imposed load,
as<.yould be imposed on the structure during
the period of erection,shall be taken as acting
together with erection loads.
7. h .A cd(wt~l I.O~S -- T h e o c c u r r e n c e of
which, with a significant value, is unlikely on;1
given structure over the period of time under
consideration, and also in most cases. is of short
duration. The occurrence of an accidental load
could, in many cases. be expected to ca;ise
severe consequences, unless special measures arc-
taken.
The accidental loads arising out of human
action include the following:
a) Impacts and collisions,
b) Explosions, and
c) Fire.
Characteristic of the above stated loads are that
they are not a consequence of no-mai use arc!
that they are undesired, and that extensive
efforts are made to avoid them. As a result. the
probability of occurrence of an accidental toad
is small whereas the consequences may be
severe.
The causes of accidental loads may be:
a) inadequate safety of equipment (due to
poor design or poor maintenance); and
b) wrong operatidR (due to insufficient
teaching or training, indisposition, negli-
gence or unfavourable external circum-
stances).
In most cases, accidental loads only develop
under a combination of several unfavourable
occurrence. In practical applications, it may be
necessary to neglect the most unlikely loads.
The probability of occurrence of accidental
toads, which are neglected, may differ for
different consequences of a possible failure. A
data base for a detailed calculation of the
probability will seldom be available.
NOTI .-- Lkterr~titrariu~r of ,1ccxlcrrral I.oaJs T y p e s
a n d maenitudc 01’ a c c i d e n t a l loadr s h o u l d nreferablv
b c bas;d o n a r i s k analy~~x. T h e a n a l y s i s shoulh
comider a l l f a c t o r s influencing the magnitude o f t h e
a c t i o n . i n c l u d i n g prevcntivc mcamrcs f o r a c c i d e n t a l
s i t u a t i o n s . G e n e r a l l y . onl! the principal load bcarinl:
s y s t e m need be designed for relevant ultimate l i m i t
Ftatcs.
7.6.1 IMPACTS AND COLLISIONS
7.6.1.1 G E N E R AL - During an impact, the
kinetic impact energy has to be absorbed by the
vehicle hitting the structureand by the structure
itself. In an accurate analysis, the probability of
occurrence of an impact with a certain energy
and the deformation characteristics of the
object hitting the structure and the structure
itself at the actual place must be considered.
Impact energies for dropped objects should be
based on the actual loading capacity Bnd lifting
height.
Common sources of impact are:
a) vehicles;
b) dropped objects from cranes. fork lifts,
etc;
c) cranes out of control, crane failures; and
d) flying fragments.
The codat requirements regarding impact from
vehicles and cranes are given in 7.6. I.? and
7.6. I..?.
7.6. I.2 COLLISIONS HL:TWEI:N VEHICLKS ANI)
STRUCI+JRAL ELLMENTS - In road t r a f f i c .
the requirement that a structure shall be able to
resist collision may be assumed to be fulfiMed
78
W-l-
if it is demonstrated that the structural element
is able to stop a fictitious vehicle, as described
below. It is assumed that the vehicle strikes
the structural element at a height of 1.2 m in
any possible direction and at a speed of 10 m/s
(36 km/h).
The fictitidtis-.vehicle shall be considered to
consist of two masses VI, and tn2 which, during
compression of the vehicle, produce an impact
force increasing uniformly from zero, corres-
ponding to the rigidities Cl and C2. It is
assumed that the mass ~1, is broken completely
before the breaking of mass m2 begins.
7 he following numerical values should be used:
III , = 400 kg. c, = lOOOOkN/m,
the vehicle is compressed.
111 2 = 12 000 kg, C2 = 300 kN/m,
is compressed.
the vehicle
No I I lhc de<cribcd fictitious collision corresponds
in the cd9e o f a n o n e l a s t i c s t r u c t u r a l e l e m e n t t o a
maximum static force of 630 kN for the mass t?tt a n d
600 kN for the mass 1112 irrespective of the elasticity,
it will therrforc bs on- t h e s a f e s i d e t o a s s u m e t h e
htltic force to bc 630 kN.
In addition. breaking of the mass rn, will result
in an impact wave, the effect of which will
depend, to a great extent, on the kind of
structural element c’oncerned. Consequently, it
wilt not always be sufficient to design for the
static force.
7.0.1.3S~i I.TY R A I L I N GS - With regard to
safety. railings put up to protect structures
against collision due to road traffic, it should be
shown that the railings are able to resist the
impact as described in 7.6.1.2.
N~)I.I. - Whcn’a vehicle collides with safety railings,
IIIC kmctic energ)’ of the v e h i c l e w i l l b e a b s o r b e d
p;lrtl) by the deformation of the railings and partly by
the deformation of the vrhiclc. The part of the kinetic
energy w h i c h the radinss s h o u l d b e a b l e t o a b s o r b
\(ithout brcahlng do\\ n m a y b e d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e
b a s i s of the JWIW~ rigidity o f t h e v e h i c l e d u r i n g
comprcision.
7.6.1.4 C R A N E I M P A C T L O A D O N BUFFER
STOP- The basic horizontal load PY (tonnes),
acting along the crane track produced by
impact of the crane on the buffer stop, is
calculated by the following formula:
P, = MV=/f
where
!’ = speed at which the crane istravelling
at the moment of impact (assumed
equal to half the nominal value)
(m/s):
 t h e maxImum shortening of the h) Internal dust explosions:
bUtf’Gr. 3wfned equal t o 0 . I m f o r
tight duly. m e d i u m - d u t y a n d heavy- C) Boiler faitule:
d u t y c r a n e s wlrh f l e x i b l e t o a d
s u s p e n s i o n altd toadmg capacity not d) F%tcrnal gas cloud exploslons;and
exceedmg 50 t. a n d 0 . 2 m i n e v e r y
other cranes; t’) Extclnat e x p l o s i o n s o f h i g h e x p l o s i v e s
( T N T . dynamlre).
/Ii = t h e reducctl crane m.~ss. (r 5’ III).
and IS obtained by the formula I t1c denial ~cquircmcnt r e g a r d i n g i n t e r n a l g a s

‘.(I..?.? I SI’LOSION l’l’I:FcT I N CLOSI, 1)

where
R = acceleration
( 9 . 8 1 lllk2 ).
KOOMS - Gas e x p l o s i o n m a y b e c a u s e d , f o r
exalnple. hy leaks in gas pipes (inclusive of
\)i)M?\ outsIde the room), evaporation from
votarile liquids or unintentional evaporation of
g;1< floni ~nll sheaThings ( f o r e x a m p l e , c a u s e d
due to gravity by fire 1.

P,, = c r a n e bridge weight (I),

P, = c r a b w e i g h t (1):

Q= crane loadmp capacity (t).

k = a coefficient, assumed equal to rero

for cranes with flexible load suspcn-
sion and to one for cranes with rigid
suspension;

I,, = crane span (m); and The overprcssure is assumed to depend on a

I = nearness, of crab ( m ) .
7.62 EX P L O S I O N S
7.6.2.1 G E N E R A L - - E x p l o s i o n s m a y caCSC
impulsive loading on a structure. The following
types of explosions are particularly relevant:
a) internal gas explosions which may be
caused by leakage of gas piping ( I n c l u d i n g
piping outside the room), evaporation from
volatile liquids or unintentional evaporation
from surface material (for example, fire);
9, kN/m*
Factor .1/l: whcrc A is the total window area in
12 a n d I’ is the v o l u m e In rrr3 of the room
considered:
The internal prcssurr IS assumed to act simulta-
ncouhly upon ;IU wills and tloors in one closed
room ; and
The ,rcrlon q. may bc taken as static action.
If account is taken of the time curve of the action, the
f t ig. 18) schematic correspondcncc hetwccn pressure
:md tune is assumed. where It is the time from the
start of combustion until ma,mlum pressure is reached
.Ind /2 is the time from maximum pressure. to the end
of combustion. For I, and f2, the most unfavourablc
values should bc chosen in relation to the dynamic
propertlrs of the s t r u c t u r e s . However, t h e v a l u e s
should hc chosen wtthin the intervals as eiven in
I’rg. 19.

90
1 4.
80 (kN/m’t t
70
60
50
10
30
20
IO
0 Am-’
V L- +L----t, _I flbiE(d

Fig. 18 Sketch Showing Relation Between Fig. 19 Sketch Showing Trme lntetval
Pressure and Time and Pressure

79
MRrnsln- DESIGN-SECll0N I LOADS VI-l-
N)TI’ 2 - I ipurc I8 i s bawd on tcstx w i t h ga 7.6.3.‘l’Hl HMAI. 1.1 I,k.CT D U R I N G I:IRI: -
c\plosiions i n roow rorrespondinp ttr ordwr) T h e thermat effect d u r i n g f i r e m a y b e
rrvdentbl Gts and should, thcrct’orc. no: bc appliccl
to considerably different conditions. The t’igurc
determined from one of the following methods:
corrdponds to an e.xplo&m caurcd I~!- towng;~> and it
might, t h r r e f o r c , b e somewhat on thr wto ride in a) the time-temperature curve a n d the
rums whcrc there is only tbc Iws4bility or gaw\ witb required fire resistance (minutes), and
a lower rate of~un~bustion.

b) an energy-bakmce method.

If the thermal effect during fire is determined

from an energy balance method, the fire load is
taken to be:

I tgure I8 is given purely a s guidr ;~nd prolxlhilit), 01 4= 12 t,,

uccurrenre of’ an explosion should Or <,hcckcd in ~‘3~11
wse using approprialc valuc~. where

= f i r e a c t i o n ( K J p e r m* f l o o r ) , a n d
4
7 . 6 . 3 V~.KTICAL LLIAI) O N AIH KAID
SHFLTERS th = required fire resistance (minutes)
[WC VI-l(6)]
7.6.3.1 CHARACTI~.KIS~lfI(‘ V:\I.UI S --. A s
regards buildings in which the individual
NUT tlJ Tbc fire action is dct’ined a s t h e t o t a l
floors are acted upon by a total chal,acterlstlc qUantlty of hut produced by complete combustion of
imposed action of up to 5.0 kN/m”. vertical a l l combu+iblr nt.itcrirll in t IIC f i r e c~rupartmcnt,
actions on air raid shelters generally located incluck ol utvrcd goods and cquipmcnt rogether with
below ground level, for example, basement, etc, building structure, .tnd buildrng materials.
should cbe considered to have the following
characteristic values: 7. 7 Orlrer Loads Other loads not included in
the present’ code. such as special loads due to
Buildings wiih up to 2X kN/m*
technical process, m o i s t u r e a n d s h r i n k a g e
2 storeys effects. e t c . s h o u l d b e t a k e n i n t o a c c o u n t
where stipulated by b’uilding design codes or
Buildings with 3-4 storeyb 34 kN/m2 esrablished in accordance with the performance
requirement of the structure.
Building with more than 41 kN/m*
4 storeys
8 LOAD COMBINATIONS
Ruildings of particularly 28 kN/m*
stab,le construction 8. 1 C;e~rra/ -- A judicious combination of the
Irrespective of the number loads keeping in view the probability of:
of storeys
a) their acting together; and
In the case of buildings with floors that are
acted upon by a characteristic imposed action b) their disposition in relation to other loads
larger than 5.0 kN/m’, the above values should and severity of stresses or deformations
be increased by the difference between the caused by the combinations of the various
average imposed action ori all storeys above the loads, is necessary to ensure the required
one concerned and 5.0 kN/m’ safety and economy in the design of a
structure.
NoTE I Uy storcyr tt ts understood, rvrry utiliz~hle
storey above the shelter.
8.2 Load Combinations - Keeping the aspect
N*ITt 2 By buildmgs of a particular stable ronstrur- specified in 8. I, the various loads should,
tion. it is understood, bulldingq in \\hich the load- therefore, be combined in accordance with the
bearing structures arc made from rrint’orccd in-sirrc stipulations in the relevant design codes. In the
concrete.
absence of such recommendations, the
following loading combinations, whichever
7.6.4 FI R E combination produces the most unfavourable
effect in the building, foundation or structural
7.6.4.1 GLNL:.RAL - Possible extraordinary member concerned may be adopted (as a
loads during a fire may be considered as general guidance). It should also be recognized
accidental actions. Examples are loads from in load combinations that the simultaneous
people along escape routes and loads on occurrence of rnaxirmm values of wind,
another structure from structure failing because earthquake, imposed and snow loads is not
of a fire. likely.
80
W-1.
 1) DL both for evaluating earthquake effect and also for
combined load effects used in such combination.
2) DL t IL
MTE 4 - For the purpose of stability of the
3)DLtWL structure as a whole against overturning, the restoring
moment shall be not less than I .2 times the maximum
4)DLtEL overturning moment due to dead load plus 1.4 times
5) DLtTL the maximum overturhina moment due to imoosed
loads. In caseSwhere deaiload provides the &aioring
6) DLtILtWL moment, only 0.9 times the dead load shall be
considered. The restoring moments due io imposed
7) DLtILtEL loads shall be ignored.
8)DLtILtTL NOTE. 5 - The structure shall have a factor against
9)DLtWLtTL slid& of not Icss than 1.4 under the most adverse
combination of the applied loads/forces. tn this case,
lO)DL+ELtTL only 0.9 times the dead load shall be taken into
account.
11) DLtILtWLtTL
12) DL+ILtEL+TL NUTS: 6 - Where the bearinr oressure on soil due to
wind alone is less than 25 pe%nt of that due to dead
load and imposed load, it may be neglected in design
(DL = dead load, IL = imposed load, where this e.xceeds 25 percent, found;ltion may be so
WL = wind- load, EL = earthquake load proportioned rhat the pressure due to combined effect
and TL = temperature load). of dead load, imposed l,oad rnd wind load does not
e\cecd the allowable bearing pressure by more than 25
percent. When earthquake ct’fect is included. the
&TE 1 - When snow load is present on roul’,, permissible incrrasc in allowable bearing pressure in
replace imposed load by snow load for the purpose of the soil shall be in accordance with [VI-I (7)1.
above load combinations.
Reduced imposed load specified in 3 for the design of
NOTIC 2 - The relevant design codes shall be followed supporting structures should not be applied in
for permissible stresses when the structure is designed combination with earthquake forces.
by working stress method and for partial suiety factors
when the structure is designed by limit stale design Nor&: 7 - O t h e r l o a d s a n d accidental l o a d
method for each of the above load combinations. combinations not included should be dealt with
appmprialely.
t+&TE 3 - Whenever imposed load (IL) is combined
with earthquake load (EL), the appropriate part OC NOTI: g - Crane load combinations are covered in
imposed load as specified in IVI-1 (711 should be used, 3.6.4.

81
MRTHalmmwu. DCSIGIU~IKTION I LOADS M-1.
 APPENDIX A
[Clause 3.3.2.1(b)]

ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLE SHOWING REDUCTIONOF UNIFORMLY

DISTRIBUTED IMPOSED FLOOR LOADS IN MULTI-STOREYED
BUILDINGS FOR DESIGN OFCOLUMh&

A-l. The total imposed loads from different levels using 3.3.2.1. Floor loads do not exceed
floor levels (including the roof) coming on the 5.0 kN/m2.
central ~.~~lumn of a multi-storeyed building A-l. I Applying reduction coeffiicents in
(with mixed occupancy) is shown in Fig. 20. accordance with 3.3.2.1. total reduced floor
Calculate the reduced imposed load for the loads on the column at different levels is
design of column members at different floor indicated along with Fig. 20.
Floor No. Actual Floor
From Top Load Coming on
including Columns at
Roof different floors kN
LOADS FOR WHICH COLUMNS ARE
TO BE DESIGNED

+40+50+50) (l-0.3) = 119

(30+40+50+50+40) (l-0.4) = 126

-(30+40+50+50+40+45) (l-0.4) = 153

50+50+40+45+50+50) (l-0.4)

30+40+50+50+40+45+50+50t40t40+40

30+40+50+50+40+45+50+50+40+40+40

30+40+50+503+40+45+50+50+40+40+40

82
wc(-
 APPENDIX B

(Clause 4.2)

NOTATIONS

A = Surface area of a structure or part of I = Length of the member or greater

a structure horizontal dimension of a building
le= Effective frontal area Pd = Design wind pressure
A,= An area at height Z Pz = Design wind pressure at height Z
b= Breadth of a structure or structural Pe = External pressure
member normal to the wind stream
in the horizontal plane II = Internal pressure

ci= Force coefficient/drag coefficient R, = Reynolds number

Cm= Normal f&e coefficient s = Strouhal number

Gt= Transverse force coefficient v, = Regional basic wind speed

c; = Frictional drag coefficient i$ = Mean hourly wind speed correspond-
ing to 10 m height
G= Pressure coefficent
v, = Design wind velocity at height Z
cpc- External pressure coefficient vz = Hourly mean wind speed at height Z
cpi= Internal pressure coefficient
W= Lesser horizontal dimension of a
d= Depth of a structure or structural building or a structural member
member parallel to wind stream
w’ = Bay width in multi-bay buildings
D= Diameter of cylinder
x = Distance down wind from a change
F= Force normal to the surface in terrain category
K= Normal force 8 = Wind angle from a given axis
F,= Transverse force Q = Inclination of the roof to the
horizonral
F’ = Frictional force
h = Height of structure above mean
ground level += Solidity ratio

hx= The height of development of a

velocity profile at a distance x down Z= A height or distance above the
wind from a change in terrain category ground
kl

k:,
1
kz = Multiplication factors

K= Multiplication factor
&= Average height of the surface rough-
ness

83
aal-.vl mtJcrumL DESIGN-tW3lON I lOADS VI-,-
 APPENDIX C
(Clause 4.4.2)
BASIC WIND SPEED AT 10 m HEIGHT FOR SOME IMPORTANT CITIES/TOWNS

CITY/TOWN BASIC W IND SPEED CITY ~TDWN B ASIC W IND S PEED

IN m/s IN m/r

Am 47 Jodhpur 47
Ahmadabad 39 Kanpur 47
Ajmer 47 Kohima 44
Almora 47 Kurnool 39
Amritsar 47 Lucknow 47
Asansol 47 Ludhiana 47
Aurangabad 39 Madras 50
Bahraich 47 Madurai 39
Bangalore 33 Mandi 39
Barauni 47 Mangalore 39
BareSly 47 Moradabad 47
Bhatinda 47 Mysore 33
Bhilai 39 Nagpur 44
Bhopnl 39 Nainital 47
Bhubaneshwar 50 Nasik 39
Bhuj 50 Nellore 50
Bikaner 47 Punjim 39
Bokaro 47 Patiala 47
Bombay 44 Patna 47
Calcutta 50 Pondicherry 50
Calicut 39 Pune 39
Chandigarh 47 Raipur 39
Coimbatore 39 Rajkot 39
Cuttack 50 Ranchi 39
Darbuanga 55
Roorkee 39
Darjeeling 47
Rourkela 39
Debra Dun 47
Delhi 41 Shimh 39
Durgapur 47 Srinagar 39
Gangtok 47 Surat 44
Guwahati 50 Tiruchchirappalh 47
Gaya 39 Trivandrum 39
Gorakhpur 47 Udaipur 47
Hyderabad 44 Vadodara 44
lniphal 47 Varanasi 47
Jabalpur 47 Vijayswada 50
Jaipur 47 Vishakhapetnam 50
Jamshedpur 47 Lakshadweep 39
Jhansi 47 Port Blair 44

M1Y
 APPENDIX D

[Clause 4.4.3.2(d)J

CHANCES IN TERRAIN CATEGORIES

D-1. LOW TO HIGH NUMBER determined in accordance with the rougher

D-I.1 In cases of transitions from a low
category number (corresponding to a low
terrain roughness) to a high category number
(corresponding to a rougher. terrain), the
velocity profile over the rougher terrain shall be
determined as follows:
a) Below height II,. the velocities shall be
determined in relation to the rougher
terrain; and
b) Above height h,, the velocities shall be
determined iri relation to the less rough
(more distant) terrain.
D-2 HIGH TO LOW NUMBER
D-2 i In cases of transitions t’rom a more
rough to a, less rough terrain. the velocity
profile shall be determined as follows:
a) Above height h,, the velocities shall be
(more distant) terrain; and
b) Below height h,, the velocity shall be
taken as the lesser of the following:
1) that determined in accordance with the
less rough terrain; and
2) the velocity at height h, as determined
in relation to the rougher terrain.
NOTE; - Examples of the determination of velocity
profiles in the vicinity of a change in terrain category
ark shown in Fig. 21 (a and b) .
D-3 MORE THAN ONE CATEGORY
D-3.1 Terrain changes involving more than one
category shall be treated in similar fashion to
that described in A- ’ -.nd A-2.
MTI‘ - Examples inv&ing three terrain catetzorias
arc shown in I:@. 21 (c).

WlNO
OIRECTlON

CATEGORY 2

x6 =fETCl& = WEIGHT FOR CATEOOW

. - . PROf IlE fOR CATEGORY 4
l l l l

------ PROFIlE fOR CATEGORY 2

- DESIGN PROFILE AT A
a) DETERMINATION OF VELOCITY PROFILE NEAR A CHANGE
IN TERRAIN CATEGORY
(LESS ROUGH TO MORE ROUGH)

Fig. 21 Velocity ProfiIes in the Vicinity of u Change in Terrain Ciztqory (Contd)

a!!
?ARTvl8lnucnJRAL ~43~4~0~ I mum HI.
 n2 rFETCH, h2=HElGHT FOR CATEfX~y 2
l ..~***.PROFIlE FOR CATEGORY 4
- --- PROFILE FOR CREGORY 2
-0ESlGN PROFWE AT A

WlNO
OlRECT ION
w

A
CATEGORY 4 CATEGORY 2
c ---x2 *

b) DETERMINATION OF VELOCITY PROFILE NEAR A CHANGE

IN TERRAIN CATEGORY
(MORE ROUGH TO LESS ROUGH)

%=FETCH, hpHEIGHT FOR CATEGO RY 4

x,&ETCH, h,=HEIGHT FOR CATEGORY 1
h4’xt h,l/

CATEGORY 3

VElOClTY VELOCITY VELOCITY-

. . . . . . . -. VELOCITY PROFILE FOR CATEGORY L

---a- VELOCITY PROFILE FOR CATEGORY 3
-.--- VELOCITY PROFILE FOR CATEGORY 1
- DESIGN PROFILE
c) DETERMINATION OF DESIGN PROFILE INVOLVING MORE
THAN ONE CHANGE IN tERRAIN CATEGORY

Fig. 21 Velocity Profiles in the Vicinity of a Change in Terrain Category

86
w-1. ~llONu wlmlNc MDI 01 WUA
 APPENDIX E
(Chore 4.4.3.3)

EFFECT OF A CLIFF OR ESCARPMENT ON THE EQUIVALENT HEIGHT

ABOVE GROUND (k, FACTOR)

E-1.. The influence of the topographic feature
is considered to extend 1.5 L, upwind and 2.5
I,, downwind of the summit or crest of the
feature, where f,, is the effective horizontal
length of the hill dependingotislope as indicated
below (SCC Fig. 22):
Slop0 L,
trout wind to PSKSS the height L and the upwind Slope
0 of the feature.
E-2. TOPOGRAPHY FACTOR, kj - The
topography factor k 3 is given by the following:
kj=l+Cs
where C has the following values:

3”<6 < 1 7 ” 1. Slope c

Z 32 e G
> 17”
0.3
where I. is the actual length of the upwind
slope in the wind direction, 2 is the effective
height of the feature, and 0 is the upwind slope
in the wind direction.
If the Lone downwind from the crest of the
feature is realtively flat, (0 < 3’) for a distance
exceeding f.,, then the feature should be
treated as an escarpment. If not then the
feature should be treated as a hill or ridge.
Examples of typical features are given in
F1g. 77.
NO~I I -- No difference is made in cvaluntinp ka
between a three dimensional hill and two dimensional
ridpc.
kY I, 2 - In undulating terrain. it is often not
porctblc to decide whether the local topography lo the
ute is significant in terms of wind Ilow. In such cases,
the average ~aluc of the rerram upwmd of the site for
a distance of 5 km should br taken a~ the base level
17” 1.2 (9
> 17* 0.36
s is a factor derived in accordance with E-2. I
appropriate to. the height, H above mean
ground level and the distance x from the
summit or crest relative to the effective lengtli,
Ie V‘
E-21 The fector s should be determined
from:
a) Fig. 23 for cliffs and escarpments, and
b) Fig. 24 for hills and ridges.
N>Tk. - Where the downwind slope of a hill or ridge
is greater than 3’, there will be large regions o f
reduced accelerations or even shelter and it is not
possible to give gcncral design rules to cater for these
clrcumstanccs. Values of s from Fig. 24 may be used
;IJ upper bound values.

WIND

+ VI DDWNWND
- -

a) GENERAL DEFINITION

Fig. 22 Definirion of Topographical Dimensions (Continued)

87
PART VI
“1-l.
 DOWNWI)D SLOPE *3’
c) HILL AND RIDGE

Fig. 22 Definition of Topographicul Dimensions

CRLSI CREST

UPWIND $

Fig 23 Facror s for Clif/and Escarprnrnr

CREST CREST

0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5-

UPWII) 2 OOWNWHO 1L
h Le
Fig. 24 Factor s for Ridge and Hill
88
Vl-l- NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF IWIA
 APPENDIX F
[ChUSP 453.2 (c)J
WIND FO-RCE ON CIRCULAR SK‘TIONS
t-1. The wind force on any object is gtven by:
F = Ct.A,.p*
where
(‘r Lf force coefficient,
A~= effective area of the object normal
to the wind direction, and
pd = design pressure of the wind.
For most shapes. the force coefficient remains
approximately constant over the whole range
of wind speeds likely to be encountered.
However, for objecCts of circular cross-section.
it varies considerably.
For a circular section. the force coefficient
depends upon the war in which the wind flows
around it and is dependent upon the velocity
and kinematic viscosity of the wind and
diameter of the section. The force coefficient is
usually quoted against a non-dimensional
parameter, called the Reyl@ds number, which
takes account of the velocity and viscosity ot
the flowing medium (in this case the wind) and
the member diameter.
Reynolds number, K, z !3_
Y t h e paramctcr I) V,. I:or suhacriticaj Il0ws.
where
D = diameter of the member;
Vd = design wind speed; and
7 = kinematic vistosity of the air which
is 1.46 x10 m”/sat 15”Cand
standard atmospheric pressure
Since in most natural environments likely tc
be found in India, the kinematic viscosity of
the air is fairly constant, it is convenient to
use Dvd as the parameter instead of Reynolds
numbers and this has been done in this section.
Fig. 25 Wgke in Subcritical Flow
The dependence of a circular section’s force
coefficient or Reynolds number is due to the
change in the wake developed behind the body.
At a low Reynolds number, the wake is as
shown in Fig. 25 and the force coefficient is
typically 1.2. As the Reynolds number is
increased, the wake gradually changes to that
shown in Fig. 26, that is, the wake width &,
decreases and the separation point, S moves
from the front. to the back of the body.
As a result, the force coefficient shows a rapid
drop at a critical value of Reynolds number,
fallowed by a gradual. rise and Reynolds
number is increased still further.
The variation of C’r with parameter Dvdis
shown in Fig. 5 for infinitely long circular
cylinders having various values of relative
surface roughness E ID when subjected to
wind having an intensity and scale of
tuibulence typical of built-up urban areas. The
curve for a smooth cylinder EiD = 1 x 10-s
in a steady air-stream. as found in a Iow-
turbulence wind tunnel. is shown for
4!urnparison.
It all he XCIl IIIiII Ik lil;litl cll’~!ct of free-strcam
turbulence i\ I() &crease the critical value 01’
turbulence can product 3 considcr;lhlc
reduction in (‘I b e l o w the ~t~tidy ail-stlcam
v a l u e s . IOI super-critical ~‘lo*ks. t h i s c~l’cc~
hccoincs significantly smaller.
If the surface of 111~ cylinder is dclibcntcly
roughened such as by incoqx)rating flurcs.
rivetted construction. ctc . ~hsa the Dada
@yen in F i g . 5 foi ppproprbrc v a l u e o f
E /D> o shall be used.
IGg+ 26 Wake in Supercritical. Flow
 APPENDIX G

(C1~zr.w 5.4.2.1)

BASIC HORIZONTAL SEISMIC COEFFICIENTS FOR

SOME IMPORTANT TOWNS

IOWN ZoNI BASIC TOWN 7.()N t BASIC‘

HORIZONTAL b.IK IZON 1‘A I
SL~ISMIC SEISMIC‘
(‘Ok.1 I.-ICI t:NT (‘0111 IC‘II NT
a a

(21 (3) (1) (2) (3)

Agt :I I11 0.04 Kathmandu V 0.08

Ah~~~dalrad III 0.04 Kohima V 0.08
Ajnicr I 0.0 I Kurnool I 0.01
Allah;lh;ld II 0.02 Lucknow III 0.04
Almora 0.05 Ludhiana IV 0.05
A mIxI la I; 0.05 Madras 0.02
AlnlIlxll IV 0.05 Madurai I; 0.07
Awnsol III 0.04 Mandi IV 0.08
Aurangahad I 0.01 Mangalore III 0.04
Bahraich IV 0.05 Monghyre IV 0.05
Uangalorc I 0.0; Moradabad IV 0.05
Barauni IV 0.05 Mysore I 0.01
Biareilly III 0.04 Nagpur II 0.02
Bhatinda III 0.04 Nainital IV 0.05
Hhilai I 0.01 Nasik III 0.04
IU~opaI II 0.0: Nellore .I I 0.0:
Bhuhancrhwar III 0.03 PunJim III 0.04
llhq V 0.08 Paliala III 0.04
IW3ncr III 0.04 f’al na IV 0.05
tk,k:llU III 0.04 Pilibhit IV 0.05
lJ~1llllXl) III 0.04 I’ondlcherry II 0.02
lhwdw3i~ III 0.04 I’u11c III 0.04
(‘alcllrla III 0.04 KLllpUI I 0.0 I
(‘ahcut III 0.04 bjkoc III 0.04
Chandigrh IV 0.05 Ranchi II O.O?
Chitradurg 0.0 I Roorkec IV 0.05
Coimbalot e Ill 0.04 Rourhela I 0.01
Cuttack III 0.04 Sadlya V 0.0x
Darbhang V 0.0x Shinila IV 0.05
Darjeeling IV 0.05 Sirvni I 0.01
Dehra Dun IV 0.05 Srinaga r V 0.08
Delhi IV 0.05 Surat Ill 0.04
Durgapur III 0.04 TeLpur V 0.08
Gangtok IV 0.05 Tanjavur II 0.02
Guwahati V 0.08 Tiruchchirappalli II 0.07
Gya III 0.04 Trivandrum 111 0.04
Gorakhpur IV 0.05 Udaipur II
Hyderabad I 0.0 I Vadodara III ::EZ
I 111 pha I V 0.08 Varanasi III 0.04
Jabalpur III 0.04 Vijayawada III 0.04
Jaipur II 0.02 Vishakhapa~nam II O.O?
Jamshedpur II 0.0:
Jhansi I 0.0 I
Jodhpur I 0.01
JOI hat V 0.08
Kanpur III 0.04

90
VI-l- N4lloNAL alJlmING CooL oc INDIA
 APPENDIX H

(Clause 5.4.2.1)

SPECTRA OF EARTHQUAKE

H-I. GENERAL choice of suitable damping coefficient for a

given structure largely a matter of judgement.
II-I. I Spectrum of an earthquake is the However, some values are given below to
representation of the maximum dynamic indicate the order of damping coefficient in
response of idealized structures during an various types of structures:
earthquake. The idealized structure is a single
degree of freedom system having a certain
period of vibration and damping. The Tapes oj Strucrure Damping Coellicknt
maximum response is plotted against the in Percent oj
natural period of vibration and can be Criticul
e x p r e s s e d in terms of maximum absolute
acceleration, maximvni relative velocity or a) Steel structures 2 to 5
maximum relative displacement. For the b) Concrete structures St010
purpose of design, acceleration spectra are c) Brick structures in 5 to IO
very useful. as they give the seismic force on a cement mortar
structure directly by multiplying it with the d) Timber structures 2 to 5
generalized or modal mass of the structure. e) Earthen structures lot030

11-J AVERAGE SPECTRA
II-2 I Prol G. W. Housner has proposed
average spectra on the basis of studies on
response spectra of four strongest earthquakes
that have occurred in USA (scr Fig. 14 which
shows the average acceleration spectra).
N)TI,. - It may be menrioncd hcrc 1lnti1 in the cla~ric
range. damping displayed hy \trucfure\ is much lower
t h a n t h a t given abow. II may lie br~wrrn I :tnd 4
p c r c c n r t o r rhe ;Ibove type o f strucruw ‘II IOH
\trcsscs. The values given thus presume some inel:l%tic
detormil~bns or fins cracking to rake place uhcn thi\
order of’ damping \vill occur. However, tar obtsinintz
d e s i g n s e i s m i c roeft’icient, ~hc valuea ot’ dalupinp
mcnrinned in rrlewnt clause AlI apply.

II-_‘._-J To take into account the seismicity of
the various zones, the ordmate of the average
spectra are to be multiplied by a factor /b.
This factor II; depends on the magnitude,
duration and form of the expected earthquake,
distance of the site from expected epicentre,
soil conditions, resistance deformation
characteristics of the structure, etc.
Approximate values of this factor are given in
Table 5.
MTE I t m a y h e p o i n t e d oul t h a t durmg t h e
expcctcd maCmum mtensity o f e a r t h q u a k e i n t h e
various seismic hones. structures will be-subjected to
a higcr force. Hut the capacity of the structure in
plastic range will be available for absorbing the kinetic
cncrpy rmpnrtcd by the earthquake. Therefore. the
L;trurtural details are fo be worked out in such a
manner t h a t tt c a n u n d e r g o sufficient plastic
detor~r~tiun\ hefore failure.
ff-4. METHOD OF USING THE SPECTRA
I/-J./ Let the period of a structure be 0.8
second and the damping 5 percent critical.
Further let the soil-foundation system give
factor p = 1.2 and let the structure have an
importance factor, I = 1 S. Referring to FIB. 14,
the spectral acceleration. S;, is 0.12 g. If the
structure has mass M=I?.O kg s2/cm and is
to be located in Zone V, the design horizontal
seismic coefficient Q,, would be [see .i.J.2.3
(b)l :
ah = PIF @,/&I)
= 1.2x1.Sx0.4x0.12
= 0.0864

H-~? DAMPING IN STRUCTURES Therefore, horizontal seismic force

P = lr,,Mg
/I-.?. I The variety of damping displayed in = 0.0864 x 12.0 x 981
different types of structures has made the = 1017.1 kg

91
mRTvlm- DESiGKWmON 1 LOADS W-l-
 APPENDIX J
(C&uses 6.4.2.4 and 6.4.3)
SHAPE COEFFICIENTS FOR MULTILEVEL ROOFS
A more comprehensive formula for the shape coefficient for multilevel roofs

7
OlRECflONS
WIND

12
c

p, = 1 +j&, 1, +m?12)(4 -2h) where

y, = 0.8 s,, is in kilopascals (kilonewtons per square metre)

k is in newtons per cubic metre

13 =2h

(h and I being in metres) 1, Q 15 m

Restriction:

92
Hl-
viluer of ml (ml) for the h@wr (lower) roof depend on itr profile and am taken as equal to:

0.5 for plane roofs with slopes a,< 20’ and vaulted roofs with f 1
iGa

f I
0.3 for plane roofs with rlopa fi,< 20° and vaulted roofs with 7 > s

The cocftlcients ml and ml may be adjusted tQ take into account conditions for transfer of snow on the roof
surfwe (i.e. wind, tcmpaature. ete)

NOTE - The othe: condition of loading alaa shall be tried.

LIST OF STANDARDS

The following list records those standards which are acceptabk as ‘good practiGe’
and ‘accepted .standards’ in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The
kztest vwsion of a standard shall be adopted at the time of the enforcement of the
Code. The standards listed may be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the Code.
In the following list, the number appearing in the first column within peren-
theses indicates the number of the reference in this part/section

(1) IS:1875 (Part 1) - 1987 Code of practice g a n t r y aanes other than steehvork
for design loads (other than earthquake) ixanes (jfr~t revision)
for buildings and structures: Part 1 Dead
Loads - units weight of building materials (4) lS:432261576 Code of ptactia for earth
and stored materials (second revision) uake resistant construction of buildings
&Irst revirion)
(2) IS:8888-1979 Guide for requirements of
low income housing (5) 13:3414-1968 Code of practia for des@
and installation of ioints in buildings
(3) 13:807-1976 Code of practice for design,
manufacture, erection and testing (struc- (6) IS:1642-1960 Code of practice for fire
tural portion) of cranr’s and hoists (j$sr safety of buildings (general):Materials and
revision) details of construction
13:3177-1977 Code of practice for elco (7) IS:189%1984 Criteria for earthquake rexis.
tric overhead travelling cranes and tant design of structures (fourth revision)

93
MRr VI lrmucnJRAL beSIGN-SKI-ION t UMDl u-i-
NATIONALBUILDING CODE
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION2 FOUNDATIONS

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS

0. FOREWORD 2
1. SCOPE ... 3

2. TERMINOLOGY 3

3. SITE INVESTIGATION 5

4. CLASSIFJCAT!ON AND IDENTIFICATION OF SOILS ... 7

5. MATERIALS 7

6. TYPE OF FOUNDATIONS ... 7

7. SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS ... 8
..
8. DRIVEN/ BORED CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE PILES ... 17
9. DRIVEN PRECAST CONCRETE PILES 21
IO. UNDER-REAMED PJLES 23

II, TIMBER PILES 26

I2. OTHER FOUNDATIONS ... 27

APPENDIX A DETERMINATION OF MODULUS OF ELASTICITY

AND POISSONS RATIO ... 27
APPENDIX B DETERMINATION OF MODULUS OF SUBGRADE
REACTION ... 28
APPENDIX C RIGIDITY OF SUPERSTRUCTURE AND
FOUNDATION ... 29

APPENDIX D CALCULATION OF PRESSURE DJSTRIBUTJON

BY CONVENTJONAL METHOD .I. 30
APPENDIX E CONTACT PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION AND
MOMENTS BELOW FLEXiBLE FOUNDATION ... 3J

APPENDIX F FLEXIBLE FOUNDATION-GENERAL

CONDITION ... 32

APPENDIX G LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY-STATIC

FORMJJLA ... 33

APPENDIX J DETERMINATION OF DEPTH OF FlXITY,

LATERAL DEFLECTION AND MAXIMUM
MOMENT OF LATERALLY LOADED PILES . . 36

APPEND/X K SAFE LOAD ON UNDER-REAMED PILES ... 38

FAIT VI StpuffULIL DESIGN -SCClION 1 FOUNDA,,DNt, VI.

PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION 2 FOUNDATIONS

0 . F O R E W O R D

0.1 This section deals with the structural design aspects CJf foundations and nrn~niv covers the
design principles involved in different types of foundations.

0.2 This section was first published in.l970. The first revision is intended to update the provisions
in the light of revision of standards on which it was based and a large number o! new standards
being formulated on the subject. In this revision mainly the following changes have been made.

a) Design considerations in respect of shallow foundations modified,

b) Provisions regarding pier foundations added,
4 Provisions regarding raft foundations revised and elaborated.
d) Provisions regarding pile foundations modified to include driven, bored cast rrt-.GIU
concrete piles and driven precast concrete piles, and

4 Load test on piles is deleted and only a reference is given as now there exists a ,eparatc
lndian Standard covering the load test on all types of piles.

0.3 For detailed information regarding structural analysis and boil mechanics aspects of
individual foundations, reference should be made to standard textbooks and available literature.

0.4 The information contained in this section is mainly based on the following Indian Standards,

13 : 1080-1980 Code of practice for design and construction of’ simple spread foundations
yirsr revision)

IS: 1904-1978 Code of practice for structural safety of buildings: Shallow foundations
( s e c o n d revlion)

IS : 291 I (Part I/Set I)-1979 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations:
Part 1 Concrete piles, Section 1 Driven cast in-situ concrete piles (frrsr revision)

IS : 291 I (Part I/Set 2)-I979 Code of practice fordesign and construction of pile foundations:
Part I Concrete piles, Section 2 Bored cast in-situ piles C/irsr revisio~r)

1s : 2911 (Part l/Set 3)-1979 Code of practice fordesignand construction’of pile foundations:
Part I Concrete piles, Section 3 Driven precast concrete piles (firs: revision)
IS : 2911 (fart HI)-1980 Code of practice for designand construction of pile foundations: Part
III Under-reamed piles (/irsr revision)

IS :.2950 (Part D-1981 Code of practice for design and construction of raft foundations: Part1
Design (second revision)

2
VI-t NATIONAL l IJILDINC CODE OF INDIA
1. SCOPE
1.f This section covers structural design
(principles) of all building foundations
(shallow, raft and pile) to ensure structural
safety without exceeding the permissible
stresses of the materials of foundations and
the bc:iring pressure of the supporting soil.
2. TERMISOLOGY
2.0 For the purpose of this section, the
following definitions shall apply.
2. ! General
B E A R I N G P R E S S U R E, AL L O W A B L E - - T h e
maximum allowable net loading intensity on
the ground in any given case, taking Into
account the ultimate bearing capacity, the
amount and kind of settlement expected and
the ability of the given structure to take up this
settlement. It is, therefore. a combined
function of both the site conditions and
characteristics of the particular structure.
CLAY --An aggregate of microscopic and
submicroscopic particles derived from the
chemical decomposition and disintegration of
rock constituents. It is plastic within a
moderate to wide range of water content. The
partlcles are less than 0.002 mm in size.
C L A Y, FIRM -~A clay which at its natural
water content can be moulded by substantial
pressure with the tingersandcanbeexcavated
wrth a spade.
CLAI. SW1 -A clay which at its natural
water content can be easily moulded with the
fingers and readily excavated.
(‘I AY. SrlFF- 4 clay which at its natural
water content canno! be moulded with the
fingers and requires a pick or pneumatic sprdi
for its removal.
RH~UI~ATIO~ - ‘I hat pert of the structure
which 1s In direct contact with soil -and
transmits loads to 11
GRAVLL. - Cohesionless a g g r e g a t e s o f
angular rounded or semi-rounded, fragments
01 more or less unaltered rocks or minerals, 50
percent or more of the particles having size
greater than 4.75 mm and less than 80 mm.
PEA’T - A fibrous mass of organic matter in
various stages ot decomposition generally
dark brown to black in colour and of spongy
consistency.
SAKD - Cohesionless aggregate of rounded,
sub-rounded. angular, subangular or flat
fragments of’ more or less unaltered rock or
?A@T VI STWCTUIAL DlslCN -- SECTtON 1 F O U N D A T IO N S
minerals, 50 percent or more of particles
greater than 0.075 mm or less than 4.75 mm in
size.
S A N D. COARSE-Sand which contains 50
percent or more of particles of size greater
than 2 mm and less than 4.75 mm.
S A N D. FINE --Sand which contains 50 per-
cent of particles of size greater than 0.075 mm
and less than 0.425 mm.
SANL). MEDIUM - Sand which contains 50
percent or more of particles of size greater
than 0.425 mm and less than 2.0 mm.
SILT C-A fine grained soil with httle or no
plasticity. The size of particles ranges from
0.075 mm to 0.002 mm.
!QOFT ROCK --A rocky cemented material
which oflers a high resistance to picking up
with pick axes and sharp tools but whichdoes
not normally require blasting or chiselling for
excavation.
SOIL. BLACK E XPANSIVE - Inorganic clays of
medium to high compressibility. They form a
major s o i l g r o u p i n I n d i a . T h e y a r e
predominately montmorillonitic in structure
and yellowish black or blackish grey in colour.
They are characterized by high shrinkage and
swelling properties.
S O I L .. C O A R S E GRAINED --Soils which
Include the coarse and largely siliceous and
unaltered products of rock weathering. They
possess no plasticity and tend to lack cohesion
when in dry state.
S OIL. FINK GRAINED -Soils consisting of the
fine and altered products of rock weathering,
possessmg cohesion and plasticity in their
natural state, the former even when dry and
both even when submerged. In these soils,
more than half of the material by weight is
smaller than 75-micron IS sieve size.
T OTAL SEITLEMENT - The total downward
movement of the foundation unit under load.
2.2 Shallow Foundation
BACK FILL - Materials used or reused to fill
an excavation.
B EARING C A P A C I T Y . SAFE -The maximum
intensity of loading that the soil will safely
carry without risk of shear failure irrespective
of any settkmem that may occur.
B E A R I N G C A P A C I T Y , UL T I M A T E - T h e
intensity of loading at the base of a folrndation
which would cause shear failure of the
supporting soil.
V W
3
 B EARING P RESSURE . A LLOWABLE (GROSS OR
NET) --The gross allowable bearing ~rcssurc
ir the maximum allowable loading mttnrity
on the ground in any given case (with full
cognizance of surcharge) taking into account
the maximum safe bearing capacity, the
amount and kin&of settlement expected and
the capability of the structure to take up this
settlement.
The net allowable bearing pressure is the gross
allowable bearing pressure minus t h e
surcharge intensity.
NOTE -. The concept of ‘gross’ and ‘net’ urd in defining
the allowable hearing pressure could also be extcndcd LO
safe bearing capacity, safe bearing prcssurc and ultimate
bearing capacity.
B EARING PRESSURE,SA~E -- The intensity of
the loading that the soil will carry without
undergoing settlement more than permissible
for the structure.
F A C T O R O F S A F E T Y ( W I T H ’ RE S P E C T KJ
BEARING CAPACITY ) -A factor by which the
ultimate bearing capacity (net) must be
reduced, to arrive at the value of safe bearing
capacity (net).
FELTING -A spread constructed In brick
work, masonry or concrete underthc bare a of
wall or column.for the purpose ofdistributing
the load over a larger area.
F O U N D A T I O N , R A F T --.A substrucrurc
sup orring an arrangement of columns or
walPs in a row or rows transmitting the lands
to the soil by means ofacontinuousslab. with
.or without dcprcssions or openings.
MAKE-L’P GR~vND - Refuse. cxcavalcd soil
oi rock deposited for.thc purpose of filling 8
decrcssion or raising a site above 11~ nntur;lI
surfice level of the ground.
OFFSET -The projection of the lower step
from the vertical face of the ltrpcr step.
IZRMANEK’I LOAD -LLodds u’hich rcnlain
on the structure for a pcrlod, or ;! rlumher of
periods, long enough to C;~I.W consulidatitrn
settlement of the soil. ‘This load may k
referred lo as rhe service lord.
S HALLOW F OUNDATION - A foundation
whose width is greater than its depth in which
load transfer is primarily through shear resist-
ance of the bearing strata and is normally
within 9m depth. The shear resistance of the
soil above the foundation is neglected.
SPREAD FO~NUATION -A f o u n d a t i o n
which transmits the load to th: groand
through one or more fthnp.
23 Pile Foundation
.%TTER PILE (RAKER PILE) -The pile which
is installed at an angle to the vertical.
VI-Z-
4 NATIDNAL
BEARING PILE -A pile formed in the ground
for transmitting the load of a structure to the
soil by the resistance developed at its tip
and/or along its surface. It may be formed
either vertically or at an inclination (Batter
Pile) and may be required to take uplift
pressure.
If the pile supports the load primarily by
resistance developed at the pile point or base,
it is referred to as ‘End Bearing Pile’; if
support is provided primarily by friction
along its surface. it is referred to as ‘Friction
Pile’.
BORED CAS r I N-SITU P ILE -The pile formed
within the ground by excavating or boring a
pile within it, with or without the use of a
temporary casing and subsequently filling it
with plain or reinforced concrete. When the
liner IS left permanently it is termed ascased
pile and when the casing is taken out it is
termed as uncased pile.
In insralling a bored pile the sides of the
borehole (when it does not stand by itself) arc
required to be stabilized with the aid of a
temporary casing, or with the aid of drilling
mud of suitable consistency. For marine
situations such piles are formed with
permanent casing (liner).
B ORED C OMPACTION P ILE -A bored cast in-
&u pile with or without bulb(s) iti which the
compaction of the surrounding ground and
f r e s h l y filled c o n c r e t e i n pile bore is
simultaneously achieved by a suitable
method. If the pile is with bulb(s), it isknown
as under-reamed bored compaction pile.
B ORED PII E -A pile fomled with or without
casirhg by excavatjng or boring a hole in the
ground and subsequently filling it with plain
or reinforced concrete
C U T- OFF LEVEL --It is the level where the
installed pile is cut-off to connect the pile caps
or beams or any other structural components
at that level.
DRIVEN CAST IS-SITU PILE --A pile formed
within th\: ground by driving a casing of
permanent or temporary type and
subsequently filling in the hole so for&ed with
plain or reinforced concrete. For displacing
the subsoil,, the casing is installed with a plug
or a shoe at the bottom end. When the casing
is left permanently, it is termed as cased pile
and when the casing is taken out, it is termed
as uncased pile.
D RIVEN PRE.CAST PILE ---A pile constructed
in concrete (reinforced or prestressed) in a
casting yard and subsequently driven in the
ground when it has attained sufficient
strength.
BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
E F F I C I E N C Y O F A PILF. GROUP ---It is the
ratio of the actual supporting value of a group
of piles to the supporting value arrived at by
multiplying the pile resistance of an isolated
pile by their number in the group.
FACTOR S A F E T Y ---It is the ratio of the
OF
ultimate load capacity of a pile to the safe load
of a pile.
M~IL-II-UNDER-REAMED PILE - A n under-
reamed pile having more than one bulb. 7 he
piles, having two bulbs may be called double
under-reamed piles.
N E G AT IVE S KIN F RICTION -Negative s k i n
friction is the force developed through the
friction between the pile and the soil in such a
direction as lo increase the loading on the pile,
generally due to drag of a consolidating soft
layer around the pile resting on a stiffer
bearing stratum such that the surrounding soil
settles more.than the pile.
U L T I M A T E LOAD CAPACITY - T h e maxl-
mum load which a pile can carry before failure
of ground (when the soil fails by shear. as
evidenced from the load settlement curves) or
failure of pile materials.
U N D E R- R E A ME D P ILE - A bored cast in-situ
or bored compaction concrete pile with
enlarged bulb(s) made by either cutting or
scooping out the soil or by any other suitable
process.
3. SITE INVESTIGATIGN
3.1 General- In areas which have already
been developed, advantage should be taken of
the existing local knowledge. records of trial
its, bore holes, etc. in the vicinity, and the
E chaviour of the existing structures,
particularly those of a similar nature to those
pro+td.
3.1.1 If the existing information is not
Pufficient or is inconclusive, the site should be
explored in detail as per good practice [ Vl-
2(I) ]* so as to obtain a knowledge of the type,
uniformity, consistency, thickness, sequence
and dip of the strata and of the ground water
conditions. Geolo@cal and agricultural soil
maps of the place give valuable information of
the site conditions. The general topography
will often give some indications of the so11
conditions and their variations. In certain
c~scs the earlier uses of the soil may have a
very important bearing on the proposed new
structures.
l In this section where rcfcrcncc is made to ‘good prac~e’
and ‘accepted standards in relation to design or testing
and construction procedures, the appropriate
document lisud al theend ofrhis section may be used as
a guide 10 the interpretation of this term.
?MT VI ItBucNUL DESIGN -8ECmW z F O U N D A T I O N 8
3:2 M~rhods oj SirQ Exploralion
2.2.1 T h e c o m m o n m e t h o d s o f site
exploration are given below:
a) OPEN -I RIAI. pll3 --The method consists
of excavating trial pits and t h e r e b y
cxposmg the subsoil surface thoroughly,
enabling undisturbed samples to be taken
from the sidcsiind bottom of the trial pits.
This is suitable for all types of formations,
hut should be used for small depths (up to
3 m). In the case of cuts which cannot
stand below water table, proper bracing
should be given.
b) .4UGER BORING -The auger is either
power or hand operated with periodic
removal of. the cuttings.
c) SHELL AND AUGER BORING --Both
manual and mechanized rig can be used
for vertical borings. The tool normally
consists of augers for soft 10 stiff clays,
shells for very slil’f and hard clays. and
shejls or sand pumps for sandy strata
attached to sectional boring rods.
d) WASH BORING --~ In wash boring. the soil
is loosened and removed from the horc
hole by a stream of water or drilling mud
from the lowerend of the wash pipe which
is worked u and down or rotated in the
bore hole. 9he water or mud flow carties
the soil up the annular space between the
wash.pipe and the casing. and it overflows
at ground level, where the soil in
suspension is allowed to settle in a pond
or tank and the fluid is recirculated as
required. Samples of the settled out sod
can be retained for identification
purposes but this procedure is often
unreliable. However, accurate
identification can be obtained if frequent
‘dry’ sampling is resorted to using
undisturbed sample tubes.
e) SOUNDING!PROBING
9 GEOPHYSICAL METHOD
g) PERCUSSION BORING AND ROTARY
BORING
3.2.2 N U M B E R AND DISI~OSI’I‘ION OF TRIAL
P ITS AND BORINGS
a) For a compact building site covering an
area of about 0.4 hectare, one bore hole or
trial pit in each corner and OII~ in the
centre should be adequate.
b) For smaller and less important buildings,
even one borc’hole or tnal pit in the centre
will suffice.
4 For very large areas covering industrial
and resldtntlal colonies. the geological
“I-&.5
 L

nature of the terrain will help in deciding
the number of bore holes or trial pits.
Dynamic or static cone penetration tests
may be performed at every 100 metres by
dividing the area in a grid pattern and the
number of bore holes or trial pits may be
decided by examining the variation m the
penetratron curves. The cone penetration
tests may not be possible at sites having
generally boulderous strata. In such
cases, geophysical methods should be
resorted to.
3.2.3 DEPTH OF EXPLORATION
a) Normally thedepth ofexploration should
he one and a half times the estimated
width or lower dimension of the footing
below the foundation level. Ifthe pressure
bulbs for a number of loaded areas
overlap, the whole of the area may be
considered as loaded and exploration
should be carried out up to one and a half
times the lower dimension. In weak solIs,
the exploration should be continued to a
depth at which the loads can be carried by
the stratum in question without
undesirable settlement or shear failure.
h) In any case. thedepth to which weathering
processes affect the soil should be
regarded as the minimum depth for the
exploration of sites, and this should be
taken as 2m. But where industrial
processes affect the soil characteristics,
this depth may be more.
C) In the case of pile foundation, the depth
of exploration should be equal to the
width of the structure beyond the tip of
the pile subject to a maximum depth of
IQ m.
3.3.2 TO P O G R A P H Y -,ln hilly country, the
choice between vertical openings (for
example, borings and trial pits) and
horizontal openings (for examdIe. headings)
may depiztid on the geological structure. since
steeply inclined strata are most effectively
explored by headings and horizon:al strata hy
trial pits or bormgs. Swamps and areas
overlain by waterare best explored by borings
which may’ have to be put down from a
floating craft.
3.3.3 COST - For deep exploration, ,borings
are usual. a’s deep shafts are costly. For
shallow exploration in soil, the choice
hetween pits and borings will depend on the
nature of the ground and the information
required for shallow exploration in rock; the
cost of bringing a core drill to the site will be
justified only of several holes are required;
otherwise. trral pits will be more economical.
3.4 Sampling
3.4.1 Mt r turn OF SAMPLING
a) DISTURBED SAMPLES -These are taken
by methods which modify or destroy the
natural structure of the material though
with suitable precautions the natural
moisture content can be preserved.
b) U?;UISTURBED SAMPI.ES -These are
taken by methods which preserve the
structure and properties of the material.
Such samples are easily obtained from
most rocks, but undisturbed samples of
soil can be obtained only by special
methods. Thin walled tube samples may
be used for undisturbed samples in soils
of medium strength and tests for the same
may be carried out in accordance with
good practice [ VI-2(l) 1.

3.3 Choke of Method 7 The ,choice of the cl REPRESENTATIVE SAMPLES - T h e s e

method depends on the following factors. samples have all their constituent parts
preserved. but may or may nor be
3.3.1 NAT~IRE 0F CR~UND structurally disturbed.

a) SOILS --In clayey soils. borings are 3.4.1.1 The methods usually employed are:
suitable for deep exploration and pits for
shallow exploration. Nature Type of Method of Sampling
of Sample
In sandy soils. boring is easy, but special
equipment would be required for taking Disturbed Hand samples
representative samples below the water Auger samples (for
table. Such samples can, however, be example. m clay)
readily taken in trial pits provided that, Soil Shell samples (for
where necessary, some form of ground example. in sand)
r

b)
water lowering is used.
ROCKS -Drillings are suitable in hard
1Undisturbed Hand samples
Tube samples
rocks and pits in soft rocks. Core borings Wash samples from
are suitable for the identification of types Rock percussion or
of rock, but they cannot supply data on rotary drilling
joints and fissures which can be examined
only in pits and large diameter borings. Cores

VI-J- 6 NATIONAL WIWNC CODt OV RyllA

 b) Density,
il) m.sIwRfwr) so11 S4MPI ES The weight cl Natural moisture content,
of sample generalI), required for testing
purposes is given in I’able I. d) Consistency limits.

b) i’~DI~;71~RHr:I) SOIL SAMPI fs .- The e) Consolidation characteristics.

mlnimum diameter of the sampie shall be 0 Strength characteristics. and
40 mm ullh the minimum length/diameter
r;1110 01 3. g) Sulphate, chloride and pH content of
soil and ground water.
rABl I- I WEIGH 1 OF SOlI. SAMI’1.t REQL’IRED
I4.J.Z In the case of lightly loaded
structures. the above tests are optional,
mainly depending on site conditions.

NOTE ~-Houses. flats and school buildings of not more

(2) (4)
than (u’o storey’s’may be .consrdcred as lightly loaded
kg srructures
I) So11 rden~ificatron. Cohesive solI I
n;lturA mol\lure 4. CLASSIFICATIONA N D
Conlcnt IUblb.
mechantcal IDENTIFICATION OF SOILS
an.ilysrh. and in-
dcx properties
1 4.1 The classification and identification of
Chemical WSIS San& and pawls 3 soils as materials of construction for
engineering purposes shall be in accordance
C‘ohcswe xnls and 12.5 with good practice [VI-2(3)].
I I) Compac~ron tc3l5 sand,
Grovrll~ soils 25
i
5. MATERIALS
Iii) Comprehensi\r Cohcwc soilsand 25 t o 50
cxamlnalron ol sand>
c~mklructron ma- 5.1 Cement, coarse aggregate, fine aggregate,
tenals including Gravelly soils SO IO 100
1 lime. SURKHI. steel, t i m b e r a n d other
srahdrzarron
materials that go into the construction of
foundations shall conform to the
3.4.3 R OCK S A M P L E requirements of Part V Building materials.

a) DISI URBED SAMPLES -The sludge from 5 . 2 Prorection Agoinsr Deroriorarion of

percussion borings, or from rotary Materials- Where a foundation is to be in
borings which have failed to yield a core, contact with soil, water or air, that is, in a
may be taken as a disturbed sample. condition conducive to the deterioration of
b) UNDISTURBED SAMPLES the materials of the foundation, protective
measures shall ‘be taken to minimize the
I) BL-OCK -Such samples
S A M P L ES deterioration of the materials.
taken from the rock formation shall be
dressed to a sire convenient for 52.1 CO N C R E T E- III the case of concrete
packing to about 90.X 75 X 50 mm. placed against a soil containing harmful
2) CORE SAMPLES chemicals (sulphates, chlorides), among other
protective measures, the cover may be
3.4.4 P R O T E C T I O N , HA N D L I N G A N D LABEL- increased by I5 to 40 mm over and above the
LING. O F S A M P L E S - C a r e should be one permitted for reinforcement. The total
taken in protecting, handling and subsequent cover may not, however, exceed 75 mm.
transport ofsamplesand in their full labelling,
so that samples can be received in a fit state for 5.2.f ./ Preferably concrete of higher @de
examination and testing, and can be correctly shall be used in situations subject toaggressive
recognized as coming from a specified trial pit environment.
or boring.
5.2.2 TIMBER-W~~~~ timber is exposed to
3.4.5 EXAMINATION AND TE S T I N G OC soil. it shall be treated in accordance with
SA M PL E S good practice [VI-2(4)].

3.4.5./ The following tests shall he carri- 6. TYPE OF FOUNDATIONS

ed out in accordance with good practice
[ VI-2(2) 1:
6:f Types of foundatidns Covered in this
a) Particle size distribution, section are:

PART VI STWCTURAI. DESIGN - SECTlOll 2 FOUNDATIONS

..7
VI-l-
a) S H A L L O W F O U N D A T I O N S
I) Simple spread foundations, such as pad
or spread footings, strip footings;
2) Raft foundations; and
3) Pier foundations.
b) PI L E FOUNDAJIONS
I) Driven cast in-situ concrete piles,
2) Bored cast in-siru concrete piles,
3) Driven precast concrete piles,
4) Under-reamed concrete piles. and
5) Timber piles.
7. SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS
7.0 Design Information-- For the satis-
factory design of foundations. the
following information is necessary:
a) The type and condition of the soil or rock
to which the foundation transfers the
loads;
b) The general layout of the columns and
load-bearing walls showing the estimated
loads, including moments and tocques due
to various loads (dead load, live load, wind
load; seismic load) coming on the founda-
tion units;
4 The allowable bearing pressure of the soils:
4 The changes in ground water level,
drainage and flooding conditions and also
the chemical conditions of the subsoil
water, particularly with respect to its
sulphate content;
d The behaviour of the buildings adjacent to
the site, the type and depths of foundations
anu the bearing pressure assumed: and
Seismic zone of the region.
7. I Design Considerarions
7. I .I D ESIGN L OADS -The foundation shall
be proportioned for the followin:
combination of loads:
a) Dead load t live load; and
b) Dead load t live load + wind load or
Seismic loads, whIchever is critical.
Nolt’ I -For dead. live. wind. scismbc and other loads.
SIP PNI VI Structural design. Secrlon I 1.oads.
NOTE 2 Fur coarw yralned ~011s. scttlcmcnts shall k
estimated corresponding to 7././(b) and for tine graincd
soil, settlement shall be estimated coircsponding to
permanent loads only.
7.1.2 BE AR ING P R E S S UR E - T h e a l l o w a b l e
bearing pressure shall be taken aseither of the
following, whichever is less:
a) The safe bearing capacity on the basis of
shear strength characteristics of soil, or
b) The allowable bearing pressure that the
soil can take without exceeding the
permissible settlement (see 7.1.3).
8
Vi-l-
7.1.2.1 RI-AHING C A P A C I T Y B Y CALCOLA-
TION -Where the physical characteristics of
the soil are available. that is, cohesion, angle
of internal friction, density. etc, the bearing
capacitjl shall be calculated from stability
considerations of shear: factor of safety of 2.5
shall be adopted for safe bearing capacity. T he
effect of inlerfcrence of different foundations
should be tdkcn into acpount. The procedure
for determining the ultimate bearing capacity
and allowable bearing pressure of shallo&
foundations based on shcnr and allowdbie
settlement crrteria hhall be in accordance with
g o o d prxtlcc [ VI-I(5) 1.
7.1.2.2 S A F E B E A R I NG CA P AC ITY - For the
design of foundations of lightly loaded
structures and for a preliminary design of any
structure, the safe bearing capacities as given
in Table 2 may be assumed in the absence of
test results at thediscretionof theengineer-in-
charge.
7.1.2.3 FIELD hlETHOD FOR DETERMINING
ALLOWABLE B E A R I N G PRESSCIRE - W h c r c
appropriate, plate load tests can bc performed
and allowable pressure determined as per
g o o d p r a c t i c e [ VI-2(6) 1. The allowable
bearing pressure for sandy soils may also bc
obtained by loading tests. k hen kuch ~csts
cannot be done, the allowable hcarlrlg
pressure for sands rndy hc drtcrmincd using
penetration test.
7.1.2.4 Where the bearing materials directly
under a foundation over-lie a stratum having
smaller presumptive safe bearing capactty,
these smaller values shall not be exceeded at
the level of such ‘stratum.
7.1.2.5 CFFECTOF WINDANDSEISMIC‘ FOKC‘F
Where the bearing pressure due to wind is less
than 25 percent of that due to dead and live
loads, it may be neglected in design. Where
this exceeds 25 percent foundations may he so
proportioned that the pressure due to
combined dead. live and wind loads does not
exceed the allowable bearing pressure by
more than 25 percent.
When earthquake forces are included, the
permissible increase in allowable bearing
pressure of pertaining soil shall be as given in
Table 3, depending upon the type of
foundation of the struct,ure.
7.1.2.6 B E A R I N G CAPACIlY OI- B U R I E D
STRATA If the base of a foundation is close
enough to a strata of lower bearing capacity,
the lattcl may fail due to excess pressure
transmitted to it from above. Care should be
taken to see that the pressure transmitted to
the lower strata IS wlthln the prescribed safe
limits. When the footings are closely spaced,
 TABLE 2 SAFE BEARING CAPACITY

(Clause 7.1.2.2)

T YPE OF Rocrs/!So~ts S AFE B E A R I N G R EMARKS

CAPACITY

(2) (3) (4)

kN/m’
a) Rocks .
Rocks (hard) without lamination and defects. for 3 240 -
example, granite, trap and dioritc
Lammated rocks, for example, stone and limestone I 620
in sound condition
Restdual deposits of shattered and broken bed 880 -
rock and hard shale. cemented material
Soft rock WI -
b) Non-cohesrve sot/s
Gravel. sand and gravel, compact and offering 440 (SW Note 2)
high resrstance to penetratron when excavated
by tools
Coarse sand, compact and dry 440 Dry means that the ground water
level is at a depth not kss than
the width of foundation below
the base of the foundation
Medmm sand, compact and dry 245 _

f me sand, silt (dry lumps easily pulverized by the 150 -

fingers)
Loose gravel or sand-gravel mixture, loose coarse 245 (See NOIC 2)
IO mcdmm sand, dry

fmc sand. loose and dry loo -

c) Cohrsrvr sods
Soft shale. hard or stiff clay m deep bed. dry 440 This group is ruaceptibk to lonp
term consolidation aattkmcnt
Medium clay, readily indented with a thumb nail 245 -
Moist clay and sand-clay mixture which can be Is0 -
indented with strong thumb pressure
Soft clay indented with moderate thumb pressure IO0
Very soft clay whtch can be penetrated several 50 -
ccntimctrcs with the thumb
Black cotton so11 or other shrinkable or cxpanstvc Sn Note 3. TO be detenniMd after
clay in dry condition (50 percent saturatton) invutigation

d) Pear
Peat S~V Nores 3 and 4. To be detcr-
mmed after investigation

c) Made-up ground
Folk or made-up ground See Notes 2 and 4. To be dcter-
mined after investigation

NOTE I - Values Itstcd in the table. arc from shear consrdcratron only.

Nort 2 -Values arc very much rough for the follovvmg reasons:
a) Effect of charactcrtstics of foundattons (that IS, effect of depth, width, shape. roughness, etc) hu not been conridered.
b) Effect of range of so11 propenter (that is, angle of frictional resistance. cohesion. water tabk,denrity, ete) hat not bacn
considered.
c) Effect of cccentrtctty and mdtcatton of loads has not been considered.

Nort 3 For non<ohcstvc soils. the values Itsted m the table shall be reduced by SO ptrant if the water, table is abon or
near the base of footing

No I F 4 .- -Compactness 01 non-cohcsrvc SOIIS may be determmcd by drivmg a cone of 65 mm dia and 60 a x angle by a
hammer of 65 kg fallmg from 75 cm. II corrected number ofblows(M)for 3Ocmpenctration islessthan IO, t R
esoiliscalkd
loose; if H lies between IO and 30, II is medium. and pi more than 30, the soil is calkd dense.

P A R T n STRUCTURAL. O~slcN SRcflON 1 F0uNO~ll0Ns n-29

 TABLE 3 PERMISSIBLE INCREASE IN ALLOWABLE BEARING PRESSURE OR RESISTANCE OF SOILS

fClQusP 7.1.2.5)

SL T YPE OF SOIL MAINLY PERMISSIOI E INCREASF IN A I l OWABI F BEAPING PRf w’Rf PEW FST

No. Co~stlmNG THE

/x
Foundation /
’ Piles Pass- PIks nor Raft Combined Isolated Well ’
ingThrough Covered Foun- o r lsolarcd RCC. Foot- Founda-
Any Sod under datlon RC‘C ing Without IIOIIS
b u t Ratmg col (3) Foormg 1.ic B e a m s
o n So11 wIIh or I:nrem-
Type l T IC Beams forced Strip
Foundations

(1) (2) (3) (4)

i) 7)~ I Rock or Hard Sods -Well 50

graded gravels and sand-gravel mix-
tures with or without clay binder, and
clayey sands poorly ded or sand-
clay mixtures (GB. Cc, SB. SW and
SC) having N above 30. where N is
the standard penetration value

ii) Type II Medium Soils - All~so~ls wirb so 2s m 25 25 25

N between IO and 30 and poorly
graded sands or granlly sands with
little or no fines (SP) with N > 15

iii) Type III Soft Soils ~ All SOIIS other 50 25 50 25 25

than SP with N< IO

N OTE I -The allowable bearing prrssurr shall be determined in accordance with [ VI-?(5) ]

NOTE 2 -If any increase in bearing pressure has already been pcrmilted for forces ocher than seismic forcer Ihe total
increase in allowable bearing pressure when seismic force is also Included shall not exceed the Ilrnltq spcclflrd ahtrve

NOTE 3 -In the caac of submerged loose sands and soils falling under classdicarlon SP wtth standard penctrarmn value\
less Iban Ibe valws spceificd in Note 5 below. the vibrations caused by eanhquakc may cause IlqucflcaIlon or ~XCCQI~C
total and differential scttkmcnts. In important projects, this aspect of the problem need be mvcsugarcd and approprldlc
methods ofcompaction or stabilization adopted lo achieve sunable N. Alternatively. deep pile foundation may he pro\ l&d
and taken to depths well into the layers which are not hkcly lo liquefy.

Non 4 -The p&s should be designed for lateral loads ncglcctmg lateral reslstjlnce of soil layers llahlc IO llquef\

N OTE 5 -Desirable field values of IV are as follows.

Zones III. IV and V I5 Sre ParI VI Slructural Design.
Zones I and II IO SectIon I Loads
1
-

the pressure transmitted to the underlying soil 2) Consolrdatmn mcludmg seconda-1

will overlap. In such cases, the pressure in the compression.
overlapped zones will have to be considered. .7) CiROl'YI> WA I t.K I.ou'f.R~\c; SptTt-
With normal foundations, it is sufficiently ally repealed lowering and raising of
accurate to estimate the bearing pressure on water level in loose granular soils tend
the udderlying layers by assuming the load to 10 compact the so11 and cause
be spread at a slope of 2 (vertical) to I settlement of the footing< Prolonged
(horizontal). lowering of the water table in f’ine
grained swls may introduce mtlement
7.1.3 SE T TLEMENT ~- The permissible values because of the extrusmn of w;lter from
of total and differential settlement for a given the voids. Pumping w;IIcr or dr;lining
type of structure may be taken as given in water by tiles or pipes Irom granular
Table 4. Total settlements of foundation due soils without an adequate mat 01 tlitcr
to net imposed loads shall be estimated in material as protectjon may. In ;1 period
accordance with good practice[ VI-2(7)]. The of time, carry a.sufliclent aniount 01
Yellowing causes responsible for producing fine particles away from the soil and
the settlement shall be investigated and taken cause settlement.
into account: 4) Seasonal swelling and shrinkage of
a) CAUSES OF SETTLEMENT expansive clays.
5)Ground movement on earth slopes. for’
I) Elastic compression of the foundation example surface eroslon, slow creep
and the underlying ‘soil. or landslides.

Jo NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 T A B L E 4 MAXIMIJM AKD DIFFERENTIAL SET?I.EMEF;TS OF BI!II.DINtiS

(C/au%- 7.1.3)

JSOI ATED Fotrsil~r KI.I RAEI Fo~NI>ArIONS

/ Yf I
Sand and Hard Clay Plasttc Clay Sand and Hard Clay .I’lastic Clay
1. A h A
r- r ?
Maximum Differential Angula? M a x i m u m Difkrentlai Angula? Maximum Dillerrntial Angular’ fMaximum Dilkrential Angular ’
seltkmrnr s e t t l e m e n t d i s t o r t i o n settlement settkmeni drstortron ~rttkmcnt scttkmcnt dirtonion se~tlerneo~ settlerrtcni distortiun

(2) I31 (4 (51 (6) (7) #I (9) (JOI (111 (12) 113) (141
mm mm mm mm

For steel structure M 0003 3L 1/.luil 50 0.003 3L I/300 75 0.003 31 I/.W 1011 II cJ0.l !I I/?~10

iiJ For remforced concrct~ structure 50 00015L i/m 75 00015L IlhM, 75 iJ.002 L I /jw 100 O.lUJ2L l/5011

iii) For muitistorey buildings

a) RC or steel frame buildings with 60 0.0021 I ,’ 500 75 0.0021. I;500 75 0002 5L I i 400 I25 0.003 il. I 300
panel walls
b) For load bearing brick walls
i) L,iH=2*, @I 0.000 2L 15ooo 6tj o.alo 2L - Not likely to be encnuntered +
ii) L/H = 7 60 0.000 4 L 1-2 5W 60 o.tmo 4L

iv) Fur water towers sod rdos 50 0001 SL l/b66 75 OIlI! JL l/M 100 0002 5L lj4(wI 125 tYtKl2 5L l/Joa

NEIL -7hc values given WI the t~hk may be taken only as I gurdc and the pcrmisHbk uttkmcnt and differential settlement in each ease should bc dceidcd *IS per rcquircmcnts of thc.doigncr

L d~nu~cs the kngth of ddkcted part of waft) raft or ccntrc-to-otntm dtstxnrt bctvccn columns.
H dsnotcs the hcrght 01 wall lrom luundatron~fooung

*Linear interpolation k permissible between ratros of 2 and 7, column 2.

a I
 6) Other causes, such as adjacent
excavation, mining, subsidence and
underground erosion.
b) CAUSES OF DIFFERENTIAL SHTLEMESTS
I) Geologic and physical non-uniformity
or anomalies in type, structure,
thickness. and density of the soil
med.um (pockets of sand in clay, clay
lenses in sand? wedge like soil strata,
that is. lenses m soil), an admixture’ of
organic matter. peat, IlllId;
2) Non-uniform pressure distribution
from foundation to the soil due to non-
uniform loading and incomplete
loading of the foundations;
3) Water regime at the construction site.
4) Overstressing of soil at adjacent site by
heavy structures built next to light
ones;
5) Overlap of stress distribution in soil
from adjoining structuresj
Unequal ex ansion of the soil due to
6)
excavation Por footing;
7) N o n - u n i f o r m d e v e l o p m e n t
extrusion settlements; and
8) Non-uniform structural disruptions or
disturbance of soil due to freezing and
thawing. swelling and softening and
drying of soils.
7.1.4 DE P T H O F F O U N D A T I O N S - T h e d e p t h
to which foundations shall becarried depends
upon:
a) the securing of adequate bearing
capacity:
b) the depth of shrinkage and swelling in the
case of clayey soils, due to seasonal
weather changes which are likely to cause
appreciable movements;
d the depth of frost pnetration in the case
of fine,rand and s&s;
4 distinct possibility of excavation close by,
and
e) depth of ground water table.
7.1.4.1 A l l f o u n d a t i o n s sh’all extend to a
depth of at least 50 cm below natural ground
level. On rock or such other weather-resisting
natural ground. removal of the top soil may be
Lall that IS r e q u i r e d .
7.1.4.2 Where there are conditions adjoining
to the subsoil on which the building is to be
erected, which are likely to impair the stability
of the building. the foundations of the same
shall be taken beyond the detrimental
influence of such cunditlons or suitable works
s h a l l he, constructed for the pruposc o f
shielding from their cffec15.
4 t.OOTINGS OX SI.OIBES -- Where footings
are to be founded along a slope or near
the edge of a slope, the distance of the
sloping surface at the base level of the
footing to the centrc of thz footing should
not be nearer than twicrl the width of%he
footing for normal loadings. W h e n
footings are heavily loaded, ‘a slope
stability analysis is csiential. When the
distance of the slope from the cdgc 01 the
footing has to be ncarcr than prescribed
above. a specialist in the field should bc
consulted.
b) FOOltNGS A.1 I)lt-tt;KIINl I Ci’FI Is
When adjacent footings arc to be placed
at different levels, the distance between
the edges of footings shall bc such as to
prevent undesirable overlapping of
stresses in ml and disturbance of the soil
under the higher footing due to the
excavation for the lower footing.
cl T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s of 7./.4.3(a) and
of
7.1.4.3(b) shall not apply under the
following conditions:
I ) Where adequate provision is made for
t h e l a t e r a l suppon (such as with
retaining walls) of the material
supporting the higher footings.
2) When the factor of safety of the
foundation soil against shear is not less
than four.
7.1.5 SH R I N K I N G A N D S W E L L I N G CHARAC-
TFRlSTlCS -In soils like clays which possess
shrinking and swelling characteristics, it is
necessary to place the foundation bearing at
such a depth that the effects of seasonal
changes are not significant; or to make the
foundation capable of eliminating the
undesirable effects due to relative movement.
7.1.6 FROST A C T I O N - Unless the
foundations are specially designed against
frost action, the bearing surface of the
foundation shall be below the level of
otential.damagc from frost, except when it
I&Jrs directly on rock not susceptible to
damage from frost.
7.1.7 A LTERATIO N S D URING C ONSTRUC -
TION
a) Where during construction the soil or
rock to which foundation is to transfer
loads is found not to be the type or in the
condition assumed, the foundation shall
be redesigned and constructed for the
 existing type or conditions and the
Authority notified.
b) Where a foundation bears on gravel, sand
or silt and where the highest level of the
ground water is or likely to be higher than
an elevation defined by bearing surface
minus the width of the footing, the
bearing pressure shall be altered in
accordance with Note 3 in Ta’ble ?._
4 Where thiz foundation has not been
placed or located as indicated earlier or is
damaged. or bears on a soil whose
properties may be adversely changed by
climatic and construction conditions, the
error shall be corrected, the damaged
portion repaired or the design capacity of
the affected foundation recalculated to
the satisfaction of the Authority.
d) Where a foundation is placed, and if the
results of a load test so indicate, the
design of the foundation shall be
modified to ensure structural stability of
the same.
7.2 .Timple Spread Foundations
72.0 Footings shall be provided under walls,
pilasters, columns, piers, fire places and
chimneys that bear on soil or rock, except that
footings may be omitted under piers or
monolithic concrete walls if the safe load
hearing capacity of the soil or rock is not
exceeded.
7.2.1 Detailed, design is not required for
spread foundations for light structures, as
normal requirements, such as minimum width
specified in 7.2.2.1; thickness of footing
specified in 7.2.2.2 will generally be sufficient
to bring the bearing pressure within the safe
limit. However, in the case of soils having very
low bearing strengths, it may be necessary to
design the width of the footing. Essentially,
the design provisions specified in 7.1 shall
apply.
NOTE - Iiouscs. flats
and school buildings of not more
than two storcys may be considered as lightly loaded
structurc3.
7.2.2 D IMENSIONS OF FWTING
7.2.2.1 The width of footing should not be
less than that given by:
B=2W+3Ocm
where
B = width at base in cm, and
W = width of support wall in cm.
73.2.2 The angle of spread of the load from
the wall Bruce to the outer edge of the ground
?AaT VI SrRucTuIAc DmIak-scsntm 2 F0uNDAnms
bearing shall not exceed the following values.
In brickwork I/Z horizontal to
and stone I vertical
masonry
In lime concrete 2/3 horizontal to
I vertical
In cement I hon?ontal ttr
concrete I vertical
When the spread of the foundat ion is only on
one side, as in the case of party walls. the effect
of the eccentricity on cont;lct pressure
distribution shall he tnken into account.
7.2.2.3 THICKNFSS Of-' FOOTING - The
thickness of different types of footings. ii not
deGpncd according to 7.1. should bc a+ given
in Tahlc 5.
7 . X FO~~NDA'I'IONO~: FII t.r,o-1!1’ GKO~!NI).-
In this case, foundaribn shall be taken to a
firm ground or strengthening ol’ lhe ground
may he done, whichever is economical.
7.2.4 Where the foundation can hc separated
into two independent units. a slipiolnt may be
i n t r o d u c e d t o t a k e c u r e 01 unequal
scttlemcnts.
7.2.2 t..AsD SLIP AREA -~ On a sloping site,
spread foundation shall be on a horizontal
hearing and stepped. At all changes.of levels,
they shall be lapped at the steps for a distance
dt !east equal to the thickness of the
t’oundation or twice the height of the step,
whichrvrr is greater. The steps shall not be of
grcatcr height than the thickness of the
foundation unless special precautions are
taken. On sloping ground on clay soils, there
is always a tendency for the upper layers of
soil to nrove.downhill, depending on type of
soil, the angle of slope, climatic conditions,
etc. Special precautionsare necessary to avoid
such a failure.
7.2.6 In continuous wali foundations,
adequate reinforcement shall be provi;ded
wherever there occurs an abrupt change in the
magnitude of the load or there is a variation in
the ground support. In thecase of foundations
for masonry it is preferably to have the steps in
multiples of the thickness of the masonry unit,
namely. brick, block, etc.
7.2,7 For detailed information .regarding
preparation of ground work, reference may be
made to good practice [VI-Z(8)].
7.3 Ra/l Foundariont
7.3.1 D ESIGN C ONSIDERATIONS - D e s i g n
provisions given in 7.1 shall generally ‘apply.
VI.23
 7ABL.E 5 THICKNFSS OF FOOTINGS
((‘iau.w 7.I.Z.J.)
51 NV l.YPF IJF f+,Oli\(,\ .1’Hil LIhIhh Ot F00TlhCa (Mm) KEMAKW
(IJ (2) (3) (4)

i) Mav-mry 3) 25 cm Select the g r e a t e r af the M-J

h) T wwc rhc maximum projec- values
thou from Ihe lace 01 the
wall

b) I‘wice Ihe maximum uffwt For footings restiny’on soil

in a *tepped tootmg

For lootlnp5 restrng on top01 pile

_~__~_ _ ------- -._-

?.j./.g R I G I D I T Y O F FOI NL),4~llONS - -

7.J.l,n r)IMt:\sIohAI. t*4Kf4vr I t I<S The
SIX a n d >hape ol the foundntlon adopted
alt~t the mngnltude 01 sub?;-ade m o d u l u s
and long term del’ornlation ut the supporting
s o i l a n d this, in turn. Influences ;he
dlstrlhut~on 01 contact pressure. l‘hls itspcct
needs to-be taken into consideration in the
3llill\:~l>
7..? 1 . 7 CC‘C‘EhllKICIl~Y O F LOADI\C -A rnlt
gcncrally oqqles the entire a r e a o f ’ t h e
Milding and otten It is not feasible and rather
Uneconomical to proportwn it culnciding thC
ccntroid of’ the raft with the line ofaction of
the resultant lorce. In such cabes, the effect 01
t h e esscntricit) on contact pressure
distribution shall be taken intoconsideratibn.
Rigidity of the foundation tends to iron out
uneven deformation and thereby modifies the
contact pressure distribution. High order of
rigidity is characterlrcd t-b, long momrnIs and
relatlvcly small, uniform settlements. A rigid
foundation may also generate high swondary
stresges in structural members. The effect of
rigidity shall be tahen into account in analysts.
7.3.1.10 KIGIDII~~ O F T H E S U P E R SIRIJC-
TURF. --~ Free response of the foundations to
suil deformation is restricted by the rigidity of
the superstructure. In the extreme case, a stiff
structure may force a flexible foundation to
behave as rigid. This aspect shall be
c o n s i d e r e d t o evaluate the validity of the
contact pressure distrtbutlun.
7.3.1.11 MODtlLllS O F ELASlICIIY A N D
MODtJLUS O F StlBGKADE KtACllON
Appendix A enumerates the methods of
determination of modulus of elasticity (E,).

VI.?- 14 NAIIDNAL BUlLMNC CODE OF INDIA


The modulus of subgrade reaction (K)
may be determined in accrodance with
Appendix B.
7.3.2 NE C E S S A R Y I NFORMATION - T h e
following information is necessary for a
satisfactory design and construction of a raft
foundation:
Site plan showing the location of- the
proposed as well as the neighbouring
structures;
b) Plan and cross-sections of building
showing different floor levels, shafts and
openings, etc, layout of load’ bearing
walls, columns, shear walls, etc;
cl Loading conditions, preferably shown
on a schematic plan indicating
combination of design loads transmitted
to the foundation;
4 Information relating to geological
history of the area, seismicity of the area,
hydrological information indicating
ground water conditions and its seasonal
variations, etc;
e) Geotechnical information giving sub-
surface profile with stratification details,
engineering properties of the founding
strata (namely, index properties,
effective shear parameters determined
under appropriate drainage conditions,
compressibility characteristics, swelling
properties, results of field tests like static
and dynamic penetration tests, pressure
meter tests, etc); and
A review of the performance of similar
structure, if any, in the locality.
7.3.3 C HOICE OF R AFT TYPE
7.3.3.1 For fairly small and uniform column
spacing and when the supporting soil is not
too compressible a flat concrete,slab having
uniform thickness throughout (a true mat) is
most suitable (see Fig. IA).
7.3.3.2 A slab may be thickened under heavy
loaded columns to provide adequate strength
for shear and negative moment. Pedestals
may also be provided in such cases (see
Fig. I B).
7.3.3.3 A slab and beam type of raft is likely
to be more economical for large column
spacing and unequal column loads
particularly when the su porting soil is very
compressive (see Fig.cp1 and ID).
7.3,3.4 For very heavy structures, provision
of cellular raft or rigid frames consisting of
slabs and basement walls may be considered.
P A R T W S T R U C T U R A L DESIGN -SsLCllDN 1 FDUNDATIONI
.
SECTION AA SECTION 8Eh
IA Flat Plate IB Flar Plate Thickened
Under Columns
SECU~N cc SECTION DO
tC Two-way Beam ID Flat Plate
end Slab
with Pedestals
Fig. I Common Tcpes of Raji Foundation
7.3.1 ME T H O D S OF A N A L Y S I S - T h e
essential task in the analysis of a raft
foundation is the determination of the
distribution of contact pressure underneath
the raft which is a romplex function of the
rigidity of the superstructure, the supporting
soil and the raft itself, and cannot be
determined with exactitude, except in very
simple cases. This necessitates a number of
simplyfying assumptions to make the
problem amenable to analysis. Once the
distribution of contact pressure is
determined, design bending moments and
shears can be computed based on statics. The
methods of analysis suggested are
distinguished by the assumptions involved.
Choice of a particular method should be
governed by the validity of the assumptions
in the particular case.
7.3.4.1 H IGID FblJNDATlON(CONVENTlONAL
METHOD ) -This method is based on the
assumption of linear distribution of contact
pressure. The basic assumptions of this
method are:
a) the foundations rigid relative to the
supporting soil and the compressible soil
layer is relatively shallow; and
b) the contact pressure variation is assumed
as planar, such that the centroid’of the
contact pressure coincides with the line
of action of the resultant force of all
loads acting on the foundation.
vl-B-w

This method may be used when either of the
following conditions is satisfied:
a) The structure behaves as rigid (due to tht
combined action of the superstructure
and the foundation) with relative
stiffness factor K > 0.5 (for evaluation of
K see Appendix C); and
b) The column spacing is less than 1.75/h
(see Appendix C).
The raft is analysed as a whole in each of the
two perpendicular directions. The contact
pressure distribution is determined by the
procedure outlined in Appendix D. Further
analysis is also based on statics.
In the case of uniform conditions when the
variations in adjacent column loads and
column spacings do not exceed 20 percent of
the higher value, the raft may be divided into
perpendicular strips of wi,dths equal to the
distance between midspans and each strip
may be analysed as an independent beam
with known column loads and known
contact pressures. Such beams . will not
normally satisfy statics due to shear transfer
between adjacent strips and design may be
based on suitable moment coefficients, or by
moment distribution.
N O T E O n sofl soils, lor e x a m p l e , n o r m a l l y
consolidated clays. peat, muck. organic S~IIS. etc. the
assumpttons mvolved in UK conventional method arc
commonly justified.
7.3.4.2 FLEXIBLE FOUNDATION
a) S I M P L I F I E D M E T H O D-In
this method,
it is assumed that the subgrade consists
of an infinite array of individual elastic
springs each of which is not affected by
others. The spring constant is equal to
the modulus of subgrade reaction (k).
The contact pressure at any point under
the raft is, therefore, linearly
proportional to the settlement at the
point. Contact pressure may be
determined as given in Appendix E. This
method may be used wheri all the
following conditions :irc satisfied:
The structure Icombmed action of
superstructure and raft) may be
considered as llexiblt (relative
stiffness factor K > 0.5, see
Appendix C).
Variation in adjacent column load
does not exceed 20 percent of the
higher value.
b) GENERAL METHOD -For the general
case of a flexible foundation not
satisfying tho requirements of (a), the
method based on closed form solution of
“IP
3
elastic plate theory may be used. This
method is based on the theory of plates
on winkler foundation which takes into
account the restraint on deflection of a
point provided by continuity of the
foiritdation in orthogonal foundation.
The distribution of deflection and
contact pressure on the raft due to a
column load is determined ,by the plate
theory: Since the effect of a column load
on an elastic foundation is damped out
rapidly. it is possible to determine the
total effect at a point of all column loads
within the zone of influence by the
met hod of superimposition. The
computation of effect at any point may
be restricted to columns of two adjoining
bays in aI1 directions. The procedure is
outlined in Appendix F.
NOTE -One of the recent neneral methods based on the
above menuoned theory i;numerical analysis by either
fmitc difference method or finite element method. This
method is used for accurate analysis of the raft
foundation. The details of this method could be cove4
at a later stage.
7.4 Pier Foundations
7.4.1 D ESIGN C ON S I D ER A T I O N S
7.4.1.1 C;f-h;FRAl The design of concrete
piers shall conform to the requirements for
column5 specified in Part VI Structural
design, Section 5 Concrete. If the bottom of
the pier is to be belled so as to increase its load
carrying capacity. such bell shall be at least
30 cm thick at its edge. The sides shall slope at
an angle 01’ not less than 45” with the horl-
7ontal. T-he least permissible dimension shall
be 60 cm. irrespectiveof the pier beingcircular,
square or rectangular. Piers of smaller dimen-
sions II permIttad shall he designed as piles
(.WP 8 and 9).
7.4.1.2 PLAIN CONCRETE PIERS -The height
of the pier shall not exceed 6 times the
leastlateral dimension. When the height
exceeds 6 times the least lateral dimension,
buckling effect shall be taken into account,
but in no case shall the height exceed 12 times
the least lateral dimension.
When the height exceeds 6 times the least
lateral dimension, the deduction in allowable
stress shall be given by the following formula:
fc' -ji
where
/: = reduced allowable strcu,
fc = allowable stress,
H= height of pier, and
D = least Metal dimension.
WAllOWAL B U I L D I N G MDE OF I N D I A
N OTE --The above provision rball not apply for picn
where the least Lateral dimenrion ir 1.8 m or greater.
7.4.1.3 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIERS -
When the height of the pier exceeds 18 times
its least dimension, the maximum load shall
not exceed:
P= P (15-3$D
where
> needed structurally or due to aggressive Site
P’= permissible load;
P = permissible load when
calculated as axially loaded
short column;
H= height of the pier measured
from top of bell, if any, to
the level of cut-off of pier;
and
U= least lateral dimension of
pier.
8 . D R I V E N , BORE11 CAS I IN-&/TIl
CONCRETE PII.ES
8 . 0 General ~~ Piles find application in
foundations to transfer load ,from a structure
to competent sub-surface strata having
adequate load bearing capacity. The load
t r a n s f e r mechanism from a pi!e t o t h e
surrounding ground is comfillcated and is yet
to be fully understood, although application
of pile foundations IS in practice over. many
decades. Broadly, piles transfer axial loads
either substantially by friction along their
shafts and/or substantially by the end
bearing. Construction of a pile foundation
requires a careful choice of piling system,
depending upon the sub-soil conditions, the
load characteristics of a structure and the
limitation ,of total settlement, differential
settlements and a n y o t h e r s p e c i a l
requirement of a project.
8.1 Marerial
8.I.f CO N C R E T E - T h e minlmum g r a d e o f
concrete to be used shall not be less than
Ml5.
8.1.1. I FOR DRIVEN CAST IN-SITUPILE The
minimum grade of concrete shall be M20 and
minimum cement content shall be 400 kg/ ml
in all conditions. For piles up to 6 m deep,
M I5 concrete with minimum cement content
of 350 kg/m3 without provisions for under-
water concreting may be used under favoura-
ble non-aggressive sub-soil conditions and
where concrete of higher strength is not
needed structurally or due to aggressive site
conditions. The concrete in aggressive sur-
roundings due to presence of sulphates, etc.
and the concrete mix shall conform to the
requirements specified in Part VI Structural-
Design, Section 5 Concrete.
PART W3 STIUCTUIAL DLSICN -SICTlON 1 F O U N D A T I O N S
8, I. 1.2 FOR BORED C AST I N- SITU C O N C R E T E
PILE - The minimum grade of concrete shall
be M20 and the cement content shall be 400
kg/m’ in all conditions. For piles up to 6 m
deep, M25 concrete with minimum cement
content of 350 kg/m3 without provision for
underwater concreting may be used under
favourable non-aggressive sub-soil conditions
and where concrete of higher strength is not
conditions. The requirements of concrete in
aggressive surroundings due to presence of
sulphates, etc, and the concrete mix shall con-
form to Part VI Structural design, Section 5
Concrete.
8. J .2 ST E EL RE I NF O R C E M E N T - Steel
reinforcement shall conform to any one of
(he types’ of steel specified in Part Vl
Structural design, Section 5 Concrete.
8 . 2 Design Considerarions-- P i l e
foundation shall be designed in such a way
that the load from the structure it supports
can bc transmitted to the soil without causing
any soil failure and without causing such
settlement, differential or total under
permanent/ transient loading as may result in
srructural damage and/or functlonal distress.
l-he p i l e s h a f t s h o u l d habe a d e q u a t e
structural capacity to withstand all loads
(vertical, axial or otherwise) and moments
which arc to be transmitted to the subsoil.
NOTE-when working mar existing ~tructurcs, cam
shall be taken IO amd any damage IO structures.
8.2.1 SOIL R E S I S T A N C E - T h e b e a r i n g
capacity of a pile is dependent on the
properties of the soil in which it is embedded.
A x i a l l o a d f r o m a p i l e i s normally
transmitted to the soil through skin friction
along the shaft and end bearing at its tip. A
horizontal load on a vertical pile is
transmitted to the subsoil primarily by
horizontal subgrade reaction generated in the
u p p e r p a r t of the shaft. A single pile is
normally designed to carry load along its
axis. The transverse load bearing capacity of
a single pile depends on the soil reaction
developed and the struitural capacity of rhe
shaft under bending. in case the horizontal
loads are of higher magnitude, it is essential
to investigate the phenomena using principles
of horizontal subsoil reaction a d o p t i n g
appropriate values ior horizontal modulus of
[he soil. Alternatively. piles may be installed
in rake. The feasibility of constructing bored
piles in rake under a given subsoil condition
should, howcvcf. be examined critically.
8.2.1.1 The ultimate bearing capacity of a
pile may be cstlmated approximately by
means of a static formula on the basis of ~011
test results, or by using a dynamic pile
formula using data obtained during driving
the pile or by test loading. The settlement of
pile obtained at safe load workrng load from
17
vu’.
load test results on a smgle pile shall not be
directly used in forecasting the settlement of
a structure unless experience from similar
foundations on its settlement behaviour is
available. The average settlement may be
assessed on the basis of subsoil data and
loading details of the structure as a whole
using the principle of soil mechanics.
82.1.2 STATIC FORMULA -By using static
formula, the estimated value of the ultimate
bearing capacity of a typical pile IS obtained,
t h e a c c u r a c y b e i n g dependent o n t h e
reliability 6f the formula and the reliability of
the soil properties for various strata
available. The soil properties to be adopted
in such a formula may be assigned from
results of laborarory tests and field tests as
per good pracrlce [Vl-2( I)]. Two separate
static formulae commonly applicable for
cohcsiti and non-cohesive soils arc indicated
in Appendix G, to serve only as a guide.
Other alternative formulae may be
applicable. depending on the subsoil
characteristics and method of installation of
piles.
X2.1.3 IJYNAMIC t-0KMI’I.A t-or driven
piles in non-cohesive soils. such a\ gravei~.
coarse sand ahd other similar dopo$its. ;\I)
approximate value 01. the bcarlng cclpacitl
may bc determined by a dynamic pile t’ormula.
The Hiley formula is one of the rcliablc lor-
mulae and is most commonly used for con-
crete piles. Dynamic formulae arc not dlrcctlv
applicable to cohesive soil deposits. such a;
saturated silts and clays, as the resistance to
impact of the toe of thecasing will beexagger-
ated by their low permeability. while the Iric-
tional resistance on the sides is reduced bv
lubrication. If as a result of test loadings on g
given area a suitable coeffi’cient can beapplied
to a dynamic formula, the results may then be
considered as reasonable.
TEST RESULTS-The ultimate
8.2.1.4 L O A D
load capacity. of a single pile is determined
with reasonable accuracy from test loading as
per good practice [VI-2(9)]. The load test on
a pile shall not be carried out earlier than
four weeks from the time of casting the pile.
8.2.2 N EGATIVE S KIN F R I C T I O N O K D R A G-
D O W N F O R C E When a soil stratum,
through which a pile shaft has Fnetrated Into,
an underlying hard stratum. compresses as a
result of either its being unconsolidated or its
being under a newly placed fill orasa result ot
remoulding a dragdown force is generated
along the pile shaft up to a point in depth
where the surrounding soil does not move
downwards relatlke to the p~lc shalt. Kecognl-
tion of the existence ot’ \uch a phcnomcnon
shall bc madeand a suitahlc reduction shall bc
m a d e t o t h e allowable loid. where
approptiatF.
6.2.3 ST R U C T UR A L C A P A C I T Y - T h e p i l e s
shall have the necessary structural strenpih to
t r a n s m i t th,e l o a d s i m p o s e d o n tilrm
ultimately to the solI.
8.2.3.I A X I A L C A P AC I TY - Where a p i l e i s
fully embedded in the soil (having an
undrained shear strength not less than 0.1
kgf/cm’) its axial carting capacity is not
hmited by its strength as a long column.
Where piles are installed through very weak
soils (having an undrained shear strength less
than 0.1 kgf; cm’), special constderation shall
be given to determine whether the shaft
would behave as a long column or not; if
necessary suitable rcductlons shall be made
in its structural strcngrh considering t h e
buckling phenomenon.
When the finlshcd pile projects above ground
level and is not secured against buckling by
adequate bracing, the effective length WIII be
governed by the fixity conditions imposed on
it by the structure it supports and by the
nature of the soil into which it is installed.
The depth below the ground surface to the
lower point of contraflexure varies wi;h the
type of soil. In good soil the lower point of
contraflcxure may be taken at a depth of 1 m
below ground surface subject to a minimum
of three times the diameter of the shaft. In
weak soil (undrained shear strength lebs than
0. I kgf/cm’) such as soft clay and soft silt,
this point may be hiken at about half the
depth of penetrat’ion into such stratum but
not more than 3 metres or IO times the
diameter of the shaft, whichever is less. A
stratum of liquid mud should bc treated as if
it was water. The degree of fixity of the
position and inclination of the pile top and
the restraint provided by any bracing shall be
estimated following a c c e p t e d structural
principles.
8 . 2 . 3 . 2 I ATERAL LOAD C‘APACITY - A pile
may be subjected to transverse forces for a
number of causes. such as wind, earthquake,
water current, earth pressure, effect of moving
vehicles or ships, plant and equipment, etc.
l-he lateral load carryingcapacitv of a single
pile depends not only on the horizontal sub-
grade modulus of the surrounding soil but
also on the structural strength of the pile shaft
against bending consequent upon the applica-
tion of a lateral load. While considering lat-
eral load on piles, the effect o f o t h e r
co-existent loads, including the axial load on
the pile. should be taken into consideration
NATIONAL IItJllBlNC CDDL OF INDIA
for checking the structural capacity of the
shaft. A recommended method for the deter-
mination of depth of fixity. lateral deflection
and maximum bending moment required for
design is given in Appendix J for fully or
partially embedded piles. Other accepted
methods, such as the method of Reese and
Matlock for fully embedded piles may also be
used.
N OTE A Bcwusc ol Iuntted information on honzonral
modulus of soil, and rrquwementr in the theoretical
analysis. it ts suggested that the adequacy of a design
should be checked hy an actual field load ~crt.
8.2.3.3 R A K E R P I L E S - R a k e r p i l e s a r c
normally provided where vcrttcal piles
cannot resist the required applied horizontal
forces. In the preliminary design, the load un
a raker pile is generally considered to b e
axial. The distribution of load bctwccn raker
and vertical piles in a group may be
determined graphically or by analytical
m e t h o d s . Wh,ere n e c e s s a r y , d u e
consideration should be given to secondary
bending induced as a result of the pile cap
movement. particularly when the cap is rigid.
Free-standing raker piles are subjected to
bending moments due IO their own weight, or
external forces from other causes. Raker
piles embedded in loose fill or consolidating
depcsrt may become laterally loaded owing
to the settlement of the surrounding roil. In
consolidating clay special precautions, like
provision of permanent casing. should be
taken for raker piles,
8..?.4 SP A C I NG OF P I L E S - T h e ccFtre to
centre spacing of a pile is considered from
two aspects as follows:
a) practical aspects of installing the piles;
and
b) The nature of the load transfer to the soil
and possible reduction in bearing capacity
of a group of piles thereby.
8.2.4.1 In the case of piles founded on a very
hard stratum and deriving therr capacity
mainly from end bearing, the spacing will bc
go\crncd by the competency of the end
beartng strata. The minimum spacing in such
cases shall be 2.5 rimes the diameter of the
shal’t.
8.2.4.2 Pilesderiving their bearing capacity
mainly from friction shall be sufficiently
apart to ensure that the zones of soil from
which the piles derive their support do not
overlap to such an extent that their bearing
values are reduced. Generally, the spacing in
PART VI 8lRUCTUEAL DE8lCN-#Ul3ON 1 FOUNDAllOWl
such cases shall not be less than three times
the diameter of the shaft.
8.2.4.3 In the case of loose sand or filling,
closer spacing than in dense sand may be
possible, in driven piles since displacement
during the piling may be absorbed by vertical
and horizontal compaction of the strata. The
minimum spacing in such strata may be two
times the diameter of the shaft.
NOTE - In rhe case of piles of non<ircUlar crorr-taztion.
the diameter of the circumscribing circle shall be
adopted.
8 . 2 . 5 P ILE
GROUPlNG -_)n o r d e r t o
determine the bearing capacity of a group of
piles,‘a number of efficiency equations are in
use. However, it is very difficult to establish
the accuracy of these efficiency equations, as
the behaviour of ile group is dependent on
many complex Pactors. It is desirable to
consider each case separately on its own
merits.
8.2.5.1 The bearing ca acity of a pile group
may be either of the Pollowing:
a) Equal to the bearing capacity of
individual piles multiplied by the number
of piles in the group; or
b) It may be less.
The former holds true in the case of friction
piles, cast or driven into progressively stiffer
materials or in end-bearing piles. In friction
piles in soft and clayey soils, it is normally
smaller. For driven piles in loode sandy aoila,
the group value may be hi her due to the
effect of compaction. In IUCa a cas, a load
test should lx. made on a pile from the group
after all the piles have been installed. The
group capacity may then be decided by
takmg into account the intetference effecu.
This would be done by multiplying the total
ca city of a pile group with the group
efp”
rcicncy factor.
8.2.5.2 In the case of piles deriving their
support mainly from friction and connected
by a rigid pile cap, the group may bevisualisai
to transmit load to the soil, as if from a
column of soil. enclosed by the piles. The
ultimate capacity of the group may be
computed followmg this concept, taking into
account the frictional capactty along the
perimeter of the column of soil as above and
the end bearing of the said column using the
accepted princtples of soil mechanics.
8.2.5.3 When the cap of the pile.group is cart
directly on a reasonably firm stratum which
supports the plies, it may contribute to the
bearing ca aclty of the group. This additional
capacity a Pong with the mdividual ca city of
the piles multr lied by the number op”pilea in
the group shalP not be more than the capacity
worked out ‘as per 8.2.5.2.
w.29
8.2.5.1 Whm a moment is applied on the pile
group either from the’superstructure or as a
consequence of unavoidable inaccuracies of
installation, the adequacy oi the pile groupin
msisting the applied moment should be
checked. In the case of a single pile subjected
to moments due to lateral forces or eccentric
loading, beams may be provided to restrain
the pile caps eiicctively from lateral or
rotational movement.
8.2.5.5 In the case of a structure supported on
a single pile/ group of piles, resulting in large
variation in the number of piles from column
to column, it is likely. depending on thetype
of subsoil sup orting the piles, to result in a
high order oP differential settlement. Such
high order of differential settlement may be
either catered for in the structural design or it
may be suitably reduced by judicious choice of
variations in the actual pile loadings. For
exam le. a single pile cap may be loaded to a
level Kighet than that of a pile in a roup in
order to achieve reduced dif ferential
settlement between the adjacent pile caps
supported on different number of piles.
8.2.6 F~cr-on OF SAFETY
8.2.6.1 The factor of safety should be
judiciously chosen alter considering the
following:
a! The reliability of the value of the ultimate
bearing capacity of a pile,
b) The type of superstructure and the type of
loading, and
c) Allowable total/differential settiement of
the structure.
8.2.6.2 When the ultimate beuring capacity is
computed from either static formula or
dynamic formula. the factor of’ safety would
depend on the reliabiliry of the formulae.
depending on a particular site and localityand
the rtiliability of the subsoil parameters
employed in such computation. T h e
minimum factor of safety on static formula
shall be 2.5. The final solution of a factor of
safety shall take into consideration tne load
settlement characteristics of the structure as a
whole on a given site.
8.2.6.3 The factor of safety for assessingtne
safe load on piles from load test data should
be increased in unfavourable conditions
where:
a) settlement is to be limited or unequil
settlement avoided as in the case o f
accurately aligned machinery or a
superstructure with fragile finishings;
b) large impact or vibrating loads are
expected;
“I-2.*0
c) the properties of the soil may be expected
to deteriorate with time; and
d) the live load on a stncture carried by
friction-piles is a, considerable portion of
the total load and approximates to the
dead load in its duration.
8.2.7 T RANSIENT L OADING -The maximum
permissible increase over the safe load of a pile
as arising out of wind loading is 25 percent.In
the case 01. lorlcls and moments arising out of
earthquake effects, the increase of safeload
shall be as given in Table 3.
8.2.8 ChXRLOADlNG -When a pile in a
group, designed ,t’or a crnain safe load is
tound, during or after execution, lo fall just
short of the load required to be carried by it,
an overload of up to IO percent ot’ the pile
capacity may be allowed on each pile. The
total overloading on Ihe group should iwt be
more than 10 percent of the capacity of the
group nor more than 4U percent of the
allowable load on a single pile.
8.2.9 R EINFORCEMENT
8.2.0.1 The design ot’ the remtorcing cage
qaries depending upon the driving and
installation conditions, the nature of the
subsoil’ and *the nature of load fo be
transmitted by theshaft-axial, or otherwise.
The minimum area of longitudinal rein-
forcement(any type or grade)within the pile
shaft shall be 0.4 percent of the sectional area
calculated on the basis of the outside area of
the cusing of the shaft.
8.2.9.2 The curtailment of reinforcement
along the depth of the pile, in general, depends
on the type of loading and subsoil strata. In
the case of piles subjected to compressive load
only, the designed quanrity of reinforcement
may be curtailed at an appropriate level as per
the design requirements. For piles subjected
to uplift load, lateral load and moments.
separately or with compressive loads, it may
be necessary to provide reinforcement for the
full depth of pile. In soft clays or loose sands,
or where there is likelihood of danger to green
concrete due to driving of adjacent piles, the
reinforcement should be provided up to the
full pile depth, regardless of whetheror not it
is required from uplift and lateral load
considerations. However, in all cases, the
minimum reinforcement specitied in 8.2.9.1
should be provided in the full length of the
pile.
Piles shall always be reinforced with a
minimum amouni of reinforcement as dowels,
keeping the minimum bond length into the
pile shaft and with adequate projection into
the pile cap.
8.2.Y.3 Clear cover to all main retnt’orce-
ments in pile shaft shall be not less than 50
N A T I O N A L ~IJILDINC COD& OF INDIA
mm. The laterals ot a rctntorcmg cage may be
in the form of links or spirals. The diameter
and spacing of the same are so chosen as IO
impart adequate rigidity to the reinforcing
cage during its handling and installation. Tbc
minimum diameter of the links or spirals shall
be 6 mm and the spacing of the links or spirals
shall be not less than 150 mm.
8.2.10 DE S I G N 0F PI1.E CAP
8.2.10.1 The pile caps may be designed hy
assuming that the load from the column is
dispersed at 45” from the top of the cap up to
the mid-depth of the pile cap from the hase of
the column or pedestal. The reactmn from
piles may also be taken to be distributed at 45”
from the edge of the pile. up to the mid-depth
of the pile cap. On this basis, the maximum
bending moment and shear forces should be
worked out at critical sections, as specified in
Part VI Structural design, Section 5 Concrete.
8.2.10.2 The pile cap shall be deep enough to
allow for necessary anchorage of the column
and pile reinforcement and the minimum
thickness shall be as specified in l-able 5.
8.2.10.3 The pile cap should normally be rigid
enough, so that the imposed load could be
distributed on the piles in a group equitably
8.2.10.4 In tne case of a large cap, where
differential settlement may be imposed
between piles under the same cap, due
consideration should be given to the
consequential moment.
8.2.10.5 The clear overhang of the pile cap
beyond the outer most pile in the group shall
normally ‘be 100 to I50 mm, depending upon
the pile size.
8.2.10.6 The ca,p is generally cast over a 75
mm thick levellmg course of concrete. The
clear cover for the main reinforcement in the
cap slab shall not be less than 60 mm.
8.2.10.7 The pile should project 50 mm into
the cap concrete.
8.2.11 G RADE B E A M S
8.2.11.1 The grade beams supporting the
wails shall be designed taking due account of
arching effect due to masonry above the
beam. The beam with masonry due to
composite action behaves as a deep beam.
For the design of beams, a maximum bending
12
moment of WI where w is uniformly dis-
50
tributed load per metre run (worked out by
considering a maximum height of two storcys
in structures with load bearmg walls and one
storey in framed structures) and. I is the
effective span in metres, will be taken if the
PART Vl SPIICTUYAL DESIGN -SECTION 2 FOUNIIATIMS
beams are supported during construction till
the masonry above it gains strength. The
value of bending moment shall be increased to
Wll
-1 if the beams are not supported. For
30
considering composite action, the minimum
height of wall shall he0.6 times the beam span.
The brick strength should not be less than 30
kgf/cm’. For concentrated and other loads
which come directly over the beam, full
bending moment should be considered.
8.2. Il.2 ihe minimum overall depth of grade
beams shall be I50 mm. The reinforcement at
the bottom should be kept continuous and an
equal amount may be provided at top to a
distance of a quarter span both ways from pile
centres. The longitudinal reinforcement both
at top and bottom should not be less than
three bars of IO mm diameter mild steel (or
equivalent deformed steel) and stirrups of 6
mm diameter bars should be spaced at a
minimum of 300 mm spacing.
8.2.11.3 In expensive soils, the grade beams
shall be kept a minimum of 80 mm clear off
the ground. In other soils, beams may rest on
ground over a levelling concrete course of
about 80 mm (see Fig. 2).
8.2.11.4 In the case of exterior beams over
piles in expensive soils, a led&c projection of
75 mm thickness and extendmg 80 mm into
ground (see Fig. 2) shall be provided on the
outer side of the beam.
8.3 For detailed information on driven/
bored cast in-situ concrete piles regarding
control of piling, installation, defective pile
and recording of data, reference may be made
to good practice [VI-2( lo)].
9. DRIVEN PRECAST CONCRETE
PILES
9.1 ProvisIons of 8 except 8.2.9 shall
generally apply.
9.2 Design of Pile
9.2.1 The design of pile section shall be such
as to ensure the strength an4 soundness ofthe
pile against lifting from the carting bed
transporting, handling, driving stresses
without damage.
9.2.2 Any shape having radial symmetry will
be satisfactory for precast piles. The most
common cross-sections used are square and
octagonal or circular.
9.2.3 Where exceptionally long lengths of
piles are required, hollow sections may
advantageously be used. If the final
conditions require a larger cross-sectional
VW-:
 \
L 50mm THICK CONCRETE
SCAB OR B R I C K ON EOGE
INTERIOR BEAM
J,\ Hc~nv i!l
area. the hollow sections may be filled with
concrete after driving in position.
9.2.4 Excessive whippiness in handling
precast pile may generally be avoided by
limiting the length of pile to a maximum of 50
times the least width.
9.2.5 Stresses induced during lifting,
handling and driving must be taken into
account.
9.3 RETNFOKCEMENT
9.3.1 The longitudinal reinforcement shall be
rovided in precast reinforced concrete piles
Iror the entire length. All the main longitudinal
bars shall be of the same length with lap
welded at joints and should fit tightly into the
pile shoe if there is one. Shorter rods to resist
local bending moments may be added, but the
same should be carefully detailed to avoid any
sudden discontinuity of the steel which may
lead to cracks during heavy driving. The area
of the main longitudinal reinforcement shall
ot be less than the following percentages of
t e cross-sectional area of the piles:
a,
a) For piles with length less than 30 times the
least width - 1.25 percent,
b) For piles with length 30 to 40 times the
least width - 1.5 percent, and
c) For piles with length greater than 40 times
the least width - 2 percent.
“1-P
/50mm T H I C K C O N C R E T E
S L A B O R BRICK O N E D G E
EXTERIOR BEAM
t up.~n,i\c s,,,t>
E L I M I N A T E ‘13 IN
: VERTICCL CUTS
COURSE
9.3.2 The lateral reinforcement is of
particular importance in resisting the driving
stresses induced in the piles and should bein
the form of hoops or links and of diameter not
less than 6 mm. The volume of lateral
reinforcement shall not be less than the
following:
a) At each end of the pile for a distance of
about 3 times ‘the least width- not less
than 0.6 percent of the gross volume of that
part of the pile: and
b) In the body of the pile - not less than 0.2
percent of the gross volume of the pile.
The spacing shall be such as to permit free
flow of concrete around it. The transition
between the close spacing of lateral
reinforcement near the ends and the
maximum spacing shall be gradually over a
length of 3 times the least width of the pile.
9.3.3 The ,cover of concrete over all the
reinforcement, including ties, should not be
less than 40 mm. But where the piles are
exposed to sea-water or water having other
corrosive content, the cover should be
nowhere less than 50 mm. Cover should be
measured clear from the main or longitudinal
reinforcement.
NOTE- When? concrete of the ik is liable to be exposed
to the attack of sulphatcs an B chlorides pmcnt m the
gottnd water, the piles may be coated with a suitabk
ItMtCrial.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 9..I.4 Piles should be provided with fiat or
pointed co-axial shoes, if they are driven into
or through ground, such as r,ock, coarse
gravel, clay with cobbles and other soils likely
to damage the concrete at the tip of the pile.
The shoe can be of steel or cast iron,. In
uniform clay or sand, the shoe may be
omitted.
Where jetting is necessary for concrete piles, a
jet tube may be cast into the pile, the tube,
being connected to the pile shoe which is
provided with jet holes. Generally, a central
jet is inadvisable, as it is liable to become
choked. At least two jet holes will be necessary
on opposite sides of the shoe, four holes giving
best results. Alternatively, two or more’jet
pipes may be attached to the sides of the pile.
9.4 For detailed information regarding
casting and curing, storing and handling,
control of pile driving and recording of
data, reference may be made to good
practice [VI-2( I I)]
IO. UNDER-REAMED PILES
10.0 General- Under-reamed piles. are
bored cast in- siru piles having one or more
bulbs formed by enlarging the bore holefor
the pile stem (see also 8.0).
10.1 Marerials
10.1.1 The materials shall be as specified
in 5.
10.1.2 CO N C R E T E -The slump of concrete
shall range between 100 mm and 150 mm for
concreting in water-free bore holes. For
concreting by hremie, a slump of 150 to 200
mm shall be used. In case of tremie
concreting for piles of smaller diameter and
length up to 10 m, the minimum cement
content should be 350 kg: m’ of concrete. For
piles of larger drameter and/or deeper piles,
the mimmum cement content should be 400
kg/m’ of concrete. For destgn purposes, the
strength of concrete may be taken M IS and
M 20 for concrete with cement content of 350
kg/ m’ and 400 kg, m’ respectively. In
addition, the concrete mix shall conform to
the reqmrements specified in’ Part VI
Structural design, Section S Concrete.
10.2, Design C‘onsideralions
fO.2.1 GE N E R A L - U n d e r - r e a m e d p i l e
foundation shall be designed in such a way
that the load from the structure they support
can be transmitted to the soil without causing
failure of soil or failure of pile material and
without causing settlement (differential or
total) under permanent transient loading as
may ‘result in structural damage and/or
functional distress (see Fig. 3).
10.2.1.1 The diameter of under-reamed
bulbs may vary from 2 to 3 times the stem
diameter, depending, upon the feasibility .of
PART VI STPUCTURAL DeSlGN -SECTION 1 FOUNDATIONS
41 = 45”(approx), & = 30”-45”(approx).
D,, = normally 2 SD
3A Sectton ot’ !imgle- 38 Section o f MUIII-
IJndcr- Reamed Pile Under-Reamed 1’1k
Fk. 3 Typical Derails of Bored Casr in-siru
Under- Reamed pile Foundation
construction and design requirements. In
bored cast in-situ under-reamed piles and
under-reamed compaction iles, the bulb
diameter shall be normally 5.5 and 2 times
the stem diameter respectively.
10.2.1.2 For piles of up to 30 cm diameter,
the spacing of the bulbs should not exceed
1.5 times the diameter of the bulb. For piles
of diameter greater than 30 cm, spacing can
be reduced to 1.25 times the stem diameter.
10.2.1.3 The topmost bulb should be at a
minimum depth of two times the bulb
diameter. In expansive soils it should also be
not less than 1.75 m below ground level. The
minimum clearance below the underside of
ile cap embedded in the ground and the
E ulb should be a minimum of 1.5 times the
bulb diameter.
10.2.1.4 Under-reamed piles with more than
two bulbs are not advisable without ensuring
their feasibility in strata needing stabilization
of bore holes by drilling mud. The number of
bulbs in the case of bored compaction piles
should not exceed 2 in such strata.
10.2.1.5 The minimum diameter of stem for
bore hole needing stabilization by drilling
mud should be 25 cm. The minimum
diameter of stem for strata consisting of
harmful constituents, such as sulphates.
should be 30 cm.
10.2.1.6, For batter piles, a batter of30” with
horizontal for piles m dry ground conditions
and 15O with horizontal for water.or drilling
mud filled holes should generally not be
exceeded. The under-reamed compaction b) SANDY SOILS
$e;5tre normally constructed up to a batter
Qu = A, (112 D Y NY + y d, NJ

10.2.2 SAFE LOAD-Safe load on a pile can fX(1/2 D, n y NV ) + y N, z dr

be determined: r=l
+ I ?rDyK t a n 6 (dt + di- - J:,-)
a) by calculating the ultimate load from soil where
properties and applying a suitable factor
of safety; TD’
A, = -, where D is stem d i a m e t e r
b) by load test on pile [W-5(9)]; and 4

c) from safe load tables. in cm;

10.2.2.1 ULTIMATE LOAD C A P AC I TY -The A. = .,z_(D", - 0’) where D, is the

ultimate load capacity of a pile can be
calculated from soil properties. The soil under-reamed bulb diameter in
properties required are strength parameters, cm;
cohesion, angle of internal friction and soil = number of under-reamed bulbs;
density. n
Y = average unit weight of soil
a) CLAYEY SOILS -For clayey soils, the (submerged unit weight in strata
ultimate load crzrrying capacity of an below water table) in kg/cm’;
under-reamed pile may be worked out
from the following expression: bearing capacity factors,
depending upon the angle of
Q.=A,N&+ A.N,c,+ C,A’, + nC.A, internal friction;
where d, = depth of the centre of different
under-reamed bulbs below
Q. = ultimate bearing capacity of pile ground level in cm;
in kg; dr = total depth of pile below ground
A, = cross-sectional area of the pile level in cm;
stem at toe level in cm’; K = earth pressure coefficient (usually
N, = bearing capacity factor, usually taken as 1.75 for sandy soils);
taken as 9; 6 = angle of wall friction (may be
cp = cohesion of the soil around toe in taken as equal to the angle of
kgf/ cm’; internal. friction d);

A. = (n/4)(&’ - D’), where D, and D d, = depth of the centre of the first

are the under-reamed and stem under-reamed bulb in cm; and
diameter, respectively in cm; d, = depth of the centre of the last
c. = average cohesion of the soil along under-reamed bulb in cm.
the pile stem in kgf/cm*;
NOTE I -For uplift bearing on pile tip. A, W~II not
A, - surface area of the stem in cm’; occur.
A’, = surface area of the cylinder
circumscribing the under-reamed NOTE 2 - N7 will be as specified in [VI-2(5)] and Np will
bulbs in cm2; be, taken from Fig. 4.

c. = average cohesion of the soil

around the under-reamed bulbs;
and
(I = reduction factor (usually taken
0.5 for clays).
NOTE I ,The above expression holds for the usual
spacing of under-reamed bulbs spaced at not more than
one and a half rimes their diameter.
NOTE 2 -If the itc is with one bulb only, the third term
will not occur. Por calculating uplift load, the first tctin
will not occur in the formula.
c) SOIL STRATA HAVING BOTH COHESION
AND FRICTION -In. soil strata having
both cohesion and friction or in layered
strata having two types of soil, the
bearing capacity may be estimated using
both the formulae. However, in such
cases load test will be a better guide.
4 COMPACTION PILES IN SANDY STRATA -
For bored compaction piles in sandy

v,_,24 N A T I O N A L WILDIIW CODE OF INDIA

 strata, the formula in (b) shall be applied
but with the modified value of ~$1 asgiven
below:
#JI = (#J f 40)/2
where
C#I = angle of internal trlctlon ofvirgin
soil.
The values of NY, iVq and 8 are taken
corresponding to 41. The value of the
earth pressure coefficient K will be 3.
PILES R E S T I NG ON R O C K -For p&s
e)
resting on rock, the bearing component
will be obtained by multiplying the safe
bearing capqcity of rock with bcarjng
area of the pile stem plus the bearing
provided by the bulb portion.
NOTE --To obtain safe load in compressIon and uplift
from ultimate load capacily generally the factors of safety
will be 2.5 and 3 rcspcctively.
10.2.2.2 SAFE LOAD FROM PILE LOAD
TESTS -Safe load on piles in compression,
uplift and lateral resistance can be determined
by load test on piles [see VI-S(9)].
I’ARf W SRIJCTURAL D181CN - BLCTlON 1 FO&NDAllONB
10.1.2.3 In the absence of actual load tests
anrl detailed investigations. the safe load on
under-reamed piles of bulb diameter 2.5 times
the stem diameter may be taken, as given in
Appendix K.
11).2.2.4 The lesser of the two safe loads
obtained from 10.2.2.1 and 10.2.2.3 should be
used in design. Higher values may be used if
established by initi,al load tests.
10.2.2.5 OVEW LO A D I N G - W h e n a p i l e
designed for a certain safe load is found to fall
just short of the required load carried by it, an
overload of up to IO percent of the safe load
on the pile may be allowed on each pile. The
total overloading on a group of piles should
not be more than IO percent of the safe load on
a group, nor more than 40 percent of the safe
load on a single pile.
10.2.3 SPA C I N G
10.2.3.1 Generally the centre to centre
spacing for bored cast in-situ under-reamed
piles in a group should be two times the bulb
diameter (20,). It shall not be less than I.5 D..
For under-grade beams,, the maximum
spacing of piles should generally not exceed
,225
3 m. In under-reamed compaction piles,
generally the spacing should not be less than
I.5 D,. If the adjacent piles are of different
diameter, an average value of bulb diameter
should be taken for spacing.
10.2.4 GROUP EFFICIENCY -- For bored cast
in-siru under-reamed piles at a usual spacing
of 2 D,, the group efficiency will be equal to
the safe load of an individual pile multiplied
by the number of piles in the group. For piles
at a spacing of I.5 D,, the safe load assigned
per pile in a group should be reduced by IO
percent.
In under-reamed compaction piles, at the
usual spacing of I.5 D., the group capacity
will be equal to the safe load on an individual
pile multiplied by the number of piles in the
group.
10.2.5 RE I N F O R C E M E N T
10.2.5.1 The minimum area of longitudinal
reinfprcement in stem should be 0.4 percent.
Reinforcement is to be provided in full length
and further a minimum of 3 bars of 10 mm
diameter mild steel or three 8 mm diameter
high strength steel bars shall be provided.
Transverse reinforcement shall not be less
than 6 mm diameter at a spacing of not more
than the stem diameter or 30 cm, whichever is
less.
In under-reamed compaction piles, a
mmlmum number of four I2 mm diameter
bars shall be provided. For piles of lengths
exceeding 5 m and of 37.5 cm diameter, a
minimum number ofsix I2 mmdiame!er bars
shall be provided. For pries exceeding 40 cm
diameter, a mimmum number of six I2 mm
diameter bars shall be provided. The circular
stirrups for piles of lengths exceeding 5 m and
diameter exceeding 37.5 cm shall be minimum
8 mm diameter bars.
10.2.5.2 The minimum clear cover over the
longitudinal reinforcement shall be 40 mm. In
aggresive environment of sulphates etc. it may
be increased to 75 mm.
10.2.6, The design of pile cap and grade beams
shall conform to the requirements specified
in 8.2.10 and 8.2.11 respectively.
10.2.7 For detailed information on under-
reamed piles regarding control of pile,
installation, reference may be made to good
practice [W-2( 12)].
Il. TIMBER PILES
11 .I Materials
w2.26
11.1.1 TIMBFR The tl,nber shall have the
following charactcrlstlcz-
a) Only structural tlmher shall be used for
piTes- (SW Part VI S:ructural d e s i g n ,
Sectlon 3 Wood):
b) The length of an individual pile shall be
I) the specified length t 30 cm for piles
up to and including I2 m in length. and
2) the specified length 2 60 cm for piles
above I2 m in length;
c) The ratio of heartwood diameter to the
pile butt diameter shall be not less than
0.8; and
4 Piles to be used untreated shall have as
little sapwood as possible.
11.2 Design Considerations
11.2.1 GEMRAI -- See 8.0.
11.2.2 SOIL RFSIS~AYCE see 8.2.1
11.2.3 STRLJCTURAI. CA P A C I T Y ’ - The pile
shall have the necessary structural strength to
transmit the load Imposed on it to the soil.
Load tests shall be conducted on a single prle
o r p r e f e r a b l y on a group 01 plies. F o r
compaction piles, test should be done on a
group of piles with their caps resting on the
ground [WE VI-2(9)1 !f such test data is not
available, the load carrlcd by the pile shall be
determined by the Engineering News formula
(SPP Notr: 1.
N’orr For t i m b e r piles. the load carried s h a l l h e
determined by the Englncertng News lormula ylven
below, Care shall be taken thar while counting rhe
n u m b e r of blows. the hedd of the timber p~lr IS not
brnomed or hrushed and in case of Interrupted driving
counting shall he done after 30 cm of driving.
For plies driven w~rh drop hammer,
16WH
P=
s + 2.50
For piles driven with smgle-acting steam hammer.
l6WH
p=--
s + 0.25
where
P = safe load on pile in kg,
W = weight of monkey in kg,
H = free fall of monkey in m. and
S = penetration of pile in cm to be taken aa the
average of the last thru blows.
11.2.4 For detailed information on timber
piles reerding spacing, classification, control
of pile driving. storing and handling, reference
NATIONAL l UlI.DlNC CIIDE Of INDIA
may be made to good practice[W-2( 13)J.
12. OTHER FOUNDATIONS
12.1 Design of foundation units not already
APPENDIX A
(C’lausP 7.3.1.11)
DETERMINATION OF MODULUS OF ELASTICITY (E,)
AND POISSON5 RATIO &)
A-/. DIITF.K ivl IN Al ION Ot- MOL)lI I.US
O F El.AS’TIClTY (E,)
.4-1.1 The modulus of elasticity is a function
01 composition of the soil, its void ratio, stress
history and loading rate. In granular soil> it is
a function of the depth of the strata. while in
cohesive soil it is markedly inlluenced by the
moisture content. Due to its great sensitivity
to sampling disturbance, accurate evaluation
of the modulus in the IaboratoI-y is extremely
difficult. For general cases, therefore.
determination of the modulus may be based
on field tests (A-2). Where properly equipped
laboratory and sampling facility IS avpilablc.
t’, may be dctermincd i n t h e l a b o r a t o r y
(SLY ,4-i).
A-2. FIELD DETERMINATION
A-2.1 The value of E, shall be determined
from plate load test in accordance with good
practice [VI-2(6)]:
where
q = intensity of contact pressure,
B = least lateral dimension of test plate,
s = settlement,
p I= Poisson’s ratio, and
b = influence factor
= 0.82 for a square plate.
A-2. I. I The average value ofE, shall be based
on a number of plate load tests carried out
over the area, the number and location of the
tests, depending upon the extent and
importance of the structure.
P A R T Vl STRUCTUPAL DCSlCN - SLCTlON 2 FOUNDATiONS
covered by this section, such as well
foundations, machine foundations, etc, may
be designed and constructed in accordance
with good practice [W-2( 14)].
A-2.1.2 EFFECT OF SIZE -~~ In granular soils
the value of E, corresponding to the size ofthe
raft shall be determined as follows:
Es = Ep $ [2 B, 2&+ Bp
P 1
where Br, B,, represent sizes of foundation and
plate and Ep is the modulus determined by the
plate load test.
A-2.2 For stratified deposits or deposits with
lenses of different materials, results of plate
load test will be unreliable and static cone
penetration tests may be carried out to
determine E,.
A-2.2.1 Static cone penetration tests shall be
carried out in accordance with good practice
[W-2(1)]. Several tests shall be carried out at
regular depth intervals up to a depth equal to
the width of the raft and the results plotted to
obtain an average value of B,.
A-2.2.2 The value of E, may be determined
from the following relationship:
where
Ckd = cone resistance in kgflcm’.
A-3. LABORATORY DETERMINA-
TlON OF E,
A-3.1 The value of & shall be determined
by conducting triaxial test in the
laboratory in accordance with good
practice [W-2(2)] on samples collected
with least disturbances.
A-3.2 In the first phase of the triaxial test, the
specimen shall be allowed to consolidate fully
91
VI-b- ’
under an all-round conhning pressure equal
to the vertical effective overburden stress for
the specimen in the field. In the second phase,
after equilibrium has been reached, further
drainage shall he prevented and the deviator
stress shall beincreased from zero vahle to the
magnitude e&mated for the field loading
condition. The deviator stress shall then be
reduced to zero and the cycle of loading shall
be repeated.
A-3.3 The value of 15, shall be taken as the
finpent modulus at tht stress level equal to
one-ha!f the maximum deviator stress applied
during the second cycle of loading.

APPENDIX B
(Clause 9.3. I. I I )

DETERMINATION O F M O D U L U S O F SURGRADE R.EACTION

-_-
&I. G E N E R A L
TABLE 6 MODULUS OF SUBGRADE REACrlON
R.l.1 The modulus of subgrade reaction (k) (&) FOR COHESIONLESS SOILS
as applicable to the case of load through a (Clause B-1.1)
plate of size 30 X .W cm or beams 30 cm wide *MoDIll us OF SusaRA.nF
SOIL CHARACTERISTIC
on the soils is given in Table 6 for cohesionless R EACTION
soils and in Table 7 for cohesive soils. Unless (k) m kg/ cm’
more specific determination of k ,is done P\ n
(see S2 and &3) these value may be used rRclaIivc Standard ’ ‘For Dry or For Sub-
Densiry Penetration Moist State merged State
for design of raft foundation in cases where Test Value
the depth of the soil affected by the width of (NI
the footing may be considered isotropic and (Blows per
30 cm)
the extra-polatlon of plate load test results is
(I) (2) (3) (4)
valid.
Loore -, IO IS 0.9

Medium IO IO 30 1,s IO 4 7 0.9 IO 2.9

B-2. F I E L D D E T E R M I N A T I O N
Dense 30 and over 4.7 to IS.0 2.9 to IO.8
B-2./ In cases where the depth of the soil
affected by the width of the footing may be *The above values apply to a square plate 30 X 30 cm or
considered as isotropic, the value of k may be beams 30 Cm wide.
determined in accordance with good pracrlce
[VI-2(15)1 The test shall berarried out wirh 3 -_ __-
plate of size not less than 30 cm.
TABLE 7 MODUL.US OF SUBGRADE REACTION
B-2.2 Theaverage value of kshall be based on (k) FOR COHESIVE SOILS
a number of plate load tests carried out over
the area, the number and location of the tests
depending upon the extent and importance ot SOIL CHARACTERISTIC *MODULUSOF SUB-
the structure. * G R A D E REACI ION
t Consistency Unconlincd Corn? (4) in kg/cm’
pressivc Strfngth,
53, L A B O R A T O R Y D E T E R M I N A T I O N kg/cm
I 61) (2) (3
B-3.1 For stratificd deposits or deposits with Stiff I to2 2.7
lenses of different materials, evaluation of k
from plate load test will be unrealistic and its Very Stiff 2 to’4 2.7 IO 5.4
determination shall be based on laboratory Hard 4 trndovcr 5.4 10 IO.8
tests [See VI-2(Z)].
o The valua apply to a quart plate 30 X 30 cm. The
S-i.2 In carrying out the test, the continuing above valuer arc based on the assumption that the
rverap loading intensity does no! exceed half chc
all pressure may be so selected as to be ultimate bearin& capacity.
representative of the depth of the average
rtrcu influena zone (about 0.5 B to B). --lll_ -

“28 l IIOWAL BUILDI~% CM)0 Of INQIA

53.3 The value of k shall be determmed from I = moment of intcrtia of the
the followrng relationship: foundation, and
B = width of the footing.
E. I
- -- B-4. CALCULATIONS
(l-r? f3
where B-4.1 When the structure is rigid (see
E = modulus of elasticity of soil (S W Appendix C), the average modulus of
Appendix A), subgrade reaction may also be determined as
follows:
E = Young’s modulus 01’ foundatron
material, Average contact pressure
k, = .- ---.. _ _ _ _
B = Poisson’s ratio of soil, Average settlement of the raft

APPENDlX C
(ChUSP 7.3.4.1)
R I G I D I T Y O F S U P E R S T R U C T U R E A N D FOUNDATIUN

C-f. DETERMINATION OF THE I spacing of the columns in cm,

RIGIDITY OF THE STRUCTURE
h, length ot the upper column in cm.
C-f .I The flcxural rigidity El of the structure h, length of the lower column in cm,
of any section may be estrmated according to
the relation given below (SPP alsu Fig. 5): ‘Ir
- -

-1J
PI
l
N_- E,l,b’- (P. + fl)b2
I” moment of inertia of the upper
2H’ +zE1’b (Jb + f, x column in cm’,
where moment of inertia ot- the lower
h
E, = modulus of elasticity of the column fn cm’. and
inlillin~material (wall material) in moment of inertia of the
fr
@f/cm , toundatton beam or raft in cm’.
I, = moment of inertia of the infilling NOTE -The summation is IO be done over all tttt rcorcyr
in cm’, includtng rht foundation beam or mft. In the case of the
b = length or breadth of the structure foundation. ff rcplaces’ro and /, becomes zero, whereas
in the direction of bending, for the topmost beam P. becomes rero.

H = total height of the mfilling in cm,

Ez = modulus of elasticrt of the frame
Y
material in kgf/cm ,
fb = moment of Inertia of the beam in
cm’,
I.
r. =
h.
II
fi = -
ht
G?. RELATIVE STIFFNESS FACTOR K
C-2.1 Whether a structure behaves as rigid or
flexible depends on the relative stiffness of the
structure and the foundation soil. This
relation is expressed by the relative stiffness
factor K give&below:
d = thickness pf the raft or beam in
cm, and
R = radius of the raft in cm.
C-2.1.1 For K > 0.5. the foundation may be
considered as rigid.

a) For the whole structure, K = C-3. DETERMlNATiON O F C R I T I C A L

COLUMN S P A C I N G

b) For rectangular rafts K = C-3.1 Evaluation of the characteristics A is

or beams, made as follows:

cl For circular rafts, K =

where
where
EI = flexural rigidity of the structure = modulus of subgrade reaction in
over the length (n) in kgflcm’. k
kp,/cm’ for footing of width B in
is= modulus of compressibilit of the cm (see Appendix B).
foundation soil in kgf/cm ,
Y
= B = width of raft fI in cm,
b length ofthescction in the bending
axis in cm, E -_ modulus of elasticity of conc?ete
in kgf/cm’. and
4, = length perpendicular to the section
under Investigation in cm, I = moment of inertia of raft in cm’.

APPENDIX D

(Clause 7.3.4.1)

C A L C U L A T I O N O F P R E S S U R E DISTRIBU7ION
fly C O N V E N T I O N A L M E T H O D

PI. DETERMINATION OF PRESSURE and y axes passing through the

DISTRIBUTION centroid of the area of the raft.

PI.I The pressure distribution (q) under‘the f., f’,, e’., e; may be calculated from the
raft thall be determined by the following following equations:
formula:

e&S +Qx
A r.‘-I;

la

total vertical Eoad on the raft, I

._E_
e, - e,
I --

lx +
total area of the raft,
pi F p,
I
-% e,
eccentricities and moments of
inertia about the principal axes 4
through the centroid of the
section, and
moment of inertia of the alea o!Jhe
x3 = co-ordinates of any given point raft respectively about the x and J
on the raft with respect to the x axes through the sentroid,

vm30
 Ixr = _f xy dA for the whole area about x
and y axes through the centroid, and
e,, eY = eccentricities in the xandy directions
of the load from the centroid.
for a rectangular raft, the equation simplifies
to:
where
a and
b = the dimensions of the raft in the x
and y directions respectively.
No* - Ii cnc or Marc of the valuer of(q) nagative as
calculated by the ahorc formula, it indicates that the
whole area of foundation is not subject to pressure and
only a part 31 the area is in contact with the soi!. and the
above formula will still hold good, provided the
appropriate values of I., I+ i.,, e, and et, are used with
respect to the area in contact with the soli instead of the
whole area.

APPENDIX E
(Clause 7.3.4.2)

CONTACT PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION AND

MOMENTS BELOW- FLEXIBLE FOUNDATION

E-l. CONTACT rPRESSURE 6Mc p ,

DISTRIBUTION 4p= + --In. I
P, = C
E-l.1 The distribution of contact pressure is c + II
assumed to be linear with the maximumvalue
attained under the columns and the minimum
value at mid span. P, = -. ?!I$ - f
c
E-1.2 The contaci pressure for the full width
of the strip under an interior colnmn load
located at a point i can be determined as (see E-l.5 If E-2.3(b) governs the moment under
Fig. 6A): the exterior columns, the contact pressures
are determined as (see Fig. 6C):

4Pe - pmll
where P@=Pc= 4c+,,

r = average length of adjacent span(m),

A = column load in t at point i, and
Mi= moment under an interior columns
loaded at i.
~513 The minimum contact pressure for the
full width of the strip at the middle of the
adjacent spans can be determined as (see Fig.
6A and 6B):
~52. BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAM
E-2.1 The bending moment under an interior
column located at i (see Fig. 6A) can be
determined as:
Mi = - % (0.24h i + 0.16)

E-2.2 The bending moment at mid span i*

obtained as (see Fig. 6A):
Mm = MO + Mi
where
-t pad
pm= Pm2 M, = moment of simply supported beam
EI.4 If E-2.3(a) governs the moment under =‘z[pi (I)+4;- + Pi (r,l
the exterior columns, contact pressures under
the exterior columns and at end of strip can be MI = a&rage of ne tive moments M at
determined as @cc Fig. 4C): each end of tfE bay

?*lt Vl STRVC’TV~AL --SICIWN 1 FlWNDAlWN8 VI.21

 1.‘-2.3 The bending moment M, under
exterior columns can be determined as the

DF_i
least of (see Fig. 6C):

P, III ‘ilrl
a) M,I = ‘-Tf (0.13 A I, + I .06 AC - 0.50)
-________J-
( 4 P, - pml,) c?
68 P r e s s u r e Dwtrihution river an lnrerlor
b, Me2 = (4c + I,) 1 Snan

P,-I - Pit,
I,--
,Y \I--

I I I I I

K M o m e n t a n d Prcbburc IJ~str~bu~~on al
Fxrcrmr Column

6A Moment a n d Prcsrurc D~str~hu~~on 31 Fig. 6 Moment and Pressure Distrihutirwt at

Interior Column C0lumn.s

APPENDIX F
(CIuuse 7.3.4.2)
FLEXIBLE FOUNDATION- GENERAL CONDITION

F-l. CLOSED FORM SOLUTION OF

ELASTIC PLATE THEORY w=g. z,(t)
F-1.1 For a flexible raft foundation with non-
uniform column spacing and load intensity,
solution of the differential equation governing
the behaviour of plates on elastic foundation where
(Winklcr Type) gives radial moment (M,)
tangential moment (M,) and deflection (w) at P column load,
=
any point by the following expressions: r =
distance of the point u n d e r
investigation from column load
along radius, and
L = radius of effective stiffness

WbClt

k = plodulur of subgrade reaction for

footing of width B.
 PI . .’ ? he radial and tangential momcntscan
be converted to rectangular co-ordinates:
---t? --
I?( I -/.I11
r31’1 thicknrss.
modulus of cl;lstici!y of the
loundation matcrkl. where

Passion’s ratio ol the I~~undation 4 --;~nglc with x-axis to the Ilnc JomIng
m; terlal. and or igin 1 0 the p o i n t uijder .
consideration.

Zd)), = functions of shear, moment

and deflection (see Fig. 7).
Fl.3 I hc hhcar 3 per- unit width 01 raft can
he dctcrrnincd by :
z4q

1’4 (f) = lunction for shear (see Fig. 7).

F-l.4 When the edge of the raft IS located

within the radius of influence, the lollowing
corrections are to bc applied. Calculate
moments and shears perpendicular to the edge
of the raf! within the radius of influence,
assuming the raft to be infinitely large. Then
apply opposite and equal moments and shears
on the edge of the mat. The method for beams
on elastic foundation may be used.

0 I 1 1 L 5 6
p-1.5 Finally, all moments and shears
‘IL calculated for each individual column and
Fig. 7 Functrons for Shear Moment a n d wall arc superimposed to obtain the total
Dejlerrion moment and shear values.

APPENDIX G
(Clause 8.2.1.2)
L O A D CARRYING CAPACITY --STATIC FORMULA

G-l. PILES IN CiRANULAR SOILS effective unit weight of soil at pile

toe in kgf/cm’,.
G-l.1 The ultimate bearing capacity (Q.) of
piles in granular soils isgiven by the following effective overburden pressure at
formula: pile toe in kg&/cm’,

bearing capacity factors

Q.= A, and depending upon the angle of
internal friction c#, at toe,
where
A, = cross-sectional area of pile toe, in summation for n layerr in. which
cm’, pile is installed,
D = stem diameter in cm; coefficient of earth P==U=,

PART 4 STRUCNNAL DESIGN-SICTlON a F-ouMlAnoNs VI.23

 .

effectivf overburden pressure in maximum effective overburden at the pile tip should
comspond to pile kngth q-1 to I5 to 20 times of the
kgf/cm for the ith layer, where i dirmctcn.
varies from I ton,
angle of tiall friction between pile 6-Z. PILES IN COHESIVE SOILS
and soil, in degrees (may be taken
equal to 4). and G-2.1 The ultimate bearing capacity of piles
(Q”) in cohesive soil is given by the following:
surface area of pile stem in cm’ in
the ith layer, where i varies from I Q. = A, . IV, . C, + (~2. A,
to n.
N~E I -For NV factors refer to good practia where
(VI-Z(5)].
AP = cross-sectional area of pile toe in
Notr 2 -N, factor will depend. l prt from nature of roil cm’.
on the type of pile atad the method of its construction and IV, = g;e~3_ ypactty factor usually
the vslucs a~ given in Fig. 4 and 8.
7
Nom 3 -The earth ptessttrc cocffiiicnt K depends on the C,, = average_ cohesion at pile tip in
mturc of soil strata, type of pik l nd the method of its
construction. For driven pikr in loose tomedittm sands.
WI cm’,
K valuer of I to 3 should be used. a = reduction factor,
NO= 4 --The agk of wall frktion inny be taken qua1 IO c = average cohesion !hroughout the
rhc l t& of &ar resistance of soil. length of pile in kgf/cm2, and
A, = surface area of pile shaft in cm2

20 25 30 35 10 45
ANGLE OF INTERNAL FRlcrlON $

m. 8 b~kCb~ifb~Factors N, f o r
NOTE I -The following values of e may be taken. where
depending upon the consistency of the roils:
4c = static point reaistana in kg/cm’, and
ConsirIency N Value Value of Q
A
fi = local side friction in kg/cm2.
I
Board piles Driven cast’
in-sifu For non-homogeneous soils, the ultimate
point bearing capacity may be calculated
“of:,‘~ very <4 0.7 1 using the following relationships:

Medium 4t*g 0.5 0.7 4co + 4ci + (Is2

2
Stiff 8 to I5 a.4 0.4 qu =
z
Stiff to hard > 15 0.3 0.3 where
N OTE 2-a) Static formula may be used as a guide only qu = ultimate point bearing capacity,
for bearing capacity estimates. Better qom = average static cone resistance over a
reliance may be put on load test on piles. depth of 2 d below the base level of
b) For working out safe load, a minimum the pile,
factor of safety 2.5 should be used on the
ulrimatc hcarmg capacity estimated by qel = minimum static cone resistance over
sutlic formulae. the came 2 d below the pile tip.
NOTE 3 - In UIC of #oft to very soft soils which LR not 43 = average of the minimum cone
ren8itivc. drc M~IC of o can be taken up IO I. resistance valuer in the diagram over
a height of 8 d above the base level of
G-3. When full static penetration data is the pole, and
available for the entire depth. the following d = diameter of the pile base or the
correlattons may be used as a guide for the equivalent diameter for a non-
determination of shaft resistance of a pile: circular cross-section.
Type of Soil Local Side Friction
G-3.1 The correlation between standard
fi penetration test value N knd static point
Clays and peats resistance qC given below may be used for
where % < 10 %- working out the shaft resistance and skin
friction of piles:

Soil type qclN

-
qc <A< *
Clays, silts, sandy silts and 2
100 25 slightly cohesive silt-sand
mixtures
3-4
-$j- <f,< -g- Clean fine to medium sands
and slightly silty sands
Course sands and sands with 5-6
Caarscsandnandgtavek little gravel
Sandy gravels and gravel 8-10

APPENDIX H
Since deleted.
 APPENDIX J
f Clause 5.S.2)
DETERMINATION OF DEPTH OF FIXITY, LATERAL DEFLECTION
AND MAXIMUM MOMENT OF LATERALLY LOADED PILES
I-I. DETERMINATION bF LATERAL DEFLECTION AT THE PILE HEAD AND DEFT11 OF
FIXITY

J-l. I The long flexible .pile, fully or partial1 embedded, is treated as a cantileverfixed at some depth
below the ground level (see Fig.l(l).

2*3 - F R E E HEAD P I L E Q
----FIXED HEAD PILE f
\
2.1 . .

= l-9
3
DC
0
l-7
E ‘\ CLAYS
\
3

FIG 10, DETERMINATION OF DEPTH Frxm

J-J.2Dc!ermine the depth of fiity and hence,the equivalent length of the cantilever using the plots
given in Fig. 10.

(A’, and K, art constants given in Tables 8 and 9 below, E is the Young’s modulus of the pile
material in kg/cmJ and f is the moment of inertia of the pile cross-section incm’).
NOTE - Fig. 10 is valid for lone flexible p&s where the embedded length L, is >4R or 47.

TABLE 8 VALUES OF CONTSNT K, &g/cm’)

(cz?ureI-1.2)
TY PF OF SOIL VALUE
- - - - - - -
Dry Submcigcd
Loose sand 0.260 0.146
Medium sand 0.775 0.525
Dense mnd 2.075 1”JS
_
VCIY loose sand under - 0.040
repeated loading or
normally loading clays

UllDNAL BtlILDDtG COOC OF INDIA

 TABLE 9 VALUES OF,CONSTANT A’* ckgkm’)
(C%rure 1-1.2)
U NCONFINED COMPRESSIVI VALUE
STRENOTH IN kg/cm*
o-2 to 0.4 7.7s
1 to 2 48.80
2 to 4 97.75
More than 4 19550

J-J.3 Knowing the length of the equivalent cantilever the pile head deflection (y) shxll be computed
using the following equations:

y=Q(&+L~)J . ..for free head pile

3El
(cm)
. ..for fixed bead pile
where Q is the lateral load in kg.

J-2 DETERMINATION OF MAXIMUM MOMENT IN THE PILE

J-2. J The fixed end moment (MF) of the equivalent cantilever is higher than the actual mxximum
moment (M) of the pile. The actual maximum moment is obtained by multiplying the fixed end
moment of the equivalent cantilever by a reduction factor, m given in Fig. 11. The fixed end
moment of the equivalent cantilever is given by:

MF - Q ( I4 + Lt 1 . ..fer free head pile

-for fixed had pile

The actual maximum moment ( M) = m ( UP ).

,L1/R O R Lt/T

1tA FOR FREE HuO PiLt

PART VI STPUCTUPAL DESIGN -SECTION I FOUNDATIONS VW?1

 _-- ,

116 FOR FIXED HEAD PILE

FIG. 11 DETERMINATION OF REDUCTION FACTORS FOR

C OMPUTATION OF M AXIMUM M OMENT IN Plre

APPENDIX K
(Clause 10.2.2.3)
SAFE LOAD ON UNDER-REAMED PILES

K-l. The safe bearing, uplift and lateral loads
for under-reamed piles given in Table 10 apply
to both mediumcompact (lo< N< 30) sandly
soils and clayey soils of medium (4 < N < 8)
consistency including expansive soils. The
values for pile diameter equal to two and a
half times the shaft diameter columns (3) and
(4) of Table 10, provide the minimum pile
lengths for single and double under-reamed
piles, respectively in deep deposit of ex ansive
soils. Also the lengths given for 3P 5 mm
diameter double under-reamed piles and more
in other soils an minimum. The values given
for double under-reamed piles in columns (9)
and (13) are applicable only to expansive soils.
The reinforcement shown is mild steel ,and is
adequate for loads in compression and lateral
thrusts columns (8). (9). (16) and (17)]. For
uplift Icolumns (12) and (1311, requisite
amount of steel should be provided. In
ex nsive soils, the reinforcement shown in
Tarle 10 is adequate to take upward dtig due
to heaving up of the soil. The concrete
considered is M 15.
K-l.1 Safe load for piles of lengths different
from those shown in Table lOcan be obtained
considering the decrease or increase as from
columns (10). (11). (14) and (I 5) of the sp&ific
case.
K-l.2 The loads for piles with more than two
bulbs in cx@nsive soils and more than one
bulb in all other soils (including non-
expansive clayey soils) can be worked out
from Table 10 by adding 50 percent of the
loads shown in column (8) or (12) for each
additional bulb in the values given in these
columns. The additional capacity for
increased len h required to accommodate
bulbs should g obtained from columns (10)
and (14).
K-1.3 Values given in columns (16) and(17)
for lateral thrur% may not be increased or
decreased for change in pile lengths. Also,for

“j.28 NATIONAL WILDING CODE OF INDIA

 TABLE IO SAFE LOAD FOR VERTICAL UNDER-REAMED PlI ES Ih: SANDY AND CLAYEY SOILS INCLUDING BLACK COrrON SOlLS

DIAMETER WIDER- MILD STEEL

LENGTH
R EINFORCEMENT SAFE LOADS
OF PILE REAMED
DMMETER A A
/
Lon ‘ludinal Spacing oClr Bearing Resistance Uplift Resistance Lateral Thrust ’
ReinPorcement 6mm
’ Singk Double’ ’ No. of Dia 4 Diameter /Single Double liMX%SC tkcfrascl ‘Single Double Increase Decrease’ ’ Single Doubk’
under under Bars Rings under UlldCr per IO cm per 30 cm under under per30cm per3Ocm under under
rearncd reamed reamed reamed length length reamed reamed length length reamed reamed

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (61 (7) IQ (9) (10) (111 (12) (131 (14) (15) (16) (17)
cm cm m m mm cm I t t t t t t t t L
20 50 3.5 3.5 3 IO I8 II I2 9.9 0.7 4 6 0.65 0.55 1.0 1.2
25 62.5 3.5 3.5 4 IO 22 12 I8 I.15 0.9 6 9 cl.115 0.10 I.5 1.8
30 75 3.5 3.5 4 I2 25 16 24 1.4 I.1 8 I2 LOS O&S 2.0 2.4
37.5 94 3.5 3.7s 5 12 30 24 36 I.8 I.4 12 18 1.35 1.10 3.0 3.6
40 100 3.5 4.0 6 12 30 28 42 1.9 l-5 14 20 1.45 I.15 3.4 4.0
45 LIZ5 3.5 4.5 7 12 30 3s 52.5 215 1.7 17.5 25.75 1.60 1.30 4.0 4.8
50 125 3.5 5.0 9 12 30 42 63 2.4 1.9 21 315 i.Bo I .45 4.5 5.4

.
multi-under-reamed piles, the values should
not increase beyond those given in column
(17). For longer and/ or multi-under-reamed
piles, higher lateraltirusts may be adopted
after establishing from load test.
K-l.4 Fqr dense sandy (N 2 30) and stiff
clayey (N 2 8) s’oils, the safe loads in
compression and uplift obtained from Table
10 may be increased by 25 percent. Lateral
thrust values should. not he increased unless
the stahility and strength of top soil (strata up
to a depth of about 3 times the pile shaft
diameter) is ascertained. For piles in loose (4
i: N G IO) sandy and soft (2 < n < 4) clayey
soils, the safe loads should be taken0.75 times
the values shown in the table. For very loose
(N d 4) sandy and very stif’f ( V < 2) clayey
soils, the values ,ohtained from the table
shlwld be reduced by 50 pcrccnt.
K-1.5 The safe loads obtained from Table IO,
should be reduced by 25 percent if the pile
bore holes are full of subsoil water of driillng
mud durini concreting. No such reduction
may be made if the water is confined to the
shaft portion below the bottom-most bulb.
K-l.6 The safe. loads in uplift and
compression given in Table 10 or obtained in
accordance with K-I.1 and K-I.3 should he
reduced by I5 percent for piles with bulb of
twice the stem diameter. But no such
reduc!ion is required for lateral loads shown
in Tab!e IO.
K-1.7 The safe load for under-reamed
compaction piles may _be worked out by
increasing the safe load of equivalent bored
cast in-siru. under-reamed pile obtained from
Table 10 by 1.5 times in the case of medium
(10 < N < 30) and I.75 times in the case of
loose to very loose (N 4 10) sandy soils.
Depending upon the nature. and initial
compact of strati. pile geometry and layout of
piles, this increase may be up to a factor of 2
and initial load tests are suggested to arrive at
the final safe load values for design in the case
of sizeable works. The values of lateral loads
should not be increased by more than 1.5
“,_$O
times in all cases. In obtaining safe load of
.compactionpjlc, the reduction for pile bore-
holes full of subsoil water or drilling mud
during concreting should be &ken 15 percent
instead of 25 percent as given in K-1.5. The
reduction for pile with twice the bulb diameter
is to be tak:il 10 percent instead of t5 percent
as given i n K - i . 6 . T h e p r o v i s i o n o f
reinforcement in under-reamed compaction
piles will also be guided as stipulated in
10.2.5.1.
K-1.8 The safe loads in Table 10, and the
recommendation made to obtain safe load in
different cases (K-l.1 to K-1.7) are based on
extensive pile load tests. The loads thus
ohtained rn2.y be taken equal to two-thirds the
loads Lorresponding to deflection of 12 nim
for loads in compression and uplift. The
deflections corresponding to respective safe
loads will be about 6 mm and 4 mm. The
deflection at lateral safe load will he about 4
mm.‘The values given in Table IO will be
normally on conservative side. For working
out ultimate ,compressive and uplift loads, if
defined as loads corresponding to 25 mm
deflection on loaddeflection curve, the values
obtained from Table 10 can be doubled. But in
the case of lateral thrust, twice the values in
Table 10 should be considered corresponding
to deflection of 12 mm only.
K-l ,9 The permissiLe increase over safe loads
obtained from Table IO should be taken as
stipulated In 10.2.2.4 for respective
conditions. Also, the group capacity should
be obtained in accordance with 10.2.4.
K-1.10 For piles subjected to external
moments and or larger lateral loads than
those given in Table 10, the pile should be
designed properly and the required amount of
steel should be provided.
NOTE - For obtaininn safe loads from Table IO. ‘N’value
(standard pcnetratioi test value), a weighted average
should be taken up to a depth equal to the bulb dlamcrer
below the pile toe.
In the case of predominantly silty soils, the
uiding N value for obtammg Safe loads may
% e taken between the values given for sandy
and clayey solls.
NATlONAL WlLDlNG CODE O F INDIA

LIST OF STANDARDS
ahc foll6wing list records rho& stat&r& which are acceptabk as ‘good practice’ and
‘accepted stat&r& in tk ik reqtiiromefts o the Code. The latest version of a
standard shall be adopted at t eqforcement oftL? +Co&. The sta&rds listed may be
$lbA;k Authority (~1 a gui& in conformahce with tk requirements of tk referred chum in
.
In tk following Itit, tk number appearing in tk first cohrmn within parentkses indicates
tk numbei of tk r)ji&ce irl this paiijsection.
(I) IS: 1892-1979 Code of racticciorsub-
surface investigation Por foundations
(/irsr revision)
IS: 2131-1981 Method for standard
penetration test for soils Virjt revision)
.
IS : 2 l32- 1972 Code of practice for thin-
walled tube sampling of soils vrst
M \i.SiWT)
IS : 4434-1978 Code of practice for in-
siru vane shear test for soils VJrst
rP\*i.Yion)
IS: 4968 Method for subsurface
sounding for soils:
IS:4968 (Part D-1976 Part I
Dynamic method using 50mm cone
without bentonite slurry (first
&Ti.ViOfl)
IS :4968 (Part II)-1976 Part II
Dynclmic method using cone and
bentonitc slurry (fkst revision)
IS: 4968 (Part 1111>1976 Part III
Static cone .penetration test Q?rst
revkion)
IS : 8763-1978 Code of practice for
undisturbed sampling of sands
IS: 9214-1979 Method ofdetermination
of modules of subgrade reaction (K-
value) of soils in field
(2) IS : 2720 Methods of tests for soila:
IS:2720 ( P a r t I)-1972 P a r t I
Preparation of dry soil sanfplcs for
various tests @rsr revision)
IS: 2720 (Part ID-1973 Part II
Determination of water content
(second revision)
IS:2720 (Part III)-1980 Part III
Determination of specifx gravity:
Section I Fine grained soils mrsr
revision)
Section 2 Fine, medium and
c o a r s e grained soils (jht
revision)
.
IS:2720 .(Part IV)-1975 Part IV
Grain size analysis vrst revhim)
IS: 2720 .(Part V)-1970 Part V
Determination of liquid and plarfic
limits first revision)
IS: 2720 (Part X)-l973 Part X
Determination of unconfined
compressive strength vrsr r&&n)
IS : 2720 (Part XIII)-1972 Part XIII
Direct shear test first revision)
IS: 2720 (Part XV)-I%5 Part XV
Determination of consolidation
properties
IS: 2720 (Part XXVIII)-1974 Part
XXVIII Determination of dry
density bf soils in place by the rand
replacement method @rst revision)
IS:2720 ( P a r t XXIX)-1975 Pati
XXIX Determination of dry density
of soils In place by the core cutter
method (/It-sr revision)
IS:‘2720 (PartXXXIII)-1975 P a r t
XXX111 Determination of the
density in-place by the ring and water
replacement method
IS : 2720 (Part’ XXXIV)-1972 Part
XXXIV Determination of density of
soils in-place by rubber-balloon
method
IS: 2720 (Part XXXIX/Sec D-1977
Part XXXIX Direct shear test for
soils containing gravel. Section I
Laboratory test
(3) IS : 1498-1970 Classification and
identification of soils for general
engineering purposes (fvsr revhion)
(4) IS:4Ol-1982 Code of practice f o r
preservation of timber (third reva%on)
(5) IS : 6403-1981 Code of practice for
determination of allowable_ bearing
p~z,;;~ on shallow foundatmns Wst
(6) IS: 1888-1982 Method of load tests on
soils (second revision)
(7) IS : 8009 (Part I)- 1976 Code of practice
for calculation of settlement offounda-
tions: Part I Shallow foundations
subjected to symmetrical static vertical
loads
(8) IS : IO80-1980 Code o f p r a c t i c e f o r
design and construct@ ’ of simple
spread foundations (/?rsr,revision)
(9) IS : 291 I (Part IV)-1979 C o d e o f
practice for design and construction of
pile foundations: Part IV Load test on
piles
(10) IS : 291 I Code of practice for design
and construction of pile foundations.
I S : 2 9 1 I(Part. I/Set I)-1979
Concrete piles Section I Driven cast
in - situ pries yifsf revision)
I S : 2 9 1 I(Part I/Set 2)-1979
Concrete piles Section Bored cast in-
siru piles (fksf revision)
( I I) IS:2911 (Part l/Set 3)-1979 C o d e oi
practice for design and construction of
pile foundations: Part I Concrete piles.
Section 3 Driven precast piles Wrsr
revision)
(12) IS:2911 (PartIll)-198OCodeofpractice
for design and construction of pile
foundations: Part I11 Under-reamed
pile foundation msf revision)
(13) IS:2911 (Part II)-1980Codeofpractice
for design and construction of pile
foundations: Part I1 Timber piles (jksr
revision)
( 14) IS : 2974 Code of practice for design and
construction of machine foundations
IS:2974 (Part I)-1969 Part I Founda-
tions for reciprocating type machine
(fifsr revision)
I S : 2 9 7 4 ( P a r t II)-1966 Part II
Foundations for impact type founda-
tions (drop and forge hammer
foundations)
lS:2974 ( P a r t Ill)-1975 P a r t III
Foundations for rotary ty machi-
nes (medium and high lpe reque.ncy)
(firs1 revision)
IS:2974 ( P a r t IV)-1968’ P a r t I V
Foundations for rotary type machi-
nes of low frequency
IS:2974 ( P a r t V)-1970 P a r t V
Foundations for impact t pe machi-
nes other than hammers ( P
orging and
stamping press: pig breaker, elevator
and hoist tower)
IS: 3955-1967 Code of practice for
design and construction of well founda-
tions
IS:9556-1983 Code of practice f o r
“,“,“lin and construction of diaphragm
(15) 15:9214-1979 Method ofdetermination
of subprade reaction (K value) of soils in
the field
NATIONALBUILDING CODE
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION3 WOOD

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS

0. FOREWORD ... 2

1. SCOPE ... 3

2. TERMINOLOGY ... 3

3. SYMBOLS ... 4

1. MATERIALS ... 4

5. PERMISSIBLE STRESSES ... 5

6. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ... 10

7. DESIGN OF COMMON STEEL WIRE NAIL JOINTS ... 16

8. DESIGN OF NAIL LAMINATED TIMBER BEAMS ... 21

9. DESIGN OF BOLTED CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ... 22

PART V I STBUCTURAL DKSIGN -SCl%DN J wmlo W-5. 1

PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION 3 WOOD

0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section deals with the structural designaspect of timber structures. The various species of
Indian timber classified into three groups depending on the structural properties are included.
0.2 This section was first published in 1970. In this revision provisions of this section are updated
and detign of nailed laminated timber beams is included. Information on bolted construction
joints hu alao been added.
03 The information contained in this sectioniskgely based on the following Indian Standards:
IS : 399-1963 Classification of commercial timbers and theirzonal classification (revised)
IS : 683-1970 Code of practice for design of structural timber in buildings(thirdrevision)
IS : 4891-1968 Specification for preferred cut sizes of timber
IS : 1150-1976 Trade names and abbreviated symbols for timber species (second revision)
IS : 23661982 Code of practice for nail-jointed timber constructionfirs1 revision).
IS : ~3-1!NM Code of pmctia for design and construction of nailed laminated timber beams
*Jr rtvlr~oon) (under print)

vu. 2 WA-AL BUILDING MDE Df INDLn

1. SCOPE
I.1 This section of the Code relates to the use
of structural timber in structures or elements
of structures connected together by fasteners.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.0 For the purpose of this section, the
following definitions shall apply.
2.1 Structural Purpose Definitions
B ASIC OR U L T I M A T E S T R E S S --The stress
which is determined on small clear specimen
of timber, in accordance with good practice
[VI-3(l)]‘; and does not take into account
the effect of naturally occurring
characteristics and other factors.
I NSIDE L OCATION -Position in buildings in
which timber remains continuously dry or
protected from weather.
LOCATION - Locatron is generally referred
to as exact place where a timber is used in
building.
O UTSIDE L OCATION -Position in buildings
in which timbers are occasionally subjected to
wetting and drying as in the case of open sheds
and outdoor exposed structures.
P ERMISSIBLE S T R E S S -The basic stress as
modified by modificationfactors according to
defects, location and particulars of design.
S PACED C OLUMN --Two column sections
adequately connected. together by glue, bolts,
screws or otherwise.
WET LOCATION -Position in buildings in
which timbers are almost continuously damp
or wet in contact with the earth or water, such
as piles and timber foundations.
2.2 Definitions of Defects in Timber
C HECK -A separation of fibres extending
along the grain which is confined to one face
of a piece of wood.
C O M P R E S S I O N W OOD - Abnormal wood
hich is formed on the lower sides of branches
nd inclined stems of coniferous trees. It is
%arker and harder than normal wood but
relatively low in strength for its weight. It can
be usually identified by wide eccentric growth
rings with abnormally high proportion of
growth latewood.
*In this sectton where rkfercna is made to’good practice’
in relation to design or testing and construction
proczduns, the appropriate document lutcd at thccnd of
the section may bc used as a guide to the intcrprctation of
this term.
D EAD K N O T-A knot in which the layers of
annual growth are not completely intergrown
with those of the adjacent wood. It is
surrounded by pitch or bark. The encasement
may be partial or complete.
D ECAY OR R O T- Disintegration of wood
issues caused by fungi (wood destroying) or
other micro-organisms.
D E C A Y E D K N O T-A knot soltcr than the
surrounding wood and containing decay.
D I A M E T E R O F K N O T- T h e m a x i m u m
distance between the two points farthest apart
on the periphery of a round knot, on the lace
on which it becomes visible. In the case of a
spike or a splay knot, the maximum width of
the knot visible on the face on which II appears
shall be taken as 11s diameter.
DISCXXOIJRATION A c h a n g e f r o m t h e
normal colour of the wood which does not
impair the strength of the wood.
.KNOT-A branch base or limb embedded in
the tree or timber by natural growth.
KNOl- HOLE ~ A hole left as a result of the
removal of a knot.
LIVE KNOT -A knot free from decay and
other defects, in which the fibres are firmly
intergrown with those of the surrounding
wood. Syn. ‘Intergrown knot’. Cf. ‘Dead
Knot’.
L OOSE G RAIN (L.OOSENED GR A I N )--A defect
on a flat sawn surface caused by the
separation or raising of wood fibres along the
growth rings. Cf. ‘Rased Grain’.
Loose KNOT-A knot that is not held firmly
in place by growth or position, and that
cannot be relied upon to remain in place. Cf.
‘Tight Knot’.
M O U L D-A soft vegetative growth that
forms on wood in damp, stagnant atmosphere.
It is the least harmful type of fungus, usually
confined to the surface of the wood.
PITCH POCKET-Accumulation of resin
between growth rings of coniferous wood as
seen on the cross section.
S AP S TAIN - Discolouration of the sapwood
mainly due to fungi.
SAPWOoD-The outer layer of log, which in
the growing tree contain living cells and food
material. The sapwood is usually lighter in
colour and is readily attacked by insects and
fungi.
S HAKE --~ A partial or complete separation
between adjoinlng layers of tissues as seen in
end surfaces.
S L O P E OF GR A I N -The inclination of the
fibres to the longitudinal axls of the member.
S OUND KNOI -- A tight knot free from decay.
which IS solid across its face, and at least as
hard as the surrounding wood.
SPL.W- A crack extending from one face ol a
piece of wood to another and runs alor~g the
grain of the piece.
T IGHT KNOI A knot so held by growth or
position as to remain f.irm in position in the
piece of wood. Cl. ‘Loose Knot’.
W ANE - I.he original rounded surlace of a
tree remalnlng on ;I piece 01 converted timhcr.
WARf’-~ A deviation in sawn timhcr from ;I
true plane surface or distortIon due to \trchse’r
causing departure from a true plant
W O R M HOI I s- C‘avilics caused h! worms.
3. SYMBOI S
3.1 For the purpose ol this section, the
following letter symbols shall have the
meaning indicated against each:
width of the beam in cm
depth of beam in cm.
depth of heam at the notch 111 cm
dimension of least side of column in
cm.
the least overall width oi box column
m cm.
the least overall dimension of core in
box column in cm.
diameter of bolt.
modulus of elasticity irl flt~:ldlnp
kgf cm’.
c;llculated be$ing stress i n c\tremc
fihrc in kgf cm-.
calculated average axial ComprcsSI~‘c‘
\t~ess in kgftcm-.
calculat,ed axial tenslIe stress in
hgf. cm-.
permissible bending s\ress on the
extreme fihre in kgf/cm .
permissibl: stress in axial compression
In hgf! cm-.
permissible s t r e s s i n cr~mpre,ssiqn
normal (perpendicular) to gram I~I
kgf, cm’.
permissible stress in rqmpression
parallel to grain in kgf/cm-.
permissible compressive stress in the
direction of the line of action of’ the
load m kgf:cm’.
permissible stres? in tension parallel to
grain in kgf, cm-.
horizontal shear stress in kgf/cm’.
moment 01 inertia Of a section in cm’
modil&ition factor for change in
slope of grain.
rnodllication factor lor change in
duration ot loadings.
,
h5 = lorm tactors.
and
hh i
h’: = modillca(lon factor for bearing stress
span ot il hcam or lrusb in cm.
shank diameter 01 the nail.
ratio ot’ the thrchncbs 01 the compre-
salon tlanpc to the depth 01 the hcam.
statical moment of arca ahovc or
bctow the neutral axis ;~hour neutr;lI
BYI) III cm’.
a constant for particular thlcknos 01’
plank (SW h’u and 6..5._‘,.5).
ratlo 01 the total thickness 01 web 01
webs to the overall width 01 t h e
beam.
effective length of soltd and box
columns in crp: distance between
points of lateral support 01 spaced
columns. in cm.
nominal thickness 01 planks used in
forming box type column in cm.
constant for a particular thickness of
the plank (SW KS and 6.5.2-J).
vertical and reaction or shear at a
section in kg.
a factor determining the value of form
factor K1 [ser 6.4.2(b)].
angle of load to grain directiL)n.
4. MATERIALS
4.1 Species of Timber-The species of
timber recommended for structural purposes
(classified into three groups, namely, Group
A, Group B and Group C) are given in
Table I.
NATIONAL MJILDINC COW. OF INDIA
4.1. I The characteristics nf these groups are
as given below:
GROUP A- Modulus_of elasticity in bending
above 126 tonnes’ cm-;
G ROUP B--Modulus of elasticity iq bending
above 98 and up to 126 tonnes cm‘; and
GROUP,C--- Modulus of elasticity in bending
above 56 and up to 9X tonnes, cm’
4.1.2 Timber species may be Idcntlllcd in
accordance with good practice [VI-?(Z)]
4.2 The availability and general charactcrlstlc5
like durability and treatabillty 01 the spcc~o\
are also given in T-able I. Specie\ t)1‘ tirnhcr
other than those recommended in I ahlc-I nla!
be used, provided the basic stress charilctcrih-
tics are determined.
N OTE For obtaming basic stress fy,ures of the unItsted
species, reference may be made to the Forc~t Kewuch
lnstirute and Colleges, Dehra Dun.
4.3 Mois/ure Content in Tin~hr -- I h e
moisture content 01 timber t’or various
positions in buildings shall be as given in
Table 2.
4.4 Sawn Timbtv
4.4.1 SIZES - Preferred cut sizes of timber
for use in structural components shall be as
given in Tables 3. 4 and 5.
4.4.2 T OLERANCES ~ Permissible tolerances
in measurements of cut sizes of structural
timber shall be as follows:
a) For width and thickness:
I) Up to and including
100 mm
2) Above 100 mm
+10
b ) F o r length
4.5 Grading of Structural Timber
4.5.1 Cut size*Of structural timber shall
be graded, after seasoning, into three
grades based on permissible defects given
m Table 6.
a) Grade 1;
b) Grade 2; and
c) Grade 3.
PART VI ~TPIJCTUPAL DESSICN - SECTION 3
4.5.2 The prohibited defects given in 4.5.2.1
and permissible defects given i n 4.5.‘.’ I -
and 4.5.2.3 shall apply to structural timber.
4.5.2.1 I’HC)HIHI I I I) I,“FFC‘JS 1 OOSC
grains. splits. comprcssl\‘c mood in coniferous
timber. heartwood rot. sap rot. warp. worm
holes made b> powder post bcctlcs and pitch
pockets shall not he permrtted.
4.5.?.2 I’~.KMI\\IHI t I)t t-1 C‘l< I )CfCCI~ to
the extent specified In lablc h \hall be
pcrmissiblc.
4.5.3 I O(‘4 I IO\ ot I)1 I I c ‘\ ‘I he
influence 01 dclcct\ in timhcr i\ c!:tlclcnt for
different locations in the SI~LIL~I~I;I~ clement.
‘ I hcrelorc thcsc should bc 50 placed during
construction ho that they do not ha\e an>
adverse cf’lcct on the nlcmbers. in accordance
with food pr;ictice [ \‘I-J(4)].
4.15.1 %(‘I IAHII I I Y I\ KFSPEC7‘ O F
f)t~K/\l3II.t I Y ANI, ~1 Kt A IAHII I1 Y
There
are two choices as given 111 4.6.1.1 and 4.6./.2.
4.f%/./ I-IKSI C H O I C E The species shall be
of any one of the following:
a) llntreatcd heartwood of high durability
as lizted in Table I;
b) Treated heartwood of moderate and low
durability a n d classes ‘a’ and ‘b’
treatability as listed in Table I;
cl Heartwood. of moderate durability and
Class ‘c’ treatability after pressure
impregnation as listed in ‘I‘able I; and
4 Sapwood of all classes of durability after
thorough treatment with preservative.
4.6.1.,’ S~CON’I) CHOICE The species s h a l l
+3 he heartwood of moderate durability and
-0 mm
Class ‘d’treatability. Such timbers are listed rn
Table I
5 . PFKMISSlBI.E WKF.SSt:S
5.1 Ba51c stress values Of different group3 of
-0 mm t i m b e r a r e deterlnined on small clear
specimen accordmg to good practice (VI-
3(l)]. These values are then divided by the
appropriate factors of sal.ety to obtain the
permissible stresses.
5.2 ‘l’he permissible stresses for Groups A, B
and C for different locatIons appllcahle to
Grade 2 structural timber shall be as given in
‘lable 7 p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e f~ollow~ng
conditions are satisfied.
a) The timbers should be of’ high or
moderate durability and be grven the
woou \; 1 5
 TABLE I SPECIES I OR STRL’CTURAL PURPOSES

CROUP SPECIE5
Wt~wi~ 4r ILITYt
\
’ BotanicaL Name Trade %amc 12 PERC’EYI ‘?North East Ccntrc West South-
hhlbl URE. zone zone Zone Zone Zone
Coyrtur

;31 (4) (51 (61 (7) (8) (9) (W (1)) II!)

kg, mr
Khair I 010 X x x 2 High High
Knla-siris 735 Y Y 2 : Y. High Modera1e
Balonoc~arpu~ uri/ls Knrungkongoo YYS -. - _- - 3/o (MO)
C.! nometra pol~andra Roxb. ping 915 5 -. - _- LOW H tgh 260 (235)

-X
Dlpterocarpus mocrocorpus Vesquc holiong 73s Low Moderate I70 (70)

._E
Grcwio iiltopjolio Vahl. Modrrare
Hupeo Spp. (other than Hopea @dorato)
Meuo ferrea Linn.
dhaman
hopea
mesua
7%5

::
v

._ x - z.__ ::
X
hlodrrdte
High
High
High
High

Mvnusups lirtarab
Poeciloncuron indwum Redd.
Rerocarpus suntalinuc Linn f
bullet wood
ballad
red s#ndcn
I 105
I 135
I 105
-
-
-
--- -Z
-
Z
y’
Y
High
Moderate
_
e
High
High
Htgh
Srhledwro aleo a Okin (Syn. S rrrjogo Wllld ) kurum I 089 Z Y Z Z Y I>OW a High
Shorea rohusro Gacrtn. f. sat (UP.) 881 X X X -- High e High
I’ifex spp. millr 930 -. - A
Z High __ High

Acucio mlotica Del. (Syn. A. urahta Wtlld ) babul X X X Y’ Y Low Moderate

I I w (1_ul
I50 (1 IO)
-170
A~rocarpus/rclrinrfius Wighi. ct Am.
Albizia kbbeck Bent h.
Allingccl rxcrlsa Noronha
maudani
kakko
juiili
Y :
Z
Ti- z F
_.
Low
High
Moderate
Moderate
Moderrte
High
(Y5)
200 (70)
I-
Amooro spp. - Y -. - __
-u
sm8ri Moderate
Ano~eissus ocuminato Bedd. yun - - E.loderate C High
Dip&knemo butwoceo H.J.Lam (Syn. 6hssra hill mahua z _ - High e High
butyracca Roab.)
Camha brurhiota Merr. (Syn. C. interrlma D C . )
., I carallia (maniawga) 755 ._ _.. _ __ - -_
Awt’urpus 3pp.
Cancarina equisetifolio Fors~.
pussur
casuarinr
785
850 Y v
Z
X Low High

-Z
Chdmskz C’elurim W. & A. (Syn. C. !obuhnr A. Jurs.) chickrassy 675 Y Moderate Moderate 24ojkO)
cia%ml ro.?qrmzrl Km &II. C &u&w yiit) Karani _- - Low Low I IO (95)
P~laqu1un1 cllrprwum Enger pali % - - ; Moderate Moderate
190(9!30)
Maslixia arboreo Clarke gurjan 785 - X Z X Low Moderate
I 195 ($5)
Oysoxylvrn molbaricum ikdd. white mlar 720 - 2 - High - Moderate -

, I
 Lucalyprus eugemo~des cuc~yQlus RM - - - - Y e
Lgenia rpp. jamin 850 X Y Y Y Y -
Gluta rrovancorica B&d.
Grewia tilii/olio V&a
Kingiodendron pinnarum Harms
gllltIl
dhamnn (UP, M P ) :z z
i T
Z
- a
(Syn. Hardwickia pinnala Roxb.)
Lugcrsrroemia Inceoiara Wall.
pine)
benteak
625
675 x- x x 7- i
-
c
e
%~?~~%Ibergioi&s Roxb.
bullel wood
padauk
880
720 - x - - - High
-
C 190 (140)
~ero~~rpus marsupium Roxb. bijasal a00 X X X Y Y High c 150 (I20)
- f 20.5 (150)
Qwrnu ‘PP. lndiun oak 865 - X -- - Moderate -
Sho?cQ robusm &sxtn f. WI (MP) 865 X X X - - .High c
&ymidrr febrijyo A. Juxr. rohini 1 I55 X Z - High -
Swintonrk#oribunda Griff. ci\it 640 - - - - - - -
Turom grundi~ Linn. 1. wall 640
- Y X X X c MCldCratr
High
Tirminak bcffirica Roxb. behra X X i b Mod&
Trrninalia chebulo Retz. ; - ‘:
-x
harda (myrabolan) :: k.:: C High
Terminal& manii King - -
TerminoAia ponicuka Roth.
Tewnfnolia uhra Roth (Syn. T. Coreacru W. & A.,
black chuglam
kindnl z - - 7 x Low
Moderate
a
C
Moderale
High ’ -
T. i%dQlQ Roth) X X -
Xy/ia xybcarpu Tmb.
laurel
iruJ :: G z Y ii 4Moderatc
High
b
e
High
High 230 WJ)
Ad&to cordi/otia Roxb. Hk. f. X
Rlbiziu proreru Benth.
An~hocepMus Chi~~b A. Rich.
haldu
Safed-SiriS
Kadam
675
640
480
t
-
Y
X
z- ti
- f
Low
Moderate
LOW
a
C
a
Moderate
Moderate
Low
235 (100)
I40 (50)
-_
(Syn. A. cu&AI Miq.)
Arrocarpus d&aSha Roxb.
Anrocarptu hererophylhrs brn. (Syn. A. inrcgrl$olirr~
chaplash 515 - x -- - Moderate d Moderate -
au~f. non linn. f.) kslhal 595 Z Y Z Z Y High Moderate -
Anocu~puc &koocho Roxb. lakuucha _ - - - - - - -
kadirachlu in&u A. Juss. - - -- -
C
MOdUCQ bn&-oiti Mac Bride
nttm
mahua
E
929 z x -x - T-- High e High- -
-_
x -- z 5
tbiokhk SQQ. kasci 595 Y X -
Z Modtralc e ModeraE
Ptortiun serratwn Engl. (Syn. Bowa smwa Cekbr ) murtcnga - Moderate e Moderate
C&phyl/um spp.
Curey arbowu Roxb.
z:
- i -- - Low e High It&&)
-
Enbi 865 i! High High
tktanopsis hysrrrx
TOOM cliuta Roem (Syn. Cedrelu
Cetinu dcodora G. Don f.
loona Roxb.)
Indian chrstnut
loon
dtodar
625

z
x
X
Y
Y
-
-- -F i- Moderate
Low
High
Moderate
Moderate
Low
100~0)
90 (40)
Cupemw rorulo~o D. Don
x- 5: u-- Ti- x-
cypress 515 Y High Low 200 (Xl)
iklbergia
_.. largol$ R 9x b rorcwood 755 High Moderate
LblbergiQ sissoo Roxb. skoo I 785 Moderate Moderate I70(150)
Diilenia spp.
EbtocQfjYW SQQ.
ditlenir
rudrak
625
480 - - - z
2
Low
-
Moderate
Low
T
r
m TABLE I SPECIES FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES- Conrd
(chuse 4.l)
GROUP SPECIES AVERAGE UNIT AVAILABILITY D~RABI- T R E A T - REFRACTORI- PEPMISSUILE
WEIGHT AT A LlTTt ABILITY+ NESS TO AiR bTEUAL
/
BolPrllul Name Trade Name ’ I2 f%IICENl fNorth East Ccntrc W e s t South- SEASO?~ING) S TRENGTH
MOlSTURf Zone Zooe Z o n e Zone Z o n e OF NAILS IN
~NlENT DOL~BLE
SHEAR Ii
(4) (5) (6) m (8) .(9) (JO) (11) (12) (‘13)
kg, mJ kg
Y - Moderate
515
849
Y
F f Y High
High High 320 (I-G?)
595
625
x
-
i
Y -.Z r t
2
LOW
Moderate
ii
e.
Moderate
Moderate
180 (125)
245 (215)
llO(90)
690 X X Y Y X Low a Low
225( ISO)

k8im bS7 X X Y Y Low b ModCraIC -

sllndrn 850 Y Y Z H@ Moderate 170(100)

bonsum 530 2 - - Low Moderate
120 (601
L’uo (7s)
kail 51s X - .- - Low Low 70 (30)
llO(100)
chit 375 X - -- - Low Low ( w (60)
iitmin -. - -8 -
hathipsila ;: 2 Low Moderate
Qadri 70s - Y 2 Y Low Moderate
arjun a01 z X X Y Moderate Modern&
Hullock 610 _~ - Low Moderate I30 (loo)
T I 275 (90)
2
P l Availahililv T h e Icrrrlorx( ccllnpri*lng Indta. and Skkklm ,tnd Hhufnn ha&r: been Jivldtd Into IIVC r~ner wh1r.h cover rough!! lhc folIowIng a r e a s :
g a ) NI)RTH ZOHC .ldmmu dnd Kn,hmtr. Puhlah. Hlm.+c-hnl I’radcsh. I)elhl. I!lcar PrPdcsh a n d Rap+sihdn.
h) EAST ZONt As;nm. blan~pur, lrlpura, WeSl Bengal. Bihar, Oriau 5lkklm. Elltiuun. Andaman,, h(crlh Fast F r o n t i e r A g e n c y a n d Nagaland;
g c) CI \IKF ZONF Mddhya Prsdcrh, Vidharbha areas of Mahard$hlra Snare and rhc Vorth-East parr 01 Andhrd P r a d e s h (Codabar1 delta area);
d) WfSl ZONE Maharashrra Slate lexccpt l’tdhar-bha area+). Guprai and Yorrh-West par1 of K a r n a r a k a .
$
21 Sou IH LIINF - Tarnil hadu. Andhra Pradesh (cxccpt the Godabdrl dclia areal. Kerala and KarnataLa (ertcept north west p a n ) .
::
1 hc dballahlkity 01 l~mbcrs IP catcgorlzcd under three classes a: Indlcaled helow

‘i Mobi common, 1,415 m’(l 000 ronnca) and murc per bear.
0 Y C o m m o n . 155 m (2% ~onn~si to I 415 m (1 000 tonnes) per tear. and
L 1~3s c o m m o n . below 155 m 1250 tonnes) per yrar.
f
? In the case of qxc~rs. where arallabtlq IS nol mdlcatcd under aok zones. Ihe ,nlo~matlon 4s lacking.
 tnu~.lsd;!) The tlm+rs shall be cLlsslficd for durabllxy accqxdmg tc thclr awrage !ifc as follows:

HIGH T.mbers hakinK avcragc lift of 120 m o n t h s dnd over:

Mont r 4TI Tlmbrrs hawng average Life oi less tnan I Xl months hut nf Ml months or oter, and
I.ClU rlmber hakin& average lilt of less than ho months.

Di;rablll?y of various spec~cs m thrir teanwood is based on the ‘Gra\tyard’tests carried out in the open in whrch test spccrmens ofsizc 60 X 5 X 5 cm ofuntrcated heanwond were buried inthe
ground LJ ha,! their length

* Treatabil~ty - Treatable timbers may be classified as fol! >ws to Indicate appronmiatcly the degree of resistance offered by the heartwood of a species t&l the pcnctration of t!x presenm~e
tlutd under a workmg pressure oI’ 10.5 t8 cm’

a ) Hcdrtuood s~sily rrrJtablr.

b) Heartwood Iredtabls hut compk?r pcnstratwn 01 prewwafne I-XX :~lwa!s att.llnrd;
c) Hear~uood only partially trcatahlr;
d) Heartwood refractory to Ireatmrnt; and
e) Hcartuood VCQ retraclory lo trealmcnt. penetrrt~on oi prcservatlve kmg practlcai only from slds nr e n d

f Refractormrs5 to Air Seasoning - l‘he timbers are classillcd. as stated below. depending upon thclr behavlour with resp. ‘I of crackmp and splrflmg durm g normal a:r sedsonmg practice
suttable for the spcc~cs concerned.

High refractoriness (indicated ‘High’ in the Tobir).

Moderate refractoriness (indicated ‘Moderate’ m the I ahlr). and
Low refractoriness (indicated ‘Low’ in the Table)

]I+mtsGblt !ucral.str,en@h (i? doub!c shear) of,?.55 mm @I natls 8.0 cm long. and 5 mm 4 nails I5 cm lnng at lengthening joints and node joints (values in brackets are far node joIntsI IS gl\sn
1 he value9 shown m ttahcs fctcr to 3 mm @ natls.
- -
 suitable treatment where necessary. They
‘rAB1.E 2 RECOMMENI,ED PERCENTAGE
may be used on,any location. If the
MCIIS.1 [IRE CC)% 1 FKT V.41 t/ES
location is inside and not in contact with
the ground, low durability timber may be (Ciuuw 4.3)
used after..,proper seasoning and
preservative treatment are given in SI u\t ZOhES’
;;dordance with good practice [VI-3(5)]; NO I( II III 1v’

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

b) The loads should be continuous and i) Structural 12 14 17 20
permanent. elements
IO i2 14 16
s.3 For other grades the permissible stresses ii) Doors and

r ‘ven in Table 7 shall be multiplied by the

ollowing factors to obtain the permissible
stresses assuming that the conditions laid
wndws
*The counwy has heen broadly dwided Into the following
f o u r Tones hased on the humidity varialions in Ihe
down in 5.2 are satisfied: country.

a) For Grade 1 timber 1.16 Avcragc annual rclat~ve humtidlty less

than 40 percent.
b) For Grade 3 timber 0.84 Average Jnnusl relatwc humid!@ 40 to
50 percent.
5.3.1 When low durability timbers are10 be
used [see 5.2(a)] on outside locations, the
permissible stresses for all grades of’timber,
arrived at by 5.2 and 5.3 shall be multiplied by
0.8.
For detailed londl clns<lilc;ilIr>n. relerence may be made
5.4 Modlfwation Factors for Permissible to good practice [VI-?(?)]
Stresses

5.4.1 For change in slope of grain when the

IABI [~ 3 PKLt-LRRLL) C‘LI I SIZLS OI
timber has not been graded and has major SrKliC‘I lJRAl
defects like slope of grain, knots and checks or TIMBERS FOR ROOF TRIISSFS
shakes but not beyond permissible value, the (FROM 3 TO 20 METRES)
permissible stress given in Table 7 shall be
(Cl0Usc~ 4 4 I)
multiplied by modification factor KI for
different slopes of grain as given in Table 8. THICK~I \L; ,h WII)1’H IN cm
cm
/ f. 7
5 . 4 . 2 F OR C HANGE IN D U R A T I O N O F
LoAD - For durations for design load other (1) (21 (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
than continuous, the permissible stresses 20 4 5 6 I3 - ~ - -
given in Table 7 shall be multiplied by the 2.5 4 5 6 8 IO 12 14 16
modification factor Kz given in Table 9. 30 4 5 6 II IO I2 :4 16
4.0 - - 6 8 IO I2 14 I6
5.0 6 8 IO 12 14 16
6.0 - - - 8 IO I 2 14 I6
6. DESIGN CONSlDERATlONS 8.0 IO I? I4 I6
NOISE Preferred lengths <)I timber. I m. I.5 m. 2 m,
6.1 All structural members, asse.mblies or 2.5 m and 3 m.
framework in a building in combination with
the floors, walls and other structural parts of
the building shall be capable of sustaining, TABLE 4 PREFFRREI) (‘UT SIZES OF
without execeding the limits of stress STRUC’TLIRAL TIMBER FOR ROOF PURLINS.
specified, the worst combination of all KAFTEKS. FI.OOR RFAMS. FTC
loadings (spe 6.3).
T HICKNESS IN WlDlN IY cm
6.2\ Ner Section cm h \
p
6.2.1 The net section is obtained by deducting (1) (;, 13) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
from the gross section the projected area of all 6 IO 12 14 I6 - --
material removed by boring, grooving or 8 - 10 I2 I4 I6 - -
other means. IO - 14 16 I8 20
NOTE --Preferred lengths of timber 2 m, 2.5 m. 3 m and
NOTE --In amc of nailing, the area of the prcbored hole
3.5 m.
&II not be t&at into munt for thit purpose.

VlP NATtONAL WtWNG CODS OF I N D I A

 TARLE 5 PREFERRED CUT SIZES OF
sr~ucru~.~~ nMi5Erts FUR PARDON
FRAMING AND COVERING Form factor (KJ) shall not be applied for
(Clause 4.4.0 beams having depth less than or equalto
30 cm.
Tnar- WIDTH IN cm
NESS IN W B O X BFAMS A N D I- B E A M S - F o r box
cm. f A \ beams and l-beams the form factor Kq
shall bc obtained by using the formula:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (9 (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
1.0 - 5 - 8 IO - - - -
1.s - 5 - 8 IO I2 I6 - - K, = 0.8 + 0.8 Y
2.0 - - - 8 IO I2 I6 - -
- - - a IO I2 I6 20 24
;;a- - - IO I2 I6 20 24 where
410 4 6 : IO I2 I6 20 24
- : IO I2 I6 20 24 Y=t2(6-8/: +3q2)(l -q,)+q,
;; - _ 6 8 - I2 I6 20 24
*I0 - - - - IO I2 I6 20 24. c) SOLIDCIRCULARCROSSSECTIONS-For
solid circular cros% sections, the foFm
factor k’~ shall be taken as 1.18.
NOTE -Prtfcrrcd lendha of timber : 0.5 m, I m, I .5 m
and2m. d) S Q U A R E CROSS S E C T I O N S -For s q u a r e
cross sections where the load is in the
direction of diagonal, the form factor Kd
6.2.2 The net section used in calculatingload- shall be taken as 1.414.
carrying capacity of a member shall be the
least net section determined as above by 6.4.3 W IDTH ---The minimum width of the
passing a plane or a series of connected planes beam or any flexural member shall not be less
transversely through the members. than 5 cm or one-fiftieth of the span whichever
is greater.
6.2.3 Notches shall in no case remove more
than one quarter of the section. 6.4.4 DE,PTH -The depth of beam or any
flexural member shall not be taken more than
62.4 In the design of an intermediate or long three times of its width without lateral
column, gross section shall be used in stiffening.
calculating load carrying capacity of the
column. 6.4.4.1 STIFFENING -All fkxural members
having a depth exceeding three times itswidth
6.3 Loads or a span exceeding 50 times its width or both
shall be laterally restrained from twistingor
63.1 The loads shall conform to those given buckling and the. distance between such
in Part VI Structural design, Section I Loads. restraints shall not exceed 50 times its width.
6.3.2 The worst combination and location of 6.4.3 DE F L E C T I O N -The deflection in the
loads shall be considered for design. Wind and case of all flexural members. (except nxil
seismic forces shall not be considered to act laminated beams) supporting brittle materials
simultaneously. like gypsum ceilings, states, tiks and asbestos
sheets shall not exceed I/‘360 of the span. The
6.4 Flexural Members deflection in the case of other flexural
members shall not exaed I /240 of the span
6.4.1 E F F E CT IVE S PAN -The effective span and I / 180 of the freely hanging kngthin the
of beams and other flexural members shall bc case of cantilevers.
taken as the distance from face of supports
plus one-half of the required length of bearing 6.4.6 SH E A R
at each end except that for continuous beams
and joists the span may be measured from 6.4.6.1 The following formula shall apply:
centre of bearing at those supports over which
the beam is continuous. a) General formula:
64.2 FO R M F A C T O R S FOR FLEXURAL
MEMBERS -The following form facton shall 3v
be applied to the bending stress: b) Rectangular beams: H=FD
a) RECTANGULAR SECTION - F o r
rectangular sections. for differentdepths 4 Notched beams with tension H =gg2
of beams. the form factor Ks Shall be notches and supports I
taken as: (see 6.4.6.3)
 TABLE 6 PERMISSIBLE DEFECTS FOR CUT SIZES OF TIMBER FOR STRUCTURAL USE

(Cbuw 1.5.2.1)

All dimensions are m milhmctrcs.

G RA DE I G RA D E 2 GRADE 3
I% DEFEcTS
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

i) Wane Shall be permissible al 11s Shall be permissible at its Shall be pcrmlssibk at its
deepest portion up to a limit dapcrt ponmn up to a limit deepest portlon up to a limit .
of l/8 of the wtdth of tbc of l/6 of the width of the of I14 of the width of the
surlacc on whrch it occurs surface on watch II occutx surface on which tt occurs

il) Worm holes Other than tho.u due to pow- Other than thoscduc to post Orher than those due to powda
dcr post butkr am permissi- butb arr pcrmibsibk post beetles arc pcrmissibk
bk

iii) Slope of gratn Shall not be more than I oh 10 Shall not k morr than I in I5 Shall not be more than I in 12

iv) Live knots:

WIDTH OF WIDE PFRMISSIBLE MAYIUUU SIZE PERMISSIIILE M A X IM U M SIZE PERUISSIBLE MAXIMUM SIZE
FACES OF CUT OF LIVE KNOT OPI OF I IVE KNOT ON OF I IVC KNOT 0%
SIZES OF TIMBER cf-*-, ,-A-,
Max Narrow Faces The Rcmainmg Narrow Faces The Rcmainina Narrow I-aces The Rcmninina
and I14 of Central’Half and 1’4 of Central Half- and l/4 of Central Half”
the Width of the Width the Width of the Width the Width of the W\dth
Face Close of the Wide Face C!osc of the Wide Face c‘losc of the Wldc
to Edges of Faces 10 Edges of Faces to Edger of FEC.3
Cut SIX of Cut Sire of Cut Size of
Timber Timber Timber

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

75 IO IO I9 19 29 30
IO0 I3 13 25 25 38 39
I50 I9 19 38 38 57 57
200 22 25 44 50 66 75
250 25 29 50 57 7s 87
3iKI 27 38 54 75 81 II4
350 29 41 57 81 87 I23
400 32 44 63 87 96 132
450 33 47 66 93 99 141
500 35 50 69 100 105 I50
550 3h 52 72 103 108 156
boo 38 53 75 106 I14 I59

v) ChczAr and shah

WlDrH OF THE PERMISSIBLE DEPTH
FACE OF THE Mar
1IMBER
MAX

(1) 0) (9 (4)

75 I2 25 ?h
100 18 35 54
I50 25 50 75
200 33 65 99
250 40 81 I20
300 50 100 I50
350 57 II5 I71
u10 46 131 198
450 76 I50 225
500 83 I65 270
550 90 ISI 300
Ml I00 200

“I-P NAllONM BUILlNNC CODE OF INDIA

 TABLE 7 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES FOR GRADE 2 TIMBER

(Clal+r 5.2)

Loc’ar1oh: PERMISVBLF: SlRESSES. b.pf/Cm’

r \
tiroup A Group B Group C
(E= 126) (E- 98 IO 126) (E- 56 IO 98)

(1) (2) 0) (4) (5)

Bending and tenSIon along gram lnsldc locattons I82 I23 84

DutsJe locations I52 102 10
wet locations 120 81 60

Shear Horizontal, all locations* I2 1; 6

Along grain, all locations 17 9

Compression parallel to Fain inside locations 120 70 64

Outside locations
Wet locations 106
88 62
58 z

Compressron prepcndlcular to lnsldc Iocatwns 40 22 22

gram (h&de locations
Wet Iocatwns 46
38 I:

‘The valueb of horirontal shears to be used only lor beams

In all other cases \hcar along grain IO he used

-.-__--.
All unilorm loads within a distance equal
‘TAHL.E 8 MDDIFIcA~~D~~~ FACTOR K, .ro to the depth of the beam from the edge of
ALLOW FOR CHANGE IN SI.OPF OF GRAIN the nearest support may be neglected, and
(Clwse 5.4. I) b) All concentrated loads m the vicinity of
the supporrs may be reduced by the
SLOPE M O D I F I C A T I O N FACTOR K,
reduction factor applicable according to
7---y
Strength of Strength of Table IO.
Beams, Jouts Posts or
and TICS Columns _
(1) (2) (1: fAMLE IO REDlIC-f’lON FACTOR FOR
CDNCEN-TRATEI) LO.ADS INTHF V I C I N I T Y
I rn IO @NO 0.74 OF SlIPPORTS
I tn I2 0% 0.82 [Clouw 6.4.6.2 (b)J

I m I4 0.98 0.87 Distance of load 151) 20 2.5 D 30

from the nearest or less or more
g I in IS l-00 1.00 rupporl
-~
Reduction factor 0.60 0.40 0 . 2 0 N o re-
duction

TABLE 9 MODIFICATION FACTOR Kz F O R NOTE .-For i n t e r m e d i a t e d i s t a n c e s . perccntagc

CHANGE IN DURATION OF LOADING reduction may be obtained by linear interpolation.

(Clause 5.4.1)

DURATION OF LOADING M~LUFICATION 6.4.6.3 Unless the local stress is calculated

FACTOR Kz and found to be within the permissible stress,
Cbntinuous I.0 flexural member shall not be cut, notched or
bored except as follows:
‘Two months I.15 a) Notches may be cut in the top or bottom
Seven days I.25 neither deeper than one-fifth of the depth
of the beam nor farther from the edge of
Wind and urthquakc I.33 the support than one-sixth of the span;
Irutantancour or impaet 2.00 W Holes not larger in diameter than one-
quarter of the depth may be bored in the
middle third of the depth and length, and
6.142 In determinmg the vertical reaction V,
the following deductions in loads may bc cl If holes or notches occur at a distance
made: Beater than three times the depth of the

members from the edge of the nearest
support, the net remaining depth shall be
used in determining the bending strength.
6.4.7 B E A R I N G
6.4.7.1 The ends ot’ flexural members shall be
supported in recesses which provide adequate
ventilation to prevent dry rot and shall not be
enclosed. Flcxural members except root
timbers which are supported directly on
masonry or concrete shall have a length of
bearing of not less than 7.5 cm. Members
supported on corbels, offsets and rout’timbers
on a wall shall bear immediately on and be
fixed to wall-plate not less than 7.5 X 4.0 cm.
Timber joists or floor planks &all not bc
supported on the top tlanpe of steel beams
unless the bearing stress, calculated on the net
bearing as shaped to fit the beam, is less than
t h e p e r m i s s i b l e c o m p r e s s i v e sirrss
perpendicular to the grain /c,,. specified in
Table 7.
6.4.7.2 BEARING S I REsS
a) LENGTH AND POSI’I’IUK uF WARINGS -At
any bearing on the side grain of timber,
the permissible stress in compression
perpendicular to the grain, fin, is
dependent on the length and position of
the bearing.
b) The pcrmlssible stresses given in Table 7
for compression perpendicular to the:
grain are also the permissible stresses for
bearings of any length at the ends of a
member and lor bcarmgs I50 mm or more
in length at any other position.
c) For bearings less than I50 mm in length
located 75 mm or more from the end ot a
member as shown in Fig. I the permis-
sible stress may br multiplied by the
modification factor KT given in Table I I.
I I
I 6.5.1’2 For intermediate columns the
c 75 mm,
MIN
150mm MAX
BE ARlNG
Fig. 1 Position of End 0earings
TABLE I I MODIFICATION ~KT0R K, FOR REARING STRESSES
. [C/me 6.1.7.2 tc) und (I)]
Lrlythofbewin$,inmm IS 25
ModifIIrion fmor. Kl 1.67 1.40
--“-““’ .
I..
d) No allowance need be made for the
difference injntensity ofthe bearing stress
due to bending of a beam.’
e) The bearing area should be calculated as
the net area after allowance for the
amount of wane as permitted in 4.5.3.
1-l For bearing stress under a washer or a
small plate, the same coefficient specified
m Table I I may be taken for a bearing .
with a length equal to the diameter of the
washer or the width of the small plate.
g) When the,direction of stress is a( an angle
to the directton of the grain in any
structural member, then the pcrriussible
bearing stress in that member shall be
citlculatcd by the following formula:
6.5
6.5.1 SOI It> C‘OLlJMNS ---Solid column shall
bt: c!sssllled Into shor!. Intermedtatr and long
colurllns descending u p o n t h e i r slendcrn<ss
ratio (S/A ab f’ollows:
Short columns where SJd dues not
exceed It,
Interrncdlate c o l u m n s w h e r e S/d IS
ht‘twe~~~I I and Kw, and
l.ong columns where S/i, is greater than
Ki’r
6.5.1.1 For short columns, the permlsrible
compressive stress shall be calculated as
l’ollows:
f; =_fip
permissible compressive stress is calculated by
using the following formula:
f+,,[ I- f ($-J]
40 50 75 IKI IM 01 mom
I.25 l.20 I.13 I.10 I.uo
6.5.1.3 For long columns, the pcrmlssible
corn resrive stress shall be calculated by using
the P
ollowing formula:
0.329 E
/e=(s/d)2
6.5.f.4 In the case of solid columns oftimber.
S/d ratio shall not exceed 50.
6.5.1.5 The permissible load on a column of
circular cross section shall not exceed that
permitted for a square column of an
equivalent cross-sectional area.
6.5.1.6 For determining S/d ratio of a
tapered column, its least dimension shall be
taken as the sum of the corresponding least
dimensions at the small end of the column and
one-third of the difference between this least
dimension at the small end and the
corresponding least dimension at the large
end. but in no case shall the least dimension
for the cloumn bc taken as more than one and
a half times the least dimension at the small
end. The induced stress at the small endofthe
tapered column shall not exceed the
permissible compressive stress in the direction
of grain.
6.5.2 B UILT-UP COLUMNS- BOX COLUMNS
$5.2.1 Box columns shall be classified into
short, intermediate and long columns as
follows:
a) Short columns, where
is less than 8;
b) Intermediate columns, where
is bewan 8 and KP; and
s.
c) Long columns, where J=
is greater than KS.
6522 For short columns. the ocr missibk
oomprcssive stress shatl be Calculated as
follows:
/c = qfcp
6.5.2.3 For intermediate columns, the
permissible compressive stress shall be
obtained using the Eollowing formula:
65.2.4 For long columns, the permissible
&m rcssive stress shall be calculated by using
the Pormula:
6.5.2.5 The following values of U and q.
depending upon plank thickness (I) in 6.5.2.1.
6.5.212, 6.5.2.3 and 6.5.2.4. shall be used:
I 4
(in cm)
2.50 0.80 1.00
5.00 0.60 1.00
6.5.3 B U I L T- UP C O L U M N S- SP A C E D
COLUMNS
6.5.3.1 The formulae for solid columns as
specified in 6J.l are applicable to spaced
columns with a restraint factor of 2.5 or 3,
depending upon distances of end connectors
in the column:
The ccntroid of connectors or of the
connector group in the end block shall be
within one-twentieth of the lengthS from
the column end, and
The ccntroid of connectors or connector
group in the end block shall be between
one- twentieth and one-tenth ofthe length
S from the column end.
6.5.3.2 For intermediate spaced column the
permissible compressive stress shall be:
6.5.3.3 For long spaced columns the formula
shall be:
0.329 E X 2.5
fc=
(S/d)’
6.5.3.4 For individual members of spaced
columns. S/d ratio shall not exceed 80.
6.5.4’ Compression members shall not be
notched. When it is necessary to pass services
through such a member, this shall be effected
by means of a bored hole not larger in
diameter than one-quarter the width of the
face through which the hole is bored provided
that the local stress is calculated and found to
be yithin the permissible stress specified. The
distance from the edge of the hole to the edge
of the member shall not be less than one-
quarter of the width of the face.
6.6, Slrucrural Members Subject to Bending
artd Axial Stresses
6.6.1Structural members subjected both to
bending and axial compression shall be
d e s i g n e d t o c o m p l y with the followrng
formula:
-& + ./.b is not greater than I.
fc .A
6.6.2 Stuctural members subJected both to
bending and axial tension shall be designed to
comply wtth the following formula:
b + b IS not greater than 1 grain
,/I fh
7. DESIGN Ol- COMMCjh STEEL WIRE
SAlI. JOINTS
7.1.1 I he dtmensron of an Individual piece of
timber (that IS any single memher) shall be
within the range given below.
a) I he mrnimum thickness of the main
members rn mono-chord constructron
shall’be 30 mm.
b) ‘The minrmum thickness of an individual
piece of member i n s p l i t - c h o r d
construction shall be 20 mm tor web
members and 25 mm for chord members.
c) 1 he space between two adjacent pieces of
timber shall be restrtcted to a maximum
ot 3 times the thickness of the individual
piece of timber of the chord member. In
case of web members, it may be greater
for jomtng facilitres.
7.1.2 No lengtheningjoint shall preferably be
located at a panel point. Generally not more
than two, but preferably one, lengthening
joint shall be permitted between the two panel
joints of the members.
7.2 Spectficotion and Diameter of Notls
7.2.1 The nails used for timber joints shall
conform to Part V Building matertals.
7.2.2 The diameter of nail shall be within the
limits of one-eleventh to one-sixth of the least
thickness of members being connected.
7.2.3 Where the nails are exposed to the
saline conditions, common wire nails shall be
galvanized.
7.3 Arrangement oj Nuils in the Joints -The,
end distances, edge distances and spacings of
nails in a nailed joint should be such as to
avoid undue splitting of the wood and shall
not be less than those given in 7.3.1 and 7.3.2.
7 . 3 . 1 L E N G T H EN I N G J O I N T S - T h e
requirement of spacing of nails in a
lengthening .joint shall be as follows (see also
Fig. 2):
SI Tvpe o f Rquire
No. Stress in mew,
the Joint Min
i) End distance Tension 12 n
compression 10 n
ii) In direction of Tension 10 n
compre&on 5 n
iii) Edge distance Sn
iv) H e t w e e n r o w o f 5n
nails perpendi-
cular to the
grain,
N01t The 5 n dlsrance between rows perpendicular to
the gracn may be increased subject to rhc avallabrhty of
width ol the member keepmg edge distance constant.
7.3.2 NODE .lOINTS -The requirement for
spacing of nails in node joints shall be as
spectfied in Fig. 3 where the members are at
right angles and as in Fig. 4 where the
members are inclined to one another at angles
other than 90” and subjected to either pure
compression or pure tension.
7.4 Penetration of Nails
7.4. / For a lap joint when the nails are driven
from the side of the thinner member, the
length of penetration of nails in the thicker
member shall be one and a half times the
thickness of the thinner member subject to
maximum of the thickness of the thicker
member.
7.4.2 For butt joints the nails shall be driven
through the entire thickness of the joint.
7 S Design Considerations
7._5.1 Where a number of nails are used in a
joint, the allowable load in lateral resistance
shall be the sum of the allowable loads for the
individual nails, provided that the centroid of
the group of these nails lies on the axis of the
member and the spacings conform to 7.3.
Where a large number of nails are to be
provided at a joint. they should be so arranged
that there are more of rows rather than more
number of nails in a row..
7.5.2 Nails shall. as far as practicable, be
arranged so that the line of force in a member
passes through the centroid of the group of
nails. Where this is not practicable, allowance
shall be made for any eccentricity in
computing the maximum load on the fixing
nails as well as the loads and bending moment
in the member.
NATKINAL l UlLDINC COOL OF INDIA
 5n mm.
EFFECTIVE END
DISTANCE

2 A M o n o c h o r d T y p e Bult Joint Subject tn C o m p r e s s i o n

10 n min.-

5n min.
+-+--t- ; -+~--c-----+-
. . 5n min.
+.‘t-_+ j +__+__t

+.+_+
j-- ? -+ I

D I S T A N C E Sn m i n .

LB Monochord Type Butt Joint Subject to Tension

n= shank diameter of natl

Fix. 2 Spacirrg of A/ails i n a Lengthmtn~ Joint-Conttnued

PART V I SVtII)CTURAL DLQGN - SE(‘TIUN J WUOU ,,.,.l’

 .

EFFECTIVE EWD
DtSTA(rCE ton MIN

EFFECTIVE EDGE
DISTAMCE Sn WIN -I
2C Split-Chord Type Butt Joint Subjcc? toCcmprcsrion

2D Split-Chord Type Butt Joint Subject to Tension

n = shmnk diameter of nail.

Fig. 2 Spacing of Nails in a Lengthening Joint

w!* NATWNAL BUILUNC

 .

5n WIN-

3A

l h my be incrcurd to IO n. if tkdaigncd idthof

chord member permiu. OWrwi~ IIK end of tbc
lmdcd rrb mccnkr may k extended by &I, Min.
n = &tank dLmctcr of NIL

Fig. 3 Spacing qf Nail Where Members arc

at Right At@es IO One Anorhcr

?AmT VI IIIwcN)AL DUKN-8unoN 3 WUOD YIP

 a -7wil
I
sn

r LOADED EOGE .

l51 may be increased IO IOn. if thedargncd width of chord member permltr.

Otherwise Ihc end of Ihc loaded web member may bc cxrcnded by 5n. Min

Fig. 4 Spacing of Nails al Node Joints Where

Members are Inclined to One Another

73.3 Adjacent nails shall preferably be
. .
driven from opposite faces. that IS, the nails
are driven alternatively t’rom either face.
7.5.4 For a rigid joint, a mmimum of 2 nails
for nodal joints and 4 nails for lengthening
joint shall be driven.
7.5.5 Two nails in a horizontal row are better
than using the same number of nails in a
vertical row.
7.6 Special Consideration in Nail-Jointed
lluss Ckwlruction
7.6.1 The initial upward camber provided at
the centre of the lower chord of nail-jointed
timber trusses shall be nqt less than 1,200 for
timber structures using seasoned wood and
I/ 100 for unseasoned or partially seasoned
wood.
7.6.2 The total combined thickness of the
gusset or splice plates on either side of the
joint in a mono-chord type construction shall
not be less than one and a half times the
thickness of the main members subject to a

“1-P N A T I O N A L DUlWNC CODE OF I N D I A

minimum thickness of 2.5 cm of individual 8.2.3 In order to obtain the overall width of
gusset plate. the beam, the number and thickness of planks
to form vertical nailed laminated beams, and
N OTE I-The allowahlc load or lateral strength values of also type and size of wire nail shall be as
nails shall be those as given in Table I I. mentioned in Table 12. The protruding
N OTE 2 -The strengthdata forjointsgiven in this section
portion of the nail shall be cut off or cleriched
apply to gusset or splice or fish plates Kf solid -wood; across the grains.
however. materials other than sohd wood may be used for
gusset when field tests xe made and their strength
requiiements have been estahhshed. .
TABLE I2 NUMBtK AND SIZE OF PLANKS AND
NAILS FOR NAIL ED LAMINATED BEAMS
7.6J.The total combined thickness of all
spacer blocks or plates or bothincluding outer SL OVERA! I N o THICKhESS TY P E A N D S I Z E
splice plates, at any joint in a split-chord type No WIUTH OF OF EACH OF NAIL TO BE
construction shall not be less than one and a OF BEAM PI A N K S PI.ANK USED
(cm) (cm) (mm)
half times the total thickness of all the main
members at that joint. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

7. 7 Fabrication - I‘he fabrication of nail- I 5 2 2.5 80 long 3.55 dia

jointed timber construction shall be done in 2 6 3 2.0 -do-
accordance with good practice [V l-3(6)].
3 7 3 2 X 2.5
-do-
1X2.0
8. DESIGN OF N A I L L A M I N A T E D 4 8 4 2.0 100 long 4.0 dia
TIMBER BEAMS
5 9 3 3.0 -do-
8.1 Melhod of Arrangement 6 IO 4 2.5 I25 long 5.0 dia

8.1.1 The beam is made up of 2 to 3 cm thick 7 II 4

-do
planks placed vertically with joints staggered
in the adjoining planks with a minimum 8 12 4 3.0 -do-
distance 6f 30 cm. The planks are laminated
with the help of wire nails at regular intervals 9 IS 5 3.0 I50 long 5.0 dia
to take up horizontal shear developed in the N OTE ~~ A number of combmatiops of the different
beam besides keeping the planks in position thickness of planks may be adopted as long as the
(see Fig. 5) minrmum and maximum thickness of the planks are
adhered to.

8.2 Sizes of Planks and Beams

8.2.1 The p!anks thickness for fabrication of 8.3 Design Considerarions

nailed laminated beams recommended are
2-0, 2.5 and 3-O cm.
8.2.2 In case of nailed laminated timber beam
the maximum depth and length of planks shall
be limited to 25 cm and 200 cm, respectively.
8.3.1 Nail laminated beams shall be designed
in accordance with 6.
8.3.f.l The deflection in the case of nailed
laminated timber beams. joists, purlins,

-.._
,6*-_- -~ t60----

ueZ5mm THICK TIMBER PLANK S

C~75mmc3oOmm

(AU dimcnaiona LIZ! in em unksa ot&rwiac spiftcd)

Fyg. 5 Phn and Elevation of a Typical Nailed

Laminated lhber &am
b a t t e n s a n d o t h e r flcxural members
supporting brittle materials like gypsum,
ceiling slates, tiles and asbestos sheets shall
not exceed I /480 of the span. The deflection
in case of other-flexural members shall not
exceed I / 360 of the span in the case of beams
and joists. and I I225 of the freely hanging
length in case of cantilevers.
8.3.2 Permissible lateral strength of mild steel
wire nails shall be as given in Table I column
13 for Indi;tn Species of timber. which shall
apply to nails that have their points cut flush
with the facts. For nails clenched across the
grains the strength may be increased by 20
percent over the values for nails with points
cut flush.
8.3.3 ARRANGEMENT OF NAII s
8.3.3.1 A mimmum number ul four nails in a
vertical row at regular interval not cxcceding
7.5 cm to take up horizontal shear as well as to
keep the planks in position shall be used. Near
the joints ol’ the planks this distance may,
however. be limited to 5 cm instead of 7.5 cm.
8.3.3.2 Shear shall be calculated .at various
points of the beam and the number of nails
required shall be accommodated within the
distance equal to the depth of the beam. with a
minimum of 4 nails in a row at a standard
spacing as shown in Fig. 6.
8.3.3.3 If the depth of the hcam is more. then
the vertical intcrmedrate spacing of nails may
be increased proportionately.
8.3.3.4 If the nails required at a point are
more than that can he accommodated in a
row, then these shall be provided lengthwise
of the beam within the drstance equal to the
depth of the beam at standard lengthwise
spacing.
8.3.3.5 For nailed laminated beam minimum
depth of 8 cm for 3.55 mm and 4 mm diameter
nails, and 12.5 cm for 5 mm diameter nails
shall be provtded.
8.4 Fabricorion
6A For 3-55 mm and 4 mm &meter Nails
(AU dimenrioru in mm)
fig. 6 Staudard lrngth wise Spacing in
Nailed klminated Beam
8.4.1 The fabrication of nailed laminated
timber beams shall be done in accordance
with good practice [VI-3(7)].
9. DESIGN OF BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
JOINTS
9. J Generul- For total prefabrication, bolt
jointed construction is the most befitting idea
for ti,mber structural components. Bolt
jointed construction’units give better farilities
as regards workshop ease, transport
convenience and re-assembly at site of work.
This technique is best suited for defence
purposes for semi-permanent structures
(sheds) which are required to be erected at
high altitudes and in far off places. Mass
production of structutal components i n
factories can thus be made far rational.
9.2 Design Considerations
9.2.1 Beams shall be designed in accordance
with 6.
9.2.2 Where a number of bolts are used in a
joint, the allowable load in withdrawal or
lateral resistance shall be the sum of the
allowable loads for the individual bolts.
9.3 Arranpemenr of Bolts
9.3.1 The following spacings in bolted joints
shall be followed (see Fig. 7):
a) SPACTNG OF BOLTS IN A ROW - F o r
parallel and perpendicular to grain
loading = 48.
b) SPACING BETWEEN ROWS OF BOLTS
I) For perpendicular to grain loading :
2.5 d, to 5d, (2.5 ds for r/d, ratio of 2
and 5 h for r/h ratio of 6, where t is
the thickness of main memberand do is
the diameter of the bolt used).
2) for parallel to grain loading : At least
(N-4) d) with a minimum of 2.5 h,
where N is total number of bolts. Also
governed by net area at critical section
68 For 5 mm hmctcr NtiL
 L4,
7A Sprcin( of Bolts in Lenahenlng Joinu
(Jointr loaded ptxallel to grain)
A= (N-4) d, or 2.5 d, whichever is patsr. Also
loverned by net area A( critical aectmn (aran should
be IJO percent of the total area in be4nne under all
bohr).
N= total number of bolta in the joint.
Fig. 7 Typical S’cing of Bolts in Srructuwl3oinrs
which should be 80 percent of the total
area in bearing under all bolts.
for sof’t woods in
cl END DISTANCE --~7 dj
tension, 5 do for hardwoods in tension
and 4 do t”or all species in compression.
d) EDGE DISTANCE
I) For parallel to grain loading I.5 & or
half the distance between rows of
bolts, whichever is greater.
2) For perpendicular to grain loading,
the loaded edge distance shall be at
least 4 h.
9.3.2 For inclined members. the spacing
given above for perpendicular and parallel to
grain of wood may be used as a guide and
rur VI-+m WXURAL DUIGN--_CWON J Woo0
78 Spcinl of Bolu II Node Joinu
(Joints I oaded perpendicular to gnin)
6 = I .5 da
or half the distance between rows of bolts,
w hi&ever is greater.
da = diameter of the bolt
1= thickness of the mai; member.
bolts arranged at the joint with respect to
loading direction.
9.3.3 Tht bolts shall be arranged in such a
manner SO as to pass the centre of resistance of
bolts through the rntersection ofihc gravity
axis of the members.
9.3.4 Staggering of bolts shall be avoided as
far as possible in case of members loaded
parallel to grain of wood. For loads acting
perpendicular to grain of wood. staggering is
preferable to avoid splitting due to weather
effects.
9.3.5 B O L T I N G -The bolt holes shall be
bored or drilled perpendicular to the surface
involved. Forcible driving of the bolts shall be
avoided which maycausecrackingorsplitting
of members. A bolt hole of 1.0 mm oversize
may be used as a guide for preboring.
,_*23
 .

LlST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standard.s which are acceptable as ‘good practice and ‘accepted
standards’ in the fulfi~ment of the requirements of the Code. T?te latest version of a standard shall
be adopted at the’ time of the enfirrcement of rbe Code. The standards listed ma-v be used by the
Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the&de
In the following list. the number appearing in the first column within parentheses indicates the
number of rhe reference in this partlsecnon.

(1) IS : 1708-1969 Methods oftesting small
clear specimens of timber (first
revision)
IS : 2408-1963 Methods of static tests of
timbers in structural sizes
IS : 2455-1974 Methods of sampling of
model trees and logs for timber testing
and their conversion (first revision)
(2) IS : 4970-1973 Key for identification of
commercial timbers flrsr revision)
(3) 13:287-1973 Recommendations f o r
maximum permissible moisture content
of, timber used for different purposes
(second revision)
( 4 ) 13:3629-1966 Specification for
structural timber in building
(5) 1S:401-1982 C o d e o f p r a c t i c e f o r
preservation of timber (third revision)
(6) IS: 2366-1983 Code of practice for nail-
jointed timber construction C/irsr
revision)
(7) IS:4983-1984 Code of p r a c t i c e f o r
design a n d constructron o f nail
laminated timber beams first revision)
(under prim)
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION 4 MASONRY

BUREAU OF lNDL4.N STANDARDS

 PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION 4 MASONRY

0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section covers the structural design of non-reinforced masonry elements in buildings.
Results of designs by normal structural analysis for certain loadings and spans have beenprsaanted
in the form of nomograms in order to obviate the need for detailedcakulations in simple
structures, thus facilitating the work of designers.
0. S In the revision of this section, certain provisions have been updated following therevidon of
IS: 1905 on which the earlier version was based. The following major changes have been made in
this revision.
a) The requirements of a masonry element for stability have beenmodfied.
b) In the design of a free standing wall, provision has been made for taking advantage of the
tensile resistance in masonry under certain conditions.
c) Provision regarding effective height of a masonry wall between openingshas been modif&d.
d) Method of working out effective height of a wall with a membrane type DPC has
been modified.
e) Criteria for working out effective length of wall having openings has been modified.
f) fag general guidelines have been given for dealing with concentrated loads for design of

g) Provisions regarding cutting and chases in walls have been amplified.

0.3 Structural design requirements of this section are based on IS: 19051987 Code of practice for
structural use of unreinforced masonry (fhird rev&&n) and IS:43261976 Code of practice
for earthquake resistant design and construction of buildings(first revision)‘.

1
rAITwslxucNau DW-N 4 MA+MRY w-4
CONTENTS

0. FOREWORD
1. SCOPE
2. TERMINOLOGY
3. MATERIALS
4. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
5. STRUCTURAL DESIGN

6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

7. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS IN EARTHQUAKE ZONES

8. NOTATIONS AND SYMBOLS

APPENDIX A SOME GUIDELINES FOR ASSESSMENT OF

ECCENTRICITY OF LOADING ON WALLS

APPENDIX B CALCULATION OF BASIC COMPRESSIVE

STRESS OF MASONRY BY PRISM TEST

APPENDIX C GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF MASONRY

SUBJECTED TO CONCENTRATED LOADS

APPENDIX D GUIDELINES FOR APPROXIMATE DESIGN OF

NON-IJJAD BEARING WALL
APPENDIX E NOTATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
2
# NAllopLAL BUILDIWG COM OF INDIA
I . SCOPE
1.1 This section covers the structural design
aspects of unreinforced load bearing and non-
load bearing walls, constructed with solid or
perforated burnt clay bricks, sand-lime bricks,
stones, concrete blocks, lime based blocks or
burnt clay hollow blocks in regard to the
materials to be used, mximum pe,rmissible
stresses and the methods of design.
1.2 The recommendations of the code do not
apply to walls constructed in mud mortars.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this section, the
following definitions shall apply.
B ED B LOCK - A block bedded on a wall,
column or pier to disperse a concentrated load
on a masonry element.
EJOND - Arrangement of masonry units in
successive courses to tie the masonry together
both longitudinally and transversely; the
arrangement is usually worked out to ensure
that no vertical joint of one course is exactly
over the one in the next course aboveor below
it, and there is maximum possible amount of
lap.
COLUMN.PIERAND BUTTRESS
COLUMN - An isolated vertical load
bearing member, width of which does not
exceed four times the thickness.
PIER - A thickened section forming
integral part of a wall placed at intervals
along the wall, to increase the stiffness of
the wall or to carry a vertical concentrated
load. Thickness of a pier is the overall
thickness including the thickness of the
wall or, when bounded into a leaf of a
cavity wall, the thickness obtained by
treating that leaf as an independent wall
(see Fig. 1).
r TMCMNESS OF PIER, tp
1
, WlOfH
Fig. 1 Definirion of Pier
?ARrvlsFu~ DlISlCK4lUllOW 4 RUSONRV
c) BUTTRESS - A pier of sonry built as
an integral part of wall and%rejecting from
either or both surfaces, decreasing incross-
sectional area from base to top.
C R O S S- SECTIONAL A REA OF M A S O N R Y
UNIT - Net cross-sectional area of a masonry
unit shall be taken as the gross cross-sectional
area minus the area of cellular space. Gross
cross-sectional area of cored units shall be
determined to the outside of the coring but
cross-sectional area of grooves shall not be
deducted from the gfoss cross-sectional area to
obtain the net cross-sectional area.
CURTAIN WALL - A non-load bearing wall
subject to lateral loads. It may be laterally
supported by vertical or horizontal structural
members where necessary (see Fig: 2).
EFFECTIVE H EIGHT - The height of a wall
or column, to be considered for calculating
slenderness ratio.
EFFECTIVE LENGTH - The length of a wall
to be considered for calculating slenderness
ration.
EFFECTIVE T HICKNESS - The thicknessof a
wall or column to be considered for calculating
slenderness ratio.
H OLLOW U N I T - A masonry unit of which
net cross-sectional area in any plane parallel
to the bearing surface is less than 75 percent of
its gross cross-sectional area measured in the
same plane.
G ROUT - Mortar of pourable consistency.
Jo INT - A junction of masonry units.
a) BED JOINT - A horizontal mortar joint
upon which masonry units are laid.
b) CROSS JOINT - A vertical joint, normal
to the face of the wall.
OF PlER,Wp , 4

Fig. 2 Masonry Curtain Wall
c) WALL JOINT -- A vertical joint parallel to
the face of the wall.
&AI: - Inner or outer section of a cavity wall.
L AT E R A L S UPPORT A support which
~
enables a masonry element to resist lateral load
and/or restrains lateral deflection of a masonry
element at the point of support.
IDAI) BEARING WA’LL ~ A wall designed to
carry an imposed vertical load in addition to its
own weight, together with any lateral load.
M ASONRY .- An assemblage of masonry units
properly bonded together with mortar.
M ASONRY U NIT - Individual units which are
bonded together with the help of mortar to
form a masonry element such as wall, column,
pier, buttress, etc.
P A R T I T I O N W ALL -~ An interior non-load
bearing wall, one storey or part storey in
height.
PANEL W ALL - An exterior non-load bearing
wall in framed construction, wholly supported
at each storey but subjected to lateral loads.
S HEAR W ALL - A wall designed to carry
horizontal forces acting in its plane with or
without vertical imposed loads.
S L E N D ER NESS R ATIO - Rario of effective
height or effective length to effective thickness
of a masonry element.
4
K+
AGRAMMATIC)
rYPES OF tiA LLS
a) CAVITY WALL ~ A wall comprising two
leaves, each leaf being built of masonry
units and scparatrd by a cavity and tied
together with metal ties or bonding units
to ensure that the two leaves act as one
structural unit, the space between the
leaves being either left as continuous cavity
or filled with a noqload bearing insulating
and water-proofing material.
b) FACEDWALL ~~ A wall in which facing
and backing of two different materials are
bonded together to ensure common action
under load (see Fig. 3).
NOTE’ ~ To ensure monolithic action in faced walls,
shear strength between the facing and the backing
shall be provided by toothing, bonding or other
means.
c) VENEERED W ALL - A wallinwhichthe
facing @attached to the backing but not
so bonded as to result in a commonactlon
under load.
3. MATERIALS
3.1 General - The materials used in masonry
construction shall be in accordance with
Part V Building mater+
3.2 Masonry Units ~ Masonry units used in
construction shall conform to accepted
standards [W4(1)] *
l In this section, where reference is made to ‘accepted
standards’ or ‘good practice’ in relation to mateqial
specification, design, testmg and construction
procedures, the appropriate document listed at the
end of this section may be used as a guide to the
interpretation of this term.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INLUA

BRICK BACKING
Bf?ICK
F*c~ffi
Fig. 3 Typical Faced Wall
3.2.1 Masonry units may be of the following
types:
a) Common burnt clay building bricks,
b) Stones (in regular sized units),
c) Sand-lime bricks,
d) Concrete blocks (solid and hollow),
e) Lime based blocks,
f) burnt clay hollow blocks,
g) Gypsum partition blocks, and
h) Autoclaved cellular concrete blocks.
NOTE 1 ~ Gypsum partition blocks are used only for
construction of non-load bearing partition walls.
NOTE 2 - Use of other masonry units such as precast
stow blocks not covered by the above specifications
canalso be permitted based on test results.
3.2.2 Masonry units that have been previously
used shall not be reused in brickwork or block-
?MlWavcrvlw Dl!SlGU-SJ!4XlOW 4 MASONRY
.
L STONE FACING
CORlCAETE BLOCK
BACKING
work construction, unless they have been
thoroughly cleaned and conform to the section
for similar new masonry units.
3.3 Morrar - Mortar for masonry shall conform
to accepted standards [W-4(2)].
3.3.1 Mix proportions and compressive
strengths of some of the commonly used
mortars are given in Table 1,
4. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
4. I Cenerul -- Masonry structures gain stability
from the support offered by cross walls,flodrs.
roof and other elements such as piers and
buttresses. Load bearing walls are slructurally
more efficient when the load is uniformly
distributed and the structure is so planned that
eccentricity of loading on the members is as
small as possible. Avoidance of eccentric
loading by providing adequate bearing of floor/
roof on the walls providing adequate stiffness in
slabs and avoiding ftity at the supports, etc.,
is especially important in load bearing walls
in multistorey structures. These matters should
receive careful consideration during the
planning stage of masonry structures
5
vu-
 TABLE 1 MIX PROPORTIONS AND STRENGTHOFMQRTARS FOR MASONRY

C;RADti.OF iv&x PRoIwKTI~NS (BY L00.5~ VO L U ME ) MINIMUM

k. U~RTAR COMPRFSSIVE
S TRENGTH AT
’ Cement Lime Lime Pozzohna Sand ’ TODAYS
Pozzolana
Mixture

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

N/mm2
1 Hl 1 %CorB 0 0 3 10
2(a) . H2 1 % Cor B 0 0 4 7.5
2(b)
1 % Cor B 0 0 4% 6.0
-I
3(a) Ml 1 0 0 5 5.0
3(b) 1 I CorB 0 0 6 3.0
3(c) 0 17 1 (LP-40) 0 1% 3.0
I
4(a) M2 I 0 0 0 6 3.0
4(b) 1 2B 0 0 9 2.0
4(c) 0 1A 0 0 2 2.1)
4(d) 0 18 0 1 I 2.0
4(e) 0 1 C0rB 0 2 0 2.0
4(f)
10
0 1 (LP-40) cl 1% 2.0

S(a) M3 1 0 0 0 7 1.5
s(b) I 38 0 0 12 1.5
5(c) 0 1A 0 0 3 1 .5
S(d) 0 IB 0 2 1 1.5
5(e) 0 I CorB 0 3 0 1.5
S(f) I0 0 I (LP-40) 0 2 1.5

. 6(a) Ll I 0 0 0 8 0.7
6(b) 0 1R 0 1 2 0.7
6(c) 0 1CorB 0 2 1 0.7
6(d) 0 0 1 (LP-40) 0 2% 0.7
6(e) 0 0 1 (LP-20) 0 1% 0.7
i
7(a) L2 0 IB 0 0 3 0.5
7(b) 0 1CorB 0 1 2 0.5
7(c) 0 0 1 (LP-7) 0 1% 0.5
{
NOTE 1 - Sand for making mortar should be well graded. in case sand is not well graded, its proportion shall be
reduced m order to achieve the minimum specified strength.
NATE 2 - For mixes in SI No, 1 and 2, use of lime is not essential from consideration of strength as it does not
result in
increase in strength. However,its use is highly recommended since it improves workability.
NOTE 3 - For mixes in Sl No. 3(a). 4(a), S(a) and 6(a), either lime C or B to the extent of % part of cement
(by volume) or mme plasticizer should be added for improving workability.
bk3TE 4 - For mixes in SI No. 4(b) and 5(b), lime and sand should first be ground in mortar mill and then
ament added to coarse stuff.
N0TE 5 - It is essential that mixes in Sl No. 4(c). 4(d), 4(e), 5(d), S(e), 6(b), 6(c), 7(a) and 7(b) sue prepared by
grinding in a mortar mill.
MOTE 6 - Mix in SI No. 2(b) has been classifttd to be of rame grade as that of Sl No. 2(a), mixes in Sl MO; 3(b)
and 3(c) same as that in S1 No. 3(a), mixes in Sl No. 4(b) to 4(f) same as that in Sl No. 4(a), eItn thou~ thah
compressive strength is less. This is from consideration of strength ofmasonry using difYerent mix propoftkna.
b&TE 7 - A, B, and C denote eminently hydraulic lime, semihydraulic lime and fit Urne reqe&w.@, as
specified in appropriate IS codes.
-

6
u-4 Na7oN4LB- CQolam~
4.2 Lateral Supportsand Stability
4.21 L A T E R A L SUPPORTS - Lateral
supports for a masonry element such as load
bearing wall or column are intended:
a) to limit slenderness of a masonry.element
so as to prevent or reduce possibiltiy of
buckling of the member due to vertical
loads; and
b) to resist horizontal components of forces
so as to ensure stability of a structure
against overturning.
4.2.1.1 Lateral suppori may be in the vertical
or horizontal direction, the former consisting
of floor/roof bearing on the wall or properly
anchored to the same and latter consisting of
cross walls, piers or buttresses.
4.2.1.2 Requirements of 4.2.1(a) from consi-
deration of slenderness may be deemed to have
been met with, if:
a) In case of a wall, where slenderness ratio
is based on effective height, any of the
following constructions are provided:
1) RCC floor/roof slab (or beams and slab)
irrespective of the direction of span,
bears on the supported wall as well as
CTOSS walls, to the extent of at least
9cm;
2) RCC floor/roof slab not bearing on the
supported wall or cross wall is anchored
to it with non-corrodible metal ties of
60 cm length and of section not less
than 6 x 30 mm, and at intervals not
exceeding 2 m, as shown in Fig. 4; and
3) Timber floor/roof, anchored by non-
corrodible metal ties af length 60 cm
.4 = Cement concrete only at. p&a where anchors are provided ( 20 cm in
width in the direction perpendicular to the plane of paper )
Fig. 4 Anchoring of RCC Slab with Masonry Wall
(When SIab Doer not Bear on Wall)
rAKrnmucnJmAL DESlGN48CTlON I MUONUY
and of minimum section 6 x 30 mm,
securely fastened to joists and built into
walls as shown in Fig. 5 and 6. The
anchors shall be provided in the direction
of span of timber joists as well as in its
perpendicular direction, at intervals of
not more than 2 m in buildings up to
two storeys and 1.25 m for buildings
more than two storeys in height.
NOTE 1 _ In case precast R C C units are used for
floors and roofs, it is necessary to interconnect them
and suitably anchor them to the cross walls so that
they can transfer lateral forces to the cross walls.
kTE 2 _ ln case of small houses of conventional
designs, not exceeding two storeys in height, stiffen-
ing effect of partitions and cross walls is such that
metal anchors are normally not necessary in case of
timber floor/roof and precast RCC floor/roof units.
b) In case of a wall, when slenderness ratio is
based on its effective length; a cross wall/
pier/buttress of thickness equal to or more
than half the thickness of the supported
wall or 90 mm, whichever is more, and
length equal to or more than one fifth
of the height of wall, is built at right angle
to the wall (see Fig. 7) and bonded to it
according to provision of 4.2.2.2 (d);
c) In case of a column, an RCC or timber
beam/R S joist/roof truss, is supported on
the column. In this case, the column will
not be deemed to be laterally supported in
the direction at right angle to it; and
d) In case of a column, an RCC beam forming
a part of beam and slab construction, is
supported on the column, and slab
adequately bears on stiffening walls. This
construction will provide lateral support to
the column, in the direction of both
horizontal axes.
/-A
7
a-4.
Y
 METAL ANCHOR 60 cm
tONCRETE,min. LONG,FIXEO TO JOIST
LENGTH 3Ocm 1
CONCRETE, min.
LENGTH 30 cm -,

5A Joists at Right Angle to Wall 5Fj ]oirts Parallel to Wail

Fig. 5 Typical Details for Anchor Age-of

Solid Walls

6 A Timber Jo II sts at Right Angles to Wall

6 B Tlmber Joists Parallel to Wall

(Ii (III

6 C Prrcasr C o n c r e t e Floor Units Pualiel to Wall

i‘rg 6 Typical Details for. Anchorage of Cavity Walk

 4 I---y OR IOOmm WHICHEVER
IS GREATER
Fig. 7 Minimum Dimensions for Masonry Wail or
Buttress Prowding Effective Lateral Support

42.2 ST A B I L I T Y - A wall or column

n;bject to vertical. and lateral loads may be
consrdered to be provided with adequate lateral
support from consideration of stability,if the
construction providing the support is capable of
resistmg some of the following forties:

a) Sinlp!e static reactions at the point of

lateral support to all the lateral loads; plus

h) 2.5 percent of the total vertical load that

the wall or column is designed to carry at
the po~ri! of lateral support.

4.2.I. i For the purpose specified in 4.2.2, if the

lateral supports are in the vertical direction,
these should meet the requirements given in
4.2. I.:(a) and should also be Lapable of acting
as horrzontal grrders duly anchored to the
cross wall so as to transmit the lateral loads to
the foundations without exceeding the
permissible stresses 111 the cross walls.
4.2.2.~ In case of load bearing buildings up to
four storeys, stability requrrements of 4.2.2
may be deemed to have been met with, if:
height to width ratio of burlding does not
exceed 2;
cross walls acting as stiffening walls conti-
nuous from outer wall fo outer wall or
outer wall to a load bearing inner wall,
and of thickness and spacings as given in
Table 2 are provided. If stiffening wall or
walls that are in a line, are interrupted
by openings, length of solid wall or walls
in the zone of the wall that is to be
stiffened shall be at least one-fifth of
height of the opening as shown in Fig. 8;
floors and roof either bear on cross walls or
are anchored to those walls as in 4.2.1.2
such that all lateral loads are safely trans-
mitted to those walls and through them
to the foundation; and
Fig, 8 Opening m Stiffening Wall
d) cross walls are built jointly with the bearing
walls and are jointly mortared, or the two
interconnected by toothing. Alternatively,
cross walls may be anchored to walls to be
supported by ties of non-corrodible metal
of minimum section 6 x 35 mm and length
60 mm with ends bend at least 5 cm;
maximum vertical spacing of ties being
1.2 m (see Fig. 9).
4.2.2.3 In case of halls exceeding 8.0 m in
length, safety and adequacy of lateral supports
shall always be checked by structural analysis.
4.2.2.4A trussed roofing may not provide
lateral support unless special measures are
adopted to brace and anchor the roofing.
However, in case of residential and similar
buildings of conventional design with trussed
roofing having cross walls, it may be aaaumed
that stability requirements are met with by the
cross walls and structural analysis for stability
may be dispensed with.
9
u-4.
 _... l.““-- .

TABLE 2 THICKNESS AND SPACING OF STIFFENING WALLS

[CIpuse 4.2.2.2 (b)]
T HICKNESS OF LOAD H E I G H T* OF S T O R E Y STIFFENING
*
WALL*
BEARINGWALLTO NOTTOEXCEED 1
BE S T I F F E N E D ‘Thickness not less than Maximum
I 1 spacing
1 to 3 4 to 6
storeys storeys

(1) (2) (31 (4) (5) (6)

cm m cm cm m
i) 10 3.2 10 _ 4.5
ii) 20 3.2 10 20 6.0
ii0 30 3.4 10 20 8.0
iv) above 30 5.0 10 20 8.0
l Storey height and maximum spacings asgiven are centre-tozentre dimensions.
-
4. ;?. 2.5 Capacity of a cross wall, also calied shear b) clear height of ceiling in basement does not
wall, sometimes to take horizontal. loads and exceed 2.6 m;
consequently bending moments increases, when
parts of bearing walls act as flanges to the cross cl walls are stiffened according to provisions
wail. Maximum overhanging length of bearing of.4.2.2.1;
wall which could effectively function as a
flange should be taken as 12 r or H/6, which- d) in the zone of action of soil pressure on
ever is less, in case of T/f shaped walls and basement walls, traffic load excluding
6 t or H/16, ‘whichever is less, in case of L/U any surcharge due to adjoining buildings
shaped walls, where r is the thickness of bearing does not exceed 5 kN/m* and terrain does
wall and II is the total height of wall above the not rise; and
level being considered, as shown in Fig. 10.
9 mimmum thickness of basement walls is
4,226 EXTERNAL WALLS 01: RASI:ME.NT AND in accordance with Table 3.
PLINTH - In case of external walls of base- MTt - In case there is surcharge on basement walls
ment and plinth, stability requirements of from adjoining buildings, thickness of basementwalk
4.2.2 may be deemed to have been met with, if: shall be based on structural analysis.
4.2.2.7WALL.5 MAINLY SUBJECTED TO
a) bricks used in basement and plinth have a LATERAL LOADS
minimum crushing strength of 5 N/mm2
and mortar used in masonry is of Grade MI a) FREE STANDING WALL ~ Afree standing
or better; wall such as compound wall or parapet wall

Fig. 9 Anchoring of Stiffening Wall with Supported Wail

10
Y,
 Effective overhanging width of flange =
12 f or H/6 whichever is less, H being
the total height of wall above the level
being considered

Effcctivc overhanging width of flange-

6 t or H/16 whichever is less, H being
the total height of wall above the level
being considered

t EFFECTIVE OVERHANGING
WlDTn OF FLANGE

Fig. IO Typical Details for Anchorage of

Solid Wulls

TABLE 3 MINIMUM THlCKNESS OF BASEMENT WALLS

[C7uure4.2.2.6(e)j

hilrNIMUMTI-IICKNESSOF H EIGHT OFTHECROUNDABOVE BASEMENT

%. BASEMENTWALL(NOMINAL) F L O O R LEVELWITHWALLLOADING
(PERMANENT~AD)
*
f 1
More than50 kN/m Lessthan50kN/m
(1) (2) (3) (4)
cm m m
i) 40 2.50 2.00
li) 30 1.75 1.40

Is acted upon by wind force which tends
to overturn it. This tendency to over-
turning is resisted by gravity force due to
self-weight of wall, and also by flexural
moment of resistance on account of tensile
strength of masonry. Free standing walls
shall thus be designed as in 5.5.2.1. If
mortar used for masonry cannot b e
relied upon for taking flexural tension
(see 5.4.1.5). stability of free standing wall
shall be ensured such that stability moment
of wall due to self-weight equals or exceeds
1.5 times the overturning moment.
b) RETAINING W A L L -i Stabili’ for
retaining walls shall normally be achieved
through gravity action but’flexural rnrrnerrt
of resistance could also be taken advantage
of under special circumstances at the
discretion of the designer (see 5.42).
11
VI4
4.3 Effective Height
4.3.1 WA LL - Effective height of a wall shall
be taken as shown in Table 4 (see Fig. 11).
N OTE - A roof truss or beam supported on a column
meeting the requirements of 4.2.2.1 is deemed to
provide lateral support to the column only in the
direction of the beam/truss.
4 . 3 . 2 C O L U M N - In case of a column,
effective height shall be taken as actual he”lght
for the direction rt is laterally supported and
twice the actual height for the direction it is
not laterally supported (see Fig. 12).
MITE 1 - A roof truss or beam sup rted on a
column meeting the requirements of 4.2. .l IS deemed
Ire.
to provide lateral support to the column only in the
direction ofthebeam/truss.
NOTE 2 - When floor or roof consisting of R C C
beams and slabs is supported on columns, the columns
would be deemed to be laterally supported in both
directions.
4.3.3 OPENIN GS IN W ALLS - When openings
occur in a wall such that masonry between the
openings is by definition a column, effective .
height of masonry between the openings shall
be reckoned as follows:
a) When wall has full restraint at the top:

TABLE4 EFFECTIVfXHEIGHTOFWALLS
(Clause 4.3.1)

SL No. CONDITION OFSUPPORT

(1) (a (3)

0 Lateral as well as rotational restraint ((that is. full restraint) at 0.75 H

top and bottom. For example, when the floor/roof spans on
the walls so that reaction to load of floor/roof is provided by
the walls. or when an RCC floor/roof has bearing on the wall
(minimum 9 cm), irrespective of the direction of the span
f o u n d a t i o n I footings of a watt give lateral as well as
rotational restraint)
ii) Lateral as well as rotational restraint (that is, full restraint) at 0.85 H
one end and only lateral restraint (that is, partial restraint) at
the other. For example, RCC floor/roof at one end spanning
or adequately bearing on the wall and timber floor/roof not
spanning on wall, but adequately anchored to it, on the other
end
iii) Lateral restraint, without rotational restraint (that is, partial 1.00 H
restraint) on both ends. For example, timber floor/roof, not
spanning on the wall but adequately anchored to it on both
ends of the wall, that is, top and bottom
iv) Lateral restraint as well as rotational restraint (that is, full 1.50 H
restraint) at bottom but have no restraint at the top. For
example, parapet walls with RCC roof having adequate
bearing O&I the lower wall, or a compound wall with proper
foundation on the soil.

MTE 1 - H’is the height of wall between centres of support in case of RCC slabs and timber floors. In case of
footings or foundation block, height (H) is measured from top of footing or foundation block. In case of roof
truss, height (H) is measured up to bottom of the tie beam.In case of beam and slab construction, height should
be measured from centre of bottom slab to centre of top beam. All these cases are illustrated by means of
examples shown in Fig. 11.
N OTE 2 - For working out effective height, it is assumed that concreteDPC, when property bonded with
masonry, does not cause discontinuity in the wall.
NDTE 3 - Where memberane type damp-proof course or termite shield causes a discontinuity in bond, the
effective height of wail may be taken to be greater of the two values calculated as follows:
a) consider H from top of footing ignoring DPC and take effective height as 0.75 H.
b) consider H from top of DPC and take effective height as 0.85 H.
P&W 4 ~ When assessing effective height of walls, floors not adequately anchor& to walls shall not be
considered as providing lateral support to such walls.
MTE 5 - When thickness of a wall bonded to a pier is at least two-thirds oftherthickness of the pier measured
in the same direction, the wall and’pier may bedeem;d to act as one structural element.
-_
12
w-4- NmlobL BUIIDING cum OF INDIA
 llA R'CC FLOOQlQOOF 110 ?lueER FL O O R /R O O F
BElta ON W I L L !RRESP
EC,l”E OF ClRECTlDN
OF SPIN
Fig. 11 Efhctive Height of Wall
1) Effective height for the direction
perpendicular to p l a n e o f wall
equals 0.75 H plus 0.25 H,, where H
is the distance between supports and HI
is the height of the taller opening; and
2) Effective height for the direction parallel
to the wall equals y, that is, the
distance’between the supports.
b) When wall has partial restraint at the top
and bottom :
1) Effective height for the direction
perpendicular to plane of wall equals
H when height of neither opening
exceeds 0.5 H and it is equal to 2 H
when height of any opening exceeds
0.5 H, and
2) Effective height for the direction parallel
to the plane of the wall equals 2 H.
4.4 Effective Length - Effective length of a
wall shall be as given in Table 5.
4.5 Effective Thickness - Effective thickness
to be used for calculating slenderness ratio of a
wall or column shall be obtained as in 4.5.1
to 4.5.5.
4.51 For solid walls, faced walls or columns,
effective thickness shall be the actual thickness.
4.5.2 For solid walls adequately bonded into
piers, buttresses, effective thickness for deter-
mining slenderness ratio based on effective
height shall be the actual thickness of wall
MC llYBER FLOOR *ND 110 F R E E SI..HD,NO WALL
TRUSSED ROOF
multiplied by stiffening coefficient as given in
Table 6. No modification in effective thickness,
however, shall be made when slenderness ratio
is to be based on effective length of walls.
4.5.3 For solid walls or faced walls stiffened by
cross walls, appropriate stiffening coefficient
may be determined from Table 6 on the
assumption that the cross walls are equivalent
to piers of width equal to the thickness of the
cross wall and of thickness equal to three times
the thickness of stiffened wall.
4.5.4 For cavity walls with both leaves of
uniform thickness throughout, effective thick-
ness shall be taken as two-thirds of the sum of
the actual thickness of the two leaves.
4.5.5 For cavity walls with one or both leaves
adequately bonded into piers, buttresses or
cross walls at intervals, the effective thickness
of the cavity wall shall be two-thirds of the sum
of the effective thickness of each of the two
leaves; the effective thickness of each leaf being
calculated using 4.5.1 or 4.5.2 as appropriate.
4.6 Slenderness Ratio
4.6.1 WALLS - For a wall, slenderness ratio
shall be effective height divided by effective
thickness or effective length divided by the
effective thickness, whichever is less. In case of
a load bearing wall, slenderness ratio shall not
exceed that given in Table 7.
4.6.2 COLUMNS - For a column, slenderness
ratio shall be taken to be the greater of the
ratios of effective heights to the respective
13
w4-
 EFFECl!vE HEIGHT EFFECIIVE HEIGHT
ABOUT AXIS A B O U T AxIS
X-X.1.OH Y X.?OH
Y-Y i I,0 H Y-Y., OH
12 A

120 12c
ROOF COASTRUCTIOS’ CFFECTIVE HblCHT E FFECTIVEIIEICH~
A B O U T AXIS ARO1:T AXIS
FIO. 120 FIG. 12C
With precast concrete units of in sifu x - XP I’0 H* _Y--XC 1.5 Cl,
concrete floor or roof Y - ?‘.== I.0 H, I'- TP I.OH,
I-- r=1.5H,
(No tio)
With light deck or similar roof X-X= I.0 H2 X- X=Z.OH,
T- r= 1.0 H, Y- Tul.OH1
I-- ?-= 2.0 H,
( No ties )
Fig. 12 Examples of Effective Height of Columns
effective thickness, in the two principal the designer. Some guidelines for assessment of
directions, Slenderness ratio for a load bearing eccentricity are given in Appendix A.
column shall nor exceed 12.
5. STRUCTURAL DESIGN
4.7 Eccentricity - Eccentricity of vertical
@ding at a particular junction, in a masonry 5.1 General - The building as a whole sha! be
wall shall depend on factors, such as extent of analyzed by accepted principles of mechanics
bearing, magnitude oflbads, stiffness of slab or to ensure safe and proper functioning in service
barn, fixity at the support and constructional of its component parts in relation to the whole
details at junctions. No exact calculations are building. All component parts of the structure
possible to make accurate assessment of shall be capable of sustaining the most adverse
eccentricity Extent of eccentricity under any combinations of loads, which the building may
prticular circumstances has, therefore, to be be reasonably expected to be subjected to
decided according to the best judgement of during and after construction.
14
vu-
-
TABLE 5 EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF WALLS
(Clause 4.4)
SL NO. CONDITIONS OF SUPPORT EFFECTIVE LENGTH
(see Fig. 13)
(1) (2) (3)

i) Where a waU is continuous and is supported by cross wall and 0.8 L

there is no opening within a distance ofH/8 from the face of
cross wall (see Fig. 13) .
01
Where a waU is continuous and is supported by piers/buttresses
conforming to 4.2.1.2(b)
ii) Where a wall is supported by a cross wall at one end and 0.9 L
continuous with cross wall at other e<d
or
Where a wall is supported by a pier/buttress at one end and
continuous with pier/buttress at other end conforming to
4.2.1.3(b)
iid Where a wall is supported at each end by cross waU 1.0 L
or
Where a wall is supported at each end by a pier/buttress
conforming to 4.2.1.2@)
iv) Where a wall is free at one end and continuous with a crosswaU 1.5 ,L
at the ofher end
Or
Where a wall IS free at one end and continuous with a pier/buttress
at the other end conforming to 4.2.1 Z(b)
Where a wall is free at one end and supported af the other end by 2.0 I.
a cross wail
01

Where a wall is free at one end and supported at the otherend by

a pier/buttress conforming to 4.2.I.,?(b)

where

L = length of wall from or between centres of cross wall.

piers or buttress; and

H = actual heigh! of wall between centres of adequate

lateral support.

NOTE - In case there is an opening taller rhan 0.5 H ma wall, ends of the wall at the opening shall be
considered as free. Cross walls shall conform 10 4.2.2.1(d).

5.2 Design Loads - Loads tcr be taken into 5.2.1 The design loads and other forces to be
consideration for designing masonry taken for the design of masonry structures shall
components of a structure are: conform to Part VI Structural design, Section1
Loads.
a) dead load; of walls, columns, floors and NoTE - During construction, suitable measures shall
roofs; be taken to ensure that masonry is Mt liable t o
damage or failure due to action of Wind forces, back
b) hve loads of floors and roof; filling behind walls or temporary construction loads.

5.3 Load Dispersion

c) wind loads on walls and sloping roof; and
d) seismic forces.
I\bTk’ When a building is subjected to other loads,
such as vibration- from railways; machinery, etc.
the?e should be taken into consideration accordingly
to the best judgemcnt of the designer.
PART VI S’lRUclliRAL DESIGN--SECTION I M A S O N R Y
5.3. I GE N E R A L - The angle of dispersion, of
vertical load on walls shall be taken as not more
than 30~ from the vertical.
5.3.2 ARCHING ACTION - Account may also
be taken of the arching action of well-bonded
15
\ILi
 TABLE 6 STIFFENINCCOEFFICIENTFORWALLSSTIFFENEDBY
PIERS,BUTTRESsESORCROSSWALLS
(Clauses 4.5.2 and 4.5.3)
S
SL RATIO + STIFFEN~NC COEFFICIENT
NO. A
r
rP tP
-=2 _fir = 3 or more
1
tw tw tw
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) 6 1 .o 1.4 2.0
ii) 8 1.0 1.3 1.7
iii) 10 1 .o 1.2 1.4
iv) 15 1 .o 1.1 1.2
v) 20 or more 1 .o 1.0 1.0
where
s, = centre to centre spacing of the pier or cross wall.

IP = the thickness of pier as dehned in 23.2 (see Fig. 11,

I, = actual thickness of the wall proper (see Fig. I), and
Wp = width of the pier in the direction of the wall or the actual thickness of the crosswall.
WTE - Linear interpolation between the valuesgiven in this tableis permissible but not extrapolation outside
the limits g&t.

sufficient to ensure that stresses in the masonry

TABLE7 MAXIMUMSLENDERNESSRATIO (combination of wall stresses, stresses due to
FOR A L0AD BEARING WALL arching action and bearing stresses from the
(czXlse4.6.1) lintel) do not exceed the stresses permitted in
5.4 (see 6.2.4).
MAXth4UM~T;;D~~~~~s
%%TzF 5.4 Permissible Stresses

( ~.~.~PERMIS~IBLECOMPRES~IVESTRESS-
Cement or Portland Mortar Permissible corn ressive stress in masonry shall
Pozzolana Cement be based on vaPue of basic compressive stress
in Mortar
(1) (2) (31
20
Not exceeding 2 27
Exceeding 2 27 13
masonry walls supported on lintels and beams,
in accordance with established practice.
Increased axial stresses in the masonry
associated with arching action in this way, shall
not exceed the permissible stresses given in5.4.
5.3.3 L INTELS - Lintels that support masonry
construction shall be designed to carry loads
from masonry (allowing for arching and
dispersion, where applicable and loads received
from any other part of the structure. Length of
bearing of lintel at each end shall not be less
than 9 cm or one-tenth of the span, whichever
is more and area of the bearing shall be
16
u-6
ub) as given in Table 8 and multiplying this
value by factors known as stress reduction
factor (k,), area reduction factor (k,) and shape
modification factor (k ) as detailed in 5.4.1. I
to 5.4.1.3. Values of % asic compressive stress
given in Table 8 take into cor)sideration
crushing strength of masonry unit and grades of
mortar and hold good for values of slenderness
ratio not exceeding 6, zero eccentricity and
masonry unit having height to width ratio (as
laid) equal to 0.75 or less.
Alternatively, basic compressive stress may be
basedonresults of prism test given in Appendix B
on masonry made from masonry units and
mortar to be actually used in a particular job.
5.4.1.1 STRESS REDUCTION FACTOR--his
factor, as given in Table 9, takes into consi-
deration the slenderness ratio of the element
and also the eccentricity of loading.
NATfOWL. BUIIDING CODE OF INDIA
 Wall is continuous at both ends and ij
supported by cross walls of thickness t,/Z
or 100 mm whichever is more, length of
cross wall is not less than H/6, opening in
wall is not closer than H/8 from cross Call

13A Care 1
.
Sartw as case 1 except that one end of the
wall L dircon tinuous

130 Care 2

Same as case 1 except that wall ir discon-

tinuous on both ends

I3C Cnsc 3

ported by a cross wall and ir continuum.

There being no opening within H/g from

Same as case 4 but opening is within H/8

from cross wall and thus that end is taken
as discontinuous

I .:i
13E case 5

Tbis illustration is with an opening which

is within H/8 from cross wall

13F Case 6

Wall length is between two openings which

arc closer than H/8 from cross walls

Fig. 13 Effective Length of Wall

17
t!AurvlsTlt~ .DESIGN-SIUTION 4 MASONRY vu
 I-

- -
TABLE 8 STRESS REDUCTION FACTOR FOR SLENDERNESS RAT10AND ECCEtiTRlClTY

(Ck7use 5.4.1.1)

SLEN~V;~ESS E CCENTRICITY OF LDADING DIVIDED BY THE

T HICKNESS OF THE M E M B E R
&
( 1
0 l/24 l/l2 l/6 l/4 l/3

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

6 1 .oo 1 .oo I .oo 1 .oo 1.00 1 .oo

8 0.95 0.15 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.91

10 0.89 0.08 0.87 0.85 0.83 0.81

12 0.84 0.83 0.81 0.78 0.75 0.72

14 0.78 0.76 0.74 0.70 0.66 0.66

16 0.73 0.71 0.68 0.63 0.58 0.53

18 0.67 0.64 0.61 0.55 0.49 0.43

20 0.62 0.59 0.55 0.48 0.4 1 0.34

22 0.56 0.52 0.48 0.40 0.32 0.24

24 0.51 0.47 0.42 0.33 0.24

26 0.45 0.40 0.35 0.25

27 0.43 0.38 0.33 o.i2

NoTE I- Linear interpolation between values is permitted.
MTE 2 - Where in special cases the eccentricity of loading lies betweenl/3 and l/2 of the thickness of the
member. the stress reduction factor should vary linearly between unity and 0.20 for slenderness ratio of 6 and 20
respectively.
NOTE 3 - Slenderness ratio of a member for sections withinl/8 of the height of the member above or belowa
lateral support may be taken to be 6.

5.4.1.2AREA RED.UCTION FACTOR - This b) When resultant eccentricity ratio exceeds

factor takes into consideration smallness
of the sectional area of-the element and is
applicable when sectional area of the element is
less than 0.2 m2. The factor k, = 0.7 + 1 .X4, A
being the area of section in m2.
l/6, 25 percent increase in permissible
stress is allowed but the area of the section
under tension shall be disregarded for
computing the load carrying capacity of
the member.

NoTE - When resultant eccentricity ratio of loading

5.4.1.3SHAPE MODIFICATION FACTOR -
This factor takes into consideration the shape
of the unit, that is, height to width ratio (as
laid) and is given in Table 10. This factor is
applicable for units of crushing strength up to
15 N/mm’
5.4.1.4 INCKEASE IN PERMISSIBLE COMPRESSIVE
STRESSES ALLOWED FOR ECCENTRIC VERTICAL
LOADS. LATERAL LOADS UNDER CERTAIN
C ONDITIONS ~ In members subjected. to
eccentric and/or lateral loads, increase in
permissible compressive stress is allowed as
follows:
a) When resultant eccentricity ratio exceeds
l/24 but &es not exceed 116, 25 percent
increase in permissible compressive stress is
allowed in design.
18
u-4.
is l/24 or less, compresslve stress due to bending shall
be ignored and only axial stress need be computed
forthe purpose of design.
514.1.5 INCREASE IN PERMISSIBLE
COMPRESSIVE STRESS FOR WALLS
SUBJECTED TO CONCENTRATED LOADS -
When a wall is subjected to a concentrated load
(a load being taken to be concentrated when
area .of supporting walls equals or exceeds three
times the bearing area), certain increase in
permissible compressive stress may be allowed
because of dispersal of the load. Since,
according to the present state of art, there is
diversity of views in regard to manner and
extent of dispersal, design of walls subjected to
concentrated loads may, therefore, be worked
out as per the best judgement of the designer.
Some guidelines in this regard are given in
Appendix C.
u4lloNu l JnDING ama OF INDlA
 -- --
TABLE9 BASlCMMPRESSlVESTRESSESFOR MASONRY(AI:TER 28 D4YS)
~ciaUre 5.4. I)

SL MORTAR mPE BASIC -CDMPRESS~W STKESSES IN N/mm’ COHR~SPONI)INC; T O MASONRY

N o . ~REF.TABLE 1) L’NITS OF WHKH HKIGHT TO WI D T H rU~fg DOES N O T Excwn 0.7s ANI)
CRUSHING ST R E N G T H, IN N/mm . IS NOT J_ESS TH A N

3.5 5.0 7.5 10 12.5 15 17.5 20 25 30 35 40

(11 (2) (3) (4) 0) (6) (7) (8) (9) (IO) (11) (12) (13) (14)

1 Hl 8.35 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.16 1.31 1.45 1.591.91 2.21 2.5 3.05

2 HZ 8.35 0.50 0.74 0.96 LO9 1.19 1.30 1.41 l.h2 I.85 2.1 2.5

3 Ml 8.35 0.50 0.74 0.96 J.fl6 I.13 1.20 1.27 1.47 1.69 1.9 2.2
4 hi2 0.35 0.44 ll.59 0.81 0.94 1.03 1.10 1.17 1.34 1.51 1.65 1.9
5 M3 0.25 0.41 0.56 0.75 0.87 0.95 1.02 1.10 1.25 1.41 1.55 1.78
6 Ll 0.25 0.36 (1.53 0.67 0.76 0.83 0.90 0.97 I.1 I 1.26 1.4 1.06

7 L2 0.25 0.31 0.42 0.53 0.58 0.61 0.65 0.69 0.73 0.78 0.85 0.9s

m fE 1 - The table is valid for slenderness ratio up 10 6 and 1oadin.g with zero eccentricity
bklTE 2 -The values given for basic compressive stress are applicable only when the masonry is properly cured.

NDTE 3 - Line.11 interpolation is permrssible for unirs having crush& strengths between thoc given in the
Table.

MTE 4 - The permissible slress for random rubble masonry may be taken as 75 percent of lht corresponding
stress for coarseed walling of similar materials.
&TE 5 - The strength of ashiar. masonry (natural slonc masonry of massive type with thin joints) is doselv
related to intrinsic strength of the stone and allowable working stress in excess of those given in the table mai
be allowed for such masonry at the discretion of the designer.
-- -- -- -._- --

- --c-___.-.. _

TABLE 10 SHAPE YODII-ICATION FACTOR FOR MASONRY UNITS

HEIGHT TOW IDTH S H A P E ~IODIFICATION Fcrcrow (k 1 FOR UNITS HAVING

RATIO OFU NITS C R U S H I N G !~TR~:NCTH & N/mm* Is
--
(& LAID) b
( \
5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0

(JJ (2) (3) (4) (5)

up to 0.75 ~I .o I .o 1.0 1.0

1 .o 1.2 1.1 1.1 I.0

1.5 1.5 1.3 I.2 1.1

2.0 lo 4.0 1.8 1.5 I.3 1.2

!&JTE - Linear interpolation between values ir permissible.

~.~.~PERMISSIBLE TENSILE STRESS - which causes flexural tensile stress, as for

As a
general rule, design of masonry shall be example, panel, curtain prtition and free
based on the assumption that masonry is not standing walls, flexural tensile stresses as
capable d taking any tension. However, in case follows may be permitted in the design for
of lateral loads normal to the plane of wall, mSlKXUy:
19
?hU’-Vl STUUClVR4L DBiCV-SUllON 4 MASONRY Kc
Grade Ml or - 0.07 N/mm* for bending in mortar to be used, taking into consideration
better mortar the vertical direction where various factors, such as .slenderness ratio,
tension developed is normal eccentricity, area of section, workmanship,
to bed joints. quality of supervision, etc., subject further to
provisions of 5.5.1. I td 5.5.1.4.
- 0.14 N/mm’ for bending in
the longitudinal direction 5.5.1.1 SOLID WALLS - Thickness used for
where tension developed is design calculation shall be the actual thickness
parallel to bed joints, pro- of masonry computed as the sum of the average
vided crushing strength of dimensions of the masonry units specified in
masonry units is not less than the relevant standard, together with the
10 N/mm’ specified joint thickness. In masonry with raked
joi+, thickness shall be reduced by the depth
Grade M2 - 0.05 N/mm* for bending in of raking, of joints for plastering/pointing.
mortar the vertical direction where
tension developed is normal 5.5.1.2CAVITY WALLS
to bed joints.
a) Thickness of each leaf of a cavity wall shall
- 0.10 N/mm* for bending in not be less than 7.5 cm.
the longitudinal direction
where tension developed is b) Where the outer leaf is half masonry unit in
parallel to bed joints, provided thickness, the uninterrupted height and
crushing strength of masonry length of this leaf shall be limited so as to
units is not less than 7.5 avoid undue loosening of ties due to
N/mm’ differential movements between the two
NOTE 1 - No tensile stress is permitted in masonry in
leaves. The outer leaf shall, therefore, be
case of water-retaining structures in vieN of water supported at least at every third storey or
in contact with masonry. Nu, no tensile stress is at every 10 m of height whichever is less,
permitted in earth-retaining structures, in view of the and at every 10 m or lessalong the length.
possibility of presence of water at the back of such
walls.
NOTE 2 - Allowable tensile stress in bending in the
cl Where the load is carried by both leaves of
a wall of a cavity construction, the
vertical direction may be increased to 0.1 N/mm* for permissible stress shall be based on the
Ml mortar and 0.07.N/mm2 for M2 mortarin case of
boundry walls /compound walls at the discretion of
slenderness ratio derived from the effective
the designer. thickness of the wall as given in 4.5.4 or
5 . 4 . 3 P ERMISSIBLE S HEAR S T R E S S - In 4.5.X The eccentricity of the load shall be
case of’ walls built in mortar not leaner than considered with r.espect to the centre of
Grade MI (see Table 1) and resisting horizontal gravity of the cross-section of the wall.
forces in the plane of the wall, permissible shear d) Where the load is carried by one leaf only,
stress calculated on the area of bed joint, shall the permissible stress shall be the greater of
not exceed the value obtained by the formula values calculated by the following two
given below, subject to a maximum of 0.5 alternative methods:
N/mm* :
f,=O.l +fd/6 1) The slenderness ratio is based on the
effective thickness of the cavity wall as
where a whole as given in 4.5.4 or 4.5.5 and
fd = compressive stress due to dead loads on the eccentricity of the load with
in N/mm*, and respect to the centre of gravity of the
f, = permissible shear stress in N/mm*. cross-section of the whole wall (both
leaves). (This is the same method as
5.4.4 If there is tension in any part of a section where the load is carried by both the
of masonry, the area under tension shall be leaves but the eccentricity will be more
ignored while working out shear stress on the when the load is carried by one leaf
section. only).

5.5 Derign Thickness/Cross-Section 2) The slenderness ratio is based on the

effective thickness of the loaded leaf
5.5.1 WALLS AND CO L U M N S S UB J E C T E D only using 4.5.1 and 4.5.2, and the
TO V E R T I C A L LOADS - Walls and columns eccentricity of the load will also be with
bearing vertical loads shall be designed on the respect to the centre of gravity of the
basis of permissible compressive stress. Design loaded leaf only.
consists in determining thickness in case of
walls and section in case of columns in relation In either alternative, only the actual
to strength of masonry units and grade of thickness of the load bearing leaf shall be
20
 used in arriving at the cross-sectional area
resisting the load (see Z. 5. I. I).
5.5.1.3~~cE~ WALL, - The permissible load
per length of wall shall be taken as the product
of the total thickness of the wall and the
permissible stress in the weaker of the two
materials. The permissible stress shall be found
by using the total thickness of the wall when
calculating the slenderness ratio.
5.5.1.4VENEERED WALL - The facing
(veneer) shall be entirely ignored in calculations
of strength and stability. For the purpose of
determining the permissible stress in the
backing, the slenderness ratio shall be based on
the thickness of the backing alone
~..~.~WALLS A ND C OLUMNS M A I N L Y
SUBJECTEDTO LATERALLOADS
5.S.Z.lFREE STANDING WALLS
a) Free standing walls, subjected to bind
pressure or seismic forces shall be designed
on the basis of permissible tensile stress in
masonry or stability as in 4.2.2.4. However,
in seismic Zones 1 and II, free-standing
walls may be apportioned without making
any design calculations with the help of
Table 11 provided the mortar used is of
grade not leaner than Ml.
TABLE11 HEIGHTTOTHlCKNESSRATlOOF
FREESTANDINGWALLSRELATEDTOWIND
SPEED
[ChusesJ.5.2.1 (a)nnd,@)l
(2)
(1)
N/m2
Up to 285 10
575 7 6.1 Methods of Construction
860 S 6.1.1 G E NE R A L - Construction of the
1150 4 following types of load bearing and non-load
NOTE 1 - For intermediate values, linear interpolation
is permissible.
NOTE 2 - Height is to be reckoned from 15 cm below
ground level or top of footing/foundation block,
whichever is.higher,and up to the top edge of,the wall.
MTE 3 -The thickness should be measured including
the thickness of the plaster.
_ _ _ --I_.-
b) If there is a horizontal damp-proof course
near the base of the wall, that is, not
capable of developirig tension vertically,
Pmnr3llIucnJRu DESIGN-SEllON 4 MASONRY
the minimum wall thickness should be the
greater of that calculated from either:
1) the appropriate height to thickness ratio
given in Table 11 reduced by 25 percent,
reckoning the height from the level of
the damp-proof course; or
2) the appropriate height to thickness ratio
given in Table 11 reckoning the height
from the lower level at which the wall is
restrained laterally.
5.5.2.2 RETAINING WALLS - Normally
masonry of retaining walls shall be designed on
the basis of zero-tension, and permissible
compressive stress. However, In case of retaining
walls for supporting horizontal thrust from dry
materials, retaining walls may be designed on
the basis of pertissible tensile stress at the
discretion of the designers.
5.5.3 WA L L S AND C OLUMNS S U B J E C T E D
TO V ERTICAL AS W E LL AS L A T E R A L
L O A D S - For walls a n d columns, stress
worked out separately for vertical loads as
in 5.5.1 and lateral loads as in 5.5.2 shall be
combined and elements designed on the basis of
permissible stress.
5.5.4 WALLS S UBJECTED TO I N - P L A N E
B ENDING AND V E R T I C A L L~ADS(S~~EAR
W A LLS) - Walls subjected to in-plane bending
and vertical loads, that is, shear walls shall be
designed on the basis of no tension with
permissible shear stress and permissible
compressive stress.
5.5.5 NO N- L O A D B EARING W ALLS -
Load bearing walls, such as panel walls, curtain
walls and partition walls which are mainly
subjected to lateral loads, accordingto present
state of art, are not capable of precise design
and only approximate methods based on some
tests are available. Guidelines for approximate
design of these walls are given in AppendixD.
6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
bearing masonry walls shall be carried out in
accordance with good practice [VI-4(3)].
a) Brickwork,
b) Stone masonry
c) Hollow concrete block masonry,
d) Gypsum partition blocks,
e) Autoclaved cellular concrete block
masonry, and
f) Lightweight concrete block masonry.
21
VI4
6.1.2 CO N S T R U C T I O N OF BU I L D I N G S I N
SEISM IC ZONES -- No special provisions
on construction are necessary for buildings
constructed in Zones I and II. Special features
of construction for earthqtbnke resistant
masonry buildings in Zones III, N and V shall
be applicable according to good practice
[VI-4(3)].
6.2 Minimum Thickness of Walls from Consi-
deration Other than Structural -~ Thickness of
walls determined from consideration of
strength and stability may not always be
adequate in respect of other requirements, such
as resistance to fire, thermal insulation, sound
insulation and resistance to damp penetration
for which reference may be made to the
appropriate Indian standards, and thickness
suitably increased, where found necessary.
6.3 Workmanship
6.3.1 GENEKAL -- Workmanship has consi-
derable effect on strength of masonry and bad
workmanship may reduce the strength of brick
masonry to as low as half the intended strength.
The basic compressive stress values for masonry
as given in Table 8 would hold good for
commercially obtainable standards of
workmanship with reasonable degree of
supervision. If the work is inadequately
supervised, strength should be reduced tothree-
fourth or less at the discretion of the designer
6 . 3 . 2 BE D D I N G O F M A S O N R Y UNITS -
Masonry units shall be laid on a full bed of
mortar with frog, if any, upward such that
cross-joints and waU joints are completely filled
with mortar. Masonry units which are moved
after initial placement shall be relaid in fresh
mortar, discarding the disturbed mortar.
6.3.3 B OND - Cross-joints in any course of
one brick thick masonry wall shall be not less
than one-fourth of a masonry unit iahorizontal
direction from the cross-joints in the course
below, In masonry walls more than one brick in
thickness, bonding through the thickness of
wall shall be provided by either header units or
by Other equivalent means in accordance with
good practice [V&l(4)],
6.3.4 V ERTICALITY AND A LIGNMENT All
masonry shall be built true and plumb within
the tolerances prescribed below. Care shall be
taken to keep the perpends properly aligned:
a) Deviation from vertical within a storey
shall not exceed 6 mm per 3 m height.
b) Deviation in verticality in total height of
any wall of a building more than one
storey in height shall not exceed 12.5 mm.
c) Deviation from position shown on plan of
any brickwork shall not exceed 12.5 mm.
22
w-4.
Relative displacement between load
bearing walls in adjacent- storeys intended
k+ be in vertical alignment shall not exceed
6 mm.
Deviation of bed-joint from horizontal in a
leng?h of 12 m shall not exceed 6 mm
subject to a maximum deviation of 12 mm.
Deviation from the specified thickness of
bed joints, cross-joints and perpends shall
not exceed one-fifth of the specified
thickness.
MrTt -- These t~lerancer have been specified from
the point of vic’k. of Iheu etfect on the strength oT
masonry. rhe permissible s t r e s s r e c o m m e n d e d
in 5.3 may be considered applicable only if
these toldrances are adhered to.
6.4 J o i n t s ro Controi flef;wmarwn nnd
0’ackin.q ‘.- Special provision shall be ma,de to
control or isolate thermal and other movements
so that damage to the fabric of the buildmg is
avoided and its structural sufficiency preserved.
Design and installation of juints shall be done
according to the appropriate recommendations
in accordance with good practtce [VI-4(5)],
~5.5 chases, Recesses and Holes
6.5. i ’ Chases, recesses and holes are permissible
in masonry only if these do not impair strength
and stability of the structure.
6.5.2 In masonry, designed by structural
analysis, all chases, recesses and holes shall be
considered in structural design and detailed in
building plans.
6.5.3 When chases, recesses and holes have not
been considered’in structural design and are not
shown in drawings. these may be provided,
subject to the constraints and precautions
specified in 6.5.3.1 to 6.5.3.10.
6.5.3.1 As far as possible, services should be
planned with help of vertical chases and use of
horizontal chases should be avoided.
6.>._?.2 For load bearing walls, depth of vertical
and horizontal chases shall not exceed one-third
and one-sixth of the wall thickness respectively.
0.5.3.3Vertical chases shall not be closer than
2 m in any stretch of wall and shall not be
located within 34.5 cm of an opening or within
23 cm of a cross wall that serves as a stiffening
wall for stability. Width of a vertical chase shall
not exceed thrckness of wall in which it occurs.
6 .‘. 3.4 When umavoidable horizontal chases ot
width not exceeding 6 cm in a wall having
slenderness ratio not exceeding 15 may be
provided. These shall be located in the upper or
lower middle third height of wall at a distance
NATIONAL. BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
not less than 60 cm frcm a lateral support. No
horizontal chase shall exceed one metre in
lerigth and there shall not be more than 2
chases in any one wall. Horizontal chases shall
have minimum mutual separation distance of
50 cm. Sum of lengrhs of all chases and recesses
in any horizontal plane shall not exceed one-
fourth the length of the wall.
6.3.3.5 Holes for supporting put-logs of
scaffolding shall be kept away from bearings of
bems, lintels, and other concentrated loads.
If unavoidable, stresses in the affectedarea shall
be checked to ensure that these ate within safe
limits.
6.5.3.6 No chase, recess or hole shall be
provided in any stretch of a masonry wall,-the
length of which is less than four times the
thickness of wall, except when found safe by
structural analysis.
6.5.3.7Masonry directly above a recess or a
hole, if wider than 30 cm, shall be supported
on a lintel. No lintel, however, is necessary in
case of a circular recess or hole exceeding
30 cm in diameter provided upper half of the
recess or hole is built as a semi-circular arch of
adequate thickness and there is adequate length
of masonry on the sides of openings to resist
the horizontal thrust.
6.5.3.8As far as possible chases, recesses and
holes in masonry should be left (inserting
sleeves, where necessary) at the time of
construction of masonry so as to obviate
subsequent cutting. If cutting is unavoidable,
it should be done without damage to the
surrounding or residual masonry. It is desirable
to use such tools for cutting which depend
upon rotary and not on heavy impact for
cutting action.
6.5.3.9 No chase, recess or hole shall be
provided in half-brick load bearing wall,
excepting the minimum number of holes
needed for scaffolding.
6.5.3.!0 Chases, recesses or holes shall not be
cut into walls made of hollow or perforated
units, after the units have been incorporated in
masonry.
6.6 Corbelling
6.61 Where corbelling is required for the
support of some structural element, maximum
projection of masonry unit should not exceed
one-half of the height of the unit or one-half ot
the built-in part of the unit and the maximum
horizontal projection of the corbel should not
exceed one-third of the wall thickness.
6.6.2 The load per unit length on a corbel shall
not be greater than half of the load per unit
length on the wall above the cobel. The joad on
the wa!l above the corbel, toegther with four
times the load on the corbel, shall not cause the
average stress in the supporting wall or leaf to
exceed the permissible stresses given in 5.4.
66.3 It is preferable to adopt headercourses in
the corbelled portion of masonry from
considerations of economy and stability.
7 S P E C I A L C O N S I D ER A T I O N S I N
EARTH QUAKE ZONES
7.0 Special features of design and construction
for earthquake resistant masonry buildings,
applicable to buildings in Zones III. IV and V,
are given in 7.1 to 7.5.7. No special provisions
are necessary for building construction of
Zones I and Il. Reference may also be made to
good p r a c t i c e [VI-4(6)j f o r d e t a i l e d
information.
7.1 Materials.
7.1.1 Well burnt bricks having a crushing
strength not less than 3.5 N/mm2 shall be used.
7.2 Mortars
7.2.1 Mortars not leaner than those given in
Table 1 shall be used for masonry construction.
7.2.2 Where steel reinforcing bars areprovrded,
the bars shall be embedded in cement-sand
mortar not leaner than I:4 or in, cement
concrete of grade M IO.
bk3TE - In coastal areas, the concrete grade shall be
of M 15 concreteand the Wing mortar of1:3 (cement-
snd).
7.3 wolfs
7.3.1 Masonry bearing walls build with mortars
as specified in 7.2. I unless designed as
reinforced masonry, shall not be built ofgreater
total height than 15 m subject to a maximum
of four storeys when measured from the mean
ground level to the roof slab of the main tie
level. Where necessary, masonry bearing walls
shall be strengthened in accordance with 7.5.1.
7.3.2 Bearing walls in both directions shall be
straight and symmetrical in plan as far as
possible.
7.3.3 Panel walls shall be checked for their
strength in bending to the ear%quake force
acting on their own mass (see Appendix A).
YJOTE - For panel walls having a starey height not
*ore than 3.5 m and laterally supported at top,
this check need not be exercised.
23
VI4
 7.4 Openings in the Bearing Walls
7.4.1 Tops of openings in a storey should
preferably be at the same level so that a
continuous band could be provided over them,
including the lintels throughout the building.
7.4.2 The total width of the openings shall not
be more than half of the length of the walls
between the adjacent cross walls, except as
provided in 7.4.6.
7.4.3 The opening shall be preferably located
away from the corner by a clear distance equal
to at least one-eighth of the height of the
opening where seismic coefficient is less than
0.08 and one-fourth of the height where seismic
coefficient is 0.08 or more.
7.4.4 The horizontal distance between two
openings shall not be less than one-fourth of
the height of the shorter opening where seismic
coefficient is less than 0.08 and one-half of the
height where seismic coefficient ii 0.08 or
more.
7.4.5 The vertical distance between openings
one above the other shall not be less than
60 cm.
7.4.6 Where openings do not comply with the
requirements of 7.4.2 to 7.4.5, they sha’ll be
strengthened in accordance with 7.5.5.
7.4.7 If a window or ventilator is to be
projected out, the projection shall be in
reinforced masonry or concrete and well
anchored.
7.4.8 lf an opening is-tall, say, for the full
height of wall. dividing the wall into two
portions, these portions shall be remforced with
horizontal reinforcement of 6 mm diameter
bars at not more than 60 cm intervals, one on
inner and one on outer face, properly tied to
vertical steel at jambs and corners or junctions
of walls where used.
7.4.~ The use of arches to span over the
openings is a source of weakness and shall be
avoided unless steel ties are provided.
7.5 Strengthening Arrangements
7.5.1 All buildings to be constructed of
masonry shall be strengthened by the methods
specified in Table 12. The value of design
seismic coefficient to be adopted shall be BS
given in Part VI Structural design, Section 1
Loads.
7.12 BAN D s ~ These are lintel roof and gable
hands (see 2.1). The specifications of bands are
given in 7.5.3. Roof band need not be provided
24
VI-J-
underneath reinforced coficrete or brickwork
slabs resting :)n bearing walis, provided the slabs
we continuous over parts between crumple
sections, of an?, and cover the width ,?f end
walls fully.
7.5.3 The band shell be made of reinforced
concrete of grade not leaner &an‘ Ml0 or
reinforced brickwork in cement mortar not
leaner than 1:4. The bands shall be to the full
width of the wall and not less than 7.5 cm in
depth and shall be reinforced with steel, as
irtdica?ed in Table 13.
NOT!: - In coastal areas, the concrete grade shall be
M 15 concrete and the fillirw mortar of I:3 icement:
and)
25.3.1 In the case of reinforced brickwork,
the thc!:ness of joints containing steel bars
shall be increased so as to have a miuimum
mortar cover of 6 mm ;zro;lnd the bar. In bands
of reinforced brickwork, the area of steel
provided should be equal to that specified
above for rerof’<srtx:l concrete bands.
7.5.3.2 Typical details of providing RCC band
at floor/roof .!evel ou hollow block masonry
are shown in Fig. 14.
7.5-1 SI I<FN(;THt:NINC; OF CORNERS AND
JUNC:TI!)NS - Vertical steel at corners and
Junctions of walls which are up to one and a
half bricks thick shall be provided either of
nuld steel or high strength deformed bars as
specified in Table 14. For thicker walls, the
area of the bars shall be increased propor-
tionately. The reinforcement shall be properly
embedded in the plinth masonry of foundations
and roof slab or roof band so as to develop its
tensile strength in bond and passing through the
lintel bands in all storeys. Bats in different
storeys may be welded or suitably lapped.
7.5.4. I Typical details of providing vertical
steel in brickwork and hollow block at corners,
T-junctions and jambs of opening are shown in
Fig. IS and f,ig 16.
7.5.4.2 Details of vertical reinforcement given
in ‘fable 14 are applicable to brick masonry,
stone masonry and hollow block masonry.
7.5.5 STKEHti I FI1;NING OF JAMBS O F
OPENINGS - Openings in bearing walls shall
be strengthened, where necessary (see7.6.4), by
providing reinforced ccncre:e members or
reinforcing the brickwork around them as
shown in Fig. 17.
8. NOT’AVONS AND SYMBOLS
8.1 The Various notations and letter symbols
used in the text of the standard chall have lhe
meaning 1s given in Appendix El.
 ..-___l_.-_--- --.. -.--.-__-___
TABLE 12 STRENGTHENING ARRANGEMENTS
(cklure 7.5. I)
St DESIGN S E I S M I C N0.0r ST~REYS STRENGTHENINCCMETHODSTO
No. COEFFICIENT ~EPRovrca~o

(1) (2) (3) (4)

i) Less than 0.50
a, 0.05 to o.O6
iii) More than 0.06 to
less than 0.08
iv) 0.08 and more
*At tie level all the trusses and thegable end shall be provided withdiagonal braces in plan so as to transmit
the kterai shear due to earthquake force to the gable walls acting as shear walls at the ends.
I to 4 a) Masonry mortar (see Z2.1)
.
I to4 a) Masonry mortar (see 7.2. I)
b) Lintel band (see 7.52)
a) Sir& d.r$ double storyed with a) Masonry mortar (see 7.2. I)
reinforced concrete or reinforced b) Lintel band (see 7.5.2)
brick slab roof
b) Single LII~ double storeyed with a) Masonry mortar (see 7.2.1)
pitch*::1 or other types of roof b) Lintel band (see 7.5.2)
Roof band (see 7.5.2)
s; Bracing in plan at tie level*
Cl 3 01 )! Masonry mortar (see Z2.1)
sl Lintel band (see Z5.2)
c) Roof band and gable band where
necessary (see 7.5.2)
d) Vertical steel at corners and
junctions of wal+ (see 7.5.5)
e) y:;tpi;)eel at Jambs of openings
f) RSacin * in plan at tie level for
pitche 8 roof*
i to 4 Masonry mortar (see 7.2. I)
:‘, Lintel band (see 7.5.2)
c) Roof band and gpble band, where
necesav (Me 7.5.2)
d) Vertical steel at corners and
junctions of walls (see 7.5.4)
e) Vertical steel at jambs of openings
(see 7.5.5)
n Bracing in plan at tie level for
pitched roof*

TABLE 13 BAND REINFORCEMENT

(Clarrse 7.5.3)
D ESIGN SEISMIC R EINFORCEMENT LJNK~
CIXFFICIENT ---.^-lll
I
PLan Mild Steel Bars High Strength
Deformed Bars
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) 0.05 to less than O.08 Two No. 12 mm dia, one Two No. 10 mm dia. one 6 mm dia,
on each face of the wall on each face of the wall IS cm apart
with suitable cover with suitable cover
ii) 0.08 and more Two No. 16 mm dta, one Two No. 12 mm dia c,nc 6 mm dia.
on each face of the on each face of the wall IS cm apart
wall with suitable cover with suitable cover

PART V! #l‘RUCl’URAl. DESIGN-SFLTON 4 M4SQhluV

25
w-4.
 7 I-KJLLOW BLOCK

\ CORNER PIECES
LAPPED WITH MAIN
BARS AT A POINT
AWAY FROM CORNER

L HORIZONTAL
STEEL
700 mm FOR PLAIN BAR
LOO mm FOR DEFORMED BAR

14A Detail of RCC Band at Floor I+ 1.48 Exterior fland Beam

nn 200 mm Thick Hollow Block Wall

Fig. 14 Typical Details of Roof Bands for Hollow Block Masonry

TABLE 14 VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT

(C’buses 7.5.4 and 7.5.4.2)

SL NOOF STOREYS D I A M E T E R O F S I N G L E BAROR D IAMETERO F S I N G L E B AR OR

No./ STOREYS E QUIVALENT AREA OF P L A I N E~UIVALENTAREAOFHIGH
MlL.nSl-EELTOBE~OVIDED STRENGTHDEFORMEDSTEEL
TOBEPROVIDED
A
f 4, .
Des&n Seismic Design Seismic . Design Seismic Design Seismic
Coefficient Coefficient Coefficient Coefficient
More than 0.06 0.08 and More Mo?;0tF;80.06 Above 0.08
to less than 0.08

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 6) (7)

mm mm mm mm

i) One nil 12 nil 10

ii) T&0 TOP nil nil
Bottom nil t,’ nil :“2
Iii) Three Top
Middle
Bottom
t:
16
t:
16
1:
12
:T12
iv) r-0Uf 12 10
Top
Third
Second
1’:
16
16
20
1’:
12
12
is
Bottom 16 25 12 20

NMlONAL BUllDING CODE O F IMIA

 -- I

)- 1+ ri.3
j____.__-
---___
&__._---
c_~_~~~_ El ,’
IA”

1~.l/2 A N D ! INDICATE
THE ThICtXNESS O F
BRICK
‘1‘ BR!CK T H I C K
- ‘i2 BRlCn T H I C K
- 1 BRICK T H I C K q,c 18C T-Junction Details forOne and a Halt Brick Wall
‘,2 BAR
t ,/ - B A R 7
‘(2 l---l

S E C O N D LAYER FIRST UVER

18.4 Corner Junction Dclailr for One Brick Wall

SECOND LAYER
I
i
18D Jamb Dewis torune Rrlch Walt
\BAR

FIRST LAYER

FIRST IAVEA

SECOhD LAYER
SECOND LAYER
15B Corner Junction Details for One and a Half Brick Wall 1SE Jamb Details forOric and a Hall hick WAII

Fig. 15 Typical Junction Details for Providing Verh’cal Steel in Brick Masonr,
27
MRrnsm~ L DMIGN-SEC~KIN 4 MMONPY w-4-
 APPENDIX A
(Clause 9.7)
SOME GUIDELINES FORASSESSMENT OF ECCENTRICITY OF
LOADING ON,WALLS
A-l. Where a reinforced concrete roof and
floor ,slab of normal span (not exceeding 30
times the thickness of wall) bear on external
masonry walls, the point of application of the
vertical loading shall .be taken to be at the
centre of the bearing on the wall. When the span
is more than 30 times the thickness of wall,
the point of application of the load shall be
considered to be displaced from the centre of
bearing towards the span of the floor to an
extent of. one-sixth of the bearing width.
4-2. In case of a reinforced concrete slab of
normal span (that is, less than 30 times the
thickness of the wall), which does not bear on
the full width of the wall and ‘cover tiles or
bricks’ are provided on the external face, there
is some eccentricity of load. The eccentricity
may be assumed to be one-twelfth of the
thickness of the wall.
A-3. Eccentricity of load from the roof/floor
increases with the increase in flexibility and
thus deflection of the slabs. Also, eccentricity
of loading increases with the increase in fiity
of slabs/beams at supports. Precast RCC slabs
are better than inkiru slabs in this regard
because of very little fixity. If supports are
released before further construction on top,
fixity is reduced.
A-4. Interior walls carrying continuous floors
are assumed tu be axially loaded except when
carrying very flexible floor or rqof systems. The
assumption is valid also for interior walls
carrying independent slabs spanning from both
APPENDIX B
(Clause 5.4.2)
CALCULATION OF BASIC COMPRESSIVESTRESS OF MASONRY
BY PRISM TEST
B-l. DETERMINATION OF COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH OF MASONRY BY PRISM
TEST
g-1.1 When compressive strength of masonry
vrn) is to be established by tests, it shall be
done in advance of the construction, using
prisms built of similar materials under the same
conditions with the same bonding arrangement
as for the structure. In building the prisms,
WrtnmwcNnAL DKSloKdWllON 4 MAMlNRY
sides, provided the span of the floor on one side
does not exceed that on the other by more than
15 percent. Where the difference is greater, the
displacement of the point of application of
each floor load shall be taken as one-sixth of its
bearing width on the wall and the resultant
eccentricity calculated therefrom.
A-5. For timber and other light weight floors,
even for full width bearing on wall, an
eccentricity of about one-sixth may be assumed
due to deflection. For timber floors with larger
spans, that is, more than 30 times the thickness
of the wall, eccentricity of one-third of the
thickness of the wall may be assumed.
A-6.. In multi-storeyed buildings, flxlty and
eccentricity have normally purely local effect
and are not cumulative. They just form a
constant ripple on the downward increasing
axial stress. If the ripple is large, it is likely to
be more serious at upper levels where it can
cause-cracking of walls than lower down where
it may or may not cause local over-stressing.
bbTE - The resultant eccentricity of the total loads
on a wall at any level may be calculated on the
assumption that immediately nbow a horizontal
lateral support, the resultant eccentricity of all the
vertical loads ahow that level is zero.
~.7. For a wall corbel to sup it some load,
the point of application of tP load shall be
assumed to be at the centreof the bearing on,
the corbel.
moisture content of the units at the time of
laying, the consistency of the mortar, the
thickness of mortar joints and workmanship
shall be the same as will be used in the
structure. Assembled speclmen shall be at least
40 cm high and shall have a height to thickness
ratio (h/r) of at least 2 but not more than 5.
If the h/r ratio of the prisms tested is less
than 5 in case of brickwork and more than 2 in
case of blockwork, compressive strength values
29
w-4.
 indicated by the tests shall be corrected by
multiplying with the factor indicated’ in
Table 15.
Prisms shall be tested after 28 days between
sheets of nominal ‘4 mm plywood, slightly
longer than the bed area of the prism, in a
,testing machine, the upper platform of which is
spherically seated. The load shall be evenly
distributed over the whole top and bottom
surfaces of the specimen, and shall be applied
TABLE 15 CORRECTION FACTORS FOR DIFFERENTh/r RATIOS
(Clause B-1. I)
Ratio of he’ ht to 2.0 2.5
thickness (x/t)
Correction factors 0.73 0.80
for brickwork*
Correction factors 1.00 _ 1.20
for blockwork*
l lnierpoktion is valid for intermediate values.
APPENDIX
(Clause 5.4.1 S)
GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF MASONRY SUBJECTED TO
CONCENTRATED LOADS
c-l.EXTENT O F D I S P E R S A L OF
CONCENTRATED LOAD
C-I.1 For concentric loading, maximum spread
of a concentrated load on a wall may be taken
to be equal to bt4 t (b is width of bearing and
t is thickness of wall), or stretch of wall
supporting the load, or centre-to-centre
distance between loads, whichever is less.
c-2. INCREASE IN PERMISSIBLE STRESS.
C-2.1 When a concentrated load bears on a
central strip of wall, not wider than half the
thickness of the wall and is concentric, bearing
stress in masonry may exceed the permissible
compressive by 50 percent provided the area of
supporting wall is not less than three times the
bearing area.
C-2.2 If the load bears on full thickness of wall
and is concentric, 25 percent increase in stress
may be allowed.
C-2.3 For loading on central strip wider than
half the’thickness of the wall but less than full
thickness, increase in stress may be worked out
30
at the rate of 350 to 700 kN/min. The load at
failwre should be recorded.
8.2. C A L C U L A T I O N O F BASIC
COMPRESSIVE STRESS
B-2.1 Basic of masonry shall be .taken to be
equal to 0.26f’, where f’m is the value of
compressive strength of masonry as obtained
from prism test.
3.0 3.5 4.0 5.0
0.86 0.91 0.95 1.00
_ 1.30 1.37
C
by interpolation between values of increase in
stresses as given in C-2. I and C-2.2.
C-2.4 In case concentrated load’is from a lintel
over an opening, an increase of 50 percent in
permissible stress may be taken provided the
supporting area is not less than 3 times the
bearing area.
c-3. CRITERIA OF PROVIDING BED BLOCK
c-3.1 If a concentrated load bears on one end
of a wall, there is a possibility of masonry in
the upper region developing tension.. In such a
situation, the load should be supported on an
RCC bed block (of M 15 grade) capable of
taking tension.
C-3.2 When any section of masonry wall is
subjected to concentrated as well as uniformly
distributed load and resultant stress, computed
by making due allowance for increase in stress
on account of concentrated load, exceeds the
permissible stress in masonry, a concrete bed
block (of M 15 grade) should be provided under
the load in order to relieve stress in masonry. In
N4TloNAL BullDlNc COD0 OF INDIA
concrete, angle of dispersion of concentrated
load is taken,to be 45’ to the vertical.
c-3.3 In case of cantilevers and long span beams
supported on masonry walls, indeterminate but
very high edge stresses occur at the supports
and in such cases it is necessary to relieve stress
on masonry by providing RCC bed block of
M 15 grade concrete. Similarly when a wall is
subjected to a concentrated load from 2 beam
wh+zh is not sensibly rigid (for example, a
limber beam or an RS joist), a concrete bed
block should be provided below the beam in
order to avoid high edge stress in the wall
because of excessive deflection of the beam.

APPENDIX D

(Cluuse 5.55)

GUIDELINES FOR APPROXIMATE DESIGN OF NON-LOAD BEARING WALL

D-l. PANEL WALLS c) When either there are no window openings

D-i.1A panel wall may be designed
approximately 2s under, depending upon its
support conditions and certain assumptions:
a) When there are narrow tall windows on
either side of panel, the panel spans in the
vertical direction. Such a panel may be
designed for 2 ,bending moment of PHI%
where P is ihe total horizontal load on the
panel and H is the height between the
centres of supports. Panel wall is assumed
to be simply supported in the vertical
direction.
or windows are of ‘hole-in-wall’ type, the
panel is considered to be simply supported
on all four edges. In this case also, amount
of maximum bending moment depends on
height to length ratio of panel and ratio
c1 of flexural strength of masonry. in
vertical direction to that in the horizontal
direction. Approximate values for
maximtim b e n d i n g m o m e n t i n t h e
horizontal direction for masonry with
Ir = 0.50, are given in Table 17.
D-2. CURTAIN WALLS

b) When there are long horizontal windows
between top support and the panel, the top
edge of the panel is free. In this case, the
panel should be considered to be supported
on sides and at the bottom and the bending
moment would depend upon height to
length ratio of panel and flexural strength
of masonry. Approximate values of
bending moments in the horizontal
direction for tfiis support condition, when
ratio p of flexural strength of wall in
the vertical direction to that in horizontal
direction is assumed to be 0.5, are given
in Table 16.
D-2.1 Curtain walls .may be designed as panel
walls taking ‘into consideration the actual
supporting conditions.
o-3. PARTITION WALLS
D-3.1 These are internal walls usually subjected
to much smaller lateral forces. Behaviour of
such wall is similar to that of panel wall and
these could; therefore, be designed on similar
lines. However, in view of smaller lateral loads,
ordinarily these could be apportioned
empirically as follows:

TABLE 16 BENDING MOMENTS IN LATERALLY LOADED PANEL WALLS,

FREE AT TOP EDGE AND SUPPORTED ON GTHER THREE EDGES

(Clause D-1.1)

Height o f panel. H 0 30 0.50 0.75 1 .oo 1.25 1.50 1.75

Length of panel, L

PL PL PL PL PL PL PL
Ben&g moment
-
25 -
18 14
- 12 11 10.5 lo

NOTE - For H/L ratio less than 0.30. the panel should be designed as a free standing wall and for H/L ratio
exceeding 1.75, it should be designed as a horizontally spanning member for a bending moment value ofPL/8.

31
?ARTMSIRUCNRA L DESIGN-SECIION 4 hlASONRY VW-
 TABLE 17 BENDING MOMENTS IN LATERALLY LOADED PANELWALLS
SUPPORTED ON ALL FOUR EDGES

[ Oairse D-I. 1 (c)J

Height of panel, H 0.30 0.50 0.75 1 .oo 1.25 1.50 1.75
Length of panel, L

PL PL PL PL PL PL
- PL
Bending moment
72 3a 24 18 15 13 12

NOTI’ -. \V~CW I//I. is less than 0.30. value of bending moment in the horizontal direction may be taken as nil
and panel \\;111 may be designed for a bending moment value of PH/8 in the vertical direction; when H/L exceeds
1.75. p:111c1 ~nay be assumed to be spanning in the horizontal direction and designed for bending moment of
PL/X.

a) Walls with adequate lateral restraint at
ho111 ends but not at the top:
1) The panel may be of any height
provided the length does not exceed
40 times the thickness; or
2) The panel may be of any length
provided the height does not exceed
15 times the thickness (that is, it may
be considered as a free standing wall);
or
3) Where the length of the panel is over
40 times and less than 60 times the
thickness, the height plus twice the
length may not exceed 135 times the
thickness.
2) The panel ,may be of any length
provided the height does not exceed 30
times the thickness; or
3) Where the length of the panel is over 40
times and less than 110 times the
thickness, the length plus three times
the height should not exceed 200 times
the thickness.
cl When walls have adequate lateral restraint
at the top but not at the ends, the panel
may be of any length provided the height
does not exceed 30 times the thickness.

b) wall with adequate lateral restraint at both

ends and at the top:
1) The panel may be of any height
provided the length does not exceed 40
times the thickness; or
D-3.3 Strength of bricks used in partition walls
should not be less than 3.5 N/mm2 or the
strength of masonry units used in adjoining
masonry, whichever is less. Grade of mortar
should not be leaner than M2.

32
 APPENDIX E

(Clause 8.1)

NOTATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

followina notations. letter symbols and abbreviations shall have the meaning indicated
E-l. ‘Ike
against each, unless otherwise specifiedFin the text.
A= Area of a section 1 I Effective length
L= Actual length of wall
b = Width of bearing
Ll, L2 = Lower strength mortars
DPC = Damp proof course
Ml,M2= Medium strength mortars
c = Resultant eccentricity
P= Total horizontal load
fb = Basic compressive stress
PL = Plinth level
f, = Permissible compressive stress
RCC- Reinforced cermnt concrete
f, = Compressive stress due to dead loads
RS = Rolled steel
f, = Permissible shear stress
s, = Spacing of piers/buttresses/cross walls
f’,= Compressive strength of masonry (in
prism test) SR = Slenderness ratio
CL = Ground level t = Actual thickness
H = Actual height between lateral tp = Thickness of pier
supports
t,= Thickness of walI
H’= Height of opening
w= Resultant load
Hl,HZ= High strength mortars w, = Axial load
h = Effective height between lateral
supports w, = Eccentric load
k,= Area factor \v = Width of piers/buttresses/cross walls
P

k,= Shape modification factor A’ Ratio of flexural strength of wall in

the vertical direction to that in the
k, = Stress reduction factor horizontal direction
 LIST OF STANDARDS

The following list records those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practrce’
and ‘accepted standards’ in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The
htest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code.
The standards Listed may be used by the Authority as a guide in.conformance with
the requirements of the referred clauses in the Code.

In the following list, the number appearing in the first column within parentheses
kdicates the number of the reference in thispartlsectibn.

(1) IS : 1077-1986 Specification for common
burnt clay building bricks(fourth revision)
IS : 2180-1985 Specification for heavy
duty burnt clay building bricks (second
revision)
IS : 2185 (Part 1) 1979 Specificatibn for
concrete masonry units: Part 1 Hollow
and solid concrete blocks (second revision)
IS : 2 185 (Part 3) - 1984 Specification for
concrete masonry units _: Part 3 Auto-
claved cellular concrete blocks @rst
revision)
IS : 2222-1979 SpecificaticM for burnt
clay perforated building bricks (second
revision)
IS :
2849-1983 Specification for non-load
bearing gypsum partition blocks (solid
and hollow types) (first revision)
IS : 3115-1978 Specification for lime
based blocks uirsr revision)
IS : 33161974 Specification for struc-
tural granite (firsr revision)
IS : 3620-1979 Specification for laterite
stone block for masonry (first revision)
IS : 3952-1978 Specification for burnt
clay hollow blocks for walls and partitions
(first revision)
IS : 4139-1976 Specification for sandlime
bricks Qirst revision)
(3) IS : 1597 (Part 1) - 1967 Code of prac-
tice for construction of stone masonry.:
.Part 1 Rubble stone masonry
IS : 1597 (Part 2) - 1967 Code of prac-
tice for construction of stone masonry :
Part 2 Ashlar masonry
IS : 2212-1962 Code of practice for
brickwork
IS : 2572-1963 Code of practice for
construction of hollow concrete block
masonry
IS : 2849-1983 Specification for non-load
bearing gypsum partition blocks (solid
and hollow types) Uirst revision)
IS : 43261976 Code of practice for earth-
quake resistant design and construction
of buildings (Jim revision)
IS : 6041-1985’ Code of practice for
construction of autoclaved cellular con-
crete block masonry Cftst revision)
IS : 6042-1969 Code of practice for
construction of lightweight concrete
block masonry
(4) IS : 2212-1962 Code of practice for
brickwork
(5) 1s : 3414-1968 Code of practice for
design and installation of joints in
buildings

(2) IS : 2250-1981 Code of practice for (6) IS ; 4326-1976 Code of practice for earth-
@eparation and use of masonry mortars quake resistant design and construction
(first revision) of buildings @st revision)

34
VFI NATlONAL BUllDING CODE O F INDl.4
 .

-NATIONAL BUILDING CODE

PART vI STNJCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION5 CONCRETE

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD 4
SECTION 5A PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE
SECTION SA(a) GENERAL
I. SCOPE ...

2. TERMINOLOGY ...

3. SYMBOLS .

SECTION 5A(b) MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP, INSPECT-ION

AND TESTING
4. MATERIALS . 8

5. CONCRETE ... 10

6. WORKABILITY OF CONCREl-E ... II

7. DURABILITY ... II

8. CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING ... II

9. PRODUCTION AND CONTROL OF CONCRETE ... I3

10. FORMWORK ... I4

11. ASSEMBLY OF REINFORCEMENT .. I4

12. TRANSPORTING, PLACING. COMPACTING AND CURING ... IS

13. CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL CONDITIONS ... 16

14. SAMPLING AND STRENGTH TEST OF CONCRETE ... I7

IS. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ... I9

16. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF STRUCTURES ... I9

SECTION 5A(c) GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

17. LOADS AND FORCES ... 20

18. BASES FOR DESIGN ... a0

19. STABILITY OF THE STRUCTURE ... 21

20. DURABILITY AND FIRE RESISTANCE OF THE STRUCTURE . . . 21

21. ANALYSIS ... 21

22. BEAMS ... 23

23. SOLID SLABS ... 24

24. COMPRESSION MEMBERS *.. 27

25. REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING REINFORCEMENT AND

DETAILING ... 27
26. EXPANSION JOINTS ... 35

VI+*
SECTION SA(d) SPECIAL DESlGN REQUIREMENTS FOK S-f RUCTfJRAL
MEMBERS AND SYSTEMS

27. GENERAL 35
28. DEEP BEAMS 35
29. RIBBED, HOLLOW BLOCK OR VOlDED SLAB 36
30. FLAT SLABS 37

31. WALLS 43

32. STAIRS 45
33. FOOTINGS 45

SECTION 5A(e) STRUCTURAL DESIGN (I IMI I S IATE MF I HOD)

34. SAFETY AND SERVICEAHIfI~f Y REQIJIRFMEN~l S

35. CHARACTERISTIC AND DESIGN VALfJf:s AND PAKTIA~
SAFETY FACTORS
36. ANALYSlS
37. LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: FLEXURE
38. LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: COMPRESSION
39. LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: SHEAR
40. LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: TORSION
41. LIMlT STATE OF SERVIC‘EABILI’T’Y: DEf~LECTION
42. LIMIT STATE OF SERVICEABILITY: (‘RACKING

SECTION 5A(ff STRUCI-URAL DESIGN (WORKING

Sl~RESS M E T H O D ) ’

43. GENERAL 55
44. PERMISSIBLE STRESSES .. 55

45. PERMlSSIBLE LOADS IN COMPRESSION MEMBERS . 56

46. y;$iDyiRG” SUBJECT TO COMBINED AXIAL LOAD AND
58
47. SHEAR 59
48. TORSION 60

APPENDIX A REQUIREMENTS FOR DUKABIl.ITY 62

APPENDIX B CALCULATION OF DEFLECTION ,,. 63

APPENDIX C SLABS SPANNING IN TWO DIRECTIONS 65

APPENDIX R EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS 6 7

APPENDIX E MOMENTS OF RESISTANCE FOR RECTANGULAR
AND T-SECTIONS 69

W-5. 2 NATWMWL WCLUWC cmrwrmn*

SECTIONSR PKESTRESSEDCOT'iCRETE
SECTION 5B(a) GENERAL

/ sc:oI’F !I

2. TERMlNOLOGk . 71
II. S Y M B O L S
... 71

SECTION 5B(b) MA7EKIALS. WORKMANSHIP. INSt’t’C I ION

AND 1 !:sl’lh’(;

4. MA1 FRIA1.S ... 72

.5 C‘ONC‘KEIE ... 73

6. WORKABILI IY OF CON’i‘KEl E . 74

7 DURABILI’T Y 74

8. C0NCRE.TF M I X PROPOR I IONING .. 74

Y. PRODI’CTION AND C’ON’I’ROI. OF CONCRETt 75

IO. FORMWORK .. 75

I I . ASSEMB1.Y Ol- PKESr~KESSING AND REINFORC’INC Sl E E L . . 75

II. PRESTRESSING . . 77

13. TKANSPOK I IN<;. PLACING. C‘OMPACI-INCi AND CURING . 80

14. C’0NCRE.r IN<; I;NDt’R SPECIAL. C’ONDIl-IONS ... 80
15. SAMPLING AND SiTRENGl’tt TFS’I OF CONCRETE ... 80

16. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ... 80

17. INSPECTION AND I ESTING OF STRUCTURES ... 80
SECTION 5B(c) GENFRAI. lIESIGN K E Q U I K E M E N T S

18. GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ... 81

SECTION 58(d) STKUCTURAL. DESIGN: LIMIT STATE M E T H O D

1~. S A F E T Y .4ND SERVICEABILI-I Y KEQUlKEMEN~1.S ... 85

20. CHARACTERISTIC AND DESIGN VAl.UES AND PARTIAL

SAFFl‘L’ FACTORS ... 86
21. ANALYSIS ... 87

22. LIMIT Sl-ATE O F C O L L A P S E ... 87

APPENDIX A R E Q U I R E M E N T S FOR DURABILITY 93

APPEb’DlX B MOMENTS OF RESISTANCE FOR RECTANGULAR

SLC’TION AND T-SECTIONS ... 95

PART “I STRlICTURAL DESlf$N - SILknON ¶ CONCRETE VI-S

3
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION 5 CONCRETE

0. FOREWORD

0.1 This section covers the structural design aspect of plain, reinforced and prestressed concrete.

0.2 The Panel dealing with this section strongly felt the need for a unified Code and the work was
initiated in that direction. As a result of this work, a number of points have emerged which require
careful consideration. It has, therefore, been felt that till such time as these points are sorted out.
status quo be mamtained and plain and reinforced concrete he treated separately from prestressed
concrete; hence they are covered under two sub-sections 5A and 58; 5A deals with plain and
reinforced concrete and 5B with prestressed concrete. SI units have been used in both the sections.

VI-* 4 NATIONAL UJILMNC CODE OF INDIA

0.3 This section was first published in 1970. This revision is intended to bring it in line with
revised versions of IS:456-1978 and IS: 1343-l 980.

0.3.1 The Section SA incorporates mainly the following changes:

a) MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP. INSPECTION AND TESTING

I) Theadditional materials now permitted are more types of cement, pozrolanas. light
weight aggregates, and cold twisted deformed bars of Grade Fe 500.
2) Regarding durability, guidance concerning minimum cement and maximum waler
cement ratio for different environmental conditions. Including type of cement to be used
for resisting sulphate attack has been given in an appendix. Limitations on the total
chloride and sulphate content of concrete have also been given.

3) Information regarding properties of conkrete such as modulus of elasticity. tenhllr

strength. shrinkage, creep and coefficient of thermal expansion have been given t’or
guidance.

4) Recommendations regarding constructions tolerances relating to formwork and placing

of steel have been given.

5) Recommendations regarding acceptance criteria for hardened concrete represented by

core tests has been given.
6) The clauses on load testing of structures has been modified.

b) CiENFRAI. LItSIGN REQUIREMENTS

I) Recommendations regarding prototype testing have bekn added.
2) Recommendations regarding stability of the structure as a whole have been given in
addition to the one regarding the stability of the overhanging members.
3) Some recommendations regarding frame analysis such as substitute frames have bcrn
given.
4) ‘1 he rules for effective width of flange for T and L beams have been changed.
5) The recommendations regarding slender beams have been changed.
h) The slenderness limits for columns have been changed.
7) Minimum eccentricity for the design of compression members has been specified.
8) Hulcs governing the use of bundled bars have been added.
9) CurtalIment rules for reinforcement in beams and slabs have been given.
IO) Recommendations regarding critical section for shear and minimum web reinforcement
have been added.
I I) The recommendation regarding minimum tensile reinforcement in beams has been
modified.
12) Recommendations regarding side face reinforcement in beams have been added.
13) The clause on span to depth ratio for controlling deflection has been modified and
elaborated to take into account the type and the percentage of reinforcement provided.
Method for calculating the short term as well as long term deflection has been added.
14) Detailing rules for crack control have been given in the Code. These rules are expected to
lead to a satisfactory design for most of the structures under normal environmental
conditions. Detailed investigations of crack width may however be required for unusual
cases or structures in aggressive environments.
IS) Guidance on the determination of effective length of columns in framed structures has
been added.

C) SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS F OR STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND wsfmis

I) Recommendations for the design of deep beams have been added.

5
l at VI sTWC’~‘UML DUICN --N II CONCWTS VI-S
 .

2) Guidance for the design of ribbed and voided slabs has been included.
3) The clauses on design of flat slabs have been revised. Shear in flat slabs and openings in
flat slabs are now covered in some detail.
4) The clauses on footing have also undergone some changes regarding design for shear and
transfer of load at the base of the column.
LIMIT STATE METHOD - A unified approach has been made to cover members in flexure and
fiexure combined with axial force. A method of design of compression members with biaxial
bending has also been added. Slenderness effects aretaken into account by augmenting the .
moments to be considered in design. I
WOKKING STRESS METHOD --The permissible stresses in steel have been modified to make
them more rational and to reflect the provisions of the basic standards on steel. Permissible
stresses in concrete for shear have been completely revised. Values of local bond stress have.
been deleted as these are not required according to new rules. Values of bearing stress in
concrete have also been deleted from the table of permissible stresses, since it has been given in
the clause on design of footings.

0.3.2 In the revision of the Section 5B, an attempt has been made to unify the provisions between
prestressed concrete structures and reinforced concrete structures, as is necessary. As a result
many of the provisions regarding materials, workmanship, inspection and testing and general
requirements of Section 5A apply to prestressed concrete structures and, therefore, only reference
has been made to such provisions in this section. Themajor changes in this section are on the
following lines:
‘The concept of limit state which provides a rational approach, taking into account variations
in material strengths and loads on semi-probabilistic basis has been introduced. This in fact is
a rationalization of the ultimate load method covered in the earlier version.
b) Provision for intermediate degrees of prestress (partial prestress) has been included.
Consequently, the section covers 3 types of structures, the types being associated with the
permissible tensile stress in concrete.
C) The method of design for shear and torsion has been completely revised, incorporating the
results of the latest research on the subject.
d) Recommenddtions regarding transmission length of prestressing tendons have been
elaborated.
e) Recommendations for ensuring lateral stability during handling and erection have been
modified.
0 Cortsiderations regarding durability have been detailed with guidance concerning minimum
cement content and maximum water cement ratio for different environmental conditions,
including types of cement to be used for sulphate attack. Limitations on total chloride and
sulphate content of concrete have been given.
0.4 Assistance has been derived from the following publications in the formulation of this
section:
AC1 318-77 AC1 Standard building. code requirements for reinforced concrete. American
Concrete Institute.
CP I IO : Part I : 1972 Code of practice for the structural use of concrete. Part I Design,
materjals and workmanship. British Standards Institution.
AS 1480-1974 SAA Concrete Structures Code. Standards Association of Australia.
AS 1481-1974 SAA Prestressed concrete code. Standards Association of Australia,

0.5 The following handbooks published by Indian Standards Institution would

supplement for easy use and understanding of Section 5A:
a) SP : I6 Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete to IS: 456-197s.
b) SP : 22 Handbook on Concrete Mixes.
c) SP : 24 Explanatory Handbook on Indian Standard Code for Plain and Reinforced
Concrete (IS : 4561978).
d) Handbook on Concrete Reinforcement Detailing (underpreparalionj.

VI-S
6 NATIONAL BUlLDlNC CODE OF INDIA
 SECTION 5A PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

SECTION 5A(a) GENERAL Split tensile strength of concrete

1. SCOPE Design strength
1.1 This section deals with the general struc- Characteristic strength of steel
tural use of plain and reinforced concrete. Effective moment of inertia
1.2 Design of special structures like rein- Moment of inertia of the gross section
forced concrete shell structures, folded plates, excl’uding reinforcement
liquid retaining structures, composite Moment of inertia of cracked section
constniction structures. precast concrete Stiffness of member
structures shall be done in accordance with
good practice [VI-5(l)]*. Constant or coefficient or factor
Development length
2. TERMINOLOGY Live load or imposed load
2.2 For the purpose ofthis section, the defini-. Length of a column or beam bctwecn
tions given m accepled standards [VI-S(Z)] a d e q u a t e lqteral r e s t r a i n t s o r the
shall generally apply. unsupported length of a column
3. SYMBOLS Effective span of beam or slab or
3.1 For the purpose of this section, the effective length of column
following letter symbols shall have the Effective length about X-X axis
meaning indicated against each; where other Effective length about .I’-.I’ axis
symbols are used, they are explained at the
appropriate place: Clear span, face fo face of supports
I. for shorter of-the two spans at right
A Area angles
b Breadth of beam, or short,er dimension Length of shorter side of slab
of a rectangular column Length of ionger side of slab
b er Effective width of slab Distance between points of zero
br Effective width of flange moments .in a beam
b, Breadth of web or rib Span in the direction in which
D Overall depth. of beam or slab or moments are determined. centre to
diameter of column; di.mension of a centre of supports
rectangular column in the direction Span transverse to II. centre to centre
under consideration ot supports
Dl Thickness of flange 1~ for the shorter of the continuous
DL Dead load spans
Bending moment
d Effective depth of beam or slab
Modular ratio
6 Depth of compressidn reinforcement
from the highly compressed face Number of samples
E, Modulus of elasticity of concrete Axial load on a compression member
EL Earthquake load z;Fo$ated maximum bearing pressure
ES Modulus of elasticity of steel
Radius
Eccentricity
Spacing of stirrups or standard
;I Characteristic cbmpressive strength of deviation
concrete Torsional moment
Modulus of rupture of concrc:c Shear force
( f l e x u r a l tencllc Strength)
Total load
3 a this Se&on where reference ir made to ‘good Wind load
pmctice’ or ‘accepted ~tanflud~’ in relsuon to Distributed load per urlit area
material rpccifiitioa, de&n, tcrtini or construction
pmcedurw. the rpproprirtc document listed at the Distributed dead load per unit area
end of thii Scaion mmy be uud u a guide to the
iaterpmtion of tbi term. Distributed imposed load per unit area

?ART n 8Rucw8AL DlDlGN-UCTlON 4 CGN~ VW 7

 Depth 01 neutral axls
Modulus of section
Lever arm
Angle or ratio
Partial safety factor for load
Partial safety factor for material
Percentage reduction in moment
Creep strain of concrete
Permissible btress in concrete in
bendlng compresslon
Permissible stress in concrete in direct
compression
Permissible stress in metal in direct
compression
Permissible stress in steel in com-
presston
Pcrmisslble stress in steel in tension
Permissible tensile stress in shear
reinforccmcnt
Design bond stress
Shear stress in concrete
MaxImum shear stress in concrete
with shear reinforcement
Nnmlnal \hrar \trec\
IJiamcter of hilr
sFC7 ION 5th) MATL:KIAI.S, WOKK-
MANSHIP, INSPTCTIOS GtiDTESTlNG
4. MATERIALS
4.1 GP)IYTU/ - All materials used in the
constructton of concrete works shall conform
lo Part V Building materials.
4.1.1 CFM~NT 1 he cement used shall be
any of thr lollowing conforming to accepted
standards [VI-5(3)] with the prior approval of
the engineer-in-charge:
a) Ordinary or low heat Portland cement,
b) Kapid hardening Portland cement.
c) Portland slag cement,
d) Portland porrolana cement,
e) High strength ordinary Portland
cement.
0 Hydrophobic cement.
NOI~ -I w hcJt Purli~nd cemtnl sh,ill h e ubed ulth
adrquatc prclautlunh UII~ regard IO rcm~$nl 01
lurmu,rrh. et<
4.1.2 High alumina cement conforming to
accepted standards [ V l-5(3)] may be used only
under special circumstances with the prior
approval of the cngmeer-in-charge.
\1 T 8
S u p e r s u l p h a t e d cement contormlng to
accepted standardsjvl-S(3)] may be used onI1
under special circumstances’ -~lth prior
approval of the engineer-in-charge.
Specialist literarurc may be consulted for
guidance regarding the use of these types 01
cements.
4.2 Ag~regore.r ~-Aggregates shall conform
to accepted standards [VI-5(4)].
42.1 <)thcr tvpes of aggregates, such as slag
and owhrcl -o\erburnt brick o’r tile, which
may bc found suitable,wilh regard tostrength,
durablht) of concrete and freedom from
harmful effect! may be used for secondary
members, but such aggregates should not
contain more than one percent of sulphates
and should not absorb more than IO percent
of their own mass of water.
4.2.2 Heavy weight aggregates or light weight
aggregates: such as bloated clay aggregates
and sintered fly ash aggregates. may also be
used provided the engineer-in-charge is
satisfied with the data on the properties of
concrete made with them.
NOlE -Some of the provIsions of the \cctmn would
rcqulrc modlftcarlon when these aggregate% arc used.
specialist literature ma) be consulted for guldancc
4.2.3 Fly ash conforming to accepted
standards [VI-5(5)] may be used as part
replacement of fine aggregate.
4.2.4 SIZF OF A GGREGATE --The nominal
maximum she of coarse aggregate should be
as large as possible within the limits specified
but in no case greater than one-fourth of the
minimum thickness of the member, provided
that the concrete can be placed without
difficulty so as to surround all reinforcement
thoroughly and fill the corners of the form.
For reinforced concrete work, aggregates
having a nominal size of 20 mm are generally
considered satisfactory.
Plums above 160 mm and up to any
reasonable size may be used in plain concrete
work up to a maximum limit of 20 percent by
volume of concrete when specifically
permitted by the engineer-in-charge. The
plums shall be distributed evenly and shall be
not closer than I50 mm from the surface.
4.2.4. I For heavily reinforced concrete
members as in the case of ribs of maln beams,
the nominal maximbm size of the aggregate
should usually be restricted to 5 mm less than
the minimum clear distance between the main
bars or 5 mm less than the minimum cover to
the reinl’orccment whichever is smaller.
Where the reinforcement is widely spaced as
In solid blabs. hmitations of the size of the
aggregate may not be so important and the

nominal maximum size may sometimes be as
great as or greater than the minimum cover.
4.2.5 Coarse and fine aggregate shall
preferably be batched separately. All-in-
aggregate may be used only where specifically
permitted by the engineer-in-charge.
4.3 Water - Water used for mixing and
curing shall be clean and free from injurious
amounts of oils. acids. alkalis, salts, sugar,
organic materials or other substances that
may be deleterious to concrete or steel.
Potable water is generally considered
satisfactory for mixing concrete. As a guide,
the following ooncentratlom represent the
maximum permissible values:
a) To neutralize 200 ml sample of water.
using phenolphthalein as an indicator. it
should not require more than 2 ml of 0. I
normal NaOH. The details of test shall be
in accordance w i t h g o o d p r a c t i c e
[VI-5(6)1,
‘3 To neutralize 200 ml sample of water,
using methyl orange as an indicator, it
should not require more than 10 ml of 0. I
normal HCI. The details of tests shall be
in accordance with good practice
[VI- S(6)].
cl Permissible limiis for solids shall be as
given in Table I.
TABLE I PERMISSIBLE L.IMITS FOR SOLIDS
(C/we 4.3)
bLlD f’tRMlbblBLE LlMll
Mar
Organic 200 mgl I
Inorganic 3 000 mg/l
Sulphatcs (as SO,) 500 mgi I
Chlorides (as Cl) 2 000 mg! 1for pliin concrele
work and 1 000 mgil lor
reinforced conrrr~r work
Suspended matter 2 000 mg, I charge.
43.1 In case,of doubt regarding development
of strength, the suitability of water for making
concrete shall be ascertained by the
compressive strength and initial setting time
tests specified in 4.3.1.2 and 4.3.1.3.
4.3.1.1 The sample of water taken for testing
shall represent the water proposed to be used
for concreting, due account being paid to
seasonal vanation. The sample shall not
receive any treatment before testing other
PART VI STIWCTUIIAL D E S I G N - SPCTION 5 CWWYtlt
.
than that envisaged in the regular supply of
water proposed for use in concrete, The
sample shall be stoied in a clean container
previously rinsed out with similar water.
4.3.1.2 Average. 28 days compressive strength
of at least three l5-cm c o n c r e t e c u b e s
prepared with water proposed to bc used shall
not be less than 90 percent of the average of
strength of three similar concrete cubes
prepared with distilled water. The cubes shall
be prepared, cured and tested in accordance
with good practice [VI-5(7)].
4.3.1.3 The initial setting time of test block
made with the appropriate cement and the
water proposed to be used shall not be less
than 30 minutes and shall not differ by + 30
minutes from the initial setting time ofcontrol
test block prepared with the same cement and
distilled water. The test blocks shall be
prepared and tested in accordance with good
practice [VI-S(8)].
4.32 ThepH value of water shall generally be
not less than 6.
4.3.3 S E A w~~~~-.-Mixing or curing of
concrete with sea water is not recommended
because of presence of liarmful salts in sea
water. Under unavoidable circumstances, sea
water may be used for mixing or curing in
plain concrete or such reinforced concretr
constructions which are permanently under
sea water.
4.3.4 Water found satisfactory for mixing is
also suitable for curing concrete. However.
water used for curing should not produce any
objectionable stain or unsightly deposit on the
concrete surface. The presence of tannic acid
or iron compounds is objectionable.
4.4 Admixrures ~~ Admixtures may be used
with the approval of the engineer-in-charge.
The admixtures shall conform to accepted
standard [VI-X9)].
4.5 Pozzolanas - 1’07zolanic materials may
be used with the permission oi theengineer-in-
4.5.1 F l y a s h conlormrng t o acceptcvd
standards [VI-S(5)] or burnt clay poztol;dna
conforming to accepted standards [VI-5( IO)]
may be used as part replacement of unblended
cements provided uniform blending with the
cement is ensured.
4.5.2 Fly ash conforming to accepted
standards [VI-5(5)]and burnt clay por7olana
conforming to accepted standards [VI-5( IO)]
may be used as a’n admixture for concrete.
4.6 Reinforcemenr - The reinforcement
vi ‘v 9
shail be any of the following conforming to lower columns in multistorey buildings) the
accepted standards [VI-5( I I)]: characteristic compressive strength given in
a) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars, Table 2 may be increased by multiplying by
the factors given below:
b) Hot-rolled deformed bars,
c) Cold-twisted bars, Minimum Age 01 Member Age Factor
d) Hard-drawn steel wire fabric, and When Full Design
Load/ Swess is Expecred
e) Rolled steel made from structural steel. (Months)
4.6.1 All reinforcement shall .be free from 1 I .o
loose mill scales, loose rust and coats of 1.10
paints, oil, mud or other coatings which may ; I.15
destroy or reduce bond. I?, 1.20
NOTE I- No increase in respect of agcat loading should
4.6.2 The modulus of elasticity of steel shall be allowed where high alumina cement concrete is used
be taken as 200 kNjmm’.
N OTE 2 --Where members are sub.iec:ed IO lower direct
load during construction, they should be checked for
4.7 Storuge of Materials -~ Storage of stresses resulting from combination of direct load and
materials shall be done in accordance with bending during constructIon.
good practice [VI-5( 1211.
Nok 3 -The permissible stresses or dcalgn strengths
shall be based_ on the increased value of compressive
strength.
3. CONCRETV
5.2.2 TENSILE ST R E N G T H O F CONCRE-IE
5.1 Grades - The concrete shall be in grades -The flexural and split tensile strengths
designed as per Table 2. shall be obtained in accordance with. good
practice [VI-S(7)]. When the designer wishes
TABLE 2 GRAnES OF COKCKEl U to use an estimate of the tensile strength from
( C l a u s e s 5 . 1 . 5.2.1. X.2.1, 14 I I a n d 3 5 . 1 ) the compressive strength, the following
formula may be used:
G RADE D ESIGNATION !+SIFIEI> CHAHAClENlSTlC
COMPRESSIVF STRENCrH Flexural strength A, = 0.7 & N/ mm2
AT 28 DAYS where fck is the characteristic compressive
strength of concrete.
(1) (2)
N, mm’ 5.2.3 E LASTIC D EFORMATION - T h e
M IO 10 modulus of elasticity is primarily influenced
M I5 15 by the elastic properties of the aggregate and
M 20
M 25 g to a lesser extent by the conditions of curing
M 30 and age of the concrete, the mix proportions
‘M 3 5 35 and the type of cement. The modulus of
M4d-J 40 elasticity is normally related to the
N OTE I - In the designation of a co~!crcte mix, letter M compressive strength of concrete.
refers IO the mix and the number IO t h e s p e c i f i e d
characteristic compressive, strength of I5-cm cube ar 28
days, expressed m N/mm-.
5.2.3.1 In the absence of test data, the
modulus of elasticity for structural concrete
N~rt 2 - M 5 and M 7.5 grades of concrete may be used
for lean concrete bases and simple foundations for
may be assumed as follows:
masonry walls. These mixes need not 6e designed. E=5700&
NOTE 3 - Grades of concrete lower than M I5 shall not be where
used in rtmforccd concrete.
E is the short term static modulus of
elasticity in N i mm’, and
5.1.1 The characteristic strength is defined as &k is the characteristic cube strength of
the strength of material below which not more concrete in N mm’.
than 5 percent of the test results are expected
to fall. 5.2.4 SHRISKAGE -;The total shrinkage of
concrete depends upon the constituents of
S.2 Properties of Concrete concrete, size of the member and
environmental conditions. For a given
5.2.1 INCREASE IN STRENGTH WITH environment, the total shrinkage of concrete
&E-Where it can be shown that a member is most influenced by the total amount of
will not receive its full design load/stress water present in the concrete at the time of
within a period of 28 days after the casting of mixing and, to a lesser extent, by the cement
the member (for example, in foundations and content.

VI-s. 10 NATIONAl. BUILDING C O D E OF INDIA

5.2.4.1 In the absence of test data, the Placing D;w;; of Values uf
approximate value of the total shrinkage Condif ions Workobilir s
pbilily
straiu for design may be taken as 0.000 3 (see
(1) (2) (3)
Section 5B).
Concreting of lightly Low IO-S seconds.
5.2.5 C R E E P OF CO N C R E T E -Creep o f reinforced sections Vcc-Bee time
concrete depends, in addition to the factors with vibration
~W.gS. compact-
listed in 5.2.4, on the stress in the concrete, age ing factor
at loading and the duration of loading. As
long as the stress in concrete does not exceed Concreting of Iikhtly Medium S- seconds.
one-third of its characteristic compressive reinforced se&Ions 3 cc-&e time
strength, creep may be assumed to be without vibmtion or
hBWily roidOlU!d t$4J.92. compc1-
proportional to the stress. aion with vibration mg factor

5.2.5.1 In the absence of experimental data g;7S mm, slump for

20 mm* aggfemle
and detailed information on the effect of the
variables, the ultimate creep strain may be Comere of heavily Hlsh AboK 0.92, corn
estimated from the following values of creep rcinfonxd sections paning factor
coefficient (that is. ultimate c r e e p without vibration or
strain,‘elastic strain at the age of loading): 7% I25 mm, slump
for 20 mm* apgadrc
Age at Loading Creep Coefficienr
*For smalkr aggrcgatc the r~lucs wiil lx lower.
7 days 2.2
28 days I.6
I year I.1 7. DURABILITY
(For more information, see Section 5B) 7.1 The durability of concrete depends on its
NOTE - The ultlmalc creep strain. estimated as resistance to deterioration and the
dcscribcd above does not include the elastic strain. environment in which it is placed. The
resistance of concrete to weatherrng. chemical
5 . 2 . 6 T H E RM AL E X P A N S I O N -7he attack, abrasion, frost and fire depends
coefficient of thermal expansion depends on largely upon its quality and constrtuent
n”‘ure of cement, the aggregate, the cement, materials. Susceptibility to corrosion of the
the relative humidity and the size of sections. steel is governed by the cover provided and the
The value of coefficient of tlicrmal expansion permeability of ‘concrete. The cube-crushing
for concrete with different aggregates may be strength alone is not a reliable guide to the
taken as below: quality and durability ofconcrete; it must also
have an adequate cement content and a low
7jpe of Coefficient i$ Thermal water-cement ratio.
Aggregate Expansion for Concrerel’C
Quartzite I.2 10 1.3x lo-? 7.1.1 One of the main characteristics
influencing the durability of any concrete is its
Sandstone 0.9 to I .2 x IO -’ permeability. With strong, dense aggregates, a
Granite 0.7 to 0.95 x Jo- suitably low permeability is achieved by
Basalt 0.8 to 0.95 X IO-5 having a sufficiently low WaterCement ratio,
Limestone 0.6 to 0.9 X IO -’ by ensuring as thorough compaction of the
concrete as possible and by ensuring sufficient
hydration of cement through proper curing
6. WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE methods. Therefore. for given aggregates, the
6.1 The concrete mix proportions chosen cement content should be sufficient to provide
should be such that the concrete isof adequate adequate workability with a low water-
workability for the placing conditions of the cement ratio so that concrete can be
concrete and can propurly be compacted with completely compacted with the means
the means available. available.
IUOTE - Suggesrcd ranges of values of workability of
7.2 Appendix A provides guidance regarding
concrete for some placing condlGons. measured in
accordance with good prsc~e[VI-5( I3)]are glvcn below. minimum cement content and permissible
Plarmng “kc;; 4 Valt4es 01 limits of chloride and sulphate in concrete.
Condirions Workabihry
obrlit ,
(1) (2) (3) 8. CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING
C o n c r e t i n g of Very low 20-10 seconds.
rhalluw seaions Vce-Bee ume
with vibrirlion
8. I Mix Proporrion - The mix proportions
~~7S-O.gO, compact- shall be selected to ensure that the workability
mg factor of the fresh concrete is suitable for the
cond~~~on~ 01 handling and placlng, so t h a t 8.3 Nominal Mix Concrele -- Nominal mix
dfter L’ompacrlon it surrounds all concrete may be used for concrete of grades
rt’lnlorccmcnls and c o m p l e t e l y f i l l s t h e M 5, M 7.5, M IO. M 15, and M 20. The pro-
lormwork. When concrete IS hardened, it shall portions of materials for nominal mix concrete
have the rcqulrcd strength, durability and shall be in accordance with Table 3.
surtace tlnihh.
8. I I The determination of the proportions of TABLE 3 PR~CW’ORlC$SF’&R NOMINAI.
cement, aggregates and water to attain the
required strengths shall be made as follows: (chure RJ. 83.1 and 83-T)
GRADE T O T A L QUANTII-V PROPORIION QUAhTlTY
a) Bydesigning the concrete mix; such OF OF DR Y AGGRE- OF F I N E 0~ WA T E R
concrete shall be called ‘Design mix CONCRETE G A T E S B Y MASS A G GR E G A T E PER 54 KG
concrete’; or PER 50tXjOi T0 COARSE
CEMFNT. ~0 m AGGREGATF CEZNT.
b) By adopting nominal concrete mix; such T A K E N A S rHt (BY MASS) M a r
concreteshall be called ‘Nominal mix S U M O F THt
concrete’. IN~IvIO~JAI
M A S S E S O F FINE
AND COARSE
Design mix concrete IS preferred to nominal A G G R E G A T E S.
mix. If design mix concrete cannot be used for Max
any reason on the work for grades of M 20 or (3)
(1) (4)
lower, nominal mixes may be used with the ‘k; llrres
permission of engineer-in-charge, which, MS 800 Generally 60
however, is likely to involve a higher cement M 7 5 625 I.2 but rubjcct 45
content. M 10 4RO to an upper hmrt 34
hi I5 350 ofI,lf dnda Q
8. I .2 INFOHMA I I O N RFQUIF~ED -- I n
specifying a particular grade of concrete, the M 20 250 lower limit of 30
following information shall be included:
4 Type of mix, that is, design mix concrete NOTE -The proportions of the fine to coarse aggregates
or nominal mix concrete; should be adjusted from u per hmit to lower limit prog-
ressively as the grading o P the fme aggregates becomes
b) Grade designation, finer and the maximum sire of coarse aggregate becomes
larger. Graded coarse aggregate shall bc used.
c) Type of cement;
an average grading of fme puregate (see
E XAMPLE -For
d) Maximum nomlnal size of aggregate; VI-S(4)]. the proportions shall be I.1 I, I.2 and I .2 i
Minimum cement content (for design mix \ or maximum size of aggregates 10 mm, 20 mm and
e) 40 mm. respcctivcly.
concrete);
0 Maximum water-cement ratio; 8.3.1 The cement content of the mix specified
Workability; and in Table 3 for any nominal mix shall be pro-
g) portionately increased if the quantity of water
h) Mix proportion (for nominal mix in a mix has to be increased to overcome the
concrete). difficulties of placement and compactton. so
that the water-cement ratio as specified is not
8.1.2.1 In appropriate circumstances, the exceeded.
followlng additional information may be
N OTE 1 -In the case of vibrated concrete. the llmlt spcci-
specified, tied may be suitably reduced to avoid wgregatlon.
a) Type of aggregate, NOTE 2 -The quantity of water used in the concrete mix
for remforced concrete work should be suffioent, but nol
b) Maximum cement content, and more than sufficient to pruducc a dense concrete of
Cl Whether an admlxture shall or shall not adequate workability for its purpose. which WIII surround
be used and the type of admixture and the and properly gnp all the reinforcement. Workablhty of
the concrete should be controlled by maintaining a water
conditrons of use. content that is found to give a concrete which is lust
sufficiently wet to bc placed and compacted without
8.2 Design Mix Concrete difficulty with the means avadable.

8.2.1 The mix shall be designed to produce
the grade of concrete having the required
workablllty and a characteristic strength not
less than the appropriate values given in Table
2. I‘he procedure given in accepted standards
[VI-5(14)] may be followed.
8.2.2 As long as the quality of the materials
does’not change, a mix design done earlier
may be considered adequate for later work.
8.3.2 If nominal mix concrete made in
accordance with the proportions given for a
particular grade does not yield the specified
strength, such concrete shall be classified as
belonging to the appropriate lower grade.
Nominal mix concrete proportioned for a
given grade in accordance with Table 3 shall
not, however, be placed in higher grade on the
ground that the test strengths arc higher than
the minimum specified.

,J2 NAllONAL B U I L D I N G CODE O F I N D I A

9. PRODUCTlON A N D C O N T R O L O F
CONCRETE
9. I GrInera --- To avoid confusion and error
in batching, consideration should be given to
using the smallest practical number of
different concrete mixes on any site or in any
one plant.
9.1.1 A competent person shall supervise all
stages of production of concrete. Preparation
of test specimens and site test shall be properly
supervised.
9.1.2 The engineer-in-charge shall be
afforded all reasonable opportunity and
facility to inspect the materials and the
manufacture of concrete and to take any
samples or to make any tests. All such
inspection, sampling and testing shall be
carried out with the minimum of interference
with the process of manufacture and delivery.
9.2 Burching -- In proportioning concrete.
the quantity of both cement and aggregate
should be determined by mass. Where the
mass of cement is determined on the basis of
mass of cement per bag, a reasonable number
of bags should be weighed periodically to
check the net mass. Where the cement is
weighed on the site and not in bags it should
be weighed separately from the aggregates.
Water should be either measured by volume in
calibrated tanks or weighed. Any solid
admixtures that may be added, may be
measured by mass: liquid and paste
admixtures by volume or mass. Batching
plant where used should conform to accepted
standards [VI-5( l5)]. A l l m e a s u r i n g
equipment should be maintained in a clean
serviceable condition and their accuracy
periodically checked.
9.2.1. Except where it can be shown to the
satisfaction of the engineer-in-charge that
sup ly of properly graded aggregate of
uni Porm quality can bc maintained over the
period of work. the grading of aggregate
should be controlled by obtaining the coarse
aggregate in different sires and blending them
in the right proportions when required. the
different sizes being stocked in separate stock
piles. The material shcq-lld be stock-piled for
several hours preferab& a day helore use. The
grading ofcoarseand I?neaggregateshould be
checked as frequently as possible. the
frequency for a gilzen ~c)b beingdetcrmlned b)
the e n g i n e e r - i n - c h a r g e IO cn’;urc t\xit the
specified grading 15 maintatwd.
9.2.2 In case unlformit! in the material\ uwd
for concrete making has bcenestahll~hcd ober
a period of trme. the proportIonIng may bc
done by volume batchrng, pro\lded periodic
checks are made 0 n mass Lolume
relationships of the matertats. Where weight-
batching is not practicable, the quantities of
fine and coarse aggrega te (not cement) may be
determined by volume. If fine aggregate is
moist and volume batching is adopted,
allowance shall be made for bulking in
accordance with good practice [V l-5( 16)].
9.23 It is important to maintarn the water-
cement ratio constant at its correct value. To
this end, determination of moisture contents
in both fine and coarse aggregates shall be
made as frequently as possible, the frequency
for a given job being determined by the
engineer-in-charge according to weather
conditions. l-he amount 01 the added water
shall be adjusted -to compensate for any
observed variations in the moisture contents.
For the deter-mination of moisture content in
the aggregates[seeVl-5( Ih)]. To allow for the
variation in mass ofaggregatedue to variation
in their morsture c o n t e n t , s u i t a b l e
adjustments in the masses of aggregates shall
also be made. In the absence of exact data,
only in the case of nominal mixes, theamount
of surface water may be estimated from the
values given in Table 4.
TABLE 4 SURFACE WATER CARRIED BY
AGGREGATE
AG G R E G A T E A P P R O X I M A T E QUANTITY OF
S URFACE W A T E R
- -
Percent by Mass l/m’
(1) (2) (9
very we1 sand 75 120
Moderately wee 50 HO
sand
2.5 ‘ill
I 75-2.5 10440
9.2.4 No substitutions in materials used on
the work or alterations in the established
proportions, except as permitted in 9.2.2 and
9.2.3, shall be made without additional tests to
show that the quality and strength of concrete
are satisfactory.
9.3 Mlxrng -Concrete shall be mixed in a
mechanical mixer. The mixer should comply
with accepted standards [VI-SC 17)J. The
mixing shall be continued until there IS a
uniform distribution of the materials and the
mass is uniform in colour and consistency. If
there is segregation after unloading from the
mixer, the concrete should be remixed.
?IOIF I --For gutdance. the mlxlng time may he Ii IO 7
rmnutcs; for hydrophobic cement tt ma) he take!! JI 2; IO
3 minutes.
NOYE 2 - - I n e x c e p t i o n a l clrcumstanccs. \uch a\
mechanical breakdown of mixer, work III remote arra\ or
when the quantity of concrete work 1s very small. hand
mixing may bc permitted sublea to adding IO pcrccnl
extra cement. When hand mixing IS pcrmtttcd, it shall bc
curried out on a water-tight platform and care rh‘tll be
taken tocnsure that mtxing 1s continued until the concrete‘
is uniform in colour and constslency.
9.3.1 Workability of the concrete should be
controlled by direct measurement of water
content. Workability should be checked at
frequent intervals [see VI-5( 13)].
10. F O R M WOKK
IO. 1 General T h e formwork shall be
designed and constructed to the shapes, lines
and dlmcnsions shown on thedrawings within
the tolerances given below [XCF also Indian
Standard Code of practice lor falsework for
concrctr structtltes (trr&r prepur0ritrn)).
Dcvtatlon f r o m t h e - bmm
specified dimensions of tt2 mm
cross section of columns
and beams
Deviation from dimen-
sions of footings (see
Note):
I) Dimensions in plan -12 mm
150 mm
2) Eccentricity 0.02 times the
width of the
footing in the
direction o f
deviation but
not more than
SO mm
3) I hickness 20.05 t i m e s
the specified
thickness
N O T E Tolcranccs apply to concrrlc dlmrnsions o n l y .
not to positioning trf vertical relnlorcq steel nrdowels.
IO.2 C/caning and Trearmenr q/Forms --~ All
rubbish, particularly chippings, shavings and
sawdust, shall be removed from the Interior of
the forms before the concrete is placed and the
formwork in contact with the concrete shall be
cleaned and thoroughly wetted ortreated with
an approved compositlon. Care shall be taken
that such approved composition IS kept out of
contact with the reinforcement.
JO.3 Stripping Time Forms shall not be
struck until the concrete has reached a
strength at least twice the stress to which the
concrete may be subjected at the tirne of
removal of formwork. The strength referred
“1.~14
to shall be ttlat of concrete using the ame
c e m e n t a n d aggregates. urth t h e ~ilmc
proportions and cured under conditions ol
temperature and moisture slmllar to those
existing on the work. Where possrble, the
formwork shall he left longer 35 II would ;IS.‘I\I
the curing.
Noit I In normal clrrumalancc, and where ordinary
Portland Lament i\ ukcd. lorrns may Kenerally he rem<>\ed
after
a)
b) Slabs (prop5 left under) 3 day\
C) &am soIlits (props lelt under) 7 days
d) Removal 01 props undrr +lah\
I) Spannlng up to 4 5 m 7 day\
2) Spannmg over 4 5 m I4 J‘tys
cl Removal of props under
beams and arches:
I) Spanning up 10 0 m I4 day5
2) Spannq over 6 m 21 da\>
For other cements, the \trlppmg tome recommended for
ordinary Portland cement may he suirahly modified.
N OTE 2 The number of props left under, their sires and
dlsposnion shall be such as to be able to safely carry the
full dead load of the slab. beam or arch as the case may he
together with any live load likely to occurdurmpcuring or
further construction.
10.3.1 Where the shape of the element is such
that the formwork has re-entrant angles, the
formwork shall be removed as soon as
possible after the concrete has set, to avoid
shrinkage cracking occurring due to the
restraint imposed.
II. ASSEMBLY OF REINFORCEMENT
I I. I Straightening. Cutting and Bending .-
Reinforcement shall be bent and
fixed in accordance with good practice
[VI-5( l8)J and shall not be. straightened in a
manner tha! will injure the material.
11.2 All reinforcement shall be placed and
maintained in the position shown in the
drawings.
11.2.1 Crossing bars should not be tack-
welded for assembly of reinforcement unless
permitted by engineer-in-charge.
Il.3 Tolerance on Placing of Reinforce-
menl ---Unless otherwise specified by the
NATIONAL WILDiNC CODE OF INDIA
engineer-in-charge, reinforcement shall be
placed within the rollowing tolerances:
a) For effective depth 200 mm +lOmm
or less
b) For effective depth m o r e +ISmm
than 200 mm
The cov& shall in no case be reduced by more
than one-third of specified cover or 5 mm
whichever is less.
Il.4 W e l d e d J o i n t s o r M e c h a n i c a l
Connections -Welded joints or mechanical
connections in reinforcement may be used but
in all cases of important connections, tests
shall h made to prove that the joints are of the
full strength of bars connected. Welding of re-
inforcements shall be done in accordance with
good practice [VI-5( 19)3.
11.5 Where reinforcement bars are bent aside
at construction joints and afterwards bent
back into their original positions, care should
be taken to ensure that at no time is the radius
of the bend less than 4 bar diameters for plain
mild steel or 6 bar diameters for deformed
bars. Care shall also be taken when bending
back bars, to ensure that the concrete around
the bar is not damaged.
12. TRANSPORTIBG, PLACING,
COMPACTING AND CURING
i2.1 T r a n s p o r t i n g - C o n c r e t e shall be
transported from the mixer to the formwork
as rapidly as possible by methods which will
prevent the segregation or loss of any of the
Ingredients and maintaining the required
workability.
12.1.1 During hot or cold weather, concrete
shall be transported in deep containers. Other
suitable methods to reduce the loss of water by
evaporation in hot weather and heat loss in
cold weather may also be adopted.
1 2 . 2 P l a c i n g -The concrete shall be
deposited as nearly as practicable in its final
position to avoid rehandling. The concrete
shall be placed and compacted before setting
commences and should not be subsequently
disturbed. Methods of placing should be such
as to preclude segregation. Care should be
taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement
or movement of formwork.
12.3 Compactinn --Concrete should be
thoroughly compacted and fully worked
around the reinforcement, arouild embedded
fixtures and into corners of the formwork
12.3.1 The use of mechanical v i b r a t o r s
complying with accepted standards [VI-5( I?)]
for compacting concrete is recommended
PART VI STRUCTURAL DEWiN ~~ S E C T I O N 3 CONCBETF.
Overvibration or vibration of very wet mixes
is harmful and should be avoided; under-
vibration is also harmful.
Whenever vibration has IO be applied
externallv, the design of formwork and the
disposition of vibrators should receive special
consideration to ensure efficient compaction
and to avoid surface blemishes.
12.4 Construction Joints -Concreting shdll
b e c a r r i e d o u t c o n t i n u o u s l y u p to
construction joints, the position and
arrangement .of which shall be indicated by
the designer.
12.4.1 When the work has to be resumed on a
surface which has hardened, such surface
shall be roughened. It shall then be swept
clean and thoroughly wetted. For vertical
joints neat cement slurry shall be applied on
the surface before it is dry. For horizontal
joints the surface shall be covered with a layer
of mortar about IO to I5 mm thick composed
of cement and sand in the same ratio as the
cement and sand in concrete mix. This layer
of cement slurry or mortar shall be freshly
mixed and applied immediately before
placing of the concrete.
12.4.2 Where the concrete has not fully
hardened, all laitance shall be removed by
scrubbing the wet surface with wire or bristle
brushes, c a r e b e i n g t a k e n t o a v o i d
dislodgement of particles of aggregate. The
surface shall be thoroughly wetted and all free
water removed. The surface shall then be
coated .with neat cement slurry. On this
surface, layer of concrete not exceeding
I50 mm in thickness shall first be placed and
shall be well rammed against old work,
particular attention being paid to corners and
close spots: work thereafter shall proceed in
the normal way.
12.5 Curing
12.5.1 MUIST CU R I N G --Exposed surfaces
of concrete shall be kept continuously in a
damp or wet condition by ponding or b!
covering with a layer of sacking, cama\.
hessian o r s i m i l a r m a t e r i a l s a n d kept
constantly wet for at least seven days from the
date of- placing of concrete.
12.5.2 M E M B R A N E C U R I N G - A p p r o v e d
curing compounds may be used in lieu of
moist curing with the permission of the
engineer-in-charge. Such compounds shall be
applied to all exposed surfaces of the concrete
as soon as possible after the concrete has set.
12.6 Supervision --. It is exceedingly difficult
and costly to alter concrete once placed.
Hence, constant and strict supervision of all
the items of the construction is necessary
W-P
during the progress of the work, including the
proportioning a’nd mixing of the concrete.
Supervision is also of extreme importance lo
check the reinforcement and its pl;lcing before
being covered.
12.6.1 Before any important operation. such
as.concreting or stripping of the formwork IS
started, adequate notice shall be given IO the
construction supervisor.
J3. CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL.
CONDITIONS
13. J Work m Exrreme Weather C’ondirwns -
During hot or cold weather, the concreting
should be done in accordance with good
practice rwsc20)j.
J3.2 Under- Wnltv C‘onrrering
13.2.1 W h e n I( IS n e c e s s a r y t o deposit
concrete under water. the methods,
equipment, materials and proportlons ol the
mix to be used shall be submltted to and
approved by the engineerAin-charge before the
work is started. In no case shall such concrete
be considered as ‘Design mix concrete
13.2.2 The concrete shall contain at least IU
percent more cement than that required for
the same mix placed In thedry. thequantIty of
extra cement varying wllh conditions 01
placing. The volume or mass cif the coarse
aggregate shall be not less than one and a hall
times, nor more than twice that 01 the line
a g g r e g a t e . ‘The tnaterlal:, hhall he UI
proportmned as to produce a concrete having
a <lump of not less thiln IOU mm. and IW more
than I80 mm.
13.2.3 Coffer-dams or forms shall be
sufficiently tight to ensure still water if
practicable, and in any case to reduce the flow
of water to less than 3 m per minute through
the space into which concrete is to be
deposlted. Coffer-dams or forms in still water
shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of
mortar through the walls. Dewatering by
umping shall not be done while concrete is
& ing placed or until 24 hours thereaftw.
13.2.4 C o n c r e t e s h a l l b e d e p o s i t e d
continuously until it is brought to the required
height. While depositing, the top surface shall
be kept as nearly level as possible and the
formation of scams avoided. The methods to
be used for depositing concrete under water
shall be one of the following:
a) TREMIE- When concrete is to be
deposited under water by means of a
trcmie, the top section of the tremic shall
be a hopper large enough to hold one
entire batch of the mix or the entire
contents of the transporting bucket If any.
The tremie pipe shall be noI%% than 200
mm in diameter and shall be large enough
to allow a free flow of concrete and strong
enough to withstand the external pressure
of the water in which It IS suspended, even
if a partial vacuum develops inside the
pipe. Preferably, flanged steel pipe of
adequate strength for the job should be
used. A separate lifting device shall be
provided for each tremle pipe with its
hopper at the upper end. Unless the lower
end of the pipe is equlppcd w i t h a n
approved automatic check valve, the
upper end of the pipe shall be plugged
with a wadding of the gunny sacking or
other approved material before delivering
the concrete to the tremie pipe through
the hopper. zo that when the concrete is
forced down from the hopper to the pipe,
it will force the plug(and along with it any
water In the pip(:) down the pipe and out
of the bottom end, thus establishing a
continuous stream of concrete. It will be
necessary to raise slowly the tremie in
order to cause a uniform flow of the
concrete. but the tremie shalt not be
emptied so that water enters the pipe. At
all times after the placing of concrete is
started and until all the concrete is placed,
the lower end o: the tremie pipe shall be
below the top surface of the plastic
concrete. Thts will cause the concrete to
butld up from below Instead of flowing
out over the surface, and thus avold
formation 01 laltance layers. If the charge
in the tremie IS lost while deposlttng, the
tremie shall be ratsed above the concrete
surface. and unless scaled by a check
valve. tt shall be replugged at the top end.
as at the begInnIng. brlnre refilling for
deposltlng concrete.
b) DROP RCXTOM BUCKET The top of the
bucket shall be covered with a canvas
flap. The bottom doors shall open freely
downward and outward when tripped.
The bucket shall be filled completely and
lowered slowly to avoid backwash. The
bottom doors shalt not be opened until
the bucket rests on the surface upon
which the concrete is to @z deposited and
when discharged, shall be withdrawn
slowly until well above the concrete.
c) B AGS~- Bags oi at least 0.028 m’capacity
ofjute or other hoarse cloth shall be filled
about two thirds full of concrete. the
spare end turned under so that bag is
square ended and sccurcly tied. They shall
be placed carefully in header and
stretcher courses so that the whole mass is
interlocked. Bags used for this purpose
shall be free from deleterious materials.
 d) GROUTING -A series of round cages
made from 50 mm mesh of 6 mm steel and
extending over the full height to be
concreted shall be prepared and laid
vertically over the area to be concreted so
that the distance between centres of the
cages and also to the faces of the concrete
shall not exceed one rnetre. Stone
aggregate of not less than 50 mm nor
more than 200 mm size shall be deposited
outside the steel cages over the full area
and height to be concreted with due care
to prevent displacement of the cages.
A stable I:2 cement-sand grout urth a
water-cement ratio of not less than 0.6
and not more than 0.8 shall be prepared in
a mechanical mixer and sent down under
pressure (about 0.2 N/mm’) through 38
to 50 mm diameter pipes termmatinginto
steel cages, about 50 mm above
the bottom of the concrete. As the
grouting proceeds. the pope shall be raised
gradually up to a height of not more than
600 mm above its starting level after
which it may be withdrawn and placed
into the next cage for further grouting by
the same procedure.
After grouting the whole area for a height
of about 600 mm. the same operation
shall be repeated, if necessary, for the
next layer of 600 mm and so on.
The amount 01 grout to be sent down
shall be sufficient to fill all the vords
which may be erther ascertained or
assumed as 55 percent ofthe volume to be
concreted.
13.2.5 To minimize the formatton of laitance,
great care shall be exercised not to disturb the
concrete as far as possible while it is being
deposited.
13.3 Concrete in Sea- Water -- Concrete in
sea-water or exposed directly along the sea-
coast shall be at least M I5 Grade in the case ol
plain concrete and M 20 in case of reinforced
concrete. The use of slag or pozzolana cement
is advantageous under such conditions.
13.3.1 Special attention shall be given to the
design of the mix to obtain the densest
possible concrete; slag, broken brick, soft
limestone, soft sandstone. or other porous or
weak aggregates shall not be used
13.3.2 AS far as possible, preference shall be
given to precast members unreinforced, well-
cured and hardened. without sharp corners,
I’ART V I S T R U C T U R A L D E S I G N ~ SCmON 5 CONCRETE
a n d havmg trowel-srnootn linrshea surtaces
free from crazing, cracks or other defects;
plastering should be avoided.
13.3.3 No construction joints shall be allowed
within 600 mm below low water-level or
within 600 mm.of the upper and lower planes
of wave action. Where unusually severe
conditions or abrasion are anticipated, such
parts of the work shall be protected by
bituminous or silica-fluoride coatings or
stone facing bedded with bitumen.
13.3.4 In reinforced concrete structures, care
shall be taken to protect the reinforcement
from exposure to saline atmosphere during
storage and fabrication.
13.4 Concrete in Aggressive Soils and Water
I3.4.l GENERAL -The destructive action of
aggressive waters on concrete is progressive.
The rate ofdeterioration which varies with the
alkali-resisting property of the cement used,
decreases as the concrete is made stronger and
more impermeable, and increases as the salt
content of the water Increases.
Where structures are only partially immersed
or are in contact with aggressive soils or
waters on one side only, evaporation may
cause serrous concentrations of salts with
subsequent deterioration, even where the
original salt content of the soil or water is not
high.
NOTE ---Guidance rrgarding reqwremems for concrete
exposed IO srrlpharc attack is given in Appendix A.
13.4.2 DR A I N A G E -At s i t e s w h e r e a l k a l i
concentrations are or may become very high,
Portland cement concrete is not
recommended, and if used, the ground water
shall he lowered by drainage so that it will not
come into direct contact with the concrete.
Additional protection may be obtained by the
use of a chemically resistant stone facing or a
layer of plaster of Paris covered with suitable
fabric, such as jute, thoroughly impregnated
with bituminous material.
14. SAMPLING AND STRENGTH T E S T
OF CONCRETE
14:l General -Samples from fresh concrete
shall be taken as per good practice [VI-5( I3)]
and cubes shall be made, cured and tested at
28 days in accordance with good practice
[VI-5(7)].
 NOIE ?F/)r rclatwely small and unimportant buildIn? grade shall be In accordance with
‘and works in which quanllly ofconcretc is less than I5 m following:
the strength teals may be walvcd by ~hc cnglneer-m-
charge no tus discretion. @lorlIII_,v 0:. ~‘oll(.rt’~~’ Yu~?ltwr of
in the Work. NI’ k:~IpIes~
14.1.1 In order to get a relatively quick& Idea
of the quality of concrete, optional tests on l-5 I
beams for modulus of rupture at 72 & 2 hours h-15 !
or at 7 days or compressive strength tests at 7 16-30 3
days may be carried out in addition to 28 days
31-50 4
compressive strength tests. For this purpose,
51 and above 4 plus one addItIona .
the values given in Table 5 may be taken for
general guidance in the case of concrete made sample i’or each ad-
u ith ordinary Portland cement. In all cases, ditional 50 ml or
the 28 days compressive strength specified in part t hcreot
Table 2 shall alone be the criterion for NOIE’- At least one sample shall bc tdkcn lrom cvch
acceptance or rejection of the concrete. If, thtft.
however, from lests carried out in a particular
job over a reasonably long period, it has been 14.3 Test Specimen Three test specimens
established to the satisfaction of the engineer- shall be made from each sample lor testing at
in-charge that a suitable ratio between 28 days 28 days. Additional cubes may be required tor
compressive strength and the modulus of various purposes such as IO determine the
rupture at 72 I? 2 hours or 7 days, or strength of concrete at 7 davs or at the rime of
compressive strength at 7 days may bc st,riking tk formwork, or to determlnr the
accepted, the e,ngineer-in-charge may suitably duration of curing. or to check the testing
relax the frequency of 28 dayS compressive error. Additional cubes may also be rcquircd
strength specified in 14.1, provided the for testing cubes cured by accelerated
expected strength values ot the specified early methods in accordance with good practice
age arc consistently met. [VI-5(6)].

1 4 . 4 Tar S t r e n g t h UJ Sumplu .-- 1 hc test

strength of the sample shall be the average o!
ThHLt 5 OW IONAL ‘TES1.S REQ’ IREMENl’S OF the strength of three specimens. The
CONCKET E
Individl;al variation should not be more that)
f 15 percent of the average.

14.5 Stondora Lkk7tton

14.5.1 ST A N D A R D D EVIATION 5.6~~ o h
TEsr RESlll TS
a) NllMDER of TFSI RI301 1s - The total
n u m b e r o f lest results rcquircd lo
M IO 70 I2 I7 constitute ar! acceptable record for
calculation of standard deciatton shall
M I$ 100 I < 21 be not less than 30. Attempts should be
M 20 13.5 _ 1.7 2.4 made to obtain the 30 test results, as
early as possible, when a mtx is used for
M 25 17 0 IO 2.1
t:,e first tlrnc.
%I 30 20 0 21 JO
STANUARL) I)tk’lA I 10N 10 f3t
M 1s 23 5 23 32 BROllCHT I!P TO DAIS
I-he
M4U 27.0 2,s 3.4 calculation of the srandard deviatron
shall be brought up to date after cvcry
change of mix design and at least once a
month
14.2 Frequency. of kvnpling

14.2.! SAMPL~ING PRWHH.:RE --A r a n d o m

sampling procedure shal! be adopted to
ensure that each concrete batch shall have a
reasonable chance of being tested; that is, the
sampling should be sprc3d over the cnttre
period of concreting and cover ail mir.lng
units.
14.2.2 F RE Q U E N C Y ---The m i n i m u m
frequency of sampling of concrete of each
a ) C o n c r e t e of, rach g r a d ? shal! ha
analysed s e p a r a t e l y to detcrrninr bus
standard dev~atlon.
b) The stanaard deviation of concrete of a
iven grade shall be calculated ~ng the
!ollowing formula from the r,csults of
Individual tests of concrete oftbar grade
obtained as specified In Id 4,
Estimated standard deviation 2 ) 0.80 times t h e characteristic
strength;
and the average strength of all the samples is
s= 2 not less than the characteristic strength I%L,
J-
where
A = deviation of the individual test
strength from theaverage strength
r l-45
d~;~d~v~ ol’ sampIGs
1, t’mtS Ihe stanp

of n samples. and 15.2 The concrete shall be deemed not to

n = number of sample test results.
c) When significant changes are made in
the production of concrete batches (for
example changes in the materials used,
mix design, equipment or technical
control), the standard deviation value
shall be separately ca!culated for such
batches of concrete.
14.5.3 ASSUMED ST A N D A R D D E V I A T I O N ~~
Where sufficient test results for a particular
grade of concrete are not available, the value
of standard deviation given in Table 6 may be
assumed
comply with the strength requirements if:
a) the strcng?h of any sample is less than thr
greaier 01.
I) the characteristic strength minus I.35
times the sttindard deviation; and
2) 0.80 times the characteristic stength: or
h) the average strength of all the samples is
less than rhe characteristic strength plus
c 1.65 - r
3
\/ nunlhcr ol samples
dard deviation.
1 times the stan-

However, when adequate past records for a
similar grade exist and justify to the designer a
value of standard deviation different from
that shown in Table 6, it shall be permissible
to use that value.
IS._{ Concrete which does not meet the
strength requirements as specified in 15.1 but
has a strength greater than that required
by IS._’ may, at the discretion of the designer,
be accepted as being structurally adequate
without furtller iesting.

TABLE 6 ASSUMED STANDARD DEVIATION 1.4 If the concrete is deemed not to comply
persuant to I5.2, the structural adequacy of
(C/uusc 11.5.J) the parts affected shall be investigated (SCY 16)
GhwE 0F CONCRETE ,I\SSUMCU S;TANDARI) :111ci any consequential action as needed shall
DEVIATION be taken.
Pi/ mm’
15.5 Concrete of each grade shall be assessed
u IO 2.3
separately.
u I5 3,s
u 20 4.6
15.6 Concrete shall be assessed daily fol
M 25 5.3
compliance.
u 30 6.0
u 35 63
15.7 Concrete IS liable to be rejected if it is
u40 6.6
porous or honey-combed; its placing has been
-_._- interrupted without providing a proper
ConstructIon joint; the reinforcement has been
displaced beyond the tolerances specified; or
15. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA construction tolerance have not been met.
However, the hardened concrete may be
15.1 The concrete shall be deemed to comply accepted after carrying out suitable remedial
with the strength requirements if: measures to the satisfaction of the engineers.
in-charge.
a) every sample has a test strength not
less than the characteristic value; or
W the strength of one or more samples, 1 6 . I N S P E C T I O N A N D TFSTINC; Of,
though less than the characteristic STRUCI’URES
value is in each case not less than the
16.1 inspecrion -Immediately after
greater of: stripping the formwork. all concrete shall be
1) the characteristic strength minus carefully inspected and any defective work 01
1.35 times the standard devration; small defects either removed or n~+de go: ;:i
and before concrete has tl-;oroughly !~.~drned.
 /6.2 In case of daub! regarding the grade of
c o n c r e t e u s e d , either d u e t o pooT
workmanship or based on results of cube
strength tests, compressive strength tests o!
concrete on the basts of 16.3 and, or load test
(;)cP 16.5) may be carried out.
16.3 Core Test
16.3.1 The points from which cores are to be
taken and the number of cores required shall
be at the discretion of the engineer-in-charge
and shall be representative of the whole of
concrete concerned. In nocase, however. shall
fewer than three cores be tested.
16.3.2 Cores shall be prepared and tested in
accordance with good practice [VI-s(7)].
16.3.3 Concrete in the member represented
by a core test shall be considered acceptable 11
the average equivalent cube strength of the
cores is equal to at least 85 percent ofthecube
strength of the grade of concrete specified for
the corresponding age and no individua: core
has a strength less than 75 percent.
16.4 In case the core test results do not satisfy
the requirements of 16.3.3 or where such tests
have not been done, load test (see 16.5) may be
resorted to.
i6.S Load Tesls orl Parts of Structures
16.5.1 Load tests should be carried out as
soon as possrble after expiry of 28 days from
the time of placing of concrete.
16.5.2 The structure should be subjected to a
load equal to full dead load of the structure
plus 1.25 times the imposed load for a period
of 24 hours and then the imposed load shall be
removed.
NOTE -Dead load includes self weight of the structural
members plus weight of finishes and walls or parrrtions. If
any. as consldercd in the design.
16.5.3 The deflection due to imposed load
only shall be recorded. If within 24 hours of
removal of the imposed load, the structure
does not recover at least 75 percent of the
deflection under super-imposed load, the test
may be repeated after a lapse of 72 hours. If
the recovery is less than 80 percent, the
structure shall be deemed to be unacceptable.
16.5.3.1 If. the maximum deflection in mm,
shown during 24 hours under load is less than
40?/ D, where I is the effective span in m and
f3. the overall depth of the section in mm,it is
not necessary for the recovery to be measured
and the recovery provisions of 16.5.3 will not
apply.
16.6 Other non-destructive test methods may
he adopted, in which case the acceptance
Y,P
crrteria shall be agreed upon between the
engineer-in-charge and the contractor and the
test shall be done under expert guidance.
5A(c) GENERAL DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS
17. LOADS AND FORCES
17. I General -- In structural design, account
shall be taken of the dead, live and wind loads
and forces, such as those caused by
earthquake, and effects due to shrinkage,
creep, temperature. etc, where applicable.
17.2 The loads shall conform to those given
in Part VI Structural Design, Section I
Loads. The worst combination and location
of loads shall be considered for design.
171.1 In ordinary buildings, effects due to
temperature fluctuations and shrinkage and
creep can’ be ignored in the design
calculations.
17.3 Olher Forces and Effects - In addition,
account shall be taken of the following forces
and effects if they are liable to affect
materially the safety and serviceability of the
structure:
a) Foundation movements,
b) Elastic axial shortening,
c) Fatigue, and
d) Stress concentration effect due to point
loads and the like.
17.4 Dead Load Counteracring OIher Loads
and Forces -When dead load counteracts
the effects due to other loads and forces in a
structural member or joint, special care shall
be exercised by the designer to ensure
adequate safety for possible stress reversals.
f7.5 Design Loads - Design load is the load
to be taken for use in the appropriate method
of design; it is thecharacteristic load in case of
working stress method and characteristic load
with appropriate partial safety factors for
limit state design.
18. BASES FOR DFSIGN
18.1 General-Structures and structural
members shall be designed to have at all
sections, strengths at least equal to the
structural effects of design loads and forces
that occur during construction and use as
determined by the relevant method of design.
Structures and structural members shall also
meet all the other requirements of the Code.
18.1.1 T h e d e s i g n s h a l l b e m a d e i n
accordance with the principles of mechanics,
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
recognized methods of design and sound
engineering practice. In particular. adequate
consideration shall be given to the effects of
continuity on the distribution of bending
moments and shears due to monolithic
construction.
18.2 Methods of Design -Structures and
structural elements ma) be designed by any of
the following methods:
a) Limit state method,
b) Working stress method. and
c) Methods based on experimental
investigations.
18.3 I?evign on t-xperimental Basis ~- Where
the design is based on experimental
investigation on full sile structure or element.
load tests shall be carrled out to ensure the
following:
a) The structure shall satisfy the
requirements for deflection (.~PP 22.2) and
cracking (see 34.3.2) when subjected to a
load for 24 hours equal to the
characteristics load multiplied by I .33 71.
where yf shall be taken lrom Table 12. for
the limit state of serviceability. If within
24 hours of the remotal of the load, the
structure does not show a recovery of at
least. 75 percent of the maximum
deflection shown during the 24 hours
under the load, the test loading should be
repeated after a lapse of at least 72 hours.
The recovery after the second test should
be at least 75 percent of the maximum
deflection shown during the second test.
NoIt - If the msxlmum JcHectlon m mm. ahown during
24 hours under load IS lcsa than 40 I-‘/D. where I is the
efktivt span in m and Dthr overall depth of the scctlon
in mm. it is not nechrary for the recovery to be measured.
b) The structure shall have adequate
strength to sustain for 24 hours, a total
ldad equal to the characteristic load
multiplied by 1.33 yf. where yf shall be
taken from Table I2 for the limit state of
collapse.
19. STABILI I’Y OI- THE S T R U C T U R E
1Y.I Overturning T h e s t a b i l i t y o f a
structure as a whole against overturning shall
be ensured so that the restoring moment shall
be not less than the sum of I.2 times the
maximum overturning moment due to the
characteristic dead load and I.4 times the
maximum overturning moment due to the
characteristic imposed loads. In cases where
dead load provides the restoring moment,
only 0.9 times the characteristic dead load
Y%Rl \I STRI‘TUYAI. DkXCN SECTlOB .r CONCYETL
shall be considered. Restoring moment due to
imposed loads shall be ignored.
19.1.1 The anchorages or counterweights
provided for overhanging members (during
construction and service) should be such that
static equilibrium should remain, even when
overturning moment is doubled.
19.2 Sliding--The structure shall have a
factor against sliding of not less than I.4 under
the most adverse combination of the applied
characteristic forces. In this case only 0.9
times the characteristic dead load shall be
taken into account. .
19.3 70 ensure stability at all times, account
shall he taken of probable variations in dead
load during construction, repair or other
temporary measures. Wind and seismic
loading shall be treated as imposed loading.
19.4 In designing the framework of a
building, provisions shall be made by
adequate moment connections or by a system
of bracings to effectively transmit all the
horizontal forces to the foundations.
20. DURABILI’IY AND FIRE KESISTANCE
OF THE STRUCTURE
-70. I Duruhility -- In general, compliance
with the requirements regarding cover to the
reinforcement and detailmg in associat,ion
with the durability requirements of concrete
m 7 is intended to meet the durability
requirements of most structures. Adequate
additional precautions shall be taken for
structures in exceptionally severe
environments.
20.2 Fire R e s i s t a n c e - T h e m i n i m u m .
requirements for adequate protection against
tire are given in accepted standards [V l-5(2 I )].
21. ANALYSIS
21.1 General.- All structures may be
analysed by the linear elastic theory to
calculate internal actions produced by design
loads. In lieu of rigorous elastic anal sis, a
simplified analysis as given in 21.4 for rrames
and as given in 21.5 for continuous beams may
be adopted.
21.2 Effective Spun -Unless o t h e r w i s e
specified, the effective span of a member shall
be as follows:
S IMPLY S UPPORTED B EAM OR
SLAB -The effective span of a member
that is not built integrally with its
supports shall be taken as clear span plus
the effective depth of slab or beam or
centrc to centre of supports, whichever is
less.
COF;TIKIJOIIS BE A M O R SLAB -In t h e
case of continuous beam or slab, if the
VIP
 u ldth 01 the support is less than I ! 12 o!
the clear span, the effective span shall be
25 In 2/.2(a). if the supports are wider
than I : 12 the clear span or 6CN m m
whichever IS less. the effective span.shall
bc taken as under:
1) I.or’end 5pan with one end fixed and
the o t h e r cdntinuous or for
Intcrmedlate spans, the effective span
sh;lll bc the c l e a r s p a n b e t w e e n
supports; and
2) For end span with one end free and the
othqr contlpuou5. the cffeclive s p a n
shall be equal to the clear span plus
hall the cffcctlve depth of the beam or
slab or the clear 5pan plus half the
width 01 the discontinuous support.
whicheve! IS less.
hon
h,.;,r,ng, Ihc ellct’~~vc \~a” \h.ill alway\ he Ihe OIFIBIII’C
h<3urcn 1111’ ct‘lllrea 111 hemngb
I) I RAP#lt \ In the analysis of a contlnuou5
iranlc. c’cn1rc to ccntre distance shall be
UVXI.
‘/..!.I Rrl AtIvL SIII-)_N\‘FCS --The r e l a t i v e
;tlttncss ot the memhrs may be based on the
rrlr>rncnl 01 lncl tia of the section determined
on the basis of any one of the following
ilelinitions:
GROSS SFCTlON The gross-section of
the member ignoring reinforcement;
TRA~SI:~RMTI)SFC~IO~' -The concrete
cross-section plus the area of
rclnforcement transformed on the basis
of modular ratio; or
CRACKED SI;C‘TION - - T h e a r e a o f
concrete in compression plus the area of
reinforcement transformed on the basis
of modular ratlo.
b) When design live load does not exceed
three-fourths of the design dead load, the
load arrangement may be design dead
load and design live !oad on all the spans.
NOIF. ~ For beams and slabs CO~II~UOUS over support
21 4./(a) may be assumed.
2 1 . 4 . 2 S U B S T I T U T E F R A M E -- F o r
determining the moments and shears at any
floor or roof level dtie to gravity loads, the
beams a! the level together with columns
above and below wkh their far ends fixed ma)
be considered to constitute the frame.
21.4.3 For lateral loads. simplified methods
may be used to o&in the moments and shears
for structures that are symmetrical. For
unsymmetrical or very tall structures. more
rigorous methods should be used.
21.j.l Unless more exact estimate5 are made,
for beams of uniform cross-scctmn which
support substantially uniformly dlstrlbuted-
loads over three or more spans which do not
differ by more than I5 percent of the lotigest,
the bending moments and shear forces used in
design may be obtained using the coefficients
given in Table 7 and Table 8, respectively.
For moments at supports where two unequal
spans meet or in case where the spans are not
equally loaded, the average of the two values
ior the negative moment at the support may
be taken for design.
Where coefficients given in Table 7 are used
for calculation of bending moments,
redistribution referred to in 21.7 shall not be
permitted.
-- --I- _.

The assumptions made shall be consistent for TABLE 7 BENDING hjOMENT COEFFKIEN-IS
all the members of the structure throughout (GRAW fl.S.l)
any analysis.
TVPF OF S PAN MO~~ENTS S~IYPORT MOMI \ rs
LOAD r A
2j.3.2 F o r d e f l e c t i o n c a l c u l a t i o n s .
Near .4l ’ 7G--+-z
appropriate values of moment of inertia as Mtddlc Middle Support Other
specified in Appendix B should be used. o f E n d o f lnterlor Next IO lntcrmr
Span Span the End Supporis
21.4 Structural Frames ~~~ The simplifying Support
assumpiions as given in 21.4.1 to 21.4.3 may (1) (2) (3) (4) 0)
be used irr the analysis of frames, Dead load
and imposed t- & _-I I
--
load (fixrd)
+i’r 10 12
2I.d.d .~XRANCiEMEN r OF UVE L O A D
impossd load
a) Consideration may be limited to (not fixed) I --I
+Ib- ‘+ i7 9 A
combinations of:
NOTE - - F o r obtammg r h e bendmg moment, Ihc
I) design dead load an all spans with full coefflcwnl shall be mulrlphcd by!heroraldeslgn loadand
design live load on two adjacent spans; cffcc~w span.
and
2) desrgn dead load on all spans with fuli 21.5.2’ BE A M S ANI) SL A B S O V E R F R E E E N D
design live load on alternate spans. %IPPORl’S --Where a member is built into a

~,,_y, 22 WAllONAL BUsLDlNC CODE OF INDIA

masonry wall which deveiops on!y partial
restraint, the member shall bc designed to
resist a negative moment at the face of the
support of I+‘// 24 where W is the total design
load and I is the effective span, or such other
tIW-_L
restraining moment as may be shown to bc-
applicable. For such a condition, shear
coefficient given in Table 8 at the end support
may be increased by 095.

(ChIAQl?s 21.5.1 mf ZL52)

1‘YPK <IF A T ENU AT WPPOHT N E X T AT A;I
LOA0 SUPPORT 1 ” :Hk f:NI) ChIiIR
S!!PPORT Ixl~LRlOR

Gtcr SL:pPoH”

Side Sldc
II) (2) 0) (4) (5)
I)i‘Ki lo:cd O-4 0.6 0.55 O”5
‘lntl 1m-
po,cJ load
(lixrd)
lhlL.knqrs of flnishrng maternal n o t p l a c e d
Imposed I0ad 0.45 O-6 0.6 0.b monolirhicdll> with the member and the
(nor iiAed)
thlciinrss of any concrete provided to allow
for ~ear I hl< yill not apply to deep beams.

?I .ti C‘rilicul Swrion.~ for Monwnl and Sheor

constructlon, the
2111.l F o r m o n o l i t h i c
moments computed at the face of the supports
shall be used in the design of the members at
those sections. F o r n o n - m o n o l i t h i c
construction the design of the member shail be
done keeping in view 21.2.
21.6.2 CR I T I C A L SEC‘Tlhh FOR SHFAK - -
The shears computed at the face of the
support shall be used m the design of the
member at that section except as in 21.6.2.1.
21.6.2.1 When the reaction in thcdirection of
the applied shear Introduces compression into
the end region ofthe member, sections located
at a distance less than d from thr face of the
support may be designed for the same shear as
that computed at distance ti (MP Fig. t).
.?I.7 Hrdisrrrburion of,%iomenls - Kedlstri-
bution of moments may be done in
accordance with 36./.1 for limit state method
and in accordance with 43.2 for working stress
method. However where simplified analysis
using coefficients is adopted, redistribution of
moments shall not be done.
22. B E A M S
22.0 Effeclive Depth ~- Effective depth of a
beam IS the distance between the centroid of
the area of tension reinforcement and the
maximum compression fibre, excluding the
2,‘.1.1 (;bNI.K.;\l A slab which IS a s s u m e d
!o ;~ct AS a liange of a I -beam or L:beam shall
sc~i\t~ the folloumg:
a) lhe slab shall be cast lntegraily with the
web, or the web and the slab shall be
effectively bonded together in any other
manner: and
b) If the main reinforcement of the s!ab is
parallel t o the b e a m , t r a n s v e r s e
remforcement shail be provided as in
Fig. 2; such reinforcement shall not be
less than 60 percent of the main
reinforcement at mid span of the slab.
2 2 . 1 . 2 E F F E C T I V E W IDTH OF F L A N G E I n
the absence of more accurate determination,
the effective width of flange may be taken as
the following but in no case greater than the
breadth of the web plus half the sum of the
clear distances to the adjacent beams on either
side:
a) For T-beams, b, = I,: 6 t h, f 6 D,
b) F . )r 1. -beam<. * hr T- 1, I? ,t h, 1 3 I),
c) For isolated beams, the effective flange
width shall be obtained as below but in no
case greater than the actual width:
T - b e a m , h,=-(I+-q + b,
/I
5.5 I,
I,-bean;, hr = ---- -.-- -t- 6,.
(/,,I b)+A

PART VI STWCTUDAL. DlBiGN -8sLCllON I CONCEtfL \,.P


where
h, = effective width of flange.
I‘, = distance between points of zero
moments in the beam.
h, = breadth of the web,
L)r = thickness of flange, and
*h = actual width of the flange.
NorE i-or
conlinuous b e a m s nnd frames. I, ma) bc
assumed as O-7 tames the cfkctivc span
r accordance with Fig. 3.
I d) Depending on the area of compresslon
I
i.
/
; accordance with FIN. 4.
--_
1
L- _---,j _
XT j -- : I e-7X
‘--;--,I
2 2 . 2 Cunlrol q/ UeJJecticm The deflection
of a structure or part thereof shall not
adversely affect the appearance or efficiency
of the structure or finishes or partitions. The
deflection shall generally be limitod to the
following:
a) The final deflection due to all loads
including the effects of temperature,
creep and shrinkage and measured from
the ascast level of the supports of floors,
roofs and all other horizontal members.
should not normally exceed span/ 250.
b) The deflection including the effects of
temperature, creep and ‘shrinkage
occurring after erection of partitions and
the apphcation of finirhcr should not
normally exceed span/350 or 20 mm
whichever is less.
22.2.1 For beams and slabs, the vertical
deflection limits may generally be assumed to
be satisfied provided that the span to depth
“I.24
.
ratios ar.e nbt greater than the values obtained
as below:
a) Basic values of span to effective depth
ratios for spans up to 10 m:
Cantilever
Simply supported 2;
Continuous 26
For spans above IO m, the values in (a)
b)
may be multiplied by 10 span in metres,
except for cantilever in which case
deflection calculations should be made.
Ci Depending on the area and the type ol
steel for tension reinforcement, the
values in (a) or (b) shall be modified In
reinforcement. the value of span to
depth ratio be further modified in
Cl For llatged beams. the values of (a) or(b)
1 he modtIled In accordance with Fig. 5
and the reinforcement percentage for
use in Fig. 3 and 4 should be based on
area of section equal to hr d.
NOIF when dellrrtwns a r e requlrcd to he cal-
culatcd. r h c method gwcn m Appcndtx H md) k
used,
22.j Slenderness Llrnrrs for Beomr /o Ensun
Lureral Slahrlir)~ ~-- A <Imply supported or
continuous beam shall be so proportloned
that the clear distance between the lateral
restraints does not exceed 60 b or 250 h’,d
whichever is less, where tlis the effectivedepth
ofthe beamandhthebreadthofthccompres-
sion face midway between the lateral
restraints.
For a cantilever, the clear distance from the
free end of the cantilever to the lateral
restraint shall’not exceed 25 b or 100 h’/J
whichever is less.
23. SOLID SLABS
23.1 General - The provisions of 22.2 for
beams apply lo slabs also.
NOTE I - For slabs spanning in two dtrecttons. the shor-
ter of the two spans should be uad for calculating the
span to effective depth ratios.
NOTE 2 - For two-way slabs of small spans
(up to 3.5 m) with mild steel reinforcement, the span to
overall depth ratios given below may generally be
assumed to satisfy vertical deflection limits for ioadlng
cbtss up to 3 000 N I m’ f300 kg: m’).
Simply supported sla’bs 35.
Continuous slabs 40
For high slrengIh deformed bars of grade Fe 415, the
valuer given above shot&l be multiplied by 0.8.
23.2 Slabs Conrinuous Over Supports - The
slabs continuous over supports shall be
NATIONAL WlLDlNG COOt OF IkiblA
 MILD. STEEL BARS

0.L 0.6 1.2 l-6 2.0 24 2*9 3.0

PERCENTAGE TENSION REINFORCEMENT

Fix. 3 ModQkarion Faclor for Tensiorl Reinforcement

Fi.g. 4 MotlQicarion Farror_for Compression

Reinfurcemenf
0.7s

designed according to the provisions 0.10

applicable to continuous beams. D 0.1 0.4 0.8 @.a I.0

2 3 . 3 Shahs Monolirhic w i t h Supports - RATIO OF WEB WIDTH TO FLANGE WIDTH

Bending moments in slabs (except flat slabs)
constructed monolithically with the supports
shall be caltulated by taking such slabs either
as continuous over supports and capable of
free rotation, or as members of a continuous
framework with the supports. taking into
account the stiffness @f such supports. If such
supports are formed due to beams which
justify fixiry at the support of slabs, then the
effects on the supporting beam, such as the
bending of rhe web in the transverse direction
of the beam and the torsion in the longitudinal
direction of the beam, wherever applicable,
shall also be considered in the design of the
beam.
23.3.1 For the purpose of calculation of
moments in slabs in a monolithic structure, it
Fig. 5 Reducrion Factorsfor Rarios of Span
lo Effective Depth for Flanged Beams
will generally be sufficiently accurate to
assume that members connected to the ends of
such slabs are fixed in position and direction
at the ends remofe from their connections
with the slabs.
23.3.2 S L A B S C A R R Y I N G C ON C E N T R A T E D
LOAD
23.3.2.1 If a solid slab supported on two
opposite edges carries concentrated loads, the
maximum bending moment caused by the
concentrated load shall be assumed to be
resisted by an effective width of slab

FART VI STRI:CTURAL DttlCN -- SCCTlON 5 CONCRETE Y,.P


(measured parallel to the supportlngedges)as
follows:
a) For a single concentrated load, the
effective width shall be calculated in
accordance with the following equa‘tinn
providqd that it shall not exceed the
actual width of the slab:
&,=kx(I+)+rr
Cl
effrctive width of slab;
constant h;r\ing the values given In
I‘ahle 9 depending upon the rallo of
Ihe width oL‘ the slab (I’) to the
efffzcIi\e span i,,.;
dist;tncc ol’ the ccnrrold 01 t h e
concentrated load from n e a r e r
5upport;
cllc~,l~ve \pan. and
(I - width o f t h e t‘ont;tcI ‘arc3 of the
c o n c e n t r a t e d l o a d measured
parsll~l to the supported edge;
And pro\lded turrher that In case of a
load r&r the unsupported edge ol a slab.
the eflectivc width shall nor exceed the
abuvc value nor half the above value plus
t h e d i s t a n c e 01 the load from t h e
unsupported edge.
b) For two or more concentrated loads
placed in a line in the direction of the
span. the bending moment per meIre
width of slab shall be calculated
separately for each load according IO its
a p p r o p r i a t e effective- width of slzb
calculated as in (a) above and added
together for design calculations.
For,two or more loads not in a line in the
direction ol’ the span, if the effective
width of slab for one load does not
overlap rhe effective width of slab for
another load, both calculated as in (a)
above, then the slab for each load can be
designed separately. If the effective width
of slab for one load overlaps the efkctive
width of slab for ‘an adjacent load, the
overlapping portion of rhe slab shatl be
designed for the combined effect of the
two loads.
d) For cantilever solid slabs. the effective
width shall be calculated in accordance
with the following equation:
h,: = I .2 01 + u
where
ar = distance ol‘ the concrntratcd load
f r o m t h e l’ace of the c.antileLcr
support, and
“1 526
3
u = width of contact area of the
concentrated load measured
parallel to the supporting edge.
Provided that the effective width of the
cantilever llab shall not exceed one-third
the length of the cantilever slab mtisured
parallel to the fixed edge.
A n d provided f u r t h e r t h a t w h e n t h e
concentrated load is placed near rhe’extreme
ends of the length of cantilever slab in the
dIrection parallel lo the fixed edge, the
effective width shall not exceed the above
value nor shall it exceed half the above value
plus the distance of the concentrated load
from the extreme end measured In the
dIrectIon parallel (0 the fixed edge.
TABLE Y VALUES OF k FOR SIMPLY
SUPPORTED AND COh7TNUWS SMBS
(C4J.w 23JZ.l)
filcc k F OR S I M P L Y k F OR COHTI-
SUPPORTtD sl ALE. NUOUS Sl ABS
0.1 0.4 0.4
0.2 0.8 0.8
b.? I.16 1.16
0.4 1.48 1.44’
0.5 I 72 1.68
0.6 I .96 1.84
0.7 2.12 1.96
0.8 2.24 2.08
0.9 2.36 2.16
I .O and above 2.48 2.24
.?.f.J..?.J For slabs other than solid slabs, the
sflective width shall depend on the ratioofthe
transverse and longitudinal flexural rigidities
oi the slab. Where this ratio is one. that I S,
where the transverseand longitudinal flexural
rigidities are approximately equal, the value
of actice width as found for solid slabs may
be used. Rut as the ratio decreases,
proportionately smaller value shall be taken.
23.3.2.3 Any other recognized method of
analysis fsr cases of slabs covered by 23.32.1
and 23.3.2.2 and for all other cases of slabs
may be used with theapproval 01 the englneer-
in-charge.
23.3.2.4 The critical section for c h e c k i n g
shear shall be as givrn in 33.2.4./.
23.4 Slabs Spanning in Tnw Directions or
Righr Angles - The ,slabs spanning in two
d!rectlons at right angles and carrying
uniformly distributed load may be deslgned
by any acceptable theory or by using
coefficients given in A p p e n d i x C . F o r
determining bending moments In slabs
spanning In two directions at right angles and
carrying concentrated load, any accepted
NATION,,,_ BLILDING C O D E Ot WUIA
method approved by the engineer-in-charge
may be adopted. Ribbed slabs spanning in
two directions at right angles may also be
treated as solid slabs provided that the
spacing of ribs is not more than I? times the
flange thickness.
NOIE The most commonly used elastic methods arc
based on Pigcaud’s or WestcrganrdS theory and the most
commoniy used limit slate ofcollapse method is based on
Johansen’s yield-line theory.
2J.S Loads on Supportirrg Beams - - The
losds o n b e a m s s u p p o r t i n g s o l i d s l a b s
spanning in two directions at right angles a n d
supporting uniformly distributed loads, may
be assumed to be in accordance with Fig. 6.
24. COMPRESSION MEMBERS
24. I Dejinirions
24. I. I Column or strut is a compression
member, the effective length of which exceeds
three times the least lateral dimension.
24.1.2 SH O R T
AND S LENDER C O M P R E S S I O N
M EMBERS - A compression member may be
corisidered as short when both the slenderness
I I
ratios z and z are less than 12;
D b
where
1,. = effective length in respect of the
major axis,
D = depth in respect of the major axis,
I,, = effective length in respect of the
minor ails. and
h = width of the vzmber
It shall otherwise be considered as a slender
compression member.
24.1.3 UNSUPPORIEPLENG~ H - T,he
u n s u p p o r t e d l e n g t h . I , o f a comprewon
member shall be taken as the clear distance
betweer end restraints except that:
a) in flat slab construction, it shall be clear
distance bttween the floor and the lower
PAllT V I S T R U C T U R A L DUIGN - SLCTIOH 5 CONCRETE
extremity of the capital, the drop panel or
slab whichever is the least.
b) in beam and s<ab construction, it shall be
the clear distance between the floor and
the underside of the shallower beam
framing into the columns in each
direction at the next higher floorlevel.
cl in columns restrained laterally by struts.
it shall be the Clear distance between
consecutive struts in each vertical plane,
provided that to be an adequate support,
two such struts shall meet the columns at
approximately the same level and the
angle between vertical planes through the
struts shall not vary more than 30” from a
right angle. Such struts shall be of
adequate dimensions and shall have
sufficient anchorage to restrain the
member against lateral deflection.
d) in columns restrained laterally by struts
or beams, with brackets used at the
junction, it shall be the clear distance
between the floor and the lower edge of
the bracket, provided that the bracket
width equals that of the beam strut and is
at least half that of the column.
24.2 Effective Lengrk of Compression Mem-
bers - In the absence of more exact analysis,
the effective length lcr of columns may be
obtained as described in Appendix D.
24.3 Slenderness Limirs for Columns
24.3.1 The unsupported length between end
restraints shall not exceed 60 times the least
lateral dimension of a column.
24.3.2 If.. in any given plane, one end of a
100 b2
length, I, shall not exceed 7
where
b= width of that cross-section. and
D = depth of the cross-section measured
in the plane under consideration.
24.4 Minimum Eccenrricity - AH columns
shall be designed for minimum etxentricity
equal to the u n s u p p o r t e d length of
columni SO0 plus lateral dimenslonl30.
subject 10 a minimum of 20 mm.
25. REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING
REINFORCEMENT AND DETAILING
25 I General - Reinforcing steel of same
type and grade shall be used as main
reinforcement in a structural member.
W-52’

However, simultaneous use of two different
types or grades of .&eel for main and
secondary reinforcement, respectively, is
permissible.
25.1.1 Bars may be arranged singly, or in
pairs in contact, or in groups of three or four
bars bundled in contact. Bundles shall not be
used in a member without stirrups. Bundled
bars shall be tied together to ensure the bars
remaining together. Bars larger than 36 mm
diameter shall not be bundled, except in
columns.
25.1.2 The recommendations for detailing
for earthquake-resistant construction given
in [VI-5(22)] should be taken into considera-
tion, where applicable.
25.2 Development of Stress in Reinforce-
ment - T h e c a l c u l a t e d t e n s i o n o r
compression in any bar at any section shall be
developed on each side of the section by an
appropriate development lenith or end
anchorage or by a combination thereof.
25.2.1 DE V E L O P M E N T LENGI-H O F
BARS - The development length Ld is .given
by:
p$
bd
where
C$ = nominal diameter of the bar,
us = stress in bar at the section considered
at design load, and
7~ = design bond stress given in25.2.1.1.
NOTE I - The development length includes anchorage
values of hooks in tension reinforcement.
NOTE 2 - For bars of secnons other than circular, the
development length should be sufficient IO develop the
stress In the bar by bond.
25.2.1.1 Design bond .stress in limit state
method for plain bars in tension shall be as
below:
Grade of Design bbnd
Concrete Stress. Tbd,
N/mm*
M 15 I.0
M 20 l-2
M 2.5
M 30 ;:;
M 35 I.7
M 40 1.9
For deformed bars conforming fo [VI-5( I I)],
these values shall be increased by 60 percent.
For bar in compression, the values of bond
stress for bars in tension shall be increased by
25 percent.
.
The values of bond stress in working stress
design, are given in 44.1.
25.2.1.2 B A R S B U N D L E D I N C O N T A C T - T h e
development length of each bar of bundled
bars shall be that for the individual bar,
increased by IO percent for two ‘bars in
contact, 20 percent for three bars in contact
and 33 percent for four bars in contact.
25.2.2 ANCHORING REINFORCING BARS
25.2.2.1 ANCHORING BARS IN TENSION
a) Deformed bars may be used without end
anchorages provided development length
requirement is satisfied. Hooks should
normally be provided for plain bars in
tension.
b) LENDS AND HOOKS - Bends and hooks
shall conform to good practice
[VI-5(18)]:
I) B EN DS -The anchorage value of
bend shall be taken as 4 times the
diameter of the bar for each4Y bend
subject to a maximum of 16 times the
diameter of the bar.
2) HOOKS -The anchorage value of a
standard U-type hook shall be equal to
16 times the diameter of the bar.
25.2.2.2 ANCHORING BARS I& COMPRES-
SION - The anchorage length of straight bar
in compression shall be equal to the
development length of bars in compression as
specified in 25.2.1. The projected length of
hooks, bends and straight length beyond
bends. if provided for a bar in compression,
shall be considered for development length.
25.2.2.3M E C H A N I C A L DEVlCES F O R
ANCHORAGE - Any mechanical or other
device capable of developing the strength of
the bar without damage to concrete may be
used as anchorage with the approval of the
engineer-in-charge.
2J _._.
’ ’ 4 ASCHORINC SHEAK REINFOKCEMENT
a) ISCLINED BARS - The development
length shall be as for bars in tension; this
length shall be measured as under:
I) In tension zone, from the end of the
sloping or inclined portion of the bar,
and
2) In the compression zone, from the
mid depth of the beam.
b) SllRRllPS - NotwithstandIng any of
the provisions of this standard, in case of
secondary reinforcement, such as stirrups
a n d t r a n s v e r s e t i e s , complete
development lengths and anchorage shall
be deemed to have been provided when
the bar is bent through an angle of at least
 90“ round a bar of at least its own
diameters and is continued beyond the
end of the curve for a length of at least
eight diameters, or when the bar is bent
through an angle of 135” and is continued
beyond the end of the curve for a length
of at least six bar diameters or when the
bar.is bent through an angle of 180” and
is continued beyond the end of the curve
for a length of at least four bar diameters.
25.2.2.5 BEARING S T R E S S E S A T B E N D S - T h e
bearing stress in concrete for bends and hooks
described in [VI-X18)] riced not be checked.
The bearing stress inside a bend in any other
bend shall be calculated as given below:
BeaGng stress =+
where
& = tensile force due to design loads in a
bar or group of bars;
r= internal radius of the bend; and
cb = size of the bar or, in bundle, the size
of bar of equivalent area.
For limit state method of design,this stress
1.5&k -
shall not exceed where j& is the
1+24/o ’
characteristic strength of concrete and u, for a
particular bar or group of bars in contact shall
be taken as the centre to centre distance
between bars or groups of bars perpendicular
to the plane of the bend; for a bar or group of
bars adjacent to the face of the memberu shall
be taken as the cover plus size of bar(9). For
working stress method of design, the bearing
stress shall not exceed
25.2.2.6 If a change in direction of tension or
compression reinforcement induces a resultant
force acting outward tending to split the
concrete, such force should be taken up by
additional links or stirrups. Bent tension bar
at a reentrant angle should be avoided,
25.2.3 C URTAILMENT OF T E N S I O N
REINFORCEMENTINFLEXURALMEMBERS
25.2.3.1 For curtailment, reinforcement shall
extend beyond the point at which it is no
longer required to resist flexure for a distance
equal to the effective depth of the member or
12 times the bar diameter, whichever is
greater except at simple support or end of
cantilever. In addition requirements of
25.2.3.2 to 25.2.3.5 shall also be satisfied.
Nom - A point at which rcinforccmcnt is no longer
rkquirrd to resist flcxun is where the resistance momcnl
of the section. considering only the rontinuing bars, is
equal to the design moment.
PART VI STltUCTlJUL DCBICN -8tKllON S CONCULTS
25.2.3.2 Flexural reinforcement shall not be
terminated in a tension zone unless any one of
the following conditions is satisfied:
4 The shear at the cut-off point does not
exceed two-thirds that permitted,
including the shear strength of web rein-
forcement provided.
b) Stirrup area in excess of that required
for shear and torsion is provided along
each terminated bar over a distance
from the cut-off point equal to three-
fourths the effective depth of the
member. The excess stirrup area shall be
not less than O-4 b slfy, where b is the
breadth of beam, s is the spacing andfY is
the characteristic strength of reinforce-
ment i’n N/mm*. The resulting spacing
shall not exceed d/8 Bb where Et, is the
ratio of the area of bars cut-off to the
total area of bars at the section, and d is
the effective depth.
Cl For 36 mm and smaller bars. the conti-
nuing bars drovide double the area
required for flexure at the cut-off point
and the shear does not exceed three-
fourths that permitted.
25.2J.3 POSITIVE MOMENT REINFORCEMENT
a) At least one-third of the positive moment
reinforcement in simple members and
one-fourth of the positive moment
reinforcement in continuous members
shall extend along the same face of the
member into the support, to a length
equal to Ld/3.
b) When a flexural member is part of the
primary lateral load resisting system, the
positive reinforcement required to be
extended into the support as described in
(a) shall be anchored to develop its design
stress in tension at the face of the support.
cl At simple supports and at points of
inflection, positive moment tension
reinforcement shall be limited to a
diameter such that Ld computed for/d
by 25.2.1 does not exceed
Ml
7 +Ll
where
M, = moment of resistance of the
section assuming all reinforcement
at the section to be stressed to fd;
0.87 fy in the case of limit state
/a=
design and the permissible stress
C,~ in the case of working stress
design;
v = shear force at the section due to
design loads;
L= sum of th anchorage beyond the
centre o! the support and the
YIP
 e+ivaient anchorage value of any
hook or mechanical anchorage at
simple support; and at a point of
inflection, S, is limited to the
effective depth of the members or
I2 4, whichever is greater; and
4 = diameter of bar.
The value of MI/ Y in the above expression
may be increased of by 30 percent when the
ends of the reinforcement are confined by a
compressive reaction.
25.2.3.4 NEGATIVE MOMENT REINFORCE-
MENr -. At least one-third of the total
reinforcement provided for negative moment
at the support shall extend beyond the point
of inflection for a distance no: less than the
effective depth of the member or I2 4 or one-
sixteenth of the clear span whichever is
greater.
25.2.3.5 ClJi$TAILMENT O F B U N D L E D
BARS - Bars in-a bundle shall’ terminate at
dilterent points spaced apart by not less than
40 times the bar diameter except for bundles
slopping at a support.
25.2.4 SPECIAI ME MB ER S - Adequate end
anchorage shall be provided for tension
reinforcement in fiexural members where
reinforcement stress is not directly
proportional to moment. such as sloped,
stepped, or tapered footings; brackets; deep
beams: and members in which the tension
reinforcement is not parallel to the
comptession face.
25.2.5 REINFORCEMENT S PLICING - Where
splices are provided in the reinforcing bars,
they shall as far as possible be away from the
sections of maximum stress and be staggered.
it is recommended that splices in flexurai
members should not be at sections where the
bending moment is more than 50 percent of
the moment of resistance; and not more than
half the bars shall be spliced at a section.
Where more than one-half of the bars are
spliced at a section or where splices are made
at points of maximum stress, special
precautionh shall be taken, such as increasing
the length of lap and,‘or using spirals or
closely spaced stirrups around the length of
the splice
25.2.5.1 LAP m.icm
a) Lap splices shall not be used for bars
larger than 36 mm; for larger diameters,
bars may be welded (see 11.1); in cases
where welding is not practicable. lapping
of bars i a r p r than 36 mm may be
permitted, m which case additlon’ai
spirals should be provided around the
lapped bars.
b) Lap splices shall be considered as
staggered if the centre to centre distance
of the splices is not less than I.3 times the
lap length calculated as described in (c).
Lap length including anchorage value of
cl
hooks in flexurai tension shall be Ld (see
25.2.l) or 30 b whichever is greater and
for direct tension 2 Ld or 30 &whichever is
greater. The straight length of the lap
\hlrll noI he lets than 15 r$ or 20 cm,
where
f.d IS the development length as described
in 25.2. I for/d.
NOTF - S p l i c e s i n tcnuon members s h a l l bc
epcloscd m spirals made of bars nor Ierr than 6 mm
diameter with pitch not more Man 100 mm. Hooks
shall bc provided at the ends of bars in terwon
tncmbcrs.
d) The lap length in compression shall be
equal .to the development length in
compression, calculated as described in
25.2.1, but not less than 24 4.
4 When bars of two different diameters are
to be spliced. the lap length s&an be
calculated on the basis of diameter of the
smaller bar.
0 When splicing of welded wire fabric is to
be carried out, lap splices of wires shall be
made so that overlap measured between
the extreme cross wires shall be not less
than the spacingofcross wires plus 10 cm.
B) in case of bundled bars, iapped splices of
bundled bars shall be made by splicing
one bar at a time: such individual snlices
within a bundle ihail be staggered.’
25.2.5.2 WELDEDSPLICES AND MECHANICAL
(‘ONNECTIONS -The design strength of a
welded splice (see 11.4) or mechanical
connections shall be taken as equal ta 80
percent of the design strength of the bar for
tension splices and 100 percent of the design
strength for compression spi/ces. However,
100 percent of the design strength may be
assumed in tension when the spliced area
forms not more than 20 percent of the total
area of steel at the section and the splices arc
staggered at least 60 cm.
25.2.5.3 E N D - B E A R I N G S P L I C E S End
bearing splices shall be used only for bars in
compression. The ends of the bars shall be
square cut arid concentric bearing ensured by
suitable devices.
25.3 Spacing o/‘ Reinforcement
25.3.0 For the purpose of this clause. the
diameter of a round bar shall be its nominal
diameter, and in the case of bars which are not
round or in the case of deformed bars or
irinlped harS. the diameter shall be taken as
the diameter of a circle giving an equivalent
effective area. Where spacing limitations and
minimum concrete cover (see 25.4) are based
on bar diameter, a group of bars bundledin
contact shall be treated as a single bar of
diameter derived from thr: total equivalent
3rea.
25.3.1 MI N I M U M D I S T A N C E B E T W E E N
I N D I V I D U A L B ARS -The following shall
apply for spacing of bars:
4 The horizontal distance between two
parallel main reinforcing bars shall
usually be not less than the greatest of the
following:
I) The diameter of the bar if the dia-
meters are equal,
2) The diameter of the larger bar if the
diameters are unequal, and
3) 5 mm more than the nominal’maxi-
mum size of coarse aggregate.
NOTE - This does not preclude the use of larger size
of aggregdtcs beyond the congested reinforcement
in the same member; the size of aggregates may be
reduced around congcrtcd rcmforccmcnt to comply
with this provision.
b) Greater horizontal distance than the
minimum specified in (a) should be
provided wherever possible.’ However
when needle vibrators are used the
horizontal distance between bars of a
group may be reduced to two-thirds the
nommal maximum size of the coarse
aggregate, provided that sufficient space
is left between grou@ of bars to enable
the vibrator to be immersed.
c) Where there are two or more rows of bars,
the bars shall be vertically in line and the
minimum vertical distance between the
bars shall be 15 mm, two-thirds the
nominal maximum size of aggregate or
the maximum size of bar, whichever is the
greatest.
2 5 . 3 . 2 M A X I M U M D I ST A N C E B E T W E E N
B ARS IN T ENSION - Unless thecalculation of
crack widths shows that a greater spacing is
acceptable. the ‘following rules shall be
applied to flexural members in normal
internal or external conditions of exposure.
a) B E A M S - The horizontal distance
between parallel reinforcement bars, or
groups, near the tension face of a beam
shall not be greater than the value given in
Table 10 depending on the amount of
redistribution carried out in analysis and
the characteristic strength of the
reinforcement.
b) SLABS
I) The horizontal distance between
parallel main reinforcement bars shall
not be more than three times t.!re
effective depth of a solid slab or 450
mm whichever is smaller
The horizontal distance between
4
parallel reinforcement bars provided
against shrinkage and temperature
shall not be more than five trmes the
effective depth of a solid slab or 450
mm whichever is smaller.
TABLE 10 CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN BARS
(Churf 25.3.I)
P E R C E N T A G E RIGISTRIBUTION TO OR FR O M
%XllON ~ONSIDCRED
--
h
N T
250
415
500
N OTE -The spacings ‘given in the tabk arc not
applica,ble t? members subjected to particularly
aggrcrslvc cnvlronmcnrs unless in the calculation of tnc
moment of resistance./, has been limited to MO N I mm’ in
limit state design and o,, limited IO 165 N/mm’in working
stress design.
M.4 Cover to Reinforcement
25.4.1 Reinforcement shall have concrete
cover and the thickness of such cover
(exclusive of plaster or other decorative
finish) shall be as follows:
a) At each end uf reinforcing bar not less
than 25 mm, nor less than twice the
diameter of such bar;
b) For a longitudinal reinforcing bar in a
column, not less than 40 mm, nor less
than the diameter of such bar. Inthe case
of columns of minimum dimension of200
mm or under, whose reinforcing bars do
not exceed 12 mm, a cover of25 mm may
be used;
c) For longitudinal reinforcing bar in a
beam, not less than 2.5 mm, noi less than
the diameter of such bar;
d) For tensile, compressive, shear, or other
reinforcement in a slab, not less than15
mm, nor less than the diameter of such
bar; and
e) For any other reinforcement, not leers
than I5 mm, nor less than the diameter of
such bar.
2.5.4.2 Increased cover thickness may be
provided when surfaces of concrete members
are exposed to the action of harmful
chemicals (as in the ease of concrete in contact
with earth faces contaminated with such
chemicals), acid, vapour, saline atmosphere,
sulphurous smoke (as in the case of steam
operated railways), etc. and such increase of
cover may be between 15 mm and 50 mm
beyond the figures given in 25.4.1 asmay be
specified by the engineer-in-charge.
25.4.2.1 For reinforced concrete members
totally immersed in sea water, the.cover shall
be 40 mm more than that specified in25.4.1.
25.4.2.2 For reinforced concrete members,
periodically immersed in sea water or subject
to sea spray, the cover of concrete shall be
50 mm more than that specified in 25.4.1.
25.4.2.3 For concrete of grade M 25 and
above, the additional thickness of cover
specified in 25.4.2 to 25.4.2.2 may be reduced
to half.
25.4.2.4 In all such cases, the cover should
not exceed 75 mm.
25.5 Requiremenrs of Reinforcement for
Sirucrural Members
?5.5.1 BE A M S
25.5.1.1 TENSION REINFORCEMENT
a) MINIMUM REINFORCEMENT - T h e
minimum area of tension reinforcement
shall not be less than that given by the
following:
A, 0.85
‘I;;i=i,
where
A, =minimum area of tension
reinforcement.
b = breadth of the beam or the breadth
of the web of T-beam,
effective depth, and
characteristic s t r e n g t h o f
reinforcement in N / mm2.
b) MAXIMUM R E I N F O R C E ME N T - T h e
maximum area of tension reinforcement
shall not exceed 0.04 bD.
25.5.1.2 COMPRESSION REINFORCEMENT -
The maximum area of corn ression
reinforcement shall not exceed B.04 bD.
Compression reinforcement in beams shall be
enclosed by stirrups for effective lateral
restraint. The arrangement of stirrups shall be
as specified in 25.5.3.2.
25.5.1.3 SIDE FACE REINFORCEMENT -
Where the de th of the web in a beam exceeds
750 mm, si(Pe face reinforcement shall be
provided along the two faas. The total area of
such reinforcement shall be not less than 0.1
percent of the web area and shall be
distributed equally on two faces at a spacing
not exceeding 300 mm or web thickness
whichever is less.
25.5.1.4 TRANSVERSE REINFORCEMENT IN
BEAMS FOR SHEAR AND TORSION - T h e
transverse reinforcement in beams shall be
taken around the outer-most tension and
compression bars. In T-beams, and l-beams
such reinforcement shall pass around
longitudinal bars located close to the outer
face of the flange.
25.5.1.5 MAXIMUM SPACING OFSHEAR REIN-
FORCEMENT - The maximum spacing of
shear reinforcement measured along the axis
of the member shall not exceed 0.75 d for
vertical stirrups and d for inclined stirrups at
45O. where d is the effective depth of the
section uuder consideration. In no case shall
the spacing exceed 450 mm.
2.5.5.1.6 MINIMUM SHEAR REINFORCE-
MENT - Minimum shear reinforcement in the
form of stirrups shall be provided such that:
_$+A
Y .h
where
Aw = total cross-sectional area of stirrup
legs effective in shear,
S” = stirrup spacing along the length of
the member,
h= breadth of the beam or breadth of
the web of ‘flanged beam, and
h= characteristic strength of the stirrup
reinforcement in N/mm’ which
shall not be taken greater than 415
N/mm’.
However, in members of minor structural
importance such as lintels, or where the
maximum shear stress calculated is less than
half the permissible value, this provision need
not be complied with.
25.5.1.7 DISTRIBUTION OF TORSION REIN-
FORCEMENT -When a member is designed
for torsion (see 40 or 48). t o r s i o n
reinforcement shall be provided as below:
a) The transverse .reinforcement for torsion
shall be rectangular closed stirrups placed
perpendicular to the axis of the member.
The spacing of the stirrups shalJ not
x1 +yt
exceed the least of: X I, - and
4
%KI mm, where XI and ye are respectively,
the short and long dimensions of the
stirrup.

b) Longitudinal reinforcement shall be
placed as close. as is practicable to the
corners of the cross-section and in all
cases, there shall be at least one
longitudinal bar in each corner of the ties.
When the cross-sectional dimension of
the member exceeds 450 mm, additional
longitudinal bars shall be provided to
satisfy the requirements of minimum
reinforcement and spacing given in
25.5.1.3.
25.5.1.8 Reinforcement in flanges of Tand L
beams shall satisfy the requirements
in 22.1.1(b). Where flanges are in tension, a
part of the main tension reinforcement shall
be distributed over the effective flange width
or a width equal to one-tenth of the span,
whichever is smaller. If the effective flange
width exceeds one-tenth of the span, nominal
longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided
in the outer portions of the flange.
2-5.5.2 SLABS --The rules given in 25.5.2. I
and 25.5.2.2 shall apply to slabs in addition to
those given in the appropriate clauses.
25.5.2.1 M I N I M U M R E I N F O R C E M E N T - T h e
reinforcement in either direction in slabs shall
not be less than 0. I5 percent of the total cross-
sectional area. However, this value can be
reduced to 0.12 percent when high strength
deformed bars or welded wire fabric are used,
2 . 5 . 5 . 2 . 2 M AX I M U M D I A M E T E R - - - T h e
diameter of reinforcing bars shall not exceed
one eighth of the total thickness of the slab.
25.5.3 C O L U M N S
2.5.5.3.1 LONGITUDINAL REIN170RCEMENT
a) The cross-sectional area of longitudinal
reinforcement, shall be not less than 0.8
percent nor more than 6 percent OT the
gross cross-sectional area of the column.
N OTE -The use of 6 ercent :einlbrcemcnt may
rnvolvc practical dl‘?’ftcult~es
in placing and
compacting of concrete; hence lower percentap IS
recommended. Where bars from (he columns below
have IO be lapped with those m the column under
consideration. the percentage of steel shall usually
not exceed 4 percent.
b) In any column that has a larger cross-
sectional area than that required to
support the load. ths minimum
percentage of steel shall be based upon
the area of concrete required to resist the
direct stress and not upon theactual area.
C) The minimum number uf longitudinal
bars provided in a column shall be four in
rectangular columns and six in circular
columns.
d) The bars shall not be less than I2 mm in
diameter.
PART W STPI;CTUPAL DESIGN - SECTION 5 CONCRETE
.
e) A reinforced concrete column having
helical reinforcement shall have at least
six bars of longitudinal reinforcement
within the helical reinforcement.
0 In a helically reinforced column, the
longitudinal bars shall be in contact with
the helical reinforcement and equidistant
around its inner circumference.
&?I Spacing of longitudinal bars measured
along the periphery of the column shall
not exceed 300 mm.
h) In case of pedestals in which the
longitudinal reinforcement is not taken
into account in strength calculations,
nominal longitudinal reinforcement not
less than 0. IS percent of the cross-
sectional area shall be provided.
NOTE Pedestal is a compresslon member. the
rffcctlvc length of which does not exceed three times
the least lateral dlmenslon.
25.5.3.2 TRANSVERSE. REINFORCEMtNl
a) GENERAL ----A r e i n f o r c e d c o n c r e t e
compression member shall have
transverse or helical reinforcement so
disposed that every longitudinal bar
nearest to the compression face has
effective lateral support against buckling
sub,ject to provisions in (b). The effective
lateral support is given by transverse
reinforcement either in the form of
circular rings capable of taking up
circumferential tension or by polygonal
links (lateral ties) with internal angles not
e x c e e d i n g 135”. The ends of the
transverse reinforcement shall be
properly anchored [sea 25.2.2.4 (b)]
b) ARRANGEMENT OF T R A N S V F R S E REIN-
FORCEMEN I
1) If the longitudinal bars are not spaced
more than 75 mm on either side,
transverse reinforcement need only to
go round corner and alternate bars for
the purpose of providing effective
lateral supports (see Fig. 7).
2) If the longitudinal bars spaced at a
distance of not exceeding 48 times the
diameter of the tie are effectively tied
in t w o d i r e c t i o n s , a d d i t i o n a l
longitudinal bars in between these bars
need to be tied in one direction by open
ties (see Fig. 8).
3) Where the longitudinal reinforcing
bars in a compression member are
placed in more than one row, effective
lateral support to the longitudinal bars
in the inner rows may be assumed to
have been provided if’:
i) transverse reinforcement is
0.9444 0 for the outer-most row in
accordance with 25.5.3.2, and
VI-J 33

ii) no bar of the inner row is closer to
the nearest compression face than
three times the diameter of
the largest bar in the inner row (sep
Fig. 9).
4) Where the Longitudinal bars in a
compression member are grouped (not
in contact) and each group adequately
tied with transverse reinforcement in
accordance with 25.5.3.2; the
transverse reinforcement for the
compression member as a whole may
be provided on the assumption that
each group is a single longitudinal bar
for purpose of determining the pitch
and diameter of the transverse
reinforcement in accordance with
25.5.3.2. The diameter of such
transverse reinforcement need not,
however. exceed 20 mm (see Fig. 10).
c) PITCH AND DIAMETER OF LATERAL 1 IES
1) PITCH -The pitch of transverse
reinforcement shall be not more than
the least of the following distances:
9 The least lateral dimension of the
compression member;
ii) Sixteen times the smallest
diameter of the longitudinal
reinforcement bar to be tied;
iii) Fortyeight times the diameter of the
transverse reinforcement.
Fig. 7
Fig. 9
w.24
3
2) DIAMETER -The diameter of
the polygonal links or lateral ties shall
be not less than one-fourth of the
diameter of the largest longitudinal
bar. and in no case less than 5 mm.
d) HELICAL REINFORCEMENT
1) PITCH -Helical reinforcement shall
be of regular formation with the turns
of the helix spaced evenly and its ends
shall be anchored properly by
providing one and a half extra turns of
the spiral bar. Where an increased load
on the column on the strength of the
helical reinforcement is allowed for,
the pitch of helical turns shall be not
more than 75 mm, nor more than
one-sixth of the core diameter of the
column, nor less than 25 mm, nor less
than three times the diameter of the
steel bar forming the helix. In other
cases, the requirements of 2.5.5.3.2
shall be complied with.
D I A M E T E R -The diameter of the
2)
helical reinforcement shall. be in
accordance with 25.5.3.2(c) (2).
25.5.3.3 In columns where longitudinal bars
are offset at a splice, the slope of the &lined
portion of the bar with the axis of the column
shall not exceed I in 6, and the portions of the
Fig. 8
I
Fig. IO
NATIONAL lUlLDING CODE OF INDIA
bar above and below the offset shall be
parallel to the axis of the column. Adequate
horizontal support at the offset bends shall be
treated as a matter of design, and shall be
provided by metal ties, spirals, or parts of the
floor construction. Metal ties or spirals so
designed shall be placed near (not more than
eight-bar diameters from) the point of bend.
The horizontal thrust to be resisted shall be
assumed as 1 t times the horizontal
components of the nominal stress in the
inclined portion of the bar. Offset bars shall
be bent before they are placed in the forms.
Where co!umn faces are offset 75 mm or
more, splices of vertical bars adjacent to the
offset face shall be made by separate dowels
overlapped as specified in 25.2.5.1.
?6. EXPANSION JOINTS
26.1 In view of the large number of factors
involved in deciding the location, spacingarrd
nature of expansion joints, the provision of
expansion joint in reinforced cement concrete
structures should be left to the discretion of
the designer.
26.2 Structures in which marked changes in
plan dimensions take place abruptly shall be
provided with expansion joints at the section
where such changes occur. Expansion joints
shall be so provided that the necessary
movement occurs with a minimum resistance
at the joint. The structures adjacent to the
joint should preferably be supported on
separate columns or walls but not necessarily
on separate foundations. Reinforcement shall
not extend across an expansion joint and the
break between the sections shall be complete.
26.3 The details as to the length ofa structure
where expansion joints have to be provided
can be determined after taking into
consideration various factors, such as
temperature, exposure to weather, the time
and season of the laying of the concrete, etc.
For the purpose of general guidance,
however, it is recommended that structures
exceeding 45 m in length shall be divided by
one or more expansion joints.
S E C T I O N 5A(d) SPECIAL D E S I G N
REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL
MEMBERS AND SYSTEMS
27. GENERAL
27.1 This part covers special d e s i g n
requirements for some structural members
and syrtems in addition to those given in
PART V l sl’DtJCWIAL DZSICN- ~EClWW I CDNcRITI
Sections 5A(c), 5A(e) and 5A(f), except where
modified.
28. DEEP BEAMS
28. I General
a) A beam shall be deemed to be a deep
beam when the ratio of effective span to
overall depth, l/D is iess than:
I) 2.0 for a simply supported beam; and
2) 2.5.for a continuous beam.
b) A deep beam complying with the
requirements of 28.2 and 28.3 shall be
deemed to satisfy the provisions for shear.
28.2 Lever Arm -The lever armz for a deep
beam shall be determineIf as below:
a) For simply supported beams:
z = 0.2 (I + 20) when 1 < $
or
I = 0.6 I qhcn
b) For continuous beams:
I = 0.2 (I+ 1.5D) when I Q + G 2.5
or
z = 0.5 I when
where I is the effective span taken as centre to
centre distance between supports or1.15 times
the clear span, whichever IL smaller, and D is
the overall depth.
28.3 Reinforcement
28.3.1 POSITIVE R EINFORCEMENT -The
tensile reinforcement required to rcaist
positive bending moment m any span of a
deep beam shall:
4 extend without curtailment between
supports;
W be embedded beyond the faa of each
support, so that at the face of support it
shall have a development length not less
than 0.8 Ld; where 4 is the development
length (see 25.2.1), for the design stress in
the reinforament;
4 be placed within a zone of dcpth’equal to
0.25 D - 0.05 ladjacent to the tensionfaa
of the beam where D is the overall depth
and I is the effective span.
VI-25
28.3.2 NEGATIVE R EINFORCEM E N T
l-ERMINATION OF REINFORCEMENT-
For tensile reinforcement required to
resist negative bending moment over a
support of a deep beam:
It shall be permissible to terminate not
more than half of the reinforcement at
a distance of 0.5 D from the face of the
support where D is as defined in 28.2;
and
The remainder shall extend over the
full span.
b) DISTRIBUTION -When ratio of clear
span to overall depth is in the range I.0
to 2,5, tensile reinforcement over a
support of a deep beam shall be placed in
two 7ones comprising:
I) a 7one of depth 0.2 D. adjacent to the
tension face, which shall cont-iin a
proportion of the tension steel given by
0.5( $ - 0.5)
where
I = clear span, and
I) = overall depth; and
a Tone measuring 0.3 D on either side
of the mid-depth of the beam, which
shall contain the remainder of the
tension steel, evenly distributed.
For span to depth ratios less than
umty, the steel shall be even11
distributed over a depth of 0.X n
meausred from the tension face.
28.3.3 V ERTICAL REINFORCEMEN.~ -If
forces are applied to a deep beam in such a
way that hanging action is required, bars or
suspension stirrups shall be provided to carry
all the forces concerned.
28.3.4 SIDE FACE RHNFORCEMFN-I .-Side
face reinforcement shall comply with
requirements of minimum reinforcement of
walls (see 31.4).
29. RIBBED. HOI_LOW BLOCK OR
VOIDED SLAB
2 9 . 1 GPnerol-This covers the slabs
constructed in one of the ways described
below:
a) As a series of concrete ribs with topping
cast on forms which may be removed
after the concrete has set;
b) As a series of concrete ribs between
precast blocks which remain part of the
w4.36
completed structure; the top of the ribs
may be connected by a topping of
concrete of the same strength as that used
in the ribs; and
cl With a continuous top and bottom face
but containing voids of rectangular, oval
or other shape.
29.2 Analysis of Structure --The moments
and forces due to design loads on continuous
slabs may be obtained by the methods given in
Section 3 for,solid slabs. Alternatively, the
slabs may be designed as a series of simply
supported spans provided they are not
exposed to weather or corros\ve conditions:
wide cracks may develop at the supports and
the engineer shall satisfy himself that these
will not impair finishes or lead to corrosion01
the reinforcement.
29.3 .Shrar ~~- Where hollow blocks are used,
for the purpose of calculating shear stress, the
rib width-may be increased to take account of
the wall thickness of the block on one side of
the rib; with narrow precast uqlts, the width of
the jointing mortar or concrete may be
included.
29.4 DeJeclion --The recommendations for
deflection in respect of solid slabs may be
applied to ribbed, hollow block or voided
construction. ‘The span to effective depth
ratios given in 22.2 for a flanged beam are
applicable but when calculating the final
reduction factor for web width, the rib wtdth
for hollow block slabs may be assumed to
include the walls of the blocks on both sides of
the rib. For voided slabs and slabs constructed
of box or I-section units, an effective rib width
shall be calculated assuming all material
below the upper flange of the unit to be
concentrated in a rectangular rib having the
same cross-sectiona area and depth.
29.5 Size and Posirion of Ribs - In-silu ribs
shall be not less than 65 mm wide. They shall
be spaced at centres not greater than I .5 m
apart and their depth, excluding any topping,
shall be not more than four times their width.
Generally ribs shall be formed along each edge
parallel to the span of one way slabs. When
the edge is built into a wall or rests on a beam,
a rib at least as wide as the bearing shall be
formed along the edge.
29.6 Hollow Blocks and Formers - Blocks
and formers may be of any suitable material.
Hollow clay tiles for the filler type shall
conform to accepted standards [VI-5(23)].
When required to contribute to the structural
sttength of a slab they shall:
a) be made of concrete or burnt clay; and
NATIONAL IUILDINC CODE O F I N D I A

b) have a crushing strength of at least 14
N/mm’ measured on the net section
when axially loaded in the direction of
compressive stress in the slab.
29.7 Arrangement of Reinforcement - The
recommendations given in 25.3 regarding
maximum distance ,between bars apply to
areas of solid concrete in this form of
construction. The curtailment, anchorage
and cover to reinforcement shall be as
described below:
4 At least 50 percent of the totai main
reinforcement shall be carried through at
the bottom on to the bearing and
anchored in accordance with 25.2.3.3.
b) Where a slab, which is continuous over
supports, has been designed as simply
supported, reinforcement shall be
provided over the support to, control
cracking. This reinforcement shall have a
cross-sectional area of not less than one-
quarter of that required in the middle of
the adjoining spans and shall extend at
least one-tenth of the clear span into
adjoining spans.
4 In slabs with permanent blocks, the side
cover to the reinforcement shall not be
less than IO mm. In all other cases, cover
shall be provided according to 25.4.
29.8 The construction with precast joists and
hollow concrete filler blocks and precast joist
CRITIC AL SECTION
I I A SlabWithout Dropand Column
WithoutColumn Head
CRITICAL SECTION
FOR SHKAR
/
ANY CONCRETE IN THIS AREA TO BE NEGLECTED IN THE
-K-- C A L C U L A T I O N S
-L--d-
‘,‘/
I IC SlabWithout Drop and Column with column Head
Fig. I I Critical Sections for Shear in Flat Slabs
?MT Vt 8TRUcrulAL DESIGN - SLCllOW 3 CONCRETE
.
and hollow clay filler blocks shall conform to
accepted standards [VI-5(23)].
30. FLAT SLABS
JO. I Getieral :The term flat slab means a
reinforced concrete slab. with or without
drops, supported generally without beams, by
columns with or without flared column heads
(see Fig. I I). A flat slab may be solid slab or
may have recesses formed on the soffit so that
the soffit comprises a series of ribs in two
directions. The recesses may be formed by
removable or permanent filler blocks.
30.1.) For the purpose of this clause, the
following definitions shall apply:
a) COLUMN STRIP --column strip means a
design strip having a width of 0.25 12, but
not greater than 0.25 II on each side oft he
column centre-line, where II is the span in
the direction moments are being
determined, measured centre to centre of
supports and 12 is the sp_an transverse to I,.
measured centre to centre of supports.
b) MUDDLE STRIP -Middle strip means a
design strip bounded on each of its
opposite sides by the column strip.
c) PANEL -Panel means that part of a slab
bounded on each of its four sides by the
centre-line of a column or centre-lines of
adjacent spans.
CRITICAL SECTlOh FOR
SHEAR IMMEDI A T EL Y
I IB Slab withDrop andColumn withColumnHead
NOTE - D. is the diameter of column or column head to
be considered for design and the d is effective depth of
slab or drop as appropriate.
“I-f 37
30.2 Proporriening
30.2.1 T HICKNESS OF F LAT S LAB - T h e
thickness of the flat slab shall be generally
controlled by considerations of span of
effective depth ratios given in 22.2.
For slabs with drops conforming to 30.2.2,
span to effective depth ratios given in 22.2
shall be applied directly; otherwise the span to
effective depth ratios obtained in accordance
with provisions in 22.2 shall be multiplied by
0.9. For this purpose, the longer span shall be
considered. The minimum thickness of slab
shall be I2S mm.
30.2.2 DROPS -The drops when provided
shall be rectangular in plan, andhave a length
in each direction not less than one-thirdofthe
panel length in that direction. For exterior
panels, the width of drops at right angles to
the non-continuous edge andmeasured from
the centre line of the cqlumns shall beequal to
one-half the width of drop for interior panels.
30.2.3 COLUMN HEADS -Where column
heads are provided, that portion of a column
head which lies within the largest right
circular cone or pyramid that has a vertex
angle of 90” and can be included entirely
within the outlines of the column and the
column head, shall be considered for design
purposes (see Fig. I I).
30.3 Determination of Bending Moment
30.3.f ME T H O D S OF A NALYSIS AND
D ESIGN -It shall be permissible to design
the slab system ‘by one of the following
methods:
a) The direct d?sign method as specified in
30.4, and
b) The equivalent frame method as specified
in 30.5.
In each case the applicable limitations given
in 30.4 and 30.5 shall be met.
30.3.2 B ENDING M OMENTS IN PANELS WITH
M ARGINAL B EAMS OR W ALLS -Where the
slab is supported by a marginal beam with a
depth greater than 1.5 times the thickness of
the slab, or by a wall, then;
a) the to&l load to be carried by the beam or
wall shall comprise those loads directly
on the wall or beam plus a uniformly
distributed load equal to onequarter of
the total load on the Slab, and
b) the bending moments on the half-column
strip adjacent to the beam or wall shall be
one-quarter of the bending moments for
the first interior column strip.
30.3.3 T RANSFER OF B ENDING M OMENTS
TO COLUMNS -When unbalanced gravity
“,P
load, wind, earthquake, or other lateral loads
cause transfer of bending moment between
slab and column, the flexural stresses shall be
investigated using a fraction, a of the moment
given by:
where
01 = overall dimension of the critical
section for shear in the direction in
whi’ch moment acts, and
a2 = overall dimension of the critical
section for shear transverse to the
direction in which moment acts.
A stab width between lines that are one and
one-half slab or drop panel thickness,I .5 D,
on each side of the column o,r capital may be
considered effective, D being the size of the
column.
Concentration of reinforcement over column
head by closer spacing or additional
reinforcement may be used to resist the
moment on this section.
30.4 Direct Design Method
30.4.1 LI M I T A T I O N S - S l a b s y s t e m s
designed by the direct design method shall
fulfil the following conditions:
a) There shall be minimum of three
continuous spans in each direction,
b) The panels shall be rectangular, and the
ratio of the longer span to the shorter span
within a panel shall not be greater than 2.0.
cl It shall be permissible to offset columns to
a maximum of IO percent of the span in the
direction of the offset notwithstanding the
provision in (b),
4 The successive span lengths in each
direction shall not differ by more thanone-
third of the longer span. The end spans
mhy be shorter but not longer than the
interior spans, and
e) The design live load shall not exceed three
times the design dead load.
30.4.2 T OTAL D ESIGN M OMENT FOR SPAN
30.4.2.1 In the direot.design method, the total
design moment for a span shall be determined
for a strip bounded laterally by the centre line
of the panel on each side of the centre line of
the supports.
30.4.2.2 The absolute sum of the positive and
average negative bending moments in each
N A TIONAL BUnDING CODE OF INDIA
direction shall be taken as:
Mo= 8
w I.
where
M, = total moment;
w = design load on an area h In;
1” = clear s an extending from face to
face oPcolumns, capitals, brackets
or walls, but not less than 0.65II;
1, = length of span in the direction of
M.; and
A = length of span transverse to Ii.
30.4.2.3 Circular supports shall be treated as
square supports having the same area.
30.4.2.4 When the transverse span of the
panels on either side of the centre-line of
supports varies, 12 shall be taken as the
average of the transverse spans.
30.4.2.5 When the span adjacent and parallel
to an edge is being considered, the distance
from the edge to the centre line of the panel
shall be substituted for h in 30.4.2.2.
~~$IS$ATIVE AND P OSITIVE D E S I G N
30.4.3.1 The ne tive design moment shall be
located at the P
ace of rectangular supports,
circular supports being treated as square
supports having the same area.
30.4.3.2 In an interior span, the total design
moment M, shall be distributed in the
following proportions:
Negative design moment 0.65
Positive design moment 0.35
30.4.3.3 In an end span, the total design
moment M, shall be distributed in the
following proportions:
Interior negative design moment:
0,75 - -!L!!L
1+$
Positive design moment:
0.28
0.63 - ;
1+-J&
Exterior negative design moment:
0.65
1+,+
FART VI sIpUCTURAL WSIGN -rlFCllON S C O N C R E T E
ac is the ratio of flexural stiffness of the
exterior columns to the flexural stiffness of
the slab at a joint taken in the direction
moments are being determined and is given by
ZKC
ac_=- K
I
where
ZK, = sum of the flexural stiffnesses of
the columns meeting at the joint;
and
K, = flexural stiffness of the slab,
expressed ds moment per unrt
rotation.
30.4.3.4 It shall be permissible to modify
these design moments by up to 10 percent, so
long as the total design moment M, for the
panel in the direction considered is not less
than that required by 30.4.2.2.
30.4.3.5 The negative momeut section shall
be designed to resist the larger of the two
interior negative design moments determined
for the spans framing into a common support
unless an analysis is made to distribute the
unbalanced moment in accordance with the
stiffness of the adjoining parts.
30.4.4 DI S T R I B U T I O N BENDING
M OMENTS A CROSS P~:EL WIDTH -
THE
Bending moments at critical cross-section
shall be distributed to the column strips and
middle strips as specified in 30.5.5 as
applicable.
30.4.5 MOMENTS IN CQLUMNS
30.4.5.1 Columns built integrally with the.
slab system shall be designed to resist
moments arising from loads in the slab
sybtem.
30.4.5.2 At an interior support, the
supporting members above and below the
slab shall be designed to resist the momentM
given by the followin equation, in direct
proportion to their sti#ness unless a general
analysis is made:
M =. o8 (wd + 0.5 wI)h 1.’ - Wif##
where
( ) 1+’
ac
Wdr WI = design dead and live loads
respectively, per unit area;
I, = length of s an transverse to the
direction oPM;
1, = length of the clear span in the
direction of M, measured face to
face of supports;
Y,-P
 XKC 30.5 Equivalent Frame Method
ac = - where Kc and K, are as
ZK.
defined in 3Q.4.3.3; andw’~, r2 and 30.5.1 AS S U M P T I O N S -Tire b e n d i n g
I’.,refer to the shorter span moments and shear forces may bedete+ned
by an analysis of the structure as acontmuous
30.4.6 EFFECTS OF PA~ERN LOADING -In frame and the following assumptions may be
the direct design method, when the ratio of made:
live load to dead load exceeds 0.5,
a) The structure shall be considered to be
4 the sum of the flexural stiffnesses of the made up of equivalent frames on column
columns above and below the slabZIG, lines taken longitudinally and
shall be such that aC is not less than the transversely through the building. Each
appropriate minimum valueaC m,n speci- frame consists of a row of equivalent
fied in Table II, or columns or supports, bounded laterally
by the centre line of the panel on each side
b) if the sum of theflexural stiffnesses of the of the centre line of the columns or
columns, K,, does not satisfy (a), the supports. Frames adjacent and parallel to
positive design moments for the panel an edge shall be bounded by the edge and
shall be multiplied by the coefficientfl, the centre line of the adjacent panel.
given by the following equation:
W Each such frame may be analysed in its
entirety, or, for vertical loading, each
floor thereof and the roof may be
analyced separately with its columns
being assumed fixed at their remote ends.
Where slabs are thus analysed separately,
it may be assumed in determining the
bending moment at a given support that
ac is the ratio of flexural stiffness of the the slab is fixed at any support two panels
columns above and below the slab. to the distant therefrom provided the slab
flexural stiffness of the slabs at a joint taken in continues beyond that point.
the direction moments are being determined
and is given by: c) For the purpose of determining relative
stiffness of members, the moment of
xck’, inertia of any slab or column may be
ar = -
ZK, assumed to be that of the gross cross-
where K, and K. are flexural stiffnesses of section of the concrete alone.
column and slab respectively. 4 Variations of moment of inertia along the
axis of the slab on account of provision of
drops shall be taken into account. In ‘the
case of recessed or coffered slab which is
TABLE II MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE made solid in the region of the columns,
VALUES OF a< the stiffening effect may be ignored
provided the solid part of the slab does
not extend more than 0.15 I.r, into the
LIVE: LOAD/ DE A D R ATIO + V A LUE OF a, ,nm span measured from the centre line of the
LOAD columns. The stiffening effect of flared
column heads may be ignored.
(1) (2) (3)
OS 0.5 to 2.0 6 30.5.2 LOADING PAITERN
I.0 0.5 0.6
I.0 0.8 O.?
I.0
30.5.2.1 When the loading pattern is known,
I.0 0.7 the str1;cture shall be analysed for the load
I.0 t.25 0.8 concerned.
1.0 2.0 I.2
2.0 0.5 I.3 30.5.2.2 When the live load is variable but
2.0 0.8 I.5 does not exceed threequarters of the dead
2.0 i.0 16 load, or the nature of the live load is such that
2.0 1.25 1.9
2.0 2.0
all panels will be loaded simultaneously, the
4.9 maximum moments may be assumed to occur
30 0.5 I.8 at all sections when full design live load is on
3.0 0.8 2.0
30 1.0,
the entire s&b system.
23
3.0 1.25 2.8
3.0 2.0 130 30.5.2.3 For other conditions of live
.._c____ load/dead load ratio and when all panels are

“I.5 40 NATIONAL l UILLNNG CODE OF INDIA

not loaded simultaneously:
a) maximum positive moment near
midspan of a panel may be assumed to
occur when threequarters of the full
design live load is on the panel and on
alternate panels; and
h) maximum negative moment in the slab at
a support may be assumed to occur when
three-quarters of the full design live load
is on the adjacent panels only.
.30.5;2.4 In no case shall design moments be
taken to be less than those occurring with full
design live load on all panels.
30.53 NEGATIVE D ESIGN M O M E N T
30.5.3.1 At interior supports, the critical
section .for negative moment, in both the
column strip and middle strip, shall be taken
at the face of rectilinear supports, but in no
case at a distance greater than 0.17511 from
the centre of the column whereII is the length
of the span in the direction moments are being
determined, measured centre-to-centre of
supports.
30.5.3.2 At exterior supports provided with
brackets or capitals, the critical section for
negative moment in the direction
perpendicular to the edge shall be taken at a
distance from the face of the supporting
element not greater than one-half the
projection of the bracket or capital beyond
the face of the supporting element.
30.5.3.3 Circular or regular polygon shaped
supports shall be treated as square supports
having the same area.
3’0.5.4 MO D I F IC A T I O N O F M A X I M U M
M OMENT -Moments determined by means
of the equivalent frame method, for slabs
which fulfil the limitations of 30.4 may be
reduced in such proportion that the numerical
sum of the positive and average ne tive
moments is not less than the value o18”total
design moment M,, specified in 30.4.2.2.
30.5.5 DI S TR IBUTION OF B ENDING M O M E N T
AcqOss THE P A N E L WIDTH
30.5;5.1 COLUMN STRIP: NEGATIVE MOMENT
A T A N I N T E R I O R S U P P O R T-At an interior
support, the column strip shall be designed to
resist 75 percent of the total negative moment
in the panel at that ‘support.
30.5.5.2COLUMN STRIP : NEGATIVE MOMENT
AT AN EXTERIOR SUPPORT
a) At an exterior support, the column strip
shall be designed to resist the total
negative moment in the panel at that
support.
PAaT w STRUTTURAL DESIGN-StCllON 4 CONCSETE
b) Where the exterior support consists of a
column or a wall extending for a distance
equal to or greater than three-quarters of
the value of h, the length of span
transverse to the direction moments are
being determined, the exterior negative
moment shall be considered to be
uniformly distributed across the length12.
30.5.5.3 COLUMN STRIP : POSITIVE MOMEN’T
FOR EACH SPAN - For each span, the column
strip shall’be designed to restst 60 percent of
the total positive moment in the panel.
30.5.5.4 M O M E N T S I N T H E M I D D L E
STRIP -The middle strip shall be designed on
the following bases:
a) That portion of the design moment not
resisted by the column strip shall be
assigned to the adjacent middle strips.
b) Each middle strip shall be proportioned
to resist the sum of the moments assigned
to its two half middle strips.
c) The middle strip adjacent and parallel to
an edge supported by a wall shall be
proportioned to resist twice the moment
assigned to half the middle strip
corresponding to the first row of interior
columns.
30.6 Shear in Flat Slab
30.6.1 ,The critical section for shear shall beat
a distance d/2 from the periphery of the
column/capital/ drop panel, perpendicular to
the plane of the slab, where d is the effective
depth of the section (see Fig. I I). The shape in
plan is geometrically similar to the support
immediately below the slab (see Fig. I2A
and 128).
N OTE -For column sections with re-cntrant angles, the
critical section shall be taken as indicated in FIN. I2C
and l2D.
30.6.1.1 In the
case of columns near the free
edge of a slab. the critical section shall be
taken as shown in Fig. 13.
30.6.1.2 When openings in llat slabs are
located at a distance less than ten times the
thickness of the slab from a concentrated
reaction or when the openings are located
within the column strips. the critical sections
specified in 30.6,1 shall be modified so that
the part of the periphery of the critical section
which is enclosed by radial projections of the
openings to the centroid of the reaction area
shall be considered ineffective (see Fig.14).
and openings shall not encroach upon column
head.
30.6.2 CALCULATION OF SHEAR STRESS -
The shear stress 7, shall be the sum of the
“W41
 value< c~lculatcd according to 30.6..?./ and
30.6.2 ,’

30.6.2.i I-he nomlnal shear stress in flat slabs

shall be taken as V/hod where 1’ is the shear
force due to design load, 6, is the periphery ol
the critical sectlon and nis theeffective depth.
30.6.,7.? When unbalanced gravity l o a d .
wind, earthquake or other forces cause
transfer of bending moment between stab and
column. a fraction (1 ~ a) ofthe moment shall
be considered transferred by rccentricity of
the shear about the centroid of the critical
section. Shear stresses shall be taken as
varying linearly about the centroid of the
critlcal scctlon. ‘Ihe vallle o f 0 s h a l l b e
obtained from the equation given tn 30.3.3

.;0.6.3 f’t.KMlSSlBl i SHE A K sl KESS

30.6.3.1 When shear reinforcement is not
provided, the calculated shear stress at the
critical section shall not exceed k,r,,
where
k, = (0.5 + PC) but not greater than 1, &
being the ratio of short side to long
side of the column/ capital: and
TL = 0.25 fi in limit state method of
design, and 0.16 ain working
stress method of design.
30.6.j.2 When the shear stress at the critical
section exceeds the value given in 30.6.3.1, but
less than 1.5 7C shear reinforcement shall be
provided. If the shear stress exceeds 1.5 T,.
the fiat slab shall be redesigned. Shear stresses
13 A 13 B shall be investigated at successive sections
more distant from the support and shear
Fig. I3 Effecr of Free Edges ON Crrlrral reinforcement shall be provided up to a
Section fvr Shear sectton where the shear stress does not exceed
0.5~~. While designing the shear rein-
forcement, the shear stress carried by the
concrete shall be assumed to be 0.5 T, and
reinforcement shall carry the remaining
shear.
30.7 Slab Reinforcement
30.7.1 SPACING -The spacing of bars in a
flat slab. shall not exceed 2 times the slab
thickness, except where a slab is of cellular or
ribbed construction.
30.7.2 AKEA OF R E I N F O R C E M E N T - W h e n
drop panels are used, the thickness of drop
panel for determination of area of
reinforcement shall be the lesser of the
following:
a) Thickness of drop, and
b) Thickness of slab plus one quarter the
distance between edge of drop and edge
of capital.

Fig. 14 Effecr of openings on Critical JO.?.3 MINIMUM LENGTH~F REINFORCEMENT

Secrion for Shear a) Reinforcement in flat slabs shall have the

vi 5.42 NATIONAL lUlLDING CODE OF INDIA

 minimum lengths specified in Fig. 15.
Larger lengths of reinforcement shall be
provided when required by analysis.
b) Where adjacent spans are unequal, the
extension of negative reinforcement
beyond each face of the common column
shall be based on the longer span.
30.7.4 AN C H O R I N G , RE I N F O R C E M E N T
a) All slab reinforcement perpendicular to a
discontinuous edge shall have an
anchorage (straight, bent or otherwise
anchored) past the internal face of the
spandrel beam. wall or column, of an
amount:
I) FOR POSITIVE KEINFORCEMENT
less than I5 cm except that with fabric
reinforcement having a fully welded
transverse wire directly over the
support, it shall be permissible to
reduce this length to one-half of the
width of the support or 5 cm,
whichever is greater; and
2) F O R N E G A T I V E R E I N F O R C E M E N T --~
such that the design stress isdeveloped
at the internal face, in accordance with
Section SA(c).
b) Where the slab. is not supported by a
spandrel beam or wall. or where the slab
cantilevers beyond the support, the
anchorage shall be obtained within
the slab.
30.8 Openings in Flar Slabs -Openings of
any size may be provided in the flat slab if it is
shown by analysis that the requirements of
strength and serviceability are met. However,
for openings conforming to the following, no
special analysis is required:
a) Openings of any size may be placed
within the middle half of the span in each
direction, provided the total amount of
reinforcement required for the panel
without the opening is maintained.
b) In the area common to two column strips,
not more than one-eighth of the width of
strip in either span shall be interrupted by
the openings. The equivalent of
reinforcement intelrupted shall be added
on all sides of the openings.
4 In the area common to one column strip
and one middle strip. not more than onc-
quarter of the reinforcement in either
strip shall be interrupted by the openings.
The equivalent of reinforcement
interrupted shall be added on all sides of
the openings.
4 The shear requirements of 30.6 shall be
sattsfied.
PART V l STRUCTUIAI. DESIGN - SCCTION 5 CONCWTE
31. WALLS
31. I General - Where reinforced concrete
walls are intended to carry vertical loads, they
should be designed generally in accordance
with the recommendations given for columns.
The provisions with regard to transverse
reinforcement to restrain the vertical bars
against buckling need not be applied to walls
in which ‘the vertical bars are not assumed to
assist in resisting compression. The mimmum
reinforcement shall be as given in 31.4. The
minimum thickness of wall should not be less
than 100 mm.
31.2 Load Carrying Capaciry -The load
carrying capacity of the walls shall be cal-
culated as for columns given in Section5A(e)
-not
or 5A(f) however the strength of the wall may
be increased by the values given below:
Ratio of storey I.5 or 1.0 0.5 or
height to more less
length of wall
Percentage 0 IO 20
increase in
strength
Nom -The length of the wall is the overall length or.
where openmgs occur. the length between adjacent
opening.
3 1 . 3 S l e n d e r n e s s Effecrs - When the
effective height of the wall exceeds 12 times
the wall thickness, the slenderness effects shall
be considered as in columns. Where the wall is
stiffened by cross walls, the slenderness ratios
may be determined as given in Part VI
Structural Design, Section 4 Masonry.
31.4 Reinforremenr --The reinforcement
for walls shall be provided as below:
a) t h e m i n i m u m r a t i o o f v e r t i c a l
reinforcement to gross concrete area shall
be:
I) 0.0012 for deformed bars not larger
than I6 mm in diameter and with a
characteristic strength of 415 N/mm’
or greater.
2) 0.0015 for other types of bars.
3) 0.0012 for welded wire fabric not
Larger than 16 mm in diameter.
b) Vertical reinforcement shall be spaced
not farther apart than three times the wall
thickness nor 450 mm.
c) The minimum ratio of horizontal
reinforcement to gross concrete area shall
be:
I) 0,002 for deformed bars not larger
than I6 mm in diameter and with a
characteristic strength of 4 I5 N ! mm’
or greater.
2) 0.0025 for other types of bars.
w-43
 WlfHOUl DROP PANEL WITH DROP PANEL
I

.
75 mm AR DIA O R
mm min. ALL BARS

IN0 SLAB CONtlNUllY 1 ICDNIINIJIT.Y~PROYOEDI IH) SLAB CONI&

Minimum Length Maximum Lcngtb

I
lbhrk l b I 1 L / I
---- ----
Length 0.14 1. I 0.20 1. 0.22 I* 0.30 I. 0.33 I. d.20 1. 0.24 I.
I

.Rcnt brn at exwrior tupporrr may bc used if a general anal+ ig nude.

Non - D ir the dirmettr or Ibe column and tbc dimension of the rcctangul~r column in &bc
direction under canrideration.

Fig. IS Minimum Bend Joint Locations and Extensions for Reinforcement in Fkr Slabs

\I 544 NATIONAL MIlLDING CODE OF INDI A

 3) 0.002 for welded wire fabric not larger
than 16 mm in diameter.
cl) Horizontal reinforcemen! shall bespaced
not farther apart than three times the wall
thickness nor 450 mm.
bread!h of the secflon increased by
ellectrve
7.5 mm for purposes of design (XC Fig. 18).
3 2 . 3 L)q’lll 01. .52c~lrilll l.he d e p t h 01
scctlon shall be taken 3s t h e m i n i m u m
thickness pcrpcndlcular to the soffit of the
staircase.

3’. S I AIKS
.1_‘. I I.;l/;~rrw Sputa of’.Sforrs 1 h e effectlbe
3pan of stairs ulthout. stringer beams shall be
taken as the following horizontal distances:
W h e r e huppotted at top and bottom
risers by bcamsspanning parallel with the
risers. the distance centre-to-centre of
beams:
W h e r e \p,rnnlng on to the edge ol a
landing slab. which spans parallel. with
the risers (YCY Fig. 16). a dlstancccqual to
the gomg ol the stairs plus at each end
tither half the width of the landing or one
mctrc. whichever is smaller; and
?
Where the landing slab span5 in the same F
\,
direction as the stairs. they shall be
considered as acting together to form a
single slab and the span determined as the
distance centre to centre of the
supporting beams or walls. the going
being measured horizontally.

Fig. 18 L o a d i n g WI Srarrs Built into W’al1.s

33. F O O T I N G S

3;. I General Footmgs shali be designed to

Fig. 16 tjjec,live Span for Stairs Supported
at Eac,h End h_~* Landings Sparking Parallel
rvith rha Risers
32.2 Dislribution of Loading on &airs -In
the case of stairs with open wells, where spans
partly crossing at right angles occur. the load
on areas common to any two such spans may
be taken as one-half in each dIrection as
shown in Fig. 17. Where flights or landings
are embedded mto walls for a length of not
less than I IO mm and are designed to span in
the direction of the flight, a I50 mm strip may
be deducted from the loaded area and the
sustain the applied loads, moments and forces
and the induced reactions and to ensure that
any settlement which may occur shall be as
nearly uniform as possible, and the safe
bearing capacity of the soil IS not exceeded.
(see Part VI Structural design. Section 2
Foundations.)
33.1.1 In sloped or stepped footings the
effective cross section in compression shall be
hmited by the area above the neutral plane,
and the angle of slope or depth and location of
steps shall be such that the design
requirements are satisfied at every section.
Sloped and stepped footings that are designed

P A RT V I STRIICTL’RAL DLSICN SECTION 5 CONCRETE “125

,as a unit shall be constructed to assure action
as a unit.
3 3 . 1 . 2 T H I C K N E S S A T THE E D G E O F
FOOTING -In reinforced and plain coritrete
footings, the thickness at the edge shall be not
less than I5 cm for footings on soils, nor less
than 30 cm above the tops of piles for footings
on piles.
33.1.3 In the case of plain concrete pedestals.
the angle between the plane passing through
the bottom edge of the pedestal and the
corresponding junction edge of the column
with pedestal and the horizontal plane (sre
Fig. 19) shall be governed by the expressIon:
where
4” = c a l c u l a t e d m a x i m u m b e a r i n g
pres$ure at the base of the pedestal
in N/mm’. and
.Lk = characteristic strength of concrete
at 28 days in N/mm’
Fig. 19
33.2 Momenrs and Forces
33.2.1’ In the case of footings on piles,
computation for moments and shears may be
based on the assumption that the reaction
from any pile is concentrated at the centre of
the pile.
33.22 For the purpose of computing stresses
in footing6 which support a round or
octagonal concrete column or pedestal, the
face of the column or pedestal shall be taken
as the side of a square inscribed within the
perimete; of the round or octagonal column
or pedestal.
33.2.3 B ENDING M O M E N T
33.2.3.1 The bending moment at any section
shall be determined by passing through the
section a vertical plane which extends
completely across the footing, and computing
the moment of the forces acting over the
v,.,46
entire area of the footing on one side of the
said plane.
33.2.3.2 The greatest bending moment lo be
used in the design of an isolated concrete
footing which supports a column, pedestal or
wall, shall be the moment computed in the
manner prescribed in 33.2.3.1 at sections
located as follows:
iI) At the face of the column. pedestal or
wall. for footings supporting a concrete
column, pedestal or wall;
b) Halfway between the centre line lrnd the
edge of the wall. for footings under
masonry walls; and
C) Halfway between the lace of the column
or pedestal and the edge 01’ the gussetted
base. for footings under gussetted bases.
33.J.4.l ‘I’he shear strength of footings I S
governed by the more severe of the following
two conditions:
a) the footing acting essentially as a wide
beam. with a potential diagonal’ crack
extending in a plane across the entire
width; the critical section for this
condition shall be assumed as a vertical
section located from the face of the
column. pedestal or wall ai a distance
equal to the effective depth of the footing
m case of footings on soils, and a distance
equal to half the effectivedepth of footing
for footings on piles.
b) two-wav action of the footing, with
potential diagonal cracking alone the
surface of truncated cone or pyr.lmid
around the concentrated load; in tms
case. the footing shall be designed for
shear in accordance with appropriate
provisions specified in 30.6.
332.4.2 In computing the external shear on
any sectlon through a footing supported on
piles, the entlre reaction from any pile of
diameter D, whose centre is located D,,, 2 or
more outside the section shall be assumed as
producing shear on the section; the reaction
from any pile whose centre is located L&i 2 or
more inside the section shall be assumed as
producing no shear on the section. For
in’termediate posltions of the pile centre, the
portion of the pile reaction to be assumed as
producir,g she; nnsthe section shall be based
on straight line interpolation between full
value at D,!2 outside the section and zero
value at D,,‘2 inside the section.
33.2,4.3 The critical section for checking the
development length in a footing shall be
assumed at the same planes as those described
for bending moment In 33.2.3 and also aI ail
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

u:her vertical planes where abrupt changes of
section occur. If reinforcement is curtailed,
the anchorage requirements shall be checked
in accordance with .?.C.,l.J
33.3 Tensile Reinforcement -The total
tensile reinforcement at any section shall
provide a moment of resistance at least equal
to the bending moment on the section
calculated in accordance with 33.2.3.
33.3.1 Total tensile reinforcement shall be
distributed across the corresponding resisting
sectlon as given below:
a) In one-way reinforced footing, the
reinforcement shall be distributed
uniformly across the full width of the
tooting;
b) In two-way reinforced square footings,
the remforcement extending in. each
direction shall be distributed uniformly
across the full width of the footing;
c) In two-way reinforced rectangular
footing, the reinforcement in the long
direction shall be distributed uniformly
across the full width of the footing. For
remforcement in the short direction, a
central band equal to the width of the
footing shall be marked along the length
of the footing and portiorc of the
reinforcement determined in accordance
with the equatibn given below shall be
uniformly distributed across the central
band:
Reinforcement in
central band width
Total reinforcement in P+l
short direction
where /3 is rhe ratio of the long side to the
short side of the footing. The remainder of the
reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed
in the outer portions of the footing.
33.4 Transfer of Load at the Base of
Column-The compressive stress in concrete
at the base of a column or pedestal shall be
considered as being transferred by bearmg to
the top of the supporting pedestal or footing.
The, bearing pressure on the loaded area shall
not exceed the permissible bearing stressm
direct compression rrlultiplied by a value
Al
equal to - but not greater than 2;
AZ
where
A, = supporlmg area for hearing of
footing, which in sloped or stepped
footing may be taken as the area of
the lower base of the largest
frustrum of a pyramid or cone
contained wholly within the footing
and having for its upper base, the
PAP1 n s TllUCTI;R4L DLWCN - S E C T I O N J CONCRETE
.
area actually loaded and hhving
side slope of one vertical to two
horizontal; and
AZ = loaded area at the column base.
For wofking stress method of design the
permissible bearing stress on full area of
concrete shall be taken as O-25fct; for limit
state method of design the permissible
bearing stress shall be 0*45&k.
33.4.1 Where the permissible bearing stress
on the concrete in the supponmg or
supported member would be exceeded.
reinforcement shall be provided for
developing the excess force, either by
extending the longitudinal bars into the
supporting member, or by dowels(see33.4.3).
33.4.2 Where transfer of force is
accomplished by reinforcement. t h e
development length of the reinforcement shall
be sufficient ta transfer the compression or
tension to the supporting member in
accordance with 25.2.
33.4.3 Extended longitudinal reinforcement
or dowels of at least O-5 percent of the crou-
sectional area of the supported column or
pedestal and a minimum‘of four bars shallbe
provided. Where dowels an used, their
diameter shall not exceed the diameter of the
column bars by more than 3 mm.
33.4.4 Column bars of diameters larger than
36 mm, in compression only can be dowelled
2 at the footings with bars of smaller size of the
necessary arca. The dowel shal! extend into
the column, a distance equal to the
development length of the column bar and
into the footing, a distance. qua1 to the
development length of the dowel.
SECTION SA(e) STRUCTURAL DESIGN:
LIMIT STATE METHOD
34. SAFETY AND SERVICEABILITY
REQUIREMENTS
34.1 General-In the method of design
based on limit state concept, the structure
shall be designed to withstand safely all loads
liable to act on it throughout its life; it shall
also satisfy the serviceability requirements,
such as limitations on deflection and
cracking. The acceptable limit for the safety
and serviceability requirements before failure
occurs is called a ‘Limit State’. The aim of
design is to achieve acceptable probabilities
that the structure wtil not become unfit for the
use for which it is intended, that is, that it will
not reach a limit state.
“12’
34.1.1 All relevant limit states shall be
considered in design to ensure an adequate
degree of safety and serviceability. In general,
the structure shall be designed on the basis of
the most critical liniit state and shall be
checked for other limit states.
$4.1.2 For ensuing the above objective, ‘he
design should be based on characteristic
values for material strengths and applied
loads, which take into account the variations
in the material strengths and in.the loads to be
supported. The characteristic values should
be based on statistical data if available; where
such data are not available they should be
based on experience. The ‘design values’ are
derived from the characteristic values
through the use of partial safety factors, one
for material strengths and the other for loads.
In the absence of special considerations these
factors should have the values given in 35
according to the material, the type of loading
and the limit state being considered.
34.2 Limit State of Coilbpse-The limit state
of collapse of the structure or part of the
structure could be assessed from rupture of
one or more critical sections and from
buckling due to elastic or plastic instability
(including the effects of sway where
appropriate) or overturning. The resistance to
bending, shear, torsion and axial loads at
every section shall not be less than the
appropriate value at that section produced by
the probable most unfavourable combination
of loads on the structure using the
appropriate partial safety factors.
34.3 Limit States of Serviceabdity
34.3.1 DEFLECTION-Limiting VCtlUeS of
deflections are given in 22.2.
34.3.2 CRACKING -Cracking of concrete
should not adversely affect the appearance or
durability of the structure; and’ acceptable
limits of cracking would vary with the type of
structure and environment. The actual widths
of cracks will vary between wide limits and the
prediction of absolute maximum width is not
possible.
Non-As rspidc thcYollowing may be regarded as
rcasorublr lirmts:
The surfaa width of cracks should not. in gcncml, exceed
0.3 mm. For ~rticulrly aggressive environment, such 9s
tk ~wlc c+pry in Tnbk 19. the urcucd rurfmx width
of cracks at points nearest to the main reinforcement
should not, in pncnl, exc&ii 0304 times the nominal
corn to the main reinforcement. The possibility of some
ctacks be& wider may be taken into account, if
-rY.
34.4 Otkr Limit States-Structures designed
for unusual or special functions shall comply
with any relevadt additional limit state
considered appropriate to that structure.
n-9
35. CHARACTERlSTlC AND DESIGN
VALUES AND PARTIAL S.IZFETY
FACTORS
3 5 . 1 C h a r a c t e r i s t i c S t r e n g t h o./
Materials-The term’characteristic strength’
means that value of the strength of the
material below which not more than 5 percent
of the test results are expected to 1811. The
characterisctic strength for concrete shall be
in accordance with Table 2, modified by5.2.1
regarding increase in concrete strength with
age. Until the relevant Indian Standard
Specifications for reinforcing steel are
modified to include the concept of
characteristic strength, the characteristic
value’ shall be assumed as the minimum
yield/$2 percent proof stress specified in the
relevant Indian Standard specifications.
35.2 Characteristic Loads-The t e r m
‘characteristic load’ means that value of load
which has a 95 percent probability of not
being exceeded during the life ofthz structure.
Since data are not available to express loads
in statistical terms, for the purpose of this
section loads specified in Part VI Structural
design, Section I Loads may be assumed as
the characteristic loads:
35.3 Design Values
35.3.1 MA T E R I A L S -The design strength of
the materials,fJ is given by:
where
/ = characteristic strength of the
material (see 35.1), and
ym = partial safety factor appropriate to
the material and the limit state
being considered.
352.2’ LoADs -The design load, Fd is given
by:
Fd = F Y1
where
F = characteristic load (see 3S.Z), and
Y‘ = partial safety f&tor appropriate to
the nature of loading and the limit
state being considered.
35.3.3 C ONSEQUENCES OF A TTAINING L I M I T
STATE-where the consequences of a
structure attaining a limit state are of a serious
nature such as huge loss of life and disruption
of the economy higher values foi y,,, and y,
than those given under 35.4.1 and 35.4.2 may
be applied.
35.4 Partial Safety Factors
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 .

35.4.1 PA R T I A L S A F E T Y F A C TO R y, 4 Equilibrium between the internal forces

FORL O A D S - T h e v a l u e s o f yr given m and the external loads is maintained.
Table 12 shall normally be used.
b) The ultimate moment of resistance
provided at any section of a member is
not less than 70 percent of the moment at
that section obtained from an elastic
TABLE I2 VALUES OF PARTIALSAFETY FACTOR
y, FOR LOADS maximum moment diagram covering all
appropriate combinations of loads.
(Clauses 18.3 and 35.4.1)
c) The elastic moment at any section in a
LOAD L IMIT S TATE OF L IMIT S T A T E S member due to a particular combination
C OMBINATION COLLAPSE OF
SERVICEAIJILITY of loads shall not be reduced by more
than 30 percent of the numerically largest
wLLDL L L WL’ moment given anywhere by the elastic
(1) (2) (3 (4) (3 (6) (7) maximum moments diagram for the
DL + LL I.5 I.S - I .o- I.0 -
particular member, covering all
appropriate cotibination of loads.
D L + W L 1.5or ~ 1.5 I.0 - I.0
0.9. d) At sections where the moment capacity
after redistribution is less than that from
D L + L L + W L 1.2 1.2 I.2 I.0 0.8 0.8 the elastic maximum moment diagram,
N O T E I ~ Whllc considering earthquake effects. the following relationship shall be
substirurc EL for WL. satisfied:
NOTE 2-For Ihe limit states of serviceability, the values
of y, given in this Table are apphcable for short term
eflrcrs. Whllc asscssmg the ion term effects due to creep,
$- + s Q 0.6
the dead load and thar parr o B rhe hvc load hkely 10 be
permanent may only bc considered.
where
*This value LS 10 bc constdcrcd when stabihty against X” = depth of neutral axis,
overturning or stress reversal Is crctical. d = effective depth, and
6M = percentage reduction in moment.
3 5 . 4 . 2 PA R T I A L S A F E T Y F A C T O R yrn FOR e) In structures in which the structural
M A T E R I A L Sr RENGI H frame provides the lateral stability, the
reductions in moment allowed by
35.4.2.1 When assessing the strength of a condition 36.1./(c) shalt be restricted to
structure or structural member for the limit IO percent for structures over 4 storeys in
state of collapse. the values of partial safety height.
factor, y,,, should be taken as 1.5 for concrete
and I. I5 for steel. 36.12 AN A L Y S I S O F SLABS SP A N N I N G I N
Nolt y., ~alucr a r e a l r e a d y Incorporawd in r h e T w o D I R E CT I O N S A T R I G H T A N G L E S- -
equations and tables glren in this Code for Ilmlt slate Yield line theory or any other acceptable
design. method may be used. Alternatively the
provisions given in Appendix C may be
35.4.2.2 When assessing the deflection, the followed.
material properties such as modulus of
elasticity, should be taken as those associated
with the characteristic strength of the 37. LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE:
material. FLEXIIRE
37. I Assump!ions -- Design for the limit
36. ANALYSIS state of collaose in flexure shall be based on
the assumptibns given below:
36. I Anal,~~si.s qf Strticturr M e t h o d s o f
a) Plane sections normal to the axis remain
analysis as rn 21 shall be used. 1 he material plane after bending.
strength to be assumed shall be characteristic
values in t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f e l a s t i c b) The maximum stram In concrete at the
properties of members lrrespectlvc of the limit outermost compression fibre IS taken as
state being considered. Redistribution of the 0.003 S in bending.
calculated moments may be made as given in c) T h e r e l a t i o n s h i p b e t w e e n t h e
36.1.1. compressive stress distribution In
concrete and the strain in concrete may
36.1.1 REUISTRIWIIW OF MO M E N T S IS bc assumed to be rectangle, trapezoid,
CO”~TISI;OI;S BFAMS ASI) FRAML~ - The parabola or any other shape which results
redistribution of moments may becarried out in prediction of strength m substantial
sarlsfying the following conditions. agreement with the results of tests. An
 L

acceptable stress-strain curve is given in

Fig. 20. For design purposes, the
compressive strength of concrete in the. _-___--
---__- ‘Y

F
structure shall be assumed to be 0.67 -*_--
times the characteristic strength: The W-M-
’ I ty/l .15
partial s a f e t y f a c t o r Y’m = 1 . 5 _--- I’
shall be applied in addition to this. _-- I’ ’1 :
NOTE --For the stress-strain curve in Fig. 20, the design ,: /y ’
stress block parameters are as follows (SPP Fig 21):
1’ /, I
Area of stress block = 0.36Jr. xu I’ ‘I
#Ii, I
Depth of ccntre of compresivc = 0.42 X.
In
force from the extreme fibre WI
in compression
iti
where c
v)
&r = charactcrlstlc compressive strength of E,=200000 N/mm2
concrete. and
x. = depth of neutral axis.

22 A Cold Worked Deformed Bar

‘Y

0-J
w
ii!
ii
I Es = 200000 N/mm2

f‘rg. 22 Kt~presenlalive Stress S t r a i n C‘urws

jbr Reln/c~rcemrnr

shall not be less than:

.fE
+ 0.002
Fig. 21 Stress Block Padmeters -1.15 E,
where
4 The tensile strength of the concrete is /; = characteristic strength of steel, and
ignored.
E, = modulus of elasticity of steel.
e) The stresses in the reinforcement are
derived from representative stress-strain Nur~ -The limiting vrlun of the depth of neutral axis
for different grades of steel bscd on the assumptions
curve for the type of steel used. Typical m 37.1 arc as follows:
curves are given in Fig. 22. For design
purposes, the partial safety factor y,,,, /, Y..‘mu d
equal to I. I5 shall be applied. 250 O.J3

The maximum strain in the tension 415 0.48

reinforcement in the section at failure 500 0 46

VIP N A T I O N A L WlLDlNC CODE OF IWDlA


The expressions for obtainmg the moments of resistance
for rectangular and T-Sections, based on the
assumptions of 37.1, are given in Appendix E.
38. LlMlT STATI. OF COLLAPSE:
COMPRESSION
38.1 Assumptions-In addition to the
assumptions given in 37.1(a) to 37./(e) for
flexure, the following shall be assumed:
a) The maximum compressive strain in
concrete in axial compression is taken as
0.002.
b) The maximum compressive strain at the
highly compressed extreme fibre in
concrete subjected to axial compression
and bending and when there is no tension
on the section shall be 0.003 5 minus 0.75
times the strain at the least compressed
extreme fibre.
38.2 Minimum Eccentricity-- All members
in compression shall be designed for the
minimum eccentricity in accordance with
24.4. Where calculated eccentricity is larger.
the minimum eccentricity should be ignored.
38.3 Short Axially Loaded Members in
Compression -The member shall be
designed by considering the assumptions
given in 38.1 and the minimum eccentricity.
When the minimum eccentricity as specified
in 24.4 does not exceed 0.0s times the lateral
dimension, the members may be designed by
the following equation:
P, = O-4/%. A, + 0+67f,. A,
where
P. = axial load on the member,
fck = characteristic compressive strength
of the concrete,
A, = area of concrete,
7y= characteristic strength of the
compression reinforcement, and
A , = area of longitudinal reinforcement
for columns.
38.4 Compression Members with Helical
Reinforcemenr - T h e s t r e n g t h o f
compression members with helical
reinforcement satisfying the requirement
of 38.4.1 shall be taken as 1.05 times the
strength of similar member with lateral ties.
38.1.1 The ratio of the volume of helical
reinforcement to the volume of the coreshall
not be Ie& than @36 (An/A, - 1)&/f,,
where
A‘ = gross area of the section,
rmnmuamu DUWN-SUBlON S CONCRSTS
.
A, = area of the core of the helically
reinforced column measured to the
outside diameter of the helix,
/;t = characteristic compressive strength
of the concrete, and
f,= characteristic strength of the helical
reinforcement but not exceeding
415 N/mm’.
38.5 Members Su&ecI to Combined, Axial
Load and Uniaxiol Bending-- A member
subjected to axial force and uniaxial bending
shall bc designed on the basis of38.1 and 38.2.
NOTf -The design of member subject to combined axial
load and uniaxial bending will involve lengthy
calculation by trial and error. In order tb overcome these
difhculties interaction diagrams may be used. These have
been prepared and published rn ‘SP : 16 Design aids for
reinforced concrete to IS: 456 1978’.
38.6 Members Subject to Combined Axial
Lood and Biaxial Bending-The resistance
of a member subjected to axial force and
biaxial bending shall be obtained on the basis
of assumptions given in 38.1 and 38.2 with
neutral axis so chosen as to satisfy the
equilibrium of load and moments about two
axes. Alternatively such members may be
designed by the following equation:
where
M.., MU, = moment about x and _V axes due
to design loads;
Mu,~,Muyl = maximum uniaxial moment
capacity for an axial load of P,,
bending about x and y axes,
respectively; and
a. is related to P./P,,,
where P,,= 0.45 fct. A, + 0.75 Jy A,.
For values of PJ P., = 0.2 to 0.8, the values of
on vary linearly from 1 .O to 2.0. For values less
than 0.2, ar, is I .O; for values greater than 0.8,
an is 2.0.
38.7 Slender Compression Members-The
design of slender compression members (see
21.1.1) shall be based on the forces and the
moments determined from an analysis of the
structure including the effect of deflections on
moments and forces. When the effect of
deflections are not taken into account in the
analysis, additional moment givenin 38.7.1
shall be taken into account in the appropriate
direction,
38.7.1 The additional moments M, and MIY
” WSl
shall be calculated by the following formulae: flanged sections shall be taken as
the breadth of the web, h,; and
d = effective depth.
39.1.1 B EAMS OF V A R Y I N G DEPIH -In the
case of beams of varying depth, the equation
shall be ‘modified as:
whsre
P, = axial load on the member,
Tb = ---
I,, = effective length in respect of the hd
major axis,
where
I,, = effective length in respect of the
minor axis, TV, V,,. b and dare the same as in 3Y.l:
D = depth of the cross section at right M, = bending moment at the sectlon,
angles to the major axis, and and
h = width of the member. P= angle between the top and the
bottom edges of the beam.
For design of section, 38.5 or 38.6 as
appropriate shall apply. The negative sign In the formula applies when
Norm I --In the case of a braced column wtthour any t h e b e n d i n g m o m e n t M, I n c r e a s e s
transverse loads occurrmg tn us hctght. the additional numertcally in the same direction as the
moment shall bc,added to an initial moment equal IO sum effective depth d Increases, and the positive
ol 0.4 M,, and 0.6 M,J where Mwl IS the larger end sign when the moment decreases numerically
moment and MUI is the smaller end moment (assumed
ncgarlve 11 the column IS bent tn double curvature). In no in this direction.
case shall the tnttial moment be less than 0 4 M.2; nor the
total moment tncludtng the initial moment be less than 39.2 Design Shear Strength 01 Concrere
,M..: For unbraccd columns, theaddutonal moment shall
be added to the end moments.
39.2.1 W ITHOUT SH E A R RLINFORCE-
holr 2 I. tinbraced compression members. at any gtvcn MENT -The design shear strength ofconcrete
level or slorey. subject to lateral toad arc usually in beams without shear reinforcement is given
constramed IO deflect equally. In such cases slenderness
ratlo lor each column may be taken as the average for all in Table 13.
columns acting in the same dtrectton
39.2.1.1 For solid slabs, the design shear
7. I. I The values given by equation 38.7.1
_IR. strength for concrete shall be kr<, where k has
may be multiplied by the following factor: the values gl\cn helo*
&wall Depprh of Slab, m m k

\W or more 1.00
27 I .05
where 2.50 I IO
P, = axial load on compression member, 225 I.15
2cil I.20
Put = as defined in 38.6, and 175 I.25
I50 or less t.30
Ph = axial load corresponding to the
condition of maximum compressive VOTE ---This prowlon shall not apply to flat slabs for
which 30.6 shall apply.
strain of 0.003 5 in concrete and
tensile strain of 0.002 in outermost 39.2.2 SH E A R STRENGTH OF M E M B E R S
layer of tension steel. U NDER A XIAL C OMPRESSION -For
members subjected to axial compression P,,
the design shear strength of concrete rc. given
39. LJMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: in Table 13, shall be multiplied by the
SHEAR following factor:
39.1 Nominal Shear Stress-The nominal 3P”
shear stress tv in beams or slabs of uniform ~ but not exceeding 1.5
’ = ’ + ,‘&fck
depth shall be obtained by the following
equation: where
V” P, = axial compressive force in Newtons,
Iv= bd
A, = gross area of the concrete section in
where mm2, and
V,, = shear force due to design loads; fck = characteristic compressive strength
b = breadth of the member, which for of concrete.

“,.P NAnoNAL l lmnmG cxmsor~

 TABLE 14 MAXIMUM SHEAR STRESS,
TABLE 13 DESIGN SHEAR STRE,NGTH OF
CONCRETE, 7c, N/mm’ Tcmax. N/mm’

(Clauses 39 2.3. 39 2.3 I and 40.3 I)

(Clnuses39.2.1. 392.2, 39.3.39.4, 40.3.2,40.3.3anJ40.4.3)
GRADE OI; CoWHE 5 C‘OWRETF GRXUE TC ma. N/mm’
looA_’ ,- A M IS 2.5
\
M 20 2.8
hd M. I5 M 20 M 25 M 30 M 35 M 40 M’25 3.1
M 30 3.5
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) M 35 3.7
M4O 4.0
0.25 0.35 0.36 0.36 0.37 0.37 0.38 .
0.50 0.46 0.48 0.49 0.50 0.50 0.51
Shear re. forcement shall be provided to
0.75 0.54 0.56 0 57 0 59 0.59 0.60 carry a f s ear equal to VU - fC. bd. The
1.00 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.67 0.68 strength of shear reinforcement L’- shall be
calculated as below:
1.25 0.64 0.67 0.70 0.71 0.73 0 74
a) For vertical stirrups:
1.50 0.68 0.72 0.74 0.7b 0.78 0.79

1.75 0 71 0.75 0.78 0.80 0.82 0.84 v

“I
= 0.87/, A,, d
2.00 0.71 0.79 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.88
S”

2.25 0.71 0.81 0.85 0.88 0.90 0.92 b) For inclined itirrups or a series of
bars bent-up at different cross-sections:
2.50 0.71 0.82 0 88 0.91 0.93 0.95
2.75 0.71 0.82 0.90 0.94 0.96 0 98 0.87 fy At. d
V”, = 5”
(sin [Y + cos n)
3.00 0.71 0.82 0.92 0.96 0.99 1.01
NOTE -The wrm A, 1s the arc? of longitudinal tension c) For single bar or single group of parallel
reinforcement which continuer al leas1 one effective bars, all bent-up at the same cross section:
depth beyond the secttdn bein considered except ar
supports where the full arca o f tension rclnforccmenl
may be used provided the dckling conforms 10 25.2.2 VU, = 0.87J, A,, sin (I
and 2S.Z.3.
where

39.2.3 W ITH SHEAR REINFORCEMENT - A,, = total cross-sectional area of stirrup

legs or bent-up bars within a
Under no circumstances, even with shear
distance s,;
reinforcement, shall the nominal shear stress
in beams T,, exceed fc ,,,.. given in Table 14. sv = spacing of the stirrups or bent-up
bars along the length of the
39.2.3.1 For solid slabs, the nominal shear member;
stress shall not exceed half the appropriate
values given in Table 14. TV = nominal shear stress;
7t = design shear strength of the
39.3 Minimum Shear Reinforcement - When concrete;
rv is less than rC given in Table I3;minimum
shear reinforcement shall be provided in b = breadth of the member which for
accordance with 2.5.5.1.6. flanged beams, shall be taken as the
breadth of the web b,;
3 9 . 4 D e s i g n o f Sheor Reinforcement-
When fr exceeds rC given in Table 13, shear /y= characteristic strength of thestirrup
or bent-up reinforcement which
reinforcement shall be provided in any of the
shall not be taken greater than
following forms:
415 N/mm*,
a) Vertical stirrups,
angle bttween the inclined stirrup
b) Bent-up bars along with stirrups, and or bent-up bar and the axis of the
member, not less than 45’; and
c) lnciined stirrups.
d = effective depth.
Where bent up bars are provided, their
N OTE I -Where more lhan one type of shear
contribution towards shear resistance shall reinforcement is used 10 reinforce the same portion of the
not be more than half that of the total shear beam, the total shear resistance shall be compulcd as the
reinforcement. sum of the mistances for the various types separately.

PART VI ST’RUCTURAL DESIGN -SECTION 5 CONCRETE “I-P

Norm 2-The arta of the stirrups shall not be Lear than
the minimum qwifieij in ZS.5.1.6.
40. L I M I T S T A T E O F C O L L A P S E :
TORSION
40.1 General-In general, where the
torsional resistance or stiffness of members
has not been taken into account in the
analysis of structure, no specific calculations
for torsion will be necessary; adequatecontrol
of any torsional cracking being provided by
the required nominal shear reinforcement.
Where the torsional resistance or stiffness of
members is taken into account in the analysis,
the members shall be designed for torsion.
NOTE --The approach to design in this clause for torsion
is as follows:
Torsional reinforcement is not. calculated separately
from that required for bending and shear. Instead the
total longitudmal reiaforcement 18 determined for a
fictltlous bending moment which is a function of actual
bcndlng moment a n d t o r s i o n ; sirnllarly w e b
reinforcement IS determined for a fictiticius shear which IS
a function of actual shear and torsion.
The design rules laicj down in JO.3 and
40. I. 1
40.4 shall apply to beams of solid rectangular
cross section. However, these clauses may
also be applied to flanged beams, by
substituting h, for h in which case they are
generally conservative; therefore specialist
literature may be referred to.
40.2 Criric~l Serrion-Sections located less
than-a distance d, from the face of the support
may be designed for the same torsion as
computed at a distance d, where d is rhe
effective depth.
40.3 Shear and Torsion
40.3.1 EQ U I V A L E N T S H E A R- E u i v a l e n t
shear, V,. shall be calculated Prom the
formula:
where
V, = equivalent shear,
VU = shear,
Tu = torsional moment, and
b = breadth of beam.
The equivalent nominal shear stress, rwr in
this case .shall be calculated as iven in 39. I,
except for substituting VU by V,. t he values of
rrr shall not exceed the values of rC ,,,., given in
Table 14.
40.3.2 If the equivalent nomrnal shear stress,
m does not exceed r., given in Table 13.
VI-s-
minimum shear reinforcement shall be
provided as per 25.5.1.6.
40.3.3 If tvc exceeds TV given in Table 13. both
longitudinal and transverse reinforcement
shall be provided in accordance with 40.4.
40.4 Reinforrement in Members Subjecred
to Torsion
40.4.1 Reinforcement for torsion, when
required, shall consist of longitudinal and
transverse reinforcement.
40.4.2 LO N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O R C E M E N T - -
The longitudinal reinforcement shall be
designed to resist an equivalent bending
moment, M,I. given by M,, = Mu + M,,
where
M, = bending moment at the cross section,
and
where
T. is the torsional moment, D is the overall
depth of the beam and b is the breadth of the
beam.
40.4.2.1 If ‘the numerical value of Mt as
defined in 40.4.2 exceeds the numerical value
o f t h e m o m e n t M., l o n g i t u d i n a l
reinforcement shall be provided on the
flexural compression face, such that the beam
can also withstand an equivalent Mtz given by
Me3 = Mt - M,, the moment Mtz being taken
as acting in the opposite sense to the moment
M”.
40.4.3 TR A N S V E R S E R E I N F O R C E M E N T - -
Two legged closed hoops enclosing the corner
longitudinal bars shall have an area of cross
section & given by
T”S” F”S,
AS, = b>, (0*87/,) + 2.5 d, (0*87/,)
but the total transverse reinforcement shall
not be less than
(fw - T<) b.s,
0.87 f,
where
Tu = torsiontil moment,
V” = shear force,
3” = spacing of the stirrup reinforcement,
b, = centre to centre distance between
corner bars in the direction of the
width,
N A T I O N A L BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 d, = centre to centre distance between
corner bars in the direction of the
depth,
b Ts breadth of the member,
h = characteristic strength ofrhc stirrup
reinforcement,
7°C .= equivalent shear stress as specified
in 40.3.1, and
Tc = shear strength of the concrete as per
Table 13.
43.3 A s s u m p t i o n s f o r D e s i g n o f
Members-In the methods based on elastic
theory, the following assumptions shall be
made:
At any.. cross section, plane sections
before bending remain plane after
bending.
b) All tensile stresses are taken up by
reinforcement and none by concrete,
except as otherwise specifically
permttted.

41. LlMlTSTATEOFSERVlCEABlLITY: cl The stress-strain relationship of steel and

DEFLECTION
4 1 . 1 Flexural Members-In a l l n o r m a l
cases, the deflection of a flexural member will
not be excessive if the ratio of its span to its
effective depth is not greater than the
appropriate ratios given in 22.3. When
deflections are calculated according to
Appendix B, they shall not exceed the
permissible values given in 22.2.
42. LIMtTSTATEOFSERVlCEABlLITY:
CRACKING
concrete, under working loads, is a
straight line.
d) The modular ratio m has the value 280
3 ocbc
where CT,& is permissible compressive stress
due to bending in concrete in N/mm’ as
specified in Table IS.
NOTE ~ The expression given for m partially takes into
account long-term cffec~s such as creep. Therefore this m
is not the same as the modular ratio derived based on the
value of .!I, given in S.2.3.l.

42.1 Flexural Members - In general, TABLE IS PERMISSIBLE STRESSES IN CONCRETE

compliance with the spacing requirements of
reinforcement given in 25.3.2. should be (Clause3 43.3, 44.1. 44.1.2, 44.3 and46.2)
sufficient to control flexural cracking. All values in N/mm’

42.2 Compression Members -~ Cracks due to G RADE OF ~RMISMBLE STRESS PERMISSIBLE

bending in a compression member subjected C ONCRETE IN C OMPRESSION STRESS IN
BOND
to a design axial load greater than 0.2.&k A,, ( AV E R A G E ) F O R
where Jet is the characteristic compressive PLAIN BARS
strength of concrete and A, is the area of the A
, IN T E N S I O N

gross section of the member, need not bc ‘Bending Direct

checked. A member subjected to lesser load
(1) (2) (3) (4)
than 0.2Jk A, may be considered as a flcxural
member for the purpose of crack control (see a&c UCC *bd
42. I).
M IO 3.0 2.5 -

M 1s 5.0 4.0 0.6

S E C T I O N SA(f) S T R U C T U R A L M 20 7.0 5.0 0.8

DESIGN: WORKING STRESS METHOD u 25 8.5 6.0 0.9

43. GENERAL M 30 IO.0 8.0 I.0

M 3s I I.5 9.0 I.1

43. I General Design Requirements - The
general design requirtmcnts of Section SA(c)
shall apply to this part.
13.2 Redistribution of Moments-Except
where the sim lifted analysis using
coefficients (see 2P.5) is used. the moments
O v e r the gu ports for any assumed
arrangement o P loading, includmg the dead
load moments may each be increased or
decreased by not more than 15 percent,
provided that these modified moments over
the supports are used for the calculation of the
corresponding moments in the spans.
M40 13.0 10.0 I.2
HOTE I -The valuer of permissible shear swear in
concrete are given in Table I?.
NOTE 2 -The bond stress given in cold ~lull be incrcwd
by 25 pcrcenl for ban in compression.
44. PERMISSIBLE STRESSES
44.1 Permissible Stresses in Concretr-
Permirsiblc stresses for the various gmlr of
concrete shall be taken as .those given in
Tables 15 and If.

FART V I tTlUClUUL DtSlGN-U&ON 5 CONC~LTt

Nolr For mcrease in strength with age. 5.2 I shall be
apphcablc (we also Note 3 of 52.1) The valuer of
permlsslblc stress shall be obtained by lnterpolatlon
between. rhc grades of concrete.
44.1.1 DIRKI TENSION F o r m e m b e r s In
direct tension, when full tension is taken by
the reinforcement alone, the tensile stress
shall be not greater than the values given
below:
Grade of C’oncrult* 7‘ensile Slress.
N/mm’
M IO 1.2
M I5 2.0
M 20 2.8
M 25 3.2
M 30 3.6
M 35 4.0
M 40 4.4
The tensile stress shall be calculated as
F,
A, + trr A,,
where
E = total tension on the member minus
pretension in steel, if any, before
concreting,
A, = cross-sectional area of concrete
excluding any finishing material and
reinforcing steel;
111 -_ modular r~atio; and
A,, = cross-sectional area of reinforcing
steel in tension.
44.1.2 BOND SIKFSS tC)R DEfXIRMEDRARS
For deformed bars conforming IO accepted
standards [Vi-S( I I)]. the bond stresses given
in Table 15 may be increased by 40 percent.
4 4 . 2 Pernli.~.~ibl~J SIresscs i n SIEP~
Rt~in_/krtwc~nr Permissible stresses in steel
reinforcement shall not exceed the values
specified in Table 16.
442.1 In flcxural members the value of cl,,
given in Table 16 is applicable at the centroid
of the tensile reinforcement subject to the
condition that when more than one layer of
tensile reinforcement is pr,ovided. the stress at
the centroid of the outermost layer shall not
exceed by more than IO percent the value
given in Table 16.
44.3 In~r~~ase in Permissible Swesses - Where
stresses due to wind (or earthquake),
temperature and shrinkage effects are
combined with tho,e due to dead, live and
impact load, the stresses specified in Tables
15. 16 and I7 may be exceeded up to a limit of
33 f percent. Wind and seismic forces need
not be considered as acting simultaneously.
45. PERMISSIBLE LOADS IN
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
45.1 Pedestals and Short Columns w,irh
Lateral Ties-The axiai load P permissible
on a pedestal or short column reinforced with
longitudinal bars and lateral ties shall not
exceed that given by the following equation:
b
p = us< A, + a,, A,,
where
oci = permissible stress in concrete in
direct compression.
A, = cross-sectronal area. of Concrete
excluding any finishing material and
reinforcing steel,
OK = permissible compressive stress for
column bars, and
A,, = cross-sectional area of the
longitudinal steel.
NC111 1 h e m~mmum cccenrrlciry mcnrloned HI 24 4
may he deemed ~o,be incurporated in theaboveequation.
45.2 Shorr C o l u m n s s,irh Helical
Rtw~fi~rcrrrrem - ‘I he permissible load for
columns with helical reinforcement satisfying
the requirement 01 36.4. I shall be 1.05 times
the permissible load for similar member with
lateral ties or rings.
45.3 Long C o l u m n s - T h e m a x i m u m
permissible stress in a reinforced concrete
column or part thereof having a ratio of
effective column length to least lateral
dimension above 12 shall not exceed that
which results from the multiplication of the
appropriate maximum permissible stress as
specified under 44.1 and 44.2 by the
coefficient C, given by the following formula:
1
C,= ]*25-L
486
where
c, = reduction coefficient;
I,, = effective length of column; and
b= least lateral dimension ofcolumn; for
column with helical reinforcement, b
is the diameter of the core.
For more exact calculations, the maximum
permissible stresses in a reinforced ccncrete
column or part thereof having a ratio of
effective column length to least lateral radius
of gyration above 40 shall not exceed those
which result from the multiplication of the
appropriate maximum permissible stresses
specified under 44.1 and 44.2 by the
PMTlONAL WlLDlNC CODE OF INDIA
 .

coefficient C, given by the following formula: AC
I equal to the gross area of the concrete
c, = 1.25 - A
160 i,ifi
where imin is the least radius of gyration.
45.4 Composite Columns
a) A LLOWABLF LOAD-The allowable
axial load P on a composite cokmn
consisting of structural steel or cast-iron
column thoroughly encased in concrete
reinforced with both longitudinal and
spiral reinforcement shall not exceed
that given by the following formula:
b)
P = ucc A, + ac A, t am A,,,
occ = permissible stress in concrete in
direct compression;
net area of concrete section; which is
section - A, - A,,,;
permissible compressive stress for
column bars;
cross-sectional area of longitudinal
bar reinforcement;
allowable unit stress in metal core,
not to exceed 125 N/mm* for a steel
core, or 70 N/mm’ for a cast iron
core; and
the cross-sectional area of the steel or
cast iron core.
M ETAL C ORE AND REINFORCEMENT-
The cross-sectional area of the metal
core shall not exceed 20 percent of the
gross area of the column. If a hollow
metal core is used, it shall be filled with
concrete. The amount of longitudinal
and spiral reinforcement and the

TABLE 16 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES Ilc: STFFI HGINTFORCEMENT

(CllWe #.2,4+.3 and 4.2)
-fVPE OF STRESS IN ~EIMISSIHLC Srarssts IN N/mm*
STEEL REINFoI~CE~~EVI

Mild Steel Ban. or Medium Tensile Steel or Hi h Yield Strength

Deformed Mild Steel Deformed Medium Defarmed Ban Con-
Ban Conforming to Ten&c Steel Ban forming to(Gmdc Fe419
Acce ted Standards Conforming to Accc ted Acce ted Standards
F I-Y1 01 Stand&r& [VI-Y I P)] PVM(l I)]

(1) (2) (5) (4) (5)

0 Tmrion (u. .or 0,):
(a) Up to and including 20 mm 140 Half the guaranteed 230
yield stress subject to a
(b) Over 20 mm I30 maximum of 190 230
ii) Compression in column bara (*=) 130 I30 I90

iii) Compression in bara in a beam or rlab The calculated compressive strcu in tk surrounding concrete
when the corn reuive r&stance of the multiplied by I .S times the modular ratio or oy whichever is lower
concrctc ir ta Pen into account

iv) Compression in ban in a bum or &tab

when the comprasivc raistana of thy
concrete ir not taken into account:

a) Up to and including 140 Half t h e guxrantced I90

yield streu rub’ect to a
maximum of I bo
b)Gvcr2Omm I30 I90

N OTE I -For hi yield rtren h deformed bare of Grade Fe 500 the permiribk ~trcu in direct tension and fkxuralte~lon
shall be 0.55/,. rhe pcrmirrl%Ie (trasa for abear and compmuion reinforcement ~hsll bs as for Omde Fe 415.

;;“N:;myor welded wire fabric conforming to accepted standard [VI-5(l I)]. tk pcnnksiblr valun in ten&ion u” k

NOTE 3-For the purpcne of this section. the yield strew of atcek, for which there ir no ckarly defmcd yield point rhould be
taken to be 0.2 percent proof rtrcrr.
NOTL 4-When mild steel conformin@ to Grade II i, used. the permkxibk strclKl rhrll be 90 pwccnt of the iul#t.
rhucr in WI. (3). or if the design details have already been worked out on the baair of mild rteel conforming to r
rule I; the
uu of reinforcement shall be increased by IO percent of that required for Grade I Steel.

?MT W IlRUCtlJBAL DWON -tWXlTON I CONCRCTE

 requirements as to spacing of bars,
details of splices and thickness of
protective shell outside the spiral, shall
conform to requirements of dS.S.3. A
clearance of at least 75 mm shall be
maintained between the spiral and the
metal ‘core at all points, except that
when the core consists of a structural
steel H-column, the minimum clearance
may be reduced to 50 mm.
S PLICES AND C O N N E C T I O N S OF ME I AL
C O R E S - M e t a l cores in composite
columns shall be accurately milled at
splices and positive provisions shall be
made for alignment of one core above
another. At thecolumn base, provisions
shall be made to transfer the load to the
footing at safe unit stresses in
accordance with 33. The base of the
metal section shall be designed to
transfer the load from the entire
composite columns to the footing, or it
may, be designed to transfer the load
from the metal section only, provided it
is placed in the pier or pedestal as to
leave ample section of concrete above
the base for the transfer of load from the
reinforced concrete section of the
column by means of bond on the
vertical reinforcement and by direct
compression on the concrete. Transfer
of loads to the metal core shall be
provided for by the use of bearing
members, such as billets, brackets or
other positive connections; these shall
be provided at the top of the metal core
and at intermediate floor levels where
required. The column as a whole shall
satisfy the requirements of formula
given under (a) at any point; in addition
to this, the reinforced concrete portion
shall be designed to carry, according to
45.1 or 45.2 as the case may be, all floor
loads brought into the column at levels
between the metal brackets or
connections. In applying the formulae
under 45.1 or 45.2 the gross area of
column shall be taken to be the area of
the concrete section outside the metal
core, and the allowable load on the
reinforced concrete section shall be
further limited to 0.28 fc~ times gross
sectional area of the column.
A L L O W A B L E L OAD ON M ETAL C O R E
ONLY-The metal core of composite
columns shall be designed to carry
safely any construction or other loads to
be placed upon them prior to their
encasement in concrete.
46. MEMBERS SUBJECT TO COMBINED
AXIAL LOAD AND BENDING
4 6 . 1 D e s i g n B a s e d o n Untracked
“I-F58
Secrion-A member subjected to axial load
and bending (due to eccentricity of load,
monolithic construction, lateral forces, etc)
shall be considered safe provided the
following conditions are satisfied;
Ucc.ul ~ Ghc,r.l I
a ) -___- t
OCC Rh‘
where
G,~,I = calculated direct compressive stress
in concrete,
uLL = permissible axial compressive stress
in concrete,
uch,ia~ = calculated bending compressive
stress in concrete, and
u,h~ = permissible bending compressive
stress in concrete.
b) the resultant tension in concrete is not
greater than 35 percent and 25 percent
of the resultant comprtssion for biaxial
and uniaxial bending respectively, or
does not exceed three-fourths, the 7 day
modulus of rupture of concrete.
P
NOTE I - UW.‘ll = - - for columns wlch IICS
A , + I 5 mA,,
where P. A, and A. nrc as defined III 45.1 and m 1s the
modular ratio.
N OTE 2-oo,*. <,, = 5 where M equals the moment
z
and Z equals modulus of section. In the case of sectlons
suhlecr to moments in two dIrections, the stress shall be
calcu!atcd separately and added algcbralcqlly.
46.2 Design Based on Cracked Secrion ----If
the requirements specified in 46.1 are not
satisfied, the stresses in concrete and steel
shall be calculated by the theory of cracked
section in which the tensile resistance of
concrete is ignored. If the calculated stresses
are within the permissible stresses specified in
Tables 15, I6 and 17, the section may be
assumed to be safe.
NOTE -The maximum stress III concrete and steel may
be found from tables and charts based on the cracked
scclmn theory or directly by determining the no-stress
line which should ratlrfy the following requirements:
The direct load should be equal to the algebraic
sum of the forces on concrete and steel,
-
The moment of the external loada about any
aference line should be equal to the algebraic sum
of the moment of the forces in concrete (ignoring
the tensile force in concrete) and mcl about the
same line. and
The moment of the external loads about any other
reference lines should be equal to the rlpebrsrc
sum of the moment of the forces in concrete
(ignoring the tensile force in concrete) and steel
abobt the same line.
N A T I O N A L WILMNC CODL OF INDIA
 .

shall be modifti as:

TABLE 17 PERMISSIBLE SHEAR STRESS IN
CONCRETE, f,, N/mm'
u
(Clouses44.1, 44.3,46,2.4?.2.1.47.2.2,47.3.47.4,48.3.2. b d
48.3.3. ond 48.4.3, and Toble 15) b
where
100 A, rV, V, b and dare the same as in 42.1,
G RADE OF C ONCRETE
M= bending moment at the section, and
b” fi15 M20 M2S M30 M35 M40’
/3 = angle between the top and the
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
bottom edges of the beam.
0.25 0.22 0.22 0 23 0.23 0.23 0.23
0.50 0.29 0.30 0.3) 0.31 0.31 0.32 The negative siio in the formula applies when
0.15 0.34 0.35 0.36 0.37 0.37 0.38 the bending mo,ment Mincreascs numerically
I.00 0.37 0.39 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.42 in the same direction as the effective depthd
1.25 0.40 0.42 0.44 0.43 0.45 0.46 increases, and the positive sign when the
1.50 0.42 0.45 0.46 0.48 0.49 0.49 moment decreases numerically in this
1.75 0.44 0.47 0.49 0.50 0.52 0.52 direction.
2.00 0.44 0.49 0.51 0.53 0.54 0.55
2.25 0.44 0.51 0.53 0.55 0.56 0.57 47.2 Design Shear Strengrh of Concrete
2.50 9.44 0.51 0.55 0.57 0.58 0.60
2.75 0.44 0.51 0.56 0.58 0:60 0.62 47.2.1 W I T H O U T S H E A R R E I N F O R C E -
3.00 0.44 O.Sl 0.57 0.60 0.62 0.63 MENT-The permissible shear stress in
and above c o n c r e t e in btam.s w i t h o u t oherr
reinforcement is given in Table 17.
NOW-A, is rhnt area of Ion irudinal t e n s i o n
reinforcement which continuer at Rast one effective 47.2.1 ,I For solid slabs the pcrmiesiblc shear
f
depth beyond the section bein considered except St
rupponr where the full area o k-ion reinforcement
ma be used provided the derailing conforms to J5Jj.Z
stress in concrete shall hekr. where k has the
value given below:
anrK 25.2.3. OvtruN Depth of Slab, ‘MIII

E Or morc I*!!
46.3 Members Subjected IO Combined
1:;;
Dirccr Load and Flexure- M e m b e r s
%
subjected to combined direct load and flexure 1:20
and designed by the methods based on elastic :: I.25
theory should be, further checked for their 150 or less 1.30
strength under ultimate load conditions to
ensure the desired margin of safety; this check No~~--Thir does not apply lo flat rlrk for which 30.6
is specially necessary when the bending shall npply.
moment is due io horizontal loads.
47.2.2 S H E A R S T R E N G T H OF M EMBERS
47. SHEAR
U NDER A XIAL C OMPRESSION - F o r
members subjected to axial compression P,
47. I Nominal Shear Stress-The nominal the permissible shear stress in concrete sc
iven in Table 17. shall be multiplied by the
shear stress T” in beams or slabs of uniform
following factor:
depth shall be calculated by the following
cquatioa -. 5P
6=1+- but not exceeding I.5
Y A&t
T” = -
bd
where
where
P= axial compressive force in Newtonr,
V = shear force due to design loads;
b = breadth of the member, which for
flanged sections shall be taken as the A, * gross aren of the concrete section in
mm’, and
breadth of the web, b,; and
&k = characteristic comprosive strength
d = effective depth. of concrete.
47.1.1 B EAMS OF V ARYING D EPTH --In the 47.2.3 W ITH S H E A R R E I N F O R C E M E N T -
case of beams of varying depth, the equation When shear reinforcement is provided the

?ART VI STIUCTURAL DxSSIGN - SLCTION 3 CONCRxTt “,.P

nominal shear stress rv in beams shall not
exceed TV,,,.” given in Table 18.
47.2.3.1 For slabs, I” shall not exceed half the
value of rcnul given in Table 18.
TABLE 18 MAXJMUM SHFAR STRESS. Tc~w, N/mm’
(C&us 47.2.3. 47.2.3.1 and 4X3.1)
CONCRETE GRADE Tc max. NI mm*
M 15
II
E 1.9
M30
M 35 ;:
M40 2:s
47.3 Minimum Shear Reinforcement -
When rr is less than ~~ given in Table 17,
minimum shear reinforcement shall be
provided ip accordance with 2.5.5.1.6.
47.4 Design of Shear Reinforcement -
When sv exceeds rC given in Table 17, shear
reinforcement shall be provided in any of the
following forms:
a) Vertical stirrups,
b) Bent-up bars along with stirrups, and
Ic) Inclined stirrups,
Where bent up bars are provided, their
contribution towards shear resistance shall
not, be more than half that of the total shear
reinforcement.
Shear reinforcement shall be provided to
carry a shear equal to V- r,.bd. The strength
of shear reinforcement V, shall be calculated
as below:
a) For vertical stirrups
a, A, d
v, =
S”
b) For inclined stirrups or a series of bars
bent-up at different cross sections:
un A, d
v, = (sin Q + cos a)
SV
d For single bar or single group of parallel
bars, all bent-up at the same cross
section:
v, = un A, sin a
where
A , = total ctou-sect ional area of stirrup
legs or bent-up ban within a distance
2%
VIP
S” = spacing of the stirrups or bent-up
bars along the length of the member;
Tc = design shear strength of the concrete;
b = breadth of the member which, for
flanged beams, shall be taken as the
breadth of the web b,;.
uw = permissible tensile stress ,in shear
reinforcement which shall not be
taken greater than 230 N,/mm’;
ff= angle between the inclined stirrup or
bent up bar and the axis of the
member, not less than 45’; and
d = effective depth.
NOTE-Where more than one type of shear
reinforcement is used to reinforce the same portion of the
beam, the total shear resistance shall be computed as the
.sum of the resistance for the various types separately. The
area of the stirrups shall not be less than the mimmum
specified in 25.5.1.6.
48. TORSION
48.1 General-In general, where the
torsional resistance or stiffness of members
has not been taken into account in the
analysis of structure, no specific calculations
for torsion will be necessary; adequate control
of any torsional cracking being provided by
the required nominal shear reinforcement.
Where the torsional resistance or stiffness of
members is taken into account in the analysis,
the members shall be designed for torsion.
NOTE -The approach to design in this clause for torsion
is aI follows:
Torsional reinforcement is not calculated s,eparately
from that required for bending and shear. Instead the
total longttudinal reinforcement is determined for a
fictitious bendmg moment which is a function of actual
b e n d i n g m o m e n t .and torsion; similarly w e b
reinforcement IS determined for a fictwous shear which is
a function of actual shear and torsion.
48.1.1 The design rules laid down in 48.3 and
48.4 shall apply to beams of solid rectangular
cross section. However, these clauses may
also be applied to flanged beams by
substituting b, for 6, in which Case they are
generally conservative; therefore, specialist
literature may be referred to.
48.2 Cririral Secrion - Sections located less
than a distance d. from the fa‘ceof the support
may be designed for the same torsion as
computed at a distance d, where d is the
effective depth.
48.3 Shear and Torsion
48.3.1 EQ U I V A L E N T SHEA’R - E q u i v a l e n t
shear, V,, shall be calculated from the
formula:
v.= v+ 1.6;
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
where
V, = equivalent shear,
V = shear,
T = torsional moment,
b = breadth of beam.
The.equivalent nominal shear stress, T.,, in
this case shall be calculated as given in 47.1,
except for substituting V by VC. The values of
rur shall not exceed the values of rc maX given in
Table 18.
48.3.2 If the equivalent nominal shear stress
rvc does not exceed rcr given in Table 17,
minimum ‘shear reinforcement shall be
provided as specified in25.5.1.6,
48.3.3 If rve exceeds rC given in Table 17. both
longitudinal and transverse reinforcement
shall be provided in accordance with 48.4.
48.4 Reinforcement in Members Subjected
IO Torsion
48.4.1 Reinforcement for torsion, when
required, shall consist of longitudinal and
transverse reinforcement.
48.4.2 LONGITUDINAL R EINFORCEMENT - The
longitudinal reinforcement shall be designed
to resist an equivalent bending moment, M.I,
given by M,I = M + A4,,
where
M= bending moment at the cross section,
and
M, = T f’+D’b!
1.7
where Tisthetorsional
moment, D is the overall depth of the
beam and b is the breadth of the beam
?MT n m- ---s-
48.4.2.1 If the numerical value of M, as
defined in 48.4.2 exceeds the numerical value
of the m0ment.M. longitudinal reinforcement
shall be provided on the flexural compression
face, such that the beam can also with-
stand an -equivalent moment Mc2 given by
M.2 = M, - M. the moment Me2 being taken as
acting in the opposite sense lo the moment M.
48.4.3 T RANSVERSE R EINFORCEMENT ~
Two legged closed hoops enclosing the corner
longitudinal bars shall have an area of cross
section A,,, given by
A,,= Ts,_ +
v s,
, but
br A& u,v 2.5 d, usv
the total transverse reinforcement shall not be
less than
(rvc _ rc) b.Sv
UlY
where
T =torsional moment,
v =shear force,
S” =spacing of the stirrup reinforcement,
b, =centre to centre distance between
corner bars in the direction of the
width,
d, = centre to centre distance between
corner bars in the direction of the
depth,
b = breadth of the member,
an = permissible tensile stress in shear
reinforcement,
7°C = equivalent shear stress as specified in
48.3.1, and
TC = shear strength of the concrete as
specified in Table 17.
 APPENDlX A
(Clauses 7.2 and 13.4.1)

REQUIREMENTS FOR DURABILITY

A-l. Minimum cement contents for different materials, that is, cement, aggregates. water
exposures and sulphate attack are given in and admixtures, as well as by diffusion from
Tables 19 and 20, for general guidance. the environments should be limited.
Generally, the total amount of chlorides (as
Cl) and_ the total amount of soluble sulphates .
A-2. To minimize the chances of (as SO,) in the concrete at the time of placing
deterioration of concrete from harmful should be limited to 0. I5 p&cent by mass of
chemical salts, the levels of such harmful salts cement and 4 percent by mass of cement,
in concrete coming from the concrete respectively.
m-
TABLE 19 MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT REQUIRED IN CEMENT CONCRETE TO
ENSURE DURABILITY UNDER SPECIFIED CONDITIONS OF EXPOSURE

(C’lmu~s 34.3.2 imd A-l)

EXPOSURE P L A I N CDNCRETE R E I N F O R C E D COHCRFTE

- - -
M i n i m u m t Maxunum Minimum1 Maxlmum
Cement Water Cement Water
Content C;$$ Content Cement
Ratio

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(kg/m’) (kg/m’)

Mild - For example, completely protected against weather, 220 0.7 250 0.65
or aggressive conditions, except for a brief period of
exposure IO normal weather conditions during construction
Modem/e- For exampk, sheltered from heavy and wind 250 0.6 290 0.55
driven rain and against freezing, whilst saturated with
water; buried concrete in soil and concrete continuously
under water
Severe -- For cxampk. exposed to sea water, alternate 310 0.5 360 0.45
wetting and drying and to freezing whilrt wet. subject to
heavy condensation or corrosive fumes.
Nom 1 - When the maximum water-cement ratio can be strictly controlled, the cement content giveninthe table may be
reduced by 10 percent.
No IF 2 - The minimum amcnt content is bwd on 20 mm aggrc tc For 40 mm aggregate, it should be reduced by about
10 percent; for 12.5 mm aggregate, it should be increased by a I?
out IO percent.

TABLE 20 REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE EXPOSED TO SULPHATE ATTACK

(Clcrrur A-I)

CLASS C O N C E N T R A T I O N O F SULPHATES -t-YPE OF &~ENT R EQUIREMENTS FOR D E N S E.

EXPRE~ED AS so, F U L L Y CBMPA~D Con-
* C R E T E M A D E W I T H AGGRE-
I- \
OATES COMPLYING WITH
A C C EP TED STANDARD
[VkY4)1
In Soil /
v l n Ground Minimum Maximum
SO, in 2:1 Water (Parts Cement Free Water/
(Percent; Water p e r latlloo) Content Cement Ratio
extract
gl’

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

kg/m’

9 L.ess than 0.2 - Less than 30 OrdiiPcntland cement or Polilsnd 280 0.55
slag cement or Portland pouolana
cement
(Conrint&

“I-F NAllONAl. l lJlLDtNG COOL OF INDIA

 .

TABLE 20 REQUIREMENI‘S FOR CONCRETE EXPOSED TO SULPHATE AlTACK-Conrd

CLASS CONCENTRATION OF SIJLPHATES T YPES OF C EMENT REOUIREMENIS FOH LANGE

EXPRESSL D AS SO, F;LLY COMPACTED CON-
h C R E T E M ADE WITH ACGRE-
r , GArES COMPLYING WI,”
AKEFTED ST A N D A R D
\[VI-3411
In Soil
b In Ground M i n i m u m
Total SO, SO,in 2: I Water (Parts Cement Free Water!
(Percent) water per 100 ooo) Content Cement Ratio
extract . .
isi 1
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
kg/m’
0.2 to 0.5 -- 30 to 120 Ordinay Portland ament or Portland 330 0.50
slag ccmcnt or PortLand pouolnna
cement

Supcrsulphate cerncnf 310 0.50

0.5 to I.0 I.9.LO 3.1 120 IO 250 Supcrsulphatcd cement 330 0.H)
NOTE I - This table applia only io concrete made wnh 20 mm aggregate complymg wlrh the rquircmcnts of accepted
standard [ IV-5(4)] placed in near-neutral round water ofpH 6 to pH 9, contaming naturally occurring sulphatcs hut no1
contaminants such as ammonium salts. F or 40 mm aggregate. the value may be reduced by about I5 pcrcenr and for
12.5 mm aggregate the vaiuc may bc increased by about 15 pcrccm. Concrete prepared from ordinary Portland cement
would not bc recommended tn acidic conditions @H 6 or less) Supersulphatcd cement gives an acceptable ltfe providtd
that the concrete is dcnx and prcparcd wnh a waler, cement ratio of 0.4 or less. m mmeral acids, down to ptl 3 5

NOTE 2 -- The cement conrents given in Clasr 2 arc the mmlmum recommended. For SO, contents near the upper limit 01
Class 2. ccmem contents above these rmmmum are advised.
Norc 3 - Where the total SOI in co12 cxcccds 0.5 pcrrem. then a 2: I water extract may result ma lower sitcclasslficatton
if much of the sulphatc w prcscnt as low solubility calcium sulphate.

Nort 4 ~ For ~~crc conditions, such as thm. sec~tons under hydrostatic pressure on one sldc only and sections panly
immcrcscd. considerations should bc given to a further reducrlons of wa:cr/ccmcnt ratio, and if ncceasasry an increase in
the cement content to ensure the degree of workability needed for full compaction and thus minimum permeablhty.
NOTE 5 - Portland slag cement conforming to accepted standards [VI-5(3)] with slag content more than 50 percent
cxhlblts better sulphatc resisting properties.
NOTF 6 - Ordinary Portland cement with the additional requirement that C) A content bc not more than 5 pcrccnt and
ZC\A+C.AF (or its solid solution 4CaO. AIzO~,Fc~O~+ZCaO, FczOa) be not more than 20 pcrccnt may bc used in place of
supcrsulpharcd cement.

APPENDIX J3
(Clauses 21.3.2, 22.2.1 and 41.1)

CALCULATION OF DEFLECTION

51. TOTAL DEFLECTION

Icrr =
fr ;but
B-1.1 The total d ‘flection shall be taken as
the sum of t h/ short-term deflection
determined in accordance with B-2 and the
long-term deflection, in accordance with 83
1.2 - -_l-$%
Mr z
Md ( J
and B-4.
B-2. SHORT-TERM DEFLECTION 1, = moment of inertia of the cracked
sec!ion;
B-2.1 The short-term deflection may be
calculated by the usual methods for elastic l;r I,
M, = cracking moment, equal to -
deflections using the short-term modulus of Yt
elasticity of concrete, Ec and an effective where _A is the modulus of rupture of
moment of inertia I,rr given by the following concrete, I,, is the moment of inertia of
equation: the gross section about the centroidal
 axis, neglecting the reinforcement, be computed from the following equation:
and yI is the distance from centroidal
axis of gross section, neglecting the acl=h416j
reinforcement, to extreme fibre in
tension; where
M= maximum moment under service
loads; k3 is a constant depending upon the support
conditions,
z =
lever arm;
0.5 for cantilevers,
X= depth of neutral axis; 0.125 for simply supported members,
d = effective depth; 0J.It.I; ‘,“,‘d members continuous at one
6, = breadth of web; and 0.063’for fully continuous members.
b = breadth of compression face.
For continuous beams, deflection shali be k 0 ea
tics is shrinkage curvature equal to 7
calculated using the values of I,, I,, and M,
modified by the following equation:
where ccl is the ultimate shrinkage strain of
concrete (see 5.2.4)
X,+k, (X1:X2\ +(I-k,)Xo
\ L /
where
L,=o.7++I GI.0 for0.25<P,-P,<I.O

X( = modified value of X. A - PC
= 0.65 - < 1.0 forP,-P, 3 1.0
x,,x2 =’ values of X at the supports, n
x0 = value of X at mid span,

k, = coefficient given in Table 21. and 100 A,, 100 A.,

P, = - andP,= -
,Y = value of I,, 1,, or M, as appropriate. bd bd
and D is the total depth of the section,
TABLE 21 VALUES OF COEFFICIENT. kl and 1 is the length of span

OS or ksr 8-I. DEFLECTION DUE TO CREEP

0.6 Ok
0.7 0.08
fU.1 The creep deflection due to permanent
0.8 0.16
0.9 0.30 loads, uss fp,,,,) may be obtained from the
I.0 0.50 following equation:
I.1 0.73
1.2 0.91
1.3 0.91
1.4 1.0

initial plus creep deflection due

M I + MI
1’:= ~ to permanent loads obtained
MFl+MFl using an elastic analysis with an
where effective modulus of elasticity.
MIMI . support moments, and
Mr1, Mfl = fixed end moments. L = A, 0 being the creep
coefficient, and
B-3. DEFLECTION DUE TO SHRINKAGE
short-term deflection due to
&~.‘I The defkction due to shrinkage acr may permanent load using G.
 APPENDIX C
(Chses 23.4 ond 36.1.2)
SLABS SPANNING IN IWO DIRECTIONS

C-f. RESTRAINED SLABS where

C-1.0. When the corners of a slab are pre- a. and or are coefficients given in Table 22,
vented from lifting, the slab may be designed
as specified in C-l.1 to C-1.11. w = total design load per unit area,
C-f .I The maximum bending moments per M,. MY= moments on strips of unit width
unit width in a slab are given by the followmg ;rdnning 1, and f, respectively,
equations:
lu, =&I wi2 1, and l,= lengths of the shorter span and
MY=ay wl; longer span respectively.
X

TABLE 22 BENDING MOMENT COEFFICIENTS FOR RECTANGULAR PANELS SUPPORTED ON

FOUR SIDES WITH PROVISION FOR TOR SION AT CORNERS

CASE T YPE OF P ANEL AND M OMENTS SHORT SPAN ~EFFlClENTs a, kBNG SPAN
No -CONSIDERED (VALUES OF 4th) COEFFICIENTS a,
FOR ALL
VALUES

1.0 I.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 I.5 I.75 2.0

(1) (2) (3) (4) (9 (6) (t) (8) (9) (10)

I. Interior Panels:
Negative moment at continuous cdgc 0.032 0.037 0.043 0.047 0.051 0.053 0.060 0.065
Positive moment at mid-#pan 0.024 0.028 0.032 0.034 0.039 0.041 0.045 0.049
2. One Short Edge Discontinuous:
Negative moment at continuous edge 0.037 0.043 0.048 0.051 0.0s 0.09 0.064 0.068
Positive moment at mid-span 0.028 0.032 0.036 0.039 0.041 0 . 0 4 4 o.Iw1 0.052
3. One Long &lge Disconrinuous:
Negative moment at continuow cdgc 0.031 0.044 0.052 0.051 0.063 0.067 0.077 0.085
Positive moment at mid-span 0.028 0.033 0.039 0.044 0.047 0.051 0.059 0.065
4. Awe Adjawr Edges DisconMnww:
Negative moment at continuow edge 0.047 0.033 0.060 0.065 0.071 0.075 0.064 0.091
Positive moment at mid-cpm 0.035 0.040 0.045 0.049 0.053 0.0% 0.063 0.069
5. 7bo Short &i&es Disconfitwotu:
Negative moment at wntinuouw cd~ 0.045 0.049 0.052 0.0s 0.059 o.om 0.065 o.aL)
Positive moment at mid-opaa 0.035 0.037 0 . 0 1 0 0 . 9 1 3 o.w4 0.W 0.049 0.052
6. Tbo bng &a Dircontinuow
Negative moment at continuow edge __ - - -- -_ - -
Positive monyat at mid-rpan 0.035 0.034 0.051 0.057 0.063 0.068 o.oa o.a8
1. ?hree E?ige~ ,Dkon~imwu
(&e L o n g tugw conrimrow):
Neptiye moownt at coatinuora edge o.os7 0 . 0 6 ) 0.071 0.076 0.010 0.01) 0.091 0.097
Positive moment at mid-sPan 0.043 0.04a 0.053 4057 0.060 o.m4 0.w 0.073
8. llvcc Edges Diwontbwau~
(/AIe big Ekigu Conrinww)
Ncc(i*lo mamcot at c+mtiauow edm - - - -- -v- - -

?di?mmnmcat&tmidqu 0.w 0.051 0.0% 0.06s 0.m 0.076 0.017 0.096

9. FrSl@tLWC-h-i
?odh-staidqu, 0.0% 0.064 0.072 0.079 0.o.s 0.011 0.m 0.m

C-l.2 Slabs are considered as divided in each
direction into middle strips and edge strips as
shown in Fig. 23, the middle strip being three-
quarters of the width and each edge strip one-
eighth of the width.
23A For Sprn 1.
238 For Span I,
Ftg. 23 Division of Slab into Middle and
Edg p Strips
C-I.3 The maximum moments calculated as
in C-l.1 apply only to the middle strips and no
redistribution shall be made.
C-1.4 Tension reinforcement provided at
mid-span in the middle strip shall extend in
the lower part of the slab to within 0.25 I of a
continuous edge, or 0. I5 1 of a discontinuous
edge.
C-l.5 Over the continuous edges of a middle
strip, the tension reinforcement shall extend
in the upper part of the slab a distance of 0. I5 I
from the support. and at least 50 percent shall
extend a distance of 0.3 1.
C-l.6 At a discontinuous edge, negative
moments may arise. They depend on the
degree of fixity at the edge of the slab but, in
general, tension reinforcement equal to 50
percent of that provided at mid-span
extending 0. I I into the span will be sufficient.
C-l.7 Reinforcemellt rn edge strip, parallel to
that edge, shall comply with the minimum
given in Section SA(c) and the requirements
for torsion given in C-1.8, C-l.9 and C-1.10.
C-1.8 Torsion reinforcement shall be
provided at any corner where the slab is
simply supported on both edges meeting at
.
that corner. It shall consist of top and bottom
reinforcement. each with layers of bars placed
parallel to the sides of the-slab and extending
from the edges a minimum distance of one-
fifth of the shorter span. ‘The area of
remforcemcnt in each of these four layers
shall be three-quarters of thearea required for
the maximum mid-span moment in the slab.
C-1.Y Torsion reinforcement equal to half
that described in C-l.8 shall be provided at a
corner contained by edges over only one of
which the slab is continuous.
C-l.10 Torsion reinforcements need not be
provided at any corner contained by edges
over both of which the slab is continuous.
C.I.11 Where &/IX IS greater than 2, the slabs
shall be designed as spanning one way.
C-2 SIMPLY SI!PPORTF.D SLARS
C-2-I When simply supported slabs do not
have adequate provision to resist torsion at
corners and to prevent the corners from
lifting, the maximum moments per unit width
are given by the following equation:
M, = (zl H’li
MY = by U’li
where
M., M,, w, I., I,aresameas those in C 1 .l,and
a, and Q~ are moment co’efficients given i n
Table 23.
tABL.E 23 BENDING MOMENT (‘OFFICIENTS
FQR SLABS SPANNING IN TWO DIRECtIONS
AT RIGHT ANGLES, SIMPLY S1IPPORTED
ON FOUR SIDES
a1 a,
0.062 0.042
0.074 0.041
0.084 0.059
0.093 0.055
0.099 0.05 I
0.104 0.046
0.113 0.037
0,118 0.029
0.122 0.020
0 124 0.014
-___- _. ._ _. _._“_,_____
C’.2.1.1 At least SO percent of the tension
reinforcement provided at mid-span should
extend to the supports. The remaining 50
percent should extend to within 0. Il. or 0. II,
of the support, as appropriate.
 APPENDIX D
(Clause 24.2)
EFFECTIirE LENGTH OF COLUMNS

D-I. In the absence of more exact analysis,
the effective length of columns in framed
structures may be obtained from the ratio of
effective length to unsupported length I.(/1
given in Fig. 24 when relative displacement of
the ends of the column is prevented and in
Fig. 25 when relative lateral displacement of
the ends is not prevented. In the latter case, it
is recommended that the effective length ratio
lcr// may not be taken to be less than 1.2.
NOTE 1 - Figures 24 and 25 arc reproduced from ‘The
Structural Engineer’ No. 7, Volume 52. July 1974 by the
rmissioa of the Council of the Institution of Structural
&news. U.K.
NO: ,2 - In Fig. 24 and 25. /31 and & are equal to
&AC
lx + EK.
where the summation is to be done for the
men&s framing into a joint at to and bottom rcspcc-
lively; K, and Kb being the fkxura P stlrfness for column
and beam respectively.
D-Z. For normal usage assuming idealized
conditions, the effective lengthI,, in a given
plane may be assessed on the basis of
Table 24.

Fig, 24 Effective Length Ratios/or a Column

in a Frame with no Sway

r1rco 0
0

E
P a
i P

Fig. 2.5 Effective Lengrh Rafio for u Column

in o Frame Without RestraintAgainst Sway

?Alt VI STBlJClURAL DUltN- S E C T I O N S CONCWTI VW6

 TABLE 24 EFFECI-WE LENGTH OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS
DEWIEE OF E N D R E S T R A I N T OF SVMNX THEORETICAL VALUE R E CO MM E ND E D
CRMl’RESSlON MEMBER OF E F F E C T I V E VALUE of
LENGTH E F F E C T I V E LENGIH

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Effectively held in position and 0.5 I 0.65 I

restrained a@inst rotation at both
ends
.
Effectively held in position at both
ends. restrained against rotatton
at one end

Effectively held in position at both 1.00 I 1.00 I

ends. but not restrained against
rotation

Effectively held in position and 1.00 I I.20 I

mtrained ‘against rotation at one
end. and nt the other mtrained
against rotation but not held in
position

Effectively held in posttion and I.50 I

resrramed against rotation at one @T$
end, and at the other partially
restrained ngamrt rotation but not
held III position L /’
,

Effectively held ut position at one 2.00 I 2.00 I

end but not restrained against
rotation. and at the other end
restrained ngamst rotation hut not
held tn poswon

Effcctwtly held in position and 2.00 I 2.00 I

restrained against rotation at one
end but not held in position nor
restrained against rotation at the
other end

NOTE - 1 is the unsupported length of compression member.

~-

VbP NATIONAL WILDING CODE OF INDIA

 APPENDIX E
(Clause 37.1)
MOMENTS OF RESISTANCE FOR RECTANGULAR AND T-SECTIONS
E-0. The moments of resistance of rectangu-
lar ‘and T-sections based on the assumptions
of 37.1.are given in this Appendix.
E-I. RECTANGULAR SECTIONS
E-I.1 Sections Without Compression Rein-
forcemenr - The moment of resistance of
nctangular sections without compression
reinforcement should be obtained as follows:
a) Determine the depth of neutral axis
from the following equation:
xu
_= 0.87 py A,,
d 0.36 /Ft bd
b) If the value of x,/ dis less than the limit-
ing value (see Note below 37.1).calcu-
lak the moment of resistance.by the
following equation:
M, = 0.87/, A,I d
)
If the value of x,/d is equal to the
cl
limiting value, the moment of resistance
of the section is given by the following
expression:
M y,,yn = 0.36 xy (I -0.42 xy ) bdff,r
d) If xu/ d is greater than the limiting value,
the section should be redesigned.
In the above equations,
X” = depth of neutral axis,
d = effective depth,
/y= characteristic strength of re-
inforcement,
A,, = area of tension reinforcement,
fCk = chatact~tic compressive strength
of conorete,
b = width of the compression face,
M u&m = limiting moment of resistance of
a sectton without compression
reinforcement, and
xu,nux = limiting value of xu from 37. I.
E-l.2 Section with Compression Reinforce-
ment - Where the ultimate moment of
resistance. of section exceeds the lirriiting _
?AIT V I 8lRUCTURAL DC!UCN~‘SCCllDN 4 CONCMCTC
value. Murh compression reinforcement may
be obtained from the following equation:
Mu- Mu,lirn=fe A, (d-d)
where
Mu, K,hm, d are same as ,in E-1.1,
fx = design stress in compress;on
reinforcement corresponding to a
0.003 5 (X”, MI - d) f
strain of X”. “.I
xurmlr is the limiting value of x. from 37.1,
A, = is-e; of compression reinforcement
.
d’ = depth of. compression reinforcement
from compression face.
The total area of tension reinforcement shal
be obtained from the following equation:
A., = A,,, + Aaz
where
.4,, = area of the total tensile reinforce-
ment,
A,,, = area of the tensile reinforcement for
a singly reinforced section for Mu, I,,,,,
and
A rrz = A,fJ(O.87/;.)
E-2. FLANGED SECTION
E-2.1 For x, < Dr. the moment of resistance
may be calculated from the equation givenin
E-1.1.
E-2.2 The limiting value of the moment of
resistance of the section may be obtained by
the following equation when the ratioD,/d
does not exceed 0.2:
hf”, h =0.36 ?(I -0.42 7) /ckb&
ti.45 fck (br - b,) d - $
( J
where
Mu, xu nun, d andAk are same as in E-1.1,
br = breadth of the compression
face/ Ilange,
 = breath of the web and
$f = thickness of the flknge.
E-2.2.1 When the ratio Dt/d exctcds 0.2, the
moment of resistance of the section may be
calculated by the following equation:
MyI b=d.36 -(I - 0.42 y) /,,bws#
+ 0.45 f.k (br- b,) y,td - f )
vl20
where yr = (0. I5 x,, + 0.65 Dr), but not greater
than Df, and the other symbsls arc same as in
E-l.1 and E-2.2.
E-2.3 For xU, ,,,,,, > xu > 0, the moment of
resistance may be calculated by the equations
given in E-2.2 when Drlx. does not exceed
0.43 and E-2.2.1 when L&/x. exceeds 0.43; in
both cases substitutinkx., ,,,,, by xU.
NArnNAl - coot OF INDIA
 SECTION 5B PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
SECTION SB(a) GENERAL
1. SCOPE
1.1 This Section deals with the general
structural use of prestressed concrete. It
covers both work carried out on site and the
manufacture of precast prestressed concrete
units.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this Section, the
definitions as given in accepted standards[VI-
5(Z)] shall generally apply; however some of
the important definitions are given below:
ANCHORAGE .--In post-tensioning, a device
used to anchor the tendon to the concrete
member; in pre-tensioning, a device used to
anchor the tendon during hardening of the
concrete.
&)NDEP MEMBER -A prestressed concrete
member in which tendons are bonded to the
concrete either directly or through grouting.
B ON D E D POST~TENSIONINC -Post ten-
sioned construction in which the annular
spaces around the tendons are grouted after
stressing, thereby bonding the tendonto_ the
concrete section.
C HARACTERISTIC L OAD --Load which has
95 percent probability of not being exceeded
during the life of the structure(see 20.2).
CHARACTERISTIC STRENGTH -Strength of
material below which not more than 5 percent
of the test results are expected to fall (see
20.1).
C O L U M N OF S TRUT -A compression
member of rectanylaf section, the effective
length of which exceeds three times the least
lateral dimension.
C REEP COEFFICEN~ --The ratio of creep
strain to elastic strdm in concrete.
CREEP IN CONCRETE -Increase with time in
the strain of concrete SubJected to sustained
stress.
F INAL PRESTRESS .The stress which exists
after substantially all losses have occured.
F!NAI. TENSION --The tension in the steel
corresponding to the state of the final
prestress.
INITIAL PRESTRESS -The prestress in the
concrete at transfer.
I NITIAL T ENSION -The maximum stress
induced in the prestressing tendon at the time
of the stressing operation.
P OST T ENSIONING -A rrtethod of prestress-
ing concrete in which pre-stressing steel is
tensioned against the hardened concrete.
PRESTRESSEU CO N C R E T E -Concrete i n
which permanent internal stresses are
deliberately introduced, usually by tensioned
steel, to counteract, to the desired degree, the
stresses caused in the member in service.
PRE-TENSIONING -A method of prestressing
concrete in which the tendons are tensioned
before concreting.
SHORT COLUMN -A column of rectangular
section, the effective length of which does not
exceed 12 times the least lateral dimension.
SHRINKAGE Loss -The loss of stress in the
prestressing steel resulting from the shrinkage
of the concrete.
S LENDER C&WIN - A column of
rectangular section, the effective length of
which exceeds 12 times the least lateral
dimension.
S TRESS AT T RANSFER -The stress in both
the prestressing tendon and the concrete at the
stage when the prestressing tendon is released
from the pre-stressing mechanism.
T ENDON -A steel element, such as wire,
cable, bar, rod or strand, used to impart
prestress to concrete when the element is
tensioned.
TRANSFER -The act of transfering the stress
in prestressing tendons from the jacks or
pretensioning bed to the concrete member.
TRANSMISSION LENGTH -The distance
required at the end of a pretensioned tendon
z;neveloping the maximum tendon stress by
3. SYMBOLS
3.1 For the purpose of this Section the
following letter symbols shall have the
meaning indicated against each; when other
symbols are used, they are explained at the
appropriate place:
A ArC3
B Breadth of beam

Breadth of web or rib
Overall depth of beam
Dead load
Effective depth of beam
Effective depth of beam in shear
Modulus of elasticity of concrete
Earthquake load
Modulus of elasticity of steel
Eccentricity
Characteristic load
Bursting tensile force
Design load
Characteristic strength of material
Cube strength of concrete at transfer
Characteristic compressive strength of
concrete
Compressive stress at centtoidal axis
due to’prcstress or average intensity of
effective prestress in concrete
Modulus of rupture of concrete
(flexural tensile strength)
Design strength
Characteristics s t r e n g t h o f
prcstresring steel
Maximum prestress after losses
Maximum initial prestress
Ultimate tensile stress in the tendons
Maximum principal tensile stress
Characteristic strength of steel
Live load or imposed..Joad
Bending moment
Modular ratio
Spacing of stirrups
Torsional moment
Shear force
Ultimate shear resistance of concrete
Ultimate shear resistance of a section
untracked in flcxure
Ultimate shear resistance of a section
cracked in flexure
Wind load
Depth of neutral axis
Partial safety factor for load
Partial safety factor for material
Percentage redliction in moment
Shear stress in concrete
Diameter of tendon or bar
.
SECTION SB (b) MATERIALS,
WORKMANSHIP, INSPECTION
AND TESTING
4. MATERIALS
4.1 Cemmt -- The cement used shall be any
of the following conforming to accepted
standards [W-5(3)] with the.prior approval of
the Engineer-in-Charge.
a) Ordinary Portland cement,
6 Portland slag cement with not more than
50 percent slag content,
C) Rapid-hardening Portland cement, and
4 High strength ordinary Portland cement.
4.2 Aggregates -All aggregates shall
conform to accepted standard[VI-5(3)]
4.2.1 The nominal maximum size of coarse
aggregate shall be as large as possible subject
to the following:
In no case greater than one-fourth the
minimum thickness of the member,
provided that the concrete can be placed
without difficulty so as to surround all
prestressing tendons and reinforcements
and fill the cornets of the form;
It shall be 5 mm less than the spacing
between the cables, strands or sheathings
where provided; and
Not more than 40 mm; for segregates
having a maximum nominal SIU of 20
mm or smaller are generally considered
satisfactory.
4.2.2 Coarse and tine aggregate shall be
batched separately.
4.3 Water-the requtrements of water used
for mixing and curmg shall conform to the
requirements given in Section 5A. However
use of sea water is prohibited.
4.4 Admixtures -Admixtures may be used
with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
However, use of any admixture containing
chlorides in any form is prohibited.
4.4.1 The admixtures shall conform to the
accepted standards [VI-5(S)]
4.5 Prestressing Steel
4.5.1 The prestressing steel shall be any one of
the following conforming to accepted
standards [W-5(25)]:
a) Plain hard-drawn steel wire,
W Cold-drawn indented wire,
d High tensile steel bar, and
d) Uncoarqd stress relieved strand.
4..5.l.l All prestressingstcel shall he free from
splits, harmful scratches; surface flaws: rough.
jagged and imperfect edges and other defect5
likely to impair its use in prestressed concrete:
slight rust may be permitted provided there is
no surface pitting visible to the naked eye.
I..!..? Coupling units and other similar
fixtures used in conjuction with the wires or
bars shall have an ultimate tensile strength of
not less than the individual strengths of the
wires or bars being joined.
4.5.3 MOWJLUSOFELASTIC~TY -Thevalue
of the modulus of elasticity of steel used for
the design of prestressed concrete members
shall preferably be determined by tests on
samples of steel to be used for the
construction. For the purposes of this clause,
a value given by the manufacturer of the
prestressinp steel shall bc considered as
fulfilling the necessary requirement.
4.5.3.1 Where ir is not possible to ascertain
the modulus of elasticity by test or fromttie
manufacturer of the steel, the following values
may be adopted:
Type of Steel Modulus of Elasticity,
E, (kN/mm’)
Plain cold-drawn wire 210
High tensile steel bars 200
rolled or heat-treated
Strands I95
4.6 Untensioned Steel - Reinforcement used
as untensioned steel shall be any of the
following conforming to accepted standards
[VI-5( I I)]:
a) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars,
b) Hot rolled deformed bars,
c) Cold-twisled bars, and
d) Hard-drawn steel wire fabric.
4.7 Storage of Materials -Storage of
materials shall be done in accordance with
good practice [VI-5( I2)].
5: CONCRETE
5.1 Grades -The co Crete shall be in grades
designated as per Taf le I
5.1.1 The characteristic strength of concrete
is defined as the strength of the concrete below
which not more than 5 percent of the test
results are expected to fall.
5.2 Properties of Concrete
5.2.1 I NCREASE IN S T R E N G T H WITH
AGE -Where it can bc shown that a inember
PART Vl S~UCTURAL DESIGN .- SWllON J CI?NCRETC
TABLE I GRADES OF CONCRFTE
(Clauses 5.1. X2.1. 8.2.1 and 20.1)
(1) (2)
M 30 30
M 35 15
M 40 4b
M 45 45
M 50 SO
M 55 55
hi 60 60
NOTE I ---In the dcslgnation of a concrete mut. letter M
rcfcr$ to the mix and the number to the spculied
characteristic compreaslvr strength of I5 cm cube at 28
days. expressed in N/mm’.
N OTE 2 -For pretensioned prestrcsscd concrete. the
grade of concrete shall be not less than M 40.
will not receive its full design stress within a
period of 28 days after the casting of the
mem.ber (for example, in foundations and
lower columns in multi-storey buildings); the
characteristic compressive strength given in
Table I may be increased by multiplying by
the factors given below:
Minimum Age of Age Factor
Member When Full
Design Stress is
Expected
(Months)
I 1.0
1.10
: 1.15
12 I .20
Norm I -Where members are subjected to lower direct
load during construction, they should be checked for
stresses resulting from combination of direct load and
bending during construction.
NUTE 2 -the design strength shall be based on the
increased value of compresswe strength.
5 . 2 . 2 T E N S I L E STRENGTH OF CONCRETE-
The flexural strength shall be obtained in
accordance with good practice -[YI-S(7)].
When the designer wishes to use an estimate of
the flexural strength from. the compressive
strength, the following formula may be used:
Flexural Strength/,, = 0.7&k N/mm*
where fcr is the characteristic compressive
strength of concrete.
5.2.3 EL ASTIC DeFORMATION--- The
modulus of elasticity is primarilyinfltienced
by the elastic properties of the aggregate and
to a lesser extent by the conditions of curing
VI-S ’-

4
and age of the concrete, the mtx proporttons
and the type of cement. T’he modulus of
elasticrty i s normally r e l a t e d t o t h e
compressive strength of concrete.
5.2.3.1 In the absence of test data. the
modulus of elasticity for struc:ural concre:e
may be assumed as follows:
E, = 5700 v$%
where EL is the short term static modulus of
elasticrty in N/mm’, and r&k is the
characterrstrc cube strength of concrete in
N/mm>.
5.2 4 S H R I N K A G E T h e s h r r n k a g e o f
concrete depends upon the constrtuents of
concrete. size of the member and environ-
mental conditions. For a grven envuonment,
the shrrnkage of concrete is most influenced
by the total amount of water present in the
concrete at the time of mixing and. to a lesser
extent, by the cement content.
5.2.4.1 In the absence of, test data, the
approximate value of shrinkage strain for
design shall be assumed as follows.
F.or,pre-tensioning = o.ooo3
0.000 2
For post-tensioning =
Log10 (r + 2)
where
I = age of concrete at transfer in days.
NOPE The value of shrinkage strain for design of post-
tcnsioncd concrete may bc Increased by 50 percent tin dry
armosphcrlc condlttons. sub]cct to a maximum value of
0oCM11
5.2.4..? For the calculation of deformation of
concrete at some stage before the maximum
shrrnkage is reached, it may be assumed that
half of the shrinkage takes place during the
first month and that about three quarters of
the shrinkage takes place in first six months
after commencement of drying.
5 . 2 . 5 CREEP 0F CO N C R E T E - - C r e e p o f
concrete depends, in addition to the factors
listed in 5.2.4. on the stress in the concrete, age
at loading and the duration of loading. As
long as the stress in concrete does not exceed
one-third of its characteristic compressive
strength, creep may be assumed to be
proportional to the stress. ’ adequate workability with a low water-
5.2.5.1 In the absence of experimental data
and detailed information on the effect of the
variabks, the ultimate creep strain may be
estimated from the following values of creep
coefficient (that is. ultimate creep strain/
elastic strain at the age of loading):
Agr ut Loading Creep Coefficienr
7 days 2.2
3 days 1.6
I year I.1
VP
.
Nort 1 he ultimate creep strain estimated as pcr5.2.5.1
doe, not include the elastic stram.
525.2 For the calculation of deformation at
some stage before the total creep is reached, it
may be assumed that about half the total creep
takes place in the first month after loadmgand
that about three-quarters of the total creep
takes place m the first six months after
loading.
5 . 2 . 6 THERMAL E X P A N S I ON - - !he
coefficient of thermal expansion depends on
nature of cement, the aggregate, the cement
content, the relative humidity and the SUP of
sections. For values of coefficient of thermal
expansion fOi concrete with different
aggregates, 5.2.6 of Sectton SA may be
referred to.
6. WORKARII~lTY OF CONCRF-rF
6 I Ihc. concrete mix proportions chosen
should be such that the concrete IS ofadcyuatc
workability for the placing conditions of the
concrete and can properly be compacted with
the means available. Suggested ranges of
values of workability of concrete are given in
Section 5A.
7. DljRABILITY
7.1 The durability of concrete depends on
its resistance to deterioration and the
environment in which it is placed. The
resistance of concrete to weathering, chemical
attack, abrasion, frost and fire depends
largely upon its quality and constituent
materials. The strength alone is not a reliable
guide to the quality of durability of concrete;
it must also have an adequate cement content
and a low water-cement ratio.
7.1.1 One of the main characteristics
influencing the durability of concrete is its
permeability. With strong, denseaggregates, a
surtably low permeability is achieved by
having a sufficiently low water-cement ratio,
by ensuring as thorough compaction of the
concrete as possible and by ensuring sufficient
hydration of cement through proper curing
methods. Therefore, for given aggregates, the
cement content should be sufficient to provide
cement ratio so that concrete can be
thoroughly compacted with the means
available.
7.2 Appendix A provides guidance regarding
minimum cement content and permissible
hmits of chloride and sulphate in concrete.
8. CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING
8. I Mix Proparkm -The mix proportions
shall be selected to ensure that the workability
NATIONAL l UlUMNC EOOL OF INDIA
of the fresh concrete is suitable for the
conditions of handling and placing, so that
after compaction it surrounds all prestressing
tendons and reinforcements if present and
completely fills the formwork. When concrete
is hardened, it shall have the required
strength, druability and surface finish.
8.1. I The determination of the proportions of
cement, alggregates and water to attain the
required strengths shall be made by designing
the concrete mix. Such concrete shall be called
‘design mix concrete’.
For prestressed concrete construction, only
‘design mix concrete’ shall be used. The
cement content in the, mix should preferably
not exceed 530 kg, m
8.1.2 INFORMATIOKREQ~JIRED -In s p e c i -
fying a particular grade of concrete the
information to be included shall be:
a) Grade designation,
b) Type of cement,
c) Maximum nominal size of aggregates,
d) Minimum cement content,
e) Maximum water-cement ratio, and
f) Workability.
8.1.2.1 In appropriate circumstances, the
following additional information may be
specified:
a) Type of aggregate,
b) Maximum cement content, and
c) Whether an admixture shall or shall not
be used and the type of admixture and the
conditions of use.
8.2 Design Mix Concrete
8.2.1 The mix shall be designed to produce
the grade of concrete having the required
workability and a characteristic strength not
less than appropriate values given in Table I.
The procedure in accordance with good
practice [VI-S( 14)] may be followed.
9. PRODUCTION &ND CONTROL OF
CONCRETE
9.1 Quo/i/y of Materials - It is essential for
designers and construction engineers to
appreciate that the most effective use of
prestressed concrete is obtained only when
the concrete and the prestressing steel
employed are of high quahty and strength.
9.2 The provisions of 9 of Section 5A shall
apply; except that no hand-mixing shall be
permitted in prestressed concrete work.
PAW W IlRCcllUL D E S I G N - U4TlON I CDNCICR
10. FORMWORK
IO.1 The provisions of 10 of Section SA shall
generally apply. In addition, 10.1.1 shall also
apply.
10.1.1 Moulds for pre-tension work shall be
sufficiently strong and rigid to withstand.
without distortion, the effects of placing and
compacting concrete as well as those 01’
prestressing in the case of manufacture by the
individual mould process where the
prestressing tendon issupported by the mould
before transfer.
II. A S S E M B L Y O F PRESTRESSINC
AND REINFORCING STEEL
I I. 1 Preslressing Steel
1 i.1. I S TRAIGHTENING
11.1.1.1 The wire, as supplied. shall
preferably be self-straightening w h e n
uncoiled. If it is not so. the wire may need to
be mechanically straightened before use. In
this event; care shall be taken to avoid
alteration in the properties of the wire during
the straightening process and preferably a test
shall be made on a sample of the wire after
straightening.
l/./.1.2 In the case of high tensile alloy steel
bars, any straightening (or bending if the
design provided for curved bars) shall be
carried out by means of a bar-bending
machine. Bars shall not be bent when their
temperature is less than IO’C.
l/././.3 In no case heat shall be applied to
facilitate straightening or bending of
prestressing steel.
11.1.2 A RRANGEMENT OF W IRES AND
P OSITIONING
ll.I.2.1 All prestressing steel shall be
carefully and accurately located in !he exact
positions shown in the design drawings. The
permissible tolerance in the location of the
prestressing tendon shall be + 5 mm. Curves
or bends in prestressing tendon required by
the designer shall be gradual and the
pratressing tendon shall not be forcedaround
sharp bends or. be formed in any manner
which is likely to set up undersirable
secondary stresses.
11.1.2.2 The relative position of wires in a
cable, whether curved or straight shall be
accurately maintained by suitable means,
such as sufficiently ‘rigid and adequately
distributed spacers.
11.1.2.3 In the case of post-tension work, the
spacing of wires in a cable shall be adequate to
ensure the free flow of grout.
I I. f .2.4 The method of fixing and supporting
the steel in the mould or the formwork shall be
such that it is not displaced during the placing
or compaction of the concrete or during
tensioning of the steel.
11.1.2.5 The type of fixtures used for
positioning the steel shall be such that it dots
not give rise to friction greater than that
assumed in the design.
11.1.3 J OINTING
11.1.3.1 High tensile wire other than hard-
drawn wire may be joined together by suitable
means provided the strength of such joints is
not less than the individual strengths of the
wires being joined. Hard-drawn wire used in
prestressed concrete work shall be contmuous
over the entire length of the tendon.
11.1.3.2 High tensile steel bars may be joined
together by means of couplings, provided the
strength of the coupling is such that in a test to
destruction, the bar shall tail before the
coupling.
ll.l.3.3 Welding shall not be permitted in
either wires or bars.
11.1.4 CU-nHNG
11.1.4.1 All cutting to length and trimming of
the ends of wires shall be done by suitable
mechanical or flame cutters. Where flame
cutters are used, care shall be taken to ensure
that the flame does not come into contact with
other stressed wires or concrete.
11.1.4.2 Bars shall preferably be ordered to
the exact length required. Any trimming
required shall be done only after the bar has
been tensioned and the grout has set; ,it
shall then be carried out in accordance
with 11.1.4:1.
1 1 . 1 . 5 ‘ PR O T E C T I O N OF PRESTRESSING
S TEEL AND A -In all
N C H O R A G E S
constructions of the post-tensioned type,
where prestressing is initially carried out
without bond, the prestrcssing tendon shall, at
a subsequent date and generally not later than
one week after prestressing, be given -an
adequate protection against corrosion.
11.1.5.1 INTERNAL PRESTRESSING STEEL -
Internal prestressing r’.eel is best protected by
a cement or cement-sand grout preferably in
colloidal form. Care shall betaken to prevent
segregation and, for that purpose, only fine
sand shall be used.
The grout shall be placed underpressure, and
it shall be ensured that the entire space
between the duct and the prestressing tendon
is properly filled with grout._
Where small ducts are encountered, it is
advisable that. water is flushed through prior
to grouting, care being taken to see that all
water is subsequently displaced by grout. In
the case of butted assemblies, flushing with
water shall be carried out .only after the
jointing material has properly hardened.
Injection shall proceed lrom one end or
preferably in case of curved ducts from the
lowest point of the curve, and shall be
continued until the grout overflows from the
other end.
11.1.5.2 EXTERNAL PHESTRESSING SIL-FL. -
The protection of external prestressingsteel is
usually best done by encasing the tensioned
wires, cables or bars in a dense concrete
secured to the main concrete, for example, by
wires left projecting from the latter. If a
cement sand mix is used, the cover,provided
and its density should be adequate to prevent
corrosion.
Altcrnative’ly, the steel may be encased in
buumen or, where the steel is accessible for
inspection and maintenance, paint protection
may be provided.
11./.5.3 The anchorage shall be adequately
protected against damage or corrosion soon
after the completion of the final stressing and
grouting operations.
11.1.6 COVER
11.1.6.1 In pre-tensioned work, the cover of
concrete measured from the outside of the
preetressing tendon shall be at least 20 mm.
11.1.6.2 In post-tensioned work, where
cables and large sized bars are used, the
minimum clear cover from sheathing/duct
shall be at least 30 mm or the size of the cable
or bar whichever is ,bigger.
1 I. 1.6.3 W h e r e p r e s t r e s s e d c o n c r e t e
members are located in aggressive
environment, the cover specified under
11.1.6.1 and 11.1.6,2 shall be increased
by IO mm.
11.1.7 S PACING
11.1.7.1 Inthecaseofsinglewiresusedinpre-
tension system, the minimum clear spacing
shall not be less than greater of the following:
a) 3 times the diameter of wire, and
b) 1: times the maximumsize of aggregate.

11.1.7.2 In theca$eofcablesorlargebars,the
minimum clear spacing (measured between
sheathings/ducts wherever used) shall not be
less than greater of the following:
a) 40 mm,
b) Maximum size of cable or bar, and
c) 5 mm plus maximum size of aggregate.
If .I.8 GR O U P E D C A B L E S
11.1.8.1 Cables or ducts may be grouped
together in groups of not more than four as
shown in Fig. 1.
11.1.8.2 The minimum clear spacing between
groups of cables or ducts of grouped cables
shall be greater of the following:
a) 40 mm, and
b) 5 mm plus maximum size of aggregate.
The vertical distance between groups shall not
be less than 50 mm (see Fig. I).
Fig. I Spacing of Groups of Cables
11.2 Sheaths and Exrracrable Cores
11.2.1 Sheaths shall be sufficiently water-
tight to preveni concrete laitance penetrating
in them m quantities likely to increase friction.
Special care shall be taken to ensure water-
tightness at the joints.
11.2.2 They shall be preferably machine-
manufactured and have bores sufficiently
large to allow being easily threaded on the
cable or bar in long lengths.
11.23 The tubes or sheaths shall be of such
strength as not to be dented or deformed
during handling or ccrncref,ing.
11.2.4 The alignment of all sheaths and
extractable cores shaiaii in correct to the
requirements of the drawings and maintained
securely to prevent displacement during
placing and compactitrn raf concrete. The
permissible tolerance in the location of the
sheaths and extractable cores shall be 2 5 mm.
Any distortion of the sheath during
concreting may lead to additional friction.
?Mt Vl ETIUCTU~AJ. DESIGN - SECTION S CONCRLTL
.
I I .3 Reinforcing Steel
fl.3.1 Provisions for assembly of reinforce-
ment given in Section 5A shall apply.
f f .3.2 The requirements ofcover and spacing
between bars shall conform to Section 5A.
12. PRESTRESSlNG
12.1 Presrressing Equipmenr
12.1.1 T ENSIONING APPARATUS
12.1.1.1 The requirements of 12.1.1 shall
apply to both the pretensioned and the post-
tensioned methods of prestressing concrete
except where specifically mentioned
otherwise.
12.1.1.2 Prestressing steel may be tensioned
by means of levers. screw jacks, hydraulic
jacks or similar mechanical apparatus. The
method of tensioning steel covered by this
section is generally by means of hydraulic or
similar mechanical jacks.
The type of tensioning apparatus shall be such
that a controlled force can be applied.
The tensioning appartus shall not induce
dangerous secondary stresses or torsional
effects on the steel, concrete, or on the
anchorage
12.1.1.3 The anchorage provided for the
temporary gripping of wires or bars on the
tensioning apparatus shall be secure and such
as not to damage the wire or bar.
12.1.1.4 Devices attached to the tensioning
apparatus for measuring the applied force
shall be such that they do not introduce errors
exceeding five percent.
f2.1.2 TE M P O R A R Y G RIPPING D EVICE -.
Prestressing tendons may be gripped by
wedges, yokes, double cones or any other
approved type of gripping devices. The
prestressing wires may be gripped singly or in
groups. Gripping devices shall be such that in
a tensile test, the wire or wires fixed by them
would break before failure of the grip itself.
12.1.3 RELEASING D EVICE -The releasing
device.shall be so designed that during the
period between the tensioningand release, the
tension in the prestressing elements is fully
maintained by positive means, such as
external anchorages. The device shall enable
the trangfer of prestress to be carried out
gradually and so as to avoid large difference
ol tension between wires in a tendon, severe
eccentricities of prestress or the sudden
application of stress to the concrete.
V W ”

12. I .4 ANCHORAGE
12.1.4.1 The anchorage may consist of any
device, patented or otherwise, whichcomp-
lies with the requirements laid d o w n
’ under 12.1.4.2 to 12.1.4.6.
12.1.4.2 The anchoring device shall be
capable of holding, without more than
nominal slip, the prestressing tendon
subjected to a load midway between the
proposed initial prestressing load and the
ultimate strength of the pnstressing tendon.
I2.f .43 The anchoring device shall be strong
enough to resist in all respects a force equal to
at least the breaking strength of the
prestressing tendon it anchors.
ELONGATION
12.1.4.4 The anchorage shall transfer
effectively and distribute, as evenly as
possible, the entire force from the prertressing
tendon to the concrete without inducing
undesirable secondary or local stresses.
12.1.4.5 The anchorage shall be safe and
secure against both dynamic and static loads
as well as against impact.
12.1.4.6 The anchorage shall have provision
for the introduction of a suitable protective
medium, such as cement grout, for the
protection of the prestressing steel unless
alternative arrangements are made.
12.2 Procedure for Tensioning and Dansfer
12.2.1 STRESSING
12.2.1. J The tensioning of prestressing
tendons shall be carried out in a manner that
will induce a smooth and even rate of increase
of stress in the tendons.
12.2.1.2 The total tension imparted to each
tendon shall conform to the requirements of
the design. No alteration in the prestressing
force in any tendon shall be allowed unless
specifically approved by the designer.
12.2.2.3 Any slack in the prestressing tendon
shall first be taken up by applying ‘a small
initial tension. The initial tension rquired to
removeslackness shall be taken as the starting
point for measuring the,elongation and a
correction shall be applied to the total
cloqation to tompensate for the initial
tcnsloning of the wire. The extent of
correction shall he arrived at by plotting on a
graph the gauge reading as abscissae and
extensions as ordinates; the intersection of the
curve with the r_uis when extended
shall be taken to give the effective elan tion
during intial tensionin and this ef!a ective
elongation shall be ad%ed to the measured
.
elongation to arrive at the actual total
elongation as shown in Fig. 2.
Y
Fig. 2 Determinarion of Acruai Elongarion
12.2.1.4 When two or more prestressing
tendons are to be tensioned simultaneous1
care shall be taken to ensure that all sueK
tendons are of the same length from gri to
grip. This provision shall be more carePully
observed for tendons of length smaller than
7.5 m.
12.2.1.5 ‘The placement of cables or ducts and
the order of stressing and grouting shall be so
arranged that the prestressing steel, when
tensioned and grouted, does not adversely
affect the adjoining ducts.
12.2.2 M EASUREMENT OF PRESTRESSING
F ORCE
12.2.2.1 The force induced in the prestressing
tendon shall be determined by means of
gauges attached to the tensioning apparatus
as well as by measuring the extension of the
steel and relating it to its stress-strain curve. It
is essential that both methods are used jointly
so that the inaccuracies to which each is singly
susceptible are minimized. Due allowance
shall be made for the frictional losses in the
tensioning apparatus.
R
12.2.2.2 The ressure gauges or devices
attached to t e tensioning apparatus to
measure the force shall be periodically
calibrated to ensure that they do not at any
time introduce errors in reading exceeding 2
perant.
12.233 In measuring the extension of
prestmsing steel, any slip which may occur in
the gripping device shall be taken into
consideration.
Z2.2.3 B R E A K A G E OF W I R E S - T h e
tikage of wires in any one mtmsed
concrete member shall not exceed S.5 percent
during tensioning. Wire breakages after
anchorage, irrespective of percentage, shall
noi b e c o n d o n e d w i t h o u t s p e c i a l
investigations.
12.2.4 TRANSFER OF PRESTREWNG FORCE
12.2.4. I The transfer of the prtistress shall be
carried out gradually so as to avoid large
differences of tension between wires in a
tendon, severe eccentricities of prestressing
force and the sudden application of stress to
the concrete.
12.2.41 Where the total prestressing force in
a member is built up by successive transfers to
the force of a number of individual tendons on
to the concrete, account shall be taken of the
effect of the successive prestressing.
12.2.4.3 In the long line and similar methods
of prestressing, when the transfer is made on
several moulds at a time, careshall be taken to
ensure that the prestressing force is evenly
applied on all the mouldsand that the transfer
of prestress to the concrete is uniform along
the entire length of the tension line.
12.3 Grouring
12.3.1 The requirements of the grout are
fluidity and low sedimentation (or bleeding)
in the plastic state. In the hardened state, it
shall be dense, have low shrinkage and be
durable. The grouting technique adopted
should be such that it can be carried out easily
and effectively.
f2.3.2 Grout shall bc made from any of the
cements specified in 4.1 and water conforming
to 4.3. Fine sand passing I50 Micron IS Sieve
may be added only for ducts of very large size.
If permitted by the engineer-in-charge,
admixtures may be ,added to improve the
performance of the grout. The water-cement
ratio for neat cement grouts should be
approximately 0.50 by mass, but should in no
case exceed 0.55 by mass.
12.32. I The compressive strength of 100 mm
cubes of the grout shall not be less thanI7
N/mm’ at 7 days. Cubes shall be cured in a
moist atmosphere for the first 24 hours, and
subsequently in water.
12.3.3 GROUTING EQUIPMENI
12.3.3.1 The mixer shall be of high speed
mixing type. capable of mixing with high local
turbulance while imparting only a slow
motion to the body of the grout. A grout
screen should preferably be fitted.
12.3.3.2 The pump and the injection
equipment shall be capable of continuous
operatioti with little, if any, pressure variation
and shall have a system for recirculating the
grout while actual grouting is not in progress.
No compressed air system should be used for
groutingwork. _The puinping equipment shall
_be able to deliver the grout at a nozzle pressure
of at least 0.7 N/mm’.
12.3.3.3 All piping to and from the grout
pump shall have a minimum of bends,valves
and changes in diameter, and-the delivery hoa:
shall be as short as practicable.
12.3.3.4 All piping, pumping and mixing
equipment should be thoroughly washed with
clean water after each series of operations or
more frequently, if necessary. In any c8se, the
intervals between the washings shall not
exceed 3 hours.
12.3.4 MIXING -Water shall be measured
and added to the mixer first, followed by
cement. When these are thoroughly mixed,
the additive and sand if any, shall be added.
When all the ingredients have been added,
mixing shall continue for at least two minutes.
1z.3.5 DUCX PREPARATION -Ducts shall be
kept clean at all times. Unwanted opening 8t
anchorages and in any other locatiotushall be
sealed before grouting commences.
In all long dbcts. or in any duct where
considerable changes of level occur and in any
large d&Meter ducts, grout vents shall &!
provided at ail crests and at intervals of 20 m
to 30 m so that grout can be injected
successively through vents as the grout flows
along the ducts. Where water is likely to enter
ducts, valley vents shall also be provided fol
drainage.
12.3.6 GROUT INJECUON -Grouts should
be injected from the lowest point or ‘uphill’
wherever practicable so that air,and water in
the duct, being less dense than the ,grout. will
be pushed ahead of the grout mix and be less
liable to become entrapped in the grout mix,
Grout mix shall be allowed to flow through
vent openings until its consistency is
equivalent to that of the grout injected. Vent
openings shall then be firmly closed out after
the other in the direction of flow. Once ood
grout mix has commenced-to flow freely from
the end or ends of the duct,. that end or ends
shall be closed and the pressure built,up inside
the duct to 0.7 N/mm* before closmg the
injection end.
In the case of large ducts where psassurc
grouting cannot he used, a stand pipe or vent
pipe shall be provided and kept topped up
with cement for an hour or two to replace
grout losses due to wastage and subsidence at
the termination of grouting operation.
/3. TRANSPOR’I IhC;, PLACING, deviation shall be a< gilen :a !able 2 and
COMPACTING AND CURING T a b l e 3 . respectively. In addition. the
requirement given in I.(.2 shall apply.
13.1 Provisions given in Section 5A shall
apply. In addition, the provisions given
in 13.1.1 and 13.1.2 shall also apply. TABLE 2 OPTIONAL TESTS REQUIREMENTS OF
CONCRETE
13.1.1 The use of construction joints in
prestressed concrete work should preferably
GRADE OF C OMPRESSIVE Moou~us OF
be avoided. But if found necessary, their C ONCRETE STRENGTHON R U P T U R E BI BF~U
position and arrangement shall be I5 cm CuBES. TEST. Mir:
predetermined by the designer. Min AT A
7 DAYS ’ 7
AI 12 -+ Zh 41 1 days
I3.l.t JO I N T I N G OF BOWED AS S E M B L I E S
(1) !a (3) (4)
N:mm’ N mm’ N mm)
13.1.2. I The joints of butted assemblies shall
be made of either cement grout or cement M 30 200 2I 3.0
mortar or concrete. Grouttng shall be used for M 35 23.5 2.3 3.2
joints up to 12 mm thick. For joints thicker M40 27 a 25 34
than I2 mm and preferably for thicknesses M 45 30 0 2.7 I.6
between I8 and 25 mm, mortar shall be used. M 50 33.5 2.9 3.8
The mortar which may be made of one part
cement and one and a half part sand. shall be M 55 37.0 3.1 4.0
of a dry consistency and shall be packed hard M60 40.0 3.3 4.2
in layers so that it rings true. Where joints --
exceeding 75 mm are encountered. the joint
shall be made of concrete.
TABLE 3 ASSUMED STANDARD DEVIATION
13.1.2.2 The stressing operations may be
carried out in case of mortar joints
immediately after placing the mortar but the G RADE OF CONCRETE AWJMED ST A N D A R D
D EVIATION .
stress in the mortar shall not exceed 7.0 N, mm’
N/mm*. In the case of grouted joints and
concrete joints the allowable stress in the first M30 6.0
24 hours after placing of the grout or concrete M 35 63
in the joint shall approximate as closely as M40 6.6
possible to the strength of the grout or
M 45 7.0
concrete used.
M so 7.4
13.1.2.3 The holes for the prestressing M 55 7.7
tendons shall be accurately located and shall M60 7.8
be in :rue alignment when the units are put
toget her.
15.2 Concrete -Strength al Transfer - In
IJ.l.2.4 Full tenstoning shall not be carried addition to the tests required as per 15.1,
out until the strength of the concrete or additional cube tests should be conducted at
mortar in the joint has reached twice the appropriate intervals to ensure that the
transfer stress. concrete strength in the member at transfer
conforms to the design requtrements. The
frequency of sampling and number of cubes
14. CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL should be decided by the engineer-in-charge.
CONDITIONS The sampling of concrete should preferably
be at the point of placing and the cubes should
14.1 Work it1 E x t r e m e Wealher Condi- be stored as far as possible under the same
rions During hot or cold weather, the conditions as the concrete in the members.
concreting should be done in accordance with
good practice [VI-5(20)]. 16. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

16.1 The provisions of Section 5A shall

f.5. SAMPI.ING AND STRENGTH TEST apply.
OF CONCRETE
17.’ INSPECTION AND TESTING OF
IS. I The provisions given in Section 5A shall STRUCTURES
apply; but the optional test requirements of
concrete and values of assumed standard 17.1 The provisions of Section 5A shall

VIP NATIONAL WILDING CODE OF INDIA


apply, except for the following:
a) For type I and 2 structures (see 19.3.2),
if within 24 hours of removal of the
imposed load, the structure does not
recover at least 85 percent of the
deflection under superimposed load, the
test may be repeated after a lapse of 72
hours. If the recovery is tess than 90
percent, the structure shall be deemed to
be unacceptable.
b) For type 3 structures (see 19.3.2). if
within 24 hours of the imposed load, the
structure does not recover at least 7 5
percent of the deflection under
superimposed load, the teat may be
repeated after a lapse of 72 hours. If the
recovery is less than 80 percent, the
structure shall be deemed to be
unacceptable.
SECTION 5B(c) GENERAL DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS
18. GENERAL DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS
18.1 The general design requirements for
design of prestressed concrete structures shall
be as given in 17 to 24 of Section 5A except as
modified and supplemented in 18.2 to 18.6.5.
18.2 The effects of prestress shall also be
taken into account in assessing loads and
forces.
18.3 The deductions for prcstressing tendons
as in 18.3.1 shall be considered for the
determination of area, centroid and moment
of inertia of the cross section.
18.3.1 DE D U C T I O N S FOR PRESTRESSING
TENDONS -In calculating area, centroid and
moment of inertia of a cross-section,
deduction for prestressing tendons shall be
made as follows:
a) In the case of pre-tensioned members,
where the prestressing tendons are single
wires distributed on the cross section or
strands of wirus of relatively small cross-
sectional area, allowance for the prestress
ing tendons need not be made. Where
allowance is made, it shall be on the
basrs of (m-l) times the area of the
prestressing tendons, m being the
modular ratio.
b) In the case of post-tensioned members,
deductions shall invariably be made for
prestressing tendons, cable ducts or
sheaths and such other openings
whether they are formed longitudinally
?ARl VI STlttJCTUBAL DCSICN - SKIlOW 5 CONCRETE
.
or transversely. These deductions need
not however be made for determining
the effect of loads applied after the
ducts, sheaths or openings have been
grouted or filled with concrete. Where
such deductions are not made, a
transformed area equivalent to (m- I)
times the area of the pre-stressing
tendon shall be taken in calculation, )rt
being the modular ratio.
Nom m shall be calculated RS E./E. for values ol E,
and EC, see 4.5.3.1 and 5.2.3.1, respectively. Wherever
nccessa, 5’. creep effect shall also be taken mto
consideration.
18.4 Instability During Erecrion - 1 n
evaluating the slenderness effects during
lifting of slender beams, the following factors
require consideration:
a) Beam geometry,
b) Location of lifting points,
c) Method of lifting, and
d) Tolerances in construction.
All beams which are lifted on vertical or
inclined slings, shall be checked for lateral
stability and lateral moment on account of
tilting of beam due to inaccuracies in location
of lifting points, and due to the lateral bow.
For calculating the factor of safety against
lateral instability y, reference may be made to
specialist literature. This factor shall not be
less than two.
For determining the lateral moment due to
tilting, realistic values which are not likely to
be exceeded in practice shall be assumed for
the eccentricity of lifting points and the lateral
bow. The maximum tensile stress for
y,/(y,-I) times the lateral moment due to
tilting, shall not exceed 1.5 N/mm’
18.5 Presrressing Requirements
183.1 MA X I M U M I N I T I A L PRESTRESS -At
the time of initial tensioning, the maximum
tensile stress, fP, immediately behind the
anchorages shall not exceed 80 percent of the
ultimate tensile strength of the wire or bar or
strand.
1 8 . 5 . 2 LO S S E S IN PRESS R E S S - WhiJe
assessing the stresses in concrete and steel
during tensioning operations and later in
service, due regard shall be paid to all losses
and variations in stress resulting from creep of
concrete, shrinkage of concrete, relaxation of
steel, the shortening (elastic deformation) of
concrete at transfer, and friction and slip of
anchorage. Unless otherwise determined by
actual tests, allowance for these losses shall be
made in accordance with the values specified
under 18.5.2.1 to 18.S.2.6.
VI-5 81
In computing the losses in presrress when
untensioned reinforcement is present, the
effect of the tensile stresses developed‘by the
untensloned reinforcement due to shrinkage
and creep shall be considered.
/8.j.,./ LOSS OF PRESTRESS DUE JC C R E E P
OF CONCRE I E--The loss of prestress due 10
creep of concrete under load shall be
determined for all the permanently applied
loads including the prebtress.
The creep loss due IO live load stresses,
erection stresses and other stresses of short
duration may be Ignored. The loss ot prestress
due to creep 01 concrete is obtained as the
product of the modulus of elasticity of the
prestressing steel (SCC 4.5.3) and rhe ultimate
creep strain of the concrete fibre (JPP 5.2.5.1)
mtcgrated along I he line ofcentre of gravity of
the prestressing steel over its’ entire length.
The total creep strain during any specific
period shall be assumed for all practical
purposes to be the creep strain due to
sustained stress equal to the average of the
stresses at the beginning and end ot the period.
18.5.2.2 L O S S O F PRFSTRESS D U E 1’0
S H R I N K A G E O F CONCKEIC --.Thr loss O f
prestress due to shrinkage of concrete shall be
the product of the modulus of elasticity 01
steel (see 4.5.3) and the shrinkage strain 01
concrete (Jee 5.2.4.1).
18.5.2.3 L O S S Of PKfSlKtSS fIl:f. f0
R~.L.AXAIIO~ O F STEEL ~- T h e relaxarlon
losses m prestressing steels vary with type of
steel, initial prestress. age and temperature
and, therefore, shall bc determined from
experiments. When experimental values are
not available. the relaxation losses may be
assumed as given in Table 4.
TABLE 4 RELAXAllON I OsSES F O R
PRESTRESSfKG STEEL
AT I000 HOURS AT 27°C
IKlllAL SIRES5 R E L A X A T I O N 1.0~s
N/mm’
0.5 “I, 0
0b.h 35
70
o-7/,
o.g/, 9u
NOTE -jp IS rhc charactcnvic StrCngth of prestrcssing
steel.
_
For tendons at higher temperatures or
subjected to large lateral loads, greater
relaxation losses as specified by the engineer-
in-charge shall be allowed for. No reduction in
the value of the relaxation losses should be
w-32
made for a tendon with a load--equal to or
greater than the relevantjacking iorce that has
been applied for a short time prior to rhe
anchoring of the tendon.
13.5.2.4 L O S S O t PRESIRESS ,t)t~tf 10
SHORl~FNIYC OF COYCRETE --. This type ot
loss occurs ‘when the prestressing tendons
upon release from tensioning devices cause
the concrete to be compressed. This loss IS
proportIona to the modular ratio and initial
prestress in the concrete and shall, be
calculated as below, assuming that the
tendons are locared ar their centroid:
a) For pretensioning. the loss of prestress in
the tendons at transter shall be calculated
on a modular ratio basis using the stress
in the adjacent concrete.
b) For mcmhers with post-tensioned
tendQns w h i c h a r e n o t s t r e s s e d
simultaneously. there is a progressive loss
of prestress during transfer due to the
gradual application of the prestressing
forces. This loss ot prestress should be
calc.uiated on the basis of hatfthe product
of the stress in the concrete adjacent to the
tendons averaged along their lengths and
the modular ratio. Alternatively, the loss
ot‘ prestress may be exactly computed
based on the sequence of tensioning.
18.5.2.5 LOSS OF PRESTRESS DUt f0 SI IP IN
ANCHORAGF --Any toss of prestress which
may occur due to slip of wires during
anchoring or due to the strair: of anchorage
shall be allowed for in the design. Loss due to
slip in anchorage is ofspecial importance with
short members and the necessary addltional
elongation should be provided for at the time
of tenslonlng to compensate for this loss.
18.5.2.6 LAOS!, O F PRES.rRFSS D U E J O
FRIClWN ~~~~Thc design s h a l l t a k e i n r o
consideration all losses in preslress that may
occur during tensioning due to frlctlon
between rhe prestressing tendons and the
sur,rounding concrete or any fixture attached
to the steel or concrete.
For straight or moderately curved structures
with curved or straight cables, rhe value oi
prestressing force P, at a distance x metres
from tensioning end and acting in the
direction of the tangent to the curve of the
cable, shall be calculated as below:
where
P, = p r e s t r e s s i n g f o r c e In t h e
prestressed steel at the tensioning
end acting in the direction of the
tangent to the curve of rhe cable:
 a = cumulative angle in radians
through which the tangent to the
cable profile has turned between
any two point under consideration,
= coefficient of friction in curve;
P
unless otherwise proved by tests, p
may be taken as:
O-55 for steel moring on concrete,
O-30 for steel moving on steel,
0.25 for steel moving on lead
k = coefficient for wave effect varying
from IS X IO-’ to 50 X IO-’ per
metre.
NOTE I -Expansion of the equation fcr P. for small
values of (pa + kx) may he P. = P. (1 - N* - kx).
N OTE 2 --In circular or similar constructions, where
circumferential tendons arc tensioned by jacks, values of
~1 for calculating friction may hc taken as:
O.AS for steel moving in smooth concrete
0.25 for srecl moving on steel bearers
0.10 for steel moving on steel rollers
N OTE 3
-The effect of reverse friction shall k rakcn into
consideratjon in such casts where the initial tension
applied to a prcstressing tendon is partially released and
action of friction in the reverse direction causes an
alteration in the distribution of stress along the lcnph of
the tendon.
18.6 Considerarions Affecting Design Details
18.6.1 TR A N S M I S S I O N ZONE IN PRETEN-
SIONED MEMBERS
18.6.1, I T R A N S M I S S I O N L E N G TH -The
considerations affecting the transmission
length shall be the following:
4 The transmission length depends on a
number of variables the most important
being the strength of concrete at transfer.
the size and type of tendon. the surface
deformations of the tendon, and the
degree of compactness of the concrete
around the tendon.
b) The transmission length may vary
depending on the site conditions and,
therefor’c, should be determined from
tests carried out under the most
unfavourable conditions. In the absence
of values based on actual tests, the
following values may ,bc used provided
the concrete is well-compacted, and its
strength at transfer is not less than
35 N/mm’ and the tendon is released
gradually:
I) For plain and indented wire 1004
2) For crimped wires 65 4
3) Strands 30 4
Norm 1 --#I is the diameter of the tendon.
N OTE a--The recommended volts of transmission
kngth appty 10 wirp of diameter not exceeding 5 mm and
atrandr of diameter not exceeding 18 mm.
cj The development of stress in the tendon
may be assumed to vary parabolically
along the length of the member.
4 For general guidance, it is recommended
that one-half the transmission length
shall overhang the support in a simply
supported beam. Where there is end-
fixing, the whole of the transmission
length shall overhang.
18.6.2 E ND ZONE
18.6.2.1, BEARING STRESS
a) On the areas immediately behind external
anchorages, the permissible unit bearing
stress on the concrete, after accounting
ior all losses due to relaxation of steel
elastic shortening, creep bf concrete, slip
and/or seating of anchorages, etc, shall
not exceed
0.48/,, JF orO.R/,i
Pun
whichever is smaller. where fC, is
the cube tirength at transfer, AI,, is
the beating area and Apun is the
punching area.
During tknsioning. the @lowable bearing
b)
stress specified in (a) maji % increased by
25 percent. provided that this temporary
value does not exceed the average cube
strength at transfer, 1;*_
cl The bearing stress s ified in (a) and (b)
for permanent anJet temporary bearing
stress may be increased suitably if
adequate hoop reinforcement complying
with Section SA is provided at the
anchorages.
4 When the anchorages are embedded in
concrete, the bearing stress shall be
investigated after accounting for the
surface friction between the anchorage
and the concrete.
6) The effective punching area shall
generally be the contact area of the
anchorage devices which, if circular in
shape, shall be replaced by a square of
equivalent area. The bearing area shall be
the maximum area of that portion of the
member which is gc~met&ally simi!ar
and concentric to the effective punching
area.
Where a number of anchorages are used,
the bearing area AL. shall not’overlap.
Where there is already a compressive
stress prevailing over the bearing area, as
in the case of an anchorage placed in the
body of a structure, the total stress shall
not exceed the limiting values specified in
(a), (b) and (c). For stage stressing of
c a b l e s the a d j a c e n t u n s t r e s s e d
anchorages shall be neglected when
determining the bearing area.
/8.6._?.2 BURSTING TENSILE FORCES
a) Thr bursting tensile forces in the end
blocks. or regions of bonded post-
tensioned members, should be aqessed
on the basis of the tendon jacking load.
For unbonded memebrs, the bursting
tensile forces should be assessed on the
bases of the tendon jacking load or the
load in the tendon at the limit state of
collapse, whichever is the greater (see
Appendix B).
The bursting tensile force, FL,,, existing in
an individual square end block loaded by
a symmetrically placed square anchorage
or bearing plate, may be derived from
equation below:
Fbr!
= 0.32 - 0.3 .T-
P, 0 reinforcement in the web when the web is
where
bursting tensile force.
load in the tendon assessed as
abo(le,
side of loaded area, and
side of end block.
b) The force, Ft,,, will be distributed in a
region extending from 0. I ,vO to y0 from
the loaded face of the end block.
Reinforcement rovided to sustain the
bursting tensile P
orce, may be assumed to
be acting at its design strength (0*87J,)
except that the stress should be limited to
a value corresponding to a strain of 0401
when the concrete cover to the
reinforcement is less than 50 mm.
cl In rectangular end blocks, the bursting
tensile forces in the two principal
directions should be assessed on the basis
of 18.6.2.2. When circular anchorage or
bearing plates are used, the side of the
equivalent square area should be used.
Where groups of anchorages or bearing
plates occur, the end block should be
divided into a series of symmetrically
loaded prisms and each prism treated in
the above manner. For designing end
blocks having a cross-section different in
shape, from that of the general cross-
section of the beam, reference should be
made to specialist literature.
4 Compliance with the requirements of (a),
(b) and (c) will generally ensure that
bursting tensile forces along the load axis
are provided for. Alternative methods of
design which make allowance for the
tensile strength of the concrete may be
used, in which case reference should be
made to specialist literature.
d Consideration should also be given to the
spalling tensile stresses, that occur in end
blocks where the anchorage or bearing
plates are highly eccentric; these reach a
maximum at the loaded face.
18.6.3 DEIAILING OF R E I N F O R C E M E N T IN
PR ES rRESSED CONCRETE
18.6..7./ l-he detailing of reinforcement in
prestressed concrete shall generally conform
to the requirements given in Section 5A.
In addition, the requirements of 18.6.3.2
to 18.6.3.3 shall be satisfied.
18.6.3.2 TRANSVERSE REINFORCEMENT
a) The amount and spacing of transverse
reinforcement shall be governed by shear
and torsion considerations. It is however
desirable to provide transverse
rhin and cables are located in the web.
b) In case of all members subjected to
dynamic loading, webs shall be provided
with transverse reinforcement, not less
than 0.3 percent of the sectional area of
the web in plan. This percentage of
reinforcement may be reduced, to O-2
percent in members where the depth of
the web is not more than four times the
thickness of web. These values may be
r e d u c e d t o 0.2 and O-15 p e r c e n t ,
respectively, when high strength
reinforcement is used.
4 In case of members not subjected to,
dynamic loading, reinforcement shall be
provided when the depth of the web is
more than 4 times the thickness. Such
reinforcement shall not be less than 0.1
percent of the sectional area of the web in
plan. The reinforcement shall be spaced
at a distance not greater than the clear
depth of the web and the size of such
reinforcement shall be as small as
possible.
4 Reinforcement in the form of links or
helix shall be provided perpendicular to
the line of heavy compression or shock
loading to resist the induced tensile
stresses.
18.6.3.3 L O N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O RC E ME N T
a) A minimum longitudinal reinforcement
of 0.2 percent of the total concrete area
shall be provided in all cases cxcc t in the
case of pretensioned units oP small
sections. This reinforcement ma be
reduced to Q 15 percent in the case orhigh
yield strength deformed reinforcement.
The percentage of steel provided, both
tensioned and untensioned t a k e n
together, should be sufficient SO t h a t
when the concrete in the prtcomprcssed
tensile zone cracks, the steel is in a
poaiCion [o take up the additional tensile
 stress transferred on to it by the cracking
of the adjacent fibres of concrete and a
sudden failure is avoided.
When the depth of the web exceeds 50 cm.
longitudinal distribution reinforcement
not less than 0.05 percent of the area of
the web, shall be provided on each lace.
l-he spacing of the individual bars of such
reinforcemerlt shall not exceed 20 cm.
All untensioned longitudinal
reinforcement shall be restrained in the
lateral direction.
18.6.4 CONllNUITY --In t h e design o f
continuous prestressed concrete structures.
due consideration shall be given to the effect
of the support restraints on both the external
moment and the moment due to prestressing.
1X.6.5 Br I II‘I) A%LMUI 1 Where a hutted
assembly is used. oiwhcrc lihc ctjndi’tions of
abuttal arc employ4. proper r,r,)vi\ion shall
b e m a d e to transfer all shear stresses.
Whcreber the shear stresheh exceeds the limits
\pccif.ied under 22.4, this provision s h a l l
include kevrng of all abuttrng faces.
SECTION 5&d) STR UCl’U RAL
DESIGN : LlMIT STATE hlEIHOD
19. S A F E T Y A N D SERVICEAHILITY
REQUIREIMEN I-S
19.1 Limit Slate l&sign ---The structural
design shall be based on limit state concepts.
In this method ofdesign. the structure shall be
designed to withstand safely all loads liable to
act on It throughout its life; it shall also satisfy
the serviceability requirements, such as
limitations on deflection and cracking. The
acceptable limit for the safety and
serviceability requirements before failure
occurs is called a ‘Limit State’. The aim of
design is to achieve acceptable probabilities
that the structure will not become unfit for the
use for which it is intended. that is, that it will
not reach a limit state.
19.1.1 All relevant limit states shall be
considered in design to ensure an adequate
degree of safety and serviceability. In,general,
the structure shall be designed on the basis of
the most critical limit state and shall be
checked for other limit states.
19.1.2 For ensuring the specified objective,
the design should be based on characteristic
values for material strengths and applied
loads, which take into account the variations
in the material strengths and in the loads to’be
supported. The c’haracteristic values should
PART VI STYL’CTL’RAL DESIGN - SDt?llON 5 CONCILTE
be based on statistical data if available; where
such data are not available, they should be
based on experience. The ‘design values’ are
derived from thecharacteristic values through
the use of partial safety factors, one t’or
material ?;tre.ngths and the other for loads. In
the absence of-special considerations, these
factors should have the values given in 20.4
according to the material, the type of loading
and the limit state being considered.
19.2 Limir Statrq/Collap.w The limit state
of collapse of the structure or part of the
structure could be assessed from rupture of
one or more critical sections arrd from
buckling due to elastic or plastx Instability
iincluding the rl‘tects o f s w a v w h e r e
appropriate) or overturning. The resistance to
bcndlng, shear, torsion and axial loads at
every section shall be not less than
appropriate value at that scction\produced by
the probable most unfavourable combination
of loads on the structure using the’appropriate
partial safety factors.
19.3 Limit States of Serviceahllilj~
19.3.1 L IMIT STATE OF S~~RVICEABILITY:
DEFL.EC~‘ION -~ -The deflection of a structure
or part thereoi shall not adversely effect the
appearance or efficiency of the structure or
finishes or partitions. The deflection shall
generally be limited to the following:
4 The final deflection due to all iodds
including !he effects of temperature.
creep and shrinkage and measured from
the as cast level of thit supports of floors,
roofs and all other hormzontal members,
should not normally exceed span/250..
b) The deflection including the effects of
temperature, creep and shrinkage
occuring after erection of partitions and
the application of finishes should not
normally exceed span/350 or 20 mm
whichever is less.
c) If finishes are to be applied to prestressed
concrete members, the total upwar’d
deflectinn should not exceed spani300.
unless uniformity of camber between
adjacent uniformity of camber between
adjacent units can be ensured.
19.3.2 L IMIT S TATE OF S E R V I C E A B I L I T Y :
C R A C K I N G -Cracking of concrete shall
not effect the appearance or durability of
the structure. The criteria of limit state of
cracking for the three types of prestressed
concrete members shall be as follows:
a) For Type 1, no tensile stresses.
b) For Type 2, tensile stresses are allowed
but no visible cracking.
c) For Type 3. cracking is allowed, but
should not affect the appearance or
“1-P
 durability of the structure; the acceptable
limits of cracking would vary with the
type of structure and environment and
will vary between wide limits -and the
prediction of absolute maximunt width
is not possible.
KOTE -For design ol rypc 3 members. as a guide,
thk following may bc regarded as reasonable limits
The surface width ol cracks should not. in general.
exceed 0.1 m m f o r m e m b e r s e x p o s e d lo a
parllcularly aggressrve environment such as the
scwre category m Appendix A and not exceeding
0.2 mm lor all other members
19.3.3 The flexural tensile stress at any
section of the structure, both at transfer and
under the most unfavourable combination of
design loads shall satisfy the criteria for the
corresponding type of structure.
19.3.4 LI M I T S TA TE O F S E R V IC E A B I L I T Y :
M AXIMUM C O M P R E S S I O N -The compres-
sive stresses both at transfer and under design
loads shall be limited to the values given in
22.8 for all types of structures.
19.3.5 OT H E R L IMIT S T A T E S - S t r u c t u r e s
designed for unusual or special functions shall
comply with any relevant additional limit
states considered appropriate to that
structure.
20. CHARACTERISTIC AND DESIGN
VALUES AND PARTIAL SAFETY
FACTORS
20. I C h a r a c t e r i s t i c S t r e n g t h o/
Morerials -The term ‘characteristic stress’
means that value of the strength of the
material below which not more than 5 percent
of the test results are expected to fall. The
characteristic strength for concrete shall be in
accordance with Table I, modified by 5.2.1
regarding increase in concrete strength with
age. Until the relevant Indian. Standard
specificatidns for prestressing and reinforcing
steel are modified to include the concept of
characteristic strength, the characteristic
strength shall be assumed as the minimum
ultimate tensile stress/ breaking load for
prestressing steel and as the minimum
yield/ @2 percent proof stress for reinforcing
tteel. specified in the relevant Indian Standard
specifications.
20.2 Characteristic Loads -The term
‘characteristic load’ means that value of load
which has a 95 percent probability of not
king exceeded duringthe life of the structure.
Since data are not available to express loads in
statistical terms, for the purpose of the
section. the dead loads, live loads, wind loads
and scismrc forces as given in Part VI
Structural design, Section I Loads shall be
assumed as the characteristic loads.
20.3 Design Values
20.3.1 M ATERIALS -The design strength of
the materials, fd is given by
where
/ = characteristic strength of the
material (see 20.1), and
ym = partial safety factor appropriate to
the material and the limit state
being considered (see 20.4).
20.3.2 LOADS -The design load, Fd is given
by
F.j = FY,
where
F y characteristic load (see 20.2), and
7 = partial safety factor appropriate to
the nature of loading and the limit
state being considered (see 20.4).
20.3.3 CONSEQUENCES OF ATTAINING LIMIT
S T A T E - W h e r e the consequences of a
structure attaining a limit state are of a serious
nature such as huge lo& of life and disruption
of the economy, higher values forym and y,
I han those given under 20.4.1 and 20.4.2 may
be applied.
X.4 Partial SaJety Factors
20.4.1 PA R T I A L S A F E T Y F A C T O R ym FOR
M ATERIAL S T R E N G T H
20.4.1.1 When assessing the strength of a
structure or structural member for the limit
state of collapse, the values of partial safety
factor y,,, should be taken as and I.5 for
concrete and I. I5 for steel.
NOTE - ya values arc already incorporated in the
equations and tables given in this section.
20.4.1.2 When assessing the deflection, the
material properties such as modulus of
elasticity of concrete should be taken as those
associated with the characteristic strength of
the material and safety factor shall not be
applied.
20:4.2 PA R T I A L S A F E T Y F A C T O R 7, F O R
L O A D S-The value of y, given in Table 5
shall normally be used.
NATIDNAL BUIUXNG CDDC OF INDIA
 where
TABLE5 VALUES OFPARTIALSAFETYFACTOR
wlxm-y X” = depth of neutral axis,
.. d = effective depth, and
batIT STATES
cD&ZilON "%~~~" OF SEllVlC&ABlLITV
&M = percentage reduction in
e-
moment.
DL LL WL DL LL WL 4 In structures in which the structural
(1) (2) (3) (4 (9 (6) (7) frame provides the lateral stability, the
reduction in moment allowed by
DL + LL 1.5 I.5 - 14 1.0 - condition 2l.f.l(c) shall be restricted to
DLi WL 13or - 1.5. I.0 - 1.0 20 percent for structures up to 4 storeys in
height and 10 percent for structures over 4
$e9Note I) storeys in height.
DL+LL+WL I.2 1.2 I.2 I.0 04 0.8
21.1.2 A NALYSIS OF S LABS S P A N N I N G IN
Non 1 -Thie value of 0.9 ir to be coasidercd when Two DIRECTIONS ATR IGHT ANGLES--In
ttability againat overturning or atrem revereal ie critical.
general, the provisions of Section 5A shall
N O T E 2 - W h i l e conridering earthquake effect& apply.
rubrtitute EL for WL.
NOTE 3 -For the limit etatee of aerviceahility. the values
of yr given in this table’ are rppliubk for short term 22. LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE
effects. While wumin the long tcrmc effects due to
creep, the dead load an&f that part of the live load likely to
be permanent may only be conridered. 22.1 Limit State of Collapse : Flexure
22.1.1 AMJMPTIONS -Design for the limit
21. ANALYSIS state of collapse in flexure shall be based on
21.1 Analysis of Structure-Methods of the assumptions given below:
analysis as given in Section 5A shall be used. a) Plane sections normal to the axis remain
The material strength to be assumed shall be plane after bending.
characteristic values in the determination of b) The maximum strain in concrete at the
elastic properties of members irrespective of outermost compression fibre is taken as
the limit state being considered. O$lO35 in bending.
Redistribution of the calculated moments
may be made as given in 21.1.1. cl The relationship between the compressive
stress distribution in concrete and the
21.1.1 REDISTRIBU~ON 0F MOMENTS IN strain in concrete may be assumed to
C ON T I N U O U S B EAMS A N D FRAMES-The be rectangle, trapezoid; parabola or an)
redistribution of moments may be carried out other shape which results in prediction of
satisfying the following conditions: strength in substantial agreement with the
a) Equilibrium between the internal forces results of tests. An acceptable stress-
and the external loads is maintained, strain curve is the same as Fig. 20 of
Section 5A. For design purposes, the
b) The ultimate moment of resistance compressive strength of concrete in the
provided at any section of a member is structure shall be assumed to be 0.67
not less than 80 percent of the moment at times the characteristic strength.The
that section obtained from an elastic partial safety factor ym = l-5 shall be
maximum moment diagram covering all applied in addition to this.
appropriate combinations of loads,
NOTE -For the strr-strain curve (see Fi .20 of Section
cl The elastic moment at any section in a 5A). the design rtresr block parnmcten orf rectangular
member due to a particular combination action are as followa (see Fig. 21 of Section 5A).
of loads shall not be reduced by more Arca of strcar block = 0.36/d,
than 20 percent of the numerically largest
moment given anywhere by the elastic Depth of centre of comgraaivc force from the
maximum moments diagram for the extreme tibrc in compmuton = tI42 xu
particular member, covering all where
appropriate combination of loads,
hk = characteristic compreuive strength of
4 At sections where the moment capacity concrete, and
after redistribution is less than that from = depth of neutral axis.
X”
the elastic maximum moment diagram,
the following relationship shall be
satisfied: 4 The tensile strength of the concrete is
ignored.
&I4
5-+- 1oo GO.5 The stresses in bonded prestressing
tendons, whether initially tensioned or

?.UT VT S T R U C T U R A L DESIGN -IIU~IDN 5 CONCUTB

 untensioncd. a n d i n a d d i t i o n a l
reinforcement are derived from the
representative stress-strain curve for the
type of steel used given by the
manufacturer or typical curves given in
Fig. 3 for prestressifig tendons and in
Section 5A for reinforcement. For ‘design
purposes, the partial safety factor y,,,
equal to I.15 shall be applied.
f) If tendons are unbonded in post-
tensioned members, the stress in the
tendons may be obtained from a rigorous
analysis or from tests.
O-95 tp
o-9 tp
;::i :;
08 tp
0 1 0.1 0.2 0.5
o-05
STUAlN
3A Wirer (Stnm Relieved), Stranda and BNE
0 7 fp
In
z I;= maximum pri .pal tensile stress
a given by @24 3”
Iii
0.05 STRAIN
38 Wira (AS-D~~W@
Fig. 3 Representative SIMS strain CkWS
for Restressing Steels
22.1.2 DESIGN FORMULAE --In the absence
of an analysis based on the assumptions given
in 221.1, the moment of resistance of
rectangular sections anti flanged sections in
which the neutral axis lies within the flange
may be obtained by the procedure givenm
Appendix B.
For flanged sections iit which the neutral axis
lies outside the flange, the moment of
resistance rhall be determined using
assumptions given in 22.1.1.
22.2 Limit State of ColIapse : Compres-
sion - Prestressed concretg compression
members in framed structures, where the
mean stress in the concrete section imposed by
tendons is less than 2.5 N/mm’, may be
analysed as reinforced concrete compression
members in accordance with Section5A; in
other cases specialist literature may be
referred to.
22.3 Limit State of ColrCpse : Tension -
Tensile strength of the tension members shall
be based on the design strength (0.87 times
characteristic, strength of prestressing
tendons) and the strength developed by any
additional reinforcement. The additional
reinforcement may usually be assumed to be
acting at its design stress (4.87 times
characteristic strength of reinforcement);in
special cases it may be necessary to check the
stress in the reinforcement using strain
compatibility.
22.4 Limit State of Collapse : Shear -The
ultimate shear resistance of the concrete
alone, V,, should be considered at both
sections cncracked and cracked in flexure, the
lesser value taken and, if necessary, shear
reinforcement provided.
22.4.1 SECTIONS U NCRACKED IN F LEXURE -
The ultimate shear resistance of a section
untracked in flcxure, V, = KO. is given by
Vco = 0.67 bD Jr;’ + 0.8/,,/,
where
b = breadth of the member which for T. I
and L beams should be replaced by
breadth of the rib b,;
D = overall depth of the member,
f& taken as positive;
and
/cP = compressive stress at centroidal axis
due to prestrcss, taken as positive.
In flanged members where the centroidal axis
occurs m the flange, the principal t nsile stress
should be limited to 024?- fck at the
intersection of the flanged web, in this
calculation, O-8 of the stressdue to prestress at
this intersection may be used. in calculating
Vco.
For a section untracked in flexure and with.
inclined tendons or vertical prestress, the
component of prestressing force normal to the
longttudinal axis of the member may be added
to v,.
22.4.2 SECTIONS CRACKED IN F LEXURE -
The ‘ultimate shear resishnce of section
cracked in flexure, V, = V,, is given by
NATlONAL 8UllDlNC CUDL O F I N D I A
where For a section cracked in flexure and with
fpc = effective prestress after all losses inclined tendons, the component of
have occurred, which shall riot be prestressing force normal to the longitudinal
put greater than 0.6f,, axis of the member should be ignored.
fp= c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s t r e n g t h o f 22.43 SHEA-R REINFORCEMENI
prestressing. steel,
i, = ultimate shear stress capacity of 22.4.3.1 When V, the shear force due to the
concrete obtained from Table 6, ultimate loads, is less than VC, the shear force
b = breadth of the member, which for which can be carried by the concrete,
flanged sections shall be taken as minimum shear reinforcement should be
the breadth of the web b,, provided in the form of stirrups such that:
d = distance from the extreme A,,
-=- 0.4
compression fibre to the centroid bsv 0.87fy
of the tendons at the section
considered, where
M, = moment necessary to produce zero A,, = total cross-sectional area of stirrup
stress in the concrete at the depth, legs effective in shear ;
given by: b = breadth of the member which for T, I
and L beams should be taken as the
MO = 0.8 fP, & breadth of the rib, b,;
where.fp, is the stress due to prestress S” = stirrupspacing. along the length of
only at depth d and distance .V from the member; and
the centroid of the concrete section
which has second moment of area/. h= characteristic strength of the stirrup
and reinforcement which shall not be
taken greater than 415 N/mm’.
shear force and bending moment
respectively, at the ‘section consi- However, shear reinforcement need not be
dered due to ultimate loads. provided in the following cases;.
VC, = should be taken as not less than a) where V is less than 0.5 Vc; and
0-I brl&- b) in members of minor importance.
TABLE6 DEWGNSHEARSTRENGTHOF 22.4.3.2 When the shear force V, due to the
CONCRETE. Tc, N/mm* ultimate loads, exceeds V,, the shear force
(Clause 22.4.2) which can be carried by concrete, shear
reinforcement shall be provided such that
C ONCRETE G RADE
A
loon M30 M 35 A,,
-= y- K
bd M*Ezd S" 0.87f,d,
(1) (2) (3 (4)
0.25 0.37 0.37 0.38
O-50 0.50 0.50 c51
In rectangular beams, at both corners in the
0.75 0.59 059, 060
tensile zone, a stirrup should pass around a
I al 0% 0.67 @68
longitudinal bar, a tendon or a group of
I.25 0.71 b73 0.74
tendons having a diameter not less than the
I.50 076 0.78 079
diameter of the stirrup. The depthd, is then
1.75 0.80 0.82 0.84
taken as the depth from the extreme
2.00 084 0.86 @88
compression fibre either to the longitudinal
2.25 0.88 090 0.92
bars or to the centroid of the tendons
2.50 o-91 0.93 0.95
whichever is greater.
2-75 0.94 0.96 098 The spacing of stirru s along a member
34Xl 0.96 099 I.01
should not exceed 0.75s, nor 4 ttmes the web
Note---A, is the area of prcstrcssing tendon. thickness for flanged members. When V
exceeds I .8 V,, the maximum spacing should
be reduced to 0.5d,. The lateral spacing of the
The value of V,, calculated at a particular individual legs of the stirrups provided at a
section may be assumed to be constant for a cross-section should not exceed0.75d,.
distance e ual to d/ 2, measured in the
direction o? increasing moment, from that 22.44 M AXIMUM S HEAR FORCES--In no
particular section. circumstances should the shear forceV, due to

PART VI STRIJCTUPAL DESIGN- SECTION 5 CONCRETE “14.~9

ultimate loads, exceed the appropriate values
given in Table 7 tiultiplicd by bd.
22.5 Limit State of Collapse: Torsian
22.5.1 GENERAL - In general, where the
torsional resistance oi stiffness of members
has not been taken into account in the analysis
of the structure, no specific calculations for
torsion will be necessary; adequate control in
torsional cracking being rovided by the
required nominal shear reinPorcement. Where
the torsional resistance or stiffness of
members is taken into account in theanalysis,
the members shall be designed for torsion.
designed to withstand a moment MC2 given by
Me2 =M,-A4
the moment ML2 being taken as acting in the
opposite sense to the moment M.
22.5.3.3 Where the numerical value of M is
less than or equal to that of M,,rhe.beam shall
be designed to withstand an equivalent
transverse bending moment M,I (not acting
simultaneously with MI), given by

22.5.2 APPLICATION OF D ESIGN R ULES FOR

TORSION -The design rules laid down
in 22.5.3 to 22.5.5 apply to:
a) beams of solid rectangular cross-section
(D>b).
b) hollow rectangular beams with D>b and
with a wall thickness- t >b/4
cl T-beam and l-beams.
In all these cases the average intensity of
prestress in the concrete shall be ltss than
0.3&
and acting about an Bxis at right angles to the
axis of M. where xlis the smaller dimension of
a closed lioop used as torsional shear
reinforcement and r is as defined in 22.5.4. f.
22.5.4 TR A N S V E R S E R E I N F O R C E M E N T
22.5.4.J TORSIONAL MOMENT AND SHEAR
C A R R I ED
BY CONCRETE - The reduced
torsional moment carried by the concrete, T.I,
is given by

22.5.3 LONGITUDINAI. RE I N F O R C E M E N T
22.5.3. I The longitudinal reinforcement shall where
be designed to resist an equivalent ultimate
bending moment M.I given by:

M., = M + M,
where
e = ---
M .= applied ultimate bending moment at V
the cross-section acting i n TC
combination with T,

M, = T7
I + b , the sign of M,
being the same as that of Mi
D = overall depth of the beam, and
h= breadth of the member which for
T and I beams shall be taken as the
breadth of the web,&.
22.5.3.2 Where the numerical value of M is
less than thit of M,.the members shall also be
In the above expressions,
T, = t o r s i o n a l m o m e n t carrried by
concrete,
b = breadth of member, which for T and
I beams shall be taken as the breadth
of the web, b,

TABLE 7 MAXIMUM SHEAR STRESS

(ChUJP 22.1.1)

C ONCRETE G R A D E M30 M35 M40 M 45 M50 M55andovcr

Maximum
Shear Stress, 3.5 3.7 4.0’ 4.3 4.6 4.0
N/mm*

“,_S_ 90 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 D = overall depth of beam,
fit = characteristic compressive strength
of concrete,
T = torsional moment applied to a cross-
section under ultimate load
conditions,
V = shearing force at a cross-section
calculated for the specified ultimate
loads,
v, = theoretical shear strength at cross-
section, a s s u m i n g t h e m o s t
unfavourable conditions for inclined
cracking, that is, smaller or V,, and
V,, (see 22.4.1 ‘and 22.4.2), and
fcp = average intensity of effective
prestress in concrete.
22.5.4.2 The shear force carried by the
concrete Vci is given by :
where
V, = smaller of V,, and VCl obtained as
in 22.4.1 and 22.4.2.
22.5.4.3 DESIGN OF TRANWERSE REIN-
FORCEMENT -; The area of cross-section, A,
of the closed stirrup enclosing the corner
longitudinal bars shall be taken as the larger
of the following two values:
M sv
AS’ = 1.5 b, d,f,
and A, = A, + 2 A,
where
A, = ( V-V&
0.87 f&i
Ac _ (T-T,, ) sv
0.87 bIdI fv
ti the above expressions,
MI is as defined in 22.5.3.1,
S” = spacing of the stirrup reinforcement,
6, = centre to centre distance between
corner bars in the direction of
the width,
di = centre to centre distance between
corner bars in the direction of the
depth,
x= charact,cristic strength of shear
reinforcement,
V is as defined in 22.5.4.1, V,I is as
defined in 22.5.4.2, and
T and Td are as defied in 22.S.4.1.
PART n $nuclIJnAL nuJcN-8Ecllou 5maI-n
22.5.4.4 MlNlMUM REINFORCEMENT- The
value of A,, shall-not be taken lesser than that
given by:
A,, _ 0.4
--= - -
bs, 0.87/,
There shall be at least one lonfiitudinal bar not
less than 12 mm in diameter m each corner of
the stirrups.
2 2 . 5 . 5 D ISTRIBUTION OF T O R S I O N
R E I N F O R C E M E N T - When a member is
designed for torsion, torsion reinforcement
shall be provided as below:
8) All transverse reinforcement rovided
for torsion shall be in thePorm of
closed stirrups perpendicular to the
axis of the members.
b) The spacing, sr. of the stirrups shall not
exceed (XI + vi)/4 or 200 mm whichever is
smaller, where XI and ye are respectively,
short and long dimensions of the stirrup.
d Each end of the bar forming the stirrup
shall be anchored in accordane with
Section 5A.
4 Torsional reinforcement shall be
continued to a distance not less than
(D + b,) beyond the point at which it is no
longer theoretically rea uired, where D is
the overall depth and %,, is the effective
width of the web of a flanged member.
22.6 Limit State of Serviceability: Defection
22.6.1 T YPE ~ANDIYPE 2 M E M B E R S
22.6.1.1 SHORT TERM DEFLECTION- T h e
instantaneous deflection due to design loads
may be calculated using elastic analysis based
on the untracked section and the modulus of
elasticity of concrete as given in 5.2.3.
22.6.1.2 LONG TERM DEFLECTlON - The
total long term deflection due to the
prestressing force, dead load and any
sustained Imposed load may be calculated
using elastic analysis, taking into account the
effects of cracking and of creep and shrinkage
(src 5.2.4 and 5.2.3. Due allowance shall be
made for the loss of pitstress (see18.5.2) after
the period considered. The deflections should
comply with the limits given in19.3.1.
22.6.2 T Y P E 3 ME M B E R S - Where the
permanent load is less than or equal to 2S
percent of the design imposed load, the
deflection may be calculated as in 22.6.1 .I.
When the permanent load is more than 25
percent of the design imposed load, the
vertical deflection limits for beams and slabs
may gemraily be assumed to be satisfied
vk.21
 .

provided that the span to effective depth

ratios are not greater than the values obtained
as below:
4 Basic. values of span to effective depth
ratios for spans up to 10 m:
Cantilever
Simply supported 2:
Continuous 26
b) For spans above. IOm, the values in (a)
may be multiplied by IO/span in metres,
except for cantilever in which case
deflection calculations should be made.
22.7 Limit State of Serviceability : Cracking
22.7.1 In members made up of precast units,
no tension shall be allowed at any stage at
mortar or concrete joints. For member which
is free of joints, the tensile stress shall not
exceed the values specified below for the 3
types of members.
a) TYPE I --/No tensile stress
b) TYPE 2 -’ The tensile stress shall not
exceed 3 N/mm’. However, where part of
the service loads is temporary in nature,
this value may be exceeded by 1.5
N/mm*, provided under the pernanent
component of the service load, the stress
remains compressive.
C) TYPE 3 - For type 3 members in which
cracking is permitted, it may be assumed
that the concrete section is untracked and
that hypothetical tensile stresses exist at
the maximum size of cracks. The
hypothetical tensile stresses for use in
these calculations for members with
either pre-tensioned or post-tensioned
tendons are given in Table 8 modified by
coefficients given in Fig. 4.
TABLE 8 HYPOTHETICAL FLEXURAL TENSILE
STRESS FORTYPE3MEMBERS
TVFE OF L IMITING S TRESS OF C O N CRETE
TENDONS CRACK GRADE
W IDTH
%l30h435M4OM45MSO
0.6 I
4 200 400 600 800 ~.rCOO
DEPTH OF MEMBER 1N mm
NUrE - The values in Table 8 shall be multipkd by the
factors obtained from the figwe depending on the depth
of the mcmbcr.
Fig. 4 Depth Factors-for Tensile Stress for
Tvpe 3 Members
NOTF -When additional reinforcement is distributed
within the tension zone and positioned CIOSC to the
tcnsron faec of concrete, the hypothetical tensile stresses
may be increased by ah amount which is proportional to
the cross-sectional area of the additional rcmforcrment
expressed as a pcrcentagc of the cross sectional area of tht
concrete. For I percent of additional reinforcement, the
stress may be increased by 4 N/mm’ for mcmbcrs with
prc-tcnsioncd and grouted post-tensioned tendons and by
3 N mm-’ for other members. For other percentages of
addrtronal reinforcement the stresses may be increased m
proportron excepting that the total hypothetical tensile
stress shall not exceed 0.25 trmes the characteristic
compressive strength of.concrcte.
22.8 Limil Stbte of.ServiceabilitJ : Maximum
Cvmpression
22.8.1 M A X I M U M S T R E S S U NDER S ERVICE
C ONDITIONS
22.8. f .1 COMPRESSIVE STRESS IN FLEXURE -
The maximum permissible compressive
stress, prestress and service loads after
deduction of the full losses in the specified
prestress shall be determined by a straight line
relation as in Fig. 5 but different stress limits
shall apply to the concrete of the structure
depending on whether it falls in a part of the
section where the compressive stresses are not
likely to increase in service (Zone 1) or in part
FOR of the section where the compressive stresses
A are iikely to increase in service (Zone II) (see
\ Fig. 5).
and
above rtONE I,

(2) (3) (4) (9 (6) (7)

mm
Pn-tensioned 0. I - - 4. I 4.4 4.0
tendons 0.2 - - 5.0 5.4 5.8
Grouted posi- 0.1 *i 3.6 4.1 4.4 4.8
tensioned 0.2 3.8 4.4 5.0 5.4 5.B
tendons
Prc-tensioned 0.1 - - 5.3 5.8 6.3.
tendons 'ck
distributed in 0.2 - - 6.3 6.8 7.3
the tensile zone Fig. 5 Computation of Maximum Permissible
and positioned Compressive Stress in Fluxure due to
close to the ten- Final Prestresk
sion faces of
concrete For Zone i, the straight line relation of
permissible stress shall be determined by the

vl-22 NATIOIAL BllLDlNC CODE OF INDIA

straight line joining a point given by a
permissible stress of 0.41 fCk for concrete of
Grade M 30 to another point given by a
permissible stress of 0.35 fCt for concrete of 0.37 lci
grade M 60.
For Zone II, the determining points of the
graph shall be reduced to 0.34&k and 0.27 fik
respectively.
22.8.1.2 STRESS IN DlRECTCOMPRESSlON~~ fck
Except in the parts immediately behind the
anchorage, the maximum stress in direct
compression shall be limited to 0.8 times the 6A POSI Tensioned Work
permissible stress obtained from22.8.1. I.
22.8.2 M AXIMUM STRESSATTRANSFER
22.8.2.1 COMPRESSIVESTRESSIN FLEXURE -
0.51 lci

El
The maximum permissible compres’sive stress
due to bending and direct force at thetinie of 0.44 lci

transfer of prestress shall be determined from

a graph in which a straight line joins a point
given by 0.54&i for a concrete of Grade M30
to a second point giving a permissible stress of
0.37 5, for concrete of Grade M 40
(seeFig.6A) fc, being cube strength of concrete
at transfer which in no case shall be less than M&O M60
half the corresponding characteristic f,k
compressive strength of concrete. These
values apply to post-tensioned work;for pre-
tensioned work the variation represented by 68 Pre-Tensioned Work
Fig. 6B will apply. FIN. 6 Computation of Maximum Permissible
Compressive Stress in Flexure at Tran.$er
N OTE - The strength of concrete at the time of transfer,
fit, shall bcestabhshed by tests carried out on cubesat the
age 01 the concrete at transfer for bridges and such other
mayor structures and in other cases. if more convenient, 22.8.2.2 STRESS IN DIRECT COMPRESSION -
from the straight line raph, joining the characteristic Except in the parts immediately behind the
compressive strength oI@ concrete and cube strength at 7
days. The transfer of prestress shall be made only after the
anchorages, the maximum stress in direct
concrete has attained a strength of at least half the compression shall be limited to 0.8 times the
characteristic compressive strength of concrete. permissible stress obtained from22.8.2.1.

APPENDIX A
(Clauses 7.2 and 19.3.2)
REQI’IREMENTS FOR DURABILITY

A-l. Minimum crment contents for different
exposures and sulphatc attack are given in
Tables 9 and 10 for general guidance.
A-2. To minimize the chances of deterioration
of concrete froin harmful chemical salts, the
levels of such harmful salts in concrete coming
from the concrete materials.-that is. cement,
eves, water and admixtures as well as by
i!%~on from the environments should be
limited. Generally, the total amount of
chlorides (as CT)and the total amount of
soluble sul hates (as SO;)in the concrete at
the time oPplacing should be limited to 0.06
percent by mass of cement and 4 percent by
mass of cement, respectively.

FART VI STRUCTURAL D E S I G N - StCllON 5 CONCBLR VP

TABLE 9 MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT REQUIRED IN CEMENT CONCRETE TO ENSURE DURABILITY
UNDER SPECIFIED CONDITIONS OF EXPOSURE
(Cluuse A-l)
ExPosuRt MIHIMUM M AXIMUM
C EMENT W ATER
C ONTENT C EMENT
kg/m’ RATIO

Mrld For example, completely protected against weather, or aggressive conditions, 300 0.65
except for a brief period of exposure to normal weather conditions during
construction

Moderate For example, sheltered from heavy and wind driven rain and against freezing. 300 0.55
whilst saturated with water, buried concrete in soil andconcretecontinuously
under water

.%WVu For example. exposed to sea water, alternate wetting and drying and to freezing 360 0.45
whdst wet Subject to heavy condenkatlon or corrosive fumes

NOW The mmlmum cement content IS based on 20 mm nominal maximum size of aggregate. For 40 mm aggregate,
minimum cement content should be reduced by about 10 percent under severe exposure condition only: for 12.5 mm
aggregate the mmlmum cement content should be Increased by about 10 percent under moderate and severe exposure
condltlons only.

TABLE IO REQUIREME.NTS FOR CONCRETE EXPOSED TO SULPHATE AT-TACK

(C/uuse A-f)

Cl AS5 C ONCENTRATION OF SULPHAIES TYPE OF R EQUIREMENTS FOR D E N S E, FULLY

E XPRESSED AS S O , CEMENT COMPACTEDCONCW~~~ MADE WITH
AG G R E G A T E S C OMPLYING WITH
A ACTEPT‘ED’STANDARD [VI-5(4)]
f \
In Soil In Ground Water

/
lTotal. I (parts per ‘ooooo) Minttnnte2tnent Maxtmum Free
(Percent) Water kxtract Water/Cement
g/t Ratio
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 0
kg/m’
i. Less than @2 - Less than 30 Ordinary portland 280 0.55
cement or port-
land slag
cement
2. 0.2 to 0.5 30 to 120 Ordinary portkind 330 0.50
cement (see
Note 5) or pott-
land slag cement
3 0.5 to I.0 1.9 to 120 to ordinary ptmland 330 0.50
3.1 250 cement (see
Note 5)
NOTE I -This table applies only to concrete made with 20 mm aggregates complying with the requirements of accepted
standard [VI-5(4)] placed in near-neutral ground waters ofpH 6 topH 9. containing naturally occurringsulphatcs but not
contaminants, such as ammonium salts. For 40 mm aggregate the value may be reduced by ahout 15 percent and for
12.5 mm aggregate the value may be increased by about I5 percent. Concrete prepared from Ordinary Portland cement
would not be recommended in acidic conditions @H 6 or less).
NOTE 2 L The cement contents given in Class 2 arc the minimum recommended. For SO, contents near the upper limit of
Class 2, cement contents above these minimum are advised.

NOTE 3 - Where the total SO, in col(2) exceeds 0.5 percent, then 42: I water extract may result in a lower stte cluriftcation
if much of the sulphatc $ present 81 low rolubility calcium sulphnte.
N OTE 4-For severe conditions, such as thin sections under hydra-static pressure on one side only and sectiona putly
immersed, considerations should be given to P further reduction of water/cement ratio. and if necessary an incruu in the
cement content to ensure the degree of workability needed for full compaction and thus minimum pemtcability.
N OTE S-For Class 3 ordinary Portland ammt with the additional requirement that C,A content be not more thrn 5
percent and 2 CBA t GAF (or its slid solution 4Ce0, Also,, Fc~ol •t 2&O. FesOj) not more than 20 percent is
recommended. If this cement is used for Class 2 minimum cement contentmay be reduced to 310 kg/m’.

W-P NATIONAL BIJIIDINC CDDL OF INDIA

 APPENDIX B
(Clauses 18.6.2.2 and 22.1.2)

MOMENTS OF RESISTANCE FOR RECTANGULAR AND T-SECTIONS

B-f. The moment of resistance of rectangular A,, = area of pretensioning tendons,

sections orT-sections in which neutral axis
lies within the flange may be obtained as d = effective depth, and
follows: X” = neutral axis depth

M =jPy A, (d - 0.42 x,) For pretensioned members and for post-

where
M = moment of resistance of the section,
fPy = ultimate tensile stress in the tendons,
TABLE I I CONDITIONS AT THE ULTIMATE
LIMIT STATE FOR RECTANGULAR BEAMS
WITH PRE-TENSIONED TENDONS OR WITH
POST-TENSIONED TENDONS HAVING
EFFECTIVE BOND
tensioned members with effective bond
between the concrete and tendons, values of
fPu and xu are given in Table 1 I. The effective
prestress after all losses should not be less than
0.45& where_& is the charactheristic strength
of prestressing steel.
For post-tensioned members with unbonded
tendons the values of,& and xu Are given in
Table 12.

h/P TABLE I2 CONDITIONS AT THE ULTIMATE

STRESS IN TEN~MXN R ATIO OF THE D EPTH LIMIT STATE FOR POST-TENSIONED
bd/.r RECTANGULAR BEAMS HAVING
AS PROFORTION oi NEUTRAL A XIS
OF THE DESIGN TO THAT OF THL
UNBONDED TENDONS
StRENCiTH CENTROID OF THE
L TENDON I N T H E 4.6 S TRESS IN T E N D O N S RATIO OF DEPTH O F
T ENSION Z O N E __ AS A PROPORTION OF N E U T R A L A XIS T O T H A T
0.87 fp x./d bdl,. T H E EFFECTIVE PRE- O F T H E CENTROID O F
, STRESS f&f, FOR THE TENDONS IN THE
’ Pm-ten- Port-ten- ’
‘Prc-tcn- Post-ten-
V A L U E S OFI/~ TFNSION ZONE x.1 d F O R
sioning sionin rioning sionin
V A L U E S OF//~
with Effcct- with Effect-
ivc Bond ive Bond E FFECTIVE S P A N E F F E CT IVE S P A N

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) E F F E C T IVE D E P T H EFIZCT~VE DE P T H

( )( )
0.025 1.0 1.0 0.054 0.054
0.05 1.0 I.0 0.109 0.109 M20

0.10 1.0 I.0 0.217 0.217 W (2) (9 (4) (5) (6) (7)
0.15 1.0 1.0 0.326 0.316 0.025 1.23 I.34 I .45 0.10 0.10 0.10
0.20 1.0 0.95 0.435 0.414 0.05 I.21 1.32 I .45 0.16 0.16 0.18
0.25 I.0 0.9 0.542 0.488 0.10 I.18 1.26 1.45 0.30 0.32 0.36
0.30 1.0 0.85 0.655 0.558 0.15 I.14 1.20 I.36 0.44 0.46 0.52
0.40 0.9 0.75 0.783 0.653 0.20 I.11 I.16 1.27 0.56 0.58 0.64
 LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those-standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and
‘accepted standards’ in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standard shall be adopted at the time of the enforcement of the Code. The stadards listedmay be
used by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in
the Code.
In the following list, the number appearing in the first column within parentheses indicates
the number of the reference in this part/section.
(I‘ IS: 3370 Code of practice for concrete
structures for the storage of liquids:
IS: 3370 (Part l)-1965 Part I General
requirements
I S : 3 3 7 0 ( P a r t II)-1965 Part II
Reinforced concrete structures
IS: 22 IO-1962 Criteria for design of
reinforced concrete shell structures
and folded plates
IS: 3201-1965 Criteria for design of
precast trusses
IS. 4090- 1967 Criteria for the design of
reinforced concrete arches
IS: 4995 (Part II)-1974 Criteria for the
design of reinforced concrete bins for
the storage of granular and powdary
materials: Part II Design criteria
IS: 4998 (Part I)-1975 Criteria for
design o f r e i n f o r c e d c o n c r e t e
chimneys: Part I Design criteria
(2) IS: 4845- 1968 Definitions and ter-
minology relating to hydraulic
cement:
IS: 6461 Glossary of terms relating to
cement concrete:
IS: 6461 (Part I)-1972 Part I
Concrete aggregates
I S : 6 4 6 1 ( P a r t II)-1972 Part II
Materials (other than cement and
aggregate)
IS: 6461 (Part III)-1972 Part III.
Concrete reinforcement
IS: 6461 (Part IV)-1972 Types of
concrete
IS: 6461 (Part V)-1972 Part V
Formwork for concrete
IS: 6461 (Part VI)-1972 Part VI
Equipment, tools and plant
IS: 6461 (Part VII)-1973 Part VII
Mixing, laying, compaction, curing
and other construction aspects
IS: 6461 (Part VIII)-1973 Part VIII
Properties of concrete
IS: 6461 (Part IX)-1973 Part IX
Structural aspects
IS: 6461 (Part X)-l973 Part X Tests
and testing apparatus
IS: 6461 (Part XI)-1973 Part XI
Prestressed concrete
IS: 6461 (Part XII)-1973 Part XII
Miscellaneous
VT-P
(3) IS: 269-1976 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
.ogdinary and low h e a t P o r t l a n d
cement (third revision)
IS: 8041-1978 Specification for rapid
hardening Portland cement (firsr
revision)
1s: 4 5 5 - 1 9 7 6 apecifiration f o r
Portland slag cement (third revision)
IS: 1489-1976 Specification for
Portland pozzolanz cement (sec~~?d
revision)
IS: 81 12-1976 Specification for high
strength ordinary Portland cement
IS: 8043- I978 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
hydrophobic Portland cement first
revision)
IS: 6452-1972 Specification for high
alumina cement for structural use
IS: 6909-1973 Specification f o r
supersulphated cement
(4) IS: 383-1970 Specification for coarse
and fine aggregates from natural
sources for concrete (second revision)
(5) IS: 3812-1981 Specification for fly ash:
For use as pozzolana and admixture
fifst revision)
(6) IS: 30251964 Methods of sampling
and tesr (physical and chemical) for
water used in industry
(7) IS: 516-1953 Methods of tests for
strength of concrete
IS: 58161970 Method of test for
splitting tensile strength of concrete
cylinders
IS: 9013-1978 Method of making,
curing and determining compressive
strength of accelerated cured concrete
test specimens
(8) IS: 4031-1968 Methods of physical
tests for hydraulic cement
(9) IS: 9103-1979 Specification for
admixtures for concrete
( IO) IS: i 344 I982 Specification for calcined
clay pw~olana (sarond revision)
NATIONAL 8UlLDlNG CODE OF INDIA
 (I I) IS: 432 (Part l)-1982 Specification for
mild steel and medium tensile steel
bars and hard drawn steel wire for
concrete reinforcement: Part I Mild
steel and medium tensile steel bars
(rhird twlision)
1s: 1139-1966 Specification for hot
rolled mild steel, medium tensile steel
and high yield strength steel deformed
bars for concrete reinforcement
(revisd)
IS: 1786-1979 Specification for cold-
worked steel high strength deformed
bars for concrete reinforcement
(secw7d revision)
IS: 1566-1982 Specification for hard-
drawn steel wire fabric for concrete
reinforcement (srcor~d rt~visiun)
I S : 226- I975 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
structural sieel (standard quality)
fiti reGsion)
(12) IS: 4082-1977 Recommendations on
stackmg and storage of constructlon
materials at site first rcwision)
(13) IS: 1199-1959 Methods of sampling
and analysis of concrete
(14) IS: 10262-1982 Recommended guide-
lines for coricrete mix design
(15) IS: 4925-1968 Specification for
concrete batching and mixing plant
(16) IS: 2384 (Part III)-1963 Methods of
test for aggregates for concrete:
Part 111 Specific gravity, density,
voids, absorption and bulking
(17) IS: 1791-1968 Specification for batch
type concrete mixers (firsr revismn)
IS: 2505-1980 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
concrete vibrators, immersion type
(/irst relision)
IS: 2506-1964 Specification for screed
board concrete vibrators
IS: 2514-1963 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
concrete vibrating tables
IS: 4656-1968 Specification for form
vibrators for cOncrete
(18) IS: 2502-1963 Code of practice for
bending and fixing of bars for concrete
reinforcement
P A R T Vl STRIJC-TIJPAI. DCSICN - SECTlOW 5 CONCRETE
(19) IS: 2751-1979 Code of practice for
welding of mild steel plain and
deformed bars for reinforced concrete
constructionfirsr relwiun)
IS: 9413-1979 Recommendations for
welding cold-worhed steel bars for
reinforced concrete construction
(20) IS: 786I-Code of practice for extreme
weather concreting:
I S : 786I(Part I)-1975 P a r t I
Recommended p r a c t i c e f o r h o t
weather concreting
I S : 7 8 6 1 ( P a r t II)-1981 Part II
R e c o m m e n d e d practice ior cold
weather concreting
(21) IS: 1642-1960 Code of practice for 11re
safety of buildings (general): MaterLis
and details of construction
(22) IS: 4326-1976 Code of practice for
earthquake r e s i s t a n c e design and
construction o f buildings (lir.q/
re\Giun)
(23) IS: 3951 (Part I)-1975 Specification for
structural holloti clay tiles for lloors
and roofs: Part I Filler type (firs/
revision)
IS: 6061 Code of practice for
construction of floor and roof with
joists and-hollow filler blocks:
IS: 6061 (Part I)-1971 Part I With
hollow concrete filler blocks
IS: 6O6l (Part II)-1981 Part II With
h o l l o w c l a y f i l l e r blocks(/;rsr
revision)
(24) IS: 1785 Specificatton for plain hard-
drawn steel wire for prestressed
concrete.
I S : 1785 ( P a r t II)-1983 P a r t I I
Asdrawn wire yirsr revision)
IS : 6003-1983 Specification for
indented wire for prestressed concrete
flirsl revision)
IS: 2090-1962 Specification for high
tensile steel bars used in prestressed
concrete Cfirsr rrvision)
IS: 6006-1970 Specification for
uncoated stress relieved strand for
prestressed concrete (/Yrst wvision)
“,P
NATIONALBUILDINGCODE
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION6STEEL
,

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS

0. FOREWORD . . . I
1. SCOPE . . . 3
2. TERMINOLOGY . . 3
3. MATERIALS . . 5
4. GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS . . * 5
5. DESIGN OF TENSION MEMBERS . . 14
6. DESIGN OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS . . . I5
7. DESIGN OF MEMBERS SUBJECTED TO BENDING . . . 25
8. COMBINED STRESSES . . . 47
9. CONNECTIONS . . 49
10. PLASTIC DESIGN . . 54
II. DESIGN OF ENCASED MEMBERS . . . 57
12. FABRICATION AND ERECTION . . . 59
13. STEEL-WORK TENDERS AND CONTRACTS . . . 63

APPENDIX A CHART SHOWING HIGHEST MAXIMUM

TEMPER.ATURE . . . 64
APPENDIX B CHART SHOWING LOWEST lWlNIMlJh4
TEMPERATURE . . . 65
APPENDIX C EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS . * . 66
APPENDIX D METHOD FOR DETERMINING EFFECTIVE
LENGTH FOR STEPPED COLUMNS . . . 68
APPENDIX E LIST OF REFERENCES ON THE ELASTIC
FLEXURAL TORSIONAL BUCKLING OF
STEEL BEAMS . . . 73
APPENDIX F PLASTIC PROPERTIES OF INDIAN STANDARD
MEDIUM WEIGHT BEAMS ... 73
APPENDIX G GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR
STEELWORK TENDERS AND
CONTRACTS ... 74
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION 6 STEEL

0. ‘FOREWORD
0.1 This section covers the structural design aspect of steel structures in buildings.
0.2 This section covers the use of.hot-rolled structural steel sections, steel tubes and
cold-formed light gaugs steel in buildings. It permits the design by working stress
method and plastic theory.
0 . 3 This. section is based on ‘IS:800-1984 Code of practice for general construction in
steel (second revision) (Amendment No. I)’ and ‘IS: 806-1968 Code of practice for use
of steel tubes in general building constructionCfirsr revision)‘.
0.1 This-revision is intended to bring it in line with revised version ofIS:800-l984.
0.5 1.n this revision the following major modifications have been effected:
a) Resides a genera1 rearrangement of the clauses, formulae and the values
have been given in SI units only.
b) Symbols used in this Standard have been aligned to the extent possible with
IS0 3898-1976 ‘Basis for design of structures-Notation--General
symbols’.
c) In view of the development and production of new varieties of medium and
high tensile structural steels in the country, the scope of the Code has been
modified permitting the use of any variety of structural steel provided the
relevant provisions of the Code aresatisfied.
d) Indian Standards are now available for rivets, bolts and other fasteners and
reference has been made to these standards.
In view of the fact that the Code specifies a number of grades of steel with
different yield strengths, the design parameter, the geometrical properties
and permissible stresseshave been expressed to the extent possible in terms
of the yield strength of the material. Speciftc values have also been given for
commonly used steels.
1
PART VI STRCCITJRAL DESIGN-SECTlON 6 STEEL W-6..
 f) Recommendations regarding expanrion joints have been added.
g) Keeping in view the developments in the design of steel structures there has
been a general i&sion in the permissible stress values for steels and
fasteners.
h) In IS: 800-1962, design by plastic theory had been permitted. In’this revision
detailed design rules have been included for design using plastic theory.
j) Specific provisions relating to limiting deflection have been added.
k) Effective length of columns has been dealt with in a greater detail. For
normally encountered struts, a table has been given strictly on the basis of
end conditions. The effective length of columns in framed structures and
stepped columns in mill buildings have been specified on more exact basis.
m) The secant formula far axial compression has been dropped. In its place the
Merchant Rankine formula has been specified with value ofn. empirically
fixed as 1.4.
n) fknding stresses - The method of calculating the critical stresses in bending
comprhOnf,b has been simplified by expressing the formulae in terms of
geometrical properties of the section. Merchant Rankine formula recom-
mended f6r calculating permissible stresses in a,xial compression has been
used for calculating permissible stresses in bending compression from the
critical stresses, with value of n empirically fixed as’ 1.4.
0.3.1 More rigorous analytical procedurez? than envisaged in this Code are
available and can be made use of for finding effective lengths of compres-
sion members in determining elastic critical loads.
I. SC’OI’E
1.1 This section covers the use of structural
steel in general building construction inclu&
ing the use of hot rolled steel sections and steel
tubes.
NOTE--$ecial requirenwnts ,as applicable IO s1wI lubes
arc included undei appropriate clauses.
1.2 .Special provisions applicable to the use of
cold-formed light gauge steel sections shall’be
in accordance with good practice [VI-H I I]*
1.3 The’provisions of thiS section are gcner-
ally applicable to rivetted. bolted and wcldc&
construction.
2. T E R M I N O L O G Y
2. I For the purpose of this section the follow-
ing definitions shall apply.
Buckling Load--The load at which a member
or a structure as a whole collapses in service or
buckles in a load test.
Dead Lout/s--The self weights of all perma-
nent cons1’ructions and installations including
the self weights of all walls, partitions, floors
and roofs.
,!$ective Lateral Restraint--Restraint which
produces sufficient resistance in a plane per-
pendicular to the plane of bending to restrain
the compression flange of a loaded. strut,
beam or girder from buckling to either side at
the point of application of the restraint.
Elastic Critical M o m e n t - - - T h e e l a s t i c
moment which will initiate yielding or cause
buckling.
Factor of Sqfity-The factor by which the
yield stress of the material of ‘a member’ is
divided to arrive at the permissible stress in
the material.
Guuge-The transverse spacing between
parallel adjacent liaes of fasteners.
Imposed (Live) Load-The load assumed to
be produced by the intended use of occupancy
including distributed. concentrated, impact
and vibration and snow loads but excluding,
wind and earthquake loads.
*In this se&on where reference isndeto’good practice’
or ‘accepted standrrds’in relation to design. testing. con-
struction prdeedu~ and material ‘specification. the
appropriate document listed at the end of this section may
k used 1s 8 pidc to thi interpretatioti of this terin.
Load F‘octor -The numerial factor hy which
the working load is to be multiplied LO obtain
an appropriate design ultimate load.
Main ,Vernhrr A structural member which
is primarily responsible for carrying and dis-
tributing the applied Itiad.
Pitch The ccntre to centre distance between
individual fasteners in a line of fastcncr.
.Wonc/~r~~ Mcwbrr Secondary lncmbcr is
that which is provided for-stability and or
restraining the main members from buckling
or similar modes of failure.
Yield Stress The minimum yield stress of the
material in tension :IS specified in relevant
Indian Standards.
2.1.1 WEI.I)ING I’EHMs- -Unless otherwise
defined in this sectiyn the welding terms used
shall have the ni’eaning given in accordance
with good practice [VI-h,(2)].
2.2 .Syr~tho/.s Symbols used in this Code
shall have the following mcnnings with respect
to the structure or*member or condition.
unless otherwise defined elsewhere in this
Code:
A Cross-sectional area (A used with
subscripts has been defined at
appropriate place)
a. h Respectively the greater and lesser
projection of the plate beyond
column
B Length of side of cap or base
h” Width of steel flange in encased
member
Clll Coefficient
C The distance centre to centre of
battens
c Distance between vertical stiffeners
Cl. (‘2 Respectively the lesser and greater
distances from the sections neutral
axis to the extreme fibres
D Overall +pth of beam
d Depth 01 girder--to be taken’ as
the clear distanee between flange
angles or where there are no flange
angles the clear distance between
flanges ignoring fillets
d. Diameter df the reduced end of the
column
4 i) For the web of a beamwithout
horizontal stiffeners-the clear
distance ktween the’ flanges,
VI.63
 neglecting fillets or the clear
distance between the inner toes
of the flange angles as
appropriate
ii) For the web of a beam with
horizontal stiffenkrs-t he clear
distance between the horizontal
stiffener and the tension flange;
negleciing fillets or the inner
toes of the tension flange angles
as appropriate
dz Twice the clear disthnce from the
neutral axis of a beam to the com-
pression flange. neglecting fillets
or the inner toes of the flange
angles as appropriate
E The modulus of elasticity for steel,
taken as 2~ 105 MPa in this Cbde
Yield stress
Elastic critical stress in bending
Elastic critical stress in compres-
sion, also known as Euler critical
stress
g Gauge
h Outstand of the stiffener
I Moment of inertia
Kb or Kc Flexural stiffnesses
kt, kz Coefficients
Distance from outer face of flange
k
to web toe of fillet of member to be
stiffened
L Span/ length of member
I Effective lendth of the member
M Bending moment
a Maximum moment (plastic)
capacity of a section
Mpc Maximum moment (plastic)
capacity of a se&ion subjected to
bending and axial loads
MO Lateral bucklipg strength in the
absence of axial load
N Number of parallel planes of
batte’ns
n Coeffikient in the Merchant Ran-
kine formula, assumed as I .4
P Aitial~ force, compressive or tensile
Cdlculated maximum load capa-
P&
city of a strut
p* Calc&ted maximum load capa-
city as a tension member
PC Euler load,
\ PP Yield strength diaxkily loaded
s&on
R The reaction .of the beam .-at the
sup@rt
‘vbb
4
Radius of gyration of the section
Transverse distance betweencen-
troids of rivets groups or welding
Staggered pitch
Mean thickness of Compression
flange (T used with subscripts has
been defined at appropriate place)
Thickness of web
Transverse shear
Longitudinal. shear
Calculated maximum shear capa-
city of a section
Total load
Pressure or loading on the under-
side of the base
Plastic modulus of the section
Ratio of smaller to larger moment
Stiffness ratib
Slenderness ratio of the member;
ratio of the effective length (I) to
the appropriate radius of gyration
(r)
Characteristic slenderness ratio
Maximuni permissible compres-
sive stress in an axially loaded
strut not subjected to bending
Maximum permissible .tensile
stress in an axially loaded tension
member not subjected to bending
Maximum permissible bending
stress in slab base
Maximum permissible -compres-
sive stress due to bending in a
member not subjected to axial
force
Maximum permissible tensile
stress due to bending in a member
not subjected to axial force
Maximum permissible stress in
concrete in compression
Maximum permissible equivalent’
stress
Maliimum permissible bearing
stress in a member
Maxinium permissibk bearing
stress in a fastener
Maxinium permissible stress in
steel in compression
.Maximum permissible stress in
axial tension in fastener
 Calculated average axial compres- connections, as may be required for the
sive stress proper preparation of shop drawings. Any
Calculated average stress in a special precaution to be taken in the erection
member due to an axial tensile of structure from thedesignconsideration,thc
force same shall also be indicated in the drawing.
Calculated compressive stress in a
2.3.1.2 SHOP BKAWIMS -Shop drawings.
member due to bending about a
giving complete information necessary for the
principal axis
fabrication of the component parts of the
Calculated tensile stress in a
structure including the location, type, size.
member due to bending about
length, and detail of all welds, shall be pre-
both principal axes
pared in advance of the actual fabrication.
Maximum permissible average
They shall clearly distinguish between shop
shear stress in a member
and field rivets, bolts and welds. For addi-
Maximum permissible shear stress
tional information to be included ondrawings
in. a member
for designs based on the use of welding, refer-
Maximum permissible shear stress
ence shall be made to appropriate Indian
in fastener
Standards. Shop drawings shall be made in
Ratio of the rotation at the hinge
accordance with good practice [Vl43)]. A
point to the relative elastic rota-
marking diagram allotting distinct identifica-
tion of the far end of the beam
tion marks to each separate part of steel work
segment containing plastic hinge
shall be prepared. The diagram shall besuffr-
Coefficient cient to ensure convenient assembly and erec-
Ratio of total area of both the tion at site.
flanges at the point of least bend-
ing movement to thscorrespond- 2.3.2 Symbols for welding used on plans
ing area at the point of greatest and shop drawings shall be according to
bending moment IS:813-1961.
Ratio of moment of inertia of the 3. MATERIALS
compression flange alone to that
of the sum of the moments of iner- 3. I All materials used in structural steel con-
tia of the flanges each calculated struction shall conform to Part V Building
about its own axis parallel to the materials. Structural steel, rivets, welding
y-y axis of the girder, at the point consumables, steel castings, bolts and nuts,
of maximum bending moment. washers and steel tubes shall be in accordance
with accepted standards[W-6(5)].
NW E The subscript x. .y denote the X-X and y-y axis of
rhe section respectively. For symmetrical sections, x-x 3.2 Tubes-Tubes made by other than hot
denotes the major principal axis whilst J-J’ denotes the finishing processes, or which-have been sub-
minor principal axis. jected to cold working, shall be regarded as
2.3 Plans and Drawings hot finished if they have subsequently been
heat-treated and are supplied in the normal-
2.3.1Plans, drawings and stress sheetshall be ized conditions.
prepared according to good practice [VI-
WI. NOTE-Grade ERW YSt 22 tuttcs conforming to
ampted standard;[VI4(J)) with a carbon content kss
2.3.1.i PLANS-.-T~~ plans (design drawings) than 0.30 percent. may be considered as hot finished for
shall show the complete design with sizes, sec- the purposes of 2.2.
tions, and the relative locations of the various 1. GENERALDESIGN REQUIREMENTS
members. Floor levels, column ccntres, and
offsets shall be dimensioned. Plans shall be 4.1 Types of &ads
drawn to a scale large enough to convey the 4.1. I For the purpose of computing the maxi-
information adequately. Plans shall indicate mum stresses in any structure or member ofa
the type of construction to be employed; and structure, the following loads and load effects,
shall be supplemented by such data on the shall be taken into account, where applicabkz
assumed loads, shears, moments and axial
forces to be resisted by all members and their a) Dead loads;

VI45
 Imposed loads;
Wind loads;
Earthquake loads;
Erection loads; and
Secondary effects due to contraction or
expansion resulting from temperature
changes. shrinkage, creep in compres-
sion members, differential settlements
of the structure as a whole and its
components.
41.2 The dead loads, imposed loads (live
loads), dynamic effects, wind 1,oads. seismic
loads and snow loads to be assumed in design
shall be according to Part VI Structural
design, Section 1 Loads.
4.1.2.1 Imposed loads. arising from equip-
ment. such as cranes and machines to be
assumed in design shall.be as per manuiactu-
rem/suppliers data (see 4.4.2.4).
4.1.2.2 The erection loads and temperature
effects shall be calculated in accordance
with 4.2 and 4.3
4.2 Erection Loads
4.2.1 .All loads required to be carried by the
structtire or any pa’rt of it due to storage or
positioning of construction material and erec-
tion equipment including all loads dua to
operation of such equipment, shall be consi-
dered as ‘erection loads’. Proper provision
shall be made. including temporary bracings
to take care of all stresses due to erection
loads. The structure as a whole and all parts of
thestructureinconjuctionwiththetemporary
bracings shall be capable of sustaining these
erection loads. without exceeding the per-
missiblc stresses as specified in this code sub-
ject to. the allowable increase of stresses as
indicated in 4.9. Dead load, wind load and
also such parts of the live load as would be
imposed on the structure during the period of
erection shall be taken as acting together with
the erection loads.
4.3 .Tenrperatrtre ,FJkts
4.3.1 Expansion and contraction due to
changes in temperature of the materials of a
structure shall be considered and adequate
provision made for the effects produced.
4.32 The temperature range varies fordiffer-
ent localities and under different diurnsil and
seasonal conditions. The absolute maximum
and minimum temperatures which may be
VW
6 NATIONAL WU.DING CODE Op INDIA
expected in different localities in tne country
are indicated on the maps of India in Append-
ices A and B. respectively. These appendices
may be used for guidance in assessing the
maximum variations of temperature for
which provision for expansion ‘and contrac-
tion has to be allowed in the,structure.
4.3.3 The temperatures indicated on the maps
in Appendices A and B are the air tempera-
tures in the shade. The range of variation in
temperature of the building materials may be
appreciably greater or less than the variation
of air temperature and is influenced by the
condition of exposure and the rate at which
the materials composing the structure absorb
or radiate heat. Thisdifference in temperature
variations of the material and air should be
given due consideration.
4.3.4 The co-efficient of expansion for steel
shall be taken as 0.000 012 per degree centi-
grade per unit length.
4.4 Design Considerations
4.4.1 GE N E R A L - All parts of the steel
framework of the structure shall be capable of
sustaining the most adverse combination of
the dead loads, prescribed imposed loads,
wind loads, earthquake loads where applica-
ble and any other forces or loads to which the
building may reasonably be subjected without
exceeding the permissible stresses specified in
this standard.
4.4.2 L OAD C OMBINATIONS
4.4.2.1 Load combinations for design pur-
poses shall be the one that produces maxi-
mum forces and effects and consequently
maximum stresses from the following combi-
nations of loads:
a) Dead load + imposed loads,
b) Dead load 4 imposed loads i- wind or
earthquake loads, and
c) Dead load + wind or earthquake loads.
NOIP --In case ofqructum bcaringcranc loads, imposed
lids shall include the crane &ect as given in 1.1.2.1,
4.4.2.2 Wind load and earthquake loads shall
be assumed not to act simultaneously. The
effect of both the forces shall be given
separately.
4.4.2.3 The effect of cranes to be considered
under imposed loads shall include the vertical
loads, eccentricity effects induced by the verti-
cal loads, impact factors, lateral (surge) and
the longitudinal horizontal thrusts acting
across and along the crane rail. respectively.
4.4.2.4 The crane loads to be considered shall
be as indicated by the customer. In the
absence of any specific indications the load
combination shall be as follows:
il) Verti,cal loads with full impact from one
loaded crane or two cranes in case of
tendum operation together with vertical
loads. without impact, from as many
loaded cranes as may be positioned for
maximum effect, alongwith maximum
horizontal thrust (surge) from one crane
only or two cranes in case of tandum
operation;
b) For multibay multicrane gantries -
loads as specified in (a) above, subject to
consideration of cranes in maximum of
any two bays of the building cross
section;
cl The longitudinal thrust on a crane track
rail shall be considered for a maximum
of two loaded cranes on the track; and
4 Lateral thrust (surge) and the longitudi-
nal thrust acting respectively across and
along the crane rail shall not be assumed
to act simultaneously. The effect of both
the forces, shall, however, be’ investi-
gated separately.
4.4.2.5 While investigating the effect of earth-
quake forces the resulting effect from dead
loads of all cranes parked in each bay position-
ed for maximum effect shall be considered.
4.4.2.6 The crane runway girders supporting
bumpers shall be checked for’bumper impact
loads.
4.4.2.7 Stresses developed due to secondary
effects such as handling. erection, tempe-
rature effects. settlement of foundations
shall be appropriately added to the stresses
calculated from the combination of loads
stated in 4.4.2.1. The total stresses thus calcu-
lated shall be within the permissible limits as
specified in 4.9.
4.4.3 METHODS OF DESIGN - - The following
methods may be employed for.the design of
the steel framework:
a) Simple design.
PART n muciuEAL DlSIoN-SCCIWN 6 -
b) Semi-rigid design. and
c) Fully rigid design.
4.4.4 SIMPLE DESIGN - This method applies
to structures in which the end connections
between members are such that they will not
develop restraint moments adversely affecting
the membersand thestructureasa wholeand
in consequence the structure may, for the pur-
pose of design. be assumed to be pin-jointed.
4.4.4. I The method of simple design involves
the following assumption&
a) Beams are simply supported;
b) All connections of beams, girders or
trusses are virtually flexible and are pro-
portioned for the reaction shears ap-
plied at the appropriate eccentricity;
cl Members in compression are subjected
to forces applied at the appropriate
eccentricities (see 6.3.3) with the effec-
tive length given in 6.2; and
4 Members in tension are subjected to
longitudinal forces applied over the net
area of the section, as specified under
4.6.2 and 5.2. I.
4.4.5 SEMI- RIGID D ESIGN - This method,
as compared with the simple design method,
permits a reduction in the maximum bending
moment in beams suitably connected to their
supports, so as to provide a degree of direction
fixity, and in the case of triangulated frames, it
permits account being taken of the rigidity of
the connections and the moment of interac-
tion of members. In cases where this method
of design is employed, calculations based on
general or particular experimental evidence
shall be made to show that the stresses in any
part oft he.structure are notin excess of those
laid down in the code. Stress investigations
may also be done on the finished structure for
assurance that the actual stresses under spe-
cific design loads are not in excess of those laid
down in the standard.
4.4.6 FULLV RIGID D ESIGN - This method
as compared to the methods of simple and
semi-rigid designs gives the greatest rigidity
and economy in the weight of steel used when
applied in appropriate cases. The end connec-
tions of members of the frames shall have
sufficient rigidity to hold the original angles
between such members and the members they
connect virtually unchanged. Unless other- tion shall be calculated by deducting
wise specified, the ,design shall be based on from the area of the gress-cross section
theoretical methods ofilastic analysis and the the following:
calculated stresses shall conform to the rele- i) The sectional area in excess of effec-
vant provisions of this standard. Alterna- tive plate width, as given in 4.5.2, and
$ively, it shail be based on the principles of
plastic design as given in 9. ii) The sectional areas of all holes in the
sectioli, except that for parts in com-
4.4.7 E XPERIMENTALLY B ASED D ESIGN - pression (see 4.6).
Where structure is of non-conventional or
complex nature, the design may be based on 4.5.2 PLATE T~CKNESS
full scale or model tests subject to the follow- 4.5.2.1 If- the projection of a plate or flange
ing donditions: beyond its connection to a web, or otherlink
A full scale test of prototype structure of support or the like, exceeds the relevant
may be done. The prototype shall be values given in (a), (b) and (c) below, the area
accurately measured before testing to of the excess flange shall be neglected when
determine the dimensional tolerance in ciiculating the effective geometrical proper-
all relevant parts of the structure; the ties of the section.
tolerances then specified on.the drawing 256 7i
shall be such that all successive struc- a) Flanges and plates - subject to a
tures shall be in- practical conformity in compression fi maximum of
with the prototype. Where the design is with &stiffened I6 TI
based on failure loads, a load factor of ‘edges
not less than 2.0 on the loads or load b) Flanges and plates 20 T, to the inner-
combinations given in 4.4.2 shall be in compression most face
used. Loading devices shall be pre- with stiffened .edges of the
viously calibrated and care shall be exer- stiffening
cised to ensure that no artificial cl Flanges and plates in tension 20 TI
restraints are applied to the prototype NOTE I - Stiffened flanges shall include flanges com-
by the loading systems. Thedistribution p& of channels or l-sections or of plates with continu-
and duration of forces applied in the test ously stiffened edges.
shall be representative of those to which NOTE 2 - TI denotes the thickness of the.flange of a
the structure is deemed to be subjected. sectton or of a plate in compression. or the aggregate
thickness of plates; if connected together in accodance
b) In the case where design is based on the with the provisions of 8, IS appropriate.
testing of a shall scale model structure, NOTE 3 - The width of the outstand of members referred
the model shall be constructed with due ahove shall be taken is follows:
regard for the principles of dimensional
similarity. The thrusts, moments and TYP Width of Outstand
Plates DiStance from the free
deformations under working loads shall edge to the first row of
be determined by physical measure- rivets or welds
ments made when the loadings areapp- Angle, charinels, Z-sections Nominal width
lie$ to simulate the conditions assumed and stems of tee sections
in the dqign of the actual struciure. Flmgeofbe8mmdtac Half the nominal width
S8CtiOlU
4.5 Geometrical Properties
4.5.2.2 Where a plate is connected to other
4.5.1 ‘GENERAL - The geometrical proper- parts of a built up member along lines gener-
ties of the gro& arid the etfective cross sections ally parallel to fhe longitudinal axis of the
of a member or part thereof shall be calculated member, the width between any two adjacent
on the following basis: lines of connections or supports shall not
exceed the following:
a) The properties of the gross cross section
shall be calculated from the specified a) For plates in uniform compression -
size of the member or part thereof. 1%. subject to a maximum of 90 T,
b)- he properties of the effkctive cross sec- 4T
 However. where the width exceede -
560 T,
subject to a maximum of 35 ?i
K
for welded plates which are not
stressed relieved. or.
800 T, subject to a maximum of 50 TI,
z- for other plates.
the excess width shall be assumed to be
located centrally and its Sectional area
shall be neglected when calculating the
effective geometrical properties of the
section.
bb For plates in uniform tension - 100 TI.
However where the width exceeds 68 I,
the excess width shall be assumed to be
located centrally and its sectional area
shall be neglected when calculating the
geometrical properties of the section.
In this rule, TI shall be taken to be the
thickness of the plate, irrespective of
whether the plate is a flange or a web-of
the member.
4.5.2.3 The provisions contained in 4.5.2.1
and 4.5.2.2 shall not be applicable to box
girders (where width/depth is greater than
0.2). In such cases strength is not usually gov-
erned by lateral buckling. However, in such
cases check s.hould be exercised for local buc-
kling and yield stress of material.
4.5.2.4 For only the diaphragm of the box
girder. all the provisions pertaining to size,
thickness, spacing, etc, asgiven in 4.5.2. I and
4.5.2.2 for plate girders shall be applicable.
4.5.2.5 STEEL TUBES
a) For tubular steel work painted with one
priming coat of red oxide-zinc chromate
paint after fabrication and periodically
painted and mtiintained regularly, wall
thickness of tubes used for construction
exposed to weather shall be not less than
4 mm. and for construction not exposed
to weather shall be not less than 3.2 mm;
where structures are not readily accessi-
ble for maintenance. the minimum
thickness shall be 5 mm.
b) Steel tubes used for construction
exposed to weather shall be not less than
3.2 mm thick and for construction not
exposed to weather shall be not lessthan
2.6 mm thick, provided in each case the
tube is applied with:
I) one coat of zinc primer conformiug
to accepted standards [Y 1-6 (6)] fol-
lowed by a coat. of red oxide-zinc
chromate ready mixed paint con-
forming to accepted standards[VI-6
WI. and
ii) two coats of semi-gloss brushing, fin-
ishing, ready mixed paint conform-
ing to accepted standards (VI-6(6)].
This painting system has to be renewed after
every two years in the case of tubes exposed to
weather. In case some other metallic corro-
sion protecting material is used, such asalum-
inium painting, the renewal of coating may be
done after longer intervals.
4.6 Holes
4.6.1 DIAMETER - In calculating the area to
be deducted for rivets, bolts or pins, the
diameter of the hole shall be taken.
4.6.1.1 In making deduction for rivets less
than or equal -to 25 mm in diameter, the
diameter-of the hole shall be assumed to beI .5
mm in excess of the nominal diameter of the
rivet unless specified otherwise. If the diame-
ter of the rivet is greater than 25 mm, the
diameter of the hole shall be assumed to be 2.0
mm in excess of the nominal diameter of the
rivet unless specified otherwise.
.4.6.i.2 In making deduction for bolts, the
diameter of the hole shall be assumed to be1.5
mm in excess of the nominal diameter of the
bolt, unless otherwise specified.
4.6.1.3 For counter sunk rivets or bolts the,
appropriate addition shall be made to the
diameter of the hole.
4.6.2 DEDUCTION FOR HOLES
4.6.2.1 ‘Except as required in 4.6.2.2 the&rear
to be deducte$ shall be the sum of the sect
tional area of the maximum number of holea
in any cross section at right angles to the
dire&ion of stress in the member for:
8) all axially loaded tcnaion members,
b) plate girdem with d/t ratio exceeding
the limita specifscd in 7.7.3.X:
where NOTE - In a built-up member where the chains of holes
considered in individual parts do no.tcor.respond with the
1 = thickness of web, and critical chain of holes for the members as a whole, the
d =depth of the girder to be taken asthe clear value of any rivets or bolts joining the parts betweensuch
distance between flange angles or where chains of holes shall be taken intoaccount in determining
there are no flange angles the clear.dis- the strength of the member.
tance.between flanges ignoring fillets. 4.7 Maximum Slenderness Rario
4.6.2.2 Where bolt or rivet holes are stag-
gered, the area to be deducted shall be the sum 4.7.1 The maximum slenderness ratio
of the sectional areas of all holes in a chain A I
=- of beam, strut or tensionmem-
of lines extending progressively across the ( 1 )
2 ber given in Table I shall not be exceeded. In
member, less !_!_for each line extending bet-
+! this ‘/,‘is the effective length of the member
ween holes at other than right angles to the (see 6.2) and r is appropriate radius of gyra-
direction of stress, where, S, g and I are respec- tion based on the effective section as defined
tively/he staggered pitch, gaugeand thickness in 4.5. I.
associated with the line under consideration
[see Fig. 1 A]. The chain of lines shall be TABLE I
M A X I M U M SLENDERNFSS R A T I O
chosen to produce the maximum such deduc- .
tion. For non-planer sections, such as angles SI. M~MUER MAXIMUM
with holes in both legs, the gauge, g, shall be No. SLENDER-
NESS
the distance along the centre of the thickness R ATIO A
of the section between hole centres [see (1) (2) (3) *
Fig. I B]. i) A member carrying compressive I80
loads resulting from dead
DIRECTION OF FORCE loads and imposed loads
S
ii) A tension member in which a 180
24 reversal of direct stress due to
loads other than wind or seismic
forces occurs

iii) A member subjected to 250

compression forces resulting
from wind/earthquake forces
provided the deformation of
such member does not adversely
affect the stress in any
part of the structure

iv) Compression flange of a beam 300

v) A member normally acting as 350

a tie in a roof truss or a
bracing system but subject to
possible reverse of stress
resulting from the action of
wind or earthquake forces

vi) Tension members (other thar 400

oretensioned members)

-_-

4.8 Corrosion Protection - Minimum

lb) Angh Thickness of Metal

DEDUCTION = (Sum of mionrl areas of hokr B. C 4.8.1 GE N ER A L - Ex&pt where the provi-
l ndD)- sions of subsequent clauses require thicker
[$+22] elements of members, the minimum thickness
of metal for any structural element shall be, as
Rg. I Staggered Pitch, s, and Gauge, g specified under 4.8.2 to 4.8.4.

VI.20
4.8.2 S T E E L W O R K D I R E C T L Y EXPOSED TO load is taken intoaccount. the permissible
W E A T H E R - Where the steels is directly stresses specified may be exceeded by 25
exposed to weather and is fully accessible for percent.
cleaning and repainting, the thickness shall be
4.9.2.2 ERECTlON LOADS
not less than 6 mm and where the steel is
directly exposed to weather and is not accessi- a) SECONDARY EFFECTS--WITHOUT WIND
ble for cleaning and repainting, the thickness O R E AR T H Q U A K E L O A D S - F o r c o n -

shall be not less than 8 mm. These provisions
do not Apply to the webs of Indian Standard
roiled steel joists and channels or to packings.
4.8.3 STEELWORK NOT D I R E C T L Y E X P O S E D
TO WEATHER
structions where secondary effects are
conSidered without wind or earthquake
loads. the permissible stresses on the
member or its connections as specified
may be exceeded by 25 percent.

4.8.3.1 The thickness of steel in main b) SECONDARV EFFECTS COMBINED WITH

membersnot directly exposed to weather shall W I N D 0R EA R T HQ U AKE LOADS -- W h e n

be not less than 6 mm. secondary effects are considered together

with wind or earthquake loads. the
4.8.3.2 The thickness of steel in secondary increase in the permissible stresses shall
members not directly exposed to weather shall be as specified in 4.9.2.1.
be not less than 4.5 mm.
4.9.2.3 in no case shall a member or its con-
4.8.4 R OLLED S TEEL. BEAMS AND C HAN-
nections have less carrying capacity than that
NELS - The contrblling thickness as specified
under 4.8.2 and 4.8.3 for rolled beams and needed if the wind or earthquake loads or
secondary effects due to erection loads are
channels shall be taken as the mean thickness
of flange, regardless of the web thickness. neglected.
48.5 The requirements of thicknesses speciti- 4.9.3 I N C REASE IN PERMlsslBLE ST R E S S E S
FOR D ESIGN OF G ANTRY G IRDERS AND
ed under 4.8.2 to 4.8.4 do not apply to special
THEIR S UPPORTING S TRUCTURES -While
light structural work or lo sealed box section
or to steel work in which special provision
considering the simultaneous effects of verti-
against corrosion. such as use of special paints
cal and horizontal surge loads of cranes for
has been made or to steelwoik exposed to the combination given in 4.4.2.3 and 4.4.2.4
the permissible stresses may.be increased by
highly corrosive industrial fumes or vapour or
10 percent.
saline atmosphere. Insuch cases the minimum
thickness of structural and secondary 4.9.4 Where the wind load is the main load
members shall be mutually settled between the acting on the structure, no increase in the
customer and the designer. permissible stresses is allowed.
4.9 Increase C$ Stresses 4.10 Fluctuation of Stresses
4.9. I GENERAL -- Except as specified in4.9.24.10.1 Members subjected to fluctuations of
to 4.9.4, all parts of the structure shall be so
stresses are liable to suffer from fatigue failure
proportioned that the working stresses sh&il caused by loads much lower than those which
not exceed the specified values. would be necessary to cause failure under a
4.9.2 INCREASE oh: PERMISSIBLE STRESSES single application. The fatigue cracks are
IN M E M B E R S PROPORTIONED FOR OCCA- caused primarily due to stress concentrations
SIONAL LOADINGS introduced by constructional details‘. Discon-
tinuities such as bolt or rivet holes, welds and
4.9.2.1 WIND OR EARTHQUAKE LOADS other local or general ch+nges in geometrical
a) STRUCTURAL STEEL AND STEEL-CAST- form cause such stress concentrations from
INGS - When the effect of wind or earth- which fatigue cracks may be initiated, and
quake- load is taken into account, the these cracks may subsequently propagate
permissible stresses specified may be through the connected or fabricated
exceeded by 33 + percent. members.
b) RIVETS. BOLTS AND TENSION RODS - Ail details shall, therefore, be designed to
When theeffect ofthe wind orearthquake avoid, as far as possible, stress concentrations
likely to result in excessive reduction of the
fatigue strength of mcmbcrs or connections.
Care shall bc taken to avoid sudden changes
of shape of a member or part of a member,
especially in regions of tensile stress or local
secondary bending.
Except where specifically stated to the con-
trary, the permissible fatigue stresses for any
particular detail are the same for all steels.
410.2 When subjected to fluctuations .of
stresses the permissible stresses shall be the
basic stress stipulated in accordance with
good practice [VI-6(7)] for different.fmin/.fL,x
and for different number of stress cycles and
classes of constructional details.
,
The following provisions shall also be consi-
dered while determining the permissible stress
in members sybjected to fluctuations of stress:
a) Whilecomputingthe valueof.f~i&,~.~ the
effect of wind or earthquake temperature
and secondary stresses shall be ignored.
b) For plain steel in the as-rolled condition
with no gas cut edges the constructional
detail shall be considered as Class A of
[VI-h(7)].
c) For members of steel with yield stress 280
Ml’s and over, and fabricated or con-
nected with bolts or rivets the construc-
tion details shall be considered as ClassUC
of [VI-6(7)].
For members of steels with yield stress
below 2110 M Pa, fabricated or connected
with bolts or rivets the construction
details shall be considered as Class D of
w-6(7)1.
d) The value of fmlLI shall not exceed the
permissible tensile or compressive fatigue
stress as determined from [VI-6(7)].
Where co-existent bending and shear
stresses are present&, shall be taken as
the principal stress at ‘the point under
consideration.
4. I I Resistance IO Hcdonral Forces
411.1 In designing the steel framework of
building, provisions shall be made by ade-
quate’moment connections or by a system of
bracing to effectively transmit to the founda-
*
tions all the horizontal forces, making due
allowance for the stiffening effect of the walls
and floors, where applicable.
“I-P
411.2 When the walls, or walls and floors
and/or roof are capable of Cllcctively trans-
mitting all of the horizontal forces directly to
the foundations, the structural framework
may be designed without considering the
effect of wind.
4.11.3 W ind a’nd earthquake forces arc
reversible and therefore calls for rigidity in
both longitudinal and transverse directions.
To provide for torsional effects of wind and
earthquake forces bracings in plan should be
provided and integrally connected with the
longitudinal and transverse bracings to
impart adequate torsional resistance to the
structure.
4. I I,3.! In shed type buildings, adequate pro-
visions shall be made by wind bracings to
transfer the wind or earthquake loads from
their. points of action to the appropriate sup-
porting members. Where the connections to
the interior columns are so designed that the
wind or earthquake loads are not transferred
to the interior columns. the exterior columns
shall be designed to.resist the total wind or
,earthquake loads. Where the connections to
the interior columns are so designed that the
wind or earthquake effects are transferred to
the interior columns also, both exterior and
interior columns shall be designed on the
assumption that the wind or earthquake load
is divided among them in proportion to.their
relative stiffnesscs. Columns also should be
tested for proper anchorage to the trusses and
other members ‘to withstand the uplifting
effect caused by excessive wind or-earthquake
pressure from below the roof.
4.11.3.2 Earthquake forces .are proportional
to the mass of structural component and the
imposed load. Therefore earthquake forces
should be applied at the centre of gravity of all
such components of loads and their transfer to
the foundation should be ensured.
4.11.3.3 In buildings where high-speed travel-
ling cranes are supported by the structure or
wherea building or structure is otherwise sub-
jected to vibration or sway, triangulated brac-
ing or especially rigid portal systems shall be
provided to reduce the vibration or sway to a
suitable minimum.
4. I1.4 FOUNDATIONS .- The-foundations of
building or other structure shall be so
designed as to ensure such rigidity and
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
strength as have been allowed for in the’design
of the supcrstructurc, including rcsislance to
all Ibrccs.
4.II.s OV E R H A N G O F W A L L S - W h e r e a
wall is placed ccccntritally upon the flange of
a supporting steel beam, the beam and its
conn&ons shall ho designed for torsion.
unless the beam is cncascd in solid concrete
and rcinforccd in combination with an ad.join-
itig solid floor slab in such a way as,to prcvcnt
the beam dcl’orming t&sionally.
4.12.1 Ihcat;lbilityol’thcstructurcasi~ whole
or ol’ any part 01’ it shall bc invcstigatcd, and
weight or anchorage shall br provided so that
the least rcslorinp moment and anchorage.
shall be not less than the sum of I .2 tirncs the
maximum ovcrturniny moment due to dead
load and I .4 times the maximum overturning
moment due to imposed loads and wind or-
earthquake loads.
4.12.1.1 In cases where dead load provides
the restoring moment, only 0.9.times thcdead
load shall be considered. Restoring moment
due lo imposcd’loads shall be ignored.
4.12.1.2 To ensure stability at all times.
account shall be taken of probable variations
in dead load during construction, repair or
other temporary measures. The effect on the
load from the deflected or deformed shape of
the structure or of individual elements of the
lateral load resisting systems. may be consi-
dered as required.
NATE I - Incomplyinpwiththcrcquiretnentsof~./3./,il
is necessary to ascertain that the resulting pressures and
.shear forces to be communicated by the foundutions to
the supporting soil would not cause failure.
kl0.W 2 -- All individual members of the structure which
have been designed for their dead and imposed loads.
‘wind orearthquake loads lo the permissible stresses stipu-
lated in this code shall be deemed lo be adequately
covered for this margin of stability. .
4.13 Limiting Deflection
4.13.1 L IMITING V ERTICAL D EFLECTION
4. I3.1.f The deflection of a member shall be
calculated without considering the impact fac-
tor or dynamic effect of the loads causing
deflection.
4.13.1.2 The deflection of member shall not
be such as to impair the strength or efficiency
of the structure and lead. to damage to finish-
ings. Generally; the maximum deflect@
should not exceed I/325 of the span, but this
limit may be exceeded in cases wheie grcater
deflectioti would not impair the strength or
efficiency ofthe structure or lead to damage to
finishings.
4.13.1.3 In the case of crane runway girder
Ihe maximum vertical deflection under dead
and iniposed loads shall not exceed the fol-
lowing values:
L
a) Where manually operated cranes
Are operated and for similar 500
loads
b) Where electric overhead travelling L
cranes operate, up 10 501 750
cl Where electric overhead travelling L
cranes operate. over 50r I 000
L
d) Other moving loads such as -
600
charging cars, etc.
where
,!_ = Span of crane runway girder.
4.13.2 L IMITING H ORIZONTAL D E F L E C T I O N
4.13.2. I At the caps of columns in single sto-
rey buildings, the horizontal deflection due to
lateral forces should not ordinarily exceed
l/325 of the actual length ‘I’ of the column.
This limit may be exceeded in cases where
greater deflection would not impair the
strength and efficiency of the structure or lead
to damage to finshing.
4.13.2.2 The horizontal deflection at column
cap level of columns supporting crane runway
girders in the building shall not exceed limits
as may be specified by the purchaser.
413.3 TUBES -- The requirement of the limit-
ing defleaion of Ii325 of the span may be
deemed to be satisfied if the bending stress in
compression or tension does not exceed
3l ‘y D kgf/cmr, where D is the outside
diameter of the tube in cm and I is the effective
length of the beam in cm.
4.13.3.1 PURLINS
a) The requirements under 15.4.2 regarding
limiting deflection may be waived in the
design of simpletubular purlins provided
that the following requirements are
satisfied:
VIP
 Nqrure c?/ Mitiitriutn Value CJ\’ Mittitttutn is provided at the centre of the building or
End S&tiotr Moclttl~r.v Out.~itk
building section. the length of the build-
Fi.ying A Ikwierrr
Grade Grade ’ . . ./or
ing section may be restricted to 180
f Grade
YSI 22 YSt 25 YS1 32 u^rorles: metres in case of covered buildings and
cm’ cm’ cm’ lx/ “. 120 metres in case of open gantries (see
YB 23 Fig. 2).
O/fCJ
w 32
cm
Simply WLi II’Ll WI./ L/SO
supported I I 200 13 2.10 16 4(w)
Effectively WLj WL/ WI.1 L/70
continuous 16 X00 19 u4u 24 600

where
W= the total distributed load in kg on
the purlins arising from dead load
and snow but excluding wind, and
L= the distance in cm between the cen-
tres of the steel principals or other
supports.
b) A purlin shall be considered as effectively
continuous at any intermediate point of
support if it is actually continuous over,
that point or if it has there a joint able to
provide a fixing moment of not less than
WI_! 12. where W and I. arc as defined
above.
4.14 Expansion Joints
4.14. I In view of the large number of factors
involved in deciding the location. spacing and
nature of expansion joints. provisions of
expansion joints should be left to the discre-
tion of the designer.
4.14.2 Structures in which marked changes in
plan dimensions take place abruptly shall be
provided with expansion joints at the section
where such changes occur. Expansion joints
shall be so provided that the necessary move-
ment occurs with a minimum resistance atlhe
joint. The structure adjacent to the joint
should #preferably be supported on separate
columns but not necessarily on separate
foundation.
4.l4.3 The details as to the length of a struc-
ture where expansion j&in& have to be pro-
vided may be determined after taking into
consideration various factors Such as temper-
ature. exposure to weather and structural
design, etc. For the purpose of general gui-
dance the following provisions have been
recommended:
a) If one ret of column longitCldit4 braciq
I_ 1eOm
END OF BUILDING/SECTION
Fig. 2 Maximum Length of Building with
One Set of Column Bracing
b) If one set of column longitudinal bracing
is provided near centre of the building/
section, the maximum centre line dis-
tance between the two sets of bracing may
be restricted to 48 metres for covered
buildings (and 30 metres for open gan-
tries) and the maximum distance between
centre of the bracing to the nearest expan-
sion joint/end of building or section may
be restricted to 90 metres (60 metres in
case of open gantries). The maximum
length of the building section thus may bc
restricted to 22X metres for co* ered build-
ings [and I50 metres for open gantries
(SW Fig. 3)].
Fig. 3 Maximum Length of Buildings/ Section
with Two Sets of Column Bracings
c) The maximum width of the c o v e r e d
building section should preferably be res-
tricted to 150 metres beyond which suita-
ble provisions for the expansion joints
may be made.
5. DESIGN OF TENSION MEMBERS
5. I Axial Stress
5.1. I The permissible stress in axial tension,
 uo,. in MPa on the net effective area of the the members are connected together along
sections shall not exceed: their length as specified in 9.10.3.3.
uor =O. 6 ./.y 5.2.1.4 Where the angles are back-to-back
where but are not tack riveted or welded according
to 8.10.3.3 the proyisions under 5.2.X.2
f ,” = minimum yield stress of steel in MPa and 5.2.1.3 shall not apply and each angle
5.1.2 Fort TUBES -- ‘The permissible direct shall be designed as a single angle connected
stress in axial tension on the net area of the through one leg only in accordance with
sections shall not exceed the values given 5.2. I. I.,
below: 5.2.1.5 When two tees are- placed back-to-
Crude (I.~ (M Pa) back but are not tack ritieted or welded as per
YSt 22 123 9.10.3.3 the provisions under 5.2.1.3 shall not
YSt 25 147 apply and each tee shall be designed as a single
YSt 32 186 tee connected to one side of a gusset only in
accordance with 5.2.1.2.
5.2 Design Detail.!
N OTE - The area of the leg of an angle shall be taken as
5.2.1 NE T EFF~CI-WE AREAS FOK ANGLES the product of the thicknessand the length from theoutcr
AND TEES IN T E N S I O N corner minus half the thickness and the area of the leg of a
teeas the product ofthe thicknessand thedepthminusthe
5.2.1.1 In the case of single angle connected thickness of the table.
through one leg the net effective sectional area
shall be taken as: 6 DESIGN OF COMPRESSION
A, + AIk MEMBERS
w h e r e
6.1 Axial Stresses in Vncased Struts
AI = effective cross-sectional area of the
6.1.1. The direct stress in compression on the
connectid leg,
AI = the gross cross-sectional area of the gross sectional area of axially loaded com-
unconnected leg, and pression members shall not exceed 0.6f nor
the permissible stress uacr calculated using the
k= 3At
following formula:
3A, + A2
Where leg angles are used, the effective sec- /CC.fY
oar = 0.6
tional area of the whole of the angle member [U CC)“+ (r .?)n]“n
shall be considered. where
5.2. I.2 In the case of a pair of angles back-to- U ,,< =permissible stress in axial
back (or a single tee) connected by one leg of compression, in MPa;
the angle (or by the flange of the tee) to the fy = yield stress of steel, in MPa;
same side of a gusset, the net effective area
shall lx taken as f CC = elastic critical stress in
compression,
A, + Azk T’E
where =-,
A I and AZ are as defined in 5.2. I. I, and h2
5A I, E = modulv of elasticity of steel,
k = 2 X 10’ MPa;
5A, + A2
A (cl/r)= slenderness ratio of the mem-
The angles shall be connected together along
l&, ratio of the effective
their length in accordance with the reqoire-
length to appropriate radius
ments under 9.10.3.3.
of gyration; and
5.2.1.3 For double angles or tees placed back- n = factor assumed as 1.4.
to-back and connected to each side of a gusset
or to each side 9f part of a rolled section the Values of uoc for some of the Indian
rreas to be taken in computing the mean ten- Standard structural steels are given in
rile stress shall be the effective area provided Table 2 for convenience.
 TABLE’2 PERMISSIBLE STRESS o.< (MPa) IN AXIAL COMPRESSION
FOR STEELS WITH VARIOUS YIELD STRESS

[C/owe &I.I]

h- 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540

10 132 I38 I44 I50 I56 168 180 192 204 215 227 239 251 269 287 305 323
20 I31 137 142 148 I54 I66 177 189 201 212 224 235 246 263 i80 297 314
30 I28 134 140 I45 I51 162 172 I83 194 204 215 225 236 25’1 266 280 295
40 124 129 134 139 I45 I54 I64 174 183 192 201 210 218 231 243 255 267
50 118 123 127 132 136 I45 I53 I61 168 176 183 I90 197 207 216 225 233
60 Ill II5 II8 122 126 133 139 146 I52 I58 I63 168 173 180 I87 193 I99
70 bO2 I06 I09 II2 I15 120 I25 130 135 139 142 I47 I50 I55 160 I64 168
80 93 96 98 IO1 103 107 I I I II5 II8 121 124 127 129 I35 136 139 I41
90 85 87 88 90 92 95 98 IO1 103 I05 108 109 III II4 116 II8 I19
100 76 78 79 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 93 94 96 97 99 100 IO1
110 68 69 71 72 73 74 76 77 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87
120 61 62 63 64 64 66 67 67 69 70 71 71 72 73 73 74 75
I30 55 55 56 57 57 58 59 60 61 ‘61 62 62 63 63 64 64 65
140 49 50 50 II 51 52 53 53 54 54 54 55 55 56 56 56 57
150 44 45 45 45 46 46 47 4Y 48 48 48 49 49 49 49 50 50
160 40 40 41 41 41 42 42 42 43 43 43 43 43 44 44 44 44
170 36 36 37 37 36 37 38 38 38 38 39 39 39 39 39. 39 39
180 33 33 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 35 35, 35 35 35 35 35 35
190 30 30 30 30 30. 30 31 31 31 31 31 31 32 32 32 32 32
200 27 27 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
210 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
220 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
230 21 21 21 21 21 21 22 21 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
240 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
250 If’ I8 I8 I8 I8 I8 I8 I8 18 19 I9 19 19 I9 I9 I9 I9

61.2 FOR T UBULAR S E C T I O N S - The direct Effective length as given in Table 4 may also
stress in compression on the cross sectional be adopted where columns directly form part
area of axially loaded steel tubes shall not of framed structures.
exceed the values given in Table 3. 6.2.3. E CCENTRIC B EAM C O N N E C T I O N S- I n
6.2 Effective Length of Compression cases where the beam connections are eccent-
Members ric with respect to the axes of the columns, the
same conditions of restraint shall be deemed
6.2.1. GENERAL - The slenderness ratio of a to apfily, provided the connections are carried
strut shall be calculated as the ratio of the across the flange or web of the columns as the
effective length, I, to the appropriate radius of case may be, and the web of the beam lies
gyration, r. The effective length, 1, shall be within, or in direct contact with the column
derived from the actual length,L. The actual section. Where practical difficulties prevent,
strut length shall be taken as the length from this, effective length shall be estimated to
the centre-to-centre of inter-sections with sup- accord with the case appropriate to no res-
porting members, or the cantilevered length in traint. in that direction.
the case of free-standing struts.
6.2.4 MEMBER< OF TRUSSES - In thecaaeof
6.2.2 EFFECTIVE L ENGTH - Where accurate bolted, riveted or welded trusses and braced
frame analysis is not done, theeffective length frames, the effective length V’of the compres-
of a compression member in a given plane sion members shall be taken as between 0.7
may be determined by the procedure given in and I .O times the distance between centres of
Appendix C. However, in most cases t h e inter-sections, depending on the degree of end
effective length in the given plane assessed on restraint provided. In the case of members of
the basis of Table 4, would be adequate. trusses buckling in the plane perpehdicular to

“I-Cl6
 TABLE 3 PERMISSIBLE STRESS IN AXIAL beam reactions or similar loads shall b e
COMPRESSION, IN MPa assumed to be applied 100 mm from the face
(Clause 6.12) of the section or. at the centre of bearing
(S-mx TUBES CONFORMING TO IS:1 161-1979 GRADE) whichever dimension gives the greater eccen-
lfr YSr 22 YSt 25 YSt 32
tricity, and with the exemption of the follow-
(1) (2) (3) - (4) ing two cases:-
0 123 147 186
10 119 142 179
a) In the case of cap connections, the load
20’ 115 137 172 shall be assumed to be applied at the face
30 1.11 133 165 of the column shaft or stanchion section;
40 la7 128 158 or edge of packing if used, towards the
50 103 123 151 span of the beam; and
60 98 118 144
b) In the case of roof truss bearing on a cap,
70 95 113
80 91 107 no eccentricity need be taken for simple
90 86 98 bearings without connections capable of
100 80 89 91
developing an appreciable moment.
110. 73 80 85 6.3.3.2 In continuous columns, the bending
120 66 71 14
moments due to eccentricities of loading on
130 59 63 65
140 53 55 57 the columns at any floor may be taken as:
150 48 49 51 4 ineffective at the floor levels above and
160 42 43 44 below that floor: and
170 37 38 39
1x0 33 34 35 b) divided equally between the column’s
lengths above and below that floor level.
190 30 30 31
200 27
provided that the moment of inertia of
27 27
210 24 24 55 either column section, divided by its effec-
220 22 22 22 tive length does not exceed I.5 times the
230 29 2 0 20 corresponding value of the other column.
240 18 18 18 In case where this ratio is exceeded, the
250 16 16 16
bending moment shall be divided in pro-
300 10 10 10
350 7 7 7 portion to the moments of inertia of the
-___
column sections divided by their res-
the plane of the truss the effective length shall
pective effective lengths.
be taken as 1.0 times the distance between
points of restraints. The design of discontinu- 6.3.4 .SPLICES
ous angle struts shall be as specified in 6.5.
6.3.4‘1 Where the ends of compression
6.2.5 S TEPPED C O L U M N S -- A method deter-
members are faced for bearing over the whole
mining the effective length of stepped columns
area, they shall be spliced to hold the con-
is given in Appendix D. nected members accurately in position, and to
6.3 Design Details resist any tension when bending is present.
6.3. I THICKNESSOF E LEMENTS -The thick-
ness of an outstanding leg of any member The ends of compression members faced for
in compression shall be in accordance bearing shall invariably be machined to
‘with 4.5.2.1 and 4.5.2.2. ensure perfect contact of surfaces in bearing.
6 . 3 . 2 E F F E C T I V E SECTIONAL AR E A - 6.3.4.2 Where such membersare not faced for
Except as modified, under 4.5.2 the gross sec- complete bearing the splices shall be designed
tional area shall be taken for all compression to transmit all the forces to which they are
members connected by welds and turned and subjected.
fitted bolts and pins except that holes, which 6.3.4.3 Wherever possible, splices shall be
are not fitted with rivets. weld or tight-fitting proportioned and arranged so that the cen-
bolts and pins, shall be deducted. troidal axis of the splice coincides as nearly as
6.3.3 E CCENTRICITY FOR S TANCHION AND possible with the centroidal axes of the
S OLID C O L U M N S members jointed in order to avoid eccentric-
6.3.3.1 For the purpose of determining the ity; but where eccentricity is present in the .
stress in a stanchion or column section. the joint. the resulting stress shall be providedfor.

PART VI SHtUCllJRAL DESIGN-&XXlDN 6 STEEL “J’

 TABLE 4 EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS
OF CONSTANT DIMENSIONS
[C/we 6.24
DEOREE OF E ND R ESTRAINT OF RECOMMI?NDED Srumx
COU?W.SSlON MEMBSR VALue OP
EFFHXIVE
LENOlll
(1) (2) (31

a) Effectively held in porition and 0.65 L

restrained against rotation at
both ends

b) Effectively held in position at 0.80 L

both ends and restrained a&nst
rotation at one end

\
cl Effectively held in position at I.00 L \
\
both ends. but not restrained . I
against rotation
:
#
I

d) Effectively held in position and 1.20 L

restrained against rotation at
one end. and at the other end re-
8traioed agaiart rotation but oot
kid in poktiott
 TABLE 4 EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS
OF CONSTANT DIMENSIONS - Conrd
D EGREE OF END RESWMINT OF RECOMMENDED SYMBOL
Cokmtmuob~ MEMBER VALUE OF
EFFEXTWE
LENGG
(1) (2) (4%

!”
I
cl Effectively held in position and I.50 L I
restrained against rotation at I’
one end. and at the other end
putidly ratmined ayinrt rotation /
but not held in position

f) Effectively held i n p o s i t i o n a t ZOOL

one end but not restrained
against rotation, l nd at the other
end restrained ayinst rotation
but not held in poaition

1
//I d
g) Effectively held ‘in position ml 2.00 L
rcrtmined against rotation at
one end but not held in position
/
nor restrained 8Ipinst rotation
at the other end
A

NOTE I - L is the uttsupported length of compression member.

NOTE 2 - For brttsned st~ta the effecti& ~I@I ahall be inctaned by 10 w

MRT n SNUCRRAL DIIIQN-S-N 4 #tUL vJ9

 6.4 Column Buses 6.4.3.2 For solid round steel columns, in
cases where the loading on the cap or under
6.4.1 GUSSETED BASES - For stanchion the base is uniformly distributed over the
with gusseted bases, the gusset plates, angle whole area including the column shaft, the
cleats, stiffeners, fastenings, etc. in combina-
minimum thickness of the square cap or base
tion with the bearing area of the shaft shall be shall be:
sufficient to take loads, bending moments and
reactions to the base plate without exceeding t= lOJ-F&
specified stresses. All the bearing surfaces
shall be machined to ensure perfect contact. where
6.4.1.1 Where the ends of the column shaft I = the thickness of the plate, in
and the gusset plates are not faced for com- mm;
plete bearing, the fastenings connecting them W = the total axial load, in kN;
to the base plate shall be sufficient to transmit B = the length of the side of cap or
all the forces to which the base is subjected. base, in mm;
ob8 = the permissible bending stress in
6.4.2 C OLUMN AND B ASE PLATECONNEC- slab bases (for all steels, shall be
TIONS - Where the end of the column is assumed as 185 MPa); and
connected directly to the plate by means of full do = the diameter of the reduced end,
penetration butt welds the connection shall be if any, of the column, in mm.
deemed .to transmit to the base all the forces
and moments to which the column is 6.4.3.3 When the load on the cap or under the
subjected. base is not uniformly distributed or where end
of the column shaft is not machined with the
6.4.3 S LAB B ASES - Columns with .slab cap or base, or where the cap or base is not
bases. need not be provided with gussets, but square in plan, calculations shall be made
fastenings shall be provided sufficient to based on the allowable str&s of 185 MPa.
retain the parts securely in plate and to resist
6.4.3.4 The cap or base plate shall not be less
all moments and forces, other than direct
than 1.5 (do i- 75) mm in length or diameter.
compression, including those arising during
transit, unloading and erection. When the slab 6.4.3.5 The area of the shoulder (the annular
alone distributes the load uniformly, the mini- bearing area) shall be sufficient to limit the
mum thickness of a rectangular slab shall be ‘stress in bearing, for the whole of the load
given by the following formulq: communicated to the slab, to the maximum
values given in 7.3. and resistance to any bend-
QFJq, ing communicated to the shaft by the slab
shall be taken as assisted by bearing pressures
developed against the reduced end of the shaft
where
in conjunction with the shoulder,
r = the slab thickness, in mm;
w = the pressure or loading on the 6.4.3.6 Bases for bearing upon concrete or
underside of the base, in MPa; masonry need not be machined on the under-
II = the greater projection of the’ plate side provided the reduced end of the shaft
beyond column, in mm; terminates short of the surface of the slab, and
in all cases the area of the reduced end shall be
b = the lesser projection of the plate neglected in calculating the bearing pressure
beyond the column, in mm; and from the base.
U& = the permissible bending stress in 6.4.3.7 In cases where the cap or base is fillet
slab bases (for all steels, shall be welded direct to the end of the column without
assumed as 185 MPa). boring and shouldering, the contact surfaces
6.4.3.1 When the slab does not distribute the shall be machined to give a perfect bearing
loading uniformly or where the slab is not and the imlding shall be sufficient to transmit
rectangular, special calculationsshall be made the forces aa required in 6.4.3 and its sub-
to show that the atre+a are within the speci- clauses for faatehing to stab bases. Where full
Gdlimita. stnngth T-butt . welds arc provided no
machining of contact surfaces shall be ,values obtained from Table 2 for the ratio
required. of slendeiness based on the appropriate
6.41 BASE P LATES AND B EARING P LATES - radius of gyration. The angles shall he
The base plates arid grillages of stanchions
-connected together in their lengths so @s
and the hearing and spreaders of beams and. to ktisfy the requirements of 6.9 and
girden rhaI1 be of adequate.strength, stiffness 9.10.3.
and area, to spread the load upon the con- b) Double angle discontinuous struts back-
crete, masonry, other foundation, or other to-back, connected to one side of a gusset
supports without exceeding the permissible or section by a one or more bolts or rivets
s&s on such foundation under any combina- in each angle. or by the equivilent in
tion of load and bending moments. welding. shall be designed as for single
angles in accordance with 6.5.1 (a) and
6.5 Angle Struts the angles shall be connected together in
their length so as to satisfy the require-
6.5. I SINGLE ANGLE S T R U T S
ments of 6.Y and 9.10.3.
a) Single angle discontinuous struts con-
nected by a single rivet or b61t may be 63.3 CONTINIIOIJS M E M B E R S -- Single or
designed for axial load only provided the double angle continuous struts such as those
compressive stress does not exceed 80 forming the tlanges. chords or ties of trusses
percent of the values given in Table 2 in or trussed girders, or the legs of towers shall be
which the effective length ‘/‘of the strut designed as axially loaded compression
shall be taken as centre-to-centre of inter- members, and the effective length shall be
section at each end and r is the minimum taken in accordance with 6.2.4.
radius of gyration. In no case. however.
6.14 COMHIYSIIST R E S S E S - If the siruts
shall the ratio of slenderness for such sin-
to axial loads, loads which
carry, in addition
gle angle struts exceed 180.
cause transverse bending, thecombined bend-
b) Single angle discontinuous struts con- ing and asial stresses shall be checked in
nected by a weld or by two or more rivets accordance with X./.1., For determining the
or bolts in line along the angle at each end permissible axial and bending stresses. for use
may be designed for axial IoZid only pro- in applying 8.1. I, the effective length shall be
vided the compression stress does not taken in accordance with 6.2 and 7.6.1,
exceed ,the values given in Table 2. in respecti\,ely.
which the effective length ‘/‘shall be taken
6.6 SIW/ C’crsr ings The use of steel casting
as 0.85 time the length of thestrut. centre-
be limitrd to bearings, junctions and other
tocentre of intersection at each end and
similar prts and the working stresses shall
r is the minimum radius of gyration.
not esceed the working stresses given in this
6.3 ,, t)OUHLE &‘&TILE STRUTS standard f’or steel of yield stress 250 MPa.

ai For double angle discontinuous struts. 6.7 Lacing

back-to-back conn~ctrd to both sides of
the gusset or section by not less than t\\‘o
bolts or rivets in line along the anglrts at
each. or by ther equivaltnt in \vrlding. the
load may be’ wgarded as applied asial!y.
The effective length ‘/‘in the plane of end
gusset shall be taken as bCtwern 0.7 and
0.85 times the distance between intersec-
tions. depending on the degree of the res-
traint provided and in the plane
perpendicular to that of the end gusset.
the effective length ‘I’ shall be taken as
equal to the distance between centres of
intersections. The calculated average
compressive stress shall,n& exceed the
6.7. / tiESERA1.
6.7.1.1 Compression members comprising
two main components laced and tied should
where practicable. have a radius of gyration
about the axis perpendicular to the plane of
lacing not less. than ttie radius of gyration
about the axis in the plane of lacing (see
Fig. 4A).
6.7.1.2 As far as practicable the iacingsystem
shall not be varied throughout the length of
the strut.
6.7. I.3 Except for tie plates as specified in6.8
double laced system (UP Fig. 4B)‘Md. single
laced systems on opposite sides of the main

rmr VI SrEu- DCSIQN-SECIION ( SlUL

components shall not be combined with cross
members perpendicular to the longitudinal
axis of the strut unless forces resulting from
deformation of the strut members are calcu-
lated and provided for in the lacing and its
fistenings (.vee Fig. 40.
6.7.1.4 Single laced systems on oppositesides
Of fhc components shall preferably be in the
same direction so that one be the shadow of
the other. instead of being mutually opposed
in direction (see Fig. 4D).
6.7.2 D ESIGN OF L ACIN G
6.7.2.3 The slenderness ratio ‘A’ of the lacing
bars for compression members shall not
exceed 145. In riveted construction, the effec-
tive length of lacing bars for thedetermination
of the permissible stress shall be taken as the
length between the inner end rivetsof t he bars
for single lacing. and as 0.7 of this length for
double lacing effectively riveted at intersec-

6.7.2.1 The lacing of compression members

shall be proporfioncd to resist a total trans-
verse shear ‘Vat any point in the length ofthe
member equal to at least 2.5 percent of the
axial force in the member, which shear shall
be considered as divided equally among all
transverse lacing systems in parallel planes.

6.7.2.2 For members carrying calculaIed

bending stress due to eccentricity of loading.
applied ind moments and/or lareral’loading,
the lacing shall be proportioned to resist the
shear due to the bending in addition to that
specified under 6.7.2.1. Fig. 4C Double Laced and Single heed
Systems Combined with Cross Members

UC)30 ON LACING ON
FACE AA FACE 80 LACING ON LACING O N LACING ON LACING m
FACE A PACE 0 FACE A FACE 8
PREFERRED NOT PREF ERREO

Fig. 4B Double Fig. 4D Single Laced System on Opposite

Fig. IA Lacing Details Lacing System Sides of Main Compahents

V3 NATIONAL BUILZNNQ CODE OF INWA

tion. In welded construction, the effective
lengths shall be taken as 0.7 times the distance
between-the inner erids of welds connecting
the lacing bars to the member.
6.7.3 WIDTH OF L ACING B ARS - Iit rivetad
construction, the minimum width of lacing
bars shall be as follows:
Nominal Width o$
Rivet Dia ‘Lacing &rrs
mm mm
22 65
20 60
18 55
16 50
6.7.4 THICKNESS OF L ACING BARS - The
thickness of flat lacing bars shall be not IesS
than one-fortieth of the length between the
inner end rivets or welds for single lacing, and
one-sixtieth of this length for double lacing
riveted or welded at intersections.
6.7.4. I Rolled sections or tubes of equivalent
strength may be used instead of flats.
6.7.5 A NGLE OF IN C L I N A T I O N - L a c i n g
bars, whether in double or single systems,
shall be inclined at an angle not less than 40
degree nor more than 70 degrees to the axis of
the members.
NOTE - The requiredsection for lacing barsforcompres-
sion members or for tension members subject to bending
shall be determined by using the appropriate permissible
stresses subject to the requirementsin6.7.3and6.7.4. For
tension members under stress. only the lacing bars shall
be subject IO the requirements of 6.7.3. 6.7.4 and 6.7.5.
6.7.6 S PACING
6.7.6. / The maximum spacing of lacing bars,
whether connected by riveting or welding,
shall i&o be such that the minimum slender-
ness ratio A (= I/r) of the components of the
members between consecutive connection is
not greater than 50 or 0.7 times the most
unfavourable slenderness ratio of the member
as a whole, whichever is less. where ‘/‘is the
distance between the centres of conneciion of
the lattice bars to each component.
6.7.6.2 Where lacing bars aie not lapped to
form the connection to the components of the
members; they shall be so connected that there
is no appreciable interruption in the triangula-
tion of the system.
6 . 7 . 7 ATTACHMENT T O MAlN ME M B E R S -
The riveting or welding of lacing bars to the
main members shall be sufficient to transmit
the load in. the bars. Where welded lacing bars
overlap the main members, the amount of lap
measured along either edge of the lacing bar
shall be not less than four times the thickness
of tKe bai or the members, whichever is less.
The welding should be sufficient to transmit
the load in the bar and shali, in any case, be
provided along each side of the bar for the full
length of lap.
6.7.7.1 Where lacing bars are fitted between
the main members, they shall be connected to
each member by fillet welds oneach side of the
bar or by full ‘penetration butt welds. The
lacing bars shall be so placed asto be generally
opposite the flange or stiffening elements of
the main member.
6.7.8 E ND T IE P LATES -- Laced compression
members shall be provided with tie plates at
the ends of lacing systems and at points where
the systems are interrupted (see also 6.8).
6.8 Battening and Tie Plates
6.8. I GENERAL
6.8.1. I Compression members composed of
two main components battened should prefer-
ably have their two main components of the
same cross section and symmetrically dis-
posed about their X-xaxis. Where practicable,
the compression members should have a
radius of gyration about the axis perpendicu-
lar to the plane of the batten not less than the
radius of gyration about the axis in the plane
of batten.
6.8.1.2 Battened compression members not
complying with the requirements specified in
this clause or those subjected, in the plane of
the battens, to eccentricity of loading. applied
moments or lateral forces (see Fi$. 5) shall be
designed according to the exact theory of elas-
tic stability or empirically from the verifica-
tion of tests. so that they have a load factor of
not less than 1.7 in the actual structure.
6.8.1.3 The battens shall be placed opposite
each other at each end of the members and
points where the member is stayed in its length
and shall, as far as practicable. be spaced and
proportioned uniformly throughout. The
number of battens shall be such that the
member is divided into not less than three
bays within its actual length from centre-to-
centre of connection.

6.8.2 ihSI(;N
6.8.2.1 BATTENS -- Battens shall be designed
to carry the bending momcntsand shcarsaris-
ing from transvcrsc shear force ‘V’of 2.5 per-
cent of the total axial force on the whole
compression member, at any point in the
length of the member. divided equally
between parallel planes of battens. ‘I.he main
members shall also bc chcckcd for the same
shear force and bending moments as for the
battens.
Battens shall be of plates, angles, channels, or
l-sections and shall be rivctcd or welded to the
main components so as 10 resist simultane-
ously a longitudinal shear
“,= vc
N.S
v. C’
_and a moment M = -
2 N
where
V = the transverse shear force as
defined above;
C = the distance centre-to-centre of’
battens. longitudinally;
N = the numbers of parallel planes of
battens; and
S = the minimum transverse distance
between the centroids of the rivet
group/welding.
“I-,24
6.x..?:.? TIE PIATES - Tie plates shall be
dcsigncd by the same method as battens. In no
GI\C shall a tic plate and its fastenings be
incapahlc of carrying the forces for which the
lacing has been designed.
?.8.2.3 SIZE -. When plates.are used for bat-
tens, the end battens and those at points where
the member&stayed in its length shall havean
cl.fcctive depth. longitudinally, of not less than
the pcrpcndicular distance between the cen-
troidh of the main members. and intermediate
hattcns shall have an effective depth of not less
than three quarters of this distance. but in no
cast shall the ef’fcctivc depth ofany batten be
Its\ than twice the width of one member in the
plane of the battens. The effective depth of a
batten shall be taken as the longitudinyl dis-
tancc betwpcn end rivets or end welds.
The thickness of batten or the tie plates shall
bc not less than one-fiftieth of the distance
between the innermost connecting lines of
rivets or weld.
6.X.2.4 ‘fhe requirement of si7e and thickness
specified above does not apply when angles,
channels or l-sections are used for battens
with their legs or flanges ptirpendicular to the
main member. However. it should be ensured
that the ends of the compression members are
tied to achieve adequate rigidity.
6.8.3 SP A C I N G OF BATTESS
6.8.3. I In battened compression members
not specifically checked for shear stress and
bending moments as specified in 6.8.2,/. the
spacing of battens centre-to-centre of end fas-
tenings shall be such that the slenderness ratio
‘A’ of the lesser main component over that
distance shall be not greater than 50or greater
than 0.7 time the slenderness ratio of the
member as a whole, about its x-x axis (parallel
to battens).
NOIF --- With regard 10 elfective length of rhe battened
compression member as a whole. reference may he made
to Table 4.
6.8.3.2 The number of battens shall be such
that ttie member i;divided into not less than
three parts longitudinally.
6 . 8 . 4 ATTACHMEST.IO MA I N M EMBERS
6.8.4. I WELDED co!GNEcTloNs--Where tie or
batten plates o\,crlap the main members, the
amount of lap shall be not less than four times
the thickness of the plate. The length of weld
N A T I O N A L Ml&DING CODE DP INDU
connecting each edge o! the oatten plate to the
member shall, in aggregate: be not less than
half the depth of the batten plate. At least
one-third of the weld shall bc placed at each
end of this edge. The length of weld and depth
of batten plate shall be measured along the
longitudinal axis of the main member.
In addition. the welding shall be returned
along the other two edges oi’the plates trans-
versely to the axis of the main member for ;I
length not less than the minimum lap specified
above.
6.9.1 Compression members composed of
two angles. channels, or tees, back-to b&k in
contact or separated by a small distance shall
be connected together by riveting. bolting or
welding so that the ratio of slenderness of each
member between the connections is no:
greater than 40 or greater than 0.6 times the
most unfavourable ratio of slenderness of the
strut as a whole, whichever is less (SPV also 8).
6.0.2 In no case shall the-ends of the strut he
connected togcthcr with less than two rivets or
bolts or their cqui\~aIcnt in welding, and there
shall be not less than two additional conncc-
tions spaced cquidi>tant in the Icngth of strut.
Where the mcmbcrs arc scparatcd back-to-
back. the rivets or bolts through thcsc conncc-
tions shall pass through solid washers or
packings. and whcrc the Icgs oI’ the connected
angles or tables of the conncctcd tees ;Lre IQ
mm wide or over, or whcrc webs of channels
arc 150 mm wide or over, not less than two
rivets or bolts shall be used incach connection
one on lint of each gauge mark.
6.0.3 Whcrc thcsc connections are made b!
wcldinp. solid packin# shall bc used to effect
tile &~inting unless the m e m b e r s arc suffi-
cicntly close togthcr to permit welding, a n d
the members shall bc conncctctl by welding
a l o n g b o t h p a i r s o f cdgcs of the main
components.
6.Y.4 The rivets, bolts or welds in thcsc con-
ncctions shull bc sufficient to carry the shear
force and moments. if ilIly, specified for bat-
tcncd struts,‘iind in no case Sllilll tlifz rivets or
b o l t s b e less than 16 mm ctiemctcr for
mcmbcrs up to and including IO 1)1m thick;20
P A R T VI STRUclupAL DESIGN-SRCIlON 6 OTgeL
mm diameter for members up to and includ-
ing I6 mm thick; and 22 mm diameter for
members over I6 mm thick.
6.Y.4.1 Cbmprrssion members connected by
-such riveting, bolting or welding shall not be
subjected to transverse loading in a plane per-
pendicular to the washer-riveted, bolted or
welded surfaces.
6.9.5 Where the components are in contact
back-to-back. the spacing of the rivets, bolts
or intermittent welds <hall -not exceed the
m;tximum spacing IIor compression members
as pi\lcn in 6.1.4 and 6.2.6 of ls:Xl6-1969.
7 . I)ESIGN OF RltlMBE-:l<S SIIBJECTED
1-o BESI)IN<i
7. I tirrll~rol H& -calculated stress in a
member sub_jcctcd to bending shall not exceed
any of the appropriate makimuni permissible
stresses piLen in 7..? for bending!, 7.3 for bear-
ing, 7.4 for shear ilnd in 8. I lor the combina-
tion of stresses.
7.2.1 MA\IMIIM HI \I)I\(; STl<tsS5FS - T h e
maxyilllum bending strchs in tension (ub,. E,,l) or
in compression ((~1.~ =“I) in extreme fibrecalcu-
lated on the effective section of a beam shall
not exceed the maximum permissible bending
stress in tension (Obl) or in compression (a~=)
obtained as follows nor the values specified in
7.2.2. 7.2.X 7.2.5 and 7.2.6. as appropriate:
(Ib, O r at.- = 0.64/,.
7 . 2 . 2 MAXIMUM PERMISSIb1.E BWDING
C O M P R E S S I V E S TRESS IN B E A M S ANI> CH A N-
NELS WITH E QUAL F L A N G E S -~~ F o r a n I-
beam or channel with equal flanges bent
about the’axis of maximum strength (X-X
axis), the maximum bending compressive
stress on the extreme fibre calculated on the
effective section shall not exceed the values of
maximum permissible bending compressive
stress ubr given directly in Table 5A or 5B,
Table 5C or 5D and Table 5E or SF, as
appropriate, for steels with yield stress,/, of
250 M Pa, 340 MPa and 400 MPa. respec-
tively. For &eels with yield stresses other thafi
those covered in Tables 5A to SF. maxim&
permissible bending compressive stress shall
be obtained in accordance with 7.2.3 and
7.2.4.
NOTE - Tablk 5A lo SF have been derived in accordoncc
with 7.2.3 and 7.24,
 TABLE 5A MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE BENDING STRESSES, ak (MPa),
IN EQoAL FLANGE I-BEAMS OR CHANNELS
(Clause 7.2.2)

with j, = 250 MPa, L > 20 or ” > 8 5

I -i-

8 IO 12 I4 I6 I8 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 80 100

40 I60 I60 159 I59 I58 I58 I58 I58 I58 157 I57 157 157 I57 157
45 159 158 157 157 156 156 156 I55 I55 I55 I55 155 I54 I54 154
50 I58 157 I56 I55 I54 I54 I53 I53 .I52 I52 I52 I51 I51 ISI I51
55 I57 155 I54 I53 152 ISI I50 149 149 I48 I48 I48 148 ldl 147
60 156 I53 152 I50 149 148 148 I46 145 145 I44 I44 Ii4 I41 143
65 154 152 I50 I48 147 145 I44 143 142 I41 I40 I40 I39 I19 I39
70 153 I50 148 I46 I44 142 I41 I39 I38 I37 I36 I35 I35 13s I34
15 I52 148 I45 I43 I41 I39 138 I36 I34 I33 I32 I31 I30 I30 129
80 I50 147 I43 I41 I38 I36 135 I32 I30 128 I28 126 I26 125 I25
85 149 145 I41 I38 I36 I33 I32 128 126 124 I23 122 I21 120 IP
90 147 I43 I39 I36 133 I30 128 124 122 120 II9 II7 I I6 II5 II5
95 I46 I41 137 I33 130 128 I25 I21 II8 I lb I I4 II2 III I IO I 10
la0 145 I40 135 I.11 128 125 I22 II7 I I4 I I2 I IO IO8 107 Kn I05
I10 142 I36 I31 127 I23 119 116 tll 107 104 102 99 98 96 95
I20 139 I33 127 122 I I8 I I4 III I04 100 97 94 91 Qo 88 87
130 137 I30 124 Ilrn II3 I09 I06 99 94 90 88 84 62 80 79
140 134 127 120 II4 I09 IO5 IO1 93 R8 84 81 78 75 73 72
I50 I32 I24 II7 I IO 105 loo % 88 83 79 lb 72 b9 b7 65
160 129 121 II3 107 IO1 96 92 84 78 74 71 66 64 61 60
170 127 II8 II0 I04 98 93 88 80 74 69 66 62 59 56 55
I80 124 II5 I07 100 94 89 85 76 70 65 62 58 55 52 50
I90 122 II3 I04 97 91 86 R2 73 66 62 58 54 51 48 46
200 I20 I IO 102 94 88 83 78 70 63 59 35 50 48 44 43
210 II8 IO8 99 92 86 80 76 67 60 56 52 47 44 41 40
220 I I6 I05 97 89 83 78 73 64 58 53 49 45 42 38 37
230 II3 103 94 87 80 75 70 62 55 51 47 42 39 36 34
240 III IO1 92 84 78 73 68 59 53 48 45 40 37 34 32
250 109 99 90 82 76 70 66 57 51 46 43 38 35 32 30
260 107 97 88 80 74 - 68 64 55 49 44 41 36 33 30 28
210 106 95 86 78 72 66 62 53 47 43 39 35 32 28 26
280 104 93 84 76 70 65 62 53 47 43 39 35 32 27 25
290 102 91 R2 74 68 63 58 50 44 39 36 32 29 25 24
300 100 89 80 72 66 61 57 48 42 38 35 30 27 24 22
_-

.,,26 NATIONAL BUlLDING CODE OF INDIA

 TABLE SB MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE BENDING STRESSES, ok (MPa).
IN EQUAL FLANGE I-BEAMS OR CHANNELS
(C/oust 7.2.2)

withj, = 250 MPa, L 5 20 and dll85

I I

8 10 12 14 16 I8 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 80 100

40 lb1 161 160 lb0 I60 I60 I60 I59 159 I59 159 I59 I59 159 I59
45 161 160 159 159 I58 158 I58 157 157 157 157 157 I57 I57 157
50 160 158 158 157 156 156 156 155. I55 I55 154 154 154 I54 I54
55 159 157 156 I55 154 154 I53 I53 152 152 I52 I51 151 ISI ISI
Ml I58 156 154 I53 152 152 I51 I50 149 149 !49 I48 I48 148 I48
65 156 154 I53 I51 I50 149 I48 147 I46 I46 I45 I45 I44 144 I44
70 155 153 I51 149 149 I47 146 I44 143 142 I42 I41 I41 140 I40
75 154 152 149 141 146 144 I43 141 I40 139 138 137 137 136 I36
80 153 I50 148 145 143 142 I40 I38 136 135 I34 133 132 132 I32
85 152 I49 146 I43 141 139 138 135 I33 I31 I30 129 I28 127 127
90 151 147 144 141 139 137 135 131 129 127 126 125 I24 123 I23
95 I50 146 142 139 137 134 132 I28 126 124 122 I21 120 II9 II8
100 149 145 141 137 134 I32 129 125 122 120 I I8 II6 II5 II4 113
110 147 142 137 133 130 127 124 I I9 II5 I13 III IOU 107 105 I05
120 144 I39 134 129 126 122 I I9 II3 109 I06 104 IO1 99 97 96
130 142 136 131 126 I21 II8 I I4 108 I03 99 97 94 91 89 88
140 140 133 128 122 II8 II3 I10 I03 97 94 91 87 85 82 81
I50 138 131 124 II9 I I4 I09 I05 98 92 88 85 81 78 76 74
160 136 128 121 I I5 110 IO6 I01 93 87 83 80 7s 73 70 68
I70 134 126 I19 II2 107 102 98 89 83 79 75 70 68 64 63
110 I31 123 116 109 104 99 94 8.5 79 74 71 66 63 60 58
190 129 121 113 106 101 95 91 82 75 71 67 62 59 55 54
200 127 118 III 104 98 92 88 79 72 67 63 58 55 51 50
210 125 116 108 101 95 90 85 76 69 64 60 55 52 48 46
220 I23 114 106 99 92 87 82 73 66 bl 57 52 49 45 43
230 122 112 I03 96 90 84 80 70 63 58 55 49 46 42 40
240 120 II0 101 94 87 82 77 61 61 56 52 47 43 40 38
250 II8 I08 99 92 85 80 75 65 59 54 50 44 41 37 35
260 116 106 97 89 83 77 73 63 57 52 48 42 39 35 33
270 I14 104 95 87 81 75 71 61 55 50 46 41 37 33 31
280 113 102 93 85 79 73 69 59 53 48 44 39 35 32 30
290 III 110’ 91 84 77 72 67 58 51 46 42 37 34 30 20
300 109 9d 89 82 75 70 65 56 49 45 41 36 32 29 27
- -

PART VI STRWTURAL D&SIGN-SECI’ION 6 SpEgL

 TABLE~C MAXIMUM PERbitsslB~~ BENDINGSTRESSES.U~(MP~),
IN EQUAL FLANGE I-BEAMS OR CHANNELS
(C/mm 7.2.2)

with/, = 340 MPa. L >2.0or .?> 75

t I
Dl T-,
8 IO I2 14 16 I8 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 80 100

40 215 214 212 212 211 211 210 210 209 209 209 209 209 209
45 ?I3 211 209 208 207 206 206 205 204 204 203 203 203 203
50 210 208 205 204 203 202 201 I99 I99 198 198 197 197 197 197
55 ZO8 204 202 200 198 197 I% 194 193 192 I91 I91 I90 I90 I90
60 205 2i)l 198 195 193 I91 190 188 I86 I85 I85 I84 183 183 I83
6s 203 l9Lt 194 191 188 I86 185 181 180 178 I71 I76 I76 I75 I75
70 200 I95 I96 I86 183 I81 179 I75 173 I71 170 I69 I68 I67 I67
75 198 192 I86 I82 179 I76 173 169 I66 I64 I63 I61 I60 I59 I59
It0 I95 188 183 178 I74 170 I68 I63 I59 I57 1% I54 I53 ISI I51
85 193 I85 179 174 169 I65 I62 I57 I53 I50 149 I46 145 144 143
90 190 I82 I75 I69 I65 I61 I57 151 I47 I44 142 139 138 136 136
95 I88 179 172 165 I60 I56 I52 I45 I41 137 I35 132 I31 129 128
100 I85 I76 I68 I62 I56 ISI 147 I40 I35 I31 I29 I26 124 122 I21
I IO 180 170 162 I54 148 I43 138 I30 I24 I20 II7 II4 112 109 108
I20 176 I65 I55 147 I41 I35 I30 I21 II5 II0 107 I03 IO1 98 97
1.30 I71 I59 I49 141 134 I28 122 II3 I06 IO1 98 93 91 88 87
140 I67 I54 14.4 I35 127 I21 II6 I05 98 93 90 85 82 79 78
I50 I63 I50 139 129 122 II5 II0 99 92 87 83 78 75 72. 70
160 I58 I45 134 124 II6 II0 164 93 86 80 77 72 68 65 63
170 I55 I41 129 I20 III I05 99 88 80 75 71 66 63 59 58
180 I51 137 I25 II5 107 100 94 83 76 70 66 61 58 54 53
190 I47 133 121 III 103 96 90 79 72 66 62 57 54 50 48
200 I44 I29 II7 107 99 92 86 75 68 62 58 53 50 46 44
210 I40 I25 II3 103 95 88 83 72 64 59 55 50 46 43 41
220 I37 122 II0 I00 92 85 79 69 61 56 52 47 43 40 38
230 I34 II9 107 97 89 82 76 66 58 53 49 44 41 37 35
240 I31 II6 I04 94 86 79 74 63 56 51 47 42 38 35 33
250 128 II3 IO1 91 83 76 71 61 53 48 44 39 36 32 31
260 125 I IO 98 88 80 74 68 58 51 -46 42 37 34 31 29
270 122 107 95 86 78 72 66 56 49 &t 41 36 32 29 27
280 120 I05 93 83 76 69 64 54 47 42 39 34 31 27 25
290 117 102 90 81 73 67 62 52 46 41 37 32 29 26 24
300 II5 100 88 74 71 65 tXl 51 44- 39 36 31 28 25 23
 TABLE 5D MAXIMUM. PERMlSSlBLE BENDING STRESSES, ok (MPa),
IN EQUAL FLANGE I-BEAMS OR CHANNELS
(Clause 7.2.2)

with jy = 340 MP8. L (2.0rnd di_ e75

_
I I

D/T*
8 IO I2 I4 I6 I8 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 80 100
Ilr,
+

40 217 216 215 214 214 ,213 213 213 212 212 212 2‘12 212 212 212
45 215 214 212 211 211 210 210 209 a8 208 208 208 208 207 207
50 213 211 209 208 207 206 206 205 204 203 203 203 203 202 202
55 211 209 206 205 203 202 201 200 199 198 198 197 197 197 197,
60 209 206 203 201 199 198 197 I95 193 193 192 I91 I91 I91 I90
65 207 203 200 197 I95 193 192 189 188 187 I86 I85 184 I84 184
70 205 201 197 194 I91 189 I87 I84 182 I81 180 178 178 I77 I77
75 203 198 194 I90 187 184 182 178 I 76 174 I73 172 I71 I70 169
80 201 I95 I90 186 183 180 177 I73 170 168 167 I65 I64 163 162
85 199 193 187 183 179 I75 173 168 I64 162 I60 I58 I57 I56 I55
90 I97 I90 184 I79 175 I71 167 162 I58 I56 I54 ISI I50 148 148
95 I95 I87 I81 I75 I71 167 163 I57 I53 I50 148 145 143 142 I41
100 193 I85 I78 172 167 163 I59 I52 147 I44 142 138 137 I35 I34
110 188 180 172 I65 159 I55 I50 142 137 133 I30 I26 124 122 121
I20 184 I75 166 I59 I52 147 142 133 I27 123 120 II6 II3 I10 I09
130 180 170 I61 I53 I46 540 I35 I25 II9 II4 II0 I06 103 100 99
140 177 I65 I56 I47 I40 134 128 II8 III lb6 102 97 94 91 89
I50 I73 I61 I51 142 134 128 122 II2 I04 99 95 89 86 83 81
160 169 I57 146 I37 129 122 I I7 I06 98 92 88 82 79 75 74
I70 I66 I53 142 132 124 II7 III 100 92 E6 82 76 73 69 67
180 162 149 137 128 120 II3 107 95 87 81 77 71 67 63 61
I90 I59 I45 133 124 II5 108 102 9i 82 76 72 66 63 59 56
200 155 I41 130 120 II I I04 98 86 78 72 68 62 58 54 52
210 I52 I38 126 II6 108 100 94 83 74 69 64 58 54 50 48
220 149 I35 123 II3 I04 97 91 79 71 65 61 55 51 47 45
230 I46 132 II9 I09 IO1 94 88 76 68 62 58 52 48 44 42
240 143 128 II6 I06 98 91 85 73 65 59 55 49 45 41 39
250 I41 126 II3 103 95 88 82 70 62 57 52 46 43 38 36
260 138 123 II0 100 92 85 79 68 60 54 50 44 40 36 34
270 I35 120 108 98 89 82 77 65 58 52 48 42 38 33 32
280 I35 II7 I05 95 87 80 74 63 56 50 46 40 36 32 30
290 I30 I15 103 93 84 78 72 61 54 45 44 38 35 31 29
300 128 I I2 lo0 90 82 76 70 59 52 46 42 37 33 29 27
 TABLE SE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE BENDING STRESSES, (I& (MPa).
1N EQUAL FLANGE I-BEAMS OR CHANNELS
(Cluuse 7.2.2)

with/, = 400 MPa. 2 > 20 or ‘367

I I

DIT-C
8 IO 12 14 I6 18 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 80 100
Ilr,
+
40 250 248 247 245 245 244 243 243 242 242 242 241 241 241 241
45 247 244 242 240 239 238 237 236 235 235 239 234 234 233 233
50 244 240 237 234 233 231 230 228 227 227 226 226 225 225 225
55 240 235 232 229 226 224 223 22! 219 218 217 216 216 216 215
60 236, 231 226 223 220 217 216 212 210 209 208 207 206 206 205
65 233 226 221 217 213 210 208 204 202 200 I99 197 I97 I96 I95
70 229 222 216 2iI 20’ 203 201 I% 193 191 I89 I88 187 I86 I85
75 226 217 211 205 200 196 193 I88 I84 182 I80 I78 I77 I75 I75
RO 222 213 206 199 194 190 I86 180 176 I73 171 I68 I67 I66 lb5
85 219 2W 201 194 I88 I83 l7Y 172 I67 164 lb2 I59 I58 I56 I55
90 216 20s !Yh I88 182 177 173 I65 I60 I56 I54 I51 149 147 1’46
95 212 201 191 I83 177 I71 166 I58 I52 149 I46 142 140 138 137
loo 2W 197 I87 178 I71 I65 I60 I51 I45 I41 138 I35 I33 130 129
I IO 203 189 I78 169 lb1 I55 149 I39 I33 I28 I25 121 I I8 115 I I4
120 1% I82 170 Iti I52 I45 140 129 I21 I lb II3 108 I06 I03 IO1
130 I91 I76 I63 I53 I44 137 I31 I19 II2 IO6 I03 98 95 92 90
140 IHJ 169 I56 I46 I37 129 123 III I03 98 94 88 85 82 @n
150 179 I63 I50 139 I30 122 II6 IO4 96 90 86 81 77 74 72
I60 174 I58 I44 I33 124 II6 I09 97 89 83 79 74 70 67 (05
170 169 I52 133 I27 II8 II0 I04 92 83 78 73 68 64 61 59
I hrt I65 14; 134 I:? II3 IO5 97 86 78 72 68 63 59 55 54
1%: rtc i 4.3 129 i :7 IO8 100 94 82 74 68 64 58 55 51 49
3% 156 :38 124 Ii3 104 96 90 78 70 64 60 54 51 47 45
Ii<! ’ 15: I34 I20 IOY 100 J2 86 74 66 60 56 51 47 43 41
220 1 I48 130 110 I05 96 LII: 82 71 63 57 53 47 44 40 38
230 I44 126 II2 IO1 Y: ri 79 67 60 54 50 45 41 37 36
240 ! i41 123 !OY r?l 89 h’ c 76 65 57 52 47 42 39 35 33
250 j 137 II9 I 06 YS II+ W 73 62 54 49 45 40 37 33 31
zbo j I34 I I6 I:)3 Y: X? 76 70 60 52 47 43 38 35 31 29
270 i III II3 I(Y) #Y n! i4 68 57 50 45 41 36 33 29 27
210 ! I?8 I!@ 1;’ fir 76 71 66 55 48 43 39 34 31 27 2b
290 I?5 rti‘ *in r6 76 69 64 53 46 41 38 33 30 26 24
300 i.L ? )tiS 0: id 74 67 62 52 45 40 36 31 28 25 23
.-A.- -._ ._ .._.. .._____.__.__

NATIONAL BUXUDING CODS OF INDIA

 TABLE 5F MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE BENDING STRESSES, ok (MR),
IN EQUAL FLANGE I-BEAMS OR CHANNELS
(Clmur 7.2.2)

with/,=4OOMPa.?_(20mnd ‘I < 67
1 r-

D/T+
8 IO I2 I4 I6 I8 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 80 100
Ilr,
+

40 253 252 250 249 249 248 248 247 247 246 246 246 246 246 246
45 251 248 246 245 244 243 243 242 241 241 240 240 240 240 239
50 248 245 242 240 239 238 237 235 234 234 233’ 233 233 232 232
55 245 241 238 236 234 232 231 229 227 227 226 225 225 225 224
60 242 237 234 231 228 226 225 222 220 219 218 217 217 216 216
65 239 234 229 225 222 220 218 215 212 211 210 209 208 207 207
70 236 230 225 220 217 214 212 207 205 203 202 200 I99 I98 I98
75 233 226 220 215 211 208 205 200 197 I95 I93 191 190 I89 I88
80 230 223 216 210 206 202 199 I93 I89 I86 I85 I82 I81 I80 I79
85 227 219 212 205 200 I% 192 I86 I81 I78 176 174 172 I71 I70
90 225 215 207 201 I95 I90 I86 I79 174 I71 I68 I65 I64 162 I61
95 222 212 203 1% 1% I85 I80 172 I67 I63 I61 I57 I55 I53 I52
100 219 208 I99 I91 I85 I79 I.75 I66 I60 I56 I53 I50 I48 I45 I44
110 213 202 I91 I83 176 169 I64 I54 I48 I43 I40 I35 I33 I30 I29
I20 208 I95 184 I75 167 I60 I54 I44 I36 I31 127 I23 I20 II7 II5
I30 203 I89 177 167 I59 I52 I46 I34 126 I21 II7 Ill I08 I05 I03
140 I98 I83 I71 lb0 I52 144 I38 126 II7 Ill I07 I02 98 95 93
I50 I93 I78 I65 I54 I45 I37 I31 II8 I09 I03 99 93 89 86 84
160 I88 172 159 I48 I39 I31 124 III I02 96 92 8S 82 78 76
170 I83 167 I54 142 I33 I25 II8 I05 96 90 85 79 75 71 69
I80 179 162 149 I37 127 II9 112 99 90 84 79 73 69 65 63
I90 I75 I58 I44 I32 122 II4 I08 94 85 79 74 68 64 60 58
200 I71 I53 I39 I28 Iltl II0 I03 90 81 75 70 63 60 55 53
210 167 149 I35 I23 II4 105 99 86 77 70 66 59 55 51 49
220 I63 I45 131 II9 II0 I02 95 82 73 67 62 56 52 48 45
230 I59 141 1’7 115 I06 98 91 79 70 64 59 53 49 44 42
240 I56 I38 123 II2 I02 94 88 75 67 61 56 50 46 42 39
250 I52 I34 I20 I08 99 91 85 72 64 58 53 47 43 39 37
260 149 I31 II7 I05 96 88 82 70 61 55 51 45 41 37 34
270 I46 I28 II4 I02 93 85 79 67 59 53 49 43 39 35 32
280 I43 I25 I II 99 90 83 77 65 57 51 47 41 37 33 30
290 140 122 IO8 97 88 80 74 63 55 49 45 39 35 31 29
300 I37 II9 I05 94 85 78 72 61 53 47 43 37 33 29 27

FART V I Sl?lLUXWRAL DESIGN-SECTKBN 6 SIXEL VI3

7.2.2.1 In Tables 5A to 5F:
D = overall depth of beam;
d, = depth of web (see 2.2);
I = effective .length of compression.
flange (see 7.6):
r, = radius of gyration of the section
about its axis of minimum strength
(_PJJ axis);
T = mean thickness of the compression
flange, is equal to the area of horizon-
tal portion. of flange divided by
width; and
t = web thickness.
For rolled sections, the mean thickness is that
given in appropriate Indian Standards.
In case of compound girders withcurtailed
flanges, D shall be taken as the overall depth
of the girder at the pointof maximum bending
moment, and Tshall be taken as the effective
thickness of the compression flange and shall
be calculated as:
T = K, X mean thickness of the horizontal
portion of the compression flange at the point
of maximum bending moment. CoefficientKI
is defined in, 7.2.4.
7.2.3 MA X I M U M P E R M I S S I B L E B E N D I N G
C O M P R E S S I V E S TRESS IN B EAMS AND P L A T E
G IRDERS - For beams and plate girders,
bent about the axisof maximum strength (x-x
axis). the maximum bending compressive
stress on the extreme fibre. calculated on, the
effective section shall not exceed, the maxi-
mum permissible bending compressive stresd
uhcin M Pa obtained by the following formula:
.rCh. .rY :
(ItI< = 0.66
[ V;.hY + @I.)” ]li”
where
elastic critical StreSS in bending,
.fi,h =
calculated in accordance with 7.2.4
or by an elastic flexural-torsional
buckling analysis, in MPa;
j;..= yield stress of the steel in M Pa;
and
n 7 a factor assumed as 1.4.
Values of ‘oh as derived from the above for-
mula for someof’the Indian Standard structu-
ral steels are given in Ta.ble 6.
7.23. / TUBES - In tubes, the tensile bending
stress and the compressive bending stress in
extreme fibres shall not exceed the values
given below:
Grade (rhr or Uhf (MPa)
(1) ‘(2)
YSt 22 I37
YSt 25 162
YSt 32 201
W-632
72.4 ELASTIC CRITICAL S.t‘KEss--If an elas-
tic flexural analysis is not carried out, the
elastic critical stress ,J.I, for beams .and plate
girders with /.” smaller than I, shall be calcu-
lated using the following formula:
where
26.5 X 105 MPa
Y’
(~I0
kl = a coefficient to allow for reduction in
thickness or breadth of flanges
between points of effective lateral
restraint and depends on I&, the ratio
of.the total areaof both flanges at the
point of least bending moment to the
corresponding area at thC point of
greatest bending moment between
such points of restraint. Values of k I
for different values of $ are given in
Table 7.
0. T 1
I. r, = as defined in 7.2.2. I.
kz = a coefficient to allow for the inequal-
ity of flanges, and depends on w. the
ratio of the moment of inertia of the
compression flange alone to that of
the sum of the moments, of inertia of
the flanges, each calculated about its
ownaxisparallel to they-yaxisofthe
girder, at the point of maximum
bending moment. Values of k2 for
different values of w are given in
Table 8.
Cl, c2 = respectively the lesser and greater dis-
tances from the section neutralaxic
to the extreme fibres.
r, = moment of inertia of the whole sec-
tion about the.axis lying in thz plane
of bending (v-y axis), and
I, = moment of inertia of the whole sec-
tion about the axis normal to the
plane of bending (r-x axis).
Values of Xand Y are given in Table 9 for
appropriate values of D/T and l/r,.
7.2.4. I Values of fcb shall be increased by 20
percent when T/r is not greater than 2.0 and
dl/t is not greater than I 344/flwhere dl is
asdefined in 7.2.2.1 and 2.2and t the thickness
of web.
NATmNAL.BunDlNocoD~QMDu
 TABLE6 VALUESOFo~CALCULATEDFROtHf,~ FORDIFFERENTVALUESOF f,
(Clause 7.2.3)
All units in MPa.
_.__
220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 -380 400 420 450 480 510 540

.-- ._
20 13 I3 I3 I3 I3 I3 13 I3 13 I3 I3 I3 I3 I3 !3 13 I3
30 I9 I9 I9 I9 I9 I9 I9 I9 I9 I9 I9 19 I9 I9 20 20 20
40 25 25 25 25 25 2S 2S 25 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
50 30 30 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 32 32 32 32 12 32 32 32
60 36 36 36 36 36 37 37 37 37 37 38 38 38 3LI 38 38 38
70 41 41 41 41 42 42 42 43 43 43 43 44 44 44 q 44 44
80 45 46 46 46 47 47 48 48 48 49 49 49 49 so so 50 50
90 so so 51 51 51 52 53 53 54 54 54 5s 55 55 56 56 56
IO0 54 54 55 55 56 57 57 58 59 59 60 60 60 61 61 62 62
110 58 58 59 6060 61 62 63 64 64 65 65 66 66 67 67 67
I20 61 62 63 64 .64 65 67 67 68 69 70 70 71 71 72 72 73
130 65 66 67 67 68 70 71 72 73 74 74 75 76 76 77 73 78
140 68 69 70 71 72 73 75 76 77 78 79 80 80 WI 82 83 04
IS0 71 72 73 74 75 77 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 P9
160 74 75 77 78 79 81 82 84 85 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 Y4
170 77 78 80 81 82 84 86 88 89 91 92 93 94 95 97 98 99
180 79 81 82 84 85 87 89 91 93 94 96 97 98 100 IO1 IO? IO?
190 82 84 85 87 88 90 93 85 97 98 100 IO2 102 IO4 106 IO' IOX
200 84 86 88 89 91 93 96 98 ,100 102 103 IO5 106 tO8 II0 III II\
210 86 88 90 92 93 96 99 IO1 103 IO5 107 I09 110 112 114 II6 Iii
220 89 90 92 94 96 99 !02 I04 106 I09 III II2 II4 II6 II& 120 121
230 90 93 94 96 98 I01 104 107 110 II2 It4 It6 118 120 122 124 I20
240 92 94 97 99 100 104 107 II0 II3 II5 II7 II9 I21 I24 126 128 I30
250 94 96 99 IO1 103 106 II0 II3 II5 II8 120 I22 124 127 130 132 i 14
260 96 98 100 103 105 108 II2 IIS 120 "?I 123 126 128 I31 133 I36 I38
270 97 I00 102 I04 107 III II4 II8 121 124 126 129 I31 134 137 139 142
280 99 IO1 I04 I06 108 II3 II6 I20 123 I26 I29 I!2 134 I37 140 143 I45
290 100 103 105 IO8 II0 II5 I19 122 I26 I29 IJ2 IJS 137 I41 I44 147 149
300 102 I04 107 II0 II2 II6 t2l I25 I2H I31 I35 137 I40 144 147 150 ,153
310 jO3 106 108 III II4 II8 123 127 130 I34 137 I40 I43 147 IS0 IS3 IS6
320 I04 IO7 110 II3 II5 120 I25 129 133 136 I40 I43 146 150 153 IS7 160
330 105 108 III II4 II7 122 126 I31 I35 13h 142 145 148 IS2 IS6 I60 163
340 to6 110 113 II5 II8 123 128 133 137 I41 I44 148 ISI IS5 IS9 163 166
350 108 III 114 II7 120 I25 130 134 13Y 141 147 ISO IS3 IS8 162 166 169
360 109 I12 I15 II8 I21 126 I31 136 141 145 149 IS2 156 161 166 169 172
370 II0 II3 II6 II9 122 128 133 I38 143 14' I51 IS5 IS8 163 I68 172 1.75
380 Ili 114 II7 I20 123 129 135 I40 I44 149 ISJ 157 I60 I66 I70 I74 I78
390 III II5 II8 121 I25 130 136 I41 146 I51 IS5 ISY 163 I68 173 177 181
'400 II2 116 119 122 .I26 I32 I37 143 148 ,152 157 161 I65 170 175 I80 I84
420 II4 II8 121 I24 128 134 I40 I46 ISI I56 160 165 169 I75 I10 185 189
440 II5 119 123 126 130 136 142 148 IS4 159 I64 I69 173 I79 I85 I90 IY5
460 117 I21 124 128 132 138 I45 ISI IS7 162 167 I72 I77 I83 189 194 200
480 II11 122, 126 I30 133 I40 147 153 IS9 I65 170 175 180 187 193 199 204
500 II9 12. / 127 I31 I35 142 IS0 IS5 162 I68 I73 178 183 I90 197 203 209
520 I20 I2 129 133 136 I44 IS1 IS8 I64 170 176 181 I87 194 201 207 213
540 I21 126 130 I34 138' 145 153 If?0 166 172 I78 I84 189' 197 204 211 217
560 122 127 I31 I35 I39 147 154 Ihl 168 I75 ISI IX7 192 200 208 215 221
580 123 128 132 136 I40 I48 156 163 170 I77 183 189 I95 203 211 218 225
600 124 129 133 137 I41 I50 IS7 I65 172 179 I85 192 198 206 II4 222 229
620 125 129 134 138 143 ISI 159 166 174 ISI 187 194 200 209 217 225 232
640 126 130 I35 139 I44 IS2 I60 168 17s I83 189 196 202 211 220 228 235
660 126 I31 136 I40 I45 IS3 I61 169 177 184 I91 198 204 214 222 231 238
680 127 132 136 I41 I45 154 163 I71 178 186 I93 200 207 216 225 234 242
700 128 132 137 142 I46 IS5 I64 172 180 187 I95 202 209 218 228 236 244
720 128 133 138 143 147 156 I65 173 I81 I89 196 204 210 220 230 239 247
740 129 134 139 143 I48 IS7 I66 174 182 I90 I98 205 212 222 232 241 250
fconrim wd)
33'
PART VI STRUCIIIIIAL DESIGN-SECIIGN 6 SIXEL
 TABLE 6 VALUES OF (r* CALCULATED FROM fa+ FOR DIFFERENT VALUES OF f, -Conrd
(Clause 7.2.3)
All unit8 in MR.

h’ 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
/A
t

760 I29 134 I39 I44 149 I58 167 175 I84 192 I99 207 214 224 234 244 253
780 I30 135 I40 145 I49 I59 I68 176 IHS I93 201 208 216 226 236 246 255
800 130 135 140 145 I50 I59 169 177 I86 194 202 210 217 228 238 248 257
850 I31 I37 142 147 I52 161 I71 180 188 i97 205 213 221 232 ‘243 253 263
900 I32 138 I43 148 153 I63 172 I82 IPI 200 208 216 224 236 247 25a 268
950 I33 I38 I44 149 I54 164 174 I83 193 202 211 219 227 240 251 262 273
1000 I34 I39 I45 I50 I55 I65 I75 I85I95 204 213 222 230 243 255 266 277
I 050 I35 I40 I45 ISI I56 167 177 I87 196 206 215 224 233 246 258 270 281
I 100 I35 141 I46 I52 I57 I68 I78 188 I98 207 217 226 235 248 261 273 285
I I50 I36 I41 147 I52 I58 I68 179 I89 199 209 219 228 237 251 263 276 288
1200 I36 142 147 I53 I59 169 I80 I90 200 210 220 230 239 253 266 279 291
I300 13-7 I43 149 I54 I60 I71 182 I92 203 213 223 233 243 257 270 284 297
I400 I38 I44 149 155 161 172 I83 I94 205 215 225 236 246 260 274 288 302
I 500 I39 IU I50 I56 162 173 184 I95 206 270’ 228 238 241 263 768 292 306
1600 I39 I45 I51 157 I63 174 I85 197 208 219 229 240 250 266 281 295 309
I 700 I40 146 I51 157 I63 175 I86 I98 209 220 231 242 252 268 283 298 313
I800 I40 I46 ‘52 I58 I64 176 187 199 210 221 232 243 254 270 285 301 316
I900 I40 I46 I’j2 I58 I64 I76 188 200 211 222 234 245 256 272 287 308 318
2000 I41 I47 I53 I59 I65 177 I89 200 212 223 235 246 257 273 289 305 321
2200 I41 147 I54 I60 I66 178 190 202 213 225 237 248 259 276 292 309 325
2400 142 I48 I54 I60 I66 I79 I91 203 215 226 238 250 261 278 295 312 328
2600 142 I48 I54 I61 167 179 IYI 204 216 227 239 251 263 280 297 314 331
2800 142 149 I55 I61 167 I80 192 204 216 228 240 252 264 282 299 316 333
3000 I43 149 I55 I61 I68 I80 I93 205 217 229 241 253 265 283 300 318 335
3sOO 143 149 I56 162 I68 I81 194 206 218 231 243 255 267 286 303 321 339
4000 I43 I50 I56 I63 169 182 194 207 219 232 244 257 269 287 306 324 342
4%x I44 IS0 I57 I63 169 I82 I95 208 220 233 245 258 270 289 307 3J6 344
5000 I44 I50 IS7 I63 170 I83 I95 208 221 233 246 259 271 290 309 327 346
SSOO IU I51 I57 I63 I70 I83 I96 208 221 234 247 259 272 291 310 328 347
6Ow I44 I51 I57 I64 170 I83 196 209 222 234 247 260 273 291 310 329 ‘348

TABLE 7 VALUES OF k, FOR BEAMS WITH CURTAILED FLANGES

( Clause 7.2.4)
$ I.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.0
kI I.0 I.0 I.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2
NOTE - Flmaer should not be reduced in breadth to give a value of 9 lower than 0.25.

TABLE 8 VALUES OF k, FOR BEAMS WITH UNEQUAL FLANGES

(Clam 7.2.4)
0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.0
;:: 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 -0.2 -0.4 -0.6 -0.8 -1.0

VA NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF lNDl.4

 NOTE --Guidance for calculating elastic buckling
foices may be found in the references listed in Appendix
E.
7 . 2 . 5 B E A M S B E N T A B O U T T H E Axis O F
M I N I M U M S T R E N G T H (P.V AXIS) -The m a x -
imum permissible bending stress in tension oh,
or in compression uhr in beams bent about the
axis of minimum strength shall hot exceed
0.66f,. where/; is the yield ‘sfress of steel.
7.2..6 AN G L E S AND T E E S - T h e b e n d i n g
stress in the leg when loaded with the flange or
table in compression shall not exceed 0.66.L..
When loaded with the leg in compression, the
permissible betiding stress shall be calculated
from 7.2.3 and 7.2.4 with kz = - I.0 and
T = thickness of leg
7.2.7 S TEEL TUBES-In tubes. the tensile
bending stress and compressive bending stress
in the extreme fibres shall not exceed the
values given below:
Grade Oh,, Or Ohr (MPa)
(1). . 0)
YSt 22 137
YS1 25 162
YS1 32 201
in flexure. shall not exceed the value T,.,., given
below:
T\n# = 0.45,/;.
where
Tvrn = maximum permissible shear stress.
and
,/r = yield stress of steel.
7.4.2 AVERAGE S HEAR S TRESS - The aver-
age shear stress in a member calculated on the
cross section of the web (sre 7.4.2.1) shall not
exceed:
a) FOR UNSTIFFE-NED WEBS -- the value T”.
obtained by the formula rv. = 0.4 fy. and
b) FOR s fIFITI:UtlI WEISS the values given
in Tables IOA, IOB and IOC as approp-
riate,Cor yield stress values 250, 340 and
400 M Pa. respectively.
The values rvti for stiffened webs for a
steel whose yield stress is not given in
Tables IO/\, IOH and IOC shall he deter-
mined by using the following formulae,
provided that the average s1rcss rv,, shall
not exceed 0.4ff,.
i) For webs where the distance between
the vertical stiffeners is less than ‘d’

d.Z. zc
i 01
7.3 Bearing S~tws -‘The bearing stress in any
part of a hcam when calculated on the net area
“a = -
of contact shall not exceed the value of 0, c ?
dctcrmined by the following formula:
T 0.41, iI .3 4000 I+‘/2 7 1
ii) For webs where the distance between
\b lirrc .the vertical stiffeners is more than ‘d’

CT P= Ill;IXilTlLlIIl pcrniissihlc hearing stress. f-

and
fy = yield stress of steel.

7.3.l The average bearing stress on the net

projected area of contact shall not exceed the
values given below: where

Grudr Up (MPU) TvIl = maximum’ permissible average shear

(1) (2) stress.
YS1 22 I67 = distance between vertical stiffeners.
YSt 25 I86 = I) FOR VERTICALLY STIFFENED
YSt 32 245 WEBS WITHOUT HORIZONTAL
STIFFENERS --- the clear distance
7.4 Shear Stwsre.!
between flange angles or. where
7.4.1 MA X I M U M S H E A R STRESS - T h e there are no flange angles. the
maximum shear stress in a member having clear distance between flanges.
regard to thedistrihution ofstresses inconfor- ignoring fillets. Where tongue
mity with the elastic behaviour ofthe member plates (see Fig. 6) having a thick-

PART VI STRUCXURAL D E S I G N - S E C T I O N 6 SI’EEL VI,=

 TABLE 9 VALUES OF X AND Y FOR CALCULATINGfd
(Clause 7.2.4)
-
X ,
-
8 . IO I2 I4 I6 I8 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 80 100

-
40 824 2 222 2 006 I 965 I 897 I II49 I 814 I 759 I 728 I 709 I 697 I 683 I 675 I 667 I 663 656
45 : 103 I 856 I 708 1612 I 546 I 499 I 465 I411 I 380 I 362 I 349 I 335 I 327 I 319 I315 309
50 822 1590 1449 1357 1293 1248 1214 II61 II31 III3 II01 1086 1078 1070 1067 060
55 607 I 389 I254 1 I66 I I05 I %I IO28 976 947 929 917 902 894 ,886 883 816
60 437 I 232 I I04 I 020 961 918 886 835 806 788 776 762 754 746 743 736
65 301 I 107 985 904 847 806 775 726 697 679 667 653 645 637 634 627
70 188 I005 889. 811 757 717 687 838 610 592 581 567 559 551 547 541
75 094 920 810 735 682 644 615 567 540 522 511 497 489 481 478 471
80 014 849 743 672 621 584 556 509 482 465 454 440 432 424 421 414
85 945 788 687 618 570 533 506 461 434 417 406 392 385 317 373 367
90 886 735 639 573 526 491 464 420 394 371 366 353 345 337 334 327
95 833 689 597 534 488 454 428 385 360 343 332 319 311 304 300 294
100 187 649 560 499 455 423 398 356 331 314 304 290 283 275 272 265
110 708 582 499 443 402 371 347 307 283 2 6 8 257 244 237 229 226 219
120 644 527 451 398 359 339 308 270 247 232 222 209 202 194 I91 184
130 591 482 411 361 325 298 277 240 218 204 194 IRI I74 I67 163 I57
I40 546 444 379 331 297 271 251 217 195 I81 172 I60 153 I45 142 I35
I50 508 412 3SQ 3n6 274 249 230 197 I77 163 154 142 I35 145 124 II8
I60 474 385 326 284 254 230 212 I81 161 I48 I39 127 121 II3 ‘I IO 104
170 445 360 305. 265 236 214 197 I67 148 135 I26 II5 109 IO2 98 92
180 420 339 286 249 221 200 184 I55 137 I25 I I6 IO5 98 92 88 82
I90 397 320 270 235 20s I88 172 145 127 II5 I07 96 90 83 80 73
200 376 104 256 222 197 177 162 I36 I I9 107 99 89 X3 76 73 66
210 358 288 243 210 I86 I68 I53 I2U II? IO1 93 82 16 70 66 60
220 341 275 231 200 I71 I59 145 lil 105 94 87 71 71 64 61 55
2.30 326 262 220 I91 I69 I52 I38 I I5 99 89 82 72 66 60 56 50
240 312 251 211 lit2 I61 145 132 I09 94 R4 77 67 62 55 S2 46
250 299 241 202 175 I54 I38 I26 I04 90 80 73 64 58 52 49 42
2Ml 288 231 194 I67 148 I33 121, 99 85 76 69 60 55 48 45 39
270 277 222 I86 IhI 142 I27 II6 95 R2 72 66 57 52 46 42 36
280 267 214 I80 155: 137 122 III 91 78 69 63 54 49 43 40 34
290 _ 257 207 173 149 132 IIR 107 88 75 66 60 52 46 41 38 32
300 249 200 I67 144 127 II4 I03 84 72 64 57 49 44 38 35 92
-

ness 01 not less than twice- the
thickness of the web plate are
used, the depth dshall be-taken as
the depth of the girder between the
flanges less the sum of the depths
of the tongue plates or eight times
the sum of the thickness of the
tongue plates, whichever is less.
2) F O R V E R T I C A L L Y S T I F F E N E D
wmb wtTH ~ORIZDNTAL S T I F-
FENERS - as described in 7.7.4.3.
YOI t I -- For the minimum thickness of ucb plates
rnd the design of web stiReners. .FW 7.7.3 and 7.7.4.
NOIF: 2 - The allovahlc s~rck given in Tahlcs
IOA. IOB and IO< apply provided any reduction of the
web cross section is due only 1.0 rivet holes. etc. Whew
large aperturca are cut in the web. a apecal analysis shall
hc made to cnsurc that the maxtmum pcrmissibleaverape
shear strcsscs laid down in thts standard are not exceeded.
NOTE 3 - Compliance with this subclause shall be
deemed to satisfy the requirements of 7.4.1.
7.4.2.1 The crosk sections
. of the web shall be
taken as follows:

the clear distance between the ten- For rolled The depth of the
sion flanges (angles flange plate or l-beam and beam multiplied by
tongue plate) and the horizontal channels web thickness
stiffener. For plate The depth of the
girders web plate multiplied
t = th’e thickness of the web. by its thickness

. -36
NATIONAL IIUIUNNG CODE Oc INDIA
 TABLE IOA PERMISSIBLE AVERAGE SHEAR STRESS sw, IN STIFFENED WEBS OF STEEL WITH
/,=250 MP8
(Clause 7.4.2)
dir STRESS tv, (MPa) FOR DIFFERENT DISTANCES c BETWEEN STIFFENERS

0.3d 0.4d 0.5d O.&i 0.7d 0.8d 0.9d I.Od <Id I.2d 1.3d l.4d I .5d’

90 I00 100 100 I00 I00 100 I00 100 100 100 IO0 MO 100
95 Ii&l 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 9!2
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 99 99 98
105 100 100 100 lo0 100 100 100 100 I00 !I9 98 97 96

110 IO0 100 IO0 I00 IO0 100 I00 100 99 98 % 93 94

115 I00 100 I00 100 100 100 100 I00 98 96 95 94 93
120 100 100 100 I00 100 100 I00 98 96 95 93 92 91
I25 I00 100 I00 100 I00 I00 98 97 95 93 92 91 90

I30 100 I00 I00 100 100 99 97 96 94 92 90 89 88

135 100 loo 100 100 100 98 96 94 92 90 89 8-l 86
140 100 100 .I00 IO0 99 96 95 93 91 89 87 86 85
I50 100 100 I00 100 97 94 92 90 88 86 84 83 81

160 I00 100 I00 98 94 92 89 88 85 83 81 80 78

170 I00 loo 100 96 92 89 87 85 82 80 78 76 75
I80 I00 I00 98 94 90 87 84 82 80 77 75 73 72
I90 100 100 97 92 88 84 82

200 100 100 95 90 86 82 81

210
220
230
100
I00
100
99
98
96
93
91
90
88
86
84
83
81
79
81
80 r
.J
Non-applicable zone.

240 100 95 88 83 77
250 I00 93 86 82 74
260
270
100
99
92
90
85
84
81
81 I-
NOTE - Intermediate values may be obtained by linear interpolation.

7.4.3 S TEEL T UBES - The maximum shear

ir
I 1
stress in a tube calculated by dividing the total
shear by an area equal to half the netcross-
sectional area of the tube shall not exceed the
values given below:
Grade Tvm (MPa)
(1) (2)
YSt 22 88
YSt 25 1-08
YSt 32 132
7.5 Effective Span of Beams - The effective Fig.6 Tongue plates
span of a beam shall be taken as the length
7.6.1 For simply supported beams and
between the centres of the supports, except in
girders where no lateral restraint of the com-
cases where the point of application of the
pression flanges is provided, but where each
reaction is taken as eccentricity to the support,
end of the beam is restrained against torsion,
when it shall be permissible to take the effec-
the effective length ‘I’ of the compression
tive span as the length between the assumed
flanges to be used in 7.2 shall be taken as
points of application of reaction.
follows:
.7.6 Effective Length of Compression Flanges a) With ends of compression I = span

rmnmmmu DUIQN-8EllON 6 m J7
 TABLE 108 PERMISSIBLE AVERAGE SHEAR STRESS t, IN STIFFENED WEBS OF STEEL WITH
/I=340 MPa
(Ckwr 7.1.2)
d/r Sruess rv, (MPa) FOR DIPP~RENT DISTANCLS c BETWEEN SnFFENeRs

’ 0.3d 0.4d O.Jd 0.6d 0.7d O&f 0.9d I.Od I.ld I.2d l.3d l,4d l.5d-

75 I36 I36 1% I% I36 1% 1% I% 136 I36 I36 I36 I36

80 I36 I36 I% I36 I36 I% I36 I36 I36 I36 I36 I36 I36
85 1% I% I% I36 136 1% 1% I36 I36 I36 I36 I34 I33

90 136 f’36 I% I36 I36 I36 1% I36 I36 I35 133, I32 I31
95 I36 I36 I% I% I36 I36 I36 I36 135 I33 I31 129 128
100 I36 I% I% I36 I36 I36 I36 I35 132 130 128 127 126
105 I36 I36 I% I36 I36 I36 I35 133 I30 128 126 I24 I23

110 1% I36 I% I36 I36 I35 I33 I31 128 126 124 122 120
II5 I36 I36 1% I36 I36 I33 I31 129 126 123 121 I I9 II8
I20 I36 l.36 1% I36 I35 I31 129 127 124 121 II9 II7 II5
125 I36 I36 1% 136 I33 I29 127 125 I21 I I9 II6 II4 II3

I30 1% I36 I36 I35 I31 127 I25 122 I19 116 I I4 II2 II0
I35 1% I36 I36 I34 I29 126 123 120 II7 I I4 III I09 IO8
I40 I36 lj6 I36 132 127 I24 I21 II8 I I5 II2 I09 107 IO5
I50 1% I36 I35 129 124 120 II7 II4 I IO 107 I04 102 100

I60 I36 136 132 126 I20 I I6 II3 II0 106 102 99 9i 95
170 I36 I36 129 I23 II7 II2 I09 106 IO1 98 95 92 90
I80 I36 I35 127 I I9 II3 108 IO5 102 97 93 90 87 84

%
I90 I36 I33 124 II6 II0 I05 100

200 136 I30 121 II3 106 IO1 96

210 I36 128 II8 110 I03 97
226 I36 126 II6 107 99 93 r-

r-J-
2% 135 I23 II3 103 Non-applicable zone.

240 I34 I21 II0 100 92

250 I32 II9 107 97 89
266 1% II6 I04 94
270 !28 II4 102 91

NOTE - Intermediate values may be obtained by linear interpolation.

tlanges unrestrained against
lateral bending (that is, free
to rotate in plan at the
bearings)
b) With ends of compression I = 0.85 X
flanges partially restrained span
agains’t lateral bending
(that is, not free to rotate in
plan at the bearings)
d With ends of compression I = 0.7X
flanges firlly restraGed span
against lateral bending
(that is, not free to rotate in
plan at the bearings)
Restraint against torsioir can be provided by:
i) web or flange cleats, or
ii) bearing stiffeners acting in conjunction
with the bearing of the beam. or
iii) lateral end frames or other external sup-
ports to the ends of the compression
flanges (see Note below), or
iv) their being built into walls.
Where the ends 01 the beam are not restrained
again9 toCon. or where the load is applied to
the compression flange and both the load and
flange are free to move laterally, the above
values of the effective length shall be increased
by 20 percent.
NOTE-The end restraint elcmcn~ shall be capa-
ble of safely resisting, in addition IO wind and other
applied external forces, a horiromal force acting at
the bearing in a direction normal IO the compression
flange of the beam at the level of the centroid of the
flange and having a value equal to not less than 2.5
nereent of the maximum force occurring in the flange.

v&P N ATIONAL BUlLDIN CODE 4YF INDIA

 TABLE IOC PERMISSIBLE AVERAGE SHEAR STRESS r, IN STIFFENED WEBS OF STEEL WITH
j,=400 MPa
(C/m&w 7.4.2)
dir S TRESS 7”. (MPa) FOR D IFFERENT D ISTANCES c BETWEEN S TIFFENERS

0.3d 0.4d 0.5d 0.6d 0.7d 0.8d 0.9d I.Od t.ld I.2d I .3d l.4d 1%.

70 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 160 I60 I60 I60 160’ I60 I60 160
75 t60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I59
80 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I59 I57 I56
85 I60 I60 I60 160 I60 I60 160, I60 I60 I58 I56 154 I52

90 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I57 15s I52 I51 149
95 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I59 I57 I54 I52 149 147 I46
100 160 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I57 I55 I51 I49 I46 I44 I43
105 I60 I60 I60 I60 I60 I57 I54 I52 149 I46 I43 I41 I39

II0 I60 I60 I60 I60 I59 155’ I52 149 I46 I43 I40 I38 136
II5 I60 I60 I60 I60 I56 I52 149 147 I43 I40 I37 I35 I33
120 I60 I60 I60 I59 I54 I50 147 I44 I40 I37 I34 I32 129
125 160 I60 I60 I57 I52 147 I44 I41 I37 I34 I31 128 I26

I30 160 160 I60 I55 I50 I45 I41 I39 I34 I31 128 I25 I23
I35 I60 I60 160 I53 147 I43 I39 I36 I32 128 I25 122 I20
I40 I60 I60 I58 I51 I45 I40 I36 I33 I29 I25 122 II9 II6
IS0 I60 I60 I55 147 I41 I35 I31 I28 I23 II9 II5 II2 110

160 I60 I60 ISI I43 I36 I30 126 I23 II7 II3 I09 106 I03
170 160 I58 148 I39 I32 126 I21 II7 II2 107 IO3 100 97
180 !60 I55 I44 I35 127 I21 II6 II2 IO6 IO1 97 93 90
190 I60 I52 I40 I31 I23 II6 Ill

200 160 149 I37 I27 II8 Ill I06 I

210 I60 I46 I33 I23 II4 I06
220 I57 I43 I30 II9 I09 IO1
230 I55 I40 126 II4 IO5 Non-applicable zone.

240 I53 137 I23 II0 100

?-
250
260
270
ISI
148
146
I34
131
128
I I9
I I6
112
I06
102
98 rl 96

NOTE - Intermediate values may be obtained by linear interpolation.

7.6.2 For beams which are provided with cl Built-in at the support. I = 0.5 L.
restrained against lateral
members giving effective lateral restraint to
deflection and torsion at
the compression flange at intervals along the
the free end (see Fig. 7B)
span, in addition to the end torsional restraint
required in 7.6.1 the effecitve length of the 4 Continuous at the support, I= 3L
unrestrained against torsion
compression flange shall be taken as the maxi-
at the support and free at
mum distance, centte-to-centre, of the res-
traint members. the end (see Fig.. 7C)
e) Continuous at the sup- I= 2 L
7.6.3 For cantilever beams of projecting port, with partial restraint
length ‘L’the effective length to be used in 7.2 against torsion of the
shall be taken as follows:
support and free at the end
a) Built-in at the support, I = 0.85 L (see Fig. 7D)
free at the end t) Continuous at the support. I= L
b) Built-in at the support, I = 0.75 L restrained against .torsion
restrained against torsion at the support and free at
at the end by continuous the end (Jp4 Fig. 7E)
construction (see Fig. 7A) L = length of cantilever.

I’ART V i SIllUCNML DESIGN-SUXION (muI. VI439

 Fig, 7A Cantilever Built-in at Support, Restrained Against Torsion at the End

FACE BEAMS

Fig. 78 Cantilever Built-in at Support, Restrained Laterally at the End

,s* NMIONAL BUILDIN CODI OF INDlA

 Fig. 7C Cantilever L.1 Continuous at the Fig. 70 Cantilever L.3 Continuous at the
Support, Unrestrained Against Torsion at Support, Partially Restrained Against
the Support and Unrestrained at the End Torsion at the Support and Unrestrained at
the End

TIONS
At INTERSECTIONS

Fig. 7E Cantilever Span Continuous at the Support. Fully Restrained Against Torsion
at the Support and Unrestrained at the Free End

If there is a degree of fixity at the free end, the tion, the beam shall be deemed to be effec-
effective length shall be multiplied by: tively restrained laterally if the frictional or
0.5 positive connection of the slab to the beam is
in (b) and (c) above, and by capable of resisting a lateral force of 2.5 per-
0.85 cent of the maximum force in the compression
0.15 flange of the beam, considered as distributed
in (d), (e) and (f) above.
uniformly alohg the flange. Furthermore, the
0.85
slab construction shall be capable of resisting
7.6.4 Where beams support slab construc- this lateral force in flexure and shear.

PART Vi STRUCTURAL DESIGN-SECTION 6 BFEEL vudl

7.6.5 For beams which are provided w i t h
members giving effective lateral restraint of
the compression flange at intervals along the
span, the effective lateral restraint shall be
capable of resisting a force of 2.5 percent of
the maximum force in the compression flange
taken as divided equally between the number
of points at which the restraint members
occur.
7.6.6 In a series of such beams, with solid
webs, which are connected together by the
same system of restraint members, the sum of
the restraining forces required shall be taken
as 2 percent of the maximum flange force in
one beam only.
7.6.6.1 In the case of a series of latticed
beams, girders or roof trusses which are
connected together by the same system of
restrain! meqbers, the sum of the restraining
forces required shall be taken as 2.5 percent of
the madimum force in the compression flange
plus 1.25 percent of this force for every
member of the series other than the first up to
a maximum total of 7.5 percent.
7.7 Design of Beams and Plate. tiirders nirh
Solid Webs
7.7.1 SEC NAL P ROPERTIES - Solid web
girders sht ‘ld preferably be proportioned on
the basis of the moment of inertia of the gross
cross section with the neutral axis taken at the
centroid of that section, but it shall be
permissible to use the net moment of inertia.
In arriving at the maximum flexural stresses,
the stresses calculated on the basis of the gross
moment of inertia shall be increased in the
ratio of gross area to effective area of the
flange section. For this purpose the flange
sectional area in riveted or bolted
construction shall be taken to be that of the
flange plate, flange angles and the portion of
the web and side plates (if any) between the
flange angles; in welded construction the
flange sectional area shall be taken to be that
qf the flange plates plus that of the tongue
plates (if any) up to a limit of eight times their
thickness, which shall be not less than twice
the thickness of the web.
7.7. I.1 The effective sectional area of
compression flanges shall be the gross area
with deductions for excessive width of plates
as specified for compression members (see
452.1 and 4.5.2.2) and for open holes
w-P2
(Including holes for pins and black bolts)
occurring in a plane perpendicular to the
direction of stress at the section being
considered (see 4.6).
The effectiv: sectional area of tension
flanges shall be the gross sectional area with
deductions for holes as specified in4.5.2. I and
4.6 of this Code.
The effective sectional area for parts in
shear shall be taken as specified in 7.7.3.4.
7.7.2 FLANGES
7.7.2.1 In riveted or bolted construction.
flange angles shall form as large a part of the
area of the flange as practicable (preferably
not less than one-third) and the number of
flange plates shall be kept to a minimum:
4 In exfiosed situations where flange plates
are used, at least one plate of the top
flange shall extend the full length of the
girder. unless the top edge of the web is
machined flush with the flange angles.
Where two or more flange plates are used
on the one flange, tacking rivets shall be
provided, if necessary. to comply with the
requirements of 9.10.2 and 9.10.3.
b) Each flange plate shall be extended
beyond its theoretical cut-off point. and
the extension shall contain sufficient
rivets or welds to deve!op in the plate the
load calculated for the bending moment
on the girder section (taken to include the
curtailed plate) at the theoretical cut-off
point.
cl The outstand of flange plates, that is the
projection beyond the outer line of
connections to flange angles. channel or
joist flanges. or. in the case of welded
constructions, their projection beyond
the face of the web or tongue plate, shall
not exceed the values given in 4.5.i.
d) In the case of box girders, the thickness of
any plate. or the aggregate thickness of
two or more plates when these plates are
tacked together to form the flange, shall
satisfy the requirements given in 4.5.2.
7.7.2.2 FLANGE S P L I C E S - Flange joints
preferably should not be located at points of
maximum stress. Where splice plates are used,
their area shall be not less than 5 percent in
excess of the area of the flange clement
spliced; their centre of gravity shall coincide.
NATIOSAL B U I L D I N G COD6 OF ISDIA
as nearly as possible, with that of the element
spliced. There shall be enough rivets or welds
on each side of the splice to develop the load in
the element splices plus 5 percent but ifi no
case should the strength developed be less
than 50 percent of the effective strength ofthe
material spliced. In welded construction,
flange plates shall be joined by complete
penetration butt welds, wherever possible.
These butt welds shall develop the full
strength of the plates.
7.7.2.3 CONNECTION OF FLANGES TO WEB -
The flanges of plate girders shall be connected
to the web by sufficient rivets, bolts or welds
to transmit the maximum horizontal shear
force resulting from the bending moments in
the girder, combined with any vertical loads
which are directly applied to the flange.
7.7.2.4 DlSPERSlON OF LOAD THROUGH
FLANGE TO WEB - Where a load is directly
applied to a top flange, it shall be considered
as dispersed uniformly at an angle of 30
degrees to, the horizontal.
7.7.3 W EB P LATES
7.7.3.1 MINlhlllM THI<‘KNtSS - - - T h e
thickness of the web plate shall be not less
than the following:
a) For unstiffened webs: the grrater of
__dl dXYX
a n d .dlG_
816 1344
but not less than _!!_
85
where
dl = depth of web as delined in 2.2, and
TVu, Sa[ I= calculated average stress in the web
due to shear force.
b) For vertically stii‘fened webs: the greater
of
I! 180 of the smallest clear panel
dimension
and dlfi but not less than __$_
3 200 200
C) For webs stiffened both veitically and
horizontally with a horizontal stiffener at
a distance from the compression flange
equal to 2/ 5 of the distance from the com-
I’ART vl SI’RUCI-URAL DFSIGN-SECXION 6 STEEL
pression flange to the neutral axis: t h e
greater of
I/ 180 of the smaller dimension in each
panel,
and _!!?_??a but not less than d2
4000 250
d) When there is also a horizontal stiffener
at the neutral axis of the girder: the
greater of
I/ 180 of the smaller dimension in each
panel,
and d2JX but not less than dz
6 400 400
In (b), (c) and (d) above, d2 is twice the clear
distance from the compression flange angles.
or plate, or tongue plate to the neurral axis.
In the case of welded crane gantry plate
girders intended for carrying cranes with a
lifting load of 15 tonnes or more, the thickness
of web plate shall be not less than 8 mm.
The minimum thickness of web plates for
different yields stress values are given in Table
11 for information.
NOTE-In no case shall the greater clear dimen-
sion of a web panel exceed 270 I, nor the lesser clear
dimension of the same panel exceeo IHO I, where I 1s
the thickness of the web plate.
7 . 7 . 3 . 2 R I V E T E D C O N S T R U C T I O N -~ F o r
girders in exposed situations and which do not
have ilange plates for their-entire length, the
top edge of the web plateshall be flush with or
above the angles, as specified by the engineer,
and the bottom edge of the web plate shall be
flush with or set back from the angles. as
specified by the engineer.
7.7.3.3 W E LD ED CONS I‘KI!CTION -- The gap
between the web plates and flange plates shall
be kept to a minimum, and for fillet welds
shall not exceed I mm at any point before
welding.
7.7.3.4 EFFECTIVE SECTIONAL AREA
a) WEB OF PLATE GIRDER - The effective
cross-sectional area shall be taken as the
full depth of the web plate multiplied by
the thickness.
vI-,43
 ---
TABLE II MINIMUM THICKNESS OF WEB
(Clause 7.7.J.I)
Mlmmum Thickness of Web fw Yield Suess/, (in MPa) of
/ h
-3

&- 220 _-__-- 1 , 230 d, 240 d, 250 ;r, 260 JI 280 do 300 ____ d, 320 d, 340 dx 360 d, 380 d, 400 d, 420 d, 450 d, 480 d, 510 d, 540 d,
-__--_-_,--
t 344 US 85 85 85 83 80 78 75 73 71 69 67 66 6361 60 58

c1.K
L-L- - A
cl: _
cl. - J? - dz -
d? dz
_
dz
-
dz
_
d> cl1 d: dz dz d: dl dl d:
--__--
3 ml 200 200 200 200 I98 191. 185 179 174 169 164 160 156 ISI 146 142 I38

cl: J: d> d: cl:

c/:v%;___-~_-_-__----_- d> d> d2 d* dz d: d: dz d> d, dz dz
4 000 250 250 250 250 248 239 231 224 217 211 205 200 195 I89 I83 177’ 172

cl*v%; ~lr $1~ d: t/z d, d, d: dz d: d> d! d: d? dz dz d?

_ _:_%.__---____------
6 400 4OU 400 400 400 396 382 3 7 0 358 348 338 328 320 312 302 292 284 276

NOII Where webs arc varied in thickntx m the plates and their fastenings shall be carried
depth of rhc ,ectlorl hk the USC 01 tongue pl;ctcs or the beyond the-points at which they become theo-
like. or uhrrc the pruportion of Ihc ucb included in
retically necessary.
the flange arca I\ 25 p e r c e n t or more of lhr otrrall
d e p t h . t h e above approxtmailon IS nol pcrmlbslhlc 7 . 7 . 4 I NT E R M E D I A T E W E B S T I F F E NE R S FOR
and the maxtmum shear stress shall bc compuicd.
P LATE G IRDERS

b) KOI.1.F.D BEAMS AND CIIANXELS -- T h e

2.7.4.1 GEN E R A L - When the thickness of
effective cross-sectional area for shear
the web is less than the limits specified in
shall bc taken as the lull depth of the
7.7.3.1 (a) vertical stiffeners shall be provided
beam or channel multiplied by its web
throughout the length of the girder. When the
thickness. For other sections the mahi-
thickness of the web is less than the limits
mum shear stress shall be computed from
specified in 7.7.3. I (b) horizontal stiffeners
the whole area of the cross section. having
shall be provided in addition to the vertical
regard to the actual distribution of shear
stiffeners.
slress.
In no case shall the greater unsupported
c) Webs which have openings larger than clear dimension of a web panel exceed 270 I
those normally used for rl\c’ts or other nor the lesser unsupcrted clear dimension of
fawnlr,gs r e q u i r e special anal!Gs t o the same panel exceed I80 I. where I is the
cnsurc that the prrrnissibk btrc’ss ;l\ \pc’ci- thickness of the web plate.
fied 111 this Standard art’ not cxcecdcd
7.7.4.2 VERTICAL STIFFENERS - Where ver-
7.7.3.5 SPLIC‘CS IS WEBS -- S p l i c e s i n t h e tical stiffeners are required, they shall be pro-
webs of the plate girders and rolled sections vided throughout the Length of the girder at a
shall be Jesrgnrd to resist the shears and distance apart not greater than I.5 d and not
moments iit the spliced section. less than O-33 d, where d is the depth as defined
in 7.4.2 (definition I). Where horizontal stif-
In riveted con\tructlon, splices plates shall feners are provided d in mm shall be taken as
be provided on each side of the web. In welded the clear distance between the horizontal stif-
constructton. web splices shall preferably be fener and the tension flange (farthest flange)
made with complete penetration butt welds. ignoring fillets. These vertical stiffeners shall
7.7.3.6 Where additional plates are required be designed so that .I is not less than
to augment the strength of the web, they shall l.5x &Xl’
be placed on each side of the web and shall be (‘1

equal in thickness. The proportion of shear where

force, assumed to be resisted by these plates I = the moment of inertia of a pair of
shall be limited by the amount of horizontal stiffeners about the centre of the web,
shear which they can transmit to the flanges or a single stiffeners about the face of
through their fastenings, and such reinforcing the web,

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 f = the minimum required thickness of
the web, and
c = the maximum permitted clear dis-
tance between vertical stiffener. for
thickness r.
NOTE-H the thickness ofthe web is made greater, or
the-pacing of stiffeners made smaller than that required
by the standard, the moment of inertia of the stiffener
need not be correspondingly increased.
Intermediate vertical stiffeners may be
joggled and may be single or in pairs placed
one on each side of the web. Where single
stiffeners are used, they should preferably be
placed alternatively on opposite sides of the
web. The stiffeners shall extend from flange to
flange, bpt need not have the.en& fitted to
provide a tight bearing on the flange.
7.7.4.3 HORIZONTAL STIFFENERS - Where
horizontal stiffeners are used in addition to
vertical stiffeners, they shall be as follows:
One horizontal stiffener shall be placed
on the web at a distnace from the com-
pression flange equal to 215 of the dis-
tance from the compression ,flange to the
neutral axis when the thickness of the web
is less than the limits specified in 7.7.3.1
(b). This stiffener shall be designed so that
I is not less than 4c.P where land t are as
defined in 7.7.4.2 and c is the actual dis-
tance between the vertical stiffeners;
b) A second holirontal stiffener (single or
doublej &all be placed at the neutral axis
01 rhe girder when the thickness of the
web is less than the limit specified in
7.7.3. I (c). This stiffener shall be designed
so that / is not less than dz. 13 where dz also
in mm, /and I are as defined in 7.7.4.2 and
d2 is as defined in 7.7.3.1;
c) Horizontal web stiffener shall extend
beiween vertical stiffeners but need not be
continuous over them; and
4 Horizontal stiffeners may be in pairs
arranged on each side of the web, or
single.
7.7.4.4 OUTSTAND OF STIFFENERS - Unless
the outer edge of each stiffener is continuously
stiffened, the outstand of all stiffeners
from the web shall be not more than
256.r for sections and 12 f for flats where r
L/z
is the thickness of the section or flat.
P A R T VI SI’RUCI~IRAL DESIGN--sTcTK)N 6 Sl’EEL
7.7.4.5 EXTERNAL FORCES ON INTERME-
DIATE STIFFENERS - When vertical interme-
diate stiffeners are subjected to bending
rnoments and shears due to eccentricity of
vertical loads, or the action of transverse for-
ces, the moment of inertia of the stiffeners
given in 7.7.4.2 shall be increased as shown
b e l o w :
a) Bending moment on stiffener due to
eccentricity of vertical loading with
respect to the vertical axis of the web:
Increase of I = ’ 5o MD2 cm4.. and
Et
b) Lateral loading on stiffener:
Increase of I = o’3 vD3 cm*
Et
where
M = the applied bending moment
kNm;
D = overall depth of girder; in mm;
E = Young’s modulus, 2 X IO5 MPa;
r = thickness of web, mm; and
V = the transverse force in kN to be
taken by the stiffener and deemed to
be applied at the compression flange
of the girder.
7.7.4.6 CONNECTIONS OF 1NTERMEDlATE
STIFFENERS TO WEB - Intermediate vertical
and horizontal stiffeners not subjected to
external loads shall be connected to the web
by rivets or welds, so as to withstand a shear-
ing force, between each component of the stif-
fener .and the web of not less than
‘% kN/m
h
where
r = the web thickness in mm, and
h = the outstand of stiffener in mm.
For stiffeners subjected to external loads. the
shear between the web and stiffeners due to
these loads shall be added io the above values.
7.7.5 L OAD B EARING W EB S T I F F E N E R S
7.7.5.1 ALL SECTIONS - For any section,
load bearing stiffeners shall be provided at
points of concentrated load (including points
of support) where the concentrated load or
reaction exceeds the value of
amt. B
where
oa = the maximum permissible axial stress
for columns as given under 6. / for a
slenderness ratio
$6
I= web thickness;
B = the length of the stiff portion of the
bearing plus the additional length
given by dispersion at 45” to the level
of the neutral axis, plus the thickness
of the scatin; angle, if any. The stiff
portion of a bearing is that length
which cannot deform appreciably in
bending and shall not be taken as
greater than the depth of beam for
simply supported beams and the full
depth of the beams continuous over a
bearing;; and
d, = clear depth of web between root
fille1.s.
Load bearing stiffeners shall be symmetrical
about the web, where possible.
7.7.5.2 PLATE GIRDERS --~ In addition to the
requirements of 7.7.5.1, load bearing stiffness
shall be provided also at the supports H here
, plate. shall be not less than.
either:
a ) t h e w e b i s overstressed in shear [SCV
7.7.3.l (a)], or
b) the web is otherwise overstressed at
support or at the web connection.
7.7.5.3 DESIGN O F t.OAO. BE.ARING
STIFFENERS
a) Load bearing stiffeners shall be designed
as columns assuming the section to con-
sist of the pair of stiffeners together with a
length of web on each side of the crntre
line of the stiffeners and equal. where
available. to 20 times the web thickness.
The radius of gyration shall be taken
about the axis parallel to the web of the
beam or girder. and the working stress
shall be in accordance with the approp-
riate allowable value for a compression
member assuming an effective length
equal to 0.7 ofthe length of the stiffeners;
b) The outstanding lggs of each pair of stif-
feners shall be so proportioned that the
bearing stress on that part of their area
“k646
clear of the root of the flange or flange
angles or clear of the welds does not
exceed the bearing stress specified in 7.3;
cl Stiffeners shall be symmetrical about the.
web, where possible and at points of sup-
port shall project as nearly as practicable
to the outer edges of the flanges;
4 Load bearing stiffeners shall be provided
with sufficient rivets or welds to transmit
to the web the whole of the concentrated
load;
e) The ends of load bearing stiffeners shall
be fitted to provide a tight and uniform
bearing upon the loaded flange unles>
welds or rivets designed to transmit the
full reaction or load arc provided between
the flange and stiffener. At points of SUP-
port this requirement shall apply at both
flanges;
Bearing stiffeners shall not be joggled and
shall be solidly packed throughout; and
For plate girders, where load bearingstif-
feners at supports are the sole means 01
providing restraint against torsion (SCB
7.6.4) the moment of inertia, I. of the
stiffener about the centre line af thz web
DzX R
250 w
where
D = overall depth of the girder,
T = maximum thickness of compression
flange,
R = reaction of the beam at the support,
and
W = total load on the girder between
supports.
In addition, the bases of the stiffeners in
conjunction with the bearing of thegirder shall
be capable of resisting a moment due to
the horizontal force specified in the Note
under 7.6. I.
7.7.5.4 STIFFENERS FOR TUBES
a) Where the tubular steel beam rests on
abutment or other supporting member, it
shall be provided with a shoe adequate to
transmit the load to the abutment and to
stiffen the.end of the tube.
NATIONAL IUILDING COD1 DF INDIA
 b) Where a concentrated load is applied to a
tubular member transverse to its length or
the effect of load concentration is given
by the intersection of triangular truss
members. consideration shall be given to
the local stresses set upand the rnethod of
application of the load, and stiffening
shall be provided as necessary IO prevent
the local stresses from being cxc,essive.
The increase in the intensity oflocal bend-
.ing stresses caused by concentrated loads
is particularly marked if either thcdiame-
ter ofconnected member or the connected
length of a gusset or the like is small in
relation to the diameter of the tubular
member to which it is connected.
7.8 Box Gir&rs The design and detailing
.
of box girders shall be such as to give full
advantage of its higher load carrying capacity.
The diaphragms and horizontal stiffeners
should conform to 7.7.3 and 7.7.4.
7.8. I All diaphragms shall be connected such
as to transfer the resultant shears to the web
and flanges.
7.8.2 Where the concentrated or moving load
does not come directly on top of the web the
local effect shall be considered for the design
of flanges and the diaphragms.
7.9 Purlins
7.9.1 All purlins shall be designed in accor-
dance with the requirements for uncased
beams ( see 7.2.1 and Table I);and the limita-
tions of bending stress based on lateral insta-
bility of the compression flange and the
limiting deflection specified under 4.13 may
be waived for the design of purlins. The maxi-
mum fibre stress shall not exceed the values
specified in 7.2. I except as provided under 4.9
for increase of stress. The calculated deflec-
tions should not exceed those permitted for
the type of roof cladding used; In calculating
the bending moment advantage may be taken
of the continuity of the purlin over supports.
The bending stresses about the two axes
should be determined separately and checked
in accordance with 8.1.1. Open web purlins
shall be designed as trusses.
7.9.2 ANGLE PURLINS OF STEEL CO N F O R M-
ING ‘ro GRADES FE 4104). FE 410-S OR F E
4 1 0 - W A N D SLOVES NOT E X C E E D I N G 300
Prrcti - As an alternate to thegeneraldesign
PART VI SlWJCl’URAL DESIGN-SEfXKN’i 6 STEEL
procedure given in 7.9. I angle purlins of roofs
with slopes not exceeding 30 degrees may be
designed, if the following requirements which
are based on a minimum imposed load of0.75
kN/ m2 are fulfilled:
a) The width of leg or thedepth of the purlin
in the plane appropriate to the incidence
of the maximum load or maximum com-
ponent of the load is not less than L/45;
The width of the other leg or width of the
purlin is not less than f./60;
4 The maximum bending moment in a pur-
lin may be tak& as WL/ IO where W is the
total distributed load on the purlin
including wind load. The loads shall be
assumed as acting normal to the roof in
which case the bending about the minor
axis may be neglected. L shall be taken as
distance centre-to-centre of the rafters or
other supports of the purlins; and
4 Under the bending moment calculated as
in (a) abo?‘e, the maximum fibre stress
shall not exceed the appropriate value of
uhC or bbr given in 7.2 except as provided
under 4.9 for increase of stresses. The
calculated deflection should not exceed
those permitted for the type of cladding
used.
7. IO Side and End Sheering Kails - - Side and
end sheeting rails shall be.designed for wind
pressures and vertical loads, if any; and the
requirements of, as regards limiting deflection
and lateral stability of beams, the same provi-
sions as given in 7.9.1 shall apply.
8. COMBINED STRESSES
8.1 Combination of Direct Stresses
8.1.1 COMBINED A XIAL C OMPRESSION A N D
B ENDING - Members subjected to axial com-
pression and bending shall be proportioned to
satisfy the following requirements:
Oar. cd. Cmx.~&x. cd.
a) -+
+
cmy. U bcyxd. I 1.0
Rlc,
J
cd.
I- - aav
.0.60,c,
However. if the satio _?C!!_ is less than
out
d7
0.15, the following expression may be used in
lieu of the above:
oar. cd onrx. co/. m-Y. cd < , o
= slenderness ratio in the plane of
----+ -----_++_.
aoc ohrx ObCY bending
The value of Ohcx and ahry to be used in the x,y = represent x-x and y-y planes
above formulae shall each be lesser of the cnl = a coefficient whose value shall be
values of the maximum permissible stresses taken as fo!lows:
ah< given in 7 for bending about the approp- 4 For members in frames where side sway is
riate axis. not prevented:
b) At a support and using the values ahcx and C,,, = 0.85
at,<” at the support: b) For members in frames where side sway is
prevented and not subject to transverse
a.,_, co/ ohcr. rol obey. cd < I o
loading between their supports in the
----_+__.
0.60_/; + Ohs-x Obey plane of bending:
For an encased strut where an allowance is C, = 0.6 - 0.4 /? L 0.4
made for the force carried by the concrete in N OTE I - p is the ratio of smaller to the larger
accordance with I/. 1.1. the ratio of alu. ca, shall moments at the ends of that portion ofthe unbraced

00 member in the plane of bending under

be replaced by the ratio of the calculated axial consideration.
force on the strut to the maximum permissible NOTE 2 -- p is positive when the member is bent in
axial force determined as per II. 1.2. reverse curvature and negative when it is bent in
8.1.2 CO M B I N E D A XIAL T E N S I O N A N D single curvature.
B E N D I N G ~- A member subjected to both c) For members in frames where side sway is
axiai tension and bending shall be propor- prevented in the plane of loading and sub-
tioned so that the following condition is jected to transverse loading between their
satisfied: supports; the value of C, may be deter
oar. ‘01 ohrx. c d Ubry. cd < I mined by rational analysis. In the absence
------_+-_ - -
of such analysis, the following values may
0.60 00, 0.66 Ob,x + 0.66 Obfy
be used:
8.1.3 S YMBOLS -- The symbols used in8.1.i
For members whose ends are restrained
and 8.1.2 shall have the following meaning:
against rotation
UPC, co/ = calculated average axial com- C, = 0.85
pressive stress For members whose ends are unres-
an. rol = calculated average axial tensile trained against rotation
stress c, = 1.00
ob<. cd = calculated bending compressive
8.1.4 B ENDINGAND S HEAR - lrrespectiveof
stress in extreme fibre
any increase in the permissible stressspeGified
Obr. <al = calculated bending tensile stress in 4.9, the equivalent stress ur, rrr,., due to co-
in extreme fibre existent bending (tension or compression)and
oar = permissible axial compressive shear stresses obtained from the formula
stress in the member subject to given in 8.1.4. I shall not exceed the value.
axial compressive load only
(I( = 0.9j;
aor = permissible axial tensile stress in
the member subject to axial ten- where
sile load only
or = maximum permissible equivalent
Obr = permissible bending compressive stress.
stress in extreme fibre
Obr = permissible, bending tensile stress 8.1.4. I The equivaknt stress (I~, ra~. is obtained
in extreme fibre from the following formula:

fee
= elastic critical stress in com- at, Cd = Obt2, M. + 3Tvm2, Cd. or
pression = ,, Obc.2 , Cd. + 3r”,‘, Cal*

VI.648 NATIONAL BUILDINQ CODll Op INDIA

8.1.5 COMBINED, BEARING. BENDP~G AND stresses shall not exceed the values given
S HEAR S TRESSES - Where a bearing stress is below:
combined with tensile or compressive, bend-
ing and shear stresses under the most unfa- Grade a (MFa)
vourable condition of loading, the eqdivalent YSt 22 186
stress uI, c,,/. obtained from the following for- ust 25 224
mulae, shall not exceed (Ye. = 0.9& YSt 32 284

9. CONNECTIONS
9.0 General - As much of the work of fabri-
cation as is reasonably practicable shall be

, up2, ad. +
completed in the shops where the steel work is
fabricated.

J
2
or. co/ = Ubc cd. +

Ubc. cd. 2 +3 Tvm .? , cd

up, cd 9.1 Rivets, Close Tolerance Bolts, High
Strength Friction Grip Faireners. Black Bolts
8.1.6 1118.1.4 a n d 8.1.5 Obr, cr,,. ; Ubc,c.l., Tvm,cd.
and Welding -- Where a connection is subject
a n d 0,. cam. are the numerical values of the
to impact or vibration or to reversal of stress
co-existent bending (compression or tension),
(unless such reversal is due solely to wind) Of
shear and bearing stress. When bending
where for some special reason, such as conti-
occurs about both axes of the member, Ubr.cd
nuity in rigid framing or precision in align-
and uhc. c0~ shall be taken as the sum of the two
ment of machinery-slipping of bolts is not
calculated fibre stresses, ur is the maximum
permissible, then rivets, close tolerance bolts,
permissible equivalent stress.
high strength friction grip fasteners or welding
8.1.7 S TEEL T U B E S shall be used. In all other cases bolts in clear-
ance holes may be used provided that due
a ) COMBINED -BENDING AND AXIAL
allowance is made for any slippage.
STRESSES --- Members subject to both
bending and axial stresses shall be pro- 9.2 Composite Connections - In any con-
portioned that the quantity: nection which takes a force directly communi-
cated to it and which is made with more than
one type of fastening, only rivets and turned
and fitted bolts may be considered as acting
together to share the load. In all other connec-
or
tions sufficient number of one type of fasten-
(Jbr. ‘01
I I.0 ing shall be provided to communicate the
i- entire load for which the connection is
ubr
designed.

uoc, cd = calculated axial stress, that is. axial 9.3 Members Meeting at a Joint - For trian-
load divided by appropriate area of gulated frames designed on the assumption of
member; pin jointed connections, members meeting at
a joint shall, where practicable, have their
uor = permissiblt stress in member for
centroidal axes meeting at a point; and wher-
axial 4oa&
ever practicable the centre of resistance of a
Ub<, <,I = calculated bending stress in the connection shall be on the line ofaction ofthe
extreme fibre; and load*so as to avoid an eccentricity moment on
the cohnections.
ub = permissible bending stress in t h e
extreme fibre.
9.3. I However, where eccentricity of
b) COMBINEDBENDINGANDSHEAR -lrres- members or of connections is present, the
pective of any permissible increase of members and the connections shall provide
allowable stress. the equivalent stress, ur adequate resistance to the induced bending
due to co-existent bending and shear moments.

PART Vl SIlUCllJRAL DESIGN-SECllDN 6 SlTZL “29

9.3.2 Where the design is based on non-
intersecting members at a joint all stresses
arising from the eccentricity of the members
shall be calculated and the stresses kept within
the limits specified in the appropriate clause of
this code.
9.4 Bearings Brackets - Wherever practica-
ble, connections of beams to columns shall
include a bottom bracket and top cleat. Where
web cleats are not provided, the bottom
bracket shall be capable of carrying the whole
of the load.
9.5 Gussers -- Gusset plates shall be designed
to resist the shear, direct and flexural stresses
acting on the weakest or critical section. Re-
entrant cuts shall be. avoided as far as
practicable.
9.6 Packings
9.6.1 R I V E T S ‘on BOLTS THR’&JGH PA C K-
INGS - Number of rivets or bolts carrying
calculated shear through a packing shall be
increased above the number required by nor-
mal calculations by 2.5 percent for each 2.0
mm thickness of packing except that, for
packings having a thickness of 6 mm or less,
no increase need be made. For double shear
connections packed on bothsides, the number
of additional rivets or bolts required shall be
determined from the thickness of the thicker
packing. The additional rivets or bolts should
preferably be placed in an extension of the
packing.
9.6.2 PACKINGS IN WELDEDCONSTRUCTION
- Where a packing is used between two
parts, the packing and the welds connecting it
to each part shall be capable of transmitting
the load between the parts. Where the packing
is too thin to carry the load or permit the
provision of adequate welds, the load shall be
transmitted through the welds alone, the
welds being increased in size by an amount
equal to the thickness of the packing.
9.6.3 PACKING S UBJECTEDTO D IRECT COM-
PRESSlObi ONLY - Where properly fitted
packings are subjected to direct compression
only, the provisions under 9.6. I and 9.6.2 shall
not apply.
9.7 Separators and Diaphragms - Where
two or more .rolled steel joists& channels are
used side by side to form a girder, they shall be
connected together at intervals of not more
JO
than I 500 mm except in the case of grillage
beams encased in concrete, w4ere suitable
provision shall be made to maintain correct
spacing. Bolts and separators may be used
provided that in beams having a depth of 300
mm or more, not fewer than 2 bolts. are used
with each separator. When loads are required
to be carried from one beam to the other or are
required to be distributed between the beams,
diaphragms shall be used, designed with sufti-
cient stiffness to distribute the ioad
9.8 Lug Angles
9.8.1 Lug angles connecting a channel-
shaped member shall, as far as possible be
disposed symmetrically with respect to the
section of the member.
9.8.2 In the case of angle members, the lug
angles and-their connections to the gusset or
other supporting member shall be capable of
developing a strength not less than 20 percent
in excess of the force in the outstanding leg of
the angle, and the attachment of the lug angle
to the angle member shall be capable of deve-
loping 40 percent in excess of that force.
9.8.3 In the case of channel members and the
like, the lug angles and their connection to the
gusset or other supporting member shall be
capable of developing a strength of not less
than IO percent in excess of the force not
accounted for by the direct connection of the
member, and the attachment of the lug angles
to the members shall be capable ofdeveloping
20 percent in excess of that force.
9.8.4 In no case shall fewer than two bolts or
rivets be used for attaching the lug angle to the
gussest or other supporting member.
9.8.5 The effective connection of the lug angle
shall, as faras possible, terminateat the end of
the member connected and the fastening of
the lug angle to the member shall preferably
start in advance of the direct connection of the
member to the gusset or other supporting
member.
9.8.6 Where lug angles are used to connectan
angle member, the whole area of the member
shall be taken aseffective not withstanding the
requirements of 4 and 6.
9.9 Permissible Stresses in Rivers and Bolts
9.9. I C A L C UL ATION OF S TRESSES - In cal-
NATIONAL BU~LMNQ CODE d INDIA
culating shear and bearing stresses the effec-
tive diameter of a rivet shall be taken as the
hole diameter and that of a bolt as its nominal
diameter. In calculating the axial tensile stress
in a rivet the gross area shall be used and in
calculating the axial tensile stress in a bolt or
screwed tension rod the net area shall be used.
9.9.2 G R O S S AND N ET AREAS OF RIVETS
AND BOLTS
9.9.2. I The gross area of a rivet shall be taken
as the cross-sectional area of the rivet hole.
9.9.2.2 The net sectional area of a bolt or
screwed tension rod shall be taken as the area
of the root of the threaded part of cross-
sectional area of the unthreaded part which-
ever is lesser.
NOTE - The net sectional areas of bolts are given in
Ivt_6(s)l.
9.9.3 A REA OF R IVET AND B OLT H OLES -
The diameter of a rivet hole shall be taken as
the nominal diameter of a rivet plus 1.5 mm
for rivets of nominal diameter less than or
equal to ‘25 mm, and 2.0 mm for rivets of
nominal diameter exceeding 25 mm, unless
otherwise specified. The diameter of a bolt
hole shall be taken as the nominal diameter of
the bolt plus 1.5 mm unless specified
otherwise.
9.9.4 STRESSES IN R I V E T S, B O L T S
WELDS
9.9.4.1 The calculated stress in a mild steel
shop rivet or in a bolt of property class 4.6 ( see
[V1-6(8)] shall not exceed the values given in
Table 12.
multiplied by the ratio of the tensile strength
of the rivet material to the tensile strength as
specified in accepted standard[W-6 (9)].
NOTE-Fxu field rivets the permissible stresses shall be
reduced by IO percent.
9.9.4.3 The permissible stress in a bolt (other
than a high strength friction grip bolt) of
property class higher than 4.6 shall be those
given in Table 12 multiplied by the ratio of its
yield stress or 0.2 percent pro.of stress or 0.7
times its tensile strength, whichever is the
lesser than 235 MPa.
9.9.4.4 The calculated bearing stress of rivet
or bolt on the parts connected by it sliall not
exceed: (a) the valuef, for hand driven rivets
or bolts in clearance holes, and (b) the value
1.2 fY for power driven rivets or close toler-
ance and turned bolts. fY is the yield stress of
the connected parts,
Where the end distance of a rivet or bolt (that
is, the edge distance in the direction in which it
bears) is less than a limit of twice the effective
diameter of the rivet or bolt, the permissible
bearing stress of that rivet or bolt on the con-
nected part shall be reduced in the ratio of the
actual and distance to that limit.
9.9.4.5 COMBINED SHEAR AND TENSION -
Rivets and bolts subject to both shear and
axial tension shall be so proportioned that the
AND
shear and axial stresses calculated in accor-
dance with 9.2. I do not exceed the respective
allowable stresses T,,J and ou and the
expression
TV/.
cd. or/. cd.
-+-
{ Iv/ au >

TABLE I2 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE STRESS does not exceed 1.4.

IN RIVETS AND BOLTS
DESCRt PTtON OF A XIAL SHEAR. BEAR- 9.9.4.6 HIGH STRENGTH FRICTION GRIP
FASTENERS T ENSION zr( ING. utf BOLTS -- The provisions contained in 9.9.4.1

to 9.9.4.5 do not apply to high strength fric-

(1) % (3) (4)
MPe MPa MPa
tion grip bolts, which shall be used in confor-
Power-driven mity with accepted standard [VI-6( IO)].
rivets 100 I00 300
Hand-driven
9.9.4.7 WELDS - Permissible stress in welds
rivets 80 80 250 shall be as specified in accepted standards
Close tolerance [Vl-6( I I,].
and turned bolts I20 100 300
Bolts in clearance 9.10 Rivets and Riveting
holes I20 80 250
9.10.1 PITCH OF R IVETS
9.9.4.2 The permissible stress in a high tensile a) MINIMUM PITCH - Thedistance between
steel rivet shall be those given in Table I2 centres of rivets should be not less than

?AaT VI mucnraAL DUIDN--ICCfiON 6 m Vt+51

 2.5 times the nominal diameter of the
TABLE 13 EDGE DISTANCE OF HOLES
rivet.
b) MAXIMUM PITCH D IAMETER OF DISTARCE TO DISTANCE TO
HOLE SHEARED OR RoLLED,
9 The distance between centres of any H AND F LAME MACHINE
two adjacent rivets (including tack- CUT EDGE FL&ME CUT,
ing rivets) shall not exceed 32 r or 300 SAWN OR
mm, whichever is less. where I is the P LANED EDGE
thickness of the thinner outside plate. (1) (2) (3)
mm mm mm
ii) The distance between centres of two 13.5 and below !9 17
adjacent rivets, in a line lying in the 15.5 25 22
17.s 29 2s
direction of stress, shall not exceed 19.5 32 29
16 I or 200 mm, whichever is kss in 21.5 32 29
tension members and 12I or 200 mm, 23.5 38 32
whichever is less in compression 25.5 U 38
members. .In the case of compression 29.0 51 U
32.0 57 51
members in which forces are trans- 35.0 57 51
ferred through butting faces, this dis-
tance, shall not exceed 4.5 times the
9.10.3.1 Tacking rivets shall have a pitch in
diameter of the rivets’for a distance line not exceeding 32 times the thickness of the
from the abutting faces equal to 1.5
outside plate or 300 mm, whichever is’less.
times the width of the member.
Where the.plates are exposed to the weather,
iii) The distance between centres of any the pitch in line shall not exceed16 times, the
two consecutive rivets in a line thickness of the outside plate or 200 mm,
adjacent and parallel to an edge whichever is less. In both cases, the lines of
of an outside plate shall not exceed rivets shall not be apart at a distance greater
(100 mm+4r) or 200 mm, whichever than these pitches.
is less in compression or tension
9.10.3.2 All the requirements specified
members.
in 9.IO.3.I shall apply to compression
iv) When .rivets are staggered at equal members generally, subject to the stipulation
intervals and the gauge does not in this code affecting the design and constiuc-
exceed 75 mm, the distances specified tion of compression members.
in (ii) and (iii) between centres of
9.10.3.3 In tension members composed of
rivets, may be increased by 50
two flats, angles, channels or tees in contact
percent.
back-to-back or separated back-to-back by a
9.10.2 E DGE D I S T A N C E distance not exceeding the aggregate thick-
a) The minimum distance from the centre of ness of the connected parts, tacking rivets,
any hole to the edge of a plate shall be not with solid distance pieces where the parts are
less than that given in Table 13. separated, shah be provided at pitch in line
b) Where two or more parts are connected not exceeding 1 000 mm.
together a line of rivets or bolts shall be 9.10.3.4 For compression members covered
provided at a distance of not more than in 6, the tacking rivets shall be at a pitch in line
37 mmf4r from the nearest edge, where not exceeding 600 mm.
I is.the thickness in mm of the thinner
outside plate. In the case of work not 9.10.4 C O U NT ERSUNK H EADS - For coun-
exposed to weather, this may be increased tersunk heads. one-half of the depth of the
to 12r. countersinking shall be neglected in calculat-
ing the length of the rivet in bearing. For rivets
9.10.3 TA C K I N G R I V E T S - I n c a s e s o f
in tension with countersunk heads, the tensile
members covered under 9.10.1 (b)(ii). when
the maximum distance between centres of two value shall be reduced by 33.3 percent. No
reduction need be made in shear.
adjacent rivets as specified in9.10.1 (b)(ii) is
exceeded, tacking rivets not subjected to cal- 9.10.S LONG GRIP R IVETS - Where the grip
culated stress shall be used, of rivets carrying calculated loads exceed 6

NATIONAL WIIBING COD1 OF tnnu

times the diameter of the holes, the number of
rivets required by normal calculation shall be
increased by not less than one percent for each
additional 1.5 mm of grip; but the grip shall
not exceed -8 times the diameter of the holes.
9.11 Bolts and Bolting
9. I .I. I . IV8 CHES. EDGE D I S T A N C E S F O R
TACKIHG BOLTS - The requirements for
bolts shall be the same as for rivets given in
9.10 and its sub-clauses.
9.11.2 B LACK B OLTS - The dimensions of
black bolts shall conform to those given in
accepted standards [VI-6 ( 12)].
9.11.3 CLOSE T OLERANCE B OLTS - Close
tolerance bolts shall conform to accepted
standards [VI-6(g)].
9.11.4 TURNED B ARREL Boe~s -The nomi-
nal diameter of the barrel shall be in multiples
of 2 mm and shall be at least 2 mm larger in
diameter than the screwed portion.
9.11.5 WASHERS - Washers with ‘perfectly
flat fades should be provided with all close
tolerance bolts and turned barrel bolts. Steel
or malleable cast iron tapered washers shall be
provided for a11 heads and nuts hearing on
bevelled surfaces.
9.1 I.6 LOCKING OF N UTS - Wherever there
is risk of the nuts becoming loose due to vibra-
tion or reversal of stresses, they shall be
securely locked.
9.12 Wclds and Welding - For requirements
of welds and welding, reference shall be made
to accepted standards [VI-6(13)].
9.13 Connections in Tubular Structures
9.13.1 GENERAL - Connections in struc-
tures using steel tubes shall be provided by
welding, reveting or bolting. Wherever possi-
ble. connections between tubes shall be made
directly tube to tubt without gusset platesand
other attachments, Ends of tubes may be flat-
tened as specified in 26.16 or otherwise
formed to provide for welded, riveted or
bohed connections.
943.2 EC C E N T R I C I T Y OF M E M B E R S -Tubes
meeting at a point shall. wherever practicable,
have their gravity axes meeting at a point so as
to avoid eccentricity.
9.I3.2.1 ECCENTRlClTY OF CONNECTIONS -
Wherever practicable, the centre ot resistance
of the connection shall lie on the line of action
of the load so as to avoid eccentricity moment
of the connection.
9.13.3, WELC)ED CONNECTIONS
9.13.3. I A weld connecting two tubes end to
end shall be full penetration butt weld. The
effective throat thickness of the weld shall be
taken as the thickness of the thinner part
joined.
9.13.3.2 A weld connecting the end of one
tube (branch tube) to the surface of another
tube (main tube) with their axes at an angle of
not less than 30” shall be of the following
types:
a) A butt weld throughout,
b) A fillet weld throughout. and
c) A fillet butt .weld. the weld being a fillet
weld in one part and a butt weld in
another with a continuous change from
the one form to the other in the interven-
ing portions.
Type (a) may be used whatever the ratio of the
diameters of the tubes joined. provided com-
plete penetration is secured either by the use of
backing material, or by depositing a sealing
run of metal on the back of the joint or,by
some special method of welding. When type
(a) is not employed. type (b) should be used
where the diameter of the branch tube is less
than one-third of the diameter of the main
tube. and type (c) should be used where the
diameter of the branch tube is equal to or
greater than one-third of the diameter of the
main tube.
For the purpose of stress calculation. the
throat thickness of the butt weld portion shall
be taken as the thickness of the thinner part
joined, and the throat thickness of the fillet
weld and the fillet butt weld shall be taken as
the minimum effective throat thickness of the
fillet or fillet-butt weld.
9.13.3.3 ANGLE BETWEEN TUBES - A weld
connecting the end of one tube to the surface
of another, with the axes of the tubes idter-
setting at an angle of less than 30”. shall be
permitted only if adequate efficiency of the
junction has been demonstrated.
9.13.3.4 CONNECTIONS WHERE THE AXES OF
THE I‘WOTUBES DO NOT INTERSECT - A weld
VI3
connecting the end of one tube to the surface
of another where the axes of the two tubes do
not intersect, shall besubject to the provisions
under 9.13.3.2 and 9.13.3.3, provided &at no
part of the curve of intersection of the eccent-
ric tube with the main tube lies outside the
curve of intersection of the corresponding
largest permissible non-eccentric tube with
the main tube.
9.13.3.5 CONNECTIONSOFTUBESWITH FLAT-
TENED ENDS - Where the end of the branch
tube is flattened to an el!iptical shape, 9.13.3.2
to 9.13.3.4 shall apply; and for the application
of 9. I3.3.2 to 9./3.3.4 the diameter of the flat-
tened tube shall be measured in a plane per-
pendicular to the axis of the main tube.
10. PLASTIC DESIGN
IO. I Genera/
10.1.1 The structure or part of a structure
may be proportioned on the basis of plastic
design based on their maximum strength
using the provisions contained in this section.
‘Reference may also be made to good practice
[VI-6 (14)].
IO.i.2 The requirement of this standard
regarding the maximum ,permissible stress
shall be waived for this method. However, the
design shall comply with all other rquire-
ments of this standard.
IO./.3 Members subjected to heavy impact
and fatigue shall not be designed on the basis
of plastic theory.
10.1.4 Steel conforming to Grade Fe 410-Oaf
[VI-6 (IS)] shall not be used when the struc-
ture is designed on the basis of plastic theory.
10.2 Design
10.2.1 LOAD F ACTORS -S~tructuresor por-
tions of structures proportioned using plastic
design shall have sufficient strength as deter-
mined by plastic analysis to support the work-
ing loads multiplied by load factors as given
below:
Working Loads Load Factor,
Min
Dead load 1.7
Dead load -I- imposed load 1.7
Dead load + load due to
wind or seismic forces 1.7
Dead load + imposed load + load
due to wind or seismic forces 113
“bbS4
lO.2.2 DE F L E C T I O N - Detlections under
working loads shall be in accordance with
relevant provisions of this code.
10.2.3 B E A M S
102.3. I The calculated maximum moment
capacity, Mp, of a beam shall be
MP =Z, ./y
where
Z, = plastic modules of the section, and
I; = yield stress of the material,
10.2.3.2 P l a s t i c p r o p e r t i e s o f I n d i a n
Standard medium weight beams are given
in Appendix F for information.
10.2.4 TENSION MEMBERS - The calculated
maximum load capacity P., of a tension
member shall be P., = 0.85 A&.
where
A* = effective cross-sectional area of the
member;
/y = yield stress of the steel.
10.2.5 STRUTS -- The calculated maximum
load capacity P,,c of a strut shall be
Pm = 1.7 A, uor
where uac is the maximum permissible
stress in axial compression as given in 6.1
using effective length / equal to the actual
length L.
10.2.6 MEMBERS S UBJECTEDTO C O M B I N E D
B E N D I N G A N D A X I A L F O R C E S (BEAM-
Co~uhw MEMBE R S)
10.2.6. I The calculated maximum moment
capacity Mpc of a member subjected to com-
bined bending and axial forces, where P/P,
exceeds 0. IS, shall be reduced below the value
given in 10.2.3 and it shall satisfy the following
requirements:
a) BEAMS - $+ PCM < 1.0
Y I.18 Mp
b) SLENDER STRUTS - A member where
P/ Py in addition to exceeding 0. I5 also
exceeds 1+/3---o
I+@+Ao
shall not be assumed to contain plastic
binges although it shall be permissible to
design the member as an elastic part of a
 plastically designed structure. Such a from-i- I for double curvature, 0 for
member shall be designed according to ‘one end pinned, to -I for single cur:
the maximum permissible stress require- vature); and
ments satisfying:
L = ac.tual strut length.
_P_ + Mpc. Cm d I.0 10.2.6.2 A member assumed to contain plas-
PO? X(1 -P/P*) tic hinges and subjected to combined bending
and axial compression with P/ Py not exceed-
c) STOCKY STRUTS - A strut not covered in ing 0. I5 shall have a value of P/ Py not exceed-
(b) above shall satisfy ing (0.6 + 0.4 /~)/Ao where ho and /3 are as
M defined above.
P C <I
MP 10.2.7 S HEAR .- The calculated maximum
shear capacity VY of a beam or a beam-column
where shall be
P = an axial force, compressive or tensile VY = 0.55 Avfy
in a member; where A, is the effective cross-sectional
Mpc = maximum moment (plastic) capacity area resisting shear for calculating the average
acting in the beam-column; shear stress or the maximum shear capacity of
the members.
Mp = plastic moment capacity of the
section; 10.2.8 ST A B I L I T Y - The elastic buckling
load of a frame or its components designed on
M, = lateral buckling strength in the the basis of plastic theory shall be at least three
absence of axial load times the pla.stic collapse load. If an accurate
= MP if the beam column i s laterlirly estimate of the elastic buckling load is not
braced; available, this provision shall be deemed to be
satisfied for frames of up to three storeys if the
P, = buckling strength in the plane of compressive force P, in each memberdoes not
bending if axially loaded (without exceed:
any bending moment) and if the 033 lr= El
beam column is laterally braced as .-
p e r 10.2.5.1; P
for buckling in any direction, where the effec-
P, = Euler load tive length I is determined according to 6.2.

= IrzEAs for the plane of bending;
IUrY
Py = yield strength of axially loaded sec-
tion = Alfy;
A, = effective cross-sectional area of the
member;
cm = a coefficient as defined in 8.1.3;
r = radius of gyration about the same
axis as the applied moment;
Aa = characterisitc slenderness ratio
B = ratio of end moment, each measured
in the same rotational direction and
chosen with the numerically large
amount in the denominator (fi range
For frames of over three storeys, the calcu-
lated plastic collapse load shall include an
assessment of the moment caused by the pos-
sible combination of high axial force and
transverse deflection.
10.2.9 MI N I M U M T H I C K N E S S
10.2.9.1 COMPRESSION OUTSTANDS - A
flange or other compression element required
to participate in a plastic hinge shall not pro-
ject beyond its outer most point of attachment
by more than 136. TI/ \/7;:
where TI is the thickness of flange of a section
or plate in compression or the aggregate
thickness of plates if connected in accordance
with 9.
For the purpose of this clause, web stiffen-
ers at plastic hinges shall be proportioned as
compression elements.

?AaT VI #IWCKIRAL DUION--ltcFI)N 6 m vs

 10.2.9.2 UNSUPPORTED WIDTHS The dis- -
tance between adjacent parallel lines of
attachment of a compression flange or
another compression element to other parts of
member. when such flanges or elements are
required to participate in a plastic hinge
action. shall not exceed 512. TI/ fi where
TI is as defined in J0.2.9.1.
10.2.9.3 W E B S I N S H E A R --
If the depth d,
of a web subjected to shear and required to
participate in a plastic hinge exceeds
- 688. I -
G more than
then the compressive axial force P on the
member shall not exceed the value
P = Pv
( 0.70 -- -+C&)
4 c)
The maximuk permissible value of dl in any
plastic hinge zone shall he
IIZO. I
-.
Jz-
10.2.9.4 WEB UNDER BENDING AND COM-
PRESSION -- When the web is subjected to
bending and compression. the following con-
ditions shall be satisfied:
length and the spacing of the adjacent
supports shall not exceed’
96oV4
YE-
b) If the length along the member in whch
the applied moment exceeds 0.85MP. is
greater than or equal to
64Ov.r,
dx
the critical flange shall be supparted in
such a manner that no portion of this
length is unsupported for a distance of
64otJ.T”
fi
Later@ restraints for the remaining elas-
tic portions of the member shall be
designed in accordance with 5 and 6 as
appropriate. using stresses derived from
the plastic bending moments multiplied
by 1.7.
In this clause MP shall be assumed as MP or
UPC as appropriate.
u may be taken as unity or calculated by the
following expression:

a) Where P/ Py exceeds 0.27. then the depth

JI shall not exceed
v=&&
where 8 is the ratio of the rotation at the hinge
688.
-. t . and
point to the relative elastic rotation oftire far
47 ends of the beam segment containing theplas-
b) When P/ Pu is less than or equal to 0.27. tic.hinge.
then the depth dl shall not exceed

J.1
II20
- - 1600- -P
c fi a ( PJ
10.2./O LA I‘ERAL BRACING
10.2.10.1 Members shall be adequately
braced to resist lateral and torsional displace-
ment at the plastic hinge locations associated
with failure mechanism. Lateral bracing mass
be dispensed within the region of the last hinge
to form in the failure mechanism assumed as
the basis for proportioning the given member.
a) If the length along the member in which
the applied moment exceeds 0.854,. is
less than
&IoU.f,
4X-
at least one critical flange support shall be
provided within or at the end of this
NOTE -The lateral restraints provided bythisclausc will
ensure that a section delivers its full moment and defor-
mation capacity. This may bc too great for some daign
circumstances. With the approcal of the appropriate
authoricy the daign engineer may I& the methods which
allow a reduced amount of bmcing lo be used, provided
that this reduction is jus~ificd by rational and widely
accepted means and that any associated reductions in
moment and deformation capacity arc fully considered in
the design.
10.2.11 WEB S T I F F E N I N G
10.2. I I. I EXCESSIVE SHEAR FORCES - Web
stiffeners or doubler plates shall be provided
when the requirements of10.2.7 are not met,
in which case the stiffeners or doubler plates
shall be capable of carrying that portion of the
forces which exceeds the shear capacity of the
wib.
10.2.ll.2 CONCENTRATED L OADS - Web
stiffeners shall be provided at points on a

,56
member where the concentrated force deli-
vered by the flanges of another member fram-
ing into it will produce web crippling opposite
the compression flange or high tensile stressin
the ‘connection of the tension flange. This
requirement shall be deemed to bt! satisfied if
web stiffeners are placed:
a) opposite the compression flange of the
other member when
Al
/<
Th + 5k
b) opposite the tension flange of the other
member when
7j < O-4. d A/
where
I= thickness of web to be stiffened,
h= distance from outer face of flange
to web toe of fillet of member to be
stiffened,
Tb = thickness of flange of delivering
concentrated load,
T/= thickness of flange of member to be
stiffened, and
A, = area of .flange delivering concen-
trated load.
The area of such stiffeners, AH, shall
be such that
The ends of such stifferners shall be fully butt
welded to the inside face of the flange adjacent
to the concentrated tensile force. It shall be
permissible to fit the stiffeners against the
inside face of the flange adjacent to the con-
centrated compression force without welding.
When the concentrated force is delivered by
only one beam connected to an outside face of
a strut, the length of the web stiffener shall
extend for at least half the depth of the
member, and the welding connecting it to the
web shall be sufficient to develop a force of
/p. A,,.
10.2.11.3 PLASTIC HINGES - Web stiffeners
shall be provided at all plastic hinges where
the applied load exceeds 0.06 A,& where A,
is as explained in”10.2.7.
10.2.12 LOAD C APACITIESOF C O N N E C T I O N S
- The calculated load capacities of welds,
bolts and rivets shall be taken as I .7 times the
values calculated using permissible stress
specified in 9.9.4.
10.3 Connections and Fabrication
10.3. I CONNECTIONS
10.3.1.1 All connections which are essential
to the coitinuity, assumed as the basis of the
design analysis shall be capable ofresisting the
moments. shears and axial loads to which they
would be subjected by either full or factored
loading.
10.3.1.2 Corner connections (haunches). tap-
pered or curved for architectural reasons shall
be so proportioned that the full plastic bend-
ing strength of the section adjacent to the
connection may be developed.
10.3. I.3 Stiffeners shall be used. as required.
to preserve the flange continuity of inter-
rupted members at their junction with other
members in a continuous frame. Such stiffen-
ers shall be placed, in pairs em opposite sides of
the web of the member which extends contin-
uously through the joint.
10.3.2 FARBICATION --The provisions of 12
with respect to workmanship shall govet’n the
fabrication of structures, or portions of struc-
tures, designed on the basis of maximum
strength, subject to the following limitations:
a) The use of sheared edges shall be avoided
in locations subject to plastic hinge rota-
tion at factored loading. If used they shall
be finished smooth by grinding, chipping
or planing.
b) In locations subject to plastic hinge rota-.
iion at factored loading, holes for rivets
or bolts in the tension area shall be silb-
punched and reamed or drilled full size.
If. DESIGN OF ENCASED MEMBERS
11. I Encased Columns
If. 1.1 C ONDITIONS OF D ESIGN - A member
may be designed as an encased column when
the following conditions are fulfilled:
a) The member is of symmetrical I-shape or
a single l-beam for channels back-to-
back. with or without flange plates;
b) The overall dimensions of the steel MC-
tion do not exceed 750 X 450 mm over
plating where used, the larger dimension
being measured parallel to the web;
c) The column is unpained and is solidly
37
 encased in ordinary sense concrete with where
20 mm aggregate (unless solidity can be
obtained with a larger aggregate): Am Ac = cross-sectional area of steel and
concrete, and
4 The minimum width of solid casing is ox, UC = permissible Stresses in steel and
equai to b0 + 100 mm, where b0 is the concrete in compression.
width of the steel flange in millimetres;
N OTE - This clause does not apply to steel struts of
e) The surface and edges of the steel column overall sectional dimensions greater than IO00 mmXSO0
hake a concrete cover of not less than 50 mm, the dimension of I000 mm being measured parallel
to the web or to box sections.
mm;
9 The casing is effectively reinforced with 11.2 Encased Beams
steel wires. The wire shall beat least 5 mm 11.2.1 CO N D I T I O N S O F D E S I G N - Beams
in diameter and the reinforcement shall and girders with equal flanges may be
be in the form of stirrups orbinding at not designed as encased beams when the following
more than 150 mm pitch so arranged as to conditions are fulfilled:
pass through the centre of the covering of
the edges and outer faces of the flanges a) The section is of single web and l-form or
and supported by longitudinal spacing of double open channel form with the
bars not ,jess than four in number; Bnd webs ‘not less than 40 mm apart;
The beam is unpainted and is solidly
8) Steel cores in encased columns shall be b) encased in M 15 (min) concrete, with 10,
accurately machined at splices and provi-
sions shall be made for alignment of mm aggregate (unless solidity can be
column. At thk column base provision obtained with a larger aggregate);
shall be made to transfer the load to the d The minimum width of solid casing =
footing at safe unit stresses. (bo + 100) mm, where bo is the width of
11.1.2 DESIGN OF MEMBER
the steel flange in mm;

11.1.2. I The steel section shall be considered
as carrying the entire load but allowance may
be made by assuming the radius of gyration ‘t’
of the column section about the axis in the
plane of its web to be 0.2 (bo + 100) mm, where
b0 is the width of the steel flange inmillime-
tres. The radius of gyration about its other
axis shall be taken as that of the uncased
section.
11.1.2.2 The axial load on the encased
column shall not exceed 2 times that which
would be permitted on the uncased section,
nor shall the slendereness ratio of the uncased
section fo! its full length centre-to-centre of
connections exceed 250.
11.1.2.3 In computing the allowable axial
load on the encased strut, the concrete shall be
taken as assisting in carrying the load over its
rectangular cross-section, any cover in excess
of 75 mm from the overall dimensions of the
steel section of the cased strut being ignored.
21.1.2.4 The allowable’compressivc Kurd Pin
case of encased columns &all be determined
aa follows:
4 The surface and edges of the flanges of the
beam have a concrete cover of not less
than 50 mm; and
d The casing is effectively reinforcedwith
steel wire of at least 5 mm diameter and
the reinforcement shall be in the form of
stirrups or binding at not more thanI50
mm pitch. and so arranged as to pass
through the centre of the covering to the
edges and soft3 of the lower flange.
11.2.2 D ESIGN OF MEMBER - The steel sec-
tion shall be considered as carrying the entire
load but allowance may be made for the effect
of the concrete on the lateral stability of the
compression flange. This allowance should be
made by assuming for the purpose of deter-
mining the permissible stress in compression
that the equivaleit moment of inertia (I__)
about the y-y axis is equal to Ax,’ where A is
the area of steel section and r, may be taken as
0.2 (b,+ 100) mm. 0ther properties required
for.referring to 7.2 may be taken as for the
uncared section. The permissible bending
rtms so determined shall not exceed I .5 times
that permitted for the uncased section.
NOTE - This clause does not apply to beams and girders find it necessary, the edges shall be ground
having a depth greater than IO00 mm, or a width greater afterwards.
than.500 mm or to box sections.
12.2.4 H OLING
11.3 Composite Construction
12.2.4.1 1 Holes_through more than one thick-
11.3. I Composite construction shall be done ness of material for members, such as com-
in accordance with good practice [VI-6(16)]. pound stanchion and girder flanges shall,
12. FABRICATION AND ERECTION where possible, be drilled after the members
are assembled and tightly clamped or bolted
12.1 General - Tolerances for fabrication together. Punching may be permitted before
and erection of steel structures shall conform assembly, provided the holes are punched 3
to accepted standards [VI-6 (17)]. For general mm less in diameter than the required size and
guidance on fabrication by welding, reference reamed after assembly to the full diameter.
may be made to good practice [VI-6 (13)]. The thickness of material punched shall be not
12.2 Fabrication Procedures greater than I6 mm. For dynamically loaded
structures, punching shall be avoided.
12.2. I S TRAIGHTENING - All material shall
be straight and, if necessary, before being 12.2.4.2 When holes are drilled in one opera-
worked shall be straightened and/ or flattened tion through two or more separable parts,
by pressure, unless required to be of curvili- these parts, when so specified by the engineer,
near form and shall be free from twists. shall be separated rifter drilling and the burrs
removed.
12.2.2 CL E A R A N C E S - The erection clear-
ance for cleated ends of members connecting 12.2.4.3 Holes in connecting angles and
steel should preferably be not greater than 2.0 plates, other than splices, also in roof
mm at each end. The erection clearance at members and light framing, may be punched
ends of beams without web cleats shouldbe full size through material not over 12 mm
not more than 3mti at each end, but where, thick, except where required for close toler-
for practical reasons, greater clearance is ance bolts or barrel bolts.
necessary, suitably designed seatings should
be provided. 12.2.4.4 Matching holes for rivets and black
bolts shall register with each other so that a
12.2.2.1 Where black bolts are used, the holes gauge of I .5 mm or 2.0 mm (as the case may be
may be made not more than I.5 mm greater depending on whether the diameter of the
than the diameter of the bolts, unless other- river or bolt is less than or more than 25 mm)
wise specified by the engineer. less in diameter than the diameter of the hole
12.2.3 CU-ITING will pass freely through the assembled
members in the direction at tight angle to such
12.2.3. I Cutting may be effected by shearing, members. Finished holes shall be not more
cropping or sawing. Gas cutting by mechani- than I .5 mm or 2.0 mm (as the case may be) in
cally controlled torch may be permitted for diameter larger than the diameter of the rivet
mild steel only. Gas cutting OC high tensile or black bolt passing through them, unless
steel may also be permitted provided special otherwise specified by the engineer.
care is taken to leave sufficient metal to be
rkmoved by machining so that all metal that 12.2.4.5 Holes for turned and fitted bolts
has been hardened byflame is removed. Hand shall be drilled to a diameter equal to the
flame cutting may be permitted subject to the nominal diameter of the shank or barrel sub-
approval of the inspector. ject to H 8 tolerance specified in good practice
[Vl-6(18)]. Preferably parts to be connected
12.2.3.2 Except where the material is subse-
with close tolerance or barrel bolts shallbe
quently joined by welding, no loads shall be
firmly held together by tacking bolts or
transmitted into metal through a gas cut
clamps and the holes drilled through all the
surface.
thicknesses at one operation and subsequently
12.2.3.3 Shearing, cropping and gas cutting, reamed to size. All holes not drilled through
shall be clean, reasonably square, and free all thicknesses at one operation shall be drilled
from any distortion. and should the inspector to a stnalkr size and reamed out after

PAST VI SRucluaAL DLsI;N-SWflON 6 STUL v14S9

assembly. Where this is not practicable, the
parts shall be drilled and reamed separately
through hard bushed steel jigs.
12.2.4.6 Holes for rivets or bolts sha!! not be
formed by gas cutting process.
j2.3 Assembly - The component parts shall
be assembled and aligned in such a manner
that they are neither twisted nor otherwise
damaged, and shall be so prepared that the
specified cambers, if any, provided.
12.4 Riveting
12.4.1 Rivets shall heated uniformly through-
out their length, without burning or excessive
scaling. and shall be of sut’ficient length to
provide a head of standard dimensions. They
shall, when drtven. completely fill the holes
and, if countersunk, the countersinking shall
be fully filled by the rivet, any protrusion of
the countersunk head being dressed off flush,
if required.
12.4.2 Riveted members shall have al! parts
firmly drawn and held together before and
during riveting, and special care shall be taken
in this respect for a!! single-riveted connec-
tions. For multiple riveted connections, a ser-
vice bolt shall be provided in every third or
fourth hole.
12.4.3 Wherever practicable. machine rivet-
ing shall be carried out by using machines of
the steady pressure type.
12.4.4 Al! loose, burned or otherwise defec-
tive rivets shall be cut out and replaced before
the structure is loaded, and special care shall
be taken to inspect a!! single riveted
connections.
12.4.5 Special cart shall be taken in heating
and driving long rivets.
12.5 Bolring
i2.5.1 Where necessary, washers shall be
tapered or otherwise suitably shaped to give
the heads and nuts of bolts a satisfactory
bearing.
12.5.2 The threaded portion of each bolt shall
project through the nut at least one thread.
12.5.3 In all craes where the full bearing area
of the bolt is to be developed, the bolt shall be
provided with a washer of sufficient thickness
under the nut to avoid any threaded portion of
,w60
the bolt being within the thicknessorthe parts
bolted together.
12.6 Welding
12.6.1 Welding shall be in accordance with
good practice [V I-6( !9)].
12.6.2 For welding of any particular type of
joint, welders shall give evidence acceptable to
the purchaser of having satisfactorily com-
pleted appropriate tests as described in any of
t h e I n d i a n Standards--!Sfg!7-1966. IS:
1393-1961, IS: 7307 (Part I)-1974, !~:73!0
(Part !)-I974 and IS:7318 (Part I) 1974, as
relevant in accordance with good practice
[VI-6(20)].
12.7 Machining c$ Burrs, Caps and Bases
12.7.1 Column splices and butt joints of
struts and compression members depending
on contact for stress transmission shall be
accurately machined and close-butted over
the whole section with a clearance not exceed-
ing 0.2 mm locally at any place. In column
caps and bases, the ends of shafts together
with the attached gussets. an&s. channels,
etc. after riveting together should bc accu-
rately machined so that the parts connected
butt over the entire surfaces of contact. Care
should be taken that these gussets. connecting
angles or channels arc fixed uith such accu-
racy that they are not reduced in thrckness by
machining by more than 2 0 mm.
f2.7.2 Where sufficient gussets and rivets or
welds are provided to transmit the entire load-
ing (see 6) the column ends need not be
machined.
12.7.3 Ends of all bearing stiffeners shall be
machined or ground to fit tightly at both top
and bottom.
12.7.4 SLAB BASES AND C APS -S!ab bases
and slab caps, except when cut from material
with true surfaces. shall be accurately
machined over the bearing surfaces and shall
be in effective contact with the end of the
stanchion. A bearing face which is to be
grouted direct to a foundation need not be
machined if such face is true and parallel to
the upper face.
12.7.5 To facilitate grouting, holes shr!! be
provided where necessary in stanchion bases
for the escape of air.
12.7.6 The’ ends of a!! tubes for columns.
NMloMLauaullocowQ~
transmitting loads through the ends, should
be.true and square to the axisof the tube and
should be provided with B cap or base a&-
rately fitted to the end of the tube and
screwed, welded or shrunk on.
12.7.6.1 ,The cap or base plate should betrue
and square to the axis of the column.
12.8 Solid Round Steel Columns ’ and approval.
12.8.1 Solid round steel columns with shoul-
dered ends shall be provided with slab caps
and bases machined to fit the shoulder, and
shall be tightly shrunk on or welded in
position.
12.8.2 The tolerance between the reduced
end of the shaft and the hole, in the case of
slabs welded in position, shall not exceed 0.25
12.83 Where slabs are welded in position, the
reduced end of the shaft shall be kept just
sufficiently short to accommodate a filletweld
around the hole without weld-metal being
proud of the slab.
12.8.3.1 Alternativel,y, the caps and bases
may be welded direct to the column without
bearing or shouldering.
12.8.3.2 All bearing surfaces of slabs
intended for metal-to-metal contact shall be
machined perpendicular to the shaft.
12.9 Painting
12.9.1 Painting shall be done in accordance
with good practice [VI-6(2l)].
12.9.2 All surfaces which are to be painted,
oiled or otherwise treated shall be dry and
thoroughly cleaned to remove all loose scale
and loose rust. \
12.9.3 Shop contact surfaces need not be
painted unless specified. If so specified, they
shall be brought together while the paint is
still wet.
12.9.4 Surfaces not in contact, but inaccessi-
ble after shop assembly. shall receive the full
specified protective treatment before assem-
bly. This does not apply to the interior of
sealed hollow sections.
12.9.5 Chequered plates shall be painted but
the details of painting shall be specified by the
purchaser.
P A R T VI sTpUCllXML DESIGN-SICXION 4 .TrEEL
12.9.6 In the’case of surfaces to be welded, the
steel shall not be ‘painted or metal coated
within a suitable distance of any edges to be
welded if the paint specified or the metal coat-
ing w.ould be harmful to welders or impair the
quality of the welds.
12.9.7 Welds and adjacent parent metal shall
not be painted prior to deslagging, inspection
12.9.8 Parts to be encased in concrete shall
not be painted or oiled. If not galvanized, all
tubes shall, unless otherwise specified, be
painted or oiled or otherwise protectively
coated before exposure to the weather. If they
are to be painted in accordance with any spe-
cial requirements, this shall be arranged
between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
12.10 Marking
12.10. I Each piece of steel work shall be dis-
tinctly marked before delivery, in accordance
with a marking diagram, and shall bear.such
other marks as will facilitate erection.
12.11 Shop Erection
12.11.1 The steelwork shall be temporarily
shop erected complete or as arranged with the
inspector so that accuracy of fit may be
checked before despatch. The parts shall be
shop assembled with sufficient numbers of
parallel drifts to bring and keep the parts in
place.
12.11.2 In the case of parts drilled or
punched, through steel jigs with bushes result-
ing in all similar parts being interchangeable.
the steelwork may be shop erected in such
position as arranged with the inspector.
12.12 Packing - All projecting plates or bars
and all ends of members at joints shall be
stiffened. all straight bars and plates sha!l be
bundled, all screwed ends and machined sur-
faces shall be suitably packed and all rivets,
bolts, nuts, washers and small loose parts shall
be packed separately in cases so as to prevent
damage or distortion during transit.
12.13 Inspection and Testing
12.13.1 Tbe inspector shall have free access
at all reasonable times to those parts of the
manufacturer’s works which are concerned
with the fabrication of the steelwork and
shall be afforded all reasonable facilities for
VIY
 satisfying himself that the fabrication is being
undertaken in accordance with the provisions
of this standard.
12. I3.2 Unless specified otherwise, Inspec-
tion shali be made at the place of manufacture
:prior to despatch and shall be conducted so as
not to interfere unnecessary with the opera-
tion of the work.
12. I3.3 The manufacture? shall guarantee
compliance with the provisions.of this stand-
ard, if required to do so by the purchaser.
12.13.4 Should any structure or part of a
struct,ure be found not to comply with any of
the provisions of this standard, it shall be
liable to rejection. No structure or part of the
structure, once rejected shall be resubmitted
for test, except incasos where the purchaser or
his authoriscd representative considers the
defect as rcc6fiablc.
12.13.5 Defects which may appear during
fabrication shall bc made good with the con-
scnf of and according to the procedure laid
down hy the inspector.
12.13.f~ All gaugesand templates necessary to
satisfy the inspector shall be supplied by the
manufacturer. The inspector, may. at his dis-
cretion, check the test results ohtalned at the
manuf.tcturcr’s works by indcpcndcnt tests at
the Ciovcrnment Test House or elsewhere, and
should the material so tested be found to be
unsatisfactory, the costs of such tests shall bc
borne by the manufacturer, and if satisfac-
tory. the costs shall be borne by the purchaser.
12. I4 Sirrl Erecvion.
I,‘. 14. I t’I.AN I AND E.‘~~I~PMFK I The suit-
ability and capacity of all plant and cquip-
ment used for erection shall be to the
satisfaction of the engineer.
12.14.2 STORING A N D HANDI ING -- A l l
structural steel should be so stored and
handled at the site that the members are not
subject&d to excessive stresses and damage.
12.14.3 SE~T’I‘ING 01~~ - The positioning and
levelling of all steelwork. the plumbing of
stanchions and the placing ofevery part ofthe
structure with accuracy shall be in accordance
with the approved drawings and to the satis-
faction of the engineer.
12.14.4 SECURITY DURING.ERECTION
v1462
12.14.4. I For safety precautions during trot-
tion of steel structures reference shall be made
to good practice [W-6(22)].
12.14.4.2 During erection, the steelworkshail
be securely bolted or otherwise fastened and,
when necessary, temporarily braced to pro-
vide for all load to be carried by the structure
during erection including those due to erec-
tion equipment and its operation.
12.‘14.4.3 No riveting, permanent bolting or
welding should be done until proper align-
ment has been obtained.
12.14.5 FIELD C O N N E C T I O N S
12.14.5. I FIELD RIVETING - Rivets driven at
the site shall be heated and driven with the
same care as those driven inthe shop.
12.14.5.2 ‘FIELD BOLTING - Field bolting
shall be carried out with the same care as
required for shop bolting.
12.14.5.3 FIELD WELDING - All field assem-
bly and welding shall be executed in accor-
dance with the requirements for shop
fabricatlonexccptingsuchasmanifestlyapply
to shop conditions only. Where the steel has
been delivered painted, the paint shall be
removed before field welding, fora distance of
at least 50 mm on either side of the joint.
I.!. 1.F Pm’nting A,frer E r e c t i o n
:..‘. 15. I Hefore painting of such steel which is
dcIIvcrcd tirlpalnttxl, is commenced, all surfa-
ccs to bc p:lt:lted shall be dry and thoroughly
cleaned from all loose scale and rust.
I,‘. i5.2 i-he specified protective treatment
shn!i be completed after erection. All rivet and
bolt llcads and the site welds after deslagging
shall be cleaned. Damaged or deteriorated
paint surfaces shall lirst be made good with
the same type of paint as the shopcoat. Where
specified, surfaces which will be in contact
after site assembly shall receive a coat of paint
(in addition to any shop priming) and shall be
brought together while the paint is still wet.
12.15.3 Where thi steel has received a metal
coating in the shop, this coating shall be com-
pleted on site so as to be continuous~over any
wilds and site rivets or bolts, but subject to the
approval of the engineer protection may be
completed by painting on site. Bolts which
have been galvanized or similarly treated are
exempted from this requirement.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 12.15.4 Surfaces which will be inaccessible
after site assembly shall receive the full speci-
fied protective treatment before assembly.
12.15.5 Site painting should not be done in
frosty or foggy weather, or when humidity is
such as to cause condensation on the surfaces
to be painted.
12.15.6 Paints used shall conform toaccepted
standards [VI-6(6)].
12.16 Bedding of Stanchion Bases and Bear-
ings of Beams and Girders on Stone, Brick or
Concrete (Plain or Reinforced)
12.16.1 Bedding shall be carried .out with
Portland cement, grout or mortar, as des-
cribed under i2.16.4 .or fine cement concrete
in accordance with IS: 456-1978.
12.16.2 For multi-storeyed buildings, this
operation shall not be carried out until a suffi-
cient number of bottom lengths of stanchions
have been properly lined, levelled and
plumbed and sufficient floor beams are in
position.
12.16.3 Whatever me;hod is employed the
operation shall not be carried out until the
steelwork has been finally levelled and
plumbed, the stanchion bases being supported
meanwhile by steel wedges; and immediately
PART Vl SIIUCTURAL D E S I G N - S E C T I O N 6 STEEL
before grouting, the space under the steel shall
be thoroughly cleaned.
J2.16.4 Bedding of structure shall be carried
out with grout or mortar which shall be of
adequate strength and shall completely fill the
space to be grouted and shall either be placed
under pressure or by ramming against fixed
supports.
2.16.5 FLATTENED E NDS - in tubular con-
struction, the ends of tubes may be flattened
or otherwise formed to provide for welded,
riveted or bolted connections provided that
the methods adopfed for such flattening do
not injure the material. The change of section
shall be gradual.
12.16.6 SEALING OF T UBES -When the end
of a tube is not automatically sealed by virtue
of its connection. by welding to another
member, the end shall be properly and com-
pletely sealed.
12.16.6.1 Before sealing, the inside of the tube
should be dry and free from loose scale.
13. STEEL - WORK TENDERS AND
CONTRACTS
13.1 General Recommendations
13.1.1 A few recommendations are given in
Appendix G for general information.
 APPENDIX A
(Clause 4.3.2)
CHARTSHOWINGHIGHESTMAXIMUMTEMPERATURE

The territorial waters of India extend into thesea to a distance of twelve nautical miles measured from the
appropriate base line.
Based upon Survey of India’map with the permission of the Surveyor General of India.
@J Government of India Copyright 1990.
Responsibility for the correctness of internal details rests with the publishers.

VI.&64
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
.
 APPENDIX B
(Clause 4.3.2)
CHART SHOWING LOWEST MINIMUM TEMPERATURE

08 92 96

-I MAP OF INOlii

I SHONIHC uwEs1 NwINuN

LEtPERAm IsoPLmNs l c

I
USED Oh' DATA DP TO 1958 SUPPLIEI
BY IND~EP~~mICAL

I. PROJECYION: IA'fBWI CONICAL

ORl7loHORPHIC~

HCHIRAPPALLI

The territorial waters of India extend into the sea to adistance of twelve nautical miles measured from the
appropriate base line.
Based upon Survey of India map with the permission of the Surveyor General of India.
Q Government of India Copyright IWO.
Responsibility for the correctness of internal detailsresta with the publishers.

I’ANT V I !3TRUClURAL DESlCN-SkClON 6 SZ'ECL vrP

 APPENDIX C
(Clause 6.2.2)
EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS

C-i. In the absence of more exact analysis,
the effective I&gth of columns in framed
structures may be obtained from the ratio I/L,
of effective length I to unsupported length L
given in Fig. C-l when relative displacement
of the ends of the column is prevented and in
Fig. C-2 when relative lateral displacement of
the ends is not prevented. In the later case, it is
recommended that the effective length ratio
I/L may not be taken to be less than 1.2.
In Fig. C-I and Fig. C-2, PI and /32 are equal to
where the summation is to be done for the
members framing into a joint at top and bot-
tom respectively; K, and &being the flexural
stiffnesses for the column and beam,
respectively.

HINGED 1.0

0:9

0.8

0.6
P1

FIXED 0
0' 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
P 2-

Fig. C-l &gective Langrh Ratios,for a Column in a Frame with No Sway

“1-P NATIONAL WKDING COiE OF INDIA

HINGEDl.0

0.9

0.7

0.6

t
P, OS5

0.2

0.1

FIXED 0 HlNGED
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.9 1.0

0 f%-
ks
E:

Fig. C-2 Effective Length Ratios for a Column in a Frame Without Restraint
Against Swa)
 APPENDIX D
(‘Cluuse 6.2.5)
METHOD FOR DETERMINING EFFECTIVE LENGTH FOR STEPPED COLUMNS

el SINGLE STEPPED COLUMNS L2

n2= _,

D-l.1 Effective lengths in the plane of stcp- LI

ping (bending about axis x-x) for bottom and fW = Average value of moment of
top parts for single stepped columns shall be inertia for the lower. and middle
taken as given in Table D-f. parts
= IILI + 12 L2
NOTE - The provisions of D-I. I arc applicabk to inter- LI + L 2
mediate columns as well with steppings on either side. I”, = Average value of moment of
provided appropriate values of f, and f2 are taken.
inertia for middle and top parts
D-2. EFFECTIVE LENGTH FOR = I2L2 + I3 L3

DOUBLE STEPPED COLUMNS Ll + L,

Value of coefficient E2 for middle part of
P2.f Effective lengths in the plane ofstep- column is given by formula
pings (bending about axis x-jr) for bottom,
middle and top parts for a double stepped rl= kl
column shall be taken as follows: c2
Coefficient XI for effective length of bottom and coefficient E, for top part of the column is
part of double stepped column shall be taken given by
from the formula:

where

where
zi:& go arc taken from Table D-6, c, = b
- / II Pa
LI v /J(Pl+h+h)
1, = PI
-9
P3 NOTE - The provisions of DZ. I are applicable to ihter-
P2 mediate columns as well with stepping on either side,
‘2= K provided appropriate values of II. Ia and h arc taken.

NATIONAL BtlIUMNO CODE Oc INDIA

 TABLE D-I EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF SlNGLED
STEPPED COLUMNS
(Clause D-I. I)

COLUMN
SL D EGREE OF E N D SKETCH
NO. R ESTRAINT
PAnAMalEns FOR
ALL CASU
(1) (2) (3 (4) (9

a) Effcctivcly h e l d i n
position and restrained
against rotation at
both ends
r, = rlc3
Cl
WhCtC
7;,2 and &I
are to be
taken as per Tabk
D-2

l
Effectively held in
, = PI+P2
position at both ends
and restrained against PI
rotation at bottom end
only &= ,r’,< 3 Cl=-
L2
J II
Cl
WhCE LI -ii--

I
&I and XII are to be
taken as per Table
;=lr6 x +
D-3
Effective length of
bottom part aC
column in p&e d
stepping = tt LI
cl Effectively held in & to be taken aa per
position and restrained Tabk D-4 Efkctiw leqtb of
against rotation at top part of column
bottom end, and top in plane of steppinS
6=b,g3
end held against rota- = E*Lz
Cl
tion but not held in
position

d) Effectively held i n & to be taken as per

position and restrained Table D-5
l gakt rotation at bot-
tom end, and top end I, = s-g,
neither held against Cl
rotation nor held in
position

“I469
 TABLE D-2 COEEFICIENTS OF EFFECTlVE LENGTHS&z AND& FOR COLUMNS WITH BOTH.
ENDS EFFECTIVELY HELD IN &‘OSlTlON AND RESTRAINED AGAINST ROTATION
( 7’abk D-I)
h C~EFFICIENTS~II AND &, FOR 4/L, EQUAL T O

I1 ‘0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.8 2.0 ’

CoQjWenr kll (PI = 0)

0.05 0.74 0.94 1.38 I.60 1.87 2.07 2.23 2.39 2.52 2.67 3.03 3.44 3.85 4.34 4.77 Pz

0.2 0.64 0.70 0.79 0.93 1.07 1 . 2 3 I.41 I.50 I.60 1.72 1.92 2.11 2.28 2.45 2164
0.3 0.62 0.68 0.74 0.85 0.95 I.06 I.18 1.28 1.39 1.48 1.67 1.82 1.96 2.12 2.20
0.4 0.60 0.66 0.71 0.78 0.87 0.99 1.07 I.16 1 . 2 6 1.34 I.5O 1.65 1.79 I.94 2.08 ‘2 q h
0.5 0.59 0.65 0.70 0.77 0.82 0.93 0.99 1 . 0 8 I.17 1.23 1.39 1.53 1.66 1.79 1.92
1.0 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50

Coeflcienr k , , (PI = 0)
0.05 0.65 0.67 0.71 0.85 I.01 1 . 1 7 I.31 I.41 1.50’ 1.57 1.67 1.74 1.78 1.82 1.86 11 4

0. I 0.64 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.78 0.92 1.05 I.15 I.25 1.33 1.45 1.55 I,62 1.68 I.71
0.2 0.62 0.64 0.65 0.65 0.66 0.73 0.83 0 . 9 2 I.01 I.09 1.23 1.33 I.41 1.48 I.54
0.3 0.60 0.,63 0.64 0.65 0.66 0.67 0.73 0.81 0 . 8 9 0,94 I.09 1.20 1.2s 1.35 I.41
0.4 0.58 0.63 0.63 0.64 O.ti 0.66 0.68 0.75 0.82 0.88 I.01 I.10 I.19 1.26 1.32
0.5 0.57 0.61 0.63 0.64 0.64 ‘0.65 0.68 0 . 7 2 O.i7 0.83 0.94 I.04 I.12 I.19 I.25
1.0I
0. 0.67
0.55 0.76
0.58 0.60
I.00 0.61
1.20 0.62
1.42 0.63
I.61 10.65
. 7 8 0.67
1 . 9 2 0.70
2.04 0.73
2.20 2.40
0.80 2.60
0.88 2.86
0.93 3.18
I.01 3.41
1.05 4+9
4

N OTE - lntcrmediate values may be obtained by interpolation.

TABLE D-3 COtiEFICIENTS OF EFFECTIVE LENGTHS T;,, AND &I FOR COLUMNS WITH
BOTH ENDS EFFECTIVELY HELD IN POSITION AND RESTRAINED AGAINST
ROTATION AT BOTTOM END ONLY
(Tab/e DI)
h C OEFFICIENTS El2 AND El, FOR La/L, EQUAL TO
c
I
-
II 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0. I.2 I.4 1.6 I.8 2.0

Coeficicnr kI2 (PI = 0)

0.05 0.97 1.66 2.10 2.43 2.72 2.92 3.08 3.24 3.48 3.73 4.22 4.85 5.36 6.00 6.58
0.1 0.83 I.21 1.57 1.95 2.14 2.33 2.46 2.60 2.76 2.91 3.28 3.61 4.03 4.43 4.85
0.3 b.78 0.90 I.09 1.27 I.44 I.60 1.74 1.86 1.98 2.11 2.35 2.51 2.76 2.99 3.25
0.5 0.78 0.86 0.99 I.16 1.22 1.35 1.47 1.57 1.67 1.76 I.96 2.15 2.34 2.5o 2.76
I.0 0.78 0.85 0.92 0.99 I.06 I.13 I.20 1.27 1.34. I.41 1.54 1.68 1.82 1.97 2.10
coeflciurr t,, (Pz = 0)
0.05 0.67 0.67 0.82 I.16 I.35 I.48 I.58 1.65 1.69 1.74 I.81 I.84 1.86 1.88 I.%
0. I 0.67 0.67 0.73 ,0.93 I.11 I.25 1.36 1.45 I.52 1.57 1.66 1.72 1.77 I.80 I.82
0.3 0.67. 0.67 0.67 0.71 0.80 0.90 0.99 1.0.8 I.15 1.22 1.33 I.41 I.48 I.54 1.59
0.5 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.69 0.73 0.81 ‘0.17 0.94 1.01 1.07 I.17 1.26 1.33 1.39 I.44
1.0 0.67 0.67 .O.67 0.68 0.71 0.74 0.78 0.82 0.87 0.91 0.99 1.07 I.13 I.19 1.24
NOTE - Intermediate values may be obtained by interpolation.
_. .

NA’IIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 TABLE M COEFFICIENT OF EFFECTIVE LENGTH 1, FOR COLUMNS EFFECTIVELY HELD IN
POSITION AND RESTRAINED AGAINST ROTATION AT BOTTOM END AND TOP END
HELD AGAINST ROTATION BUT NOT HELD IN POSITION
I Table PI1 1s
C OEFFICIENT El ioR illi, E&AL TO .

Cl ’ 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 I:4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 5.0 IO 20 ’
‘2 s 1,
0 2.0 I.86 1.76 I.67
0.5 2.0 1.90 1.80 1.74 I.69 1.65I.61 1.58 I.55 I.53 - - - - -
1.0 2.0 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 - - - - - - - - -
1.5 2.0 2.25 2.38 2.48 _ - - - - --r - -*- - - I1 Ll
2.0 2.0 2.66 2.91 - - - - - - - - - - - -
2.5 2.5 3.17 3.50 - _------_- _I-
3.0 3.0 3.70 4.12 - _ - - - - - - - - - - ,
‘I.60 1.55 I.50 I.46 1.43 I.40 1.37 1.32 I.18 I.10 1.05 B
NOTE - Intermediate values may be obtained by interpolation. h +s

TABLE D-5 ‘COEFFICIENT OF EFFECTIVE LENGTHS &, FCR COLUMNS WITH TOP END FREE
AND BOTTOM END EFFECTIVELY HELD IN POSITION AND RESTRAINED
AGAINST ROTATION
C OEFFICIENTS El FOR h/it EQUAL TO
Cl ,
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 I.2 I.4 I.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 5.0 IO 20’

0 2.0 2.0 .2.0 2.0 20 20 2.0 2.0 2.0 20 2.0 2.0 20 2.0 20
0.5 2.0 214 2.24 2.36 2.47 2.57 267 2.76 285 294 3.02 - - - -
1.0 20 273 3.13 3.44 3.74 4.00 - - - - - - - - -
1.5 3.0 3.77 4.35 4.86 - - - - - - - - - - - t,
20 4.0 4.90 5.67 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -
25 5.0 6.08 7.00 _ _ _ _ _ _’ _ - _ _ _ -
3.0 6.0 7.25 _ _ _ _ - - _ _ _ - _ _ -

NOTE - Intermediate values may be obtained by interpolation.

P A R T Vl STRUCNRAL DESIGN--SEIXWN 4 SWXL

 TABLE D-6 VALUES OF i,, i, AND i,
(cewr D-2. I)
- .
D EGREE OF E N D COLUUN
SL
No R ESTRAINT ’
SKETCH
2, k, PAMMETES
‘OR ALb CASES

iff&tivc\y held in 2, = I,, I, = i,, il, = it*

I
o&ion a n d fes- where irr is taken here ~II is takes where XII is taken
rained against from Table D-2 from Table D-2 from Table P2
otation at both
IIdS.

e
A

_ _ _ _
b) lffcctivcly held i n kl,= k,, kL= i,, k, = kn
bosition a t both I
where kg, is taken here kit is taker where 21, is taken
nds and restrained from Table D-3 from Table D-3 from Table D-3
gains1 rotation at
lottom end only. I

I
,

- _
4 3ffectively held ir k, = k, Xl = I, k, = L I
rosition and res where z,
is taken where 1, is taken where xl is taken
rained ap8insl from Table D-4 from Table D-4 from Table D-4 with
,olation 81 bottom with C, = 0 with Cr = 0
:nd. and top end LJ
7, =
rid against rota. LI + L2 J
ion but not held in
position.

~ffcctively held in
_ -
4 kr - 2 kz = 2 k, = k,
m&ion and rcs- where XI is taken
rained rgainsl from Table D-5 with
utation at bottom
mnd. and top end
Either held sgainsl
ntation nor @ml
ran&ion.

VI22 NATIONAL WUUNG CoDI OF I N D I A

 i--

APPENDIX E
(C/ause 7.2.4./)
LiST OF REFERENCES ON THE ELASTIC FLEXURAL TC3RSIONAL BUCKLING OF
STEEL BEAMS

Textbooks References Wor to 1%1

T1h40SHENKO(S P)and GERE(J M). The- LEE (G C), A survey of literature on the lat-
ory of elastic stability. Ed 2, 1%1. McGraw- eral instability of beams. Welding Research
HiU, New York. Council Bulktin, Sarics No. 63, Aug 1960.

BLEICH (F), Buckling strength of metal

structures, 1952. ‘McGraw- HiIl, New York.
JOHNSTON (B G), Ed. Guide tddesigncrite-
ria for metal compression-members. Column
-Research Council. 1966, Ed 2. John WiIey,
New York.
GALAMBOS (T V). Structural mcmbersand
frames. 1968. Prentice-Hail, New Jersey.
Handbook of structural stability. Column
Research Committee of Japan. 1971. Corona
Publishing Co, Tokyo.
Abt ( H G) and Bulson (P S). Background to
buckling.
Values of Elastic Critical Loa& and E#ective
Length Factors
TRAHAIR (N S). The bending strasa rules
of the draft AS CA 1. J Inst. Engra Aust. 38;
No. 6, June 1966.
TRAHAIR (N S). Elastic stability of I-beam
clement in rigid-joi~td frames. J Inst. Engrs
Aust. 38; No. 7-8. July-Aug 19ti, 171.
TRAHAIR (N S). Elastic stability of propped
cantilevers. Civ Eng Trans, institution of
Engineers, Australia, V CE 10. No. 1; April
]968.

Stability of strucfure under static and Safe load tables for laterally unsupported
dynamic loads. American Society of Civil angles. Australian Institute of Steel
Engineers, 1977 Ed. Construction.

APPENDIX F
(Ctause 10.2.3.2)
PLASTIC PROPERTIES OF INDIAN STANDARD MEDIUM
WEIGHT BEAMS [VI-6(23)]

DESiLiNA. WEI- SEc- DEPTH WIDTII THICK- TItICK— RACYIOF pus. SHAPE &D
sEC-
r{osl CiHT TIONAL OF NEss NESS GYnA-
FAC- T T
AREA sTc- FLAN- OF TION TION TIC
TION F;~N- WEB ~?5s .
Mow. SSG
(D) :) tiE (1) Lus TtON
(n MODU-
z
LUS
6
(1) (4) (6) (8) (9) ( 10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
k%:2 mm
(5)
mm mm
7.5
(7)
mm
4.5
cm
4.14
cm cm) cml
1.16 9.33 22.2
ISMB 103 11.5 !4.7 100 70 1.55 56.4 58.6
ISMB !25 13.4 17.0 I 23 70 8.0 5.0 5.16 1.51 ‘71,2 813 1.15 8.75 2S.0
ISMB 150 IS 19.1 150 7s 8.0 5.0 6.13 1.57 95.7 I 10 1.15 9.3830.0
ISMB 175 19.5 24.9 175 85 9.0 5.8 7.13 1,76 144.3 166 1.15 9.44 s. 17
ISMB 200 25.4 32.3 2iN 100 10.8 5.7 8.32 2.15 224 2S4 1.13 9.26 3s.1
ISMB 225 31.2 39.7 225 I 10 11.8 6.5 9.31 2.34 * 348 1.14 9.32 34.6
ISMB 250 37.3 47.6 250 125 12.5 6.9 10,40 2.65 410 466 1.14 10.00 36.2
ISMB 300 46.1 58.7 300 140 13.1 7.7 12,40 2.86 599 683 1.14 10.7 3s.9
ISM B 350 52.4 66.7 350 140 14.2 8. I 14.30 2.84 779 w 1.14 9.$6 43.2
ISMS 400 61.6 78.5 400 140 t6.o 8.9 -16.2 2;82 I On I 176 IJ5 8.7s 44.9
ISMB 450 72.4 92.3 450 150 17.4 9.4 18.2 3.01 I 350 1533 1.14 8.62 47.9
ISMB 500 86.9 .111, m 1$0 [7.2. 10.2 20.2 3.52 I 810 207S 1.1s 10.47 *.O
ISMB 550 MM 132 S50 NM J9.3 I 1.2 22.2 3.73 23S0 2712 1.1s 9.66 49. I
ISMB 600 123 1% 600 2to 20.8 12.0 24.2 4.12 3060 3511 1.1s 10.10 So.o
 APPENDIX G
. ‘j Clause 13. I. I)
GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR STEELWORK TENDERS AND CONTRACTS
G-O. GENERAL
G-0.1 The recommendations given in this
Appendix are in line with those generally
adopted for steelwork construction and are
meant for general information.
G-0.2 These recommendations do not form
part of the requirements of the standard and
compliance with these is not necessary for the
purpose of complying with this Code.
G-0.3 The recommendations are unsuitable
for inclusion,as a block requirement in a con-
tract, but in drawing up a contract the points
mentioned should be given consideration.
G-l. EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION
G-l.1 Before the steelwork design is com-
menced, the building designer should be satis-
fied that the planning of the building, its
dimensions and other principal factors meet
the requirements of the building owner and
comply with regulations of all authorities con-
cerned. Collaboration of building designer
and steelwork designer should begin at the
outset of the prqject by joint consideration of
the plamting and of such questions as the
stanchion spacing, materials to be used for the
construction, and depth of basement.
G-2. INFORMATION REQUIRED BY
THE STEELWORK DESIGNER
G-2. I General
4 Site plans showing in plan and elevation
of the proposed location and main dimen-
sions of the building or structure;
b) Ground levels, existing and proposed;
cl Parttculars of buildings or other con-
structions which may have to remain on
the actual site of the new building or
structure during the erection of the
steelwork;
4 Particulars of adjacent buildings affect-
ing, or affected by the new work;
d Stipulation regarding the erection
sequence or time schedule;,
WY
0 Conditions affecting the position or con-
tinuity of members;
Id Limits of length and weight of steel
members in transit and erection;
h) Drawings of the sub-structure, proposed
or existtng, showing:
9 levels of stanchion, foundations, if
already determined;
ii) any details affecting the stanchion
bases or anchor bolts;
iii) permissible bearing pressure on the
foundation; and
iv) provisions for grouting (see 12.16).
In the case of new work, the substructure
should be designed in accordance with the
relevant codes dealing with foundations
and substructure;
j) The maximum wind velocity appropriate
to the site (see IS: 875-1964); and
k) Environmental factors, such as proximity
to sea coast, and corrosive atmosphere.
Reference to bye-laws and regulations
affecting the steelwork design and
construction.
G-2.2 Further Informarion Relating to
Buildings
a) Plans of the floors and roof with principal
dimesions, elevations and cross sections
showing heights between floor levels.
b) The occupancy of the floors and the posi-
tions-of any special loads should be given.
c) The building drawings, which should be
fully dimensioned, should preferably be
to the scale of I to lOOand should show all
stairs, fire-escapes, lifts, etc, suspended
ceilings, flues and ducts for heating and
ventilating. Doors and windows should
be shown, as the openings may be taken
into account in the computation of dead
load.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 Requirements should be given in I -spect
of any maximum depth of beams or mini-
mum head room.
Large-scale details should be given of any
special features affecting the steelwork.
d) The inclusive weight per ml of walls.
floors, roofs, suspended ceilings, stairs
and partitions, or particulars of their con-
struction and finish for the computation
of dead load.
The plans should indicate the floors
which are to be designed to carry parti-
tions. Where the layout of partitions is
not known, or a given layout is liable to
alteration, these-facts should be specially
noted so that allowance may be made for
partitions in any position.
e) The superimposed loads on the floors
appropriate to the occupancy, as given in
IS: 875-1964 or as otherwise required.
0 Details of special loads from cranes, run-
ways? tips, lifts, bunkers, tanks, plant and
equipment.
Ix) The grade of fire resistance appropriate to
the occupancy as may be required.
G-3 INFORMATION REQUIRED BY
TENDERER (IF NOT ALSO THE
DESIGNER)
G-3. I General
4 All information listed under G-2.1;
b) Climatic conditions at site--seasonal vari-
ations of temperature, humidity, wind
velocity and direction;
c) Nature of soil. Results of the investiga-
tion of sub-soil at site of building or
structure;
d) Accessibility of kite and details of power
supply;
Whether the steelwork contractor will be
e)
required to survey the site and set out or
check the building or structure lines,
foundations and levels;
Setting-out plan of foundations, stan-
0
chions and levels of bases;
l3) Cross sections and elevations of the steel
structure, as necessary, with large-scale
details of special features;
?MT VI mUCI’UBAL DESIGN-SLCTION 6 STEEL
h) Whether the connections are to be bolted,
riveted or wetded. Particular attention
should be drawn to connections of a spe-
cial nature. such as turned bolts, high
strength friction grip bolts, long rivets
and overhead welds:
j) Quality of steel (see 4). and provisions for
identification;
k) Requirements in respect of protective
paintings at works and on site, galvaniz-
ing or cement wash;
m) Approximate ‘dates for commencement
and completion of erection;
Details of any tests which have to be made
n)
during the course of erection or upon
completion; and
P) Schedule of qtiantities. Where the tend-
erer is required to take off quantities, a list
should be @en of the principal items to
be included in the schedule.
G-3.2 Additional information Relating to
Buildings
a) Schedule of stanchions giving sizes,
lengths and typical details of brackets,
joints, etc;
b) Plan of grillages showing sizes, lengths
and, levels of grillage beams and particu-
lars of any stiffeners required;
c) Plans of floor beams showing sizes,
lengths and levels eccentricities and end
moments. The beam reactions and details
of the type of connection required should
be shown on the plans;
d) Plan of roof steelwork. Fora flat roof, the
plan should give particulars similar to
those of a floor plan. Where the roof is
pitched, details should be given of trusses,
portals, purlins, bracing, etc;
e) The steelwork drawings should prefera-
bly be to a scale of I to 100 and should
give identification marks against all
members; and
0 Particulars of holes required for services,
pipes, machinery fixings, etc. Such holes
should preferably be drilled at works.
G-3.3 Irformation Relating to Execution of
Building Work
G-3.3.1 Supply of materials.
VP
G-3.3.2 Weight of steelwork for payment.
G-3.363 Wastage of steel.
G-3.3.4 Insurance. freight and transport
from shop to site.
G-3.3.3 Site facilities for erection.
G3.3.U Tools and plants.
G-3.3.7 Mode and terms of payment.
G-3.3.8 Schedules.
G-3.3.9 F ORCED M AJEURE - Clauses and
provisions for liquida!ion and damages fbr
delay in completion.
G-3.3. IO Escalation clauses
G - 4 DETAIL.lN(i
G-4. I In addition to the number ol‘copies ot
the approved drawings or details required
under the contract. dimensioned shop drau-
ings or details should be submitted in dupli-
cate to the engineer who should retain one
copy and return the other to the steel supplier
or fabricators with his r‘omments. if any.
G-5 T I M E SCHEi)ilI.l.
G-5.1 As the dates on which subsequent
trades can commence, depend on the progress
of erection of the steel framing. the time sche-
dule for the latter should be carefully drawn
up and agreed to by the parties concerned at a
joint meeting.
G-6 PROCEDURE ON SITE
G-6.1 .The steelwork contractor should be
responsible for the positroning and levelling of
all steelwork. Any checking orapproval ofthe
setting out b) the general contractor or the
engineer should not relieve the steelwork con-
tractor 01’ his responsibilities in this respect.
VI476
G-7 I N S P E C T I O N
G-7.0 References may be made to good prac-
tice [VI-6(24)]
G-7.1 Access to Conrracror’s Works- ThL
contractor should offer facilities for the
inspection of the work at all stages.
G - 7 . 2 Inspecrion qj’ Fahricarion -- Unless
otherwise agreed. the inspection, should be
carried out at the place of fabrication. The
contractor should be responsible for the accu-
racy of the work and for any error which may
be subsequently discovered.
G-7.3 Inspection on Site - To facilitate
inspection, the contractor should, during all
working hours. ha\e a foreman or properly
accredited ctiarge hand available on the site.
together Nith a complete se1 ofcontract draw-
ings and any further drawings and instruc-
tions u hich may have been issued from time to
time.
G-8 MAINTENANCE
G-8.1 Gerwrol .- Where steelwork is to be
encased in solid concrete. brickwork or
masonry. the question of maintenance should
not arise, but where steelwork is to be housed
in hollow fire protection or is to be unpro-
tected. particularly where the steelwork is
exposed to a corroding agent. the question of
parntlnp or protective treatment of the steel-
work should be given careful consideration at
the’ construction stage. having regard to the
special circumstances Of the case.
C-8.2 Connections - Whereconnectionsare
exposed to a corroding agent. they should be
periodicall), Inspected. and any corroded
parts should be thoroughly cleaned and
painted.
G-8.2.1 Where bolted connections are not
solidly encased and are subject to vibratory
effects of machinery or plant. they should be
penodically inspected and all bolts tightened.
NAIIONAL WILDING CODE O F INDIA
 LIST OF STANDARDS
?he following list records those standards which are acceprabk as ‘goodpracrice’and ‘accepted
srondards’in the fulfilmenr of the requiremenrs of the Code. The laresr version of a srandardshall
be odopred at rhe rime of the enforcement of rhe Code. The standards listed may be used by rhe
Aurhority as a guide in conformance with rhe requirements bf the referred clauses in the Code.
h the following lisr, rhe number appearing in rhe first column within parenrheses indicates the
numbtr vf rhe reference irr rhis parrlsecrion.
(I) IS : 801-1975 Code of piactice for use of
cold formed light gauge steel structural
members in general building construction
(firsr revision).
IS : 8 I I- I%5 Specification for cold formed
light gauge structural steel sections
(revised).
(2) lS:812-1957 Glossary of terms relating
to welding and cutting of metals.
(3) lS:696-1972 Code of practice for gen-
eral engineering drawings [second
revision).
IS : 962-1967 Code of practice for archi-
tectural and building drawings (fi’rsr
revision).
(4) lS:813-1961 Scheme of symbols for
welding
( 5 ) Slruc,rural Steel
IS: 226-1975 Specification for structural
steel (standard quality) v(/th revision)
IS : 961-1975 Specification for structural
steel (high tensile) (second revision)
IS: 1977-1975 Specificationforstructural
steel (ordinary quality) (second revision)
IS : 2062-1980 Specification for structu-
ral steel (fusion welding quality) (second
revision)
IS : 8500-1977 Specification for weldable
structural steel (medium and high
strength qualities)
IS: 1161-1979 Specification for steel
tubes for structural purposes (third
revision)
Rivets
IS: 1929-1982 -Specification for hot
forged steel riyets for hot closing ( I2 to 36
mm diameter) firsr revision)
P A R T VI SRUCIIJRAL DLSIGN-SRCllON 4 SI’SEL
IS : 2155-1982 Specification lor cold
forged solid steel rivets for hot closing (6
to 16 mm diameter) (firsr’revision).
IS : 1149-1982 Specification for high ten-
sile steel rivet bars for structural purposes
(third revision)
Welding Consumables
IS : 8 I4 Specification for covered elec-
trodes for metal arc welding of structural
steel
IS :814 (Part I)-1974 Row welding
products other than sheets (/ourrh
revision)
IS: 814 (Part 2)-1974 For welding
sheets gourrh revision)
IS : 1395-1982 Specification for low and
medium alloy steel covered electrodes for
manual metal arc welding (thirdrevision)
IS : 1278-1972 Specification for filler
rods and wires for gas welding (second
revision)
IS : 7280-1974 Specification for base
wire electrodes for submerged arc weld-
ing of structural steels
IS : 3613-1974 Specification for accep-
tance tests for wire-flux combinations for’
submerged-arc welding of structural
steels first revision)
IS : 6419-1971 Specification for welding
rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded
arc welding of structural steel
IS : 6560-1972 Specification for moly-
bdenum and chromium-molybdenum
low alloy steel welding rodsand base elec-
trodes for gas shielded arc welding
Steel Castings
IS : 1030-1982 Specification for carbon
steel castings for general engineering pur-
poses (Grade 23-45) (third revision)
VI,”
 Bob and Nuts
IS : 1363 Specification for hexagon head
bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C
IS :.I363 (Part I)-1984 Hexagon head
bolts (site range M5 to M36) (second
revision)
IS : 1363 (Part 2)-1984 Hexagon head
screws (size range MS to M36) (second
revision)
IS : 1364 Specification for hexagon head
bolts, screws and nuts of product grade A
and B
IS : I.364 (Part 2)-1983 H e x a g o n
screws (sire range M3 to M36) fsewnd
revihion)
IS : 1367-1967 ‘Iechnical supply condi-
tion\ for threaded steel fastener,
IS : 3640-1982 Specification for hexagon
Sit bolts (Jrst rebY.\ion).
IS : 3757-1972 Specification f’or high-
tensile friction grip bolts (firsr retision)
IS : 6623-1972 Specification for high ten-
sile friction grip nut\
IS : 6639-1972 Specification for hexagon
bolts for steel structures
Washers
IS : 5369-1975 General requirements for
plain washers and lock washers (/irsr
revision)
IS : 5370-1969.Specification for plain
washers with outside diameter== 3 x inside
diameter
IS : 5372-1975 Specification l’or taper
washers for channels (ISMC) (first
re\*ision)
IS : 5374-1975 Specification for taper
u-ashers f o r l - b e a m s (ISMB) (firs!
re\:ision).
IS : 6610-1972 Specification for heavy
washers for steel structures
IS : 6649-1972 Specification for high ten-
sile friction grip washers
(6) IS : 104-1979 Specification for ready
mixed paint. brushing. zinc chrome.
priming (second revision)
,7g
IS : 123-1962 Specification for ready
mixed paint, brushing, finishing, semi-
gloss, for general purposes, to Indian
Standard colours
No. 445 Venetian red
No. 446 Red oxide
No. 448 Deep Indian red and red oxide
(colour unspecified) (revised)
No. 449 Light purple brown
No. 451 Chocolate
No. 473 Gulf red
IS : 2074-1979 Specification for ready
mixed paint, air drying, red oxide-zinc
chrome. priming (firsr revision)
(7) IS : IO24- I979 Code of practice for use of
welding in bridges and structures subject
to dynamic loading [first revision).
(8) !S : i 3h4- 1967 Specificatton for hexagon
head bolt\. scrrBs and nuts of product
grade A and H
IS : 1367-1967 Technical supply conds
tions for threaded fasteners fir-c:
revision).
(9) IS : 114%1982 Specification for hot-
rolled steel rivet bars (up to 40 mm dlarne-
t e r ) f o r s t r u c t u r a l purposzs (rhrrd
revision)
(IO)IS : 4000-1967 Code of practice for
assembly of structural joints usrng hrph
tensile friction grip fasteners
(I I) IS : 816-1969 Code of practice for use of
metal arc welding for general construc-
tion in mild steel (firsr retision)
IS : 1323-1982 Code of practice for osy-
acetylene welding for structural work in
mild steel (second re\*ision)
(12) IS : 1363-1984 Specification for hexagon
head bolts. screuIs and nuts of product
grade C (Part I to 3) (second re\.ision)
(13) IS : 816-1969 Code of practice for use of
metal arc welding for general construc-
tion in mild steel (firsr ret-isiotIJ
IS : 9595 1980 Recommendations for
metal arc welding of carbon and carbon
manganese steels
(14)SP6:(6)-1972 IS1 Handbook for StrUCtu-
ral Engineers: Part 6 Application of plas-
tic theory in design of steel structures
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDtA
(15) IS : 1977-1975 Specification for structu-
r;tI steel (ordinary quality) [sf*cont/
~rcJvi.viilll)
(16) IS : 3Y35-1966 (‘ode 0i’ praclicc for com-
posjtc construction
( 17) IS : 72 I5 1074 Specification for tolcran-
cc\ It\r I;rhrication of htcel 4tructurcs
(under rrvision)
‘l‘olcrsnces for erection of steel struc-
t ures (uudcr pwpururion)
(IX) IS : Y IY Recommendation for limits and
fits for engineering
IS : Y 19 (Part I )-I963 General engineer-
ing (/i'r.\i rrhion)
(IY) IS X lh-1969 C’odb of’ practice lor u\c o f
m e t a l a r c welding lor general con\truc-
lion in mild \fcel f/i’r.sr w\*ision)
IS : XIY-lY.57 C‘ode of practlcc lor rcsist-
ancc spot welding tar light assemblies in
mild ael
IS : 1024-IV79 Code of practw for use of
welding in bridges and btructuws hubjcct
to d) namic loading (/tr.sr rr\Vsron)
!S : 1261-iY5Y C’odc ,)f practice for seam
welding in mild \tecl
!S : l323-IYH? Code of practice for oxy-
acctylcne aelding for structural Hark in
mild steel {.~c~ond rc,\isron)
IS : 9595lY80 Rccommcndatlons for
metal arc welding of carbon and carbon
mangancsc steel
(20) IS : 8 I7-.I966 Code of practice for traln-
FAIT VI SlXUCNJtAL DESIGN-SUJTION-4’ =EtZL
ing and testing of metal arc welders
(revi.&)
IS : 1393-1961 Code of practice fortrain-
ing and testing of oxy-acetylene welders
IS : 7307 (Part I j-1974 Specification for
approval tests of welding procedures:
Part I Fusion welding of steel
IS : 7310 (Part I)-1974 Specification for
approval testing of welders working to
approval welding procedures: Part I
Fusion welding of steel
IS : 7318 (Part I)-1974 Specification for
approval tests for welders when welding
procedure approval is not required: Part
I Fusion welding of’ steel
(21) IS : 1477 Code of practice for painting of
ferrous metals in bui!dings
IS : 1477 (Part I)-1971 Pre-trea!ment
Ifj:rst revision).
IS : 1477 (Part 2)-1971 Painting first
revi.uion).
(22) IS : 7205-1973 Safety code for erection
on structural steel work
(23)IS : 808 (Part I)-1978 Dimensions for
hot-rolled steel sections: Part I MB series
(beams) (.recond revision)
(24) Handbook for fabrication, erection and
inspection of steel structures (under
preparation)
IS : 7215-1974 Tolerancesforfabrication
of steel structures.
“129
NATIONALBUILDINGCODE
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
SECTION 7 PREFABRICATION AND
SYSTEMSBUILDING

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS

'0. FOREWORD .*. 2

I. SCOPE ... 3
2. TERMINOLOGY *.. 3
3. MATERIALS. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ... 3’
4. MODULAR CO-ORDINATION, ARCHITECTURAL
TREATMENT AND FINISHES ...
COMPONENTS ..*
f’REFABKICATION SYSTEMS AND STRUCTURAL SCHEMES . . .

7. JOI X7-S ...

8. TESTS FOR COMPONEN I-S, STRUCTURES ...
hlANUFAC1‘IJRE. STORAGE, TRANSPORT AND ERECTION
OF PRECASl. F.f.EMENTS ... 9
10. EQUIPMEN r ... 18
Il. PREFABRICAI~ED STRUCTURAL UNITS ... 18

PAST V I STltUCTURAL D-SIGN - SDCllON ‘I PREFABllICATlON A N D SYSTIMS BUWC VI.,!

PART VI STRUCTURAL ,DESIGN
SECTION 7 PKEFARKICAI-ION ANI) SYSTEMS BWIL.DING

0. FOREWORD
0.1 Prefabrication. though desirable in terms of large scale housing. has yet to take a firm hold in
the country. Two aspects of prefabricatton specifically to be borne in mind are the system13 be
adopted for the different categories of buildmgs and the sires of then components. Here the
principle of modular co-ordination is of value andIts use is recommended.
0.2 Advantages of recent trends in prefabrication have been taken note of and alsothe hazards
attended to such constructlon. A few recommendatrons on the nerd to avoid ‘progressrvc c~I!;~pse’
of the structure have been mcluded This has become necessarym view 01 such collapses m the
past. A specific pomt to be borne m mind, therefore, is the need to make the structure reasonably
safe agamst such a collapse.
0.3 Prefabricated construction, being a new technique, some of the essentialrrqu:rernents for the
manufacture of the prefabricated components and elements are also includedm th:s section.
0.4 Since the aim of prefabrication is to effecteconomy. improvement in quality and speed in
construction, the selection of proper materials for prefabrication is also an important factor in the
popularisation of this new technique. The use of locally avarlable materials with required
characteristics and those material which, due to their innate characteristics likehghuwetght,easy
workability, thermal insulation, non-combustibihty, etc. effect economy and improved quality
may be tried. However, this section pertains to prefab elements withcementatious materials.
0.5 The design of prefabricated buildings shall include provision for all installations of piping,
wiring and accessories for service equipment to be installed in the building.
0.6 This section was first published in 1970. In thisrevtsion the following main changes have
been made:
a) A brief provision regarding importance of architectural treatment and finishes as applicable
to prefabricated buildings is included;
b) A brief clause is added on the requirements of materials for use in prefabrication;
c) The clause on prefabrication systems and structural elements is elaborated;
d) The clausq on testing of component.s is now revised to include testing of structure or part 01
structure;
e) A brief clause on the manufacture of cellular concrete is added.

VI-t
2 NATIONAI. BUll.DlhC CODE O F INDIA
1. SCOPE
1.1 This section gives recommendations
regarding modular planning, component
sizes, joints, manufacture, storage, transport
and erection of prefabricated elements for use
in buildings.
2; TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this section, the
following definitions shall apply.
BASIC MODULE - The fundamental module
used in modular co-ordination, the size of
which is selected for general application to
building and its components.
NOTE - The value of the b&z mbdule has been chosen as
100 mm for the maximum flexibility and convenience.
The symbol for the basic module is M.
C E L L U L A R CONCRETE -The material
ccnsisting of an inorganic binder (such as lime
or cement or both) in combination with a
finely ground material containing siliceous,
acid (such as sand), gas generating material
(for example, aluminium powder), water and
harmless additives (optional); and steam
cured under high pressure in autoclaves.
COMPONENTS - A building product formed
as a distinct unit having specified sizes in three
dimensions.
C OMPOSITE M EMBERS - Structural
members comprising.prefabricated structural
units of steel, prestressed concrete or fabrication, the following special character-
reinforced concrete and cast in-situ concrete
connected together in such a manner that they
act monolithically.
INCREMENTS - Difference between two
homologous dimensions *of components of
successive sizes.
M ODULE - A unit of size used in
dimensional co-ordination.
MODULAR CO-ORDINATION - Dimensional
co-ordination employing the basic module or
a multimodule.
NOTE - The purporer of modular coordination arc:
a) to reduce the kricty of cqmponmt rizcs produad,
and
b) to’allow the building da’ er greater flexibility in trend is to use concrete, steel, treated wood,
the arrangement of corn F;%”ncnts.
M O D U L A R 6~1~ -A r e c t a n g u l a r c o - section pertains to prefab concrete elements.
ordinate reference system in which the
-distance between consecutive lines is the basic 3.2 Plans and Specfficorions - Complete set
module or a multimodule. Thismultimodule of drawings as specified in Part II
may differ for each of the two’dimensions of Administration ‘shall be submitted to the
the grid.
?ADT VI SYRUCNIRAL DESIGN - !3KllON 7 ?REFMlUCAllON
MULTIMODULE - A module whose size is a
selected multiple of the basic module.
PREFABRICATE - To fabricate components
or assembled units prior to erection or
installation in a building.
PREFABRICATED BU I L D I N G - T h e
completely assembled and erected building, of
which. the structural parts consist of
prefabricated individual, units or assemblies
using ordinary or controlled materials,
including service facilities; and in which the
service equipment may be either prefabricated
or constructed in-situ.
SHEAR CONNECTORS - Structural elements,
such as anchors, studs, channels and spirals,
intended to transmit the horizootal shear
between the prefabricated member and the
cast .in-situ concrete and also to prevent
vertical separation at the interface.
UNIT- Building material formed as a simple
article with all three dimensions specified,
complete in itself but intended to be part of a
compound unit or complete building.
Examples are brick block, tile, etc.
3. MATERIALS, PLANS AND
SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Mureriuis - All materials shall conform
to Part .V’Building materials.
3.1.1 While choosing the materials for pre-
istics are to be considered:
a) Easy availability;
b) Light weight for easy handling and
transport, and to economise on sections
and sizes of foundations;
c) Thermal insulation property;
d) Easy workability;
e) Durability in all weather conditions;
f) Non-combustibility;
g) Economy in cost, and
h) Sound insulation.
3.1.2 The materials used in prefab
components can be various and the modern
aluminium, cellular concrete, light weight
concrete,ceramic products, etc. However, this
Authority for approval.
AND SYSYEMS BUILDING VI-7-y
3.2.1 Such drawings shall describe the
elemcnrs of the structure or assembly
including all required data of physical
properties of component materials.
3.2.2 Details of connecting joints shall be
giGen to an enlarged scale.
3.2.3 Site or shop location of services, such as
installation of piping. wiring or other
accessories shall be shown separately,
32.4 The drawings shall also clearly indicate
locatibn of handling arrangements for lifting
and handling the pref’abricated elements.
4. MODC;I.AR C O - O R D I N A T I O N ,
ARCHITECTL!RAL TREATMENT
AND FINISHES
4. I Moduiar Co-ordination -- The basic
module is to be adopted. After adopting this.
further work is necessary to outline suitable
range of muitimodules with greater
increments, often referred to as preferred
Increments. A set of rules as detailed below
would be adequate for meeting the
rcquirerncnt? of conventional and pre-
fahrlcated <onstru,ction. ?‘hese rules relate to
rtic I~,llowing haslc elements:
l’hc planning grid in both directions of
I!I~ hor\/c.nrai plan shall be:
I) 3 btl for residential and institutional
buildings:
2) for industrial buildings:
15 M for hpans up to 12 m.
30 M for spans between 12 m and
IK m. and
60 M for spans over I8 m.
l’he centre lines of ioad bearing walls
shall coincide with the grid lines:
In case of external walls. the grid lines
shall coincide with the cenire tine of the
wall or a line on Ihe wall 5 cm from the
internal face;
I-he planning module in the vertical
direction shall be I M up to and includin
a height of 2.8 M: above the height o?
2.8.m. it shdll be 2 M;
Preferred increments for sill heights.
doors. windows and other fenestration
shall be I M; and
In the case of internal columns, the grid
lines shall’coincide with the centre lines
of columns. In case of external columns
and columns near the lift and stair wells,
ihe grid lines shall coincide with centre
lines of ihe column in the topmost storey
or a line in the column !? cm from the
internal face of’ the column in the
topmost 5torey.
4.2 /J rchitecwrol Treatmew ‘and Finishe --
The process of architectural design requires
the designer to relate tlie resources of knowledge
of building technology to the human, social
and cultural conditions dt a particular stage of
economic growth. In doing this the designer
seeks to make a comprehensible statement out
of tangible matter and intansle ideas
(bricks, timber, steel and cement plus the
social order and cultural disciplines) and
expresses this unity in plastic form. Adoption
of industrlalised approach in the execution OI
building programmes on mass scale he’comes
necessary if the objective is to achieve
economy in cost, efficiency of design,
reduction in time for construction. etc. This in
turn requires development of prefabrication
techniques which does necessarily mean that it
is not possible to achieve or evolve
aesthetically sati+‘ying designs. In fact, a
careful and judicious handling of materials
and use of finishes on a prefabricated building
can help the designer a great deal in ensuring
that the appearance of the building is not
monotqnous and unappealing. The purpose
of finishes and architectural treatment is not
only to give prefabricated buildings an
individual character but also to effect better
performance, and greater user satisfaction.
Treatment and finishes have to be specified
keeping in view the requirements of
protection, function and aesthetics of internal
and extcrntil spaces and surfaces. Thinking on
these aspects must be incorporated right at the
design inception stage so that the entire
building or complex of buildings can be
conceived of in totality - in terms of
architectural expression, structural design,
function, etc.
While deciding the type of architectural
treatment and finishes for prefabricated
buildings, the following points should be kept
in view:
4 Suitability for mass production
techniques;
b) Recognition of the constraints imposed
by the level of workmanship available;
cl Possibility of using different types of
finishes;
d) l‘ht: use of finishes and architectural
treatment for the creation of a particular
architectural character in individual
buildings and in groups of buildings by
the use of colour, texture. projections
and recesses on surfaces, etc;
e) The incorporation of structural
elements likeJoists, columns, beams, etc.
as architectural ieatures and the
treatment of these for better overall
performance and appearance;
 0 Simultaneous design of structural sub-
system and finishes;
f3) Satisfactory finishing of surfaces; and
h) The use of light weight materials to
effect economy in the structural system.
Some of the normally acceptable methods of
finishes are:
9) Moulded concrete surface to design,
b) Laid-on finishing tiles fixed during
casting,
cl Finishes obtained by washing, tooling,
grinding, grooving of hardened
concrete,
4 Exposed aggregates in-sttu, and
e) Finishes added in-situ.
5. COMPONENTS
5.1 The preferred dimensions of precast
elements shall be as follows:
a) F LOORING AND R OOFING SCHEME -
Precast slabs or other precast structural
flooring units:
1) LENGTH - Nominal length shall be in
multiples of 3 M;
2) WIDTH -Nominal width shall be in
multiples of I M; and
3) OVERALL THICKNESS - Overall
thickness (thrt is, the thickness of
structural flooring units plusin-situ
concrete decking) shall be in multi-
ples of M/4.
b) BEAMS
,I) LENGTH -Nominal length shall be
in multiples of 3 M;
2) WIDTH -Nominal width shall be in
multiples of M/4; and
3) OVERALL DEPTH -Overall depth
of the floor zone (that is, from soffit
of the beam to the top of in-situ deck-
ing) shall be in multiples of M/4.
4 COLUMNS
1) HEIGHT-Overall height (that is,
floor to floor or the clear height) shall
be in multiples of 1 M for heights up
to 2.8 m; and for heights above 2.8 m.
it shall be in multiples of 2 M; and
2) LATERAL DIMENSIONS -~eralllate-
ral dimension or diameter of columns
shall be in multiples of M/4.
d) WALLS
THICKNESS - The nominal thickness of
walls shall be in multiples of M/4.
e) S T AI RC AS E
WIDTH - Nominal width. shall be in
multiples of 1 M.
PAD1 w Sl’RUCTURAL DESIGN - SECTION 7 ?REFABRICAllON AND SYSTEMS
fI LINTELS
I) LENGTH -Nominal length shall be
in multiples of I M;
2) WIDTH - Nominal width shall be in
multiples of M/4; and
3) DEPTH - Nominal depth shall be in
multiples of M/4.
g) SUNSHADES; CHAJJA PROJECTIONS
I) LEwXH~Nominal length shall be in
multiples of 1 M.
2) PROJECTION - Nominal length shall
be in multiples of I M.
S.2 Tolerances on the dimensions of
components shall be as follows:
a) L ENGTH - 20. I percent subject to a
minimum of ?5 mm and a maximum of
ltl0 mm.
b) C R O S S- SECTIONAL D IMENSIONS -
53 m or +O.I percent, whichever is
greater.
4 STRAIGHTNESS OF Bow - I; 750 of the
length subject to a minimum off5 mm
and a maximum of -+20 mm.
4 S QUARENESS -When considering the.
squareness of the corner, the longer of
the two adjacent sides being checked
shall be taken as the base line. The
shorter side shall not vary in length from
the perpendicular by more than 5 mm.
For the purpose of this requirement, any
error due to lack of straightnessshah be
ignored; squareness shall be measured
with respect to the straight lines which
are nearly parallel with the features
being checked when nominal angle is
other than 90°; the included angle
between the check lines should be varied
accordingly.
e) TWIST - Any corner shall not be more
than the tolerance given below from the
plane containing the other three corners:
Up to 60 cm in width 5 mm
and up to 6 m in length
Over 60 cm in width and 10 mm
for any length
FLAT~~ESS - The maximum deviation
from a I .5m straight edge placed in any
position on a nominal plane surface
shall not exceed 5 mm.. ’
6. PREFABRICATION‘SYSTEMS AND
* STRUCTURAL SCHEMES
6.1 The word ‘system’ is referred to a
particular method of construction of
buildings using the prefabricated components
which are inter-related in-functions and are
produced to a set of instructions. With certain
5
l lJlLDlNC w-7-
constraints, several plans are possible, using
the same set of components. The degree of
flexibility varies from system to system.
However, in all the systems there is a certain
order and discipline.
6.2 The following characteristics, among
others, are to be considered in devising a
system:
Intensified usage of spaces;
Straight and simple walling scheme;
Limited sizes and numbers of
components;
d) Limited opening in bearing walls;
e) Regulated locations of partitions;
0 Standardized service and stair units;
g) Limited sizes of doors and windows with
regulated positions;
h) Structural clarity and efficiency;
j) Suitability for adoption in low rise and
high rise blocks;
k) Ease of manufacturing, storing and
transporting;
m)Speed and ease of erection; and
n) Simple jointing system.
6.3 Prefabrication Swtems - The system of
prefabricated construction depends on the
extent of the use of prefab components, their
materials. sizes and the technique adopted for
their manufacture and use in building.
6.3.i OWN PKEFAB SYSTEM -- This system
is based on the use of the basic structural
elements to form whole or part of a building.
The standard prefab concrete components
which can be used are:
a) Reinforced concrete channel units,
b) Hollow core slabs,
c) Hollow blocks and battens,
4 Precast planks and battens,
d Precast joists and tiles,
D Cellular concrete slabs,
IS) Prestressed; reinforced concrete slabs,
h) Reinforced/ prestressed concrete beams,
j) Reinforced/ prestressed concrete
columns,
k) Precast lintels and chujjas,
m) Reinforced concrete waffle slabs/shells,
n) Room size reinforced,! prestressed con-
crete panels,
p) Reinforced: prestressed concrete
walling elements, and
q) Reinforced: prestressed concrete
trusses.
VI-T-
6 NATIONAL
No rr -- The elements may be cast at the site or off the
sate.
Foundation for the columns could be of
prefabricated type or of the conventional cast
in-situ type depending upon the soil
conditions and loads; and the columns may
have hinged or fixed- base ccumections
depending upon the type of components used
and the method of design adopted:
6.3.1.1 There are two categories of open
prefab system depending on the extent of
prefabrication used in the construction as
given in 6.3.1.2 and 6.3.1.3.
6.3.1.2 P A R T I A L P R E F A B O P E N S Y S -
TEM - This system basically emphasises the
use of precast roofing and flooring
components and other minor elements like
lintels, chu@s, kitchen sills in conventional
building construction. The structural system
could be in the form of in-situ framework or
load bearing walls.
6.3. I .3 FULL PREFAB OPEN SYSTEM - In this
system almost all the structural components
are prefabricated. The filler walls may be of
bricks or of any other local material.
6.3.2 L ARGE P ANEL P R E F A B
SYSTEM -This system is based onthe useof
large prefab. components. The components
used are precast concrete large panels for
walls, floors, roofs, balconies, staircases,.etc.
The casting of the components could be at the
site or off the site.
Depending upon the extent of prefabrication,
this system can also lend itself to partial
prefab system and full prefab system.
4.3.2.1 Structural scheme with precast large
panel walls can be classified as:
a) CROSS WALL SYSTEM - In this scheme,
the cross walls are load hearing walls
whereas the facade walls are non-load
bearing. This system is suitable for high
rise buildings.
b) LONGITUDINALWALL SYSTEM - Inthis
case, cross walls are non-load bearing
whereas longitudinal walls are load
bearing walls. This system is suitable for
low rise buildings.
NOTE - A combination of the above systems with ali
load bearing walls can also be adopted.
6.?.2.2 Precast concrete walls could he:
a) H O M O GENEOUS WALLS-which could
be solid, hollow of ribbed; and
b) NON-HOMOGENEOUS WALLS -these
could be composite or sandwich panels.
BUILDING CODE OF IIQ)IA
6.3.2.3 Based on the structural functions of NOTE -This system derives its stability and stiffness
the walls. the walls could be classified as: from the box units which arc formed by four adjacent
walls. Walls arc jointed to make rigid connections among
a) load bearing walls, themselves. The box unit rests on plinth fodndation
b) non-load bearing walls, and which may be of conventional type or precast type.
c) shear wails
6.4 Design. Considerations - The precast
6.3:2.4 Based on their locations and structure should be analyzed as a monolithic
functional requirements the walls are also one and the joints in them designed to take the
classified as: forces of an equivalent discrete system.
external walls, which can be load Resistance’ to kofizontal loading shall be
bearing or non-load bearing depending provided by placing shear walls(in,diaphragm
upon the lay-out, are usually .non- braced frame type of construction) in two
homogeneous walls of sandwiched type directions at right angles or otherwise. No
to import better thermal comforts; and account is to be taken of rotational stiffness, if
any, of the floor-wall joint in case of precast
b) internal walls providing resistance bearing wall. buildings. The individual
against vertical loads, horizontal loads, components shall be designed,taking into
fire, etc, are normally homogeneous consideration the appropriate end conditions
walls. and loads at various stages of construction.
The components of the structure shall be
6.3.2.5 TYPES OF PRECAST FLOORS - designed for loads in accordance with Part VI
Depending upon the composition of units, Structural design, Section 1 Loads. In
precast flooring units could be homogeneous addition members shall be designed for
or non-homogeneous. handling, erection and impact loads that
might be expected during handling and
a) Homogeneous floors could be solid slabs. erection.
cored slabs, ribbed or waffle slabs.
6.4.1 In some conventional forms of
b) Non-homogeneous floors could be construction, experience, has shown that the
multi-layered ones with combinations structures are capable of safely sustaining
of light weight concrete or abnormal conditions of loading and
reinforced,’ prestressed concrete, with remaining stable after the removal of primary
filler blocks. structural members. It has been shown that
Depending upon the way the loads are some forms of building .structure and
transferred, the precast floors could be particularly some industrialized large panel
classified as one way or two way systems have little reserve strength-to resist
systems. forces not specifically catered for in the
One way system transfers ioads to design. In the light of this, therefore,
supporting members in one direction recommendations made in 6.4.2 to 6.4.9
only. The precast elements which come should be kept in mind for ensuring stability
under this category are: channel slabs, of the structure.
hollow core slabs, hollow blocks and 6~4.2 Adequate buttressing of external wall
battens, battens plank system, channels panels is important since these elements are
and tiles system, light weight cellular -‘not fully restrained on both sides by floor
concrete slabs, etc. panels. Adequate design precaution’s may be
Two way systems transfer loads in both taken by the designer. Experience shows that
the directions imparting loads on the the external. wall panel connections are the
four edges. The precast elements under weakest points of a precast panel building.
this category are room sized panels, two 6.4.3 It is equally important to provide
way ribbed or waffle slab systems, etc. restraint to all load bearing elements at the
comers of the” building. These elements and
6.3.2.6, STAIRCASE SYSTEMS - Staircase the external ends of cross-wall units should be.
system could consist of single flights within- stiffened ; either by introducing columns as
built risers and treads in the element only. The connectmg units or by jointing them to non-
flights ‘are normally unidirectional stmctural wall units which in emergency may
transferring the loads to sppporing’ landing support the load. Jointing of these units
slabs or load bearing walls, should be done bearing in mind the need for
load support in an emergency.
6.3.3, BOX TYPE CONSTRUCTION - In this 6.4.4 In prefabricated construction, the
system,room size units are prefabricated and possibility of gas or other explosions which
erected at site.,Toilet and kitchen blocks could can remove primary structural elements
also be similarly prefabricated and erected at leading to progressive collapse of the structure
site. shall be taken into account. It is, therefore,
1
I
?ABT Yl SYRWUIAI. DESIGN - SECTION 7 ?lIEFA~RICAYlON AND SYSTEMS WILDING w-7.
necessary to congider the possibility of
progressive collapse in which the failure or
displacement of one element of a structure
causes the failure or displacement of another
element and results in the partial or total
collapse of the building.
64.5 Provision in the design to reduce the
probability of progressive collapse is essential
m buildings of over six storcys and is *of
relatively higherpriority than for buildings of
lower height.
6.4.6 It is necessary to ensure that any local
damage to a structure does not spread to other
parts of the structure remote from the point of
mishap and that the overall stability is not
im aired, but it may not be necessary to
stiPfen,all parts of the structure against local
damage or collapse in the immediate vicinity
of a mishap, unless the design briefs
specificillly requires this to be done.
6.4.7 Additional protection may be required
in respect of damage from vehicles; further, it
is necessary to consider the effect of damage to
or displacement of a load-bearing member by
an uncontrolled vehicle. It is strongly
recommended that jmportant structural
members are adequately protected by
concrete kerbs or similar method.
64.8 In all aspects of erection that affect
structural design, it is essential that .the
designer should maintain a close liaison with
the builder/ contractor regarding the erection
procedures to be followed.
6.4.9 Failures that have occurred during
construction appear to be of two types. The
first of these is the pack-of-cards type of
collapse in which the absence of restraining
elements, such as partitions, cladding or
shear walls, means that the structure is not
stable during the construction, period. The
second is the situation in which one element
falls during erection and lands on an element
below. The connections of the lower element
then :give way under the loading, both static
and dynamic, and a chain reaction of further
collapse is set up.
6.4.9.1 A precaution against the first form of
failure is that the overall stability of a building
shall be considered in all its erection stages as
well as in its completed state. All joints that
may be required to resist moments and shears.
during the erection. stage only, shall be
designed with these .in mind. Temporary
works required to provide stability during
constructionshall be designed carefufly.
6.4.9.2 To’guard against the second form of
failure, that is, the dropping of a unit during
erection, particular attention shall be given to
w-7-
8 NATIONAL
the details of all pre-formed units and their
seatings to ensure that they are sufficiently
robust to withstand the maximum stresses
that can arise from site conditions. Precast
concrete construction generally shall be
capable of withstanding the impact forces that
can arise from bad workmanship on site.
6.5 Bearingfor Precast Units - Precast units
shall, have a bearing at least of 100 mm on
masonry supports and of 73 mm at least on
steel or concrete. Steel angle shelf bearings
shall have a 100 mm horizontal leg to allow for
a 50mm bearing exclusive of fixing clearance.
When deciding to what extent, if any, the
bearing width may be reduced in special
circumstances, factors, such as loading, span,
height of wall and provision of continuity,
shall be taken into consideration.
7. JOINTS
7.2 The design of joints shall be made in the
light of. their assessment with respect to the
following considerations:
4 FEASIBILITY - The feasibility of a joint
shall be determined by its load-carrying
capacity in the particular situation in
which the joint is to function.
W P RACTICABILITY - Practicability of
joint shall be determined by the amount
and type of material required in
construction; cost of material,
fabrication and erection and the time for
fabrication and erection.
4 SERVICEABILITY - Serviceability snall
be determined by the joints/ expected
behaviour to repeated or possible over-
loading and exposure to climatic or
chemical conditions.
d) RRE-PROOFING
e) APPEARANCE
7.2 The following are the requirements of an
ideal structural joint:
a) it shall be capable of beingdesigned to
transfer the imposed load and moments
.with a known margin of safety;
b) It shall occur at logical locations inthe_
structure and at points which maybe
most readily analysed and aasily
reinforced;
c) It shall accept the loads without marked
displacement or rotation and avoid high
local stresses;
d) It shall accommodate tolerances .in
elements;
l JlLDINC CODE OF INDIA
 e) It shall require little temporary support,
permit adjustment and demand only a
few distinct operation to make;
f) It shall permit tffecti\;e inspection and
rectification;
g) It shall be reliable in service with other
parts of the building; and
h) It shall enable the structure to abliorb
sufficient energy during earthquakes so
as to avoid sudden failure of the
structure.
7.2. I Precast structures may have continuous
or hinged connections subject to providing
sufficient rigidity to withstand horizontal
loading. When only compressive forcesare to
be taken, hinged joints may be adopted. In
case of prefabricated concrete elements, load
is transmitted via the concrete. When both
compressive force and bending moment are to
be taken, rigid or welded joints may be
adopted; the shearing force is usually small in
the column and can be taken up bythe friction
resistance of the joint. Here load transmissiqn
is accomplished by steel inserted parts
together with concrete.
7.2.2 When considering thermal shrinkage
and heat effects, provision of freedom of
movement or introduction of restraint may be
considered.
7.3 Joining techniques/ materials normally
employed are:
a) Welding of cleats or projecting steel,
b) Overlapping reinforcement, loops and
linking steel grouted by concrete,
c) Reinforced concrete ties all round a
slab.
4 Prestressing.
d Epoxy grouting,
f-l Bolts and nuts connection, and
id A combination of the above.
TESTS FOR COMPONENTS/
STRUCTURES
8.1 Testing on Individual Components -
The component should be loaded for one
hour at. its full span with a total load
(including its own self weight) ofI:25 times
the sum of the dead and imposed loads used
in design. At the end of this time it should not
show any sign of weakness, faulty
construction or excessive deflection. Its
recovery one hour after the removal of the
test load, should not be less than 75 percent
of the maximum deflection recorded during
the test. If prestressed, it should not show any
?APT Yl STRUCTURAL. DESIGN - SECTION 7 ?PEFASPICAllON AND SYSYEMS lUlLDING
visible cracks up to woiking load and should
~~;o;rcovery of not less than 85 percent in
8.2 Load Testing of Structure or Part of
structure -Loading test on a completed
structure should be made if required by the
specification or if there is a reasonable doubt
as to the adequacy of the strength of the
structure.
8.2.2 In such tests the structure should be
subjected to an imposed load equal to l-25
times the specified imposed load used in
design, and this load should be maintained
for a period 6f 24 hours before removal.
During the tests, struts equal in strength to
take the whole load should be placed in
position leaving a gap under the rriember.
8.2.f.l If within 24 hours of the removal of
the load, a reinforced concrete structure does
not show a recovery of at least 75 percent of
the maximum deflection shown during the’24
hours under load, test loading should be
repeated after a lapse of 72 hours. If the
recovery is less than 80 percent, the structure
shall be deemed to be unacceptable.
8.2.1.2 If within 24 hours of the removal of
the load, prestressed concrete structure does
no! show a recovery of at least 85 percent of
the maximum deflection show? during the 24
hours under load, the test loading should be
repeated. The structure should be considered
to have failed, if the recovery after the second
test is not at least 85 percent of 0% maximum
deflection shown during the second test.
9. MANUFACTURE, STORAGE,
TRANSPORT AND ERECTION OF
PRECAST ELEMENTS
9.1 Manufacture of Precast Concrete
Elements
9.1. I A judicious location of precasting yard
with storage facilities, suitable transporting
and erection equipments and availability of
raw materials are the crucial factors which
should be carefully planned and provided for
effective and economic use of precast concrete
components in constructions.
9.1.2 M ANUFACTURE - The manufacture of
the components can be done in a centrally
located factory or in a site precasting yard set
up at or near the site of work.
9. I .2. I FACTORY PREFABRICATION -
Factory prefabrication is resorted to in a
centrally located plant for manufacture of
standardized components on a long term
basis. It is a capital intensive production
where work is done throughout the year
9
n-7--
preferably under a closed shed to avoid effects
of seasonal variations. High level of
mechanization can always be introduced in
this system where the work can be organized
in a factory-like manner with the help of a
constant team of workmen.
The basic disadvantage in factory
prefabrication is the extra cost incidente of
transportation of elements from plant to site
of work where sometimes even the shape and
size of prefabricates get limited due to lack of
suitable transportation equipment, road
contours. etc. The organized labour of
permanent nature with regular benefits lead to
huge establishment cost which add to ultimate
;ost of production.
Y.I.,‘.? si I E PKI:.I:AHHICATION - In t h i s
scheme, rhe components are manufactured at
site or as near the site of work as possible.
This system is normally adopted for a specific
job order for a short period. The work is
normally carried out in open space with
locally available labour force. The equipment
machinery and moulds are of mobile nature.
Though there& definitecconom~with respect
to coht of trnnspor’tation. this system suffers
from hniic drawback of its non-suitability to
any higl; dcgrcc of mcchanilation and no
c:lahoratc arriingenlcnts lor quality control.
Normal henct‘its ot colltir:uily of work is not
;~vailahlc in this sys~cm 01‘ construction.
V.I.3 I he \,arious processes involved in the
m,~nulactt~rc 01 prccart clemcnts may b e
classiflcd ilS ICJIIOWS.
9.IJ.l \lAIS I’KOC‘I~SS
a) Providing and asscmbltng the mou!tis.
placing reinforcement c,~pc in position
f o r reinforced concrete w o r k . a n d
stressing the wires i n the cilse 01
prestrcs&d elcmcnts;
b) Fi.xing of Inserts and tubes. where
necessary;
c.) Pouring the concrete into the moulds;
4 Vibrating the concrete and finishing;
e) Demoulding the forms and stacking the
precast products; and
Curing (steam curing. if necessary).
9.1.3..? .\L:sll I,IKI’ PROCESS - - P r o c e s s
necessary for the successlrll completion of rhe
processes covered by the main process:
a) Mixing and manufacture oi’ fresh
concrete (done in a mix.ing qtation or b!; a
batching plant):
b) Prefabrication of reinforcement cage
(done in a stee! yard oi uorkshop):
VI ,!Q
cl Manufacture of inserts and other
finishing items to be incorporated in the
main precast products;
d) Finishing the precast products; and
d Testing of products.
9.1.3.3 SL’BSIDIARY PROCESS -Ail- o t h e r
work involved in keeping the main production
work to a cyclic working:
a) Storage of materials;
b) Transport of cement and aggregates;
c) Transport of greer. concrete and rein-
forcement cages;
d) Transport and stacking the precast
elements;
e) Repairs and maintenance of tools, tackles
and machines: and
r) Generation of steam, etc.
9.1.4 For the manufacture of precast
elements all the above processes shall be
planned in a systematic way to achieve the
following:
a) A cyclic technological method of working
to bring .in speed and economy in
manufacture;
b) Mechanization of the process to increase
productivity and to improve quality;
c) The optimum production satisfying the
quality control requirements and to beep
up the expected speed of construction
aimed;
d) Better working conditions for the people
on the job; and
e) To minimize the effect of weather on the
manufacturing schedule.
Y.1 5 The various stages of precasting can be
classified as in Table I on the basis of the
machine complexes required for the various
stages. This permits mechanization and
ratlonali7ation of work In the various stages.
In the precasting, stages 6 and 7 given in
Table I fo:m the main process in the
manufacture of precast concrete elements.
For these precasting stages there are man)
technological processes to suit the concrete
product under consideration which have
been proved rational. economical and time
saving. The technological line or process is
the theoretical solution for the method of
planning the work involved by using machine
complexes. Figure I illustrates diagrama-
tically the various stages involved in a plant
process.
Y.1.6 The various accepted methods of
manufacture of precast units can be broadI>
classified into two methods:
a) The ‘Stand Method’ where the moulds
remain stationary at places,, when the
NATIONAL Bl’ILDINC CODE OF INDIA
 __ --_. ..-..--.--
TABLE I STAGES 8F PRECASTING CONCRETE PRODUCTS
(chlues 9.1.J and 9.11(g)]
SL P RECASTING NAME OF PIKCESS Or~amo~s IN V O L V ED
No. STAGE No.
(1) (2) 0) (4)
9 I Procurement and storage of Unloading and transpon of cement. coarse and fina
construction materials aggraga-and staeband storing tham in bins, silos
or storage sheds
ii) 2 Testing of raw materials Tuting of all materials including steel
iii) 3 Design of concrete mix Tating of raw materials, plotting of grading curves
and trial of mixes in laboratory
iv) ‘4 Making of reinforcement cages Unloading of reinforcement bars from wagons or
lorries and stacking them in the steel yard, cutting,
bending, tying or welding the reinforcements and
making in the form of a cage, which can’k directly
introduced into the mould
v) 5 Oiling and laying of moulds in Moulds are cleaned, oiled and assembled and placed
position at the right place
vi) 6 Placing of reinforcement cages, The reinforcement cages afe placed in the moulds with
inserts and fixtures spacers, ctc
vii) 7 Preparation of green concrete Taking out aggregates and cement from bins, silos, etc.
batcliing and mixing
viii) 8 Transport of green concrete Transport of green concrete from the mixer to the
moulds. In the case of precast method involving
direct transfer of concrete from mixer to the mould
or a concrete hopper attached lo the mould this
prefabrication stage is not necessary
ix) 9 Pouring and consolidation of Concrete is poured and vibrated to a good finish
concrete
x) IO Curing of concrete and demould- Either a natural curing with water or an accelerated
ing curing using steam curing and other techniques. In
the case of steam curing using twnches or autoclaves,
this stage involves transport of moulds with the green
concrete into the trench or autoclave and taking
them out after the curing and demoulding elements
from the moukl. In the case of pre-tensioned ele-
ments cutting of protruding wires also falls in this
stage. In certain cases the moulds have 10 be partly
removed and inserts, have 10 be removed after
initial set. The total demoukiing is done after a
certain period and the components are then allowed
to be cured. All these fall in this operation
xi) II Stacking of precast elements Lifting of precast elements from the mould and Irans-
porting to the stacking yard for further transport by
trailer or rail is part of this stag?
xii) 12 Testing of finished components Tests are carried out on the components individually
and in combination to ensure the adequacy of their
strength
xiii) I3 Miscellaneous a) Generation of steam involving storing of coal or oil
necasary for generation of steam and providing steam
pipe connection up to the various technological lines
b) Repair of machines used in the production
NOTE -For ready mixed concrete, stages I. 2. 3 and 7 are not applicable.

?ARt vl STRUCTUIAL DESIGN ..L SECTION 7 ?REFABUCATlON AND SYSTSmd BIRLDINC n-7-f 1
 I

i
MOULD OILING {1 BINDING
1
STRESSING
*
FILLING CONCRETE

1
COMPACTING
I 1
1
CURING AND
DETENSIONING

MOULD CLEANING

1 CURING IN YARD
_1
I ,
I
I
TESTING 1
I
BY ROAD 4 BY RAIL

S L P RECASTING M ETHOD
NO.
(1) (2)
I) *Individual mould method
(Precasting method
using moulds which
inay be,easily assembled
out of bottom and sides,
transportable, if neces- ‘b) Prestressed railway
sary. Thii may be either
in timber. ot in steel
using needle or mould
vibrators and capable
of taking prestressing
forces) J W e i g h t :
ii) Battery form method
(The shuttering panels
may be adjusted into
the form of a battery at
the required distances
equal to the thickness
of the concrete member)
iii) Stack method
iv) Tilting, mould method
(This method iscapable
of being kipped verti-
cally using hydraulic
jacks)
v) Long line prestressing bed
method
vi) Extrusion method
(Lorg concrete mould
with constant cross sec-
tion concreting and
vibration will be done
automatically just as in
concrete roads)
PART W SUKJCTURAL DESIGN --SECTION 7 PIWFABRICATION
TABLE 2 PpECASTlNG METHODS
(Clat@s P.l.b,md 9.9.1)
W HERE U S E D D IMENSIONS AND
W EIGHTS
(3) (4)
a) Rib slabs, beams, gir- Any desired dimensions
ders. window panels, and weight up to 20
box type units and tonnes, except for pre-
special elements stressed elements. as
below:
Length:
sleepers, parts of pre- Less than 7 200 mm
stressed girders, etc Breadth.
Less than I 800 mm
Thickness:
Less than 300 mm
Up to 5 tonnes
Interior wall panels, shell Length: I8 m
elements. reinforced Breadth: 3 m
concrete battens, rafters. Weight: 5 tonncS
purlins and. roof and
floor slabs
Floor and roof slab Length: .4ny desired length
panels Breadth: I to 4 m
Weight: 5 tonnes
Length: 6 m
Breadth: 4 m
Weight: 5 tonnes
Double tees, rib slabs, Length: Any desired
purlins, piles and beams Breadth: 2 m
Height: 2 m
Weight: Up to IO tonnes
Roof slabs, foam concrete Length: Any desired
wall panels and beams Breadth. Less than 2 m
Height: Less than 3 m
AND Sk3TEM.S lUlLDING
ADVANTAGES AND
REMARUS
(5)
I
a) Strengthening of the
cross section possible
b) Openings are possible
in two planes
Specially suitable for mass
productionaf wall pan-
els where shuttering
cost is reduced to a large
extent and autoclave or
trench steam curing
may be adopted b)
taking the steam pipes
through the shuttering
panels
For casting identical rein-
forced or prestressed
panels one over the
other with separating
media interposed in
bet wcen
Suitable for manufactur-
i n g the external wall
pa&_+
Ideally suited for preten-
sioned members
May be used Hith advan-
tage in the case of un-
remforced blocks, foam
concrete panels
VL7 13
 various processes involved are carried out
in a cyClic order at the same place, and
b) The ‘Flow Method’where the precast unit
under consideration is in movement
according to the various processes
involved in the work which are carried
out in an assembly-line method.
The various accepted precasting methods are
listed in Table 2 with details regarding the
elements that can be mariufactured by these
methods.
9.2 Preparation and Storage of Materials -
Storage of materials is of considerable
importance in the precasting industry, as a
mistake in planning in this aspect can greatly
influence the economics df production. From
experience in construction, it is clear that
there will be very high percentages of loss of
materials as well as poor quality due to bad
storage and transport. So, in a precast factory
where everything is produced with special
emphasis on quality, proper storage and
preservation of building materials, especially
cement, coarse and fine aggregates, is of prime
importance.
9.2.1 S TORAGE OF C EMENT -Storage of
cement can be effected either in specially
erected storage sheds whqe cement can be
stored in the form of bags or in silos where it is
stored loose. For details, see Part VII
Constructional practices and safety.
9.2.2 S TORACE OF C OARSE AND FINE
A GGREGATES -The coarse and fine
aggregates can be stacked either in open or in
bunkers. In the case of open storage, the
‘Parallel - Boxes’ method with dividing walls
up to about 3 metres in height, is considered to
be the most convenient and economical. The
dividing walls can be made up of precast
R.C.C. retaining walls or steel or timber
panels inserted between the columns. In
planning this method of storage, the following
points shall be kept in mind:
a) The stored aggregate shall be protected
from mixing up with the local earth, clay
or coal; and
b) The various bins or boxes shall be
properly designated about the size and
type of material to be stored. Mistakes
occurring due to dumping of one
class/size of aggregates in the wrong bin
should be avoided.
Yetanother method of open storage is by
heaps under ,which a tunnel is provided with
conveyor belt system to extract fromthe heap
whatever material is required for preparation
and mixing of concrete.
In planning the storage of,coarsr and tine
aggregates, bins, silos, etc. shall have a
..
“,714
minimum storage capacity and shall be
designed to suit the supply requirements of the
factory. As far as batching silos are
concerned, 2 to 4 hours storage capacity shall
be provided.
9.3 Moulds
9.3.1 Moulds for the manufacture of precast
elements may be of steel, timber, concrete and
plastic or a combination thereof. For the
design of moulds for the various elements,
special importance should be given to easy
demollding and ,assembly of the various
parts. At the same time rigidity, strength and
watertightness of the mould, takin into
consideration forces due to pouring of green
concrete and vibrating, are also important.
9.3.2 TOLERANCES -The moulds have to be
designed in such a way to take into
consideration the tolerances given in 5.
9.3.3 S LOPES OF THE M OULD W ALLS -For
easy demoulding of the elements from the
mould with fixed sides, the required slopes
have to be maintained. Otherwise there is a
possibility of the elements getting stuck up
with the mould at the time of demoulding.
9.4 Accelerated Hardening -In most of the
precasting factories, it is economidal to use
faster curing methods or artificial .curing
methods, which in turn will allow the elements
to be demoulded much earlier permitting
early re-use of the forms. Any of the following
methods may be adopted:
a) BYHEATING T H E A G G R E G A T E S A N D
W ATER B EFORE M IXING T H E
CONCRETE-BY h e a t i n g o f t h e
aggregates as well as water to about 70°C
to 80°C before making the concrete mix
and placing the same in the moulds,
sufficiently high earlier strengths are
developed to allow the elements to be
stripped and transported.
b) S TEAM C URING -Steam curing may be
done under high pressure and high
temperature in an autoclave. This
technique is more suited to smaller
elements. Alternatively, this could be
done using low pressure steam having
temperature around 80°C. This type of
curing shall be done asspecified in 9.5.2.
For light weight concrete products when
steam cured under high pressure, the
drying shrinkage is reduced considerably.
Due to this reason, high pressure steam
curing in autoclave IS specified for light
weight low densities ranging from 300 to
I 000 kg/ m3. For normal heavy concretes
as well as light weight concretes of higher
densities, low pressure steam curing may
NATIONAL BUlLDiNG &DE OF INDIA
 be desirable as it does not involveusmg
high pressures and - temperatures
requiring high investment in an autoclave
(see also 9.5.2).
4 S TEAM INJECTION D URING M IXING OF
C ONCRETE ---In t h i s m e t h o d l o w
pressure saturated steam is injected into
the mixer while the aggregates are being
mixed. This enables the heating up of
concrete to approximately 6O“C. Such a
concrete after being placed in the moulds
attains high early strength.
d) HEATED AIR METHOD --In this method,
the concrete elements are kept in contact
with hot air with a relative humidity not
less than 80 percent. This method is
specially usefL1 for light weight concrete
products using porous coarse aggregates.
e) H OT W ATER M ETHOD -In this method,
the concrete elements are kept in a bath of
hot water around 50°C to 80°C. The
general principles of this type of curing
are not much different from steam curing.
E LECTRICAL M ETHOD -The pa&age of
current through the concrete panels
generates heat through its electro-
resistivity and accelerates curing. In this
method, the concrete is heated up by an
alternating current ranging from 50 volts
for a plastic concrete and gradually
increasing to 230 V for the set concrete.
This method is normally used for massive
concrete products.
C ONSOLIDATION BY S PINNING -Such a
method is generally used in the
centrifugal moulding of pipes and such
units. The spinning motion removes
excess water, effects consolidation and
permits earlier demoulding.
P RESSED C ONCRETE -This method is
suitable for fabricatiod of small or large
products at high speed of production.
A 100-200 tonnes press compresses the
wet concrete in rigid moulds and expells
water. Early handling and a dense wear
resistant concrete is obtained.
V ACUUM T REATMENT -This method
removes the surplus air and water from
the newly placed concrete as in slabs and
similar elements. A suction up to about 70
percent of an atmosphere is applied for 20
to 30 minutes per centimetre thickness of
the units.
CONSDLIDATION BY. SH O C K - T h i s
method is suitable for small concrete
units dropped repearedly from a height in
strong moulds. The number of shocks
required to remoue excess water and air
may vary from 6 to 20 and the height of
lift may be up to as much as half the depth
of the mould.
?MT Yl SYUUCTURAL D@lGN - SECllON 7 PREFABRICATION AND SYSTEMS
9.4.1 After the accelerated curing of the
above products by any of the above accepted
methods, the elements shall be cured further
by normal curing methods to attain fullfinat
strength.
9.5 Curing
9.5.1 The curing of the prefabricated
elements can, E effected by the normal
methods of _curmg by sprinkling water and
keeping the elements moist. This can also be
done in the case of smaller elements by
immersing them in a specially made water
tanks.
9.5.2 STEAM CURING
9.5.2.1 The steam curing of concrete products
shall take place under tarpaulin in tents, under
hoods, under chambers, in tunnels or in
special autoclaves. The steam shall have a
uniform quality throughout the length of the
member. The precast elements shall be so
stacked, with sufficient clearance between
each other and the bounding enclosure, so as
to allow proper circulation of steam.
9.5.2.2 The surrounding walls, the top cover
and the floor of steam curing chamber or
tunnel or hood shall be so designed as not to
allow more than 1 kcal/m*,‘h/‘C.
9.5.2..3 The inside face. of the steam curing
chamber, tunnel or hood shall have adamp-
proof layer to maintain the humidity of steam.
Moreover, proper slope shall be given to the
floor and the roof to allow the condensed
water to be easily drained away. At first, when
steam is let into the curing chambers, theair
inside shall be allowed to go out through
openings provided in the hoods or side walls
which shall be closed soon after moist steam is
seen jetting out.
9.5.2.4 It is preferable to let in steam at the
top of the chamber through perforated
pipelines to allow uniform entry of steam
throughout the chamber.
9.5.2.5 The fresh concrete in the moulds
should be ‘allowed to get the initial set before
allowing the concrete to come into contact
with steam. The regular heating up of fresh
concrete product from about 20°C to 35’C
should start only after a waiting period
ranging from 2 to 5 hours depending on the
setting time of cement used. It may be further
noted that steam can be let in earlier than this
waiting period provided the temperature of
the concrete product does not rise beyond
35°C within this wiiting period.
9.5.2.6 The second stage in steam curing
BUILDING VI_,1 5
process is to heat up the concrete elements, inherent dangers of breakage and damage
moulds and the surroundings in the chamber: caused by supporting other than at two
4 In the low pressure steam curing the air- positions, and also by the careless placing of
space around the member is heated up to packings (for example, not vertically one
a temperature’ of 7YC to 80°C at a above the other). Ribs, comers and intricate
gradual rate, usua.lly not faster than 30 projections from sohd section should be
deg per hour. adequately protected. Packing pieces shall not
discolour, disfigure or otherwise Ermanently
This process takes around Ii to 2f hours cause mark on units or members. Stacking
depending upon outside temperature. shall be arranged ‘or the precast units should
b) In the case of curing under high pressure be protected, so as to prevent the
steam in autoclaves, the temperature and accumulation of trapped water or rubbish,
pressure are gradually built up for a and if necessary to reduce the risk of
period of about 4 hours. efflorescence.
9.5.2.7 The third stage of steam curing is to 9.6.1 The following points shall be kept in
maintain the uniform temperature and view during stacking:
pressure for a duration depending upon 4 Care should be taken to ensure that the
thickness of the section. This may vary from 3 flat elements are stacked with right side
to s$ hours in the case of low pressure steam up. For identification, top surfaces
curmg and 4 to 7 hours in the case of high should be clearly marked.
pressure steam curing.
b) Stacking should be done on a hard and
9.5.2.8 The fourth stage of steam curing is the suitable ground to avoid any sinking of
gradual cooling down of concrete products support when elements are stacked.
and surroundings in the chamber and 4 In case of horizontal stacking, packing
normalization of the pressure to bring it at par materials must be at specified locations
with outside air. The maximum cooling rate, and must be exactly one over the other to
which is dependent on the thickness of the avoid cantilever stress in panek.
member, should normally not exceed 30 deg
per hour. 4 Components should be packed in a
uniform way to avoid any undue
9.5.3 Before the concrete products are projection of elements in the stack which
normally ,is a source of accident.
subjected to any accelerated method of
curing, the cement to be used shall be tested in
accordance with accepted standards (see 9.7 Handling Arrangements
Part V Building materials) especia.lly for 9.7.1 Lifting and handling positions shall be
soundness, setting time and suitability for clearly defined particularly where these
steam curing. sections are critical. Where necessary special
facilities, such as bolt holes or projecting
9.5.3.1 In the case of elements manufactured loops, shall be provided in the units and full
by accelerated curing methods, concrete instructions supplied for handling.
admixtures to reduce the water content can be
allowed to be used. The normal aeration 9.7.2 For precast prestressed concrete
agents used to increase the.workability of members, the residual prestress at the age of
concrete should not be allowed to be used. Use particular operation of handling and erection
of calcium chloride should be avoided for shall be considered in conjunction with any
reinforced concrete elements. stresses caused by the handling or erection of
member. The compressive stress thus
9.53.2 In al1 these cases. the difference computed shall not exceed SO percent of the
between the temperature of the concrete cube strength of the concrete at the time of
product and the outside temperature should handling and erection. Tensile stresses up to a
1101 be rnk>re than 60°C for concretes up to limit of 50 percent above those specified in
M 30 and 75% for concretes greater than Part VI Structural design, Section 5 Concrete
M 45 In t hr case nf light weight concrete, the shall be permissible.
ditference in temperature should not be more
than 600-C for concretes less than M 25. For 9.8 Identification and Marking-All precast
concretes greater than M50, the temperature units shall bear an indelibie identification,
differences can go up to 75°C. location and orientation marks as and where
necessary. The date of manufacture shall also
9.6 Stacking During Transport and be marked on the units.
.Storage Fvery precaution shall be taken
against over-stress or damage, by the provision 9.8.1 The identification markings on the
nf sunable packings at agreed points of drawings shall be the same as that indicated in
support. Particular attention isdirected to the the manufacturer’s literature and shall be

w,_* 6 NATIONAL l LWDINC CODE OF INDIA

shown in a table on the setting schedule
together with the length, type, site of the unit
and the sizes and arrangement of all
reinforcement.
9.9 Transport -Transport of precast
elements inside the faetory and to the site of
erection is of considerable importance not
only from the point of view of economy but
also from the point of view of design and
efficient management. Transport of precast
elements must be carried out with extreme
care to avoid any ’ rk and distress in elements
and handled as arP as possible in the same
orientation as it is to be placed in final
position.
9.9.1 T RANSPORT INSIDE THEFACTORY-
Transport of precast elements moulded inside
the factory depends on the method of
production, selected for the manufacture as
given in Table 2.
9.9.2 ‘TRANSPORT F ROM S TACKING YARD
I NSIDE THE F ACTORY TO THE S ITE OF
ERECTION -Transport of precast concrete
elements from the factory to the site of
erection should be plannedm such a way so as
to be in conformity with the traffic rules and
regulations as stipulated by the Authorities.
The size of the elements is often restricted by
the availability of suitable transport
equipment, such as tractor-cum-trailers, to
suit the load and dimensions of the member in
addition to the load-carrying capacity of the
bridges on the way.
9.9.2.1 While transporting elements in
various systems, that is, wagons, trucks,
bullock carts, care should be taken to avoid
excessive cantilever actions and desired
supports are maintained. Special care shauld
be taken at location of sharp bends and on
uneven or slushy roads to avoid undesirable
stresses in elements.
9.9.2.2 Before loading the elements in the
transporting media, care should be taken to
ensure that the base packing for supporting
the elements are located at specified positions
only. Subsequent packings must be kept
strictly one over the other.
9.10 ‘Erection -In the ‘erection of precast
elements*, all the following items of work are
meant to be included:
a) ‘Slinging of the precast element;
b) Tying up of erection ropes connecting to
the erection hook,
c) CIeaning of the elements and the site of
erection;
d) Cleaning of the steel inserts before
incorporation in the joints, lifting up of
~nmucnmu omaa-ascllom r rmmAnlcAmoN@JDsYsmMs
the elements, setting them down into the
correct envisaged position;
Adjustment to get the stipulated level,
e)
line and plumb;
r) Welding of cleats;
8) Changing of the erection tackles;
Putting up and removing of the necessary
h)
scaffolding or supports;
j) Welding of the inserts, laying of
reinforcements in joints and grouting the
joints; and
k) Finishing the joints to bring the whole
work to a workmanlike finished product.
9.10.1 In view of the fact that the erection
work in various construction jobs using
prefabricated concrete elements differs from
place to place depending on the site
conditions, safety precautions in the work are
of utmost importance. Hence only those
skilled foremen, trained workers and fitters
who have been properly instructed about the
safety precautions to be taken should be
employed on the job. For additional
information, see Part VII Constructional
practices and safety.
9.20.2 Transport of people, workers or
visitors, by using cranes and hoists should be
strictly prohibited on an erection site.
9.10.3 In the case of tower cranes running on
rails, the track shall not have a slope more
than 0.2 percent in the longitudinal dtrection.
In the transverse direction the rails shall lie in
a horizontal plane.
9.Z0.i The track of the crane should be daily
checked to see that all fish plates and bolts
connecting them to the sleepers are in place
and in good condition.
9.20.5 The operation of all equipment used
for handling and erection shall follow the
operations manual provided by the
manufacturer. All safety precautions shall be
taken in the operations of handling and
erection.
9.11 A tkiochved Celluh (concrete -The
manufacture of cellular concrete products
differs from that. of dense concrete in certain
respects as given below:
a) The manufacture of celhrlar concrete
being a highly controlled process has to
be done in a factory;
b) The princi al raw materials are cement or
lime and Pme inateriab (silicious sand, fly
ash, granulated bIast furnace slag);
c) The siIicious,materiaI is ground fine& in a
ball-mill and the slurry is prepared with
*.
mmg4lNG VW.
 predetermined quantity of cement or lime
and water. Gas generating materials and
harmless additives are also added in the
required amount before the concrete is
poured into the moulds;
4 The cellular concrete is cast in standard
moulds and the various components are
cut to the required size before it is
autoclaved;
e) Curing is done in autoclaves at high
temperatures (18OOC to 2ooPC) ahd at
high pressures (7 to 15 kgf/cm’). The
components are taken out after they are
fully autoclaved;
9 Each slab is provided with tongue at one
side and groove at the other or any other
provision is made to transfer load from
one unit to another; and
8) In view of the above, there will be some
changes in the stages of manufacture
given in Table 1.
10. EQUIPMENT
10.1 General-The equipment used in the
precast concrete industry can be classified into
the following categories:
a) Machinery required for quarrying of
coarse and fine aggregates;
W Conveying equipment, such as belt
conveyors, cham conveyors! screw
conveyors, bucket elevators, hoists, etc;
cl Concrete mixing machines;
4 Concrete vibrating machines;
e) Erection equipment, such as cranes,
derricks, hoists, chain pulling blocks, etc;
9 Transport machinery, such as tractor-
cum-trailers, dumpers, lorries, locomo-
tives, motor boats and rarely even
helicopters;
s) Workshop machinery for making and
repairing steel and timber moulds;
h) Bar s@ghtening, bending and welding
machmes to make reinforcement cages;
3 Minor tools and tackles, such as wheel
barrows, concrete buckets, etc; and
JO Steam generation plant for accelerated
curing.
In addition to the above, pumps and soil
corn actmg machinery are required at the
builJring site for the executton of civil
engineering projects involving prefabricated
components.
Each of the above groups can further be
classified into various categories of machines
and further to various other types depending
on the souree of power and capacity.
“,,Y
IO.2 Mechanization of he Consrruction and
Erection Processes -The various processes
can be mechanized as in any other industry for
attaining the advantages of mass production
of identical elements which in turn will
increase productivity and reduce the cost of
production in the lon run, at the same time
guaranteeing quality for the end-product. On
the basis of the degree of mechamxation used,
the various precasting factories can be divided
into three categories:
a) With simple mechanization,
b) With partial mechanization, and
c) With complex mechanization leading to
automation.
10.2.1 In simple mechanization, simple
mechanically operated implements are used to
reduce the manual labour and increase the
speed.
10.2.2 In partial mechanization, the manual
work is more or less eliminated in the part of a
process. For example, the batching plant for
mixing concrete, hoists to lift materials to a
great.height and bagger and bulldozer to do
earthwork come under this category.
10.2.3 In the case of complex mechanization
leading to automation, a number of processes
leading to the end-product are all mechanized
to a large extent (without or with a.little
manual or human element involved). This
type of mechanization reduces manual work
to the absolute minimum and guarantee the
mass production at a very fast rate and cheap
price.
10.2.4 The equipment shall conform to
accepted standards as listed in Part VII
Constructional practices and safety.
II. PREiABRICATD STRUCTURAL
11.1 For the design and construction of
composite structures made up of prefabri-
cated structural units and cast in-si&
concrete, reference may be made to good
practice [VI-7(l)]*.
11.2 For design and construction of preust
reinforced and restressed concrete ttianlu_
lated trusses re?crence may be made to good
practive [VI-I(2)].
* In thisrction, wberc rcfcrcncc h made to’good practice
o r ‘*ted rtantt~rds’ in rrlrtion to muefisl
spccificitiqn, design, testing o r conrtructioo
proadum, the appropriate document listed at tbc end
of this section may k used as l guide to the
interpretation of this tem~.
NAllONAL - CootoF~
11.3 For brief design and construction of
floors and roofs using precast doubly-curved
shell units, waffle units, ribbed or cored units
reference may be made to good practice
[VI-7(3)].
11.4 For construction of floors and roofs
with joists and filler blocks reference may be
made to good practice [VI-7(&)3.
11.5 For the requirements of autoclaved
reinforced cellular concrete floor, roof and
wall slabs reference may be made to accepted
standards [VI-7(>)].

LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted
standards’ in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a standard
shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. The standardsJisted may be used by the
Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the Code.

In the following list the number appearing in the first column within parentheses indicates the
number of the reference in this part,fsection.

1) IS: 3935-1966 Code of practice for
composite construction
2) IS: 3201-1965 Criteria for the design and
construction of precast concrete trusses
3) IS: 6332-1971 Code of practice for
construction of floors and roofs using
precast doubly-curved shell units
IS : 10297-1982 Code of practice for
design and construction of floors and
roofs using precast reinforced; preslres-
sed concrete ribbed or cored units
IS: 10505-1983 Code of practice for
construction of floors and roofs using
precast reinforced concrete waffle units
4) IS : 6061 (Part I)-197 1 Code of practice
for construction of floor and roof with
joists and hollow filler blocks : Part I
With hollow concrete filler blocks
IS : 6061 (Part II)-1971 Code of practice
for cbnstruction of floor and roof with
joists and hollow filler blocks : Part FK
With hollow clay filler blocks
5) IS : 6073- 1971 Specification for auto-
claved reinforced cellular concrete floor
and roof slabs
IS: 6072-1971 Specification for
autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete
wall slabs
IS: 6441 (Part VI)-1973 Methods of test
for autoclaved cellular concrete products:
Part VI Strength, deformation and
cracking of flexural members subject to
bending-Short duration IoadinR test
IS : 6441 (Part VII)-1973 Methods of test
for autoclaved cellular concrete products:
Part VII Strength, deformation and
cracking of flexural members subject to
bending-Sustained loading test

?ARt Vl STPUCTURAL D E S I G N - SECTlOW ? ?RECABRlCAllON A N D SYSTEMS llUll.DINC VP

 8
u
0m

-.
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
GROUP 3
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY

B U R E A U O F I N D I A N STANQ,ARDS
MANAK BHAVAN, 9BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG, NEW DELHl-I 10002
.SP 7(3) : 1983
FIRST PUBLISHED DECEMBER 1970

FIRST REVISION APRIL 1984

FIRST REPRINT AUGUST 198s

SECOND REPRINT JANUARY 1991

Q BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS, 1984

UDC 69 : 006.76
ISBN 81-7061-013-3

PRICE Rs 100.00
-

PRINTED IN INDIA AT CENTRAL ELECTRIC PRESS, NEW DELHI 110028 AND

PUBLISHED BY BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG, NEW DELHI 110002
I
FOREWORD

Construction programmes are interwoven in a large measure in all sectors of

development, be it housing, transport, mdustry, irrigation, power, agriculture,
education or health. Construction, both public and private, accounts for about fifty
percent of the total outlay in any Plan. Half of the total money spent onconstruction
activities is spent on buildings for residential, industrial, commercial, administrative,
educational, medic@, municipal and entertainment uses. It is estimated that about
half of the total outlay on buildings would be on housing. In a Five-Year Plan of, say,
Rs 1 560 billion, about Rs 780 billion would be spent on construction generally, of
which about Rs 390 billion would be on buildings of various types and occupancies. It
is imperative that for such a large national investment, optimum returns are assured and
wastage in construction is avoided.
Soon after the Third Plan, the Planning Commission decided that the whole gamut of .
operations involved in construction, such as administrative, organisational, financial
and technical.aspects, be studied in depth. For this study, a Panel of Experts was
appointed in 1965 by the.Planning Commission and its recommendations are found in
the ‘Report on Economies in Construction Costs’ published in 1968.
One of the facets of building construction, namely, controllingand regulating buildings
through municipal byelaws and departmental handbooksreceived the attention of the
Panel and a study of these regulatory practices revealed that some of the prevailing
methods .of construction are outmoded; some designs are overburdened with safety
factors and there are other design criteria which, in the light of newer techniques and
methodologies, could be rationalized; and building byelaws and regulations of
municipal bodies which largely regulate the building activityin the country wherever
they exist, were outdated. They did not cater to the use of new building materials and
the latest developments in building designs and construction techniques. It also became
clear that these codes and byelaws lacked uniformity and they were more often than not
‘specification oriented’ and not ‘performance oriented’.
These studies resulted in a recommendation that a National Building Code be prepared
to unify the building regulations throughout the country for use by government
departments, municipal bodies and other construction agencies. The Indian
Standards Institution.was entrusted by the Planning Commission with the preparation
.of the National .Building Code. For fulfilling this task a Guiding Committee for the
preparation of the Code was set up by the Civil Engineering Division Council in
1967. This Committee, in turn, set up 18 specialist panels to prepare the various parts
of the Code. The Guiding Committee and its panels were constituted with architects,
t6wn planners, materials experts, structural, construction, electrical illumination,air-
conditioning, acoustics and public health engineers. These experts were drawn from
the Central and State Governments, local bodies, professional institutions and private
agencies. The first version of the COW was published in 1970.
After the National Building Code was published in 1970, a vigorous implementation
drive was launched by the IS1 to propagate the contents and use of the Code among all
concerned in the field of planning, designing and construction activities. For this,
State-wise implementation conferences were organized with the participation of the
leading engineers, architects, town planners, administrators, building material
manufacturers, buiiding and plumbing services Installation agencies, contractors, etc.
These conferences have been useful in getting across the contents of the Code to the
interests concerned. These conferences have also helped in the establishment of
Action Committees to look into the actual implementation work carried out by the
construction departments, loGa bodies and other agencies in different States. The
Action Committees representing all interests in individual States met regularly to
review and consider the action required leading to the actual adoption of the
Code. The main actions taken by the Action Committees were to revise and
modernize their existing regulatory media, such as specifications, handbooks, manuals,
etc, as well as buildingbyelaws of local bodies like municipalities at city and town levels,
zillaparishads, panchayats and development authorities, so as to bring them in tine with
the provisions contained in the National Building Code. Arising out of this,

V
considerable progress has been made by most of the statesin revising their building
byelaws with the assistance of ISl.
Some of the byelaws of corporations, municipalities and other local bodies in the States
of Maharashtra, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, Andhra Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh,
Rajasthan, Bihar, West Bengal, Union Territory of Delhi, Madhya Pradesh and
Haryana were redrafted to bring them in line with National Building Code and
submitted to the respective Governments. These are under various stages of
consideration.
Some of the State Construction Departments like Public Works Departments have set
up Cells to look into the revision of PWD Specifications and Codes to align them with
the National Building Code and other related Indian Standards.
In spite of the best efforts by all concerned to implement the Code, the revised building
byelaws finalized in many states have not yet been adopted by the concerned
implementing/enforcing agencies due to procedural bottlenecks. Efforts are necessary
at Government level to overcome the difficulties in revising buildingbyelaws and PWD
specifications and adopting them in practice, reflecting the present state of knowledge
on various aspects of building construction.
Since the publication in 1970 of the National Building Code, a large number of
comments and useful suggestions for modifications and additions to different parts and
sections of the Code were received as a result of use of the Code by all concerned, and
revision work of building byelaws of some states. In addition, a number of Indian
Standards have been prepared over the past 13 years and a large number of Indian
Standards on which some parts/sections of the Code were based have undergone
substantial modifications, particular mention may be made of the revisions to Concrete
Code, Earthquake Code and Masonry Code. The revised version of the National
Building Code has been prepared taking into consideration all the aspects mentioned
above.
The National Building Code is a single document in which,like a network, the
information contained in various Indian Standards is woven into a pattern of continuity
and cogency with the interdependent requirements of sections carefully analyzed and
fitted in to make the whole document a cogent continuous volume. A continuous
thread of ‘preplanning’ is woven which, in itself, contributes considerably to the
economies in construction particularly in building and plumbing services.
The Code contains regulations which can be immediately adopted or enacted for use by
various departments, municipal administrations and public bodies. It lays down a set
of minimum provisions designed to prqtect the safety of the public with regard to
structural sufficiency, fire hazards and health’aspects of buildings; so long as these basic
requirements are met, the choice of materials and methods ofdesign and construction is
left to the ingenuity of the architect and the engineer. The Code also covers aspects of
administrative regulatiqns, development control rules and general building
requirements; fire protection requirements; stipulations regarding materials and
structural design; rules for Pesign of electrical installations, lighting, air-conditioning
and lifts; regulation for ventilation, acoustics and plumbing services, such as water
supply, drainage, sanitation and gas supply; measures to ensure safety of workers and
public during construction; and rules ,for erection of signs Bnd outdoor display
structures.
Some other important points covered by the Code include ‘industrialized systems of
building* and ‘architectural control’. The increase in population in the years to come
will have a serious impact’ on the housing problem. It has been estimated that the
urban population of India will double itself in the next two decades andconsequently at
least as much additional accommodation as is now available has to be provided during
this period. Speed of construction is thus of an utmost importance and special
consideration has to be given to industrialized systems of building. With increased
building activity, it is also essential that there should be some architectural control in the
development of our cities and towns if creation of ugliness and slum-like conditions in
our urban areas is to be avoided.
The changes incorporated in the present Code have beenspecified in the Foreword to
each part/section of the Code. Some of the important changes are: addition of

VI
development control rules, requirements for greenbelts and landscaping including
norms for plantation of shrubs and trees, special requirements for low income housing;
fire safety regulations for high rise buildings; revision of structural design section based
on new and revised codes, such as concrete codes (plain and reinforced concrete and pre-
stressed concrete), Earthquake Code, Masonry Code; addition of outside design
conditions for important cities in- the country, requirements relating to noise and
vibratton, air filter, automatic control, energy conservation for air-conditioning; and
guidance on the design of water supply system for multi-storeyed buildings.

The Code as now published is the second version representing the present state of
knowledge on various aspects of building construction. The process of preparation of
the Code has thrown up a number of problems; some of them have been answered fully
and some partially. Therefore, a continuous programme is envisaged by which
additional knowledge that is gained through technological evolution, users’views over a
period of time pinpointing areas of clarification and coverage and results of research in
the field, would be incorporated in’ to the Code from time to time to make it a living
document. It is proposed to bring out changes to the Code periodically.

Provision of the Code will serve as a model for adoption by PWDs and other
government construction departments, local bodies and other construction agencies.
Existing PWD codes, municipal byelaws and other regulatory media could either be
replaced by the National Building Code or suitably modified to cater to local
requirements in accordance with the provisions of the Code. Any difficulties
encountered in adoption of the Code could be brought to the notice of the Guiding
Committee for Corrective Action.

I part of the Nationai Building Code of India 1983 arid contains

nal Practices and Safety which would guide the construction
40,execute the various constructional operations in a safe and
Guiding Committee for National Building Code, BDC64
CHAIRMAN
MAJ-GEN HARKIRAT SINGH
W-51 .Greater Kailash - I, New Delhi 110 048
MEMBERS REPRESENTING
DR B. M. AHUJA Indian Institute of Technology, New Delhi
SHRI V. ASRANI PAHALAJ Corporation of Madras, Madras
SHRI J. P. BAJAJ The Institution of, Surveyors, New Delhi
SHRI SASIDARAN (Alternate)
S HRI B A L W A N T SINGH In personal capacity (N-29 Panchshila Park,
New Delhi 110 017)
SHRI J. R. BHALLA The Indian Institute of Architects, Bombay
SHRI M. S. BHATIA In personal capacity (A-2136Safdarjang Enclave,
New Delhi 110 016)
SHRI H. U. WJLAN~ Housing and Urban Development Corporation
Ltd, New Delhi
SHRI H. K. YADAV(A/ternate)
SHRI C. S. CHANDRASEKHARA Institute of Town Planners (India), New Delhi
SHRI R. CHANNABASAPPA Corporation of Bangalore, Bangalore
SHRI A. ~HATTERJI Tariff Advisory Committee (Delhi Regional
Committee), Bombay
CHIEF ENGINEER (BUILDINGS ) Public Works Department, Govt of Tamil Nadu
S UPERINTENDING ENGINEER
(P AND .D CIRCLE) (Alternate)
CHIEF ENGINEER (DESIGNS) Central Public Works Department (Central
Designs Organization), New. Delhi
SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER (Alternate)
S HRI D. N. CHGPRA In personal capacity (A-9133 Vasant Vihar,
New Delhi 110 057)
S HRI D. S. DESAI M. N. Dastur & Co Private Limited, Calcutta
P~OF DINESH M OHAN Central Building Research Institute (CSIR),
Roorkee
S HRI R. C. MANGAL (Alternate)
DIRECTOR School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi
DIRECTOR (CIVIL ENGG) Railway Board (Ministry of Railways)
ADDITIONAL DIRECTOR (G) (Alternate)
DIRECTOR S TANDARDS (CIVIL) Research, Designs & Standards Organization
(Ministry of Railways), Lucknow
D IRECTOR ( ENGG S ERVICES & PROJECTS) Municipal Corporation of Greater Bombay,
Bombay
CITY ENGINEER (Alternate)
S HRI J. DURAI RA J In personal capacity (DI/ 141 Satya Marg,
New Delhi 110 021)
G ENERAL SECRETARY The Institution of Fire Engineers India, New Delhi
SHRI S. S. GILL Public Works Department, Government of Punjab
SHRI V. K. GUPTA Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters,
New Delhi
SHRI K. DEVARAJAN (Alternate)
S HRI N. JAGANNATH Steel Authority of India Limited, New belhi
SHRI !. C %ZPUR Danfoss (India) Limited, Bombay
L)R R. X. GUPTA (Alternate)
Sari A. C. KHAZANCHI Regional Research Laboratory (CSIR), Jorhat
SIli<! [‘. KKISHNAN North Eastern Council, Shillong

VIII
MEMBERS REPRESEn’TING
SHKI M. Z. KWEN Tata Consulting Engineers, Bombay
SHKI D. S. HAKPAL.ANI (AIrernate)
S HRI MADAN MO H A N Directorate General of Factory Advice Service and
Labour Institute, Bombay
S HRI MAHENDRA RA J The Association of Consulting Engineers (India),
New Delhi
S HRI A. D. PAVATE (Alrernate)
S HRI G. C. .MATHUR National Buildings Organization, New Delhi
SHRI M. M. MISTRY. (Alternate)
S HRI G. D. MATHUR Town and Country Planning Organization,
New Delhi
D R S. MAUDGAL Department of Science & Technology, New Delhi
S HRI P. N. MEH~OTRA In personal capacity (A -101 Anand Bihar,
New Delhi J JO 092)
S HRI G. B. MEYON Ministry of Home Affairs
S HRI K. K. NAMBIAR In personal capacity (RatnanaJaya,lcS First Crescettr
Park, Gandhi Nagar, Adyar, Madras 600 020)
S HRI R. NATRAJAN Qntral Public Works Department, New Delhi
S HRI M. D. PATEL Public Works Department, Government of Gujarat
S HRI I. K. MODI (Allernare)
P RESIDENT Forest Research Institute and Colleges, Dehra Dun
SHRI A.N. BAJAJ (Alternate)
S HRI V. RAGHU Ministry of Works & Housing. (CPHEEO)
S HRI A. RAMAN National Environmental Engineering Research
Institute (CSIR), Nagpur
SHRI D. RAGURAMAN (Alternate)
S HRI N. V. RAMAN Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR),
Madras
SBRI ZACHARIA G EORGE (Alternate)
S HRI B. J. RAMRAKHIAN~ In personal capacity (.I/3 East Pate1 Nagur, New
Delhi 110 008)
S HRI V. S. RANE PI&C Works & Housing Department, Gowmx%m
of Maharashtra, Bombay
S HRI B. K. RO Y Corporation of Calcutta, Calcutta
S HRI D. P. ROY C HOWDHARY Public Works Department, Government of
West Bengal
SHRI D. P. GHOSH (Alternate)
S HRI T. K. SARAN Bureau of Public Enterprises (,Ministry of Finance),
New Delhi
SHRI T. S. RN-NAM (Alternate)
S HRI H. J. SH A H Builders Association of India, Bombay
S HRI R. G. GANDHI (Alrernure)
S HRI R. L. SURI Suri & Suri Consulting Acoustical Engineers,
New Delhi
S HRI M. THYAGARAJAN Indian Institute of Public Administration,
New Delhi
SHKI B. T. UN W A L L A The Concrete Association of India, Bombay and
Institution of Engineers (India), Calcutta
SHKI Y. K. MEHT~ (Ahernate) The Concrete Association of India, Bombay
Brig D. R. KATHUKIA (Ahernute) Institution of Engineers (India), Calcutta
DK H. C. VISVESVAKAYA Cervent Research Institute of India, New Delhi

IX
MEMBERS REPRESENTING
SHKI D. AJ~THA SIMHA, Deputy Dtrector
General [Former Director (Civ Engg) 1 Director General, ISI (Ex-officcio Member)
SHIU Gl RAMAN, Director (Civ Engg)

FORMER SECRETARY
SHRI D. AJITHA SIMHA
Deputy Director General [Former Director (Civ Engg)],kW
SECRETARY
SHRI G. RAMAN
Director (Civ Engg),ISI
JOINT SECRETARY
SHRl J. VENKATARAMAN
Sr. Deputy Director (Civ Engg),ISI

Panel for Constructional Practices and Safety, BDC 64 : Pl 1

CONVENER

SHR~ D. N. CHOPRA In personal capacity (A-9133 Vusant Vihor,

New Delhi 1100.57)

MEMBERS
SHRI V. S. AGRAWALA Engineer-in-Chief’s Branch, Army Headquarters
LT-COL G. D. BADLANI (Alrernate)
CHIEF ENGINEER (TRAINING ) Central Public Works Department, New Delhi
SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER
(TRAINING) (Alfernare)
DIRECTOR (CIVIL ENGINEERING ) Railway Board (Ministry of Railways)
SHRI H. N. GUPTA Director General of Factory Advice Service Bt
Labour Institute (Ministry of Labour),
Bombay
SHRI G. VAIDYANATHAN (Alfernate)
BRIG HARI~H CHANDRA Builders Association of India, Bombay
SHRI V. M. DHARAP (Alternate)
SHRI P. N. M EHROTRA Ministry of Home Affairs
SHRI G. B. MENON (Alternate)

X
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL
PRACTICES & SAFETY
The National Building Code of India consists of the following Parts and Sections:

PART I DEFINITIONS
PART II ADMINISTRATION
PART III DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND
GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
PART V BUILDING MATERIALS
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Section 1 Loads
Section 2 Foundations
Section 3 Wood
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
Plain and Reinforced Concrete
Prestressed Concrete
Section 6 Steel
Section 7 Prefabrication and Systems Building
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES
Section 1 Lighting and Ventilation
Section 2 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Air-conditioning and Heating
Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control
Section 5 Installation of Lifts and Escaiators
PART 1X PLUMBING SERVICES
Section I Water Supply
Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation
Section 3 Gas Supply
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES
NATIONALBUILDING CODE
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL
PRACTICES AND SAFETY

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD ... 3
1. SCOPE ... 4
SECTION i CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES
2. PLANNING ... 4
SECTION 2 STORAGE, STACKING AND HANDLING PRACTICES
3. GENERAL ... 5
4. STORAGE, STACKING AND HANDLING OF MATERIA LS ... 5
5. UNLOADING RAIL ROAD WAGONS AND MOTOR VEHICLES .,. 12
SECTION 3 SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION OF ELEMENTS OF A BUILDING
6. GENERAL .*. 13
7. TERMINOLOGY ... 13
8. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION, USE OF SIDE WALLS AND
TEMPORARY ENCROACHMENTS *.* 14
9. TESTING ... 14
10. INSPECTION AND RECTIFICATION OF
HAZARDOUS DEFECTS ... 14

?ARt Vll CONSTWCl’IONAL ?RACTKW AND SAFITY

II. FOUNDATIONS ... 14
12. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS_ AND COMMON HAZARDS
DURING EXCAVATION ... IS
13. PILING AND OTHER DEEP FOUNDATIONS ... 16
14. WALLS ... 18
1.5. COMMON HAZARDS DURING WALLING ... 19
16. ROOFING ... 20
17. ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ERECTION
OF CONCRETE FRAMED STRUCTURES (HIGH RISE
BUILDINGS) ... 21
18. ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ERECTION
OF STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK ... 24
19. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS ... 26
20. FINISHES ... 28
21. FRAGILE FIXTURES ... 28
22. SAFETY IN SPECIAL OPERATIONS ... 28
23. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND LIFTS ... 29
24. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ... 29
2s. CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY ... 30
SECTION 4 SAFETY IN DEMOLITION OF BUILDINGS
26. GENERAL ... 30
27. PRECAUTIONS PRIOR TO DEMOLITION ... 30
28. PRECAUTIONS DURING DEMOLITION ... 31
29. SEQUENCE OF DEMOLITION OPERATIONS ... 31
30. WALLS ... 31
31. FLOORING ... 31
32. CATCH PLATFORM ... 32
33. STAIRS, PASSAGEWAYS AND LADDERS ... 32
34. DEMOLITION OF CERTAIN SPECIAL TYPES AND
ELEMENTS OF STRUCTURES ... 32
35. LOWERING, REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS ... 33
36. MECHANICAL DEMOLITION ... 33
37. MISCELLANEOUS ... 33
38. FIRST-AID I.. 34
APPENDIX A PROGRAMME EVALUATION AND REVIEW
TECHNIQUE AND CRITICAL PATH METHOD ... 35
?
VW’ NATIONAL. BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES
AND SAFETY

0. FOREWORD
0.1 This part of the Code emphasizes the importance of carrying out all construc-
tional operations in a safe and efficient manner. Workers in large number,both skilled
and unskilled, are engaged in the innumerable construction works. Due to increased
tempo of such a building activity and large scale mechanization, hazards of accidents
have increased considerably. It has, therefore, become imperative that adequate safety
rules are laid down for every phase of construction work.
Planning the various constructional operations before hand and making adequate
arrangements for procurement and storage of materials, and the machinery to get
work done is as important as carrying out these constructional operations in accor-
dance with good practice. Lack of planning or defective planning may result in
avoidable delay in the completion of work and consequently increased hazards from
the point of view of fire, health and structural soundness.
0.2 The first version of this art was repared in 1970. As a result of experience
gained in implementation andPeedback Jrata received as well as the reparation of new
standards in the field of constructional practices and safety a neeBto revise this part
was felt. This revision incorporates a number of important changes and additions.
0.2.1 Information regarding handling operations, that is unloading, stacking, lifting,
loading and conveying of building mater&, has also been given now along with the
storage practices.
0.2.2 Additional information regarding the use of ladders; safety requirements for
floor and wall openings, railings and toe boards; piling and other deep foundations;
constructions involving use of hot bituminous materials; and erection of structural
steel work and concrete framed structures, etc, has been given.
0.3 The information contained in this part is largely based on the following Indian
Standards:
IS: 3696 (Part I)-1966 Safety code for s&folds and ladders: Part I Scaffolds
IS: 3696(Part II)- 1966 Safety code for scaffolds and ladders: Part II Ladders
IS: 3764-1966 Safety code for excavation work
IS: 4082-1977 Recommendations on stacking and storage of construction mate-
rials at site (fzrst revision)
IS: 4130-1976 Safety code for demolition of buildingsvrst revision)
IS: 4912-1978 Safety requirements for floor and wall openings, railings and toe
boards (/Trst revi.&@
IS: 5121-1969 Safety code for piling and other deep foundations
IS: 59161970 Safety code for constructions involving use of hot bituminous
materials
IS: 72051974 Safety code for erection of, structural steel work
IS: 7969-1975 Safety code for handling and storage of building materials
IS: 8989-1978 Safety code for erection of concrete framed structures

PART VlI CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY vu-

3
1. SCOPE
1.2 This part qf the Code covers the cons-
tructional practices in buildings; storage,
stacking and handling of materials and safety
of personnel during construction operations
for all elements of a building and demolition
of buildings.
SECTION 1 CONS-I-R UCTIONAL
PRACTICES
2. PLANNING
2.1 General
2.2.1 PL A N N I N G-For timely, economical
and reasonably smooth completion of cons-
truction or demolition work, it is necessary
that, from the stage of preparing to start on
such activity, the owner takes recourse to a
systematic hnd well-knit plan for execution.
This shall, intir-alia, include planning for the
agency or agencies for designing and building
of structures or parts thereof; appropriate
scheduling of fire prevention measures and
fire protection facilities, obtaining of sanction
or permission from all the controllingauthcr-
ities on submission to them of the required
plans, specifications and information; timely
prccurement of the construction materials
and equipment, and proper stacking, storage
and handling of construction materials at site.
For jobs of any magnitude, aid may be had of
the modern techniques of management and
planning such as Progravme Evaluation
and Review Technique (PERT) and Critical
Path Method (CPM) (see Appendix A).
‘2.2.2 RESPONSlBlLiTlES-Except where the
owner is himself the agency for the construc-
tion or demolition work, the terms of con-
tract between the owner and his agency or
contractor for execution of the work and the
designer or architect shall be clearly defined
and preferably put in writing. This shal!not,
however, absolve the owner from any ofhis
responsibilities under the regulations. as
owner (see also Part II Administration).
NOTE I-The contract may be either item rate orpe?en-
mgc rate above or below the rates given in the notdied
schedule, or lump sump for the entire work or on any
other formal terms.
NQTE 2-The construction materials and equipment
may be stipulated.to be supplied wholly by the owner or
the contractor or partly by either party.
NOTE 3-The owner may engage labour at piece-work
or daily rates.
NOTE &Contracts for provision of fire protection facili-
ties should be awarded at an’early stage to avoid delay
in the supply of essential fire protection equipment.
NOTE S-Contract should specify the essential fire safety
requirements which are to be observed and establish the
right to administration and enforcement by theowner/
VII-
4 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
authority 88.the case may be even thotqh the build@
my otherwIse be entirely under the junsdietion of the
builder/ contractor.
2.1.2.1 In every case within the provisions of
The Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923;
The payment of Wages Act, 1936; The Pay-
ment of Bonus Act 196J; The HOWS of
Employment Regulations; etc, the terms of
contract between the owner and the contrac-
tor yill determine the responsibilities and lia-
bilities of either party, in the concerned
matters.
2.2 Construction Control
2.2.1 PROF’ESSIONAL ARCHITECTURE OR
ENGINEERING S ERVICES
2.2.i:Z All new work or aiteration shall be
planned, designed and qrvised by licensed
personnel, namely, townplanner, architect,
engineer as specified in Part II ‘Adminis-
tration. All applications for permits and
issuance of certificates shall be as given in
Part II Administration.
2.2.2.2 IN S P E C T I O N A L RESPONSIBILITY-
For -the quality of materials used, even
though procured by the contractor and
for the soundness of construction, the
owner has to take responsibility, unless
a licensed architect/ engineer (referred
to in 2.2.1.1) h a s b e e n e n g a g e d t o
supervise and will be responsible for
these technical aspects (see Part 11
Administration).
2.3 Construction of All Elements-Cons-
truction of all elements of a building shall be
in accordance with codes of good practice
[VII(l)]*. It shall also be ensured that the
elements of structure satisfy the appropriate
fire resistance requirements as specified in
Part IV Fire protection.
2.4 Low Cost Housing-The requirements
regarding structural safety, health safety and
fire safety shall be in accordance with this
code, though certain relaxations may be
made in the planning and general building
requirements. For detailed information,
retirence may be made to good practice
cw~)l.
2.5 Site Preparation-While preparing the
site for construction, brush and other wood,
debris, etc, shall be removed and promptly
disposed of so as to minimize the attendant
hazards.
l In this part, where reference is made to’good practice’in
relation to design, testing, construction procedures or
other information appropriate document listed at the
end of ,this part may be used as a guide Jo the
interpretation of thii term.
 2.5.1 Temporary buildings for construction
offices and storage shall be so located as to
cause the minimum fire hazards and shall be
constructed from non-combustible materials
as far as possible.
2.6 Access for Fire Fighting Equipment
Vehicles-Acccs$ for fire fighting equipment
shall be provided to the construction site at
the start of construction and maintained
until all construction work is completed.
2.6J Free access from the street to fire.
hydrants/ static water tanks, where available,
shall be provided and maintained at all
times.
2.6.2 No materials for construction shall be
placed within 3 m of hydrants/ static water
tanks.
2.6.3 During building operations, free access
to permanent, temporary or portable first-aid
fire fighting equipment shall be maintained at
all times.
2.7 ‘Access to the Upper Floors During
Construction-In all buildings over two
storeys high, at least one stairway shall be
provided in usable condition at all times.
This stairway shall be extended upward as
each floor is completed. As far as possible,
there shall be a handrail on the staircase.
SECTION 2 STORAGE, STACKING
AND HANDLING PRACTICES
3. GENERAL
3.2 Materials shall be stored, stacked and
handled in such a manner as to prevent dete-
rioration or intrusion of forei n matter and
to ensure the preservation of their quality
and fitness for the work.
3.2 Materials shall be segregated as to kind,
size and length and placed in neat, orderly
piles that are safe against falling. If piles are
high they shall be stepped back at suitable
intervals in height. Piles of materials shall be
arranged so as to allow a passageway of not
less than I m width in between the piles or
stacks for inspection or removal. All passage-
ways shall be kept clear of dry vegetation,
3.2.1 Materials shall be stacked on well
drained, firm and unyielding surface. Mate-
rials shall not be stacked so as to impose any
undue stresses on walls or other structures.
3.2.2 Materials shall be stacked in such a
manner as not to constitute a hazard to
passerby. At such places the stacks shall
have suitable warning signs in day time and
red lights on and around them at night.
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
3.2.3 Stairways, passageways andgangways
shall not become obstructed by storage of
building materials, tools or accumulated
rubbish.
3.3 Manual Handling-When heavy mate-
rials have to be handled manually each
workman shall be instructed by his fore-
man or supervisor for the proper method of
handling such materials. Each workman
shall be provided with suitable equipment
for his personal safety as necessary. Supervi-
sors shall also take care to assign enough
men to each such job depending on the weight
and, the distance involved.
3.4 Protection Against Fire
3.4.1 Timber, coal, paints and similar mate-
rials present fire hazards. Where possible
these materials should be segregated from
each other so that fire spread is minimized.
3.4.2 Flammable liquids like petrol, thinner,
etc, shall be stored in conformity with rele-
vant regulations.
3.4.3 Explosives like detonators, gun
powder, etc, shall be stored in conformity
with relevant regulations for storage and
handling of explosives.
4. STORAGE, STACKING AND
HANDLING OF MATERIALS
4.2 The storage stacking and handling of
materials generally used in construction shall
be as given in 4.2 to 4.27.
4.2 Cement
a) S TORAGE AND S TACKING- Cement shall
be stored at the work site in a building or
a shed which is dry, leakproof and as
moisture- roof as possible. The building
or shed Por storage should havemini-
mum number of windows and close fit-
ting doors and these should be kept
closed as far as possible.
Cement received in bags shall be kept in
such a way that the bags are kept free
from the possibility of any dampnessor
moisture coming in contact with them.
Cement bags shall be stacked off the
floor on wooden planks in such a way as
to keep them 150 to 200 mm clear from
the floor and space of 450 mm minimum
shall be left alround between the exterior
walls and the stacks. In the stacks the
cement bags shall be kept close together
to reduce circulation of air as much as
possible. Owing to pressure on bottom
layer of bags sometimes ‘warehouse
pack’ is developed in these bags. This can
VU-
5
 be removed easily by rolling the bags
when cement is taken out for use.
The height of stack shall not be more
than 15 bags to prevent the possibility of
lumping up under pressure. The width of
the stack shall be not more than four
bags length or 3 metres. In stacks more
than 8 bags high, the cement bags shall
be arranged alternately lengthwise and
crosswise so as to tie the stacks together
and minimize the danger of toppling
over.
For extra safety during monsoon, or
when it is expected to store for an
unusually long period, the stack shall be
completely enclosed by a water proofing
membrane such as polyethylene, which
shall close on the top of the stack. Care
shall be taken to see that the
waterproofing membrane is not damaged
any time during the use.
Drums or other heavy containers of
cement shall not be stacked more than
two layers high.
The manner of storage shall facilitate the
requirement that lots of cement received
are removed and used more or less in the
order in which they are received.
HANDLING--Hooks shall not be used
for handling cement bags unless specifi-
cally permitted by the engineer-in-
charge.
For information regarding bulk handling
of cement, see 4.4.
4.3 Lime
4.3.1 QUICKLIME BEFORE S LAKING
a) STORAGE AND STACKING --Quicklime
should be slaked as soon as possible. If
unavoidable it may be stored in compact
heaps having only the minimum of
exposed area. The heaps shall be stored
on a suitable platform and covered to
avoid direct contact with rain or being
blown away by wind. In case quick lime
is stored in a covered shed, a minimum
space of 300mm should be provided
alround the heaps to avoid bulging of
walls.
Unslaked lime shall be stored in a place
inaccessible to water and because of fire
hazards, shall be segregated from the
combustible materials.
N OTE-Quick lime should be slaked as soon as possible
as it deteriorates rapidly on exposure by taking up mois-
ture and carbon dioxide from atmosphere.
VII-
6 NATIONAL BUILDING
b) tiANDLING----See 4.4.
4.3.2 HYDRATED LIME
4 STORAGE AND STACKING -Hydrated
lime is generally supplied in containers,
such as j&e bags lined with polyethylene
or high density polythylene woven bags
lined with polyethylene or craft paper
bags. It should be stored in a building to
protect the lime from dampness and to
minimize warehouse deterioration.
b) HANDLING -- see 4.4.
4.3.3 D RY S LAKED L I M E
a> STORAGE AND STACKI,NG- If the lime js
to be used within a few days, it may be
stored on a platform suitably’covered for
protection from rain and wind. If it is
required to be stored for a longer period
not exceeding 2 months, it may be kept
in a dry and closed godown.
b) HANDLING -See 4.4.
4.4 Handling of CemPnt and Lime-Work-
men, handling bulk cement or lime shall wear
protective clothing, respirators, and goggles;
shall be instructed in the need of cleanliness
to prevent dermatitis, and shall be provided
with hand cream, petroleum jelly, or similar
preparation for protection of exposed skin.
Bulk cement stored in silos or bins may fail to
feed to the ejection system. When necessary
to enter a silo or bin for any purpose, the‘
ejection system employed shall be shutdown
and locked out. When necessary for a work-
man to enter such storage area, he shall wear
a life-line, with another workman outside the
silo or hopper attending the rope.
4.5 MasonrJ3 Units
a) S TO R A G E A N D SrACKING-Bricks shall
not be dumped at site. They shall be
stacked on dry firm ground in regular
tiers directly as they are unloaded to
minimize breakage and defacement of
bricks. For proper inspection of quality
and ease in counting, the stacks shall be
50 bricks long and 10 bricks high, the
bricks being placed on edge, and prefer-
ably, the width of each stack shall be two
bricks. Clear distance between adjacent
stacks shall preferably be not less than
0.8 m.
In the case of bricks made from clays
containing lime KA NKAR, the bricks in
stack should be thoroughly soaked in
water (docked) to prevent lime bursting.
Bricks of different types and classifica-
tion sha,ll be stacked separately.
CODE OF INDIA
 Concrete blocks, stone blocks, etc, shall
be stored in stacks of such height as will
not damage the blocks in the lower layers
nor there be fear of toppling of stack.
b) H ANDLING- Bricks shall be loaded or
unloaded a pair at a time unless
palletized.
4.6 Aggregate
a) STORAGE AND STACKING--Aggregates
shall be stored at site on a hard dry and
level patch of ground. If such a surface is
not available, a platform of planks or old
corrugated iron sheets, or a floor of
bricks, or a thin layer of lean concrete
shall be made so as to prevent the admix-
ture of clay, dust, vegetable and other
foreign matter.
Stacks of fine and coarse aggregate shall
be kept in separate stockpiles sufficiently
removed from each other or separated by
dividing walls to prevent the material
from getting intermixed. Fine aggregate
shall be stacked in a place where loss due
to the effect of wind is minimum.
b) HANDLING-when withdrawals are
made from stock piles, no over hang
shall be permitted.
Employees required to enter hoppers
shall be equipped with safety belts and
life-lines, attended by another person.
Machine driven hoppers, feeders, and
loaders shall be locked in the off position
prior to entry.
4.7 F!v Ash
a) S TORAGE AND S TACKING -Fly ash shall
be stored in such a manner as to permit
easy access for proper inspection and
identification of each consignment. Fly
ash in bulk quantities shall be stored in
stack similar to fine aggregates, avoiding
any intrusion of foreign matter. Fly ash
in bags shall be stored in stacks not more
than 15 bags high.
b) H ANDLING -See 4.4.
4.8 Timber
4.8.1 ST O R A G E A N D STACKING-T~~~~~
shall be stored in stacks upon well treated
and even surfaced beams, sleepers or brick
pillars so as to be above the ground level by
at least 150 mm to ensure that the timber will
not be affected by accumulation of water
under it. Various members shall preferably
be stored separately in different lengths, and
material of eoual lengths shall be’ piled
PART YII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
together in layers with wooden battens,
called crossers, separating one layer frcm
another. The crossers shall be of sound
wood, straight and uniform in thickness. In
case, where separate crossers are not availa-
ble smaller sections of the available structural
timber may be employed in their place. In
any layer an air space of about 25 mm shall
be provided between adjacent members. The
longer- pieces shall be placed in the bottom
layers and shorter pieces in the top layers but
one end of the stack shall be in true vertical
alignment.. The crossers in different layers
shall be in vertical alignment. The most suita-
ble width and height of a stack are recom-
mended to be about 1.5 and 2*0m. Distance
between adjacent stacks is recommended to
be at least 450 mm. In case the stacking with
the help of battens is not possible, the timber
may be close piled in heaps on raised founda-
tions with the precautions specified above.
The stacks shall be protected from hot dry
winds or direct sun and rain. Heavy weights,
such as metal rails or large sections of wood,
are recommended to be placed on the top of
the stack to prevent distortion or warping of
the timber in the stack. In case timber is to be
stored for about a year or more, to prevent
end-cracking in the material, the ends of all
members shall be coated with coal tar, alumi-
nium leaf paints (hardened gloss oil), micro-
crystalline wax or any other suitable material.
Care must be taken that handler or workmen
are not injured by rails, straps, etc, attached to
the used timber. This applies particularly to
planks and formwork for shuttering.
4.9 Steel
a) STORAGE AND STACKING-Steel rein-
forcement shall be stored in a way as to
prevent distortion and corrosion. It is
desirable to coat reinforcement with
cement wash before stacking. to prevent
scaling and rusting.
Bars of dirrerent classification, sizes and
lengths shall be stored separately to
facilitate issues in such sizes and lengths as
to minimize wastage in cut from standard
lengths.
In case of long storage or in coastal
areas, reinforcement bars shall be
stacked above ground level by at least
15 cm and a coat of cement wash shall be
given to prevent scaling and rusting.
Structural steel of different sections,
sizes and lengths shall be stored sepa-
rately. It shall be stored above ground
level by at least 15cm upon platforms,
skids or any other suitable supports to
avoid distortion of sections. In case of
coastal areas or in case of long storage,
suitable protective coating of cement
 wash shall be given to prevent scaling
and rusting.
For each classification of steel, separate
areas shall be earmarked. Also ends of
bars and sections of each class shall be
painted with separate nominated
colours.
b) HANDLING-Tag lines shall be used to
control the load in handling reinforce-
ments or structural steel when a crane is
employed. Heavy steel sections and bun-
dles shall be lifted and carried with the
help of slings and tackles and shall not be
carried on the shoulders of the workmen.
4.10 Doors, Windows and Ventilators
a) ST O R A G E A N D S T A CK I N G - M e t a l
doors, windows and ventilators shall be
stacked upright (on their sills) on level
ground preferably on wooden battens
and shall not come in contact with dirt or
ashes. If received in crates they shall be
stacked according to manufacturer’s
instructions and removed from the crates
as and when required for the work.
Metal frames of doors, windows and
ventilators shall be stacked upside down
with the kick plates at the top. These
shall not be allowed to stand for long in
this manner before being fixed so as to
avoid the door frames getting out of
shape and hinges being strained and
shutters drooping.
During the period of storage of alumi-
nium doors, windows and ventilators,
these shall be protected from loose
cement and mortar by suitable covering,
such as tarpaulin. The tarpaulin shall be
hung loosely on temporary framing to
permit circulation of air to prevent mois-
ture condensation.
Wooden frames and shutters shall be
stored in a dry and clean covered space
away from any infestation. The frames
shall be stacked one over the other in
vertical stacks with cross battens at regu-
lar distances to keep the stack vertical
and straight. The door shutters shall be
stacked in the form of clean vertical
stacks one over the other and at least
80mm above the ground on pallets or
suitable beams to ensure that they will
not be affected by accumulation of water
under’ them. The top of stack shall be
covered by protecting cover and weighed
down by means of scantlings or other
suitable weights. For detailed. informa-
tion reference may be made to good
practice [VI1(3)].
8
VII-
Precast concrete door and window
frames shall be stored in upright position
adopting suitable measures against risk
of subsidence of soil/support.
b) HANDLING-W~~~~ unloading, shifting,
handling and stacking timber door and
window frames and shutters, care shall
be taken that the pieces are not dragged
one over the other as it may cause dam-
age to their surface particularly in case of
the decorative shutters. The pieces
should be lifted and carried preferably
flat avoiding damage to corners or sides.
4.1 I Roofing Materials
4.11.1 Roofing sheets shall be stored and
stacked in such a manner as not to damage
them in any way. Damaged sheets shall not
be stacked with sound materials. All dam-
aged sheets shall be salvaged as early as
possible.
4.11.2 A SBESTOS C EMENT S HEET
a) STORAGE AND STACKINGS-Asbestos
cement sheets shall be stacked to a.h:zight
of not more than one metre on fi1.m and
level ground, with timber or other pack-
ing beneath them. If stacked in exposed
position, they shall be protected from
damage by the winds.
b) HANDLIN G -Not more than two sheets
shall be first pushed forward alon’ the
valley line say about one fourth of 8 the
sheet length and preferably carried by
two workmen. Asbestos cement sheets
shall be lowered or raised gently and not
thrown.
4.21.3 CGI S HEETS
4 STORAGE AND STACKING -CGI sheets
shall be stacked in not more than 100
bundles per stack built solidly, each bun-
dle consisting of 10 sheets. Bundles shall
be so laid that the corrugations run in the
same directions in every course. One end
of the stack shall be raised by IO toI5 cm
to allow water flowing freely. If the
sheets are not to be used in the near
future, these shall, be stacked under roof
cover.
b) HANDLING-In bulk handling of CGI
sheets, workmen shall be provided with
suitable hand protection.
4.12 Boards
4.12.1 G YPSUM B OARDS
a) STACIYING - G y p s u m
S T O R A G E AND
boards shall be stored flat in a.covered
clean and dry place.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
. b) HANDLING--&Y 4.11.2(b).
4.12.2 PLYWOOD, FIBRE BOARD, PARTICLE
BOARD, BLOCK BQARD,ETC
4 STORAGE AND STACKING --Plywood,
fibre board, particle board, block board,
etc, shall not be stored in the open and
exposed to direct sun and rain. The
boards silall be stacked on a flat dunnage,
on the top of which a wooden frame shall
be constructed with battens of 5X2.5 cm
(Min) in such a way that it supports all
four edges and corners of the boards with
intermediate battens placed at suitable
intervals to avoid warping. If required,
the stack shall be adequately raised above
ground level to ensure that it ,will not be
affected by accumulation of water under
it.
The board shall be stacked in a solid
block in a clear vertical alignment. The
top sheet of each stack shall be suitably
weighed down to prevent warping, wher-
ever necessary.
b) HANDLING-The board shall be
unloaded and stacked with utmost care
iivoiding damage to the corners and sur-
face. In case of decorative plywood.and
decorative .boards, the surfaces of which
are likely to get damaged by dragging
one sheet over another, *it is advisable
that these are lifted as far as possible in
pairs facing each other.
4.13 Plastic and Rubber Sheets
a) S TORAGE AND STACKING-Plastic and
rubber sheets shall be stored according
to manufacturer’s instructions.
The coolest store room available shall be
utilized for the storage of the sheets. The
store rooms where the sheets are stored
shall be well ventilated and kept as dark
as possible. Direct light should not be
allowed to fall on them.
The sheets shall be stored away from
electric generators, electric motors,
switchgears and other such electrical
equipment as they produce harmful
gases which may damage the sheets.
Contamination of the sheets with vegeta:
ble and mineral oils; greases; organic sol-
vents; acids and their fumes; alkalies;
dust and grit shall be prevented. Where
greasy contamination occurs this shall be
removed immediately with kerosene or
similar liquid and the sheets thoroughly
wiped dry and dusted with french chalk.
Undue stretch and strain, kinks, sharp
bends or folds of the sheets shall be
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICFaS AND SAFETY
avo.ided. In case of long storage, the
sheets shall be turned over periodically
and treated with french chalk; if
necessary.
NOTE --Plastic and rubber sheets have a tendency
to break down during storage.
b) HANDLING --While handling plastic and
rubber sheets, workmen shall lift the
sheets and Carl-y them flat to avoid sharp,
bends or folds of the sheets.
4.14 Glass Sheets
a) S T O R A G E A N D STACKING-It is hpm-
tar& that all glass sheets whether stored
in crates or not shalt be kept dry. Suita-
ble covere&&orage space shall be pro-
vided for the safe storage of the glass
sheets. The glass sheets shall be lifted and
stored on their long edges and shall be
put into stacks of not more than 25
panes, supported at two points by fillets
of wood at about 300 mm from each end.
The first pane laid in each stack shall’be
so placed that its bottom edge is about
25 mm from the base of the wall or other
support against which the stack rests.
The whole stack shall be as close and as
upright as possible. To prevent slipping
on smooth floor, the floor shall be
covered with gunny bags.
b) HANDLING-W~~~~~~ handling glass
panes, waste glass pieces and fibre glass
shall be provided with suitable hand pro-
tection. In removing glass sheets from
crates, great care shall be taken to avoid
damages. Glass edges shall be covered or
otherwise protected to prevent injuries to
workmen.
4.15 Asbestos Cement Pipes and Fittings
a) S T O R A G E AND S T A C K I N G- The pipes
shall be unloaded where they are
required, when the trenches are ready to
receive them.
Storage shall be provided at the bottom
tayer to keep the stack stable. The stack
shall be in pyramid shape or the pipes
placed lengthwise and crosswise in alter-
nate layers. The pyramid stack is advisa-
ble in smaller diameter pipes for
conserving space in storing them. The
height of the stack shall not exceed 1.5 m.
Each stack shall contain only pipes of the
same class and size.
Cast iron detachable joints and :fittings
shall be stacked under cover and sepa-
rated from the asbestos cement pipes and
fittings.
VII-
9
 Rubber rings shall be kept clean, away
from grease, oil, heat and light.
b) HANDLING --Pipes in the top layer shall
be handled first. At a time only one pipe
shall be handled by two labourers while
conveying to the actual site and shall be
carried on shoulders. Fittings shall be
handled individually.
4.16, Polyeth~~lene Pipes
4 STORAGE AND S T A C K I N G - - B l a c k
polyethylene pipes may. be stored either
under cover or in the open. Natural
polyethylene pipes, however, should be
stored under cover and protected from
direct sunlight.
Coils may be stored either on edge or
stacked flat one on top of the other, but
in either case they should not be allowed
to come into contact with hot water or
steam pipes and should be kept away
from hot surface.
Straight lengths should be stored on
horizontal racks giving’ continuous sup-
port to prevent the pipe taking on a per-
manent set.
Storage of pipes in heated areas exceed-
ing 27OC should be avoided.
b) HANDLING-Removal of pipe from a
pile shall be accomplished by working
from the ends of the pipe.
4.17 Unplasticized PVC Pipes
a) ST O R AG E AND S T A C K I N G - P i p e s
should be stored on a reasonably flat ,sur-
face free from stones and sharp projec-
tions so that the pipe is supported
throughout its length. The pipe should
be given adequate support at all times. In
storage, pipe racks should be avoided.
Pipe should not be stacked in large piles
especially under warm temperature
conditions as the bottom pipes may dis-
tort thus giving rise to difficultyirrjoint-
ing. Socket and spigot pipes should be
stacked in layers with sockets placed at
alternate ends of the stacks to avoid lop-
sided stacks.
It is recommended not to store a pipe
inside another pipe. On no account
should pipes be stored in a stressed or
bent condition or near a source of heat.
Pipes should not be stacked more than
1.5 m high. Pipes of different sizes and
classes should be stacked separately.
In tropical conditions, pipes should be
stored in shade. In very cold weather, the
impact strength of PVC is reduced mak-
ing it brittle.
“ll.lo
The ends of pipe should be protected
from abrasion particularly those specially
prepared for jointing either sptgot or
socket solvent welded joints or soldered
for use with couplings.
If due to unsatisfactory storage or handl-
ing a pipe becomes kinked, the damaged
portion should be cut out completely.
b) HANDLING-Great care shall be exer-
cised in handling these pipes in wintry
conditions as these become brittle in very
cold weather.
4.18 Pipes of Conducting Materials
a) S TORAGE AND S TACKING --Pipes shall
be stacked on solid level sills and con-
tained in a manner to prevent spreading
or rolling of the pipe. Where quantity
storage is necessary, suitable packing
shall be placed between succeeding layers
to reduce the pressure and resulting
spreading of the pile.
In stacking and handling of pipes and
other conducting materials, the following
minimum safety distances shall be
ensured from the overhead power lines:
11 kV and below 1.40 m
Above 11 and below 33 kV 3.60 m
Above 33 and below 132 kV 4.70 m
Above 132 and below 275 kV 5.70 m
Above 275 and below 400 kV 6.50 m
b) HANDLING-RR~~O~~~ of pipes from a
pile shall be accomplished by working
from the ends of the pipe. During trans-
portation, the pipes shall be so secured as
to insure against displacement.
4.19 Piling and Poles
4 S TORAGE AND S TACKING -Piling and
poles shall be carefully stacked on solid,
level sills so as to prevent rolling or
spreading of the stack.
The storage area shall be maintained free
of vegetation and flammable materials.
b) HANDLING -When placing piling or
poles on the stack, workmen shall work
from the ends of the piles/poles. Similar
precautions shall be observed in removal
of piles/poles from the stack. Tag lines
shall be used to control piling and poles
when handling for any purpose.
In stacking and handling of piling and
poles, precautions as laid down in 4.18(a)
shall be followed.
NATIONAL BUILDING CDDE OF INDIA
4.20 Poinrs. Varnishes and Thinners to 3 tiers. ,Leaky drums shall be segre-
gated. Empty drums shall be stored in
a) S T O R A G E AND S T A C K I N G - Paints, pyra midal stacks neatly in rows.
varnishes, lacquers, thinners and other b) H A N D L I N G - S e e 19.13.1.2 and 19.3.4.
flammable materials shall be kept in
properly sealed or closed containers. The 4.22 Bituminous Roofing Felts
containers shall be kept in a well ventilated
location, free from excessive heat, smoke, a) S TORAGE AND STACKING -Bituminous
sparks or flame. The floor of the paint roofing felts shall be stored away from
stores shall be made up of 1Ocm thick other combustible flammable materials,
loose sand, For long storage it shall ,be kept under
shade.
Paint materials in quantities other than
required for daily use shall be kept b) HANDLING -Bituminous roofing felts
stocked under tegular storage place. should be handled in a manner to prevent
Where the aint is likely to deteriorate cracking and other damages.
with age, tRe manner of storage shall
facilitate removal and use of lots in the 4.23 Flammoble Materials
same order in which they are received. a) STORAGE AND STACKING-In addition
Temporary $ectrical wirings/ fittings to the requirements as laid down in 3.4.2
shall not be Installed i? the paint store. and 3.4.3, the following provisions shall
When electric lights, switches or electrical also apply:
equipment are necessary, they shall ,be of 1) Outdoor storage of drums requires
explosion proof design. some care to avoid contamination
because moisture and dirt in hydrau-
b) HANDLING-ventilation adequate to lic brake and transmission fluid, gaso-
prevent the accumulation of flammable line, or lubricants may cause mal-
vapours to hazardous levels of concentra- function or failure of equipment, with
tion shall be provided in all areas where possible danger to personnel. The
painting is done. storage area should be free of accumu-
When painting is done in confined spaces lations of spilled products, debris
where flammable or explosive vapours and other hazards.
may develop, any necessary heat shall be 2) Compressed gases and petroleum
provided through duct work remote from products shall not be stored in the
the source of flame. same building or close to each other.
Sources of ignition, such as open flame
and exposed heating elements, shall not b) H ANDLING -Petroleum products deli-
be permitted in area or rooms where vered to the job site and stored there in
spray painting is done nor shall smoking drums shall be protected during handling
be allowed there. to prevent loss of identification through
Care should be taken. not ,to use any damage to drum markings, tags, etc. Un-
naked flame inside the paint store. identifiable petioleum products may
Buckets containing sand shall be kept result ‘in improper use, with possible fire
ready for use in case of fire. Fire extin- hazard, damage to equipment or operat-
guishers when required shall be of foam ing failure.
type conforming to accepted standards Workmen shall be required to guard
[vII(4)]*. .carefully against any part of their cloth-
Each workman handling lead based ing becommg contaminated with flam-
paints shall be issued l/2-litre milk per mable fluids. They shall not be allowed to
day for his personal consumption. continue work when their clothing
becomes so contaminated.
4.21 Bitumen, Rood Tar, Asphalt, etc 4.24 Water-Water to be stored for cons-
a) ST O RA GE AND S T A C K I N G-Drums or tanks truction purposes shall be stored in proper
containers containing all types of aggregate to prevent any organic impurities. The
bitumen, road tar, asphalt, etc, shall be determinedcapacity after
of storage tanks shall be
taking into account the
stacked vertically on their bottoms in up requirements of fire fighting.

l la this part, where reference is made to ‘accepted stand- 4.25 Tiles

ards’ in relation to material specification or other infor-
mation, the appropriate document listed at the end of
this plvrt may be used as a guide to the interpretation of a) STORAGE AND STACKING -All tiles shall
thii term. be stacked on well-treated and hard sur-

?ART VII CONSTRUCllONAL ?EMZTM.ZS A N D SAFETY “2 l

 face in layers and in different tiers. These
shall not be dumped at site and shall be
stacked in .such a way that mould surface
of one faces that of another. The height
of stack shall not be more than I m.
Tiles of different quality, size and thick-
ness shall be stacked separately to facili-
tate easy removal for use in work.
Tiles, when supplied by manufacturers in
wooden crates, shall be stored as such
and the crates opened one at a time when
required for use.
b) HANDLING-Removal of the tiles shall
start from top layer only. Only on finish-
ing top course next course be tackled.
Tiles should be handled in pairs and shall
not be thrown.
4.26 Sanitary Appliances
stocks. Freshly arrived materials shall never
be placed over materials which had arrived
earlier.
4.28.4 Appropriate types of fire extinguishers
shall be provided at open sites where com-
bustible materials are stored and for each
storage shed/ room where flammable/com-
bustible materials are stored. For guidance in
selection of the appropriate types of fire extin-
guishers reference may be made to good
practice [VII(S)]. It is desirable that a mini-.
mum of two extinguishers are provided at
each such location.
4.28.5 Workers handling excavated earth
from foundation, particularly if the site
happens to be reclaimed area or marshy area
or any other infected area, shall be protected
against infection affecting their exposed body
portions.

4 S TORAGE AND S TACKING - All sanitary 4.28.6, H OUSE K EEPING -Stairways, walk-
appliances shall be carefully stored under ways, scaffolds, and accessways shall be kept
cover to prevent damage. When accept- free of materials, debris and obstructions.
ing and storing appliances, consideration The engineer-in-charge/the foreman shall
shall be given to the sequence of removal initiate and carry out a programme requiring
from the store to the assembly positions. routine removal of scrap and debris from
Vitreous fittings shall be stacked scaffolds and walkways.
separately from the metal ones.
4.28.7 Where stacking of the materials is to
b) HANDLING -Bigger sanitary appliances be done on road side berms in the street and
shall be handled one at a time. Traps, other public place, the owner shall seek per-
water seals and gullies shall be handled mission from the Authority for such’stacking
separately. While ,handling sanitary and also for removing the remnants of the
fittings they shall be free from any oil same after the construction is over, so as to
spillings, etc. The hands of the workers avoid any hazard to the public.
shall also be free from any oily substance.
Before lowering the appliances in their
position the supporting brackets, 5. UNLOADING RAIL ROAD WAGONS
pedestals, etc, shall be checked for their AND MOTOR VEHICLES
soundness and then only the fixtures be
attached. 5.1 Loading and Unloading dail Road
4.27 Other ‘Materials-Small articles like Wagons
screws, bolts, nuts, door and window fittings.
polishing stones,. protective clothing, spare 5.1.1 Appropriate warning signals shall be
parts of machinery, linings, packings, water displayed to indicate that the wagons must
supply and sanitary fittings, and electrical tit- not be coupled ‘or moved.
tings, insulation board, etc, shall be kept in
suitable and properly protected containers or 5.1.2 The wheels of wagons shall always be
store rooms. Valuable small materials shall spragged or chained while the wagons are
be kept under lock and key. being unloaded. The brakes alone shall not
be depended upon.
4.28 Special Considerations
5.1.3 Special lever bars shall preferably be
4.28.1 Materials constantly in use shall be used for moving rail wagons rather thanordi-
relatively nearer the place of use. nary crow bars.
4.28.2 Heavy units like precast concrete 5.1.4 Where gangplanks are used between
members shall be stacked near the hoist or wagons and platforms of piles (heaps), cleats
the ramp. at lower end of gangplank, or pin through
end of gangplanks, shall be used to prevent
4.28.3 Materials which normally deteriorate sliding. If gangplank is on a gradient, cleats
during storage shall be kept constantly mov- or abrasive surface shall be provided for the
ing, by replacing old materials with fresh entire length.

J2 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

5.1.5 When rail road wagons are being
loaded or unloaded near passageways or
walkways, adequate warning signals shall be
placed on each end of the wagon to warn
pedestrians.
5.2 Loading and Unloading from Motor
Vehicles
5.2.2 The motor vehicles shall be properly
blocked while being loaded or unloaded;
brakes alone shall not be depended upon to
hold them.
5.2.2 When motor vehicles are being loaded
or unloaded near passageways or walkways,
adequate warning signs shall be placed on
each end of the vehicle to warn the
pedestrians.
5.3 Handling Heavy/ Long Items
5.3.1 Loading and unloading of heavy items,
shall, as far as possible, be done with cranes
or gantries. The workman shall stand clear of
the material being moved by mechanical
equipment. The slings and the ropes used
shall be of adequate load carrying capacity,
so as not to give way and result in accidents.
5.j.2 While heavy and long components are
being manually loaded into motor vehicle,
wagons, trailer, etc, either wooden sleepers or
steel rails of sufficient length and properly
secured in position shall be put in a gentle
slope against the body of the wagon/vehicle
at 3 or 4 places for loading. These long items
shall be dragged, one by one, gently and uni-
formly along these supports by means of
ropes, being pulled by men with feet properly
anchored against firm surface. As soon as the
items come on the floor of the vehicle, the
same may be shifted by crowbars and other
suitable leverage mechanism, but not by
hands to avoid causing accident to the
workmen.
5.3.3 Similar procedure as outlined
under 5.3.2 shall be followed for manual
unloading of long or heavy items.
SECTION 3 SAFETY IN CONSTRUC-
TION OF ELEMENTS OF A BUILDING
6. GENERAL
6.1 The provisions of this section shall apply
to the erection/ alteration1 of the various parts
of a building or similar structure. The cons-
truction of the different elements shall con-
form to provisions of 2.3.
62 Other Laws-Nothing herein stated shall
be construed to nullify any rule , regulations,
safety standards or statutes ofshe local state
PAaT “,I CONSTRUCTIONAL FRA,X,C,tS AN,, SAFE,‘~
governments or those contained in the
various Acts of the Government of India. The
specific rules, regulations and Acts pertaining
to the protection of the public or workmen
from health and other hazards wherever
sepcified by the Local/State Authority or in
the Acts of the Government take precedence
over whatever is herein specified in case of a
doubt or dispute.
7. TERMINOLOGY
7.1 For the purpose of this part the following
definitions shall apply.
A UTHORITY H AVING JURrsDICTIoN -The
Authority which has been created by a sta-
tute and which for the purpose of administer-
ing the Code/Part, may authorize a
committee or an official to act on its behalf;
hereinafter called the ‘Authority’.
C O N S T R U C T I O N E Q U I P M E N T-All equip-
ment, machinery, tools and temporary retam-
ing structures and working platforms, that is,
tools, derricks, staging, scaffolds, runways,
ladders and all material, handling equipment
including safety devices.
F LOOR H OLE-An opening measuring less
than 30 cm but more than 2.5 cm in its least
dimension, in any floor, platform, pavement,
or yard, through which materials but not per-
sons may fall; such as, a belt hole, pipe open-
ing or slot opening.
F LOOR O PENING -An opening measuring
30cm or more in its least dimension, in any
floor, platform, pavement or yard through
which person’ may fall; such as hatch way,
stair or ladder opening, pit or large manhole.
G UARD R AILING-A barrier erected along
exposed edges of an open side floor opening,
wall opening, ramp, platform, or catwalk or
balcony, etc, to prevent fall of persons.
M ATERIAL H ANDLING H OISTS -A plat-
form, bucket or similar enclosure exclusively
meant for the lifting or lowering of construc-
tion material the hoists being operated from
a point outside the conveyance.
PILE RIG -The complete pile driving equip-
ment comprising piling frame, leader,
hammer, extractor winch and power unit.
Complete pile driving rig may be mounted
on rafts or pontoon or rails. Pile rig may also
be a. mobile unit mounted on trailers or
trucks, or a special full revolving rig for rak-
ing piles.
P LATFORM-A working space for persons,
elevated above the surrounding floor or
ground, such as balcony or platform for the
operation of machinery and equipment.
J3
SCAFFOLD -A temporary erection of timber guards are to be provided. In case these pro-
or metal work used m the construction, alter- tective devices project beyond the property,
ation or demolition of a building, to support the consent of the Authority and that of the
or to allow the hoisting and lowering of owner of the adjoining property shall be
workmen, their tools and materials, obtained.
T OE BOARD-A vertical barrier erected 9. TESTING
along exposed edge of a floor opening, wall
opening, platform, catwalk or ramp topre- 9.1 Tests -No structure, temporary support,
vent fall of materials or persons. scaffolding or any construction equipment
during the construction or demolition of any
WALL HOLE -An opening in any wall or par- building or structure shall be loaded beyond
tition having height of less than 75cm but the allowable loads and working stresses as
more than 2.5 cm and width unrestricted. provided for in Part VI Structural design.
WALL OPENING -An opening in any wall or 9.1.2 Whenever any doubt arises about the
partition having both height of at least 75 cm structural adequacy of a scaffolding, support
and width of at least 45cm. or any other construction equipment, it shall
be tested to two and a half times the superim-
8. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION, USE posed dead and live loads to which the mate-
OF SIDE WALLS ANDTEMPORARY rial or the equipment is subjected to and the
ENCROACHMENTS member/material shall sustain the test load
without failure if it is to be accepted.
8.1 Temporary Construction-The plans.
and specifications of temporary, construc- 9.2 Notwithstanding the test mentioned
tions, which are likely to interfere with facili- above, if any distress in any member is visi-
ties or right of way provided by the ble, the member shall be rejected.
Authority, shall be submitted to the Author-
ity for approval showing clearly the layout, IO. I N S P E C T I O N A ND RECTIFICA- . .
design and construction. TION OF HAZARDOUS DEFECTS
8.1.1 Temporary structure referred to in8.1 10.1 Ins ection-The Authority shall
shall apply to the following types of inspect tge construction equipment and if
structures: during the inspection, it is revealed that
a) Structures with roof or walls made of unsafe/ illegal conditions exist, the Authority
straw, hay, ulugrass, golpatta, hogle, shall intimate the owner and direct him to
darma, mat, canvas cloth or other like take immediate remedial measures to remove
materials not adopted for permanent or the hazard/violation.
continuous occupancy. 10.2 Rectification-The owner shall proceed
b) Site-work sheds, truck-runways, trestles, to rectify the defect, hazardous condition or
foot-bridges, etc. violation within 24 hours of the receipt of the
notice from the Authority. The Authority
8.2 For detailed information regarding fire shall have full powers to rectify the unsafe
safety aspects in respect of construction, condition and all expenses incurred in this
location, maintenance and use of temporary connection is payable by the ,owner of the
structures [mentioned in 8.Z.Z(a)] including ,property. Illegal encroachments and non-
pandals used by public for outdoor assem- payment of money due, in respect of the rec-
bly, reference may be made to good practice tification of unsafe conditions may vest a lien
D’W91. on the property with the Authority (seeat30
8.3 Special permits shall be obtained for the Part 11 Administration).
storage of the materials on side walks and 10.3 When the strength and adequacy of any
highways. It shall be ensured that the mate- scaffold or other construction equipment is
rial dump or the storage shed does not create in doubt or when any complaint is made, the
a traffic hazard, nor it shall interfere with the Authority shall get .the same inspected before
free flow of the pedestrian traffic. Special use.
permits shall also be obtained for the use of
water and electricity from the public facili- II. FOUNDATIONS
ties. Whenever such utilities are made use of,
adequate safety precautions regarding drain- 11.1 General-The distribution of the sup-
age and elimination of contamination and
hazards from electricity shall be taken. porting foundation shall be such as to avoid
any harmful differential settlement of the
8.4 In order to ensure safety for the adjoin- structure. The type and design of the founda-
ing property, adequate temporary protective tion adopted shall ensure safety to workmen

“lJ.14 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

during construction and residents of the
neighbouring property. Sufficient care shall
be taken in areas, where withdrawal of
ground water from surrounding areas could
result in damages to such foundations. Dur-
ing the construction of the foundation, it
shall be ensured that the adjoining properties
are not affected by any harmful effects.
11.2 Adjoining Properties - The person
causing excavation shall, before starting the
work, give adequate notices in writing to the
owner of the adjoining properties, safety of
which is likely to be affected due to excavation.
After. having given such notices, wherein
details regarding the type of protective
works that are anticipated to be incorporated
in the excavation are shown, written permis-
sion shall be obtained for such excavation
from the adjoining property owners. Where
necessary, the person causing excavation
shall make adequate provision to protect the
safety of adjacent property. If on giving such
notices and the precautionary measures hav-
ing been approved by the Authority, the
adjoining property owner still refuses to give
necessary facilities to the person causing
excavation for protecting/ providing both
temporary and permanent supports to such
property, the responsibility for any damage
to the adjoining property shall be that of the
adjoining property owner. The person caus-
ing excavation shall be absolved of responsi-
bility for any loss of property or life in the
adjoining property.
In driven piles vibration is set up which may
cause damage to adjoining structures or ser-
vice lines depending on the nature of soil con-
dition and the construction standard of such
structures and service lines. Possible extent
of all such’ damages shall be ascertained in
advance, and operation and mode of driving
shall be planned with appropriate measures
to ensure safety.
Where in the vicinity of a site where bored or
driven piling works are to be carried out there
are old structures which are likely to be dam-
aged, tell-tales shall be fixed on such struc-
tures to watch their behaviour and timely
precautions taken against any undesirable
effect.
Il.3 During construction, inspection shall
be made by the engineer-in-charge to ensure
that all protective works carried out to safe-
guard the adjoining property are sufficient
and in good order to ensure safety (see
Part 11 Administration).
11.4 Before carrying out any excavation
work/ pile driving, the position, depth.and
size of underground structures, such as water
pipes, mains, cables or other servicesin the
PART Yll CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
vicinity to the proposed work, may be ob-
tained from the Authority to prevent acci-
dents to workmen engaged in excavation
work and calamities for the general public.
Prior to commencement of excavation
detailed data of the type of soils that are likely
to be met with during excavation shall be
obtained and the type of protective works by
way of shoring timbering, etc, shall be decided
upon for the various strata that are likely to be
encountered during excavation. For detailed
information regarding safety requirements
during excavation reference may be made to
good practice [VII (7)].
12. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND
COMMON HAZARDS DURING
EXCAVATION
12.1 Location of Machinery and Toois-
Excavating machinery consisting of both
heavy and light types shall be kept back from
the,excavation site at a distance which would
be safe for such type of equipment. Heavy
equipment, such as excavating machinery
and road traffic shall be kept back from the
excavated sites at a distance of not less than
the depth of trench or at Ieast 6 m for trench
deeper than 6 m. Care shall also be taken to
keep excavating tools and materials far away
from the edge of trench to prevent such items
being inadvertently knocked into the trench.
12.2 Excavated Materials- Excavated
materials shall be kept back from the edges
of the trench to provide clear berm of safe
width. Where this is not feasible, the protec-
tive works designed for the trenches shall
take into consideration, the additional load
due to overburden of materials.
12.2.1 OTHER SURCHARGES -Proximity
of buildings, piles of lumber, crushed rocks,
sand and other constructional materials,
large trees, etc, may impose surcharges on
the side of the trench to cause sliding, etc.
Under these conditions additional protective
works shall be provided to support the sides
of the trench.
12.3 T)rpe of Strata-Adequate precau-
tions, depending upon the type of strata met
with during excavation (like quick sand,
loose fills and loose boulder) shall be taken
to protect the workmen during excavation.
Effect of climatic ‘variations and moisture
content variations on the materials under
excavation shall be constantly watched and
precautions taken, where necessary, imme-
diately to prevent accidents at work site.
12.4 Overhang and Slopes- During any
excavation, sufficient slopes to excavated
sides by way of provision of steps or gradual
slopes shall be provided to ensure the safety
of men and machine working in the area.
12.5 Blasting for foundation of building is
prohibited unless special permission is
obtained form the Authority. Where blasting
technique has to be resorted to, prior inspec-
tion for the stability of slopes shall be carried
out. After blasting, overhangs or loose
boulders shall be cleared by expert workers
carrying out blasting prior to continuation of
the excavation by normal working parties.
12.5.1 Burrowing or mining or what is
known as ‘gophering’shall not be allowed. In
any trench where such methods have been
followed, the cavities left shall be eliminated
by cutting back the bare slope before remov-
ing any further material from the section of
the trench.
12.6 Health Hazards-Where gases or fumes
are likely to be present in trenches, sufficient
mechanical ventilation, to protect the health
and safety of persons working there, shall be
provided. If necessary, the personnel work-
ing there, shall be provided with respiratory
protective equipment when work in such
unhealthy conditions has to be carried out.
The precautionary measures provided shall
be inspected by the local health authorities
prior to commencement of the work.
12.7 Safety of Materials-Materials required
for excavation, like ropes, planks for gang-
ways and walkways, ladders, etc, shall be
inspected by the engineer-in-charge who shall
ensure that no accident shall occur due to the
failure of such materials (see Part V Build-
ing materials).
12.8 Fencing and Warning Signals-Where
excavation is going on, for the safety of pub-
lic and the workmen, fencing shall be erected,
if there is likelihood of the public including
cattle frequenting the area. Sufficient number
of notice boards and danger sign lights shall
be provided in the area to avoid any member
of public from inadvertently falling into the
excavation. When excavations are being
done on roads, diversion of the roads shall be
provided with adequate notice board and
lights indicating the diversion well ahead.
Where necessary, recourse may be had
for additional precautionary measures by way
of watchmen to prevent accident to the gen-
eral public, especially during hours of
darkness.
12.9 Effect of Freezing and Thawing-Due
to expansion of water when freezing, rock
fragments, boulders, etc, are frequently loo-
sened. Therefore, the side walls of the exca-
vation shall be constantly watched for signs
of cracks during a thaw. When depending in
“n!6
whole or in part on freezing to support the side’
walls, great care shall be taken during thaws to
provide suitable bracing or remedy the condi-
tion by scaling of the loose material from the
sides.
12.10 Vibrations from Nearby Sources-
Vibration due to adjacent machinery, vehi-
cles, rail-roads, blasting, piling and other
sources require additional precautions to be
taken.
12. I I Precautions While Using Petroleum
Powered Equipment-At the site of excava-
tion, where petroleum powered equipment is
used, petroleum vapours are likely to accum-
ulate at lower levels and’ may cause fire
explosion under favourable circumstances.
Care should, therefore, be taken to avoid all
sources of ignition in such places.
13. PILING AND OTHER DEEP
FOUNDATIONS
I3.1 Gpneral
13.1.1 SAFETY P R O G R A M M E -All opera-
tions shall be carried out under the imme-
diate charge of a properly qualified and
competent foreman who shall also be respon-
sible for the safety arrangements of the work.
13.1.2 For work during night, lighting of at
least 100 lux intensity shall be provided at
the work site.
13.1.3 Every crane driver or hoisting
appliance operator shall be competent to the
satisfaction of the engineer-in-charge and no
person under the age of 21 years should be
in-charge of any hoisting machine including
any scaffolding winch, or give signals to
operator.
13.1.4 Working in compressed air, in case of
deep foundations, requires several precau-
tions to be observed to safeguard the work-
men against severe hazards to life,
compressed air disease and related ailments.
For detailed information regarding safety
requirements, reference may be made to
good practice [VII(S)].
13.2 Piling Rig
13.2.1 Pile drivers shall not be erected in
dangerous proximity to electric conductors.
If two pile drivers are erected at one place
these shall be separated by a distance at least
equal to the longest leg in either rig.
13.2.2 The frame of any rig shall be structu-
rally safe for all anticipated dead, live or
wind loads. Whenever there is any doubt
about the structural strength, suitable test
shall be carried out by the foreman and the
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
results of the test recorded. No pile driving
equipment shall be taken into use until it has
been inspected and found to be safe.
1.3.2.3 Pile drivers shall be firmly supported
on heavy timber sills, concrete beds or other
secure foundation. If necessary, to prevent
danger, pile drivers shall be adequately
guyed:
When the rig is not in use, extra precaution-
ary measures for stability, such as securing
them with minimum four guys, shall be
adopted to prevent any accidents due to
wind, storm. gales and earthquake.
13.2.4 Access to working platforms and the
top pulley shall be provided by ladders.
Working platforms shall be protected against
the weather.
13.2.4.1 In tall driven piling rigs or rigs of
similar nature where a ladder is necessary for
regular use, the ladder shall be securely fas-
tened and extended for the full height of the
rig.
13.2.5 Exposed gears, lly wheels, etc, shall
be fully enclosed.
13.2.6 Pile driving equipment in use shall be
inspected by a competent engineer at regular
intervals not exceeding three months. A
register shall be maintained at the site of work
for recording the results of such inspected Pile
lines and pulley blocks shall he inspected by
the foreman before the beginning of each
shift, for any excess wear or any other defect.
13.2.6!1 Defective parts of pile drivers, such
as sheaves, mechanism slings and hose shall
be repaired by only competent person and
duly mspected by foreman-in-charge of the
rig and the results recorded in the register.
No steam or air equipment shall be repaired
while it is in operation or under pressure.
Hoisting ropes on pile drivers shall be made
of galvanized steel.
13.2.7 Steam and air lines shall be controlled
by easily accessible shut-off valves. These
lines shall consist of armoured hose or its
equivalent. The hose of steam and air
hammers shall be securely lashed to the
hammer so as to prevent it from whipping if
a connection breaks. Couplings of sections of
hose shall be additionally secured by ropes or
chains.
13.2.8 When not in use the hammer shall be
in dropped position and shall be held in place
by a cleat, timber or any other suitable
means.
13.2.9 For every hoisting machine and for
every chain rig hook, shackle, swivel and pul-
PART VII CONSTRI’CTIONAI. P R A C T I C E S AND
ley block used in hoisting or as means of
suspension, the safe working loads shall be
ascertained. In case of doubt, actual testing
shall be carried out and the working load
shall be taken as half of the tested load.
Every hoisting machine and all gears referred
to above shall be plainly marked with the
safe working load. In case of a hoisting
machine having a variable safe working load,
each safe working load together with the
conditions under which it is applicable shall
be clearly indicated. No part of any machine
or any gear shall be loaded beyond the safe
working load except for the purpose of
testing.
13.2.10 Motor gearing, transmission, CleCtri-
Cal wiring and other dangerous parts of
hoisting appliances should be provided with
efficient safe guards. Hoisting appliances
shall be provided with such means as ~111
reduce, to the minimum, the risk of acciden-
tal descent of the load and adequate precau-
tions shall be taken to reduce to the
minimum, the risk of any part of suspended
load becoming accidentally displaced. When
workers are employed on electrical instaha-
tions which are already energized, insulating
mats and wearing apparel, such as gloves,
etc, as may be necessary, shall be provided.
Sheaves on pile drivers shall be guardedSO
that workers may not be drawn into them.
13.2.10.1 When loads have to be inclined:
a) they shall be adequately counter-
balanced, and
b) the tilting device shall bt -cured against
slipping.
13.2.11 Adequatee precautions shall be
taken to prevent a pile driver from overturn-
ing if a wheel breaks.
13.2.12 Adequate precautions shall be taken
by providing stirrups or by other effective
means, to prevent the rope from coming out
of the top pulley or wheel.
13.2.13 Adequate precautions shall be taken
to prevent the hammer from missing the pile.
13.2.14 If necessary, to prevent danger, long
piles and heavy sheet piling should be
secured against falling.
132.15 Wherever steam boilers are used, the
safety regulations of boilers shall be strictly
followed and safety valves shall be adjusted
to TN/cm’ in excess of working pressure
accurately.
13.2.16 Where elctricity is used as power for
Piling rig, only armoured cable conforming
to the relevant Indian Standard shall be used
and the cable shall be t h o r o u g h l y
waterproofed.
SAFETY w.1
13.2.17 All checks as given in the Indian shall be properly tied to the junctions with
Standards and any manuals issued by the coir ropes of sufficient strength or mechani-
manufacturers shall be carried out. cal joints to ensure that joints do not give
way due to the load of workmen and mate-
13.3 Operation of Equipment rial. Joining the members of scaffolds only
with nails shall be prohibited as they are
13.3.1 Workers employed in the vicinity of likely to get loose under normal weathering
pile drivers shall wear helmets conforming to conditions. In the erection or maintenance of
accepted standards [VII(9)]. tall buildings, scaffoldings shall be of non-
combustible material especially when the
23.3.2 Piles shall be prepared at a distance at work is being done on any building in occu-
least equal to twice the length of the longest pation. After initial construction of the scaf-
pile from the pile driver. folding, frequent inspections of scaffolding
shall be carried out to ensure that no damage
13.3.3 Piles being hoisted in the rig should has occurred to scaffolding, especially due to
be so slung that they do not have to be swung the weathering of coir ropes which would
round, and may not inadvertently, swing or endanger workmen working on the scaffolding.
whip rdund. A hand rope shall be fastened to The platforms, gangways and runways pro-
a pile that is being hoisted to control its vided on the scaffoldings shall be of sufficient
movement. While a pile is being guided into strength and width to ensure safe passage for
position in the leads, workers shall not put the workmen working on the scaffolding. The
their hands or arms between the pile and the joints provided in these gangways, platforms,
inside guide or on top of the pile, but shall etc, shall be such as to ensure a firm foot-hold
use a rope for guiding. to the workmen. -Where necessary, cross bars
shall bc provided to the full width of gangway
13.3.4 Before a good pile is hoisted into or runway to facilitate safe walking. For
position it shall be provided with an iron ring detailed information regarding safety require-
or cap over the driving end to prevent ments for erec tion, use and dismantling of
brooming. When creosoted wood piles are scaffolds, reference may be made to good
being driven, adequate precautions shall be practice [Vll( I I)].
taken, such as the provision of personal pro- 14.2.1 The engineer-in-charge shall ensure
tective equipment and barrier creams, to pre- by frequent inspections that gangways of
vent workers receiving eye or skin injuries scaffolding have not become slippery due to
from splashes of creosote. spillage of material. Loose materials shall
not be allowed to remain on the gangways.
Z3.3.5 When piles are driven at an inclina- Where necessary, because of height or res-
tion to the vertical, if necessary, to prevent tricted width, hand-rails shall be provided on
danger, these should rest in a guide. both sides. Workers shall not be allowed to
work on the scaffolding during bad weather
13.3.6 No steam or air shall be blown down and ‘high winds.
until all workers are at a safe distance.
14.2.2 In the operations involved in the erec-
14. WALLS tion or maintenance of outside walls, fittings,
etc, of tall buildings, it is desirable to use one
14.1 General-Depending on the type of or more net(s) for the safety of the workmen
wall to be constructed the height of construc- when the workmen are required to work on
tion per day shall be reStricted to ensure that scaffoldings.
the newly constructed wall does not come
down due to lack of strength in the lower 14.3 L&&t-s---All ladders shall be cons-
layers. Similarly, in long walls adequate tructed of sound materials and shall be capa-
expansion/crumple joints shall be provided ble of carrying their intended loads safely.
to ensure safety. ‘The ladders shall have not only adequate
strength but rigidity as well. If a ladder shows
14.2 Scaffoold-Properly designed and cons- tendency JO spring, a brace shall be attached
tructed scaffolding built by competent to its middle and supported from some other
workmen shall be- provided during the cons- nori-yielding fixed oblect. No ladder iXWmg a
truction of the walls to ensure the safety of missing or defective rung or one which
workei-s. The scaffolding may be of timber or depends for its support solely on nails, shall
metal sections and the materials in scaffold- be used. Ladders shall not be used as guys,
ing shall be inspected for soundness, braces or skids or for any other purpose for
strength, etc, at site by the engineer-in-charge which they are not intended. They shall not
prior to erection of scaffolds. Steel scafFolds be used in horizontal position as runways.
intended for use in normal building construc- They shall not be overcrowded. Wherever
tion work shall conform to accepted stand- possible, ladders shall not be spliced. Where
ards [VI& lo)]. Bamboo and timber scaffolds splicing is unavoidable, it shall be done only

J* N A T I O N A L BUlLDING CODE OF iNDL4

under the supervision of engineer-in-charge.
Ladders leading to landings or walkways
shall extend at least one metre above the
landing and shall be secured at the upper end,
To prevent slipping, a ladder shall be secured
at the bottom end. If this cannot be done, a
person shall be stationed at the base when-
ever it is in use. As a further precautions,
the pitch at which a lean-to-ladder is used
shall be such that the horizontal distance of
its foot from the vertical plane of its top shall
be not more than one quarter of its length. If
the surface of the floor on which the ladder
rests is smooth or sloping, the ladder shall be
provided with non-slip bases. If the use of a
ladder is essential during strong winds, it
shall be securely lashed in position. No
ladder shall be placed or leant against win-
dow pane, sashes or such other unsafe or
yielding objects, nor placed in front of doors
opening towards it. If set up in driveways,
passageways or public walkways, it shall be
protected by suita’ble barricades. When
ascending or descending, the user shall face
the ladder, use both his hands and place his
feet near the ends of the rungs rather than
near the middle. It is dangerous to lean more
than 30cm to side in order to reach a larger
area from a single setting of the ladder.
Instead, the user shall get down and shift the
ladder to the required position.
Metal ladders shall not be used around electri-
cal equipment or circuits of any kind where
there is a possibility of coming incontact with
the current. Metal ladders shall be marked
with signs reading ‘CAUTION. DO NOT USE
NEAR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT’.
Wooden ladders shall be inspected at least
once in a month for damage and deteriora-
tion. Close visual inspection is recommended
in preference to load testing. This condition
is particularly applicable to rope and bam-
boo ladders wherein fraying of ropes and
damage to bamboo is likely to occur due to
materials falling on them. When a ladder has
been accidentally dropped it shall be
inspected by the engineer-in-charge prior to
re-use. Overhead protection shall be pro-
vided for workmen under ladder. For detailed
information regarding safety requirements for
use of ladders, reference may be made to good
practice [VII( 12)].
14.4 Opening in Walls-Whenever making
of an opening in the existing wall is contem-
plated, adequate supports against the col-
lapse or cracking of the wall portion above or
roof or adjoining walls shall be provided.
1 4 . 4 . 1 G UARDING OF W ALL O P E N I N G S A N D
HOLES -Wall opening barriers and screens
shall be of such construction and mounting
that they are capable of withstanding the
PART wl CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES A ND SApETy
intended loads safely. For detailed informa-
tion reference may be made to good practice
[V11(13)]. Every wall opening from which
there is a drop of more than 120cm shall be
guarded by one of the following:
4 RAIL, ROLLER, PICKET FENCE, HALF
DOOR OR EQUIVALENT BARRIER ---The
guard may be removable but should
preferably be hinged or otherwise
mounted so as to be conveniently
replaceable. Where there is danger to
persons working or passing below on
account of the falling materials, a remov-
able toe board or the equivalent shall
also be provided. When the opening is
not in use for handling materials, the
guards shall be kept in position regard-
less of a door on the opening. In addi-
tion, a grab handle shall be provided on
each side of the opening. The opening
should have a sill that projects above the
floor level at least 2.5 cm.
b) Extension platform into which materials
may be hoisted for handling, shall be of
full length of the opening and shall have
side rails or equivalent guards.
14.4.2 Every chute wall opening from which
there is a drop of more than 120 cm shall be
guarded by one or more of the barriers speci-
tied in 14.4.1 or as required by the
conditions.
14.5 Projection from Walls-Whenever pro-
jections cantilever out of the walls, tempo-
rary formwork shall be provided for such
projections and the same shall not be
removed till walls over the projecting slabs
providing stability load against overturning
are completely constructed.
15. COMMON HAZARDS DURING
WALLING
15.1 Lifting of Materials for Construc-
tion - Implements used for carrying materials
to the top of scaffoldings shall be of adequate
strength and shall not be overloaded during
the work. Where workmen have to work
below scaffoldings or ladder, overhead pro-
tection against &he falling materials shall be
provided. Care shall be taken in carrying large
bars, rods, etc, during const.ruction of the
walls to prevent any damage to property or
injury to workmen.
15.2 Haulage of Materials
15.2.1 In case of precast columns, steel
beams, etc, proper precautions shall betaken
to correctly handle, use and position them
with temporary arrangement of guys till
grouting of the base.
J9
1S.2.2 Manila or sisal rope shall not be used
in rainy season for hoisting of heavy mate-
rials as they lose their strength with alternate
wetting and drying.
15.3 Electrical Hazards-No scaffolding,
ladder, working platform, gangway runs, etc,
shall exist within 3m from any uninsulated
electric wire.
15.4 Fire Hazards-Gangways and the
ground below the scaffolding shall be kept
free from readily combustible materials
including waste and dry vegetation at all
times.
1.5.4:1 Where extensive use of blow torch or
other flame is anticipated scaffoldings,
gangways, etc, shall be constructed with fire
resistant materials. A portable dry powder
extinguisher of 3-kg capacity shall be kept
handy.
15.5 Mechanical Hazards- Care shall be
taken to see that no part of scaffolding or
walls is struck by truck or heavy moving
equipment and no materials shall be dumped
against them to prevent any damage. When
such scaffoldings are in or near a public
thoroughfare, sufficient warning lights and
boards shall be provided on the scaffoldings
to make them clearly visible to the public.
15.6 Fragile Materials-During glazing
operations, adequate precautions shall be
taken to ensure that the fragments of fragile
materials do not cause any injury to work-
men or general public in that area by way of
providing covering to such material, side pro-
tection at work sate, etc.
16. ROOFING
Id.1 Prevention of accidental falling of
workmen during the construction of roofs
shall be ensured by providing platforms,
catch ro es, etc. If the materials are to be
hoisted From the ground level to the roof
level, adequate precautions shall be taken by
way of correct technique of handling, hoists
of sufficient strength to cater for the quantity
of stores to be hoisted and prevention of
overloading such hoists or buckets, preven-
tion of overturning of hoists or buckets.
Where in a multi-storeyed building, the floor
of one storey is to be used for storage of
materials for the construction of roofs, it
shall be ensured that the quantum of stores
kept on the floor along with the load due to
personnel engaged in the construction work
shall ‘not exceed the rated capacity of the
floors.
16.2 While roofing work is being done with
corrugated galvanized iron or asbestos
“U?O
cement sheets, it shall be ensured that joints
are kept secured in position and do not slip,
thus causing injury to workmen. Workers
should not be allowed to walk on asbestos
cement sheets but should be provided with
walking boards. While working with tiles, it
shall be ensured that they are not kept loose
on the roof site resulting in falling of tiles on
workmen in lower area. In slopes of more
than 30“ to the horizontal, the workmen shall
use ladders or other safety devices to work on
the roof.
16.3 If any glass work is to be carried out in
the roof, it shall be ensured that injury to
passerby due to breaking of glass is pre-
vented. During wet conditions, the workmen
shall be allowed to proceed to work on a
sloping roof, only if the engineer-in-charge
has satisfied himself that the workmen are
not likely to slip due to wet conditions.
16!4 Flat Roof-ln any type of flat roof con-
struction, any formwork provided shall be
properly designed and executed to ensure
that it does not collapse during construction.
During actual construction of roof, frequent
inspection of the formwork shall be carried
out to ensure that no damage has occured to
it.
16.5 While using reinforcement in roofs, it
shall be ensured that enough walking plat-
forms are provided in the reinforcement area
to ensure safe walking to the concreting area.
Loose wires and unprotected rod ends shall
be avoided.
16.6 Guarding o$ Floor Openings and Floor
Holes
16.6.1 Every tern orary floor opening shall
have railings, or sR all be constantly attended
by someone. Every floor hole into which er-
ztrercan acctdently fall shall be guardec! by
a) a railing with toe board on all exposed
sides, or
b) a floor hole cover of adequate strength
and it should be hinged in place. When
the cover is not in place, the floor hole
shall be constantly attended by some one
or shall be protected by a removable
railing.
26.6.2 Every stairway floor opening shall be
guarded by a railing on all cx osed sides,
except at entrance to stairway. Bvery ladder
way floor opening or platform shall be
guarded by a guard railing with toe board on
all exposed sides (except at entrance to open-
ing), with t& passage through the railing
either provided with a swinging gate or so
offset that a person can not walk directly into
the opening.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
16.6.3 G UARDING OF O P E N- SIDE F LOORS
AND P LATFORM -Every open-sided floor or
platform 120 cm or more above adjacent floor
or ground level shall be guarded by a railing
(or the equivalent) or all open sides, except
where there is entrance to ramp, stair-way, or
fixed ladder. The railing shall be provided
with a toe board beneath the open sides
wherever:
a) persons may pass;
b) there is moving machinery; or
c) there is equipment with which falling
materials could create a hazard.
For detailed information, reference may be
made to good practice [VII( 13)].
17. ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIRE-
MENTS FOR ERECTION OF
CONCRETE FRAMED STRUCTURES
(HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS)
17.1 Handling of Plant
17.1.1 MIXERS
Z7.1,Z.f All gears, chains and rollers of mix-
ers shall be properly guarded. If the mixer
has a charging skip the operator shall ensure
that the workmen are out of danger before
the skip is lowered. Railings shall be pro-
vided on the ground to prevent anyone walk-
ing under the skip while it is being lowered.
17.1.1.2 All cables, clamps, hooks, wire
ropes, gears and clutches, etc, of the mixer,
shall be checked and cleaned, oiled and
greased, and serviced once a weak. A trial run
of the mixer shall be made and defects shall
be removed before operating a mixer.
17.1.1.3 When workmen are cleaning the
inside of the drums, and operating power of
the mixer shall be locked m the off position
and all fuses shall be removed and a suitable
notice hung at the place.
17.1.2 CRANES
17.1.2.1 Crane rails where used shall be
installed on firm ground and shall be.prop-
erly secured. In case of tower cranes, it shall
be ensured that the level difference between
the two rails remains within the limits pres-
cribed by the manufacturer to safeguard
against toppling of the crane.
17~1.2.2 Electrical wiring which can possibly
touch the crane or any member being lifted
shall be removed, or made dead by removing
the controlling fuses and in their absence
controlling switches.
?ART VII CONSTTWCIIONAL ?RACTlCIS A N D SAFSTT
17.1.2.3 .A11 practical steps shall be taken to
prevent the cranes being operated in danger-
ous proximity to a live overhead power line.
In particular, no member of the crane shall
be permitted to approach within the mini-
mum safety distances as laid down in 4.18(a).
If it becomes necessary to operate the cranes
with clearances less than those specified
above, it shall be ensured that the overhead
power lines shall invariably be shut offdur-
mg the period of operation of cranes. Loca-
tion of any underground power cables in the
area of operation shall also be ascertained
and necessary safety precautions shall be
taken.
17.1.2.4 Cranes shall not be used at a speed
which causes the boom to swing.
17.1.2.5 A crane shall be thoroughly exa-
mined at least once in a period of 6 months
by a competent person who shall record a
certificate of the check.
17.1.2.6 The operator of the crane shall
follow the safe reach of the crane as shown by
the manufacturer.
17.1.2.7 No person shall be lifted or trans-
ported by the crane on its hook or boom.
17.1.2.8 Toe boards and limit stops should
be provided for wheel barrows on the load
ing/unloading platforms. Material should be
loaded securely with no projections.
17.1.2.9 Concrete buckets handled by crane
or overhead cableway shall be suspended
from deep throated hooks, preferably
equipped with swivel and safety latch. In the
concrete buckets, both bottom drop type and
side drop type, closing and locking of the
exit door of the bucket shall always be
checked by the man-in-charge of loading
concrete in the bucket to avoid accidental
opening of the exit door and consequent fal-
ling of concrete.
17.1~2.10 Interlocking or other safety devices
shot&I be installed at all stopping points of the
hoists. The hoists shaft way should be fenced
properly.
17.1.2.11 When the bucket or other memebrs
being lifted are out of sight of the crane opera-
tor, a signalman shall be posted in clear view
of the receiving area and the crane operator.
17.1.2.12 A standard code of hand signals
shall be adopted in controlling the move-
ments of the crane, and both the driver and
the signaller shall be thoroughly familiar with
the signals.
“u-21
The driver of the crane shall respond to sig-
nals only from the appointed signaller but
shall obey stop signal at any time no matter
who gives. it.
17.1.2.23 If a travelling gantry crane is oper-
ating over casting beds, a warning signal
which sounds automatically during travel
should be provided to avoid accidents to
workmen crossing or standing in the path of
the moving loads.
17.1.3 TRUCKS
17.1.3.1 When trucks are being used on the
site, traffic .problems shall be taken care of. A
reasonably smooth traffic surface shall be
provided. If practicable, a loop road shall be
provided to permit continuous operation *of
vehicles and to eliminate their backing. If a
continuous loop is not possible, a turnout
shall be provided. Backing operations shall
be controlled by a signalman positioned so as
to have a clear view of the area behind the
truck and to be clearly visible to the truck
driver. Movement of workmen and plant
shall be routed to avoid crossing, as much as
possible, the truck lanes.
i 7.2 Formwork
17.2.1 Formwork shall be designed after tak-
ing into consideration spans, setting tempera-
ture of concrete, dead load and working load
to be supported and safety factor for the
materials used for formwork.
17.2.2 All timber formwork shall be care-
fully inspected before use and members
haing cracks and excessive knots shall
be discarded.
17.2.3 As timber centering usually takes an
initial set when vertical load is applied, the
design of this centering shall make allowance
for this factor.
17.2.4 The vertical supports shall be ade-
quately braced or otherwise secured in posi-
tion that these do not fall when the load gets
released or the supports are accidently hit.
17.2.5 Tubular steel centering shall be used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. When tubular steel and timber
centering is to be used in combination. neces-
sary precautions shall be taken to avoid any
unequal settlement under load.
17.2.6 A thorough inspection of tubular steel
centering is necessary before its erection and
members showing evidence of excessive rest-
ing, kinks, dents or damaged welds shall be
discarded. Buckled or broken members shall
be replaced.. Care shall also be taken that
“u-22
locking devices are in good working order
and that coupling pins are effectively aligned
to frames.
17.2.7 After assembling the basic unit,
adjustment screws shall be set to their
approximate final adjustment and the unit
shall be level and plumb so that when addi-
tional frames are installed the tower shall be
in level and plumb. The centering' frames
shall be tied together with sufficient braces to
make a rigid and solid unit. It shall be
ensured that struts and diagonals braces are
in proper position and are secured so that
frames develop full load carrying capacity.
As erection progresses, all connecting devices
shall be in place and shall be fastened for full
stability of joints and units.
17.2.8 In case of timber posts, vertical joints
shall be properly designed. The connections
shall normally be with bolts and nuts. Use of
rusted or spoiled threaded bolts and nuts
shall be avoided.
17.2.9 Unless the timber centering is sup-
ported by a manufacturer’s certificate about
the loads it can stand, centering shall be
designed by a competent engineer.
f 7.2.10 Centering layout shall be made by a
qualified engineer and shall be strictly fol-
lowed. The bearing capacity of the soil shall
be kept in yiew for every centering job. The
effect of weather conditions shall also be
taken into consideration as dry clay may
become very plastic after a rainfall and show
marked decrease in its bearing capacity.
17.2.11 Sills under the supports shall be set
on firm soil or other suitable material in a
pattern which assures adequate stability for
all props. Care shall be taken not to disturb
the soil under the supports. Adequate drain-
age shall be provided to drain away water
coming due to rains, washing of forms or
during the curing of the concrete to avoid
softening of the supporting soil starta.
17.2.12 All centering shall be finally,
inspected to ensure that:
a) footings or sills under every post of the
centering are sound.
b) all lower adjustment screws or wedges
are snug against the legs of the panels.
c) all upper adjustment screws or heads of
jacks are in full contact with the
formwork.
d) panels are plumb in both directions.
e) all cross braces are in place and locking
devices are in closed and secure position.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
0 in case of CHHAJAS and balconies, the
props shall be adequate to transfer the
load to the supporting point.
17.2.13 During pouring of the concrete, the
centering shall be constantly inspected and
strengthened, if required, wedges below the
vertical supports tightened and adjustment
screws properly adjusted as necessary. Ade-
quate protection of centering shall be secured
from moving vehicles or swinging loads.
17.2.14 Forms shall not be removed earlier
than as laid down in the specifications and
until it is certain that the concrete has deve-
loped sufficient strength to support itself and
all loads that will be imposed on it. Only
workmen actually engaged in removing the
formwork shall be allowed in the area during
these operations. Those engaged in removing
the formwork shall wear helmets, gloves and
heavy soled shoes and approved safety belts
if adequate footing is not provided above 2 m
level. While cutting any tying wires in ten-
sion, care shall be taken to prevent backlash
which might hit a workman.
17.2.14.1 The particular order in which the
supports are to be dismantled should be fol-
lowed according to the instructions of the
site engineer.
17.3 Ramps and Gangways
17.3.1 ,Ramps and gangways shall be of ade-
quate strength and evenly supported. They
shall either have a sufficiently flat slope or
shall have cleats fixed to the surface to pre-
vent slipping of workmen. Ramps andgang-
ways shall be kept free from grease, mud,
snow or other slipping hazards or other
obstructions leading to tripping and acciden-
tal fall of a workman.
17.3.1.1 Ramps and gangways meant for
transporting materials shall have even sur-
face and be of sufficient width and provided
with skirt boards on open sides.
17.4 Prestressed Concrete
27.42 In pre-stressing operations, oparat-
ing, maintenance and replacement instruc-
tions of the supplier of the equipment shall
be strictly adhered to.
17.4.2 Extreme caution shall be exercised in
all operations involving the use of stressing
equipment as wires/strands under high ten-
sile stresses become a lethal weapon.
17.4.3 During the jacking operation of any
tensioning element(s) the anchor shall be
kept turned up close to anchor plate, wher-
PART VII CONSTRUCTldNAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
ever possible, to avoid serious damage if a
hydrualic line fails.
17.4.4 Pulling-headers, bolts and hydraulic
jacks/rams shall be inspected for signs of
deformation and failure. Threads on bolts
and nuts should be frequently inspected for
diminishing cross section. Choked units shall
be carefully cleaned.
17.4.5 Care shall be taken that no one stands
in line with the tensioning elements and jack-
ing equipment during the tensioning opera-
tions and that no one is directly over the
jacking equipment when deflection is being
done. Signs and barriers shall be provided to
prevent workmen from working behind the
jacks when the stressing operation is in
progress.
17.4.6, Necessary shields should be put up
immediately behind the prestressing jacks
during stressing operations.
17.4.7 Wedges and other temporary anchor-
ing devices shall be inspected before use.
17.4.8 The prestressing jacks shall be period-
ically examined for wear and tear.
17.5 Erection of Prefabricated Members
17.5.1 A spreader beam shall be used wher-
ever possible so that the cable can be as per-
pendicular to the members being lifted as
practical. The angle between the cable and
the members to be lifted shall not be less than
60’.
17.5.2 The lifting wires shall be tested for
double the load to be handled at least once in
six months. The guy line shall be of adequate
strength to perform its function of contro!-
ling the movement of members being lifted.
17.5.3 Temporary scaffolding of adequate
strength shall be used to support precast
members at predetermined supporting points
while lifting and placing them in position and
connecting them to other members.
17.5.4 After erection of the member, it shall
be guyed and braced to prevent it from being
tipped or dislodged by accidental impact
when setting the next member.
17.5.5 Precast concrete units shall be
handled at specific picking points and with
specific devices. Girders and beams shall be
braced during transportation and handled. In
such a way as to keep the members upright.
17.5.6 Methods of assembly and erection
specified by the designer, shall be strictly
adhered to at site. Immediately on erecting
any unit in position, temporary connections
or supports as specified shall be provided
before relasing the lifting equipment. The
permanent structural connections shall be
established at the earliest opportunity.
17.6 Heated Concrete- When heaters are
being used to heat aggregates and other
materials and to maintain proper curing
temperatures, the heaters shall be frequently
checked for functioning and precautions shall
be taken to avoid hazards in using coal, liquid,
gas or any other fuel.
17.7 Structural Conriections
17.7.1 When reliance is placed on bond
between precast and in situ concrete the con-
tact surface of the precast units shall be suita-
bly prepared in accordance with the
specifications.
17.7.2 The packing of joints shall be carried
out in accordance with the assembly
instructions.
17.7.3 Levelling devices, such as wedges and
nuts which have no load bearing functionih
the completed structure shall be released or
removed as necessary prior to integrating the
joints.
17.7.4 If it becomes necessary to use electric
power for in situ work, the same should be
stepped down to a safe level as far as possible.
k7.8 General- 17.8.1 Workmen working in
any position where there is a falling hazard
shall wear safety belts or other adequate
protection shall be provided.
18. ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIRE-
MENTS FOR ERECTION OF
STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
18.1 Safety Organization -The agency
responsible for erecting the steel work should
analyze the proposed erection scheme for
safety; the e&ion scheme should cover
safety aspects right from the planning stage up
to the actual execution of the work.
18.2 Safety ,of Men
18.2.1 GENERAL-While engaging men for
the job the supervisor should check pp. and
make sure that they are skilled inthepataicu-
lar job they hhve to perform.
vII.24
IR.2.l.l The helmets shall be worn properly
and a! all times during the work and shall
conform to the accepted standards [V11(9)].
18.2.1.2 The safety goggles shall be used
while performing duties which are hazardous
to eye like drilling, cutting and welding. The
goggles used shall conform to the accepted
standards [VII( IS)] and should suit individ-
ual workers.
18.2.1.3 The welders and gas cutters shall be
equipped with proper protective equipment
like gloves, safety boots, aprons and hand
shields [see VII(l4)]. The filter glass of the
hand shield shall conform to the accepted
standards [VII( 1 S)] and should be suitable to
the eyes of the particular worker
18.2.1.4 When the work is in progress, the
area shall be cordoned off by barricades to
prevent persons from hitting against structu-
ral components, or falling into exca$ated
trenches or getting injured by falling objects.
18.2.1.5 Warning signs shall be displayed
where necessary to indicate hazards, for
example (a) ‘440 VOLTS’, (b) ‘DO N O T
SMOKE’, (c) ‘ M E N W O R K I N G A H E A D ’ ,
etc. Hand lamps shall be of low voltage pref-
erably 24 V to prevent electrical hazards.
28.2.1.6. All electrically operated hand tools
shall be provided with double earthing.
18.2.2 Anchors for guys or ties shall be
checked for proper placement. The weight of
concrete in which the anchors are embedded
shall be checked for uplift and sliding.
18.2.2.1 Split-end eye anchors shall only’ be
used in good, solid rock.
28.2.2.2 The first load lifted by a guy derrick
,shall be kept at a small height for about 10
minutes and the anchors immediately
inspected for any signs or indications of
failure.
18.2.3 When a number of trusses or deep
girders is loaded in one car or on one truck,
all but one being lifted shall be tied back
unless they have been tied or braced to pre-
vent their falling over and endangering men
unloading.
18.2.4 The erection gang shall have adequate
supply of bolts, washers, rivets, pins, etc, of
the correct size. Enough number of bolts
shall be used in connecting each piece using a
minimum of two bolts in a pattern to ensure
that the joint will not fail due to dead load
and erection loads. All splice connections in
columns, crane girders, etc, shal! be com-
pletely bolted or riveted or welded as speci-
fied in the drawing before erection.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
18.2.5 Girders and other heavy complicated
structural members may require special erec-
tion devices like cleats and hooks, which can
be shop assembled and bolted or riveted or
welded to the piece and may be left perma-
nently in the place after the work.
18.2.6, If a piece is laterally unstable when
picked at its centre, use of a balance beam is
advisable, unless a pair of bridles slings can
be placed far enough apart for, them to be
safe lifting points. The top flange of a truss,
girder or long beam may be temporarily rein-
forced with a structural member laid flat on
top of the member and secured temporarily.
18.2.7 On deep girders, and even on some
trusses, a safety ‘bar’ running their.full length
will aid the riggers, fitters and others
employed on the bottom flange or bottom
chord to.work with greater safety. This can
be a single 16 mm diameter wire rope through
vertical stiffeners’of such members about one
metre above the bottom flange and clamped
at the ends with wire rope clamps. If the holes
cannot be provided, short eye bolts can be
welded to the webs of the girder at intervals
to be removed and the surface chipped or
ground to leave it smooth after all work on
the piece has been completed.
18.2.8 Safety belts shall always be available
at work spbt to be used whenever necessary.
The rope shall be chemically treated to resist
dew and rdtting. These shall not be tied on
sharp edges of steel structures. They shall be
tied generally not more than 2 to 3m away
from the belt.
18.2.9 On a guy derrick or climbing crane
job, the tool boxes used by the erection staff
shall be moved to the new working floor each
time the rig is changed. On a mobile crane
job, the boxes shall be moved as soon as the
crane starts operating in a new area too far
away for the men to reach the boxes conve-
niently. While working a tall and heavy guy
derrick, it is advisable to control tension in
guys by hand winches to avoid jerks, which
may cause an accident.
18.2.10 The proper size, number and spacing
of wire rope clamps shall be used, depending
on the diameter of the wire rope. They shall
be properly fixed in accordance with codes of
good practice [VII(16)]. They shall be
checked as soon as the rope has been
stretched, as the rope, especially if new, tends
to stretch under the applied load, which in
turn may cause it to shrink slightly in diame-
ter. The clamps shall then be promptly tight-
ened to take care of this new condition. In
addition, the clamps shall be inspected fre-
quently to be sure that they have not slipped
and are tight enough.
?Alf wl CONSTWJCTIONAL ?RA- AND MFBlT
18.2.11 When the men can work safely from \
the steel structure itself, this is preferable to
hanging platforms or scaffolds, as it elimi-
nates additional operations, which in turn,
reduces the hazard of an accident.
18.2.11.1 To aid men working on floats or
scaffolds, as well as menin erection gangs, or
other gangs using small material, such as
bolts and drift pins, adequate bolt baskets or
similar containers with handles of sufficient
strength and attachment to carry the loaded
containers, shall be provided.
18.2.11.2 The men should be trained to use
such containers, and to keep small tools
gathered up and put away in tool boxes when
not in use. Material shall not be dumped
overboard when a scaffold is to be moved.
Rivet heaters shall have safe containers or
buckets for hot rivets left over at the end of
the day.
18.2.12 During the erection of tall buildings,
it is desirable to use nylon nets at a height of 3
to 4 m to provide safety to men.
18.2.13 S AFETY A GAINST F IRE-A fire pro-
tection procedure is to be set up if there1s to
be any flame cutting, burning, heating, rivet-
ing or any operation that could start a fire.
For precautions to be observed during weld-
ing and cutting operations. reference may be
made to good practice [V11(17)].
18.2.13.1 The workers should be instructed
not to throw objects like hot rivets, cigrette
stubs, etc, around.
18.2.13.2 Sufficient fire extinguishers, pref-
erably of soda acid type shall be placed at
strategic points. Extinguishers shall always
be placed in cranes, hoists, compressors and
similar places. Where electrical equipments
are involved, CO2 or dry powder extin-
guishers shall be provided.
18.2.14 Riding on a load, tackle or runner
shall be prohibited.
18.2.15 .The load shall never be allowed to
rest on wire ropes. Ropes in operation should
not be touched. Wtre rope with broken
strand shall not be used for erection work.
Wire ropes/manila ropes conforming to
acceptable standards [VII(18)] shall be used
for guying.
18.2.16 LIFTING APPLIANCES -Precautions
as laid down in 17.1.2 shall be followed.
18.2,17 SLINGING
18.2.17.1 Chains shall not be joined by .bolt-
ing or wiring links together. They shall not be
VP
shortened by tying knots. A chain in which
the links are locked, stretched or do not move
freely shall not be used. The chain shall be
free of ,kinks and twists. Proper eye splices
shall be used to attach the chain hooks.
18.2.27.2 Pulley blocks of the proper size
shall be used to allow the rope free play in the
sheave grooves and to protect the wire rope
from sharp bends under load. Idle sling
should not be carried on the crane hook
alongwith a loaded sling. When idle slings are
carried they shall be hooked.
28.2.17.3 While using multilegged slings,
each sling or leg shall be loaded evenly and
the slings shall be of sufficient length to avoid
a wide angle between the legs.
18.2.28 RIVETING OPERATIONS
18.2.18.1 HANDLING RIVETS-Care shall be
taken while handling rivets so that they do
not fall, strike or cause injury to men and
material below. Rivet catchers shall have
false wooden bottoms to prevent rivets from
rebounding.
18.2.18.2 RIVETINO DOLLIES-Canvas, leather
or rope slings shall be used for riveting dol-
lies. Chain shall not be used for the purpose.
18.2.18.3 RIVETING HAMMERS-Snaps and
plungers of pneumatic riveting hammers
shall be secured to prevent the snap from
dropping out of place. The nozzle of the
hammer shall be inspected periodically and
the wire attachment renewed when born.
18.2.18.4 FIRE PROTECTION-The rivet heat-
ing equipment should be as near as possible
to the place of work. A pail of water shall
always be kept ready for quenching the fire
during riveting operations and to prevent
fires when working near inflammable
materials.
18.2.19 WELDING AND G AS C UTTING
18.2.19.1 For safety and health requirements
in electric gas welding and cutting opera-
tions, reference may be made to good prac-
tice [VII( 19)]. The recommendations given
in 18.2.19.2 to 18.2.19.4 are also applicable.
18.2.19.2 All gas cylinders shall be used and
stored in the upright position only and shall
be conveyed in trolleys. While handling by
cranes they shall be carried in cages. The
cylinders shall be marked ‘full’ or ‘empty’ as
the case may be. Gas cylinders shall be stored
away from open flames and other sources of
heat. Oxygen cylinders shall not be stored
near combustible gas, oil, grease and similar
Y*I-26
combustible materials. When the cylinders
are in use, cylinder valve key or wrench shall
be placed in position. Before a cylinder is
moved, cylinder valve shall be closed. All
cylinder valves shall be closed when the
torches are being replaced or welding is
stopped for some reason. The cylinder valve
and connections shall not be lubricated.
18.2.19.3 Gas cutting and welding torches
shall be lighted by means of special lighters
and not with matches. The cables from
welding equipment should be placed in such
a way that they are not run over by traffic.
Double earthing shall be provided. Before
undertaking welding operations near
combustible materials, suitable blanketing
shall be provided and fire extinguishers kept
nearby. Welding shall not be undertakenm
areas where inflammable liquids and gases
are stored.
18.2.19.4 Gas lines and compressed air lines
shall be identified by suitable colour codes
for easy identification, to avoid confusion
and to prevent fire and explosion hazards.
18.3 Safety of Structure
18.3.1 GENERAL-The structure itself should
be safeguarded during its erection. The first
truss of the roof s stem shall be guyed on
each side before theyhoisting rope is detached
from it. After the subsequent trusses and roof
purlins are erected, protective guides shall be
firmly established and the required wind
bracings shall be erected to prevent the whole
structure being blown over by a sudden gale
at night. Bracing and guying precautions
shall be taken on .every structure until it is
complete. Guying shall be specifically done
for trusses and structural components which
after their erection form an erection device.
On structures used for temporary material
storage overloading shall be avoided.
18.3.1.1 Erection of columns shall be
immediately followed by vertical bracing
between columns before the roof structure is
erected.
19. .MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
19.1 Staircase Construction-While
staircase is under construction, depending on
the type of construction, namely, concrete or
brickwork, etc, suitable precautions shall be
taken by way of support, formworks, etc, to
prevent any collapse. Workmen or any other
person shall not be allowed to use such
staircases till they are tested and found.fit for
usage by the Authority/engineer-in-charge.
Till the permanent handrails are provided,
temporary provisions like ropes, etc, shall be
NATIONAL BUILDlNG CODE OF INDIA
provided on staircases prior to commence-
ment of use of such staircases.
19.2 Lift Wells--Till the installation of the
lift is completed, lift wells shall be protected
with check boards or railings together with
notice boards, danger lights, etc, to prevent
persons accidentally falling into the wells.
The handrails provided shall be capable of
withstanding pressure exerted due to normal
bumping of an individual against the same.
19.3 Construction Involving the Use of Hot
Bituminous Tar Materials
19.3.1 S AFETY P ROGRAMME
19.3.1.1 GENERAL-On ah major works, an
experienced and competent foreman or
supervisor shall be placed in-charge of the
work, and shall be made responsible for the
strict observance of the safety rules. He shall
stock the necessary protective equipment, fire
extinguishing equipment, first-aid kit, etc. He
shall also keep a record of the accidents tak-
ing place on any particular job, with reasons
thereof, and shall suggest suitable remedial
measures to the management for prevention
thereof.
19.3.1.2 PROTECTIVE ~~~~Rl~~i----Workers
engaged on jobs involving handling of hot
bitumen, tar, and bituminous mixtures shall
use protective wears, such as boots and
gloves, preferably of asbestos or otherwise of
rubber; goggles and helmet. No workers shall
be permitted to handle such materials with-
out wearing the needed protective covering.
19.3.1.3 FIRE FIGHTING ARRANGEMENTS-
When heating and handling of hot bitumi-
nous materials is to be done in the open,
sufficient stocks of clean dry sand or loose
earth shall be made available at the work site
to cope with any resultant fires. When such
materials are not available, nor are any suita-
ble type of fire extinguishers provided at the
work site in the open, and reliance has to be
on using water for fighting any fire; the water
supply available should be in abundance and
the water shall be applied to the. fire in’ the
form of spray. When heating of bituminous
materials is carried out in enclosed spaces,
sufficient number of property maintained dry
powder fire extinguisher or form extinguisher
conforming to accepted standards
[VII(20)] shall be kept in readiness on the
work site.
19.3.2 S P R A Y E R , SPREADER / PA V E R
19.3.2.1 SPRAYER-The sprayer shall be
provided with a fire resisting screen. The
screen shall have an observation window,
Piping for hot tar and bitumen shall beade-
FART MI CONSTIIUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
quately insulated to protect workers from
injury by burns. Flexible piping work under
positive pressure shall be of metal which shall
be adequately insulated. Workers shall not
stand facing the wind directions while spray-
ing hot binder, lest it may fall on them caus-
ing burns.
19.3.2.2 SPREADER/ PAVER -Spreaders in
operation shall be protected by signals, signs
or other effective means. People should be
warned against walking over hot mixture
laid. Gravel spreaders shall always keep a
safe distance from sprayer. Elevated plat-
forms on spreaders shall be protected by suit-
able railing and be provided with an access
ladder.
19.3.3 EQ U I P M E N T FOR H EATING OF
B I T U M E N A.ND TARS
19.3.3.1 Tanks, vats, kettles, pots, drums
and other vessels for heating tar, bitumen
and other bituminous materials shall be:
a) adequately resistant to damage by heat,
transportation, etc;
b) capable of holding a full load without
danger of collapse, bursting or
distortion;
c) provided with a close fitting cover suita-
ble for smothering a fire in the vessel OI
protection from rain; and
d) leak proof, and provided with suitable
outlets which can be controlled for tak-
ing out the hot material.
19.3.3.2 Suitable indicator gauges shall be
used to ascertain level and temperature of the
material in the boiler. On no account shall
workers be allowed to peep into the boiler for
this purpose. For ascertaining levels, in small
plants, dipstick may also be used.
19.3.3.3 Gas and oil-fired bitumen and tar
kettles or pots shall be equipped with
burners, regulators and safety devices of
types approved by the Authority. Heating
appliances for vessels shall distribute the heat
uniformly over the heating surface so as to
avoid overheating. In case of bituminous
mixtures using mineral aggregates filler
together with bitumen, it is preferable to have
some means for .stirring as well. Only vessels
heated by electricity shall be used inside
buildings. Tar boilers shall never be used on
combustible roof.
19.3.3.4 Buckets for hot bitumen, bitumi-
nous materials or tar shall have:
a) the bail or handle firmly secured,. and
b) a second handle near the bottom for
tipping.
19.3.3.5 Bitumen or tar boilers mounted on
wheels for easy transport or towing shall
preferably be provided with hand pumps for
spraying purposes.
19.3.3.6 Vessels in operation shall be kept at
a safe distance from combustible materials.
When vessels are used in confined spaces. the
gases, fumes and smoke generated shall be
removed by exhaust ventilation or by forced
ventilations. Vessels that are being heated
shall not be left unattended. Pieces of bitumi-
nous material shall not be thrown into the
hot vessels so as to cause splashing. Covers
shall be kept closed when vessels are not in
use. Containers shall not be filled with hot
bitumen or tar to a level that might cause’
danger when they are carried or hoisted.
Enough space shall be left in vessels for
expansion of binder when heated.
19.3.3.7 Bitumen, tar shall be kept dry and to
avoid fire due to foaming, boiler shall have a
device that prevents foam from reaching the
burners or anti-foaming agents shall be used
to control the same. Alternatively to avoid
fire due to foaming, the heating shall be at low
temperature till the water entrapped, if any, is
completely evaporated. Any water present in
the boiler shall also be drained before using it
for heating binders. No open light shall be
used for ascertaining the level of binder in
boilers. If a burner goes out, the fuel supply
shall be cut off and the heating tube shall be
thoroughly blown out by the fan so as to
prevent a back fire.
19.3.3.8 Cutbacks shall not be heated over
an open flame unless a water jacket is used.
While they are being heated the vessel shall
be kept open.
19.3.3.9 Piping shall not be warmed with
burning rags and instead blow-lamps or
similar devices shall be used.
19.3.3.10 Spilled bitumen or tar shall be
promptly cleaned up around boilers.
19,3.3.11 inspection openings shall not be
opened while there is any pressure in the
boiler.
19.3.3.12 When tanks are cleaned by steam,
adequate precautions shall be taken to pre-
vent any build up of pressure.
19.3.4 HANDLING B ITUMEN /TAR-Bitu-
men/tar shall not be heated beyond the
temperature recommended by the manufac-
turer of the product. While discharging
heated binder from the boiler, workers shall
not stand opposite to the jet so as to avoid
the possibility of hot binder falling on them.
The container shall be handled only after
vl1.28
closing the control valve. While handling hot
bitumen, tar, workers shall exercise scrupu-
lous care to prevent accidental spillage the-
reof. The buckets and cans in which the hot
material is carried from boiler shall be
checked before use to ensure that they are
intact ,and safe. Mops and other applicators
contaminated with bituminous materials
shall not be stored inside buildings.
19.3.5 BITUMEN PI.AS~‘S---Safety require-
ments shall be in accordance with good prac-
tice [V11(21)].
20. FINISHES
20.1 Painting, Polishing and Other Fini-
shes-only the quantity of paint, thinner and
polish required for the day’s work should be
kept at the work spot.
20.1.1 All containers of paint, thinner and
polish which are not in actual use should be
closed with tight fitting lids and kept at a safe
place away from the actual work site.
20.1.2 A 5 kg dry powder fire extinguisher
conforming to acceptable standards
[Vll(22)] shall be kept handy.
20.1.3 Metal receptacles with pedal operated
metal lids shall be kept handy at the work site
for depositing used cotton ragsi waste. The
contents of such receptacles shall be disposed
off before the end of each day’s work at a safe
place, preferably by burning under proper
supervision.
20.1.4 All containers of paint shall be
removed from the work site and deposited in
the paint store before the close of day’s work.
Used paint brushes shall be cleaned and
deposited in the store alongwith the
containers.
20.1.5 Some paints/polishing and finishing
materials are injurious to the health of work-
men. Adequate protective clothing, respira-
tory equipment, etc, shall be provided for the
use of workmen during such operations
where necessary.
21. FRAGILE FIXTURES
2Ll It shall be ensured that sufficient
number of workmen and equipment are pro-
vided to carry the fragile fixtures like. sanitary
.
fittings, glass panes, etc, to prevent injury to
workmen due to accidental dropping of such
fixtures.
22. SAFETY IN SPECIAL OPERATIONS
22.1 Safety in compressed airwork, drilling,
blasting and welding operations shall be in
accordance with good practice [VlI(23)].
NATIONAL BUILDING COD1 OF UUDiA
23. IX..E;X..;gtL INSTALLATIONS
23.1 Temporary Electrical Wiring
23.1.~ Frayed and/ or bare wires shall not be
used for temporary electrical connections
during construction. All temporary wiring
shall be installed and supervised by a compe-
tent electrician. Adequate protection shall be
provided for all electrical wiring laid’on floor
which may have to be crossed over by cons-
truction machinery or by the workmen. All
flexible wiring connecting the electrical
appliances shall have adequate mechamcal
strength and shall preferably be enclosed in a
flexible metal sheath. Overhead wires/cables
shall be so laid that they leave adequate head
room.
23.1.2 All electrical circuits, other than those
required for illumination of the site at night,
shall be switched off at the close of day’s
work. The main switch board from which
connections are taken for lighting, power
operated machinery, etc, shall be located in
an easily accessible and prominent place. No
article of clothing nor stores shall be kept at
the back of or over the board or anywhere
near it. One 3-kg/4.5-kg CO2 extinguisher or
one S-kg dry powder extinguisher shall be
provided near the switch board.
23.2 Permanent Electrical Installatmns-
Besides the fire safety measures for electrical
installations covered under 23.1, safety in
electric installations in buildings and installa-
tions of lifts shall be in accordance with Part
VIII Building services, Section 2 Electrical
installations and Part VIII Building services,’
Section 5 Installation of lifts and escalators.
24. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
24.1 Sanitation
a) Adequate toilet facilities shall be pro-
vided for the workmen within easy access
of their place of work. *The total number
to be provided shall be not less than one
per 30 employees in any one shift.
b) Toilet facilities shall be provided from
the start of building operations, and con-
nection to a sewer shall be made’as soon
as practicable.
cl Every toilet shall be soconstructed that
the occupant is sheltered from view and
protected from the weather and falling
objects.
d) Toilet facilities shall be maintained in a
sanitary condition. A sufficient quantity
of disinfectant shall be provided.
?ARt VII CONSl’RlJCTlONAL ?McTscu AN0 SA?‘ETV
An adequate supply of drinking water
shall be provided, and unless connected
to a municipal water supply, samples of
the water- shall be tested at frequent
intervals by the Authority.
Washing facilities shall be installed, and
when practicable shall be connected to
municipal water supply and shall dis-
charge to a sewer.
Natural or artificial illumination shall be
provided.
24.2 Fire Protection
24.2.1 In addition to the provision of fire
extinguishers, as specified in this part of the
Code, other fire extinguishing equipment
shall also be provided and conveniently
located within the building under construc-
tion or on the building site, as required by the
Authority.
24.2.1.1 All fire extinguishers shall be main-
tained in a serviceable condition at all times
in accordance with good practice [V11(5)].
24.2.1.2 It shall be ensured that all workmen
and supervisory staff are fully conversant
with the correct operation and use of fire
extinguishers provided at the construction
site.
24.2.2 Access shall be provided and main-
tained at all times to all fire. fighting equip-
ment, including fire hose, extinguishers,
sprinkler valves and hydrants.
24.2.3 Where the building plans require the
installation of fixed fire fighting equipment,
such as hydrants; stand pipes, sprinklers and
underground water mains or other suitable
arrangements for provision of water shall be
installed, completed and made available for
permanent use as soon as possible, but in any
case not later than the stage at which the
hydrants, etc. are required for use as speci-
tied in 24.2.3.1 to 24.2.3.4.
24.2.3.1 A stand pipe system (landing
valves), permanent in nature shall be
installed and made available before the build-
ing has reached the height of 15 m above the
grade, and carried up with each floor.
24.2.3.2 The standpipe (landing valve/ inter-
nal fire hydrant) and its installation shall
conform to the accepted standards[V11(24)]:
24.2.3.3 The standpipe shall be carried up
with each floor and securely cap ed at the
top. Top hose outlets, should at aPI times, be
not more than one floor below the floor
under construction.
24.23.4 A substantial box, preferably of
metal, should be provided and maintained
near each hose outlet. The box should con-
tain adequate lengths of hdse to reach all
arts of the floor as well as a short branch
%ted with 12 or 20mm nozzle.
24.2.4 Close liaison shall be maintained with
the local Fire Brigade, during construction of
all buildings above I5 m in height and special
occupancies, like educational, assembly,
institutional, industrial, storage, hazardous
and mixed occupancies with any of the afore-
said occupancies having area more than
500 mz on each floor.
24.2.5 It is desirable that telephone system or
other means &f inter-communication system
be provided during the construction of
all buildings over 15 m in. height or buildings
having a plinth area in excess of 1 000m2
24.2.6, All work waste, such as scrap timber,
wood shavings, sawdust, paper, packing
materials and oily, waste shall be collected
and disposed of safely at the end of each
day’s work. Particular care shall be taken to
remove all waste accumulation in or nearver-
t,ical shaft openings like stairways, lift-shaft,
etc.
24.2.7 An independent water storage facility
shall be provided before the commencement
of construction operations for fire-fighting
purposes. It shall be maintained and be avail-
able for use at all times.
24.2.8 F IRE Cur-OFFS-Fire walls and exit
stairways required for a building should be
given construction priority. Where firedoors,
with or without automatic closing devices,
are stipulated in the buiiding plans they
should be hung as soon as practicable and
before any significant quantity of combusti-
ble material is introduced in the building.
24.2.8.1 As the work progresses, the provi-
sion of permanent stairways, stairwayenclo-
sur,es, fire walls and other features of the
completed structure which will prevent the
horizontal and vertical spread of fire should
be ensured.
24.3 Clothing
24.3.1 Itshall be ensured that the clothes
worn by the workmen be not of such nature
as to increase the chances of their getting
involved in accident to themselves or to
others. As a rule, wearing of CHA DDA RS
or loose garments shall be prohibited.
24.3.2 Workmen engaged in processes which
splash liquid or other materials which will
injure the skin shall have enough protective
clothing to cover the body.
n,-3°
24.3.3 Individuals engaged in work involving
use of naked flames (such as welding) &all
not wear synthetic fibre or similar clothing
which increases the risk of fire hazards.
25. CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY
25.1 Specification and requirements of con-
struction machinery used in, construction or
demolition work shall conform to accepted
standards [V11(25)].
25.2 For safety requirements for working
with construction machinery, reference may
be made to good practice [VH(26)].
25.3 Petroleum powered air compressors,
hoists, derricks, pumps, etc, shall be so
located that the exhausts are well away from
combustible materials. Where the exhausts
are pipes to outside the building under’con-
struction, a clearance of at least 15cm shall
be maintained between such piping and com-
bustible material.
SECTION 4 SAFETY IN DEMOLITION
OF BUILDINGS
26. GENEHAL
26.1 This section lays down the safety
requirements for carrying out demolition/
dismantling work.
26.2 Planning and Permit-Before begin-
ning the actual work of demolition a careful
and detailed study shall be made of the struc-
ture to be demolished including its surround-
ings. While working out the plan of
demolition, safety of adjoining structures
shall be ensured. The final .plan of sequence
of operation shall be approved by the
engineer-in-charge. Variance from the
approved plan shall not be permitted without
the approval of the engineer-in-charge.
26,2.1 Before commencing demolition work,
permit where required, shall be obtained
from the Authority and posted prominently
at site.
27. PRECAUTIONS PRIOR TO
DEMOLITION
27.1 If the structure to be demolished is one
which may have got hidden damages, caused
by fire, flood or earthquake, measuresneces
sary to prevent accidental collapse by wayoi
bracing, shoring, etc, shall be provided.
27.2 When demolition by explosives has to
be resorted to, this shall be done only after
the approval of the Authority and after tak-
ing necessary precautions. For detailed infor-
mation reference may be made to good
practice [VI1(27)].
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
27.3 Prominent danger signs shall be posted
all round the property and all openings giv-
ing access to the structures shall be kept bar-
ricaded or manned except during the actual
passage of workmen or equipment. However,
provision shall be made for at least two inde-
-pendent exits for escape of workmen during
any emergency. During night, warning lights
shall be placed on or above all barricades.
27.4 All gas, water, electricity, steam and
other service lines shall be shut off outside
the property line after notifying the service
companies and concerned authorities and
obtaining their approval. Any temporary ser-
vice connections required for the demolition
work shall be separately taken and arranged
in such a manner as to afford safety to the
workmen.
27.5 When work is not in progress, watch-
men shall be provided to prevent unautho-
rized entry of the public in the danger zone.
27.6 All necessary safety appliances shall be
issued to the workers prior to starting of
work.
27.,7 Suitable safety precautions for fire shall
be provided. Clothing for workmen shall
conform to 24.3.
27.8 Protection of the Public
27.8.1 Safety distances to ensure safety of
the pubiic shall be clearly marked and promi-
nently sign posted. Every sidewalk or road
adjacent to the work shall be closed or pro-
tected. All main roads, which are open to the
public shall be kept open to the public clear
and unobstructed at all times. Diversions for
pedestrians shall be constructed, where
necessary for safety.
27.8.2 If the structure to be demolished is
more than two storeyed or 7.5m high, mea-
sured from the side walk or street which can
not be closed or safely diverted., and the
horizontal distance from the inside of the
sidewalk to the structure is 4.5 m or less, a
substantial sidewalk shed shall be con-
structed over the entire length of thesidewalk
adjacent to the structure, of sufficient width
with a view to accommodating the pedestrian
traffic without causing congestion. The side-
walk shed shall be lighted sufficiently to
ensure safety at all times. For detailed infor-
mation reference may be made to good prac-
tice [V11(28)].
27.8.3 When the horizontal distance from
the inside of the sidewalk to the structure is
more than 4.5m and less than 7.5.m, a side-
walk shed or fence may be built or in place of
such a shed or fence a substantial railing shall
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICE AND SAFETY
be constructed on the inside of the sidewalk
or roadway along the entire length of the
demolition side of the propert with movable
bars as may be necessary ror the proper
prosecution of the work.
28. PRECAUTIONS DURING EMOLI-
DEMOLITION
28.1 Prior to commencement of work, all
material of fragile nature like glass shall be
removed.
28.2 All openings shall be boarded up.
28.3 Dust shall be controlled by suitable
means to prevent harm to workmen.
28.4 Stacking of materials or debris shall be
within safe limits of the structural member.
Additional supports, where necessary, shall
be given.
28.5 Adequate natural or artificial lighting
and ventilation shall be provided for the
workmen.
2Y. SEQUENCE OF DEMOLITION
OPERATIONS
2Y.I The demolition shall always proceed
systematically storey by storey, in the des-
cending order. All work in the upper floor
shall be completed and approved by the
engineer-in-charge prior to disturbance to
any supporting member on the lower floor.
Demolition of the structure in sections may
be permitted in exceptional cases if proper
precautions are ensured to prevent injuries to
persons and damage to property.
30. WALLS
30.1 Walls shall be removed part by part in
reasonably level courses. They shall not be
allowed to fall in large masses which
endangers the adjoining property or exceeds
the safe loads of the floors below. Debris
shall be removed at frequent intervals to pre-
vent overloading of any structural member.
30.2 Stages shall be provided for the men to
work on if the walls are less than one and a
half brick thick and dangerous to work by
standing over them.
30.3 Adequate lateral bracing shall be pro-
vided for walls which are unsound.
31. FLOORING
31.1 Prior to removal of masonry or con-
crete floor adequate support centering shall
be provided.
Vll.31
 32.2 Planks of sufficient strength shall be
provided to give workmen firm support to
guard against any unexpected floor collapse.
32.3 When floors are being removed no per-
son shall be allowed to work in an area
directly underneath and access to such area
shall be barricaded.
32. CATCH PLATFORM
32.2 In demolition of exterior walls ofmul-
tistorey structures, catch platform of suffi-
cient strength to prevent injuries to workers
below and public shall be provided.
32.2 Materials shall not be dumped on the
catch platform nor shall they be used for
storage of materials.
33. STAIRS, PASSAGEWAYS AND
LADDERS
33.1 Stairs with railings, passageways and
ladders shall be left in place as long as possi-
ble and maintained in a safe condition.
34. DEMOLITION OF CERTAIN
SPECIAL TYPES AND ELEMENTS
OF STRUCTURES
34.1 Roof Trusses-If a building has a
pitched roof,the structure should be removed
to wall plate level by hand methods. Sufficient
purlins and bracing should be retained to
ensure stability of the remaining roof trusses
while each individual truss is removed
progressively.
34.1.1 Temporary bracing should be added,
where necessary, to maintain stability. The
end frame opposite to the end where disman-
tling is commenced, or a convenient interme-
diate frame should be independently and
securely guyed in both directions before work
starts.
34.1.2 On no account should the bottom tie
of roof trusses be cut until the principal rafters
are prevented from making out ward
movement.
34.2.3 Adequate hoisting gears suitable for
the loads shall be provided. If during demoli-
tion any thing is to be put on the floor below
the level of the truss, it shall be ensured that
the floor is capable of taking the load.
34.2 Heuvy Floor Beams-Heavy baulks of
timber and steel beams should be supported
before cutting at the extremities and should
then be lowered gently to a safe working place.
34.3 Jack Arches-Where tie rods are present
between main supporting beams, these should
vu-32
not be cut until after the arch or series of
arches in the floor have been removed. The
floor should be demolished in strips parallel to
the span of the arch rings (at right angles to the
main floor beams).
34.4 Brick Arches-Expert advice should be
obtained and, at all stages of the demolition,
the closest supervision should be given by per-
sons fully experienced and conversant in the
type of work to ensure that the structure is
stable at all times.
However, the following points may be kept in
view.
34.4.1 On no account should the restraining
influence of the abutments be removed before
the dead load of the spandrel fill and the arch
rings are removed.
34.4.2 A single span arch can be demolished
by hand by cutting narrow segments progres-
sively from each springing parallel to the span
of the arch, until the width of the arch has
been reduced to a minimum which can then be
collapsed.
34.4.3 Where deliberate collapse is feasible,
the crown may be broken bythe demolition
ball method working progressively from edges
to the centre.
34.4.4 Collapse of the structure can be
effected in one action by the use of explosives.
Charges should be inserted into- bore holes
drilled in both arch and abutments.
34.4.5 In multi-span arches, before indivi-
dual arches are removed, lateral restraint
should be provided at the springing level.
Demolition may then proceed as for single
span; where explosives are used it is preferable
to ensure the collapse of the whole structure in
one o eration to obviate the chance of leaving
unsta!le portion standing.
34.5 Cantiber (Not Part of a Framed Strut-
we) -Canopies, cornices, staircases and bal-
conies should be demolished or supported
before tailing down load is removed.
34.6. In Situ Reiqforced Concrete-Before
commencing demolition, the nature and con-
dition of the concrete, the condition and posi-
tion of reinforcement, and the possibility of
lack of continuity of reinforcement should be
ascertained.
Demolition should be commenced by remov-
ing partitions and external non-load bearing
cladding.
34.6.2 REINFORCED C ONCRETE B EAMS - A
supporting rope should be attached to the
NATIONAL lUlLDING CODE OF INDIA
beam. Then the concrete should be removed
from both ends by pneumatic drill and the
reinforcement exposed. The reinforcement
should then be cut in such a way as to allow
the beam to be lowered under control to the
floor.
34.6,2 REINFORCED CONCRETE COLUMNS -
The reinforcement should be exposed at the
base after restraining wire guy ropes have
been placed round the member at the top. The
reinforcement should then be out in such a
way as to allow it to be pulled down to the
floor under control.
346.3 REINFOKCED ’ CONCRETE W ALLS -
These should be cut into strips and demo-
lished as for columns.
34.6.4 S USPENDED FLOORS AND KooFs-
the slab should be cut into strips parallel to
the main reinforcement and demolished strip
by strip. Where ribbed construction has been
used, the principle of design and method of
construction should be determined before
demolition is commenced. Care should pe
taken not to cut the ribs inadvertently.
34..7 Precast Reinforced Concrete-Due pre-
cautions shall be taken to avoid toppling over
of prefabricated units or any other part of the
structure and whenever necessary temporary
supports shall be provided.
34.8 Prestressed .Reinforced Concrete
Before commencing of the demolition work,
advice of an engineering expert in such demo-
lition shall be obtained and followed.
35. LOWERING, REMOVAL AND
DISPOSAL OF MATER.IALS
35.2 As far as possible no material shall be
dropped. They shall be lowered either by con-
tainers, ropes and tackles or chutes properly
designed. Chutes, if provided at an‘angle of
more than 45O from the horizontal, shall be
entirely closed on all the four sides except for
opening for receiving the material. The chute
opening shall be kept locked except when in
use. The top opening of chute for dumping of
material shall be protected with guard rkils.
Debris may also be dropped through holes in
the floor, if absolutely necessary. When such a
method is adopted precautions shall be pro-
tected with guard rails. Debris may also be
dropped through holes in the floor, if abso-
iutely neclssary. When such a method is
adopted precautions shall be taken to avoid
overloadmg of the floor. Such area, where the
debris is dropped, shall be adequately pro-
.md to prevent.mjury to persons.
35.2 Debris shall oe removed at the earliest to
ensure safe and adequate working space.
PART VII CONSTRUCtlONAL ?RAC’TlCE AND SAFETY
Debris shall be removed from the site in stages
as not to be of nuisance to the public. Care
shall be taken that material like glass, nails,
etc, are not strewn about and cause injury to
workmen or public.
35.3 Stacking of material shall cater for fire
prevention.
36, MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
36.1 -When-demolition is to be performed by
mechanical devicec, such as weight ball,
power shovels, the following additional pre-
cautions may be observed:
a) The atea shall be barricated for a min-
imum distance of one and a half times the
height of the wall;
b) While the mechanical device is in opera-
tion, no workman shall be allowed to
enter the building being demolished;
cl The device shall be so located as to avoid
damage by falling debris; and
d) The mechanical device when being used
shall not cause any damage to adjacent
structure, power line, etc.
37. MISCELLANEOUS
37.1 No demolition. work should becarried
out during night as far as possible, especially
when the structure to be demolishedis in an
inhabited area. if such night work has to be
done, additional precautions by way of addi-
tional red warning signals, working lights
and watchmen, shall be piovided to avoid
any injury to workmen and public.Demoli-
tion Work shall not be carried out during
storm and heavy rain.
37.2 Warning devices shall be installed in the
area to warn the workers in. case of any
danger.
37.3 Safety dewices like industrial safety
helmets confoim&. to the accepted stand-
ards [VII(9)] and goggles made of celluloid
lens, shall be issued to the workmen.
Foreman-in-charge of the work areas shall
ensure that all the-rrorkmen are wearing the
safety devices before commencing any work.
37.4 Constructiouz&heds and tool boxes shall
be so located ar&~ protect workers from
injuries from the .f&lling debris.
37.5 Where there&a likelihood of injuries to
hands of workmen&hen demolishing RCC,
steel structures, etc,aloves of suitable mate-
rials shall be worn by workmen.
37.6, Sufficient pr&ection by way of both
overhead cover and screens shall be provided
“ll-33
to prevent injuries to the workmen and the
public.
37.7 Safety belts or ropes shall be used by
workmen when working at higher levels.
37.8 Grading of Plot- When a building has
been demolished and no building operation
has been projected or approved, the vacant
plot shall be filled, graded and maintained in
conformity to the established street grades at
curb level. The plot shall be maintained free
from the accumulation of rubbish and all
other unsafe and hazardous conditions which
endangers the life or health of the public; and
provisions shall be made to prevent the
accumulation df water or damage to any
foundations on the premises or the adjoining
property.
38. FIRST-AID
38.f A copy of all pertinent regulations and
notices concerning accidents, injury and first-
aid shall be prominently exhibited at the
work site.
38.2 Depending on the scope and nature of
the work, a person, qualified in first-aid shall
be available at work site to render and direct
first-aid to casualities. He shall maintain a
list of individuals qualified to serve in first-
aid work. Enough first-aid kit, including a
stretcher and cot with accessories shall be
provided at site. A telephone may be pro-
vided to first-aid assistant with telephone
numbers of the hospitals prominently
displayed.
Complete reports of all accidents and action
taken thereon shall be forwarded to the com-
petent authorities.
BUlLDlNG CtBDC GF INDIA
 APPENDIX A
(Clause 2.1.1)

PROGRAMME EVALUATION AND REVIEW TECHNIQUE, AND

CRITICAL PATH METHOD

A-O. INTRODUCTION *g)Construction safety aspects _specially in

case of pile foundations.
A-O.1 Programme Evaluation and Review *h) Blasting ‘if required (for deep
Technique (PERT) and Critical Path foundations).
Method (CPM) are modern management
tools or devices, which have made it possible *j) Fire protection measures.
to achieve considerable savings in cost and
time of construction. They can be used with A-l .2 Time Needed for Each Activity-An
advantage for demolition, constructional assessment is to be made to find out the time
safety and fire protection measures, by needed for each activity and their to list out.
including them in the list of activities (also those activities, which can be executed
called events) along-side with other ‘events’ concurrently (or simultaneously) with each
of the project. @her. For example, while designing of the
building is in hand, correspondence for land
A-O.2 Advance Planning purchase can also go on side by side; or while
work in foundations is in progress, order for
A.0.2.1 PERT and CPM enable us to ‘joinery’ can be placed.
achieve judicious employment and utilization
of resources, such as labour, materials, and A-1.3 Crirical Acrivity- It should then be
equipment by pre-determining the various seen as to which of the activities are critical,
stages, listing out the various activities and that is which items are such that a single day’s
drawing out ‘Arrow Network Diagram’. delay will mean overall delay. on the project.
Contrary to this, it will be seen from CPM
A-O.3 Synchronization of Sub-Projects Network that certain activities can be delayed
to a certain extent without delaying the
A-0.3.1 Another extremely important completion of the project. This is a.very useful
advantage of CPM is that various factors and valuable information for the ‘Project
influencing completion of a project can be Manager’. That is where resources scheduling
scientifically planned to be coordinated such becomes easier and economical and a time
that the completion of various sub-projects saver. It eliminates chances of idlelabour and
and services, such as furniture, sewage, elec- higher expenses which are results of
tricity and water supply synchronises. haphazard planning.
A-l. PREPARATION OF CPM CHART
(LISTING OUT THE ACTIVITIES) A-2. UPDATING
A-1.1 The most important step in prepara- A-2.1 In implementing the CPM there are
tion of CPM network is to list out the activi- bound to be gaps between the planned CPM
ties involved to the minutest details, For and actual progress or position on ground.
example, a few activities in case of a building This should be checked periodically-weekly,
project are given below: fortnightly or monthly depending on nature
and size of project.
a) Designing of building by architect, engi-
neer and approval of plans by the A-3. ‘GENERAL
Authority.
A-3.1 In case of projects being executed by
b) Making the* land available. contractors for the owners, or departments, it
cl Outlining detailed specifications. is recommended that it should be an essential
condition of the contract to submit a CPM
4 Procurement of materials,, such as Chart along with the quoted tenders. This
sand, cement, stone and timber; and will ensure that. the construction work will be
plants, such as concrete mixer, vibra- according to a systematic, engineer-like and
tors, water pump for curing. well-knit plan of execution.
Soil explorations and trial pits. -
Excavation in foundations, including *These can be further subdivided and number of activi-
demolition, if needed. ties increased.

PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICE AND SAFETY “,l-35

 LIST OF STANDARDS
The following lis~ records those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and
‘accepted standards’ in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standard shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may be
used by the Authorit,y as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in
the Code.
In the following list, the number appearing in the first column within parentheses indicates
the number of the reference in this Part VII.
(I) a) Foundations
IS: 1080-l 980 Code of practice for
design and construction of simple
spread foundations vrst revision)
IS: 1904-1978 Code of practice for
structural safety of buildings : Shal-
low foundations (second revision)
IS:291 I Code of ,piactice for design
and construction of pile foundations:
IS:2911 (Part l/Set I):1979 Part 1
Concrete piles, Section I Driven
cast in-situ concrete piles @rst
revision)
IS:291 I (Part I/ Set 2)-1979 Part I
Concrete piles, Section 2 Bored cast
in-situ concrete piles ( f i r s t
revision)
IS:291 I, (Part I/ Set 3)-1979 Part 1
Concrete piles, Section 3 Driven
precast concrete piles (first
revision)
IS:2911 (Part IjSec 4)-1984 Part I
Concrete piles, Section 4 Bored
precast concrete piles (firsr
revision)
IS:2911 (Part II)-1980 Part II
Timber piles (first revision)
IS:2911 (Part Ill)-1980 Part 111
Under-reamed piles (first
revision)
IS:2911 (Part IV)-1979 Part IV
Load test on piles
IS:2974 Code of practice for design
and construction of machine
foundations:
IS:2974 ( P a r t I)-1982 P a r t 1
Foundations for reciprocating type
machines (second revision)
‘IS:2974 (Part II)-1980 Part 11
Foundations for impact type
machines (Bammer foundations)
(jirsr revision)
IS:2974 (Part Ill)-1975 Part 111
Foundations for rotary type
machines (medium and high fre-
quency) (first revision)
IS:2974 (Part IV)-1979 Part IV
Foundations for rotary type
machines of low frequency (First
revision)
IS:2974 (Part V)-1970 Part V
Foundations for impact type
machines other than hammers
(forging and stamping presses,
pig breakers, elevators and hoist
towersj
lS:9456-1980 Code of practice for
design and construction of conical
and hyperbolic paraboidal types of
shell foundations
15:9556-1980 Code of practice for
design and construction of diaph-
ragm walls
b) Masonr.,
IS:)597 Code of practice for cons-
truction of stone masonry:
IS:1597 (Part l)-1967 Part I Kub-
ble stone masonry
IS:1597 ( P a r t II)-1967 P a r t II
Ashlar masonry
I S:2 I IO- 1980 Code of practice for in-
situ construction of walls in buildings
with soil-cement @rst revision)
lS:2212-1962 Code of practice for
brickwork
lS:2250-1980 Code of practice for
preparation and use of masonry mor-
tars wrsr revision)
lS:2572-1963 Code of practice for
construction of hollow concrete
block masonry
lS:3630-1966 Code of ,,practice for
construction of non-load bearing
gypsum block partitions
lS:4407-1967 Code of practice for
reed walling
NATIONAL IWILDING CODE OF INDIA
 IS:444 I - I980 Code of practice for use
of silicate type chemical resistant
mortars yirst reGsion)
lS4442~1980 Code of practice for use
of sulphur type chemical resistant
mortars @rst revision)
lS:4443-1980 Code of practice for use
of resin type chemical resistant mor-
tars (f?rst revision)
lS:6041-1971 Code of practice for
construction of autoclaved cellular
concrete block masonry
lS:6042-1969 Code of practice for
construction of light weight concrete
block masonry
4 Wood
IS: 1634-1973 Code of practice for
design and construction of wood
stairs in houses (first revision)
lS:2366-1983 Code of practice for
nail-jointed timber construction
(fksr revision)
IS:491 3-1968 Code of practice for
selection, installation and mainte-
nance of timber doors and windows
lS:4983-1968 Code of practice for
design and construction of nailed
laminated timber beams
lS:5390-1969 Code of practice for
construction of timber ceilings
d) Concrete
IS:456-1978 Code of practice for
plain and reinforced concrete (rhird
revision)
lS:457-1957 Code of practice for gen-
eral construction of plain and rein-
forced concrete for dams and other
massive structures
IS:2502-1963 Code. of practice for
bending’ and fixing of bars for con-
crete reinforcement
lS:2541-1977 Code of practice for
preparation and use of lime concrete
(jksr revision)
IS:3370 Code of practice for concrete
structures for the storage of liquids:
IS:3370 (Part I)-1965 Part 1 Gen-
eral requirements
IS:3370 (Part IQ-1965 Part II
Reinforced concrete structures
IS:3370 (Part Ill)-1967 Part III
Prestressed concrete structmes
PART VII CONSTRUCTIOSAL PRACTICE AND SAFETY
IS:3558-1983 Code of practice for use
of immersion vibrators for consoli-
dating concrete (/irsr relision)
lS:5817-1970 Code of practice foi
preparation and use of lime pozzo-
lana mixture concrete in buiidings
and roads
lS:7246-1974 Recommendations fat
use of tabte vibrators for consolidat-
ing concrete
lS:7861 Code of practice for extreme
whether concreting:
IS:7861 ( P a r t I)-1975 P a r t I
Recommended practice for hot
weather concreting
IS:7861 ( P a r t II)-1981 P a r t I I
Recommended practice for cold
weather concreting
IS: 10262- I982 Recommended guide-
lines for concrete mix design
IS:lO359-1982 Code of practice for
manufacture and use of lime pozzo-
lana concrete blocks for paving
Steel
lS:800-1984 Code of practice for gen-
eral steel construction ( s e c o n d
revision) (under print)
IS:80 I-1 975 Codeof practice for use of
cold formed light gauge steel
structural members in. general
building construction (first rev&on)
lS:805-1968 Code of practice for use
of steel in gravity water tanks
IS:806-1968 Code of practice for use
of steel tubes in general building con-
struction (jksr revision)
lS:4000-1967 Code of practice for
assembly of structural joints using
high tensile friction grip fasteners
lS:4180-1967 Code of practice for
corrosion protection of light gauge
steel sections used in building
lS:6533-1971 Code of practice for
design and construction of steel
chimneys
IS:8629 (Parts I to III)-1977 Code of
practice for protection of iron and
steel structures from atmospheric
corrosion
1339077-1979 Corrosion protection of
steel reinforcements in RB and RCC
construction
IS:9 172-l 979 Recommended design
practice for corrosion prevention of
steel structures
“,L3
Flboring and Roofing
lS:658-1982 Code of practice for
magnesium oxychloride composition
floors (second revision)
IS: I 196-1978 Code of practice for
laying bitumen mastic flooring
(second revision)
IS: I 197-1970 Code of practice for
laying of rubber floors (/Trsr revision)
18:1198-1982 Code of practice for
laying and maintenance of linoleum
floor @rsr revision)
IS:1443-1972 Code of practice for
laying and finishing of cement con-
crete flooring tiles (first revision)
IS:2118-1980 Code of practice for
construction of jack-arch type of
built-up floor or roof (first revision)-
I&2119-1980 Code of practice for
construction of brick-cum-composite
(Madras terrace) floor or roof (/ksr
revision)
l.k2204-1962 Code of practice for
construction of reinforced concrete
shell roof
IS:2571-1970 Code of practice for
laying in-situ cement concrete floor-
ing (fkst revision)
IS:2700-1964 Code of practice for
roofing with wooden shingles
IS:2792-1964 Code of practice for
design and construction of stone slab
over joist floor
lS:2858-1964 Code of practice for
roofing with Mangalore tiles
IS:3007 Code of practice for laying of
asbestos cement sheets:
IS:3007 (Part I)-1964 Part 1 Corn--
gated sheets
IS:3007 ( P a r t II)-1965 P a r t 1I
Semi-corrugated sheets
18:3670-1966 Code of practice for
construction of timber floors
IS:51 19 Code of practice for laying
and fixing of sloped roof covering:
IS:51 19 (Part I)-1968 Part 1 Slating
IS:53 18-1969 Code of practice for
laying of flexible PVC sheet and tile
flooring
IS:5389-1969 Code of practice for
laying of hard wood parquet and
wood block floors
IS:5390-1969 Code of practice for
construction of timber ceilings
lS:5766-1970 Code of ractice for
laying burnt clay brick Rooring
IS:6061 Code of practice for con-
struction of floor and roof with joists
and filler blocks:
IS:6061 (Part I)-1971 Part I With
hollow concrete filler blocks
IS:6061 ( P a r t II)-1981 P a r t I I
With hollow clay filler blocks
(fksr revision)
lS:6061 (Part lIl)-1981 Part [II
Precast hollow clay blocks joists
and hollow clay filler blocks
lSZ6061 (Part IV)-1981 Part 1V
With precast hollow clay block
slab panels
lS:6332-1971 Code of practice for
construction of floors and roofs using
precast doubly-curved shell units
13:9472-1980 Code of practice for
laying mosaic parquet flooring
18:10297-1982 Code of practice for
design and construction of floors and
roofs using precast reinforced/pres-
tressed concrete ribbed or cored units
lS:10440-1983 Code of practice for
construction of reinforced brick
floors and roofs
IS: 10505- 1983 Code of practice for
construction of floors and roofs using
precast reinforced concrete waffle
units
8) Finishes
ls:l346-1976 Code of practice for
waterproofing of roofs with bitumen
felts (second revision)
IS: 1414-I962 Code of practice for fix-
ing wall coverings
IS: 1477 Code of practice for painting
of ferrous metals in buildings:
13:1477 (Part I)-1971 Part I Pre-
treatment (jirsr revision)
tS:1477 ( P a r t ll)-1971 P a r t I I
Painting (j?rsr revision)
ls:1609-1976 Code of practice for
laying damp-proofing treatment
using bitumen felts (second revision)
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 I&1661-1972 Code of practice for
application of cement and cement
lime plaster’ finishes yirst revision)
IS:2114-1962 Code of practice for
laying in-situ terrazzo floor finish
IS:21 15-1967 Code of practice for
flat-roof finish: Mud P H U S K A
(fht revision)
IS:2338 Code of practice for finishing
of wood and woodbased materials:
lS:2338 (Part 15-1967 Part I Oper-
ations and workmanship
IS:2338 (Part II)-1967 Part II
Schedules
lS:2394-1965 Code of practice for
application of lime plaster finish
IS:2395 Code of practice for painting
concrete, masonry and plaster
surfaces:
IS:2395 (Part I)-1966 Part I Oper-
ations and workmanship
IS:2395 ( P a r t II)-1967 P a r t I I
Schedules
IS:2402-1963 Code of practice for
external rendered finishes
IS:i441-1963 Code of practice for
fixing ceiling covering
IS:2524 Code of practice for painting
of non-ferrous metals in buildings:
IS:2524 (Part I)-1968 Part I pre-
treatment
IS:2524 (Part II)-1968 P a r t I I
Painting
lS:3036-1980 Code of practice for
laying lime concrete for a water-
proofed roof finish cfirst revision)
lS:3067-3966 Code of practice for
general design details and prepara-
tory work for damp-proofing and
water proofing of buildings
iS:3140-1965 Code of practice for
painting asbestos cement building
products
lS:3548-1966 Code of practice for
glazing in building
IS:4 IO1 Code of practice for external
facing and veneers:
IS:4101 (Part I)-1967 Part 1 Stone
facing
IS:4101 (Part ‘I&l%7 P a r t I I
Cement concrete facing
PART VII CONSTRUCTlONAL PRACTICE AND SAFETY
IS:4101 (Part Ill)-1969. Part 111
Wall tiling and mosaics
lS:4112-1967 Code of practice for
fixing of polystyrene wall tiles
lS:4365-1967 Code .of ,practice
application of bitumen mastic E:
waterproofing of roofs
lS:4597-1968
_... Code of practice for
finishing of wood and wood based
products with nitrocellulose and
cold catalysed materials
18:4631-1968 Code of practice for
laying of epoxy resin floor toppings
lS:5491-1969 Code of practice for
laying in-d.4 granolithic concrete
floor topping
lS:6278-1971 Code of practice for
white-washing and colour washing
1836494-1972 Code of practice for
waterproofing of underground water
reservoirs and swimming pools
13:7198-1974 Code f practice for
damp-proofing using“a itumen mastic
lS:7290- I979 Recommendations for
use of polyethylene film for water-
proofing of roofs
lS:9918-1981 Code of practice fo! in-
siru waterproofing and damp-
proofing treatments with glass fibre
tissue reinforced bitumen
h) Piping
lS:783-I959 Code of practice for lay-
ing of concrete pipes
lS:3134-1965 Code of practice for
laying of cast iron pipes
lS:4127-1967 Code of practice for
laying of glazed stoneware pipes
lS:5329-1983 Code of practice for
sanitary pipe work above ground for
buildings flrsr revision)
lS:5822-1970 Code of practice for
laying of welded steel pipes for water
supply
lS:6530-1972 Code of practice for
laying of asbestos cement pressure
pipes
IS:7634 Code of practice for plastics
pipe work for potable water supplies:
IS:7634 (Part I)-1975 Part I Choice
of materials and general
recommendations
IS:7634 (Part II)-1975 Part II Lay-
ing and jointing polyethylene (PE)
pipes
vu-39
 IS:7634 (Part Ill)-1975 Part 111
Laying and jointing of unplastici-
zed PVC pipes
j ) Measuremenrs
IS:I200 Method of measurement of
building and civil engineering works:
IS:1200 (Part I)-1974 Part I Earth-
work (third revision)
IS:1200 (Part II)-1974 Part II Con-
crete work (third revision)
IS:IZOO (Pa!t Ill)-1976 P a r t I l l
Brickwork (third revision)
IS:lZOO (Part IV)-1976 Part IV
Stone masonry (third revision)
IS:1200 (Part V)-1972 P a r t V
Formwork (second revision)
IS:1200 (Part VI)-1974 Part VI
Refractory work (second revision)
IS:1200 (Part VII)-1974 Part VII
Hardware (second revision)
IS:1200 (Part VIII)-1974 Part VIII
Steelwork and ironwork (third
revision)
IS:1200 (Part IX)-1973 Part IX
Roof covering including cladding
(second revision)
IS:1200 (Part X)-l973 Part X
Ceiling and linings ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS:1200 (Part XI)-t977 Part XI
Paving and floor finishes dado and
skirting (third revision)
IS:1200 (Part XII)-1976 Part XII
Plastering and pointing (third
revision)
IS:1200 (Part X111)-1976 PartXlll
White washing, colour wash-
ing, distempering and other fini-
shes (third revision)
IS:1200 (Part XIV)-1970 PartXIV
Glazing (second revision)
IS:1200 (Part XV)-1976 Part XV
Painting, polishing, varnishing, etc
IS:1200 (Part XVI)-1979 PartXVI
Laying of water and sewer
lines including appurtenant items
(third revision)
IS:1200 (Part XVII)-I%9 PartXVII
Roadwork including air field
pavements (second revision)
IS:1200 (Part XVIII)-1974 Part
XVIII Demolition and dismantling
(third revision)
“I,_*0
IS:1200 (Part XIX)-1981 PartXIX
Water supply, plumbing, drains
and sanrtary fittings (third
revision)
IS:IZOO(Part XX)-1481 Part XX
Laying of gas and oil pipe lines
(third revision)
IS:lZOO (Part XXI)-1973 PartXKl
Woodwork and joinery (second
revision)
lS:IZOO (Part XXIII)-1977 P a r t
XXIII Piling (third revision)
IS:1200 ( P a r t XXIV)-1983
Part XXIV Well foundations (third
revision)
lS:3861-1975 Method of measure-
ment of plinth, carpet and rentable
areas of buildings (/Trsr revision)
k) Others
IS:IOBI-1960 Code of practice for fix-
ing and glazing of metal (steel and
aluminium) doors, windows and
ventilators
IS:1649-1962 Code of practice for
design and construction of flues and
chimneys for domestic heating
appliances
lS:1946-1961 Code of practice for use
of fixing devices in walls. ceilin@ and
floors of solid construction
IS:2470 Code of practice for design
and construction of septic tank&:
IS:2470 (Part I)-1968 Part I Small
installations (jksr revision)
IS:2470 (Part II)-1971 Part II
Large installations first revision)
18:2527-1963 Code of practice for fix-
ing rain-water gutters and down pipes
for roof drainage
18:3414-1968 Code of practice for
design and installation of joints in
buildings
IS:3548-1966 Code of practice for
glazing in buildings
IS:3558-1966 Code of practice for use
of immersion vibrators for consoli-
dating concrete
IS:3935-1976 Code of practice for
composite construction
IS:4326-1976 Code of practice for
earthquake resistant design and con-
struction of buildings (first rivision)
IS:49 13-1968 Code of practice for
selection, installation and
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE W INDIA
 maintenance of timber doors and
windows
IS:6313 Code of practice for anti-
termite measures in buildings:
IS:6313 (Part I)-1981 Part I Con-
structional measures (firs1 revision)
IS:6313 (Part II)-1981 Part II Pre-
constructional chemical treatment
measures wrsr revision)
IS:6313 (Part III)-1981 Part 111
Treatment for existing building
(first revision)
IS:6924-1973 Code of practice for the
construction of refuse chutes inmul-
tistoreyed buildings
l&7246-1974 Recommendation for
use of table vibrators for consolidat-
ing concrete
IS:8 147- 1976 Code of practice for use
of aluminium alloys in structures
13:10439-1983 Code of practice for
patent glazing
(2) 18:8888-3978 Guide for requirements
of low income housing
(3) lS:4082-1977 Recommendations on
stacking and storage of construction
materials at site (j!rsr revision)
(4) lS:933-I 976 Specification for porta-
ble chemical fire extinguisher, foam
type (sewnd revision)
(5) lS:2190-1979 Code of practice for
selection, installation and mainte-
nance of portable first-aid fire
appliances (second revision)
(6) 1$:8758-1978 Recommendations for
fire precautionary measures in con-
struction of temporary structures and
pandals
(7) IS : 3764-l 966 Safety code for
excavation work
(8) 1s : 4 138- 1977 Safety code for working
in compressed air vrst revision)
(9) IS : 2925-1975 Specification for
industrial safety helmets (first
revision)
(10) IS: 2750-1964 Specification for steel
scaffoldings
(11) IS : 3696 Safety Code for scaffolds and
ladders:
I S : 3 6 9 6 ( P a r t I)-1966 Part I
Scaffolds
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICE AND SAFETY
(12) IS : 3696 Safety code for scaffolds and
ladders:
IS:3696 (Part I&1%6 Part II
Ladders
(13) IS : 4912-I 978 Safety requirements for
floors and wall openings, railing and
toe boards
IS : 1179-1967 Specification for
(14)
equipment for eye and face protection
during welding (flrsr revi+m)
(15) IS : 5983-1980 Specification foreye-
protectors (fIrsr revision)
(16) IS : 236 I - 1970 Specification for bull-
dog grips flrsr revision)
(17) IS : 30 I6- 1982 Code of practice for fire
precautions in welding and cutting
operations wrsr revision)
(18) IS: 1084-1969 Specification for
manila ropes (second revision)
IS: 2266-1977 Specification for steel
wire ropes for general engineering
purposes (second revision)
(19) IS : 8 18- 1968 Code of practice for
safety and health requiremtnts in
electric and gas welding and cutting
operations
(20) IS:933-1976 Specification for
portable chemical fire extinguisher,
foam type (second revision)
18:2171-1976 Specification for
portable fire extinguishers, dry
powder type (second rcvison)
(21) IS : 5916-1970 Safety code for
constructions involving use of hot
bituminous materials
(22) lS:2171-1976 Specification for
portable fire extinguishers, foam type
(second revision)
(23) IS:8 18-1968 Code of practice for
safety, and health requirements in
electric and gas welding and cutting
operations wrst revision)
IS:819-1957 Code of practice for
resistance spot welding for light
assemblies in mildsteel
IS:1261-1959 Code of practice for
seam welding in mild steel.
IS : 30 16 1982 Code of practice for fire
Precautions in welding and cutting
operations (first revision)
IS : 408 l-1 967 Safety code for blasting
and related drilling operations
VIl-41
 IS : 4138-1977 Safety code for working
in compressed gas vrsr reiGion)
IS : 9595- 1980 Recommendations for
metal arc welding of carbon and
carbon manganese steels
IS: 10138-1982 Recommended
procedure for CO2 gas shielded metal-
arc welding of structural steels
(24) lS:3844-1966 Code of practice for
installation of internal fire hydrantsin
multi-storey buildings
lS:5290-1977 Specification for
landing valves (internal hydrants)
flrsf revision)
(25) is:274 ( P a r t s 1 & ll)-1981
Specification for shovels: Part I
General purpose shovles, Part 11
Heat-treated shovels (third revision)
lS:663- 1980 Specification for adzes
(second revision)
lS:704-1984 Specification for crow-
bars and claw-bars (second revision)
(under print)
lS:841-1983 Specification for hand
hammers (second revision)
IS:844 Specification for screw
drivers:
lS:844 ( P a r t ll)-1979 P a r t I I
Dimensions (second revision)
IS:844 (Part III)-1979 Part 111
Dimensions for screw drivers for
recessed head screws (second
revision)
1 S: 1630- 1960 Specification for
mason’s, tools for plaster work and
painting work
IS: 1759- 1980 Specification for POW-
RAHS (first revision)
ISt1791-1968 Specification for batch
type concrete mixers (/ksf revision)
IS:1930 Specification for chisels and
gouges:
IS:1930 (Part II)-1975 Part II
Dimensions for firmer gouges (first
revision)
IS:1930 (Part III)-1975 Part III
Dimensions for firmer chisels @rsr
revision)
IS:1930 (Part IV)-1975 Part IV
Dimensions for mortice chisels
@St revision)
IS:1930 (Part V)-1975 Part V
Dimensions for turning chisels (first
revision)
“u-42
IS: 193 1 - 1972 Specification for engi-
neer’s files (tht ’ rev&ion)
1$:2028-1981 Specification for open
jaw spanners (second revision)
IS:20291901 Specification for ring
spanners (second revision)
IS:2030-1971 Specification for box
spanners (/Irsr revision)
18:2093-1974. Specification for dis-
tributors for hot tar and bitumen
yirst revision)
lS:2094-1974 Specification for heat-
ers for tar and bitumen (fhr revision)
18:2431-1963 Specification for steel
wheel barrows (single wheel-type)
lS:2434-1973 Specification for hand-
operated drums asphalt mixer @sr
revision)
18:2438-1963 Specification for roller
pan mixer
IS:2439-1963 Specification for metal
hand rollers (fixed-weight type)
.IS:2505-1980 Specification for con-
crete vibrators, immersion type
(second revision)
18:2506-1964 Specification for screed
board concrete vibrators
IS:2514-1964 Specification for con-
crete vibrating tables
IS:2587-1975 Specification for pipe
vices (open side type and fixed sides
type) (jhr revision)
IS:2588-1975 Specification for
blacksmith’s vices (f?rsl revision)
lS:2722- 1964 Specification for porta-
ble swing weigh hatchers for concrete
(single and double bucket type)
13:2852-1964 Specification for car-
penter s’ augers
lS:3066-1965 Specification for hot
asphalt mixing plants
IS:3251-1965 Specification for
asphalt paver finisher
lS:3365-1965 Specification for floor
polishing machines
IS:33661965 Specification for pan
vibrators
1833559-1966 Specification for pneu-
matic concrete breakers
IS:3587-1976 Specification for rasps
(first revision)
IS:3650-198 I Specification for com-
bination side cutting pliers (second
revision)
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 i&3938- I979 Specification for elect-
ric wire rope hoists (/Trsr revision)
IS:4003 Specification for pipe
wrenches:
IS:4003 (Part Q-1978 Part I Gen-
eral purpose
IS:4003 ( P a r t II)-1978 P a r t II
Heavy duty
18:4017-1967 Specification for car-
penters’ squares
lS:4057-1967 Specification for car-
penters’ metal bodied bench planes
lS:4095-1973 Specification for
pincers (i?fst revision)
IS:4 I83- I967 Specification for metal
hand rammers
IS:41841967 Specification for steel
wheel barrows (with two wheels)
lS:4508-1968 Specification for shor-
tened single ended. ring spanners
IS:46561968 Specification for form
vibrators for concrete
18:4915-1968 Specification for
welders’ chipping hammer
IS:50661969 Specification for glass
pliers
18:5067-1969 Specification for fenc-
ing pliers
lS:5087-1969 Specification for wire
stripping pliers
lS:5098-1969 Specification ‘for cross
cut and rip saws
18:5123-1969 Specification for tenon
and dovetail saws
lS:5169-1969 Specification for hack-
saw frames
lS:5200-1969 Specification for bolt
clippers
IS:5658-1970 Specification for snipe-
nose pliers
IS:5663-I 970 Specification
. . . for brick
and mason’s chisels
lS:5684-1970 Specification for pipe
vices (chain type)
18:5697- 1970 Specification for rip-
ping chisels
lS:5889-1970 Specification for vibra-
tory plate compactor
18:5890-1970 Specification for mobile
hot mix asphalt plants, light duty
lS:589I-1970 Specification for hand-
operated concrete mixer
PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRAChCE AND SAFETY
lS:5995- 197 1 Specification for pipe
grip pliers
lS:6007-1971 Specification for pipe
vices (hinged type)
18:6078- I977 Specification for Iine-
man’s pliers (/Irsr revision)
IS:6087-1971 Specification for metal
cutting shears
IS:61 18-1971 Specification for slip
joint pliers
IS:6149-1984 Specification for single
ended open jaw adjustable wrenches
yirsl revision) (under print)
18:6375-l 97 I Specification for wood
splitting wedges
IS:6389- I972 Specification for com-
bination wrenches
lS:6428-1972 Specification for pile
frame
lS:6430-1972 Specification for mobile
air compressor for construction
purposes
IS:6433-1972 Specification for gunit-
ing equipment
IS:6546 I972 Specification for claw
hammers
IS:68361973 Specification for hand
snaps and set-ups for solid rivets
13:6837-1973 Specification for three
wheel type pipe cutter
IS:6841-1973 Specification for wreck-
ing bars
13:6861-1973 Specification for engi-
neers’ scrapers
lS:6881-I973 Specification for link
type pipe cutters
IS:6891-1973 Specification for car-
penters’ auger bits
lS:6892- I973 Specification for
blacksmith’s hick iron
18:7041-1973 Specification for car-
penters’ plain brace
IS:7042-1973 Specification for car-
penters’ ratchet brace
lS:7077-1973 Specification for bend-
ing bars
lS:7958-I976 Specification for hand
vices
lS:8202- 1976 Specification for car-
penters’ wooden bodied nose planes
without ramshorn handle
lS:8203-1976 Specification for car-
penters’ wooden bodied nose planes
 IS:8205-1976 Specification fr car-
penters’ wooden bodied try planes
13:8206-1976 Specification for car-
penters’ wooden bodied smoothing
$an
IS:8209-1976 Specification for cut irons and
cap irons for carpenters’ wooden bodied
bench planes
IS:8671-1977 Specification for nail puller
@6> IS:7293-1974 Safety code for working
with construction machinery
@7> IS:408 l-1967 Safety code for blasting
and related drilling operations
(a) IS:4130-1976 Safety code for demoli-
tion of buildings
NATIONAL Bl!II.DINC CODE OF INDIA
The National Building Code of India consists of the following Parts and Sections:

PART 1 DEFINITIONS
PART II ADMINISTRATION
PART I11 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND
GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
PART V BUILDING MATERIALS
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
S e c t i o n I .Loads
Section 2 Foundations
Section 3 Wood
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
Plain and ,Reinforced Concrete
Prestressed Concrete
Section 6 Steel
Section 7 Prefabrication and Systems Building
. PART VII CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES
Section I Lighting and Ventilation
Section 2 Electrical Installsitions
Section 3 Air-conditioning and Heating
Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control
Section 5 Installation of Lifts and Escalators
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES
Section 1 ,Water Supply
Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation
Section 3 Gas Supply
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES
SECTION 1 LIGHTING AND VENTILATION

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS

0. F O R E W O R D ... 2

I. S C O P E ... 3

2. TERMINOLOGY ... 3

.3. ORIEN7ATlON O F B U I L D I N G ... 6

4. LIGHTING ... 8

5. VENTILATION ... 30

APPENDIX A S K Y COMI’ONI’N’I -I-AB1.F.S ... 39

PART WI BUILDING SERVICES-SECTION I LIGHTING AND VENTlLATlON VIII-I-

1 *
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES
SECTION 1 LIGHTING AND VENTILATION

0. F O R E W O R D

0.1 Illumination levels for different tasks are recompended to be achieved either by daylighting
or artificial lighting or a combination’.of both. This section, read together with Part VIII
Building services. Section 2 Electricai installations, adequately covers the illumination levels
required and methods of achieving the same.

Ventilation requirements to maintain air quality and control body odours in terms of air changes
per hour and to ensure thermal comfort and heat balance of body are laid for different
occupancies and the methods of achieving the same by natural or mechanical means are covered
in this section.

Climatic factors which normally help in decidink the orientation of the buildings to get desirable
benefits of lighting and ventilation inside the buildings are also covered in this section.

O..? The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. Some provisions have been updated
following the revision of IS : 2440. IS : 3 103 and IS : 3362 on which the earlier version was based.
Information has also been included in the light of the new Indian Standard, IS: 7662 (Part I)-
1974, brought out on the subject. These have been incorporated in this revision. The major
changes in this revision are:

4 Rationalization of definitions and addition of definitions for more terms.

b) Provisionsrelating to orientation of buildings have.been elaborated to cover the influence of
climatic factors on optimum orientation of buildings.
C) ‘l‘he rcquircments relating to’realization of aims of good lighting with regard to planning the
brightness pattern within an interior have been added.
d) Provisions relating to ERC and IRC have been’revised and reference to relevant Indian
Standards have been made for method of evaluating ERC and IRC.
e) The requirements regarding availability of daylight in multistorey blocks of different relative
orientat ion have been introduced.
0 Artifical lighting prqvisions have been amplified to cover stepwise guidance for the design of
interiors to meet the recommended levels of illumination.
g) l‘he conccp: of designing air-conditioned and lightiri$ system integrally has been introduced.
h) lIesign requirements for ventilation regarding limits of carbon dioxide concentration to be
permitted in air for any space, and recommended values for air changes have been specified
in a more rational lashion.
j) To facilitate better design of ventilation, the requirements regarding desirable wind speed fir
thermal comfort for ensuring the air changes as well as effective method .of controlling the
thermal conditions in industries have been introduced.
k) The requirements relating to ventilation for contaminants control have been specified in a
detailed manner to cover the recommended values of capture velocities for some of the
manufacturing processes.
ml Provisions relating to evaluation of ventilation by combined wind action and stack effect
have been specified in a more rational fashion.

0.J The
. . information contained in this section is largely based on the following Indian
Standards:
IS: 2440-1975 Guide for dayligting of buildings (sr~ond reCion)
1s: 3103-1975 Code o!’ practice for Industrial ventilation (,/ir.sf w’irion)
IS : 3362-1977 Code of practice for natural ventilation of residential buildings yirsl revision)
IS:&46 (Part II)-1966 Code of practice tor interior illumination : Part II Schedule for
values of illumination and glare index
IS : 7662 (Part I)-1994 Recommendations for orientation of buildings Part I Non-
industrial buildings

VIII-I-
2 NATIDNAL l Ull.DlNC CDDE OF INDIA
1. SCOPE
1.1 This section covers requirements and
methods for lighting and ventilation of
buildings;
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.0 For the purpose of this section, the
following definitions shall apply.
2.1. Lighting
ALTITUDE (6) - The angular distance of any
point of celestial.sphere, measured from the
horizon, on the great circle passing through
the bodyand the zenith.
AZIMUTH (4) - The angle measured between
meridians passing through the north point
and the point in question (point C in Fig. I).
REFERENCES
O-Observer’s station S-Geographical south
C-Celestial body E--Geographical east
Z-Zextith W---Geographical west
NA-Nadir NP- Celestial north pole
N-Geographical north SP-Celestial south pole
Fig. I Azimuth of a Cdesrial Body
B R I G H T N E S S R ATIO OR C O N T R A S T - T h e
variations or contrast in brightness of ihe
details of a visual task, such as white print on
blackboard.
CANDELA (cd) -The Sl unit of luminous
intensity.
Candela = 1 lumen per. ste@dian.
C ENTRAL F IELD - The area of circle round
the point of fiiation and its diameter subtends
ari angle of about 2 degrees at the eye. Objects
within this area are most critically seen in both
their details and colrour.
C LE AR D ESIGN S KY -The distribution of
luminance of such a sky is non-unifoim; the
PUT VI0 SWDlNG SERYIL’pIcSKWlN I LlCllllNC AND
horizon is brighter than the zenith, and when
B, is the brightness at zfnith, the brightness at
an altitude (0) in the region away from the sun,
is given by the expression:
Be = B, Cosece
when 8 lies between 15” and Ix)“. and B Y is
constant when 8 lies between 0” and 15”.
D AY LIGHT AKEA -- The superficial area on
the working plane illuminated to not less than
a specified daylight factor, that is, the area
within the ielevant contour.
D AYLIGHT FACTOR - It is a measure of the
total daylight illumination at a point on a
given plane expressed as the ratio (or
percentage) which the illumination at the
point on the given plane bears to the
simultaneous illumination on a horizontal
plane due to clear design sky-at an exterior
point open to the whole sky vault, direct
sunlight being excluded.
DAY LIGHT PENETRATION - The maximum
distance to which a given daylight factor
contour penetrates into a room.
D I R E C T S O L A R ~LLIJMINATION - T h e
illumination from the sun without taking into
account the light from the sky.
EXTERNAL' REFLECTED CoMPoNEN’r
(ERC) -The ratio (or percentage) of that
part of the daylight illumination at a point on
a given plane which is received by direct
reflection from external surfaces as compared
to the simultaneous exterior illumination on a
horizontal plane from the entire hemisphere
of an unobstructed clear design sky.
G LARE -A condition of vision in which
there is discomfort or a reduction in the ability
to see significant objects or both due to an
u_nsuitable distribution or range of luminance
or to extreme contrasts in space ana rime.
ILLUMINATION - At a point on a surface, the
ratio qf the luminous flux incident on an
infinitesimal element of the surface containing
the point under consideration to the area of
the element.
\ NOTE -The unit of measurement of illumination is hix
which is I lumen per square m&e.
IN T E R N A L R EFLECTED C OMPONENT
(IRC) - The ratio (or percentage) of that part
of the daylight illumination at a point in a
given plane which is received by direct
reflection or inter-reflection from the internal
surfaces as referred to. the simultaneous
exterior illumination on a horizontal plane
V E N T I L A T I O N VIII-L-
due to the entire hemisphere of an
unobstructed clear design sky.
LIGHT OU T P U T RATIO (q) -- The ratio ofthe
flux emitted from the luminaire to that
emitted from the lamp(s) (nominal lurninous
flux). It is expressed in percent.
J_UMEN(lm) - Sl unit of luminous flux. The
luminous flux emitted within. unit solid angle
(one steradian) by a point source having a
uniforni intensity of one candela.
NMJNANCE (AT A P~JN.J.OFA.S~KFACE JN A
GIVEN DI R E C T I O N ) (BR I G H T N E S S ) - T h e
quotient of the luminous intensity in the iven
direction of an infinitesimal element o7 the
surface containing the point under
consideratjon by the orthogonally projected
area of the element on a plane perpendicular
to the given direction. The unit is candela per
square metre (cd,’ m2).
L U M I N O U S F L U X (4) -- T h e qtiantity
characteristic of radiant flux which expresses
its capacity to produce visual sensation
evaluated according to the values of relative
luminous efficiency for the light adapted eye:
a) ~F-FEC’J’JVE LUMJYOIIS. J.LUX (an) - -
Total luminous flux which reaches the
working plane.
b) NOMINAL L.UMJNOUS FJ+IIX($,) - Total
luminous flux of the light sources in the
interior.
MAJNTENAWE FAC’JOR (6) - The ratio of
the average illuminance on the working plane
after a certaih period of use of a lighting
installation to the average illuminance
obtained under the same conditions for a new
installation.
MERJUIAN --It is the great circle passing
through the zenith and poles for a given point
of observation
N ORTH ANJI SOUTH P OINTS --The point in
the respective directions where the meridian
cuts the horizon.
O R IENTATJON OF B U ILDJNGS ---In the case of
non-square buildings, orientation refers to the
direction of the normal to the long axis. For
example, if the length of the building is east-
west, its orientation is north-south.
P E R I P H E R A L F I E L D-It is the rest of t h e
visual field which enables the observer to be
aware of the special framework surrounding
the bbject seen.
NOTE - A central part of the peripheral field, subtendin
an ande of about 30 degrees on either side ofthc
fixatton, is chiefly involved in the perception o
VIII-I-
4 NATIONAL BUILDING ‘CODE OF INDIA
R E F L E C T E D G L A R E - I’he variety of iJJ
effects on visual efficiency and comfort
produced by unwanted reflections in and
around the task area.
R E F L E C T I O N F A C T O R ( RE F L E C T A N C E ) -
The ratio of the luminous flux reflected by a
body (with or without diffusion) to the flux it
receives.
r,- reflection factor of the ceiling.
rw - reflection factor of the parts of thd
wall between the working surface
and the luminaires.
R E V E A L - T h e side of an opening for a
window.
R OOM J NDEX (k,) - An index relating to the
thape of a rectangular interior, according to
the formula:
L. w
k, =
(L+w) ffm
where L and W are the length and width
respectively of the interior, and H, is the
mounting height; that is, height of the fittings
above the working piane.
NOPE I - For rooms wherethelengthexceeds 5 times the
width, L shall be taken as L = 5W.
NOTE 2 .- If the reflection factor of the upper stretch of
the walls is less than half the reflection factor of the
ceiling, for indtrect or for the greater part of indirect
Jlghtmg, the value H, is measured between theceilingand
the working plane
S KY C OMPONENT (SC) -The ratio (or
percentage) of that part of the daylight
illumination at a point on a given plane,which
is received directly from the sky as compared
to the simultaneous exterior illumination on a
horizontal plane from the entire hemisphere
of an unobstructed clear design sky.
S OLAR L OAD - The amount of heat received
into a building due to solar radiation which is
a f f e c t e d b y .orientation, m a t e r i a l s o f
construction and reflection of external
finishes by colour.
U T I L I Z A T I O N F A C T O R (COEFFJCJENT O F
U T I L I Z A T I O N ) (cc) - The ratio of the total
luminous flux which reaches the working
plane (effective luminous flux, (Pn) to the total
luminous flux of the light sources ih the
interior (nominal luminous flux. Q,).
V I S U A L F I E L D - The visual field in the
binocular which includes an area
approximately 120 degrees vertically and 140
degrees horizontally centering on the point to
which the eyes are directed. The line joining

the point of fixation and the centre of the
pupil of each eye is called its primary line of
sight.
W ORKING P LANE -A horizontal ‘plane at a
level at which work will normally be done (see
4.1.3.3 and 4.1.3.4).
2.2 Ventilation
A IR C HANGE P ER HOUR -The amount of
air leakage into or out of a building or room in
terms of the number of building volumes or
room volumes exchanged.
AXIAL,FLOW FAN - A fari having a casing in
which the air enters and leaves the impeller in
a direction substantially parallel to its axis.
CENTRIFUGAL FAN - A fan in which the air
leaves the impeller in a direction substantially
at right angles to its axis.
C O N T A M I N A N T S - Dusts, fumes, gases,
mists, vapours and such other substances
present in air as are likely to be injurious or
offensive to the occupants.’
DILUTIONVENTILATION - Supplyofoutside
air to redtice the air-borne concentration of
contaminants in the building.
D RY B ULB T EM PE RATURE - The tempera-
ture of the air, read on a thermometer, taken
in such a way as to avoid errors due to
radiation.
E FFECTIVE T EMPERATURE ( E T ) - A n
arbitrary index which combines into a single
value the effect of temperature, humidity and
air movement on the sensation of warmth or
cold felt by the human body and its numerical
value is that of the temperature of still
saturated air which would induce an identical
sensation.
TABLE I MAxlMuMALLOWABLECONTAMINANTCONCEN~ATIONSFORVENTlLATlONA~R
(Clause 2.2)
A NNUAL AVERA.GE
(ARITHMETIC MEAN)
(1) (2)
fig/m'
Suspended particulates 60
Sulphur oxides 80
Carbon monoxide 20 000
Photochemical oxidant 100
Hydrocarbons (nbt including methanes) I 800
Nitrogen oxide 200
Odour: Esseritially unobjectionable.
PUT Vlll l WL,DlNC SERVICL%-SECTION I LIGHTING AND VENTlLATlON
‘.
EXHAUST OF A IR - Removal of air from a
building and its disposal outside by means of a
mechanical device, such as a fan.
F RESH A IR OR O UTSIDE A IR -Air of that
quality, which meets the criteria of Table 1
and in addition shall be such that the
concentration of any contaminant in the air is
limited to.within one-tenth the threshold limit
value (TLV) qf that contaminant.
Where it is reasonably believed that the air of
quality is unexpectable as indicated above,
samplingand analysis shall be carried out by a
competent authority havingjurisdictiori and if
the outside air of the quality specified is not
available, filtration and other treatment
devices shall be used to bring its quality to or
above the levels mentioned in Table 1.
G ENERAL V ENTILATION - Ventilation,
either natural or mechanical orboth, so asto
improve the general environment of the
building, as- opposed to local exhaust
ventilation for contamination control.
H UMIDIFICA TION - 1 ne process whereby
the absolute humidity of the air in a building is
maintained at a higher level than that of
outside air or at a level higher than that which
would prevail naturally.
H U M I D I T Y , AB S O L U T E - The weight of
water vapour per unit volume.
H U M I D I T Y, RELATIVE -The ratio of the
partial pressure ot density of the water vapour
,in the air to the saturated pressure or density
respectively of water vapourat- the same
temperature.
L OCAL E XHAUST V E N T I L A T I O N - Ventila-
tion effected by exhaust of air through an
exhaust appliance, sl[ch as a hood with or
without fan located as closely as possible to
SHORT TERM LEVEL AVERAGING PERIOD
(NOT TO EXCEED
MORE THAN ONCE A
YEAR)
(3) (4)
wm' h
IS0 24
400 24
30 000 8
500 1
4ooo 3
500 24
*
- - - - - -
5
VIII-I- I
the point at which contaminants are released,
so as to capture effectively the contaminants
and convey them through ducts to asafe point
of discharge.
MAKE-LIP AIR -Outside air supplied into a
building to replace the air.
M E C H A N I C A L VENTII.ATION -- Supply of
outside air either by positive ventilation or by
infiltration by reduction of pressure inside due
to exhaust of air. or by a combination of
positive ventilation and exhaust of air.
NAUIKAL. VENTII.ATION --- Supply of outside
air into a building throtigh window or other
openings due to wind outside and convection
effects arising from temperature or vapour
pressure differences (or both) between inside
and outside of’ the building.
POSITIVE VENTII.A~I‘ION -- T h e s u p p l y o f
outside air by means of a mechanical device,
such as a fan.
PKOPEI I.CK FAN -~ A fan in which the air
leaves the impeller in a direction substantially
parallel to its axis designed to operate
normally under free inlet and outlet
conditions.
SPRAY -HFAII SY ST E M - A’ s y s t e m o f
atomizing water so as to introduce free
moisture directly into a building.
SI-A(‘K ~FFFC‘l’ - Convection effect arising
from temperature or vapour pressure
difference (or both) between outside and
inside oft he room and the difference of height
between the outlet and inlet openings.
Tll~t~stiol 1) t.lMIl‘ VAI IJF (7‘L.V) -.. Refers
to air-borne concentration of contaminants
currently accepted by the American
Conference of Goverhmental Industrial
Hygienists and represents conditions under
which it is believed that n’early all occupants
may be repeatedlv enposed. day after day.
without adverse effect.
VEI OCITY ChpTL!RE -.- Air velocity at any
point in front of the exhaust hood necessary to
overcome opposing air currents and to
capture the contaminants in air at that point
by causing the air to tlow mto the exhaust
hood.
Vi~~-i-ii.~i~ic~x ---- Supply of outside air into.
or the removal of inside air from an enclosed
space.
WEI Btrt.~ TEhlPERATljRE -- The steady
temperature linally given by a thermometer
having its bulb coveredwith gauze or muslin
moistened with distilled water and placed in
Bn air stream of not less than 4.5m/s.
\‘lll-I- 6
3. ORIENTATION OF BUILDING
3.1 The chief aim of orientation of buildings
is to provide physically and psychologically
comfortable living inside the building by
creating conditions which suitably and
successfully ward off the undesirable effects of
severe weather to a considerable extent by
judicious use of the recommerlifations and
knowledge of climatic factors.
3.2 Basic Zones
3.2. I For the purpose of orientaticn it would
be convenient to divide the country into three
broad climatic zones:
a) hot and arid,
b) h nt/ warm and humid, and
c) co!d.
32.2 It is to be remembered that there may
not be uniform climatic factors in a particular
zone. They might even vary during day and
night in the same zonal region. Each zone, all
the same, poses certain basic problems.
3.3 Climatic Factors -- From the point of
view of lighting and ventilation, the following
climatic factors influence the optimum
orientation of the building:
a) solar radiation and temperature,
b) clouds.
c) relative humidity, and
d) prevailing winds.
3.4 Solar Radiation and Temperature
3.4. I The best orientation from solar point of
view requires that the building as a whole
should receive the maximum solar radiation
in winter and the minimum in suinmer. For
practical evaluation, it is necessary to know
the duration of sunshine. and hourly. solar
intensity on the various external surfaces on
representative days of the seasons. The total
direct diurnal solar loads per unit area on
vertical surface facing different directions are
given in Table 2,for two days in the year, that
is. I6 May and 22 December. representative of
summer and winter. for latitudes
corresponding to some important cities all
over India. From Table 2. tlie total heat intake
can be calculated for all possible orientations
of the building for these extreme days of
summer and winter.
3.4. I. I Wherever possible, suitable sun-
breakers have to be provided to cut off the
incursion of direct sunlight to prevent heat
radiation and to avoid glare.
3.4.2 In order ‘to ascertain good and bad
aspects and to decide whether or not to take
NATIONAL BI:II.DINC CO& OF INDIA
 ‘.

advantage of the sun’s rays, gay temperatures
of the region, for which orientation is to be
decided. should be studied in relation to the
following broad classification of temperature
ranges:
Below 15°C Cold
SunB rays advantageous
1s to 20” c Cool
20 to 30” C Temperate
30 to 35” C Hot
Protection from sun’s
Above 35°C Very rays advantageous
hot
3 . 5 ClOU~JS
3.S.J The clouds reduce not onlv the direct
radiation from sun but also -make sun
protection devices of little advantage. It is,
therefore, desirable to take note of cloudy
periods of. t he year and if t hey are long enough
and also coincide with hot periods. then. the
ideas of sun protection shpuld be given up,
although high day temperatures may demand
such protect,ion.
3 . 6 Relative Humitlir.ta and Pre\wiling
Winds
3.6.1 The discomfort due to high relative
humidity in air when temperatures are also
high can be counteracted, to a great extent. by
circulation of air with electric fans or by
ventilaton. In the past. simultaneously with
heavy construction and surrounding
verandahs t6 counter the effect of sun’s
radiation, there was also an over emphasis on
prtvailing winds to minimize the adverse
effects of high humidity wirh high
temperatures. With the introduction of
electric fan to effectively circulate air and
owing to faking into account the riseiri cost Gf
construction of buildings, it would perhaps be
better to shift the emphasis on protection
f:om solar radiation where temperatures are
very high: When, however, thereIS less diurnal
variation between morning and mean
maximum temperatum along with high
humidity, as in coastal areas, the emphasis
should be on prevailing winds.
3.6.1.1 For the purpose of orientation, it is
necessary _to study the velocity and direction ,
of the wind at each hour and in each month
instead of relying on generalizations of a
month or a period or for the year as a whole.
This helps to spot the right winds for a
particular period of day or night.
3.6.j.2 It is generally found that variation up
to 30” with respect’ to the prevalent wind
direction does not mateiially affect indoor
ventilation (averageindoor air velocity) inside
the building.
3.6.2 A comparative study of relative
humidity can be made under the following
categories:
0 - 25 Percent Very dry
25 - 50 Percent Dry
50 - 75 Percent Humid
75 -- 100 Percent Very humid
3.6.3 When relative humidity is of the
category of ‘dry’ and ‘very dry’. advantage can
be taken of evaporative cooling in summers to
cool the air before .introducing it into the
building. This, however, raises the relative
humidity to some extent. But when thi
atmosphere is already ‘humid’oc ‘very humid’

TABLE 2 DAILY TOTAL DIRECT SOLAR RADIATION OS VERTICAL SURF4CES IN _e. callcm /DAY
FOR TWO REPRESENTATIVE DAYS

(C/awe _J.4./1
R”X 13”N 193 23% 29-s
_A
I6 May 22 D2c I6 May 22 Dee 16 Mav 22 Dee .Ih---- -- 16 May 22 Dee
North I87 - 140 - 83 - 64 - 46 -
North East 228 3s 214 27 194 20 IPlc I5 180 9

East ‘25 I87 232 173 540 1.57 247 146 25.1 126
South East 100 291 II5 294 IJI 29s 158 297 IA8 281

South 348 - 377 - +t3 I8 ?98 64 390

South West 100 291 II5 294 141 ‘95 IS8 297 I88 281

west 225 I87 232 I73 240 I57 247 146 253 /r&l
./
North West 228 35 214 27 19-I 20 I88 IS ly’ 9
./

P4Rt VIII B~~II.DtNC SERVICFS--EF.:CTIOY I I ICiTIW AND WVTlI.4TIOI VIII-I- 7 *


it is desirable either to regulate.the rate of air
movement with the aid of electric fans or to
take advantage of prevailing winds.
3.7 Aspecrs of Dqvligfiring- Since the clear
design sky concept for daylighting takes care
of the worst possible situation, orientation’is
not a major problem for daylighting in
multistoreyed buildings, except that direct
sunshine and glare should be avoided.
However, due allowance should be given to
the mutual shading effects of opposite facades.
-3.8 Planting of Trees-Planting of trees in
streets and in open spaces should be done
carefully to take advantage of bot h shades and
sunshine without handicapping the flow of
natural winds. Their advantage in abating
glare and in providing cool and, or warm
pockets in deveioped areas should also be
taken. Some trees shed leaves in winter while
retaining thick foliage’in summer. Such trees
will be very advantageous, particularly where
southern and western exposures are
concerned, by allowing maximum sun during
winter and effectively blocking it in summer.
3.9 For detailed information regarding
orientation of buildings and recommendations
for various climatic zones of country.
reference may be made to good practice
. [VIII-I( I)]*.
4. LIGHTING
4.: Principles of Lighting
4.1.1 A IMS OF G OOD L IGHTING - Good
lighting is necessary for all buildings and has
three primary aims. The first aim is to
promote work and other activities carried out
within the building; the second aim is to
promote the safety of the people using the
building; and the third aim is to create,_in
conjunction with the structure and
decoration, a pleasing environment conducive
to interest of the occupants and a sense of their
well-being.
4.1 .I.1 Realization of these aims involves:
a) careful planning of the brightness and
colour pattern within both the working
areas and the surroundings so that
attention is drawn naturally to the
important areas, detail is seen quickly and
accurately and the room is free from any
sense of gloom or monotony (see.4.1.3);
- -
*In this section where reference is made 10 ‘good
pr’aaice’ or ‘accepted standards’ in relation to design.
testing, construction procedures and other information,
the appropria:e documenbs listed at the end of this
section may be used ac guide to the interpretation ofthis
term.
VIII-I-
8 SATIOSAL BLILDINC C O D E O F I N D I A
‘.
b) using directional lighting where
appropriate to assist perception of task
detail and to give good modellng;
c) controlling direct and reflected glare from
light sources to eliminate visual
discomfort;
4 in artificial lighting installations,
minimizing flicker from certain types of
lamps and paying attention to the colour
rendering properties of the light;
4 correlating lighting throughout the
building to prevent excessive differences
between adjacent areas so as to reduce the
risk of accidents; and
fl installation emergency lighting systems,
where necessary.
4. I . 2 P L A N N I N G T H E B R I G H T N E S S
P ATTERN - The brightness pattern seen
within an interior may be considered as
composed of three main parts-the task itself,
immediate background of the task and the
general surroundings of walls. ceiling, floor,
equipment and funishings.
4.1,2.1 In occupations where the visual
demands are small, the levels of illumination
derived from a criterion of visual performance
alone may be too low to satisfy the other
requirements. For such situations,therefore,
illumination recommendations are based on
standards of welfare, safety and amenity
judged appropriate to the occupations; they
are also sufficient to give these tasks
brightness which ensured that the visual
performance exceeds the specified minimum.
Unless there are special circumstances
associated with the occupation, it is
recommended that the illumination of ail
working areas within a building should
generally be 150 lux, even though the visual
demands of the occupation might be satisfied
by lower values.
4.1.2.2 Where work takes place over the
whole utilizable area of room, the
illumination over that area should be
reasonably uniform and it is recommended
that the diversity ratio. of minimum to
maximum illumination should be not less
than @7
NOTE -This diversity ratio does not take into account
the effects of any local lighting provided.
4.f.2.3 When the task brightness appropriate
to an occupation has been determined, the
brightness of the other parts of the room
should be planhed to give a proper emphasis
to visual comfort and interest.
A general guide for the brightnessrelatio.nship
within the normal field of vision should beas
follows:
4 For high task brightness Maximum
(above 100 cd/ ml)
1) Between the visual task 3 to 1
and the adjacent sources
like table tops
2) Between the visual task lot0 1
and the remote areas of
the room
For low and medium task brightness
b)
(below 100 cd/m’): The task should be
brighter than both the‘background and
the surroundings; the lower the task
brightness, the less critical is the
relationship.
4.1.3 RECOMMENDED V ALUES OF I LLUMI -
NATION - Table 3 gives recommended values
of illumination commensurate with the
general standards of lighting described in this
section and related to many occupations and
buildings. These are vaiid under most of the
conditions whether the illumination is by
daylighting, artificial lighting’ or a combi-
nation of the two. The great variety of
visual tasks makes it impossible to listthemall
and those given should be regarded as
representing types of task.
4.1.3.1 The different locations and tasks are
grouped within the followingiour sections:
.a) Industrial buildings and process;
b) Offices, schools and public buildings;
c) Surgeries and hospitals; and
d) Hotels, restaurants, shops and homes.
4. I .3.2 The illumination leveis recommended
in Table 3 are those to be maintained at all
time on the task. They represent good practice
and should be regarded as giving the order of
illumination commonly required rather than
as having some absolute significance. They
may be exceeded where standards of visual
performance or amenity higher than those set
m this section are called for, provided other
requirements of this section, such as freedom
from visual discomfort, are satisfied.
4.1.3.3 Where a visual task.is required’to be
carried out throughout an interior, general
illumination to the recommended value on the
working plane is necessary; where the precise
height and location of the task are not known
or cannot be easily specified,. the
recommended value is that on horizontal
plane 85 cm above level.
NOTE - For an industrial task: working ptane for the
purpose of general illummation levels is that on a work
place which is generally 75 cm above the floor level. For
PABT VIII WlLMNC SCIIVlCE8-SKTION I LIGHTING
certain purposes, such as viewing the objects of arts, the
illumination levels recommended are for .the vertical
plane at which the art pieces are placed.
4.1.3.4 Where the task is localized, the
recommended value is that for the task only; it
need not, and sometimes should not, be the
general level of illuminationused throughout
the interior. .Some processes, such as
industrialinspection process. call for lighting
of specialized design, in which case the level of
illumination is only one of the several factors
to be taken into account.
4.1.4 GLARE - Excessive contrast or abrupt
and large changes in brightness produce the
effect of glare. When glare is present, the
efficiency of vision is reduced and small
details or subtle changes in tone cannot be
perceived. It may be:
a) direct glare due to light sources within the
field of vision,
b) reflected glare due to reflections fr6m light
sources or surfaces of excessive
brightness, and
C) veiling glare where the peripheral field is
comparatively very bright.
4.1.4.1 An example of glare sources in
daylighting is”the view of the bright sky
through a windowor skylight, especially when
t h e surr,ounding wall or ceiling i s
comparatively dark or weakly illuminated.
Glare can be minimized in thbcase either by
shielding the open-sky from.direct sight by
louvers, external hoods or deep reveals,
curtains or other shading devicesorby cross-
lighting the surroundings to a comparable
level. A gradual transition of brightness ,from
one portion to the. other within the field of
vision always avoids or minimizes the glare
discomfort.
4.1.5 LIGHTING FOR M OVEMENT ABOUT A
B UILDING - Most buildings are complexes
of working areas and other areas, such as
passages, corridors, stairways, lobbies and
entrances. The lighting of all these areas
should be properly correlated. to give safe
movement within the building at all times.
4.1.5.1 CORRIDORS. PASSAGES AND
STAIRWAYS - Accidents may result if $eople
leave a well-lighted working area and pass
immediately into corridors or on to stairways
where the lighting is inadequate, as the time
needed for adaptation to the lower level may
be too long to permit obstaclebor the treads of
stairs to be seen sufficiently quickly. For the
same reason, it is desiiabk that t h e
ilhmtination of rooti which open off II
working area should be fairly hi& even
though the rooms may be used only
occasionally.
A N D VCNTILATIDN VIII-L-
 TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION
(Clauses 4.1.3. Md 4.1.3.2.)

V ISUAL T ASKS ILLUMINATION

k. lux

(0 (2) (3).

A. lnduattlal Buihlin~ and ProWam

1) General Factory Areas:
a) Canteens I50
b) Cloak-rooms 100
c) Entrances. contiors, stairs 100
2) Factory Ourdoor Arear:
Stockyards, main entrances and exit roads, car parks, internal factory roads 20

3) AircraJl Facror:es and Maintenance Hangars:

a) Stock parts productions 450
b) Drilling, riveting, screw fastening, shce: aiuminium layout and template work, 300
wing sections, cowhng, welding sub-assembly, final assembly and inspection
c) Maintenance and repair (hangars) 300
4) Assembly Shops:
a) Rough wor&, for exampk, frame assembiy and assembly of heavy machinery 150
dj Medium work, for exampk, machmed parts, engme assembly, vehicle body assembly 300
c) Fine work, for exampk. radio and teiepnone equipment, typewnter andoffice 7qo
machinery assembly
d) Very fine work, for exampk. assembly of very small precision mechanisms and 1500.
mstruments
5) bkeries:
a) Mixing and make-up rooms,oven rooms and wrapping rooms* Iso‘
b) Decorating and Icing 200
6) Boiler Houses (indwriat):
a) Coal and ash handiing 100
b) Boiler rooms:
I) Boiler fronts and operating areas w
2) Other areas 20 to 50
c) Outdo& ptants:
I) C&miks 20
2) Platforms 50
Booh&n%ng:
a). Pasttng, punching and stitching 200
WJ Binding and folding and mis&aneous machutes 300
c) Finishing, blocking and inlaying 300
Boor mrd Shoe Factories:
8) sorting and @WI-
‘*O+al8idrahotikuxdwhemnaeuuy.
! Supplementary bul li@ng may be required for yule @aas and inatrumcttt part&.
$ Bpa&l attention sbotdd be paid to the wbur quality of the light.

“Wl.1° NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION (Con&)
St. VISUAL -hSKS ILWMINATION
No. lux
(1) (2) (3)

b) Clicking and closing preparatory operations 700

c) Cutting table and presses, stitching IBlKJ
d) Bottom stock preparation, lasting and bottoming, finishing 700
e) Shoe rooms 700

9) Breweries and Distilleries:

a) General working areas I50
b) Brewhouse. bottling and canning plants 200
c) Bottle inspection Spcci8l lighting
10) Canntig and Reserving Factories:
a) Inspection of beans, ria. barley. cte 450
b) Preparation: Kettle areas. mechanical cleaning, dicing, trimming 300
c) Canned and bottkd goods: Retorts 200
d) High speed labdiing lines 300
c) Can ‘inspection 450
I I) Carper Factories:
a) Winding and beaming 200
b) Designing, jacquard card, cutting, setting pattern, tufting, topping, cutting. 300
hemming and fringing
c) Weaving, mending and inspection 450
12) Ceramics (see Pottery)
13) Chemical Works:
a) Hand furnaces, boiling tanks, stationary driers, stationary or gravity crystallixen. Is0
mechanical driers, evaporators, filtration plants, mechanical crystallizing, bkaching
extractors, percolators. nitrators and electrolytic cells
b) Controls, gauges, valves, etc
c) Control rooms:
I) Vertical control panels 200 to 300
2) Control desks ml

14) Chocolore and Confecrionery Factories:

a) Mixing, blending and boiling I50
b) Chocolate husking, winnowing, fat extraction, crushing and refining, feeding bean .mo
cleaning, sorting, milling and cream making
c) Hand decorating inspection, wrapping and packing 300
IS) Clothing Factories:
a) Matchingup 4sot
b) Cutting, sewing

l Suppkmcntary local lighting may be required for gauge glasses and i,nstrtnuant patmk.
mpa&l l tmntion should be paid to the cobur quality of the light.
(CWNillLUdl’

?Mt VDI BUIWNC SERVK-B--(IWl’lDN I WCllllNC A N D VENllLATIDN VW-~ 1

 TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION (Confd.)

SL VISUAL TASKS ILLuktlN~rt0~

No. LUX

(1) ‘(2) (3)

c) Inspection:
I) Light 450
2) Medium loo0
3) Dark I500
d) Hand tailoring:

I) Light 450
2) Medium 1000
3) Dark I 500
16) Collieries (Surface Builrling):

a) Coal preparation plant:

I) Working areas 150

2) Other areas 100

3) Picking belts 300
4) Winding houses I50

b) Lamp rooms:
I ) Main areas 100
2) Repair sections 150
3) Weight cabins 150
c) Fan houses 100
17) Duiries;
a) General working areas 200’
b) Bottle inspection Special lighting
c) Bottle filling 450
18) Die Sinking:
a) General 300
b) Fine. I. 000

19) Dye Works:

a) Reception, grey perchmg 700
b) Wet processes I sot
c) Dry proasses 2w
d) Dyers’ oflicices 700:
e) Final perching 2ooo:

20) Elecrriciry GenerarinK Stations (Indoor Locarions).

a) Turbine halls 200

b) Auxiliary equipment, battery rooms, blowers, auxiliary generators, switchgear and 100
transformer chambers

*Supplementary local lighting may be required for sight glasses.

tSupplemetary local lighting should be used where necessary.,
$penal attention should be paid to the cobur quality of the light.
 TABLE 3 RECOMbiENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION (Cod.)
VISUAL TASKS. b_LUI$4llON
%.
(1) (2) (3)
c) ‘Boiler houses (hscluding operating floors) platforms. coal conveyors, pulverizers, 7Oto 100
feeders, pmcipitatorm. soot and slag blowers
d) Boiler house and turbine house 100
e) Basements m
f) Conveyor houses, conveyor gantries and junction towers 7010 loo
g) Conrol rooms:
,
1) Vertical control panels 2wto3oo
2) Control desks 300
3) Rear of control panels Is0
4) Switch houses IS0
h) Nuclear reactors and steam raising plants:
I) Reactor areas, boilers and galleries IS0
2) Gas circular bays Is0
3) Reactor charge/ discharge face 200
21) Elecrn’cily Generating Star ions (Ourdoor Locations):

a) Coal unloading areas 20

b) Coal storage areas 20
c) ‘Conveyors 50
d) Fuel oil delivery headers 50
e) Oil stomp tanks 50
f) Cat-walks 50
g) Platforms, boiler and turbine desks SO
h) Transformers and outdoor switchgear 100

22) Engruving:
a) Hand loo0
b) Machine (see Die Sinking)
23) Farm Building (Dairies):
a) Boiler houses 50
b) Milk rooms I50
c) Washing and sterilizing rooms 150
d) Stables 50
e) Milking parloun I50

24) Flour Milk

a) Roller, purifier, silks and packing floors IS0

b) Wetting tables 300

25) Forges:

General I50

26) Foundries:

a) Charging floomT tumbling, cleantng, pourmg, shaking out, rough moulding and 150
rough core maktng
b) Fine moulding, core making and inspection 300
(cotllhl4ed)

W IT VIII RUlLDfNC SERVICE&SuII1oN I l.UfElwC A N D VENllLAlRlN v,,,_p ,

 TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF iLLUMINATlON (ConrJ.j

VISUAL i-ASKS iLLUMlNAl’lON

IUX

(1) (2) (3)

27) Garages:
a) Parking areas (interior) 70
b) Washing and polishing, greasing, general servicing and pits I50
c) Repairs 300

28) Gas W&k:

a) Retort houses, oil gas plants, water gas plants. purifiers, coke screening and coke 30 to so*
handling plants (indoor)
b) Governor, meter, compressor, booster and exhauster houses IO0
c) Open type plants
I) Cat-walks 20.
2) Platforms 50’

29) .Gauge and 7001 Rwms:

General 7w
3@) Glass Works and Processes:

a) Furnace rooms, bending,annealing lehrs I00

6) Mixing rooms, forming (blowing, drawing, pressing and rolling) I50
c) Cutting to size. grinding, polishing and toughening 200
d) Finishing (bevelling, decorating, etching and si;vermg) 300
e) Brilliant cutting 700
f) Inspection:
I) General 200
2) Fine 700
31) Glove Making:
a) Pressing, knitting, sorting and cutting 300
b) Sewing:
I) Light 300
2) Medium 450
3) Dark 700
c) Inspection:
I) Light 450
2) Medium loo0
3) Dark I 500

32) Har Making:

a) Stiffening, braiding, cleaning, refining, forming, sizing, pouncing, flanging I50
Bnisbing and ironing
b) Sewing
1) Light 300
2) Medium 450
3) Dark 700

*Supplementary IocabJighting should be used at important points.

tsuppkmentary local lighting and optical aids should be used where necessary.
(Conrittued)

NATIONAL BUILDING CDDc. OF INDIA

 TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES.OF ILLUMINATION (Cu&.)

I%. VlstrAl I’AStiS

lux
(1) (2) (3)
33) Hosiery and Knirwor:

a) Circular and flat knitting machines, universal winders. cutting UUI. folding and 300
pressing
b) Lock-stitch and overlocking machines:
I) tight .m
2) Medium 450
3) Dark 700

c) Mending Iso0

d) Examining and hand finishing. light, medium and dark 700

c) linking or running on 450

3+) Inspection Shops ( EngiMering):

a) Rough work, for example. counting and rough checking of stock parts, CIC Is0
b)- Medium work. for example. ‘go’ and ‘no go’ gauges and sub-assemblies 300
c) Fine work, for example, radio and telecommunication equipment, calibrated scales, 700
precision mechanisms and instruments
d) Very f& work for exampk. gauging and inspection of small intricate parts I sot)
e) Minute work for example, very small instruments 1uoo’
35) Iron and Steel W&s:
a) Marshalling and outdoor stockyards IO to 20
b) Stairs, gangways. basements, quarries and loading docks IO0
c) Slavards. melting shops, ingot stripping soaking pits. blast-fucnace working areas. IO0
pickmg and ckanmg lines, mechanical plant and pump houses
d) Mould pteparation rolling and-wire mills, mill motor rooms, power and blower houses I50
e) Slab inspection and conditioning. cpki strip mills, sheet and plate finishing, tinning. 200
galvanixmg machine and roll shops
f) Plate inspection 300
g) Tinplate inspection Special lighting

36) Jewellery and Watchmaking:

a) Fine processes 700’

b) Minute process 3ooo*

c) Gem cutting polishing and setting I 5oot

37) Laboratories a n d Test Roomt:

a) General laboratories and balance rooms 300

b) Electrical and instrument laboratories 450

38) &undriu and Dry&m&g Works:

a) Rcaiving, sorting, washing. drying ‘ironing (calendering) and dcspatch 200

b) Dryclaning and bulk machine work 200

c) Fine hand ironin& pressing, inspection. mending and spotting 300

Wptial aids should be used whefe neasary.

fSpc&l attention to colour quality of light may be necessary.
(ConIinueJ)

mm VI1 BumalNG suvL’6.-lFecrmN I LJCtlllNC AND VENtlWt’lDN

 TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION (Co&.)
SL VISUAL TKXS ILLLJ~UNATKIN
No. lux

(1) (2) (3)

39) Leather Dressing:

a) Vats, ckaning, tanning, stretching, cutting, fleshing and stuffing I50

b) Finishing, staking, splitting and scarfing 200

baths Working

a) Pressing and glazing 450

b) Cutting, scarfing and sewing 700

c) Grading and matching 1OW

41) Madrine and Fit&g Shops:

a) Rough bench and machine work I50

b) Medium bench and machine work, ordinary automatic machincs, rough grinding, 300
mcdium buffing and polishing
c) Fine bench and machine work, fine automatic machines, medium grinding, fine
buffing and poliihing

42) Moror Vehicle Plants:

a) Gcncral sub-assemblies, chasis assembly and car asscmbIy

b) Final inspection
c) Trim shops, body sub-asscmblics and body assembly
d) Spray booths

43) Point Works:

a) General, automatic proccsscs 200

b) Special batch mixing 450

c) Colour matching 700.

44) Point Shops and Spraying Booths:

a) Dipping, tiring and rough spraying I50

b) Rubbing, ordinary painting, spraying and finishing 300

c) Fine painting and finishing 450
d) Retouching and matching 7ooL

45) Poper works:

a) Paper and board making

I) Machine houses calcndeiing, pulp milh, preparation plants, 2tm
cutting, finishing and trimming
2) Inspection and sorting (overhauling) MO

b) Paper converting procascs:

I) .Corrugatcd board, cartons containers and paper sack manufactum. 200
toting and hminatcd proceUa
2) Aswciatcd printing 300

*Special attention should be paid to the cobur quality of the Ii&t.

 TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION(Conrd.)
VISUAL TASKS ILLUMIKATI~N
23. IUX

(1) (2) (3)

46) PharmaceutiwLr and Fine Chemical Works:
a) Raw material storage 200
b) Control laboratories and testing 300
c) Pharmaceuticals manufacturing
Grinding, granulating, mixing and drying, tableting, sterilizing and
washing, preparation of solutions andfiihng, labelling,
capping, cartoning and wrapping, abd inspection
d) Fine chemical manufacture:
I) Plant processing.
2) Fine chemical finishing 300
47) Plasric Works:
a) Manufacture (see Chemical Works)
b) Processing
I) Calendering and extrusion 300
2) Moulding-compression and injection 200
3) Sheet ,fabrication:
i) Shaping 200
ii) Trimming, machining, polishing Jo0
iii) Cementing 200

48) Plating Shops:

a) Vat and baths, buffing, polishing and burnishing Is0
b) Final buffing and polishing Special lighting

49) Porrery and Clay Products:

a) Grinding, filter pressing, kiln rooms, moulding, pressing, cleaning, trimminn. 150
glazing and tiring
b) Enamelling, colouring, decorating 450.

SO) Prinling Works:

a) Type foundries:
I) Matrix making, dressing type, hand and machine casting 2s
2) Front assembly and sorting 450

b) Printing plants:
I) Machine composition and imposing stones 200
2) Presses 300
3) Composition room 4%
4) Proof-reading 300
c) Electrotyping
1) Block-making, electroplating, washing and backing 200
2) Moufding, fmishing and routing 300
d) Photo-engraving
I) Bloc~making, etching and masking 200
2) Finishing and routing 300

l Sperial attention should be paid to the cofour quality of the light.

(Conrinuedl

?MT VW B U I L D I N G SSWlCrp--8-N I LIGHTING AND VENTlLATlON VlJ (

 ‘TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES & ILLUMINATION (ConrJ.)

SI VISIIAI ',-ASKS iI.I.UMINA+lON

No lux

(1) (2) (3)

e) Colour pnnting:
inspection area 700,

5 I) Rut&v Rc~ces.w~~

a) Fabric preparation creels 200

h) Dlppmg. moulding. compounding and calendering 150
c) Tyre and tube making 200

52) Shwr Mural Work.v:

a) Bench work. sctibmg. pressing, punchmg, shearing, stampmg, spurning and folding 200
h) Sheet inspection Special lighting

5 3 ) ,SON/~ For~rorIcx

Ke~tlr houses and anclllarles. glycertnr evaporarlon and di\tillatlon,and continuous

Indoor soap making plants:
I) General area> I50
2) Control panels 200 IO 300
Batch or continuous soap cooling curling and drying. soap mllhng and ploddmg:
I) cieneral area, I 50
2) (‘ontrol panels and key rqulpment 200 IO 300

Soap stampmg. wra$pmg and packmg. granules makmg. granules storage and
handling. lillinp and packmg granulea-

I) General arcds I50

2) C‘onlrol panels and machmt~ 200 to 300
Fdihle products processmg and packing 200
54) Sfrrrl~rurcll SIlTi !tihrr1 “,,,),I Plu,rrs:

.I) (icnetal I50

h) Markmg oft 300
55) ‘li*rlr/e Ilrll.+ ((;rrrrvr or I.~fv~rr)-

a ) B a l e hreaklng. hlowmg, cardmg. rovlnp. sluhhtng. spmmng (ordlnaq counts). I.50

windmp. heckling, sprcadmg and cahllng
h) Warpmg, slashmg!. dressing and dyemg. Jouhlmg (lancy) and spurning (I~nc counts) 200
c ) Hraldmg (drawlnp-tn) 700
d) Wr‘lcmg:
I) I’.llterned cloths and line counfs. darh 700
2) I’ar~erned ilo[hs and line c,,unts. hght 300
3) I’lain grcy cl<,th 200
c) C‘loth m\pec,,on 700*

56) 7i~\fl/l~ /%fIl/.\ (.SI/i, ,‘I .Y, ?Ifi,cYr<x)

.I) Sr~~hmg. lug~r~\c tm~mg. condutonmg or scttmg or tw$ist 200

h) Sptnnmg 450
i) Wrndlng. twrs~~np. rcwmtimg .rnd coinmg. qu~h~np and slashing,

I ) Llghl thrcati
2 ) IXuk thrrad
 TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION (Cum%)
VISUAL TASKS- ILLUbl~xATtDN

(2) (3)

d) Warping MO
e) Healding (drawing-in) 700
f) Weaving 700
g) Inspection 1m
57) Texrile Mills ( Woollen):
a) Scouring, carbonizing, teasing preparing, raising,brushing pressing, back-washing, 150
gilling. crabbing and blowing
b) Blending, carding, combing (whtte), tentering, drying and cropping 200
c) Spinning, roving, winding, warping, combing(coloured) and twisting 450

d) Healding (drawing-in) 700

e) Weaving
I) Fine worsteds 700
2) Medium worsteds and fine wooliens 450
3) Heavy woolkns 300
f) Burling and mending 700
g) Perching:
1) Grey 700
2) Final 2000+

58) Textile Mills (Jute):

a) Weaving. spinning, flat, jacquard carpet loom and copwmding 200

b) Yarn calendering 150
59) Tobacco Fortories:

All processes mot

60) UphoLrrermg:

Furnrture and vehicles 300

61) Worehouses ond Bulk Srores:

a) Large material loading bays loo

b) Small material racks I50
c) Packing and despatch I50

62) Welding und Soldering

a) Gas and arc welding and rough spot welding 150
b) Medium soldering brazing and spot welding, for example, domestic hardware 300
c) Fine soldering and spot welding, for example,instrumprts. radio set assembly 7&t
d) Very fine soldering and spot welding, for exampk, radio valves I50
63) Woodworking Shops :
a) Rough sawing and bench work

l Speciaf attention shored be paid to the coiour quality of the light.

tSpedal attention should be paid to thecobur quality of the light in all processing areas.

( ( ‘onrmued )

?ART VIII WlLMNC SPIVICDFSECTIDN I L I G H T I N G AND VENTILATIDN

 TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION(Conrd.)
VISU~I. ILLUMINATION
I%. TA S K S
lux

(1) (2) (3)

b) Sizing, planing, rough sanding. medium machine and bench work,glueing, veneeiing 200
and cooperage
c) Fine bench and machine work;.fine sanding arid finishing 300

B. Offkea, Schoob and Puhiis Buildinp

64) Airport Buildings:

a) Reception areas (desks) 300

b) Customs and immigration halls 300
c) Circulation areas and lounges 150

65) Assembly and Concert:

a) Foyers and auditoria 100 to I50

b) Platforms 450
c) Corridors 70
d) Stairs 100

66) Banks:

a) Counter, typing and accounting book areas 300

d) Public areas 150

67) Cinemas:
a) Foyers 150
b) Auditoria 50
c) Corridors 70
d) Stairs 100

68) Libruries*

a) Shelves (stadrs) 70 to 15ot

b) Reading rooms (newspapers and magazines) I50t0300
c) Reading tables 300 to 700
d) Book repair and binding 300 to 700
e) Cataloguing, sorting and stock rooms 1SOto300

69) Museums An Galleries:

a) Museums:
I) General I50
2) Displays Special lighting
b) Art galleries:
I) General
2) Painting

*For/details reference may be made to good practia [WI-l(s)].

tOn vertical surfaces.
1% fticrica with separate picture lighting, In small @icries without wall lighting the illumination should bein~r~ucd to

0011 vertical surface. Special attention shbuld be paid to the colour quality of the light.
(co&su~

WI-I-20 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INMA

 TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATiON(Cbmf.)

SL hXlAL TASKS l~LUhtlfd~Ti0~

No. lux

(1) (2) (3)

7 0 ) o//ice:
a) Entrance balls and reception areas I50

b) Conference rooms and executive office 300

c) General office 300
d) Business machine operation 450
,
e) Drawing office:
1) General 300
2) Boards and tracing 450
f) Corridors and lift cars 70
g) Stairs loo
h) Lift landings I50
j) Telephone exchanges:
I) Manual exchange rooms (on desk) 200*
2) Main distribution frameroom I50
7 I) School and Colleges:
a) ‘Assembly halls:
I) General IS0
2) When used for examinations 300
3) Plateforms 300
b) Class and lecture rooms:
I) Desks 300
2) Chalk boards 200 to 3001
c) Embroidery sewing rooms 700
d) Art rooms 450:
e) Laboratories 300
1) Libraries:
1) Shelves, stacks 70 to Isot
2) Reading tables 300
g) Manual training See appropriate trades
h) Offices 300
j) Staff rooms and common rooms 150
k) Corridors 70
m) Stairs 100

7 2 ) Thearres:
a) Foyers I50
b) Auditoria 70
*Spedal ‘lighting will be required for switchboard.
ton vertical surfacrrs.
ZSpecial attention should be paid to thedirecton and the colour quality of the light.
(Conrinucd)

?ART Vlti B U I L D I N G St?.UVICE)-SECTION I LIGHTING AND VEMlLATlON vttt-t? ’

-. - -
TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF lLLUMINATION(ConrJ.)

No.

0) (2)
c) Corridors
d) Stairs

73) lknlal Surgeries:

a) Waiting rooms
b) Surgeries:
I) General
2) Chairs
c) Laboratories

a) Waiting rooms and consulting rooms Iw

h) Corridors 70

c) Stairs IO0

d) Sight testing (acult).) wall charts and near VI\IO~ type?, Jell*

7 5 ) Hospirals:

a) Reception and waiting rooms I 51)

b), Wards:

1) General !#I

2) Beds I 50

c) Operating theatreq:

I) General
2) Tables

d) Laboratorlcs
e) Radiology deparrmcnts

f) Casualty and outpatient depxtment\

g) Stairs and corr&rs

h) Dispcnsarles

c‘. Hotels, Restaurants, Shops and Homes

76) H o t e l s :

a) Entrance halls I 50

W Reception and accounts so0

c) Dining rooms (tdhlrb) 100

d) Lounges I50

e) Bedrooms:
I) Grncral loo
2) Dressing table\. hcd heads. c ‘IC X0
0 Writing rooms (rabies) SO0
g) Corridors 70

*The charts should be so illuminated tha: their brightness is suhsrantiall> uniiorm over their whole ared.
((‘c,t,l,llo.‘Jl
_-___ _... _-.-. --_.-______ _ - --.__..
 TABLE 3 RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION (Conrd.)
VISUAL TANKS I~~utdltd~T~N
luX

0) (2) (3)
b) Stairs 100
j) Laundries 200
k) Kitchens 2ov
m) Goods and passenger lifts 70
n) Clock-rooms and toilets 100*
p) Bathrooms loti*
7 7 ) Resrauranrs: I

a) Dining rooms:

1) Tables 100
2) Cash desks 300
b) Self-carrying counters 300

c) Kitchens 200.
d) Cloack-rooms and toilets 100.

78) Shops and Srores:

a) General areas 150 to 3oot
b) Stock rooms 200
7 9 ) Hoines:

a) Kitchens 200
b) Bathrooms 100:
c) Stairs 100
d) Workshops 200
e) Garages 70
r) Sewing and darning 700
g) R.eading (casual) IS0
h) Homework and sustained reading 300

*Supplementary local lighting should be provided over kitchm quipmcnt and at mirrors.

$%tppkmmtary local lighting should be used as required for counter and display areas.
$Suppkmentary local lighting should be provided at mirrors.

It is important, when lighting stairways. to brightness usually present outdoors and

prevent disability from glare caused bydrrect
sight of bright sources to emphasize the edges
of the treads and to avoid confusing shadows.
The same precautions should be taken in the
lighting of cat-walks and stairways on
outdoor industrial plants.
4.1.5.2 E N T R A N C E S -- The problems of
correctly grading the lighting within a
building to allow adequate time for
adaptation wkn passing from one area to
another area Ne particularly acute at building
entrances. These are given below:
a) By day, people ‘entering a budding will be
adapted to the very high levels of
there is risk of accident -if entrance areas,
particularly any steps, are poorly lighted.
This. problem may often be overcome by
arranging windows to give adequate
natural lighting at the immediate
entrance, grading to lower levels further
inside the entrance area. Where this
cannot be done. suppismentary artificial
lighting should be installed to raise the
illumination 10 an appropriate value.
b, At night it is desirable to light entrance
halls and lobbies so that the illumination
level reduces towards the exit and so that
no bright fittings are in the line of sight of
pcopte leaving the building. Any entrance

?MT VW B U I L D I N G SEltVICES--SE(TIO?I I LICHTINC A N D VENTlL4TION vlll-I-L3 ’

 steps to tne uuudmg snould be well-ltghted
by correctly screened fittings.
41.6 For detailed information regarding
principles of good lighting, reference may be
made to good practice [VIII-l(2)].
4.2 Daylighting - The primary source of
lighting for daylighting is the sun. The light
received by the earth from the sun consists of
two parts, namely, direct solar inumination
and- sky radiation. For the purposes of
daylighting design, direct solar illumination
shall not be considered and only sky radiation
shall be taken as contributing to illumination
of the building interiors during the day.
42.1 The relative amount of sky radiation
depends on the position of the sun defined by
its altitude, which in turn, varies with the
latitude of the locality, the day ofthe year and
the time of the day, as indicated in Table 4.
4.2.2 The external available horizontal
illumination which may be assumed for design
purposes in this country, broadly covering
India from north to south, may be taken 8 000
lux. Since the design is based on the solar
position of 15” altitude, the corresponding
illumination from the Design sky has been
found to be nearly constant all over the
country. However, the prevalent atmospheric
haze which varies from place to place may
necessitate a 25 percent increase in the value of
8 000 lux design illumination suggested in this
Code, where haze conditions prevail at design
time.
4.2.3 The daylight factor is dependent on the
sky luminance distribution, which varies with
atmospheric conditions. A clear design sky
with its non-uniform distribution of
luminance is adopted for the purposes of
design in this section.
4.2.4 C O M P O N E N T S OF D A Y L I G H T
F ACTOR - Daylight factor is the sum of all
the daylight reaching on an indoor reference
point from the following sources:
a) The direct sky visible from the point,
b) External surfaces. reflecting light
directly* to the point, and
c) Internal surfaces reflecting and inter-
reflecting light to the point.
NOTE - Each of the thm components when expressed
as a ratio or percent of the simu,ltaneous external
illumination on the horizontal plane, defines respectively
l External surface refkction may be computed
approximately only for points at theccntre of the room,
and for detailed analysis procedurea are complicated
and these may be ignored for actual calculatPns.
vll1.P
the sky component (SC), the external reflected
component (ERC) and the internal reflected component
(IRC) of the daylight factor.
4.2.4.1The daylight factors onthe horizontal
plane only are usually taken, as the working
plane in a room is generally horizontal;
however, the factors in vertical planes should
also be considered when specifying
daylighting values for s@cial cases, such as
daylighting on class-rooms, blackboards,
pictures and paintings hung on walls.
4.2.5 SKY C OMPONENT (SC)- Sky com-
ponent for a window of any size is computed
by the use of the appropriate table of
Appendix A.
a) The recommended sky component level
should be ensured generally on the
working plane at the’following positions:
I) at a distance of 3 to 3.75 m from the
window along the central line
perpendicular to the window,
2) at the centre of the room if more
appropriate, and
3) at fixed locations, such as school
desks, black-boards and office tables.
b) ‘The daylight area of the prescribed sky
component should not normally be less
than half the total area of the room.
4.2.5.1 The values obtainable from the tables
are for rectangular, open unglazed windows,
with no external obstructions. The values
shall be corrected for the presence ofwindow
bars, glazing and external obstructions, if any.
This assumes the maintenance of a regular
cleaning schedule.
4.2.5.2 CORRECTIONS FOR WINDOW
BARS-The corrections for window bars
shall be made by multiplying the values read
from tables in Appendix A by a factor equal to
the ratio of the clear opening to the overall
opening.
4.2.5.3 CORRECTION FOR GLAZING - Where
windows are glazed, the sky components
obtained from Appendix A shall be reduced
by 10 to 20 percent, provided the panes are of
clear glass, tolerably clean. Where glass is of
the frosted (ground) type, the sky components
read from Appendix A may be reduced by 15
to 30 percent. Higher indicated correction
corresponds to larger windows and/or near
reference points. In the case of openings and
glazings which are not vertical, suitable
correction shall be taken into account.
4.2.5.4 CORRECTION FOR EXTERNAL
OBSTRUCTIONS - T h e r e i s n o s e p a r a t e
correction, except that the values from tabks
in Appendix A shall be read only for the
unobstructed portions of the window.
NATtONAL l UtLDtNC CODWe OF IWIMA
 TABLE 4 SOLAR-ALTITUDES (TO THE NEAREST DEGREE) FOR INDIAN LATITUDES

(Clause 4.2.1)

PERIOD OF YEAR 22 JUNE 21 M A R C H AND 23 SE?TEMBER 22 .DECEM~IER

07 00 08 00 09 qo IO 00 II 00 I2 00 07 00 08 00 09 00 IO 00 II 00 I2 00 0700 0800’0900 1000 1100 1200

1700 I600 I500 I400 1300 - 1700 1600 IS00 1400 1300 - 1700 1600 1500 1400 1300 -

IO”N I8 31 45 58 70 77 IS 30 44 59 72 80 9’ 23 35 46 53 57
I3”N I9 ‘32 46 60 i2 80 I5 29 44 58 70 77 8 21 33 43 51 54
l6”N 20 33 47 61 74 83 I4 29 43 56 68 74 7 I9 31 41 48 51
I9Pl 21 34 48 62 75 86 I4 28 42 55 66 71 5 I8 29’ 48 45 48
22”N 22 35 49 62 75 89 I4 28 41 53 64 68 4 I6 2: 36 42 45
25”N 23 36 49 6j 76 88 I3 27 40 52 61 65 3 I4 25 34 39 42
2II”N 23 36 49 dl 76 86 I3 26 39 50 59 62 I I3 23 31 37 39
3l”N 24 37 50 d 75 82, 13 25 37 48 56 56 - 11 21 28 34 36

W”N 25 37 49 & 73 79 12 25 36 46 53 56 - 9 IW 26 31 33
L

.
4.1.6 J2%-IEKNAL KEFLECTED COMPONEST
(ERC) -The value of the sky component
corresponding to the portion of the window
obstructed by the external obstructions can be
found by the use of methods described in
Appendix B of accepted standards
[VIII-l(3)].
These values when multiplied by the
coriection factors, corresponding to the mean
elevation of obstruction from the point in
question as given in Table 5, can be taken as
‘the external reflected components for that
point.
TABLE5 CORREC'TlOI'i FAC-l-OR FOREKC‘
(Cluuse 4.,7.6)
MFAN ANU F OF ~ORKCCll0h FACIOR
EI.tVAl IOh
5” 3.U86
I 5” 0.086
25 0.142
35 0.192
45" 0.226
55" 0.274
65" 0.304
75" 0.314
w 0.334
4.2.6.1 For method of calculating ERC,
reference may be made to accepted standard
[see Examples IO and 1 I given in Appendix B
of VIII-l(3)].
4 . 2 . 7 Ilril.EKhAl, REFt.EcI-F-Jt) COMPONENT
(IRC) -- The component of daylight factor
contributed by reflection from the inside
surfaces \,aries directly as the window area
and inversely as the total area of internal
suifaces, and depends on the reflection factor
of the floor, wall and roof SUI faces inside and
of the ground outside. For rooms white-
washed on walls and ceiling and windows of
normal sizes, the IRC will have sizeable value
even at points far away from the window.
External obstructions, when -present, will
proportionately reduce IRC. Where accurate
values of IRC are desired, reference to a
precise method of evaluation given in
Appendix B of accepted standard [VIII-l(3)]
may be made.
2.2.8 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF OPENINGS
7.0 AF F O R D G OOD LiGHTtNG
4.2.8.1 Generally, while taller openings give
greater penetrations, broader openings give
better distributldn of light. It is preferable that
some are& of the sky at an altitude of 20 to 25
degrees should light up the working plane.
4.2.8.2 Broader openings may also be equally
WI-I-26
or more efficient, provided their sills are
raised by 30 to 60 cm above the working plane.
hr011- -- It is tobcnotcd thatwhlieplacingwmdowwitha
high sill level might help natural Ilghtmg. this is likely to
reduce venlilatlcn at wcvk levels. While deqming the
opening for ventilation also, a compromise may be made
by providing the sill level about I5 cm below the head
level of workers.
4.2.8.3 For a given penetration. a number of
small openings properly positioned along the
sqme. adjacent or opposite walls will give
better distribution of illumination than a
single large opening. The sky component at
any point. due to a number of openings m;\y
be easily determined from the corresponding
sky component contour charts appropriately
superposed. The sum of the individual sky
component for each opening at the point
given the overall component due to all the
openings. The same charts may also facihtate
easy drawmg of sky component contours due
to multiple openings.
4.2.X.4 Unilateral lighting fromside openings
~111. in general, be unsatisfactory if the
effective width of the room IS more than 2 to
2.5 times the distance from the floor to the top
of the opening.
4.2.8.5’ Openings on two opposite sides will
give greater uniformity oi internal daylight
illumination, especially when the room is 7 m
or more across. They also minimize glare by .
illuminating the wail surrounding each of‘the
oppobing openmgs. Side openings on one side
and clerestory openings on the opposite side
may be provided where the situation so
requires.
4. ?.5.6 Cross-lighting with openings on
adjacent walls tends IO in&ease the diffused
lighting within a room.
4.2.8.7 Openings in deep reveals tend to
minimize glare effects.
4.2.8.8 Openings shall be provided with
chajiahs, louvers, baffles or other shading
devices to exclude, as far as possible, direct
sunlight entering the room. Chajjahs, louvers,
etc, reduce the effective height of the opening
for which due allowance shall be made. Broad
and low openings are, in general, much easier
to shade against sunlight entry. Direct
sunlight, when it enters, increases the inside
illumination very considerably. Glare will
result if it falls on walls at low angles. more so
than when it falls on floors, especially when
the floors are dark coloured or less reflective.
4.2.8.9. Light qontrol media, such as
translucent glass panes (opal or mate)
surfaced by grinding, etching or sandblasting,
configurated or corrugated glass, certain
types of prismatic glass and glass blasts are
NATIONAL BI:II.UlkC CODE OF INDIA

often used. They should be provided, either
fixed or movable outside or inside, especially
in the upper portions of the openings. The
lower portions are usually left clear to afford
desirable view. The chief purpose of such
fixtures is to reflect part.of the light on to the
roof and thereby increase the diffuse lighting
within, ligbi up the farther areas in the room
and thereby produce a more uniform
illumination throughout. They will also
prevent the opening causing serious glare
discomfort to the occupants but will provide
some glare when illuminated by direct
sunlight.
4 . 2 . 9 A VAILABILITY OF D A Y L I G H T I N
MULTISTOREY BLOCK - Proper planning
and layout of building can add appreciably to
daylighting- illumination inside. Certain
dispositions of building masses offer much
kss mutual obstruction to daylight than
others and have ’ a significant relevance,
especially when intensive site planning is
undertaken. The relative availability of
daylight in multistorey blocks of different
relative orientations are given inTable 6.
4.2.10 For specified requireinents for
daylighting of special occupancies and areas,
reference may be made to good practice
[Vlll-l(4)].
4.3 Artijicial Lighting
4.3 I Artificial lighting may have to
be provided.
4 where the recommended illumination
levels have to be obtained by artificial
lighting only,
b) to supplement daylighting when the level
of illumination falls below the
recommended value, and
cl where visual task may demand a higher
level of illumination.
TABLE 6 RELATIVE AVAILABILITY OF DAYilGHT ON THE WINDOW PLANE AT GROUND
IN A FOUR-STOREYED BUILDING BLOCKS (CLEAR DESIGN-SKY ASBASIS,
DAYLIGHT AVAILABILITy TAKEN AS UNITY ON AN UNOBSTRUCTED
FACADE. VALUES ARE FOR THE CENTRE OF THE BLOCKS)
DISTANCE OF SEPARATION INFINITELY LONG
BETWEEN Bmxs PAKALLEL BLOCKS
(LENGTH =2 X H EIGHT )
0.5 Ht 0.15
1.0 Ht 0.30
t.5 Ht 0.40
2.0 Hl 0.50
pM1 VIII l lWDlNC SKRVICFS--SECTION I LIGHTING AND VENTILATION
‘.
4.3.2 A RTIFICIAL L I G H T I N G RESIGN FOR
INTERIORS - For general lighting purposes,
the recommended practice is to design for a
level of illumination on the working plane on
the basis of the recommendedlevels f6r visual
tasks .iiven in Table 3 by a method called
“Lumen mettiod”. In order to make the
necessary detailed calculations concerning the
type and quantity of lighting equipment
necessary, advance information on the surface
reflectances of walk, ceilings and floors is
required. Si@larly, calculations concerning
the-bightness ratio in the. interior call for
details of the interior decor and furnishing.
Stepwise guidance regarding designing the
interior lighting systems for a building using
the ‘*Lumen method” is given in 4.3.2.1
to 4.3.2.4.
4.3.2.fDETERMINATION OF THE ILLUMI-
NATION LEVEL - Recommended value of
illumination shall be taken from Table 3,
depending upon the type of work to be carried
out in th& location in question and the visual
tasks involved.
4.3.2.2 SELECTION OF THE LIGHT SOURCES
AND s e l e c t i o n of l i g h t
L U M I N A I R E S- T h e
sources and luminaires dependson the choice
of lighting system, namely, general lighting,
directional lighting and localized or local
lighting.
4.3.2.3 DETERMINATION OF THE LUMINOUS
FLUX
a) The luminous flux (a) reaching the
working plane depends upon the
following:
1) lumen output of the lamps.
2) type of luminaire,
3) proportion of the room (room index)
(M.
4) reflectance of internal surfaces of the
room,
LEVEL
PARALLEL -KS P ARALLEL &LOCKS
F ACING E ACH &HER FACINO GAGS BETWEEN
DppoSlTE BLOCKS
(LENGTH = 2 x H EIGHT )
0.15 0.25
0.32 0.38
0.50 0.55
0.60 0.68
w-2 ’
 5) depreciation in the lumen output ofthe
lamps after burning their rated life,
and
6) depreciation due to dirt collection on
luminaires and room surface.
b) C O E F F I C I E N T O F UTILIZA’I3ON OR
UTILIZATION FACTOR
1) The compilation of tables for the
utilization factor requires a
considerable amount of calculations,
especially if these tables have to cover a
wide range of lighting practices. For
every luminaire, the exact light
distribution has to be measured in the
laboratory and their efficiencies have
to be calculated and measured exactly.
These measurements comprise:
9 the luminous flux radiated by the
luutc$res directly to the measuring
I P= the utilization factor in new
ii) the luminous flux reflected andre-
reflected by the ceiling and the walls
/to the measuring surface, and
iii) the inter-reflections between the
ceiling and wall which result in the
measuring surface receiving
additional luminous flux.
All these measurements have to be
made for different reflection factors of
the ceiling and the walLs for all necessary
room indices. These tables have also to
indicate the maintenance factor to be
taken for the luminous flux
depreciation throughout the life of an
installation due to ageing of the lamp
and owing to the deposition of dirt on
the lamps and luminaires and room
surfaces.
2) The values of the reflection factor of
the ceiling and of the wall are as
,follows:
White and very light 0.7
colours
Light, colours 0.5
Middle tints 0.3
Dark cdlours 0.1
Forthe walls, taking into account the
influence of the windows without
curtains, shelves, almirahs and doors
with different colours, etc, should be
estimated.
“Ill-I-~*
c) CALCULATION FOR DETERMINING THE
LUMINOUS FLUX
E., = -+-
EVA
or, 9 = ___ for new condition
cc
EVA
and #I = -- for working condition
rd
where
9= The total luminous flux of
the light sources installed in
the room in lumens;
Ew = the average illumination
level required on the
working plane in lux;
A = area of the working plane in
m*;
conditions; and
d = maintenance factor.
In practice, it is easier to calculate
straightaway the number of lamps or
luminaiies from:
Ea,A -
Nlam, = -
pdcpw
where
Q, IImpS= luminous flux of each
lamp in lumens
~bmimirc = luminous flux of each
luminaire in lumens
NImp = total number of Iamps
N~umin.irc = total number of luminaires.
4.3.2.4 ARRANGEMENT OFTHE LUMINAIRES -
This is done to achieve better uniformly
distributed’ illumination. The location of the
luminaires has an important effect on the
utilization factor.
a) In general, luminaires are spaced*a*metre
apart in either direction, while tlie
distance of the end luminaire from the
wall is ’ + n’metre. The distance ‘a’is more
or less equal to the mounting height ‘H,’
between the luminaire and the working
plane. The utilization factor tables are
calculated for this arrangement of
luminaires.
b) For small rooms where the room index
(k,) is less then 1, the distance ‘a’ should
N A T I O N A L WU.OlNC CIBDE OF INDIA

always be less than I&,,, since otherwise
luminaires cannot be properly located. In
most cases of such rooms, four’or. two
luminaires are placed for good general
lighting. If, however, in such rooms only
one luminaire is installed in the middle,
higher utilization factors are obtained,
but the uniformity ofdistributionis poor.
For such cases, references should be made
to the additional tables for k,=06 to l-25
for luminaires ioeated centrally.
4.3.3 I N T E G R A T I O N O F LIGH-ITNG A N D AIR-
CONPITIONING SYSTEM -,lt is desirable’ to
design air-conditioning and lighting system
integrally. The fundamental idea in this
integration is that the return air after air-
conditioning the space is passed through
luminaires or other lighting fittings so that it
is brought into close contact with the means of
illumination. Hence, a large part of the heat
generated by the lighting is removed at source
and only a small portion of the warmth is
dissipated within the premises. Detailed
design of integration of lighting and air-
conditioning system shall ,be done in
accordance with good practice.
4.34 A RTIFICIAL L IGHTING TO S UPPLEMENT
D AY LIGHTING
4.3.4.1 The need for general supplementary
artificial lighting arises due to diminution of
daylighting beyond design hours, that is, for
solar altitude below 15” or when dark cloudy
conditions occur.
0 I . .,.I....,..
0 SO 100
FLOOR AREA, ,n2
Fig. 2 Supplemenrary Arrificial Lighring_for 40 W Fluorescent Tubes
?Mt VlIl BUILDING SCBVICK4-SECI’ION I LlGHTINi A N D
‘.
4.3..4.2 The need may also arise for.providing
artificial lighting during the day in the
innermost parts of the building which cannot
be adequately provided with daylighting, or
when the outside windows are not of adequlrts
size or when there are unavoidable external
obstructions to the incoming daylighting.
4.3.4.3 The neqd for supplementary lighting
during the day arises, particularly when the
daylighting on the working plane fallsbeJow
100 lux and the surrounding luminance drops
below 19-cd/m’ and the working lane
illumination level to a range of 100 to 15g lux.
4.3.4,4 The requirement of supplementary
artificial lighting increases with the increase in
daylighting availability. Therefore,
conditions near sunset or sunrise or
equivalent conditions due to -clouds or
obstructions, etc, represent the worst
conditions when the supplementary lighting is
most needed.
4.3.4.5 The requirement of supplementary
artificial lighting when daylighting
availability becomes poor canbe determined
from Fig. 2 for an assumed ceiling height of
3.0 m, depending upon floor area,
fenestration percentage and room surface
reflectance. Cool daylight fluorescent tubes
are recommended with semi-direct
luminaires. To ensure a good distribution of
illumination, the mounting height should be
between 1.5 and 2.0 m above the work plane
for a separation of 2.0 to 3.0 m between the
OPENINGS.
PERCENT
. .I*,
150 200 230
VENllLATN)N vlll-I-*9 *
luminaires. Also the number of lamps should
preferably be more in the rear half oft he room
than in the vicinity of wirrdows. The following
steps may be followed for using Fig. 2 for
determining the number of fluorescent tubes
required for supplementary daylighting.
a) Determine fenestration percentage of the
floor area, that is,
- Wind0.w
- - - -Area
- - x 100
Floor Area
b) In Fig. 2, refer to rhe curye corresponding
to the percent fenestration determined
above and the set of reflectances of
ceiling, walls and floor actually provided.
c) For the referred curve of Fig. 2 read,
along the ordinate. the number of 40 W
fluorescent tubes required, corresponding
to the given floore area on the abscissa.
3.3.5 For detailed information on the design
aspects and principles of artificial lighting,
reference may be made to good practice
[vlll-l(2)].
4.3.6 For specific requirements for lighting of
special occupancies and areas, reference may
be made to good practice [Vlll-l(5)].
4.j.7 Electrical installation aspect for
artificial lighting shall be in accordance with
Part VIII Building services, Section 2
Electrical installations.
5. VENTILATION
5.1 Generul- Ventilation of buildings is
required to supply fresh air for respiration of
occupants, to dilute inside air to prevent
vitiation by body odours and to remove any
products o f c o m b u s t i o n o r o t h e r
contaminants in air and to provide such
thermal environments as will assist in the
maintenance of heat ,balance of the body in
order to prevent discomfort and injury to
health of the occupants.
5.2 Design Consideratiuns
5.2.1 RESPIRATION - Supply of fresh air to
provide oxygen for the human body for
elimination of waste products and to maintain
carbon dioxide concentratiofi in the air within
safe limits rarely calls for special attention as
enough outside air for this purpose normally
enters the areas of occupancy through crevices
and other openings.
5.2.1.1 Even in the worst ventilated rooms,
the content of carbon dioxide in air rarely
exceeds 0.5 to I percent and is, therefore,
incapable of producing any ill effect. The
Ylll-I-30
amount of air required to keep the
concentration down to I percent is very small.
The change in oxygen content is also too small
under normal conditions to have any ill
effects; the oxygen content may vary quite
appreciably without noticeable effect. if the
carbon dioxide concentration is unchanged.
7 a1 VITIATION BY BODY ODOURS - Where
5 ._.*
no products of combustion or other
contaminants are to be removed from air, the
amount of fresh air required for dilution of
inside air to prevent vitiation of air by body
odours. depends on the air space available per
person and the degree of physical activity; the
amount of air decreases as the .air space
available per person, and it may vary from
20 to 30 m’ per person per hour. In rooms
occupied by only a small number of persons
such an air change will automatically be
attained in cool weather by normal leakage
around windows and other openings and this
may easily be secured in warin weather by
keeping the openings open.
No standards have been laid down under the
Factories Act 1948 asregards the amount of
fresh air required per worker or the number of
air changes per hour. Section I6 relaling to
over-crowding requires that at least 14 to
l6m’ of space shall be. provided for every
worker and for the purpose of that section no
account shall be taken of any space in a work
room which is more than 4.25 m above the
floor level.
NEIL -~ Vitration of the atmosphere can also occur in
factories by odours given off due to contaminants of the
product itself, say for example. from tabacco processing
in a ‘Bidi’ factory. Here the ventilatwn will have to be
augmented to keep odours within unobjectionable levels.
5.2.2.1 R E C O M M E N D E D V A L U E S F O R A I R
CHANGES -- The following standards of
general ventilation are recommended based
on maintenance of required oxygen, carbon
dioxide and other air quality levels and for the
control of body odours when no products of
combustion or other contaminants are
present in the air:
AIR CHANGES SCHEDULE
Space to be ventilated Air changes
‘per hour
*Assembly Halls/Auditoria 3 - 6
*Bed Rooms/ Living Rooms 3 - 6
Bath Rooms/Toilets 6- I2
*Cafes/ Restaurants l2- I5
Cinemas/Theatres (Non-smoking) 6 - 9
Class Rooms 3 - 6
*Smoking
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 space to be verrrilared Air changes
per hour
l Factories (Medium metal work) 3 - 6
* Garages !2 - 15
* Hospital Wards 3 -- 6
* Kitchens (Common)
6-9
* Kitchens (Domestic) 3-6
Laboratories 3-6
* Offices 3-6
5:2.3 HEAT B ALANCE OF BODY -- Specially
in hof weather, when thermal environment
inside the room is worsened by heat given off
by machinery, occupants and other sources,
the prime need for ventilation is to provide
such thermal environment as will assist in the
maintenance of heat balance of the body in
order to prevent discomfort and injury to
health. Excess of heat either from increased
metabolism due to physical activity of persons
or gains from a hot environment has to be
offset to maintain normal body temperature
(37°C). Heat- exchange of the human body
with respect to the surroundings is determined
by the temperature and humidity gradient
between’ the skin and the surroundings and
other factors, such as age of persons, clothing,
etc, and the latter depends on air temperature
(dry bulb temperature), relative humidity,
radiation from the solid surroundings and
rate of air movement. The volume of outside
air to be circulated through the room is,
therefore, g o v e r n e d b y t h e p h y s i c a l
considerations ofcontrolling the temperature,
air distribution or air movement. A i r
movement and air distribution may, however,
be achieved by recirculation of the inside air
rather than bringing in all outside air.
However, fresh air supply or the circulated air
will reduce heat stress by dissipating heat from
body by evaporation of the sweat, particularly
when the relative humidity is high and the air
temperature is near body temperature.
5.2.3.1 LIMITS OF COMFORT AND HEAT
T O L E R A NC E comfort is that
-Thermal
condition of thermal envuonment under
which a person can maintain a bodily heat
balance at normal body temperature and
without perceptible sweating. Limits of
comfort vary considerably according to
studies carried out in India and abroad. In
terms of effective temperature, the upper limit
of comfort may be 27.W for every day work
in industry. This is also the temperature for
most efficient production. Air movement is
necessary in hot and humid weather for body
cooling. A certain minimum desirable wind
l Contaminants from concentrated sources, suchasheat,
smoke and fumes shall be collected separately by local
exhuast ventilation.
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES--SECTION I LIGHTING AND VENTILATION
speed is needed for achievingtherms1 comfort
at different temperatures and relative
humidities. Such wind speeds are given in
Table 7. These are apphcable to sedentary
work in offices and other places having no
noticable sources of heat gain. Where
somewhat warmer conditions are prevalent,
such as in godowns and machine shops and
work is ‘of. lighter intensity, and higher
temperatures can be tolerated without much
discomfort, minimum wind speeds for just
acceptable warm conditions ‘are given in
Table 8; For obtaining values of indoor wind
speed above 2.0 m/s, mechanical means of
ventilation may have to be adopted.
5.2.3.2 There will be a limit of heat tolerance
when air temperatures are excessive and the
degree of physical activity is high. This limit is
determined when the bodily heat balance is
upset, that is, when the bodily heat gain due to
conduction, convection and the radiation
from the surroundings exceeds the bodily heat
loss, which-is mostly by evaporation of sweat
from the surface of the body. The limits of
heat tolerance for Indian workers are based
on the study conducted by the Chief Adviser
Factories, Government of India, Ministry of
Labour and are given in his report on Thermal
Stress in Textile Industry (Report No. 17)
issued in 1956. According to this Report,
where workers in industrial buildings wearing
light clothing are expected to do work of
moderateseverity with theenergy expenditure
in the range 235 to 330 kcal/ h, the maximum
wet bulb temperature shall not exceed 29°C
and adequate .air movement subject to a
minimum air velocity of 30 m/min shall be
provided, and in relation to the dry bulb
temperature, the wet bulb temperature of air
in the work room, as far as practicable, shall
not exceed that given in Table 9.
5.3 Methods of Ventilation - General
ventilation involves providing a building with
relatively large quantities of outside air in
order to improve general environment of the
building. This may be achieved in one of the
following ways:
a) natural suply and natural exhuast’of air;
b) natural supply and mechanical exhaust of
air;
c) mechanical supply and natural exhuast of
air: and
d) mechanical supplyand mechanical
exhaust of air.
5.3.1 CO NT ROL OF H EAT -Although it is
recognized that general ventilation IS one of
the most effective methods of improving
thermal environmental conditions in
factories, in many situations, the application
w4.31 ’
-o’Sfventilation should be preceded by and
considered along with some of the following
other methods of coritrol. This would
facilitate better design of buildings for general
ventilation, either natural or mechanical or
both, and also reduce their cost.
5.3.1.1 I S O L A T I O N - SOmetimeS it iS
possible to locate heat producing equipment,
such as furnaces in ,such a. position as would
expose only a small number of workers to hot
environment. As far as practicable, such
sources of heat in factories should be isolated.
In situations where ralatively few people are
exposed to severe heat stress and theil
activities are confined to limited areas as in the
case of rolling mill operators and crane
operators, it may be possible to enclose the
work areas and supply conditioned air to such
enclosures.
5.3.1.2 I N S U L A T I O N - A considerable
portion of heat in many factories is due to the
solar radiation fallihg on the roof surfaces,
which, in turn, radiate heat inside the
building. In such situations, insulation of the
roof or providing a false ceiling or double
roofing would be very effective in controlling
heat. Some reduction can also be achieved by
painting the roof in heat reflective shadek.
Hot surfaces of equipment, such as pipes,
vessels, ctc, in the building should also be
insulated to reduce their surface temperature.
5.3.1.3 SUBSTITUTION - Sometimes, it is
possible to substitute a hot process by a
method that involves application pf localized
or more efficiently contrplled method of
heating. Examples include induction
hardening instead of conventional heat
treatment, cold rivetting or spot welding
instead of hot rivetting, etc.
5.3. I .4 RADIANT SHIELD ING - Hot surfaces.
such as layers of molten metal emanate
radiant heat, which can best be controlled by

TABLE 7 DESIRABLE WIND SPEEDS (m/s) FOR THERMAL COMFORT CONDITIONS

(C’lauw 5.23.1)

D RY B ULB RELATIVE H UMIDITY (PERCENTAGE )

T EMPERATURE , OC &
‘30 40 50 60 10 80 901
28 l l * * l l l

29 l l l * L 0.06 0.19
30 l * * 0.06 0.24 0.53 0.85
31 l 0.06 0.24 0.53 1.04 1.47 2.10
32 0.20 0.46 0.94 I.59 2.26 3.04. t
33 0.11 1.36 2.12 3.00 t t t
34 I.85 2.72 t t t t t
35 3.20 t t t t t t.
l None.
tHigher then those acceptable in practice.

TABLE 8 MINIMUM WIND SPEEDS (m,‘s) FOR JUST ACCEPTABLE WARM CONDITIONS
(C/owe 5.23. I)

D RY BULR RELATIVE HWIDW (PERCENTAGE)

T EMPERATURE, “C L
4 30 40 50 60 70 80 90’

28 * l l * l l *

29 1 l + l l l l

30 l l t l l * l

31 l . l l l 0.06 0.23
32 l * l 0.09 0.29 0.a 0.94
33 * 0.04 0.24 0.60 1.04 I.85 2.10
34 0.15 0.46 0.94 I.60 2.26 3.05 t
35 0.68 1.36 2. IO 3.05 t f t
36 1.72 2.70 t t t t t
lNone.
t Higher then those qcceptubie in predice.

VWI-32 NATIONAL BUILDING WOE OF INDIA


TABLE 9 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WET BULB
TEMPERATURES FOR GIVEN DRY BULB
TEMPERATURES
(C&use 5.2J.2)
lhv BUI.R TEMPERATIIRE MAXIM~J~~ WET-B~II.H
TF:MPERA.IIIR~
“C “C
30 29.0
35 28.5
4 0 28.0
45 27.5
50 27.0
Nor~ I - These are limits bqyond which the industry
should not allow the thermal conditions to go for more
than I h continuously. Thelimits are based on a series of
studies conducted on Indian subjects in psychrometric
chamber and on other data on heat casualtics in earlier
studies conducted in Kolar Gold Fields and elsewhere.
NOTE 2 - Figures given in this table are not intended to
convey that human efficiency at 50°C will remain the
same as at 30°C. provided appropriate wet bulb
temperatures are maintained. Efficiency decreases with
rise in the dry bulb temperature for a given wet hulb
temperatyre attained and efforts’should be made to bring
down the dry bulb temperature as wtll. as much as
possible. Long exposures to temperature of SO”C dry
bulb;2PC wet bulb may prove dangerous.
Nan: 3 - Refrigeration orsome other method of
cooling
is recommended in all cases where conditions would be
worse than those shown in this table.
placing a shield having a highly reflecting
surface between the source of heat and the
worker, so that a major portion of the heat
falling on the shield is reflected back to the
source. Surfaces such as of tin and aluminium
have been used as materials for shields. The
efficiency of the shield does not depend onits
thickness, but on the reflectivity and
emissivity of its su.rface. Care should be taken
to see that the shield is not heated up by
condtiction and for this purpose adequate
provision should be made for the free flow
upwards of the heated air between the hot
surface and the shield by leaving the necessary
air space and providing opening at the top and
the bottom of the sides.
5.32 VO L U M E O F A I R R E Q U I R E D - T h e
volume of air required shall be calculated by
using both the sensible heat‘or latent heat gain
as the basis. The larger.of the two figures
obtained should be used in actual practice.
s.J.2.! VOLUME OF AIR REQUIRED FOR
R E M O V I N G S E N S I B L E H E A T - When the
amount of sedsibk heat given off by different
sources, namely, the sun, the manufacturing
processes, machinery, occupants and other
?Alf WI BWl.Dl~C SERtiCcs-SECllDN I l.lCHTlNC A N D
sources, is known and a suitable value for the
allowable temperature rise is assumed, the
volume of outside air to be prqvided for
removing the sensible heat may be calculated
from:
where
QI= Quantity of air in m3/ h,
K, = sensible heat gained inW, and
t = allowable temperature rise
in “C
3.3.2.2 ‘temperature rise refers mainly to the
difference between the air temperatures at the
outlet (roof exit) and at the inlet openings for
outside air. As very little data exist on
allowable temperature, rise values for
supply of outside air in summer months, the
values given in Table 10 related to industrial
buildings may be used ior general guidance.
T A B L E I O A L L O W A B L E 7EMPERATlJRE RISE
VAl.IJES
HEIGHT ok OUTLET OPI-NIUC; ‘l’CMI’FRA1 UHF R~sr-
m “c
6 3 to 4.5
9 4.5 to 6.5
12 6.5 IO II
NOTE I --The conditions are limlterl to light or medium
heavy manufacturing processes, freedom from radiant
heat and inlet openIn@ not more rhan 3 to 4.5 m above
floor level.
NOTE 2 ---. At the working Tone between floor level and
I.5 m above floor level, the recommended maximum
allowable temperature rise for air is 2 to 3”Cabove theaIr
temperature at the inlet openings.
5.3.2.3 VO;.UME OF AIR REQUIRED FOR
R E M O VING LA~FNT HEAT -- If the latent. heat
gained from the manufacturing processes and
occupants is also known and a suitable value
for the allowable rise in the’vapour pressure is
assumed:
4 127.26X KI
Q2 = -h‘
where
QI = quantity of air in m’/ h
Kt = latent heat gained tn W, and
VENll~AtloN Vlll-I-33
 h = allowable vapour pressure
difference in mm of mercury.
N~IE ---. In majority of the cases. the sensihle heat gain
will far exceed the latent heat eain. so that the amount of
outside air to be drawn by ventila;ing equipment can be
calculated in most cases on the basis of theequation given
In 5.3.2.1.
5.3.2.4 Ventilation is also expressed as m’/ h
per m’of floor area. This relationaship fails to
evaluate the actual heat.reiief provided by a
ventilation system, but it does give a
relationship which is independent-of building
height. This is a more rational approach,
because, with the same internal load, the same
amount of ventilation air, properly applied to
the work zone with adequate velocity, will
provide the desired heat relief quite
independently of the ceiling height of the
space, with few exceptions. Ventilation rates
of 30 to 60 ml/h per m2 have been found to
give good results in many plants.
5.4 Nafural V e n t i l a t i o n The rate of
ventilation by natural meanq t h r o u g h
windows or other openings depends on:
4 direction and velocity of wind outside and
sizes and disposition of openings (wind
action), and
b) convection effects arising from
tempgrature of vapur pressure difference
(or both) between inside and outside the
room and the difference of height between
the outlet and inlet openings (stack effect).
5.4.1 VE N T I L A T I O N oh NON-I~IDUSI~RIAI.
B UILDINGS - Ventilation in non-industrial
buildings due to stack effect. unless there is a
significant internal load, could be neglected,
except in cold regions, and wmd a&on may
be assumed to be predominant.
5.4.1.1 In hot arid regions, the main problem
in summer is to provide during day protection
from sun’s heat so as to keep the Indoor
temperature lqwer than those outside under
the sun and for this purpose windows and
other openings are generally kept closed and
only minimum ventilation is provided for the
control of odours or for removal of products
of combustion.
5.4.1.2 In hot humid and warm humid
regions, the problem in the design of non-
industrial buildings is to provide free passage
of air to keep the indoor temperature’sas near
to those outside in the shade as possible, and
for this purpose the buildings are oriented to
face the direction of prevailing winds and
windows and other openings are kept open on
both windward and leeward sides.
5.4.1.3 Adequate number of circulating fans
should be installed to serve all interior
“nI-I-34
working areas during summer months in the
hot arid and hot/ warm humid regions to
provide necessary air movement at times
when ventilation due to wind action alone
does not afford sufficient relief.
5.4.1.4 In winter months in cold regions,.the
windows and other openings are generally
kept shut, particularly during night; and
ventilation necessary for the control of odours
and for the removal of products of
combustion can be achieved either by stack
action or by some infilteration of outside air
due to wind action.
5 . 4 . 2 VENTILATI~.)~ OF INDUSTRIAI.
B U I L D I N G S - In providirig n a t u r a l
ventilation of all indus:G: buildings having
significant internal heat loads due to
manufacturing process, proper consideration
should be given to the size.and distribution of
windows and other inlet openings in relation
to outlet openings so as to give, with due
regard to orientation, prevailing winds, size
and configuration of the building and
manufacturing processes carried on,
maximum possible control of thermal
environment.
5.4.2.1 in the case of industrial buildings
wider than 30 m, the ventilaton through
windows may be augmented by roof
ventilation.
5.4.3 G ENERAL R ULES FOR YAT~RAI
VENll1 Al ION
5.4.3.1 BY WIND ACT-ION
a) Inlet openings in the building should
be. well distributed and should be
located on the windward side at a low
level and outlet openings should be
located on the leeward side near the
top, so that incoming air stream is
passed over the occupants. inlet and
outlet openings at high levels may only
clear the top air without producing air
movement at the level of occupancy.
When outlets Serve also as inlets, they
shall be’ located at the same level.
Maximum air movement at a
particular plane is achieved by keeping
the sill height of the opening at 85
percent of the height of the plane. The
following levels of occupancy are
recommended:
I) For sitting on chair = 0.75 m
2) For sitting on bed = 0.60 m,
3) For sitting on floor -- 0.40 m.
b) Inlet opening should not, as far as
possible, be obstructed by adjoining
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF IWMA
 buildings, trees, signboards or other
obstructions or by partitions inside the
path of air flow.
c) Greatest flow per unit asea of openings
is obtained by using iniet and outlet
openings of nearly equal areas.
For a total area of openings (inlet and
.outlet) of 20 to 30 percent of floor area,
the average indoor wind velocity ib
around 30 percent of outdoor velocity.
Further increase in window size
increases the available velocity but not
in the same proportion. In fact, even
under most favourable conditions the
maximum average, indoor wind
‘velocity does not exceed 40 percent of
the outdoor velocity.
d) Where the stream of wind is quite
constant and dependable, the openin s
may be readily arranged to take fuf 1
advantage of the wind. Where the wind
direction is quite variable, the
openings shall be so arranged that as
far as possible there is approximately
equal areas on all sides and the
openings shall be located.at the same
levels. Thus; no matter what’the wind
direction is, there are always some
openings directly exposed to wind
pressure and others to air suction and
effective lnovement through building
is assured.
&l-t - For data on outdoor wind speeds at a place,
rrierence may be made to Climatological and Solar Data
for Design of Bulldings for Comfort in India’, published
by the Central Building Research Instnute, Roorkee.
3.4.3.2 BY S-l A C K E F F E C T - N a t u r a l ventiia-
tion by stack effect occurs when air inside a
building is at a different temperature than air
outside. Thus in heated buildings or in build-
ings wherein hot processes are carried on and
in ordiria’ry buildings durmg summer nights
and durmg premonsoon periods, the inside
temperature is higher than that of outside,
cool outside air will tend to enter through
openings at low level and warm Gr will tend to
leave through openir,gs at high level. It would.
therefore. be advaruagcous to provide vcnrila-
tors as close to ceilings as possibie. Ventilators
can also be provided in roofs as, fol example.
cowl. ventpipe. covered roofand ridge vent.
5.5.1GkNERAL. - Where adequate air
changes speclf’ied in 5.2.2.1 or for providiug
thermal envil-oruncnt within the limits
specified in Table 9 whichever is higher,
cannot be obtained by natural ventdation,
mechanical ventilation either by exhaust ot air
P A R T ’ VIII BtJlLDlNC SERVICti-SECTIUN t LICHTINC
or by positive ventilation or a combination of
the two shall be provided; and in case of
positive ventilation where necessary, air
befsie being brought into the area of
occupancy may be cooled by evaporative
cooling or by air-conditioning (see Part VIII
Building services, Secton 3 Air-conditioning
and heating).
521.1 Fans and other equipment for
.mechanical ventiIation may be located in
eonvenient positions having regard to the
intake of fresh air, accessibility for
maintenance and noise control.
5.5.2 EXHAUST OF AIR - Exhaust fans are
provided in walls on one side of the building
or in the attic and roof to draw large volumes
of air through the building. These fans are
usually of propeller type,since they operate
against little or no resistance. It is important
that windows and other openings.near the
fans are kept closed, as otherwise the fans
would draw outside air from these openings
and .cause what is termed as ‘shortcircuiting!
Adequate inlet openings shall be provided on
opposite side of the building so as to limit inlet
velocities.
5.5.2.1 When fans are centrally located on an
attic or other unused space and arranged to
draw proportionately from several areas of
occupation or from exhaust appliances with
duct work, these are predominantly
centrifugal type so as to overcome the
resistance from duct work.
5.5.3 POSITIVE V ENTILATION - Positive
ventilation is provided by centrally located
supply fans which are usually of the
centrifugal type or sometimes axial flow
types, since this application requires duct
work with a wide range of satisfactory and
quiet operation against high pressures.
Considerable advantage ‘may be achieved by
incorporating the ducts and risers with air
discharge outlets into the building structure
and by having the interior surfaces carefully
finished to render them smooth and-airtight
and treated to preveut the possibility of’ dust
being scoured from the walls by the passing
air.
5.5.3.1 l!nit ventilators may be provided for
individual rooms and may be placed against
outside wall near the central line of the room.
5.5J.2 Both central system and .unit
ventilators could be equipped to provide,
besides the function of ventilating, cooling by
evaporative cooling or by cooling coils.
‘c+p~cal installations are equipped with a
system of controls that permits ventilating
arrd’cooling effect to be varied, while the fans
are crperating continuously, in accordance
with the room requlements.
AND VENTILATIQN VIII-I-u”
5.5.4 COMBINED S YSTEMS - The combined
systems with positive ventilation and with
exhaust of air have the advantage of providing
better control conditions and better
distribution of air over the entire area of
occupancy, particularly in wider buildings. By
sqpplying sufficient volumes of air i n
proportion to heat load generated in the
respective areas at suitable velocities at the
required areas through duct work and by
extracting the air in the return ducts i n
proportion to the supply air quantities and
recirculating the air or a part of it after
property mixing it with cool fresh air,
completely satisfactory ventilation is
obtained. In a combined system, it is
preferable to provide slight excess of exhaust
if there are adjoining occupied spaces and a
slight excess of supply if there are no such
spaces. IJnit exhausters can also be used to
match unit ventilators’ exteriors and located
along the outside wail.
55.5 EVAPORATIVE COOLING - In regions
where high day-time temperatures prevail
with reasonably low humidities, evaporative
cooling may be employed effectively to lower
the temperature of the air to near the wet bulb
temperature and produce an air supply cool
enough to take care of the indoor sensible heat
loads without exceeding the upper safe limits
given in Table9 or the temperature risevalues
at area of occupancy given in Table 10. By
positive ventilation, this air may be supplied
to produce cooler environments with lower air
volume than would be required under 5.3.2 as
greater temperature rise than given under
Table10 may be tolerated. Although the
relative humidity of supply air will be
increased, due to the large sensible heat loads,
the resultant relative humidity of the air will
be sufficiently lowered after mixing with the
inside air to produce body cooling.
TABLE II RANGE OF RECOMMENDED CAPTUREvELCKTIIES
(C1ou.r 5.5.1.1)
SI No C ONDITIONO F DISPEHSIOH OF
CONlAMhAHT
(1) (2)
9 Released at with practically no velocity
into quiet air
ii) Released at low v&city into moderately
rtill air
iii) Active generation into zone of rapid air
motion
iv) Released at high initial velocity into zone-
of very rapid air motion
V,*l.,.36
5.5.5.1 Evaporative coohng with positive
ventilation using a central system consisting
ef a water spray chamber and a fan to supply
outside air into the area of occupancy through
a distribution duct is preferable to spray head
system which will only humidify the air within
space. Where a spray head system only
humidifies the air, the cooling capacity of the
air will be improved very little; and none of the
air which absorbs the heat given off by men
and machinery and other sources is removed
from the building under these conditions.
5.5.6 AIR -C O N D I T I O N I NG -Where the
desired temperatures and humidities cannot
be obtained by mere ventilation, air-
conditioning may be resorted to (see Part VIII
Building services, Section 3 Air-conditioning
and heating).
5 . 5 . 7 VENT-IL.ATION FOR C O N T A M I N A N T- S
C O N T R O L -- When contaminsnts are given
off during the manufacturing process.
efficient local exhaust ventilation arid 1 or
dilution ventilation to reduce their
concentration below the thrcs??old value
(TLV) shall be provided.
5.5.7. I Recommended capture velocities for
some of the manufacturing processes which
are likely to give rise to the contaminants
depending upon their condition of dispersion,
are given in Table I1 as a guide.
5.5.7.2 MAKE-LIP AIR ~- Sufficient make-up
air shall be brought into the work room by
natural filtration or by positive ventilation at
suitable points in relation to the extiuast
points to replace the air exhausted by local
exhaust ventilation or by dilution ventilation,
and the air may be efficiently filtered or
treated. when necesssary.
EXAMPLE\
(3) (4)
ms
Evaporalipn from tanks degreasing, 0.25-0.5
CtC
Spray booths; intermittent container 0.5-I .o
filling low speed conveyor trans-
fers; welding plating pickling
Spray painting in shallow booths; 1.0-2.5
barrel filing; conveyor loading.
crushers
Giinding ahrasive blasting, tumbling 2.5-10
-_ __-
NATIIX’~~ BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
5.5.7.3 Detailed design of local exhaust
ventilation and dilution ventilation shall
bedone in accordance with good practice
[VIII-l(6)].
5.6 Determining Rate of Ventiiatioon
5.6.1 ~~ATURALVENTILATION - This is
diffk@t to measure as it varies from-time to
time. The amount of outside air through
windows and other openings depends on the
direction and velocity of wind outside (wind
action) and/or convection effects arising from
-temperature or vapour pressure differences
(or both) between inside and outside of the
building (stack effect).
5.6. I. I WIND’ ACTlON - For determining the
rate of ventilation based on wind a.ction the
wind may -be assumed to come ,from any
direction. within 45” of the direction of
prevailing wind. Ventilation due to external
wind is. given by the following formula:
Q= K A V
where
Q = the rate of air flow in m’/.h;
K = coefficient) of effectiveness, which
may be taken as 0.5 for wind
perpendicular to openings and 0.3
for wind at an angle less than 45” to
the openings;
A = free area of inlet openings in m’;
and
v = wind speed in m/h.
N OTE 1 --The value of the coefficient of effectiveness K
depends on the directIon of the wind relative to t h e
opening and on the ratio between the areas of two
openings. Figure 3 gives the increase in values of K by the
percentage of unequal areas expressr.d as ratios of the two
openings.
N O T E 2 -For wind data at a place, the local
Meteorological Department may be consulted.
5.6.1.2 STACK EFFECT .- Ventilation due to
convection effects arising from temperature
difference between inside and outside is given
by:
Q = 7.0 Ad h (tr-to)
where
Q = the rate of air flow in m’/ h;
A = free area of inlet openings in m*;
h = vertical distance between inlets and
outlets in m;
tr = average temperature of indoor air at
height h, in “C; and
f0 = temperature of outdoor air in “C.
P A R T VW IUILDING SERVI(‘W=-SECTION I I.IGHtlNC
Non -The equation is bawd on 0.65 cffectivutur of
openings. This should be reduced toO.SOifconditionsarc
not favourable.
5.6.Z.3 When areas of inlet and outlet
opening are.unqual, ‘A’ given in equationi
under 5.6.1.1 and 5.6.1.2 wiil be the smaller
area and the volume of air will be increased
according to the percentage given in Fig. 3.
RATIO OF OUTl.ET TO INLET OR VICE-VERSA
(Reprmted by permission from Ashrae Guide and Data
Book 1963)
Fig. 3 &crease in Fiow Caused by Excess of
one Opening over Another
5.6.1.4 When both forces (wind and thermal)
act together in the same direction, even
without interference, the resulting air flow is
not equal to the t‘wo flows estimated
separately. Flow through any opening is
probortional to the square root of the sum of
the two heads acting on that opening.
Wind velocity and direction, outdoor
temperature, and indoor distribution can not
be predicted with certainty, and refinement in
calculation is not justified. A simple method is
to calculate the sum of the flows produced by
each force separately. Then using the ratio of
the flow produced by thermal forces to the
aforementioned sum, the actual flow due to
the combined forces can be approximated
from Fig. 4. When the two flows are equal, the
actual flow is about 30 percent greater than
the flow caused by either force acting
independently (see Fig. 4)
Judgemerit is necessary for proper location of
openings in a building specially in the roof,
where heat, smoke and fumes are to be
removed. Usually windward monitor
openings stiould be closed, but if wind is so
slight that temperature head can overcome it,
all openings may be opened.
5.6.1.5 For method for determining the rate
of ventilation based on probable indooi wind
speed with typical illustrative example for
residential building, reference may be made to
accepted standards [see A-4 ofVIII-l(7)]. ,
37
AtiD vENTIt,ATION vm.1.” ’

U 2U 40 ho 80 100
F-LOW WI IO IEMI’FWAILIHE
D,FFFKFNC‘L A4 I’FK(‘Elril Ot- TO1 At
(Reprinted by permission from Ashrae Guide and Data
Book 1963
I Fig. 4 Determination .qf Flow Caused b.v
Combined Forces of’ Wind and
Temperature D#vetw
5.6.2 M E C H A N I C A L VENTILATION
5.6.2.1 The volume of outside air by positive
ventilation shall be measured using proper
instruments, such as properly calibrated
anemometer, velocity meter and pitot tube.
To measure the average velocity of air flow, it
is necessary to make a traverse of the
instrument over the cross-sectional area of the
inlet openings or ducts and obtain the average
velocity from these results. The volume of air
is given by:
Q= Ati
“nt-t-38
where
Q = volume of air in m’/h,
A = free area of inlet openings OF ducts
in m’, a n d
&__ _
P’= average velocity of air in m/h.
5.6.2.2 When ventilation is achieved only by
exhuast of air, the volume of exhaust air shall
be measured in thesame manner as in the case
of positive ventilation by measurement of air
velocity and area ofexhuast ducts or openings
and multiplying one with the other.
~7~6.3 CO M B I N E D EFFECT OF D I F F E R E N T
M ETHODS OF V ENTILATION - When
combination of two or more methods of
general ventilation is used, the total rate of
shall be reckoned as the highest of
ventilation
the following three. and this rule shall be
followed until an exact formula is established’
by research:
a) !.25 t i m e s t h e r a t e o f n a t u r a l
ventilation (see 5.6.1)
b) Rate of positive ventilation (see 5.6.1.0,
and
4 Rate of exhast of air (see 5.6.2.2)
5 . 6 . 4 A IR M O V E M E N T -The rate ot air
movement of turbulent type at the working
zone shall be measured either with a Kata
thermometer {dry silvered type) or heated
t h e r m o m e t e r o r p r o p e r l y ,calibrated
thermocoup.le a n e m o m e t e r . W h e r e a s
anemometer gives the air velocity directly, the
Kata thermometer and heated thermometer
eive cno\ing p?:ver of air and the rate :.r 3;~
Iro\‘rmlXnt 1s found b; rcfcrznce to a suitable
nomogram using the ambient temperature.
NATIONAL lUlLDiNG CODE OF INDIA
 APPENDIX A
(C/awes 4.2.5, 4.2.5.2. 4.2.S.3 and 4.2.5.4)
SKY COMPONENT TABLES

A-/. DESCRIPTION OF TABLES opening on a line perpendicular to the plane of

A-I.1 The three sky component tables are as
given below:
Table 1’2 Percentage sky components
on the horizontal plane due to
the opening through one of its lower corners,
a n d I and h are the width and height
respectively of the rectangular opening (see
Fig. 5).
+--l------I
I I

El
C
a vertical rectangular opening
for the clear design sky. -I-
h
0

Table 13 Percentage sky components

the vertical plane
LA /\
B

ze:pendicular to a vertical
rectangular opening for the
clear design sky.

Table 14 Percentage sky components

on the vertical plane parallel A-l.4 Sky component for different h/J and
to a vertical rectangular /!.d values are tabulated, that is, for windows
opening for the clear design of different size and for different distances of
sky. the point P from the window.

A-l.2 All the tables are for an unglazed
opening illuminated by the clear design sky.
A-l.3 The values tabulated are the
components at a point P distant from the
A-13 By suitable combination of the values
obtained ft-om the three tables, for a given
point for a given window, the sky component
in any plane passing through the point may be
obtained.

?ART Vlll l LWDINC SERVICES-SECTION I LIGHTING AND VENTliATlON vlll-*-39 *

 TABLE I 2 PCK(‘ENlA(rt SK’I COMPO\l.WS OX 1 HE HOKIZONTAL P L A N E Dl’E -10 A VERTICLE RECTANGULAR OPENING FOR
1 HE CLEAR DESIGN. SKY
(c‘lause A-l..0

IId 0. I 02 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 I.0 I.1 I.2 1.3

h/d
\
0. I 0.036 0.07 I 0.104 0 i33 0.158 0.179 0.198 0.213 0.225 0.235 0.243 0.250 0.256
0.2 0.141 0.277 0.403 0.516 0.614 0.699 0 770 0.82V 0.878 0.918 0.950 0.977 0.999
0.3 0.300 0.589 0.859 I.102 I.315 1.499 I .653 1.782 I .888 I.976 2.048 2.108 2.157
0.4 0.460 0.905 1.322 1.702 2.04 I 2.337 2.590 2.804 2.984 3.134 3.258 3.361 3.446
0.5 0.604 I.189 I.741 2.247 2.700 3.099 3.444 3.740 3.992 4.204 3.383 4.553 4.659
0.6 0.732 1.443 2. I14 2.732 3.289 3.781 4.211 4.582 4.900 5.171 5.401 5.5% 5.761
0.7 0.844 1.665 2.44 I 3. I59 3.808 4.385 4.89 I 5.330 5.708 6.034 6.31 I 6.548 6.751
0.8 0.942 I.858 2.727 3.532 4.262 4.914 5.488 5.989 6.423 6.798 7.119 7.395 7.632
0.9 I.026 2.025 2.974 3.855 4.657 5.375 6.01 I 6.567 7.05 I 7.470 7.832 8. I44 8.413
I.0 1.099 2.169 3.188 4. I35 5.000 5.776 6.465 7.071 7.600 8.060 8.458 8.803 9.102
I.1 I.161 2.294 3.372 4.377 5.296 6.124 6.86 I 7.510 8.079 8.576 9.008 9.383 9.709
I.2 I.215 2.401 3.531 4.586 5.553 6.425 7.204 7.893 8.498 9.027 9.489 9.892 10.243
1.3 1.262 2.493 3.668 4.767 5.775 6.687 7.503 8.226 8.863 9.422 9.912 10.339 10.713
1.4 1.302 2.573 3.787 4.924 5.968 6.915 7.764 8.517 9.183 9.769 10.283 10.733 Il.127
I.5 1.337 2.643 3.89 I 5.060 6.136 7.114 7.991 8.772 9.664 10.073 10.609 11.080 ll.49j
1.6 I .267 2.703 3.981 5.179 6.283 7.287 8.190 8.996 9.710 IO.341 10.897 I 1,386 I I.817
1.7 1.394 2.756 4.060 5.283 6.412 7.440 8.366 9.192 9.927 10.577 Il.151 Il.657 12.104
1.8 I.417 2.803 4.129 5.375 6.526 7.574 8.520 9.366 IO.119 10.786 Il.376 Il.898 12.359
1.9 I.438 2.844 4.190 5.4% 6.626 7.693 8.656 9.520 10.289 10.972 Il.577 12.1 I2 12.587
2.0 I.456 2.880 4.244 5.527 6.714 7.798 8.778 9.656 10.440 I I.137 II.755 12.303 12.789
3.0 1.559 3.087 4.553 5.937 7.223 8.403 9.478 10.448 Il.321 12.103 12.804 13.431 13.993
4.0 1.600 3.168 4.676 6.100 7.426 8.646 9.759 10.768 I I.678 12.498 13.235 13.897 14.493
5.0 I .620 3.208 4.735 6. I79 5.525 8.765 9.897 10.925 I I.854 12.693 13.448 14.128 14.742
10.0 1.648 3.263 4.818 6.289 7.662 8.930 10.089 II.144 12.100 12.965 13.747 14.454 I5.W
INF 1.657 3.282 4.846 6.327 7.710 8.986 IO. I55 I I.220 12.186 I3.Oul 13.&Sl 14.587 15.217
 Iid T.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 , I.8 1.9 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 IO.0 INF
hf
\

0.t 0.261 0.264 0.268 0.270 0.272 0.274 0.276 0.284 0.286 0.287 0.288 0.288
0.2 I.018 I .033 I .(#6 I .056 I .065 I .072 I .079 I.110 I.118 1.122 I.125 t.125
0.3 2.197 2.231 2.259 2.282 2.302 2.318 2.333 2.401 2.42 t 2.429 2.436 2.437
0.4 3.516 3.574 3.623 3.664 3.699 3.728 3.753 3.873 3.909 3.922 3.935 3.937
0.5 4.765 4.853 4.928 4.990 5.043 5.088 5.126 5.312 5.366 5.387 5.408 5.410
0.6 5.901 6.020 6.121 6.208 6.28 I 6.344 6.397 6.661 6.739 6.769 6.798 6.802
0.7 6.924 7.071 7.198 7.307 7.400 7.48 I 7.551 7.902 8.006 8.047 i.087 8.092
0.8 7.836 8.01 I 8.162 8.292 8.405 8.502 8.587 9.029 9.164 9.217 9.268 9.276
0.9 8.645 8.846 9.019 9.170 9‘301 9.415 9.515 10.045 to.214 to.280 to.345 10.355
I.0 9.361 9.5li5 9.780 9.950 IO.098 10.228 10.343 10.957 I I. 162 tt.243 t t 323 t I.335
1.1 9.992 10.239 to.454 10.642 IO.806 IO.951 I I.078 t 1.776 12.017 i2. t I4 12.209 12.224
1.2 10.549 IO.816 11.050 11.254 Il.434 Il.593 Il.732 12.509 12.786 12.900 13.013 13.030
1.3 Il.040 It.326 Il.577 Il.797 II.992 12. I63 12.314 13.167 13.478 13.609 13.742 13.762
1.4 I t .473 Il.777 12.044 12.279 12.487 12.670 t 2.8j3 t3.75lj 14. to2 14.251 14.404 14.427
1.5 t t .857 12.176 12.458 12.707 12.927 13.122 t 3.295 14.289 14.666 14.832 15.006 15.033
1.6 12.1% 12.531 12.826 13.088 13.319 13.525 13.708 14.768 15.176 15.359 l5.US 15.585
1.7 t 2.498 12.846 13. I54 13.427 13.669 13.885 14.078 l5.W t 5.638 t 5.838 16.056 16.091
I.8 12.766 13.127 13.446 13.730 13.983 14.208 14.409 15.590 16.058 16.274 16.516 16.554
I.9 13.006 13.378 13.708 14.002 14.264 14.498 14.707 15.944 16.441 16.673 16.937 16.980
2.0 13.220 t 3.603 13.943 14.246 14.516 14.758 14.975 16.265 16.790 t 7.037 17.325 t 7.372
3.0 14.4% 14.947 15.353 15.718 16.048 16.346 16.676 18.3Ot 19.051 19.432 19.943 m.046
4.0 15.030 15.514 15.951 16.347 16.706 17.033 17.330 19.241 20.142 rn.623 21.322 21.495
i 5.0 15.296 t 5.798 16.252 16.664 17.040 17.382 17.695 19.740 20.740 21.293 22.148 22.393
to.0 15.674 16.201 l6.& 17.118 17.518 17.885 18.222 20.491 21.681 22.390 23.676 24.238
tNF 15.806 16.342 16.831 17.278 I7.6mU 18.064 18.410 m.770 22.046 22.838 24.463 26. t I I
TABLE I3 PERCENTAGE SKY COMPONENTS ON THE VERTICAL PLANE PERPENDICULAR TO A VERTICAL RECTANGULAR OPENING FOR THE
CLEAR DESIGN SKY
(Clause .4-/J)

0. I 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 I.1 1.2

0.1 0.036 0.141 0.303 0.506 0.734 0.971 I.207 I.432 I.643 2.836 I.011 2.166
0.2 O.Oil 0.277 0.594 0.993 I .442 1.910 2 314 2.820 3.236 3.618 3.964 4.276
0.3 0.103 0.401 0.863 I .445 2.100 2.793 3.475 4 180 4.743 5.3% 5.818 6.279
0.4 0.126 0.491 I .059 1.779 2.597 3.460 4.326 5.166 5.958 6.691 7.359 7.467
0.5 0.142 0.554. I.197 2.015 2.947 3.937 4.938 5.514 6.842 7.707 8.503 9.22%
0.6 0.154 0.600 I.298 2.187 3.204 4.288 5.389 6468 7.498 8.464 9.358 IO.177
0.7 0.162 0.634 1.372 2.316 3.397 4.552 5.729 6.887 7.997 9.W2 10.013 10.907
0.8 0.169 0.660 I.429 2.413 3.543 4.754 5.990 7.209 8.382 9.490 10.523 I I .476
0.9 0.174 0.680 I .472 2.487 3.655 4.909 6.192 7.46d 8.683 9.841 10.924 I I .926
I.0 0.178 0.695 1.505 2.545 3.743 5.030 6.350 7.657 6.921 10.120 II.243 12.264
1.1 obl8l 0.707 1.532 2.591 3.812 5.126 6.475 7.814 9.110 10.342 Il.498 12.573
1.2 0. I83 0.716 1.552 2.626 3.866 5.202 6.575 7.939 9.26I IO.521 lJ.705 12.807
1.3 O.lSj 0.723 1.568 2.655 3.910 5.263 6.655 8.040 9.384 10.666 11.873 12.998
i.4 0.186 0.729 1.582 2.678 3.945 5.312 6.720 8.122 9.484 10.785 12.01 I 13.155
I.J 0.188 0.734 1.592 2.697 3.973 5.352 6.773 8.189 9.566 10.883 12.124 13.285
1.6 0.189 0.738 I.601 2.712 3.996 3.385 6.816 8.244 9.634 IO.963 12.219 l3.3$
I.7 til89 0.741 1.608 2.724 4.016 5.412 6.852 8.290 9.690 II.031 12.298 13.484
1.8 0. I90 0.744 I.614 2.735 4.032 5.434 6.882 8.328 9.737 II.087 I2364 13.5661
I.9 0.191 0.746 I.619 2.743 4.045 5.453 6908 8.360 9.777 Ii.135 12.420 13.625
2.0 0.191 0.748 1.623 2.751 4.056 5.469 6.929 8.387 9.81 I II.175 12.468 13.690
3.0 0.193 O.-l% 1.642 2.785 4.109 5.544 7.030 8.517 9.972 II.371 12.699 13.950
4.0 0.194 0.759 1.648 2.794 4.124 5.566 7.058 8.54 10.018 Il.427 12.767 14029
5.0 0. I94 0.760 I.650 2.798 4.129 5.574 7.069 8.568 IO.036 I I;449 12.793 14.060
IO.0 0.194 0.761 I .652 2.801 4.135 5.58 I 7.080 8.582 10.053 I I.470 12.818 l4.@M
MP 0.194 0.161 1.652 2.802 4.136 5.582 7.061 a.584 10.0% Il.473 l2.822 14.ms
 0.1 2308 2433 2544 2.642 2.730 2.808 2878 2.940 3.309 3.461 3.5% 3.641 3.6'1)
0.2 IS54 4.802 5.022 5.219 5.393 5.549 5.688 5.812 6.547 6.85b 7.000 7.211 j.284
0.3 &690 7.0% 7.385 7.677 7.936 8.14 8.375 8.560 9.657 10.110 10.335 10.651 IO.160
0.4 8.507 8.900 9.420 9.801 IO. 146 IO.451 IO.724 10.968 12.421 13.024 13.323 13.743 13.889
0.5 9.883 IO.472 10.999 II.476 II.897 12.273 12.610 12.912 14.712 15.462 15.835 16.360 16.542
0.6 10.922 11.5% 12.204 Iii52 13.244 13.686 l4.on4 14.441 16.583 17.478 17.924 III.552 18.771
0.7 II.723 12465 13.138 13.746 14.296 14.793 15.241 15.646 18.111 19.148 19.665 20.397 26.653
0.8 . I2350 13.147 13.873 14.531 15.129 15.670 16.161 16.606 19.361 m.538 21.127 21.961 22.253
0.9 12847 13.690 14.459 III59 li.7% 16.375 16.902 17.381 20.387 21.701 22.360 23.397 ti.625
1.0 13.245 14.126 14.931 15.666 16.337 16.948 17.504 18.012 21.237 22.6&o 23.408 24.446 24.810
I.1 13.5% 14.478 15.314 16.079 16.778 17.416 17.999 18.531 21.946 23.508 24.303 25.441 25.841
I.2 13.827 14.766 15.628 16.418 17.141 17.802 18.407 l8..%l 22.543 24.208 25.072 26.309 26.74s
I.3 14.041 15.003 15.887 16.698 17.442 li. 123 18.747 19.320 23.049 24.809 25.735 2X070 27.542
I.4 14.217 15.1% 16. IO1 16.931 17.692 18.391 19.032 19.621 23.480 25.326 26.308 27.441 28.M
1.5 14.364 I5.36I 16.280 17.125 17.902 18.616 19.272 19.875 23.850 25.772 26.808 28.336 2Jl.880
1.6 14.486 I 5.497 16.430 17.289 18.079 18.806 19.475 20.090 24.169 26.161 27.245 28.866 29.44s
I.7 14.589 15.51 I 16.556 17.427 18.229 18.968 19.648 20.274 24.444 26.501 2 7 . 6 2 9 2i.340 29.955
1.8 14.675 IS.708 16.663 17.545 18.357 IQ. I05 19.795 20.43 I 24.684 26.799 27.%9 29.765 30.&b
1.9 14.749 15.791 16.755 17.645 18.466 IQ.224 19.922 20.567 24.893 21.062 28.270 30.149 30.835
2.0 14.81 I 15.861 16.833 17.731 18.560 IT.325 20.031 20.684 25.077 27.294 28.537 30.4% 31.217
3.0 l5.lm 16.21 I 17.224 18.164 19.036 Pp44 20.5w 21.289 26.082 28.619 30.108 32.676 32.742
4.0 15.212 ‘16.316 17.343 18.298 19.185 ZQ.008 20.772 21.483 26.439 29.128 30.745 33.687 35.064
5.0 IS.248 16.357 17.390 18.351 19.243 m.073 2 0 . 8 4 4 21.562 26.592 29.359 31.049 34.232 35.872
10.0 15.283 16.398’ 17.436 l8.4oj 19.302 20.138 20.917 21.641 26.758 29.624 31.419 35.049 37.513
INF IS.288 l6.404 17.443 18.41 I 19.311 20.148 20.928 21.654 26.785 29.672 31.490 35.274 39.172
*
r TABLE I4 PERCENTAGE SKY COMPONENTS ON THE VERTICAL PLANE PARALLEL TO A VERTICLE RECTANGULAR OPENING FOR THE CLEAR
DESIGN SKY
(Clause A-1.5)

lid 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 I.0 I.1 1.2 I.3

h/d
\

0.1 0.728 1.429 2.078 2.600 3.167 3.660 3.964 4.265 4.513 4.717 4.083 5.m 5.132
0.2 1.429 2.803 4.007 5.221 6.220 7.073 7.790 8.385 8.876 9.278 9.609 9.880 IO. I03
0.3 2.068 4.061 5.913 7.580 9.040 10.28s 11.337 12.212 12.934 13.528 14.016 14.417 14.747
0.4 2.529 4.970 7.249 9.312 II.133 12.707 14.042 15.164 16.097 16.870 17.507 18.025 18.458
0.5 2.852 5.608 8.186 10.529 12.606 14.401 IS.952 17.256 18.350 19.262 20.02I 20.652 21.177
0.6 3.086 6.Orn 8.867 Il.415 13.681 IS.656 I7 353 18.793 20.008 21.027 21.879 22.592 23. I89
0.7 3.259 6.413 9.373 12.074 14.482 16.588 18.402 19.949 21.257 22.359 23.285 24.%3 24.716
0.8 3.389 6.672 9.755 12.573 IS.090 Il.296 19.201 20.830 22.212 23.380 24.365 25.195 25.895
0.9 3.489 6.869 10.046 12.955 15.556 17.840 19.817 21.511 22.952 24. I73 25.206 26.078 26.816
1.0 3.565 7.024 10.272 13.250 15.917 18.263 20.297 22.043 23.531 24.795 25.866 26.773 27.542
I.1 3.625 7.139 10.447 13.481 16.200 18.594 20.674 22.462 23.989 25.288 26.391 27.326 28.121
I.2 3.872 7.233 IO.586 13.663 16.423 18.857 20.973 22.795 24.353 25.681 26.8 IO 27.770 28.587
1.3 3.709 7.307 10.696 13.807 16.602 19.067 21.213 23.062 24.b5b 25.998 27.148 28.128 28.%3
1.4 3.739 7.366 10.784 13.924 16.745 19.236 21.406 23.278 24.884 26.255 27.424 28.420 29.271
1.5 3.763 7.414 10.856 14.018 16.861 19.373 21.563 23.454 25.077 26.465 27.649 28.6ul 29.523
I.6 3.783 7.453 10.914 14.095 16.9% 19.485 21.692 23.599 25.236 26.638 27.835 28.857 29.732
I.7 3.799 7.485 IO.962 14.158 17.034 19.578 21.798 23.718 25.368 26.781 27.989 29.022 29.1906
I.8 3.812 7.512 ll.ao2 14.21 I 17.099 19.655 21.886 23.817 25.478 26.900 28.1 I8 29.160 30.~52
1.9 3.824 7.534 I I.035 14.254 17.153 19.719 21.960 23.900 25.570 27.001 28.226 29.276 30.175
2.0 3.833 7.553 II.062 14.291 17.199 19.773 22.022 23.970 25.647 27.086 28.318 29.374 31.279
3.0 3.876 7.639 II.192 14.463 17.412 20.027 22.316 24.302 26.016 27.491 28.757 29.846 30.783
4.0 3.888 7.663 II.228 14.51’1 17.471 20.098 22.398 24.398 26.121 27.6% 28.884 29.983 30.930
5.0 3.893 7.672 I I.241 14.529 17.494 20. I25 22.430 24.432 26.161 27.650 28.932 30.035 30.986
IO.0 3.897 7.681 I I.254 Ii.546 17.515 20.150 22.459 24.466 26.199 27.693 28.978 30.085 31.041
INF 3.898 7.682 Il.256 44.548 17.518 20. I54 22.464 24.471 26.205 27.699 28.985 30.093 31.049.
 0.1 5.225 5.301 5.365 5.418 5.463 5.501 5.533 5.687 5.733 5.749 5.765 5.766
0.2 10,286 10.439 10.565 10.671 10.760 10.835 10.899 I I.207 Il.296 I I .330 Il.362 Il.365
0.3 t 5.020 15.246 15.434 15.591 15.724 15.836 15.931 16.390 16.523 16.574 16.623 lb.627
0.4 18.8 I6 19.1 t3 19.360 19.568 19.742 19.890 20.015 20.624 20.801 20.868 20.933 20.939
0.5 21.613 21.978 22.275 22.538 22.746 22.923 23.082 23.836 24.056 24.140 24.222 24.229
0.6 23.689 24. to9 24.462 24.761 25.014 25.229 25.412 26.229 26.561 26.662 26.759 26.768
0.7 25.267 25.73 t 26. t 24 26.458 26.742 26.984 27.192 28.214 28.517 28.634 28.748 28.758
0.8 26.486 26.987 27.412 27.775 28.084 28.350 28.578 29.720 30.065 30.198 , XI.327 30.339
0.9 27.441 27.972 28.424 28.810 29.141 29.426 29.672 30.927 31.303 31.451 3115% 31.610
1.0 28.196 28.572 29.226 29.633 29.982 30.283 30.544 31.889 32.302 32.467 32.627 32643
1.1 28.798 29.375 29.,869 30.293 30.658 30.973 31.246 32.670 33. I I7 33.297 33.473 33.49 t
1.2 29.283 29.818 30.388 30.826 31.204 31.532 31.816 33.309 33.796 33.981 34.173 34.193
1.3 29.676 30.286 30.8 to 31.261 31.651 31.989 32.283 33.836 34.350 34.550 34.756. 34.779
1.4 29.998 30.621 31.157 31.618 32.018 32.365 32.667 34.374 34.813 35.035 35.247 3s.n t
1.5 30.262 30.897 31.443 31.914 32.322 32.677 32.986 34.641 35.202 35.436 35.663 35.689
1.6 30.482 31.226 31.680 32.160 32.575 32.937 33.253 34.950 35:532 35.776 36.017 36M6
1.7 30.665 31.317 31.879 32.366 32.888 33. t56 33.477 35.21 I 35.812 36.067 36.321 36.352
1.8 30.8 I8 31.477 32.046 32.539 32.967 33:340 33.666 35.435 36.052 36.316 36.5Li4 36.617
1.9 30.94Ft 31.613 32. t 88 32.686 33. I I9 33.497 33.828 35.626 35.259 36.532 36.812 36.847
2.0 31.058 31.728 32.308 32.8 t I 33.249 33.631 33.965 35.791 36.438 36.7 19 37.01 I 37.048
3.0 31.592 32.29 t 32.898 33.427 33.889 34.294 34.551 36.640 37.380 37.715 38.107 38.157
4.0 31.748 32.457 33.074 33.61 I 34.082 34.496 .34.8bO 36.915 37.699 38.063 38.510 38.579
5.0 31.808 32.521 33.142 33.683 34.157 34.574 34.943 37.028 37.834 38.214 38.696 38.78 i
to.0 31.867 32.584 33.208 33.753 34.231 34.652 35.024 37.144 37.978 38.382 38.927 39.057
INF 31.876 32.593 33.218 33.764 34.243 34.w 35.037 37.162 38.003 38.4 t I 38.978 39. t 72
 LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are acceptable as ‘goud practice’ and
accepted standardr’ in the fulfirment of the requirements of the Co&. The latest version of a
standardshall be adopted UI the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may be used
by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the rejerred clauses in the
code.
In the following list the number appearing in thefirst column within parentheses indicates the
number {f the refirence in this part/section

(I) IS : 7662 (Part I)-1974 Kecommenda-
tions for orientation of buildings: Part I
Non-industrial buildings
(2) IS:3646 (Part I)-1966 Code of paractice
for interior illumination: Part I Principles
of good lighting and aspects of design
(3) IS : 2440-1975 Guide for daylighting of
butldings (second revision)
5) IS: 1944 (Parts I and ll)-1970 Code of
practice for lighting of public
thoroughfares virst revision)
lS:2672-1966 Code of practice for
library lighting
lS:4347-1967 Code of practice for
hospital lighting
IS:6665-I972 Code of practice lor
industrial lighting

(4) IS : 6060-1971 Code of practice for
daylighting of factory buildings
IS : 7942-1976 Code of practice for
daylighing of educational buildings
(6) lS:3103-1975 Code of practice for
industrial ventilation (first revi.k.m)
(7) lS:3362-1977 Code of practice for
natural ventilation 01 residential
buildings first revision)

NRI‘IDNAL IllilLDiNCi CIJDE OF IYDIA

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES
SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS

0. FOREWORD ... 2

1. SCOPE .. 3

2. TERMINOLOGY ... 3

3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ... 6

4. PLANNING OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATlONS ... 7

5. DISTRIBUTlON OF SUPPLY AND CARLEING IO

6. WIRING ... 16

7. FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES ... 27

8. EARTHING 30

9. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF INSTAI,LATIONS ... 31

10. TELECOMMUNICATION AND OTHER MISCEL.LANEC)IJS

SERVICES .., 35

II. LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF RIJILDINGS ... 36

APPENDIXA ARCH1TECTURA.L SYMROLS FOR EL,ECTRlCAL.

INSTALLATIONS ... 42

APPENDIXB EXTRACTS FROM INDIAN ELECTRICITY

RULES, 1956 ... 45
APPENDIXC FORM FOR COMPLETION CERTIFICATE . . . 50

1 ,
?ART VIII BIWDINT. S E R V I C E S - S E C T I O N 2 EI.FCTRICAI IYST4i.i 4110Ns \‘!ll-2-
-PART VIII BLIILDING S E R V I C E S
SECTlON 2 ELECTRICAL INSTAL,1~ATIONS

0. FOREWORD

0.1 This section covers essential requirements for electrical installations in buildings.

0.2 This section was first published in 1970. It is now revised to up-date the provisions and to bring
it in line with the latest version of Indian Standards on which it was based..This section now includes
general guidance for electrical wiring installations in industrial locations where voltage supply
normally exceeds 650 volts.

0.3 The importance of preplanning and exchange of information among all concerned agencies
from the earlier stages of the building work has been emphasized. This section has to be read
together with Part VIII Building services. Section 1 Lighting and ventilation for making provision
for the desired levels of illumination as well as ventilation for the different locations in different
occupancies.
0.4 Utmost importance should be given in the installation of electrical wiring to prevent short
circuiting and the hazards associated therewith.

0.5 The information contained in this section is largely based on the following Indian Standards:
IS : 732 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations:
IS : 732 (Part l&1982: Part I Definitions and general requirements (second revision)
IS : 732 (Part I&1982: Part II Design and construction (second revision)
IS :732 (Part III)-1982: Part III Inspection and testing of installations (secondrevision).
IS : 2032 (Part X1)-1969: Graphical symbols used in electrotechnology: Part XI
Electrical installations in buildings (architectural symbois).
IS : 4648-1968 Guide for electrical layout in residential buildings.

VIII-2.
2 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

1. SCOPE
1.1 This section covers the essential
requirements for electrical installations in
buildings to ensure efficient use of electricity
including safety from fire and shock. This
section also includes general requirements
relating to lightning protection of buildings.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this section, fhe
following definitions shall apply.
ACCESSORY - Any device, associated with
the wiring and electrical appliance of an
installation, for example. a switch, a fuse, a
plug, a socket-outlet, a lamp-holder, or a
ceiling rose.
A PPARATUS - Electrical apparat-us
including all machines, appliances and fittings
in which conductors are used or of which they
form a part.
APPLIANCE - An energy-consuming device
or equipment (other than a lamp) fixed or
portable, in which the electrical energy is
converted into light, heat, motion or any other
form of energy or substantially changed in its
electrical character.
BUNCHED -- Cables are said to he.‘bunched’
when two or more are contained within a
single conduit, duct, or groove or, if not
enclosed, are not separated from each other.
C ABLE - A length of single-insulated
conductor (solid or stranded), or two or more
such conductors, each provided with its own
insulation, which are laid up together. The
insulated conductor or conductors may or
may not be provided with an overall
mechanical protective covering.
CABLE ARMOURED -A cable provided with
a wrapping of metal (usually in the form of tape
or wire) serving as a mechanical protection.
CABLE. FLEXIBLE - A cable containing one
or more cores, each formed of a grou of
wires, the diameters of the cores and oP the
wires being sufficiently small to afford
flexibility.
CABLE, LEAD-COVERED - A cable provided
with ‘ii lead sheath for the purpose of
excluding moisture from the conductors and
insulation thereof; such sheath consisting
either of commercially pure lead or,
alternatively, of pure lead to which a small
percentage of rare metals has hcen added for
hardening purposts.
CABLE, METAL-SHEATHED - An insulated
able with a metal sheath.
PART VIII l~‘lLDlNC SERVICES-SECTlOW 2 ELCC’lWCAt.
‘.
C A B L E, POLYTHENE-INSULATED -A cable
inwhich the insulation of the conductor or
conductors is a polythene compound.
CANE, PVC-INSULATED - A.cabie in which
the insulation of the conductor is a
,polyvinylchloride compound.
CABLE , PVC-SHEATHED - A cable in which
mechanical protection is provided for the core
or cores by a sheath of a polyvinylchloride
compound.
CABLE, TOUGH RUBBER -SHEATHED (CABLE,
TRS) - An insulated cable consisting of one
or more vulcanized insulated cores
surrounded by a close-fitting rubber sheath.
CABLE-WHEATHERPROOF -A c a b l e S O
constructed that when installed in uncovered
locations, it will withstand all kinds of
weather variations.
CIKGUIT -- An arrangement of conductor or
conductors for the purpose of conveying
energy and forming a system or a branch of a
system.
CIRCLJIT BR E A K E R-A device, capble of
making and breaking the circuit under all
conditions, and unless otherwise specified, so
designed as to break the current automatically
under abnormal conditions.
C IRCUIT F I N A L, SUB-An outgoing circuit
connected to one-way distribution fuseboard
and intended to supply electrical energy at
one or more points to current, using
appliances without the intervention of a
further distribution fuse board other than a
one-way board. It includes all branches and
extensions derived from that particular way in
the board.
C LEAT - An insulated incombustible
support normally used for insulated cable.
C ONDUCTOR , AERIAL - Any conductor
which is supported by insulators above the
ground and is directly exposed to the weather.
NOTE - Four classes of aerial conductors arc recopizcd:
a) Bare aerial conductors,
h) Covered aerial conductors,
c) Insulated aerial conductors, and
d) Weatherproof neutral-screened cable.
C O N DUCTOR, B A R E- A conductor not
covered with insulating material.
CONiXJCTOR,'hRTHED- A conductorwith
no provision for its insulation from earth.
CONDUCTOR, INSULATED - A conductor
adequately covered with insulating n$aterial
INS~ALLAWJNS VIII-2-
3 .
of such quality and thickness as to prevent
danger.
C~NBUCTOR QF A C ABLE OR C O R E - T h e
conducting portion consisting of a single wire
or group of wires, assembled together and in
contact with each other or connected in
parallel.
C ONNECTOR - A mechanical clamp
shrouded in insulating material for
connecting the conductor of a cable or of a
flexible cord to that of another cable or of
another flexible cord.
CQNNECYOR Box OR J OINT BOX - A box
forming a part of wiring installation, provided
to contain joints in the conductors of cables of
the installation.
C ONNECTOR FOR P ORTABLE APPLIANCES ---
A ccmbination of a plug and socket arranged
for attachment to a portable electrical
appliance or to a flexible cord.
CONSUMERX ,TERMINALS - The ends of the
eiectrical conductors situated upon any
consumer’s premises and belongrng to him at
which the supply of energy is delivered from
the service line.
CORD, FLEXIBLE - A flexible cable having
conductor of small cross-sectional area. 1 wo
flexible cords twisted together are known as
twin ‘flexible cord’.
C ORE OF A C ABLE -A single conductor of a
cable with its insulation but not including any
mechanical protective covering.
Cur-OuT -Any appliance for automatically
interrupting the transmission of e n e r g y
through any conductor when the current rises
above a pre-determined amount, for example.
fusible cut-out.
D A M P SITtiATION -A situation in which
moisture is either permanently present or
intermittently present to such an extent as to
be likely to impair the effectiveness of an
installation conforming to the requirements
for ordinary situations.
D EAD --At or about earth potential or
disconnected from any live system.
D IRECT E A RT HING S YSTEM -A system of
earthing in which the parts of an installation
are so earthed as specified but are not
connected within the installation to the
neutral conductor of the supply system or to
earth through the trip coil of an earth leakage
circuit-breaker.
DISCONNECFORS - A device used to open
(or close) a circuit when either’ negligible
VIII-2.
4 NATIONAL DbILDt~~ (‘ODE
current IS interrupted (or established) or when
the significant change in thevoltage across the
terminals of each of the pole of the
disconnectors occurs; in the open position it
provides an isolating distance between the
terminals of each pole.
DIHANCE AREA OR R E SI ST AWE AREA (F O R
E AR rH ELECTKOI~E ON L Y) -~ The area of
ground (around an earth electrode) within
which a voltage gradient measurable with
ordinary commercial instruments exists when
the electrode is being test.ed.
DIS rRIBUT’IoN FIJSE-BOARD -- A n
assemblage of parts including one or more
fuses arranged for the distribution of electrical
energy to final sub-circuits.
E AR rfI - A connectlon to the general mas$
of earth by means of an earth electrode. An
object is said to be ‘earthed’ when it is
electrically connected to an earth electrode;
and a conductor is said to be ‘solidly earthed’
when it IS electrically connected to an earth
electrode without a fuse, switch, circuit-
breaker, resistance or impedance in the earth
connectlon.
EAR I tt CON I IYUI I’Y Co~uucroIr -- T h e
conductor, includmg any clamp, connecting
to the earthing lead or to each other those
parts of an Installation which are required to
be earthed. It may be in whole or rn part the
metal conduit or the metal sheath or Irmour
of the cables, or the special continuity
conductor of a cable or tlexible c o r d
incorporating such a conductor.
EARI H EI.F,~TROIJ~: A metal piate. pipe or
other conductor electricali! connected to the
general mass of the earth.
E AR WING LEAD -. The final conductor by
which the connection to the earth electrode is
made.
E A R T H LEAKAGE CIRCliIT-BREAKER
SYSTEM -- A system of earthlng in which the
parts of an installation, specified, to be
earthed are so earthed through one or more
earth leakage circuit-breakers or relays.
E N C L O S E D DISTRIBUTION FU S E B O A R D -
An enclosure containing bus-bars, with fuses
for the purpose of protecting, controlling of
connecting more than one outgoing circuit.
fed from more than one or more incoming
circuits.
E XPOSED M ETAL --All metal parts of an
installation which are easily accessible other
than:
a) parts separated from live parts by doubk
insulation;
OF INDIA
b) metal name-plates, screw heads, covers, or
plates, which are supported on or attached
or connected to substantial non-
conducting material only in such a manner
that they do not become alive in the event
of failure of insulation of live parts and
whose means of fixing do not come in
contact with any internal metal; and
cl parts which are separated from live parts
by other metal parts which are themselves
earthed or have double insulation.
Fll TING, L I G H T I N G ~- A device for
supporting or containing a lamp or lamps (for
example, fluorescent or incandescent)
together with any holder, shade, or reflector,
for exmaple, a bracket, a pendant with ceiling
rose, an eiectroiier, or a portable unit.
F LAMEPROOF ~NCLOSlIRE - An enclosure
which will withstand without injury any
explosion of inflammable gas that may occur
within it under practical conditions of
opefation within the rating of the apparatus
(and recognized overloads, if any, associated
therewith) and will prevent the transmission
of flame which may ignite any inflammable
gas that may be present in the surrounding
atmosphere.
NOIF I --An electrical apparatus is not considered as
flamproof unless it comphes with the appropriate
statutory regulations.
NOTF 2---Other types of fitting are also in vogue in
wiring installations. for example, ‘increased safety’.
FUSE - A device that, by the fusion of one or
more of its specially designed and
proportioned components, opens the circuit
in which it is in&-ted when the current
through it exceeds a given value for a
sufficient time. The fuse comprises ail the
parts that form the complete device.
F USE-ELEMENT -That part of a fuse which
is designed to melt and thus open a circuit.
F U S E- SW I T C H - A composite unit,
comprising a Sitch with the fuse contained in
or mounted on the moving member of the
switch.
INFLAMMABLE - A material capable . of
being easily ignited.
I N S U L A T E D - Insulated shaii mean
separated from adjacent conducting material
or protected from personal contact by a non-
conducting substance or an air space, in either
case’offering permanently sufficient resistance
to the passage of current or to disruptive
discharges through or over the surface of the
subtance or space, to obviate danger or shock
or injurious leakage of current.
PART VIII IIIIILDINC SERVICES--SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
I N S T A L L A T I O N ( EL E C T R I C A L) -Ail & h e
electrical wiring, accessories, fittings,
consuming devices, control and protective
gear, and.,other apparatus associated with the
wiring situated in any premises in which
electricity is supiiied or is to be supplied
through any one service connection to
consumer(s).
INSULATION , DOUBLE
4 OF A CONDUCTOR - A conductor is s;iid
to have double insulation when insulating
material intervenes not only between the
conductor and its surrounding envelope
(if a cable) or immediate support (if bare)
but also betwen the envelope or support
and earth.
b) OF AN APPLIANCE ..- An appliance having
accessible metal parts is doubly insulated
when protective insulation is provided in
addition to the normal functional
insulation in order to protect against
electric shock in case of breakdown of the
functional insulation.
INSIJLATION (ELECTRICAL ) - Suitable non-
conducting material, enclosing, surrounding
or supporting a conductor.
L INKED S WITCH - Switches linked together
mechanically so as to operate simultaneously
or in definite sequence.
L IVE OR ALIVE -Electrically charged so as
to have a potential different from that of
earth.
L O C A T I O N S, IN D U S T R I A L -. Locations
where tools and machinery requiring
electrical wiring are installed for manufacture
or repair.
L O C A T I O N S, NON-INUDSTRIAL - Locaiions
other than industrial locations, and shall
include residences, offices, shops,
showrooms, stores and similar premises
requiring electrical wiring for lighting, or
similar purpose.
M ULTIPLE E ARTHED N EUTRAL SYSI-EM ---
A system of earthing in which the parts of an
installation specified to be earthed are
connected to the general mass of earth and, in
addition, are connected within the installation
to the neutral conductor of the supply system.
N E U T R A L O R N E U T R A L CONDUCTOR-
Includes the neutral conductor of a three-
phase four-wire system, the conductor of a
single-phase or dc installation which is
earthed by the supply undertaking (or
otherwise at the source of the supply), and the
middle wire or common return conductor of a
three-wire dc or single-phase ac system.
W-2--
P L U G -- A device carrying three metailic
contacts in the form of pins, intended for
engagement with corresponding socket
contacts and arranged for attachment to a
flexible cord or cab!e.
POINI - A point shall consist of the branch
wiring from the branch distribution board.
together with a switch as required, as far as
and including the ceiling rose or socket-outlet
or suitable termination. A three-pin socket-
outlet point shall include, in addition, the
connecting wire or cable from the earth pin to
the earth stud of the branch distribution
board.
?iERVICE - The conductors and equipment
required for delivering energy from the
electric supply system to the wiring system of
the premises served.
SOCKET-OUTWI - A device carrying three
metallic contacts deSigned for engagement
with correspondmg plug pins and arranged
for cor.nection to fixed wiring.
Swl~l<7~~ - A manually operated device for
closing and opening or for changing the
connection of a circuit.
Swl I-(‘HHOARI) ~- A n a s s e m b l a g e o f
switchgear with or without instruments but
the term does not apply to a group of local
switches on a final sub-circuit where each
switch has its own insulating base.
SW1 IC‘HGFAK Main switches, cut-outs or
fuses. conductors and other apparatus in
connection therewith. used for the purpose of
controlling or protecting electrical circuits or
machines or other current using appliances.
Ils,AN 1~ Whl 1 SPACE -~ All portions of a
wall. except that occupied by a door in its
normal open position. or occupied by a fire
place opening. but excluding wall spaces
which are less than I m in ext.ent measured
along the wall at the floor line.
\‘()I 1 AGI-, L.oW - The voltage which does
not normally exceed 250 volts.
Vol I AGE. MEDIUM -- The voltage which
normally exceeds 250 volts but does not
exceed 650 volts.
VOLIAGE. ,HIGU - T h e v o l t a g e w h i c h
normally ekceeds 650 volts (but less than
33 kV).
W E A T H E R P R O O F - Accessories, lighting
fittings. current-using appliances and cables
are said to be of the ‘weatherproof’ type, if
they are so constructed that when installed in
open situation they will withstand the effects
VIII-Z-
6 NATIONAL
of rain, snow, dust and temperature
variations.
2.2 Conventional Symbols -- T h e
architectural symbols that are to be used in all
drawings, wiring plan;, etc. for electrical
installations in buildings shall be as given in
Applendix A.
2.2.1 For other graphical symbols used in
electrotechnology, reference may be made to
good practice [VIII-2 (I I].*
3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3. I Conformit). with Indian Electricity Act
19/O and It;’ Rules I956 Amended L$J -to-&e -
The installation shall generally be carried out in
conformity with the requirements of the Indian
Eltwricit~~ Act, 1910 as amended up-to-date and
the indian Elcc~trici!,~ Rules. 1956 framed th’ere-
under and also the relevant regulations of the
Electric Supply Authority concerned as
amended from time to time. Extracts from the
Indian Electricity Rules, 1956, referred to in
this section. are given in Appendix B.
3.2 Materials -- All materials, fittings,
appliances, etc, used in electrical installations,
shall conform to Part V Building Materials.
3.3 Local Supply Authority
a) In all cases, that is, whether the proposed
electrical work is a new installation or
extension of an existing one, or a modi-
fication involving major changes. the
electricity supply undertaking shall be
consulted about the feasibility. etc, at an
early date.
b) ADDITION TO AN I N S T A L L A T I O N- A n
addition. temporary or permanent, shall
not be made to the authorized load of an
existing installation. until it has been
definitely ascertained that the currentcarrying
capacity and the condition of existing
accessories, conductors, switches. etc,
affected, including those of the supply
authority are adeauate for the increased
load.
3.4 Power Factor Imbrovement in Consumers ’
Installaiion
3.4. I Conditions of supply of electricity boards
or licensees stipulate the lower-limit of power
factor which is generallv 0.85 and consumer is
* In this section where referenceis made to’good practice’
in relation to design or testing, and construction and
material procedures. thcappropriatedocument listed at
the end of this section may be used as a guide to the
mteroretation of this term.
Ilt’IIntNC COtlE 01; INDIA
obliged to improve and maintain the power
factor of his installation to conform to this
condition.
3.4.2 Principal causes of lowpower factor are
many. For guidance to the consumers of
electric energy who take supply at low and
medium voltages for imporvement of power
factor, reference shall be made in accordance
with good practice [VIII-2(2)].
3.5 Execution of work - Unless otherwise
exempted under the appropriate rule of the
Indian Electricity Rules, the work of electrical
install&ions shall be carried out by an
electrical contractor licensed and under the
direct supervision of a person holding a
certificate of competency and by persons
holding a valid permit issued and recognized
by any Indian government.
3.6 Safety procedures and practices shall be
kept in view during execution of the work in
accordance with good practice [VIII-2(3)].
4. PLANNING OF ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS
4.1 Generai - The design and planning of an
electrical wiiing installation involve
consideration of all prevailing conditions, and
is usually influenced by the type and
requirement of the consumer. It is
recommended that the advice of a competent
electrical engineer be sought at the planning
stage with a view to providing for an
installation that will prove adequate for its
intended purpose, and safe and efficient in its
use. The information given under 3 shall also
be kept in view.
4.1.1 The design and planning of an electrical
wiring installation shall take, into
consideration, some or all of the following:
4 the type of supply, occupancy, envisaged
load and the earthing arrangement
available;
b) the atmospheric condition, such as
cooling air temperature, moisture or such
other conditions which are likely to affect
the installation adversely;
c) the possible presence of inflammable or
explosive dust, vapour or gas;
d) the degree of electrical and mechanical
protectton necessary;
e) the importance of continuity of service,
including the possible need for standbv
rupply;
0 the probability of need for modification or
future extension;
PART WI MJlLDlnQ MllVIClS-ICC’tlON 1 Cl.~RICAl,lNlJTALL4llONS
iit) the probable operation and maintenance
cost taking into account the electricity
supply tariffs available;
h) the relative cost of vaious alternative
methods;
9 the need for radio and telecommunication
interference suppression;
k) ease of maintenance;
m) safety aspects; and
n) energy conservation.
4.1.2 All electrical apparatus shall besuitable
for the services these are intended for.
4.J.3 CO-OKDINATION - P r o p e r c o -
ordination and collaboration between the
architect, civil engineer and the electrical and
mechanical engineer shall beeffected from the
planning stage of the installation. The
provisions that will be needed for the
accommodation of substation, transformer,
switchrooms. service cable ducts, rising mains
and distribution cables, sub-distribution
boards, openings and chases in floors and
walls for all required electrical installations,
etc, shall be specified in advance.
4.1.4 Before starting wiring and idstalletion
of fittings and accessories, information should
be exchanged between the owner of the
building/archbect/electrical contractor and
the local supply authority in respect of tariffs
applicable, types of apparatus that may be
connected under each tariff, requirement of
space for installing meters, switches, t?tc, and
for total load requirements of lights, fans and
power.
4.1.5 While planning an installation,
consideration should be taken of the
anticipated increase in the use of electricity for
lighting, general purpose ‘socket-outlet,
kitchen heating, etc.
It is essential that adequate provision should
be made for all the services which may be
required immediately and during the intended
useful life of the building, for the householder
may otherwise be tempted to carry out
extension of the installation himself or to rely
upon use of multiplug adopters and long
flexible cords, both of which are not
recommended.
4,2 L o c a t i o n a n d Rrqulremrnr o f
Substation- Information on locationand
re uirements of a substation should cover the
fol8 owing:
4 . 2 . I TO T A L P L I N T H ( C O V E R E D ) ,
AREA - Electrical mbstatianr ml borr~lly
be required in case of oft%e buildrngn with m
7 1
VIII-l. -
total plinth (covered) area of 5000m2; even
buildings with smaller plinth (covered) areas
with large loading or under local regulations
may require a substation.
4 . 2 . 2 LO A D C E N T R E AND C ENTRE
G RAVITY OF B U I L D I N G S
4 The ideal location for an electrical
substation for a group of buildings would
be at the load centre and shall be located
on the ground floor.
b) In multi-storeyed buildings, the substation
shall preferably he installed on the lowest
floor level, but direct access from the street
for installation or removal of the equipment
shall be provided. The floor level of the
substation or switch room shall be above
the highest flood level of the locality. In this
case the load centre would be somewhere
between the geometrical centre and the air
conditioning plant room. if provided.
c j The substation should preferably -be
located in a separate building and should
be adjacent to the generator room, if any.
Location of substation in the basement
floors should be avoided, as far as
possible. In case electric substation has to
be located within the main building itself
for unavoidable reasons, then it should be
located on ground floor with easy access
from outside. Oil-filled transformers,shall
not be housed on any floor above ground
floor (see Part IV Fire protection).
It is preferable to locate the electrical
substation a d j a c e n t t o t h e air-
conditioning plant room if provided in
such a way that the distance from the
controlling switchboard of the air-
conditioning plant room and
corresponding switches in the electrical
substation are kept to the barest
minimum.
For transformers having large oil content
(more than 2 000 hires). Rule 64 of Indian
Electric-i!,! Rules. 1956 shall apply.
d) The availability of power lines nearby may
also be kept in view while deciding the
location of the substation.
For detailed information regarding
location of transformers reference may be
made to good practice [VIII-2(2)].
\
4 . 2 . 3 LAYOUT O F SLIBSTATION - I n
allocating the area of substation, it is to be
noted that the flow of electric power is from
supply company’s room to HT room, then to
transformer and finally to the low voltage
switchgear room. ‘The layout of the room shall
be in accordance with this flow.
1111 . 8
4.2.4 ROOM, SPACES R EQUIRED - Gener-
ally the following rooms/spaces are required
in a substation:
a) Supply company’s switchgear room
OF
and/or space for meters.
b) CAPACWY AND SIZE - The capacity of a
substation depends. upon the area of the
b.uilding and its type. The capacity of
transformers may be determined based on
the following load requirements:
Lo& Requkrneni
per PIinrh Arm
( Watts/ rn3
Normal lighting
Lighting with lifts, pumps but
w i t h o u t c e n t r a l air-
conditioning 30.0
Additional capacity for
technical buildings like
laboratories, hospitals, etc II.0
Additional capcity for air-
conditioning 100
(of air-condi-
tioned area)
After calculating the electrical load on the
above basis, a load factor of 70 percent is to be
applied to arrive at the minimum capacity of
substation. The area required for substation
and transformer room for different capacities
is given in Table I.
c) HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCH ROOM - In Case
of substation having one’transformer and
one source of supply. the owner is required
to provide one high voltage switch. In case
of single point supply with two or more
transformers the number of switch
required will be one for incoming supply
and one for each transformer. In case of
duplicate supply two switches shall be
prpvided with mechanical/electrical
inlocking arrangement where necessary in
cables with switches. In case the number of
incoming and outgoing switches exceed
five, bus coupler of suitable capacity
should invariably be provided. The floor
area required in case of a single switch is
roughly 4mX4m and for every additional
switch the length wou!d be increased by
I m.
4 L.dW VOLTAGE SWITCH ROOM ‘- The
floor area required in respect of low
voltage switchgear room may be
determined keeping in view the number
and type of incoming/outgoing bus coupler
switches including likely expansion in
future.
NATIONAL BI’II.DINC CODI. OF INIBIA
 TABLE I AREA REQUIRED FOR TRANSFORMER ROOM AND SUBSTATION
FDR DIFFERENT CAPACITIES
[C/we 4.2.#(b)]
CAPACITY OF TRANS. TOTAL SUBSTATION AREA !hOOiL9TlbD MINIMUM
FORMER(S) IN kVA. (ok C4WMNG HT. LT F+r WIDTH
PANELS. TRANSFORMER
Rook BUT WITHOUT
GENER ATOR S)

(1) (2) (‘1 W (9

(m 1 (ml
i) lX16p 14.0 90 9.0
ii) WI60 28.0 II8 13.5
iii) 1x250 IS.0 91 9 . 0
iv) 2x250 30.0 121 13.5
v) IX400 16.5 93 9.0
vi) 2MoO 33.0 125 13.5
vii) 3x400 49.3 I67 18.0
viii) w5W 36.q 130 14.5
ix) 3x500 54.0 I72 19.0
x) W630 36.0 132 14.5
xi) 3X630 54.0 176 19.0
xii) WfIOO 39.0 135 14.5
xiii) 3x800 58.0 I81 14.0
xiv) 2xlOfm 39.0 149 14.5
xv) 3x1000 50.0 197 19.0
NOTE I -,The length and breadth of the transformer room, HT room, LT room can be sekcted, depending upon the actwl
kngth and width of the transformers, supply company’s panels, consumer’s HT and LT panels. The above dimensions are
overall area required for sub-station excluding gencratmg set.
NOTI? Z-The clear height required for substation equipment shall be minimum of 3.6.mcucr,

Non 3 -The wea and height required for substation quipmentsgiven in the table are for general guidance only and may
be fiiy fixed according to actual requirements.

Separate substation building is generally

not required if total load is less than TABLE 2 ADDITIONAL AREA REQUIRED
FOR GENERATOR IN ELECTRIC SUBSTATION
IOOkVA. However, a suitable size of
lockable space should & iarmarked for [ CIOW 1.2.4 (f)]
installing control switchgear in buildings. SL No C A P A C I T Y AREA C LEAR HEIOHT BELOW
THE SOFFIT OF THE B EAM
R O O M F OR S T A N D B Y The
GENERATOR -
capacity of standby generating set shall be (1) (1;;’ ($ :T:
chosen on the basis of essential light load,
essential air-conditioning load, essential 0 25 56 3.6
equipment load and essential services ii) 48 56 3.6
load, such as one lift out of the bank of iii) 100 65 3.6
iv) I50 72 4.6
lifts, one or all Water pumps,.etc. Having
chosen the capacity and number of v) 248 IO0 4.6
generating sets, a space shown in Table 2 NOTE -The ama and IA&t required for pnarrtiu wt
may be provided for their installation. room given in the above uble arm for ~nenl auldancc
only and may bt fmally fixed according to actual
The generating set should invariably be reakrcmcnts.
ho@ed in the substation building to windows and independent access
enable transfer of electrical load qOickly as doors in accordarice with local
well as to avoid transfer of vibration and regulations.
noise to the main building.‘The generator ii) All tb! rooms shall be provided with
house should have proper ventilation, fire- rtttlons up to the ceding and shall
fahting quipment, etc. E ve proper ventilation. Special care
REQUIREMENTS OF ROOMS should be taken to ventHate the
transformer rooms and where
i) The areas given above in respect of necessary louvers at lower level and
the different categories of rooms exhaust fans at hi h&r level shall be
holds good if they are provided with provided at suitabfe locations.

PART VIII l lULDlNG SCWICLB-SLcTlON 2 #iLtCTRlCAL IWllALWlIONS

9 .
VIII-z--
 iii)In order to prevent storm water
entering the transformer and switch
rooms through. the soak-pits, the
floor level, the substation shall be at
least l5cm above the highest flood
water level that may be anticipated in
the locality.
iv) The minimum height of high voltage
switchgear room shall be 3.6 m.
4.3 Location of Switch Room - In large
installations other than where a substation is
provided, a separate switch room shall be
provided; this shall be located as closely as
possible to the electiical load centre and
suitable ducts shall be laid with minimum
number of bends from the point of entry of the
main supply cable to the position of the main
switchgear. The switch room shall also be
placed in such a position that risingducts may
readily be provided therefrom to the upper
floors of the building in one straight vertical
run,. In larger buildings, more than one rising
duct may be required and then horizontal
ducts may also be required for running cables
from the switch room to the foot of each rising
main. Such cable ducts shall be reserved for
the electrical services only which may,
however, include medium ahd low voltage
installations, such as call-bell systems;
telephone installations should be suitably
segregated.
4 . 4 L o c a t i o n a n d Requiremenis o f
Distribution Panels - The electrical control
gear distribution panels and other apparatus,
which are required on each floor may
conveniently be mounted adjacent to the
rising mains, and adequate space should be
provided at each floor for this purpose.
5. D;~BRlM3;T10N O F S U P P L Y A N D
5.0 General - In the planning and design of
an electrical wiring installation, d u e
consideration shall lx? made of all the
prevailing conditions. It is recommended that
advice of a competent electrical engineer be
sought at the initial stage itself with a view to
providiug for the installation that will prove
adequate for its intended purpose, and safe
and efficient use.
5.1 System of Supply
5.1.1 All electrical apparatus shall be suitable
for the voltage and frequency of supply.
II.2 In case of connected load of IO0 kVA
and above, the relative advantage of high
voltage three-phase gupply should be
considered. Though ,the use of high volta
supply entails the provision of space for tl!ee
W.P
ca ital cost of providing suitable transformer
su!station at the consumer’s premises, the
following advantages- %re gained:
a) advantage in tariff,
b) more effective earth fault protection for
heavy current circuits;
cl elimination of interferenee with suplies to
other consumers permitting the use of
large size motors, welding plant, etc; and
4 better control of voltage regulation and
more constant supply voltage.
NOTE - Additional safety precautionr required to be
observed in HV installations shall alao be kept in view.
5.1.3 In very large Industrial buildings where
heavy electric demands occur at scattered
locations, the economics of electrical
distribution at high voltage from the main
su bstaion to other subsidiary transformer
substations or to certain items of plant, such
as large motors and furnaces, should be
considered. The relative economy attainable
by use of medium or high voltage distribution
and high voltage plant is a matter for expert
judgement and individual assessment in the
light of expereince by a professionally
qualified electrical engineer.
5.2 Substation Equipmenr and Accessories -
All substation equipment and accessories and
materials, etc, shall conform to relevant
Indian standards wherever they exist,,
otherwise they shall be approved by the
Authority.
5.2.1 H IGH V OLTAGE S W I T C H G E A R
5.2.1.1 The selection of the type of high
voltage switchgear for any intiallation inrer-
alia depends upon the following:
a) voltage of the supply system;
b) the prospepctive short-circuit current at
the point of supply;
c) the size and layout of electrical
installation;
d) the accommodation available; and
e) the nature of industry.
Marketing and breaking capacity of
switchgear shall be commensurated with shor-
circuit potentialities of the supply system and
the supply authority shall be consulted onthis
subject..
5 . 2 . 1 . 2 GuideIinea dn various taypes of
switchgear equipment and their chotce for a
particular application shall be inaccordance
with accepted standards [see VIII-2(.(s)].*
l In thil saction, Where refcrtncc in made IO ‘acepted
standard:’ in relation to matwirl rpe@Rwtion, tiw
rpptoprlau document llated at the od of thin mctlon
may be wed u guide to the Lntwptetation of thL term.
NAtRNAL DUlLDING CDDC Dt INDIA
5.2.1.3 In extensive installations of
switchgear, banks of gears shall be segregated
from the each other by means of fire-reststing
barriers in order to t-event spreading.of the
risk of damage by Ptre or explosion arising
from switch failure. Where a bus-section
switch is .installed. it shall aslo be senreeated
from adjoining banks in the sage-way
[seevlll-2(S)].
5.2.1.4 It should be possible to is&ate any
section from the rest of the switchboards such
that work might be undertaken on this section
without the necessity of making the
switchboard dead. IsoWing switch- used for
the interconnection of sections or for the
purpose of isolating circuit-breakers of other
apparatus, shall also be segregated within its
compartment so thatno live part is acoesaibk
when work in a neighbouring section is io
progress,
5.2.1.5 in the case of duplicate or ring main
supply, switches wrth interlocking
arrangement shall be provided to ercvcnt
simultaneous switching of two different
supply sources.
5.2.2 C ABLES
5.2.2.1 The smallest size of the cable that shall
be used, will depend upon the method of
laying cable, permissible matitnum
temperature it shall withstand, the
prospective short-circuit current to which the
cable may be subjected, the charactersitics of
the overload protection gear installed, load
cycle and thermal resistivity of the soil [see
also. VIII-2(6)]. Short-circuit rating curves
given in Appendix A will serve as an
approximate guide for selection of the size of
cables.
N O T E-Guidelines for correlation of the ratings of
cables and characteristics of protective device are under
consideration.
5.2.2.2 The advice of the cable manufacturer
with regard to installation,, jointing and
scaling shall be followed.
5.2.2.3 The H T cables shall either be laid on
the cable rack/ built-up concrete
trenches/ tunnel/ basement or directlyburied-
in the ground depending upon the specific
requir ment. All cables shall be installed in
actordante with-good practices [VIII-2(6)].
5.2.3 TRANSFORMERS
5.2.3.1 The maximum size of any transformer
used to suppl a medium voltage installation
from a htgT? voltage network is generally
selected on the basis of present load, possible
future load, operation and maintenance cost
and other system eonditions and is limited by
WRt VIII W I L D I N G =VKU-SICTION 2 CLKTBlCALINSTALLATlONY
ity of
short-circuit making and breakitg
t h e switch-r used for coWo
7Yw tha
medium voltage distribution syrtcm.
5.2.3.2. See 4.2 for details of locatiot! arid
requirements of substation. Where, two or
more transformers are to be ~inrtalled in a
substation to supply a medium voltage
distribution system, the distribution system
shall be divided into separate ScctiOnS crab of
which ,shaff k normally fed from one
transformer only unless the medium voltage
switchgear has the requisite rhon-circait
capacity. Provision may, however, be made to
interconnect reprrate sections, through a bus
coupler in the event of failure or
disconnection of one trat&rmer.
The transformers, that may at any time
operate in parallel. shal1 be so aekcted as to
share the load in propo&on to tktir m
load ratings.
5.2.4 Low VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
5.2.4.1 Switchgear and fuaegear shall have
adequate breakin
capacity of the tr
connected.
5.2.4.2 lsolation and protection of outgoing
circuitsforming mai~distributionsystemmay
be effected by means of circuit-breakers, or
fuses or switch and fuseunits mounted on the
main switchboard. The choice between
alternative types of equipment may be
influenced by the following considerations:
4 In certain installations supplied with
electric power from remote transformer
substations, it may be necessary to protect
main circuits with circuit-breakers
operated by earth leakage trips, in order to
ensure effective earth fault protection.
b) Where large electric motors, furnaces-r
othrr heavy electrical equipment is
installed, the main circuits shall be
protected by metal-clad circuit-breakers
or contactors fitted with suitable
instantaneous and time delay over current
devices together with earth leakage and
back-up protection where neccessary.
4 In installations other than those referred
to in (a) and (b) or where overloading of
circuits may be considered unlikely,HRC
type fuses will normally afford adequate
protection for main circuits. Where means
of isolating main circuits separately is
required, the fuses shall be mounted in
fuse switch or switch fuse units or with
switches forming part of the main
switchboards.
5.2.4.3 Sometimes it may be necessary to
provide suitable connection. for the power
vtir.*.l ’ ’
factor improvement capacitor at the
substation bus. Suitable capacitor may be
selected in consultation with the capacitor as
well as switchpear manufacture and necessary
switchpearifeedet circuit-breaker s h a l l b e
p!ovided for controlling of cnnaritor hank.
5.2.4.4 Adequate passage ways shall be
allowed to afford to all switchhoards for
operation and maintenanceand proper means
shall he provided for isolating the equipment
to allow access for maintenance and other
purposes. Sufficient additional sapce shall be
allnwvrd to provide fnr anticipated future
extensions.
5..?.4..5 Electrical installations in a rnom or
cubicle or in an arc3 surrounded by wall fence,
access t_o which is cnntrollcd by lock and key
shall be considercti accessible to authorized
persons only.
A wall or fenre less than 2.25 mctres in height
shall, not he considered as preventing access
unless it has other features that provide a
degree of isnlatinn enuivalent to a 2.25 metres
fence.
.5.3././ I‘hcre shall be a circuit-hreaker or
miniature circuit-hreakers or a load break
switch fuse on each live conductor of the
supply mains at the point of entry. The wiring
thqhout the installation shall he such that
there is no hreak in t,he nentral wire in the
form of a switch or fuse unit. The neutral shall
also he distinctly marked. In this connection.
R u l e 32(2) of the Inrjiian Fh~tricitl~ Rules.
1956 (,pf>e Appendix R) shall also be referred.
:..~.I.2 The main switch shall be easily
accessible and situated as near as practicable
tn the terminatinn of service line.
.F._I./..j On the main switch. where the
conductors include an earthed conductor of a
two-wire svstem or an earthed neutral
conductor or a multi-wire system or a
conductor which is to be connected thereto,
an indication of a permanent nature shall be
provided to identify the earthed neutral
conductor. In this connection. Rule 32(I) of
the Indinn Elecvrkir v Rulm, (see Appendix B)
shall be referred.
5.3.1.4 FAFPGY METERS -- Energy meters
shall be installed in residential building3 at
such a place which is readily accessible to the
owner of the building and the Authority.
These shndd he installed at a height where It IS
convenient tn note the meter reading; it
shnnld preferably not be-installed below one
metre from the gtciund. The energy meters
should either be provided with a protective
covering, enclnsinp it completely except the
Rlass window through which the readings are
noted or shnnld be mounted inside a
completelv enclosed panel provided with
hirqed nr sliding doors with arrangement for
locking.
5.3.2 M AIN S WITCHES AND SWITCHBOARD
5.3.2.1 All main switches shall be either of
metal-clad enclosed pattern or of any
insulated enclosed pattern which shall be
fixed at close nroximitv to the point of entry
of supply.
a) The location of the main board should be
such that It is easily accessible for fireman
and other personnel to ouickly disconnect
the supply m case of emergencies.
b) Main switch hnard shall be installed in
rooms nr cuphoards so as to safeguard
aeainst operation by unauthorized
personnel.
Open type switchboards shall be placed
only in dry situations and in ventilated
rooms and they shall not be placed in the
vicinity of storage batteries or exposed to
chemical fumes.
d) In damp situation or where infammable or
explosive dust. vapnur or gas is likely to be
present. the switchhoard shall be totally
enclosed nr made flameproof as may be
neceessitated b y t h e p a r t i c u l a r
circumstances [&Tee Vlll-2(7)].
e) Switchboards shall not be erected above
gas stoves or sinks. or within 2.5 m or any
washing unit in the washing rooms or
laundrieri, or in hat.htooma. lavatories or
toilets. or kitchens.
f-l In case of switchboards unavoidably fixed
in places likely tn be exposed to weather,
to drip. or to abnormal moist atmosphere,
the outer caamg shall be weatherproof and
shall’ be provided with glands or bushin I
or adopted to receive screwed condu ft,
according to the manner in which the
cables are run.
g) AdeqUate illumination shall bt provided
for all working spaces about the
switchboards when installed indoors.
3.3.2.3 Metal-clad swltchgcar shall prefer-
ably be mourned on any oi the following
types of boards:
a) Hin @d-type mrtal hoarh-These
shal f consist of a box n&e--of sheet
metal not less than 2mm thick and shall
be provided with a hinged cover to enable
the board to swmg open for examina-
tion of the wiring at the back. The joints
shall be welded. There shall be a clear
distance of not less than 2.5cm between
the teak wood board and the cover, the
distance being increased for larger
boards in order that on closing of the
cover, the insulation of the cables is
not subjected to damage and no short
length of cables is subjected to excessive
twisting or bending in any case. The
board shall be securily lixed to the wall
b means of rag bolta, pluyls, or wooden
#I Yug;8 and shall be provided with a lock-
mg arranpment and en eanhrng tmd.
All wires passing through the metal
board shall be protected by a rubber or
wooden bush at the entry hole. The earth
stud should commensurate with the size
of earth lead/ leads. Alternatively, metal
boards may be made of suitable size
angle ‘iron of minimum size 35 mm X
33 mm X 6mm or channel iron of mini-
m u m s i z e 35mm X 2Smm X 6mm
framed work suitably mounted on front
with 8 3mm thick mild steel plate and
on back with 1.5mm thick mild steel
sheet. No a paratus shall project beyond
any edge oPpanel. No fuse body shall be
mounted within 2.5cm ot any edge of
the panel.
N~IE -Such type 01 boards are particularly suitable
for small switchboard for muummg nrrtil-crad sw~h-
gear connected to supply al law \Orreprs.
b) Fixed-t.ype metal hourds -- I hrse shall
COnSiSt Of’ aI3 ar@e O r CrMrle~ IrOIl traIrlc
fixed on the wall or on floor and
supported on the wail at the top. it
necessary. There shall be a clear distance
of one metre in front bt the swrichboards.
If there are any atrachmems of bare
connections at the back of the
switchboard Rule 51( 1) (c) of hdiun
Elrcrrici!.v Rules, lciS6 shall apply. The
connect~onsl between the switchgear
mounting and the outgoing cable up co the
wall shall be enclosed in a protecrion pipe.
Fio~ t - Sucn ~ypc of boaros are partrcularly suir-
able for large switchboards lor muunrmg large
nun&l of switchgears o r h i g h capacity metal-
clad switcbgear or both.
c ) Wooden booms -- l-‘or s m a l l installa.
tions connected to a single-phase 24ovoll~
supply. wooden boards may be used as
main-boards or sub-boards. I hese shall
be 01 seasoned leak or other approved
quality with all joints dovetailed.
5.3.2.4 RECESSING OF WARDS- Where so
s ecified, ihe uwltcnboalws shall be recessed in
t RE wall. Ample cawn shall be provided at the
back for connection and at the front between
thti switchgear mountings.
5.3.2.5 In large installations of medium vol-
tage, before proceeding with the actual
construction of the boards. a proper drawing
shaking the detailed dimensions and design
including the disposition of the mountings,
which shall be syrqmerrically and neatly
arranged for arriving at the overall dimen-
sions, shall be prepared along with the build-
ing drawings.
5.3.2.6 ARRANGEMENT OF AI’PARAIIJS
a) Equipment which is on the front ofa
switchbourd shall be so arranged that in-
advertent personal contact with live
parts is unhkely during the manipulation
of sv/itches, changing of fuses and the
like operations.
b) No ap aratus shall project beyond any
edge of! the panel. No fuse body shall be
mounted within 2.5cm of any edge of
the panel-and no. hole other than the
holes by means of which the panel is
fixed shall be diilled ‘closer than 1.3cti
from any edge of the panel.
4 The various live parts, unless they are
effectiveiy screened by substantial bar-
riers of non-hygroscopic, non-inflam-
mable insulating material, shall be so
spaced rhar an arc cannot- maintain
between such parts and earth.
d) The arrangement of the gear shall be
such that they shall be readily accessible
and their connecrions to all insttuments
and apparatus shall also be easily identi-
fiable.
e) In every case rn which switches and fuses
are fitted on rhe same pole, these fuses
shall be so arranged that the fuses are
not alive when their resipective switches
are ih off position.
fl No fuses other than fuses in instrument
circuit shail be fixed on the back of or
behind a switchboard panel or frame.’
5.3.2.7 MARKING OF AI’I’ARATUS (SEE ALSO
[VIII Ulc)].
a) Where a board is connected to voltage
higher rhan 250 V, all the apparatus
mourned on it shall be marked on the
followmg colours to ind,icate the dif-
ferent poles or phases to which the
 apparatus or its different. terminals may
have been connected:
Alternating Direct Current
Current
Three-phases - Three-wire system-
red, yellow; blue 2 outer wire, posi-
tive red and
negative blue
I Neutral-black I Neutral-black
Where four-wire three-phase wiring is
done, the neutral shall be in one colour
and the other three wires in another
colour.
Where a board has more than one switch,
each such switch shall be marked to
indicate which section of the installa-tion
it controls. The main switch shall. bc
marked as such and where there is more
than one main switch in the building.
each such switch shall be marked to indi-
cate which section of the installation it
controls.
All markings shall be clear and
permanent.
5.3.3 MA I N ANT) BRANCH DISTKI~UTION
BOARDS ~ The rating or setting of over-
current protection devices shall be so chosen
as to be suitable for protection of cables and
conductors used in the circuit.
_5.3.3./ Main and branch distribution boards
shall be of any type mentioned under 5.3.4.
5.3.3..? Main distribution board shall be
provided with a circuit-breaker on each pole
of each circuit, or’s switch with a fuse on the
phase or iivc conductor and a link on the
neutral or earthed conductor of each circuit.
The switches shall always be linked.
5 . 3 . 4 BKAN(.‘H DISTRIINI 1.10~ B~AWS
5.3.4.1 Branch distribution boards shall be
provided with a fuse or a miniature circuit
breaker or both of adequate rating: setting
chosen in accordance with 5.J.3 on the live
conductor of each sub-circuit and the earthed
neutral conductor shall be connected to a
common link and be capable of being,dis-
connected individually for testing purposes.
At least one spare circuit of the same capacity
shall be provided on each branch distribution
board.
5.3.4.2 In residential instaliatiun, lights and
fans may be wired on a common circuit.Such
sub-circuit shall not have more than a total of
ten points of lights, fans and 5A socket
outlets. The load of such circuit shall be res-
tricted to 800 watts. If a separate fan circuit is
WI-*-~4
provided, the number of fans in the circuit
shall not exceed ten. Power sub-circuits shall
be designed according to the load but in no
case shall there be more than two 15A outlets
on each sub-circuit.
In industrial installations the branch
distribution board shall. be totally segregated
for single-phase distribution and wiring.
5.3.4.3 In industrial and other similar instal-
lations requiring the use of group control for
switching operation circuits for socket out-
lets may be kept separate from fans and
lights. Normally, fans and lights may be
wired on a common circuit, however, if need
is felt separate circuits may be provided for
the two. The load on any low voltage sub-
circuit shall not exceed 3000 watts. In a case
of new installation, all circuits and sub-cir-
cuits shall be designed by making a provision
of 20 percent increase in load due .to any
future modification. Power sub-circuits shall
be designed according to the load but in no
case shall there be more than four outlets
on each sub-circuit.
5.3.4.4 In wiring instaHations at special
places like construction sites, stadium,
shipyards, open yards in industrial plants,
etc, where a large number of high wattage
lamp may be required, there shall be no
restriction of load on any circuit but
conductors used in such circtiits shall be of
adequate size for the load and proper circuit
protection shall be provided.
5.3.5 LOCATION 0F DlsrRIeu-noN BO A R D S
2) The distribution fuse-boards shall be
located as near as possible to the centre of
the load they are intended to control.
b) These shall be fixed on suitable stran-
chion or wall and shall be accessible for
replacement of fuses, and shall not be
more than 2m from floor level.
c) These shall be of either metal-clad type,
or all-insulated type. But, if exposed to
weather or damp situations, these shall
be of the weatherproof type and, if
installed where exposed to explosive dust,
vapour or gas, these shall be of flame-
proof type in accordance with accepted
s t a n d a r d s [VIII-2(9)]. In corrosive
atmospheres, these shall be treated with
nnl i-corrosive preservative or covered
H lth suitable plastic compound.
d) Where two or more distribution fuee-
boards feeding low voltage circuits are
fed from a supply of medium voltasp,
these distribution boards shall be:
1) fixed not less than 2m apart; or
hATlDNAL BI’ILDINC CODE OF INDIA
 2) arranged so that it ie not possible to
open two at a time, namely, they are
interloekcd and the metal case is
marked ‘Danger 415 volts’ and identi-
fied with proper phase marking and
danger marks; or
N OTE-The wiring of such low voltage distri-
bution boards shall be segregated from each
other and not run in the same conduit.
3) installed in a room or enclosure ac-
cessible to only authorized persons.
e) All distribution boards shall be marked
‘Lighting’ or ‘Power’, as the case may be,
and also marked with the voltage and
number of phases of the supply. Each
shall be provided with a circuit list giving
diagram of each circuit which it controls
and the current rating of the circuit and
size of fuse element.
In wiring branch distribution board,.
total load of consuming devices shall be
divided as far as possible evenly between
the number of ways in the board leaving
spare circuits for future extension.
5.3.6 PROTECTION OF C IRCUITS
a) Appropriate protection shall be pro-
vided at switchboards and distribution
boards for ati circuits and sub-circuits
against short circuit and over current
and the piotective apparatus shall be
capable of interrupting any short circuit
current that may occur, without danger.
The ratings and settings#of fuses and the
protective devices shall be co-ordinated
so as to afford selectivity in operation.
b) Where circuit-breakers are used for pro-
tection of a main circuit and of thesub-
circuits derived therefrom, discrimina-
tion in operation may be achieved by ad-
justing the protective devices of thesub-
main circuit-breakers to operate at lower
current settings and shorter time-lag
than the main circuit-breaker.
Where HRC type fuses are used for
back-up protection of circuit-breakers,
or where HRC fuses are used for protec-
tion of main circuits, and circuit-brea-
kers for the protection of sub-circuits
derived therefrom, in the event of
shortcircuits protection exceeding the
short-circuits capacity of the
circuit-breakers, the HRC fuses shall
operate. earlier than the circuit-breakers;
but for smaller overloads within the
short-circuit capacity of the circuit-
breakers, the circuit-breakers shall
operate earlier than the HRC fuse
blows.
PART VIII l W.DlNC YEJI~ICFS-SECTION 2 ELFiCllllCAL INSTALLAT IO NS
4 If rewirable type fuses are used to pro-
tect sub-circuits derived from a main cir-
cuit protected by HRC tyfie fuses, the
main circuit fuse shall normally blow in
the event of a short-circuit or earth fault
occurring on a sub-circuit, although dis-
crimination may be achieved in respect
of overload currents. The use of re-
wirable fuses is restricted to the circuit’s
with short-circuit level of 4 kA; for
higher level either cartridge or HRC
fuses shall be used.
e) A fuse carrier shall not be fitted with a
fuse element larger than that for which
the carrier is designed.
T’he curtznt rating of a fuse shall not
exceed the current ratirig of the smallest
cable in the circuit protected by the fuse.
8) Every fuse shall have its own case or
cover for the protection of the circuit
and an indelible indication of its appro-
priate current rating in an adjacent cons-
picuous position.
h) For detailed information regarding
selection, installation and maintenance
of fuses, reference may be made to good
practice [VIII.-2(10)].
5.4 Voltage pnd Frequency cf Supply--It
should be ensured that all equipment con-
nected to the system including-any applian-
ces to be used on it are suitable for the vol-
tage and frequency of supply of the system.
The nominal values of low and medium
voltage systems in India are 240 V and
;;5HV, ac, respectively, and the frequency
NoTts--l‘he design of the wiring system and the sixes
of the cables should be decided taktng into account two
factors:
a) vot.rAGE tmop-l’hls should be kept as !ow as eco-
uomy permits to ensure proper functioning of all
electrical appliances and equipment including
motors; and
b) First cost against operating losses
5.5 Raring of Cables and Equipmenrs
5.5.1 The current-carrying capacity of dif-
ferent types of cables shall be chosen in
accordance with good practice [VIII-2(I I)].
5.5.2 The current ratings of switches for do-
mestic and similar purposes are5A and MA.
5.5.3’The current ratings of isolators and
normal duty switches and composite units of
switches and fuses shall be selected from one
of the following values:
16;25, 32, 63, 100, 160, 200,. 320, 400, 500,
630, 800, 1000 and I250A
Vlll-25 .

5.5.4 The ratings of rewirabie and HRC
fuses shall be in accordance with good prac-
tice [VIII-2( l2)].
5.5.5 The current ratings of.miniature cir-
cuit-breakers shall be chosen from the values
given below:
6, IO. ICI, 25, 32. JO. 63 and IOOA
3.5.6 The current rating of the distribution
fuse board shall be selected from one of the
following values:
6, 16, 25, 32. 63 and 100 A.
5.6 Lighting and Levels of Illumination
5.6. I GENERAL - Lighting installation shall
take into consideration the many factors on
which the quality and quantity of artificial
lighting depends. The modern concept is to
provide illumination with the helpof.a large
number of light sources not of higheriilumi-
natibn level. Also much higher levels ofillu--
mination are called for than in the past, often
necessitating the use of fluorescent lighting
suitably supplemented with incandescent
fittings, where required.
5.6.2 FIVIVRE DEMAND- However, if for
financial reasons. it is not possible to provide
a lighting mstallation to give the recom-
mended illumination levels, the wiring
installation at least should be so desigried
that at a later date, it will permit the provi-
sion for additional lighting fittings or con-
versioh from incandescent to fluorescent
lighting fittings to bring Ihe installation to
the required stqpdard. It is essential that
adequate provisions should be made for all
the electrical services which may be required
immediately and during the intended useful
life of the building.
5.6.3 PRINCIPI.ES OF L IGHTING - - . - W h e n
considering the function of artificial lighting,
attention shall be given- tci the following
principle characteristics before designing an
installation:
4 illumination and its uniformity;
. 6.1.2
b) special distribution of light. This in-eludes
a reference to the composition of diffused
and directional light, direction of
incidence, the distribution of Iumin#nces
and the degree of glare; and
c) colour of the light and colour rendition.
5.6.4 The variety of purposes which have to
be kept in mind while planning the lighting
installation could be broadly grouped as:
a) industrial buildings and processes:
VWs-16
‘.
b) offices. schools and public buildings;
c) surgeries and hospitals; and
d) hostels, restaurants. shops and residential
buildings.
5.6.4.1 It is important that appropriate levels
of illumination for these.and the types and
positions of fittings determined to suit the
task and the disposition of the working
planes.
5.6.5 For specific requirements for lighting of
special occupancies. reference shall be made
to good practice [VI It-2( I3)].
5.7 In locations where the system voltage
exceeds 650 volts, as in the case of industrial
locations. for details of design and construc-
tion of wiring installation, rqference may be
made to good practice [Vtll-2( 14)].
5.8Electric wiring installations in hospitals
shall be done in accordance with good
practice [VIII-2( 15)].
5.9 GUIDELINE FOKELECTRICAL-LAYOUT IN
RESIDENTIAL HUlLDINGS 2 For guidelines
for electrical installation in residential
buildings. reference may be made to good
practice [VIII-2( I6)].
A typical distribution scheme in a residential
building with separate circuits for.lights and
fans and for power appliances is given in
Fig. I.
5.10 For detailed inforniation regarding
the installation of different electrical
equipments. reference may be made to good
practice [Vlll-2( IT)].
6. WIRING
6.1 Provtkion f o r M a x i m u m L o a d - A l l
conductors, switches and accessories shall be
of such size as to be capable of carrying,
without their respective ratings being ex-
ceeded. the mriximum current which will
normally flow through them.
ES T I M A T I O N
O F L O A D R E Q U I R E-
M E N T S-
In estimating the current to be
carried by any conductor the following
ratings shall be taken, unless the actual
values are known or specified for these
elements:
Element
incandescent lamps
Ceiling fans
Table fans
IylMMb- c ‘a II
Ordinary socket outlet points
Fluorescent tubes:
Length: 600 mm
1200 mm
1500 mm 90
Power socket-outlet too0
6.1.2 Electrical installation in a new building
shall normally begjn immediately on the
completion of the main structural building
work and before finishing work such as plas-
tering has begun ex’cept in the case of surface
wiring which can be carried out after the
plaster work. Usually, no installation work
should start until the building is reasonably
weatherproof, but where electric wiring is to
be concealed within the structures as may be
the case with a reinforced concrete building,
the necessary conduits and ducts shall be
positioned firmly by tying the conduit to the
reinforcement before‘concrcting. When shut-
ters are removed after concreting, the c.on-
duit ends shall he given ‘suitable anti-corro-
sive treatment ,and holes blocked off by
putties or caps to protect conduits from
getting blocked.
6.2 Selecrion qf Size qf Conductors-The
size of conductors of circuits shall be so
selected that the drop in voltage from
consumer’s terminals in a publicsupply (or
from the bus-bars of the main switchboard
contrdlling the various circuits in a private
generation plant) to any point on the
installation does not exceed three percent of
the voltage at the consumer’s terminals (or at
two bus-bars as these may be) when the
conductors are carrying the maximum current
under the normal conditions of service.
6.2.2 If the cable size is increased to avoid
voltage drop in the circuit, the rating of the
cable shall be the current which the circuit is
designed to carry. In each circuit or sub-&-.
cuit the fuse shall be selected to match the
cable rating to ensure the desired protection.
6.3 Branch Switches--Where the supply is
derived from a three-wire or four-wire
source, and distribution is done on thetwo-
wire system, all branch switches shall be
placed in the outer or live conductor of the
circuit and no single phase switch or fuse
shall be inserted in the middle wire, earth or
earthed neutral conductor of the circuit.
Single-pole switches (other than for multiple
control) carrying not more than 15A may be
of tumbler type or flush type which shall be
on when the handle. @ ,pob is down.
6.4 Layout and Installhtion Drawing
6.4.1 The electrical layout should be consI-
dered after proper locations ofall outlets for
PART VIII BUIIBINC SER~IS-SECTION Z ltLeCTPlCALINSTAl.LAllONS
lamps, fans, appfiances both fixed and trans-
portable, motors, etc. have been selected
and best methods of wirin& determined.
6.4.2 All runs of wiring and the exact posi-
tions of all points.of switch-box& a-nd other
outlets shall be first, marked on the pla’ns of
the.Ybuilding ,and approved by the engineer-
in-charge or the owner before actual com-
mencement of the work.
6.4.3 Industrial layout drawings shouldindi-
,cate the relative civil and mechanicaldetajts.
6.4.4 LAYOUT OF WIRING-The layout. of
wiring should be designed keeping in view*
disposition of tKe lighting system to meet the
illumination levels. ‘Power’ and ‘heating’
sub-circuits shall be kept separate and dis-
tinct ,from ‘lighting’ and.‘fan’ sub-circuits. All
wirings shall be done on the distributioq
system with main and branch distribution
boards at convenient physical and electrical
load centres. All types of wiring, whether
concealed or unconcealed should be as near
the ceiling as possible. In all types of wirings
due consideration shall be given for neatness
and good appearance.
6.4.5 Balancing of circuits in three-wire or
poly-phase installation shall be arranged
before hand.-Conductors shall be so enclosed
in earthed metal or incombustible insulating
material that it is dot posslbre to have ready
access to them unless the points between
which a voltage exceeding 250 volts may be
present are 2m or more apart, in which case
means of accesc: shall be marked to indicate
the voltage present.
Where terminals or other fixed live parts
be.deen which a voltage exceeding 250V
exists are housed in separate enclosures or
items of .apparatus which, although sepa-
rated are within reach of each other, a notice
shall be placed in such a position that anyone
gaining access to live parts is warned of the
magnitude of the voltage that exists between
them.
NOTE ---The above requirements apply equally to three-
phase circuits in which the voltage between hnes or to
earth exceeds 250 vhlts and to groups of two or moF
single-phase circuits, between which medium voltage
may be present, derived therefrom. They apply also to
3-wire dc or 3-wirr single-phase ac circuits m which the
voltage betweal lines or to earth exceeds 250 ~01:s and
to groups of Z-wire circuits, between which medium vol-
tage may be present. derived therefrom.
6.4.6 Medium voltage wiring and associated
apparatus shall comply, in all respects,with
the requirements of Rules 50 and 51 and 61 of
the Indian Electricir,* Rides, t?56.
6.5 Conductors and Accessories
6.5.1CONDUCTORS -Conductors shall be
of ‘copper or aluminium: Conductors for
i7
\‘lu-2-A ’ ,

power ,and lighting circuits shall be of
adequate size to carry the designed circuit
load without exceeding the permissible
thermal limits for the insulation. The
conductor for final sub-circuit for fan and
light wiring shall have a nominal cross-
sectional area not less than 1 .OO mm’ copper
and 1.50 mm* aluminium. The cross-sectional
area of conductor for power wiring shall be
not less than 1.50.mm copper and 2.5mm’
aluminium. The minimum cross-sectional
area of conductor of ‘flexible cord shall be
0.50 mm: copper.
6.5.2 F L E X I B L E C ABLES AND F L E X I B L E
CORDS - Unless flexible cables and cords are
protected by flexible conduits or tough rubber
or PVC sheath, they shall not be used in places
where they are liable to be subjected to
mechanical damage.
6.5.3 C ABLE ENDS -When a stranded con-
ductor having a nominal sectional. area less
than 6mm2 is not provided with cable so-
ckets, all strands at the exposed ends of the
cable shall be soldered together or crimped
using suitable sleeve or ferrules.
6.5.4 R ATING OF L A M P; FAN AND S O C K E T
O UTLET P OINTS -In estimating the current
to be carried by any conductor, incandescent
and fluorescent lamps shall be rated at 60
watts, ceiling fans, table fans and ordinary’
socket-outlet points at 100 watts, and power
socket-outlet points at 1000 watts, unless the
actual values are known or specified.
Exhaust fans, if any, shall be rated according
to their capacity.
6.5.5 S P E C I A L RISK--Special forms of
construction, such as flameproof enclosures,
shall be adopted where there is risk oft he fire
or explosion.
6.5.7 C ONNECTION TO A N C I L L A R Y
B UILDINGS - Unless otherwise specified,
electrical connections to .ancillary buildings,
such as out-houses, garages, etc. adjacent to
the main building at a distance not greater
than 3m and when no roadway intervenes
shall be taken in an earthed Gf pipe ofsuitable
size in the exposed portion at a height of not
less than 2.5 m or by underground cables. This
applies to both runs of mains or sub-mains or
final sub-circuit wiring between the buildmgs.
When the distance between the buildings
exceeds 3 m or a roadway intervenes, separate
mains or sub-mains shall be run from the main
building to ancillary buildings and the
portion, of the same exposed to weather shall
be carried in weatherproof cable on GI bearer
wire at a height not less than 4m above the
ground or underground cable.
PART Ylll WILDING SERVICM-SECTION 2 ELKT‘IK’AL INSTAl.LATIORS
‘.
6.5.8 EX P A N S I O N JOINTS -The conduits
shall not normally be allowed to cross
expansion joints in a building. Where such
crossing is found to be unavoidable, special
care must be taken to ensure that the’conduit
runs and wiring are riot in any way. put to
strain or damaged due to expansion of
building structure.
6;6 Joints and Looping Back
6.6.1 Where looping back system of wiring is
specified, the wiring shall be done without
any junction or connector boxes on the line.’
Where joint box system is specified, all joints
in conductors shall’ be made by means of
suitable mechanical connectors in suitable
joint boxes. Wherever practicable, looping
back system should be preferred. Whenever
practicable, only one system shall be adopted
for a building, preferably a looping back
system.
6.6.2 In any system of wiring, no bare or
twist joints shall be made at intermediate
points in the through run of cables unless the
1,ength of a final sub-circuit, sub-main or
main is more than the length of the standard
coil as given by the manufacturer of the
cable. If any jointing becomes unavoidable
such joint shall be made through propercut-
outs or through proper junction boxes open
to easy inspection,but in-looping back sys-
tern no such junction boxes shall be allowed.
6.6.3 Where joints in cable conductors or
bare conductors are necessary, they shall be
mechanically and electrically sound. Joints in
non-flexible cables shall be accessible for
inspection; provided that this requirement
shall not apply to joints in cables huried
underground, or joints buried or enclosed in
non-combustible building materials. Joints in
non-flexible cables shall be made by
soldering, brazing, welding or mechanical
clamps, or be of the compression type; pro-
vided that mechanical clamps shall not be
used for inaccessible joints buried or en-
closed in the building structure. Allmechani-
cal clamps and compression type sockets
shall securely retain all the wires of the
conductors. Any joint in a flexible cable or
flexible cord shall be effected by means of a
cable coupler.
6.6.4 Every joint in a,cable shall be provided
with insulation not less effective than that of
the cab!e cores and shall be protected against
moisture and mechanical damage. Soldering
fluxes which remain acidic or corrosive at the
completion of the soldering operation shall
not be used.
For joints in paper-insulated metal-sheathed
cables, .a wiped metal sleeve or joint box,
wlr-il ’

filled with insulating compound, shall be
provided.
Where an aluminium conductor and a cop-
per conductor are joihed togefher, precau-
tions shall be taken against corrosion and
mechanical damage to the conductors.
6 . 6 . 5 PUI_I_ AI JOINTS A N D T E R M I N A L S- -
Every connection at a cable termination shall
be made by means of a terminal, soldering
socket, or compression type socket and shall
securely contain and anchor all the wires of
the conductor, and shall not impose any
appreciable mechanical strain on the termi-
nal or socket.
Flexible cords shall be so connected to devi-
ces and to fittings that tension will not be
transmitted to joints or terminal screws. This
shall be accomplished by a knot in the cord,
by winding with tape, by a special fitting
designed for that purpose, or by other
approved means which will prevent a pull on
the cord from being directly transmitted to
joints or terminal screws.
6.7 Passing 73trough Walls and Floors
6.7.1 Where conductors pass through walls,
one of the following methods shall be em-
ployed. Care shall he taken to see that wires
pass freely through protective pipe or box
and that the wires pass through in a straight
line without any twrst or cross in wires on
either ends of such holes:
a) A wooden box extending through the
whole thickness of the wall shall be
buried in the wall and casings or con-
ductors shall be carried so as to allow
1.3cm air space on three sides of the
casing or conductor.
b) The conductor shall be carried either in
a rigid steel conduit or a rigid
non-metallic conduit conforming to
accepted standards [VIII-2(18)] or in a
porcelain tube of such a si7e which per-
mits easy drawing in.
cl Insulated conductors while passing
through floors shall be protected from
mechanical injury by means of rigid steel
conduit. non-metal conduit or me- . the board.
chanical protection to a height not less *
than 1.5-m above the floors and flush with 6.8.5 In a hinged type board, the incoming
the ceiling below. This steel conduit shall and outgoing cables shall be fixed at one or
be earthed and securely bushed.
6.7.2 Where a wall tube passes outside a
building so as to be exposed to weather, the also, i f p o s s i b l e , b e f i x e d a t t h e
outer end shall be bell-mouthed and turned
downwards and properly bushed on the open
end.
\111.2.*0
‘.
6.7.3 FIXING TO WALI.S AND CEILINGS-
plugs for ordinary walls or ceilings shall be of
seasoned wdbd-not less than 5cm long and
2.5 cm square on the inner end and 2cm
square on the outer end. They shall be
cemented into walls to within 6.5mm of the
surface, the remainder being finished
according to the nature of the surface with
plaster or lime plugging.
6.7:4 Where owing to irregular coursing or
other reasons the plugging of the walls or
ceilings with wood plugs presents difficulties,
the wood casing. wood batten, metal conduit
or cleat (as the case may be) shall be attached
to the wall or ceiling in an approved manner.
In the case of new buildings, wherever
possible, wooden plugs shall be fixed in the
walls before they are plastered; keeping in
mind the thickness of plaster to obtain a flush
surface.
6.7.5 1‘0 achieve neatness, plugging of walls
or ceilings may be done by an approved type
of asbestos metallic or a fibre fixing plug
(raw1 plugs).
6.8 Wiring qf Dislt-ihution Boards
6.8.1 All connections between pieces of
apparatus o r b e t w e e n a p p a r a t u s a n d
terminals on a board shall be neatly arranged
in a definite sequence. following the
arrangements of the apparatus mounted
thereon, avoiding unnecessary crossings.
6.8.2 Cables shall be connected to a terminal
only by soldered or welded or crimped lugs
using suitable sleeve, lugs or ferrules unless
the terminal is of such a form that it is
possible to securely clamp them without the
cutting away of cables stands. Cables in each
circuit shall be bunched together.
6.8.3 All bare conductors shall be rigidly
fixed in such a manner that a clearance of at
l e a s t 2.5cm i s m a i n t a i n e d b e t w e e n
conductors of opposite-polarity or phase and
between the conductors and any material
other than insulation material.
6.8.4 If required, a pilot lamp shall be fixed
and connected through an independent
singlepole switch and fuse to the bus-bars of
more points according to the number of
cables on the back of the board leaving
suitable space in, between cables, and shall
corresponding points on the switchboard
panel. The cables between these points shall
be of such length as to allow the switchboard
panel to swing through on angle of not less
than 90’.
6 . 9 T o u g h Ruhhcr-Sheathed
Sheathed Wiring S.wtem
6.Y. I GENERAL. --Wiring with tough
rubber-sheathed cables is suitable for low
voltage installations. and shall‘not be used in
places exposed to sun and rain nor in damp
places, unless wires are sheathed in protective
covering against atmosphere and well
protected to withstand dampness. Wiring
with PVC-sheathed cables is suitable for
medium voltage installation and may be
installed directly under exposed conditions of
sun and-rain or damp places. Where attack
from white ants is prevalent, anti-termite
treatment shall be given.
6.9.2 All sheathed cables on brick walls,
stone or plaster wallsand ceilings, steel joists,
or any structural steel work shall be run on
well-seasoned and varnished, straight teak
wood battens finished not less than IOmm
thick and the width of which is such as to suit
total width’of cables laid on the batten. Prior
to erection, these shall be painted with one
coat of varnish or suitable paint matching
with the surroundings. These battens shall be
secured to the walls and ceilings by flat-head
wood screws to wood plugs or other plugs at
an interval not exceeding 75 cm; the flat-head
wood screws shall be countersunk within
wood batten and smoothed down with file.
6.9.3 LINK C LIPS - Link clips shall conform
to accepted standards [VIII-2( Is)]. Link clips
shall be so arranged that one single clip shall
not hold more than two twin-core TRS or
PVC-sheathed cables up to I.5 mm- above
which a smgle clip shall hold a single twin-
core cable. The clips shall be fixed on
varnished wood battens with any rust
resisting pins or screws and spaced at
intervals of 1Ocm in the case of horizontal
runs and 15cm in the case of vertical runs.
For the wiring and runs of.pains exposed to
heat and rain, clips specially made for
outdoor use from a durable metal, resistant
to weather and atmospheric corrosion, shall
be used.
6.9.b PR O T E C T I O N O F T R S OR PVC-
SHI~ATHED WIRING F R O M M E C H A N I C A L
D AMAGE
a) In cases where there are chance: of .AII~
damage to the wirings, such wirings shall
be covered with sheet metal protective,
c&ering, the base of which is made flush
with the plaster orbrickwork. as the case
may be, or the wiring shall be drawn
through a conduit complying *with all
requirements of conduit wiring system
(see #6.10).
PART Y,,, BI’II.DfNC S E R V I C E S - S E C T I O N 2 ELE(‘TRI(‘AL INSTAI.I.APlOn(S
b) Such protective covering,shall in all cases
be fitted on all down-drops within l.5m.
from the floor.
or PC’C-
619.3 HFNI)s IN WIKI\\<; T h e w i r i n g s h a l l
not in any circumstances he bent so as to form
a right angle but shall be rounded off at the
corners to a radius not less than six times the
overall diameter of the cable.
6.9.6 BURIED CABLES -- ‘The tough rubber-
sheathed cables shall not be buried directly in
plaster; where so specified, they may be taken
in teak wood charinelling of ample capacity
or cement chase or conduit buried in the wall.
6.9.7 Sl RIPPING OF OlJrFtt COVERING -
While cutting and stripping of the outer
covering of the cables, care shall be takenthat
the sharp edge of the cutting instrument does
not touch the rubber or PVC-sheathed
insulation of conductors. The protective outer
covering of the cables shall be stripped of1
near connecting terminals. and this protective
covering shall be maintained up to the close
proximity of connecting terminals as far as
practicable. Care shall be taken to avoid
hammering on link clips with any metal
instruments, after the cables are laid. Where
junction boxes are provided. they shall be
made’ moisture-proof with an approved
plastic comnound.
6.9.8 PROTECTIONOF WOODE N' BAT-TENS-
All wood batten before erection shall begiven
two coats of varnish.
6.10 Conduit Wiring System
6.10.1 S URFACE C ONDUIT W IRING S Y S T E M
WITH RIGID StEEl. CONDUITS
a) TYPEANDs~zEOFC~ND~~~~ -Allconduit
pipes shall conform to accepted standards
[VIII-2( IS)], finished with galvanized or
stove enamelled surface. All. conduit
accessories shall be of threaded type and
under no circumstance pin grip type or
clamp type accessories be used. No steel
conduit less than 16 mm in diameter shall
be used. The number of insulated
conductors that can be drawn into rigid
steel conduit are given in Table 3.
b) ERANCHINGOFCABLES -Cablescarrying
direct current may, if desired be bunched
whatever their polarity but cables carrying
alternating current, if installed in metal
conduit shall always be bunched so that
the outgoing and return cables are drawn
into the same conduit.
4 CONDUIT JOINTS --Conduit pipes shall
be joined by means of screwed couplers
91
VIII-?.
 TAB1.E 3 MAXIMtiM PERMISSIB1.E NUMBER OF 25OV G R A D E S I N G L E - C O R E C A B L E S
7HAI CAN BE DRAWN INTO RlGlD STEEL COXDUITS

(Clause 6.10.1)
SUE OF CALlI E SIZE OF CO N D U I T fmml I

A h
‘Nominal Cro\s- Number and Dia-’ / 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 3
Sectional Area meter (in mm) (Number of Cables,’ MUX)
mm’ of Wires
ti~YY?ti~$Yv?-Y?

I.0 1; 1.12’ 5 4 7 5 13 IO 20 14 - - - - - -
I.5 I/ I.40 4 3 7 5 12 10 20 14 - - - - - -
2-s
3 2 0 5 IO 8 18 12 - - - - - -

4
3 2 4 3 7 8 12 10 -- - - - - -

6 10 8 _ _ ~~ _ _ _
2 -. 3 2 6 5

IO ~~ 2 _. 5 4 8 7 __ _ _ _ _ _
- 2 - 4 3 6 5 8 6 - - - -

16 7 I.70 2 - 4 3 1 6 - - - -
2 5 7 2.24 -~ 3 2 5 4 8 6 9 7
35 7 2.50 ._ 2 -- 4 3 7 5 8 6
50 -- 2. -- 5 4 6 5

NOII I I he table \h,lwr the maxImum capacity of conduits for the simultaneously drawing of cables. The columns
headed S apply 10 runs of condu~c H hlch have distance not exceeding 4.25 m between draw-in boxes, and which do
not deflect Irom the slralght by an ;~nple of more than IY I-he columns headed B apply to runs of conduit which
dellcct Irom rhe ktralghf by an .~nglc of more than 15”.

No~t 2 In ca\c an ~nspcct~cln typr draw-In box has been provided and if the cable is first drawn through one
ctrcllght condu~r. then through the draw-ln box. and then through the second straqht conduit, such systems may be
com~dcrcd 35 that 01 a \tr.~lphr ct~ndu~t even If the condulr deflects through the straight by more than 15’.

cind screwed a c c c s s 0 r I e s only PRO7ECTlON Of- C O N D U I T A G A I N S T

[SN VIII-2( IS)]. In iong distance straight
runs ol’ conduit. inspcxzlion type couplers
at reasonable intervals shall be provided
or r u n n i n g t h r e a d s w i t h c o u p l e r s a n d
jam-nuts (in the latter cast the bare
threadelf portion shall be treated w~f h
arIck-rorrosive preservative) shall be
provided. Threaded on conduit pipes in
all cases shall be between I I mm to
27mm long sufficient to accommodate
pipes to full threaded portion of couplers
or accessories. Cut ends of conduit pipes
shall have no sharp edges nor any burrs
left to avoid damage to the insulation of
conductors while pulling them through
such p&ides.
PROTECI-ION A G A I N S T DAMPNEbs -- In
order to minimize condensation or
sweating inside the tube, all outlets of
conduit system shall be properly drained
and ventilated, but in such a manner as to
.prevent the’ ,entry of insects as far as
possible.
33LL
\ II,-?-
KL~SI ~~- The outer surface of the conduit
pipes, including all bends, unions, tees,
junction boxes, etc, forming part of the
conduit system shall be adequately
protected against rust particularly when
such system is exposed to weather. In all
cases, no bare threaded portion of
conduit pipe shall be allowed unless such
bare thceaded portion is treated with anti-
corrosive presenrative or covered with
suitable plastic compound.
FIXIN<; OFC‘ONDl!IT -Conduit pipesshall
be fixed by heavy gauge saddles, secured
to suitable wood plugs or other plugs with
screw5 In an approved manner at an
Interval of not more than one metre, but
on either side of couplirs or bends or
similar fittings. saddles shall be fixed at a
distance of 30cm from the centre of such
fittings. The saddle should not be less than
0.56mm f o r c o n d u i t s up t o 2 5 m m
diameter and not less than 0.9mm for
larger diameter.
NATIOSAL Bl’II.DINC (ODE O F JNDIA
g) BENDS IN CONDUIT -All necessary bends
in the system including diversion shall be
done by bending pipes; or by .inserting
suitable solid or insDection tvoe normal
bends, elbows or similar fittings; or fixing
cast iron inspection boxes whichever is
more suitable. Conduit fittings shall be
avoided as far as possible on conduit
system exposed to wealher; where
necessary, solid type fittings shall be used.
Radius of such bends in conduit pipes
shall be not less than 7.5cm. No length of
conduit shall have more .than the
equivalent ,of four quarter bends frdh
out@ to outlet, the bends at the outlets
not being counted.
h) OUTLETS--The switch or regulator box
shall be made of metal on all sides, except
on the front. In the case of cast boltes, wall
thickness shall be atleast 3 mm and in case
of welded mild steel sheet boxes, the wall
thickness shall not be less thah 1.18mm
for boxes upto a size of 20 cm X 30 cm and
above this I .6 mm MS boxes shall be used.
Clear depth of the box shall not be less
than 60mm and this shall be increased
suitably to accommodate mounting of fan
regulators in flush pattern. All fittings
shall be filled in flush pattern. All switches
except piano key type switches, socket
outlets and fan regulators shall be fixed on
wooden/metal strips which shall be
screwed or welded to the box.
9 C O N D U C T O R S -All conductors used in
conduit wiring shall preferably be
stranded. No single-core cable of nominal
cross-sectional area greater than 130 mm*
enclosed alone in a conduit andused for
alternating current.
W ERECTION AND EARTHING OF CONDUIT -
The conduit of each circuit orsection shall
be completed before conductors are
drawn in. The entire’system of conduit
after erection shall be tested for
mechanical and electrical contin,uity
throughout and permanently connected to
earth conforming to the requirements as
already specified by means of suitable
earthing clamp efficiently fastened to
c nduit pjpe in a workman like manner
f r a perfect contimty between each wire
ind conduit. Gas or water pipes shall not
be used as earth medium. If conduit pipes
are liable to mechanical damage they shall
be adequately protected. In a conduit
system pipe must be continuous when
passing through walls or floors.
m) lnspeetion type conduit fittings,-such as
inspection boxes, dra’w boxes, bends.
elbows and tees shall be so installed that
they can remain accessible for such
?ART till BUILDING SCRVICFS-SECTION 2 El.C<‘TRKAI.
purposes as to withdrawal of .existmg
cables or the installing of traditional
cables.
6 . 7 0 . 2 RE C E S S E D C O ND U I T W I R I N G
SYSTEM WI T H RGID ST E EL Comut-r-
Recessed conduit wiring system shall comply
with al! the requirements for surface conduit
wiring system specified in 6.10.1 (a) to Q)
and in addition, conform to the requirements
specified below:
4 M A K I N G OF C H A S E- - T h e chase in the
wall shall be neatly made and be of ample
dimensions to permit the conduit to be
fixed in the manner desired. In the case of
buildings under construction, chases shall
be provided in the wall, ceiling, etc. at the
time of their con&uction and shall be
filled up neatly after erection of conduit
and brought to the original finish of the
wall. In case of exposed brick/rubble
masonry work, special care shall be taken
to fix the conduit and accessories in
position along with the building work.
OF CONDUIT IN CHAFE-The
b) FIXING
conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of
staples or by means of saddlesnot more
than 60cm apart. Fixing of standard
bends or elbows shall be avoided as far as
practicable and all curves maintained by
bending the conduit pipe itself with a long
radius which will permit easy drawing-in
of conductors..-AIll threaded joints of rigid
steel conduit shall be treated with
preservative compound to secure
protection against rust.
4 INSPE C T I ON BOXES -Suitable inspection
boxes shall be provided to permit
periodical inspection and to facilitate
removal of wires, if necessary. These shall
be mounted flush with the wall. Suitable
veniilafing holes shall be provided in the
inspection box covers. The minimum
sizes of inspection boxes shall be 75 mm X
75mm. Minimum 65mm depth boxes
shall be used in roof slabs and the depth
of boxes in other places shall be in
accordance with good practice
[VW2(20)].
4 TYPkS OF ACCESSORIES TO BE USED --All
outlet, such as switches and wall sockets,.
may be either of flush mounting type or
of surface mounting type.
i) FLU.SH M O U N T I N G TYPE-All f l u s h
mounting outlets shall be of cast-iron
or mild steel boxes with a cover of
insulating material or shall be. a box
made of a suitable insulating material.
The switches and other outlets shall be
mounted on such boxes. Tht! metal
box shall be efficiently earthed with-
conduit by a suitable means of earth
attachment.
lNSTAI.l.ATIOSS vIII-?.ad ’
 ‘.

ii) SURFACE MOUNTING TYPE-If Surface
mounting type outlet box is specified,
it shall be of any suitable insulating
material and outlets mounted in an
approved manner.
6.10.3.3 WIRING CAPACITY - The maximum
number of PVC insulated alumjnium
conductor cable of 250 voltage grade that can
be drawn in one conduit of various sizes is
given in Table 4.

6.10.3 NON - METALLIC S URFACE C O N D U I T 6 . 1 0 . 3 . 4 B U N C H I N G O F CABI.ES -For e a s e o f

W IRING
6./0.3.f TYPE AND SIZE OF CONDUITS--All
rigid non-metallic conduits used shall
conform to accepted standards [VIII-2( IS)]
and shall be used with c o r r e s p o n d i n g
accessories [see VIII-2(20)]. All flexible non-
metallic conduits shall conform to accepted
standards [VIII-2( 18)]. The conduits’ shall
provide adequate mechanical protection for
the enclosed cables. The interior of the
conduits shall be free from obstructions.
Flexible non-metallic conduits shall be used
only at terminations, wherever specified.
The conduits shall be circular in cross-
section. The conduits shall be designated by
their nominal outside diameter.
The dimensional details of Kigid non-
metallic conduits are given in Table 4.
The conduit wiring system shall be complete
in all respect including accessories.
No non-metallic conduit less than 20mm in
diameter shall be used.
6.10.3.2 C O N D U I T A C C E S S O R I E S - Kigid
conduit accessories shall be normally of grip
type. Flexible conduit accessories shall be of
threaded type.
maintenance, cables carrying direct current
or alternating current shall always be
bunched so that the out-going and return
cables are drawn into the same conduits.
6.10.3.5 CONDUIT .lOINTS --All joints shall
b e sealedicemented w i t h a n a p p r o v e d
cement. Damaged conduit pipes/ fittings
shall not be used on the tiork. Cut ends of
conduit pipes shall have no sharp edges nor
any burrs left to avoid damage to the
insulation of conductors while pulling them
through such pipes.
The Engineer-in-Charge with a view to
ensuring that the above provision has been
carried out may require that the separate
lengths of conduit,etc,after they have been
prepared, shall be submitted for inspection
before being fixed.
6.10.3.6 PRO7EC‘FION AGAINST C O N D E N S A -
TION- The layout of conduit should be such
that any condensation or sweating inside the
conduit is drained out. Suitable precaution
shall also be taken to prevent entry of insects
inside the conduit.
6.10.3.7 P.AINTING - After installation all
accessable surface of metallic-accessories
shall be painted.

1ABL.E 4 MAXIMUM PERMISSIB1.E Nl’MBFR OF 250 VOI:IS GRADE SINGL.E~CORE CABLES THAT
MAY BE DRAWN IN.10 RIGID NOS.MF 1 Al l.I(‘ COKl)I’ll-S

SlZt OF CABI F SI/I Ot CO\l)tLl t (mm)

A fi

‘Nommal Cross- Number and’ r16 xl 2.5 32 40 50’

Secttonal Area Diameter (in ‘Vumher ol cables. .k!ax)
mm’ mm) of Wires
I .o I I.121 5 7 I3 2Q _

I-S I I.40 4 6 IO I4 - -

2.5 ( I 1.80) 3 5 IO I4 7 -
( 3 1.06’)
4 (I, 2.24) 2 7 h IO 14 -
(7.0,85*)
6 (I 2.80) _ 2 5 9 II -
( 7 1.40’)
IO ( I 3.5st1 - 4 7 9 -
(7 I40*)
I6 7 I.70 _ 2 4 5 I2
25 7 2.24 _ 2 2 6
35 7 2.50 _ - 2 5
50 7 3.0ot _ - 2 5
I9 I.80 -. _ _ 2 3
*For copper rondurtors onl!
For alummlum conductor\ only.
._

vttt.2.24 NATIONAL Bt ILDIYC <‘DDE OF ISDIA

6.10.3.8 FIXING OF CONDUIT
4 Conduit pipes shall, be fixed by heavy
gauge non-metallic saddles, secured to
suitable wood plugs or other approved
plugs with screws in an approved manner
at an interval of not more than 6Ocm. but
on either side of couplers or bends o r
similar fittings saddles shall be fixed at a
closer distance from the centre of such
fittings.
b) Where conduit pipes are to be laid along
the trusses, steel joists, etc, the same shall
be secured by means of ordinary clips or
girder clips as required by the Engineer-
in-Charge where it is not possible to drill
holes in the truss members, suitable
clamps with bolts and nuts shall be used.
The width and the thickness of the
ordinary clips or girder clips shall not be
less than as stated below:
For clamps or ordinary clips:
Size of Width of Thkkness
Con&it Saddle C?ip q/ (‘lip
20-25 m m I9 mm O.Y2 mm
32 mm and 25 mm 0.12 mm
above
6 . 1 0 . 3 . 9 Girde, c/rp~~-~ For all sizes 01
conduit. the sire ofclamping rod may be 7 mm
diameter.
6.10.3.9 B EN DS IN coNDi;Ir -All bends i n
the system may be formed either by bending
the pipes by an approved method of heaiing
or by inserting suitable accessories such as
bends, elbows or similar fittings or by fixing
non-metallic inspection boxes whichever is
most suitable. Where necessary solid type
fittings shall be used.
Radius of bends in conduit pipes shall not be
less than 7.5cm. No length of conduit shall
have more than the equivalent of four
quarter bends from outlet to outlet.
Care shall be taken while bending the pipes to
ensure that the conduit pipe is not injured and
that the informal diameter is not effectively
reduced.
6.10.3 10 OUTLETS -The switch box shall
be made of either rigid PVC moulding or
mild steel or cast iron on all sides except at
the front.
PVC boxes- shall conform to accepted
standards [VIII-2(20)] These boxes shall be
free from burrs, fins and internal roughness.
The thickness of the walls and base of PVC
boxes shall be not less than 2mm. The clear
depth of PVC boxes shall not be less than
50 mm.
PART VIII Bl!II.UIN(j SERVK’M--SECTION 2 EI.L(‘TRM Al. INSTAI.I.ATIONS
The specifications ror meraruc ooxes shall be
as per requirements of 6.10.1(h).
The regulator boxes shall h6wever be made
of only mild steel or cast iron.
The phenolic laminated sheet govers for all
All tittings shall be fitted in flush pattern.
6.10.3.11ERECTION OF CONDUIT AND
EARTHING OF METALLIC ACCESSORIES -
The erection of conduits of each circuit shall
be completed before the cables are drawn-in.
An earth continuity conductor shall be
drawn inside the conduit to provide for
earthing of noncurrent carrying metallic
parts of the installation. Gas or water pipe
shall not be used as earth medium.
6.10.3.12 SPECIAL. PRECAUTIONS-If the
pipes are liable to mechanical damages, they
should be adequately protected.
Non-metallic conduit shall not be used for
the following applications:
a) in concealed; inaccessible places of
combustible construction where aabient
temperature exceeds 60°C;
b) in places where ambient temperature is
less than 5°C;
cl for suspension of fluorescent fittings and
other fixtures; and
d) in the areas exposed to sunlight.
6.10.4 NON-MEIALLIC RECESSED C O N D U I T
W IRING SvsrtM
6.10.4.1 Recessed non-metallic conduit
wiring system shall comply with all the
requirements of surface non-metallic conduit
wiring system specified in 6.103. I to 6.10.3.12
except 6.10.3.8. In addition, the following
requirements 6. /0.4.2 to 6.10.4.6 also shall be
complifd with.
6.10.4.2 FIXING OF CONDUIT IN CHASE-
The conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of
stapples or by means of non-metallic saddles
placed at not more than 80cm apart or by
any other approved means of fixing. Fixing
of standard bends or elbows shall be avoided
as far as practicable and all curves shall be
maintained.by sending the conduit pipe itsdlf
with a long radius which will permit easy
drawing in of conductors. At either side of
bends, saddles/stapples shall be fixed at a’
distance of 15cm from the centre of bends.
6.10.4.3 I N S P E C T IO N BOXES - S u i t a b l e
inspection boxes to the, nearest minimum
requirements shall be provided to permit
periodical inspection and to facilitate
“II,.*3
replacement of wires, if necessary. The
inspection ‘junction boxes shall be mounted
flush with the wall or ceiling concrete. Where
necessary deeper. boxes of suitable
dimensions shall be used. Suitable ventilating
holes shall be provided in the inspection box
covers, where required.
6.10.4.4 The outlet boxes such as switch
boxes, regulator boxes and their phenolic
laminated sheet covers shall be as per
requirements of 6.10.3. I(h).
They shall be mounted flush with the wall.
6.10.4.5 TYPES OF A(‘cESSoKIrS TO R F
USED--- All outlets such as switches. wall
sockets, etc. may be either flush mounting
type or of surface mounting type.
7. FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
7.1 Ceiling Hoses and Similar Attachments
7.1.1 A ceiling rose or any other similar
attachment shall not be used on a circuit the
voltage of which normally exceeds 25OV.
‘7.l.2 Normally, only one flexible cord shall
be attached to a ceil’mg rose E>cciaIIy
designed ceiling roses shall be used for
multiple pendants.
7.1.3 A ceiling rose shall not embody fuse
terminal as an integral part of It.
7.2 Socket-Outlets and Phqy -- Each I5 A
socket-outlet provided in bulldings for the
use of domestic appliances such as air-
conditioner. Hater cooler. etc. shall he
provided with Its obn mdl\ldual fuse. with
suitable discrimination with back-up fuse or
miniature circuit-breaker prmlded In the
distribution, sub-distribution board. The
socket-outlet shall not necessarily embody
the fuse as an integral part of it.
7.2.1 Each socket-outlet shall also be
controlled by a switch which shall preferably
be located immediately adjacent thereto or
combined therewith.
7.2.2 The switch controlling the socket-
outlet shall be on the live side of the line.
7.2.3 Qrdinary socket-outlet may be ‘fixed at
any convenient place at a height above 20cm
from the floor level and shall be away from
danger of mechanical injury.
NoTE~I~ situations where a socket-outlet is accessible
to children, it is necessary to install an interlocked plug
and socket or alternatively a socket-butkt which
automatically gets screened by the withdrawal of plug.
In industrial premises socket-outlet of rating 2OA and
Vlll-2-26
above shall preferably be provided with interlocked type
switch.
7.2.4 In an earthed system of supply, a
socket-outlet with plug shall be of three-pin
type with.the third terminal connected to the
earth. When such socket-outlets with plugs
are connected to any current consuming
device of metal or any non-insulating
material or both, conductors connecting such
current-consuming devices shall be of flexible
cord with an earthing core and the earthing
core shall be secured by connecting between
the earth terminal of plug and the body of
current-consuming devices.
In industrial premises three phase and
neutral socket-outlets shall be provided with
a earth terminal either of pin type or
scrapping type in addition to tht: main pins
required for the purpose.
7.2.5 In wiring installations, metal clad
switch, socket-outlet and plugs shall be used
for power wiring.
?iOlt A recommended schedule of socket-outlets in a
rcsldential bulldog IS given below:
(one for .each)
I per IOm’ I
I I
7.3 Lighting Fittings
7.3.1 A switch shall be provided for control
of every lighting fitting or a group of lighting
fittings. Where control at more than one
point is necessary as many two way or
intermediate switches may be provided as
there are control points.
7.3.2 In industrial premises lighting fittings
Shall be su ported by suitable pipe/conduits,
brackets Pabricated from structural steel,
steel chains or similar materials depending
upon the type and weight of the fittings.
Where a lighting fitting is supported by
one or more flexible -cords, the maximuq
weight to which the twin flexible cords may
be subjected shall be as follows:
N A T I O N A L IJUILDIN~ (‘DDE 6F INDIA

Nominal Number Maximum
cross- and Dia- Permissible
Secrional Area meter in Weight
of Twin mm of
Flexible Wires
Cord
mm* * 4
1610.2
8% 24 10.2 3’
I:0 3210.2
1.5 4810.2 5.:
2.5 8Oi 0.2 8.8
4 128iO.2 14.0
7.3.3 No flammable shade shall form a part
of lighting fittings unless such shade is well
protected against all risks of fire. Celluloid
shade or lighting fitting shall not be used
under any circumstances.
7.3.4 General and safety requirements for
electrical lighting fittings shall be in
accordance with good practice [VIII-2(21)].
7.3.5 The lighting fittings shall conform to
accepted standards [VIII-2(9)].
7.4 Fitting- Wire--The use of fittings-wire
shall be restricted to the internal wiring of the
lighting fittings. Where fittings-wire is used
for wiring fittings, the sub-circuit loads shall
terminate in a ceiling rose or box with
connectors from which they shall be carried
into the fittings.
7.5 Lumpholders--Lampholders for use on
brackets and the like shall be in.accordance
with accepted standards [VIII-2(22)] and all
those for use with flexible pendants shall be
provided with cord grips. All lampholders
shall be provided with shade carriers. Where
centre-contact Edison screw lampholders are
used, !he outer or screw contacts shall be
connected to the ‘middle wire’, the neutral, the
earthed conductor of the circuit.
7.6 Outdoor Lumps-External and road
lamps shall have weatherproof fittings of
approved design so as to effectivelyljrevent
the ingress of moisture and dust. Flexible cord
and cord grip lampholders shall not be used
where exposed to weather. In verandahs and
similar exposed situations where pendants are
uspd, these. shall be of fixed rod type.
7!7 Lumps-All lamps unless otherwise
required and suitably protected, shall be
hung at a height. of not less than 2.5 m above
the floor _kvel. All electric lamps and
accessories shall conform to accepted
staitdards [VIII-2(23)].
a) Portabk lamps shall be wired with
flexible cord. Hand lamps shall be
equipped with a handle of moulded
PART VIII WlLDINC S~3WICFS--Sf?CTl0N 2 IWXTRICAI.
,’
‘.
..
composition or other material approved
for the purpose. Hand lamps shall be
equipped with a substantial guard
attached to the lampholder or handle.
Metallic guards shall be earthed suitably.
b) A bushing or the .equivalent shall be
provided where flexible cord enters the
base or stem of portable lamp. The
bushing shall be of insulating material
unless a jacketted type of cord is used.
cl All wiring shall be free from short-circuits
and shall be tested for these defects prior
to being connected to the circuit.
d) Exposed live parts within porcelain
fixtures shall be suitably recessed and so
located as to make it improbable that
wires will come in contact with them.
There shall be a spacing of at least
125 mm between live parts and the
mounting plane of the fixture.
7.8 Fans, Regulators and Clamps
.7.8.1 CEILING F ANS
-Ceiling fans including
their suspension shall conform to accepted
standards [VllI-2(24)] and to the following
requirements:
4 Control of a ceiling fan shall be through
its own regulator as well as a switch in
series.
b; All ceiling fans shall be wired with normal
wiring to ceiling roses .or to special
connector boxes to which fan rod wires
shall be connected and suspended from
hooks or shackels with insulators between
hooks and suspension rods. l‘here shall be
no joint in the suspension rod, butifjoints
are unavoidable then such joints shall be
screwed to special couplers of Scm
minimum length and both ends of the
pipes shall touch together within the
couplers, and shall in addition be secured
by means of split pins; alternatively, the
two pipes may be welded. The suspension
rod shall be of adequate strength to
withstand the dead and impact forces
imposed on it. Suspension rods should
preferably be procured along with the fan.
d Fan clamps shall be of suitable design
according to the nature of construction of
ceiling on which these clamps are to be
fitted. In all cases fan clamps shall be
fabricated from new metal of suitable
sizes and they shall be as close fitting as
possible. Fan clamps for reinforced
concrete roofs shall be buried with ‘the
casting and due care shall be taketi that
they shall serve the purpose. Fan clamps
for wooden beams, shall be of suitable
flat iron fixed on, two sides of the beam
and according to the size and sectiou of
~NSTALLkTlONS VIII-2-- ’
 the beam one or two mild steel bolts
passing through the beam shall hold both
flat irons together. Fan clamps for steel
joist shall be fabricated from flat iron to
fit rigidly to the bottom flange of the
beam. Care shall.. be taken during
fabrication that the metal does not crack
while hammering to shape. Other fan
clamps shall be made to suit the position,
but in all cases care shall be taken to see
that they are rigid and safe.
A Typical arrangement of a fan clamp is
given in Fig.‘,
NOTE-AH fan clamps shall be so fabricated that fans
revolve steadily
2B Slab with Beam
All dimensions in millimetres.
NOTE I - RCC slab steel reinforcement not shown.
NOTE 2 - Fan clamp shall be placed in position such
that its projecting arms in the line of lenght of beam.
Fig, 2 Tvpical Design of Fan Clamps
4 Canopies on top and bottom of
suspension rods shall effectively conceal
suspensions and connections to fan
motors, respectively.
e) The lead-in-wire shall be of nominal
cross-sectional area not less than 1 .O mm*
copper or l.5mm2 aluminium and shall
be protected from abrasion.
0 Unless otherwise specified, the clearance
between the bottom most point. of the
ceiling fan and the floor shall be not less
vIII-2-L0
than 2.4m. The minimum clearance
between the ceiling and the plane of the
blades shall be not less than 3OOmm.
7 . 8 . 2 E X H A U S T F A N S - F o r fixing of an
exhaust fan, a circular hole shall be provided
in the wall to suit the size of the frame which
shall be fixed by means of rag-bolts
embedded in the wall. The hole shall be
neatly plastered with cement and brought to
the original finish of the wall. The exhaust
fan shall be connected to exhaust fan point.
which shall be wired as near to the hole as
possible by means of a flexible cord, care
being taken that the blades rotate in the
proper direction.
7.9 Artachmenr of Fittings and Accessories
7.9.1 In wiring other than conduit wiring, all
ceiling roses, brackets, pendants and
accessories attached to walls or ceilings shall
be mounted on substantial teak wood blocks
twice varnished after all fixing holes are
made in them. Blocks shall npt be less than
4 cm deep. Brass screws shall only be used for
attaching fittings and accessories to their
base blocks.
7.9.2 Where teak or hardwood boards are
used for mounting switches, regulators, etc,
these boards shall be well varnished with
pure shellac on ail four sides (both inside and
outside), irrespective of being painted to
match the surroundings. The size of such
boards shall depend on the number of
accessories that could conveniently and
neatly be arranged. Where there is danger of
attack by white ants, the boards shall be
treated with suitable anti-termite compound
and painted on both sides.
7.10 Inrerchangeabilily-Similar part of all
switches, lampholders, distribution fuse-
boards, ceiling roses, brackets, pendants,
fans and all other fittings shall be so chosen
that they are of the same type and inter-
changeable in each installation.
7.11 Equipmenr-Electrical equipment
which form integral part of wiring intended
for switching or control or protection of
wiring installations shall conform to the
relevant Indian Standards wherever they
exist.
7.12 Fannage
7.12.1 Where ceiling fans are provided, the
bay sizes of a building, which control fan
point locations, play an important part.
7.12.2 Fans normally cover an area of 9 m2 to
10 m2 and therefore in general purpose office
NATIONAL WILDING COOE OF INDIA
 ‘.

buildings, for every part of a bay to’be served
by the ceiling fans, it is necessary that the bays
shall be so designed that full number of fans
could be suitably located for the bay,
otherwise it will result in ill-ventilated
pockets. In general, fans in long halls may be
spaced at 3m in both the directions. If
building modules do not lend themselves for
proper positioning of the required number of
ceiling fans, other types of fans, such as air
circulators or bracket fans would have to be
employed for the areas uncovered by the
ceiling fans. For this, suitable electrical outlets
6.30mm MS ROD7 /Cl COVER HINGED
3cm-rl ,_
CEMENT CONCRETE
shall be provided although result will be
disproportionate to cost on account of fans.
7.12.3 Proper air circulation could be
achieved either by larger number of snialler
fans or smaller number of-larger fans. The
economics of the system as a whole should be
a guiding factor in choosiiig the number and
type of fans and their locations.
7.12.4 Exhaust fans are necessary for spaces,
such as community toilets, kitchens and
canteens, and godowns to provide tbe
/ / TOCl FRAME’

.25cm

;y.ol i: 1.25m
I.:.‘.:.
1 l2.7mm4 II W . .2.. :, ,*_ , ‘.s ’ 2.km M,iN
I

,J( CHARCOAt LAY,7 l/l v IYrnm 4 GI P I P E

i

12mm4 ,c
HOLE -J

NOTE -Three or four buckets of water lo be ~OUKXI into sump everyfewdaysto keep thesoilsurroundmgtheearth p&te
or pipe permanently moist.

Fig. 3 Pip L&thing

I-AR, VIII BI!II.D#NC SIXIVKXS-SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS V,llP ,

required number ol’ air changes (see Part VII I
Building services, Section 1 Lighting and
ventilation). Since the exhaust fans are
located generally on the outer walls of a
room, appropriate openings in such walls
shall be provided fopin the planning stage.
7.12.5 Positioning of fans and light fittings
shall be chosen to make these effective
without causing shadows on the working
planes.
8, EARTHING
8.1 Gene&-The object of an earthing
sys!em is to provide as nearly as possible a
system o!’ conductors at a uniform potential
and as nearly zero or absolute earth potential
as possible. l‘hc purpose of this is to ensure
that in general all parts of apparatils other
than live parts shall be at earth potential as
630mm MS ROD I COVER HINGED
TO Cl FRAME
wel! as to ensure that persons coming in
contact with rt shall also bea’t earth potential
at. all times.
8.1.1 Earthing associated with current-
carrying conductor is normally essential for
the security of the system and is generally
known as system earthing, while earthing of
non-current carrying. metal work and
conductor is essenttal for the safety of human
life, of animals and of property and it is
generally known as equipment earthing.
8.2 EorrA El~trodcs -- Earth electrode ,
either in the ‘form of pipe electrode or plate
eiectrode should be provided at all premises
f’or providing an earth system. Details of
typical pipe and plate earth electrodes are
grven in Fig. 3 and 4.
8.3 As far ds possibie. all earth connections
shall he visible for inspection and shall be

c0tENf CONCRETE 12.9 mm 9

r GI PIPE

BOLT. NUT. CHECK WJT

AHD WASHER TO BE OF
COPPER FOR COPPER PuTE
AW W FOR Gl PLATE -

60~60cmfiS~Xtrnrn

60 x 6Ccm E 3-15
COPPER PLATE

E N L A R G E D DETAIL A

carefully made; if they are poorly made or
indequate for the purpose for which they are
intended, loss of life and property or serious
personal injury may result.
8.4 Equipment and Portions of Installations
which shall be Earthed
8.4.1 E QUIPMENT TO BE EARTHED - Except
for equipment provided with double
insulation, all the non-current carrying metal
parts of electrical installations are to be
earthed properly. All metal conduits,
trunking, cable sheaths, switchgear,
distribution fuseboards, lighting fittings and
all other parts made of metal shall be bended
toghether and connected by means of two
separate and distinct conductcrs to an
efficient earth electrtode.
8.4.2 S T R U C T U R A L ME T A L W O R K -
Earthing of the metallic parts shall not be
effected through any structural metal work
which houses the installation. Where metallic
parts of the installation are not required to be
earthed and are liable to become alive should
the insulations of conductors become
defective, such metallic parts shall be
separated by durable non-conducting
material from any.structural work.
8.5 System of ‘Earthing - Equipment and
p.ortions of installations shall be deemed to be
earthed only if earthed in accordance with
either the direct earthing system, the multiple
earthed neutral system or the earth,leakage
circuit-breaker system. In all cases,‘the relvant
provisions of Rules 33 and 61 of theIndiun
Electricity Rules, 1956 (see Appendix B) shall
be complied with.
8.6 The earthing of electrical installations for
non-industrial and industrial buildings shall
be done in accordance with good practice
[vlll-2(3s)J.
9. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF
INSTALLATION
9. I General Requirements
9.1 .i Before the completed installation, or an
add’tion to the existing installation, is put into
ser ‘ice, inspection and testing shall be carried
oui in accordance with the Indian Electricig
Rules. 1956. In the event of defects being
found, these shall be rectified. as soon as
practicable and the installation retested.
9.1.2 Periodic inspection and testing shall be
carried out in order to maintain the
installation in a sound condition af$r putting
into service.
9.1.2 Where an addition is to be made to the
fixed wiring of an existing installation, the
PAW 1 III SI’ILPiN(; SERVK’lli-SfCTlOh 2 ELFKTRICAL
‘.
. i
latter shall be examined for compliance with
the recommendations of the Code.
911.4 The individual equipment and
matterials which form part of the installation
shall generally conform to the relevant
Indian Standard Specification whereever
applicable. If there is no relevant Indian
Standard Specification for any item, these
shall be approved by the appropriate
authority.
9.1.5 C OMPLETION D RAWINGS - O n
completion of the ‘electric work, a wiring
diagram shall be prepared and submitted to
the engineer-in-charge or the owner. All
wiring diagrams shall indicate clearly, the
main switch board, the runs of various mains
and submains and the position of all points
and their controls. All circuits shall be clearly
indicated and numbered in the wiring
diagram and all points shall be given the
same number as the circuit in which they are
electrically connected. Also the location and
number of earth points and the run of each
loads should bc clearly shown in the
completion drawings.
9.2 Inspection of the Installation
9.2.1 GE N E R A L -- On completioin of wiring
a general inspection shall be carried out by
competent persofin31 in- order to varify that
the provisions of this Code and that of Indian
Electricit)* Rules, 1956 have been complied
with. This, among other things. shall include
checking whether all equipments, fittings,
accessories, wires/ cables, used in the
installation are of adequate rating and
quality to meet the requirement of the load.
General workmanship of the electrical wiring
with regard to the layout and finish shall be
examined for neatness that would facilitate
easy identification of circuits of the system,
adequacy of clearances, soundness, contact
pressure and contact area. A complete check
shall also be made of all the protective
devices, with respect to their ratings, range of
settings and co-ordination between the
various protective devices.
9.2.2 ITEM TO BE INSPECTED
9.2.2.1 SUBSTATION INSTALLATIONS - In
substation intallations, it shall be checked
whether:‘
I)
The installatton has been carried out in
accordance with the approved drawings;
2) Phase to phase *and phase to earth
clearances are provided as required;
3) All equipments are efficiently earthed
and properly connected to the required
number of earth electrodes;
INSTALLATlONS VIII-21 .
 4J The requued ground clearance to live-
terminals is provided;
5) Suitable fencing is provided with gate
with lockable arrangements;
6) The required number of caution boards
tire-fighting equipments, operating rods,
rubber mats, etc, are kept in the
substation;
7j ln case of indoor substation sufficient
ventilation and draining arrangements
are made;
All cable trenches are provided with non-
inflammable covers;
P’ree accessibility is provided for all
equipments for normal operation;
All name plates are fixed and the
equipments are fully painted;
A l l c o n s t r u c t i o n materia1.s a n d
temporary connections are removed;
Oil-level, bus bar tightness, transformer
tap position, etc. are in order;
Earth pipe. troughs and cover slabs are
provided for earth electrodes/earth pits
alld the neutral and LA earth pits are
marked for easy identification;
14) Earth electrodes are of GI pipes or Cl
pipes Jr copper piates. For earth
connections. brass bolts arrd nuts with
lead washers are provided in the
pi[Jes, pk+teS;
15) Earth pipe troughs and oil surnps~ pits are
free from rubbish and dirt and stone jelly
and the earth connections are visible and
easily accessible;
tl’l‘ and LT panels and switchgears are all
vermin and damp-proof and all unused
openings or holes are blocked properly;
17) ‘l’he e a r t h b u s ‘ b a r s h a v e t i g h t
connections and corrosion-free joint
surfaces;
18) Control switch-fuses are provided at an
accessible height from ground;
1’)) Auequate headroom is available in the
transformer room for easy topping-up of
oil, maintenance, etc;
20) Safety devices. horizontal and vertical
barriers. bus bar covers; shrouds,
automatic safety shutters/doors
interlock. handle interlock arc safe and in
reliable operation in all panels and
cubicles;
21) Cleara’ces in the front, rear and sides of
the mais HV and LT and sub-switch
boards are adequate;
23) The switches operate freely; the 3 blades
make contact at the same time, the arcing
horns contact in advance; and the handles
are provided with locking arrangements;
24) Insulators are free from cracks, and are
clean;
25) In transformers, there. is any oil lcalr;
26) Connections to bushing in transformers
for tightness and good contact;
27) Bushings are free from cracks and are
clean;
28) Accessories of transformers like
breathers, vent pipe, buchholz relay, etc,
are in order;
29) Connections to gas relay in trahsformers
are in order;
30) Oil and winding temperature are set for
specific requirements in transformers;
31) In case of cable tellers, a d e q u a t e
arrangements to pump out water that has
entered due to seepage or other reasons;
and
32) All incoming and outgoing circuits of HT
and LT panels are clearly and indelibly
labelled for identifications.
9.2.2.2 MEDIUM VOLTAGE INSTALLATION -
In medium voltage installtions, it shall be
checked whether:
I) All blocking materials that are used for
safe transportation in switchgears,
contactors, relays, etc. are removed;
2) All connections to the earthing system
are feasible for periodical inspcctlon;
3) Sharp cable bends are avoided and cables
arc taken in a smooth manner in the
trenches or alongside the walls and
ceilings using suitable support clamps at
regular intervals;
4) Suitable linked switch or circuit breaker
or lockable push b,utton is provided near
the motors/apparatus for controlling
supply to the motor/apparatus in an
easily accessible location;
5) Two separate and distinct earth connec-
tions are provided for the motor
apparatus;
6) Control switch-fuse is provided at an
accessible height from ground for
controlling supply to overhead travelling
crane, hoists, overhead bus bar trunking;
7) The metal rails on which the crane
travels are electrically continuous and
earthed and bonding of rails and
earthing at both ends are done;
8) ‘Four core cables are used for overhead
travelling crane and portable
equipments, the fourth core being used
for earthing, and separate supply for
lighting circuit is taken,
9) If flexible metallic hose is used for wiring
to motors and other equipment, tk
NATIONAL BUILLUNC COOE OF INDIA
 wiring is enclosed to the full lengths, and
the hose secured properly by approved
means;
10) The cables are not taken through areas
where they are likely to be damaged or
chemically affected;
11) The screens and armours of the cables
are earthed properly;
12) The belts of the belt driven equipments
are properly guarded;
13) Adequate precautions are taken to
ensure that no live parts are so exposed
as to cause danger;
14) Ammeters and voltmeters are tested, and
1% The relays are inspected visually by
moving covers for deposits of dusts or
other foreign matter.
9.2.2;3 O V E R H E A D LINES -- F o r o v e r h e a d
lines it shall be checked whether:
1) All conductors and apparatus including
live parts thereof are inaccessible;
2) The types and size of supports arc
suitable for the overhead lines/conduc-
tors used and are in accordance with
approved drawing and standards;
3) Clearances from ground level to the
lowest conductor of overhead lines, sag
conditions, etc, are in accordance with
the relevant standard;
4) Where overhead lines cross the roads or
cross each other or are in proximity with
one another, suitable guarding is
provided at road crossings and also to
protect against possibility of the lines
coming in contact with one another;
5) Every guard wire is properly earthed;
6) The type, size and suitability of the
guarding arrangement provided is
adequate;
7) Stays are provided suitably on the over-
head lines as required and are efficiently
earthed or provided with suitable stay
insulators of suitable voltages;
8) Anti-climbing devices and Danger
Board/ Caution Board Notices are
provided on all HT supports;
9) Clearances along the route are checked
and all obstructions s u c h a s
trees/ branches and shrubs are cleared on
the route to the required distance on
either side;
10) Clearance between the live conductor
and the ‘earthed metal parts are
adequate; and
11) For the service connections tapped-off
?ART WI l UIlDlNC SERVICES--SECTIOd 2 ELECTRIC4L INSTAl.LATlONS
from the overHead lines, cut-outs of
adequate capacity are provided.
9.2.2.4 I.IGCI’rINci CIKCL’IIS - -The lighting
circuits shall be checked whether:
1) Wooden boxes and panels arc avoided in
factories for mounting the ligh!ing
boards and switch controls. elc;
2) Neutral links are provided in douhle pole
switch-fuses which are used lor lighting
control. and no fuse is provided in the
neutral;
3) The plug points in the lighting circuit are
all of 3:pin type, the third pin’ being
suitably earthed;
4) Tamper-proof interlocked switch socket
and plug are used for locations easily
accessible;
5) L.ighting wiring in factory area is taken
enclosed in conduit and conduit properly
earthed. or alternatively, armoured cable
wiring is used:
6) A separate earth wire is run in the
lighting installation tn provide earthing
for plug points, t’ixtures and equipments;
7) Proper connectors and junction hnxcs
are used wherever joints arc tc hc made
in -conductors or cross o v e r o f
conductors takes piace;
81 Cartridge fuse units are fitted with
cartridge fuses only;
9) C l e a r anC permznerlt i d e n t i f i c a t i o n
marks ilre painted in all distriblltion
boards. switchboards, sub-main hosrds
and switches as necessary;
10) ‘Tk pol:rrity having heen checked ant{ PII
fuws and single pole switches are
connected on the phz$e conductor only
and wiring i5 correctly connected tn
socket-outlets;
111 S p a r e k n o c k o u t s p r o v i d e d i n
distribution boards and switch fllses sre
blocked,
12) The ends of conduits enclosin,g the
wiring leads are provided with ebonite or
other suitable bushes;
13) The fittings and fixtures used for out-
door use are all of weather-proof
construction, and similarly, fixtures.
fittings and switchgears used in the
hazardous area are of flame-oronf
application;
14) Proper terminal connectors are used for
termination of wires (conductors and
earth leads) and all strands are insrrrted
in the terminals;
15) Flat ended screws are used for fixing
conductor to the accessories,
vIII-2--~-’
16) I.lse of flat washers backed up by spring
wa\herc for making end connections is
de\iril hlc.
Y.3 I (il \I ~41 - After i n s p c c i i o n , t h e
lollowing tcits shall be carried out. before an
inst;lllatlon or an addition to the existing
instllation IS put into service. Any testing of
the electrical Installation in an ahead!
cxikting installation shall commence after
obtaining permit to work from the engineer-
ln.-cll;irgc and after ensuring t h e s a f e t y
provIsions.
YJ._? I I‘S I I u(;
o..i._l./ ~u’~~~‘tt~o~t~t)~ .- HI a n d 1.T
\uirchhoardx shall bc tcstcd in the manner
Iiltlrc;ltcd hc!ou:
I) All high koltagc switchboards shall be
tchtcd lor diclcctrio t e s t a s per good
practice 1 VIII-1(26)].
2) All earth &.onnections shall be checked
for continuity.
3) ~I’l:c opcratiolr of’ a,ll protective devices
sh~l! hc tc\tcd hy means of secondary OI
p!-!mary injection ‘tats.
4) I he operation of the breakers shall be
1catl.d from ali control stations.
5) I n d i c a t i o n signallinp lamps s h a l l b e
chrcked lor propel- working.
6) I‘hc operation of the breakers shall hc
tc5lcd for all interlocks.
‘1 Ihc cloulng and opening timings of the
hrcahcrs shall hc tested w h e r e v e r
rcquircd lor auto-transfer schemes.
X) <‘ontact resi<tancc of main and isolator
c7)ntacts shall hc measured.
1,) I hc specific gravity and the voltap< ot
the r-ontrol battery shall be measured.
c)..i._‘._? I H .\X’\t OKhll K S ‘I ransformcrs are
tcqtcd i n the minncr indicated below:
I)
7-J Insulation resistance on HI and 1.T
windings shall be mcasurcd at the end of
ant’ @nutc as also at the end of 10
minutes nl measuring the polari7atinn
index. I‘he absolute value of insulation
resistance should not be the sole criterion
for determining the state of dryness of
the insulation. Polarization index values
should lorm the basis for determining
!he state of dryness of insulation. For
.34
VIII-_-
any class of insuiation, the polarization
index should be greater than 1.5.
9.-f.?._? CAHLES -Cable installations shall be
checked as below:
It shall be ensured that the cables
c o n f o r m t o t h e relevan: I n d i a n
Standards. Tests shall also be done in
accordance with good practice [Vlll-
2(6)]. The insulation resistance before
and after the tests shall be checked.
fhe insulation resistance between each
conductor ‘and against earth shall be
measured. The insulation resistance
varies with the type of insulation used
and with the length of cable. The
following empirical rule gives reasonable
guidance:
Insulation IO X voltage in kV
resistance in = - - --
megohms length in km
9.3.2.4 MOl.ORS AND CXHER EQUIPMENTS -
1 he following tests are made on motor and
other equipment:
1) ‘The insulation resistance of each phase
winding again? the frame and between
the windings shall be measured. Megger
of 500 V or IO00 V rating shall be used.
Star points should be disconnected.
Minimum acceptable value of the
insulatlon resistance varies with the rated
power and the rated voltage of the
motor.
.I-he following relation may serve as a
reasonable guide:
20 x Er1
K,= _~._~~ -.
I 000 + 2 P
where
K, T- insulatron resistance in megohms at
25’C.
En = rated phase to phase voltage.
f’ - rated power in kW.
If the resistance is measured at a temperature
dit’ferent from 25°C. the valllr shall be
corrected to 25°C.
The insulation resistance as measured at
ambient temperature does not always give a
reliable value, since moisture might have
been absorbed during shipment and storage.
When the temperature of such a motor is
raised, the iirsulation resistance will initially
drop considerably, even below the acceptable
minimum. If any suspicion exists on this
‘score, motor winding must be dried out.
NAI‘IONAI. BI II.I)INC CODE O F IYDIA
9.3.2.5 WIRING INSTALLATION - T h e
following tests shall be done:
4 The insulation resistance. shall be
measured by applying between earth and
the whole system of conductor or any
section thereof with ali fuses in place and
all switches closed, and except in earthed
concentric wiring, all lamps in position or
both poles of installation otherwise
electrically connected together, a dc
voltage of not less than twice the working
voltage, provided that it does not exceed
500 volts for medium voltage circuits.
Where the supply is derived from three-
wire (ac,or dc) or a poly-phase system, the
neutral pole of which is connected to
earth either direct or through added
resistance the working voltage shall be
deemed to be that which is maintained
between the .outer or phase conductor
and the neutral.
b) The insulation resistance in megohms of
an installation measured as in (a) shall be
not less than 50 divided by the number of
points on the circuit, provided that the
whole installation need not be required to
have an insulation resistance greater than
one megohm.
cl Control rheostats, heating and power
appliances and. electric signs, may, if
desired, be disconnected from the circuit
dtiring the test, but in that event the
insulation resistance between the case or
framework, and all live parts of each
rheostat, appliance and sign shall be not
less than that specified in the relevant
Indian Standard specification or where
there is no such specification, shall be not
less than half a megohm.
d) The insulation resistance shall also be
m e a s u r e d b e t w e e n a l l coijd.jctors
connected to one pole or phase conductor
of the supply and all the conductors
connected to the middle wire or to the
neutral on to the other pole of phase
conductors of the supply.’ Such a teSt
shall be made after removing all metallic
connections between the two poles of the
installation and in these circumstances
t h e i n s u l a t i o n resistance between
conductors of the installation shall be not
less ahan that specified in (b).
9.3.2.6 COMPLETION CERTIFICATE - - O n
completion of an electrical installation (or an
extension to an installation) a certificate shall
be furnished by the contractor, counter-
signed by the certified supervisor under
whose direct supervision the installation was
carried out. This certificate shall be in a
prescribed form as required by the local
electric suppjy authority. One such
recommended form is given in Appendix C.
P4RI \I11 I I ILDld; SERIICES-SECTION 1 ELLU’RICAI. INSTALLATIONS
9 . 3 . 2 . 7 E A R T H I N G - For checking the
efficiency of earthing, the following tests are
done:
4 The earth resistance of each electrode
shall be measured.
b) earth resistance of earthing grid shall be
measured.
c) All electrodes shall be connected to the
grid and the earth resistance of the entire
earthing system shall be measured.
These tests shall preferably be done during
the summer months.
IO. .TELECOMMUNICATION AND
OTHER MISCELL.ANEOUS
SERVICES
10. I Telecommunication Service
10.1.1 House wiring of telephone subscribers
offices in small buildings is normally
undertaken by the Telephone Department on
the surface of walls. But in large multi-
storeyed buildings intended for commercial,
business and office use as well as for
residential purposes, wiring for telephone
connections is generally done in a concealed
manner through conduits.
IO. I .2 The requirements qf telecommuni-
cation facilities like Telephone connections,
Private Branch Exchange, Intercommunica-
tion facilities, Telex and Telegraph lines are
to be planned well in advance so that suitable
provisions are made in the building plan in
such a way that the demand for
telecommunication services in any part of the
building at any floor are met at any time
during the’ life of the building.
10.1.3 Layout arrangements, methods for
internal block wiring and other requirements
regarding provisions of space, etc, may be
decided defending as the number of phone
outiets and other details in consultation with
Engineer/ Architect and user.
10.2 Public Address System- See Part IV
Fire protection.
10.3 Common Antenna System for TV
Receivers
10.3.1 In multistoreyed apartments, houses
and hot& where many TV receivers are
located, a common master antenna system
may preferably be used to avoid
mushrooming of individual antennas.
10.3.2 Master antenna is generally provided
at the top most convenient point in any
building and a suitable room on the top most
vlll-2-- -
floor or terrace for housing the amplifier
unit, etc, m a y a l s o b e p r o v i d e d i n
consultation with the architect/engineer.
10.3.3 From the amplifier rooms, conduits
are laid in recess to facilitate drawing co-
axial cable to individual flats. Suitable ‘Tap
Off boxes may be provided in every
room/ flat as required.
II. LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF
BUILDINGS
11.1 General
11.1.1 While every structure, theoretically,
has a chance of being struck by lightning, the
degree of this chance varies depending on a
number of associated factors, such as
lightning incidences, surroundings and types
of terrain. For a certain group of occ,upancies
which form a source of danger, such as those
housing explosive factories of stores or
flammable materials, complete protection
against lightning shall be provided. In other
cases, it may be necessary to decide whether
this protection is called for, under a given set
of circumstances.
f1.1.2 It is emphasized that certain buildings
are either self-protecting or need only little
additional expenditure for providing
lightning protection. The first category
includes structures which are entirely of
meta! and which are adequately earthed.
While the second category includes structures
with frames of steel or reinforced concrete
which may easily be protected.
11.1.3 With many structures, however, there
will be little doubt as to the need for lightning
protection. The examples of such structures
are:
a) those in or near which large number of
people congregate;
b) those concerned with the maintena.nce of
essential public services;
cl those areas where lightning strokes are
prevalent;
4 very tall or isolated structures;
e) s t r u c t u r e s o f h i s t o r i c o r c u l t u r a l
importance; and
0 structures containing explosives and
highly flammable materials.
11.1.4 There are a number of factors,
affecting the risk of the structure biting struck
by lightning and consequential effects of a
stroke, which are capable of assessment.
There would be other factors which are not
capable of such assessment in relative terms.
VIII.26
yet these may over-ride all other
considerations; for example, a requirement
that there should be no avoidable risk’to life,
or the overwhelming importance or value of
the structure. In such cases lightning
protection shall always be provided. In other
cases, however, it may be desirable to make a
decision on an assessment in terms of the
chances of the strticture being struck. For this
purpose, various factors denoting chances of
the structure being struck by lightning and the
total effect of these factors shall be assessed.
As an aid to making a judgement a set of
indices is given (see 11.2.2) for the various
factors which are capable of being assessed.
I I .2 Risk Assessment
11.2.1 FA C T OR S CAPABLE OF ASSESSMENT-
The factors given in 11.2.1.1 to lf.2.1.7 have
been found capable of assessment and require
consideration.
11.2.1.1 USAGE OF S T R U C T U R E - T h e
lightning hazard to human beings within a
structure or building is a very important
factor in deciding how far to go in providing
lightning protection. Schools, hospitals,
auditoria, railway statipns, etc, are places
where a large number of people congregate
and, therefore, are structurb of greater
importance than small buildings and houses.
11.2.1.2 TYPE O F C O N S T R U C T I O N -The type
of construction of the structure has a large
influence upon the extent of protection. A
steel framed building to some extent is self-
protecting and may not require any
additional protection, while brick buildings
or buildings with thatched roof require
greater degree of protection.
11.2. I.3 CONTthTS OR CONSEQUENTIAL
EFFECTS -In addition to direct loss due to
destruction of buildings by lightning, fire
resulting from lightning. killing of live-stock,
etc. there may be indirect losses which
sometimes accompany the destruction of
buildings and their contents. An interruption
to business or to farming operations,
specially at certain times of the year, may
involve losses quite distinct from and in
addition to the losses arising from the direct
destruction of property. There are also cases
where whcle community depends for safety
and comfort in some respect on the integrity
of a single structure. as for instance on the
brick chimney of a water-pumping plant. A
stioke of lightning to the unprotected
chimney of a plant of that sort might have a
serious consequence from lack of sanitary
facilities, drinking water, water for irrigation,
fire protection, etc. The contents of the
building should also be considered as to
whether they are replaceable, whether
explosive, combustible or non-combustible.
Flammable vapour or explosive dust may
present a hazard in a building that is
otherwise immune to lightning. Contents like
hay or cotton may make protective measures
specially desirable.
11.2.1.4 DEGREE OF ISOLATION -The
relative exposure of a particular building will
be an element in determining whether the
expense of protection is warranted. In closely
builtup towns and cities, the hazard is not as
great as in the open country. In the latter, farm
barns in many cases are the most prominent
targets for lightning in a large area.
11.2.1.5 TY PE O F TERRAIN-III hilly or
mountainous area, a building is more
susceptible to damage than a. building in
plains and flat. terrain. In hilly areas itself, a
building upon high ground is usually subject
to greater hazard than the one in a valley or
otherwise sheltered area.
11.2.1.6 HEIGHT OF STRUCTURE -Height of
the structure is an important factor for the
purpose of lightning protection. Taller
structures ‘are subject to greater hazards than
smaller structures and. therefore, lightning
protection is more desirable in tall struc-
tures.
11.2.1.7 LlGH.rNlNG PREVALENCE -The
map of Fig. 5 shows the average number of
thunderstorm days in a year in India. Itmay
be seen from this map that the number of
thunderstorm days in a year varies from 10 to
100 in different parts of the country.However,
the severity of lightning storms, as
distinguished from their frequency of occu-
rence is much greater in some locations than
in others. Hence, the need for protection
varies from place to place. although not
necessarily in direct proportion to the
thunderstorm frequency.
11.2.2 I NDEX F IGURES -In Tables 5 to 1 I,
index figures are given for each of the factors
mentioned in 15.2.1 which denote a relative
degree of severity or importance for each of
the fctors. In any given case, index figures
should be obtained for all the seven factors
from these ‘tables. The sum of these index
figures is termed as ‘Risk Index’. The higher
the risk index the greater will be the need for
protection and vice versa.
11.3 Risk Index
11.3.f In order to have a practical utility of
this valuation, it is necessary to fix someCri-
?ARt WI BUItJXNC SUtVICLS-SECTION 2 ELECTltlCAL
terion. This may be taken as 40. If the value
of the risk index is higher than 40, protection
should ordinarily be considered as necessary;
if it is omitted, sound reasons in support
would be needed. If the risk index is lower
than 40, then in the absence of other over-
riding considerations, protection may be
omitted without undue harm. For risk
indices near about 40, decision will have to be
based on the importance of structure. It is
necessary to caution that the figure of 40
should not be interpreted as a sharp dividing
line meaning that no protection is needed
when the risk index is 39 while it is always
needed when it is 40. The risk index, it may
be em-phasized, is merely an aid to
judgement, that is, a method of
quantitatively assessing to some extent the
chance and the conse-quences of damage; it
should be used only in this manner.
TABLE 5 INDEX FIGURE A (USAGE OF -
STRUCTURE)
(Clause 11.2.2)
Use TO WHICH STRUCTURE VALUE OF
N”d IS Pm INDEX A
i) Houses and other builing of 2
comparable size
ii) ljouses and other buildings of 4
comparable size with outside
serial
iii) Small and medium size factor- 6
ies, workshops and labora-
tories
iv) Big industrial plants, telephone 7
exchanges, office blocks,
hotels, blocks of flats and
other than those included in
Sl No. (5) and (6)
v) Places of assembly, for example, 8
places of worship, halls,
‘theatres. museums, exhibi-
tions. departmental stores,
stations, airports and
stadium structures
vi) Schools, hospitals, children’s _ IO
and other such homes
11.3.2 The variety of structures and their
relations to surroundings is so great that any
method of assessment is not free of ano-
malies and those who have to decide on
protection should use their judgement. It
may, for instance, be found that the risk
index for a steel framed building is very 1.0~
and no protection is required but the addi-
tion of an air termination and earthing
system may improve the degree of protection
very greatly at a very small extra cost and
may be worthwhile. In other instance, struc-
ture may have natural protection from sur-
rounding formation, extensive metaliic
structure or earth wires, etc. and due allow-
ance for this protection could be taken in
37 ,
INSTALLATIONS VW-2-I .
deciding the degree of protection to be TAB1.E 8 INDEX FIGUREr D ( D E G R E E OF
provided to the structure. ISOl?ATION)

11.3.3 A low risk index may arise for chim- (Clause 11.2.2)
neys made of bricks ‘or concrete. These SL DWHEE OF IS O L A T I O N* VALUE OF
should, however, be provided with protec- No. INDEX D
tion if they are free standing or projecting i) Structure: located in a large 2
area of structures or trees of
the same or’ greater height.
TABLE 6 INDEX FIGURE E (TYPE OF for example, in a large town
CONSTRUCTION) or forest
ii) Structure located in an area S
(c1au.W I i.2.2) with a few other structures
SL T YPE OF CONST~UCWON VAL.r!E OF or trees of similar height
No. INDEX B
iii) S t r u c t u r e c o m p l e t e l y i s o l a t e d IO
fl) (2) (3) or exceeding at least’ twice
Steel framed, encased with any I the .height o f s u r r o u n d i n g
i)
roof other than metal* striIctures or trees

ii) Reinforced concrete pith any 2 *If nearby structures are very much higher than the
roof other than metal protected structures or if their nature is such as would
offer good protection, for example, extensively high
iii) Brick, plain concrete or mason- 4 metalhc structures as of switch-yard, earth wires of
ry with any roof other than transmission system and high vertical cliffs, due
metal or thatch weightage may be given to such factors in deciding the
iv) Steel framed, encased or rein- 5 necessity of protection on the basis of risk index.
forced concrete with metal
roof
v) Timber framed or clad with any 7
roof. other than metal or
thatch 7ABLSY I N D E X FIGURE E ( T Y P E O F
vi) Brick, plain concrete masonry, 8 TERRAIN)
timber framed but with
metal roofing (Clause 11.2.2)

vii) Any building with a thatched IO SL TV PE OF TERRAIN V ALUE OF

roof No. INDEX E
*A structure of exposed metal which is continuousdown (I) (2) (3)
to ground level is excl ded from the tableas it requires no
lighjning protection beypnd adequate earthing i) Flat terrain at any level 2
arrangements. ii) Hill teriain 6
iii) Mountain terrain between 500 8
to IOOOm
T A B L E 7 I N D E X FlGlJRES C ( C O N T E N T S
OR CONSEQUENTIAL EFFECTS) iv) Mountain terrain above IO00 m IO

(Clause 11.2.2)
SL CON1 c N IS OR TYPIC OF VALUE OF
No. B UILDING IN D E X C

(1) (2) (3) TABLE IO INDEX FIGURE F(HElGHT

i) Ordinary domestic or office 2 OF STRUCTURE)
buildings, factories and work- (Clause 11.2.2)
shops not containing valu-
able. or specially susceptible SL H EIGHT OFSTRUCTURE VAI.IIE OF
dontents NO. AWVE QROUND* INDEX F

ii) Industrial and agricultural 5 ’ Exceeding Not Excczding ’

buildings with specially (2) (3) (4)
(1)
susceptible* contents m m
iii) Power stations, g a s w o r k s , - IO 2
i)
telephone exchanges, radio
stations ii) IO IS ‘4

iv) Industrial key plants, ancient iii) I5 20 5

monuments and historic iv) 20 25 8
b u i l d i n g s , m u s e u m s . aVt
galleries or other buddings v) 25 30 II
with specially valuable con- vi) 30 35 I6
tents
vii) 35 40 I9
v) Schools, hospitals, children’s IO
and other such homes, p!aces viii) 40 45 22
of assembly ix) 45 55 30
*This means specially valuable lant or materials l Structuns higha than 55m require protection in all
vulnerable to fire or the results of P
ore. cases.

Vlll-2-38 NATIDNAL BUILDING CODt OF INDIA

 TABLE I I INDEX FIGURE G (LIGHTNING
more than 4.5 metres above the adjoining
PREVALENCE) structures. Chimneys are, therefore, ex-
cluded from the risk index method of assess-
(Clciuse x1.2.2) ment.
SL NUMBER OFTHIJNDERST~RM VALUE OF
No. DAYS PER YEAR IN D E X G

‘Exceeding Not Exceeding’

11.3.4 A few examples of calculation of risk
(I) (2) (3) (4) index .for different structures are given in
i) 5 4 Table 12.
ii) 5 10 g
iii) 10 I5 13
iv) I5 20 18 11.4 For detailed requirements of lightning
21
protection of various structures, reference
Vl 20 may be made to good practice [VIII 2(28)].

TABLE 12 EXAMPLJZS OF CALCULATION OF RISK INDEX FOR

EVALUATING NEED FQR PROTECTION
(ckwe f1.3.4)
SL EXAMPLE (ISOCERAUNIC VALUE OF INDEX FIGURES RISK INDEX RECOMMEN-
No. LEVEL. EXCEEDING 20) (TOTAL OF DATKINS
(see TABLE I I) c D E F INDEX
FIGURES
AroG)

(1) (2) (9 (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) ( 10) (11)
9 Small residcndial building 2 4 2 2 2 2 21 35 No protection
in a thickly populated required
locality (height less than
IO m)
ii) Oft% building in. a thickly 7 2 2 2 2 5 21 41 As the figure is
,ated locahty (he&t near about
40. protec
tion will de-
pend upon
the import-
ance of the
building
iii) Hotel building (height 31 m) 7 2 2 IO 2 16 21 60 Protection es-
exceeding twice the height sential
of surrounding structures
iv) Building of historical hnpor- 8 4 8 10 2 30 21 83 Protection es-
tance completely isolated sential
(height 50 m)
v) Structural of high historial -- - _- - -- - - - Protection es-
importance (height exceed- sensial as the
ing 55 m) height ex-
eds 55 m (see
Table IO)
Structural, such as hydro- 1 2 6 2 6 4 21 48 Protection may
electric. power stations, be omitted
suf!icientl;f protected .by even though
means surroundrng risk index is
structural, for example, morethan
high vertical cliffs, high because the
high vertical, cliffs, high building is
metallic structures or earth protected by
wire of transmissionsystem surroundingi
(height I5 m)
NOTE - Thevalues in co13 to9,arriveat byreferenceto Tables 5 to I I and themapofthunderstormdays(Fig 5),are
added together. The resultant figure in col 10, using 40 as the criterion, indicates the need for protection.

P A R T VIII BUILDING SEZRVICEY--sM-TlON 2 ELCCTPICAL INSTALI.ATIONS Vll -2-39 ,

 ANNtJAt. ANNUAI:
N AME OF THUNDER, SL N AME OF THUNDER.
PLACE STORM NO. PL A C E STORM
DAQ DAYS
! I
I Gilgit 63 Dumka 63 123 Akola 20
2 Skardu : 124 Amraoti 32
3 Culmarg Darjeeling 28 I25 Nagpur 45
4 Srinagar :: fi;p;zurt
68 126 Gondia IO
5 Dras I27 Aurangabad 34
6 Kargil : Asansol :; 128 Bombay I6
39 129 Alibag 12
7
8
ieh
Jammu
3
26
Burdwan
Kharagpur 76 130 Ahlhadnagar io
Calcutta I31 Parbhani 32
Sagar Island E I32 Pune 22
9 Dharmsala I3
I33 Mahabaleshwar I4
IO Amritsar 49
134 Ratnagiri 6
I I Pathankot 4 72 Dhubri
I35 Sholapur 23
12 Mandi 46 73 Tezpur 2;
13 Ludhiana Dibrugarh 98 136 Miraj
I2 :z
14 Simla 40 :‘: Sibsagar I03 I 3 7 Vengurla
I5 P a t i a l a 26 Shillong 75
I6 A m b a l a 9 :; Cherrapunji 49
138 Ntzamabad 36
17 Hissar 27 78 Silchar 33
139 Hanamkonda 43
140 Hyderabad 28
1’8 D e l h i 30 I 79 Kohtma 34 141 Khammam 26
142 Kalingapatam
19 Bikaner IO lmphol 49 143 Vishakhapatnam :8
20 Phalodi I4 144 Rentichintala 42
21 Stkar 17 Deesa 145 Masultpatam 20
22 Barmer it Dwarka : 146 Ongole 2s
23 Jodhpur Jamna8ar 8 147 Kurnool
24 Ajmcr t: Rajkot I48 Anantpur :;
25 Jaipur 39 Ahmadabad 1: 149 Nellore IR
26 Kankroli 36 Dohad 17 I50 Bidar I5
27 Mount Abu Porbandar 3 151 Gulbarga 34
28 Udatpur 3; Veraval I52 Bijapur 9
29 Neemuch Bhavnagar I:
30 Kota :; Baruda 8
I53 Belgaum 31
31 Jhalawar 40 Surat 4
I54 Raichur 17

32 Mussoorie 61 Gwalior 156 Bellary

155 Gadag ::
33 Roorkee :: 94 Y5 Guna
34 Najibabad Nowgong I 41 :: 59 ’ 157 I58 Karwar Hot!avar I 27 5
3.5 Mukteswar 53 95 Satna I59 Chikalthana 24
36 Meerut 34 I 96 I Sagar I60 Mangalore
37 Bareilly 1 97 1 Rhopal I61 Hassan ::
38 A!igarh 30 1 98 1 Jabalpur 162 Bangalore 46
39 Agra 24 99 Ijmaria I63 Mysore 44
.*
40 Mainpuri Ambikapur
41 Bahraich I 31 lndore 164 Kozhikode 39
42 Gonda 22 Hnuh.no.hnA
I65 Palghat 35
43 Lucknow 1 l”-II P a c h m a r h i 166 Cochin 69
44 Kanpur 104 Seoni 167 Alleppey
45 Fatehpur I05 Pendadah 168 Trivandrum 2:
46 Jhanst I06 Raipur
47 Allahabad
48 Varanasi
49 Azamgarh
107 Chhindwara
I08 Kanker
109 Jagdalpu r 333 I I I69 Vellore
170 Madras 4”:
50 Gorakhpur
110 Balasore 81
I I I71 172 Ootacamund Salem
I73 Cuddalore
I 24 69
Ji
51 Katmandu Ill Chandba
. Ii 174 Coimbatore 40
II2 An&t1 8’: I75 Tiruchchirappalli 41
II3 Bhubaneswar 46
::
Motihari
lPt$thanga
38
tn
.”
II4 P uri I 33
I76 Nagappattinam
177 Kodaikanal ::

I
II5
54
55 Gaya. :i
II6
II7
Gopalpur
Jharsuguda.
Sambalpur
267 178 Madurai
179 Pamban
39
5
S6 Daltonganj ^_ 1 I80 1 Tuticorin I 14
57 Hazaribagh II8 .Titlag em’ 1 68
5 8 Ranchi
::

34 I I9 _.._.._
Rajgalrayur I 2: 1 1811 Cape Comorin
59 Chaibasa 70
60 lamshedpur I ii I 120 IDaham, I I I :::I>:::
61 Purnca
6 2 S&our
I 13 1 184 IMinicoy I 1 20

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

1I I

L+ L
I
.
-

Based upbn Survey of India map with the permission of the Surveyor General of India. @Government of Indiaaipyright 1990.
The territorial waters of India extend into the sea to a distance of twelve nauticaln&lea measurad from the appropriate base line.
Responsibility for the correctness of internal details shown on the map rests with the publisher.

FIG. 5 M AP OF INDIA SHO.WING THE PLACES FOR AVERAGE N UMBER OF T HUNDERSTORM D AYS IN A Y EAR
NOTE-The Data in this Map have been compiled by kind courtesy of the IndianMete.orological Department at the request of
the Central Water and Power Commission (Power Wing)

PART VIII l lJlCtiNG SPVlcgP-SMXION 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

41
VIII&
 APPENDIX A

(Clause 3.2)
A ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
IN BUILDING

A-f WIRING A-2.1.4 D I S T R I B U T I O N F U S E

. BO A R D W ITH S W I T C H E S
A-f.0 Remarks ‘upwards’ and ‘downwards’
apply only when the drawing is read the right
way up. A-2.2 Power circuit Fuse
Boards
A-1.0.1 An arrow on the slant line indicates
the direction of the power flow.
A - 2 . 2 . 1 M AIN F U S E B O A R D
A-1.0.2 The wiring terminates at the circle W ITHOUT S W I T C H E S
or the black dot.
A - 2 . 2 . 2 MA I N F U S E B O A R D
A-l. I General Wiring WITH SW I T C H E S

A-1.2 Wiring on the Surface m 4-2.2.3 DI S T R I B U T I O N FUSE-

B OARDS W ITHOUT S W I T C H E S
A-l.3 Wiring under the Surface (u1y
A-2.2.4 DISI‘RIBLI~ION FIISE-
B-l.4 Wiring in Conduit B OARD W ITH S W I T C H E S

0 A-3 SWITCHES AND

A-1.4. I CONDUIT ON SURFACE m m SWITCH-OUTLETS
A-3. / One- Way SH itch
A-1.4.2 C ONCEALED C O N D U I T luoU

NOPE --The type of conduit may be indicated, if A-3. I. I SINGLE -POLE

necessary.

A-3.1.2 TWO-POLE
A-1.5 Wiring Going Upwards d
A-3.1.3 THREE-POLE
A-l.6 Wiring Going Downwards
,,
A-3.2 Single- Pole Pull Switch
A-l. 7 Wiring Passing Vertically
Through a Room
0
A-3.3 Multiposition Switch for
Different Degrees of Lighting
A-2 FUSE BOARDS
A-2.1 Lighting Circuit’ Fuse. A-3.4 Two- Way Switch
Boards
A-2.1.1 MAIN FU S E B O A R D
WITHOUT SWITCHES D
A-3.5 Intermediate Switch
A-2.1 I MAIN F U S E B O A R D m
WITH S W I T C H I N G

A-2.1.3 D I S T R I B U T I O N F U S E
BCIAR~ WITHOUT S W I T C H E S m A-3.6 Period Limiting Switch

“,,I-$ PIATIONAL B U I L D I N G &DE OF INDIA

A-3.7 Time Switch
A-5.2 Lump, Mounted on u Wall
lx
A-3.8 Pendant Switch
A-5.3 Lamp, Mounted on a
Ceiling
A-3.9 Push Button
A-5.4 ‘Counter Weight Lamp
Fixture
NOTE -The use of the push button may be indicated, if
desired.

A-3.10 Luminous Push Button A-5.5 Chain Lamp Fixture

@
x
A-3.11 Restricted Access Push 0
But ton I k-5.6 Rod Lamp Fixture
NOFE-The use of the push button may be indicated, if
desired.
A-5.7 Lump Fixture with Built-in
A-4 SOCKET-OUTLETS Switch

A-4.1 Socket-Our.et, 5A
A k-8.8 Lump Fed from Variable
Voltage Supply
A-4.2 Socket-Outlet, ISA
An
A-5.9 Emergency Lump
A-4.3 Combinhd Switch and
Socket-Outlet, 5A AC
A-5.10 Panic Lamp
A-4.4 Combined Switch and
Socket-Outlet, ISA K‘
n

fv
A-5.11 Bulk-Head Lamp
A-4.5 Interlocking Switch and
Socket-Outlet, 5A
A-5.12 Water-Tight Lighting
Fitting
A-4.6 Interlocking Switch and
Socket-Outlet, ISA K‘
n
A-5.13 Batten Lump Holder
A-5 LAMPS AND LlGHTING
APPARATUS
A-5.0 Symbols A-5.1 to A-5.18 represent A-5.14 Rejector
either the lamp .or a group,of lamps or the
s. If it is desired to specify that
to the wall or coiling, a A-5.15 Spot Light
or horizontal line respectively may be
added to the symbol.

A-5.1 Lamp or Outlet for Lamp A-5.16 Flood Ligh;

x
A-5.1.1 G ROUP OF T HREE
3X4oW
aI-WLAMPs x A-5.1 7 FIourescent

P A R T VIII BlIILDlNC SERVICES-SCCl’lO~ 2 ELF17lIlCAL INSTALWTIONS

 ‘.
..

A-5.17.1 GROUP OF A-9. TELECOMMUNICATION

T H R EE 40-W b-_-l 3X4oW APPARATUS
F L U O R ES C E Nw
T
LAMPS A-9. I Socket-Outlet for Tele-
communications
A-6. ELECTRfCAL APPLIANCES
A-9.2 Aerial
A-6. I General
A-9.3 Loudspeaker
NOTE--U necessary, use designation to specify.

A-9.4 Radio Receiving Set

A-6.2 Hearer Ill]
A-9.5 Amplifying Equipment
A-6.3 Storage Type Electric _+jjzJ
Water Heaters

A-9.6 Televisiqn Receiving Set

AI-7. BELLS, BUZZERS AND SIRENS‘
A-9.7 Control Board Vor Public
Address System)
A-7.1 Bell
A-10. CLOCKS

A-7.2 Buzzer A-l 0. I Synchronous Clock

A-7.3 Siren A-10.2 Impulse Clock Outlet

A-10.3 Master Clock Outlet

A-7.4 Horn or Hooter
A-11. FIRE ALARMS

A-7.5 Indicator (At ‘jcr, insert A-I I. 1 Manually Operated Fire

number of ways) Alarm

A-8 FANS A-l 1.2 Automatic Fire Detector

Switch
A-8. I Ceiling Fan
A-11.3 Bell Connected to Fire
Alarm Switch
A-8.2 Bracket Fan
A-Ii.4 Fire Ahzrm Indicator

A-8:3 Exhausr Fan A-12. EARTHING

k-12.1 Earth Point

A-8.4 Fan Regulator

“*II-Y NATIONAL WILDING CODE OF INDIA

 APPENDIX B
[Clauses3.1.1, 5.1.1, 5.1.3,5.2.3(b), 8.5. and iO.l.IJ
EXTRACTS FROM INDlAN ELEC’IRICITY RULES, 1956
B-I. The following arc the extracts of some
of the rules:
Rule No. 32. Identijication of lkarrhed and
birthed Neutral Conductors and Position of
Switches and Cut-Outs TIlerein
Where the conductors include an earthed
conductor of a two-wire system or an earthed
neutral conductor of a multi-wire system or a
conductor which is to be connected there-to,
the following conditions shall be complied
with:
1) An indication of a permanent nature shall
be provided by the owner of the earthed
or earthed neutral conductor, or the
conductor which is to be connected
thereto, to enable such conductor to be
distinguished from any live conductor.
Such indication shall be provided:
a) Where the earthed or earthed neutral
conductor is the property of the
supplier, at or near the point- of
commencement of supply;
b) Where a conductor forming part of a
consumer’s system is to be connected
to the supplier’s earthed or earthed
neutral conductor at the point where
such connection is to be made;
cl In all other cases, at a point
corresponding to the point of
commencement of supply or at such
other point as may be approved by an
Inspector or any officer appointed to
assist the Inspector and hold
authorized under sub rule (2) of rule
4-A.
2) No cut-out, link’ or switch other that-tea
linked switch arranged to operate
simultaneously on the earthed or earthed
neutral conductor and live conductors
shall be inserted or remain inserted in any
earl hed or earthed neutral conductor of a
two-wire system or in any earthed or
earthed neutral conductor of a multi-wire
system or in any .conductor connected
thereto with the following exceptions:
a) A link-for testing purposes, or
b) A switch for use in controlling a
generator or transformer.
Nor! .- For the purpose of this rule, the relevant Indian
Standards relating to marking and arrangement for
switch gear. bus-bar. main connections, and auxiliary
wiring may be referred IO.
P A R T VIII BUILDING .SERVICES-SECTION 2 ELECTRICAl.
Rule No. 33 Earthed Terminal on
Consumer’s Premises
1) The supplier shall provide and, maintain
on the consumer’s premises for the
consumer’s use a suitable earthed
terminal in an accessible; position at or
near the point of commencement of
J’upply as defined under rule 58:
Provided that in the case of medium. high
or extra-high voltage installation, the
consumer sha!l, in addition to afore-
mentioned earthing arrangement, provide
his own earthing system wtth an
independent electrode, and maintain the
same.
Provided further that the supplier may
not provide any earthed terminal in the
case of installations already connected to
his system on or before the 30th June,
1966 if he is satisfied that the consumer’s
earthing arrangement is efficient.
2) The consumer shall take all reasonable
precautions to prevent mechanical
damage to the earthed terminal and its
lead belonging to the supplier.
3) The supplier may recover from the
consumer the cost of installation of such
earthed terminal on the basis laid down in
sub-rule (2) of Rule No. 82.
Rule No. 50 Supp!v and Use of Energy
I) The energy shall not be supplied. trans-
formed, converted or used or continued
to be supplied, transformed, converted or
used unless the following provisions are
observed:
a) A suitable linked switch or a circuit
breaker of requisite capacity to carry
and break the current is placed as near
as possible to, but after the point of
commencement of supply, as defined
under Rule No. 58, so as to be readily
accessible and capable of being easily
operated to completely isolate the
suppty to the installation, such
equipment being ,in addition ‘to any
equipment installed for controlling
individual circuits or apparatus.
Provided that where the point of
commencement of supply and the
consumer’s apparatus are near to each
other, one linked switch or circuit-
breaker near the point of
INSTALLATIONS v,,,.z-4~ ’
 commencement of supply shall be
considered sufficient for the purpose
of this rule;
b) A suitable linked switch or circuit-
breaker of requisite capacity to carry
and break the f&l load current is
inserted on the gecondary side of a
transformer, in the case of high or
extra high voltage installation.
Prbvided, however, that the linked
switch on the primary side of the
transformer may be of such capacity
as to carry the full load current and
to break only the magnetisinp
current of the transformer;
Provided further that the provision
of the clause shall not apply to
transformers installed in sub-station
upto a n d i n c l u d i n g lOOk\iA
belonging to the sUpplier.
Provided also that the provision of a
linked switch on the primary side of
the transformer shall not apply to
the unit auxiliary transformer of the
generator.
cl Except in the case of composite
control gear designe’d as a unit; every
distinct circuit is protected against
excess energy by means of a suitable
cut-out or a circuit-breaker of
adequate breaking capacity suitably
located and so constructed as to
prevent danger from overheating,
arcing or scattering of hot metal
when it comes into operation and to
permit of ready renewal of the fusible
metal of the cut-out without danger.
4 The supply of energy to each motor
or .a group of motors or other
apparatus, meant for operating one
particular machine, is controlled by a
suitable linked switch or a circuit-
breaker or an emergency tripping
device with manual reset of requisite
capacity placed in such a position as
to be adjacent to the motor or a
group of motors or other apparatus,
readily accessible to and easily
operated by the person in charge and
so connected’in the circuit of that by
its means all supply of energy can be
cut-off from the motor or a group of
motors or apparatus and from any
regulating switch, resistance or other
device associated therewith.
e) All insulating material is chosen with
special regard to the circumstances of
its proposed use, the mechanical
strength being sufficient for the
purpose. and so far as is practicable,
is of such a character or so protected
as to maintain adequately the
insulating properties under all
working conditions in respect of
temperature and moisture; and
r) Adequate precautions are taken to
ensure that no live parts are so
exposed as to cause danger.
9-I 4 When energy is being supplied,
transformed, converted or used, the
consumer or the owner of the
concerned installation shall be
responsible for the continuous
observance of the provisions of sub-
rule (1) in respect of his installation.
b) Every consumer shall use all
reasonable means to ensure that
whert energy is supplied by a supplier
no person other than the_ supplier
shall interfere with the service lines
and apparatus placed by the supplier
on the premises of the consumer.
R u l e I’CO. 51 P r o v i s i o n s Applicable to
Medium, High or Extra-High Voltage
Installations
The following provisions shall be observed
where energy at medium, high or extra high
voltage is supplied, converted, transformed or
used:
1) a) All conductors (other than those of
overhead lines) shall be completely
enclosed ’ in mechanically ‘strong
metal casing or metallic covering
which is electrically and
mechanically continuous and
adequately protected against
mechanical damage unless the said
condtictors are accessible only to an
authorised person or are installed
and protected to the satisfaction of
the Inspector so as to prevent danger.
Provided that rigid non-metallic
conduits conforming to Indian
Standards Specification No.
lS:2509-1963 Rigid Non-metallic
Conduits for Electrical Installation,
may be used for medium voltage
installation subject to any conditions
as the Inspector or officer appointed
to assist an Inspector may think fit to
impose.
b) A l l m e t a l workd e n c l o s i n g ,
supporting or associated with the
installation, other than that designed
to serve as a conductor shall, if
considered necessary by the
Inspector, be connected with earth.
4 Every switchboard shall comply with
the following provisions namely:
i) a clear space of not less than one
 .metre in width shall be provided
in front of the switchboard:
ii) if there are any attachments or
bare connections at the badk of
the switchboard, the space (i;
any) behind the switchboard
shall be either less than 10
centimetres, or more than 75
centimetres in width, measured
from the farthest outstanding
part of any ‘attachment or
conductor;
iii) if the soace behind the switch-
board exceeds 75 centimetres in
width, there shall be passage
way from either end of the
switchboard clear to a height of
1.8 metres.
2) Where an application has been made to a
supplier for supply of energy to any
installation, the shall not commence, or
where the supply’ has been discontinued,
recommence the supply unless he is
satisfied that the consumer has complied
in all respects with the conditions of
supply, set out in sub-rule (1) of this rule
and Rules No. 50 and 64.
3) Where a supplier proposes to supply or
use energy at medium voltage or to
recommence supply after it has been
discontinued for a period of six months,
he shall, before connecting or
reconnecting the supply, give notice in
writing of such intention to the
Inspector.
4) If at any time after connecting the supply
the supplier is satisfied that any
provision of sub-rule (1) of this rule, or
of Rules No. 50 and 64’ is not being
observed, he shall give notice of the same-
in writing to the consumer and the
Inspector specifying how the provision
has not been observed, and may
discontinue the supply if the Inspector so
directs.
Rule No. 58 Point of Commencement of
SuPPlY
The point of commencement of supply of
energy to a consumer shall be deemed to. be
the point at the outgoing terminals of the cut-
outs inserted by the supplier in each
conductor of every service line other than an
earthed or earthed neutral conductor or the
earthed external conductor of a concentric
cable at the consumer’s premises.
Rule No. 61 Connection with Earth
1) The following provisions shall apply to
the connection with earth of systems at
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICEi-SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL INSlALLATlONS
low voltage in cases where the voltage
between phases or outers normally
exceeds Ii5 volts and of systems .ai
medium voltage:
.
a) i-he neutral conductor of a three-
phase four wire system, and the
middle conductor of a two-phase
three-wire system shall be earthed by
not less than two separate and
distinct connections with earth both
at the generating station and at the
sub-station. It may also be earthed
at one or more points along the
distribution system or service line in
addition t_o any connection with
earth which may be at the
consumer’s premises.
b) In the case of a system comprising
electric supply lines having
concentric cables, the external
conductor of such cables shall be
earthed by two separate and distinct
connections with earth.
c) The connection with earth may
include a link by means of which the
connection may be temporarily
interrupted for the purpose of
testing or for locating a fault.
d) 9 In a direct current three-wire
system the middle conductor
shall be earthed at the
generating station only, and the
current from the middle
conductor to earth shall be
continuously recorded by means
of recording ammeter, and if at
any time the current exceeds one
thousandth part of the
maximum supply current,
immediate steps shall be taken
to improve the insulation of the
system.
ii) Where the middle conductor is
earthed by means of a circuit-
breaker with a resistance
connected in parallel, the
resistance shall not exceed
lOohms and on the opening of
the circuit-breaker, immediate
steps shall be taken to improve
the insuiation of the system, and
the circuit-breaker shall be
reclosed as soon as possible.
iii) The resistance shall be used only
as a protection for the ammeter
in case of earths on the system
and until such earths are
removed, immediate steps shall
be taken to locate and remove
the earth.
e) In the case of an alternating current
system. there shall not be inserted in
AL) ,
\'lll-i-y '

the connection with earth and
impedance (other than that required
solely for the operation of switch
gear or instrument), cut-out or
circuit-breaker,Bnd the result of any
test made to ascertain whether the
current (if any) passing through the
connection with earth is normai,
shall be duly recorded by the
supplier.
0 No person shall make connection
with earth by the aid of, nor shall he
keep it in contact with any water
main not belonging to him except
with the consent of the owner there-
of and of the Inspector.
g) Alternating current systems which
a r e c o n n e c t e d w i t h e a r t h ,as
a.foresaid m a y b e e l e c t r i c a l l y
interconnecttd, provided that each
conqection with earth is bonded to
the metal sheathing and metallic
armouring (if any) of the electric
supply ‘lines concerned.
2) The frame of every generator, stationary
motor, portable motor, and the metallic
parts (not intended as conductors) of all
transformers and any other apparatus
used for regulating or controlling energy
and all medium voltage energy consuming
apparatus shall be earthed by the owner
by two separate and distinct connections
with earth.
3) All metal casings or metallic covering
containing or protecting any electric
supply-line or apparatus shall be
connected with earth and shall be so
joined and connected across all junction
boxes and other openings as to make
good mechanical and electrical
connections throughout their whole
length:
Provided that where the supply is at low
voltage, this sub-rule shall not apply to
isolated wall tubes or to brackets,
electroliers, switches, ceiling fans or other
fittings (other than portable hand lamps
and portable and transportable
apparatus) unhis provided with earth
terminal.
Provided further thatwhere the supply is
at iow voltage and where the installations
are either new qr renovated all. plug
sockeks shall be of the three-pin type,
having permanently and efficiently
earthed.
This sub-rule shall come into force
‘immediately in the case of new
installations and in the case of existing
installations the provisions of this sub-
rule shall be complied with before the
“I,,-*-48
‘.
expiry of a period of two years from the
commencement of those rules.
4) All earthing systems shall before electric
supply lines or apparatus are energised,
be tested for electrical resistance to ensure
efficient earthing.
5) All earthing systems belonging to the
supplier shall, in addition, be tested for
resistance on dry day during the dry
season not less than once every two years.
6) A record of every earth test made and the
result thereof shall be kept by the supplier
for a period of not less than two years
after the day of testing and shall be
available to the Inspector or any officer
appointed to assist the Inspector and
authorised under sub-rule (2) of rule 4A
when required.
Kule .&o. 64 tise of Energy at High and Extra-
High L’oltage
I) The inspector shall not authorise the
suppiicr to commence supply, or where
the supply has been discontinued for a
period of one year and above, to re-
commence the supply at high or extra-
high voltage to any consumer unless:
a) all conductors and apparatus intended
for use at high or extra-high voltage
and situated on the premises of the
consumer are inaccessible except to an
authorised person and all operations
in connection with the said conductors
and apparatus are carried out only by
an authorised person;
b) the consumer has provided and agrees
to maintain a separate building or a
locked weather-proof and fire-proof
enclosure of agreed sign and location,
to which the supplier shall at all times
have access for the purpose of housing
his high or extra-high voltage
apparatus and metering equipment, or
where the provision of a separate
building or enclosure is impracticable,
the consumer has segregated the
aforesaid apparatus of the supplier
from any other part of his dwn
apparatus:
Provided that such segregation shall
be by the provision of fire-proof walls,
if the Inspector considers it ta be
necessary;
Provided further that in the case of an
outdoor installation the consumer
shall suitably segregate the afotiid
apparatus belonging to the supplier
from his own to the satisfaction of the
Inspector.
NATIONAL BUILDING .CODC OF IbDlA
 c) all pole type sub-stations are
constructed and maintained in
accordance with rule 69.
2) The following provisions shall be
observed where energy at high or extra-
high voltage IS supplied. converted,
transformed oi used:
a) All c.onductors or live parts-of any
apparatus -shall ordinarily be
inaccessible.
All winding%. at high or extra-high
voltage of motors or other apparatus
within reach from any position in
which a person may require to be shall
be suitably protected so as to prevent
danger.
c) Where transformer or transformers
are used. suitable provision shall be
made, either by connecting with eaith
a point of the circuit at the lower
voltage or otherwise, to guard against
danger by reason o’f the said circuit
becoming accidentally charged above
its normal voltage by leakage from or
contact with the circuit at the higher
voltage.
4 i) A sub-station or switch-station
with apparatus having more than
2000 litres of oil shall no:
ordinarily be located in the
basement where proper oil
drainage arragements cannot be
provided.
ii) Where a sub-station or switch
station with apparatus having
more than 2000 litres of oil is
installed whether indoors or
outdoors, the following measures
shall be :aken, namely:
(a) baffle walls shall be erected
between the apparatus
contaming more than 2000
litres of oil and the adjacent
apparatus to prevent spread of
<‘ire and avoid damage;
PART v,,b l l:ll_DlNG ~iEqb’lc~s_SE~~lON 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
(b) a drain valve of adeauate size
which shall be capable of being
safely operated even when the
apparatus has caught fire shall
be provided, and such a valve
shall be easily accessible to
being operated and at the same
time not susceptible to
being operated inadvertantly;
(c) the drain valve shall let out the
oil to a covered drainage system
which shall take away the oil to
a place away from the danger
zone;
iii) the above measures shall be taken
inaddition to o!her fire protection
arrangements to be provided for
quenching the fire in thrapparatus;
iv) cable trenches inside the sub-
stations and switch-stations
containing cables shall be filled
with sand, pebbles or similar non-
inflammable materials, or
completely covered with non-
inflammable 4abs.
d Unless the conditions are such that all
the conductors and apparatus for use
at high. or extra-high voltage may be
made, dead at the same time for the
purpose of cleaning of for other work
thereon, the said conductors and
apparatus shall be so arranged that
they may be made dead in sections,
and that work on any section made
dead may be carried on by an
authorised person without danger.
t) Only persons authorised. under sub-
rule ( !) of ru!e 3 may carry out the
work on live lines and apparatus;
g) Adequate precautions shall be taken to
prevent unauthorised access to any
part of the installation designed to be
electrically charged at high or extra-
high voltage.
mu-i-$ *
 APPENDIX C

FORM OF COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

I ! We certify that the installation detailed below has been installed by me/ us and tested and that to
the hest of my/ our knowledge and belief, it complies withlndiati Electricity Rules 1956.

Electrical Installation at. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

_ . . ..1...............................................,.,................................................
Voltage and system of supplv

Particulars of Works:
4 Internal Electrical
Installation.
No. Total load Type or system of wiring,
i) Light point.

ii) Fan point.

iii) Plug point.

3-pin 5 A.

3-pin 15 A

b: Others. ’ Description hpl kW Type of starting.

I) Motors:
i)
ii)
iii)
2) Other plants:

C) If the work involves

installations of over head
line and/ or underground
cable.

I) i) Type and description of overheadline.

ii) Total length and No. of spans.
iii) No. of street lights and its description.

2) ,, i) Total length of underground cable and its size.

ii) No. of joints:

End joint:

Tee joint:

Straight through joint:

VIII-i.,50 NATlOYAl. BUILDING CODE Of INDIA

Earthing.
i) Description of earthing electrode
ii) No. of earth electrodes
iii) Size of main earth lead

Test Results:
a) Insulation Resistance

i) Iqsuiation resistance of the whole system of conductors to

earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megohms.

ii) Insulation resistance between the phase conductor and neutral.

Between phase R and neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megohms.
Between phase Y and neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megohms.
Between phase B and neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megohms.
iii) Insulation resistance between the phase conductors.
in case of polyphase supply.
Between phase R and phase Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . #Megohms.
Between phase Y and phase B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megohms.
Between phase B and phase R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megohms.

b) Polarity test:
Polarity of non-linked smgle pole branch switches

cl Earth continuity test:

Maximum resistance between any point in the earth continuity conductor including metal
conduits and main earthing lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ohms.

4 Earth electrode resistance:

Resistance of each earth electrode.
i) ..,..................Ohms.
ii) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ohms.
iii) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ohms.
iv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ohms.

e) Lightning protective system.

Resistance of the whole of lightning protective system to earth before any bonding is
effected with earth electrode and metal in/on the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ohms.

Signature of Supervisor Signature of Contractor

Name and Address Name and Address

............................................... ............................................................................................
................................................................ .................................................. . .......... .............
................................................................................... .........
..............................................
............................................................................................................
..............................

VW-51 ’
PAIT VW SUILMNC SEJWICES-SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
 LIST OF STANDARDS
The following lisr records those srandards which are acceptable as 'good pracrice’ and ‘accepted
standards in the fuifihgnr of the requirements sf rhe Code. The latest version oJa srandord
shall be adopted al rhe time oflhe enforcerbent of the Code. The standards listed ma-v be used by
the Authority as a guide in conformance with rhe requiremenrs oj’ the referred clauses in the
Code.
in Ihe /kIlowing list, rhe number appearing in the first column parentheses indicates rhe numbe
of the rejkzc in ti:5 pun/section.
1: IS : 8270 (Part 1)-l 976 Ciuide t‘ol- prepara-
tion of diagrams, charts and tables for
electrotechnology: Part I Definitions
and classification
lS : 2032 Graphical symbols used in elec-
trotechnology:
IS:2032 (Part II)-1962:Part II Kind
of current dtstribution systems and
method of connection
IS : 2032 (Part Ill)-1Y62: Part 111 Cir-
cuit element and variability
IS:2032 ( P a r t IV)-1964:Part I V
Rotating machines and transformers
IS : 2032 (Part V)-1965: Part V
Genera-ting station and substations
IS: 2032 (Part VI)-1965: Part VI
Motor starters.
lS:2032 ( P a r t VII)-1974:Part VI1
Switchgear and auxiliaries (firsr
revision)
IS:2032 (Part VIII)-1965:Part VIII
Semiconductor devices
2) IS: 7752 (Part I)-1975 Guide for im-
provement of power factor in consu-
mers’ installations: Part 1 Low and
medium supply voltage
3) IS : 52 16- 1969 Guide for safety proce-
dures and practices in electrical work
4) IS: 10118 (Part Ii)-1982 Code of practice
for selection, installation and mainte-
nance of switchgear and controlgear:
Part II Selection
5) IS: 1646-1982 Code of practice for fire
safety of buildings (general): Electrical
installations (first revision)
6) IS : 1255- 1967 Code of practice for
installation and maintenance of paper
insulated power cables (up to and
inchiding 33 kV) firsr revision)
7) IS : 2148-1968 Specification for flame-
proof enclosures of electrical apparatus
yirst revision)
8) IS : 375-1963 Specification for marking
and arrangement for switchgear bus-bars
main connections and auxiliary wiring
(revised)
52
VIII-Z-
9) I S : 1777~1978 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
industrial lighting fittings with metal
reflectors Qfirsf revision)
IS : 1947- 1980 Specification for floor
lights (jirsf revision)
IS : 2206 Specification for t tame-proof
electric lighting fittings:
1S : 2206 (Part I)-1962: Part I Wel!-
glass and bulkhead types
I S : 2 2 0 6 ( P a r t II)-1976:Part II
Fittings using giass tubes
IS : 3287- 1 9 6 5 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
industrial lighting fittings with plastic
reflectors
IS : 352%1Y66 Specification for water-
proof electrical lighting Gttings
IS : 35S3- 1966 Specification for water-
tight electric lighting fittings
IS : 40 12- I967 Specification for dust-
proof electric lighting fittings
IS : 40 I3- 1967 Specification for dust-
tight eiectric lighting fittings
IS : 5077-1969 Specification for decora-
tive lighting outfits
10) IS: 3106-1966 Code of practice for selec-
tion, installation and maintenance of
fuses (voltage not exceeding 650 volts)
11) IS : 3961 Recommended current ratings
for cables:
IS : 396 I (Part l)-1967 : Part I Paper-
insulated lead-sheathed cables
IS: 3961 (Part llj-lY67: Part II PVC-
insulated and PVC-sheathed heavy
auty cables
IS: 3961 (Part III)-1968: Part 111
Rub-ber insulated cables
IS: 3961 (Part IV)-1968: Part 1V
Polyethylene insulated cables
1S : 3961 (Part V)-1968 : Part V PVC-
insulated light duty cables
12) IS : 2086-1963 Specification for carriers
and bases using in rewirable type electric
fuses up to 650 volts (revised)
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 IS:9224 (Part II)-1979 L o w v o l t a g e
fuses: Part II Supplementary require-
ments for fuse with high breaking capa-
city for industrial application
13) IS: 2672-1966 Code of practice for lib-
rary lighting
IS : 4347-1967 Code of practice for hospi-
tal lighting
IS : 6665-1972 Code of practice for indus-
trial lighting
IS : 8030-1976 Luminaries for hospitais
14) IS : 732 (Part II)-1983 Code of practice
for electrical wiring installations : Part II
Design and construction (secondrevision)
15) IS: 7733-1975 Code of practice for elec-
trical wiring installations in hospitals
16) IS : 4648- 1968 Guide for electrical layout
in residential buildings
17) IS : 900-1965 Code of practice for ins-
tallation and mamtenance of induction
motors (revised)
IS : 3072-1975 Code of practice for instal-
lation and maintenance of switchgear
(firsI revision)
18) IS : 1653-1972 Specification for rigid steel
conduits for electrical wiring (second
revision)
IS : 2509-1973 Specification for rigid
non-metallic conduits for electrical ins-
tallations (firsr revision)
19) IS : 24 12- 1974 Specification for link clips
for electrical wiring (firsr rev&ion)
20) IS : 34 19- 1976 Specification for fittings
for rigid non-metallic conduits first
revision)
IS : 9537 Conduit for electrical installa-
tions :
IS : 9537 (Part I)-1980 : Part 1
General requirements
IS : 9537 (Part II)-1981 : Part II Rigid
steel conduits.
IS : 2667-1976 Specification for fittings
for rigid steel conduits for electrical
wiring first revision)
I : 5133 (Part II)-1969 Boxes for enclosers
f electrical accessories : Part 11 Boxes
f!ade of insulated materials
21) IS : 19 13 (Part I)- 1978 General and safety
requirements for luminaries: Part I
Tubulor fluorescent lamps (second revision)
PART VIII BlIILDINC SERVICFS-SECTION 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
22) IS : 1258-1979 Specification for bayonet
lampholders (second revision)
23) IS : 418-1978 Specification for tungsten
filament general service electric lamps
(third revision)
1s : 1534 (Part I)-1977’Specification for
ballasts for fluorescent lamps: Part I
For
switch start circuits (second revision)
IS :. 1569- 1 9 6 3 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
capacitors for electric discharge lamps
(fluorescent and mercury vapour)
IS : 2183- 1973 Schedule for high pressure
mercury vapour lamps fj?rsr prevision)
IS : 22 I5- 1968 Specification for star-
ters for fluorescent lamps (second
revision)
IS : 2418 Specification for tubhlar
fluorescent lamps for general lighting
service:
IS:2418 (Part I)-1977:Part I Require-
ments
ments and tests Cfirsr revision)
I S : 2 4 1 8 ( P a r t II)-1977: Part II
Standard lamp data sheets (fksr
revision)
IS: 2418 (Part III)-1977:Part III
Dimensions
Dimensions of G-5 and G-13 bi-pin
caps (first revision)
IS:2418 (Part IV)-1977:Part IV Go
and no go gauges for G-5 and G-13 bi-
pin caps first revision)
IS : 3323- 1980 Specification for bi-pin
lamp holders and tubular fluorescent
lamps firsf revision)
IS : 3324-1965 Specification for holders
and starters for tubular fluorescent
lamps
24) IS : 374-1979 Specification for electric
ceiling type fans and regulators (rhird
revision)
25j IS : 3043-1966 Code of practice for earthing
26) IS:8623 (Part I)-1977 Factory-built as-
semblies of switchgear and controlgear
for voltage up to and including 1000 V ac
and 1200 V dc : Part I General requirements
27) IS: 10028 (Part II)-1981 Code of practice
for selection, installation and maintek
ancc of transformers: Part II Installation
28) IS : 230%!969 Code of practice for the
protection of buildings and allied
structures against lightning (/?rsf
revision)
“lil.Z-~3 (
NATIQNALBUILDINGCODE
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES
SECTION 3 AIR-CONDITIONING AND
HEATING

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

 CONTENTS
0. FOKEWOKD ... 2
1. SCOPE ... 4
2. TERMINOLOGY ... 4
3. PLANNING ... 5
4. AIR-CONDITIONING ... 8
5. EVAPORATlVE COOLING ..; I7
6. PACKtiED AIR-CONDITIONERS ... I7
7. ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS ... 17
,8. HEATING .a. 18
9. SYMBOLS, UNITS AND COLOUR CODE ... I8
10. ENERGY CONSERVATION AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT ... 18
II. INSPECTlON COMMISSIONJNG A N D TEST’l.NG ... I9

?MT VIII BUIUNNC SERWCB~-S~CTION $ A~R~TOND~TION~NC AND H E A T I N G VIII-3.

1
 PART V.111 BUILDING SERVICES
SECTION 3 AIR-CONDITIONING AND HEATING

0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section deals with installation and safety aspects of air-conditioning and heating units in
buildings. In this section, emphasis iqalso laid on the importance of preplanning, which would be
very useful for an orderly development of building activity.

0.2 The space requirements for the plants for air-conditioning work vary considerably with the
system adopted. It is advisable to consult an air-conditioning engineer in this connection at the
stage of preplanning.

0.3 The outside design conditions for airconditioningand heating design work for 16 important
cities have been included in this revision. It is expected to arrive at these conditions for some more
2
VIII+
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE' OF ,ND,.
cities and also to establish similar data for all these cities for themonsoan months. Till such
information is collected for other cities. it is recommended that design work in these cities be
carried out according to the present (local) practice.
0.4 The first version of this part was prepared in1970. Additionalinformation hasbeen included
in the light of the new series of Indian Standards brought out on the subject, These have’been
incorporated in this revision. This revision containsthe following major modifications/additions
with respect to provisions of the 1970 version of this section:

a) The n.eed to take care of fire hazard arising out of the air-handling unit and the returnail
passage through the corridors has been emphasized.

b) The requirements regarding glazing,have been elaborated to cover constructional features of

sun breakers and thermal performance of different shading devices.

c) The values and units of overall coefficient of heat transferior exposed roof and floors of non-
airconditioned space have been modified.
4 Inside design conditions for winter given in Table, 2 have been made applicable, depending
upon the value of the ambient winter temperature.
d Outside design conditions for 16 important cities in the country have been covered forthefirst
time. This would lead to a more pragmatic design of the air-conditioning system for agiven set
of comfort conditions.
0 Detailed constructional and installation requirements of duct work have been introduced.
Is) A new clause drawing reference to the requirements of fire protection has been added.
h) Information regarding noise and vibration, air filters and automatic control has been added.
j) The requirements regarding evaporative cooling have been spelt out more specifically.
k) New provisions covering requirementsof packaged air-condtioners and room air-conditioners
with regard to aspects such as uses, capacity, location, installation, etc, have been-introduced.
m) Information regarding energy conservation and energy management, inspection,
commissioning and testing has been included.

n) A reference to relevant standard covering norms for symbols and units has been included. The
need for a scheme of colour code painting for air-conditioning installations has been
emphasized.
0.5 The information contained in this section is based largelyonthe following Indian Standards:
IS : 659-1964 Safety code of air-conditioning (revised).
IS : 7896- 1975 Data-for outside design conditions for air-conditioning for summer months.
0.6 Assistance has also been derived from. the following Indian Standards and foreign codesto
prepare a revised draft of this section:
IS : 139 I-197 I Specification for room air-conditioners@rsr revision).
IS : 3315-1974 Specification for evaporative air coolers (desert coolers)(first revi+m).

IS : 814X-1976 Specification for packaged air-conditioners.

BS 5720 : 1979 Code of practice for mechanical ventilation and air-conditioning in
buildings.
Canadian Heating. Ventilation andAir-ConditionimgCode 1977.
Building Code of the City of New York.

?AYT VU! l l:II.DIN~ SERVlCES-SECTION 3 AIPCONDITIONlNC AND HEATING VIII-$-

3’
 1. SCOPE
1.1 This. section covers the design,
construction and installation of air-
conditioning and heating systems and
equipment installed in buildings for the
purpos’e of providing and maintaining
conditions of air. temperature, humidity,
purity and distribution suitable for the use
and occupancy of the space.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this section, the
following definitions shall apply:
A I R- C O N D I T I O N I N G - T h e p r o c e s s o f
treating air so as to control simultaneously its
temperature, humidity\, purity and
distribution to meet the requirements of the
conditioned space.
D UCT S YSTEM -A continuous passageway
for the transmission of air which, in addition
to ducts, may include duct fittings, dampers,
plenums. fans and accessory air handling
equipment.
EVAPORATIVE AIR COOLING -The removal
of sensible heat from the air by the adiabatic
exchange of heat between air and a water
spray or wetted surface.
F IRE D A M PE R -A closure which consists of
a normally held open damper installed in an
air distribution system or in a wall or floor
asse.mbly and designed to close automatically
in the event of a fire in order to maintain the
integrity of fire separation.
F IRE S E P A R A T I O N --A construction
assembly that acts as a barrier against spread
of fire and may not be required to have a fire-
resistance rating or fire-protection rating.
F IRE W A LL-A fire resistance rated wall,
having protected openings, which restricts the
spread of fire and extends continuously from
the foundation to at least Im above the roof.
P A C K A G ED A I R- CONDITIONER -An encased
assembly as a self-contained unit primarily for
floor mounting, designed to provide free
delivery of conditioned air to an enclosed
space, room or zone (conditioned space). It
includes a prime source of refrigeration for
cooling and dehumidification and means for
the circulation and cleaning of air, with or
without external air distribution, ducting. It
m a y a l s o iriclude m e a n s f o r h e a t i n g ,
humidifying or ventilating air.
These machines are equipped with a water-
cooled or air-cooled condetiser. For the
purpose of this definition, the unit for which
VllCF 4
the air-cooled condenser is built as a separate
package for remote field installatioti and
interconnection shall also be considered as a
packaged air-conditioner.
P LENUM -An air compartment or chamber
to which one or more ducts are connected and
which forms part of an air distribution system.
P O S I T I V E V E N T I L A T I O N -The supply of
outside air by. means of a mechanical device,
such as a fan.
R E C I R C U L A T E D A I R- R e t u r n a j r p a s s e d
through the conditioner before being
resupplied to the conditioned space.
REFRIGERANT-The fluid used for heat
transfer in a refrigerating system, which
absorbs heat at a low temperature and a low
pressure of the fluid and rejects heat at a
higher temperature and a higher pressure of
the fluid, usually involving changes of state of
the fluid.
REHEATING~T~~ process by which air,
which has been cooled down in order to
condense out part of the moisture it contains.
is heated again in erder to raise its
temperature td a suitable level.
R O O M A I R- C O N D I T I O N E R - An encased
assembly designed as a self-contained unit
primarily for mounting in a window or
through the wall or as a console. It is
designed to provide free delivery of
conditioned air to an enclosed space. room or
zone (conditioned space). It includes a prime
source of refrigeration for cooling and
dehunlidification a n d m e a n s f o r t h e
circulation and cleaning of air. It may also
include means for hearing. h u m i d i f y i n g ,
ventilating or exhausting air.
SHADL FAC‘ I OK The ratio of instantaneous
heat gain through the shading device to that
through a plain glass sheet of 3 mm thickness.
SUPPL.Y AND REI-~JRN AIR G R I L L E S-Fittings
fixed at the openings through which air is
delivered into and returned from the air-
conditioned enclosure by an air-conditioning
plant or unit.
T EM P E R A T U R E , D RY B ULB - T h e
temperature of a gas or mixture of gases
indicated by an accurate thermometer after
correction for radiation.
TEMPERATLIRE, WE-F BULB - Thermodyna-
mic wet-bulb temperature is the temperature
at which liquid or solid water. by evaporating
into air, may bring the air to saturation
adiabatically at the same tempeiature. Wet-
bulb temperature (without qualification) is
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
the temperature indicated by a wet bulb
psychrometer c o n s t r u c t e d a n d .uscd
according to specifications.
T HERMAL T R A N S M I T T A N C E - Thermal
transm’ission through unit area of the given
building unit divided by the temperature
difference between the air or some other iluid
on either side of the building unit in ‘steady
state’ conditions.
Z E R O S T A T I C ‘ PRESSURE -The static
pressure at the o’utlet of the air cooler.made
equal to the static pressure at the inlet of the
air cooler.
definitions of other lerms. referenccshall hc
.NoIE -- For
made to good practice [VIII-3(I)].*
_?. PLANNlNCi
3.1 All plans, specifications and data for air-
conditioning and heating systems of all
buildings and serving all occupancies within
the scope of the Code shall be supplied to
Authority, where called for (see Part II
Administration).
3 . 2 T h e p l a n s f o r h e a t i n g a n d air-
conditioning systems shall include all details
and data necessary for review of mstallation,
such as:
4 building: name. type and location;
b) owner : name;
cl orientation; north point on plans;
d) general plans; dimensions and height of all
rooms;
e) intended use of all rooms;
1) detail or description of wall construction,
including insulation and finish;
is) detail or description of roof, ceiling and
floor construction, including insulation
and finish;
h) detail or description of windows and
outside doors, including size, weather
stripping, storm sash, sills, storm doors,
etc;
j) layout showing the location, size and
construction of the cooling tower
(apparatus), ducts, distribution system;
k) information regarding location. sizes and
capacity of air distribution system,
refrigeration and heating plant, air
handling equipment;
* In this section. where reference -is made lo ‘good
practice’ in relation to design. Jesting. construct,ion
procedures and other informatlon, the appropriate
document listed at the end of this section may be used
as a guide to the interpretation of this term.
PART Vlll BUILJXNC SERVICES-SECTION 3 AlPCONDlTlONlNG
m) information regarding type of dampers
used in air-conditioning supply grille
system;
n) chimney or gas vent size, shape and height;
P) internal equipment load, such .as number
of people. motor, heaters md lighting
load; and
9) location and grade of the required fire
separations.
3.3 Prcylanning-ln the event of buildings
not being air-conditioned at time of
construction and proposed to be air-
conditioned at a later stage, provisions for
structural and other requirements bf the
system shall be made at the planning stage
(SC’P 3.3.1 to 3.3.9).
3.3.1 EQUIPMEN 1 ROOM FOR CENTRAL AIR-
~~IVL>I~I ION.~N(; PLAN’I
3.J.1.1 In selecting the location for plant
room. the aspects of efficiency, economy and
good practice should be kept in mind and
.where possible it shall bq made contiguous
with the building. This room shall be located
as centrally as possible with respect to the area
to be air-conditioned and shall be free from
obstructing columns..
In the case of.large installations (500 tonnes
and above), it is advisable to ha\;e a separate
isolated equipment room where possible. The-
clear headroom below soffit of beam should
be a minimum of 3.6m from finished floor
level. In the case of smaller plants, this may be
reduced to 3 m.
3.3.1.2 The floors of the equipment rooms
should be light coloured and finished smooth.
For floor loading, the air-conditioning
engineer shall be consulted (see also Part VI
Structural design, Section I Loads).
3.3.1.3 Generally,. in the case of all plants,
structural provIsIons shall be made for
supporting t.he water pipes from the floor
ceiling slabs.
3.3.1.4 All equipment rooms, wherever.
necessary, shall have provision for mechanical
ventilation For space requirements, air-
conditioning engineer shall be consulted.
3.3.1.5 Adequate floor drain for disposal of
waste water from the equipment room shall be
provided.
3.3.1.6 Wherever required, the structure of
the equipment room should be windowless to
prevent noise transmission. Wherever
possible and necessary acoustic treatment
should be given to prevent transmission of
AND HEATING VIII-3-”

equipment noise. The slant machinerv shall
be founded on anti-vibratory supporis.
3.3.1.7 Pipe supports shall be such that they
are isolated from the structure-and do not
transmit vibration to the building.
3.3.2 EQUIPMENT .RooM FOK AIK H.,VSDL-
ING UNl.1.S
3.3.2.1 This shall be located as centrally as
possible to the area air-conditiuned,
contiguous to the corridors or otherspaces for
carrying air ducts. For floor loading, air-
conditioning engineer shall be consulted (see
also Part VI Structural design, Section I
Loads).
3.3.2.2 In the case of’ large and multistoreyed
buildings, independent air handling unit
rooms should bc provided. wherethe design
Calls tbr the same. The .area to be served by
the air handling unit should be decided
depending upon the provisions of fire
protection measures adopted.
3.3.2.3 Provision should be made for the
entry of fresh air. The fresh air intake shall
have louvers/ wind cheaters which make the
quantity of air intake as independent of
prevalent wind direction as possible. In the
case of tall buildings, vertical shafts should be
provided to handle fresh air and water pipes.
3.3.2.4 In all cases air intakes shall be so
located as to avoid contamination from
exhaust outlets or other sources in
concentrations greater than normal in the
locality in which the building is located.
3.3.2.5 No air from any dwelling unit shall be
circulated directly or indirectly to any other
dwelling unit,. public corridor or public
stairway.
3.3.2.6, Exterior openings for outdw~ air
intakes and exhaust outlets shall be shielded
from weather and insects, and shall be fitted
with corrosion resistant screens of mesh of
suitable size. Such screens shall be accessible
for maintenance.
3.3.2.7 All air handling rooms shall have
floor drains. The fIodr drain shall be trapped
but in this case the trap shall provide a water
seal between the air-conditioned space and
the drain line.
3.3.2.8 The passage of return amthrough the
corridors directly to the plant room may be
provided only when sufficient fire protection
arrangements like an effective means for
detecting smoke and controlling its spread are
made. In addition, return air shall not be
allowed to pass through any exit staircases.
VIII-3.6
‘.
3.3.2.9 The floor should be light coloured,
smooth finished with terrazo tiles or
equivalent.
3.3.2.10 Where necessary, structural design
should avoid beam obstruction to the passage
,of supply and return air ducts.
3.3.2.11 The air handling units should be
acousticaliy treated. The access door to the
room should be of single leaf acoustically
treated type and should have a sill. It should
opsn outwards.
3.3.3 R I S E R S
3.3.3. I In the case of centralized air handling
units, catering for a number of floors, air
risers for supply ducts and return air are
necessary. The risers shall commence from the
roof of the air handling room and shall extend
up to the slab of the last floor.
3.3.3.2 The walls of risers in the
corridor/space shah beconstructed only up to
1 m from finished floor level. They shall be
built up to the ceiling only after installation of
ducts.
3.3.4 O PENINGS FOR SUPPLY AIR D U C T S
AND RETURN AI R
3.3.4.1 For supply air ducts and return air,
openings are necessary on each floor. They are
connected through an opening to the riser.
Adequate clearance shall be provided for the
installation of supply and intake ,duct and
their connection to the risers.
3.3.4.2 Duct supports in the form of recessed
anchors of projecting mild steel flats with
holes drilled for support bolts shall be cast
with the ceiling slab.
3.3.4.3 False ceiling shall be provided after
the ducts are laid. The supports for the duct
and the false ceiling shall be independent.
3.3.4.4 Where a duct penetrates the masonry
wall it shall either be lined on outside with
felt to isolate it from the masonry, or an air
gap shall be left around it.
3..3._5 SUPPI.Y AND R ETURN A IR OPENING-
For side and ceiling outlets, provisron in
walls and ceiling shall be left in consultation
with an air-conditioning engineer.
3.3.6 SHAFT FOR PIPES -Provision shalI be
made for a suitable shaft for condenser chilled
water and refrigeration pipes from the main
equipment room to the air handling unit
rooms and/or cooling tower, where
necessary..
NATIONAL BUII.DINC CODE OF INDIA
 ‘.

3.3.7 COOLiNG TO W E R maximum glazed area possibie, especially

from the altitude and azimuth angle at the
3.3&7.1. It is often necessary to make sun which is likely to govern the heat load.
provision for mechanical draft cooling tower
on the roof and the location for the same shall, b) The sun breakers shall preferably be light
be decided in consultation with the. air- and bright in colour so as to reflect back as
conditioning engineer. The cooling tower much of the sunlight as possible..
shall not be located on the ground, as apart c) The sun, breakers shall be preferably lm
from adverse effects on its efficiency, it is also away from the wall face, with free
a source of objectionable noise. If it has to be ventilaiioni particularly from top to
located on the ground, it should be located far bottom, being provided, for carrying
away in an open space to avoid reverberations away the heat which is likely to get
from tall structures. ‘boxed’ between the sun breakers and the
main building face.
3.3.7.2 The floor area required for various
types of cooling towers shall be as given 4 The sun breakers shall be sotinstalled as to
below: have minimum conduction of heat from
sun breakers to the main building.
a) Natural draft O-15 to 0.20.mz/t of
cooling tower refrigeration 3.3.8.3 Where resort is taken to provide
reflecting surfaces for keeping out the heat
b) Induced draft 0.10 to 0*13m’/t of load, care should be taken regarding the
cooling tower refrigeratiorl hazards to the traffic and people on the road
from the reflected light from the surfaces.
c) Fibre reinforced O-07 to 0*08m’/t of
plastics cooling refrigeration 3.3.8.4 The values of shade factor for various
tower types of shading devices are given in Tablel’.

3.3.7.3 Obstruction to free air flow to the TABLE I THERMAL PERFORMANCE OF

cooling tower shall be avoided. DIFFERENT SHADING DEVICES
S L NAM E OF THE TRANS- SHADE
34.7.4 Structural provision for the cooling No. SHADING DEVKE MITTANCE FACTOR
tower shalltake into a.ccount the loads coming (I) (2) (9 (4)
on the same. W/( m2 “C)
i) Plain glass sheet 5.23 I.00
3.3.7.5 Special .design requirements are (3.0 mm thick)
necessary where noise to the adjoining ii) Plain glass+ wife 5.00 0.6s
building is to be avoided. mesh outside

3.3.7.6, Provision for make-up water tank to iii) Painted glass

the cooling tower shall be made. Make-up a) White paint 5.22 0.35
water tank to the cooling tower shall be
b) Yellow paint 5.22 o-37
separate from the tank serving drinking water.
c) Green paint 5.22 0.40
3.3.7.7 Water having contaminants which iv) Heat absorbing glass 4.65 0.45
can adversely affect the plant shall, generally,
be treated. v) Plain glass sheet + 3.72
Venetian blind
inside
3.3.8 GLAZING -In view of high energy cost,
adequate protection shall be provided by a) Light colour 035
keeping away the heat load through glazirig b) Dark colour 040
and other methods.
vi) Plain glass sheet + 3.14
curtain inside
3.3.8.1 Whi$ considering the orientation of
the buildinj: (see Part VIII Building services, a) Light 0.35
Section I Lighting and ventilal.ion) glazing in b) Dark colour 040
walls subjected to htivy sun exposure shall be
vii) Plain glass sheet 5.23
avoided. In case it is not possible to do so,
double glazing or heat resistant glass should a) 100 percent shaded .0*14
be used. b) 75 percent shaded 0.34

3.3.8.2 Where sun breakers sire used, the c) 60 perent shaded. 0.56
following aspects shall be kept in view:
3.3.9 ROOF INSULATION -The exposed roof
a) The sun breakers shall shade the should be insulated with suitable insulating

7 .
PART VlIl MJILDINC S E R V I C E S - S E C T I O N 3. AIRCONDITIONINC AND -HEATING VIIH-
materiais. “l-he insulation should bc properly 4./. f.f In conditions when ambient winter
waterproofed 10 prewmt loss of insulating temperatures are appreciably lower than
properties. 25”C, inside conditions in winter may be
reduced to the conditions given in Table 3 to
3..3.9. I The overal! thermal transmittance reduce the extent of winter heating,
from exposed roof should be kept as
the
minimum as possible and under normal 4,1.1.2 As far as possible, t hermal shock of
conditions, the desirable value should not more than 11‘C should be avoided,
exceed 0.58 W, (m~ ‘C],
4.1.2 OUTSIDE DESIGN CONDITIONS—The
3.3.9.2 The ceiling surface of floors which are outside design conditions (dry bulb and wet
not to be air-conditioned shall be suitably bulb temperatures) for summer months for
insulated to give an overall thermal different cities are given in Table 4.
transmittance not exceeding 1, !6 W/(m*°C)
4.1.2.1 SELECTiON—The design values of’
4. AIR-CONDITIONING I percent, 2.5 percent or 5 percent exceeded
temperature given in “I_able3 may be selected,
4. I Design Conditions
depending upon the percentage of occurrence
4.1.1 INSIDE DESIGN conditions—.For as appropriate to the occupancies, process
comfort air-conditioning, dry bulb and wet- and variation of temperature control
bulb temperatures may be adopted as given in required.
Table 2 for summer and in Table 3 for winter
(see 4.1.1.1). 4./,3 For air-conditioning systems other than
comfort air-conditioning, design conditions
required by the. processes involl cd may be
adopted.

4.1.4 Adequate movement of air shall always

be provided in an air-conditioned enclosure,
but velocities in excess of 0.5m~s in thezone
between floor level and the 1.5m level shall
generally be avoided; in the case of comfort
air-conditioning, 0.25m; s shall be the
permissible limit 01” air rnov~mCnt in ~hjs
zone, except in the vicinity of a supply or
return air grille.

4.2 Jfittimum (lu[side Fresh Air — “[he total

minimum outside fresh air introduced into an
ecclosure by an air-conditioning plant or unit
shall be reiateci to the number of occupants in
the enclosure at any time, whether they are
smokers or non-smokers and to the cubic
contents of the enclosed space in the manner
specified in Table 5.

TABLE 3 INSIDE D~SIGN CONDITIONS FOR

WIN’I Eit 4.2.1 Table 5 shall be used only when the
(Clausrs 4.1.1 .4.1.1.1 and 4.1.2.!) contamination of the air in the conditioned
SI ol’tls!llM MINIMUM enclosure results solely from respiratory and
so. CONIMIIONS 0)!41)[ I IOKS other physiological activities of occupants or
~~
Dry BiIlb Wet Bullr th Bulb wet Bulb
due to their smoking.
Tempera- 1 cmpwa- “1mptwti- leniptw-
ture tu re turc turc 4,2.2 In hospital operation theatres, the
(1) (3 (3) (4; (5) extent and quality of outside air shall depend
“c -c ‘t- “L- upon the type of anaestfiesia used. Where the
!ype of ana~sthesia used varies in the same
0 2;4 178 II(.3 I $4)
operating theatre, depending on the emer-
Ii) 21.7 17.3 d IJ4
gency, 100 percent outside air (see4.2.2.1)
hi) ~~.z 164 19.4 j~.() should normally beused and no recirculation
iv) 22:8 [5.3 t9.7 10+ of air should be allowed, since anaest het ic
o 23.3 144 - gases are explosive. The refrigerant used shall
be such as not to form an explosive mixture
vi) 236 13.4 -
with the common anaesthesja used in merjjc~l

8
VIII.;- NATIONAL IIx LDING CODE OF INDIA
 Ir\Bl.E .t OllXlDE DEYICS C~O~Dll~iOSis I - O R SLiMMER
( c/r;u.w 4. / 2)

tlr.( 2.55 jr., 105’ ‘I“; ?.V, 5’; lo“;’

Ahmadabad 42.X 41 7 40.7 2Y.5 27.h 21.2 2h.Y 2h.4
Amrltsar 42.5 41.5 J(i. 3 in.4 27.Y 26.‘) Zh.3 25.3
Bhopal 41 7 40.X 3Y ic 3x.5 %.: 24.x 24.4 23.x
Bomba! 34.5 32.8 33.h 32.X 2d.J 28.0 27.X 27:l
CalculIa 39.5 3x.3 37.4 35.h 29.3 29.2 2X.X 2x.4
C‘oimbatore 3h.7 35 Y 34 Y 31.7 2x.3 27.4 2h.7 25.Y
Delii1 43.0 JI 9 .+I.; 40.3 2X.1 27.2 26.4 25.h
Hbdcrabad 3Y.5 3x 7 17.Y 36.7 3.3 24.4 23.4, 23 5
.lodhplu 43,s 42.5 41.3 10 0 27.Y 27.2 2h.5 25x
I.ucknow 42.X 41.‘) 41.0 3Y.5 ?H 3 ?7.7 ‘7 2 2h.5
Madra\ 39.2 37.4 3h.Y 35.5 2X.5 2li.2 27.X 27.4
hagpur 42.9 411.0 4i.l 3Y.Y 27.5 2h.2 2S.h 15.1
Patna 42.4 41.1 39.‘) 3X.3 2X. I 27.X 27 4 27 I
Roorkee 42.5 41.4 4O.h W.2 27.8 ?h Y 26.1 256
Trivandrum 32.9 32.4 3 1.x 31 0 27.2 26.') 2h.l !h J
Vishakhapatnam 3X.4 37.0 36.0 35 I 30 4 29 7 2’) 3 2X.X

surgery. and shall conform to accepted 4.3.1 The design a n d i n s t a l l a t i o n ot

standards [Vlll-3 (2)]*.
4.2.2./ Modern practice indicates lhat
outside air rate for operation theatres is
governed by factors like type of filters used in
the supply air circuit and type of air
distribution patterns used in rooms. With the
arrangement of absolute filter and iammar
air flow in operation theatres, outside air
intake may be restricted up to 30 percent.
4.2.3 DETEHMINATIOX OF AVAILABI E
VOLUME O F POSlT.lVE VENTILA rlOV - - - In
air-conditioned enclosures, the volume of
positive ventilation shall be measured using
appropriate instruments, such as a properly
calibrated ‘anemometer’, velocity meter and
pitot tube, which primarily measure the
average velocity of air in the outside air
intake duct. The average velocity of a i r
multiplied by the area of the duct cross-
section gives the volume of outside air drawn
by the air-conditioning plant. This is the
volume of positive ventilation supplied. ‘The
locations of openings for sources of positive
ventilation shall be free from any source of
contamination which may be adjacent
thereto.
4.3 Design and lnsiallarion Hequiremenu-
T h e d e s i g n a n d installatibn of air-
conditioning equipment shall satisfy the
requirements given in 4.3.1 to 4.4./f.
*In this section. where reference is made to ‘accepted
standards’ in relation IO material specifications, the
app.ropriate document listed in the the appendix to the
Code may be used as a guide 10 the intcrpretalmn of
this term.
compressors, condensers, cvaporatols,
piping and other apparatus forming a part of
t h e r e f r i g e r a t i n g s y s t e m o f a n air-
conditioning installation shall conform I O
good practice [VIII-3 (Z)].
4.3.2 Where steam is used for heaiing or re-
heating air for air-conditioning bg direct
contact with a heating coil, the p!essurc of
steam shall not exceed I .5 kg/ cm-.
4.3.3 A n y h e a t i n g co11 used in an air-
conditioning system shall withstand: a
hydrostatic pressure five times the workrng
pressure of steam for a period of one minute
without failure or leakage.
4.3.4 All boilers used in producing steam for
h e a t i n g p u r p o s e s s h a l l s a t i s f y the
requirements of the Indian Boilers Act and
other Central or State Acts and Kegulations
in the matter of use of boilers.
4.3.5 For a very special application
(occupancy) involving the use of explosives,
more detailed technical guidance shall be
sought regarding location of the equipment.
4.4 Duct Work
4.4.1 All ducts, duct connectors, associated
fittings. and plenums used in the air duct
system shall be constructed of steel,
aluminium alloy or some other approved
metal, or materials such as clay or asbestos
cement or similar non-combustible material.
The material and constructional

PART Vlll BLJILDINC S E R V I C E S - S E C T I O N 3 AlRCONDITlONlNC AND HEATING

9 *
VIII-3 -
requirements ot metal air ducts in air-
conditioning systems shall conform to
accepted standards [VIII-3(3)].
4.4.2 Air duct systems shall be made
substantially air-tight throughout, and shall
have no openings other than those required
for proper operation and maintenance of.the
system. Access openings shall be provided
where debris, paper or other combustible
material may accumulate in plenums and
ducts. Removable grilles requiring only the
loosening of catches or screws for removal
may be considered as access openings,
Fastening on walk-in access doors shall be
such that the door may be readily opened
from the inside without the use of keys.
4.4.3 Joints and seams of all ducts shall be
mechanically secure and made subsequently
air-tight (see also 4.4.2). Slip joints shall have
a :ap of at least 25mm and shall be fastened
individually.
4.4.4 Vibration isolation connectors of
suitable length in duct systems shall be made
of non-combustible material.
4.4.5 Coverings, linings and associated
adhesives and insulation of air ducts,
plenums and other parts of air duct systems
shall be of non-combustible material when
exposed to heated air or radiation from heat
sources.

TABLE 5 MINIMUM- FRESH AIR REQUIREMENTS

(Clause 4.2 and 4.2.1)
SL. APPLICAI’ION SMOKING AIX RE Q U I R E M E N T , ci’, min
No. h -
’ Recom- Minimam Per m’ of’
mended Floor Area
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
0.56 0.28 -
9 Apartments Some
ii) Banking space Occasional 0.28 0.21 _
iii) Board rooms Very heavy I .40 0.56 _
iv) Department stores None 0.21 0.14 0.015
Directors’ rooms Very heavy 1.40 0.84 _
v)
vi) Drug stores* Considerable 0.28 0.21 _
vii) Factoriest None 0.28 0.21 0.03
viii) Garages _ - _ 0.30
ix) Hospitals :
a) Operating rooms None - 0.60
(all fresh air)
b) Private rooms None 0.84 0.70 0.10
c) Wards None 0.56 0.28 -
x) Hotel rooms Heavy 0.84 0.70 0.10
xi) Kitchens:
a) Restaurant _ 1.20
.b) Residence _ _ 0.60
xii) Laboratories* Some 0.56 0.42 -
xiii) Meeting rooms Very heavy 1.40 0.84 0.38
xiv) Offices:
a) General None 0.42 0.28 -
b) Private Some 0.70 0.42 0.08
Considerable 0.84 0.70 0.08

xv) Restaurants:
a) Cafeteria* Considerable 0.34 0:28
b) Dining room Considerable 0.42 0.34
xvi) Retail shop None 0.28 0.21
xvii) Theatre None 0.2 I 0.14 -
Some 0.42 0.28 -
xviii) Toilets (exhaust) - - 0.60

*In case exhaust air required is more than fresh air specified, fresh air requirements will take exhaust
considerations into account.
tbiay begoverned by focal byclaws (sees/so Part VIII Building services, Section I Lightingand ventilation).

.,,,3.10 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA


4.4.5.1 Duct coverings need not meet these
requirements where they are entirely located
outside of a building and do not penetrate a
wal! or roof, and do not create an exposure
hazard.
4.4.5.2 Duct covezings and linings shall be
interrupted at tlie area of operation of a fire
damper or fire door, when 8 fire damper or
fire door is used -in the duct penetration of a
fire partition or fire wall.
4.4.5.j Linings.of ducts shali be so installed
that they will not interfere with the operation
of fire dampers and other closures.
4 . 4 . 6 U n d e r g r o u n d d u c t s sha!l b e
constructed to provide interior drainage and
shall not be connected directly to a sewer.
4.4.7 No attic, basement. room or concealeJ
space in a building shall be used as an
integra! part of a duct system unless it
conforms to all the requirements for ducts:
Such arrangements shall be subject to the
approval of the air-conditioning engineer.
Plenum chambers which conform to all -the
requirements fgr ducts may be located ,in
such portion of the building; such chambers
shall not be used for storage or occupational
purposes. A concealed space formed by a
ceiling and f!oor above may be used as a
plenum chamber, provided the installation
conforms to fire-resisting and fire protection
requirements.
4.4.8 Ducts sha!l not be built into a building
in such a way as to impair the effectiveness of
the fireproofing around steel or iron
structural members, such 2s placing ducts
between the fire proofing and the members
protacted. except in the case of beams or
joists protected by a fire-res’isting ceiling.
4.4.9 Where ducts installed above a fire-
resi5tir.g ceiling are provided with openings
in ‘the ceiling, it is important that such
openings be limited in size and adequately
protected to preserve the required fire
resistance. Such openings shall have
approved means for protection.
4.4.10 putts shall not be located where they
will be Subject to damage or rupture. Where
so located, they shall be suitab!y prqtected.
4.4.11 Ducts shall be, subsfaniially
supported. Hangers and brackets for
supporting ducts shall be of metal.
4.5 Electrical and Of her Requirements
4.5.f C O N F O R M I T Y WITH iNDI4N ELECTRI-
KITY AC T. RU L E S AND ST A ND A R D S- A l l
electrical work in connection with the wiring
PART VM BIJILDIN(; SKRVICES-SECTION 3 ~IR-CONDITIONIN~ *ND
‘.
and installation of electrical equipment shall
be carried out in accordance with Part VIII
Building services, Section 2 Electrica!
installations.
4.5.2 CO N D U I T S-Wheie conduits are used
for carrying insulated electrical conductors
and when such conduits pass from a non-air-
conditioned a’rea-into an air-conditioned area
or into a fan chamber or duct, a junction box
shall be installed or other means shall be
adopted to break the continuity of such
conduit at the point of entry or just outside
and the conduit should be sealed round the
conductors to prevent air being carried from
one area into the other through the. conduit
and thereby giving rise nqt only to leakage
and inefficiency but also to the risk of
condensation of moisture inside &he conduits.
The same method applies equally to other
types of wiring, like wood sheathing or ducts
which allow air to pass through around the
conductors.
4.5.3 In the case of air-conditioning p!ants
where re-heating is done. a safety device shah
be incorporated*in the installaton to cut off
automatically the source of heating, such as
steam or electricity by means of a thermostat
or some other device, as soon as the
temperature of the room reaches ‘a
predetermined high level not exceeding 44°C
unless a higher temperature is tequiled for an
industrial piocess carried out in the air-
conditioned encloslire.
4.5.4 In the case of air-conditioning plants
where heating or re-heating by means of an
electric heater designed to operate in ,an air
current is done, a safety device shall be
incorporated in the installation to cut off the
supply of electricity to the heating device
whenever there is failure of the air current in
which the heater is required, to operate.
Serious harm to the plant and sometimes
fires may be. caused by negligence in this
respect.
4.5.4.1 The surface temperature of all
electric heaters used in an air-conditioned
plant should be limited, preferably to 4O!Y’C,
and in any case it shall not exceed 538”C,
when measured in still air.
4.6 Fire Protection Requirements -- Fire
protection requirements of air-conditioning
systems shall be in accordance with Part IV
Fire protection.
4.6.1 Air-conditioning of enclosures. where
extremely combustible articles like
cinematograph film’s, explosives, etc. are
stored, shall be governed by appropriate
State Regulations in this respect where such
regulations exist. Normally, such enclosure
“E,T,NC VIII;F~1 ,
should not, be air-conditioned by a plant or
unit which also air;conditlons other
enclosures ‘meant for human occupancy.If
this io unavoidable, effective means, sucha8
automatic shutters, shall be adoptcd.to close
tightly all duct communications between
such enclosure and other enclosuresand thr
air-cqnditioning lant itself, as soon as
tompwituns reacR a dangerously high level
due to fire or other causes, Fire dampers are
customarily ‘held open by fusible links.
4.6.1.1 In particular, a projection room
attached to a cinema theatre shall be isolated
automatically in the manner indicated above
from the auditorium.
4.7 Noise and Vibration
4.7.1 SOUND CONTROL -General noise is
unwanted sound. All ventilating and air-
conditioning systems will produce noise and
this may cause annoyance or disturbance.
4.7.1.1 NOISE SOURCES -- Undesirable
sound may arise from:
a) Central plant, for example, boiler pumps,
fans, compressors, cooling towers,etc;
b) Distribution noise owing ,to:
i) air velocity in the duct, particularly
through dampers or restriction or air
leakage;
ii) drumming from duct walls;
iii) excessive fluid velocity in pip% and
valves; and
iv) pick up of noise or vibration from
plant rooms, etc. and transmission
along duct work or pi e work, cross
talk or noise transP er from one
occupied space to another.
cl Noice souices in occupied rooms. for
example, local fans, induction unit, high
velocity unit, self-contained unit
air-conditioners air flow through grilles
and diffusers; and
4 Architecturii considefation, that is. open
plan, false ceilings.
4.7.1.2 D E S I G N PR I NC I P L E S - N o i s e c a n b e
transmitted through internal duct work,
external grilles (both inlet and exhaust)
external louvers, open windowa; etc. Noise
levels can be reduced in the room by
appropriate selection or acoustic shrouding
of machines. In sbme cases treatmeqt of plant
room walls and ceilings can alleviate the
problem, but this is not usually economical
or even adequate. The following points
should .be taken into account in selecting
equipment to meet the required noise levels.
W-*12
a) Choice of fan with low sound power level
consistent with the required perfomance
and ensuring operation at maximum
efficiency. To achieve this, smooth entry
and exit flow are important;
b) By ‘lining plenum chambers with sound
absorbent material high attenuation can
be obtained quite cheaply, particularly if
inlet and outlet do not face each other;
a For the addition of purpose-made
alterations that fit into the line of duct
work, adequate space is needed;
4 Duct work should be lined with sound
absorbent material;
e) Duct sizes should be chosen to be
compatible with the frequencies of the
sound to be absorbed;
0 Consideration should be given to the
possibility of noise transmission from the
duct, which may necessitate increasing
the mass of the duct construction;
is) Use of nitred bends preferably lined
(preferable to, lining dtJct work);
h) Avoidance of the need for excessive
throttling air at grilles, diffuser dampers;
and
9 Acoustic freatment of air inlet and outlet
external to the building.
4.7.1.3C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S O F SOIJND
ABSOKHFNT MATERIAI.
a) High sound absorption coefficient over
the required frequency range;
b) Preferably non-combustible or at least
will not sustain flame nor. produce toxic
fumes when burnt;
c) Non-hygroscopic;
d) Will not sustain morlld growth or vermin;
d Does not absorb odours;
f-l Sound absorbent material. its covering
and its adhesive should not disintegrate
under vibration or ageing and should not
be eroded by the air flow, taking into
account, extremes of temperature and
humidity likely to be encountered:
g) Surface of all sound absorbent materials
should be covered with a suitable
membrane sealed at all joints to prevent
the entrainment of particles from sound
absorbing media, as such entrainment
can lead to hazard in many applications;
and
W Sound attenuating padsshould,whenever
possible be mounted vertically; if this is
not possible, it should be retained in a
suitable enclosure to prevent collapse.
N A T I O N A L BiJll.diNG CODE OF INDlA

4.7.2 VIBRATION CO N T R O L
4.7.2.1 SOURCES -Vibration in a building
is an undesirable sensation resulting from
low frequency pressure however bein
transmitted through both the structure and
the’air? In m.ost situations it is the vertical
vibrations that are important, since floors
have the greatest flexibility in this direction.
4.7.2.2 DESIGN PRINCIPLES -- In selection of
equipment for an installation, cons,ideration
should be given to building design and the
way it will be used.
Most supports are made of either steel
springs dr rubber pads. Incorrect selection
can lead to the transmission of vibration
greater than that with rigid supports. Thus, it
is important to select the correct stiffness of
anti-vibration mount.
Vibration dampers should be fitted between
machinery and ail pipe work and duct work
including the supports when app!icable.
4.7.3 LAVOUI CO N S ID E R A T I O N ~-OR SO U ND
A ND VI B R A T I O N
a) Single glazing on floors immediately
above or below high level plant rooms
might be unsuitable;
b) Critical rooms for noise, for example,
conference rooms, lecture theatre, etc,
should be sited away from the’ plant
room;
c) Restricted or confined areas, for
,example, courtyards or alleys should be
avoided when siting equipment outside.
The equipment should be so oriented that
noise will be radiated away from the
likely areas of complaint;
4 Avoid unbalanced reciprocating
machinery in plant room above ground;
d Careful choice and siting of externally
mounted item of equipment, for example,
mechanical draught cooling tower; and
lnstallation of all rotating machinery on
suitable anti-vibration mountings and
insulation of duct work and pipe -work
from their support and from direct
contact with the building structure.
4.7.4 It is important that expert advice be
sought in dealing with noise Bnd vibration
problems, as most economical solutions
should be used without impairing the
performance.
4.8 Air Fillers
4.8.1. TYPES OF EQUIPMENT
4.8.1.1 PANEL OR UNIT FILTERS - Ufie
?ARt V I I I WJI~INC SERVICD--ICCIION 9 AIRCONDITIONING
‘.
these ir normally confined to the smaller
systems u to a maximum air flow of about
5 m’/e. TRey nre constructed in various size
ran er, such PI 450 x 450 mm, 500 x 500 mm
an(P 600 x 6OOmm, and operate at face
velocities between 1.0 and 2.5 m/s.
The charucteriutics of thilr type of filters are
get out as follows:
VlSCoUS IhiPINGEMENT FILTER - The
-efficiency range of these filters is 80 to 90
percent. These are serviced by washing
and re-oiling, and are generally uped for
industrial or engine air intakes;
PERMANENT DRY TYPE FILTER -The
efficiency of these filters is up to 95
percent. They may be of fabric, processed
from plastics or brush type. They
normally operate wi!h initial resistance of
25 to 55 Pa rising to 50 to 125 Pa with
use. Their efficiency increases with dust
load, but volume flow is reduced. They
are serviced by washing, or by
compressed air ot vacuum cleaning;
DRY REPLACEABLE MEDIA TYPE - T h e
efficiency range of these filters is 95
percent. They consist of fabric or wadding
media on metal frames. They are serviced
by replacing filter media upon a rise of 1.5
to 2 times the initial resistance, which is
normally between 35 and 100 Pa. They are
commonly used as main filters or aspre-
filters to high efficiency filters; and
T H R O W A W A Y T Y P E -The efficiency of
these filters is up to 95 percent. They are
generally of panel construction with filter
media of fabric, plastics, glass or metal
fibre mounted in a rigid wood, metal or
cardboard frame. They are used i n
sma,ller plants w h e r e s e r v i c i n g
requirement of permanent type would be
disadvantageous.
4.8.1.2 A U T O M A T I C A I R F I L T E R S - T h e s e
are primarily used’on larger systems, where
they usually ive economic advantage over
panel filters. +hese filters arc obtainable down
to a rating of 0.5 m’/s. Air flow velocity is
usually betwvn 2.00 and 2.75 m/s. Velocities
higher than this can give a reduction in overall
size, but leads to a penalty in increased
resistance and possibility of carryover of the
filter fibres or the wetting oil.
4 AUTOMATIC viscous TYPE - The
efficiency of these filters is u to 90
percent. Operation is nortnal Py time-
switch controlled and the filters maintain
a constant operatjng resistance of 50 to
125 Pa according to type.
Servicing of these filters require6 removal
by hand of the dust de orited m a rlud@
of from- the viscour R uid tank add
1’)
&a
AND HUTING VIII-%
 mechanical maintenance is required for
timer mechanism, motor bearing, etc; and
AUTOMATIC DRY TYPE -These can be
obtained with various grades of filter
media giving efficiencies between 95 and
98 percent depending on media. Air flow
pressure drop for the media are 100 to
125 Pa standard and 125 to 150 Pa
increased density. Servicing consists
mainly of replacement of media.
4.8.1.3 E L EC T R O S T A T I C C L E A N ER S -- T h e
efficiencies of these devices are 9S to 99
percent. These are efficient in removal of
large quantities of dust, especially in smaller
particle range. Electrostatic cleaner is a two
stage unit, the first stage being a series of tine
wires that give the dust particles a ,positive
electrical charge and the second stage, a
series of parallel plates generally coated with
a water soluble viscous solution charged
negative or negative and positive alternately.
Servicing is by switch off and washing down
and recoating as necessary. Cells require
regular inspection for burnt plates, as also
inspection and replacement of ionizing wires,
rectifiers, etc, as necessary. This equipment
operates on high voltage and suitable
interlocks ace required to ensure that access to
live-parts is possible only when-power is off.
4.8.1.4 HIGH EFFiCltNCY PARTICIJLATE AlK
(HEPA) OK ABSOLU I E F I L T ER S - The
efficiencies of these filter5 is 99 to 99.995
percent. They are invariably panel filters,
most commonly 600 x 600 x 300 mm, rated
for 0.500 m’/s at initial resistance of 125 to
300 Pa. Standard absolute filters use treated
or glass paper media in honeycomb
formation in mild steel or wooden case.
other filters are constructed of materials
giving suitability for operation in high
humidities, high temperatures and chemicahy
corrosive atmosphere and are generaily used
in conjunction with a pre-filter. The life of
these filters can vary from a few months to
several years, depending on iocation and
efficiency of the pre-fil!er.
4.8.1.5 CAR BON PACK FILTER -This is used
to remove odours, fumes, vapours, gases. etc.
from air. Carbon may be activated or
catalytic and is, to some extent, selective. Air
flow face velocity is comparatively low
usually of the order of I .75 m, s. These filters
quickly become clogged with atmospheric
dust and use of ‘throwaway’ pattern or those
suitable for regeneration by the manufacturer
is recommended.
4.8.1 SE L E C T I O N F A C T O R S - W h e n
selecting a filter, the\following parttculars
should be considered:
“UL3-14
a) the air flow rate for which filter is
designed;
b) the face velocity, which is the average
velocity of air (m/ s) entering the effective
face area of the filter;
4 resistance, that is, the difference between
static pressure upstream and downstream
specified for clean and dirty conditions:
d) efficiency, that is, measure oi the ability
of the filter to remove dust irom the air;.
e) dust holding capacity, which is the mass
of dust t.hat a filter can retain air flow
during a rise in pressure drop from its
initial clean resistance :o some arbitrary
maximum value, usually twice the value
oi pressure drop when clean;
economic considerations should take
into account the initial capital cost, cost
of replacement of maleriah during
cleaning operations and of the labcur
involved; and
possible fire hazards.
4.8.3 L O C A T I O N AND INsrAt.!.A.t ION
4.8.11.1 Filters are normaliy placed upstream
of the main supply fan between the pre-heat
coil. (if fitted) and the cooiing coil. Besides
producing clean room air, they protect
cooling coils and other apparatus fiom
deposition of dust. The system should be
arranged to provide an even air velocity
distribution across the filter face.
4.8.3.2 Where a high degree of fi!trLttion is
required, high efficiency fiiters, normal!y
used in conjunction with pre-iilters. are
placed downstream of the fan and should be
the last item of equipment before the
discharge point. This ensures that any air
leakage is outward and that contaminated air
is not drawn into the system. Another
advantage is also that any contamination
from the air handiing equipment is captured
by the final filter.
4.8.3.3 Fresh air intakes should be as remote
as possible from the concentration of surface
or roof dirt and positioned to avoid intake of
fumes and cdours. Weather louvers with a
wire mesh bird screen should be fitted. In
some cases, the louvers may need acoustic
treatment to reduce noise from or into the
system.
4.8.3.4 Adequate access to facilitate
servicing of the filters should be provided and
doors, iadders. elec:ric lighting. etc. should
be included where necessary. A manometer
indicating differential pressures across the
filter bank should be fitted to determine the
need for filter change.
4.8.3.5 All ducts should be clean and free compatible with the requirements of the
from dust before filters are installed. remote panel, transmission system, or the
central equipment;
4.8.3.6 The frame holding the filter media
when in position should form an effective cl output devices, which provide a means for
seal, so that no air bypasses the filter. converting a command instruction,
appearing at the remote panel, into a
4.8.3.7 Doors and hatches giving access to signal suitable for performing an
live high voltage: conductors of electrostatic operational function on external
precipitators should be equipped with locks equipment; and
under control of an authorised person. 4 remote data collection panels or remote
enclosure, which act as termination points
4.9 Automatic Controls for the remote ends of the transmission
links and for connections to the remote
4.9.1 T YPES OF E QUIPMENT -The basic input and output devices.
components that are designed, selected and
installed to work together to form a complete 4 . 9 . 2 . 2 T RANSMISSION LINKS - T h e
control system, together with their functions, transmission link provides the means for
are shown in Table 6. communication between the central
equipment and the remote data collection
panel, and may be classified according to a
TABLE 6 BASIC COMPONENTS OF A CONTROL number of variables which include:
SYSTEM
E L E M ENT O R FUNCTIOH
a) medium (wires or cables, teleDhohe lines,
COMPONENT microwave);
Sensing and measuring Measuring changes in b) transmission mode (one direction only,
element of the one or more controlled one direction at a time, etc );
controller, for example, conditions or variables
sensor,detector c) data sequence,
Controller mechanrsm Translating the changes
into forces or energy 4 wire or cable types;
of a kind that can be
used by the final e) signal types; and
control element
Connecting members of Transmitting the energy
0 message format.
the control circuit; or forces from the point
wiring for electric, of translation to the 4.9.2.3 CENTRAL EQUIPMFNT - This may
piping for pneumatic, point of corrective comprise:
linkages for mechanrcal action
Controlled device or Using the force or energy
actuar, such as motor to motivate the final
‘a) an interface, which provides a connection
o r v a l v e cohtrol element and point and the signal conversion between
effect a corrective the central processor and transmission
change in the con- links;
trolled condition
Sensing and measuring
element of the
Detecting the completion
of the change
b) the central processor, which is the
controller
collection of equipment at the central
control room containing the logic for
Controller mechanism, Terminating the call management of the centralized control
connecting means, and for corrective change,
actuator or control to prevent over- and monitoring system; the processor has
device correction the means to receive, transmit and
present information, with the ability to
process all data in an orderly fashion, and
4.9.2 C E N T R A L I Z E D C O N T R O L / MO N I T O R I N G may or may not include a computer; and
E QUIPMENT -The centralized control
system, which is shown diagrammatically in cl peripheral devices, such as typewriters,
Fig.1, comprises three main parts, namely, printers, displays (digital type, projectors,
the remote location equipment, the or cathode ray tubes, etc).
transmission links and the central equipment.
4.9.2.1 REMOTE LOCATION EQUIPMENT -
4.913 SE L E C T I O N FACI-ORS
This includes: 4.9.3.1 COMMON FACTORS -There are a
number of factors ta be considered in the
a) input devices or sensors, which .measure selection of almost all control system
the condition of a variable; components. These common factors include:
b) signal conditioning devices, which a) supbly and working electricity voltage,
convert the sensor signal to a type phases: freauency and number of wires;

?MT WI B U I L D I N G S E & I C E S - S E C T I O N 3 AIPCONDITIONINC AND H E A T I N G V,,!P *

 b) compressed air mains pressure and
quality;
cl maximum and/ or minimum temperature,
humidities .or pressures to which
components may be subjected;
d) restrictions ‘on location, mounting
positions, etc. or possible problems owing
to duct, vibration. etc;
e) dimensions and weights; and
0 required accessories or fittings.
4 . Y . 4 L_OCA~‘ION AND ACCESS
4.Y.4.1 All sensing elements .should be so
located that they measure truly representative
conditions. All instruments, such .as
thermostats, humidistats and pressurestats
should be securely fixed in position free from
vibration and risk of mechanical damage.
4.Y.4.2 Arrangements should .be made. to
ensure air flow over the instrument wherever
this is necessary for correct operation.

n r-----7

F R O M OThER TO OTHER
INPUTS OUTPUTS

REMOTE DATA
COIIECTION P A N E L
R E M O T E LOCATl6N
’ EQUIPMENT
-_c T O O T H E R
DATA COLLECTION
PANELS
TRANSMISSION fi A?S%i Is i?jN: ITE:, 5 EE%;
LINKS C O A X I A L C A B L E S , TELE-
PHONl?
- - - -L I N - ES
- , - E T-C . -. - - - -

C E N T R A L EOUIPMENT It72fz>l

I
I

INTERCOM
SYSTEMS

. OPERATOR
INSTRUCTIONS

Fig. 1 Simpl[fied dlloik Diagram of Ctwralized ‘Control System

“lll.J-16 NATIDNAL BUlLlXNC CDDi OP INDIA


4.9.4.3 Duct inspection type thermostats and
humidistats should have the sensingelemeni
correctly positioned ia the air .stream,
adequately rupported and iacated where it is
not subjected to radiation from heeting coils.
4.9.4.4 Where possible, controiiersand other
items requiring adjustment or maintenance
should be mounted approxiinateiy I.5 m
above floor level.
4.9.4.5 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPER .-
Dampers in air systems should be properly
installed to avoid air leakage around-the
damper frame and minimize leakage losses
through the damper blades within design
limits when the biades.arc in closed position.
4.10 Inspection and Maintenance
4.10.1 INSPECTION - No air-conditioning,
refrigerating or ventilating system requiring a
permit shall be operated until it has been
tested and found safe by the approved
Agency. All tests shall be conducted in
accordance with good praciice. Ail systems
requiring permits shall be inspected by the
approved Agency upon their completion. if
the syste’m is found safe and in conformity
wit’h the requirements of the Code and the
approved application. a certificate shall be
issued by the approved Agency upon request.
4.10.2 M AINTENANCE -- Maintenance of
installations shall be done in accordance with
good practice [Viii-3(2)].
5. EVAPORATIVE COOLING
5.1 in view of the rise in energy cost, the use
of evaporative coolers has become necessary,
particularly for the hot and arid region. in
areas where the air is very hot and dry it is
possible to reduce the dry bulb temperature
by passing air over a wetted surface. This
type of coolers can not be used in damp
climates, because the moisture content of the
air leaving the coolers is very high, thus
raising the humidity above comfort level.
5.2 Fresh outside air should be used with no
recirculation, be_cause by recirculating the air
leaving the evaporating cooler, the wet bulb
temperature shall continue to increase and
shall result in unsatisfactory conditions.
5.3 Capacity - The nominal capacities 01
the evaporative ‘air coolers bar u’ on the
delivery of air dt ‘zero’sratic pressure shall be
as under:
750, 1000, 1200, 1500, 180. 2op0,
2500, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, and
8000 m’/.h.
PART Vlli B U I L D I N G SUVICFS-SECTION 3 AIlbCONDITIONING
‘.
5.4 For detailed information. regarding
constructional and performance
requirements and methods of testing
eva orative air coolers, reference liray be
ma!e to good practice [VIII-3(4)].
6. PACKAGED AIR-CONDITION’ERS
6.1 Window air cooled packaged units are
available u to a limited capacity. ‘Floor
mounted seP f-contained packaged unit1 are
gade to meet the requirementr for large
capa’cities. This unit comprises a compressor,
condenser (water-cooled ‘or air-cooled),
evaporator, fans, filter and controls. It may
also include means for heating, humidifying
or ventilating air. These units are designed
for application in residences and in the
smaller commercial market-shops,
restaurants, small office suits, etc.
6.2 Capacity -Commercial packaged air-
conditioners are available in sizes of the
nqminai Looiing c a p a c i t y IOOOOW
(approximately 9OOOkcai/ h) and above.
6.3 Factors affecting cooling load estimates
as specified in 7..? shall be taken into account
while making the heat calculation.
6.4 Locatioiz-The packaged units can bc
mounted within the air-conditioned space or
remote in a separate enclosure. Provision
shall be kept for proper servicing facility
around the unit.
6.5 Installation -The packaged units are
normally mounted on-a resilient pad which
prevents vibratitin of the compressor from
being transmitted to the buiidmg.
6.6 For detailed information regarding
constructional and performance
requirements and method for establishing
rating of packaged air-conditioners,
reference may bc made to good practice
[VIII-3(5)].
7. ROOM AIR.-CONDITIONERS
7.1, These arq self-contained air-conditioning
untts, comprlsmg a compressor, evaporator
fan and air-cooled condenser. This’ unit is
used for single rooms having limited
occupancy. These are suited for.bedroo?s,
office cabins, general office areas, hotel
robms and hospitals and similar ap@catione
where normal comfort condttlons are
required.
7.2 Capacity- doom air-conditioners are
available in nominal capacities of I 500,
2 250, 3 000, 3 750, 4 500, 5 250, 6 000, 7 500
and 9 000 kcai/ h.
A N D HISATING VIII-3. - v
 7.3 Factors Affecting Cooling Load
Estimates
a) OCCUPANCY - N u m b e r o f p e o p l e ;
smoking and non-smoking
b) Extent of glazivg and orientation
C) E X P O S U R E -Roof, ceiling. floor, walls,
part itions
d) IN T E R N A L L O A D S -Lighting and-.‘other
heat generating source :ike equipment
and machinery.
V E N T I L A T I O N - Requirement for fresh
air
7.4 Location - Room air-conditioner shall
be mounted at the window sill level on an’
external. wall where hot air from the air-
cooled condenser can be discharged to
outside without causing a nuisance. There
should not be any obstruction to the iniet of
air for the condenser.
7.5 Installation-The opening for the air-
conditioner shall preferably be made a part
of window or wall construction from the
planning stage.
7 . 6 t_inliratiorts----These are no! g e n e r a l l y
recommended for:
a) operation theatres where 100 percent
fresh air is needed and fire hazard exists,
depending on the type of anaesthesia
being used.
b) the width of the area exceeds 6m.
requiring close control of
cl area
temperature and relative humidity.
4 internal zones where no exposed wall is
available for the installation of room air
conditioners.
4 sound recording rooms where criteria for
acoustics are stringent.
9 special applications lil;e sterile rooms for
htispitals and clean room applications
where high filtration efficiency is desired.
7.7 For detailed information regarding
constructional and performance
requirements and methods for establishing
ratings of room air-conditioners,. reference
may be made to good pl,acticc [VIII-3 .@)I.
8. HEATING
8.1 Ccniral S~etns--- The installation for
the‘ air-condiiioning system may be used
advantageously for the cen:ral h e a t i n g
system with such additions as a hot water or
steam boiler, heating coils, thermostats. etc.
8.2 (/‘nit S y s t e m s - T h e c o m m o n u n i t
systems include . individual heating units;
“,,,_i_l8
steam boiler units (oil or gas fired) and gas
units. The construction and operation of
these individual units shall satisfy the local
byelaws. with regard to safety in operation
and safety of occupants.
8.3 Safety controls should be used with
electric strip heaters.
Y . S Y M B O L S . UNlTS A N D COLOLJR
CODE
9.1 !Jnits and symbols to be used in
refrigeration sha!! be adopted in accordance
with good practice [VIII-3(7)].
9.2 Colour code for identification for
various items in air-conditior!ing installations
for easy interpretation and idtntification may
be necessary. This shall promote greater
safety and shall lessen chances of error,
confusion or inaction in times of emergency.
The scheme of colour code painting for air-
conditioning instal!ationc shall be as decided
by the Authority.
10. E N E R G Y C O N S E R V A T I O N A N D
ENERGY MANAGEMENT
IO. 1. Energy conservation signifies the
optimum use of’ energy to operate the
ventilation and air-conditioning system of a
building. General standards of comfort or
particular environmt‘ntal r e q u i r e m e n t s
within the building should not be sacrificed
in an endeavortr to achieve low consumpticn
of energy. Some of the more important
aspects of establishing energy conservation
requirctients f o r v e n t i l a t i n g a n d air-
cnnditioning systems are given below.
10.1.1 The design of thr sy:stem and its
associated controls should take into account
the following:
a) tbc natu1.e of the app.lcation:
r P of constructlbn;
b) t h e t)p
c) external i?nd internal load patterns:
d) .desired space conditions:
e) permissible control limits:
r) control methods for minimizing use of
prlm2t-y energy;
g) opportunities fw heat recovery; and
h) economic factors (including probable
future cost and avai!ability of fuel).
10.1.2 ?he operation of the sys!em in the
following circumstances should be
considered when assessing the complete
design:
a) in summer;
b) in ‘winter;
‘ N A T I O N A L BUILDING CODE OF ikDIA
c) in intermediate seasons;
d) at night;
ej at weekends;
fj under frost conditions; and
g) if electricity stlpply failure occurs and
when the supply is restored.
10.1.3 Consideration should be given to
changes in building load and the system
designed, so that maximum operational
efficiency is maintained under part-load
conditions. Simi!arly. the total system should
be .separated into smaller increments having
similar load requirements, so that each area
can be separately controlled to .maintain
dptimum operating conditions.
10.1.4 The temperature of heating and
cooling media circulated within the system
should be maintained at the level necessary to
achieve the required output to match th!:
prevailing load conditions with the minimum
expenditure of energy.
10.1.5 Recovered energy ‘should be used as
much as possible.
10.1.6’ Operation and maintenance
procedures should be properly planned.
10.1.7 Equipment which requires preventive
maintenance should be furnished with all the
necessary information.
10.1.8 The designer should aim to select the
simplest system of control capable of
producing the space conditions required. It is
uneconomical to provide controls with a
degree of accuracy greater than that required
by the application. Consideration should be
given to the provision of centralized
monitoring and control, thus achieving
optimum operation.
II. INSPECTION, COMMlSSlONlNG
ANri TESTING
Zl.1 Inspection, commissioning and testing
should be carried out meticulously if a
satisfactory installation is to be handed over
to the client. It should be ensured that these
are carried out thoroughly and that all results
are properly documented. Ii is recommended
that the whole commissioning procedure
should be under the guidance and control of
a single Authority.
Il.2 Inspection and Testing ar Works -The
air-conditionihg system’ will consist of
PMT VIII B U I L D I N G SERVICES-SECTION 3 AIRCONDITIONlNG
various items of equipment produced by
various manufacturers. Each manufacturer
should give facilities for the inspection of his
equipment during manufacture and on
completion.
Il.3 Inspection and Testing on Site - Prior
to setting to work and regulation,
preliminary checks, testing and charging of
the complete system should be carried oirt. It
is important that all water systems should
have’.been thorougly flushed through and
hydraulically pressure tested toI.5 times the
working pressure for a period of not less than
30 minutes.
High pressure air duct system should also
have been tested in accordance with the
prodedures.
I I .4 Commissioning
f I.4.l In applications where temperatureand
humidity are to be maintained within close
limits, it may be necessary to simulate the
maximum heat loads to ensure plant
performance. but in any case a load of at least
50 percent is required when commissioning
the refrigeration plant.
f1.4.2 R E G U L A T I O N -Regulation is the
process of adjusting the rates oftluid flow in a
distribution system within specified
tolerances. System regulation is the final stage
in a sequence that starts with the design itself.
It is essential that the flows of fluids through a
system are corredly regulated and balanced
and conform to design parameters: otherwise
the system cannot perform as intended and
the desired internal environmental conditions
will not be met.
Locating the necessary dampers in the right
places is one of the basic requirements for
effective system regulation. To carry out
satisfactory regulation of a system, a
schematic diagram showing all mains.
branches, valves, etc, with the required flow,
pressure drop and velocity appertaining to
each run of duct or pipe, is rcqoired covering
all fluid flows in the system. Adequate means
of measuring flow or velocity should be
provided.
11.5 Performance Testing- Performance
testing is the evaluation of thepefortiance of a
commissioned installation. If the installation
is to perform as required by the designer, tests
are to be carried out under actual operating
conditions, usually after the building has
settled down and been occupied.
AND HEATING .,,I29 *
 LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those start&r& which are acceptuble as ‘good practice’ and
‘accepted standark’ in the ful/irmct of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standard shall be adoptedat the thnk of eforcement of the Co&. The standards listed may be used
by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
Code.

In thefollowing list the number amearing in thefirst column within parentheses indicates the
number of the reference in th9 part/s&ion.

(1) 18:3615-1967 Glossary of terms used in evaporative air coolers (desert coolers)
refrigeration and air-conditioning @rst revision)

(2) IS:660-I 963 Safety code for mechanical
refrigeration (revised)
(3) IN:655- I963 Specification for metal air
ducts (revised)
(4) lS:3315-1974 S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r
(5) IS:8 148- 1976 Specification for packaged
air conditioners
(6) IS: I39 I - 197 I Specification for room air-
conditioners
(7) IS:483 I- 1968 Recommendation on units
and symbols for refrigeration

“,,,.P NATIONAL BUILDING CDDC Oi tNDlA

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES
SECTION4 ACOUSTICS,SOUND
INSULATION ANDNOIS~E
CO.NTROL

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS

0. FOREWORD ... 2

I. SCOPE ... 3

2. TERMINOLOGY ... 3

3.’ PLANNING AND DESIGN AGAINST OUTDOOR NOISE ... 4

4. PLANNING AGAINST INDOOR NOISE ... 7

5. RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS ... 7

6. EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS ... 9

7. HOSPITAL BUILDINGS ... II

8. OFFICE BUILDINGS ... I4

9. HOTELS AND HOSTELS ... 16

IO. INDUSTRIAL BUlLDlNGS ... I7

II. LABORATORIES AND TEST HOUSES 1.. 21

12. MISCELLANEOUS BUILDINGS . . . 22

13. PUBLIC ADQRESS SYSTEM . . . 24

APPENDIX A CONSTRUCTIONAL M EA S U R ES FOR SOUND

I N S U L A T I O N O F BUlLDINGS . . . 25

APPENDIX B SOUND REDUCTION AND SOUND

lI$!iULATlON VALUES FOR VARIOUS TYPES
OF MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION . . . 29

PART WI BUILDING SERVICES-SECllON 4 ACOUSTICS. SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL vlll-c
1
l-Aft-( VIII BUILDING SERVICES
SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL

0. FOREWORD

0.1 This section coLers the acoustical, sound insulation and noise control requirements in
buildings. Emphasis is laid on planning of buildingsvis-a-vis its surroundings to ieduce noise
and in addition sound insulation aspects of different occupancies are covered for achieving
acceptable noise levels.

VIII4
2 N A T I O N A L W I L D I N G C O D E O F INMA
0.1 1 his section was first published in 1970. In this revision mainly the following changes have
been made:

a) The approximate measured noise levels due to various types of traffic (air, rail and road) are
given; and planning and design features of buildings against outdoor noise is elaborated;

b) Impact sound insulation in residential buildings is modified to grade system of impact sound
insulation;
d Recommendations regarding planning of open plan schools. against noise is given;
4 Planning of office buildings with light weight partitions is specified;
d Planning and design aspects of hotels and hostels, laboratories and test houses, and other
miscellaneous buildings, such as law courts and council chambers, libraries, museums and
art galleries, auditoria and theatres have been given:

r) Hearing damage risk criteria in industrial buildings is now modified based on permissible
exposure limits for a steady state noise level;

iit) The public address system is now elaborated to cover public address system at passenger
terminals.

0.3 There are two types of noises, -that is, air-borne and structure-borne noise.

0.3.1 To reduce the intensity of air-borne noise, sound absorbent materials may be used. An
absorbent material is one which reduces the intensity of sound reflected from its surface. It may
be applied to walls, floors, ceilings or used as furnishing to reduce the sound level by absorption.
However, the materials selected for sound absorption shall be consistant with fire safety
requirements of the buildings.

0.3.2 To reduce the transmission of air-bornt noise, sound insulating materials may be used.
Sound insulating materials block the passage of noise through them by virtue of their mass and
physical properties. The extent of noise reduction provided by a single homogeneous panel is
proportional to the mass per unit area. For high values of sound insulation, normally heavy
panels are required. Thin sheets of materials do not have adequate mass for providing any
appreciable sound transmission loss by themselves. However, when thin sheet materials are used
in a. double panel construction with an intervening air cavity, this special construction can give
extremely high sound transmission loss values considering the weight of the partition, if designed
properly. PO,-ous materials lack the mass required to provide any appreciable scund
transmission loss, but readily allow sound at most frequencies to be transmitted through them.

0.3.3 To reduce the transmission of structure-borne noise (such as noise generated by impacts)
special construction methods and elastic discontinuity in the structure may be used.Structure-
borne noise reduction is effected bycorner.joints, changes in cross-section, changes in materials.
etc, in construction. The reduction by these construction methods is, however, not appreciable
specially when a large amount of noise reduction is required over a sho’rt distance. In such cases.
introduction of an elastic discontinuity in the structure can result in a very large amount of noise
reduction. The noise transmission is affected only above a certain lower frequency which
depends on the material thickness and the elastic properties of thema:erial Bonded fibrous
mateials. rubber elastomers, cork, etc. are suitable for curtailing structure-borne noise
transmission.

0.4 This section is largely based on the following Standards:

lS:l950-1962 Code of practice for sound insulation of non-industrial buildings
IS:?483- I965 Code of practice for noise reduction in industrial buildings
IS:4954-196X Recommendations for noise abatement in town planning
BSCP 3: Chapter III: Part 2:19?2 Code of basic data for design of buildings-
sound insulation and noise reduction

PART VIII BL’ILDINC SERVICES--SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL VIW-
3 .
1. SCOPE
1.1 This section covers recommendations
regarding planning against noise, acceptable
noise levels and the desired sound insulation
in buildings with different occupancies.
information on public address system is also
covered.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this section, the fol-
lowing definitions shall apply:
A BSORPTION COEFFICIENT-Ratio of sound
energy absorbed to the incident sound energy
on a material.
BEL-Bel is the fundamental division of a
logarithmic scale used to express the ratio of
two specified or implied quantities, the
number of bels denoting such a ratio being
the logarithm to the base 10 of this ratio.
D ECIBEL (dB)-IIt is one-tenth of a bel.
Example:
Sound power level = IO log,0 5 in decibels.
<I
Sound pressure level = 10 loglo $
0 L)
= 20 log,” f in decibels
0
where
w = measured acoustical power, Watts
(W)
w, = reference acoustical power
(=IO_‘?W)
P = measured sound pressure level,
Pascals (Pa)
po = reference sound pressure level
(“2 X IO-‘Pa)
DECIBEL[dB ( A ) ] - S o u n d l e v e l s a s
measured on a sound level meter with
weighting network A.
Nolr;---Except where mentwned. In rhls sectlm the
sound levels specified are III dH(A).
E C H O-A distinct and clearly discernible
reflected sound received at a point within, the
enclosure when any sound emanates from
any part of that enclosure. A quick succes-
sion of such echoes is called fluttei or flutter
echo.
E F F E C T I V E PERcEivED NO I S E L E V E L I N
DECIBEL (EPN dB)-The number for rating
VIII4
4
the noise of an indiridual aircraft flying over-
head is the effective perceived noise level in
decibels (EPN dB). The effective perceived
noise decibel value takes into account the
subjectively annoying .effects of the noise
including pure tones and duration. In princi-
ple, it is a kind of time-integrated loudness
level.
FREQUENCY-Frequency IS the number of
vibrations per second and the.unit is Hertz
(Hz).
INTENSITY -1irtensity at a point is the aver-
age rate at which sound energy’is transmitted
through a unit area around the point and
perpendicular to the direction of propagation
of sound.
Llo-For assessing traffic. noise, because of
its fluctuating nature a unit known as L,o is
used. I!.,o is the sound level in dB which is
exceeded IO percent for a given period of
time. For traffic noise, f.10 is the average of
all hourly I!,,() values.
L,- LC, is the level of a constant sound
which, in a given situation and time period,
has the same sound energy as a time varying
sound. It is the time weighted, mean square,
A-weighted sound level of a sufficiently long
sample of traffic noise in dB(A).
LCIUMESS - Loudness is the sensation pro-
duced in the human ear and it depends on the
intensity of sound and also its frequency.
NOISE --Noise is defined as unwanted sound.
N O I S E E X P O S U R E F O R E C A S T (NEF)-The
noise exposure forecast at any location is the
summation of the noise levels in EPN dB
from all aircraft types, on all runways, suita-
bly weighted for the number of operations
during day time and night time.
OCI AVE -BAND NO I S E L E V E L S - N o i s e i s
usually measured in groups of frequencies. A
convenient grouping is in octave-bands, such
that the highest frequency in the band is
double the lowest frequency. The centre
frequency of each octave band is usually
specified. The internationally preferred
centre frequencies for noise measurements
are 31.5. 63. 125, 250, 500. 1000, 2000, 4000
and 8000 Hz.
Pl’rCti - Pitch is the frequency sensation as
perceived by a human ear. Pitch is defined as
that aspect of auditory sensation in terms of
which sounds may be arranged on a scale
extending from ‘low’ to ‘high’as on a musical
scale.
P UBLIC ADDRESS SY S T E M ( P A SYS-
TEM)-T~~ complete chain of sound equip-
ment (comprising essentially of microphones,
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
amplifiers and loudspeakers) requited to public gardens, etc. The second is the princi-
reinforce the sound emanating from a source ple of shading or screening. This consists of
in order to provide adequate loudness for deliberately interposing a less vulnerable
comfortable hearing by the audience. building to screen a more vuherable one or
by providing a solid barrier, such as a wall.
REVERBERATION-P~~~~~~~~~~ of a sound in between the source and the location to be
an enclosure (pa&ally or completely protected.
enclosed) after the source of sound has
stopped.
R E V E R B E R A T I O N TIME-The time taken by 3.2.1 FO R A IR .TRAFFlC-For guidance,
the reverberant sound to decay to one- approximate noise levels due to various types
millionth of the sound intensity level existing of aircrafts, measured on ground, when the
at the time the source of sound is stopped. aircrafts fly overhead at a height of 450m.
are given in Table I.
SOUND IN S U L A T I O N O F A PAR’I‘ITIOS --The
difference in sound levels on the two sides of
a partition used as a sound barrier, measured l-ABLE I TYPICAL NOISE LEVELS OF
SOME AIRCRAFT TYPES
in I;3 octave bands, with centre frequency
from 100 to 3 I50 Hz. SI 11 vc OF AIKC,KA~ I FI VOVEK N~ISF
No. LEVFI S .A.1 450 m
WI IH TA K E- O F F
NOIE ~~ All sound insulation values referred to in this
section are the average of the measured values over fre- THH!I\I ( E P N dB)
quency range 100 10 j I50 Hc Boelr,g 707 III
1)
ii) Boeing 737 107
3. PLANNING AND DESIGN AGAINST iii) Boeing 74?-200 IO?
OUTDOOR NOISE iv) Air bus A 300 101
\‘) Concorde SST I14
3.! Genera/-Planning against noise should
be an integral part of town and country
planning proposals, ranging from regional 3.22 FOR R AIL TRAFFIC-Noise levels of
proposals to detailed zoning, and three- some typica! railway traffic are given in
dimensional layouts and road design withm Table 2.
built-up areas. Noise nuisance should be
fully recognized in zoning regulations.
TABLE 2 TYPICAL NOISE LEVELS OF
RAILWAY TRAINS
3.1.1 Noise is either generated by traffic
(road, rail and underground railway) or it Sl T Y P E ot TKAI\ NOISE LEVEI AI
arises from zones and buildings within built- No 3Om. MEAWHEU
up areas (industry; commerce, offices and Oh’ rHE SIIX OR IS
public buildings). For planning, the noise THE DIRECTION O F
T R A I N, dB (A)
survey should examine all the’possible causes i) Steam train. 60 kmph 85
of noise and consider the various factors ii) Diesel tram. 60 kmph 83
causing actual nuisance. iii) Electric train. 60 kmph 77

3.f.2 Noise by night, causing disturbance of

sleep, is more of nuisance than noise by day.
For this reason, housing colonies that adjoined
areas with heavy traffic movement during the
night are liable to cause serious complaints.
Also, the factories that work by night are
liable to cause serious complaints if housing
estates adjoined them. While planning, care
should be taken that housing colonies are
adequately setback from busy air?+, state
and national highways factories. m a i n
railway lines and marshaliing yards.
3.1.3 There are two aspects of defence by
planning. The first is lo plan so as to keep the
noise at a distance. Under this aspect comes
the separation of housing from traffic noise
by interposing buffer zones, and the protec-
tion of schools and hospitals by green belts,
32.3 FO R KOAV .TRAFFIC--The l e v e l o f
noise generated by road traffic depends upon
such factors as the number of vehicles pass-
ing per hour, the type of traffic, the prepond-
erance of heavy vehicles, average speed,
gradient and smoothness of traffic flow. The
smoothness of traffic flow also affects varia-
biliiy.of the noise and is governed by such
things as roundabout5 and traffic lights, and
the volume of traffic and pedestrian move-
ment with their effect5 on stopping, starting
and overtaklng. The level of traffic noise fluc-
tuates continuously and the way it does has a
considerable effect on the nuisance caused.
For assessing traffic noise, noise is measured
in dB(A). Because of the fluctuating nature of
traffic noise. a unit known as LIO or Lq (see
2.1) may be used. Typical noise levels due to

PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES--SECTION 4 ACOUSTIC$ 5 .

SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL. VI114
 ‘.

different:volcmes of’ traffic flow with a vary- tours for areas around airports. It has been
ing mix of vehicles are given in Table 3. accepted generally that noise exposure fore-
cast levels greater than NEF 40 are unaccep-
table to people while levels less than NEF 25
TABLE 3 TYPICAL NOISE LEYELS DUE TO are normally acceptable.
FREE-FLOWING ROAD TRAFFIC
3.3.1.J While it is theoretically possible to
SI i,,,, 30m bROM
so. E DGE ok ROAD provide sufficient insulation to achieve an
dB(A) acceptable indoor noise environment in the
area of very high outdoor noise. there is a
(1) (2) (3) level above which aircraft noise seriously
affects living conditions no matter how much
IJ .SOOO vehicle\ per 18 h o u r 65 sound insula:ion has been applied to the
da) (IO percent heavy
\chi<lcs). 50 kmph dwelling unit. For this reasoq it is recom-
mended that no residential development be
allowed beyond the NEF 35 level.

3.3.1.4 D u r i n g s u m m e r m o n t h s , t h e
111) 10000 rchiclcs per IX hour 75 windows are normally kept open for
day (40 percent ha\!
vch~clc\). XI) kmph adequate ventilation. In ,view of this, no
matter how much sound insulations is
IL) 20000 whlcle\ per !I( h o u r 77
d a y (40 perccnc hear)
provided for the building structure. the noise
vrhwler). X0 hmph level inside the room can never be less than
IO dB below the outdoor noise level. For very
critical buildings, such as buildings necessary
for maintaining and supplementing the
airport services, and for commercial
development. such a5 hotels, it is possible to
provide sealed windows and to centrally air-
condition the entire building. However, it is
3.3. I FON AIR ‘I ICAl I-14 Near airports two not feasible for most of the residential
sources of’ aircral’t &)l\c should be developments in the country. In such cases
considered. proper zoning regulations and siting of
vulnerable buildings away trom aircraft noise
il) I-I YOVI R SOl~sl l~lyovcr noise is that aie of vital importance.
which occurs under flight paths close to
airports i1r.d is the most serious and conl- 3.3.2 RAIL 7‘RAFFICPm-iqhis is a very serious
p r o b l e m . A s the aircralt pa\ses
111011 source of noise in built-up areas. both by day
olerhcad the noise level at any particular and by night. Railway cuttings reduce the
location rises IO a pc;~k and then spread of noise, whereas embankments
decrceses. extend it. The elevated railway on viaducts or
embankments is very common in built-up
b) GROIINII ?.OlSl: l’hc noi\c cnnmIttcd b\ areas. The elevation increases exposure to
an aircralt during ground opcration~. i;; noise but in addition the construction of the
less variable in direction than fl)ovcr viaduct may effect the propagation of noise.
:loisc. but ic usually of a longer dura:ion. In this respect solid embankments are
preferable to built-up arches, which tend to
3.3. I. I Aircrat t noise may disturb sleep, resi act as sound boxes. Worst of all are the steel
arid communication. and as such may hc con- bridges, which greatly magnify the noise due
sidered potentially harml~ul to health. It is to vibration. Uphill gradients are another
important that no new dc\cloprncnt ia car- feature tending to increase noise, especially
ri4 o u t w i t h i n arcas whcrc the clpectcd of heavy goods trains.
noise Ic\cls will c;~use mental and physical
latigue or permanent loss of hearing. In case 3.3.2./ Wherever possible. no residential or
development in such ‘areas is essential. adc- public building zone should abut on to rail-
quate sound insulation shall bc pro\idcd for wa\ lines. especially on the marshalling yards
the building. which are particularly objectionable because
of the \hrili. clanging and intermittent noise
3.3.1.2 As the problem? cau,cd by alrcraft the! generate. otten at night. The appropriate
noise/have become more acute. a number of /one\ along side railway lines are industrial
methods have been devised for evaluating and commercial buildings other than office
noise exposure in the vicinity of airports. buildings. Where. these precautions are not
Thq all combine many factors unto a single practicable and housing hag to abut on to
number evaluation. A commonly u$ed criter- railway lines, every attempt may be made to
ion is the noise exp&ure forecast (NEF). The house as l’ew people as possible in the vicinity
NEF is used primarily to develop noise con- of the railway lines.

Ylll-4-
6 NATlUWAL BClLDlNC COUE OF INDIA
3.3.2.2 The underground transportation
system is being introduced in Bndia.
Experience with subway trgins ‘in the,westt?rn
countries has indicated that they can be both
noisy and uncomfortable to passengers. Also
wayside vibration can be a major cause of
disturbance for the neighbouring
community. Very high noise levels are
propagated to long distances by the
underground high speed railway, as a result
o.f wheel rail interaction. Both air-borne
noise and ground or structure-borne
vibration are potential sources of complaints.
Noise control measures, therefore, need to _be
considered for the following:
a) In stations, where high noise levels are
produced at the arrival and departure of
trains;
b) In tunnels, during high speed train
movement:
cl Where an underground rail transit sys-
tem passes close to existing structures or
high rise buildings adequate attention
should algo be paid to the problem of
ground vibration transmitted to the
building, and proper isolation should be
provided for critical areas; and
4 In transit cars, where sound insulation is
of vital importance to provide comforta-
ble condition5 for the commutators.
3i3.3 ROAD T RAFFIC
3.3.3. I Convoys of long-distance heavy
trucks at night moving past through built-up
areas cause serious noise complaints. On
busy roads. the noise of continuous traffic
may be a worse nuisance than that of rail-
ways. At least the same precautions may,
therefore, be taken in the planning of dwel-
lings in relation to arterial and truck roads as
with railways. Care may be taken that local
housing roads do not provide short cuts for
heavy traffic through residential areas. Hilly
roads present the additional noise pf gear
changing. Trees with heavy foliage .planted
on both sides of%carriageway help slightly to
muffle the noise, provided the foliage extends
for a considerable distance (30m or more).
3.3.3.2 Road traffic may give rise to serious
nuisance particularly on busy thoroughfares,
between continuous high buildings in- main
streets, at the tiaffic lights, riear bus stops, on
steep slopes and in parking spaces and
enclosed yards.
3.3.3.3 For zoning and plaiming new build-
ings in urban areas it is recommended that
external LO is limited to a maximum of
70dB(A) when the dwellings are proposed to
have sealed windows and 6OdB(A) when the
dwellings art: proposed. to have ‘open win-
dows. Indeed it ip desirable to confine major
?ART VIII BUILDING SERVICES-StcnON 4 ACOUSl'lCS,
new residential development io locations
subject to LIO levels substantially lower than
those given above.
It .is recognised, however, that within the
large urban arms, the use’ of sites where the
external ‘LO is greater than 60-70 d&A) can-
not always be avoided. In that case it issug-
gested to utilize such design solutions as
barrier ,blocksin order to reduce external LIO
noise levels to at least 60-70dB(A) at any
point 1 .O m from any inward looking fbcade.
When ihe_ orientation of site and the density
of development are such that this can&lot be
fully achieved, some form of dwelling insula-
tion will have to be .provided. It should be
appreciated that where open windows are a
must, the occupants would have to put up
with .discomfort if the above conditions are
not inet.
3.3.3.4 Certain other methods can often be
utilized to provide economical arid effective
protection frJm noise:
4 Method may be.adopted to improve the
smoothness of flow and reduce number
of stopping and starting. This leads to an
improvement even if it leads to increased
flows. Flow linking of traffic lights, for
example,, may reduce noise nuisance.
b) Use of roads passing through residential
areas may be prohibited to heavy com-
mercial vehicles. An alternative would be
to limit use by commercial vehicles to
certain times of the day.
cl Use of honking may be prohibited near
sensitive buildings, such as hospitals and
the like.
3.4 Zoning--The zoning of the different cit-
ies shall be done by the town planning
authorities, taking into account besides other
aspects, the noise levels from different occu-
pancies. Wherever necessary, experts ‘in the
field may be consulted. For detailed informa-
tion on noise’ reduction for town planning
schemes, reference may be made to good
practice [VIII-4(I)]*
3.5 Green Belts and Lan&aping-Where
relief from noise is to be provided by means
of #green belts these may be of coniiderable
width and be landscaped. (In case of railway
tracks, a minimum distance of 5Om to 70m
may be provided between the brfildings and
the tracks.) The extent of relief ;hat may be
derived from the above may be estimated
only after considering other environmental
*In this section where reference is made to ‘good prac-
tice’ in relation to design, testing and construction proce-
dures, the appropriate document listed at t.he end of this
section may be used as a guide to the interpretation of
this term.
7
. SDUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL n&4 .

factors. Only thick belts of planting (greater
than 30 m) are of real value. Strong leafy
trees may be planted to act as noise baffles.
Shrubs or creepers may also he planted for
additional protection between tree trunks;
artificial mounds and .bankr should be
formed where practicable. As little hard pav-
ing and a$ much grass as possible may be
used. The creation of green belt is particu-
larly advisable on the perimeter of aero-
dromes, along railway lines and arterial
roads, through or past built-up areas and
adjolning noisy industrial zones.
4. PLANNING AND DESIGN AGAINST
INDOOR NOISE
4.1 Acceprahle Indoor Noise Levels in Buil-
clings--.The generally acceptable noise level5
inside buildings from point ,of view of cnm-
fort, economy and practical consideration
under the conditions prevailing in this coun-
try may be !aken a:; given in Tabie 4.
.fAHI.I’. 4 A(‘(‘l:l’l AHI.1: INI)OOK SO!SF
t.EvEI.S,FOK VAKIOI!S Hllll 1)IYGS
Sl
N:,
(1)
1) Audttorla and concert halls 20~25
11) Kadm and IV studtos 20-25
iti) Music room\ 25-N
iv) Hospitals and ctnema 35.40
t heat rcs
Apartments, hotels and 35-40
homes
vi) Conference room\. 3%40
small ofl’tccs and ltbrartes
WI) Court rooms and 40-4s
class room5
v i i i ) Larpe pub!ic nfhces. 45-W
banks and storm
ir) Rcsraurants w-55
4.2 I ‘ulneralhlc Huilclin~gs Some b u i l d i n g s
or parts of buildings are specially vulnerable
to noise. for examplr. recording and radio
s!udios. hospitals and research laboratories.
These should not bc sited near loud noise
scurces. Most vulnerable buildings contain
some nryas which are themselves noisy and in
such buildings the lest vulnerable elements
should be planned to act 9’; noise buffers.
Most noisy buildings also contain quiet
itccom.nlodation. which equally may be
pla:lned to act as a buffer between the noisy
part ol‘ the building anh adjoining vulnerable
buildinp\.
4.3 ‘rhe details of site and internal planning
and insulation reyuircmcnts ,arc covered
8
VIII4
‘.
under individual occupancies (5 to 9) as
applicable to the respective character and
sources of noise in different buildings.
4.4 Sound Insulation of Non-indusrrial
Buildings by Constructional Measures-The
desired (acceptable) noise levek and the
recommended insulation values for the var-
ious areas may be achieved ‘by providing
sound insulation treatments by construc-
tional measures. The details of the same are
given in Appendix A. The recominendations
given in Appendix A are applicable to non-
industrial buildings like residences, educa-
tional buildings. hospitals and office
buildings.
5. RES!DENTIAL BIJILDlNGS
5. I Sources of Noise Nuisance
5.1. I O~;‘IHKI~K kOlSE -The main sources
of outdoor poise irl residential areas are traf-
fic jaeroplane, railway<. roadways), children
playing, hawkers, services deliveries, road
repairs blaring loud-speakers and various
types of nioving machinery in the neighbour-
hood and building operations
5.1.2 lsDooK NO I S E -~ As far as indoor
noises are concerned, conversation of the
occupants, footsteps, banging of doors, shift-
ing of the furniture. operation of the cistern
and water-closets, playing of radios, gramo-
phones. etc, cbntribute most of the noise
emanating from an adjacent room or an adja-
cent building. Noise conditions vary from
time to time and noise which may not be
objectionable during the day may assume
annoying proportions in the silence of the
night when quiet conditions are essential.
S./.,?./ In the case of flats the main sdurces
of noise are from other flats and from stairs,
lifts and access balconies. Plumbing noise is
another cause. In semi-detached buildings.
outdoor noises from streets are noticed more
than indoor noises from neighbours.
52.1 Sn E PIASNING -The most desirable
method is to locate the residential buildings
in a quiet area away from the noisy sources
like the industrial areas, rail tracks, aero-
dromes. roads carrying heavy traffic, etc.
5.2././ To minimize ground reflection. the
dwqllings should be surrounded by the maxi-
mum amount of planting and grassed areas
and the minimum amount of hard surfacing.
This app!ies particularly to high density
areas. Where for maintenance reasons a large
amount of hard paving is necessary, it should
NATIONAL WILOINC C&E OF INDIA
be broken .up by areas of planting and grass-
ing. Narrow hard paved 6ourJs should b e
avoided between adjacent tail buildings.
5.2.1.2 Roads within a residential area
should be kept to a minimum both in width
and length, and should be designed to dis-
courage speeding. Area-wise planning, with
zbnes from which vehicular traffic is alto-
gether excluded will greatly help to reduce
noise. Through traffic roads should bt
excluded from residential areas, but where
sites have to be developed adjacent to exist-
ing inajor .roads the same pr.inciples should
be observed in the siting of blocks as with
railway lines as covered under 3.3.3.3.
5.21/.3 Play zreas for older children shouid
be sited as far away from dwellings as possi
ble. Special care should be taken with old
peoples’dwellings. They should not be placed
immediately adjacent to service entries. play
spaces, or to any entrances where children
may tend to congregate.
5.2.2 INTERNALPLANNING ---The orienta-
tion of buildings in a locality should be
planned in such a way as to reduce the noise
disturbance from neihhbourhood areas. The
non-critical areas, such. as corridors. kit-
chens. bathrooms, elevators and service spa-
ces may be located on the noisy side and the
critical areas. such as bedrooms and living
space, on the quiet side.
5.2.2.I WINDOWS AND DOORS~-- W i n d o w s
and doors should he kept awa,y from the
noisy side of the buiiding as glvcn below
wherever possible:
a! When windows of a building. particu-
larly those of bedrooms in apartments or
flats, face roads carrying heavy traffic or
other noises where the external noise is
of the order of 80 to 90 dR(A). the build-
ing should be located a! a distance of
about 30 m from the road, but a distance
of 45 m or more, where possit~le, should
be aimed at for greater relief from noise;
b) When the windows are at right angles to
the direction of the above type ofnoise,
the distance from the road should be
arranged to be about I5 to 25 m; and
cl In case another building. bourdary wall
or trees and planta!ions i n t e r v e n e
between the road traffic and the house,
Oat further noise reduction is achieved
and in such cases the above distances
may be reduced suitably.
5.2.2.2 LAYOUT PLANS-It is desirable that
rooms adjoining party walls and above/below
party floors should be of similar use. By this
means,, bedroonis are not exposed to noise
P A R T VIII BUILDING SERVICES-SECTION 4 ACOIISTICS. S O U N D INSUI.ATlON
from adjoining IiLing rooms, and there is less
risk of disturbance of sleep.
In semidetached houses, the staircase, hall
and kitchen should adjoin each other on each
side of the party wall, thus providing a sound
baffle between rooms requiring quiet
conditions.
Qpen fireplaces on party walls should be
avoided as far as possible; bedrooms should
not be planned alongside access balconies,
and preferably not underneath them. Where
the approach is by an internal corridor, a
sound baffle may usefully be provided by
arranging internal passages and bathrooms
between the corridor and the living room or
bedrooms.
Water-closets should not be planned over liv-
ing rooms and bedrooms, whether within ihe
same .dwelling or over. other’dwellings. Soil
pipes should not be carried in ducts which
adjoin living rooms or bedrooms unless the
side of the duct next to these rooms is a solid
wall containing no inspection openings.
Refuse chutes sholild not be planned next to
living rooms or bedrooms.
5.2.3.1 REDUCTlDN OF AIR-BORNE NO&E-
The average sound insulation for air-borne
noise (over the frequency range 100-3150 Hz)
between individual rooms or apartments of a
building unit shall be as given in Table 5.
These values may, however, be suitably
increased, where required, for critical areas.
.._--
T/\BLE 5 SOUND INSIJLATION B E T W E E N
INDIVIDUAL ROOMS (AIR-BORNE)
SI SITIIArIoV A VERAGE S O U N D
NO ~NSU~_A~I~N I N
dB( 100-3 I50 Hz)
(1; (2) (3)
Between the livine room in 50
0
one house or llat-and the
living room and bed-rooms
in another
ii) Elsewhere ixtween houses 45
or flats
iii) Between one room and 35
mother in rhe same house
or flat
NOTE !--Where communicating doors are provided, all
doors should be so designed as lo piovidc recommended
insulation between the rooms.
NOI E 2. - There are cases when a set of houses or flats
have to be built for the people who work at night and
sleep during the day. It is desirable 10 consider the design
of at least one such :oam in each of the houses or flats
which will provide an insulation of about 45dB in that
room.
NOTE S-The insuhtion values referred to are applicable
with doors and windows shut.
AND NOISE CONTROL
5.2.3.2 S U P P R E S S I O N OF N OISE , AT T H E
S OURCE ITSELF-AI1 items of equipment
that are potentially noisy should be selected
with care. Water-closet cisterns should not be
fixed on partitions next to bedrooms or liv-
ing rooms. Plumbing pipes should be isolated
from the structurks. Lift motors should be
mounted on resilient supports. Access doors
from machine rooms to internal staircases
should be well fitting and of .solid
construction.
52.3.3
REDUCTION OF AIR-BORNE NOISE
TRANSMITTED THROUGH THE STRUCTU-
RE-Reduction of aii-borne noise requires
the use of rigid and massive walls without
any openings. Openings are the major cause
of penetration of noise through a barrier.
While designing it should be borne in mind
that all components should provide a sound
transmission compatible with that of the rest
of the barrier so that an equivalent amount of
sound energy is transmitted through each
portion of the barrier.
Ventilating ducts or air transfer openings
where provided should be designed to minim-
ize transmission of npise. For this purpose,
some sound attenuating devices may be
installed in t’hese openings.
All partitions should be sealed effectively
where they butt against rest of the structure.
All doors and windows should be properly
gasketed where a high degree of sound insu-
lation is desired.
5.2.3.4 REDUCTION OF STRUCTURE-BORNE
NOISE-This requires ihe use of discontinu-
ous or non-homogeneous materials in the
construction of the structure.
5.2.3.5 R E D U C T I O N O F IMPACT N OI S E - - T h e
floor of a room immediatelv above the bed-
room or living room shall$isfy the grade 1
impact sound ,inSulation given in Figure I.
For example, ISOmm thick concrete floor
with thick carpet (12 mm) covering would
satisfy this requirement.
100 200 460 600 1600 3150
F R E O U E N C V (Hz1
Fig. 1 Grades for Impact Sound
insulation
“IJO
5.2.3.6 Main staircases in blocks of flats are
often highly reverberant. Some of the surfa-
ces at least (for example, the soffits of stairs
and landings) should be finished with sound
absorbent materials wherever required,
6. EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS
6.1 Sources qf NDise Nuisance
6 . 1 . 1 O U T D O O R NOISE-The o u t d o o r
sources of noise produced on school
premises, which cause disturbance .within the
school, include the noise arising from
playgrounds, playing fields and operi-air
swimming pools. Though playgrounds are
used mainly during break periods, they are
also used for games and physical education at
times when teaching is in progress in the
adjoining class rooms.
6.1.2 INDOOR NOISE-lndoor sources of
noise are as follows:
a) Singing, instrumental and reproduced
music which may take place in class-
rooms and in dining and assembly halls
particularly in primary schools. In secon-
dary . schools, specialized music rooms
are generally provided;
The movement of chairs, desks and
b)
tables at the end of one period may dis-
turb a class engaged in a lesson in a room
below;
cl The shutting and opening of doors and
windows which may occur at any time
during teaching periods;
Wireless and television reproduction in
d)
clash-rooms, and films with sound track;
e) Wood and metal workshops, machine
shops (engineering laboratories), typing
rooms etc, which produce continuous or
intermittent sound of considerable
loudness;
Practical work carried out in general
teaching areas;
Gymnasia and swimming pools;
School kitchens and dining spaces where
food preparation and the handling of
crockery and utensils -persist for. the
greater part of the school day;
j) Corridors and other circulation spaces;
and
b Plumbing and mechanical services.
6.2 Recommendations
6.2.1‘ SITE P L A N N I N G - w h e r e o u t d o o r
noise nuisance eitists from local industry,
busy roads, railways, airfields, sport grounds
or other sources beyond the control of the
N A T I O N A L BI;1LDlNC CODS OF INDIA
school authority, school buildings should be by the rooms should be controlled. Pref-
sited as far away as possible from the sources erably baffled ventilation system or dou-
of noise. ble windows should be used. (Fan-lights
over doors should. be fixed and glazed.)
6,2.1.1 Rooms should be planned in a f) FURNITURE-In all educational build-
manner so that the minimum amount of glaz- ings, regardless of the character of the
ing is placed on the side facing the external floor finish, rubber buffers should be fit-
noise. ted to the legs of chairs and tables.
6.2.1.2 Noises arising from the activities of a 6.2.3NOISE R E D U C T ION WITHIN ROOMS-
school and from the use of the buildings after Sound absorbent materials play a useful part
school hours may constitute a nuisance to in reducing the built-up or air-borne noise at
occupants of surrounding property: there- source. In rooms, such as class-rooms,
fore, it is desirable to place pltiygrounds, assembly halls and music rooms, a fairly
workshops, swimining pools, music rooms, short reverberation time under occupied con-
assembly halls and gymnasia as far away as ditions is one of the requirements of the
possible from buildings which require a quiet acoustic design. The maximum reverberation
erivironment. times permissible for this purpose are usually
short enough to give adequate noise control
6.2.2 IF;TERNAL PLANNING ---The following but in addition, the reverberation time
principles should be observed in the detailed should not be e;ycessive under empty condi-
planning of .educational buildings: tions, because noise may occur in these
rooms with very few occupants. Table 6 gives
4 GROUPING-N~~~~ rooms should be the reverberation times often arranged in
separated from quiet ones, if possible. In occupied rooms for acoustic reasons and the
general, it is desirable that rooms should maximum times recommended in the empty
be grouped together in accordance with rooms for noise reduction; the times given
the classification given in 6.2.4.1. are for a frequency of 500 Hz, but they
should not be greatly exceeded at any fre-
b) WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS--in- quency. When rooms are used for a variety of
dows of noisy and quiet rooms should purposes, the reverberation period approp-
not open on to the same courtyard or be riate to the major use should be adopted.
near to one another. Roof lights and ‘ven-
tilators over noisy rooms should be
avoided, if they are likely to be a source TABLE 6 REVERBERATION TIMES
of nuisance to adjacent ugper: floors. IN SCHOOLS
SL RO O M R EVERBERATION T IME ’S
No.
0 DOORS-SW~~~ d o o r s itit0 r o o m s 15
should only be used where no problem of ’ Usual for Maximum* for’
sound transmission exists. Reduction of Acoustic Noise Control
Reasons (Empty)
insulation between rooms and corridors (Full)
due to doors must be borne in mind. The
type and method of fitting of doors. is (1) (2) (3) (4)
impqrtant and .necessary care shall be I) ;;;mbly I .o- I .25 I .5-2.5
paid in this respect. according to according to
size volume of hall
4 Sliding partitions should only be used
2) Music 0.75-I .25 I.5
where. essential. teaching
rooms
d OPEN PLANNING AND CIRCULATION
AREAS - Where open planning is used 3) Td;;yia and - I.5
to permit spaces, such as assembly halls, swimming
dining rooms or entrance halls to be used pools
in association with each ‘other Qr for 4) Dining rooms - 1.25
circulation, ihe degree of disturbance
caused by interfering noise to teaching 5) Class-rooms 0.75 1.25
areas needs careful consideration; traffic 6) Headmasters 0.5-l .OO I.0
through such areas should be strictly room and
controlled; full use should be made of staff rooms
sound absorbent treatments to reduce *Shorter reverberation times are desirable for noise con-
the spread of noise from one space to trol whenever possible.
-
another (see 6.2.3).
If rooms have lar&e glazed panels or ven- 6,2.3.I Special attention should be given to
tilation openings facing directly on the n.oise reduction in schools for the deaf and
circulation areas, human traffic passing schools for the blind. Deaf children are

PART Vlll SIWDING SERVICES-SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS. SOUND INSULATION AND NOW CONTROL vttt2~ .

taught by means ef hearing aids which can-
not be used satisfactorily in high noise levels
or in reverberant conditions. Blind children
depend on good hear&g for understanding
speech and for detecting changes in environ-
ment. In both these types of schools, noise
levels should be kept low and reverberation
times short. As an example, the reverberation
times in empty class-rooms should not
exceed one second in schools for the blind or
0.5 second in schools for the deaf.
612.4 SOUND INSULATIOK
6.2.4.1 AIR-BOKNE Notsr--For purposes of
sound insulation, rooms in educational
buildings may be classified as follows:
Class A - Noise produ- Workshops
cing Kitchens
Dining rooms
Gymnasiums
Indoor swimming
pools
Class B -- produ- Assembly hails
cing but Lecture halls
needing quiet Music rooms
at times Typing rooms
Class C -- Average General class-
rooms Practical
rooms Laborato-
ries Offices
Class D - Rooms nee- Libraries
ding quiet Studies
Class E - Rooms nee- Medical rooms
ding privacy Staff rooms
6.2.4.2 The recommended minimum sound
reduction (average over 100-I35OHz) between
rooms of the same class is as follows:
Class A - 25 dB
Class C or D- 35 dB
Class B or E - 45 dB
6,2.4.3 Where a room is likely to have.a dual
use, for example. a dining room to be used as
a class-room, the higher sound insulation
value should be used.
6,2.4.4 The recommended minimum sound
insulation between rooms in different classes
is 45dB subject to the following:
a) In schools or institutes with a technical
bias where noisy activities, such as sheet
metal work, plumbing and woodwork;
are likely to be practised extensively in
normal hours, workshops shotrId be
regarded as a special category requiring
more than 45 dB insulation from rooms
of any other class.
b) Assembly halls and music rooms are spe-
cial cases in that, as well as producing
noise, they also require protection from
YrJ*
‘.
it and may need more than 45dB insula-
tion from rooms in Class A, if the latter
are Very noisy.
cl Circulation spaces may vary from a long
and frequented corridor to a small pri-
vate lobby and it is therefore difficult to
give precise recommendatrons to cover
them. For partitions between rooms in
Class C and most corridors, 35dB insu-
lation for the partition itself is adequate.
For partitions between rooms in other
ciasses and corridors, more or less insu-
lation may be necessary, depending upon
the specific usage.
d) The problem of noise in circulation areas
is as a rule greatly mitigated in schools
by the fact that classes usually change
rooms together at regular times. In col-
leges and evening institutes, however,
this is much less true and in such build-
ings particular attention should be paid
to insulation between rooms and
corridors.
6.2.4.5 O P E N P L A N S C H O O L S - A n e w
concept in school planning is the use of a
large teaching area with simultaneous
instructions imparted to several groups of
students. These open plan teaching areas
offer a different set of problems. Because of
the limitations in achieving a great deal of
attenuation across the space and related
difficulties in noise control and speech
interference, lectruing to a large number of
students is not possible without interfering
with neighbouring groups. The shape of such
spaces may be as linear as possible with a
width to height ratio of 5:l or greater. In
addition, special measures are required to be
introduced to reduce the level of intruding
speech to an acceptable value so that the
various teaching groups are not disturbed and
adequate privacy is maintained. judicious
positioning of partial height barriers can
improve :he sound attenuation between
teaching groups and the use of reflective
screens can reinforce the speech locally without
reflecting it to unwanted areas.
6.2.4.6 IMPACT NOI S E- In these case of
schools, the concrete floor of the r.oom
immediately above the teaching rooms shall
meet Grade 11 standard for impact insulation
shown in Figure 1. For example a covering of
6 mm linolium or cork tiles on concrete floor
(hollow or solid) weighing not less than
220 kg/m* will usually meet the above
requirement.
7. HOSPITAL BU’ILDING
7.1 Getrerul-Problems of noise control vary
from hospital to hospital but .the principks
outlined below apply to ali types. A quiet
environment in hospitals is desirable for
NATIONAL BUlLMNC CObC OF INDIA
patients who are acutely ill. Staff require
quiet conditions for consultations and
examinations and also in their living and
sleeping quarters. There have been rapid rises
in noise levels in hospitals due to the higher
levels of outdoor noise, to increasing use of
mechanical and mobile equipment (some of
which is now brought much nearer to the
patient in order to facilitate nursing
procedure) and the introduction of
loudspeaker, radio, television and call
systems. Noise control in the hospital is made
much more difficult by the extensive use of
hard . washable. surfaces which reflect and
intensify the noise. in most hospitals,
windows to the open air. and fanlights to
corridors are usually open for the purpose of
ventilation, admitting noise from outside and
allowing it to spread through the building.
7.2 Sources of Noise Nuisance
7 . 2 . 1 Ournoo~ NorsE-This m a y
classified into two main categories:
a) Noise from sources outside the hospital
premises, for example, traffic and
industrial noises; and
b) Noise from sources outside the building
but usually within the control of the hos-
pital authority, for example. ambuian-
ces, motor-cars and service vehic!es. fuel
and stores deliveries, laundries. refuse
cdilection, trucks and trolleys.
7.22 isrxw~ No~st----A hospital is a com-
plex building with many services and the
numerous internal sources of structure-borne
and air-borne noises are grouped into three
main categories:
3) Noises consequent upon hospital rou-
tines. This category includes sources
which transmi! noise through both
structure-borne and air-borne .paths,
many of which may be quite near to
patients particularly those in wards. such
as the following:
1) Wheeled trolleys of various kinds.
for food and medical supplies;.
2) Sterilizing equipment;,
3) Sluice room equipment including
bedpan washers;
4) Ward kitchen equipment;
5) Footsteps:
h) Doors bhnging;
7; The hahdling of metal or glass
equipment:
8) Noises caused during maintenance
and overhaul-of engineering services;
and
Vacuum- cleaners. mechanical
9)
polishers. etc.
?ARt VIII WILDlNC S E R V I C E S - S E C T I O N 4 ACOI’STICS. SOl!ND
b) Loudspeaker, radio or television, audible
call system. telephone bells and buzzers,
and other air-borne noises, such as loud
conversation; and
c) Noises from fixed or mobile equipment
and services not directly concerned. with
hospital routines. These include all .the
fixed services as given below:
Plumbing and sanitary fittings;
:; Steam, hot.and cold water and cen-
tral heating pipes;
3) Ventilation shafts and ducts;
4) Fans;
Boilers;
2; Pumps;
7) Air compressors:
Pneumatic tubes;
;; Electrical and mechanical motors
and equipment;
10) Lifts;
be 11) i.aund;y eqitipment; and
12) Main kitchen equipment (refrigera-
tors. mixers. steam boilers. etc).
7.3 Rec,o,llrllerrtlution.~
7.3.1 SIIF PI n\\l\(;---Hospital sites with
their high degree of sensitivity to outside
noise should be as far away from outside
sources as may be compatible with other
considerations, such ‘as accessibility and
avaiiabihty_of services. The building should
be so arranged on the site that sensitive areas
like wards, consulting and treatment rooms,
operating theatres and staff bedrooms are
placed away from outdoor-soureesof noise, if
possible, with their windows overlooking
areas of acoustic shadow.
7’.3.2 DETAILE D PI.Ah’NINC--There is a very
large number of unit and room classification
in hospital design and in planning the units in
relation to each other and to the common
services. (such as X-ray departments,
operating theatre suits and main kitchens).
noise reduction in the sensitive areas should
be weighed carefully against other design
ftictors. Special care in overal! planning and
internal planning against noise is required in
the planning within the building of units
which are themselves potential noise sources,
f o i e x a m p l e , children’s wards and
outpatients* departments, parts of which
require protection against noise.
7.3.2.l Unloading bays, refuse disposal
areas, boiler houses. workshops and iaund-
ries are examples of service units which
should be as far from sensitive areas as
possible.
7.3.2.2 The kitchen is a constant source of
both aircborne and structure-borne noise and
should preferably be in a separate building
INSULATION AND NOISE QNTROL “11123 ’

away from or screened trom the sensitive
areas. If this is not possible and the main
kitchens must form part of a multi-storey
building, noise control is easier if they are
placed below and not above the wards and
other sensitive rooms so as to facilitate the
insulation of the equipment and machinery in
order to reduce the transmission of structure-
borne noise to a minimum.
7.3.2.3 In ward units, the kitchens, sluice.
rooms, utility rooms, sterilizing rooms and
other ancillary rooms, need to be placed
quite near to the beds if they are to fulfil their
purposes. which are all sources of noise.
Some form of noise baffling between open
wards and looms of this kind will be needed
7 . 3 . 3 REDIJCTION OF NOISE AT SOUHCE--
In view of the difficulty of suppressing noise
in hospital buildings, it is important to
eliminate noise at its source wherever
possible.
7.3.3./ lJSE OF RFSII.IENI’ MATERIAI. -Mats
of rubber or other resilient material on
draining boards and rubber-shod equipment
will greatly reduce noise from utility rooms,
sluice rooms and ward kitchens. ‘The use of
plastics or othkr resilient materials for sinks.
draining boards, utensils and bowls would
also reduce the noise. Many items of
equipment especially mobile equipment, such
as trolleys and beds, may be silenc.ed by
means of rubber-tyred wheels and rubber
bumper and the provision of resilient floor
finishes (.w 73.4.1). The latter also reduces
footstep noise. Silent type curtain rails, rings
and runners should be used. Lift gates and
doors should be fitted with buffers and silent
closing gear. Fans and other machinery
should be mounted on suitable resilient
mountings to prevent the spread of noise
through the structure.
7.3.3.2 OTfiEK‘ MEAstIR~S-- Noise from
water or heating pipes may be reduced by
installing systems which operate at
comparatively low pressures and velocities.
Silencing pipes and specially designed
ffushing action reduce water closet noise at
source and make structural measures easier
to apply. The ventilation system should be
designed so as not to create a noise problem.
Silent closers should be fitted to doors.
7 . 3 . 4 REL)I!CI-IOK O F N O I S E RY sfRt$‘-
TIIHAI.. MEANS
7 . 3 . 4 . 1 IN S U L A T I O N - - S i n c e t h e v a r i o u s
departme+ or units may be planned in
many ways, only general .guidance on the
insulation values for wall&and partitions are
given as below:
a) It is recommended that walls or
“1,124
‘.
partitions between rooms should
normally have an insulation value of at
least 40dB. Higher values of insulation
of at least 45dB are necessary where a
noisy room is adjacent to one requiring
quiet. Doors should be solid with close
fitting in the frames.
b) There is little insulation value in double
swing doors and where these are fitted to
a noisy room the opening should be
planned so that it is screened from areas
requiring quiet by a baffle lobby lined
with absorbent material. Very high
insulation values may be necessary in
special cases and exceptional measures
may be required.
C) Solid floors with floating finishes and
resilient surfaces are necessary particu-
larly between wards and other parts of
the building. Ordinary timber board on
joist floors should never be used.
4 Conduits, ventilation duets, chases, etc.
should be constructed so as not to form
easy by-pass for disseminating noise
about the building. and should be pro-
vided -with sufficient sound insulation.
Pipe ducts should bc completely sealed
around the pipes where they pass
through walls or floors. Ducts carrying
waste or water pipes should be lined with
sound insulating material to prevent
noise from the pipes passing through
duct walls into the rooms through which
they pass.
7.3.4.1 Af3SOKlWoS --Most surfaces in hos-
pitals should be easily cleanable. so as to pre-
vent the build-up of bacteria which may
cause cross-infection. Many sound absorbent
materials of a soft nature and difficult to
clean are unsuitable for use in some hospital
areas and lose much of their effectiveness. if
painted for hygienic reasons.
Some porous materials with very thin non-
porous coverings (like mineral wool cohered
with thin plastic sheets) have good sound
absorption and when covered with a perfo-
rated sheet metal facing can be used in most
arcas requiring a washable acoustical treat-
ment. In noisy areas. such as corridors and
waitms rooms. however. a wider choice ol
absorbents is available.
In the ward, bed curtains. window curtains,
etc. add to the absorbent properties of the
room and help reduce reverberation in other-
wise hard surlaced surroundings.
7.3.5 Sensitive areas such as operation thea-
tres. Doctors’ consultation roqms. intensive
care units (ICU) require special consideration
against noise control. Apart from outdoor
noise. a common problem is the transmission
NATIDNAL B U I L D I N G C7bDC OF M#A
of sound. between the consulting room and
the waiting room. To ensure sil’ence. a sound
reduction of 45dB(A) between the rooms
shall be provided. If the doors are directly
connected by a single communicating door it
will not be possible to.achieve these values of
insulation. To obtain 40-45 dB(+) insulation
between communicating rooms, it is neces-
sary to provide two doors separated by an air
gap. such as a lobby or corridor.
8. OFFICE BUILDINGS
8.1 Gene&--Modern office .buildings are
often noisier than older buildings due to the
use of thinner and more rigid forms of con-
struction. harder finishes. more austere fur-
nishings and use of business machines.
8.2 Sourc,es 01’ Noise il’uisatwr
82.1 OCITDOOK NOISE --The outdoor noise
is mainly traffic noise, noise from an industry
if any located nearby or from any other
source depending upon the location of the
office building. The methods of defence
against outdoor noise as given in 3 shall also
be used in addition to’rhose given in 8.
8 . 2 . 2 I N D O O R NOISE-Main sources of
indoor noise include the following:
a) Office machines, such as typewriters, and
calculating, tabulating and punching
machines;
b) Telephonic conversation;
C) Noise from the public admitted to the
building;
d) Footsteps, voices and slamming of doors
in circulation spaces, lift doors and gates;
e) Sound reproduction in staff training
rooms and cinemas and machine noise in
projection rooms, recreation rooms, etc;
f) The handling of crockery and utensils in
canteens and kitchens; and
g) Ventilation plant and lift machinery.
8.3 Recotnttten~ialariotts
8.3:! .SITE PLANNING-kooms d e m a n d i n g
qwet conditions should~ be placed on the
quiet side of the site. Even on quiet thorough-
fares, these rooms should not be planned at
street level. They should also not be planned
on enclosed yards u$ed for the parking of
cars, scooters, etc. Where, however, the prob-
lems cannot be resolved by pianning, the pro-
vision of double windows may be necessary.
8 . 3 . 2 D E T A I L E D P L A NN I N G
8 . 3 . 2 . 1 N O I S E ‘RE-DUCTION W I T H I N
R O OM S-The reverberation time should not
PART VW BUILDIN(; SERVICES--SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL
exceed one second in all general offices of the
types listed in 8.3.2.2 to 8.3.2.6, In small pri-
vate offices, the reverberation time should
not exceed 0.75 second, in very large offices
the reverberation time may be increased to
1.25 seconds. For canteens, the recom-
mended maximum reverberation time is 1.25
seconds.
8 . 3 . 2 . 2 L A R G E G E N E R A L. O F F I C E S - T h e
grouping -of_ departments and machines
together in one room should be avoided
wherever possible. Where supervision is
necessary the provision of glazed screens car-
ried up to the ceiling should be considered. If
it is essential to the work of an office for
machine operators and clerks to work side by
side in the sarne room, the machines should
be enclosed by panels or low screens lined
with absorbent material and the ceiling
should be sound absorbent. In addition, the
machines should be as quiet as possible in
operation and mounted on suitable resilient
mountings.
SOI I A qwet area should br planned lor prolonged
tclepliomc convcrsatwn.
8.3.2.3 LIGHT WEIGHT CONSTRUCTION-
Modern construc’tion methods and economy
dictate the use of light weight construction
for many oifice buiidings. While the light
weight materials lead to fast fabrication and
erection and also effect considerable
economy in the building structure, they may
l e a d t o t r e m e n d o u s s o u n d htsulation
problems between adjacent offices and areas.
Light weight construction is also frequently
employed for the subdivision of large space
into executive cabins and secretarial areas.
Where such construction is considered
desirable, efforts should be made to provide a
double-skin panel. The panels should be
isolated from each other as far as possible
either by the use of separate framing or by
the use of elastic discontinuities in the
construction, and a sound absorbing material
may be introduced in the air cavity between
the panels. The partitions should be full
height up to the bottom of the roof above
and any openings required for air movement
should be provided with sound attenuators
compatible with the rest of the partition.
When light weight floors are provided in
multi-use buildings, adequate attention shall
be paid to the question of air-borne and
structure-borne noise transmission from the
upper floors to the floors below. For effective
reduction of air-borne. noise, a double panel
hollow floor construction may be employed
with some heavy sound damping material
introduced between the panels and the panel
isolated from each other. The sound damping
material could be sand, mineral wool, etc. In
case impact noise isolation is also required,
WI415 .
 the upper panel should be effectively isolated
from the rest of the floors and building
structure. The choice of the isolation layer
would of course depend upon the IDwest
frequency of interest.
Another point to be kept in mind when going
in for light weight construction is to ensure
that the light weight panels are not in. reson-
ance with the natural frequencies of any
mechanical equipment installed inside the
building. Light weight materials have high
natural frequencies well within the audio
range and may resonate or vibrate due to an
applied vibratory force. This vibratory force
is caused by mechanical equipment, road
traffic, rail traffic, etc. Special measures also
need be taken to isolate either the source or
the building so as to reduce the amount of
vibration transmitted to the building
structure.
8.3.2.4 CPEN PLAN OFFiCEs-A new con-
cept in office planning is the use of open plan
offices. Large open floor spaces are con-
verted into an office area with senior execu-
tives, jlrnior executives and secretarial staff
all seated within the satie area without the
use of any partitions or walls. While this
method of planning is appreciited, it leads to
a problem of inadequate acoustical privacy
between adjacent work spaces. Special design
measures are. therefore, required to reduce
the level of intruding sounds at work places
to acceptable low value so that people are not
disturbed and adequate privacy is
maintained.
Some special measures which might be
considered for such open plan offices are the
use of an acoustical ceiling ‘together with
partial height barriers between work spaces,
all designed to provide adequate privacy
between adjacent work spaces. In addition
use may have to. be made of a backg[ound
masking noise system which provides a
constant level of a generally acceptable
background noise in the entire office area.
The masking noise system is a very useful
concept in open plan office design because by
raising the background level at every
workplace, intruding noises are made less
disturbing. A background music system
cannot .serve’ as a noise masking system
because the music does not have a constant
spectrum 1 or sound level. In fact t h e
background noise masking system muit be
introduced radually without the feeling of
employees.et he airconditioning systCm can
also be used to generate backgrou’nd masking
noise if the noise level fronl’the fans, ducts and
grills k suitably tailored to generate the desired
frequency spectrum. However, it is not simple
to predict the noise level of airconditioning
components accurately. On the other hand, the
electronic system enables both the level and the
spectrum of the background noise to.befinally
adjusted to suit individual job requirements.
8 . 3 . 2 . 5 oFf-ICE M A C H I N E KC)oMs-It i s
important that machines likqpewriters. cal-
culators, data processing machines, etc.
should be quiet in themselves and also be
fitted with resilient pads, to prevent the floors
or tables on which they stand from acting as
large radiating panels. It is desirable to locate
machines further apart and to appll; sound
absorbent treatment to the ceiling. Since
office machines give a series of clicks and
taps high in pitch, the absorbent treatment
chosen should be efficient. in the high
frequencies.
8.3.2.6 BANKING HALLS-If banking halls
are large and lofty. noise ‘nuisance tends to be
aggravated. It is advisable to avoid high
reflective ceilings. The worst effects may be
reduced by segregating the noise from the
quiet operations and screening one from the
other and by applying sound absorbent mate-
rials to Che surfaces of the ceilings, screens
and nearby wall6 Resilient flooring is also
recommended.
8.3.2.7 PUBL+C OFFICES AND WAITING
SPACES- Noise nuisance may be minimized
by the provision of resilient flooring, sound
absorbent ceilings and heavy full height
screens between the public space and the
clerical office.
8.3.2.8 CANTEESS -~The provision of a
sound absorbent ceiling. resilient flooring
and the use of plastics trays and tables with
‘quiet’ tops are recommended.
8.3.2.9 CIKCULAIION SPACES -‘The effective
length of long corridors should be limited by
providing swing doors at intervals. Hard
floof finishes and board and batten floors in
corridors shouid be avoided. The provision
of a sound absorbent ceiling in corridors is
recommended. Floor ducts should be
planned on one side of corridors.
The noise from slamming of doors may be
reduced by fitting automatic quiet action
type door closers. Door buffers are useful but
may reduce insulation of air-borne sound due
to the inevitable gaps between buffers. Con-
tinuous soft, resilient strip let into the door
frames is preferable. The use of quiet action
door latches is recommended.
Staircases and lifts should be isolated from
quiet rooms and shall have silent type doors.
iYATlONAL BUILDING CObE OF INDIA
8.3.3 RE Q U I R E M E N T O F S OUND INSIILA-
TION - With open window (siigle or double)
the net insulation will be 5-IOdB, and with
sealed double windows it will be 40-45 dB.
Intermediate values are obtainable with
closed openable windows (single or double)
but only, of course, at such times as ventila-
tion may be dispensed with. Having to
choose between ventilation and noise exclu-
sion is a serious handicap to efficient working
in offices. In large office blocks on noisy
sites, consideration should be given to the
provision of sealed double windows and
mechanical ventilation at IeaSt in the offices
on the sides of the building exposed to noise.
8.3.3.1 The insulation necessary between
adjoining rooms, both horizontally and verti-
cally. depends upon the amount of noise
created within the rooms, the amount of
intruding noise and whether it is important
that conversation should not be overheard
between rooms. Generally a sound insulation
value of 30dB between one room and
another room in office is recommended.
8.3.3.2 The following list may be consider&d
as broad .classification of noise producing
rooms and rooms requiring quiet though
many offices fall into both categories. Where
rooms in opposing categories are planned
adjacent 10 each other, a sound reduction of
at least 45dB should be provided between
them.
N o i s e P r o d u c i n g Rooms Requiring Quiet
Rooms
Entrance halls, stair- Executive’s rooms
cases and corridors Conference rooms
used by the public and Board rooms
Lifts and lift halls Interview rooms
Motor and plant Offices for one or two
rooms persons
Lavatories
Public offices Medical officer’s rooms
Canteen and kitchens
Office machine ro&ns Sick rooms
and typing pools
Recreation rooms Rest rooms
Large general offices Libraries
Ci+mas and projec: Telephoning rooms
tion rooms
a) Rooms requiring quiet (as 45 dB
listed above) on a quiet site
where privacy is required
b) Rooms requiring quiet (as 40 dB
listed above) but on a noisy
site or where a lower degree
of privacy is tolerable
c) Clerical offices in which 20-30 dB
noise does not constitute a
major nuisance
mm vw l mrmc ~ERVICW-~KTION 4 .4cous~ic$
8.3.3.4 It is recommended that’the minimum
sound insulation (air-borne) for floors should
be 45dB, and the floors should have a resil-
ient finish.
9. HOTELS AND HOSTELS
9. f Gencrul-- Hotels and hostels are primar-
ily used as dwelling units, and hotels also
provide for public entertainment. The most
serious risk _of course is disturbance to sleep,
and adequate care, therefore, need be taken
to protect the occupants from disturbing out-
door and indoor noise.
9.1.1 OUTDOOR NOISE-Hotels near rail-
way stations, airports. highways and those
situated in highly urbanized areas are spe-
cially vulnerable to outdoor’noise. The out-
door noise in many of the areas is of a high
level even late at night and in the early morn-
ing. The noise could also be due to othkr
types of activities such as building construc-
tion activity (pile driving, concrete mixing
etc) and various types of portable utility
equipment, such as compressors or
generators.
9.1.2 I NDOOR NOISE---In so far as indoor
noise is concerned, the noise could be due to
the occupants theniselves, which is transmit-
ted from one room.to the other. It could also
be due to public functions and late night use
of restaurants located in the hotel as also due
to miscellaneous utilify equipment installed
for providing and maintaining the services in
the hotel, such as airconditioning equipment,
pumping equipment, power laundry and kit-
chen. Sometimes hotels equipped with
standby generators are a potential source of
noise. Only other source which could lead to
disturbance to the occupants is the plumbing.
9.2 Recommendations
9.2.1 SITE PLANNING’W~~I~ it is desirable,
to locate the hotel, or hostel away from an
area where there is a high ambient noise level,
many a times these have to be located in
noisy areas for public convenience. Hotels
near airports and railway stations are becom-
ing .popular because they are convenient for
passengers in transit. Hotels located in the
commercial areas of a city are also a commer-
cially viable proposition and many a time this
factor outweighs the other problems asso-
ciated with such a location. When a reasona-
bly quiet location is not possible, it is
desirable that adequate measures be consi-
dered to provide a comfortable acoustical
environment for the occupantst
9.2.2 INTERNAL P LANNING -Where a hotel
is located iti a noisy environment, the provi-
sion of sealed windows (single or double) and
17 *
SOUND INSUWTION. AND NOISE CONTROL VI114 * ’
 an airconditioning system is desirable for
rooms exposed to noise. The requirements
for the windows, would of course depend
upon the level and character of noise in the
area.
The genera1 recommendation for satisfactory
acoustical design of hotels and hostels are
given in 9.2.2.1 to 9.2.2.7.
9.2.2.1 H.otels of all classes shall by necessity
provide. good protection against indoor
n6ise. Since hotels can be considered as flats,
the standards of protection recommended for
flats are also applicable to hotels. Partition
between guest rooms and between rooms,
corridors and floors shall not be less than :OO
mm brick wall plastered or equivalent. The
floors shall have proper impact insulation.
Special attention should be paid to built-in
wall cupboards as these are potential areas of
sound leakage. These will not serve as sound
insulating partitions and may not be relied
upon to increase the insulation value of parti-
tions against which they may be built. In fact,
partitions between adjoining rooms should
be continuous behind the cupboards. Use of
silent type door gear and cupboard catches is
also highly desirable.
9.2.2.2 Door openings on opposite sides of
corridors shall be staggered and doors be
provided with gaskets on head, sides and
threshold. Inter-communicating .doors
should be double doors, fully gasketed.
Doors should also have quite action latches.
Whenever possible. rooms should be entered
through a baffle lobby. Wherever possible,
corridor walls should not have ventilators
unless they are double glazed and non-
openable.
9.2.2.3 Corridors and staircases may have
resilient floor coverings and sound absorbent
ceilings are desirable unless the corridor is
fully carpeted. Staircases and lift wells may
be cut off from corridors by means of swing
doors and. if possible. isolated from guest
rooms by linen stores or similar rooms.
Room service pantries ori floors can also be a
source of noise and may be separated from
corridors by baffle lobbies, unless the rooms
themselves have baffle lobbies.
9.2.2.4 Except within the same s u i t e .
bathrobms should not be planned next to
bedrooms.’ Where this is unavoidable, inter-
nal pipe shafts with heavy walls, unpierced
on bedrooms side may be used as means of.
spparation. It is important to choose quiet
type of’sanitory fittings and to design the
‘plumbing sys’tem so as hot to create noise.
that is by avoiding sharp bends, restrictions
of flow. quick-action valves chat might cause
water hammer, etc.
v*11+1*
9.2.2.5 Airconditioning system should be
quiet in operation. Care should also be taken
that the airconditioning ducts do not lead to
a cross-talk problem between rooms.
Suitable acoustical lining wouId need. to be
provided in the ducts consistant with the fire
safety requirements of the buildings.
9.2.2.6, Large hotels often have banquet halls
and conference ‘halls which are separately
hired out for public and private functions.
Late night restaurants and night’ c!ubs are
also popular and functions in ail ihese areas
may go on well into the night. It is therefore
essential that these rooms be effectively iso-
lated from bedrooms and effective insulation
from all possible noise source. is considered.
Here it is not only necessary to consider the
air-borne sound insulation but it is also
necessary to consider the question of
structure-borne and impact noise transmitted
from areas where there might be dancing late
into the night.
9.2.2.7 While most of the noise problems
encountered in hotels are applicable to hos-
tels, the latter are normally of more economi-
cal construction and, therefore, cannot cater
for special sound insulation provisidns. How-
ever, as far as possible, precautions should be
taken to provide comfortable ‘conditions in
hostel rooms. This is specially true for stu-
dent hostels where each room is also a living
room. Students might play music or have
loud discussions.late into the night. This may
disturb sleep or study of other students.
Proper precautions should, therefore, be
taken to provide satisfactory conditions.
10. INDUSTRIAL BlJlLDlNGS
IO.1 General- Industrial buildings are
primarily producers rather than receivers of
noise. The level of industrial nbisecommonly
exceeds that from any other source with the
exception of aircraft. As compared with traf-
fic noise. its effects are less widespread but it
is often more annoying in character.
10.1.1 Many industrial noises contain very
strong high frequencies whines, screeches and
clatter - these components are relatively
more attenuated by passage through the air
and by the insulation of light structure than
are lower frequencies.
IO.12 Intermittent noises are either isolated
explosions or reports, or noises of a periodic
nature, such as those of pressure relief valves
or blow off, or the noises of work occurring
at random intervals, for example. hammer-
ing. grinding and sawing operations; the lat-
ter class may be especially irritating because
of high pit.ch.
SATIONAL l UILMNC CODE OF INDIA
10.2 Soumcs of Industrial Noise
10.2.1 Noises in industrial buildings are
mainly of indoor origin. Noise in factories
and workshops is generally saused by
machine tools and by operations invoived in
making and handling the product and they
are classified into the following groups,
depending upon how the noise energy is
generaied.
10.2.1.1 IMPAU -- IVoise caused by impact is
the most intense and widespread of a!! indus-
trial noises. it is normally coupled with
resonant‘response of the structural members
connected to the impacting surface. Cdmmon
sources of this type of noise are forging, rivet-
ing.. chipping, pressing, tumbling, cutting,
weaving, etc. intense impact noise may also
be produced during handling of materiais.as
in the case of‘ sheared steel plates failing one
over another in collecting trays in a steel fac-
tory. Impact noise is usuaiiy intermittent and
impuisive in character, but it may also be
continuous as in the case of tumbling.
10.2.1.2 ~RIC-I ION ---. Most 01. the noise due
to friction is produced in such processes as
sawing, grinding and sanding. Friction also
occurs at the cutting edge on lathes and other
machine tools and in brakes and from bear-
ings. The spectrum of frictional noise often
predcminates in Iligh frequency and is very
unpleasant in character.
10.2.1.3 KO.TAl.ION ANI) RECII;KOCA-\-ION -.--
A rotating or reciprocriting machine gener-
ates noise due to unbalanced forces and, or
pressure fluctuations in the fluids inside the-
machines. in many cases. the moving surfa-
ces radiate noise directly and in other cases,
the pressure fluctuations are transmitted to
the outer casings of the machine from where
they are radiated as noise. Interaction of
rotating component with the fluid stream can
also give rise to pure tone components, such
as the whine in a turbine. Since most machine
casings have radiation efficiencies of unity in
the higher frequency range, the amoilnt of
sound radiated is often substantial.
10.2.1.4 AiX lUKBUl.E’LCE --Noise may be
generated by rapid variaton in air pressure
caused by turbulene from high velocity air,
steam or gases. Common examples are the
exhaust noise from pneumatic tools and jet
engines. The noise is intense, and broad
bas’ed in character and the frequency cri:eria
depends on the size of the jet: The intensity
increases rapidiy with the velocity of the air
stream.
10.2.1.5 NOISES WITH PIJKE TONE COMPO-
IGENTS- Whinning noise from turbines and
humming noise from transformers come
under this group.
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES--SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND IWWL.ATION AND NOlSE CONTROL
JO.3 Noise Criteria
10.3. I. HEARING D A M A G E - R ISK C R I T E-
RIA- Continuous exposure to high noise
levels may result in permanent noise induced
hearing loss in the course of time. Damage-
risk criteria specify the maximum levels and
duration of noise exposure that may be
considered safe. Generally accepted damage-’
risk criteria for exposure to continuoas,
steady.broad band noise are shown in Table
7.‘Wheneierthe sound level at the workers
position in a factory exceed the levels and the
duration suggested, feasible engineering
controls shall be utilized to reduce the sound
to the limits shown. If such controls fail to
reduce sound levels within the levelsof Table
7, persohai hearing protection equipment
shall be provided and used to reduce sound
levels within the level shown.
J 0 . 3 . 2 INTERFEREME WITH CO M M U N I C A -
T IO N --In factories where audible warning
signals are used, or where an operator fol-
lows the operation of his machine by ear, the
background noise should not be so loud as to
mask the signal or desired sound (the infor-
mation sound) to be heard. Noise may be the
cause of accidents by hindering communica-
tion or by masking warning signals.
JO.4 Methods yf Reducing Noise
10.4.1 NO I S E CONI-ROL BY L O C A T I O N-
Machines, processes and work areas which
are approximately equaliy noisy should be
located together as far as possible. Areas that
are particularly noisy should be segregated
from quiet areas by buffer zones that produce
and may tolerate intermedia!e noise ieveis.
10.4.2 NOISE REDUCTiON BY L AY OUT -- 7he
office space in a factory should be as far as
possible segregated from the production area
and located preferably in a separate building.
7 his building ThouId not have a-wall common
with the productlon area. Where a common
wa!l is unavoidable, it should be heavy with
few connecting doors and no permanent
openings.
10.4.3 NOISE t?E~Uc”l~loS H I- SOUXCF
10.4.3.1 SI:LECI~K)N ok MAC‘HINEKY ---Noise
should be reduced as near the source as possi-
b!e. While the operational processes in a,,fac-
tory may be fixed and may have no quieter
ai:ernative, careful selection of the machine
tools and equipment to be used may consider-
ably help attaining lower noise levels in the
machine shop.
10.4.3.2 REDUCING NOISE FROM POTEKTlAL
S OURCES -- Impact that is not essential to a
process should be quietened. Noise from
10
VIII+--
handling and dropping of materials on hard
surface may be reduced by using soft resilient
materials on containers, fixing rubber tyres on
trucks, trolleys, etc. Machine noise may be
kept to a minimum by proper maintenance.
Proper lubrication will reduce noise by
friction conveyors, rollers, etc.
10.4.3.3 The noise from the radiating surfaces
may be reduced by reducing the radiating
area. For example, if the area is halved, the
TABLE 7 PERMISSlBLE EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR
STEADY-STATE NOISE
(Clause I0.J. /)
noise intensity will be reduced by 3 dB and at
IOW frequencies the reduction .will be much
greater.
10.4.3.4 Supporting structures for vrbratrng
machines and other equrpment should be
frames rather than cabinets or sheeted enclo-
sures. If an enclosure is used;- precaution
should be taken to isolate it and line it on the
inside with sound-absorbent material. The
noise radiated by machinery guards can be
minimized by making them of perforated
? ‘let or of wire mesh.
,
10.4.3.5 R E D U C I N G T R A N S M I S S I O N O F
M E C H A N I C A L V I BR A T I O N -- A v i b r a t i n g

Sotl\~) LEVFI dB(A) T I M E PERMI ITED. T sources does not usually contain a large
(Slow Response) radiating surface but , the vibration is
(I) (2) conducted along mechanically rigid paths to
h min surfaces that can act as effective radiator. If the
x5 16-00 rigid connecting paths are interrupted by
ij-S1, resilient materials, the transmission of
12-00
IO-34 vibration and consequently the nois: radiated
99-11 may be greatly reduced. The reduction
8-00
6-58 depends on the ratio of the driving (forcing)
frequency of the source to the natural
$--- frequency of the resilient system. 7 he natural
frequency may be determined from static
3--29
3-02 deflection under actual load as given in Fig. 2.
:z:o
The higher the ratio between the two
frequencies, the lessen is the transmissibility,
::jy which is defined as the ratio of the force
l-31 transmitted through the resilient isolater to
I - 19
I-09 the exciting force applied to it.
Transmissibility and the equivalent noise
reduction for various frequency ratios are
given in Fig. 3. For satisfactory operation, a
ratio of 3 : I or more between the driving and
natural frequencies is recommended.
Materials for isolators and their position are
II5 o-is given below:
N~IF I .- Where the table does not reelect the actual a) MATERIAL FOR I S O L A T O R S - Vibra-
exposure ttmcs and levels, the permissible exposure to
contrnuous noise at a single level shall not exceed the
tion isolators are usuallv made of resil-
ttme. 7‘(in hours) computed from the formula: ient materials like steel-in the form of
springs, rubber, cork and felt.
I6
T = 70.2(L%57- 1) Because of the large range of deflec-
tions obtainable in coil springs, they
Where f. is the work place sound level measured in dB(A) may isolate vibrations over a large
Not E 2 - When the daily notse exposure is composed of
spectrum of low frequencies. Metal
two or more pertods of different leveis. their combmed springs transmit high frequency
effect should be considered rather than the individual (from about two hundred to several
effect of each. The combined levels may not exceed a daily thousand c/s) very readily. Trans-
noise dose, D of untty where I> is computed from the mission of these frequencies can be
formula:
reduced by eliminating direct con-
Cl C: Cn
D ZX + r_ +f ..““., + sr tact between the spring and the sup-
n porting structure. Rubber or felt
Where, Cr. CZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C, indtcate the total duration of
pads may be inserted between the
exposure (in hours) at a given steady-state noise level; and ends of the spring and the surfaces to
Tr. T: .,....... T, are the noise exposure limits (in hours for which it is fastened.
the respective levels given in the table or computed by the
equation in Note I. Exposure {o continuous noise shall 2) Rubber in the form of pads may be
not exceal I IS dB(A) regardless of any value computed used to isolate very effectively
by the formula for the daily noise dose, D or by the engines, motors, etc. It may be used
equation in the Note 2. _
in compression or in shear. Some

Vh14-20 NATIONAL BI’ILDING CODF: OF INDW


NATURAL FREQUENCY IN c, s
Fi2, 2 Relation BetweenStatic Deflection and
Natural Frequency
IO
5 6 1 leading from the vibrating machnie.
FORCING FRQUENCY
Fig. 3 Transmissibility and Equivalent Noise
Reduction for Qifferent Ratior of
Forcing and Natural Frequencies
r u b b e r moun!ings use rubber-in-
shear as the primary elastic ele-
ments and rtibber-in-compression
as a secondary element which fur-
nishes snubbing action if the
mounting is subjected to an
overload.
3) Felt or cork or both may be used as
resilient mats or pads under
machine bases. The load per unit
area shall be chosen to- produce
enough deflection for the isolation
required; and shall be such tha! at
this defelcion; it is not loaded
beyond its eleastic limit.
bj POSI I IOY OF ISOLATOR - The normal
position of the isolators is between the
machine and its foundation.However, if
the forcing frequency of the machine is
low (less than IO c si and vibration iso-
lators with the requisite defelctions for
this location are not available. the
PART WI BL’ILDINC SEIWICES-SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS
‘.
machine may be bolted directly to an
independent heavy inertia concrete base
and the available vibration .isolators
used below the concrete base,
1) Large press and drop hammers
which create serious impact vibra-
tion in heavy machine shops may be
mounted rigidly on very massive
biocks of concrete having weights
many times greater than the weights
of’ the supported machines. The
inertia blocks may, in turn, be iso-
lated from the building structure by
large wooden blocks and with thick
pads of cork.
2) I’n critical instal!ations (set ,Note),
attempt should be made to locate
the resilient mounts in a plane
which contains the centre of gravity
of the mounted assembly. It is also
preferable to locate the mounts lat-
erally as far away as possible from
the centre of the machine.
NOTF -- Critical installations are those installa-
tions where transmission of vihration from these
installations will seriously hamper the normal
working.
3) Rigid mechanical ties be!ween
vibrating machine and building
structure, short-circuit or reduce
the effectiveness of isolators. Loose
and flexible connections should be
inserted in all .pipes and conduits
Where flexible connections are
impracticable, bends should be
inserted into !he pipes or the pipes
themselves should be supported on
vibration mounts for a considerable
distance from the source.
4 ) I-LEXIBILITY O F FOUNDATI-
OK - The effect of flexibility of !he
foundation on the isolator trans-
missibility shall beconsidered in the
selection of practical vibration iso-
lating mountings. The simplified
vibration isolation theory assumes
a completely rigid foundation.
,However, in practice, this can never
be achieved. The foundation is
never actually completely rigid.
Generally, the relatively low stif-
fness of the isolation system permits
the assumption of t-he foundation to
be rigid. However, if the stiffness of
the isolator is allowed to become
comparable to the.foundation stif-
fness (or greater), the deflection of
the isolator will become smaller and
the foundation will also deflect with
increased transmissibility and
decreased isolator efficiency. In a
SGUYD INStiLATION AND NOISE CONTROL V1P
 dynamic sense, supporting fonda-
tion or floors should have natural
frequency as high and be as stiff as
possible compared to the system
being isolated: Ciood design prac-
tice requires that the isolators
should be designed assuming a rigid
foundation with the stipulation that
rhe selected machine isolation sys-
tem frequency should be welt%elow
the foundation frequency. This
point should specially he kept in
mind when installing machines at
upper levels in buildings because
supported slabs ~ generally have
lower natural frequencies (low stif-
fness) than slabs on grade in base-
ment or ground floor locations.
50.4.4 NOISE KEDIJC-I I O N ar EKI.~SI_~KES
AND BAKKIE~~s
10.4.4.1 ENCI.OSIJKES ----Air-borne noise
generated by a machine may be reduced by
placing the machine in an enclosure or behind
a barrier. The enclosure may be in the form of
close-fitting acoustic box aicund the machine
such that’the operator performs his normal
work outsid$ the box and thus is not subjected
to the high noise levels of the machine. The
enclosure may be mdde of ‘sheet metal lined
inside with an acoustical material.
Where size of thus machine, workingarea and
the operation de not permit close-fitting
enclosures, the machine may be housed in a
room of its own. The inside of the enclosure
should be lined with sound-absorbing mate-
rials to reduce the noise level of the contained
sound. The bounding wal:s of the enclosures
shall also have adequate transmission !oss to
provide desired insertion loss.
10.4.4.2 BARRIERS --A partial reducticn of
noise in certain directions may be obtained.by
‘barriers’ or partial enclosures or partial
height walls. Two-sided or three-sided barrier.
with or without a top and invariably convered
on the machine siddwith a caustic absroption
material should face a wall covered with
sound-absorbing niaterial. If the top of the
enclosure is open, the reduction may bc
increased by placing sound-absorbing
material on the ceiling overhead.
10.4.5 AC O U S T I C A L ARSORPTION DEVICFS
10.4.5.1 ACOUSTICAL TREATMEPT OF CEIL-
I NG S ANDSIDE WALLS - In order to.reduce
the general reverberant noice level in m+xhnie
shops;acoustical material may be placed on
the ceilingand side walk. With this treatment
3 to’6 dB r:duction of middle and high fre-
quency noise may be achieved. While the
noise level at the source, affecting the opera-
“111422
tor, may no! be reduced materially, the treat-
ment would bring down the general noise leve!
away from the source in reverberant field.
10.4.5.2 FtiNCTlOkAL SOUND ABSORBERS-
- For efficeint noise reduction ‘functional
sound absorbers’ may be clustered as near the
machines as possible. These tiu?li;fs may be sus-
pended and distributed in any pattern to
obtain !ower noise levels within the machine
shop. Compared on the basis of equal total
exposed surface area’s, functic;nal sound
absorbers have slightly higher noise reduction
coefficients (arithmetic average of absorption
coefficients at 250, 500. I 00 and 2 (OOO Hz)
than conventional acoustical materials place6
directly on ceilings and wal!s.
?‘I. I.ARORATORIES AND TEST
HOUSES
I I. I Sources of Yoise
/I././ CJlJl-DOCR NOISE - ln a test house or
laboratory, where research workers and
scientists are engaged in performing sophisti-
cated experiments, the externa! noise is
mostly contributed by noise emmitting build-
ings (workshops. machine rooms), aero-
dromes. railway stations and gene@ traffic
noises. l‘he outdoor sources of noise in a col-
lege-labora:ory include noises produced in a
playground as we!l.
11.1.2 Ixr)oOR NCISE - -- T h e f o l l o w i n g
sotirces mainly contribute.to indoor noises in
research institutions. college laboratories:
a) Workshop. machine rooms, cafeteria,
ctci
b) Airconditioners and exhaust fans;
c) Noise produced within !he test house or
laboratory while performing experi-
ments; and
d) Typing or other machine loises. tele-
phone service lift. sanitary services, etc.
I/.,‘./ S!TE PL A N N I N G - - - While planning
for a labcratory or test house. care should be
taken in the design that no noise emmittlng
installations should exist in its neighbour-
hood. However, where outdoor noises exist,
such as from local factory. heavy traffic.
aerodromes. railway lines. sport grounds or
busy markets, buildings should be kept as far
as possible away from the source of noise.
11.2.1.1 The window and door openings
tow;ards the nqise sources should be min-
imum. Minimum amount of glaring shollld be
placed on wails directly facing the noise
sources.
YATIDNAL lUllDING CODE O F WDIA
Il.22 INTERNAL PLANNING
11.2.2.1 Noisy places should be kept separate
from the quiet ones. The location of
laboratories or test houses shouid be so
chosen that it is cut off from the noigy zones.
Where there are offices attached to a
laboratory, provision should be made to treat
the offices and to use acoustical partitions. to
achieve a sound insulation of at least 35dB.
11.2.2.2 In a laboratory, mosfly hard refled-
ing surfaces and bare furnishings are found;
which produce very reverberant conditions.
The ncise condition still deteriorates when
noise producing instruments are switched on
or a heavy object is dropped on the floor.
Under these conditions. sound. absorbing
treatment of the space is very essential. Sound
absorbing ceilings are recommended to
deaden-such noises. Rubber buffers may also
be fitted to the legs of furniture.
11.2.2.3 In large span laboratories or test
houses where scientists and .researchers are
engaged in work and/or simultaneously busy
in calculations or desk work requiring high
degree of mental concentration, use of sound
absorbing screens is recommended.
11.2.2.4 Noise reduction between the test
house or laboratory and corridors or general
circulation space should be well kept in mind
and due care should be taken of the type of
doors and the manner of their fittings etc.
Transmission of noise through service ducts,
pipes, lifts and staircases should also be
guarded. Telephones should preferably be
placed in a separate small enclosure or acous-
tically efficient telephone booth.
1’1.2.2.5 To isolate a laboratory or a test
house from structure borne noises originating
from upper floor, sandwitch type floor con-
struction is recommended.
11.2.2.6 Wherever the provision of double
glazed windows is necessary+0 reduce the heat
losses care shouli be taken to provide sealed
double windows rather than double glazing in
a single window.
NOIE - Double glazed windows for sound insulation
should have a minimum gap of 100 mm between the two
glasses.
f2. MISCELLANEOUS BUILDINGS
12.1 L_arc* Courts And Councii Chambers -
It is important that law courts and council
chambers be protected from the intrusion of
outdoor noise and from indoor noise arising
both from ancillary offices and circulation
spaces. The general recommendations on site
planning given in 3 appiy to law courts and
municipal buildings. .buf in the larger
buildings at least, further protection against
?ARt 8111 SI’IWINC SERVICES-SECIION 4 A C O U S T I C S . SOCND
outdoor noise can be’obtained bv blanninn
offices and other rooms around- the COUP?
rooms or chambers, and separating the offices
from the central rooms by means of corridors.
This arrangement is usual:y convenient to the
function of the buildings.
12.1 .I The wait between thecorridorsand the
central rooms should have a sound insulation
value of nof less than 50 dB for example 225
mm brick t_o insulate against airborne noise in
the 6orridors. Entrances from halls or corri-
dors into court riioms or council chambers
sholild be through baffle lobbies with two sets
of quiet action doors. Sound absorbing treat-
ment on ceilings and upper parts or walls of
entrance lobbies is recommended.
12.1.2 The whole of the floor of the court
room or chamber including steps and seating
areas se1 aside for the public should have a
resilient floor finish to reduce the noise of
footsteps and shuffling. of feet. Any tip-up
seats should be quiet in action.
12.1.3 Sound absorbing treatment applied
for acoustic purposes serves alsoto reduce the
build-up of noise within the room and, part of
the treatment should be applied in a band to
the perimeter of the ceiling to absorb intrud-
ing outdoor noise; it is often desirable to keep
the cenIre part of the ceiling free of absrobent
material for acoustic reasons.
i2..2 L i b r a r i e s , M u s e u m s a n d Art
Galleries -- Quiet conditions for- reading and
study are essential in these types of buildings
and, since their occupancy is not noise
producing, intruding noise is more noticeable
and distracting.Evefy opportunity therefore
should be taken to plan.for noise defence.
both in respect of siting of the bui!ding and
internal planning. When possible, stack
rooms, store rooms and administrative offices
should be planned to, screen reading rooms,
print rooms and lecture rooms from noise
sources. In public libraries, the reference
library and lecture rooms should receive first
consideration; the lending library, newspaper
and periodical rooms have a high=
background noise and are secondary. is
importance.
12.2. I In Ial ge libraries, museums and art gal-
leries echoes from lofty. large domed or con-
cave ceilings are often a nuisance. Small
noises such as footsteps, coughs, chair scrap-
ing.and closing of books are reinforced by
reverberation. and concave surfaces even
when treated with.a sound absorbent may
focus these no,ises. Treated fiat ceilings if not
too high obviate these troubles. Books on
shelves in libraries constitutea valuable wall
absorbent.
INSULATION AND NOISE COXlROL V1114-y
12.2.2 Floor finishes are important. The
impact noise of footsteps on marble, terrazzo
or wood block flooring, and especially on
hardwood strip and batten flooring, can be
disturbing both within the room in which the
noise is generated and the rooms below. On
solid floors, resilient floor finishes, such as
rubber, cork and linoleum on an underlay, are
highly desirable. In the children’s se&tins of
libraries 2nd museums they are essen!ial. In
eristing buildings, rubber, linoleum or vinyl
asbesto tiles laid over the floor in the traffic
areas are often a solution to the problem.
/2.2.3 Reference libraries in universities,
research establishments, office buildings and
science buildings having machines and testing
benches, should be planned in a quiet part of
the building. Walls enclosing the !ibrary
should normally have a sound reduction
value of not less than 50 dB (for example 225
mm brick) and baffle lobbies should be
planned between the library and halls and
corridors. Walls facing on to corridois or
other noisy areas should not have fanlights or
borrowed lights unless they are double glazed
and non-openable.
12.3 Audiloria utd Tlwarrrs ~~~ .?‘he sources
of noise that have to be considered in concert
halls, opera houses, theatres, cinemas and
similar auditorium buildings are as follows:
Outdoor noise er.tering through walls.
roots. doors, windows or ventilation
openings;
b) Noise from any other hall ;n the same
building. especially if let out separately
for revenue;
c) Noise from foyers, service rooms and
other ancillary rooms, particularly
rehearsal rooms; and
d) Noise from airconditioning plant, etc.
and the cross-transmission of other
internal noises via ventilating duct
system.
12.3.1 Because of greatly increased outdoor
noise, all auditorium buildings now need
more care in siting than formerly. For
listening to speech or music, a very low
background noise level is desirable: in concert
halls especially the quietest possible
--
TABLE 8 MAXIMlJM SOUND PRESSL’RE LEVELS DUE TO EXTERNAL
MECHASlC.4L EQUIPMENT NOISE IN AUDITORIA (dB)
(Clause /.?.3.?)
l.yt,r OF A~WTWII~M
, 63 I25 250
Concert hails 51 29 ?I
[dB(A)-251
Drama l.hcatres 55 44 35
[db(A)-301
vttt4*4
conditions should be provided because the
pauses and moments of silence which are an
essential element of music cannot otherwise
be given full value. Therefore, sites at crass-
roads or close to steel railway bridges or near
churches where bell ringing is practised
should be avoided unless very-high standards
of structural sound insulation are
contemplated. Sites adjoining under ground
railways may also prove unsatisfactory at
basement levels owing to low-pitched noise or
rumble transmitted through the ground;
special isolation measure need to be adopted
for isolating large buildings from ground
vibration of this scrt.
12.3.2 Whenever possible, for concert halls
and theatres on city sites a noise survey of the
site .should be made; a suitable sound
reduction value for the structure of the
building can then be chosen so as to keep
down to certain maximum noise levels within
the auditorium. The maximum octave-band
sound pressure levels(SPL) recommended are
given in Table 8.
12.3.3 The minimum standard of sound
reduction likely to be required in an audito-
rium in a city to protect it against external
noise is of the order of 65 dB for a concert hall
or 55-60 dB for a theatre (when averaged over
the range of 100-3159 Hr, with a slope of not
more than 5 dB per octave so as not to fail
short at the crucial low frequencies). This
reduction should be provided on all sides, but
it would be reasonable to make the roof insu-
lation 5-10 dB less provided the building is not
unduly exposed to noise from aircraft in
flight. Surrounding the auditorium with ancil-
lary rooms and foyers is an obvious and inval-
uable planning method of obtaimng the
required insulation against outdoor noise.
12.3.4 Ventilation intakes and returns are
vulnerable features in the defence ‘against
external noise, they should be positioned so as
to avoid expcsure to noise, and in addition a
sufficient length of both inlet and outlet ducts
should be provided with carefuily designed
silencers. The ventilation system should also
be designed togvoid transmitting or adding to
internal noise.
12.3.5 The most serious internal noise prob-
lem arises when there are two halls meant for
AND
CESIKE FRt(JljEhCY,Hz)
A
500 1000 zoo0 4000 nGF
24 20 17 14 13
?Y ‘5 22 20 I8
NATIDNAL lUlLDING CODE OF INDIA
separate use in the same building, especially if
one of them a concert hall; the-latter is a very
loud potential source of noise and requires a
high standard of protection against extrane-
ous noise. In thesecircumstances it isdoubtful
whether a ‘single’ wall can be adequate for
insulating the two halls unless it is designed
with a wide unbridged cavity. Separation by
planning is preferable.
12.3.6 Other sources of internal noise are
rehearseal rooms, scenery bays, and
workshops, stages of other halls where
rehearsals or erection of stage sets might be in
progress and foyers and bars where loud
conversation might occur. The insulation of
the internal walls should be adequate to
protect the auditorim from these noise sources
and the insulation should not be by-passed by
openings, doorways, etc. The general noise
due to banging of doors also needs to be taken
care of; soft sealing materials should be
provided for all doors to ensure quiet closing.
12.3.7 For detailed acoustical design of
auditoria and conference halls reference may
be made to good practice [VII-4(2)].
13. PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
13.1 The installation and use of ampligfying
systems for public and private functions have
been greatly on the increase. To get optimum
performance out of the equipment attention
to essential detailsby professional engineers is
necessary.
1’3.2 The installation of sound distribution
systems in closed auditoria and other enclo-
PART Vlll W I L D I N G S&RVICES-SECTION 4 ACOGSTICS, S O U N D INSULAflON AND N O I S E C O N T R O L
sures calls for careful choice of equipment,
positioning of the systems and other precau-
lions to obtain optimum performance of the
system. The sound distribution system may
comprise of a central loudspeaker system or a
distributed loudspeaker system depending
upon the acoustics of the enclosure and pur-
pose of use.
13.3 The installation of sound distribution or
public address system at passenger terminals
(bus’, train or air terminals) requires careful
attention. Most passenger terminals have
hard walls. floors, ceiling, etc. and are,
therefore, highly reverberant spaces. Use of
sound absorbing materials should be resorted
restored to on some convenient surfaces to
bring down the reverberation time as far as
possible. However, even after the application
of sound absorption materials, the terminals
could be reverberant enough to constitute a
serious problem for the public address system.
Care has to be taken to position loudspeakers
such that direct sound coverage is available
for every area. Use of the reverberator built-
up sound level should not be relied upon as
this provides very poor speech intelligibility.
Also, care must be taken to ensure that the
system is capable of generating sound levels
high enough t o o v e r c o m e t h e h i g h
background noise levels at the terminals. At
least 25 dB signal to noise ratio is required for
adequate speech intelligibility in reverberant
spaces with the reverberation sound in excess
of 1.5 seconds.
13.4 For details of such a system. reference
may be made to good practice [Vll-4(3)].
v111+*5 ’
 APPENDIX A
(Cirusl~ 4.4)
CONSTRUCTIONAI. MEASURES FOR SOUND INSULATI~ON OF BUILDINGS

A-1. MAI-ERIAL secure an isolation of about 60 dB. A doub1.e

wall construction with each wall about 25 cm
A - l . 1 S o u n d lnsu!rrlion Vulws of Non- thick w&h an intervening air space of II) cm
pordus Rigid Purlitions -. T h e s o u n d woc!d. however. provide about the same
insuiation of non-porous. homogeneuus rigid insulation at half the weight. When cavity
constructions, such hs plastered solid brick walls are provided, the provision of sound
masonry walls varies as the iogarithm of the absorption inside the cavity also helps in
weight per tini! area and would thus increase improving the sound insulation-of the wall
the thickness of wall. There is, however, a provided the two walls are acoustically
limit beyond which it requires an excessive decoupled from each other all along the
increase in thickness to produce on:y a small perimeter.
increase in sound insulation (.yeeTable 9). The
relation between the weight ofa rigid par!ition
and its Sound insillaticn is approximately 1 ABLE 9 SOUND INSi!LATION VALUES
such that every time the we&lit is doubled ACCORDING Tr3 WEIGHT OF MATERIAL PER
there is an increase in sound insulation of SQUARE METRE
about 6 dB. Sound insulation values in (C/uustJ A-1.1)
relation to weight per square metre of wali are
giver. in Table 9. St.:I(I-A.\l. [)thhllY Ok WA1.i ~iHAiiShI?ISIOS i_OSS(SOUND
AlttT.4 IN ‘INSULATION
kg; m’ V ALUE A V E R A G E FOR
A-l .2 Sound lnsulaiion qf Porous Materials 128 and 2 048 Hz) dB
(1) (2)
A - / . 2 . / POHOIJS R.IGII:J MAIEKIALS -- The
5 22.a
relation between weight p& square metre and
the sound insuiation values given in Table 9 25 33.2
does not apply in the case of porous rigid 5;) 37.6
materials. like porous concrete masonry:
cinder concrete:. etc. because of their sound IO0 42.0
absorptive properties which provide about IO 150 44.1
percent higher insulation than the non-porous
200 46.4
variety of the same weight. In order to secure
the best insclation from such porous ma!e- 250 47.9
rials, it is recommended that :he porous parti- 300 49.1
tion should be plastered at least on one side
and if possible on both the sides. 350 50.0
400 50.9
A-/.2.2 N O N- RI G I D OK FLEXIYLE Po~or~s
450 51:6
Mt\ WKIAI.S -- These are materials, such as
‘Iclt. mineral wool and quilt. and they by them- 500 52.3
selves provide low sound insulation as com- 550 52.9
pared to rigid .materials and, therefore, they
arr- not generally used for the purpose of noise 600 53.6
reduction and isolation. However, a composit
constructon employing a combination of rigid
materials and porous absorbers may be A-2.2 Light Weighr Construction - For
adopted where weight is an importanr factor. light weight construction, a variety of mate-
Such a conE:ruction produces better insuta- rials, such as metal lath and p!aster, fibre-
tion ner unit weight of the partition. boards, plywood and plasterboards fixed on
studs with an intervening space may be
. I - ‘ . HALLOWANDCOMPOSITEWALL employed. For equal weight these p:ovide
CONSTRUCTION greater insulation than solid masonry. Tests
conducted on such partitions haveshown that
A-2.1 Heavy Weight Consrrustion - Where sound is mainly transmitted thrcugh the studs
a high degree of found insulation i?; required, and very little thrcugh air space. Strunural
neither a non-porous rigid material nor a cross-connections or ties between the two par-
porous materiai by itself can provide the titions should, therefore, & avoided, but
desired insulation in a reasonable thickness where they cannot be avpided only the min-
and weight. For example, zbout I@0 cm thick. imum number required should be used. These
brick wall (I 950 kg/m-) would be required to ties where provided should be made of wire or,

v111426 MPDNAL BUILDING CODE UF IWDl4

even mere preferably, of a suitable flexible
material. Construction with sfaggcred studs
(see Fig. 4) which makes the two part&&s
independent. is recommekded.
Fig. 4 Typical Sectional Plan of a Sound
Proof Partition
A-2.3 Filling of ‘.Cavity in k’artitions - The
tilling of the cavity in a partition with acoustic
materials like mineral woolor glass wool does
not always produce satisfactbry results. If the
acoustic tili is rigidjt may form a bridge acioss
the two partitions and thereby considerably
reduce the insulation. In the case of hol!ow
light weight partitions, in which the two pap-
els are not structurally separated, theacoustic
fill helps to increase the insulation only
slightly. However, .when the two pahels are
decoupied by means of staggered studs, resil-
ient supports, etc. the acoustic fill can effect
considerable increase in the insulationvalue,
and should be provided.
A-2.4 ‘Composite Wall - Composite walls ot
laminated construction may be designed to
obtain any sound insulation desired; the max-
imum value is obtained when all the layers of
alternate porous and rigid materials are separ-
ated by an air-space in which case the value
approaches the sum of the value of individual
units, provided the air space is bigger thanthe
wave len th of the sound at the lowest fre-
quency oPinterest and the layers of rigidmate-
rial are isolated from each other. Such a
construction, however, occupies more space
and needs great care’in installation in oider to
obtain .the anticipated efficieqcy. Such com-
posite wail may be used in special eases where
high sound insulation is necessary.
A-2.5 The desired sound insulationmay be
achieved in an one or more of the following
three ways:
a) B,y a d o p t i n g a continuotis
construction by using homoge-
neous materials where the extent
of sound insulatio’n is controlled
by the weight per squaie rnetre.
Where. the requirements are not
relatively stringent and are of the
ordlr of 50 dB,.solid cons’truction
of 20 cm to 30 cm bricki is
comidered suitable.
b) By adopting semi-discontinuous
construction where air cavities are
employed with cross-connections
between the two partitions. the
cross-connections being kept as
PART VIII SUILDINC SEllVICES--SECTION 4 ACOUS?lCf%
few as possible and made prefera-
bly of a flexible material, provided
adequate discontinuity is main-
tained between the floor, thewall
and the ceiling.
c) By adopting a fully discontinuous
construction where complete dis-
continuity in the structure is intro-.
duced by means of an air cavity.or
an elastic acoustic material, and
the air cavity is filled with an
acoustic material. This method
would meet the requirements of
the highest insulation ‘within reas-
onable weight per square metre:
A-2.6 i3verall Insulation- In providing
sound insulatidn in any room the question of
overall sound insulation should be consi-
dered. Some areas, like sound-proof doors,
windows, etc, may,provide insulation lqwer
than that of the other surfaces and thus would
adversely affect the overall insu!ation. All the
areas should, therefore, be designed keeping
in view the sound energy transmitted through
the individual components so as to attain the
desired overall sound insulation.
A - 2 . 7 Exa.mpks o f S o u n d R e d u c t i o n
Values- Values of sound reduction for types
of (a) continuous construction, (b) semi-
discontinuous construction, and(c) discontin-
uous construction, are given in .B-I. Sound
reduction values obtainable with various
iypes .of windows are given in B-2.
A-3 SOUND INSIJLATION OFFLOORS
AND CEILINGS BY CONSTRUCTION
MEASURES
A-3.1 Sound Insulation of Floors and Ceil-
lings-Both air-borne and structure-borne
sounds may be transmitted through floors and
ceilings. In most of the cases where the ceilings
and floor constructioti is of the solid type like
cement concrete these have sufficient weight
and rigidity to provide adequate insulationf&r
air-borne sounds, but offer poor insulation
for structure-borne or impact sounds. Insula-
tion .against impact sounds may be done as
iriditiated in A-3.1.1 to A-3.1.3.
A-3.1.1 IVY USING A RESILIENT S U R F A C E
MATERIAL O N FLOORS -This helps to damp
the impact noises, but has no appreciable
effect on air-borne sound. Linoleum, insula-
tion board, cork, asphalt mastic and carpet
are some of the mater@ usually employed;
the softer the material used, gieater is the
insulation effected. An improvement.of 5 to
10 dB over a bare.concrete floor is obtained
with suL;h material.
9iDUYD INSUWTiON AND NOISE CONTROL v1114~’
~-3.1.2 BY ’ PR O V I D I N G A FL O A T I N G FLOOR BOARD
1. MINERAL OR
FLOOR’CONSTRUCTION f GLASS-WOOL
.OUILT
a) CONCRETE FLOORS- This is an EXISTING SUB
additional floor constructed and FLOOR OF WOOD
isolated or floated fram the exist- PLASTERBOARD
ing concrete floor by means of a
resilient material and;therefore.
does not let the impacts and conse- WOODEN JOIST

quent vibration to be transmitted 6A

to the room below. It also provides < FLOOR COVERING FLOOR BOARD
useful improvement in the insula- MINERAL OR
GLASSWOOL
tion of air-borne sounds. A typical QUILT
construction is shown in Fig. 5. EXISTING SUB-
LOOR OF WOOI
The cement concrete used may be
about Scm thick which is poured PiASTERBOARG
over a resilient material like
quilted mineral or glass wool. It is VWOODEN JOISTS PLASTER 1
important that a waterproof paper
6B
be used in between, and both the. FLOOR
FLOOR BOARD/
quilt and paper lapped so as to \.COVERING MINERAL OR
(GLASS-W”L
prevent concrete from getting OUILl
through. _ EXISTING SUB-
FLOOR OR WOOD

BOARDING
PLASTERBOARD

\. WOODEN JOISTS L PLASTER \SAND PI!GGIN(;

6C
Fig. 6 Existing Timber Floors, Floating
Consrrucrion
kl OOR COVERING, ,- FLOOR BOARD
MINL RAI. “1(
Gl.ASSWOCL
QUILT
Fig. 5 SAND PUGGING

PLASlER ON
b) WO~DES EI.OOKS I n the case of EXPANDED METAL
floors constructed on wooden joists
WOOCEN JOISTS
the problem of sound insulation
becomes more difficult particularly in 7,4 When Supporting Walls Are IOcm Thick or Less
the presence of heavy mechanical FLOOR COVERING Fl.OOR BOARD
impact sounds. Sketches in Fig. 6 show MINFRAL OR
methods of insulating such floors . GL~;As,yOOL
employing mineral or glass wool quilt MINERAL WO OL
for isolation purposes. Resilient PUGGIVG
mountings may be used to obtain even
PLASTERBOAR,)
more satisfactory results. A further
improvement in the insulation of such WOODEN JOISTS L PLASTE R
floors is achieved by employing a ‘pug-
7~ When Supporting Walls Arc 20 cm Thick or More
grng’ or a ‘deadening’ material in the
air-space between the wood joists (set, Fig. 7 New Timber Floors, Floaring
Fig.6 and 7). Either sound absorbem Construction. with Pugging
type materials like mineral wool or
other materials like sand or ashes; may A-3.1.3 B Y USlsG .4 StJSPESDED CE I L I N G
be used, the latter being more effective Wll-H AI R- SPACE -This helps to improve the
because of the fact that, the efficiency insulation of both air-borne and strucrure-
of the ‘pugging’depends on the weight borne sounds by attenuating and isolating
of the material used. In order to obtain them from the room below. Typical construc-
useful improvement at least 70kg! m’ tions for wooden floors are shown in Fig. 8A,
of sand ‘pugging’ is usually employed. 88 and 8C. which provide increasing degree
Mineral wool pugging (at least I5 of insulation. For solid floors, metal hangers
kg/m’) is used mainly in conjuction of acoustic clips may be used to support the
with thin walls.of IO cm thickness or ceiling below, as shown in Fig. 8D. The extent
‘less. of improvement effected depends on the

v~ll+2* NATIONAL BUiLDlNC CODE’ OF INDIA

 rklooK (‘DVtKlsc; r8 LOOK KDAKD
.,FLOOR COVEKiNG,- FLODK RDAKD
l2mm
IBKE-ROAKD
PI.AS.IEKBOAKD PLAS~lERilDARI~
O K EXPA%DtD
OR EXPA%DED
MElAl
ME’IAI
PLASTEKJ LWODDES JOISI
PI.AS l’EK 1 \ WODDEI, JDIS
L I
8 A 8C
ISOLA I OK
HANGFK HOUSING HASGEK
J%OOK COVERING c l-LOOR BOARD

PLASTEK K
EAl SE (‘El1 I\(;
IIElAll A l ‘S’
8l.I

Fig. 8 Timber Floors, Floating Construction with Suspended_ ceiling

weight of the ceiling as well as on the structu-
ral rigidity with which it is connected to the
solid or wooden floor. Thus the highest insu-
lation could be achieved by using a heavy
ceiling which is arranged to be independent of
the floor by supporting it on resilient mount-
ings. In cases of very heavy impacts which are
difficult, to eliminate altogether, both the
methods prescribed in A-3.1.2 and A-3.f.3
may be adopted. Sound insulation values of
typical floors and ceilings are given inB-3 and
B-4.
A-3.2 Skiriing- The type of skirting fixed
will affect the. insulation of the floor-a great
deal. The larger the contact area it provides
between floor and the walls, the lower would
be the insulation. A typical method of fixing
skirting is shown in Fig. 5. An air gap or a
resilient material between the skirting and the
floor is used in this method, or the lower edge
is chamfered to reduce the contact area.
Again, most of the inner portion of the
skirting is scooped out to minimize contact
with the walls.

?AIT VIII BUILDING SERVICES--SECTION 4 ACOUSl’lCS, SOUND INSULA’IWW AND NOISE CONTROL VII1429 .
 APPENDIX B
(Clauses A-2.7 and A-3.1.3)

SO( JND INSIJLATION VALUES FOR VARIOUS TYPES OF

MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
B-l. EXAMPLESOFSOUNDREDUC- 6) Double partition of 10 cm 50-55
TION VALUES brick with 5 cm cavity thin
wire ties and 12.5 mm plaster
SI M.&II HIAI OK A\FHA(;~. AVEI<AC;C both sides
NO I YI’F or C‘O\- Wtlctl~ I SO\ XII KF-
~IHI:C’IIo\ k g m2 I>IK I IO\ dB 7) Cupboards used as partitions 25-35
Sinjfie Panel Conr inuous Constructions lhwdnuous C0nswucri0.w
1) I Y.O-mm particle 12.0 2h I) Two leaves of 6-cm concrete
board plastered and sedarated by a
2) 3-mm sheet @is:, 9.5 25 5-cm air-space associated with
suspended ceiling arid floating
3) iO-mm gypsum 10.0 25 fl00rs:
plasterboard a) Measuredacross the walls 50-60
4) 6.5-mm plate glass 17.0 28 b) Measured through thefloor 65-75
5) h.0-mm asbestos 12.25 26 2) As in (I ). but with a third 85-75
cement sheet leaf or 5-cm concrete between
the two discontinuous shells;
6) *mm wood-wool 70.0 35 each air-space 5 cm, measured
cement slab pias- across the walls or through
tered 12.5mm the floor
both ,side
3) As in (I). but with walls’of
7) 200-mm h o l l o w 2 4 5 45 IO-cm brick, plastered:
dense concrctc a) Measured across rhe walls 60-70
block plastcrcd b) Measured tlirough the 65-75
I2.5-mm both sidcx floor

Xl IO-cm brickwork, ?70 45

plastcrcd 12.5~mm
both sides
9) X-cm brickwork, 490
plastcrcd 12.5~mm
both sides
IO) -W-cm brickwork. 930
plastcrcd I2.5-mm
both sides
S(‘rrii-tlD~.orilitluolrs Conslrsucrions
1) 3(!-mm boarding on timber
.joists. with 12.5 mm gypsum
plasterboard ceiling with
skim-coat plaster
7) ZO-mm boarding on timber
joists. with expanded metal
Lath and 20 mm gypsum
sanded plaster cedmg
3) As in (2). plvs pugging OR trays
at 80kg. m‘. the pugging to
be air tight (for esample, sand
and mortar)
4) As in (2). plus floating floor 43-45
boarding on batteq.on resi-
lient quilt
Timber stud partition with
51
metal lath and 20 mm, plaster
both sides (80 kg/m-)
.30
VIII-.%-
The values given for these three items
are fdr walls without wall ties. Wire ties
effect a slight reduction (about 5dB)and
50 strip metal tie a considerable reduction
in these values. To achieve sound insula-
tion values above 55dB. considerable
55 attention need be paid to the question of’
flanking transmission. The construction
must be fully discontinuotis to achieve
the above values.
30-35 NATE -Variations in sound insulation due to the use
of different plasters do not appear to be significant.
B-2 SOUND REDUCTlON VALUES
35-40 OF 1-Y PICAL WINDOWS
SL D ESCRIPTION OF WINWW AV E R A G E
No. SXINO REDUC.
TION dB
4548 5
1) Open, in average furnished
domestic room or in class-
rooms occupied by pupils
2) Open, but with openings re- 10
duced to about 0.5 m*
3) Closed, single 3.0 mm glass 25
35 (9.5 kg/m*)
4) Closed, double. 3.0 (9.5 35
kg/ m’) glass, 100 mm apart
NATIDNAL BUILDING CODE OF INDu
5) Closed, double 3X mm (9.5 40 plasterboard. on battens in
kg, m-) glass, 150 mm apart felt-lined clips IO-15

6) Closed. single 5.5 mm (17 25

kgj m2) Plate glass B-4. SOUND INSULATION OF
TlMBER FLOORS
7) Closed. double 5.5 mm plate 45
glass, 15 cm apart SI. I‘HEAIMEYI IMPKOVE-
No. MEW
B-3 IMPACT SOUND INSULATION OF OVER FLOGK
TYPlCAL FLOORS OTHER THAN DESCKIBED IS
SL No. I
T!MBER FLOORS
Boarding on joist with ceil-
SL l-HE.41 MEN1 IMPHOvE- ing of lath and plaster, or
No. MCNr plaster on plasterboard 0
OVEK BA K E
CON(‘KF E I 2) As in (1). plus Carpet or
FIWOKS d B underfelt
Resilient Sut--ace Material 5-10
on Concrete 3) As in ( I ), plus floating floor
Bare concrete 0
or boarding on battens on
1) 12.5 mm fibreboard 5
2) Linoleum 5
4) As in (I), plus floating Boor
3) Wood blocks or thin carpet 5-10 of boarding on battens on
or rubber 2.5 cm mineral wool batts IO-15
4) Carpet or underfelt IO 5) As in (I), plus pugging of sand
or ashes 80kgim‘ or mineral
wool IOkg/ m 8-10
Floaring Floor
6) As in (I), plus pugging of
a) 5-cm Dense Concrete sand or ashes IOOkgjm
Screcd on :
IO
7) As in (I). but with floor
‘) Mineral wool/ glass wool quilt 15-20 replaced by boarding on cross
2.5 cm nominal thickness battens on 2.5 cm
(density 80-120 kg/ m’) minerai wool batts 5-10
2) Mineral wool batt (density 25 As in (7) plus pugging of
8 0 kg/m’), t w o n o m i n a l 8)
sand 5Okg/ m* 20
25 cm layers
9) Boarding on joists with separate
h) Boarding on battens on: joists for ceiling 5
I) Clips, unlined 5-10
10) Carpe! on underfelt with board-
Asbestos or felt pads, 12.5 mm 5-10 ing on joists for ceiling as above IO-15
2)
3) Fibreboard pads, 12.5 mm 10 If) Boarding cn joists, pugging
of sand or ashes IOkg! m’
4) Felt pads, 2.5 cm or rubber with ceiling as above is
pads, 12.5 mm IO-15
12) Floating float, boarding
5) Mineral wool batts, 2.5 cm on battens on 2.5 cm mineral
nominal thickness 15-20 wool baits on subboarding,
with joists and ceiling
6) Glass wool batts, 2.5 cm no- as above 15-20
minal thickness or rubber
pads 2.5 cm 15-20 NOTL I -Suspended ceiling alone will not be effective
or give the value shown unless precautions are
Suspended Ceiling (see Notes also taken to prevent transmission of impact
I and 2 under 8-4 noise by indirect paths, for example, by the use
of a floating floor or by isolating the structural
1) 10 mm (single coat or 12.5 mm floor from the walls of the room below, or by
(two coats) plaster on 12.5 using fully discontinuous cons:ruction.
mm frbereboard on 50 x 50
NOTE 2 -The values of the treatments given in 53 and
mm battens in clips S-10 B-4 may in appropriate cases be added; for
example, the value of pugging may be added to
2) 5 mm (single coat) or 12.5 mm the value of a floating floor, giving a rotal noise
(two coatsj plaster on IOmm reduction of 20 dB.

II .
,*a~ v,,, ,ULD,NC SERVtCE_G&TtON 4 ACOUSTICS. SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE, CONTROL v1114” -
 LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records thosC standards w,hich are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and
accepted standards’ in the fu~filment oJp the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standardshall he adoptedat the time of enforcement ofthe Code. Thestandards listedmay be used
by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements qf the-rejerred clauses in the
Code.
In thefollowing list the number appearing in the.first column within parentheses indicates the
number of the reference in this part/section.

(1) lS:4954-1968 Recommendations for 3) IS:l881-1961 C o d e o f p r a c t i c e for

noise abatment in town planning Instaliation of indoor amplifying and
sound dlstrlhution systems
(2) IS:25261963 Code of practice for
acoustical design of auditorium5 and
conference halls

“1114.3* N A T I O N A L IILIILDINT. (‘DDE OF INDIA

NATIONALBUILDINGCODE
PART VIII BUILDING SERVICES
SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS AND
ESCALATORS

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

 CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD ... 2

I. SCOPE ... 3

2. TERMINOLOGY ... 3

3. GENERAL ... 4

4. ESSENTIAL REQUlREMENTS ... 6

5. ELEmRKAL WIRING AND APPARATUS ... 14

6. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ... 15

7. TESTING ... 21

8. RUNNING AND MAINTENANCF ... 22

9. ESCALATORS ... 22

PART VIII BUILDING SEJlViC~-SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS AND ESCLATORS VIIM- 1

 PART VI1 BUlLDlNG SERVICES
SECTION 5 I NS7‘ALLATION OF Li FI‘S AND ESCALATORS

O..? I hi5 section walr iirst publlshcd in 1970. It is revmd to bring it in line with the latest Indian
Standards(III which it was based. ‘1 he major changes in this revision are addition of outlmc
dimensions 01 dit’lcrcrlt ~ypcs of lifts and detailed requirements of escalators in buildings.

03 Emphasis has been iaid on coordination between the architect/engineer and the lift
manuthcturrr to arrive at the number and position of lifts for attaining optimum efficiency in
serving the bullding with safety.

0.4 The information contarned in this section is largely based on the following Indian Standards:

IS:18bO-1980 Code of practice for installation, operation and maintenance of electric

passenger and goods lifts (second revision)

lS:2332-1972 Nomenclature of floors and storeys yirsr revisit)

lS:3534-1976 Outline dimensions of electric lifts firsf revtiion)

IS:4S91-1Y6X Code of practice for installation and maintenance of escalators

VIII-5.
2
f. SCOPE
1.1 This section covers the essential
requirements for the installation of lifts
(passenger lifts, goods lifts, hospital lifts and
service lifts) and escalators so as to ensure safe
and satisfactory performance.
1.2 This section gives information that
should be exchanged among the architect, the
consulting engineer and the lil’t escalator
manufacturer from the stage of planning to
installrition including maintenance.
2.1 For the purpose of this section. the
following definitions shall apply:
BAI (‘\I I I< A s h o r t piller slender a b o v e
and hrllginc beiow.
HALUSTR,\I)L - Arow ot balusters meant for:
supportrng moving hand rails.
BASi: MFN r SIoREy (B) -~- The lower storey
of a building below or partly below the ground
l e v e l .
C’~r.1 INDIC‘AIOK --- A visual and audible
device in the car to indicate to the attendent
the lift landings from which calls have been
made.
C AK BOLIYWORK -- The enclosing bodywork
of the lir‘t car which comprises the sides ahd
roof. and is built upon the car plaiform.
CAR FRAME_ -~- The supporting frame or sling
to which the platform of the lift car. its safety
gear. guide shoes and suspension ropes are
attached.
CAR PLAIFOKM ~~~ The part of the lift car
which forms the floor and directly supports
the load.
COMRPL.ATF - A pronged plate that forms
part of an escalator landing and engages with
the cleats of the steps at the limits of travel.
CONTRACT. SPEED ( LI I-T) -- The mean of the
maximum speeds attained by the lift car in the
upward and downward directions with rated
load in the lift car.
CONTROL - The system governing starting,
stopping, direction of motion, acceleration,
speed and retardation of moving member.
D ETERMINING F^NTRANCE LEVEL -This will
be the inside floor level at the entrance to the
building.
D O O R, CENTRE~PENING SLIUING -A d o o r
~.4RT WI CWILDINC SERIICES-SCCTION s IKSTALLATION
which slides horizontally and consists of two
or more panels which open from the centre
and are usually so interconnected that they
move simultaneously.
D OOR . Mll)-HAR Col.I.~i~s~t%t.E ‘- A
collapsible door -with vertical bars mounted
hrtueen the normal vertical members.
DOOK, Sr!W.E S;l.tt>t: .--- A single panel door
which slides horizontally.
DOOK. SWIKG .-- The swinging type single
panel door which is opened manually and
closed by means of a spring closer hhcn
released.
EW‘AI A IOR --- A power-driven, inclined,
continuous stairway used for raising ot
lowering passengers.
F-‘I.OOR -- -I he lower surface in a storey on
which one normally walks in a building. The
general term ‘floor‘. unless o t h e r w i s e
specifically mentioned, shall not refer to a
‘mrzanine floor’.
GOOLX 1.1~1. .-- 4 lift designed primarily for
the transport of goods, but which may carry a
lil’t attendent or other persons necessary for
the unloading and loading of goods.
GI;IOI \ (1.1~1) - 1 he members used to guide
the movcmen! of a lift-car or counterweight in
a vertical direction.
HOSPI-I AI. 1.1~7 A lift normally installed in
a hospital, dispcnbary, clinic and designed 10
accommodate one number bed; stretcher
along IIS depth, with sufficient space.alround
to carry a minimum of three attendcnts in
addition to lift operator.
LA’VWNG C A L L PUSI~ (LM ) .-- A p u s h
button fitted at a lift landing, either for calling
the lift car or for actuating the call indicator.
L ANDING D OOR (LIFT-) -Th’e hinged or
sliding portion of a lift well enclosure,
controlling access to a lift car at a lift landing.
L IFT - An appliance designed to transport
persons or materials between two or more
levels in a vertical or substantially vertical
direction by means of a guided car or
platform.
LIFT CAR -- The load-carrying unit with its
floor or platform, car frame and enclosing
bodywork.
L IFT L ANDING - That portion of a building
or structure used for the reception and
discharge of passengers or goods or both into
or from a lift car.
OF LJFTS AND E.SCA~.AT~RS VIII-5-
3
 L IFT M ACHINE -The part of the lift equip-
ment comprising motor (s) and the control
gear the&with, reduction gear (if any), brake(s)
and winding drum or sheave, by which the
lift car is raised or lowered.
LIFT PIT -The space in the lift well below
the level of the lowest lift landing served.
LIFT WELL. - The unobstructed space within
an enclosure provided for the vertical
movement of the lift car(s) and any
counter-weigh-t(s), including the lift
pit and the space for top clearance.
LIFT’ WELL ENCLOSURE - Any structure
which separates the lift well from its
surroundings.
LIFTING BEAM -A beam, mounted imme-
diately below the machine room ‘ceiling, to
which lifting tackle can be fixed for raising
parts of the lift machine.
M EZZANINE - An intermediate floor
between two floors above ground level.
M EZZANINE F LOOR ---The floor of an
intermediate storey or a mezzanine.
O PERATION --~ The pethod of actuating the
control.
O VERHEAD B EAMS ( LI F T ) - The members,
usually of steel, which immediately support
the lift equipment at the top of the lift well.
P ASSENGER LIM --- A lift designed for the
transport of passengers.
R ATED LOAU (LI F T ) --The maximum load
which the lift car is designed and installed to
carry safely at its rated speed.
R A T E D L O A D ( ES C A L A T O R ) -- T h e l o a d
which the escalator is designed and installed
to lift al the rated speed.
R ATED S PEED ( LI F T-- Also known as car
speed. The speed attained by the lift in the up
direction with rated load in the lift car.
R ATED S PEED ( ES C A L A T O R ) -- The speed at
which the escalator is designed to operate in
the up direction. It is the rate of travel of the
steps, measured along the angle of inclination,
’ with rated load on the steps or carriage.
SERVICE LIFT ( DU M BW AITER ) - A lift with
a car which moves in guides in a substantially
vertical direction; has net floor area, total
inside height, .whether or not provided with
fixed or removabk shelves, and capacity not
exceeding I m*, 1.25 m and 250 kg
respectively; and is exclusively usa for
4 .
VIII-S-
carrying materials and shall not carry any
person.
STOREY - The space between the surface of
one floor and the surface of the adjacent
floor vertically above or below it. Here the
term ‘Floor’ will include the ‘Roof but will
exclude mezzanine floors.
S TOREY FOR S PECIFIC U SE - Thesmre the
storeys which are named according to the
functions and the specific uses they arc put
to. For example, a duct storey is one through
which service pipes and electrical conduits
may be taken.
S UBSIDIARY STOREY(S) - A storey which
occurs below the determining entrance level
but above basement storeys.
S U S P E N S I O N R OPES (LIFT) -The ropes by
which the car and counter-weight are
suspended.
TOTAL. HEADROOM - The vertical distance
from the level of the top lift landing to the
floor of the machine room.
TRAVEL. (LI F T) -- The vertical distance
between the bottom and top lift landings
served.
3. G E N E R A L
3:1 The appropriate aspect of lift and
escalator installation shall be discussed during
the preliminary planning of the building with
all the concerned parties, namely, client,
architect, consulting engineer and/ or
lift/escalator manufacturer. This enables the
lift/escalator manufacturer to furnish the
architect and/or consulting engineer with the
proposed layout or vice-versa.
3.2 Information IO he Provided t_v Architect
or Engineer - As a result of prehminary dis-
cussion, the drawings of the building should
give the following particulars and finished
sizes:
4 number of lifts and size and position of
lift well;
b) particulars of lift well enclosure;
cl size, position, number and type of
landing doors;
4 number of floors served by the lift;
f.9 height between floor levels;
f) number of entrances;
l3) total headroom;
h) provision of access to machine room,
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 ..

provision of ventilation and, if possible, 6) Serving.. ........ floors.. ......entrance.. .....

natural lighting of machine room;
7) Number of floors served...................
k) height of machine room;
m) depth of lift pit; 8) Mctiiod of control............ ..*....................
n) position of lift machine, above or below 9) Position of machine room......................
lift well;
10) Sizes and position(s) of lift well(s) ......
P) size and position of arty trimmer joists or
stanchions adjacent to the lift well at each
floor; 11) P&ion of amterWigh t. ..........................

9) size and position or supporting steel work 2) Size of car platform.............................

at roof levels; or
r) size and position’ of any footings or Internal size of lift car......................
grillage foundations, if these are adjacent
to the lift pit; and 13) Construction, design and finish of car
s) in the case of passeuger lifts whether the bodywork........................
lift cage is required to carry household
luggage, such as refrigerator, steel 14) Car entrances:
almirah, etc. a) Number, size and type of
doors.. ........
3.2.1 The architect/engineer should advise
the lift manufacturer, if the Authority (see 4.1) b) Power or manual operation.. .......
has any special requirements regarding lifts 1% Car light.. ....................................
in buildings in the administrative area
concerned., 16) Ventilation of the car..
3.2.2 The information contained under 3.2 17)
and 3.2.1 is applicable for the installation
of lifts only and in the case of escalator
installations, the drawings shall provide the
appropriate information.
3.2.3 The architect/engineer should inform
the lift/escalator manufacturer of the dates
when the erection of the lift/escalator may be
commenced and is to be completed so that
sufficient time is allowed for the manufacture
and erection of the lift/escalator.
3.2.4 When submitting application for a
building permit to the local Authority, the
building plans shall include the details of lifts
(No. of lifts duly numbered, location, type,
type of doors, passenger capacity and speed).
3.3 When enquiring for and ordering an
electrical lift in accordance with this section,
the particulars given below shall be
furnished:
Particulars of Lijts
I) Passenger, goods or service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2) Number of lifts required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3) Load: number of persons . . . . . . . . . . . kg. . . . . . .
4) Rated speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s
5) Travel in m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
 25) Booklet giving complete details of main-
tenance schedule and circuit diagram
whizre so specified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Working Dmwings IO be Prepared 6-v the
Lift/ Escalator Manufacturer - The hft/es-
calator manufacturer requires sufficient infor-
mation for the preparation of working
drawings and is usually obtained from archi-
tect’s drawings supplemented by any informa-
tion obtained from the site and by colla-
boration with the other contractors
(see 3.2 and 3.3).
3.4.1 Working drawings showing the layout
of lift/escalator duly numbered. detail\ of
builders work, for example. holes in walls for
guide fixing. holes in machine room floor for
ropes and conduits, recesses for landing sills,
supports for lift/escalator machine and loads
imposed on the building should be submitted
by the lift/escalator manufacturer to the
architect, engineer for written approval.
3.5 Eiectrit,al Requiremen/ --. For illformation
of the electrical enginder, the lift/escalator
m a n u f a c t u r e r s h o u l d a d v i s e t,he
architect/engineer of h&+ electrical requirements.
This information should be available
early in the planning stage so that the electrical
supply requirements of the lift(s)/‘cscalator(s)
may be included in the electrical provisions of
the b u i l d i n g a n d t h a t s u i t a b l e
cables and switchgear may be provided.
3.6 The requirements given under 4 to 8 deal
with installation of lifts and 9 deal with the
installation of escalators.
4. ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS
4 . 1 C o n f o r m i t y w i t h Lifts A c t a n d
Rules -- The installation shall be generally
carried out in conformity with Lifts Act and
Rules thereunder, wherever they are in force.
4.1.1 It is the responsibility of the owner of
the premises where the lift will be installed, to
obtain necessary permission from the local
Authority before and after the erection of
lifts and for subsequent operation of lift(s).
4 . 2 Confirmity (cith I n d i a n Electricity
Rules - All electrical work in connection
with installation of electric lifts shall be
carried out in accordance with the provisions
of Indian Eleciricity Act, 1910 a n d t h e
provisions of the Indian Electricit.$Rules. and
shall also comply with the other provisions of
Part VIII Building services, Section 2
Electrical installations.
4.3 For detailedspecification of lifts reference
VIII-S- 6
shall be made to accepted standards
[VIII-5 (I)]*.
4.4 The outline dimensions of machme
room, pit depth, total headroom, overhead
distance and sill are specified in Tables I to 4
as given below:
Passenger lifts Table 1
Goods Lifts Table 2
Hospital lifts Table 3
Service lift5 Table 4
Fireman’s lifts (see Note 4)
NOIF I The above tables have been establIshed_ ^^ for a
maximum travel ol 30 m. t-or hetghts m excess ot .(U m.
lltt experts may be consulted.
hOI1 2 MInImum f l o o r - t o - f l o o r height f o r
horvontally slldlng d o o r s I\ f + 7 5 0 m m a n d ior
vertically hy-passmg door IS I 5 f + 250 mm, where ‘f’ IS
clear entrance height i&mm.
NOIF 3 When more than one lift comes in a bank of
hft. the machine room dimensions will he as follows:
Width = h’ X (‘+ (N-l)100 + 1500
D e p t h -= D + 2 5 0 0
where
IV = number of lifts in a bank of lifts,
C = width for each hft in mm. and
D = depth for each lift in mm.
Norr 4 Fireman’s lift shall be provided for dil
budding more than 24 meters in height. The capacity of
the fireman lift shall not be less than 8 passengers. The
dimensions of fireman lift shall be same as the
corresponding dlmenslons for passenger lifts as specified
in Table I.
4.5 Factor of S’qfety -- The minimum tactor
of safety for hny part of the lift shall not he less
than five. Higher factor of safct! for various
parts shall be applicable in acc*orJaIIcc’ with
accepted standards [VI I l-5( I 11.
4 . 6 . 1 GI:IDE RA I L S C’ar and counterweight
guide rails shall be of steel. Where the nature
of processes carried on in the building give
rise to acid fumes or corrosive substances the
steel rails shall be treated for corrosion.
l
In this section where leierence is made to ‘accepted
standards’ in relation to material specificat*on. the
appropriate document referred to at the end of the
Sectlon may be used as a guide to the interpmtation of
the standard.
NATKINA~ BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 TABLE I DIMENSIONS OF PASSENGER LIFTS
‘(All dimensions in millimetres)

TOP LANDING--\ 1
SOTTOM LANDING ‘RAVEL
BOTTOM LANDING 7 1I

ELEVATION EI..EVATION
FOR LIFT SPEED UP IO FOR LIFT SPEED UP TC
1.50 m/s 2.5 m/s

I ()\I> L.lFT WELL ENTRANCE

* \ -A_- .- .~“7

‘Persons kg cA 8 Y-----7 E

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

4 272 I loo 700 I 900 I 300 800
6 40X I 100 I 000 I 900 I 600 800
8 544 I 300 I 100 I 900 I 900 800
IO 680 I 350 I 300 ! 900 2 loo 800
I.7 X84 2000 I 100 2 SO0 I 900 900
16 I 088 2 000 I 300 2 500 2 loo I 300
20 I 360 2000 I 550 2 500 2400 i 000
Nort I ~- The total headroom has been ca!culated on the basis of car height of 2.2 m.

NOTE 2 -- In the case of manually-operated doors, clear enterance will be reduced by theamount of projection ofhandle on
the landing door.

NOTE 3 - Four-and six-passenger lifts are generally limited to a speed of I m/s

4.6.1.1 C A R G U I D E R A I L S -For paSS’Xlgt?r required for operation of safety against over

and gopds lifts having a contract speed of
more than 0.5 m/s, the car guide rails shall
have working surfaces machined.
4.6.1.2 COUNTERWEIGHT 6UlDE RAILS -
For passenger and goods lifts having a
contract speed of more than 1.5 m/s, the
counter weight guide rails shall have their
working surfaces machined.
4.6.1.3 Guide rails shall be continuous
throughout the entire length right from the
bottom of the pit floor to the top most floor
served plus additional length as may be
run. They shall be provided with adequate
brackets or equivalent fixing of such design
and spacing that the rails shall not deflect
more than 5 mm under normal operations.
4.6.2 B UFFERS - Buffers of spring or oil
shall be fitted under .the lift car directly or on
the pit floor with suitable concrete or steel
foundation. Oil resistant rubber buffers may
be used with lifts having a contract speed not
exceeding 0.25 m/s. Buffers shall be located
symmetrically with reference to the vertical
centre line of the car frame with a tolerance of
50 mm. Spring or oil buffers shall be used with

PART VIM BCIIL.DING SERVICES-SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS AND ESCALATORS VIII-5-

7 ,
 TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF GOODS LIFTS (FOK SPEEDS UP TO 0.5 m/s)
All dimensions in millimetres.

I-J- I’
E
A 4
LAN DING
- ---I i
C
I ’

TRAVEL

LANDING
PLAN

ELEVATION

LOAD C AR INSIDE LIFT WELL ENTRANCE

A h
h
kg 5 B D' E

(1) (2) (3) (5) (6)

500 I loo I 200 I 500 I loo
loo0 I 400 I 800 2 loo 1400
I 500 I 700 zoo0 2 JO0 I 700
2000 I 700 2500 2800 I 700
2500 zoo0 2500 2 800 2000
3ooo 2ooo 3ooo 3300 zoo0
4oal 2soo 3ooo 3 300 2500
so00 2500 3600 3900 2soo
NOTE I - The width of the machine-room shall be qual IO the lift well width *C’ subject to a minimum of 2 500 mm.

NOTE 2 - The total headroom has been calculated on the basis of a car height of 2.2 m.

NOTE 3 - Clear entrance width’E’is based on vertical lifting car-door and vertical bi-parting doors. For collapsibie mid-
bar doors the clear entrance width will get reduced by 200 mm or over depending on the lift design.

vp5-
8 NATlONAi BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 TABLE 4 DlMENSlONS OF SERVICE LlFTS (FOR SPEEDS UPTO 0.5 m/s)
(All dimensions in millimetres.)

MACHINE ROOM = C

T R A VE L

ELEVATION

LOAD CAR INSIDE LIFT WELL ENTRANCE

*
kg A 5 H. r----7 E

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

100 700 700 800 I 200 900 700
Is0 800 Roe 900 1300 loo0 800
200 900 900 loo0 1400 I loo 900
250 IO00 loo0 I 200 I500 I 200 1000

NOTE I - Entrance width ‘E’ is based on assumption of provision of vertical bi-parting doors (no car door is normally
provided).

VW10 N&J WNAL BUILDING CODE 0)’ ISDIA

lifts having rated speed in excess of 0.25 m/s
and up to and including 1.5 m; s. Only oil
buffers shall be used with lifts having rated
speed in excess of I.5 rn, s. Wooden’ blocks
suitably treated may also be used for service
lifts for speeds up to 0.5 mi s.
4 . 6 . 2 . 1 S T R O K E -The minimum stroke of
oil buffers shall be such that the car or the
counterweight on striking the buffers at I IS
percent of the rated speed shall be brought to
rest with an pverage retardation of not more
than IO m/ s-.
4.6.2.2 RETA~CDATION - Oil buffers shall
develop an average retardation not in excess
o f torn/s’ and shall develop> no peak
retardation greater than 25 m/s- having a
duration exceeding 1 i25 of a second with any
load in the car from rated load to ti minimum
load of 68 kg when the. buffers are struck with
an initial speed of not more than I I5 percent
of the rated speed.
4.6.2.3 The ratio of ,effective length to the
least radius of gyration (L/ R) of compression
members of oil buffers shall not exceed 80.
4.7 LI~I’ Wells and Lifr Well Enclosures
4.7.1 LIFT WELLS
4.7.1.1 No equipment except that forming a
part of the lift or necessary.for its operation
and maintenance shall be installed in the lift
well. For this purpose, the main supply lines
shall be deemed to be a part of the lift and the
underground cable, if laid along the lift well
shaft,shall be properly clamped to the wall.
4.7.1.2 Every counterweight shall travel in
juxtaposition to its car in the same lift well.
4.7.1.3 It is undesirable that any room,
passage or thoroughfare be permitted under
any lift well. Where .such conditions are
unavoidable, spaces for other uses may be
permitted under the lift well, with the prior
approval of the Lift Inspectorate Authority
and the following provisions shall be made:
a) spring or oil buffers shall be provided for
lift car and counterweight;
b) The pit shall be sufficierntly strong to
withstand successfully the impact of the
lift car with rated load or the impact of
the counterweight when either is
descending at rated speed or at governor
tripping speed; and
The car and the counterweight shall be
provided with a governor-operated safety
gear.
?ART VIII WIIDINC SERVICXS-SECTION 5 INSTAI.I.AlIOh
4.7.2 I_IR’ WELL ENCLOSURES
4.7.2.1 Lift well enclosures shall be provided
and shall extend on all sides from floor-to-
floor or stair-to-stair. ‘The enclosure shall be
of sufficient mechanical strength. It shall be
incombent on part of the civil contractor to
provide vertical walls in proper plumb.
4.7.2.2 The inner sides of the lift well
enclosures facing any car entrance shall, as
far as practicable form a smooth, continuous
flush surface de\;oid of projections or
recesses.
K<)II This rcquircmrnt may be met in existing lift
uell\~ h\ fillirlti anv rtlcesses or soaces bttween
projrctic;n\. or Calterr;ativcly by covering them with
suit&k bhcet matcridl. If it is not possible IO r e n d e r
Ilush any projection or top!. 01 rccessc’~. thtiy should be
bcvellcd on the under sldr lo an angle of 60”. from the
horirontal by mcan~ of metal plater. cement rendering or
o t h e r lirc-rebistlng m a t e r i a l s . Where a car-levelling
de\ ice 1s <)pcratIve alth car door opcnmg. such interior
\urfaccs shall alnay\ form ;i smooth tlubh surtacc helow
cdch IandIng kvcl lor a depth to at least thr depth of the
c~~lcvrll~ng ,onc plus the distance through which the 1111
car may trabcl OI IIS own momentum when the powrr IS
cut oil.
3.7.2.3 Where an open lift hell w o u l d
increase the fire risk in a building, the lift well
enclosure s h a l l b e o f f i r e - r e s i s t i n g
construction as specified in Part IV Fire
protection.
4.7.2.4 W h e r e w i r e g r i l l e o r s i m i l a r
constructions is used, the mesh or opening
shall be not greater than 3 cm and the lift well
enclosure shall be of sufficient strength to
resist accidental impact by users of the
staircase or adjoining floors or by materials
or trucks being moved in the viciriity.
4.7.2.5 Where the clearance between the
inside of an open-type lift well enclosure and
any moving or movable part ‘of the lift
equipment or apparatus is less than 5 cm, the
openings in the enclosure shall be further
protected by netting of square m e s h o f
aperture not greater than one cen:imetre and
of wire not smaller than one millimetre.
4.7.2.6 There stiail be no opening in-the lift
well enclosure permitting access to the lift car
by passing under the counterweight.
4.7.2.7 Sufficient space shall be provided
between the guides for the car and the side
walls of t.he tift well enclosure to allow safe
and easy access to the parts of the safety
gears for their maintenance and repairs.
4.7.2.8 In case of a completely enclosed lift
well, a notice with the word ‘Lift’ may be
placed outside of each landing door.
4.7.2.9 INDICATOR - Where lifts are
inst’alled in totally enclosed wells, position
 indicators are recommended to be provided
at each coor; however, where position
indicators are not provided, at least direction
indicators or ‘In Use’ indicators shall be
provided at each landing.
4.8 Lift Pits
4.8.1 A lift pit shall be provided at the
bottom of every lift.
4.8.2 Pits shall be soundly constructed and
maintained in a dry and clean condition.
Where necessary, provision shall be made for
permanent drainage and where the pits
e x c e e d s I . m , suitable discending
arrangement shall be provided to reach the
lift pit. And a suitable fixed ladder or other
discending facility in the form of permanent
brackets grouted in the wall extending to a
height of 0.75 m above the lowest floor level
shall be provided. A light point with a switch
shall also be provided for facility of
maintenance and repair work.
4.9 Landing Doors- Every lift shall, on
each side from which there is access to a
landing, be fitted with a landing door. Such
door shall be fitted with efficient interlocking
or other devices so as to secure that the door
cannot be opened except when the lift car is at
the landing and that the lift car cannot be
moved away from the landing until the door is
closed and locked. Where mid-bar collapsible
doors are used for landing entrance. they shall
not be power operated.
4.9.1 Where landing doors are mannually
operated and no indicators are provided,
vision panels of similar construction as in
4.10.3 shall be provided.
4.9.2 No automatic fire door or shutter
which operates by means of a fusible link or
otherwise due to the action of heat shall be
allowed in any landing, opening or the
liftway enclosure of any lift, if such opening
gives access to any exit from the building.
4.9.3 In the case of passenger lifts, for
buildings above 15 m in height solid doors
shall preferably be provided and in case of
buildings above 24 m in height collapsible
doors shall not be provided. Solid swing
doors may also be used where sliding space is
not available parallel to the entrance door.
4.10 Lifr Cars
4.10.1 Sliding doors (non-collapsible) are
recommended when power operation is used,
but if space is limited, collapsible doors may
be installed but they shall not be power
operated.
W-12
4.10.2 Where the space between the car gate
and inside the adjacent lift well enclosure
exceeds 13 cm, car door of entrances shall be
provided with means to prevent it from being
opened except when the lift car is at a landing
served by such car entrance.
4.10.3 Any vision panel in a car door shall be
fire-resisting and shall be of safety wired or
similar glass. The area between division bars
or other support shall not exceed 0.1 m2. The
bottom rail of a framed and glazeddoor shall
be not less than 30 cm deep. Any projections
on or recesses (including vision panels) ,in
sliding car doors shall be kept to a minimum
in order to avoid finger trapping between
sliding parts of the door and any fixed part of
the structure.
4.10.4 Where partitions are installed in lift
cars for the purpose of restricting the
platform net area for passenger use, they
shall be permanently bolted, reveted or
welded in place. Doors shall not be used for
this ‘purpose. Partitions shall be so installed
as to provide for.approximately symmetrical
loading.
4.10.5 Efficient automatic devices shall be
provided and maintained in each lift whereby
all power shall be cut-off from the motor
before the car or counterweight lands on the
buffers.
4.10.6 The levelling difference between the
car and the landing shall be within_+4 cm
where no levelling device is provided.
4.10.7 A suitable battery operated alarm
system-shall be installed inside the lift car SO
as to raise an alarm at a convenient place for
getting assistance in case passengers are
trapped inside the lift car.
4.10.8 Entrance of the lift car shall be at least
2.0 m in height. A roof, solid or perforated,
capable of supporting two persons, that is,
2 x 68 kg shall be provided. Perforations shall
be sufficiently close in mesh not exceeding
40 mm to provide reasonable protection
against falling articles to any person travelling
in the car. The floor shall be of a smooth and
non-slip surface.
4.10.9 Each lift car shall be fitted with a light
and light shall be left burning during the
whole time the lift is available for use.
4.10.10 Where the lift car has.solid enclosure
and doors, provision shall be made for a fan
and for adequate ventilation. To permit
switching off the power supply to the lift
without switching off the fan and light, a
separate switch shall be provided for fan and
light. Ventilation openings shall be provided
N A T I O N A L ~UILDINC CODE OF INDIA
in the enclosure walls above 1.8 m level and
below 0.3 m level. Total area of openings
shall not be less than 0.035 m for each
square metre of area of the car floor divided
suitably between the top and the bottom
levels.
4.10.11 Car doors when closed, shall guard
the full opening except in the case of vertical
opening car doors of goods lifts, which may
be limited to 2 m’and each door shalLbe
equipped with an electric contact which shall
prevent the movement of the car and’the
circuit shall not be completed until the
leading edge of the door is within 50 mm of
the nearest face of the door Jamb or when the
leading edges of the centre opening doors are
within 50 mm of contact of each other.
4.10.12 The car and the door, if power
operated, shall be provided with sensitive
reopening arrangements on the moving edges
which are likely to come in contact with
person(s) entering or coming out of the car.
The operating mechanism for the car door
shall operate with a force not exceeding
12.5 kg. Sliding car doors shall be guided at
top and bottom. Means shall be provided to
prevent. all sliding car doors from jumping
the tracks and suitable stops shall be
provided to prevent the hanger carriage from
leaving the end of the track.
4.11 M a c h i n e R o o m s a n d O v e r h e a d
Slruclures
4.11.1 The lift machine, controller and all
oiher apparatus and equipment of a lift
installation, excepting such apparatus and
equipment as function in the lift well or other
positions, shall be placed in the machine
room which shall be adequately lighted and
rendesed fire-proof and weather-proof.
4.11.2 The motor generators controlling the
speed of multi-voltage or variable voltage
machines, secondary sheaves, pulleys,
governors, floor selecting equipment may be
placed in a place other than the machine.
room, but such position shall be adequately
lighted, ventilated and rendered fire-proof
and weather-proof.
4.11.3 The machine room shall have
sufficient floor area as will permit free access
to all parts of the machines and equipment
located therein for purposes of inspection,
maintenance 01 repair.
4.11.4 The room shall be kept closed, except
to those who are concerned with the
operation and maintenance of the
equipment. When the electrical voltage
exceeds 220/23OV dc, a danger notice plate
?APT VIII SlIU.DINC SLltVICES-SECTION 5 INSTALLATION
shall be displayed permanently on the outside
of the door and on or near the machinery.
Where standby generator is provided, it is
necessary to connect! fireman lift to the
standby generator. Depending upon the
capacity of the standby generator one or
more other lifts may also be connected to the
SUPPlY.
All lifts shall be provided with a standard
craoking system to be used in case of power
failure to bring the car to the nearest floor. A
duplicate key shquld be made available near
the machine room in a glass enclosure.
4.11.5 The machine room shall be equipped
with an insulated portable hand lamp
provided with flexible cord for examining the
machinery.
4.11.6 If any machine room floor or
platform does not extend to the enclosing
walls, the open sides shall be provided with
hand rails or otherwise suitably guarded.
4.11.7 The machine room shall be provided
with a direct independent and convenient
access from the top most landing with the
access doors opening outwards (see 6.7).
4.11.8 The machine room shall not be used
as a store room or for any purpose ‘other than
housing the lift machinery and its associated
apparatus and equipment.
4.11.9 All machines. pulleys, overspeed
governors and similar units shall be so
supported and held as to prevent any of these
machines or parts thereof becoming loose or
displaced affecting their safe working.
4.11.10 M a c h i n e r o o m f l o o r m a y b e
provided with a trap door, if necessay. The
manhole should not be less than 50 x 50 cm.
4.11.11 The height of the machine room shall
be sufficient to allow any portion of equip-
ment to be accessible and removable for repair
and replacement and shall be not less than
2 m clear ftom the floor or the platform
of machine whichever is higher.
4.11.12 H OUSING OF O V E RHEAD P U L L E Y S
-The penthouse or other space in
which the overhead pulleys, overspeed
governors and similar machinery are housed
shall have a clearheight of at least 1.2 tn and
shall allow safe and covenient access and
where practicable, have a substantial
platform or floor and be provided with
permanent a.nd adequate artificial
illumination.
4.12 Floor Number Board- The number-
ing of floors should conform to the system
OF LIFTS AND ESCALATORS VllI-5.13
given in Fig. 1 (IA, IB, lC, ID, IE, IF, IC,
lH, IJ and IK).
4.12.1 For detailed information regarding
nomenclature of floors and storeys, reference
may be made to good practice [VIII-5(2)].
4.13 Fire Sujiy~* -- Lifts shall also conform
to the requirements specified in Part IV Fire
protection.
5. ELECTRICAL WIRING AND
APPARATUS
5.1 All electric supply lines and apparatus in
connection with the lift installation shall be so

IF 1G 1H

11 1K

I+, I Nomenclature of Floors and .StoreJ*s

NATRINAI. l UILWNC CODE OF INDIA

constructed and shall be so installed,
protected, worked and maintained that there
may be no danger to persons therefrom.
Installation of electric wiring shall conform to
Part VIII ’ Building services, Section 2
Electrical installation.
5.2 No bare conductor shall be used in any
lift car as may cause danger to persons.
5.3 Suitable caution notice shall be affixed
near every motor or other apparatus in which
energy used is at a voltage exceeding 220
volts.
5.4. Circuits which supply current to the
motor shall not be included in any twin or
multicore trailing cable used in connection
with the control and safety devices.
5.4.1 A trailing cable which incorporates
conductors for the control circuits shall be
separate and distinct from .that which
incorporates lighting and signalling circuits
in case of buildings less than 30 metres in
height. In case of building more than 30
metres in height or where high speed (1.52
m/s or more) lifts are employed. use of single
travelling cable for lightmg and control
circuits is permitted, provided that all
conductors are insulated for the maximum
voltage in the cable.
5.4.2 The cables used in lift installation shall
conform to accepted standards [VIII-5(3)].
5.5 Eurrhing
5.5.1 The terminal for the earthing of the
frame of the motor, the winding machine, the
frame of the control panel, the cases and
covers of the tapper switch and similar
electric appliances which normally carry the
mains current shall be at least equivalent to a
IO mm diameter bolt, stud or screw. The
cross-sectional area of copper earthing
conductor shall be not smaller than half that
of the largest current carrying conductor
subject to an upper%limit of 65 mm’.
5.5.2 The terminal for the earthing of the
metallic cases and covers of door interlocks,
door contacts, call and control buttons, stop
buttons, car switches, limit switches, junction
boxes and similar electrical fittings which
normally carry only the control current shall
be at least equivalent to a 5 mm brass screw,
such terminal being one specially provided
for this purpose, and the earth conductor
shall be at least equivalent to a 7/0.750 mm
conductor.
S.b.3 The earthing conductor shall be secured
to earthing terminal in accordance with good
practice [VIII-S(4)]. and also in conformity
P A R T VIII BI’II.DIN(; SERVIt’LS-SWTION S INSTAI.I..\TION
with the latest provisions of /n&n Electrici?13
Rules.
5.5.4 The exposed metal parts of e!ectrical
apparatus installed on a lift car shall be’
sufficiently bonded and earthed.
5.5.5 Where screwed. conduit screws into
electrical fittings carrying control current
making the case of cover electrically
continuous with the conduit, the earthing of
the conduit may be considered to earth the
fitting. Where flexible conduit is used for
leading into a fitting, the fitting and such
length of llexiblc conduit shall be effectively
earthed.
5.56 One side of the secondary winding of
bell transformers and their -cases shall be
cart hed.
6 DESIGN CONSIDEKAI-IONS
6.1.1 Two basic constderations. namely, the
quantity of service required and the quality
of service desired. determine the type of lifts
tn be provided in a particular building.
Quantity of service gives the passenger
handling capacity of the lifts during the peak
periods and t-he quality of service is measured
in terms of waiting time of passengers at
various floors. Both these basic factors
require proper study into the character of the
building. extent and duration of peak period,
frequency of service required. type and
method of control, type of landing doors, etc.
6.1.2 The number of lifts, their capacity and
speed required for a building is governed by
such considerations as number of the floors
to be served, number of passengers to be
handled (see 6.1.3). floor area and floor
heights. In large buildings, the provisions of a
battery of lifts is advisable wherever feasible.
Consideration should also be given to leaving
space for additional lift installation to cater
for future traffic development.
6.1.3 OC C U P A N T L.OAD -- The number of
persons within any floor area or the occupant
load shall be based on the actual number of
occupants, but in no case less than those
specified in Table 5.
NOIE The occupant load of mezzxtine floor should
he taken into account fur working out the occupancy for
a particular floor to which -the mezzanine floor
discharges its loads.
6.1.4 Q UANTITY OF S ERVICE T T h e
quantity of service is a measure _ of the
passenger handling capacity of a vertical
transportation system... it, is measured in
O* I.IF’I’S AND ESCAI.ATDWS “ll1.s~~
 The following shall be the guiding factor for
TABLE 5 OCCUPANT LOAD
(Ck7u.w 6.13) determining this aspect:

Qualily of Service or Rating

Acceptable lnrerval
20-25 seconds Excellent
30-35 ” Good
(1) (2) (3)
35-40 ” Fair
i) Residential 12.5 40-45 ” Poor
ii) Educational 4 Over 45 ” Unsatisfactory
iii) Institutional 1st
NOW - l-or rehidcntial buildings. longer intervals up to
iv) Assembly: WI xxonds should be permissible.
a) with fried or loose se& and 0.6$
dana floor 6.1.6 CA R S PEED - T h e r e c o m m e n d e d c a r
h) without seating facilities I.51 speed for the different types of lifts in
including dining rooms different occupancies are given in Table 6.
v) Merchantile:
a) street floor and sales 6.1.7 DE T E R M I N A T I O N O F H A N D L I N G
baement CAl’AClTY --- T h e
handling capacity is
b) upper sale floors calculated by the following formula:
vi) Business and industrial
vii) Storage
VIII) Hazardous
NOII For the details of clacsdication of occupancies, where
rclcrencc may he made to Part IV Fire protection. Hz Handling capacity as the per-
l 1 he gross area shall mean plinth area or covered area. centage of- the peak. population
handled during 5 minute period,
fOccupant load in dormitory portions of homes I& the
aged. orphanages, insane asylums, etc. where sleeping Q = average numbei of passengers
accommodation is provided. shall becalculated at not less carried in a car,
than 7.5m* gross arca/ person.
T = waiting interval in seconds, and
fThe gross’area shall’include:in addition to the main
assembly room or space, any occupied connecting room P = total population to be handled
or space in the same strorey or in the storeys above and during peak morning period (it is
below. where entrance is common to such rooms and related to the area for which
spaces and they are available for use by the occupants OC particular bank of lift serves)
the assembly place. No deductions shall be made in the
grossareaforcorridors,closetsor other subdivisions, the
areashall includeallspace servingthe particular assembly 6.1.7.1 The value of Q depends on the
occupancy. dimensions of the car. It may be noted that
the car is not loaded always to its maximum
terms of the total number of passengers capacity during each trip and, therefore, for
handled during each five minute peak period calculating H the value of Q is taken as 80
of the day. A five-minute base period is used percent of the maximum capacity of the car.
as this is the most practical time over which
the traffic may be averaged. The passenger 6.1.7..? The waiting interval, T is calcuated
h a n d l i n g c a p a c i t y ” (H) for different by the following formula:
occupancies, expressed in percent of the
estimated population that has to be handled
in the building in the five-minute peak
period, should be approximately as follows:
where
Class i3/ Occupancy H( percent)
Diversified (mixed) office IO-15 R, = round trip time, that is, the average
occupancy time required by each lift in taking
one full load of passengers from
Single purpose office 15-25 ground floor discharging them in
occupancy various upper floors and coming
5 back to ground floor for taking the
Residential fresh passengers for the next trip;
6.1.5 Q UALITY OF S E R V I C E - fhe quality of and
service is generally measured by the
passenger waiting time at the various floors. N = number of lifts

VWJ-16 NATIONAL BIIILDINC CODE OF INDIA

 ‘.

N O T E-R, is the sum of the time mquired in the
following processes:
a) Entry of passengers on the ground floor,
W Exit of the passengers on each floor of discharge,
d Door closing time before each time operation,
d) Door opening time bn each discharging operation,
Acceleration periods.
e)
0 Stopping and levellipg periods,
I4 Periods of full rated speeds between stops going up,
and
h) Periods, of full- rated speeds between stops going
down.
6.1.7.3 It is observed that the handling
capacity is inversely proportional to waiting
interval which in turn is proportional to R,.
Reducing the Rc of a lift from 120 to 100
seconds increases its handling,capacity by 20
percent.
6.1.7.4 The round trip time can bc decreased
not only by increasing the speed of the lift but
also by ‘improving the design of the
equipment related to opening and closing of
the landing and car,; doors, acceleration,
deceleration, levellmg and passenger
movement.
These factors are given below:
a) The most important factor, in shortening
the time consumed between the entry and
exit of the passengers to the lift car is the
correct design of the doors and the proper
car width. Ii has been proved that the
ideal door width is that of 100 cm and
that of the ideal car width is
approximately 200 ,cm. Under these
conditions, the car can comfortably hold
four people, shotrider-to-shoulder in a
straight line, permitting the two central
located persons to make an exit without
disturbing the fest -of-the passengers.
b) The utilization of centn opening doors
has been a definite factor in improving
passengers transfer time, since when
using this type of door the passengers, as
a general. rule, begin to move before the
doors have been completely opened. .On
the other hand, with a stde opening door
the passengers tend to wait until the door
has completely. opened before moving.
The utilization of centre -opening door
also favours the doors opening and
closing time periods. Given the same door
speed, the centre opening door is .much
faster than the side opening type. It is
beyond doubt that the centre opening
door represents an increase in
transportational capacity in the operation
of a lift.
6.2 positioning of Lifis -. ^A t h o r o. u. g. h
investigation should be madetar assessmg tne
most suitable position for lifts(s) while
planning the building. It should take mto
account future expansions, if any. Though
each builidng has to be .considered
individually for purposes of location of lifts,
factors influencing the locations of passenger
and goods lifts are given in 6.2.2. to 6.2.4.

TAHLE 6 CAR SPEED FOR LIFTS IN DIFFERENT OCCUPANCIES

(Cluuse 6.1.6)

9. TVPE OF LIE-I 0C.t Ill’AAN(‘Y No. OF FI.OOHS CAB? SPEED

NO. SkHVEl>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

m,‘s
i) Passenger lifts Low and medium class flats (residential) 0.5
Office building, hotels ,4-5 0.50.75
Large flats (high) 6-12 0.75-1.5
Hospital 13-20 above I.5
Shops and departmental stores* 2-2.5
ii) Goods lift5 Normalt 0.2s-d.s
Serving many flbrs I
iii) Hospital bed Short travel lifts in small hospitals 0.25
lifts Normal .0.5
Long travel lifts in gene’ral hospitals I
l The high speed isdesirableespecially where restaurant orotherfacilitiesareprovided on the top hooras thetrafficwould
at times demand a lifi or lifts to be used entirely between the ground and the top lloon.

tS(ower speeds may be used for heavier loads.

?ARt VIII BlJII.DIN(; SERVICES-SECTION S INSTALLATION OF LIFTS AND ESCALATORS. Vllld-17 ’

The location of lifts may also conform to the
travel distance requirements specified in
Part IV Fire protection.
6.2.1 A RRANGEMENT OF LIFTS -The lifts
should be easily accessible from all entrances
to the building. For maximum efficiency, 2A Straight Line Arrangement for Three Lifts
they should be grouped near the centre of the
building. It is preferably not to have all the
lifts out in straight line and, if possible, not
more than three lifts should be arranged in
this manner. It has to be kept in mind that
the corridor should be wide enough to allow
sufficient space for waiting passengers as well
as for through passengers.
6.2.1.1 In some cases when there are more
than three lifts, the alcove arrangement is
recommended. With this arrangement, the
lift alcove lead off the main corridor so that
there is no interference by traffic to other
groups or to other parts of the ground floor.
This arrangement permits the narrowest
possible corridors and saves space on the
upper floors. Walking distance to the
individual lift is reduced and passenger
standing in the centrc of the group can
readily see all’ the lift doors and landing
indicators. The ideal arrangement of the lifts
depends upon the particular layout of the
respective building and should be determined
in every individual case. The recommended
arrangements are given in Fig. 2.
6.2.2 P ASSENGER LIFT-S
6.2.2.1 LOW AND PhEDlUM CLASS ~I.ATS -- ZC Arrangement for Six Lifts
Where a lift is arranged to serve two, three or
four flats per floor, the lift may be placed
adjoining a staircase. with the liftcntranccs
serving direct on to the landings. Where the
lift is to serve a considerable number of flats
having access to balconies or corridors, it
may be conveniently piaccd in a well
ventilated tower adjoining the building.
6.2.2’.2
OI-TICE BUILL)lNGS. H0.IEi.S A N D
HIGH CLASS FLATS - It is desirable to have
at least a battery of two lifts at two or more
convenient points of a building. If this is not
possible, it is advisable to have at least two
lifts side by side at the main entrance and one
lift each at different sections of the building
for inter-communication. When two lifts are
installed side by side, the machine room shall
be suitably planned with sufficient space for
housing the machine equipment. The
positioning of lifts side by side gives the
following advantages:
a) all machines and switchgear may be
housed in one machine room.
b) the lifts can be inter-connected more
conveniently from an installation point of
view, and

“III-P N A T I O N A L BUILDING. CODk OF INDIA


cl greater convenience in service owing to
the landing openings on each floor being
adjacent.
6L2.2.3 SHOPS AND DEPARTMI?NTAL
STORES -Lifts in shops and stores should
be situated so as to secure convenient and
easy access at each floor.
6.2.2.4 HOSPITALS - It is convenient to
place the passenger lifts near the staircases.
6.2.3. GOODS Lrms-The location of lifts
in factories, warehouses, and similar
buildings should. be planned to suit the
progressive movement of goods throughout
the buildings, having regard to the nature of
processes carried out in the building, the
position of the loading platforms, railway
sidings, etc. The placing of a liftin. a fume or
dust laden atmosphere or where it. may be
exposed to extreme temperatures, should be
avoided wherever possible. Where it is
impossible to avoid installing a lift in an
adverse atmosphere, the electrical equipment
should be of suitable design and construction
to meet the conditions involved.
6.2.4 HOSPITAL BED LIP~S - Hospital bed
lifts should be situated conveniently near the
ward and operating theatre entrances. There
shall be sufficient space near the landing door
for easy movement of stretcher.
6.3 Shape and Size of Lift Car - The shape
and size of the passenger lift car bears a
.distinct relations to its efficiency as a medium
of traffic handling. The width of the lift well
entrance is, in reality, the basic element in the
determination of the best proportions
(see 6.1.7). The width of the car is
determined by the width of the entrance and
the depth of the car is regulated by the
loading (see 4.3). Centre opening doors are
the most practicable and the most efficient
entrance units for passenger lifts.
6.4 The detailed design considerations for
different types and selection of the lifts shall
be done in accordance with good practice
[VIII-5(5)].
6.5 Postioning of Mahcine Room
6.5.1 The machine room should as far as
possible, be placed immediately above the lift
well as this has several advantages, such. as
reduced load on the building, lower capital
cost of the lift, a smaller lift well for a given
size lift car and reduced powerconsumption
compared with a machine room in the
basement, renewal of suspension ropes is less
frequent and the cost of such renewals is less
because shorter ropes are required and time
taken for ‘fitting them is less.
6.5.2 If a machine room on the lift well is
PART VIII B U I L D I N G SERVICES-SkTION 5 INSTALLATION
‘.
..
impracticable for architectural or other
reasons, the machine room may be placed
below the lift well or in the basement, but
guidance of a lift engineer should be followed
on each instance, to minimize the
disadvantage of its being so placed.
6.5.3 High-speed. lifts with gearless machine
should, in all cases, .have machine room
above the lift well.
6.5.4 Where the machine room occupies a
prominent position on roof of a building,
provision should be made for lightning
protection in accordance with good practice
[VIII-5(6)].
6.5.5 Wherever the machine room is placed
it should be properly ventilated.
6.5.6 If located in the basement, it should be
separated from the lift well by a separation
wall.
6.6 Structural Considerations
6.6.1 Lift well enclosures, lift pits, machine
rooms and machine supports besides
conforming to the essential requirements in
4, should form part of the building
construction and comply with the lift
manufacturer’s drawings.
6.6.2 MACHINE R OOM -Fioors shall be
designed to carry a load of not less than
500 kg/ mz over the whole area and also any
load which may be imposed there on by the
equipment used in the machine room or by
any reaction from any such equipment both
during periods of normal operation and repair
(see Part VI Structural design, Section I
Loads).
6.6.3 The total load on overhead beams shall
be assumed as equal to all equipment resting
on the beams plus twice the minimum load
suspended from the beams.
6.6.4 The deflection of the overhead beams
under the minimum static load calculated in
accordance with .,,6.6.3 shall not exceed
l/ 1500 of the span.
6.6.5 The beams supporting the slab which
carries lift machinery, carry the entire weight ‘
and as such shall be designed to take these
loads. In addition, the beam at all other floor
levels which correspond to the beams at
machine room floor shall also be. made
stronger to take the reaction from the guides
when the lift is made to stop consequent on
the breaking of the wire ropes or the
application of the safety device.
6.6.5.1 Suitabie lifting beams immediately
below the machine room ceiling may be
OF UFlY4 A N D E S C A L A T O R S VW.19 .
provided for carrying tackle to facilitate
lifting of any heavy part of a heavy lift (say
about I/ 500 kg capacity); and capacities
below that, suitable suspension hooks may
be provided.
6.6.6 In the case of large lift installations, the
roof of the machine room also should be
designed to take up the pulley which could be
used for lifting up parts of the lift machine’ry
for inspection and repair.
6.6.7 The equivalent dead loads imposed
upon the building by th’e lift installations
should be shown on the lift manufacturer’s
drawing so that the architect/engineer may
make provisions accordingly.
6.7 Access to Machine Room and L.# Pits
6.7:I Access to a machine room above a lift
well may be either from the roof or by an
internal staircase.
6.7.2 Access between a secondary floor and a
machine room my be by ladder. Where a
machine room entrafice is less than ,I.5 m
above or below the adjacent floor or roof
surfaces, a substantial perpanently attached
ladder may bc used. Ladders shall be fixed at
least I5 cm clear of any wall, beam o r
obstruction and shall extend at least to the
landing level. Above the landing level and for
a height of at least 1.15 m. either the ladder
stringers shall be extended or suitable hand
grips shall be provided.
6.7.3 Where the machine room entrance in
I.5 m or more above or below the adjacent
floor or roof surface, access shall be provided
by means of stairs in accordance with the
requirements given in 6.7.3.1 to 6.7.3.6.
6.7.3.f The angle of inclination of the stair
shall not exceed 50” from the horizontal and
the clear width of the stair shall be not less
than 60 cm.
6.7.3.2 The tread shall have a non-slip
surface which shall. be not less than 15 cm
wide for opin stair construction and not less
than 20 cm wide for closed stair
construction.
6.7.3.3 The riser df the stair shall not exceed
25 cm.
6.7.3.4 A hand rail shall be provided on the
outer stringer ‘of all stairways fixed at a
convenient height, but not less/than 50 cm
high measured vertically from the nosings,
and not less than one metre high on landings
and platforms. Such hand rail shall have at
least 5 cm clearance between nearest
permanent object at the corrlsponding side
of the stair.
Vlll-20
6.7.3.5 Headroom ckarance of not less than
2m measured from the nosings of the
stairway, shall be pr6vided on every stairway.
6.7.3.6 Heights of stairs over 5 m in length
shall be provided with intermediate landings.
NOTE - Where compliance with’any of the requirements
specified in6.7.1 to6.7.J is impracticable. applications
for variation shall be mad6 to the Authority. who may.
vary such mquirements. -%ri
6.7.4 Access to a machine room in a
basement may be provided from a corridor.
6.7.5 Access to a machine room via the lift
well shall be prohibited:
6.7.6 The lift pit should be capableof being
examined by a separate access. In the case of
a battery of two lifts, it is possible to examine
the lift pit.through the adjoining one.
6.8 Fire Protection-To prevent fire from
spreading by means of the liftwell, lift well
encloSures shall conform to the requirements
given in Part IV Fire protection. T h e
machine room should be constructed of a
suitable grade of fire-resisting m&rial and
precautions should be taken to minimize
spread of fire from the machine room into
the lift well.
6.9. Quiet. Operation - Every precaution
should be taken with passenger lifts to ensure
quiet operation of the lift doors and
machinery. The insulating of the lift machine
and any motor generator from the floor by
rubber cushions, or by a precast concrete slab
with rubber cushions, prevents transmission
of most of the noise (see PartVi11 Building
services. Section 4 Acoustics sound insu-
lation and noise control)
6.10 Supply Cables and Switches - Each lift
should be provided wi!k a main switch or
circuit breaker of a capacity determined by
the lift manufacturer and the incoming
supply cable should terminate in this switch.
For a single lift, this switch should be fixed
adjaceni to the machine roqm entrance. In a
machine room common to more than one
lift, each main switch should be conveniently
situated with respect to the lift it controls.
Switches and fuses (which may form part of a
distribution switch-board) should b e
provided for $olating the supply cables to the
machine room.
6.10.1 Where a supply cable serves more
than one. lift, a diversity factor may be used
for determination of conductor size. The
actual diversity factor adopted should be
decided by the lift manufacturer.
NATIONM. DUILDlNC CObE O F INDIA
6.11 Control System
6.11.1 The control systems that may be
adopted are:
a) attend and dual control,
b) automatic push button control,
cl collective control,
4 single push botton collective control,
e) down collective control,
r) directive collective control for one car,
Ls) directive collective control for two to three
cars, and
h) grou,p supervisory control.
6.11.2 FE A T U R E S O F C O N T R O L S Y S T E M S
6.11.2.2 C A R P R E F E R E N C E- S o m e times it
is necessary to give a special personal service
or a house service. When this type of service
is required, it should be specified as car
preference. The transfer from normal
passenger control to a car preference is by a
key operated switch in the car. The operation
is ‘then from the car only and the doors
remain open until a car call is registered for a
floor destination. All landing calls are
bypassed and car position indicators on the
landings for this lift are not illuminated. The
removal of the key when the Qecial
operation is completed re,storcs the control to
normal service.
6. I I .2.2 LANDING CALLS AUTOMATIC
BYPASS -For collective operation
automatic bypassing of landing calls can be
provided. This device will bypass landing
calls when a car is fully loaded but the calls
are not cancelled.
6.11.2.3 MOTOR GENERATOR SHUT
DOWN - Lifts controlled by variable voltage
systems automatically shut down when
subject to an overriding control which puts
them out of service under certain conditions;
for example, no demand for lift service. They
are automatically put back into service as
required.
6.11.2.4 .BASEMENT SERVICE - For lifts with
collective control when s rJl.ce is required
below the first floor, toa sement(s), the lift
maker shall be aware oft3e service required.
6.11.2.5 HOSPITAL SERVICE - This requires
c&r preference as specified in 6.11.2.1.
Otherwise such lifts can have. the same
control system as. for normal passenger lifts,
the choice depending on the number of floors
served, service required and the number of
lifts.
PART VIII B U I L D I N G SEItVlC&S-SECTION 5 INSTALLAllON OF UFTS A N D
6X2.6 MANUALLY OPERAiED DOOhS
(WITHOUT CLOSURES) - A door open akm
should be provided to draw attention to a cat
or landing door which has barn kfk opm.
AUTOMATICALLY POWER CLCX3Eti
6.11.2.7
DOORS - For pasacnger operation when the
car arrives at a landing,. th& doors, will
automatically open and then close after lapse .
of a time interval. T%is time interval can be
overruled by the use of a car push button to
give instant door closing. An open door push
button. is provided in the car to reverse
closing motion of thedoors or hold them
open.
6.12.2.8 CONTROLLED POWER CLOSED
DOORS - When there are conditions that
particularly affect the safety of ‘passengers,
the closing of the doors should only be made
by the continuous pressure of push buttons in
the car or on landings.
6.If .2.9 SA’FE OPERATION OF DOORS - The
safety of passengers shall be ensured.
6. II .2. IO As all lift cars are illuminated when
in service, it, is recommended that this
illumination be used to signal the arrival of a
car at a landing in #reference to special
signals such as Ll FT HERE signs since signal
lamp can fail when the lift is still operating
satisfactorily.
6.11.2.11’ SERVICE.SWITCHES - W h e n
switches are provide to take car out o!
service, that is because the remaining cars in
the group can cater for the required
passenger traffic, it is essential that such
switches should not stop the fireman’s
control from being operative in the event of
the lift being designated as a firemans’s lift.
6.11.2.12 FIRE SWI T CH -When required
fire switch shall be provided, the function of
which is to enable the tire authority to take
over complete control of one or more lifts in
an installation.
6.11.2.13 PUSH ‘BUTTONS AND SIGNALS -
Every push buttons and signal shall be clearly
marked so that its function is clearly
understood by all passengers.
7 . TESTlNG
7.1 Tesr on Site - The lift shall pass the
following tests when carried out at site and
before it is put into normal service. The
necessary test weights and instruments’shall
.be provided by the lift manufacturer, and the.
electric power at the declared voltage (and
frequency) required for adjusting and testing
shall be supplied by the purchaser:
a) Test to determine that the insulation
resistance between power and control
91 ’
ESCALATORS
 lines and earth not iess ihan 0.5 MO
when measured with a dc voltage of 500
Volts. The test should be caairied out with
the conductors so connected together as
to ensure that all parts of every circuit are
simultaneously tested.
NOTE -The dampness of the building may prevent a
reading of 0.5 MUI f!qm being obtained, in which event
the lift may be provlstonally accepted by the urchaser
with an insulation resistance of 0.25 MCI an Bre-tested
before being finally accepted.
b) Test to determine that the earthing of all
conduct switich casings and similar metal
work is continuous and of low resistance.
Test should be made from all terminal
points by means of a subtantial current to
ensure that the resistance of earth path is
sufficiently low to enable fuses or circuits
to operate under faulty conditions.
4 Test to determine that the motor, brake
control equipment and door locking
devices function correctly.
4 Test to determine that the lift car raises
and lowers rated load.
4 Test to determine that the iift car a: least
achieves the contract speed.
r) Test to determine that the safety gear
stops the lift car with rated .load.
Overspeed tests shall be made with ropes
attached and all elec:ric a p p a r a t u s
operative except the overspced switch on
the governor. The stopping distance of
the lift car is the actual slide as observed
from the marking on guides.
N OTE -The safetv aear of the lift havine ac mo!or
driven machine may Ibc tested by manually TrIpping the
governor where the speed attained by a loaded lift car
descending, with brake released, is sufficient to operate
the governor.
8. RUNNING AND MAINTENANCE
8.1 The lift installation should receive
regular cleaning, lubrication, adjustment and
adequate servicing by authorized competent
persons at such intervals as the type of
equipment and frequency of service demand.
In o r d e r t h a t t h e l i f t i n s t a l l a t i o n i s
maintained at all times in a safe condition, a
proper maintenance schedule shall be drawn
up in consultation ylith the lift manufacturer
and rigidly followed. The provision of a log
book to record all items relating to general
servicing and inspection is recommended for
all lifts. It is essential tha! the electrical circuit
diagram of the lift with the sequence of
operation of different components and parts
should be kept readily available for the
persons responsible for the maintenance and
replacement where necessary.
8.2 Particuhr attention may be directea for
thorough periodical examination of wire
“Ill22
ropes when in service. Attention should also
be directed to the thorough examination of
the groove of drums, sheaves and pulleys
when installing a new rope. A groove
deepened by rope wear is liable to lead to
hrly failure of a new rope unless the groove
is returned.
8.3 Any accident arising out of operation of
maintenance of the lifts should be duly
reported to the Authority ib accordance with
the rules laid down. A notice may be put in,
the machine room to this effect.
Y. ESCALATORS
9.1 Escalators are deemed essential where
the movement of people, in large numbers at
a controlled rate in the minimum of space, is
involved, for example, railway stations,
airports, etc. In exhibitions, big departmental
stores and the like, escalators encourage
people to circulate freely and conveniently.
9.1.1 As the escalators operate at a constant
speed, serve orily two levels and have a
known maximum capacity, the traffic study
is rather easy. Provided the population to be
handled in a given time is known, it is easy to
predict the rate at which the popuiation can
be handled.
9.1.2 F o r n o r m a l p e a k p e r i o d s , t h e
recommended handling capacities for design
purposes should be taken as 3 200 to 6 400
persons per hour depending upon the width
of the esca;a:or.
9.2 Essentiai Requirenwnts
Y.2.1 Angie of inclination shail not be in
excess of 30” from the horizontai excepting
that with an escalator having a vertical rise
not exceeding 6 m an ang!e up to 35’ may be
permitted.
9.2.2 The width between balustrades shall be
measured on the.inciine up to a point 68.5 cm
vertically above the nose line of the steps, and
shall not be less than the width of the step. It
shall not exceed the width of the step by more
than 33 cm with a maximum of 16.5 cm on
either side of the escalator.
9.2.3 Escalators shall be provided on each
kide with solid balustrades. On the step side
the balustrades shall be smooth and
substantially flush except for protective
moulding parallel to the run of the steps and.
p r o p e r l y bevelled v e r t i c a l m o u l d i n g s
projecting not more than 6.5 mm, that cover
joints of panels.
9.2.3.1 There shall be no abrupt changes in
the width between the balustrades on the two
N A T I O N A L BUlLDlNC CODE OF INDIA
sides of. the escalator. Where a change in
width is unavoidable, s&h change shall not
exceed 8 percent of the greatest ividth. In
changing the direction of the balustrades
resulting from a reduction in width the
maximum gllowable angle of change in
balustrades shall not exceedI5 degrees from
the line of the excalator travel.
9.2.3.2 The clearance on either side of the
steps between the steps and the adjacent skirt
guard shall be not more than 5 mm and the
sum of the clearances on both sides shall be
not more than 6 mm.
9,2.3.3 A solid guard shall be provided.in the
intersecting angle of the outside balustrade
(deck board) and the ceiling or soffit except
where the intersection of the outside
balustrade (deck board) and the ceiling ‘or
soffit is more than 60 cm from the centre line
of the handrail. The vertical face of the guard
shall project at least 36 cm horizontally from
the apei of the angle.
9.2.4 HANDRAILS
9.2.4.1 Each balustrade shall be provided
with a handrail moving in the same direction
and at substantially the same s’peed as the
steps.
Y.2.4.2 Each moving handrail shall extend ‘at
normal handrail height not. less than 30 cm
beyond the line of points of combplate teeth
at the upper and lower landings.
9.2.4.3 Hand or finger guards shall be
provided at the point where the handrails
enters the balustrade.
9.2.4.4 The horizontal distance between the
centre lines of two handrails, measured on
the incline, shall not exceed the width
between the balustrades by more than 15 cm,
with a maximum of 7.5 cm on either side of
the escalator.
9.2.5 STEP TREADS
9.2.5.1 The depth of any step tread in the
direction of travel shall not be less than 40 cm
and the rise between treads shall be not more
than 22 cm. The widtti of a step tread shall be
not less than 40 cm nor more than 102 cm.
9.2.5.2 The maximum clearance between
step treads on the horizontal run shall be
4 mm.
9.2.5.3 The tread surface of each step shall be
slotted in a direction parallel to ttie travel of
the steps. Each slot shall be not more than
6.5 mm wide and less than 9.5 mm deep; and
the distance from centre to centre of
MET Viii BUILDING SUVICES-SCCllON 5 INSTALLATION ,OF UFTS AND ESCAL&TORS
adjoihing slots shall be not more than
9.5 mm.
9.2.6 LANDING - Landing shall be made
out. 0f antislip material.
9.2.7 C OMBPLATES -There shall be a
combplate at the entrance and at the exist of
everv escalator. The combplate teeth shall be
meshed with and set into the slots in the tread
surface so that the points of the t&th are
always below the uppir surface of the treads.
Combplates shall be adjustable verticalIy.
9.2.8 T RUSSES OR G IRDERS -The rruuss ot
girder shall be designed to safety sustain the
step? and running gear in operation. Ih the
event of failure of thl track system it shall
retain the running gear in its guides.
9.2.9 STEP WHEEL . TRACKS -This shall be
designed to prevent displacement of steps
and running gear if a step chain breaks.
9.2.10 R ATED L OAD -The rated load in
kilogram on an escalator shall be computed
by the following formula:
Rated load = 2.1 W A
where
W = width in cm between the balustrades,
and
A = horizontal distance between the upper
and lower combplate teeth in metres.
The rated, speed shall not be more than
38 metres per minute.
9.2.11 D ESIGN F ACTOR OF S AFETY - The
factor of safety based on static load shall be
at least the following:
a) for trusses and all structural members
including tracks-five
b) for driving. machine parts:
I) where made of steel or brone-eight,
2) where made of cast iron and other
materials’- ten; and
c) for power-transmission members- ten.
Step chain composed of cast-steel links
which, if throughly annealed, shall be
permitted with a factor of safety of at least
twenty.
9.2.12 D RIVING M ACHINE , MOTEOR. AND
BRAKE
9.2.12.2 The driving machine shall be
connected to the.‘main drive shaft by toothed
gearing, a coupling, or a chain.
9.2.12.2 An ekctric motor shall not drive
more than one escalator.
WI-P (
9.2.123 Each escalator shall be rovided
with an electrically released, metg a&ally
applied brake capable Of stopping the up or
down travelline escalator with any load tip to
rated load. Thur brake shall be iocated either
on the diiving .machitie or on the main drive
shaft.
Where a chain is.used to connet’the driving
machiti io the main drive shaft, a brake shall
be provided on this shalt, It is @ot required
that this brake be of the electrically released
type if an cledrrically released brake is
provided ori the driving machine
9.2.12.4 SPEED. GOVERNOR - A speed
governor shall be provided, the operwtion of
which shall’cause the interruption of power
to thq driving machine should the speed of
the steps exceed a predetermined value which
shall be not more than 40 percent above the
rated speed.
NOTE -The ovenpeed governor is not quired where a
low clip alternating curtint yuiml cage induction
motor II used and the motor is directly connected to the
driving machine.
9.3 For operation and safety devices,
electrical work, precautions and tests refe-
rence may be made togood practice[VI11:5(3)].
 LIST OF STANDARDS
The folibwing list records’ those stan&rrds which ate acceptabb as ‘good pructlce’ and
accepted stanakis’ in‘ the furfirment of the requirements of the. Code. l%e latqt version of e
star&d shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. T&e stanciclrds4sted may be used
by the Authority as a gui& in conformance with the requircmcnts of the referred &uses in the
co&?.
In the followinz list the munber aooearinr in the first dobrnn wiihrii parentheses indicates the
number if the ref+ence in this par~/secti&.

1) lS:4666-I.980 Specification for.electric 5) IS : 1860- 1980 Code of practice for

passenger and goods lifts (/%-St re\;ision) installation, operation and
maintenance. of electric passenger and
Is: 6383-1971 Specification for electic goods lifts. (second revision)
service lifts lS:6620-1972 Code of practice for
installation, operation and
2) IS:2332-1963 Nomenclature of floors maintenance of electric service lifts
and storeys IS:2309-f969 Code of practice for the
protection of buildings and allied
3) 1S : 4289- 1967 Specification for. lift structures against lightning ‘first
cables revision)
7) lS:4591-1968 C o d e o f p r a c t i c e for
4) lS:3043-1966 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of
earthing escalators.
About the Book......

With the objective of finding out areas of

economies in construction costs, the
Planning Commission set up a Panel of
Experts in 1965 to study in depth the whole
gamut of construction activities. The outlay
on construction works and particularly on
buildings forms a very large portion of the
national investment. One of the facets of
building construction, namely, controlling ’
and regulating building through municipal
byelaws and departmental handbooks,
received the attention of the Panel and
study of these regulatory practices revealed
that some of the prevailing methods of
construction were outmoded,‘some designs
overburdened with safety factors and there
were 4her design criteria which in the light
of newer techniques and methodologies
could be rationalized. Building handbooks
of public works departments and other
similar agencres, building byelaws and
regulations of municipal bodies which
largely regulate the building activity in the
country were outdated. They did not cater
to the use of new building materials and -
the latest developments in building designs
and construction techniques. It also
became clear that these codes and byelaws
were more often than not ‘specification
oriented’ and not ‘performance oriented’,
thereby hindering the use of modern
techniques and also restricting the creative
faculties of architects and structural
engineers.
The studies of the Panel led to the
conclusion. that a unified building code at
the national level should be formulated
reflecting the latest trends in building
construction activity. At the suggestion
of the Planning Commission, this task was
taken up by the ISI and Guiding Committee
finalized the Code to serve as a guide to

(Continued on.flap 2)
Rs. 250.00 .
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
OF INDIA 1983
GRC ‘.‘P S--PART IX
GROUP 5
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES

B U R E A U O F I N D I A N S T A N D A R D S
MANAK BHAVAN, 9BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG, NEW DELHI-l 10002
SF 7 (5) : 1983

FIRST PUBLISHED DECEMBER 1970

FIRST REVISION APRIL 1984
FIRST REPRINT JANUARY 1991
SECOND REPRINT FEBRUARY 1999

0 BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

UDC 69 : 006.76
ISBN 81-7061-032-X

PRICE Rs 250.00

PRINTED IN INDIA AT CENTRAL ELECTRIC PRESS, NEW DELHI 110028 AND

PIJBLISHED BY BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARC,
NEW DELHI I10002
FOREWORD

Construction programmes are interwoven in a large measure in all sectors of

development, be it housing, transport, industry, irrigation, power, agriculture,
education or health. Construction, both public and private, accounts for about fifty
percent of the total outlay in any Plan. Half of the total money spent on construction
activities is spent on buildings for residential, industrial, commercial, administrative,
educational, medical, municipal and entertainment uses. It is estimated that about
half of the total outlay on buildings would be on housing. In a Five-Year Plan of, say,
Rs I 560 billion, about Rs 780 billion would be spent on construction generally, of
which about Rs 390 billion would be on buildings of various types and occupancies. It
is imperative that for such a large national investment, optimum returnsare assured and
wastage in, cotistruction is avoided.

Soon after the Third Plan, the Planning Commission decided that the whole gamut of
operations involved in construction, such as administrative. organisational. financial
and technical aspects, bi: studied in depth. For this study, a Panel of Experts was
appointed in 1965 by the Planning Commission and its recommendations are found,in
the ‘Report on Economies in Construction Ccsts’ pubiished in 1968.

One of the facets of building construction, namely. controlling and regulating buildings
through municipal byelaws and departmental handbooks received the attention of the
Panel and a study of these regulatory practices revealed that some of the prevailing
methods-of construction are outmoded; some designs are overburdened with safety
factors and there are other design criteria which, in the lightdf newer techniques and
methodologies, could b.e rationalized; and building byelaws and regulations of
municipal bodies which largely regulate the building activity in the country wherever
they exist, were outdated. They did not cater to the use of new building materials and
the lritest developments in building designs and construction techniques. It also became
clear that these codes and byelaws lacked uniformity and they were more often than not
‘specification oriented’ and not ‘performance oriented’.

These studies resulted in, a recommendation that a National Building Code be prepared
to unify the building regulations throughout the country for use by government
departments, municipal bodies and other construction agencies. The Indian
Standards Institution.was entrusted by the Planning Commission with the preparation
of the National Building Code. For fulfilling this task a Guiding Committee for the
preparation of the Code was set up by the Civil Engineering Division Council in
1967. This Committee, in turn, set up 18 specialist panels to prepare thevarious parts
of the Code. The Guiding Committee and its panels were constituted with architects,
town planners, materials experts, structural, construction, electrical illumination,air-
conditioning, acoustics and public health engineers. These experts were drawn from
the Central and State Governments. local bodies, professional institutions andpri,vate
agencies. The first version of the Code was published in 1970.

After the National Building Code was published in 1970, a vigorous implementation
drive was launched by the.ISl to propagate the contents and use of the Code among all
concerned in the field of planning, designing and construction activities. For this,
State-wise implementation conferences were organized with the participation of the
leading engineers, architects, town planners, administrators, ‘building material
manufacturers, building and plumbing services installation agencies, contractors, etc.

These conferences have been useful in getting across the contents of the Code to the
interests concerned. These conferences have also helped in the establishment of
Action Committees to -look into the actual implementation work carried out by the
construction departments, local bodies and other agencies in different States. The
Action Committees representing all interests in individual States met regularly to
review and cgnsider the action required leading to the actual adoption of the
Code. The main actions taken by the Action Committees were to revise and
modernize their existing regulatory media, such as specifications, handbooks, manuals,
etc, as well as building byelaws of local bodies like municipalities at city and town levels,
zilla parishads, panchayats and development authorities, so as to bring them in line with
the provisions contained in the National Building Code. 4rising out of this,

V
considerable progress has been made by most of the states in revising their building
byelaws with the assistance of 1st.
Some of the byelaws of corporations, municipalities and other localbodies in the States
of Maharashtra, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, Andhra Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh,
Rajasthan, Bihar, West Bengal, Union Territory of Delhi, Madhya Pradesh and
Haryana were redrafted to bring them in line with National Building Code and
submitted to the respective Governments. These are under various stages of
consideration.
Some of the State Construction Departments like Public Works Departments have set
up Cells to look into the revision of PWD Specifications and Codes to align them with
the National Building Code and other related Indian Standards.
In spite of the best efforts by all concerned to implement the Code, the revised building
byelaws finalized in many states have not yet been adopted by the concerned
implementing/enforcing agencies due to procedural bottlenecks. Efforts are necessary
at Government level to overcome the difficulties in revising building byelawsand PWD
specifications and adopting them in practice, reflecting the present state of knowledge
on various aspects of building construction.
Since the publication in 1970 of the National Building Code, a large number of
comments and useful suggestions for modifications and additions to different parts and
sections of the Code were received as a result of use of the Code by all concerned, and
revision work of building byelaws of some states. In addition, a number of Indian
Standards have been prepared over the past 13 years and a large number of Indian
Standards on which some parts/sections of the Code were based have undergone
substantial modifications, particular mention may be made of the revisions to Concrete
Code, Earthquake Code and Masonry Code. The revised version of the National
Building Code has been prepared taking into consideration all the aspects mentioned
above.
The National Building Code is a single document in which,like a network, the
<.information contained in various Indian Standards is woven into a pattern of continuity
and cogency with the interdependent requirements of sections carefully analyzed and
fitted in to make the whole document a cogent continuous volume. A continuous
thread of ‘preplanning’ is woven which, in itself, contributes considerably to the
economies in construction particularly in building and plumbing services.
The Code contains regulations which can be immediately adopted or enacted for use by
various departments, municipal administrations and public bodies. It lays down a set
of minimum provisions designed to protect the safety of the public with regard to
structural sufficiency, fire hazards and health aspects of buildings; so long as these basic
requirements are met, the choice of materials and methods of design and construction is
left to the ingenuity of the architect and the engineer. The Code also covers aspects of
administrative regulations, development control rules and general building
requirements; fire protection requirements; stipulations regarding materials and
structural design; rules for design of electrical installations, lighting, air-conditioning
and lifts; regulation for ventilation, acoustics and plumbing services, such as water
supply, drainage, sanitation and gas supply; measures to ensure safety of workers and
public during construction; and rules for erection of signs and outdoor display
structures.
Some other important points covered by the Code include ‘industrialized systems of
building’ and ‘architectural control’. The increase in population in the years to come
will have a serious impact on the housing problem. It has been estimated that the
urban population of India will double itself in the next two decades andconsequently at
least as much additional accommodation as is now available has to be provided during
this period. Speed of construction is thus of an utmost importance andspecial
consideration has to be given to industrialized systems of building. With increased
building activity, it is also essential that there should be some architectural control in the
development of our cities and towns if creation of ugliness andslumllike conditions in
our urban areas is to be avoided.
The changes incorporated in the present Code have been specified in theForeword to
each part/section of the Code. Some of the important changes are: addition of

VI
development control rules, requirements for greenbelts and landscaping including
norms for plantation of shrubs and trees, special requirements for low income housing;
tire safety regulations for high rise buildings; revision of structural design section based
on new and revised codes, such as concrete codes (plain and reinforced concrete andpre-
stressed concrete), Earthquake Code, Masonry Code; addition of outside design
conditions for important cities in the country, requirements relating to noise and
vibration, air filter, automatic control, energy conservat.ion for air-conditioning; and
guidance on the design of water supply system for multi-storeyed buildings.

The Code as now published is the second version representing the present state of
knowledge on various aspects of building construction. The process of preparation of
the Code has thrown up a number of problems; some of them have been answered fully
and some partially. Therefore, a continuous programme is envisaged by which
additional knowledge that is gained through technological evolution, users’ views over a
period of time pinpointing areas of clarification and coverage and results of research in
the field, would be incorporated in to the Code from time to time to make it’a living
document. It is proposed to bring out changes to the Code periodically.

Provision of the Code will serve as a model for adoption by PWDs and other
government construction departments, local bodies and other construction agencies.
Existing PWD codes, municipal byelaws and other regulatory media could either be
replaced by the National Building Code or suitably modified to cater to local
requirements in accordance wi!h the provisions of the Code. Any difficulties
encountered in adoption of the Code could be brought to the notice of the Guiding
Committee for Corrective Action.

This publication forms part of the National Building Code of India 1983 and
contains Part IX Plumbing Services with all its sections dealingwith:

Water Supply
Drainage and Sanitation
Gas Supply

The information contained in this publication will essentially serve the public
health/ plumbing engineer.

VII
Guiding Committee for National Building Code, BDC 64
CHAIRMAN
MAJ-GEN HARKIRAT SINGH
W-51 Greater Kailash - I, New Delhi 110 048
MEMBERS REPRESENTING
DR B. M. AHUJA Indian Institute of Technology, New Delhi
S HRI V. ASRANI P A H A L A J Corporation of Madras, Madras
S HRI J. P. BAJAJ The Institution of Surveyors, New Delhi
S HRI S ASIDARAN (Alternate)
S HRI B ALWANT SINGH In personal capacity (N-29 Panchshila Park,
New Delhi 110 017)
S HRI J. R. BHALLA The Indian Institute of Architects, Bombay
S HRI M. S. BHATIA In personal capacity (A-2136 Safdarjang Enclave,
New Delhi 110 016)
S HRI H. U. BIJLANI Housing and Urban Developrhent Corporation
Ltd, New Delhi
S HRI H. K. YADAV(A/ternate)
S HRI C. S. CH A N D R A S E K H A R A Institute of Town Planners (India), New Delhi
S HRI R. CHANNABASAPPA Corporation of Bangalore, Bangalore
S HRI A. CHATTERJI Tariff Advisory Committee (Delhi Regional
Committee), Bombay
,CHIEF ENGINEER ( BUILDINGS ) Public Works Department, Govt of Tamil Nadu
SUPERINTE_NDING ENGINEER
(P AND D CIRCLE) (Alternate)
C HIEF E NGINEER ( DESIGNS) Central Public Works Department’ (Central
Designs Organization), New Delhi
S UPERINTENDING ENGINEER (Alternate)
S HRI D. N. CH~PRA In persona1 capacity (A-9/33 Vasant Vihar,
New Delhi 110 057)
S HRI D. S. DESAI M. N. Dastur & Co Private Limited, Calcutta
P ROF D INESH M O H A N Central Building Research Institute (CSIR),
Roorkee
SHRI R. C. MANGAL (Alternate)
D IRECTOR School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi
D IRECTOR (CIVIL ENGG) Railway Board (Ministry of Railways)
ADDITIONAL DIRECTOR (G) (Alternate)
D IRECTOR S TANDARDS ( CIVIL ) Research, Designs & Standards Organization
(Ministry of Railways), Lucknow
D IRECTOR ( ENGG S ERVICES & PROJECTS ) Municipal Corporation of Greater Bombay,
Bombay
C ITY ENGINEER (Alternate)
S HRI J. DURAI R A J In personal capacity (DI/141 Satya Marg,
New Delhi 110 021)
G ENERAL S ECRETARY The Institution of Fire Engineers India, New Delhi
S HRI S. S. GILL Public Works Department, Government of Punjab
S HRI V. K. GU P T A Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters,
New Delhi
SHRI K. DEVARAJAN (A!ternate)
S HRI N. JAGANNATH Steel Authority of India Limited, New I%lhi
S HRI J. C. KAPIJR Danfoss (India) Limited, Bombay
D R R. K. GUPTA (Alternate)
SHRI A. C. KHAZANCHI Regional Research Laboratory (CSIR), Jorhat
SHRI P. KRISHNAN North Eastern Council, Shillong

VIII
MEMBERS REPRESENTING
SHKI M. Z. KURIF” Tata Consulting Engineers, Bombay
SHRI D. S. HARPAI.,\NI (Ahernafe)
SHRI MADAN MO H A N Directorate General of Factory Advice Service and
Labour Institute, Bombay
S HRI M A H E N D R A RAJ The Association of Consulting Engineers (India),
New Delhi
S HRI A. D. PAVATE (Airernare)
S HRI G. C. MA T H U R National Buildings Organization, New Delhi
S HRI M. M. MISTRY (Alternate)
S HRI G. D. MA T H U R Town and Country Planning Organization,
New Delhi
-DR S. MAUWAL Department of Science & Technology, New Delhi
S HRI P. N. MI~HROTRA In personal capacity (A-101 Anund L’ihar,
New Delhi II0 092)
S HRI G. B. MEN~N Ministry of Home Affairs
S HRI K. K. NA M B I A R ln personal capacity (~munuku~~,l6, First Crescenr
Park, Gandhi Nugur. AJ?vr? Mu&us 600 020)
S HRI R. NA T R A J A N Central Public Works Department, New Delhi
S HRI M. D. PA T E L Public Works Department, Government of Gujarat
S HRI I. K. MODI (Alternote)
P RESIDENT Forest Research Institute and Colleges,Debra Dun
SYRI A.N. BAJAJ (Alternate)
S HRI V. RAGHU Ministry of Works & Housing (CPHEEO)
S HRI A. RAMAN National Environmental Engineering Research
Institute (CSIR), Nagpur
SHRI D. RWXRAMAN (Alrernure)
S HRI N. V. RAMAN Structural Engineering Research Centre (CSIR),
Madras
S HRI Z ACHARIA G EORGE (Alrerde)
S HRI B. J. RAMRAKHIANI In persona1 capacity (S/3 East Pure1 Nugur, New
Delhi 110 008)
S HRI V. S. RANE Public Works & Housing Dqanmxq Gowxnment
of Maharashtra, Bombay
S HRI B. K. RO Y Corporation of Calcutta, Calcutta
S HRI D. P. ROY C H O W D H A R Y Public Works Department, Government of
West Bengal
S HRI D. P. GHOSH (Alternate)
S HRI T. K. SARAN Bureau of Public Enterprises (Ministry of Finance),
New Delhi
S HRI T. S. RA~AM (Alternate)
S HRI H. J. S H A H Builders Association of India, Bombay
S HRI R. G. GANDHI (Alternate)
S HRI R. L. SURI Suti & Suri Consulting Acoustical Engineers,
New Delhi
SHRI M. THYAGARAJAN Indian Institute of Public Administration,
New Delhi
SHRI B. T. U N W A L L A The Concrete Association of India, Bombay and
Institution of Engineers (India), Calcutta
SHRI Y. K. M EHTA (Ahernure) The Concrete Association of India, Bombay
Brig D. R. K ATHURIA (Ahernure) Institution of Engineers (India), Calcutta
D R H. C. VISVESVARAYA Cement Research Institute of India, New Delhi
MEMBERS REPRESENTING
SHKI D. A.II’I’HA SI M H A. Deputy Director
General [Former Director (Civ Ed 1 Director General. IS1 (Ex-qj,FcYo Member)
SHKI G. KAMAN. Director (Civ Engg) I

FORMER SECRET.4 R Y
‘SHKI D. AJITHA SIMHA
Llrpul~r Director Genernl [Former Dirrcror (Civ Engg)]JSI
SECRETARY
SHRI G. RAMAN
Ditwtor (Ci\* Engg). IS I
.lOi,VT SECRETA R 1’
SHKI J! VENKATARAMAN
S r . I>epur~* Director (Ci\v Engg).lSI

Panel for Plumbing Services, BDC 64:P16

CONVENER REPRESENTING

S’HRI BALWANT SINGH In personal capacity (N-29 Punchshilu Park,

New Delhi 110017)

MEMBERS

SHRI S. N. A G A R W A L The Bombay Gas Company Limited, Bombay

SHRI V. A. AN A N D A D O S S Ministry of Works & Housing
S HRI J. R. BHALLA The Indian Institute of Architects, Bombay
C HAIRMAN Tamil Nadu Water Supply & Drainage Board,
Madras
S HRI S. P. CHAKARBARTI Ce;;iikuilding Research Institute (CSIR),
SHRI S. K. SHARMA (Alrernure)
SHRI J. D’CRUZ Municipal Corporation of Delhi, Delhi
SHRI S., A. SWAMY (Abemare)
SHRI B. R. N. GUPTA Engineer-in Chiefs Branch, Army Headquarters
SHRI K. P ARBHAKAR RAo(AItemare)
H YDRAULIC E NGINEER Municipal Corporation of Greater Bombay,
Bombay
D EPUTY H YDRAULIC E NGINEER
(Alternate)
JOINT DIRECTOR , STANDARDS (ARCH), Research Design & Standards Orgar&tion, Lucknow
DEPUTY DIRECTOR STANDARDS
( ARCH)II (Alremute)
SHRI K. K ANDASWAMI Corporation of Madras, Madras
PROF P. KHANNA Indian Institute of Technology, Bombay
DR M. MARIAPPAN National Environmental Engmeering Research
Institute (CSIR), Nagpur
SHRI V. P. DESHPANDE (Alremure)
SHRI P. N. MEHROTRA In personal capacity (B-6/38-1 Sqf&tjang Enclove,
New Delhi l’lOO29)
SHRI G. B. MENON Ministry of Home Affairs
SUPERINTENDING SURVEYOR OF WORKS Central Public Works Department, New Delhi
(DAZ)
SURVEYOR OF WORKS II (DAZ)
(Alternate)
SHRI S. A. VICHARE Builders’ Association of India, Bombay
The National Building Code of India consists of the following Parts and Sections:

PART 1 DEFINITIONS
PART ii ADMINISTRATION
PART iii DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND
GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
PART V BUILDING MATERIALS
PART VI STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Section 1 Loads
Section 2 Foundations
Section 3 Wood
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
Plain and Reinforced Concrete
Prestressed Concrete
Section 6 Steel
Section 7 Prefabrication and Systems Building
PART Vii CONSTRUCTIONAL PRACTICES AND SAFETY
PART Viii BUILDING SERVICES
Section 1 Lighting and Ventilation
Section 2 Electrical installations
Section 3 Air-conditioning.and Heating
Section 4 Acoustics, Sound insulation and Noise Control
Section 5 installation of Lifts and Escaiators
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES
Section 1 Water Supply
Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation
Section 3 Gas Supply
PART N SlGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES
SECTION1 WATERSUPPLY

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS
0. FOIIEWOIID ...
1. SCOI’E ...
7
_. ‘I-EI~MINOLOGY . .
.<. APf’LICATfON F-OK OBl AINING Stlf’f’LY CONNECTfO\

4. LICENSING OF PLUMBEI~S ...

.s. WA.f‘ER SIJf’P1.Y REQUIREMENTS FOR BUIL.DfNGS .
6. DESIGN OF DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS ...

7. ~MATERIALS. Ff-1’1 INGS AND APPI.fANCES ...

8. CONVEYANCE AND DISTRIBU-I-ION Of-’ WATER WITHIN
THE PREMISES . 8

Y. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS F-OR PIPE WORK ... 9

10. LAYING OF MAINS AND PIPES ON SITE ... If

‘II. JOlkTlNG OF PIPES ... I2

.
1. STORAGE OF WATER ... ‘I2

1-3. HOT WATER SlJPPLY INSTALLATIONS . 13

14. CLEANING AND DISINFECTION OF THE SUPPLY

SYSTEM ... 24

IS. WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS IN HIGH ALTITUDES

AND, OR SUB-ZEIIO TEMPERATURE REGIONS ... 25

16. INSPECTION AND TESTING ... 26

f7. GUIDELINES TO MAINTENANCE ... 28

APPENDIX A APPLICATION FORM FOR TEMPORARY,

PERMANENT SUPPLY OF WATER/FOR
ADDITIONS AND, OR ALTERATIONS FOR
SUPPLY OF WATER ... 28

APPENDIX B FORM FOR LlCENSED PLUMBER’S COM-

PLETION CERTIFICATE ... 29

APPENDIX C UNIVERSAL PIPE FRICTION DIAGRAM ... 30

A P P E N D I X D NOMOGRAM OF HAZEN AND WILLIAM’S

EQUATION ... 31

PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION I WATER SUPPLY IX-I-‘1

PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES
SECTION1 WATER SUPPLY

0. FOREWORD

0.1 This section covers the requirements of water supply, plumbing connected to public water
supply. design of water supply systems, principles of conveyance and distribution of water within
the premises, hot water supply system, inspection and maintenance of water supply systems. This
section also covers design of water supply systems in high altitudes and/ or sub-zero temperature
regions.

0.2 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. The first revision is intended to update the
provisions in the light of the revision of the standards on which it was based and a number of new
standards being formulated on the subject. This revision incorporates mainly the following
changes:

a) Rationalization of definitions and addition of definitions for more terms.

b) Universal pipe friction diagram and nomogram of Hazen and William’s equation have been
added for discharge computation, deleting the discharge curves based on Chezy’s formula.

c) A detailed clause giving guidance on the design of water supply system for muitistoreyed
buildings has been introduced.

d) in regard to storage tanks for flushing, the requiiements have been modified to indicate that
no separate storage need be provided for flushing and domestic purposes for health reasons
and a single storage tank may be provided.

e) Provisions relating to domestic hot water supply installations have been modified amplified.

0 A detailed clause covering recommendations to be considered while planning and designing

water supply systems peculiar to high altitude and or sub-zero temperature regions of the
country, has been introduced.

g) Requirements relating to inspection, testing and maintenance applicable to hot water supply
system have been added. .

0.3 This section has been based largely on the following Indian Standards:
IS : Il72-I983 Code of basic requirements for water supply. drainage and sanitation (tlrircl
,rl’i.siorl).

IS : 2065-1983 Code of practice for water supply, in buildings (src~trtl rr~li.sic>n).

IS : 6295-1971 Code of practice for water supply and drainage in high altitudes and orsub-
7ero temperature regions.

IS : 7558-1974 Code of practice for domestic hot water installations.

0.3.1 Assistance has also been derived fromthe.‘Manuai on Water Supply and Treatment (second
edition)‘, issued by Ministry of W’orkq and Housing, New Delhi in 1976.

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA IX-I-

2
1. SCOPE
1.1 The section covers the basic require-
ments of water supply for residential, busi-
ness, industrial and other types of buildings,
including traffic terminal stations. This
section also deals with general requirements
of plumbing connected to public water
supply and design of water supply systems.
1.2 This section does not take into con-
sideration the requirements of water supply
for industrial plants and processes, which have
to be provided for separately. It also. does
not provide for requirements of water supply for
other purposes, such as fire fighting, and
street cleaning.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this section, the
following definitions shall apply.
AIR GAP--The distance between’the lowest
point Of a water inlet or feed pipe to an
appliance and the spill-over level (or the
overflowing level) of the appliance.
b) Any part of a piping system other than a
main.
C ISTERN-A fixed container for water in
which water is at atmospheric pressure. The
water is usually supplied through a float
operated valve.
COMMUNIGATION PIPE-That part of a
service pipe which vests in the water
undertakers. It starts at the water main and
terminate at a point which differs according to
the circumstances of the case.
CONSUMER-Any. person who uses or is
supplied water or on whose application such
water is supplied by the Authority.
CONSUMER’S PIPE --The portion of service
pipe used for supply of water and which is not
the property of the Authority (see Fig. 1).
D-

AUTHORITY HAVING J U R I S D I C T I O N -_The

Authority which has been created by a statute
and which for the purpose of administering
the-Code/ Part may authorize a committee or
an official to act on its behalf; hereinafter
called the ‘Authority*.
A V A I L A B LE HEAD-The head of water
available at the point of consideration due to
mains’ pressure or overhead tank or any other
source of pressure.
BACKFLOW
a) The flow of water or other liquids.
m i x t u r e s or substances into the
distributing pipes of-a system Of suPPlY of
potable water from any source or sources
other than its intended source.
b) The flow of a liquid in a direction reverse
of that intended.
BACKFLOW PR E VENTION L)EvtCE TAnY
approved measure or fitting or combmatlon
of fittings specifically designed to prevent Noic -- The illustration 15 not intended to Indicate
backflow or backsiphonage in a Water setke. recdmmended positions of underground storage tanh
(where prowded), pipes. etc. and this uill dcpcnd on
BACK SIPHONAGE-The flowing back of local situations.
used, contaminated, or polluted water from a
plumbing fixture or vessel into a water supply
due to a reduced pressure in such pipe (see
Backflow).
C R O S S- CO N N E C T I O N --A connection
BRANCH between two normally independent pipelines
a) Special form of sewer tile and pipe used which permits flow from either pipelinemto
for making connections to a sewer or the other.
water main. The various types are called
T. Y, T-Y, double Y, and V branches. D IAMETER -The nominal internal diameter
according to their respectiveshapes. of pipes and fittings;
a
PAD1 IX PLUMBING SFBVICES-SECTION I WATER SUPPLY IX-I-”
DIRECT TAP-A tap which is connected to a.
supply pipe and is subject to pressure from the
water main.
D O W N T A K E T A P-A tap connected to a
system of piping not subject to water pressure
from the water main.
EFFE~IVE OPENING -The minimum cross-
sectional area at the point of water supply,
measured or expressed in terms of:
(a) the diameter of a circle; and
(b) the diameter of a circle of equivalent cross-
sectional area, if the opening is not
circular.
F EED C I S T E R N -A storage vessel used for
supplying cold water to a hot water apparatus,
cylinder or tanks.
FITTINGS- Fittings shall mean coupling,
flange, branch, bend, tees, elbows, unions,
waste with plug, P or S trap with vent, stop
ferrule, stop tap, bib tap, pillar tap, globe tap,
ball valve, cistern storage tank, baths,water-
closets, boiler, geyser, pumping set with
motor and accessories, meter, hydrant, valve
and any other article used in connection with
water supply, drainage and sanitation.
F LOAT O PERATED V ALVE- Ball valves or
ball taps and equilibrium valves operated by
means of a float.
FLIJSHING CISTERN -A cistern provided
with a device for rapidly discharging the
contained water and used in connection with a
sanitary appliance for the purpose of cleaning
the appliance and carrying away its contents
into a drain.
NOTE -The nominal size of a cistern is the quantity of
water discharged per flush.
F ROST L INE -The line joining the points of
greatest depths below ground level up to
which the moisture in the soil freezes.
G E N E R A L W A S H I N G P L A C E -A w a s h i n g
place provided with necessary sanitary
arrangement and common to more than one
tenement.
G EYSER -An apparatus for heating water
with supply control on the inlet side and
delivering it from an outlet.
H IGH A LTITUDES -Elevations higher than
1 500 m above mean sea level (MSL).
H O R I Z O N T A L PIPE-Any pipe of fitting
which makes an angle of more than 45” with
the Lertical.
IX-I- 4
H OT W ATER T ANK-A vessel for storing hot
water under pressure greater than
atmospheric pressure.
L AGGING -Material used for thermal or
acoustic insulation.
L ICENSED P L U M B E R -Aperson licensed
under the provisions of this code.
M AIN ( WATER M A I N) -A pipe laid by the
water undertakers for the purpose of giving a
general supply of water as distinct from a
supply to individual consumersan< includes
any apparatus used in connection with such a
pipe.
O FFSET -Apipe fitting used to connect two
pipes whose axes are parallel butnot in line.
P ERIOD OF SuppLy-,The period of the day
or night during which water supplyis made
available to the consumer.
PIPE WORK -Any installation of piping with
its fittings.
PLUMBING
a) The pipes, fixtures and other apparatus
inside a building for bringing in the water
supply and removing the liquid and water
borne wastes.
b) The installation of the foregoing pipes,
fixtures and other apparatus.
P LUMBING S YSTEM -The plumbing system
shall include the water supply and distribu-
tion pipes; plumbing fittings and traps; soil,
waste, vent pipes and anti-siphonage pipes;
building drains and building sewers including
their respective connections, devices and
appurtenances within the property lines of the
premises; and water-treating or water-using
equipment.
P O T A B L E WATER-W~~~~ which is satis-
factory for drinking, culinary and domestic
purposes and meets the requirements of the
Authority.
PREMISES -Premises shall include passages,
buildings and lands of any tenure,. whether
open or enclosed, whether built on or not, and
whether public or private in respect of which a
water rate or charge is payable to the.
Authority or for which an application is made
for supply of water.
RESIDUAL HEAD-The head available at any
particular point in the distribution system.
S ERVICE P IPE-Pipe that runs between the
distribution main in the street and.the riser in
case of a multi-storeyed building or the water
VATl6NAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
meter in the case of an individual house and is
subject to water pressure from such main.
STOP - COCK --A COCK fitted in a pipe line for
controlling the flow of water.
S TOP T A P-Stop tap includes stop-cock,
stop valve or any other device for stopping the
flow of water in a line or system of pipes at
will.
S TORAGE T ANK -A container used for
storage of water which is connected to the
water main or tube-we11 by means of supply
pipe.
S U B- ZE R O T E M P E R A T U R E RECIONS-
Regions where temperatures fall below 0°C
and freezing conditions occur.
SUPPLY PIRE-SO much of any service pipe
as is not a communication pipe.
SUPPORTS-Hangers and anchors or devices
for supporting and securing pipe and fittings
to walls, ceilings, floors or structural
members.
VERTtCAL PIPE -Any pipe which is installed
in a vertical position or which makes an angle
of not more than 45” with the vertical.
W ARNING PIPE-An overflow pipe so fixed
that its outlet, whether inside or outside a
building, is in a conspicuous position where
the discharge of any water therefrom can be
readily seen.
WASH -OUT VALVE - A device located at the
bottom of the tank for the purpose of draining
a tank for cleaning, maintenance, etc.
W ATER OUTLET-A water outlet, as used in
connection with the water distributing SYS-
tem, is the discharge opening for the water (a)
to a fitting; (b) to atmospheric pressure
(except into an open tank which ispart of the
water supply system); and (c) toany water-
operated device or equipment requiring water
to operate.
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM -Water supply sy%.
tern of a building or premises consists of the
water service pipe, the water-distribution
pipes, and the necessary connecting pipes,
fittings, control valves, and all appurtenances
in or adjacent to the building or premises.
WATERWORKS-Waterworks for public
water supply include a lake, river, spring, well,
pump with or without motor and accessories,
reservoir, cistern, tank, duct whether covered
or open. sluice, water main, pipe, culvert,
engine and any machinery, land. building ora
?ARt Ix ?LUkPINC SERVICES-SECTION I WATER SUPPLY
thing used for storage, treatment and supply
of water.
3. APPLICATION FOR OBTAINING
SUPPLY CONNECTION
3.1 Every consumer, requiring a new supply
of water or any extension or alteration to the
existing supply shall apply in writing in the
prescribed form (see Appendix A) to the
Authority.
3.2 Bulk Supp(,*-- In the case of large hous-
ing colonies or where new services are so
situated that it will be necessary for the
Authority to lay new mains or extend an
existing main, full information about the
proposed housing scheme shall be furnished
to the Authority; information shall also be
given regarding their phased requirements of
water supply with full justification. Such
information shall include site plans, showing
the layout of roads, footpaths, building and
boundaries and indicating thereon the
finished line and level of the roads or
footpaths and water supply lines and
appurtenances.
3.3 C o m p l e t i o n Cert@ate-On comple-.
tion of the plumbing work for the water
supply system, the licensed plumber shall give
a completion certificate in the prescribed form
(see Appendix B) to the Authority for getting
the water connection from the mains.
4. LICENSING OF PLUMBERS
4.1 Execution of Work-The work which is
required to be carried out under the provi-
sions of this section, shall be executed only by
a licensed plumber under the control of the
Authority and shall be responsible to carry
out all lawful directions given by the
Authority. No individual shall engage in the
business of plumbing unless so licensed under
the provisions of this section.
4.1.1 No individual, firm, partnership or
corporation shall engage in the business of
installing, repairing or altering plumbing
unless the plumbing work performed in the
course of such business is under the direct
supervision of a licensed plumber.
4.2 Examination and Certtyication-The
Authority shall establish standards and
procedure for the qualification, examination
and iicensing of plumbers and shall issue
licences to such persons who meet the
qualifications thereof and successfully pass
the examination.
4.3 For guidelines for registration of plum-
bers including the minimum standards for
qualifications for the grant 01’ licenccs.
s
IX-I--
reference -may be made to accepted standards provisions for waiting rooms and waiting
[IX-l( I>].* halls. They do not, however, include require-
ments for retiring rooms.
5: WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
FOR BUILDINGS 5.3.2 Requirements of water subply for
traffic terminal stations shall be according to
5.1 Water Supple for Residences--The re- Table 2.
quirements regarding water supply, drainage
and sanitation for residencesshall assume that TABLE 2 WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
a minim1.m water supply of 200 litres per head FOR TRAFFIC TERMINAL STATIONS
per day is assured together with a full flushing SL N ATURE OF W HERE W HERE
system. NO. STArIONjTERMlNAL BArHlNG B ATHING
FACILII-IES FACILI’IIES
NOl’E -The minimum value of water supply given as 200 ARE A RE N O T
litres per head per day may be reduced to 135 litres.pcr P ROVIDED P ROVIDED
head per day for houses for Lower Income Group (LIG)
and Economically Weaker Sections of Society (EWS). (1) (2) (3) (4)
litresj litres/
dcpcnding upon prevailing conditions.
capita capita
i) Intermediate stations 45 23
5.1. I Out of the 200 litres per head per day, (excluding mail and
express stops)
45 litres per head per day may be taken for
flushing requirements and the remaining ii) Junction stations and
intermediate stations
quantity for other domestic purposes. where mail or express
stoppage is provided 70 45
S.2 Waler Supply for Buildings Other than iii) Terminal stations 45 45
Residences- Minimum requirements of iv) International and 70 70
water supply for buildings other than domestic airports
residences shall be in accordance with
Table 1. NOIF I --The number of persons shall be determined
by the average number of passengers handled ‘by the
station daily; due consideration may be given ta the
TABLE I WATER REQUIREMENTS FOR staff and vendors likely to use the facilities.
BUILDINGS OTHER I-HAN RESIDENCES
SI TYPE OF BUILDING COSSUMP- NOTE 2-Consideration should be given to seasonal
NO. rtnh PER average peak requirements.
H EAD P E R
DA Y
(1) (2) (3) 5.4 Water Supply for Fire Fighting Purposes
litres
i) Factories where bathrooms are 45 5.4.1 The Authority shall make provision to
required to be provided meet the water supply requirements forfire
ii) Factories where no bathrooms are 30 fighting in the city/area, depending on the
required to be provided population density and types of occupancy.
iii) Hospitals (including laundry) per bed:
a) Xumber of beds not exceeding 100 340 5.4.2 Provision shall be made by the owner of
b) Number of beds exceeding IO0 450
the building for water supply requirements for
I\ 1 Surses’ homes and mcdiral quarters 135 fire fighting purposes within the building,
“1 Hostels I35
depending upon the height and occupancy of
vi) Ilotels (per bed) 180
vu) Offices 45 the building, in conformity with the
Viii) Rr\taurants (per seat) 70 requirements laid down in Part IV Fire
ix) C‘incmas, concert halls and theatres 15 protection.
(per seat)
x) Schools:
a) Day schools 5.4.3 The requirements regarding water
b) Boarding schools supply in storage tanks, capacity d fire
pumps, arrangements of wet riser-cum-
5.3 barer Supp(r Requiremenrs ?f Traffic downcomer and wet riser installations for
‘li~rm~nal Stalk ys buildings above 15 m in height, depending
upon the occupancy use, shall be in
S-3.1 l’he uater supply requirements of accordance with Table 3 of Part IV Fire
traffic terminal stations (railway stations, bus protection.
statlons. harbours, airports, etc) include
- 6. DESIGK OF DISTRIBUTION
*In th,q bectlon where reference is made to ‘accepted SYSTEMS
stal:dards’ in relation to material specification, testidg or
other mtormation. the appropriate document listed at the
end of this section may be used as a guide to the 6.1 General-- All buildings shall conforti
intcrpretaiion of the term. to the following general requirements in

IX-I-
6 NATIONAL. BUILD~NC CODE OF INDIA
regard to water supply, drainage and sanitation:
a) All premises intended for human
habitation, occupancy or use shall be
provided with the supply of pure and
wholesome water, neither connected with
unsafe water supply nor subject to the
hazards of backflow or back-siphonage.
b) Plumbing fixtures, devices and appur-
tenances shall be supplied with water in
sufficient volume and at pressures
adequate to enable them to function
satisfactorily and without undue noise
under all normal conditions of use.
There should be at least a residual head
of 0.018 N/mm2 at the consumer’s tap.
NOTE-The residual head shall be taken at the
highest/farthest outlets in the building.
cl Plumbing shall be designed and adjusted
to use the minimum quantity of water
consistent with proper performance and
cleaning.
d) Devices for heating and storing hot water
shall be so designed and installed as to
minimize danger arising from
overheating.
e) The plumbing fixtures, installed in a
building intended for human habitation,
occupancy or use, shall be connected to a
public sewer, where such sewer exists in
the street or alley on which the building
abuts, or where a sewer passes near the
basement, or where the public sewer is
within 30m of the building line.
6.1.2 The requirements of water supply for
cooling towers, in respect of both quantity
and pressure,‘may be taken into account in
the overall design of the storage tank and
rising main for meeting other major require-
ments like domestic, fire fighting, etc.
6.2 Estimate of Demand Load-Estimates
of total water supply requirements for build-
ings shall be based on the occupant load
consistent with the provisions of 5.
6.2.1 For residential buildings, the require-
ments of water shall be based on the actual
number of occupants; where this informa-
tion is not available, the number of OCCU-
pants for each residential unit may be based
on a family of five. For assessing the popu-
lation in other occupancies, reference may
be made to Part IV Fire protection.
6.2.2 In making assessment of watersupply
requirements of large complexes, the future
occupant load shall be kept in view. Use
may be made of the following methods for
estimating future requirements:
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTlOti I WATER SUPPLY
a) demographic method of population
projection,
b) arithmetic progression method,
geometrical progression method,
cl
4 method of varying increment or incre-
mental increase,
e) logistic method,
graphical projection method, and
0
g) graphical comparison method.
6.3 Rate of Flow-The data required for
determining the size of the communication
and service pipes are:
a) the maximum rate of discharge required,
b) the length of the pipe,
C) the head loss by friction in that length,
and
d) the roughness of the interior surface of
the pipe.
6.4 Discharge Computation
6.4.1Several formulae, diagrams and tables
of calculated values are available for the
measurement of flow through pipes. How-
ever, almost all studies based on the
Reynold’s number of flow, pipe roughness
and flow pattern (like turbulent, transient,
leminar) yields accurate and mutually
consistent results over a very large range of
flow compared to empirical formulae which
have limitations regarding their range of
applicability. Although non-dimensional
parameters are used, these rational formulae
based on Reynold’s number need
information on viscosity and the calculations
are more involved. To obviate the involved
calculations, a universal pipe friction
diagram has been provided in Appendix C.
Therefore, for accurate estimation of various
parameters, the universal pipe friction
diagram should be preferred.
6.4.2 Temperature of water and
consequently the viscosity at a place is an
estremely variable factor, depending upon
season and time. Further, commercially
available standard sizes of pipes are only to
be used against the sizes arrived at by actual
design. Therefore, several empirical formulae
are used, even though they,give less accurate
results. The Hazen and William’s formula
and the charts based on the same may be
used without any risk of inaccuracy in view
of the fact that the pipes normally to be used
for water supply are of smaller sizes.
Nomogram of Hazen and William’s equation
has been provided in Appendix D.
IX-I-
7
6.5 Distribution Systems in MultistoreJJed
Buildings-The water supply system in
multistoreyed buildings may be one or a
combination of the system g&en in 6.5.1
to 6.5.3.
6.5.1 M U L T I P L E O V E R H E A D S T O R A G E
S Y S T E M -ln this system, the tanks are
provided on the terrace. A m a n i f o l d
downtake is taken out from the storage tank
and laid out horizontally in ‘a loop on the
terrace to ,carry a designed peak load. The
pressure in the loop at peak demand must not
become negative. Vertical downtakes, as
many as necessary, may be taken out from
the loop and linked, one each, to a downtake
for a zone of 4 storeys. These downtakes are
designed for the peak demand they may have
to serve. A pressure reducing valve is
provided in each downtake, in an easily
accessible place like a duct, catwalk, etc, to
limit the head to a maximum of 25 m.
6.5.2 BREAK P R E S S U R E T ANK S Y S T E M - - I n
this system, t h e e n t i r e b u i l d i n g i s
donveniently divided into suitable zones of 5
to 8 storeys each. For each such zone, a break
pressure tank is provided, the capacity’ of
which is such that it holds IO to 15 min
supply for all the floors in the zone plus a
minimum of 2 kl for flushing and other
domestic purposes. The dowptake from the
master overhead tank feeds the break
pressure tank.
6.5.3 H Y D R O P N E U M A T I C S YSTEM -In this
system, t h e s u p p l y i s t h r o u g h a
hydropneumatic’ pressure vessel fitted with
accessories like non-return valves and
pressure relief valves. Each zone of supply is
restricted to about 7 storeys or 20m head,
whichever is less. The capacity of the pump is
such that it can, cope up with the peak
demand. Normally, three pumps, called the
lead pump, the supplementary pump and the
standby ump, are’ prdvided. The standby
pump is i,preferably diesel driven to serve
when there is a power failure. The
hydropneumatic pressure vessel is an air-
tight vessel, cylindrical in shape and
fabriCated from mild steel plates conforming
to accepted standards [1X-1(2)]. The design
and fabrication of the vessel shall be done in
accordance with good practice [1X-1(3)]*.
The capacity of the vessel is equivalent to
3 min requirements. An air compressor is
also necessary to feed air into the vessel so as
to maintain the required air-water ratio. As
sbon as the demand exceeds the capacity of
*In this section where reference is made to ‘god prac-
tice’ in relation to design, testing, constructlon proce-
dures or other informatiov, the appropriate document
listed at the end of this sectlon may be used as a guide to
the interpretation of thii term.
IX-I-
8 YATIONAL BUILDING
the lead pump, the supplementary pump
starts automatically.
7. MATERIALS,. FITTINGS AND
A P P L I A N C E S
7.1 Standards for Materials, Fittings and
Appliances- All materials, water fittings
and appliances shall conform to Part V
Building materials.
7.2 Mathials for’ Pipes-Pipes may be of
any of the following materials:
a) cast iron, vertically cast or centrifugally
(spun) cast,
W steel (iriternally lined or coated with
bitumen or a bituminous composition,
and out-coated with cement concrete or
mortar, where necessary),
C) reinforced concrete,
4 prestresrcd concrete.
e) mild steel tubes or tubulars (galvanized),
0 copper,
8) brass,
h) wrought iron,
j) asbestos cement,
k) lead (see 7.2.2),
mJ polyethylene (see 7.2.3), or
n) unplasticized PVC (see 7.2.3).
7.2.1 The material chosen shall be resistant
to corrosion, both inside and outside.
2.2.2 Lead piping shall not be used to con-
vey domestic water supply. Lead piping may,
however, be used for flushing and overflow
pipes.
7.2.3 Polyethylene and unplasticized PVC
pipes shall not be installed near hot water
pipes or near any other heat sources. t;;or
temperature limitations in the use of poly-
ethylene and unplasticized PVC pipes to
convey water, reference may be made to
accepted standards [1X-l(4)].
8. CONVEYANCE AND DlSTRIBUTlON
OF WATER WITHIN THE PREMISES
8.1 Basic Principles - Wholesome water
supply provided for drinking and culinary
purposes shall not be liable to contamination
from. any less satisfactory water. There shall,
therefore, be no cross-connection whatsoever
between the distribution system -for
wholesome’ water and any pipe or fitting
containing unwholesome water, or water
liable to contamination, or of upcertain
C O D E OF INDIA
quality, or water which has been used for any
qther purpose. The provision of reflux or
non-return valves or closed and sealed stop
valves shall not be construed as a permissible
substitute for complete absence of cross-
connection.
8.2 The design of the pipe work shall be such
that there is no possibility of backflow
towards the source of supply from any cistern
or appliance, whether by siphonage or
otherwise. Reflux non-return valves shall not
be relied upon to prevent such backflow.
8.3 Where a supply of less satisfactory water
than wholGme water becomes inevitable as
an alternative or is required to be mixed with
the latter, it shall be delivered only into a
cistern and by a pipe or fitting discharging
into the air gap at a height above the top edge
of the cistern equal to twice its nominal bore
and in no case less than 15 cm. It is necessary
to maintain a definite air gap in all appliances
or taps used in water-closets.
8.4 All pipe work shall be so designed, laid
or fixed and maintained as to remain comp-
letely water-tight, thereby avoiding wastage,
damage to property and the risk of contami-
nation.
8.5 No piping shall be laid or fixed so as to
pass into or through any sewer, scour outlet
or drain or an) manhole connected therewith
nor through any ash pit or manure pit or any
material of such nature that is likely to cause
undue deterioration of the pipe, except where
it is unavoidable.
8.5.1 Where the laying of any pipe through
corrosive soil or previous material is
unavoidable, the piping shall be properly
protected from contact with such soil or
material by being carried through an exterior
cast iron tube or by some other suitable
means as approved by the Authority. Any
existing piping or fitting laid or fixed, which
does not comply with the above
requirements, shall be removed immediately
by the consumer and relaid by him in
conformity with the above requirements and
to the satisfaction of the Authority.
8.5.2 Where lines have to be laid in close
proximity to electric cables or in corrosive
soils, adequate precautions/ protection
should be taken to avoid corrosion.
8.6 Underground piping shall be laid at
such a depth that it is unlikely to be
damaged by frost or traffic loads and
vibrations. It shall not be laid in ground liable
to subsidence, but where such ground
cannot be avoided, special precautions shall
be taken to avoid damage to the piping.
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION I WATER SUPPLY
Where piping has to be laid across recently
disturbed ground, the ground shall he
thoroughly consolidated so as to provide a
continuous and even support.
8.7 In designing and planning the layout
of the pipe work, due attention shall be
given to the maximum rate of discharge
required, economy in labour and materials,
protection against damage and corrosion.
water hammer, protection from frost, if
required, and to avoidance of airlocks, noise
transmission and unsightly arrangement.
8.8 To reduce frictional losses, piping shall
be as smooth as possible inside. Methods of
jointing shall be such as to avoid internal
roughness and projection at the joints,
whether of the jointing materials or
otherwise.
8.9 Change in diameter and in direction
shall preferably be gradual rather than
abrupt to avoid undue loss of head. No bend
or curve in piping shall be made which is
likely to materially diminish or alter the
cross -section.
8.10 N O boiler for generating steam or
closed boilers of any description or an)
machinery shall be supplied direct from a
service or supply pipe. Every such boiler or
machinery shall be supplied from a f e e d
cistern.
9. GENRAL REQUfREMENTS FOR
PIPE WORK
9.1 Mains--The following principles shall
apply for the mains:
4 Service mains shall be of adequate size
to give the required rate of flow.
b) The mains shall be divided into sec-
tions by the provisions of sluice valves
and other valves so that water may be
shut off for repairs.
c) To avoid dead ends, the mains shall be
arranged in a grid formation or in a
network.
d) Where dead ends are unavoidable, a
hydrant shall be provided to act as a
wash-out.
e) The wash-out valve shall not discharge
directly into a drain or sewer, or into
a manhole or chamber directly con-
nected to it; an effectively trapped
chamber shall be interposed, into which
the wash-out shall discharge.
Air valves shall be provided at all
summits, and wash-out at ION points
between summits.
IX-I-
9
 Mains need not be liid at unvarying
gradients, but may follow the general
contour’of the ground. They shall, how-
ever, fall continuously towards the
wash-out and rise towards the air
valves. The gradient shall be such that
there shall always be a positive pressure
at every point under working condi-
tions.
The cover for the mains shall be at least
90cm under roadways and 75cm in the
case of footpaths. This cover shall be
measured from the top of the pipe to
the surface of the ground.
The mains shah be located sufficiently
away from other service lines like elec-
tric and telegraph cables to ensure
safety and where the mains cannot be
located away from such lines, suitable
protective measures shall -be accorded
to the mains.
9.2 Communication Pipes
Every premises that is supplied with
water by the Authority shall have its
own separate communication pipe. In
the case of a group or block of premises
belonging to the same owner the
same communication pipe may supply
water to more than ‘one premises with
the prior permission of the Authority.
b) The communication pipe between the
water main and the stop-cock at the
boundary of the premises shall be laid
by the Authority.
d Connections up to 5Omm diameter
may be made on the water main by
means of screwed ferrules, provided the
size of the connections does not exceed
one-third the size of the water main.
In all other cases, the connection shall
be made by a T-branch -off the water
main.
4 As far as practicable, the communication
pipe and the underground service pipe
shall be laid at right angles to the main and
in approximately straight lines to facilitate
location for repairs.
e) Every communication pipe shall have a
stop-cock and meter inserted in it. The
waterway of each such fitting shall not be
less than the internal sectional area ofthe
communication pipe and the fittings shall
be located within the premises at a
conspicuous place accessible to the
Authority which shall have exclusive
control over it.
9.3 Consumer Pipes
a) No consumer pipe shall be laid in the
premises to connect the communication
lx-P
pipe without the approval of the
Authority.
The consumer pipe within the premises
W
shall be laid underground with a suitable
cover to safeguard against damage from
traffic and extremes of weather.
c) To control the branch pipe to each
separately occupied part of a building
supplied by a common service pipe, a stop
tap shall be fixed to minimize the
interruption of the supply during repairs.
All such stop valves shall be fixed in
accessible positions and properly
protected. To supply water for drinking or
for culinary purposes, direct taps shall be
provided on the branch pipes connected
directly to the consumer pipe. In the case
of multi-storeyed buildings, downtake
taps shall be supplied from overhead
tanks.
4 Pumps shall not be allowed on the service
pipe, as they cause a drop in pressure on
the suction side, thereby affecting the
supply to the adjoining properties. in
cases where pumping is required, a
properly protected storage tank of
adequate- capacity shall be provided to
feed the, pump.
e) No direct boosting (by booster pumps)
shall be allowed from the service pipes
(communication and consumer pipes).
r) Consumer pipes shall be so designed and
constructed as to avoid air-locks.
Draining taps shall be provided at the
lowest points from which the piping shall
rise continuously to draw-off taps.
f3) Consumer pipes shall be so designed as to
reduce the production and transmission
of noise as much as possible.
h) Consumer pipes in roof spaces and un-
ventilated air spaces under floors or in
basements shall be protected against
corrosion.
2 Consumer pipes shall be so located that
they are not unduly exposed to accidental
damage and shall be fixed in such
positions as to facilitate cleaning and
avoid accumulations of dirt.
k) All consumer pipes shall be so laid as to
permit expansion and contraction or
other movements.
9.4 Prohibited Connections
a) A service pipe shall not be connected into
any distribution pipe; such connection
may permit the backflow of water from a
cistern into the service pipe, in certain
circumstances, with consequent danger of
contamination and depletion of storage
NATIDNAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 capacity. It might also result in pipes and
fittings being subjected to a pressure
higher than that for which they are
designed, and in flooding from over-
flowing cisterns.
b) No pipe for conveyance or in connec-
tion with water supplied by the Autho-
rity shall communicate with any other
receptacle used or capable of being used
for conveyance other than water
supplied by the Authority.
4 Where storage tanks are provided, no
person shall connect or be permitted to
connect any service pipe with any distri-
buting pipe.
d) No service or supply pipe shall be con-
nected directly to any water-closet or a
urinal. All such supplies shall be from
flushing cisterns which shall be supplied
from storage tank.
e) No service or supply pipe shall be con-
nected directly to any hot water system or to
any other apparatus used for heating other
than through a feed cistern thereof.
10. LAYING OF MAINS AND PIPES
ON SITE
’ 10.1 The mains and pipes on site shall be laid
in accordance with good practice [1X-l(5)].
10.2 Excavation and Refilling-The
bottoms of the trench excavations shall be
so prepared that the barrels of the pipes,
when laid, are well bedded for their whole
length on a firm surface and are true to line
and gradient. In the refilling of trenches,
the pipes shall be surrounded with fine
selected material, well rammed so as to resist
subsequent movement of the pipes. No
stones shall be in contact with the pipes; when
resting on rock, the pipes shall be bedded
on fine-selected material or (especially
where there is a steep gradient) on a layer
of concrete.
10.2.1’ The pipes shall be carefully cleared
of all foreign matter before being laid.
10.3 Laying Underground Mains- Where
there is a gradient, pipe laying shall proceed
in an ‘uphill’ direction to facilitate joint
making.
10.3.1 Anchor blocks shall be provided to
withstand the hydraulic thrust.
10.4 Iron surface boxes shall be provided
to give access to valves and hydrants and
shall be supported on concrete or brickwork
which shall not be allowed to rest on pipes.
10.5 Laying Service Pipes
PART IX PLUMBING S~VICES-SECTION I WAlltR
20:5.1 Service pipes shall be connected to
the mains by means of right-hand screw
down ferrule or T-branches. The ferrules
shall conform to accepted standards
[1X-l(6)].
10.5.2 Precaution against contamination of
the mains shall be taken when making a
connection and, where risk exists, the main
shall be subsequently disinfected. The
underground water service pipe and the
building sewer or drain shall be kept at a
sufftcient distance apart so as to prevent
contamination of water. Water service pipes
or any underground water pipes shall not be
run or laid in the same trench as the drainage
pipe. Where this is unavoidable, the following
conditions shall be fulfilled:
ai The bottom of the water serviceDiDe, at all
points, shall be at least 3Ocm above the
top of the sewer line at its highest point.
b) The water service pipe shall be placed on a
solid shelf excavated on one side of the
common trench.
c) The ,number of joints in the service pipe
shall be kept to a minimum.
4 The materials and joints of sewer and
water service pipe shall be installed in such
a manner and shall possess such necessary
strength and durabtlity as to prevent the
escape of solids, liquids and gases
therefrom under all known adverse
conditions, such as corrosion strains due
to temperature changes, settlement,
vibrations and superimposed loads.
20.5.3 The service pipe shah pass into or
beneath the buildings at a depth of not less
than 75cm below the outside ground level
and, at its point of entry through the struca
ture, it shall be accommodated. in a’ sleeve
which shall have reviously been solidly built
into the wall oP the structure. The s ce
between the pipe and the sleeve shall betp”
tiled
with bituminous or other suitable material for
a minimum length of 15 cm.at both ends.
10.6 Pipes Laid Through Ducts, Chases,
Notches or Holes-Ducts or chases in walls
for piping shall be provided during the
building of the walls. If they are cut into
existing walls, they shall be finished suffici-
ently smooth and large enough for fming the
piping.
20.6.1 Piping laid in notches or holes shsll
not be subjected to external pressure.
10.7 Lugging of P&es- Where lagged Piping
outside buildings is attached to walls,It s&ll
be entirely covered alround w&h water-proof
and fire insulating material and shall not be in
direct contact with the wall. Where it passes,
iUPPLY’ lx_J
 through a wall, the lagging shall be continued
throughout the thickness of the wall.
11. JOlNTING OF PIPES
11.1 Cast Iron Pipes-Jointing may be
done by any of the following methods:
a) spigot and socket joints, or
b) flanged joints.
11.1.1 SPIGOT AND SOCKET JOINTS-The
spigot a’nd socket joints of cast iron or steel
pipes are usually caulked with lead. The
common form of joint is made by first
caulking in spun yarn, which shall be clean and
sterile then filling the remainder of the
joint space by running in molten lead,
taking care that no dross enters the joint and
then thoroughly caulking the lead. The lead
shall conform to the accepted standards
[1X-1(7)]. The lead ne d not extend into the
joint further than thi back of the groove
formed -in the socket. For detailed informa-
tion regarding the jointing of cast iron pipes
reference may be made to good practice
[1X-1(5)].
1l:l.l.l Rubber ring joints may also be
suitable wherever there is a provision for
them in the spigot made by the manufac-
turer.
11.1.2 FLANGED J OINTS -Flanged joints
shall be made by jointing rings of good
quality, smooth and hard compressed fibre
board of thickness not less than 1.5 mm
and of such width as to fit inside the circle
of bolts. Alternatively, the jointing .rings
may be of rubber, or rubber insertion, or
gutta-percha, or may be of corrugated non-
corrosive alloy together with a suitable
jointing paste.
11.1.3 For joints in smaller diameter cast
iron, wrought iron and steel piping, copper
alloy-screwed unions or ferrules shall be
used.
11.2 Steel Pipes -- PlainTended steel pipes
may be jointed by welding.
11.3 Wrought Iron and Steel Screwed
Pipes--Screwed wrought iron or steel
piping may be jointed with screwed and
socketed joints. Care shall be taken to remove
any burr from the end of the pipes after
screwing. A jointing compound approved
by the Authority and containing no red
lead composition shall be used. Screwed
wrought iron or steel piping may also be
jointed with screwed flanges.
Il.4 Asbestos Cement Pipes- A s b e s t o s
cement pipes may be jointed with flexible
joints
1x+1*
11.5 Copper Pipes
11.5.1 Screwed copper piping shall also be
jointed by screwed copper alloy fittings. The
screw threads of the pipe shall be cleaned out
and the joint made bl, screwing the fittings
after treating the thread with r;L\v linseed oil
or other suitable jointing compound.
11.5.2 Plain copper piping shall be jointed
with compression (manipulative or non-
manipulative) or with capillary joints, in each
case using copper or copper alloy fittings or
by welding. Only manipulative compression
joints are suitable for use with fully annealed
copper pi?ing.
If.5.3 Copper piping may be autogenous
welded or bronze welded. Piping may be
jointed directly or by the use of weldable
copper or copper alloy fittings. Copper to be
welded shall be ‘de-oxidized copper’ and not
‘tough pitch copper’.
11.5.4 Copper piping of small diameter shall
be jointed to cast iron, lead, wrought iron or
steel piping by the use of copper alloy
screwed unions and ferrules. For screwed
copper piping of diameter larger than 40 mm,
a flanged joint shall be used.
11.6. Leud Pipes-Lead and lead alloy
piping shall be jointed with wiped solder
joints.
il.7 Cnnr*rete Pipes-Concrete pipes shall
be jointed in accordance with good practice
[IX-l(S)].
11.8 Po(ve!h_vlene and Unplasticized PVC
Pipes- Polyethylene and unplasticized PVC
pipes shall be jointed in accordance with good
practice [1X-1(8)].
12. STORAGE OF WATER
12.1 In a building, provision is required to be
made for storage of water for the following
reasons:
4 to provide against interruptions of the
supply caused by repairs to mains, etc;
b) to reduce the maximum rate,of demand on
the mains;
4 to tide over periods ofintermittent supply;
and
d) to maintain a storage for the fire fighting
requirement of the building (see Part IV
Fire protection).
17 Materials Used-Reiervoirs and tanks
I;.2
for the reception and s!orage of water shall be
constructed of reinforced concrete. cast iron.
wrought Iron or galvanized mild steel plates or
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 sheets and shall be made water-tight without
the use of putty. The materials used shall be of
sufficient strength and thickness.
22.2.1 Tanks made of galvanized steel may be
of welded, riveted or pressed construction.
The metal shall be galvanized or coated
internally with a bituminous composition or
other suitable m$erial, of a kind which.does
not impart a taste or odour to the water,
especially if this has been chlorinated, and it
shall be coated externally with a good quality
anti-corrosive weather-resisting paint.Lead-
based paint shall not be used in the tank.
Lead-lined tanks shall not be used.
Rectangular pressed steel tanks shall con-
form to accepted standards [1X-1(9)].
12.3 Every tank shall be covered with a close
fitting, dust tight, insect and fly (mosquito)
proof lid and shall be provided with a
suitable ball valve conforming to accepted
standards [ IX- I( 1 O)].
12.4 Every tank shall be provided with an
efficient mosquito-proof warning pipe.
12.9 Each storage tank shall be provided
with a stop valve or stop tap at every outlet
other than the overflow pipe.
12.6 Every storage tank shall be easily
qccessiblc and placed in such a position as to
enable thorough inspection and cleaning tobe,
carried out. If the storage capacity required is
more than 5 OtIKl litres, it is advantageous to
arrange it in a series of tanks so
interconnected that each tank can be isolated
for cleaning and inspection without
I interfering with the supply of water. In large
storage tanks, the outlet shall be at the end
; opposite the inlet to avoid stagnation of the
‘water.
12.7 The outlet pipe shall be fixed 50 to
75mm above the bottom of the tank and
fitted with a strainer, preferably of copper.
12.8 In the case of underground storage
tanks, the design of the tank shall be such
as to provide for the draining of the tank
when necessary and water shall not be
allowed to collect around the tank. The
tank shall be perfectly water-proof and shall
be provided with a cement concrete cover,
having a manhole opening, with a properly
fitting hinged cast iron cover on a leak-proof
cast iron frame.
12.8.1 For jointing steel pipe to a storage
tank, the end of the pipe shall be screwed,
passed through a hole in the tank and secured
by backnuts. both inside and outside. The
pipe end shall be flush with the face of the
inside backnut. For’jointing copper pipe to
?A@1 IX ?LUMNNC SERVICES-SECTION I WATER SUPPLY
steel or copper tank, a connector of non-
ferrous material shall be used. The connector
shall have a shoulder to bear on the outside
of the tank and shall be secured by abacknut
inside.
12.9. The quantity of water to be stored
shall be calculated taking into account the
following factors:
4 hours of supply at sufficiently high
pressure to fill up the overhead storage
tariks;
b) frequency of replenishment of overhead
tanks, during the 24 hours;
c) rate and regularity of supply; and
4 consequences of exhausting storage
particularly in case of public buildings
like hospitals.
If the water supply is intermittent and the
hours of supply are irregular, it is desirable
to have a minimum storage of half a day’s
supply for overhead tanks.
I2.Y.l The particulars of water supply
requirements of residential buildings and of
buildings other than residences are given
under 5.1 and 5.2. It has been stipulated that,
where there is full flushing system, a
minimum of 200 litres per head per day shall
be assured out of which about 45 litres per
day per head may be taken as flushing
requirement and remaining 155 litres for
other domestic purposes.
12.10 When only one communication pipe
is provided for water supply to a building,
it is not necessary to have separate storage
for flushing and sanitary purposes for health
reasons. In such cases when only one storage
tank has been provided, tapping of water
may be done at two different levels (the
lower tapping for flushing) so that a part of
the water will be exclusively available for
flushing purposes [see also 9.4(d)].
13. HOT WATER SUPPLY
INSTALLATIONS
13.1 Design C’orrsideration
13.1.1 G ENERAL --In electric water heating
practice for domestic purposes, the accepted
method is to use storage heaters in which
water is steadily heated up to a predetermined
temperature and stored until required
for use. The heating by eiectricity of a large
quantity of water, such as water required
for a hot bath, within the time normally
taken to run the water into the bath, requires
a heater of too high a rating to be practicable in
normal domestic premises.
IX.,_13
23.1.2 ST O R A G E T E M P E R A T U R E
13.1.2.1 The design of hot water supply sys-
tem and its appliances shall be based on the
temperatures at which water is normally
required for the, various uses, namely:
Sink 6OOC
Hot bath 43O C as run, for use at 41 3 C
Warm bath 37oc
Tepid bath 29.5” C
13.1.2.2 In order to minimize the danger of
scalding, precipitation of scale from hard
water, standing heat losses, risk of steam
formation and the possibility of damage to
porcelain or other fittings and to surface
finishes, a storage temperature of 60cC is
recommended. If storage capacity is limited,
a higher temperature up to 65°C may be
adopted, when soft water is used.
13.1.3 STORAGE C APACITY -The size ofthe
storage vessel is governed by the maximum
short time demand of the domestic premises.
Depending on local conditions this shall be
50-75 litres at 60” C in a dwelling with a bath
tub and 25 litres at 60°C for a shower or a
tap (for bucket supply). The capacity of the
storage vessel shall not be less than 20
percent in excess of the required maximum
short time demand. In larger houses where a
single hot waterbeater is intended to supply
hot water’ to. more than one bathroom or
kitchen or both, the maximum short time
demand shall be estimated and the capacity
decided accordingly. Small electric or gas
storage heaters of 15-25 litres capacity may
be used to supply one or two points of draw
off depending on the use of hot water.
Values ,of volume of hot water required for
a bath, when ,cold water is mixed with it
are given in Table 3.
TABLE 3 VOLUME OF HOT WATER REQUIRED
FOR A BATH WHEN COLD WATER
IS MIXED WITH IT
Storage temperature, 75 70 65 60 55
OC
Percentage of hot 51 55 60 66 73
water required
Quantity of hot water 59 63 69 76 ‘84
in litres required for
a 115-litre bath
13.1.4 RATE OF FLOW-With storage type
installation, the recommended minimum
rates of flow for different types of fixtures
are given in Table 4.
13.1.5 DESIGN OF S T O R A G E VESSEL-
Storage tanks shall be oblong or cylindrical in
shape and shall be installed, preferably with
d4
TABLE 4 RATE OF HOT WATER FLQW .
(C&use 13.1.4)
SL Fixtures R ATE OF
No. FLOW
(I) (2) (3)
litres/min
i ) Bath tub
ii) Kitcheti sink ‘:i:
iii) Wash basin
iv) Shower (spray type) :
the long side vertical in order to assist the
effective stratification or ‘layering’ of hot or
cold water. T e ratio of height to width or
diameter shal Pnot be less than 2 : I. An inlet
!
baffle should preferably be fitted near the cold
inflow pipe in order to spread the incoming
cold water.
13.1.6 M A T E R I A L S F O R S T O R A G E V E S S E L
AND P IPES -Under no circumstances shall
ungalvanized (black) mild steel pipes an@’
fittings, such as sockets, bushes, etc, be used in
any part of a hot water installation, including
the cold feed pipe and thevent pipe. Materials
resistant to the chemical action of water
supplied shall be used in construction of
vessels and pipes. Each installation shall be
restricted to one type of metal only,such as all
copper or all galvanized mild steel. When
water supplied is known to have appreciable
salt content, galvanized iron vessels and pipes
shall not he used. However, it is advisable to
avoid use of lead pipes in making connection
to wash basins.
13.1.7 IMMERSION H EATER INSTALLATION
13.1.7.1 If a domestic storage vessel is to be
adopted to electric heating by the provision of
an immersion heater and thermostat, the
following precautions shall be observed:
4 LOCATioN OF IMMERSION HEATERSwThe
immersion heater shall be mounted with
its axis horizontal, except in the case of the
circulation type which is normally
mounted with its axis approximately
vertical.
50
b) In a tank with a flat bottom, a space of
not less than 75 mm below the immersion
82.5 heater and 50mm below. the cold feed
connection shall be provided to allow for
.95 accumulation of sludge and scale, where
it will. not affect the working of the
immersion heater.
d ‘In a cylindrical’-‘storage vessel with
inwardly dished!.bottom, the inlet pipe
shall be so arranged that the incoming
cold water is not deflected directly into the
hot water zone. The lowest point of the
immersion heater shall. be 25 mm above
the centre line of the cold feed inlet, which,
iu turn, is usually l,OOmm above the
cylinder rim.
NATIDNAL BUILDING CODE OF INDtA
4 LOCATIONOFTHERMOSTAT - Wherethe
thermostat dqs not form an integral part
of the imwrsion. heater, it shall be
mounted with its axis horizontal, at least
50 mm away from and not lower than the
immersion heater.
e) DUAL HEATER INSTALLATIONS --If
desired, the principle of the dual heater
may be adopted. In this case, one heater
and its thermostat shall be installed at a
low level as indicated in (b) and (c). The
second heater and its thermostat shall be
similarly disposed in the upper half of the
cylinder at a level depending on the reserve
of hot water desired for ordinaty domestic
use. The bottom heater shall be under
separate switch cohtrol.
f) CLEARANCEAROUNDSTbRAGEVESSEL-
Adequate clearance shall be provided
between the tank and the cupboard, door
or walls tq allow convenient insertion and
adjustme’lrt of the immersion heater and
thermostat and to give space for thermal
insulation.
13.1.7.2 RATINGOFIMMERSIONHEATERS-
The rating of an immersion heater shall be
f;;;;rtined according to the following
a) proposed hot water storage capacity (the
maximum. with cold water as indicated
in 23.1.3 shall be taken into account),
b) rate of utilization (draw off frequency),
c) permissible recovery period, and
d) inlet water temperature.
13.1.8 THERMAL I NSULATION -The hot
wate: storage vessel and pipes shall be
adequately insulated wherever necessary to
minimize heat l@s. The whole external
surface of the storage vessel including the
cover to the handhole, shall be provided with
a covering equivalent to npt less than 75 mm
thickness of thermal insulating material
having a conductivity of not more than
0.05 W/(m*.“C)/ mm at mean teinperztture
of 50 “C.
13.2 Cold Waler Supf$v to Heateb~
13.2.1 A storage water heater (pressure type)
shall be fed from a c6M tiater storage tank and
under no circumstances connected directly to
the water main, except the type which
incorporates a feed tank with ball valve: and
overflow pipe arrangement (cistern type
heaters) or non-pressure type heaters.
23.2.2 S TORAGE C ISTERNS
13.2.2.1 The storage capacity of acoldV+er
tank shall be at least twice the capacity of the
PART IX P L U M B I N G SERVICES-SECTIOI; 1 WATER SUPPLI (
hot water heater. The capacity of the storage
tank may, however, be 1.5 times when the .
number of heaters connected to one common
tank exceeds 10.
13.2.2.2 The storage tank for supply of cold
water to hot water heaters shall be separate,
if practicable. In the case of a common tank
which also supplies cold water to the fixtures,
this cold water supply connection shall be so
arranged that 50 percent of the net capacity,
worketi out as in 13.2.2.1, shall be available
for supply to the hot water heaters.
13.2.2.3 In the case of multistoreyed build-
ings where a common overhead tank over
the stair/lift well is generally installed, it is
advisable to have one or more’local tanks for
supply to the hot water heaters. This arrange-
ment shall help in reducing the length
of the vent pipes (see Fig. 2).
13.2. .4 In tall multistoreyed buildings
wherrf the static pressure increases with the
height, the total static. pressure on the hot
water heaters on the lowest floor shall not
exceed the rated working pressure of the
hot water heater installed. Should the height
of the building so require, additional tanks
shall be provided on the intermediate floors
to restrict the static head to permissible
limits (see Fig. 3).
13.2.2.5 As an alternative to the arrange-
ments stated in 13.2.2.3 and 13.2.2.4 an
individual storage tank in each flat. may be
provided for supply to hot water heaters (see
Fig. 4).
13.2.3 C OLD W ATER F E E D
13.2.3.1 The feed pipe connecting cold water
iank with the hot water heatcr’shall not be of
less than 20 mm bore and it shall leave the cold
water tank at a point not less than 5 cm above
the bottom of the tank and shall connect into
the hot water heater near its bottom. The feed
pipe shall not deliver cold water to any other
conneCtion, but into thi: h,ot water cylinders
only.
13.2.3.2 In the.case of multistoreyed build-
ings, a common cold water feed pipe inay be
installed, but each hot water heater shall be
provided with a check valve (horizontal type-.
checkyalve shall be preferred to vertical type
for edsy maintenance).
13.2.3.3 Care shall be taken in installing the
piping to prevent air locks in the piping and
negative pressure in the hot water heat=.
Cold water feedpipe shall not be cross
cbnnected with any other source of suppl!
under pressure (see Fig. 2).
ic
IX-l---
 LEGEND
COLD WATER SUPPLY ---_-
OVERHEAD TANK OVER STAIRWELL -
HOT WATER SUPPLY ..w

y OR LIFT SHAFT COMMON FOR

HWH

&l
ALL SHAFTS HOT WATER HEATER
LAVATORY BASIN LB

SHOWER S
i I
HWH WATER TANK OVER PLUMBlNG
VENT SHAFT INDIVIDUAL FOR EACH

6th FLOOR

SUPPLY TO

HWH S ieB
. I I ,

+./J--_
L--..-_-/..-.l ]
..
HWH
S LB

FLOOR

-..--b-MAIN
0VERHEA;‘TANK

Fig.2 Installation fbr 8-Storq,led Building

13.3 Hot Water Piping of not less than 20 mm bore. The vent pipe
shall rise above the water line of the cold
13.3.1 EX~ASSIOS PI P E OR V ENT PIPE water tank by at least IS cm plus 1 cm for
everv 3Ocm height of the water line above
13.3.1.1 Each pressure type hot water heater the Lottom of the heater. The vent shall dis-
or cylinder shall be provided with a vent pipe charge ;lt ;I ICWI higher than the cold tiatcr

1X-l l6 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 c OVERHEAD TANK OVER STAIRWELL OR
LIFT WELL COMMON FOR ALL SHAFTS

SUPPLY TO TANK NO. 1,2,3

WATER TANK OVER PLUMBING SHAFT
HWH f INDIVIDUAL FOR EACH SHAFT
VENTS-

TANK 1 FLOOR 14 -20

TANK 2 FLOOR 7 - 1 3
TANK 3 FLOOR GF - 6

14th TO 20th
FLOOR

HWH
VENTS -
14th FLOOR

liliii!l!l L+7 ]
/

7th TO 13th
L.. I! ..a i FLOOR

HWH s
LB

HWH
VENTS-
= , 7th FLOOR

L_--Ll-_.J
-_-_ L
J
AGROUND F‘LOOR
TO 6th FLOOR

-.-.-
,J LEGEND
COLD WATER SUPPLY ---.
‘-MAIN TO HOT WATER SUPPLY ----
OVERHEAD TANK HOT WATER HEATER HWH
LAVATORY BASIN LB
SHOWER S

Fig. 3 Installation for Al-Stot:I.ed Buiklitt,q

PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 1 WATYII SUPPI.\ ,&,..1

 c OVERHEAD TA N K O V E R S T A I RW EL L
iIR LIFT SHAFT COMMON FOR LEGEND
ALL SHAFTS
COLD WATER SUPPLi --_
HOT WATER SUPPLY ----
HOT WATER HEATER HWH
LAVATORY BASIN LB
SHOWER S

OVERHEAD TANK
h FLOOR

SUPPLY TO

FLOOR

--- A_ MAIF TO OVERHEAD TANK

Fig. 4 Installation for &Storyed Building with Individual Water Tanks

tank and preferably in the cold water tank
supplying the hot water heaters. Care shall
be taken to ensure that any accidental dis-
charge from the vent does not hurt or scald
any passerby or persons in the vicinity.
13.3.1.2 The vent pipe shall be connected
to the highest point of the heater vessel and
it shall not project downwards inside it, as
otherwise air may be trapped inside, result-
ing in surging and consequent noises.
lx.,!8
13.3.2.3 At no point, after leaving the vessel,
shall the vent pipe dip below the level of its
connection with the vessel.
13.3.1.4 A vent pipe may, however, be used
for supply of hot water to any point between
the cold water tank and the hot water
heaters.
13.3.1.5 The vent pipe shall not be provided
with any valve or check valves.
NATIONAL B U I LD I N G CODE 0F INDiA
13.3.2 HO T W ATER HEATERS
13.3.2.1 The common hot water delivery
pipe shall leave the hot water heater near
tts top and shall be of not less than 20mm
bore generally, not less than 25 mm’ bore if
hot water taps are installed on the same
floor as that on which the hot water heater
is situated.
13.3.2.2 Hot .water taps shall be of such
design as wouldcause the minimum friction,
Alternatively, oversized tap may be pro-
vided, such as a 20 mm tap ‘on a 15 mm pipe.
13.3.2.3 The hot water distributing system
shall be so designed as to ensure that the
time lag between opening of the draw-off
taps and discharge of hot water is reduced to
the minimum to avoid wastage of an undue
amount of water which may have cooled
while standing in the pipes when the taps
are closed. With this end in view, a secon-
dary circulation system with flow and return
pipes from the hot water tank shall be used
.where justified. Whether such a system is
used or not, the length of pipe to a hot water
draw-off tap, measured along the pipe from
the tap to the hot water tank or the second-
ary circulation pipe, shall not exceed the
lengths given in Table 5.
TABLE 5 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LENGTHS
OF HOT WATER DRAW-OFF PIPES
SL L ARGEST INTERNAL LENGTH
No. DIAMETER OF P I P E
(1) (2)
i) Not exceeding 20 mm
ii) E;rtdtg 20 nim but not exceeding
iii) Exceeding 25 mm
NOTE-III the case of a composite pipe of different
diameters, the largest diameter is to be taken into consi-
deration for the purpose of this table.
13.3.2.4 Wherever mixing of hot and cold
water is done by a mixing fitting, that is, hot
and cold stop-cocks deliver to a common
outlet of mixed water (that is, showers, basin
or bath supply fittings), the pressure in the
cold and hot water systems shall be equal.
This can be achieved by connecting the cold
water supply from an overhead tank at the
same st ic height as the overhead tank
supply’2 g cold water to the hot water heaters.
In case this is not possible, hot and cold
water should be supplied to the fixtures by
separate supply taps.
13.4 Types of Hot Water Heaters- The
various types of water heaters used for
preparation of hot water are as follows:
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICLS-SECTION I WATER
a), E LECTRIC S T O R A G E H E A T E R S:
i) Non-pressure or open outlet type,
ii) Pressure type,
iii) Cistern type, and
iv) Dual heater type.
b) GAS W ATER H EATERS:
i)’ Instantaneous type, and
ii) Storage type.
13.4.1 The quality and construction of the
different tvnes of hot water heaters shall be
in accordance with accepted stabdards
[1X-1( 1 I)].
13.4.2 Typical arrangements of different
types of water heaters are shown in Fig. 5
and 6.
13.4.3 Requirements in regard to inspection
and maintenance of hot water supply
installations shall be in accordance w.ith 16.1
and 16.4.
14. CLEANING AND DISINFECTION
OF THE SUPPLY SYSTEM
14.1 All water mains communications pipes,
service pipes and pipes used for distribution
of water’ for domestic purposes shall be
thoroughly and efficiently disinfected before
being taken into use and also after every
major repair. The method of disinfection
shall be subject to the approval of the
Authority. The pipes shall also be
(3)
periodically cleaned at intervals, depending
upon the quality of water, communication
m
pipes and the storage cisterns shall be
12 thoroughly cleaned at least once every year in
order tp remove any suspended impurities
7.5 that may have settled in the pipes or the
tanks.
3.0
14.2 Disinfection of Storage Tanks and
Downtake Distribution Pipes-Storage
tanks and downtake pipes shall be disinfected
as in 14.2.1.
14.2. J The storage tanks and pipes shall first
be filled with water and thoroughly flushed
out. The storage tank shall then be filled with
water again and a disinfecting chemical
containing chlorine added gradually while
the tanks are being filled, to ensure thorough
mixing. Sufficient quantities. of chemicals
shall be used to give the water a dose of 50
parts of chlorine to one million parts of
water. If ordinary bleaching powder is used,
the proportions will be 15Og of powder to
1000 litres of water. The powder shall be
mixed with water to a creamy consistency
before being added to the water in the storage
tank. If a proprietary brand of chemical is
used, the proportions shall be as specified by
19
SUPPLY IX-l---
 yOVERHEAD TANK OVERHEAD
TANK -j

OROUND FLOOR

Fig. 6 Electric Water Heater Working in

15.3 Prdtection of Storage Water and Treat--
Fig. 5 Non-pressure Types Installation
Conjunction with Fuel-Fired Boiler
the makers. When the storage tank is full, the
supply shall be stopped and all the taps on
the distributing pipes opened successively
working progressively away from the storage
tank. Each tap shall be closed when the water
discharged begins to smell of chlorine. The
storage tank shall then be topped.up with
water from the supply pipe and wttk more
disinfecting chemical in the recommanded
proportions. The storage tank and pipes shall
then remain charged for at least 3 h. Finally,
the tank and pipes shall be thoroughly,
flushed out before any water is used for
domestic purposes.
15. WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS IN
HlGH ALTITUDES AND/OR SUB--
ZERO TEMPERATURE REGIONS
15.1 Selection and Source-In general, the
site selected for a water source shall be such
as to mipimize the length of transmission line
so as to reduce the inspection and upkeep.
Attempt shall be made, where feasible, to
locate the source_ near the discharge of waste
heat, such as of power plants provided it does
not affect the potability of water.
15.2 Pumping Installations - Pump and
pumping machinery shall be housed mside
well-insulated chambers. Where necessary,
arrangements shall be made for heating the
inside of pump houses. Pump houses, as far
as possible, should be built directly above the
water intake structures.
ment- Where ambient temperatures are ‘so
low as io cause danger of freezing, proper
housing, insulation and protection shalJ be
provided for all processes and equipment. If
necessary, means shall be provided for
proper heating of the enclosure.
15.4 Transmivsion and Distribution - Freez-
ing of the buried pipe may be avoided

,x4-20 NATIDNAL BUILDING CODE DF INlIlA

primarily by laying the pipe below the level of
the frost line; well consolidated bedding of
clean earth or sand, under, around or over
the pipe should be provided. For the efficient
operation and design of transmission and
distribution work, the available heat in the
water shall be economically utilized and
controlled. If the heat which is naturally
present in water is inadequate to satisfy heat
losses from the system, the water shall be
warmed. Where economically feasible,
certain faucets on the distribution system
may be kept in a slightly dripping condition
so as to keep the fluid in motion and thus
prevent its freezing. If found unsuitable for
drinking purposes, such water may be used
for heating purposes. Heat losses shall be
reduced by insulation, if necessary. Any
material that will cat&, _=absoi% or hold
moisture shall not be used for insulation
purposes. Adequate number of break
pressure water tanks and air release valves
shall be provided in the distribution system.
NOTE -The level of frost line is generally found to be
between 0.9 and I .2 m below ground level in the nor-
thern regions of India, wherever freezing occurs.
15.4.1 MATERIALS FOR P IPES -Distribution
pipes shall be made of any of the following
materials conforming to Part V Building
materials:
a) high density polyethylene pipes,
b) asbestos cement pipes,
c) galvanized iron pipes,
d) cast iron pipes, and
e) unplasticized PVC pipes (where it is laid
below frost line).
15.4.2 M A T E R I A L S F O R IN S U L A T I O N O F
P IPES - The normal practice in India is to
surround the pipe with straw, grass or jute
wrapped over with gunny and painted with
bitumen; alternatively, other materials, like
85 percent magnesia, glasswool, etc, may also
be used.
15.4.3 D ISTRIBUTION M ETHODS - Distri-
bution by barrels or tank trucks shall be
employed, where the water requirements are
temporary and small. Utmost care shall be
exercised for preventing the water from being
contaminated by maintaining a residual of
disinfecting agent at all times. Hoses, pails
and the tank shall be kept free from dust and
filth during all periods of operation. Where
winter temperatures are low, making frost
penetration depths greater during the winter,
and where adequate facilities for heating the
water in the distribution system do not exist,
the use of tank trucks or barrels for delivery
of water shall be considered only for cold
weather; during the warm weather, piping
system for seasonal use may be
supplemented.
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION I WATER SUPPLY
15.4.4 In the conventional distribution sys-
tem involving the use of a network of pipe-
lines requiring no auxiliary ,heat, it is essen-
tial that the pipelines are buried well below
the frost line. Adequate facilities for draining
the pipelines shall be provided where there is
a danger of frost.
1 5 . 4 . 5 HOUSE SERVICE CONNECTIQNS-
House service connections shall be kept
operative by the use of adequate insulation at
exposed places extending below the frost
line. Figure, 7 shows a typical arrangement
for providing insulation for house service
connections.
15.5 For detailed information on planning
and designing water supply system peculiar
to high altitudes and/or sub-zero tempera-
ture regions of the country, reference may be
made to good practice [1X-1(12)].
16. INSPECTION AND TESTING
16.1 Testing of Mains Before Commencing
Work - All pipes, fittings and appliances
shall be inspected, before delivery at the site
to see* whether they conform to accepted
standards. All pipes and fittings shall be
inspected and tested by the manufacturers at
their factory and shall comply with the
requirements of this section. They shall be
tested hydraulically under a pressure equal to
twice this maximum permissible working
pressure or under such greater pressure as
may be specified. The pipes and fittings shall
be inspected on site before laying and shall be
sounded to disclose cracks. Any defective
items shall be clearly marked as rejected and
forthwith removed from the site.
16.2 Testing of Mains after Laying- After
laying and jointing, the main shall be slowly
and carefully charged with water by
providing a 25 mm inlet with a stop-cock, so
that all air is expelled from the main. The
main is then allowed to stand full of water for
a few days if time permits, and then tested
under pressure. The test pressure shall be
0.5 N/ mm* or double the maximum working
pressure, whichever is greater. The pressure
shall be applied by means of a manually
operated test pump, or, in the case of long
mains or mains of a large diameter, by a
power-driven test pump, provided the pump
is not left unattended. In either case, due
precaution shall be taken to ensure that the
required test pressure is not exceeded.
Pressure gauges shall be accurate and shall
preferably have been recalibrated before the
test. The pump having been stopped, the test
pressure shall maintain itself without
measurable loss for at least 5 min. The mains
shall be tested in sections as the work of
31
IX-l--=

__-_-----m-v-
SERVICE CONNECTION
Fig. 7 Insulation Details tit Service Connection
laying proceeds; it is an advantage to have
the joints exposed for inspection during the
testing. The open end of the main may be
temporarily closed for testing under
moderate pressure by fitting a water-tight
expanding plug of which several types are
available. The end of the main and the plug
shall be secured by struts or otherwise, to
resist the end thrust of the water pressure in
the mains.
16.2.1 If the section of the main tested ter-
minates into a sluice valve, the wedge of the
valve shall not be used to retain the water;
instead the valve shall be temporarily fitted
with a blank flange, or, in the case of a
socketed valve, with a plug, and the wedge
placed in the open position while testing. End
support shall be given as in 16.2.
16.3 Tesiing of Service Pipes and Fittings-
When the service pipe is complete, it shall be
slowly and carefully charged with water,
allowing all air to escape, care being taken to
avoid all shock or water hammer. The service
pipe shall then be inspected under working
conditions of pressure and flow. When all
draw-off taps are closed, the service. pipe
shall be absolutely water-tight. All ptpmg,
fittings and appliances shall be checked for
satisfactory support, and protection from
damage, corrosion and frost. Because of the
possibility of damage in transit, cisterns shall
be re-tested for water-tightness on arrival at
the site, before fixing.
16.4 In addition to the provisions given
in i6.l. provisions given in 16.4.1 to 16.4.3
M-L**
FROST LINE
_A----- - - - - -
shall also apply to hot water supply
installations in regard to inspection and
testing.
16.4.1 T ESTING OF THE S YSTEM A F T E R
INSTALLATION -After the hot water system,
including the hot water heaters, has been
installed, it shall be carefully charged with
water, so that all air is expelled from the
system. The entire system shall then be
hydraulically tested to a pressure of
0.5 N/mm’ or twice the working pressure,
whichever is greater, for a period of at least
half an hour after a steady state is reached.
The entire installation shall then be inspected
visually for leakages, and sweating. All
defects found shall be rectified by removing
and remaking the particular section.
Caulking of threads, hammering and welding
of leaking joints shall not be allowed.
16.4.2 HOT W ATER T ESTING -After the
system has. been proved water-tight, the hot
water heaters shall be commisstoned by
connecting the same to the electrical supply.
The system shall then be observed for leakage
in pipes due to expansion or overheating.
The temperature of water at outlets shall be
recorded. The thermostats of the appliances
shall be checked and adjusted to
temperatures specified in 13.1.2.1.
16.4.3 E LECTRICAL C ONNECTION - F o r
relevant provisions regarding general and
safety requirements fdr household and
similar electrical appliances, reference may
be made to good practice [1X-1(13)]. The
NATIONAL’ BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 metal work of the water heating appliances and inspection undertaken to ensure that any
and installation other than current carrying maintenance work has not introducedcross-
parts shall be bonded and earthed in connections or any o$her undesirable feature.,
conformity with the good practice [IX- Any addition or alterations to the systems
I( 13)]. It should be noted that screwing of an shall be duly recorded from time to time.
immersion heater into a ,tank or cylinder
cannot be relied upon to effect a low 17.3 Any temporary attachment fixed to a
resistance earth connection, 8 satisfactory tap or outlet shall never be left in such a
separate earthing of heater should be position that back-siphonage of polluted
effected. water may occur into the supply system.
17. GUIDELINES TO MAINTENANCE
17.4 All valves shall periodically be operated
17.1 Storage tanks shall be regularly to maintain free Bmovement of the working
inspected and shall be cleaned out parts.
periodically, if necessary. Tanks showing
signs of corrosion shall be emptied, 17.5 All taps and ball valves shall be water-
thoroughly wire brushed to remove loose tight, glands shall be made good, washers
material (but not scraped), cleaned and shall be replaced and the mechanism of
coated with one of the proprietary spring operated taps and ball valves shall be
bituminous compositions not liable to impart repaired where required.
taste or odour or otherwise contaminate the
water. Before cleaning the cistern, the outlets 17.6 All overflow pipes shall be examined
shall be plugged io prevent debris from and kept free from obstructions.
entering the pipes. Tanks shall be examined
for metal wastage and watertightness after
cleaning. 17.7 The electrical installation shall be
checked for earth continuity and any defects
17.2 ‘Record drawings showing pipe layout or deficiencies corrected in the case of hot
and valve positions shall be kept up to date water supply installations.

AP”\PENDIX A
(Clause 3.2)
APPLICATION F ORM F~RTEMPORARY/PERMANENT SUPPLY
OFWATER/FOR ADDITIONS ND/OR ALTERATIONS FOR
t SUPPLY 08 WATER

I/We. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .hereby
. make application to the+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
for the temporary/permanent supply of water for the following additions and/or alterations
to the water supply requireinents and water fittings at the premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WardNo . . . . . . . . .
Street No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Road/ Streetknown as. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .for
. the purpose
described below and agreed to pay such charges as the Authority may fromtimk to time be
entitled to make and to conform to all their bye-laws andregulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
licensed plumber, has been instructed by me/us to carry out the plumbing work.
Description of the preniises. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..‘.........~...............“.........................
.
Purpose for which water is required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,..............................r..............................................................................................................
The connection/connections taken by me/ us for temporary use, shall not be used byme/us
for permanent Supply unless such a permission is granted to me/us in writing by the
Authority.
I/ We hereby u n d e r t a k e t o give the* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
due notice of any additions or alterations to the above mentioned supply which I/ We may
desire to make. 5,
_-..L_-
*Insert here the name of Zhe Aurhority.

PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTlOFt I WATER SUPPLY 1\.,.23

My/Our requirements. of water supply are as under:
a) I/ We request that one connection be granted for the whole of the premises.
b) I/ We request that, separate connections may be granted for each floor and I/ We under-
take to pay the cost of the separate connections.
c) My/Our probable requireme:rcs for trade purpose are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litres per day and
and for domestic purposes are. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . litres per day.
d) Fr existing supply,is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . litres per day. Our additional requirement of supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . htres per day.
e) The details aa regards proposed additions and alterations in fittings are as follows:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... .. . . . . . . . . ..“...............................~.........~............
Signature of the licensed plumber . . . . . . . . . Signature of the applicant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name and address of the licensed plumber.. ‘Name and address d the applicant . . . . . . . .
............................................... .*.........................a*.-............
Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NOTE I-Please strike out whatever is not applicable.

NOTE 2-The application should be signal by the owner of the premises or his conatitutcd attorney and rLJl k
countersigned by the licensed plumber.

APPENDIX B
(Cluuse 3.3)

FORM FOR LICENCED PLUMBER’S COMPLETIONCERTlFlCATE

Certified that I/we have completed the plumbing work of water connection No..............
for the premises as detailed below. This may be inspected and connection given.
Ward No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Road/Street . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locality.. .........................
Block N o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H o u s e No.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Existing water connection No. (if any)...................
Owned by.......................................
Owner’s address.. ..............................
Applicant’s name............... ......... ............. son of.............................................
Address ..................................................
Situation.................................................
Size of main. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Street
Where main is situated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

,x.,.*4
 I
i 0
!WO
-20

--1O /Hu(GE LM
710

_r
d
LAMINAR FLOW

.r CRW~L ZONE
rTRANSlTION LONE
-5

-2
-5
-

-2

TV.0
‘ml

11 ! ! ! LSO8 I
0.05

-0.0‘
-8,
2
“p
n
I-50

t,,
v,
w
0
g
___- ________-----
_ __;___------ 7-----------
.- ___+,-----

r_
-0.5
-04
______----

-0.2

-0.1 "a
cf
r
i
Y
J I

-0.05
H

9
i
x
Y L

B -0.2
L - P
L _*.A, 4

-0.02 -0.00,

- 00005 so
-0.01 -
.0,2
- oaOO2
- 0305
- OaOI
0.0, 0050-l “,W
WlkES C# VD 04 MElRE SEC,OnO “NITS (FROM SCME@J \
! ‘\ O~OOOM

20

(Al NORMAL PRESSLWEJ AIR TEMP ‘\\

‘\
‘\\
~lunc vlscowY:Y:cos WTS cEw7lsTwsl \
‘\.
‘\ L____--~-~--~,~~ER
b FMI( @ 10 @-----------------’
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
Size of service pipe ..................................................
Size of ferrule..................................................
No. of taps.. .................................... No. of closets..................................................
No. of other fittings and appliances.. ................................................
R o a d c u t t i n g a n d r e p a i r i n g f e e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paid Rs...................(Receipt No.................dated.. ..............) (receipt enclosed)
Dated.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signature of licensed plumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,
.......................................
Name and address of the licensed plumber....
...............................................................

The Authority’s Report

Certified that the communication and distribution pipes and all water fittings have been laid,
applied and executed in accordance with the provisions of bye-laws, and satisfactory arrange-
ments have been made for draining off waste water.
Connection will be made on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. _ The Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX C
( Clause 6.4.1)

UNIVERSAL PIPE FRICTION DIAGRAM

C-l. The universal pipe friction diagram given in Fig. 8 consists of a graph with three linked
nomograms, by means of which it is .possible not only to see at a glance the type of flow
applicable to any particular problem, but also to obtain a solution rapidly and without
calculation.
NOTE-Although every care is taken in the preparation of the nomogram to make it sufficiently accurate, it should be
noted that the nomogram is not necessarily an exact answer for the quantities required. Therefore, it is recommended
that the nomogram may be used to get the graphical solution, though these solutions may, in the nature of thin@, be to a
lesser accuracy than that obtained by actual calculations. If exact and very accurate results are required for any purpose,
these may be obtained by actual arithmetical computations.

APPEiNDIX D
(Clause 6.4.2)

NOMOGRAM OF HAZEN AND WILLIAM’S EQUATION

(see Fig. 9)
D-l. Examples of the use of nomogram are given below:
Example 1
Find the total friction loss in 25 mm4 G.I. Pipe discharging 0.25 l/s in a total length of 200 m.

PAIT I x ~UJMUNC SIIVICES-SECTION I WAI’ER SW?LY A.29

 Procedure
0 *l - 0.26
t Q=O.25 I/s
- 0.3
Pipe 4 = 25 mm

400 Frictional loss from nomogram

=30m/lOOOm
z 70
-60
Total friction loss in 300 m length
-50 8 2 -
= 3OmllOOOm =orn
-40 0 1000
_ 3-
C- Example 2
730
El 5_
r200 a Find suitable diameter pipe to carry I5 II s
-20 % lo- from service line to overhead tank.
'50 I
iz - L 20- Total length of service main = 200 m
8 - z
I -10 Kesidual pressure available at the take off
E - -8 point on supply line is I5 m.
L
- 6 Procedure
ii - 5 - 2-o
a - ii!_
Available head = I5 m
r -4
.J - h_ 50 z 2Qo-
:: -40 2 300- ._ Deduct residual head = 2m
.g 3
_I 500- Deduct IO percent for losses in bends and
IL -2
K
E_ - 30
- 30
specials = 1.3 m
1000=
f Friction head available for, loss in pipe, of
- 1.0
5 -20 .2OOm = 15-2-1.3 = 11.7m
-1
15 Friction head available for loss in pipe of =
t
-0.5
-0*2

-0.3
From the nomogram for a discharge of
- 0.25
15 1;s and friction loss of 58.5mi I OOOm
Fig. 9 Nomogram of Hazen hi Williams diameter of nearest commercial size of
Equation (L’ ~100) pipe is 100 mm diameter.

1x-P .dATlONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 LIST OF STANDARDS

The following list records those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice and ‘accepted
standards’ in the fuIfiIment of rhe requirements of the Code. The iatest aversion of a standard
shall be adopted at the time of enforcement <?f the Code. The standards listed may be used by, the
Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses in the Code.

In the following list the number appearing in the lirst column tiithin parentheses indicates the
number of the references in this part/section

(1) IS : Guidelines for registration of plum-
bers (under preparation)
(2) IS: 2041-1982 Specification tar steel
plates for pressure vessels used at
moderate and low temperature (first
revision)
(3) IS: 28251969 Code of practice for un-
fired pressure vessel
(4) 1s : 3076-1984 Specification for low den-
sity polyethylene pipes for potable water
supplies (second revision) (under print)
IS : 4984- 1978 Specification for high den-
sity ‘polyethylene pipes for potable water
supplies, sewage and industrial effluents
(second revision)
IS:49851968 Specification for unplasti-
cized PVC pipes for potable water
supplies
(5) IS: 783-1959 Code of practice for laying
06 concrete pipes
IS: 3114-1965 Code of practice for laying
of cast iron pipes
IS : 5822- I970 Code of practice for laying
of welded steel pipes for water supply
(6) IS : 2692- I978 Specification for ferrules
for water services (firs/ revision)
(7) IS: 782-1978 Specification for caulking
lead (third revision)
(8) IS: 7634 Code of practice for plastics
pipe work for potable water supplies:
IS : 7634 (Part 1 I)- 1975 Part 1 I Laying
and jointing polyethylene (PE) pipes
lS:7634 (Part Ill)-1975 Part.111 Lay-
ing and jointing of unplasticized PVC
pipes
(9) IS: 804-1967 Specification for rectangu-
lar pressed steel tanks (first revision)
(10) IS : 1703- 1977 Specification for ball
valves (horizontal plunger type)
including floats for water supply
purposes (second revision)
(I I) lS:7558-1974 Code of practice for
domestic hot water installations
(12) IS:6295-1971 Code of practice for water
supply and drainage in high altitudes
and/ or sub-zero temperature regions
(13)IS : 302- 1979 General and safety
requirements for household and similar
electrical appliances wfth revision)

PART I X PLUMSING SCRVKCS-SECTION I WATEJt SUPPLY 1X4-31

NATIONALBUILDINGCODE
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES
SECTION2DRAINAGEANDSANITATION
CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD ... 2

1. SCOPE ... 3
2. TERMINOLOGY ... 3

3. PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF PLANS ... 7

4. LICENSING OF PLUMBERS ‘... 8

5. DRAINAGE AND SANITATION REQUIREMENTS ... 8

6. MATERIALS, FITTINGS AND APPLIANCES ... 11

7. PRELIMINARY DATA FOR DESIGN ... II

8. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ... 18

9. DESIGN ... 29

10. CONSTRUCTION RELATING TO CONVEYANCE OF

SANITARY WASTES ... 31

11. CONSTRUCTION RELATING TO CONVEYANCE OF RAIN

OR STORM WATER ... 32

12. SELECTION AND INSTALLATION OF SANITARY

APPLIANCES ... 32

13. REFUSE CHUTE SYS.TEM ... 32

14. INSPECTION AND TESTING ... 33

1.5. MAINTENANCE . . .3 4

16. COMPLETION CERTIFICATE ... 35

APPENDIX A APPLICATION FOR DRAINAGE OF PREMISES ... 35

APPENDIX B FORM FOR DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK AND

SPECIFICATION OF MATERIALS . . . 36

APPENDIX C FORM FOR LICENSED PLUMBER’S COMPLETION

CERTIFICATE ... 38

PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION 1x-2-

1
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES
S?XTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION

0. FOREWORD
0.1 This section covers the drainage and sanitation requirements of buildings, design,
construction and maintenace of drains inside buildings and from the buildings up to the
connection to the public sewer, cesspool or other watercourse, This section also covers drainage
systems peculiar to high altitudes and/or sub-zero temperature regions of the country.
0.2 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970. The first revision is intended to update the
provisions in the light of the revision of the standards on which it was based. These have been
incorporated in this revision. This revision incorporates the following major changes:

a) Rationalization of definitions.
b) The requirements for fitments for drainage and sanitation in the case of buildings other than
residences have been modified.
cl A table for sanitation facilities in fruit and vegetable markets has been added.
4 A table giving detailed guidance regarding the selectionof plumbing system, depending on the
nature of drainage load in buildings and height of buildings, has been introduced.
e) Provision relating to safeguards to be adopted in single stack system have been amplified.
0 The values of gradients, pipe sizes and the corresponding discharges have been modified.
g) Sizes of manholes/ inspection chambers have been rationalized.
h) The sizing of rain water pipe for roof drainage has been modified to take into account rainfall
intensities and recommend sizes on a more rational basis.
3 Provisions for drainage and sanitation system peculiar to high altitudes and/or subzero
temperature regions of the country have been added.
k) Requirements of the refuse chute system have been covered.
0.3 The information contained in this section is based iargely on the following Indian Standards:
IS: 1172-1983 Code of basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation third (
revbion ).
IS: 1742-1983 Code of practice for building drainage (second revision ).
IS: 5329-1983 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above, ground for buildings(first
revkion)
IS: 6295: 197 1 Code of practice for water supply and drainage in high altitudes and/ or sub-zero
temperature regions.

1x-2-
2 NATmuL BUILDING corn no INDIA
I. SCOPE
1.1 This section covers the design, layout,
construction and maintenance of drains for
foul water, surface writer and subsoil water
and sewage, together with all ancillary
works, such as connections, manholes and
inspection chambers used within the build-
ing and from the building to the connection
to a public sewer or to treatment work,cess-
pool, a soakaway or a watercourse.
I.2 This section does not cover the details
of methods of disposal of sewage in the
absence of public sewer.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this section, the
following definitions shall apply.
A UTHORITY H AVING J URISDICTION -The
Authority which has been created by a statute
and which for the purpose of administering
the Code/ Part may authorize a committee or
an official to act on its behalf; hereinafter
called the ‘Authority’.
B ARREL -This portion of a pipe in .which
the diameter and wall thickness remain
uniform throughout.
B EDDING -The material on which the pipe
is laid and which provides support for the
pipe. Bedding can be concrete, granular
material or the prepared trench bottom.
BENCHING -Sloping surfaces constructed
on either side of channels at the base of a
manhole or inspection chamber for the
purpose of confining the flow of sewage,
avoiding the accumulation of deposits and
providing a safe working platform.
B R A N C H S O I L P I P E ( BSP ) - A p i p e
connecting one or mo’e soil appliances to the
main soil pipe.
B RANCH S OIL W ASTE P IPE ( B S W P ) - A
pipe connecting one oi more soil and/or
waste appliances to the main soil waste pipe
(one-pipe system).
B RANCH V ENTILATING P IPE ( BVP)-A
pipe, one end of which is connected to the
system adjacent to the trap of an appliance
and the other to a main ventilating pipe or a
drain-ventilating pipe. It is fitted to prevent
loss of water seal from a trap owing to partial
vacuum, back pressure, or surging caused by
air movement within the pipe system. It also
provides ventilation for the branch waste
pipe.
PART IX PLUMRING SERVICES-SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
B RANCH W ASTE P IPE ( BWP)-A pipe
connecting one or more waste appliances to
the main waste pipe.
CYAIR -A bed of concrete or other suitable
material on the trench floor to drovide a
support for the pipes at intervals.
C HANNEL -The open waterway through
which sewage, storm water or other liquid
wastes flow at the invert of a manhole or an
inspection chamber.
C H U T E-A vertical pipe system passing
from floor to floor provided with ventilation
and inlet openings for receiving refuse from
successive floors and ending at the ground
floor on the top of the collecting chamben;
C LEANING E Y E-An access opening in a
pipe or pipe fitting arranged to facilitate the
cleaning of obstructions and fitted with
removable cover.
C OLLECTION C HAMBER -A compartment
situated at the lower end of the chute for
collecting and housing the refuse during the
period between two succqsive cleanings.
C ONNECTION -The junction of a foul water
drain, surface water drain or sewer from
buildmg or building with public sewer treat-
ment works, cesspool, soakaway or other
‘water courses.
COVER
a) A removable plate for permitting access
to a pipe, fitting, vessel or appliance.
b) The vertical distance between the top of
the barrel of a burried pipe or other
construction and the surface of the
ground.
C ROWN OF T RAP -The topmost point of the
inside of a tnp outlet.
DEEP MANHOLE -A manhole of such depth
that an access shaft is required in addition to
the working chamber.
DEPTH by MANHOLE -The vertical distance
from the top of the manhole cover to the
outgoing invert of the main drain channel.
D IAMETER -The nominal internal diameter
of pipes and fittings.
D RAIN -A conduct or channel for the
carriage of storm water, sewage or other used
water.
1x-2-
3
 D RAIN V ENTILATING P IPE (DVP)-A pipe
installed to provide flow of air to or from a
drain to prevent undue concentration of foul
air in the d,rain. The main soil pipe or main
waste pipe may serve as drain ventilating pipe
wherever their upper portions, which do not
receive discharges, are extended to the roof
level and let open to air.
D RAINAGE-The removal of,any liquid by a
system constructed for the purpose,
D R A I N A G E W O R K- T h e d e s i g n a n d
construction of a system of drainage.
D ROP C ONNECTION -A length of conduit
installed vertically immediately before its
connection to a sewer or to another drain.
D ROP M ANHOLE -A manhole installed in a
sewer where the elevation of the incoming
sewer considerably exceeds that of the out-
going sewer; a vertical waterway outside the
manhole is provided to divert the waste from
the upper to the lower level so that it does not
fall freely into the manhole except at peak
rate of flow.
F ITTINGS -Fittings shall mean coupling,
flange, branch, bend, tees, elbows, unions,
waste with plug, P or S trap with vent, stop
ferrule, stop tap, bib tap, pillar tap, globe
tap, ball valve, cistern, storage tank, baths,,
water-closets, urinals, boiler, geyser, pump-
ing set with motor and accessories, meter,
hydrant, valve and any other article used in
connection with water supply, drainage and
sanitation.
F IXTURE U N I T-A quantity in terms of
which the load producing effects on the
plumbing system of different. kinds of
plumbing fixtures is expressed on some
arbitrarily chosen scale.
FORMATION -The finished level of the exca-
vation at the bottom of a trench or heading
prepared to receive the permanent work.
FRENCH DR A I N O R R U B B L E DRAIN-A
shallow trench filled with coarse rubble,
clinker, or similar material with or without
field drain pipes.
G ULLY C H A M B E R-The chamber built of
masonry round a gully trap for housing the
same.
G U L L Y T R A P-A trap provided in a
drainage system with a water seal fixed in a
suitable position to collect waste water from
the scullery, kitchen sink, wash basins, baths
and rain water pipes.
HA~~NCHING -Outward .sloping concrete
IX-Z-
4 NATIONAL
support to the sides of a pipe or channel
above the concrete bedding.
H E E L R E S T B E N D O R D U C K- FO O T
B E N D-A bend, having a foot formed
integrally in its base, used to receive a vertical
pipe.
HIGHWAY AUTHORITY -The public body in
which is vested, or which is the owner of, a
highway reparrable by the inhabitants
collectively; otherwise the body or persons
responsible for the upkeep of the highway.
I NLET H OPPER -A receptacle fitting for
receiving refuse from each floor and drop-
ping it into the chute.
iNSPECTION CH A M B E R -A w a t e r - t i g h t
chamber constructed in any house-drainage
system which takes wastes from gully traps
and disposes of to manhole with access for
inspection and maintenance.
I NTERCEPTOR M ANHOLE OR IN T E R C E P T O R
C HAMBER -A manhole incorporating an
intercepting trap and providing means of
access thereto.
INVERT -The lowest point of the internal
surface, of a pipe or channel at any cross-
section.
JUNCTION PIPE-A pipe incorporating one
or more branches.
M A I N S OIL P IPE ( M S P ) - A p i p e
connecting one or more branch waste1 soil
pipes to the drain.
M AIN Sole WASTE P IPE (MSWP)-A pipe
connecting one or more branch soil waste
pipes to the drain.
M AIN V E N T I L A T I N G PIPE ( MVP)-A p i p e
which receives a number of branch
ventilating pipes.
M AIN W A S T E P IPE ( M W P ) - A p i p e
connecting one or more branch waste pipes
to the drain.
M ANHOLE -An opening by which a man
may enter or leave a drain, a sewer or other
closed structure for inspection, cleaning and
other maintenance operations, fitted with a
suitable cover.
M ANHOLE C HAMBER -A chamber
constructed on a drain or sewer so as to
provide access thereto for inspection, testing
or the clearance of obstruction.
N O N- SE R V I C E L A T R I N E - O t h e r t h a n
‘service latrine*.
BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
P IPE S YSTEMS - The system to be adopted
will depend on the type and planning of the
building in which it is to be installed and will
be one of the following:
a) TWO-PIPE SYSTEM (see Fig. 1),---A
discharge. pipe system comprising two
independent discharge pipes one of
which conveys soil directly to the drain,
the other conveying waste water to the
drain through a trapped gully. The
system may also reauire ventilating
pipes.
Fig. I Diagram of Two-Pipe System
b) O N E- PIPE SYSTEM (see Fig. 2)-The
plumbing system in which the waste
connections from sinks, baths and wash
basins, and soil pipe branches are all
collected into, one main pipe connected
directly to the drainage system. Gully
traps and waste pipes are completely
dispensed with but.all the traps of water-
closets, basins, etc, are completely
ventilated to preserve the water seal.
SINGLE STACK SYSTEM (see Fig. 3A and
3B)-One pipe system without trap
ventilation pipe work.
PUFF VENTILATION -The ventilation pro-
vided for waste traps in two-pipe system, in
order to preserve the water seal.
I’AitT‘ IX ‘PLUMSiNG ‘SERVICES-SECTION 2
Fig. 2 Diagram of &e-Pipe System
S A D D L E-A ‘purpose made fitting, 80
shaped as to fit over a hole cut in a seweror
drain used to form connections.
SERVJCE LATERINE -A laterine from which
the excreta are removed by manual agency
and not by water carriage.
S EWER -A pipe or conduit, generally
closed, but normally not flowing full for
carrying sewage or other waste liquids.
SLO.P HO P P E R (SLOP SIN.K ) - A
hoppershaped sink, with. a flushing run, and
outlet sinular to those of a WC pan, for the
recep-tion and discharge of human excreta.
SOAKAWAY -A pit, dug into permeable
ground lined to form a covered perforated
chamber or filled tiiih hard-core, to which
liquid is led, and from which it may soak
away into the ground.
SOPFIT ( CROWN )-The highest point ‘of the
internal surface of a sewer or culvert at any
cross-section.
SOIL PIPE
aj In plumbing, a pipe that conveys the dis-
charge of water-closets or fixtures haviqg
similar functions, with or. without the
discharges from other fixtures.
5
DRAtiAGE AND SANITATION IX-,
 STACK

STACR 1OOmm $

i-ne x. LENBW 1

SOmm PARALLEL B R A N C H
T O EE INlRODUCEO O N L Y
W H E N 8AlH W A S T E WOUD
SWEPT ENTRV SO mm

Is.. F I B . 0 1 PI-l

VERTICAL OISTANCE BETW EEN

WC=Water closet
S=Sink
WB=Wash basin
BUILDING FT=Floor trap
LYLAROE RAOIUS BENDS ?AIN Fl=Floor level

3A Single Stack System 3~ Singe Stack-System

(Western Style) (Indian Practice)

Fig. 3 Main Features of Design of Single Stack.S.wtem

b) -5 standard type of bell and spigot cast S YSTEMS OF DRAINAGE

lton pipe ,of limited strength.
S OIL W ASTE -The discharge from water-
closets, urinals, slop hopper, stable yard or
cowshed gullies and similar appliances.
S UBSOIL W ATER -Water,
naturally in the subsoil.
S UBSOIL W ATER D R A I N
a) A drain intended to collect and carry
away subsoil.
b) A drain intended to disperse into the
subsoil frbm a septic tank.
S URFACE W ATER -Natural water from the
ground surface, paved areas and roofs.
S U R F A C E W A T C R D R A I N- A d r a i n
conveying surface water including storm
water.
C O M B I N E D SYSTEM -A system of drains
or sewers in which foul water and surface
water are conveyed by the same pipes.
S E P A R A T E’ SYSTEM -A system of drains
or sewers in which the foul water and
occurring surface water are conveyed by separate
pipes.
PARTIALLY SEPARATE SYSTEM - A
modification of the separate system in
which part of the surface water is
conveyed by the foul sewers and drains.
T RADE E F F L U E N T -Any liquid either with
or without particles of matter in suspension
which is wholly or in part produced in the
course of any trade or industry, at trade
premises. It includes farm wastes but does
not include domestic sewage.
T RAP -A fitting or
device so designed and
constructed as to provide, when properly

IX-Z-
6 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 vented, a liquid seal which will prevent the
back passage of air without materially
affecting the flow of sewage or waste water
through it.
V ENT P IPE -An open ended pipe, in a hot
water apparatus, for the escape of air and for
the safe discharge of any steam generated.
V ENTILATING P IPE -A pipe in a sanitary
pipework system which. facilitates the
circulation of air within the system and
protects trap seals from excessive pressure
fluctuation.
W ASTE P IPE --In plumbing, any pipe that
receives tne discharge of any fixtures, except
water-closets or similar fixtures and conveys
the same to the house drain or soil or waste
stack. When such pipe does not connect
directly with a house drain or soil stack, it is
called an indirect waste pipe.
W ASTE W ATER ( SULLAGE )-The discharge
from wash basins, sinks and similar
appliances, which does not contain human or
animal excreta.
WAGER SEAL -The water in a trap which
acts as a barrier to the passage of air through
the trap.
3. PREPARATION AND SUBMlSSlON
OF PLANS
3.1 No person shall instal or carry out any
water-borne sanitary installation or drainage
installation or any works in connection with
anything existing or new buildings or any
other premises without. obtaining the
previous sanction of the Authority.
The owner shall make an application in the
prescribed form (see Appendix A) to the
Authority to carry out such a work.
3.2 The application (3.1) shall be accom-
panied by a drainage plan drawn to a scale of
not smaller than I:100 and furnished along
with the building plan (see Part I1 Admini-
stration). The plans shall show the following:
4 Every floor of the building in which the
pipes or drains are to be used;
b) The position, forms, level and arrange-
ment of the various parts of such build-
ing, including the roof thereof;
d All new drains as proposed with their
sizes and gradients;
4 Invert levels of the proposed drains with
corresponding ground levels;
4 The position of every manhole, gully, soil
and waste pipe, ventilating pipe,
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 2 DIIAINACE
rainwater pipe, water-cloLet, . urinal,
latrine, bath, lavatory, sink, trap orother
appliances in the premises proposed to be
connected to any drain and the following
colours are recommended for indicating
sewers, waste water pipes, rain-water
pipes and existing work:
Description of work Colour
Sewers Red
Waste water pipes and Blue
rain-water pipes
Existing work Black
f) The position of refuse chute, inlet hopper
and collection chamber.
3.2.1 In the case of an alteration or addition
to an existing building, this clause shall, be
deemed to be satisfied if the plans as
furnished convey sufficient information for
the proposals to be readily identified with
previous sanctioned plans and provided the
locations of tanks and other fittings are
consistent with the structural safety of the
building.
3.3 In addition, a site plan of the premises on
which the building is to be situated or any
such work is to be carried out shall be pre-
pared drawn to a scale not smaller than 1500
(see Part 11 ,Administration).
3.3.1 The site plan of the building premises
shall show:
a) the adjoining plots and streets with their
names;
b) the position of the municipal sewer and
the direction of flow in it;
c) the invert level of the municipal sewer,
the road level, and the connection level of
the proposed drain connecting the
building in relation to the sewer;
d) the angle at which the drain from the
building joins the sewer; and
e) the alignment, sizes and gradients of all
drains and also of surface drains, if any.
3.3.2 A separate site plan is not necessary if
the necessary particulars to be shown in such
a site’ plan are already shown in thedrainage
plan.
3.4 In respect of open drains, cross-sectional
details shall be prepared to a scale not
smaller than 150 sliowing the ground and
invert levels and any arrangement already
existing or proposed for the inclusion ofany
or exclusion of all storm water from the
sewers.
AND SANITATION 1x-2- -
3.5 The-plans for the building drainage shall
‘ln every case *be a c c o m p a n i e d b y
specifications for the various items of work
involved. This information shall be supplied in
the prescribed form given in Appendix B.
4. LICENSING OF PLUMBERS
4.1 The requirements ‘laid down inPart IX
Plumbing services, Section 1 Water supply
shall apply for licensing of plumbers.
5. DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
REQUIREMENTS
5.1 General-There should be at least one
water tap and arrangement for drainage in
the vicinity of each water-closet or group of
water-closets in all buildings.
5.2 Each family dwelling unit on premises
&butting on a sewer or with a private sewage-
disposal system shall have, at least, one
water-closet and one kitchen type sink. It is
desirable that a bath or shower should be
installed to meet the basic requirements of
sanitation and personal hygiene.
5.4 Residences
5.4.1: Dwellings with. individual convet+
iences shall have at least the following fit-
ments:
a) one bath room provided with a tap;
b) one water-closet; and
c) one nahani or sink either in the floor
or raised from the floor, with a tap.
5.4.2.1 Where only. one water-closet is pro-
vided in a dwelling, the bath and water-closet
shall be separately accommodated.
NOTE -Water-closets, unkas indicated otherwise, shall
be of Indian atyk (squatting type).
5.4.2 Dwellings without individual con-
veniences shall have the following fitments:
a) one water tap with draining arrange-
ment in each tenement,
b) one water-closet and one bath for every
two tenements; and
cl water taps in common bath rooms and
common water-closets.

5.3 All .other structures for human occu-
pancy or use on premises abutting on a sewer
or with a private sewage-disposal system
shall have adequate sanitary facilities, but in
no case less than one water-closet and one
other fixture for cleaning purposes.
5.5 Buildings other than Residences
5.5.1 The requirements for fitments for
drainage and sanitation in the case of build-
ings other than residences shall be in accor-
dance with Tables 1 to 12.

TABLE I OFFICE BUILDINGS

(Ckruse 5.5.1)

FITMENTS F OR M ALE P E R S O N N E L F OR F EMALE P E R S O N N E L

SL
No.

(1) (2) (3) (4)

i) Water-closets* I for every 25 persons or part thereof I for every I5 persons or part thereof
ii) Ablution taps I in each water-closet I in each water-closet
\
I water tap with draining arrangement shall be provided for every 50 persons or
part thereof in the vic,inity of water-closet and urinals.

iii) Urinals Nil, up to 6 persons

I for 7-20 persons
2 for 2 l-45 persons
3 for 46-70 persons
4 for 71-100 persons
From 101 to 200 persons add at the
rate of 3 .percent
For over 200 persons add at the rate of
2 . 5 perceni

iv) Wash.basins _ I for every 25 persons or part thereof ---)

v) Drinking water fountains I for every 100 persons with a minimum of one on each floor

vi) Cleaner’s sinks 1 per floor, Min. preferably in or adjacent to sanitary rooms

*This may include adequate number of water-closets of European style, where desired.
___- -
__ __~_ _~.__

8
1x-2- NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 .I

TABLE 2 FACTORIES
(Clause 5.5. I)
SL FITMENTS F OR M ALE PERSONNEL F OR F EMALE PERSONNEL
No.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
3 Water-closets+ I for I-15 persons I for I-12 persons
2 for 16-35 persons 2 for 13-25 persons
3 for 36-65 persons 3 for 2640 persons
4 for 66-100 persons 4 for 41-57 persons
5 for 58177 persons
6 for 78-100 persons
From IO1 to 200 persons, add From IO1 to 200 persons, add
at the rate of 3 percent at the rate of 5 percent
For over 200 sons, add For over 200 rsons, add
at the rate op”2.5 percent at the rate op”4 percent

ii) Ablution taps I in each water-closet I in each water-closet

I water tap with drainin arrangements shall be provided for every 50
persons or part thaeo f m the vicinity of water-closets and urinals

iii) Urinals Nil, up to 6 persons

I for- 7-20 persons
2 for 21-45 persons
3 for 46-70 persons
4 for 71-100 persons
From IO1 to 200 persons, add
at the rate of 3 percent
For over 200 persons, add
at the rate of 2.5 percent
iv) Washing taps with _ I for every 25 persons or part thereof -
draining arrangements
v) Drinkingwater fountains I for every 100 persons with a minimum of one on each floor

vi) Baths(preferablyshowers) As required for particular trades or occupations

NOTE I -For many trades of a dirty or dangerous character, more extensive provisions are recptired by law.
)WTE 2-Creches, wbae provided, shall be fitted with water-closets (one for IO persons or part thereof) and wash
bins (one for I5 persons or part thereof) and drinking water tap with draining arrangements (one for em 50
persons or part thereof).
*Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if dkred.

5.4 Drainage and Sanitation Requirements 5.6.2.1’ In airports, the following provisions
for Traffic Terminal Stations shall be made in addition to those given in
5.6.2:
5.6.1 Adequate arrangements shall be made
for satisfactory drainage of all sewage and a) For wash basins at the following rates:
waste water. Harmful waste waters,such as Domestic Minimum of 2 each
water containing kitchen waste, shall be airports formalesandfemalcs
satisfactorily disposed of. The drainage shall with the scale of
be so designed as to cause no stagnation at provisions as for
the maximum discharge rate for which the international airports
different units are designed. for increase in
population
5.6.2 The minimum sanitary conveniences
provided at any traffic terminal station, like International 10 for 200 persons
railway station, bus station or bus terminal, airports 15 for 400 persons
shall consist of non-service type latrine one 20 for 600 persons
each for males and for females and onenon- 25 for 1000 persons
service type. urinal for males for a daily
passenger volume up to 300 people. For large b) Shower stalls with wash basins in the
stations and airports, sanitary arrangements enclosure per stall should be provided at
given in Table 13 shall’ apply. the following ~oeations:

PART IX PLlIMUNC SERVICES-SECTION 1 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION ix-b 9

 TABLE 3 CINEMAS, CONCERT HALLS AND THEATRES
(Clause 5.5. I)
SL FITMENTS F OR M ALE PUBLIC F OR F EMALE P U B L I C F OR M ALE S T A F F F OR F EMALE S T A F F
No.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (3 (6)

i) Water-closets I per 100 persons 3 per 100 persons I for l-15 persons I for l-12 persons
up to 400 persons up to 200 persons 2 for 16-X persons 2 for 13-25 persons
For over 400 persons For over 200 persons,
add at the rate of add at the rate of
I per 250 persons 2 per 100 persons
or part thereof or part thereof
ii) Ablution taps I in each water- I in each water- I in each water- I in each water-
closet closet closet closet
water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof
in the vicinity of water-closets and urinals
iii) Urinals for 25 persons Nil, up to 6 persons
or part thereof I for 7-20 persons
2 for 21-45 persons
iv) Wash basins I for every 200 I for every 200 I for l-15 persons I for l-12 persons
;oo;s or part !;e;os or part 2 for 16-35 persons 2 for 13-25 persons

9 Drinking water AI per 100 persons or part thereof

fountain
NO.I’E I -Some of the water-closets may be of European styles, if desired.
NOTE 2-It may be assumed that two-thirds of the number are males and one-third females.

TABLE 4 ART GALLERIES, LIBRARIES AND MUSEUMS

(Clause 5.5. I)
SL FITMENTS F OR M ALE P U B L I C F OR F EMALE PUBHC FOR M A L E F’TAFF F OR F EMALE S T A F F
No.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

i) Waterclosets I per 200 persons I per 100 persons I for I-IS persons I for I-12 rsons
up to 400 persons up to 200 persons 2 for 16-35 persons 2 for 13-24”persons
For over 400 per For over 200 per
sons, add at the sons, add at the
rate of I per 250 rate of I per I59
persons or part persons or. part
thereof thereof
ii) Ablution taps I in each water- I in each water- I in each water- I in each water-
closet closet closet closet
I water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part
thereof m the vicinity of water;losets and urinals
iii) Urinals I per 50 persons _ Nil, up to 6 persons -
I for 7-20 persons
2 for 21-45 persons
iv) Wash basins I for every 200 per- .I for every 200 per- I for l-15 persons I for l-12 persons
sons or part sons or part 2 for 16-35 persons 2 for 13-25 persons
thereof. For over thereof. For over
200 persons, add 200 persons, add
at the rate of I per at the rate of I per
250 persons or part I50 persons or part
thereof thereof
v) Cleaner’s sinka (p- I per floor, Min >
v i ) Drinking f---------------l
per 100 persons or part thereof,->
water fountain
NOTE I -Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if desired.
NOTF 2 ~-- It may be assumed that two-thirds of the number are males ar#d one-third females.

do NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 TABLE 5 HOSPITAL INDOOR PATIENT WARDS
(Clause 5.5.1)
SL FITMENTS FOR MALESAND FE M A L E S
No.
(0 a (3)
i) Water-closets 1 for every 8 beds or part thereof
ii) Ablution taps I in each water-closet plus one water tap with draining arrangements
in the vicinity of water-closets and urinals for every 50 beds or part
thereof
iii) Wash basins 2 up to 30 beds; add I for every additional 30 beds or part thereof
iv) Baths I bath with shower for every 8 beds or part thereof
v) Bedpan washing sinks I for each ward:
vi) Cleaner’s sinks 1 for each ward
vii) Kitchen sinks and dish I for each ward
washers (where kitchen
is provided)
NOTE 1 -Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if desired.
NOTE 2-Additional and special fitments for specific needs of hospitals may be provided.

TABLE 6 HOSPITALS, OUTDOOR PATlENTS WARDS

(Clause 5.5.1)

SL FITMENTS FOR MALES F OR F E M A L E S

No.
(I) (2) (3) (4)
i) Water-closets for every 100 persons or 2 for every 100 persons or
part thereof part thereof
ii) Ablution taps in each water-closet I in each water-closet
water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every
50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water-closets and urinals
iii) Urinals 1 for every 50 persons or -
pan tnereoI
iv) Wash basins I for every 100 persons or I for every 100 persons 01
part thereof part thereof

v) Drinking water fountain 1 per 500 persons or part thereof

NOTE 1 -Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if desired.
NOTE 2 -Additional and special fitments for specific needs of hospitals may be provided.

1) 4 stalls each in the females’ and males’
toilets in the transit/departure lounge.
2) 4 stalls each in the females’ and males’
toilets in the main concourse.
5.6.3 Adequate scavenging arrangements
shall be provided so that each terminal is
kept clear of all refuse. Refuse containers
shall be placed at convenient points.
6. MATERIALS, FITTINGS AND
APPLIANCES
6.1 Standards for materials, fittings and
sanitary appliances shall conform to Part V
Building materials.
7. PRELIMINARY DATA FOR DESIGN
7. I General- Before the drainage system for
a building or group of buildings is designed
and constructed, accurate. information
regarding the site conditions is essential. This
information may vary with the individual
scheme but shall, in general, be covered by
the following:
a) S ITE P LAN (see 3.3)

PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION K-2-11

 TABLE 7 HOSPITALS (ADMINISTRATIVE BUILDINGS, MEDICAL STAFFAND
QUARTERS AND NURSES’ HOMES)
(Chwe SJ.1)
SL RTMENTS FOR ADMINISTRATIVE BUILDINGS FOR MEDICAL STAFF QUARTERS FOR NURSES
No. ( HOSTEL TYPE ) HOMES
* ( HOSTEL TyPE j

be
Personnel Personnd
For Male
Staff
For Female’
Staff
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
9 Water-closets* 1 for every 25 1 for every 15 1 for 4 persons I for 4 persons I for 4 persons
persons or persons or or part thereof
part thereof part thereof
ii) Ablution taps 1 in each water- I in each water- I in each water- I. in each water- I in each water-
closet closet closet closet closet
I water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part
thereof m the vicinity of water-closets and urinals
iii) UrilMiS Nil, up to 6
rsons
p” 7-20 persons
I or
2 for 2145 persons
3 for 670 persons
4 for 71-100 pertins
From 101 to 200
persons, add
at the rate of
3 percent
For over 200
persons, add
at the rate of
2.5 percent
iv) Wash basins I for every 25 I for every 25 I for every 8 I for every 8 I for every 8
persons or persons or persons or persons or persons or
part thereof part thereof part thereof part thereof part thereof
v) Bath (with shower) - I for 4 persons I for 4 persons I for 4-6 persons
or part thereof or part thereof or part thereof
vi) Drinking water
fountains I per lb0 persons or part thereof with a minimum of 1 on each floor

vii) Cleaner’s sinks I e- I per floor, Min I

*Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if desired.

D RAINAGE P LAN (see 3.2) g) Sues01~ CO N DIT IO N:

USE -A description of the use for which
the building is intended and periods of
occupation in order that peak discharges
may be estimated;.
The availability of sewers or other out-
lets;
The nature of the sewage to be carried.
While dealing with sewage from domestic
premises or schools, ,special problems
under this head may not arise; however,
note shall be taken of any possibility of
trade effluents being .discharged into the
pipes at. a future date;
COVER --The depth below ground of the
proposed sewers and drains and the
nature and weight of the traffic on the
grountl above them;
1) The approximate level of the subsoil
water, and any available records of
flood levels shall be ascertained, as
also the depth of the water table
relative to all sewer connections,
unless it is known to be considerably
below the level of the latter;
2) In the caseof deep manholes, this
information will influence largely
the type of construction to be
adopted. The probable safe bearing
capacity of the subsoil at invert level
may be ascertained in the case of a
deep manhole;
3) Where work of any magnitude is to
be undertaken, trial pits or bore-
holes shall be put at intervals along

NRTIONAL lUlLDING CODE OF I N D I A

 TABLE 8 HOTELS
(Clause 5.5. I)
SL FITMENTS F OR RESIDENTLU FOR. PUBLIC Room FOR EON-RESIDENTIAL ST A F F
No.

For Male Staff For Female Staff

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
3 watcr-c1oscts I per, 8 persons 1 per 100 2 per 100 I for 1-15 I for I-12
omitting persons up to persons upto ersons
occupants of ,400 persons 200 persons 2 /zzs 2 Por 13-25
the room For over 400, For over 200, rsons
with attached add at the add at’the 3F or 36-65 3 PZGO
waterclosets; rate of 1 per fate of 1 per I30118 ers0ns
minimum of2 250 persons 100 persons 4 p” or 66-100 4 %or 41-57
if both sexes or part thereof or part thereof persons rsonti
are lodged 5 p”
or 58-77
rsons
6 p”
or 78-100
. persons
ii) Ablution taps 1 in each
. I in each 1 in each I in each 1 in each
watercloset water-closet water-closet water-closet water-closet
1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part
thereof m the vicinity of water-closets and urinals
iii) Urinals I per 50 persons - Nil, up to 6
or part thereof
I PO?%
I?3Olls
2 $
or 21-45
m011s
3 p”
or 4670
4 Yns or 71-100
.persons .
iv) Wash basin I per IO persons 1 per water- I per water- I for I-15 I for I-12
omitting the closet closet rSOlls
wash basins and provided 2 p” or 16-35 2 &?;“5
installed in urinal ersons
the room suite provided 3 !ZZr65 3 Por 26-40
ersons
4 pocfszsfOo 4 Por 41-57
persons
5 Pzs5081s77
rsons
6 I”
or 98-100
persons
VI Baths I pc-r lOpersons - -
omitting occu-
pants of the
room with
bath in suite
vi) Slop sinks 1 per 30
bedrooms;
I per floor, Min
vii) Kitchen sinks and I in each kitchen
dish washers
Non I -Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if desired.
NOTE 2-B mav be assumed that twothirds of the number are males and one-third females.

the line of the proposed sewer or, derived from boreholes. For a.long
drain and the data therefrom tabu- length of sewer or drain,
lated, together with any information information derived from a few trial
available from previous works pits at carefully chosen points may
carried out in the vicinity. In general be supplemented by that obtamed
the information derived from trial from a number of intermediate
pits is more reliable than that boreholes;

PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION

 TABLE 9 RESTAURANTS
!Chzuse 5.5.1)
FITMENTS FOR MALE PUBLIC FOR FEMALE PULILI~ F OR M ALE S T A F F FOR FEMALE STAFF

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

i) WatcrlYoset 1 for 50 seats up 1 for 50 seats up 1 for f-i5 persons 1 for I-12 persons
to 290 seats. For to 200 seats. For 2 for 16-35 pWSOIlS 2 for 13-25 persons
over 200 seats, over 200 seats, 3 for 3665 perx~x 3 for 26-40 persons
add at the rate add at the rate 4 for 66 100 persons 4 for 41-57 persons
of 1 per IOOseatsr of 1 per 100 seats 5 foi 58-77 persons
or part thereof or part thereof 6 for 78-i&? persons
ii) Ablution taps 1 in each water- 1 in each water- 1 in .each water- 1 ioLzh water-
cbsct closet closet
I water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part
thereof m the vicinity of water-closets and urinals
iii) Urinals 1 per 50 seats - Nil, up to 6 persons -
1 for 7-20 persons
Zfor 21-45 persons
3 for 46-70 persons
4 for 71-100 persons
iv) Wash basins f - - 1 for every water-loset provided ,_
v) Kitchen sinks and (- 1 in each kitchen *
dish washers
vi) Sl;p,;sr service 4-1 in each restaurant >

NOTE 1 -Some of the-water-closets may be of European style, if desired.

N OTE 2-11 may be assumed that two-thirds of the number are mala and one-third females.

TABLE 10 SCHOOLS AND EDUCATIONAL INSTITUTIONS

(Clause 5.5.1)
SL FITMENTS N URSERY S C H O O L S E DUCATIONAL I NSTITUTIONS E DUCATIONAL I NSTITUTIONS
No. (NON-RESIDENTIAL ) (RESIDENTIAL )
A
\
' For BoysFor/ For Boys For Girls
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) ( 6 ) (7)
i) Water-closets? 1 per 15 pupils 1 per 40 pUpi!s 1 per 25 pupils I for every 8 1 for every 6
or part thereof or part thcrcpf or part thereof pupils or part pupils or prt
.I
thereof thereof
ii) Ablution taps 1 in each water- I in each water- I in each water- 1 in each water- 1 in each water-
closet closet closet closet closet
J *-ater tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 pupils or part thereof
in the vicinity of water-closets and urinals
iii) Urinals - I per 20 pupils - for every 25
or part thereof .p,u,p,fJ;pr part

iv) Warh basins I for I5 pupils I per 60 I per 40 for every 8 I for every 6
or part thereof Uin 2 Min 2 f;ep;;f or part pupils or part
thereof
v) Baths I bath-sink per 1 for every 8 1 for every 6
40 pupils or part r;$@of or part pupils or part
thereof thereof
vi) Drinking water I for every 50 I for every 50 1 for every 50 I for every 50 I for every 50
fountains pupils or part pupils or par+ r;z;;f or part pupils or part pupils or part
thereof thereof thereof thereof
vii) Cleaner’s sink <-I per floor, Min--------)
*For teaching staff, the schedule of fitments to beprovided shall be the same as in the case of office building
(gee Table 1).
7 Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if desired

IJ~ NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 TABLE II HOSTELS

(Clause 5.5.1)
St. FIT~.KNT~ FOR RESIDENTS AND FOR NON-RESIDENTIAL ROOMS WHEREIN OUTSIDERS
No. RESIDENTIAL STAFF STAFF ARE RECEIVED
, A /\
Tzz?xxx For Males For Females’ _ For Males For Females’
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Water-closets* I for every 8 I for every 6 I for I-15 1 for I-12 I per 100 per- 2 per 100
persons or persons or persons persons sons up to persons
part thereof part thereof 2 for 16-35 2 for 13-25 400 persons up to 200
persons persons For over 400 persons
3 for 36-65 3 for 26-40 persons, add For over
persons persons at the rate 200 persons,
4 for 66-100 4 for 41-57 of I for 250 add at the
persons persons persons or rate of 1
5 for 58-77 part thereof for 100
persons persons or
6 for 78-100 part thereof
persons
ii) Ablution taps I in each I in each I in each I in each I in each I in each
wzter-closet water-closet water-closet water-closet water-closet water-closet
I water tap with draining arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof in
the vicinity of water-closets and urinals
iii) Urinals I for 25 Nil, up to 6 I per 50
persons or persons persons or
part thereof 1 for 7-20 part thereof
persons
2 for 2145
3 pOe?ZO
persons
4 for 71-100
persons
iv) Wash basins I for8 I for6 I for t-15 1 for l-12 I per each I per each
persons or persons or persons rsons water-closet water-closet
part thereof part thereof 2 for 16-35 2 ?e
or 13-25 and urinal provided
persons persons provided
3 for 36-65 3 for 26-40
ersons rsons
4 Por66IO0 4F or 41-57
persons persons
5 for 58-77
rsons
F
6 or 78-100
persons
v) Baths I for 8 persons I for6persons -
or part or part
thereof thereof
vi) Cleaner’s f I per floor. Mm 9
sinks
*Some of the water-closets may be of European style. iidesrrcd

4) Much useful information is .often ascertained from the Authority, if

obtained economically and quickly
by the use of a soil auger;
j)
5) The positions of trial pits or bore-
holes shall be shown on the plans,
together with sections showing the
strata found and the dates on which
water levels are recorded.
h) L OCATION OF O T H E R S E R V I C E S- T h e
position, depth and size of all other pipes,
mains, cables, or other services, in the
vicinity of the proposed work, may be
necessary;
R S -
EINSTATEMENT OF URFACES
Information about the requirements of
the highway authority is necessary where
any part of the sewer or drain is to be
taken under a highway. Those
responsible for the sewer or drain shall be
also responsible for the maintenance of
the surface until permanently reinstated.
The written consent of the highway
authority to break up the surface and
arrangement as to the charges thereof and

PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES--SEC;ION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION ,x_p

 ,
TABLE 12 FRUITANDVEGETABLEMARKETS
(Cluuse 55.1)
FITMENTS REQUIREMENTS
iz
(I) (2) (3)
i) Urinals Not less than 2 for every 50 persons
ii) Water-closets* 2, Min, and an additional I for every 50 persons
iii) Ablution taps 2, Min, and an additional tap for evev 50 persons
iv) Bathing places Suitable numbers with bathing platforms

NOTE I -For layout for regulated market yards for fruit and vegetables, reference may be madeto accepted standards
1X-2(1) t
NOTE 2-Separate and adequate provision of water-closets shall be made for females.
NOTE 3 -Adequate washing places for fruit and vegetables shall be provided.
*Some of the water-closets may be of European style,if desired.

tin this sectionwhere reference is made to ‘accepted standards, in relation to material specification, testing or other
information, the appropriate document listedat the end of this section may be used asa guide to the interpretation of the
term.

- - . -- - - - ~ _____- - - - - - - -

TABLE I3 SANITARYREQUIREMENTS FOR LARGESTATIONSANDAIRPORTS

(Cluuse 5.6.2)
SL PLACE WC F OR M ALES WC FOR FEMALES U RINALS FOR M ALES
No. ONLY

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

i) Junction stations, inter- 3 for first I 000 persons for first I 000 persons 4 for every I 000 persons
mediate stations and and I for every subse- and 1 for every ad- and I for every ad-
bus stations quent I 000 persons ditional I 000 persons ditional I 000 persons

ii) Terminal stations and 4 for first I OC$l persons for first I 000 persons 6 for first I 000 persons
bus terminals and I for every and 1 for every and I for every
subsequent I 000 person.9 subsesquent 2 OGO persons additional I 000 persons
or part thereof persons or part thereof or part thereof

iii) Domestic airports, Min 2* 4*

for 200 persons
for 400 persons ; I;
for 600 persons I2
for 800 persons I6 ::
for I 000 persons I8 29

iv) International airports

for 200 persons 6 8
for 600 persons 12
‘for I 000 persons I8
N OTE -Separate provision shall be made for staff and workers at these traffic terminal stations.

*At least one Indian style water-closet shall be provided in each toilet. Assume 60 males to 40 females in any area.

the method and type. of surface traffic as may be necessary. Access to

reinstatement shall always be obtained properties along the road shall always be
before any work is commenced; maintained and adequate notice shall be
k) DIVERSION AND C O N T R O L O F T R A F F I C given to the occupiers bf any shops or
--In cases where sewers cross roads or business premises, particularly if
obstruction is likely;
foot-paths, cooperation shall be
maintained with the police and m) During the period of diversion, neces-
Authorities regarding the control and sary danger lights, red flags, diversion
diversion of vbhicular and/ or pedestrian boards, caution boards, watchmen,-etc,

IX-2-16 NATIONAL BUILDING tiODE Ok INDIA

 shall be provided as required by the
Authority;
W AYLEAVES ( EA S E M E N T S)-The indivi-
n)
dual or authority carrying out the work is
responsible for negotiating wayleaves
where the sewer crosses land in other
ownership. The full extend and condi-
tions of such wayleaves shall be made
known to the contractor and his
employees, and prior notice of
commencement of excavation shall
always be given to the owners concerned,
and cooperation with them shall be
maintained at all stages. Where sewers
run across fields or open ground, the
exact location of manholes shall be
shown on wayleaves or easement plans.
The right of access to manhole covers and
the right to maintain the sewer shall be
specifically included in any wayleave. or
easement arrangements which may be
made with the owner of the lknd; and
P) D A M A G E T O B U I L D I N G S A N D STRUC-
TURES -When sewer trenches have to be
excavated near buildings or walls a joint
inspection with the owners of the
property shall be. made to establish
whether any damage or cracks exist
before starting the work, and a properly
authenticated survey and record of the
condition of buildings. likely to be
affected shall be made. Tell tales may be
placed across outside cracks and dated,
and kept under observation.
Unretouched photographs taken by an
independent photographer may provide
useful evidence.
7.2 Drainage into a Public Sewer-Where
public sewerage is available, the following
information is particularly necessary and
may be obtained from the Authority:
4 the position of the public sewer or sewers
in relation to the proposed buildings;
b) the invert level of the public sewer;
cl the system on which the public sewers
are designed (combined, separate or
partially separate), the lowest level at
which connection may be made to it, and
the Authority in which it is vested;
d) the material of construction and condi-
tion of the sewer if connection is not to be
made by the Authority;
e) the extent to which surcharge in the
sewer may influence the drainage scheme;
0 whet her the connection to the public
sewer 1s made, or any part of the drain
laid, by the Authority, or whether the
owner is responsible for this work; if the
latter, whether the Authority imposes any
special conditions;
PART IX PLUMBING SEWICES-SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
g) whether an intercepting trap is required
by the Authority on the drain near the
boundary of the curtilage; and
h) where manholes are constructed under
roads, the approval of the highway
authority to the type of cover to be fitted
shall be obtained.
7.3 Orher Metho& of @kposal of Sewage
7.3.1 Where discharge into a public sewer is
not possible, the drainage of the building
shall be on a separate system. Foul water
shall be disposed of by adequate treatment
approved by the Authority on the site. The
effluent from the plant shall be discharged
into a natural watercourse or on the surface
of the ground or disposed of by subsoil
dispersion preferably draining to a suitable
outlet channel.
7.3.2 In the case of dilution into a natural
stream course, the quality of the effluent shall
conform to accepted standards [1X-2(2)] and
the requirements of the Authority controlling
the prevention of pollution of streams shall
also be observed.
7.3.3 In the case of subsoil dispersion, the
requirements of the Authority for water
supply shall be observed to avoid any
possible pollution of local water supplies or
wells.
7.3.4 The general subsoil water level and the
subsoil conditions shall be ascertained,
including the absorptive capacity of the soil.
7.3.5 A subsoil dispersion is not desirabk
near a building or in such positions that the
ground below the foundations is likely to be
affected.
7.3.6 Where no other method of disposal is
possible, foul water may be collected and
stored in impervious covered cess 001s and
arrangements made with the AutKority for
,satisfactory periodical removal. and convey-
ance to a disposal works.
7.3.7 Under the separate system, drainage
of the ‘building shall be done through septic
tanks of different sizes or by stabilization
ponds or by any other methods approved by
the Authority.
7.3.7.1 For detailed information on the
design and construction of septic tanks and
waste stabilization ponds, reference may be
made to good practice [IX-2(j)]*.
*In this kction where I+&~CIKC is I&C to ‘pod pm
tict’ in relation to design, testing construcuon proce-
dures or other information, the appropriate document
listed at the end of this section may be used as a guide to
the interpretation of this term.
1x-z-- e
7.4 Disposal o/Surface and Subsoil Waters-
All information which may influence the
choice of methods of disposal of surface
and/or subsoil waters shall be obtained. In
the absence of surface water drainage system,
and if practicable and permissible, disposal
into a natural water-course or soakaway may
be adopted. The location and flood levels of
the water course as also the requirements
of the Authority controlling the river or the
waterway shall be ascertained._
‘8. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
8.2 Aim--In designing. a drainage system
for an individual building or a housing
colony, the aim shall be to provide a system
of self-cleaning conduits for the conveyance
of foul, waste, surface or subsurface waters
and for the removal of such wastes speedily
and efficiently to a sewer or other outlet
without risk of nuisance and hazard to
health.
8.1.1 To achieve this aim, a drainage system
shall satisfy the following requirements:
a) rapid and efficient removal of liquid
wastes without leakage;
b) prevention of access of foul gases to the
building and provision for their escape
from the system;
C) adequate and easy access for clearing
obstructions;
4 prevention of undue external or internal
coriosion, or erosion of joints and
protection of materials of construction;
and
e) avoidance of air locks, siphonage,
proneness to oblruction, deposit and
damage.
8.1.2 The realization of an economical
drainage system is added by compact group-
ing of fitments in both horizontal and verti-
cal directions. This implies that if care is
taken and ingenuity brought into play when
designing the original building or buildings
to be drained, it is possible to group the
sanitary fittings and other equipment
requiring drainage; both in vertical and
horizontal planes, as to simplify the drainage
system and make it most economical.
8.2 Luyoul
8.2.1 G ENERAL -Genersilly, rain-water
shall be dealt with separately from sewage
and sullage. Sewage and sullage shall be
connected to sewers. Storm water from the
courtyard may be connected to the sewer
where it is not possible to drain otherwise
after obtaining permission of the Authority.
IX-28
The layout shall be as simple and direct as
practicable. Consideration shall be given to
alternative layouts so as to ensure that the
most economical and practical solution is
adopted. The possibility of alterations shall
be avoided by exercising due care and fore-
thought.
8.2.2 P ROTECTION A GAINST V ERMIN AND
D IRT -The installation of sanitary fittings
shall not introduce crevices which are not
possible to inspect and clean readily.
Pipes, if not embedded, shall be run well
clear of the wall. Holes through walls to take
pipes shall be made good on both sides to
prevent entry of insects. Materials used for
embedding pipes shall be rodent-proof.
Passage of rodents from room-to-room or
from floor-to-floor shall be prevented by
suitable sealing. The intermediate lengths of
ducts and chases shall be capable of easy
inspection. .Any unused drains, sewers, etc,
shall be demolished or filled in to keep them
free from rodents.’
8.2.3 C H O I C E OF P L U M B I N G S Y S TE M -
Where the sullage from baths and kitchens
can be dealt with separately for use in
gardening or any other such purposes, the
two-pipe system is advantageous. Obviously,
the one-pipe system is more economical and
has application where all types of waste
waters are taken in a common sewer line to
the place of disposal or treatment. Both these
systems are fully ventilated by a system of
ventilating pipe. However, these days the
single-stack system ( without any vent pipe
system), where the stack itself is made to
serve the vent requirements also by
restricting the flow in the stack, is being used.
This system is recommended with 100 mm
dia stack for up to 5-storey buildings. Not
m&e than two toilet units can discharge to
the single stack at each floor level. For any
different case, the permission of the local
Authority shall be obtained. In high-rise
buildings, a partially ventilated one-pipe
system is being used where the vent stack is
connected to the drainage stack or the WCs
at each or alternate floors. The safeguards for
the single stack system are stipulated
in 8.2.3.Z. The fully ventilated system does
not demand any special safeguards. For
detailed information regarding design and
installation of soil, waste and ventilating
pipes, reference may be made to good
practice [1X-2(4)].
8.2.3.1 SAFEGUARDS FOR SINGLE-STACK
SYSTEM
a) as far as practicable, the fixtuies on a
floor shall be connected to stack in order
of increasing discharge rate in the down-
ward direction;
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
b) the vertical distance between the waste
branch (from floor trap or from the
individual appliance) and the soil branch
connection, when soil pipe is connected
to stack above the waste pipe, shall be not
less than 20 cm;
cl depth of water seal traps for. different
fixtures shall be as follows;
Water closets 50 mm
Floor traps 50 mm
Other fixtures directly
connected to the stack
1) Where attached to branch 40 mm
waste pipes of dia 75 mm
or more
2) Where attached to branch 75 mm
waste pipes of less than
75 mm dia
NOTE-When connection is made through floor trap,
no separate seals are required for individual fuctur&
4 branches and stacks which receive
discharges from WC pans should not be
less than 100 mm, except where the outlet
from the siphonic water closet is80mm,
in which case a branch pipe of 80mm
may be used; for outlet of floor traps
75 mm dia pipes may be used;
e) the horizontal branch distance for fix-
tures from stack, bend(s) at the foot of
stack to avoid back pressure as well as
vertical distance between the lowest con-
nection and the invert of drain shall be as
shown in Fig. 3A; and
for tall buildings, ground floor applian-
ces are recommended to be connected
directly to manhole/ inspection chamber.
8.2.4 ADDITIONAL R EQUIREMENTS -The
pipes shall be laid in straight lines as far as
possible in both vertical and horizontal
planes. Anything that is likely to cause
irregularity of flow, such as abrupt changes
of direction, shall be avoided. No bends and
junctions whatsoever shall be permitted in
sewers except at manholes and inspection
chambers.
8.3 Choice of Material
8.3.1 S ALT G LAZED S T O N E W A R E
PIPES -For all sewers and drains in all soils,
except where supports are required as in
made-up ground, glazed stoneware pipe shall
be used as far as possible in preference to
other types of pipes; they are particularly
suitable where acid effluents or acid subsoil
conditions are likely to be encountered.,Salt
glazed stoneware. pipes shall conform to
accepted standards [1X-2(5)].
P ART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SEChON 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
8.3.2 C E M E N T C ONCRETE PIPES -When
properly ventilated, cement concrete pipes
with spigot and socket or collar joints present
an alternative to glazed stoneware sewers of
over 15Omm diameter. These shall not be
used to carry acid effluents or sewage under
conditions favourable for the production of
hydrogen sulphide and shall not be laid in
those subsoils which are likely to affect
adversely the quality or strength of concrete.
Owing to the longer lengths of pipes avail-
able, the joints would be lesser in the case of
cement concrete pipes. Cement concrete
pipes may be used for surface water drains in
all diameters. These pipes shall conform to
accepted standards [1X-2(6)].
8.3.3 C AST IRON P IPES -Cast iron pipes
shall be used:
4 in bed or unstable ground where soil
movement is expected;
b) in made-up or tipped ground;
cl to provide for increased strength where a
sewer is laid at insufficient depth, where it
is exposed or where it has to be carried on
piers or above ground;
4 under buildings and where pipes are
suspended in basements and like situa-
tions;
e) in reaches where the velocity is more than
2.4 m/s; and
f-J for crossings of watercourses.
NOTE --In difficult foundation condition such as in the
case of black cottdn soil, thecast iron pipes shall be used
only when suitable supporting arrangements are made.
8.3.3.1 It shall be noted that cast iron pipes
even when given a protective paint are liable
to severe external corrosion in certain soils.
Among such soils are:
a) soils permeated by peaty waters; and
W soils in which the subsoil contains appre-
ciable concentrations of sulphates. Local
experiences shall be ascertained before
cast iron pipes are used where corrosive
soil conditions are suspected. Where so
used, suitable measures for the protec-
tion of the pipes may be resorted to as an
adequate safeguard.
8.3.3.2 Cast iron pipes shall conform to
accepted standards [1X-2(7)].
8.3.4 ASBESTOS C EMENT P IPES -Asbestos
cement pipes are commonly used for house
drainage systems and they shall conform to
accepted standards [1X-2(8)]. They are not
recommended for underground situations.
However, asbestos cement pressure pipes
conforming to accepted standards [ IX-Z(X)]
1x-2.
19
may be used in underground situations also,
provided they are not .subject to heavy
superimposed loads. These shall not be used
to carry acid effluents or sewage under
conditions favourable for the production of
hydrogen sulphide and shall not be laid in
those subsoils which are likely to affect
adversely the quality or strength of asbestos
cement pipes. Where so desired, the life of
asbestos cement pipes may be increased by
lining inside of the pipe with suitable coatings
like epoxy/ polyester resins, etc.
8.3.5 LEAD APES-Branch soil pipes from
fittings to main- soil pipes and’ branch waste
pipes from fittings to main stack and branch
anti-siphonage pipes may be of lead and shall
conform to accepted standards [ 1X-2(9)].
8.3.6 PVC PIPES - Unplasticized PVC pipes
may ,be used for drainage purposes; however,
where hot water discharge is anticipated, the
wall thickness shall be minimum 3 inm irres-
pective of the size and flow load.
NOTE -Where possible, high density polyethylene
pipes (HDPE) and PVC pipes may be used for drainage
and sanitation purposes, depending upon the suitability.
8.4 Drainage Pipes
8.4.2 Drainage pipes shall be kkpt clear of
all other services. Provisions shall be made
during the construction of the building for
the entry of the drainage pipes. In most cases
this may be done conveniently by building
sleeves or conduit pipes into or under the
structure in appropriate positions. This will
facilitate the installation and maintenance
of the services.
8.4.1.1 Where soil and ventilating pipes are
accommodated in ducts, access to cleaning
eyes shall be provided. Any connection to a
drain shall be through a gully with sealed
cover to guard against ingress of sewer gas,
vermin or backflow. Trenches and subways
shall be ventilated, preferably to the open
air.
8.4.1.2 All vertical soil, waste, ventilating
and anti-siphonage pipes shall be covered on
top with a copper or heavily galvanized iron
wire dome or c&t iron terminal guards. All
cast iron pipes which are to be painted
periodically shall be fixed suitably to the wall
to give a minimum clearance of 5 cm.
NOTE -Asbestos cement cowls nray be used in case
as!xstos cement pipes are used as soil pips.
8.4.1.3 Drainage pipes shall be carried to a
height above the buildings as specified for
ventilating pipe (see 8.4.4).
8.4.2 SOIL PIPES --A soil pipe conveying to
a drain any solid or liquid filth shall be
circular and shall have a minimum diameter
of 1OOmm.
8.4.2.1 Except where.it is imeracticable, the
soil pipe shall be situated outside the build-
ing or in suitably designed pipe shafts and
shall be continued upwards without
diminution of its diameter, and (except
where it is unavoidable) without any bend or
angle, to such a height and position as to
afford by means of its open end a safe outlet
for foul air. The position of the open end
with its covering shall be such as to comply
with the conditions set out in 8.4.4 relating to
ventilating pipe. Even if the pipes are laid in
external chases, the soil pipes shall not be
permitted on a wall abutting a street unless
the Authority is satisfied that it is
tinavoidable. Where pipe shafts are provided,
the cross-sectional area shall be such as to
allow free and unhampered access to the
pipes to be installed in the shaft and in no
case shall the cross-section be less than a,
square of one metre side. All pipe shafts shall
be provided with an access door at ground
level and facilities for ventilation. ’
8.4.2.2’Soil pipes, whether inside or outside
the building, shall not be connected with any
rain-water pipe and there shall not be any
trap in such soil pipe or between it and any
drain with which it is connected.
8.4.2.3 Soil pipes shall preferably be of cast
iron. Asbestos cement building pipes may
also be used as soil pipes only above ground
level.
8.4.2.4 The soil pipe shall be provided with
heel rest bend, which shall rest on sound foot-
ing. It shall be fixed at least 5 cm clear of the
finished surface of the wall by means of a
suitable clamps of approved type.
8.4.3 W ASTE P IPES -Every pipe in a build-
ing for carrying off the waste or overflow
water from every bath, wash basin or sink to
a drain shall be of 32 to 50 mm diameter, and
shall be trapped immediately beneath such
wash basins or sink by an efficient siphon
trap with adequate means for inspection and
cleaning. Such traps shall be ventilated into
the external air whenever such ventilation is
necessary to preserve the seal of the trap.
Waste pipes, traps, etc, shall be constructed
of iron, lead, brass, stoneware, asbestos
cement or other approved material. The
overflow pipe from wash basins,. sinks, etc,
shall be connected with the waste pipe
immediately above the trap. Vertical pipes
carrying off waste water shall have a
minimum diameter of 75mm.
NOTE - Whenever wash basins and sinks have in-built
overflow arranpmnts, there is no need to provide over-
flow pipes in such cases.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
4
 8.4.3.1 Every pipe in a building for carrying
off Gaste water to a drain shall be taken
through an external wall of the building.by
the shortest practicable line, and shall
discharge below the grating or surface box of
the chamber but above the grating of a
properly. trapped gully. The waste pipe shall
be continued upwards without any
diminution in its diameter and (except when
unavoidable ) without any bend or angle, to
such a height and position as to afford by
means of the open end of the waste pipe, a
safe outlet for foul air, the position of the
open end and its covering beink such as to
comply with the condition.
8.4.3.2 Except where it is impiacticable, the
commdn waste pipe shall be situated outside
the building and’shall be continued upwards
without diminution of its diameter (except
where it is unavoidable ) without any bend or
angle being formed to such a height and
position as to afford by means of the open
end a safe outlet for foul air, the position of
the open end and the covering thereat being
such as to comply with the conditions set out
in 8.4.4.
8.4.3.3 The waste pipe shall be firmly
attached to the wall, at least 5 cm clear of it.
If the waste pipe is of cast iron, the pipes shall
be secured to the walls with properly fixed
holder bats or equally suitable and efficient
means.
8.4.4 VENTILATING PIPES
8.4.4.1 Ventilating pipes should be so
installed that water can not be retained in
them. They should be fixed vertically. When-
ever possible; horizontal runs should be
avoided. Ventilating pipe shall be carried to
such a height and in such a position as to
afford by means of the open end of such pipe
or vent shaft, a safe outlet for foul air with
the least possible nuisance.
8.4.4.2 The upper end of the main ventilat-
ing pipe may be continued to the open air
above roof level as a separate pipe, or it may
join the MSP and/or MWP above the floor
level of the highest appliance. Its lower end
may be carried down to join the drain, at a
point where air relief’ may always be
maintained.
8.4.4.3 Branch ventilating pipes should be
connected to the top of the BSP and BWP
between 75 mm and 450mm from the crown
of the trap.
8.4.4.4 Tha, ventilating pipe shall always be
taken to a point 150 cm above the level of the
eaves or flat roof or terrace parapet
whichever is higher or the top of any window
~.uw ix rummmc SERYICW--SEC~JON 2 DRAINAGE ANO SANITATION
_.
within a horizontal distance of 3 m. The le&. f
dimension shall be taken as a minimum and1
local conditions shall be taken into account.
The upper end of every ventlating pipeshal
be protected by means of a cowl.
8.4.4j In case the adjoining building is
taller, the ventilating pipe shall be carried
higher than the roof of the adjacent building,
wherever it is possible.
8.4.4.6 SIZES
a) The building drain ventilating pipe shall
be of not less than 75 mm diameter.
When, however, it is used as MSP or
MWP, the upper portion, which does
not carry discharges, shall not be of
lesser diameter than the remaining
portion;
b) The diameter of the main ventilating
pipe shall not be less than 50mm;
4 A branch ventilating pipe on a waste
pipe in both one-and two-pipe sy’stems
shall be of not less. than twethirds the
diameter of the branch waste ventilated
subject to a minimum of 25 mm; and
4 A branch ventilating pipe on a soil pipe
in both one-and two-pipe systems shall
be not less than 32mm in diameter.
8.5 Manholes-At every change of align-
ment, gradient or diameter of a drain, there
shall be a manhole or inspection chamber.
Bends ‘and junctions in the drains shall be
grouped together in manholes as far as possi-
ble. The spacing of manholes in any pipe may
be as follows:
Pipe Dia Spacing
mm m
up to 300 45
301 to 500
501 to 900 ;
Beyond 900 Any interval depending
upon local conditions and
as approved by the
Authority
8.5.1 Where the diameter of a drain is in-
creased, the crown of the pipes shall be fixed
at the same level and the necessary slope
given in the invert of the manhole chamber.
In exceptional cases and where unavoidable,
the crown of the branch sewer may be fixed
at a lower level, but in such cases the peak
flow level of the two siwers shall be kept the
same.
8.5.2 Chambers shall be of such size as will
allow necessary examination or clearance of
drains. The size of manholes shall be adjusted
to take into account any increase in ,the
Aumber of entries to the manhole. The 8.5.3 The access shaft shall be corbelled
minimum internal sizes of chambers inwards on three sides at the top to reduce its
[t;;;en faces of masonry) shall be as size to that of the cover frame to be fitted or
alternatively the access shaft shall be covered
a) For depth of 0.8 X 0.8 m over by a reinforced concrete slab of suitable
1 m or less dimensions with an opening for manhole
b) For depths 1.2 X 0.9m cover and frame.
between
I m and 8.5.4 The manhole shall be built on a base
1.5m of concrete of a thickness of at least15.cm
c) For depths. Circular chambers with a for manholes up to 1 m in depth, .at least
1.5m and minimum diameter of 20 cm for manholes from 1 to 2 m: deep and
above 1.4m or rectangular at least 30 cm for manholes of greater depth,
chambers with minimum unless the structural design demands higher
internal dimensions thickness.
of 1.2X0.9m
are recommended. 8.5.5 The thickness of walls shall be not less
NOTE I -In adopting the above sizes of chambers, it
than 20 cm ( or one brick ) up to 1.5 m depth
should be ensured that these sizes accord with full or half and 30 cm ( or one and a half brick) for
bricks with standard thickness of mortar joints so as to depths greater than 1.5 m. The actual
avoid wasteful cutting of bricks. thickness in any case shall be calculated on
NOTE 2-The sires of the chambers may be adjusted to
the basis of engineering design. Typical
suit the availability of local building materials and sections of the manholes are illustrated in
economics of construction. Fig. 4, 5 and 6.

I I 'II I
RENDERING WITH
CEMENT MORTAR I:2
/ +LOPE I IN 6

DETAIL OF BENCHING

i 1; I’*
SECTIONAL PLAN AT ZZ
RCC SLAB v SOcmDlAl
7

SECTION XX SECTION Y Y
NOTE - Wall thicknesses have been indicated in brick lengths to the provide forpse of modular bricks or traditional brii.
In the figure, B=one brick length, I.5 B=one and a half brick length, etc.
Fig. 4 Details of Manhole (Depths I m and Below)

1x-P NATIONAL BUILDING CDDC. OF INDIA

 RENDERING WITH
CEMENT MORTAR I:2
rSLOPE I IN 6

i._______, T_____---J
DETAIL OF BENCHING,
LtL

SECTIONAL PLAN AT ZZ

f l5cm

SECTION XX SECTION YY
NOTE _ Wall thicknesses have been indicated in brick lengths to provide for use of modular bricks or traditional bricks. In
the figure, B = one brick length, 1.5 B = one and a half brick length, etc.
Fig. 5 Details of Manhole (Depths Between 1 axed I.Sm)
8.5.6 D ROP M A N H O L E S -Where it is suitably rounded off. The branch channels
uneconomic or impracticable to arrange the shall also be similarly constructed with
connection within 60cm height above the respect to the benching, but at their junction
invert of the manholes, the connection shall with the main channel an appropriate fall
be made by constructing a vertical shaft suitably rounded off in the direction of flow
outside the manhole chamber, as shown in in the main channel shall be given. Channels
Fig. 7. If the difference in level between the shall be rendered smooth and benchings shall
incoming drain and the sewer does not have slopes towards the channel.
exceed 60 cm, and there is sufficient room in
the manhole, the connecting pipe may be 8.5.8 Rungs shall be provided in all
directly brought through the manhole wall manholes over 0.8 m in depth and shall be of
and the fall accommodated by constructing cast iron conforming to accepted standards
a ramp in the benching of the manhole. [1X-2( IO)]. These rungs may be set staggered
in two vertical ru,ngs which may be 38 cm
8.5.7CdNNEl.S -These shail be semi-circu- apart horizontally. The top rung shall be
lar in the bottom half and of diameter equal 45cm below the manhole cover and the
to that of the sewer. Above the horizontal lowest not more than 30cm above the
diameter, the sides shall be extended benching.‘The size of manhole covers shall be
vertically to the same level as the crown of such that there shall be a clear opening of at
the outgoing pipe and the top edge shall be least 50cm in diameter for manholes
Y2
IYJ
P A RT’ IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SAiUlTATlON 1x-z. -
 RENDERING WITH
CEMENT MORTAR I:2
SLOPE I IN 6

DETAIL OF BENCHING
L ---em -__-__-__-__- _I
Y
k.

SECTIONAL PLAN AT 77
.-d SOcmc

<RING -
ARCH

SECTION XX SECTION YY
NOTPWall thicknesses have been indicated in brick lengths tn providefor use of modular bricks or traditional bricks. In
the figure, R = one brick length, I.5 B = one and a half brick length. etc.
Fig. 6 Deraik of Manhole (Depprhs I-5 m and Above)
exceeding 0.9m in depth. Manhole covers done in accordance with good practice [IX-
and frames shall conform to accepted 2( I2)]. The cement mortar used shall not be
standards [1X-2( I I)]. weaker than I part of cement to 3 parts of
8.5.8.1 All manholes shall be so constructed sand where subsoil water conditions are
:IS to be water-tight under test. No manhole encountered.
or inspection &amber shall be permitted
inside a building or in any passage therein. 8.5.10 The wall shall be plastered ( 13 mm
Ventilating covers shall not be used for Min) both inside and out’side with cement
domestic drains. mortar 1:3; where sub-soil water water
conditions exist, a richer mix or a weaker
8.5.9 All brickwork in manhole chambers mix with a suitable water proofing
and shafts shall be carefully built in English compound may be used for both masonry
bond, the jointing faces of each brick being and plaster. All angles shall be rounded to
well ‘buttered’ with cement mortar before 7Scm radius and all rendered internal
laying, so as to ensure a full joint. The surfaces shall have hard impervious finish
construction of walls in brickwork shall be obtained using a steel trowel.

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF LNDIA

 SECTIONAL PLAN AT ZZ

1 cm
--l-- -
I -

SECTION XX SECTlON,YY ’
NOTE-Wall thicknesses have been indicated in brick kngths to provide for use of modular bricks Or WaditioMt b&k. I*
the figure, B = one bride kngth. I.5 B = one and a half brik length, etc.
Fig. 7 Drop Manhole
8.5.11 The channel or drain at the bottom of be made to good practice. [1X-2(13)].
the chamber shall be plastered with cement
mortar of 1:2 proportion or weaker cement 8.5.13 For information regarding cast iron
mortar with a suitable waterproofing manhole covers and frames, referencemay be
compound and tinished smooth, to the grade made to accepted standards [1X-2(11)].
(where required). The benching at the sides 8.6 Storm Water Draiktge-The object Of
shall be carried up in such a manner as to storm water drainage is to collect ‘andWry,
provide no lodgement ior any splashings in for suitable disposal, the rain-water collected
case of accidental flooding of the chamber. within the premises of the building.
8.5. I2 For detailed information regarding 8.6.1 WATER P RECIPITATION A ND R U N
manholes in sewerage system, reference may OFF- Rainfall statistics for the areas under

PART IX MAJMUNC S E R V I C E S - S E C T I O N 2 D R A I N A G E A N D SAN,TATION lX2S.

consideration shall be studied to arrive at a
suitable figure on the basis of which the
storm water drains could be designed.
Consideration shall be given to the effects of
special local conditions and to the intensity
and duration of rainfall.
8.6.2 P E R M E A B I L I T Y O F S U R F A C E - T h e
impermeability factor, that is! the proportion
of the total rainfall dischargmg to a surface
water drain after allowing for soakage,
evaporation and other losses, varies with the
frequency and duration of rainfall. These
factors shall be taken into account in design.
8.6.2.1 The whole of the rainfall on imper-
vious areas shall be assumed to reach the
drains, allowance for evaporation or time of
concent_ration being made in domestic
drainage work. The roof area shall be taken
as the horizontal projection of that area.
8.6.3 R A I N- WATER P IPES FOR D RAINAGE
OF ROOFS
8.6.3.1 The roofs of a building shall be so
constructed or framed as to permit effectual
drainage of the rain-water therefrom by
means of a sufficient number of rain-water
pipes of adequate size so arranged, jointed
and fixed as to ensu.re that the rain-water is
carried away from the building without
causing dampness in any part of the walls or
foundations of the building or those of an
adjacent building.
8.6.3.2 The rain-water pipes shall befixed to
the outside of the exteinal walls of the
building or in recesses or chases cut or
formed in such external wall or in such other
manner. as inay be approved by the
Authority.
8.6.3.3 The rain-water pipes conveying rain-
water shall discharge directly or by means of
a channel into or over an inlet to a surface
drain or shall discharge freely in a
compound, drained to surfacedrain but in no
case shall it discharge directly into any closed
drain.
8.6.3.4 Whenever it is not possible to dis-
charge a rain-water pipe into or over an inlet
to a surface drain or in a compound, drained
to a surface drain or in a street drain within
30 m from the boundary of the premises, such
rain-water pipe shall discharge into agully-
trap which shall be connected with the street
drain for storm water and such a gully-trap
shall have a screen and a silt catcher
incorporated in its design.
8.6.3.5 If such streets drain is not available
within 30 m of the boundary of the premises,
a rain-water pipe may discharge directly into
IX_ 2 -26
the kerb drain and shall be taken through-a
pipe outlet across the footpath, if any, with-
out obstructing the path.
8.6.3.6 A rain-water pipe shall not discharge
into or connect with any soil pipe or its venti-
lating pipe or any waste pipe or its ventilat-
ing pipe nor shall it discharge into a sewer
unless specifically permitted to do so by the
Authority, in which case such discharge into
a sewer shall be intercepted by means of a
gully trap.
8.6.3.7 Rain-water pipes shall be construc-
ted of cast iron, asbestos cement, galvanized
sheet or other equally suitable material and
shall be securely futed.
8.6.3.8 Rain-water pipes shall be normally
sized on the basis of roof areas according to
Table 14. A bell mouth inlet at the roof
surface is found to give better drainage effect,
provided proper slopes are given to the roof
surface. The spacing of pipes depends on the
positiop of the windows and arch openings,
but 6 m apart is a convenient distance. The
stainer area shall be If to 2 times the area of
pipe to which it connects.
8.6.3.9 The disposal of the water collecting
‘at various floors consequent upon fire
fighting operations may advantageously be
considered through small pump sets with
delivery of pump sets connected to drainage
arrangement of roof.
8.6.3.10 The storm water shall be led off in a
suitable open drain to a watercourse. The
open drain, if not a pucca mas0nr.y
throughout, shall be so at least where there IS
either a change in direction or gradient.
8.6.4 S IZE AND G RA DIENTS OF P IPES-- The
pipes shall be so designed as to give a velo-
city of flow of not less than I m, s when
running half-full. THe maximum velocity
shall not exceed 2.5 m, s.
8.6.5 DISPOSAL-SU water may be dis-
posed of in one or more ways specified in
8.6.5.1 to 8.6.5.5 but preferably by the
method given in 8.6.5.1.
8.6.5.1 SEPARATE SYSTEM -All courtyards
shall be provided with one or more outlets
through which rain-water may pass to the
storm water system. All rain-water shall be
diverted into the storm water drains and
away from any opening connecting with any
sewer.
Where storm water drains are necessary for
the discharge of rain-water to a public storm
water drain, such drains shall be designed for
the intensity of rain based on local condi-
tions, but in no case shall they be designed
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 TABLE 14 SIZING OF RAIN-WATER PIPES FOR ROOF DRAINAGE
.’
(Clause 8.6.3.8)
SL I)IA OFPlPE
AVERAGE RATE OF RAINFALL IN mm/h
No. h
I
5Omm 75 mm IOOmm 125mm I5omm 2oomuii
t .
Roof Area m*
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
mm
I) 50 13.4 8.9 6.6 5.3 4.4 3.3 .
ii) 65 24. I 16.0 12.0 96 8.0 6.0
iii) 75 40.8 27.6 26.4 16.3 13.6 10.2
iv) IO0 85.4 57.0 42.7 34.2 28.5 21.3
v) I25 80.5 64.3 53.5 40.0
vi) 150 83.6 62.7

for intensity of rainfall of less than 13 m/h.
Usually, each separate plot shall have a sepa-
rate drain connection made to a covered or
open public drain. Such connection to a
covered .drain shall be made through a pipe at
least 3.5 m in length laid at a gradient of not
less than that of the connecting drain. The
storm water from the plot shall dis-charge
into’the storm water drain directly and not
through a trap.
8.6.5.2 COMBINED OR PARTIALLY SEPARATE
S Y S T E M’-- Where levels do not permit
connection to a public storm water drain,
storm water from courtyards may be
connected to the public sewer, provided it is
designed to convey combined discharge. In
such cases, the surface water shall be
admitted to the soil sewer through trapped
gullies in order to prevent the escape of sewer
air.
8.6.5.3 TO A WATERCOURSE -lt may often
be convenient to discharge surface water to a
nearby stream or a watercourse. The invert
level of the outfall shall be about the same as
the normal water level in the watercourse.
The outfall shall be protected against float-
ing debris by a screen.
8.6.5.4 TO STORAGE TANKS -Water from
the roof of a building may be led straight
from the downpipes to one or more water-
’ tight storage tanks. Such storage tanks shall
be raised to a convenient height above
ground and shall always be provided with
ventilating covers, and have draw-off taps
suitably placed so that the rain-water may be
drawn off for domestic washing purposes or
for garden water. A large impervious storage
tank is sometimes constructed underground,
from which rain-water is pumped as required
to the house. All storage tanks shall be pro-
vided with an overflow.
PAMr IX PLUMBING SERVICES-ShCTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
8.6.5.5 An arrangement shall be provided in
the rain-water leader to divert the first wash-
ings from the roof or terrace catchment, as
they would contain much undesirable ma-
terial. The mouths.of all pipes and openings
shall be covered with mosquito ( insect)
proof wire net.
8.6.5.6 French drains may be em loyed as ’
surface water drains and are use4ul in the
drainage of unpaved surface, such as play
field and certain types of roads. When used
for this purpose in addition to the drainage
being filled with rubble, it is often advisable
to include a field drain in the trench bottom.
8.7 Subsoil Water Drainage
8.7.1 G ENERAL -Subsoil water is that por-
tion of the rainfall which is absorbed intotRe
ground and the drainage of subsoil water
may be necessary for the following reasons:
a) to increase the stability of the surface;
b) to avoid surface flooding;
c) to alleviate or to avoid causing damp-
ness in the building,’ especially in the
cellars;
d) to reduce the humidity in the immediate
vicinity of the building; and
d to increase the workability of the soil.
8.7.2 D EPTH OF W A T E R T A B L E- T h e
stand-ing level of the subsoil water will vary
with the season, the amount of rainfall and
the proximity and level of drainage channels
Information shall be obtained regarding this
level by means of boreholes or trial pits, I
preferably the latter. ‘It is desirable though
not always practicable to ascertain the level
of the standing water over a considerable
period so as to enable the seasonal variations
97
Ix-2-m '
to be recorded and in particular the high
water level. The direction of flow of the
subsoil water may usually be judged by the
general inclination of the land surface and
the main lines of the subsoil drains shall
follow the natural falls, wherever possible.
8.7.3 P RECAUTIONS -Subsoil dtains shall
be so sited as not lo endanger the stability ol
the buildings or earthwork. In some portions
of the drain, it may be necessary to use non-
porous jointed pipes.
8.7.3.1 No field pipe shall be laid in such a
manner or in such a position as to communi-
cate directly with any drain constructed or
adopted to be used for conveying sewage,
except where absolutely unavoidable and in
that case a suitable efficient trap shall be pro-
vided between subsoil drain and such sewer.
8.7.4 S YSTEMS OF SUBSOIL. DR A I N A G E
8.7.4.1 F I EL D D R A I N P IP E S - C l a y o r
concrete porous DiDes may be used and shall
be laid d one oi ihe foliowing ways:
a) NATURAL -The pipes are laid to follow
the natural depressions or valleys of the
site, branches discharging into the main
as tributaries into a river;
b) HERRING-BONE -A system consisting of
a number of main drains into which dis-
charge, from both sides, smaller subsi-
diary branches parallel to each other but
at an angle to the mains forming a series
of herring-bone patterns;
cl GRID -A main or mains near the boun-
daries of a site into .which branches dis-
charge from one side only;
d) FAN-SHAPED-,T~~ drains are laid con-
verging to a single outlet at one point on
the boundary of a site, without the use of
main or collecting drains;
\ water, such as well, lo mitigate the possibility
d MOAT OR CUT-OFF SYSTfiM - SOlnetimeS
drains are laid on one or more sides of a
building to intercept the flow of subsoil
water and !hereby protect the founda-
tions.
The choice of one or more of these systems
will naturally depend on the local conditions
of the site. For building sites. the mains shall
be not less than 75 mm in diameter and the
branches not less than 65 mm in diameter but
normal practice tends towards the use of
IOOmm and 75 mm respectively. The pipes
shall generally be laid at 60 to 9Ocm depth, or
to such a depth to which it is desirable to
lower the water-table and the gradients are
determined rather by the fall of the land than
bv considerations of self-cleansing velocity.
.l-hc connection of the subsidiary drain to the
main drain is best made by means of aclay-
ware or concrete junction pipe. The outlet of
a subsoil system may discharge into asoak-
away or through a catchpit into the nearest .
ditch or watercourse. Where these are not
available, the subsoil drains may be connec-
ted, with the approval of the Authority,
through an intercepting trap to the surface
water drainage system.
N OTE -Care shall be taken that there is no backflow
from sub-surface drains during heavy rains.
8.8 Waste Disposal Systems in High Alti-
tudes and: or Sub-zero Temperature Regions
8.8.1In general, all the cases to be exercised
regarding water supply systems shall also be
applicable in the case of waste disposalsys-
terns shall also be applicable in the case of
waste disposal systems (see Part IX
Plumbing services Section I Water supply).
The biological and chemical reduction of
organic material proceeds slowly under low
temperature conditions, consequently
affecting the waste disposal systems. The
waste disposal methods given in8.8.2. 8.8.3
and 8.8.4 shall be used only where it is not
practical to instal water carriage systems.
8.8.2 Box AND C AN SYS-KEMS - Where box
and can systems are employed, adequate
arrangements shall be made for the cleaning
and disinfection of the can after it is emptied
of its contents. The excrement from the can
shall be disposed of by burial in isolated
spots far from habitation or by incineration.
where feasible. The can shall be fitted with a
tight fitting lid for use when it is carried for
emptying.
8.8.3 T RENCH OR P IT L A TR INES -Trench
or pit latrines shall be used only where soil
and sub-soil conditions favour their use.
Whenever they are used, they shall not be
closer than 18 m from any source of drinking
of bacterial pollution of water.
8.8.4 C HEMICAL TOILEI-s -For the success-
ful functioning of chemical toilets, they shall
preferably be installed in heated rooms or
enclosures.
N OTE -Chemical toilet essentially consists of small
cylindrical tanks with a water-closet seat for the use of 8
lo IO persons. A ventilation pipe is fitted to the seal. A
strong solution of caustic soda is used as a disinfectant.
It kills bacteria, liquefies the solid; and thus checks the
decomposition of brganic matter. The lank is provided
with a drain plug from which liquid runs to a soak pit at
the time of disposal.
8.8.5 W A T E R- BO R N E S A N I T A T I O N
SYSTEMS - Water-boine sanitation systems
shall be used, where practicable. Sanitation
systems for the collection of sewage should
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
be constructed in such a manner that maximum number of simultaneously
maximum heat is retained by insulation, if discharging appliances. ,For the calculation
necessary. of this peak flow certain loading factors have
been assigned to appliances in terms of
8.8.5.1 SEWERAGE -Under normal circum- fixture units, considering their probability
stances, sewers shall be laid below the frost and frequency of use. These fixture unit
line. Manholes shall be made of air-tight values are given in Table 15.
construction so as to prevent the cold air
from gaining access inside and freezing the 9.1.1.1 For any fixtures not covered under
contents. The trenches for sewers shall be Table 15, Table 16 may be referred to for
loosely filled with earth after laying sewers, deciding their fixture unit rating depending
since loose soil is a better insulator than on their drain or trap size.
compacted soil. Consequently, sewers laid
under traffic ways and other places where soil 9.1.1.2 From Table 15 and 16, the total load
compaction
.--- may be expected are required to on any pipe in terms of fixtures units may be
be given adequate insulation:Where feasible, calculated knowing the number and type of
sewers shall be so located that the trench line appliances connected to this pipe.
is not in shadow, when the sun is shining.
Concrete, cast iron and stoneware pipes 9.1.1.3 For converting the total load in fix-
conduct heat relatively rapidly and as such ture units to the peak flow in litres per
should be adequately insulated. minute, Fig. 8 is to be used.
8.8.5.2 SEPTIC TANKS -Septic tanks can
function only when it can be ensured that the
contents inside these do not freeze at low
temperature. For this purpose, the septic
tanks shall be located well below the frost
line. The location of manhole openings shall
be marked by staves. Fencing around the
septic tanks shall be provided for discourag-
ing traffic over them. As the rate of biologi-
cal activity is reduced by 50 percent for every
10°C fall in temperature. the capacity of
septic tanks shall hc incrcascd by 100 percent
for operation at IIY’c: o\cr that for operation
at 20°C.
8 A Estimate Curves
8.8.5.3 SEEPAGE PI I‘s -Seepage pits can
function only when the soil and sub-soil
conditions are favourable. Frozen soil
extending to a great depth would preclude
the use of such disposal devices in view of the
lower water absorption capacity. The
discharge of effluent should be made below
the frost line.

8.8.5.4 SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANTS -
Suitable design modifications for
sedimentation, chemical and biological
processess shall be applied to sewage
treatment plants for satisfactory
functioning.
8.8.5.5 Lavatories and bath-rooms shall be
kept heated to avoid freezing of water inside
traps and flushing cisterns.
9. DESIGN
9.1 Estimation of Maximum Flow of Waste
Water
9.1.1 The maximum flow in a building drain
or a stack depends on the probable
0 10 40. (0 80 100 110 1‘0 1‘0 1.0 100 110 Ia 260
FfXlURB "WITS
8 B Enlarge Scale Curves
Fig. 8 Peach Flow Load CUrvf?S
9.1.1.4 The maximum load in fixture units
permissible on various recommended pipe
sizes in the ,drainage system are given in
Tables 17 and 18.
9.1.1.5 Results should be checked to see that
the soil, waste and building sewer pipes are
not reduced in diameter in the direction of
flow. Where appliances are to be added in
fixture, these should be taken into account in
assessing the pipe sizes by using the fixture
units given in ‘T-ables I5 and 16.

PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES--SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANlTATlOh I\-?--z

T A B L E I5 F I X T U R E UNIT3 F O R D I F F E R E N T TABLE Ii MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FIXTURE
SANITARY APPLIANCES OR GROUPS UNlrS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED TO
BRANCHES AND STOCKS
(Clauses 9.1.1 to 9.1.1.2 and 9.1.1.5)
(Clause 9.1.1.4)

SL T YPE OF F IXTURE / FIXTURE SL DIA- MAXIMUM N UMBER OF F IXTURE U N I T S*

No. UNIT No. METER T HAT C AN B E C ONNECTED
V ALUE AS OF PIPE A
L OAD f ANY ONE MORE THAN 3 ’
FACTORS HORI- STACK OF STOREYS IN H E I G H T
ZONTAL 3 STOREYS A
(1) (2) (3) F I X T U R E I N ‘ TO T A L T O T A L A-?
i) One bathroom group consisting B RANCH t HE I G H T FOR ONE
of water-closet, wash basin and OR 3 STAC-K STOREY OR
bath tub or shower stall: INTERVAIZ B RANCH
INTERVAL
a) Tank-water-closet
b) Flush-valve water-closet (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
ii) Bath tub* mm
iii)Bidet 9 I 2
ii) 4
iv) Combination sink-and-tray
iii) : 24
(drain board ) iv) I2 ;: 42
v) Drinking fountain l/2
v) 75 20 30
vi) Floor traps7 I
vi) 100
vii) Kitchen sink, domestic 2 vii) I25 :z :: I 100 200
I viii) I50 620 960 I 900 350
viii) Wash basin, ordinaryj
ix) Wash basin, surgeon’s 2 ix) 200 2200 :% 600
x) 250 :% 3800
x) Shower stall, domestic 2
xi) 300 6ooo 8400 G
xi) Showers (group) per head j xii) 375 :z - _ -
xii) Urinal, wall lip 4 *Depending upon the probability of simultaneous use of
xiii) Urinal, stall 4 appliances considering the frequency of use and peak
discharge rate
xiv) Water-closet. tank-operated 4
tDoes not Include branches of the building sewer.
xv) Water-closet, valve-operated 6

*A shower head over a bath tub does not increase the T A B L E I8 M A X I M U M N U M B E R O F F I X T U R E

fixture unit value. UNITS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED TO
t Size of floor trap shall be determined by the area of BUILDING DRAINS A N D S E W E R S
surface water to be drained. (Clause 9.1.1.4)
$ Wash basins with 32mm and 40mm trap have the Sl. D I A. MA X I M U M N~JMBER OF FIXluRE UN I T S
same load value. No. METER T HAT C AN B E C ONNECTED TO ANY
OF PIPE P O R T I O N- OF THE BUILDING DR A I N
OR THE BUII.DING SEWER
F OR GRADIEM
h
T A B L E 16 F I X T U R E UNII‘ V A L U E S F O R ‘l/200 I:100 l/50 l/25’
FIXTURES BASED ON FIXTLIRE DRAIN
OR TRAP SIZE (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(Clauws 9.1.1.1. 9.1.1.2 and. Y.1.1.5) mm

i) loo - 180 216 250
SI FIYI~~RE DRAIN OPI TR A P S IZE IFIXWRE ii) I50 - 700
NO. llhll iii) 200 l$loo I600 1:; :g
V ALCE
iv) 250 2500. 2900 3300 4200
(1) (2) (3) v) 300 3900 4600 5600 6700
vi) 375 7000 8300 IO 000 I2 000
0 30 m m and smaller I
*Includes branches of the building sewer.
ii) 40 m m 2
iii) 50 m m 3 9.2. Gradients and Pipe Sizes
IV) 65 m m 4
9.2.1 G R A D I E N T S
v) 75 mm 5
vi) IO0 mm 6 9.2.1.1 The discharge of water through a
domestic drain is intermittent and limited in
quantity and, therefore, small accumulations
9.1.2 The maximum rate of flow shall be of solid matter are liable to form in the drains
taken as thrice the average rate, allowance between the building and the public sewer.
being made in addition for any exceptional There is usually a gradual shifting of these
peak discharges. A good average rule is to deposits as discharges take place. Gradients
allow for a flow of liquid wastes frombuild- shall be sufficient to prevent these temporary
ir:gs at the rate of 0.03 m’ per minute per 100 accumulations building up and blocking the
pcr\on\ drains.

i\ : 30 NATIONAL BUILD.NC CODE OF INDIA

 9.2.1.2 Normally, the sewer shall be designed Tables 19 and 20 are based on Manning’s
for discharging the peak simultaneous flow formula ( n=O.O 15 ).
.as given in 9.1.1. and 9.1.2 flowing half-full
with a minimum self-cleansing velocity of 9.2.2 P IPE SIZES -Subject to the minimum
0.75 m/s. The approximate gradients which size of 100 m, the sizes of pipes shall be de-
give this velocity for the sizes of pipes likely cided in relation to the estimated quantity of
to be used in building drainage and the flow and the available gradient.
corresponding discharges when flowinghalf-
full are given in Table 19. 10. CONSTRUCTZON RELATING TO
CONVEYANCE OF SANITARY
9.2.13 In cases where it is practically not WASTES
possible to conform to the ruling gradients, a
flatter gradient may be used, but the mini- 10.1 Excavation -The safety precautions as
mum -velocity in’ such cases shall on no given in Part VII Constructional practices
account be les‘s than 0.61 rn/ s and adequate and safety, shall be ensured.
flushing should be done. 10.1.1 Excavation shall proceed to within
NOTE -Where gradients are restricted, the practice of about 7.5 cm of the finished formation level.
using a pipe of larger diameter than is requued by the This final 7Scm is to be trimmed and re-
normal flow in order to justify laying at a Batter gra- moved as a separate operation immediately
dient does not result in increasing the velocity of flow, prior to the laying of the pipes or their foun-
but reduces the depth of flow and for this reason is to be
discouraged.
dations.
10.1.2 Unless specified otherwise by the
‘-TABLE 19 DIFFERENT DIA PIPES GIVING A Authority, the width at bottom of trenches
VELOCITY OF 0.75 m/s AND
CORRESPONDING DISCHARGE
for pipes of different diameters laid at dif-
ferent depths shall be as given below:
(Clause 9.2.1.2)
SL D IAMETER GRADIENT DISCHARGE 4 For all diameters, up to an average
No. depth of 120 cm, width of trench in cm =
diameter of pipe + 30 cm;
(1) (2) (3) (4)
mm m’/min b) For all diameters for depths above
120 cm; width of trench in cm=diameter
i) 100 I in 57 0.18 of pipe+4Ocm; and
ii) I50 I in 100 0.42
iii) I in I45 0.73 cl Notwithstanding (a) and (b), the total
iv) :E I in 175 0.93 width of trench at the top should notbe
V) 250 I in 195 I.10
vi) 300 I in 250 1.70 less than 75 cm for depths exceeding
!I0 cm.
10.1.3 All pipes, ducts, cables, mains or
9.2.1.4 On the other hand, it is undesirable other services exposed in the trench shall be
to employ gradients giving a velocity of flow effectively supported by timber and/ or chain
greater than 2.4 m/s. Where it is or rope-slings.
unavoidable, cast iron pipes shall be used.
The approximate gradients which give a 10.1.4 All drainage sumps shall be sunk clear
velocity of 2.4m/s for pipes of various sizes of the work outside the trench or at the sides
and the correspondina discharge when of manholes. After the completion of the
flowing half-full are given in Table 20. work, any pipes or drains leading to such
sumps or temporary subsoil drains under
permanent work shall be filled in properly
TABLE 20 DIFFERENT DIA PIPES GIVING A
VELOCITY OF 2.4 m/s AND with sand and consolidated.
CORRESPONDlNG DISCHARGE
Sl. DIAMETER GRADIENT DISCHARGE
10.2 Laying of Pipes -Laying of pipes shall
No. be done in accordance with good practice
[1X-2( 14)].
(1) (2) (3) (4)
mh m’/ min 10.3 Jointing-All soil pipes, waste pipes,
i) I in 5.6 ventilating pipes and other such pipes above
ii) !Z I in 9.7 ::; ground shall be gas-tight. All sewers and
iii) lin I4 2140 drains laid below the ground shall be water-
iv) :: Iin I7 2.98
tight. Jointing shall be done in accordance
v) 250 lin I9 3.60
vi) 300 I in 24.5 5.30 with good practice [1X-2( 14)].
9.2. A .5 The discharge values corresponding 10.4 Connection to Exbting Sewers-The
to nominal diameter and gradient given in connection to an existing sewer shall, as far

PART IX PI.UMBINC SERVICES-SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATIOH ,_Y

as possible, be done at the manholes. Where
it is unavoidable to make connection in
between two manholes, the work of breaking
into the existing sewer and forming the
connection shall be carried out by the
Authority or under its supervision.
10.4.1 Breaking into the sewer shall be
effected by the cautious enlargement of a
small hole and .every precaution shall be taken
to prevent any material from entering the
sewer. No connection shall be formed in
such a way as to constitute a projection into
the sewer or to cause any diminution in its
effective size.
10.5 Back-Filling
105.1 ‘Filling of the trench shall not be
commenced until the length of pipes therein
has been tested and passed (see 14.2).
105.2 All timber which may be withdrawn
with safety shall be removed as filling
proceeds.
10.5.3 Where the pipes are unprotected by
concrete haunching, the first operation in
filling shall be carefully done to hand-pack
and tamp selected fine material around the
lower half of the pipes so as to buttress them
to the sides of the trench:
20.5.4 The filling shall then be continued to
15 cm over the top of the pipe using selected
tine hand-packed material, watered and
rammed on both sides of the pipe with a
wooden rammer. On no account shall
material be tipped into the trench until the
first 15 cm of filling has been completed. The
process of filling and tamping shall proceed
evenly so as to maintain an equal pressure on
both sides of the pipeline.
10.5.5 Filling shall be continued in layers not
exceeding 15cm in thickness, each layer
being watered and well rammed.
10.5.6 In roads, surface materials previously
excavated shall be replaced as the top layer of
the filling, consolidated and maintained
satisfactorily till the permanent reinstate-
ment’ of the surface is made by the Authority.
10.5.7 In gardens, the top soil and turf, if
‘any, shall be-carefully replaced.
1i. CONSTRUCTION RELATING TO
CONVEYANCE OF RAIN OR
STORM WATER
I I. I Roof Gutters-Roof gutters shall be of
any material of suitable thickness. All junc-
tions and joints shall be water-tight.
W-32
Il.2 Rain- Water Pipes - Rain-water pipes
shall conform to the accepted standards
[1X-2( 15)].
11.3 Subsoil Drain Pipes
11.3.1 FIELD D RAIN P IPES -Suitable pipes
for this purpose are plain cylindrical glazed-
ware pipes, or concrete porous pipes though
the latter may prove unsuitable where sub-
soil water carries sulphates or is acidic owing
to the presence of peat. Trenches for these
pipes need be just wide enough at the bottom
to permit laying the pipes, which shall be laid
with open joints to proper lines and
gradients.
It is advisable to cover the pipes with clinker
free from fine ash, brick ballast or other suit-
able rubble, or a layer of inverted turf, brush-
wood or straw before refilling the trench, in
order to prevent the infiltration of silt
through the open joints. Where the subsoil
drain is also to serve the purpose of collect-
ing surface water, the rubble shall be carried
up to a suitable level and when required for a
lawn or playing field, the remainder of the
trench shall be filled with pervious top soil.
When refilling the trenches, care shall be
taken to prevent displacement of pipes in line
of levels. When they pass near trees or
through hedges, socket pipes with cement or
bitumen- joints shall be used to prevent
penetration by roots.
Zl.3.2 FRENCH DRAINS -A shallow trench is
excavated, the bottom neatly trimmed to the
gradient and the trench filled with broken
stone, gravel or clinker, coarse at the bottom
and finer towards the top.
22. SELECTION AND INSTALLATION
OF SANITARY APPLIANCES
12.1 Selection, installation and mainten-
ance of sanitary appliances shall be done in
acc6rdance with good practice [1X-2( 16)].
13. REFUSE CHUTE SYSTEM
13.1 Refuse chute system is provided in
multi-storeyed buildings for transporting and
collecting in a sanitary way the refuse from
floors at different heights. The refuse is
received from the ~successive floor through
the inlets located on the vertical system of
pipes that convey refuse through it and
discharge it into the collecting chamber from
where the refuse is cleared at suitable
intervals.
13.2 This system has got three functionally
important components, namely, the chutes,
the inlet hopper and the collection chamber.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
13.2.2 The chute may be carried through
service shafts meant for carrying drainage
pipes. However, the location shall be mostly
determined by the position of the inlet
hopper and the collecting chamber that is
most convenient for the user. It should also
be considered to locate the chute away from
living rooms in order to avoid noise and
small nuisance.
13.2.2 In individual chute system, the inlet
hopper shall be located in the passage near
the kitchen and in the common chute system
towards the end of the common passage.
Nafural ventilation should be adequate to
prevent any possible odour nuisance. There
should bc adequate lighting at this location.
For ground floor ( Floor I), the inlet hoppers
may be placed at a higher level and a flight of
steps may be provided for using the same.
13.2.3 The collection chamber shall be situ-
ated at ground level.
13.3 Kequirements ‘in regard to the design
and construction of refuse chute sytem
shall be in accordance with good practict
[1X-2(17)2].
14. INSPECTION AND TESTING
14.1 Inspection
14.1.1 All sanitary appliances and fitments
shall be carefully examined for defects before
they are installed and also on the completion
of the work.
141.2 Pipes are liable to get damaged in
transit and, notwithstanding tests that may
have been made before despatch, each pipe
shall be carefully examined on arrival on the
site. Preferably, each pipe shall be ru with
a hammer or mallet and those that ?g do not
ring true and clear shall be rejected. LSound
pipes shall be carefully stored to prevent
damage. Any defective pipes shall be
segregated, marked in a conspicuous manner
and their use in the works prevented.
14.1.3 Cast iron pipes shall be carefully
examined for damage to the protective coat-
ing. Minor damage shall be made good by
painting over with hot tar or preferably bitu-
men. But if major defects in coating exist, the
pipes shall not be used unless recoated. Each
pipe shall be carefully reexamined for
soundness before laying.
14.1.4 Close inspection shall be maintained
at every stage in the work, particularly as to
the adequacy of timber supports used in ex-
cavation and the care and thcroughness
exercised in filling.
FART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 2 D R A I N A G E ANI) SANITATlOh!
14.1.4.1 Careful note shall be kept of the
condition of any sewer, manhole or other
existing work which may be uncovered and
any defects evident shall be pointed out im-
mediately to the Authority.
14.1.4.2 No work shall be covered over or
surrounded with concrete until it has been
inspected and ilpproved by the Authority.
13.2 Testing
IJ.2. I Conlpl cllcnhi\e tests of all appliances
shall be n~dc by simulating conditions
of UW. Overllow shall be examined for
obstructions.
14.2.2 S MOKE T E S T-All soil pipes, waste
pipes, and vent pipes and all other pipes
when above ground shall be approved gas-
tight by a smoke test conducted under a
pressure of 25mm of water and maintained
for 15 min after all trap seals have been
filled with water. The smoke is produced by
burning only waste or tar paper or similar
material in the combustion chamber of a
smoke machine. Chemical smokes are not
satisfactory.
14.2.3 W ATER TES.I
142.3.1 FOR PIPES OTHER THAN CAST IRON
-Glazedware ‘and concrete pipes shall be
subjected to a test pressure of at least I.Sm
head of water at the highest point of the
section under test. The tolerance figure of
Zlitrcs cm of diameter km may be allowed
during a period of ten minutes. The test shall
be carried out by suitably plugging the low
end of the drain and the ends of connections,
if any, and filling the system with water. A
knuckle bend shall be tempc;rerily.jointed in
at the top end and a sufficient le lgth of the
vertical pipe jointed to it so as to provide the
required test head, or the top end may be
plugged with a connection to a hose ending
in a funnel which could be raised or lowered
till the required head is obtained and fixed
suitably for observation.
Subsidence of the test water may be due to
one or more of the following causes:
a) absorption by pipes and joints;
b) sweating of pipes or joints;
c) leakage at joints or from defective pipes;
and
d) trapped air.
Allowance shall be made for (a) by adding
water until absorption has ceased after which
the test proper should commence. Any
leakage will he visible and the defectivep&rt
,X-,33
of the work should be cut out and made
good. A slight amount of sweating which is
uniform may be overlooked, but excessive
sweating from a particular pipe or joint shall
be watched for and taken as indicating a
defect to be made good.
N OTE-This test will not be applicable to sanitary
pipework above ground level.
14.2.3.2 FOR CAST IRON PIPES-C~~~ iron
sewers and drains shall be tested as I for
glazedware and concrete pipes. The drain
plug shall be suitably strutted to prevent their
being forced out.of the pipe during the test.
14.2.4 T ESTS FOR S TRAIGHTNESS A N D
O BSTRUCTION -The following tests shall be
carried out:
a) by inserting at the high end of.the sewer
or drain a smooth ball of a diameter
13mm less than the pipe bore. In the
absence of obstruction, such as yarn or
mortar projecting through the joints, the
ball should roll down the invert of the
pipe, and emerge at the lower end; and
b) by means of a mirror at one end of the
line and lamp at the other. If the pipeline
is straight, the full circle of light may be
observed. If the pipeline is not straight,
this will be apparent. The mirror will also
indicate obstruction in the barrel.
14.2.5 T EST R ECORDS -Complete records
shall be kept of all tests carried out on sewers
and drains both during construction and
after being put into service.
151 MAINTENANCE
15.‘1 Domestic drainage system shall be,ins-
pedted at regular intervals. The system shall
be thoroughly cleaned out at the same time
and any defects discovered shall be made
good.
15.2 Cleaning qf Drainage System
15.2.1 Sewer maintenance crews, when
entering a deep manhole or sewer where
dangerous gas or oxygen deficiencies may be
present, shall follow the following
procedures:
a) allow no smoking or open flames and
guard against sparks
b) erect warning signs
c) use only safety gas-proof, electric light-
ing equipment
d) test the atmosphere for noxious gases
and oxygen deficiencies (presence of
hydrogen sulphide is detected using lead
1x-2-34
acetate paper and that of oxygen by-
safety lamps).
d If the atmosphere is normal, workmen
may enter’ with a safety belt attached and
with two men available at the top. For
extended jobs, the gas tests shall be
repeated at frequent intervals, depending
on circumstances.
If oxygtin deficiency or noxious gas is
found, the structure shall be ventilated
with pure air by keeping open ‘at least
one manhole cover each on upstream
and downstream side for quick exit of
toxic gases or by artificial means. The
gas tests shall be repeated and the
atmosphere cleared before entering.
Adequate ventilation shall be maintained
during this work and the tests repeated
frequently.
8) If the gas or oxygen deficiency is present
and it is not practicable to ventilate
adequately before workers enter, a hose
mask shall be worn and extreme care
taken to avoid all sources of ignition.
Workers shall be taught how to use the
hose equipment. In these cases, they shall
always use permissible safety lights (not
ordinary flash lights), rubber boots or
non-sparking shoes and non-sparking
tools;
h) Workmen descending a manhole shaft to
inspect or clean sewers shall try each
ladder step or rung carefully before putt-
ing the full weight on it to guard against
insecure fastening due to corrosion of the
rung at the manhole wall. When work is
going on in deep sewers, at least two men
shall be available for lifting workers
from the manhole in the event of serious
injury; and
3 Portable air blowers, for ventilating
manhole, are recommended for all tank,
pit or manhole work where there is a
question as to the presence of noxious
gas, vapours or oxygen deficiency. The
motors for these shall be of weather-
proof and flame-proof types;
compression ignition-diesel type
(without sparking plug) may be used.
When used, these shall be placed not less
than 2 m away from the opening and on
the leeward side protected from wind, so
that they will not serve as a source of
ignition for any inflammable gas which
might be present. Provision should be
made for ventilation and it should be of
the forced type which can be provided by
a blower located at ground level with
suitable flexible ducting to displace out
air from the manhole.
15 . L.2 The following operations shall be
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
carried out during periodical cleaning of a
drainage system:
The covers of inspection chambers and
manholes shall be removed and the side
benchings and channels scrubbed;
b) The interceptive trap, if fitted, shall be
adequately cleaned and flushed with
clean water. Care shall be taken to see
that the stopper in the rodding arm is
securely replaced;
4 All lengths of main and branch drains
shall be rodded by means of drain rods
and a suitable rubber or leather plunger.
After rodding, the drains shall be tho-
roughly flushed with clean water. Any
obstruction found shall be removed with
suitable drain cleaning tools and the
system thereafter shall be flushed with
clean water;
4 The covers of access plates to all gullies
shall be removed and the traps plunged
and flushed out thoroughly with clean
water. Care shall be taken not to flush
the gully deposit into the system;
d Any defects revealed as a result of ins-
pection or test shall be made good;
f) The covers or inspection chambers and
gullies shall be replaced, bedding them in
suitable grease or other materials; and
g) Painting of ladders/rings in deep man-
holes and external painting of manhole
covers shall be done with approved
paints.
l-5.3 All surface water drains shall be peri-
odically rodded by means of drain rods and a
suitable rubber or leather plunger. After
rodding, they shall be thoroughly flushed
with clean water. Any obstruction found
shall be removed with suitable drain cleaning
tools.
15.4 All subsoil drains shall be periodically
examined for obstruction at the open joints
due to the roots of plants or other growths.
16. COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
16.1 At the completion of the plumbing ins-
tallation work, the licensed plumber shall
give a completion certificate in the pres-
cribed Ibrm, which is given in Appendix C.

APPENDIX A

(Clause 3.1)
APPLICATION FOR DRAINAGE OF PREMISES

I/ We hereby make application to the* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..T

....................................................... for permission to drain the
premises...................Ward No....................... Street No . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Road/ Street known as . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The sanitary arrangement and drains of the said premises are shown in the accompanying plans
and a description of the specification of the work/material usedis also.appended (Appendix B).
I/ We undertake to carryout the work in accordance with Part IX Plumbing services, Section 2
Drainage and sanitation of the Code.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*.........*..... ....................................
S&nature of the licensed plumber Signature of the owner
Name and address of the Name and address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..,................................. ............................ ........
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..a*.................. ..,...................*.............

Date................................ Date................................
NOTE-The application should be signed by the owner of the premises and shall be countersigned by the licensed
plumber.

*Insert the name of the Authority.

PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 2 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION ,X25

 APPENDIX B

( Clause 3.5)

FORM FOR DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK AND SPECIFICATION

OF MATERIALS

1) Separation of rain-water and foul water.........................................

2) Rain-water drains, curbs and points of discharge.................................

3) Rain-water gutters, pipes or spouts where discharging....................................................

4) Open-full-water drains, materials, sizes, curbs and other means places,\peran&rrhs, latrines

5) Silt-catcher and grating, size and position.......................................................................

6) Drains ................................................................................................................................
Main sewage drains: Fall ...........................................................................................
Size .................................................... ..- ...................................
Branch drains: Fall ...........................................................................................
Size ...........................................................................................
Materials ... ..................................................................................................................
Method of jointing .....................................................................................................

7 ) Bedding of pipes:
a) Method of bedding....................................................................................................
b) Thickness and width of beds of concrete..................................................................
c) Thickness of concrete roun@.pipes.. ...........................................................................
8) Protection of drain laid under wall............................................................... . ..................
9) Traps, description and intercepter:
a) Lavatory waste pipes..................................................................................................
b) Bath waste pipes .........................................................................................................
c) Sink .............................................................................................................................
d) Gully-traps.. .................................................................................................................
e) Water-closet traps .......................................................................................................
f) Grease traps ................................................................................................................
g) Slope sink ...................................................................................................................
h) Urinal. .........................................................................................................................
j ) O t h e r s ..........................................................................................................................
10) Manholes and inspection chambers:
a) Thickness of walls.. .....................................................................................................
b) Description of bricks ..................................................................................................
c) Description of rendering.. ...........................................................................................
d) Description of invert channels....................................................................................
e) Depth of chambers .....................................................................................................
f) Size and description of cover and manner 01’ fixing.. ...............................................
11) Ventilation of drain:
a) Position-~ Height above nearest ground level............................................................
b) Outlet shaft position of terminal at top....................................................................
I?) Soil pipe, waste pipe and ventilating pipe connections:
a) I.ead and iron pipes ...................................................................................................
h) l.cad pipe of trap with cast iron pipe .......................................................................
c) Stonew:trc pipts or trap with lead pipe.. ....................................................................
d) l.edd soil pipe or trap with stoneware pipe or trap .................................................
e) <‘:t>t iron pipe with stoneware drain.........................................................................
I‘) \ton’urir: Imp \vlih cast iron so11 pipe ...................................................................
11) \‘~I~III :11(1:1 (I!’ w~ter-~~lo\e! trap sink, lavatory and other traps material and supports.
14) Water-closets (apartments):
4 i) At or above ground level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii) Approached from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A..
iii) Floor material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv) Floor fall towards door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v) Size of window opening in wall made to open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi) Position of same . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii) Means of constant ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii) Position of same . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b) Water-closet apparatus:
9 Description of pan, basin, etc. ............................................................................
Kind .....................................................
ii) Flushing cistern .......................................
Capacity ...............................................
iii) Material of flushing pipe.....................................................................................
iv) Internal diameter.................................................................................................
v) Union with basin..................................................................................................
15) Sanitary fittings, waten storage tank, etc:
a) Number and description of sanitary fittings in room and rooms in which they are to be
installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b) Capacity and position of water storage tanks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c) Size and number of draw off taps and whether taken off storage tanks or direct from
main supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
d) Details of draw off taps, that is, whether they are of plain screw down pattern or
‘waste not’ and description of any other sanitaryw.ork to be carried out not included
under above headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16) Depth of sewer below surface of street . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*..........
17) Level of invert of house drain at point of junction:
a) with sewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b) level of invert of sewer at point of junction with house drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c) distance of nearest manhole on sewer from the point at which the drain leaves the
premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.........................................................
..
18) Schedule of pipes:
Description of Materials Diameter Weight Method of
pipe/ drain Jointing
a) Subsoil drains
b) Main sewage drains
c) Branch sewage
drams
d) Soil pipes
e) Ventilating pipes
other than soil
pipes
f) Waste pipes
g) Rain-water pipes
h) Anti-syphon pipes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*................... ...........
Signature of the licensed plumber ...............................................
Name and address of the licensed plumber ....i ............................
....................................................................................................

....................................................................................................

....................................................................................................

Date ............................................................................................

I’\W I IS 1’1.1 MBING SERVICES-SECTIDN 2 DRAINAGE AND %\\I I \ I Ien\

37
 APPENDIX C
(Clause 16. I)
FORM FOR LICENSED PLUMBER’S COMPLETIONCERTIFLCATE

Certified that I/ We have completed the plumbing work of drainage and sanitation system for
the premises as detailed below. This may be inspected, approved and connection given:
Ward No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . .
Street ......................................
Locality...................................
Block No.. ............................
House No...............................
Details of work............................................................................................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I... . * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . y . . . . .

_...._. _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I....* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . -...* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tke work was sanctioned by the Authority*

.
.......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .h . . . . . . . . . . . . . -...
.;.......,.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . ., . . ” :,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Signature of the owner Signature of the licensed plumber

Name and address.._ . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . Name and address . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -

.. u. .
.._........*m......................... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .a

Date. _.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . .
The Authority’s report:
Certified that the plumbing work of drainage and sanitation system for the premises, have been
laid, applied, executed in accordance with Part IX Plumbing services, Section 2 Drainage and
sanitation of the Code.
Drainage connection to the main sewer will be made on.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..,............,...... . . . . .
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Authority
*Insert the name of the Authority.

,x.2* NATIONAL tlUIL@tNC CODE OF INDIA

 LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and
‘accepted standards’ in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standard shall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may be
used by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred &uses
in the Code.
In the following list the number appearing in thefirst column within parentheses indicates the
number of the reference in this part/section.
1) I S : 1_787-1961 Layout for regulated
market yards for fruits and vegetables
2) IS:4733-1972 Methods of sampling and
test for sewage effluents yirst revision)
lS:4764- I973 Tolerance limits for
sewage effluents discharged into inland
surface waters yi:rst revision)
3) IS:2470 Code of practice for design and
construction of septic tanks:
IS:2470 (Part I)-1968 Part I S m a l l
installations Cfirst revision)
IS:2470 (Part II)-1971 Part II Large
installations l-first revision)
IS:561 I-1970 Code of practice for waste
stabilization ponds (fa,:ultative type)
4) IS:5329-1983 Code of practice for sani-
tary pipe work above ground for build-
ings Cfirst revision)
5) IS:65 I- 1980 Specification for salt glazed
stoneware pipes and fittings (Fourth
revision )
lS:3006-1979 Specification for chemi-
cally resistant saltglazed stoneware
pipes and fittings (first revision)
6) lS:458- I97 I Specification for concrete
pipes (with and without reinforcement)
(second revision)
lS:784-1978 Specification for prestres-.
sed concrete pipes (including fittings)
(first revision)
IS: 19 I6- 1963 Specification for steel
cylinder reinforced concrete pipes
lS:4350-1967 Specification for concrete
porous pipes for under drainage
IS:7319-1974 Specification for perfo-
rated concrete pipes
7) IS: 1536- 1976 Specification for crntri-
fugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes
for water. gas and sewage ( s e c o n d
revision)
IS: !537- 1976 Specification for vertically
cast iion pressure pipes for water, gas
and sewage (first revision )
IS:1538 (Parts I to XXIII)-1976 Specifi-
cxt~on for cast iron fittings for pressure
i’.\R I I X P1.l MBIYG SEHVIC‘ES-SE(~TlOh 2 DRAltiAGE AND SAHITATIO\
pipes for water, gas and sewage (second
revision )
IS:1538 (Part XXIV)-1982 Specification
for cast iron fittings for pressure pipes
for water, gas and sewage: Part XXIV
Specific requirements for all flanged
radial tees
1s: 3989-1970 Specification for centrifu-
gally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket
soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings
and accessories first revision)
IS:7 181- 1974 Specification for horizon-
tally cast iron double flanged pipes for
water, gas and sewage
8) IS: 1592-1980 Specification for asbestos
cement pressure pipes (second revision)
IS: 1626 Specification for asbestos
cement building pipes and pipe fittings,
gutters and gutter fittings, and roofing
fittings:
IS: 1626 (Part I)-1980 Part I Pipes and
pipe fittings (jjrst revision)
IS:1626 (Part II)-1980 Part II Gutters
and gutter fittings (first revision)
IS:1626 ( P a r t Ill)-1981 P a r t 111
Roofing accessories (first revision)
lS:6908-3975 Specification for asbestos
cement pipes and fittings for sewerage
and drainage
9) IS:404 Specification for lead pipes;
IS:404 (Part I)-1977 Part I For other
thanchemicalpurpose~(.sec,c,nclrr\.isic,n)
10) IS:5455-1969 Specification for cast iron
steps for manholes
11) IS: I726 Specification for cast iron man-
hole covers and frames
IS: 1726 (Part I)-1974 Part I General
requirements (second ra\~ision)
IS: 1726 (Part II)-1974 Part II Specific
requirements of HD circular type
(second re\lisiqn)
IS: 1726 (Part Ill)-1974 Part III Specific
r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r HI) douhlc
triangular t!‘pe (.Wcoll~/ I.(*\.i\loll)
IX-L-- _
 IS:1726 (Part IV)-1974 Part IV Specific
requirements for MD circular type
(second revision)
IS: 1726 (Part V)-1974 Part V Specific
requirements for MD rectangular type
(second re.vision)
IS:1726 (Part Vl/Sec I)-1974 Part VI
Specific requirements for LD rectan-
gular type, Section I single seal (second
revision)
IS:3726 (Part Vl/Sec 2)-1974 Specific
requirements for LD rectangular type,
Section 2 double seal ( s e c o n d
revision )
IS:1726 ( P a r t VlI/Sec I)-1974
Part VI1 Specific requirements for LD
square type, Section I single seal (second
revision)
IS:1726 (Part VlI/Sec 2 ) - 1 9 7 4
Part Vl Specific requirements for LD
square type, Section 2 double seal
(second revision)
12) IS:2212-1962 Code of practice for brick-
work
I, 4o
13) IS:41 I1 Code of practice for ancillary
structures in sewerage system
IS:41 11 (Part I)-1967 Part 1 Manholes
14) lS:783-1959 Code of practice for laying
of concrete pipes
IS: 1742-1983 Code of practice for build-
ing drainage (second revision)
IS:3 114-1965 Code of practice for laying
of cast iron pipes
lS:4i27-1983 Code of practice for laying
of glazed stoneware pipes (j?rsr revision)
IS:6530-1972 Code of practice for laying
of asbestos cement pressure pipes
15) lS:l230-1968 Specification for cast iron
rain-water pipes and fittings (jirsr
re’vision)
16)’ 13:2064-1973 Code of practice for selec-
tion, installation’ and maintenance of
sanitary appliances (jirsf revision)
17) 13:6924-1973 Code of practice for the
construction of refuse chutes in multi-
storeyed buildings
NATIONAL BL’ILDING CODE OF INDIA
NATIONAL BUILDINGCODE
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES
SECTION3GASSUPPLY

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD ... 2
I. SCOPE ... 3
2. TERMINOLOGY ... 3
_?. PRESSURE REGULATIONS ... 3
4. SERVICE SHUT-OFF VALVES ... 3
5. EXISTING WORK ... 4
6. RULES FOR TURNING GAS ON ... 4
7. RULES FOR SHUTTING OFF THE GAS ... 4
8. INSTALLATION OF GAS PIPES ... 4
9. INSPECTION OF SERVICES ... 5
10. LEAKAGE CHECK ... 6
II. USE OF LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS .., 6

PART IX PLUMING SERVICES-SECTION 3 GAS SUPPLY IX-I-

1
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES
SECTION 3 GAS SUPPLY

0. FOREWORD
0.1: This section covers the safe use of gas for fuel or lighting purposes in buildings.
0.2 The use of gas for fuel and lighting purposes in buildings has begun in some parts of the
country and with the advent of new petroleum complexes, community ‘gas supply’ is bound to
become one of the important services likeelectiicity and water supply in buildings.
0.3 The use of liquefied petroleum gas supplied in containers and cylinders is also becoming
increasingly popular. On release of pressure, by opening the valve, they readily convert into the
gaseous phase. In this state they present a hazard comparable to any inflammable natural or
manufactured gas, except that being heavier than air, low level, ventilation is necessary to avoid
inflammable concentration of gas.
0.4 A minimum set of safety regulations are, therefore, laid down to safeguard the gas piping
installation and the mode of operation in the interest of public safety.
0.5 The firsttrersion ofthis part was prepared in 1970. As a result of Indian Standards brought out
on the subject.some provisions have been updated,added.This revision contains the following
major changes:
4 The value of safe distance between gas piping and electrical wiring system has been modified.
In addition, safe distance between gas piping and steam piping has been given.
b) A reference to a new Indian Standard has been added for information regarding the handling.
use, storage’and transportation of LPG in cylinders exceeding500 ml water capacity.
cl New provisions relating to LPG cylinders installations regarding some aspects, such as
jointing compound used at joints, painting of gas piping, details of fire extinguishers (number,
type and size), total quantity of LPG at stationary and portableinst$lations in proportion to
the floor area, have been added.
4 Some provisions of LPG bulk storage installations with regard to aspects, such as location
and spacing of storage tanks, safety requirements and fire protection requiements, have been
introduced.
0.6 The information regarding the use of liquefied pertroleum gas has been, largely based on the
following Indian Standards:
IS : 6044 (Part I)-1971 Code of practice for liquefied petroleum gas storage installations:
Part I Commercial and industrial cylinder installations.
IS:60JJ(Part II)-1972 Code of practice for liquified petroleum gas storage installations:
Part II Industrial. commerical and domestic bulk storage installations.

1X-3-
2 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 1. SCOPE
1.1 This section covers the requirements
regarding the safety of persons and property
for all piping uses and for all types of gases
used for fuel or lighting purposes in buildings.
1.2 This section does not cover safety rules
for gas burning appliances.
2 TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this section, the
following definitions shall apply.
A U T H O R I T Y H A V I N G JuRlsDlcTloN-The
Authority which has been created by a statute
and which, for the purpose’of administering
the Code/ Part, may authorize acommittee or
an official to act on its behalf; hereinafter
called the ‘Authority’.
C USTOMERS , CONSUMERS C ONNECTION -
Piping tapped ‘on riser to supply each
individual customer; consumer.
G AS F I T T E R -An employee of the gas
supplying organization.
P ILOT -A small flame which is utilized to
ignite the gas at the main burner (s).
P RESSURE REGULATOR -A device designed
to lower the pressure of gas coming from the
distribution main and to maintain it
practically constants downstream. This
normal operation pressure shall be practically
in all cases that of the gas appliances used.
PURGE -To free a gas conduit of air or gas or
a mixture of gas and air.
Q U A L I F I E D IN S T A L L I N G A G E N C Y - A n
individual, firm or agency which either in
person or through a representative is engaged
in and is responsible for the installation or
replacement of gas piping on theoutlet side of
the gas meter, or the connection, installation
or repair of gas supply piping and appliances
within a bullding, and who is experienced in
such work, familiar with all precautions
required, and who has complied with all the
requirements as to qualification, registration,
licensing, etc, of the Authority.
RISER - Piping usually vertical on most of its
length that supplies gas from the service tothe
variocs storeys of the building.
S ERVICE P IPE-Pipe that runs between the
distribution main in the street and the riser in
the case of multistoreyed building or the meter
in the case of an individual house.
,SERVICE SH U T- OFF V A L V E-- A device that
PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES-SECTION 3 GAS SUPPLY
will shut off the gas supply to controlled
source of burner (s).
V ENT P IPE -A
safety device to which certain
regulators are connected to evacuate outside
gas that may escape from the normal circuit
when some part of system gets damaged or
malfunctions or a safety valve is open.
3. PRESSURE REGULATIONS
3.1 Where the pressure of gas supplied to
domestic systems or other low pressure gas
piping systems in buildings is in excess of
7kN/ m2 a gas pressure regulator of sufficient
size shall be installed in the service pipe of
each such system to prevent pressure in excess
of 7kN/ m2 from being introduced into such a
building piping unless the building piping is of
welded construction in which case the gas
pressure regulator may be located upstream of
gas meter in each consumer’s premises. In
these cases, the gas pressure in piping
downstream of gas pressure regulator shall
not exceed 7kN/m2.
3.2 If located inside a building, the required
regulator shall comply with the foIlowing:
a) If any of the diaphragms of the regulator
ruptures, the gas shall be sent to an outlet
vent pipe made of brass or plastic in order
to ventilate or drain the gas out of the
building. The vent pipe will, however, lead
to outer air about 1 m above the topmost
storey of the building. Means shall be
employed to prevent water from entering
this pipe and also to prevent stoppage of it
by insects or other foreign bodies.
b) If the gas pressure at the outlet of the
regulator falls below, 50 percent of the
operating gas pressure or rises above twice
the operating gas pressure, the gas input to
the pressure reducer shall be cut off.
c) In the event of malfunctioning of this
safety device, a supplementary device shall
connect the low pressure circuit to the
outlet circuit (vent pipe) as soon as the exit
pressure reaches 7kN/ m2.
3.3 It shall also be ensured by the supply
authority that the calorific value and sup ly
pressure of gas shall not exceed the valuesPor
the type of gas used.
4. SERVICE SHUT-OFF VALVES
4.1 Service shut-off valves shall be installed
on all new services including replacementsin a
readily accessible location.
4.2 Service shut-off valves shall be located
upstream of the meter if there is no regulator
or upstream of the regulator if there is one.
ix-L3
4.3 All gas services, operating at pressure
greater than 7kN m- shall be equipped with
an approved service shut-off valve located on
the service pipe outside the building.
4.4 Underground shut-off valves shall be
located in a covered durable curb box, man-
hole, vault or stand pipe which is designed to
permit ready operation of the valve and the
covers of which shall be clearly marked ‘Gas’.
5 EXISTING WORK
5.1 Nothing herein shall prohibit the
continued use of existing system of the gas
piping without further inspection or test,
unless the Authority has reason to believe that
defects which make the system dangerous to
life or property exist.
6. RULES FOR TURNING GAS ON
6.1 No person, unless is the employ ofthegas
company or having permission from the gas
company, shall turn on the gas at a service
shut-off valve or at any valve that controlsthe
supply of gas to more than one consumer.
6.2 Gas shall not be turned on at any meter
valve without specific permission from thegas
company or other authority if any of the
following conditions exists:
4 If the gas piping appliances or meter
supply through the meter valve are known
to leak or otherwise to be defective
(see IO).
b) If required inspection of the piping or
appliance has not been made.
c) If the gas company or other authority has
requested that the gas be left turned off.
d) If the meter valve is ICJLIIIJ shut off for
some reason not known to the gas fitter.
6.3 Gas shall not be turned on at any branch
line valve if any of the conditions specified
in 6.2 prevails. Where a branch line valve is
found closed, a gas fitter shall again turn the
gas on at such valve only if proper
precautions to prevent leakage are taken and
no other unsafe conditions are created
thereby.
6.4 Gas shall not be turned on at either the
meter valve or service line unless all gas keys
or valves provided on all outiets in the piping
system are closed or all out!ets in the piping
system are capped or plugged.
7. RULES FOR SHUTTING OFF THE
GAS
7. / The gas fitter shall put the gas off to any
IY-3- 4
appliance, pipe or piping system and shall
leave the gas turned off, until the causes for
interrupting the supply has been removed in
any one of the following cases:
a) If ordered to do so by the Authority.
b) If leakage of gas is noted, which appears to
be sufficient to cause fire, explosion or
asphyxiation.
c) If an installation of some gas appliance is
found to be such as to cause a serious
hazard to persons or property.
d) If any condition exists which threatens
interruption of gas supply which may
cause burner outage or otherwise prove
dangerous.
7.2 It shall be the duty of the installing agency
when the gas supply is to be turned off to
notify all affected consumers.
7.3 Before turning off the gas at the meter, for
the purpose of installation, repair,
replacement or maintenance of piping or
appliances, all burner and pilot valves on the
premises supplied with gas through the meter
shall be turned off and the meter test hand
observed for a sufficient length of time to
ascertain that there is no gas passing through
the meter. Where there is more than one meter
on the premises, precaution shall be exercised
to assume that the proper meter is turned off.
8. INSTALLATION OF GAS PIPES
8.1 Installation, repair and replacement of
gas piping or appliances shall be performed
only by a qualified installing agency.
8.2 Piping
82.1 Piping shall be of wrought iron, steel,
copper or cast iTon when the gas pressure is
less than 7kN, m-; with higher gas pressure use
of cast iron shall be prohibited.
8.2.1.1 Flexible metal pipes or heavy rubber
pressure tubing shall be permitted only as
direct connections to, burners.
8.2.2 SIZE OF G AS P IPING -Gas piping shall
be of such size and so installed as to provide
supply of gas sufficient to meet the maximum
demand without undue loss of pressure
between the meter or. service regulator when
a meter is not provided, and the appliance (s).
8.2.2.1 The size of gas piping depends upon
the following factors:
a) allowable loss in pressure from meter or
service regulator, when a meter is not
provided, to appliance;
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
b) maximum consumption to be provided;
c) length of piping and number of fittings;
and
d) specific gravity of gas.
8.2.2.2 No gas pipe smaller than 12 mm shall
be used.
8.2.3 As far as ,possible, straight lengths of
piping should be+ used. Where there are bends
in the pipe line, these should have a radius of
at least five times the diameter of the pipe.
8.3 The gas piping shall be painted red so as
to distinguish it from other piping and where
piping is likely to be exposed to sun rays, it
shall be painted silver grey.
8.4 Piping Underground
8.4.-i PROTECTION OF PIPING - Piping shall
be burried to a sufficient depth or covered in a
manner so as to protect the piping from
physical damage.
8.4.2 PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION -
Gas piping in contact with earth or other
materials which may corrode the piping shall
be protected against corrosion either by
adopting cathodic protection system where
soil corrosion is heavy or by applying
corrosion resisting paint like epoxy paint.
Piping shall not be laid in contact with
cinders.
8.4.3 Underground gas piping shall be
avoided as far as possible below grade
through the foundation or basement walls of
building. underground gas piping when
installed below grade thrdugh foundation or
basement wall of a building shall be either
encased in a sleeve or otherwise protected
against cdrrosion (see 8.4.2).
8.5 The building shall not be weakened by the
installation of any’gas piping.
8.6 Gas piping in building shall be supported
with pipe hooks, metal pipe straps, bonds or
hangers suitable for the size of piping and of
adequate strength and quality and located at
proper intervals so that the piping may not be
moved accidentally from the installed
position.
8.7 Pipe Entrance IO Bui/d&g.v- Where gas
pipe enters a building through a wall or floor
of masonry or concrete, any gas piping or
other piping entering the walls or floors shall
be suitably sealed against the entrance of
water/ moisture or gas.
8.7.1 PIPING IN FLObRS-Piping in soild
floors, such as concrete, shall be laid in
P A R T I X PLUMRING SERVICES-SECIW)N .3 CA9 SURLY
channels in the floor suitably covered ‘to
permit access to the piping with a minimum
damage to the building.
8.8 Gas pipe shall not be bent. Fittings shall
be used when making turns in gas pipe.
8.9 Gas piping shall not be supported by
other piping. Gas piping inside any buildink
shall not be run in or through an air duct,
chimney or gas vent, ventilating duct or
elevator shaft. Gas piping shall not be’ taken
through inaccessible or concealed areas where
their condition cannot be inspected and
accumulation of gas due to undetected
leakage may create a dangerous condition.
8.10 A drip shall be provided in the gas
distribution system, if the moisture contents
in the gas is likely to reach saturation point at
any stretch of pipe line in the system; a drip
shall, however, be provided at any suitable
point in the line of the pipe where condensate
may collect and from where it can be easily
removed. This drip should be so installed as
to constitute a trap wherein an accumulation
of condensate will shut off the flow of gas
before it will run back into the meter.
8.11 Prohibited Devices-N; device shall be
placed inside the gas piping or fittings that will
reduce the cross-sectional arka or otherwise
obstruct the free flow of gas.
8.12 Piping shall be electrically continuous
throughout its length and properly earthed
except in stretches where cathodic protection
system is used for protection against
corrosion. It shall not, however, be used to
earth any electrical equipment.
8.12.1 The distance between gas piping and
electrical wiring system shall be at least 60mm
and, where necessary, they shall be securely
fixed to prevent contact due to movement.
The gas piping should run below the electrical
wiring.
8.13 The distance between the gas piping and
steam piping, if running parallel, shall be at
least 150 mm. The gas piping should,
preferably run below the steam piping.
8.14 Piping installation shall be thoroughly
gastight.
8.15 Smoking shall not be permitted when
working on piping which contains or has
contaminated gas.
9. INSPECTION OF SERVICES
9.1 No person shall use or permit the use of a
new system or an extension of an old system of
gas piping in a building or structure beforethe
I\_,_ 5
 same has been inspected and tested to ensure
,he tightness of the system, and a certificate
has been issued by the Authority.
9.1.1 TEST OF P IPING FOR TIGHTNESS-
Before any system of gas piping is finally put
in service, it shall be carefully tested to ensure
that it is gastight. Where any part of the
system is to be enclosed or concealed, this
test should preoede the work of closingm. To
test for tightness the piping may be filled with
city gas, air or inert gas but not with any
other gas or liquid. In no case shall oxygen be
used. The piping shall stand a pressure of at
least ZOkN/ m2 measured with a manometer
or slope gauge, for a period of not less than
10 minutes without showing any drop in
pressure.
9. I .2. When the gas pressure exceeds7kN/ m2,
the piping shall withstand a pressure of
O%MN/ m for 4 hours. (This test is for piping
designed for working pressure less than
0_4MN/ m’):
9.2. The Authority shall, within a reasonable
time after being requested to do so, inspect
and test a systemof gas piping that is ready for
such inspection and test, and if the work is
found satisfactory and test requirements are
complied with, it shall issue the certificate.
9.3 It shall be unlawful to supply gas in a
building before the required certificate has
been issued, except that the Authority may
give temporary permission for a reasonable
time to supply and use gas before such an
installation has been fully completed and the
certificate issued.
IO. LEAKAGE CHECK
10.1 Before turning gas under pressure into
any piping, all openings from which gas may
escape shall be close&
10.2 Checking for Gas Leakage-No
matches, flame or other sources of ignition
shall be employed to check for gas leakge from
meters, piping or appliances. Checking for gas
leakage with soap and water solution is
recommended.
10.3 Use of Lights- Artificial illumiuat ion
used in connection with a search of gas
,leakage shall be restricted to electric hand
flash lights (preferably of the safety type) or
approved safety lamps. In searching for leaks,
electric switches should not be operated. If
electric lights are already turned on, they
should not be turned off.
1 0 . 4 checki.ng for ~Leakage w i t h
Meter- Immediately after turning gas into
the piping, the system shall be checked to
1X-S 6
ascertain that no gas is escaping. This may be
done by carefully watching the test dial of the
meter to determine whether gas is passing
through the meter. In no case should a leakage.
test be made using a gas meter unless
immediately prior to the test it has been
determined that the meter is in operating
condition.
IO.3 Checking of Leakage Without Using a
Meter-This may be done by attaching to an
appliance, orifice or a manometer or
equivalent device and momentarily turning on
the gas supply and deserving the gauging
device for pressure drop with the gas supply
shut-off. No discernible drop in pressureshall
occur during a period of 3 minutes.
IO.6 After piping has been checked, all gas
piping shall be fully purged. Piping shall not
be purged into the combustion chamber of an
appliance. A suggested method for purging -
the gas piping to an appliance is to disconnect.
the pilot piping at the outlet of the pilot valve.
10.7 After the gas piping has been effectiveiy
purged, all appliances shall be purged and the
pilots lighted.
II USE OF LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM
GAS .
Zf.1 The cylinders used for the storage and
transportation of liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) shall conform to accepted standards
[1x-3(1)]* approved by the statutory
authority.
II.2 The handling, use, storage and
transportation of liquefied petroluem gas in
cylinders exceeding 500 ml water capacity
shall be done in accordance with good
practice [1X-3(2)].
Il.3 L PG Cylinder Installation
I I .3.0 The following recommendations apply
to. installation in commeric+, industrial,
education1 and institutional premises.
I I .3.1 GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS
11.3.1.1 Those responsible for the
installation of cylinders, equipment and
piping should understand the characteristics
of .LPG and be trained in good practice of
handling, installing and maintaining
installations.
*In this section where rafcrcna is made to ‘accepted
standards’ or ‘goods praaicc’ in relation to material
specificaticm, testing and other information, the
appropriate document listed at the end of this section
may be used as a guide to the interpretationsfthis term.
NATtDNAL 8lJlLDlNC CODE O F INDIA’
11.3.1.2 The jointing compound used at
different joints in the system shall conform to
accepted standards ‘[ix-3(3)]. Hemp and
similar materials shall not be used at the joint.
In any joint in which the thread provides a
gastight seal, jointing compound shall be used
only cn the male thread.
11.3.1.3 Fire extinguishers of dry powder
type or carbon dioxide type conforming to
accented stand? r d s [1X-3(4)] s h a l l b e
provlcied in r 1.,, ct~s where LPG cylinder
installations are situated and shall be located
near such installations. Two buckets filled
with sand and two with water shall also be
installed nearby. The number, type and size of
the fire extinguishers shall be as follows:
Num- Tjpe Capa-
ber city
a) For installations I. Dry 3.5 kg
with LPG 40 powder
to 200kg
b) For irwtallations 1 Dry 7.5kg
with LPG more powder
than 200 and o r CO2 4.5kg
up to 320 kg
c) For installations 2 Dry 7.5kg
with LPG more powder
than 320 and o r CO? 4.5kg
up to 1000 kg
lf.3.1.4 Liquefied petr6leum gas shall not be
transferred from the cylinders in which it is
received to any other container.
11.3.2 C YLINDER L OCATION
11.3.2.1 STATIONARY INSTALLATIONS
a) Stationary installation not exceeding
40 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on
any floor. It is recommend$d to have a
minimum floor area of 5 m* for such an
installation.
b) S t a t i o n a r y i n s t a l l a t i o n s e a c h n o t
exceeding 40 kg of LPG may be installed
indoors on any, floor within the same
workspace provided the mi’nimum
distance between two such installations is
3 m, the proportion ofsuch installations to
floor area is one installation per 5m’ and
the aggregate quantity of gas of all such
installations does not exceed 200 kg.
cl Stationary installation not exceeding
80 kg of LPG may be installed indoors on
any floor provided the floor area for such
an installation is not less than 12 ml.
4 Stationary installations each not
exceeding 80 kg of LPG may be installed
indoors on any floor and within the same
workspace provided the minimum
distance between two such installations is
PART IX PI.IrMIJINC; SERVICES--SECTION 3 GAS hl’PPI.1
3 m, the proportion of such installations to
floor area is one installation per 12m’ and
the aggregate quantity of gas of all such
installations does not exceed 200 kg.
4 Stationary installation not exceeding
320 kg of LPG may be installed indoors in
an enclosed section of a building or a room
reserved exclusively for this purpose and
ventilated at low level directly to the
outside air.
Stationary installation above 320 kg
[200 kg in case provision as 5n ,(e) is not
possible] but not exceeding I 000 kg shall
be installed outdoors on ground level
only. A minimum distance of 3 m shall be
maintained between an installation and
any building, public place, roadways. and
other surroundings. The installation shall
be protected from excessive weathering by
sun. rain, etc, and from tampering by
unauthorized persons. A lean-to-roof with
expanded metal on angle-iron framework
on the sides is considered suitable for this
purpose. In any case, adequateventilation
at ground level to the outside air shall be
provided. The distance between any two
such installations shall be 3 m unless
separated by a leakproof wall of fire-
resistant material up to at least I m above
the height of the manifold valve.
8) Cylinders shall be installed upright with
the valves uppermost.
h) Cylinder shall not be placed below ground
level and shall be at least Im away’ from
drains, culverts or entrances and openings
leading to cellars and other depressiqns in
which gas might accumulate.
3 Cylinders containing more than 20 kg of
gas shall not be located on floors above
ground level.
k) Cylinders shall be located on a concrete or
b;ick floor, preferably raised in case of
outdoor installations.
n-0 Cylinders shall not be placed close to
steam pipes or any other source of heat
and shall be protected from the weather
and direct sun’s heat. Cylinders shall be
placed at a distance of 3 m away from any
other source of heat which is likely to raise
the temperature of cylinders above the
room temperature unless separated by
metal sheet or masonry partition.
n) When cylinders are being connected or
disconnected, there shall be no open flame
or similar source of ignition in the vicinity;
and smoking shall be prohibited.
11.3.2.2 PORTABLE INSTALLATIONS- When
portability of cylinders is necessary. the
7
I.X.3. ’
following requirements shall be fulfilled:
a) The, sum total capacity of the cylinders
connected to each mainfold shall not
exceed 80 kg of LPG. The total quantity of
gas ‘thus installed in a workspace shall not
exceed 200 kg.
b) The regulator shall be connect& directly
to the cylinder valve or to a manifold
which shall be connected’ to ‘the cylinder
valves by means of rigid connections to
give adequate support to the regulator.
cl At any time the total quantity of gas at
portable installations shall be in
proportion to the floor area as specified
in 11.3.2.1 (a) to 11.3.2.1(t).
1 1 . 3 . 3 MA N I F O L D S AND PRESSURE
REGULATORS
11.3:3.1 If pressure regulators, manifold
headers, automatic change-over devices, etc,
are connected to cylinders by flexible orsemi-
flexible connectors, they shall be rigidly
supported. Copper tube pigtails and
reinforced high pressure hoses are considered
to be flexible or semi-flexible connectors for
this purpose.
11.3.3.2 Pressure reguiator fitted with a
safety valve shall be either:
a) installed in the open air, or
b) vented to the open by means of a metal
vent pipe connected to the safety valve
outlet. : outside the buildings and shall not be
11.3.3.3 Care shall be taken that safety valve
outlets do not become choked with dust or
other foreign matter.
11.3.3.4 Suitable line shut-off valves shall be
fitted for each appliance or burner when more
than one appliance is connected to the gas
supply. Both ends of the connection to
portable appliances shall be securely attached
by means of clips. Hose shall be of a type
resistant to liquefied petroleum gas.
Il.3.3.5 The manifold headers which do not
have to be taken in normal use should be
braced or welded using a material conforming
to accepted standards [1X13(3)] and which
shall have a melting point of at least 540°C.
11.3.4 INSTRUCTIONS TO C ONSUMERS- A
handbook containing all instructions with
regard to the following aspects shall be
supplied by the supplier to the consumers:
a) operation of the whole system;
b) how to recognize gas leaks;
c) action to be take2 in case of leakage;’
1x-3-
8 NATaNAL
d) action to be taken in case of fire; and
e) action to be taken in case of damage to, or
failure of any part of the installation.
11.3.5 For detailed information regarding
installation of LPG cylinders in commercial,
industrial, educational and institutional
premises, reference may be made to good
practice [1X-3(5)].
11.4 LPG Bulk Storage Installations
11.4.0 The following recommendations
apply to LPG bulk storage installations where
stroage tanks over 450 litres water capacity
are used at industrial, commercial and
domestic consumers’ premises.
The maximum capacity of an individua!t*i:!;.
and group of tanks at industrial,co: ..;rcial
and domestic premises shall be as follows:
Premises Maximum Maximum
Water Capa& Water Capa-
city ‘of an city of
hdividual
Grwk,of
Tank,
litres Iitres ’
Industrial 130 000 260 000
commercial 40 000 80 000
Domestic 20 000 80 000
1 1 . 4 . 1 L OCATION AND S PACING O F
S TORAGE T A N K S
11.4.1.1 Storage tanks shall be located
installed one above the other.
11.4.1.2 Each individual tank shall be located
with respect to the nearest important building
or group of buildings or line of adjoining
property which may be built in accordance
with Table 1. The distances given refer to the
horizontal distance in plan between the
nearest point of’ the storage tank and
building/ property line.
11.4.1.3 In heavily populated or congested
areas the authority having jurisdiction may
determine the need for other reasonable
protective methods to be taken, such as
provision of fire walls, etc. If fire walls are to
be provided, the authority may determine the
extent to which the safety distances forabove-
ground tanks may be reduced.
11.4.1.4 No LPG tank(s) shall be located
within the bunded enclosures of any
petroleum installation. The minimum
distance of separation between LPG storage
tanks and any petroleum installation shall be
as prescribed under the Petroleum Rules 1937
or as specified in Table 1 whichever is more.
BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
11.4.1.5 The number of storage tanks in one shall open outwards and shall not be self-
storage installation shall not exceed six. In locking.
case there are more than one storage
installations, the safety distance between two 11.4.3.2 When damage to LPG systems from
installations shall be the same as the distance the LPG tank lorry is a possibility,
between the tanks and the property line in precautions against such damage shall be
accordance with Table 1. taken.
11.4.3.3 Underground tanks shall be
TABLE. 1 MlNlMUM SAFETY DISTANCES protected from above ground loading by
(Clause 11.4.1.2 and 11.4.1.5) providing a suitable curb to prevent a possible
accidental damage to the tank and its fittings
SL LPG STORAGE DISTANCE DISTANCE by LPG tank lorry.
No. W ATER FROM BETWEEN
CAPACITY 0~ B UILDING ,! TANKS
INDIVIDUAL PROPERTY 1 I .4.4 G RASS AND W EED R E M O V A L - Road
TA N K LINE ignitable material, such as weeds, long grass
Above Under Above Under or any combustible material shall be removed
Ground Ground Ground Ground from an area within 3m from the shell of any
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) LPG tank of up to 2 000 litres water capacity,
litres m m m and within 6m from the shell of larger tanks. If
i ) Upto 1; weed killers are used, chemicals which are a
ii) Above 2 000 f I.5
and up to potential source of fire hazard shall not be
10 000 selected for this purpose.
iii) Above 10 000
and up to 11.4.5 W A R N I N G S I G N S- NO smoking or
20 c@O 15 10 I.5 I.5
iv) Above 20 030 naked flames shall be permitted within the
and up to safety zone of the installation. -Prominent
,400oo 20 - 2 - notices to this effect shall be posted at access
v) Above 40 000 point.
and up to
1300000 30 - 2 -
11.4.6 FI R E P R O T E C T I O N- The possibility
NOTE 1 --If the aggregate water capacity of a multi-tank
installation is 40 000 litres or greater, theabove minimum
of a major fire outbreak, leading to direct
safety distances shall apply to the aggregate storage flame impingement of the storage tank, shall
capacity rather than the capacity per individual storage be minimized by sound engineering in plant
tank. design and layout, good operating practice,
NOTE 2 -In view of lack of experience of underground and proper education and training of
tank installations in lndta, underground tanks larger than personnel on both routine operations and on
20 000 litres water capacity shall not be permissible at action to be taken in an emergency.
present.
11.4.6.1 WATER S U P P L Y - - P r o v i s i o n shall be
11.4.2 BUNDING - Since LPG is heavier than made for an adequate supply of water and fire
air, storage tank shall not be enclosed within pr,otection in the storage area according to the
bund walls. The accumulation of flammable local hoses and mobile equipment, fixed
liquid under LPG tanks shall be prevented by monitors or by fixed spray systems which may
suitably slopping the ground. be automatic. Control of water flow should be
possible from outside any danger area.
I I .4.3 P R O T E C T I O N
11.4.6.2 F I R E E X T I N G U I S H E R S- A t l e a s t t w o
1 I .4.3. I To prevent trespassing or tampering, dry chemical powder type fire extinguishers of
the area which includes tanks, direct fired lOkg capacity each shall be installed at points
vapourisers. pumping equipment and loading of access to the storage installations.
and unloading facilities shall be enclosed by
an industrial type fence at least 2 m high along II .4.7 For detailed information regarding
the perimeter of the safety zone. Any fence LPG bulk storage installations reference may
shall have atleast two means of exit. Gates be made to good practice [1X-3(6)].
 .

i
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and
‘accepted standards’ in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standardshall be adopted at the time of enforcement of the Code. ,The standards listedmay be used
podt? Authority as,a guide in conformance with the requirements of the referred clauses @I the

In the following list the number appearing in thefirst column within parentheses indicates the
number 6f the reference in this part7 section.

(1) IS:3 196-I 982 Specification for welded
low carbon steel gas cylinder exceeding
..-- 5 litre water capacity for low pressure
liquefiable gases (third revision)
lS:7142-1974 Specification for welded
low carbon steel gas cylinder for low
pressure liquefiable gases ,not exceeding,
5 -1itre water capacity
(2) IS:8 198(Part V)-1976 Code of practice
for steel cylinders for compressed gases:
Part V Liquefied petrolurn gases (LPG)
(3) 13:3465-1966 Specification for jointing
compounds for use in liquefied
p e t r o l e u m g a s a p p l i a n c e s at+d
installations
(4) IS:2 171-1976 Specification for portable
fire extinguishers, dry powder type
(second revision)
lS:2878-1976 Specification for portable
fire extingushers, carbon-dioxide type
(first revision)
(5) 13:6044 (Part I)- 197 1 Code of practice for
liquefied petroleum gas storage
installations : Part 1 Commercial and
industrial cylinder installations
(6) IS:6044(Part IQ-1972 Code of practice
for liquefied petroluem gas storage
installations : Part. II Industrial,
commercial and domestic bulk storage
installations

h.,,l0\,4l. BLILDINC C O D E Ok 1\‘131,\

l
-NATIONALBUILDING CODE OFINDIA
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR
DISPLAY STRUCTURES

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

 CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD 2
1. SCOPE 3
2. TERMINOLOGY ... 3
3. PERMITS ... 4
4. M.AINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ... 10
5. TYPES OF SIGNS ... 10
6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL SIGNS ... II
7. ELECTRIC SIGNS AND ILLUMINATED SIGNS 12
8. GROUND SIGNS 12
9. ROOF SIGNS ... 12
10. VERANDAH SIGNS ... 13
11. WALL SIGNS ... 13
12. PROJECTING SIGNS 13
13. MARQUEE SIGNS ... 14
14. SKY SIGNS 14
IS. TEMPORARY ADVERTISING SIGNS, TRAVELLING CIRCUS
SIGNS, FAIR SIGNS AND DECOR ATIONS DURING PUBLIC
REJOICING 14
APPENDIX A SPECIMEN FORM FOR APPLICATION FOR
PERMJT TO ERECT RE-ERECT’OR ALTER IN
ADVERTISING SIGN ... 15

?ART k S I G N S AND 0l:TDOOR DISPLAI STRl (T, “,\ X-

1
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY
STRUCTURES

0. FOREWORD
0.1 This part covers the requirements of signs and outdoor display structures
with regard to public safety, structural safety and tire safety.
0.2 This part was first published in 1970. This revision follows the general
revision of the Code; commentsand suggestions received during its use have been
taken into account.
03 With the growing industrialization followed by urbanization of large
number of cities and towns, the advertising signs and its appurtenantstructures
have increased. In the absence of any definite rules, the display of advertising
signs has proceeded unrestrained resulting in a city or town littered
indiscriminately with hoardings and advertising signs of all types.
0.4 Consideration of the aspects of urban aesthetics and public safety points to
the necessity for building regulations for the control of advertising signs and
structures. For signs coming on Highways, relevant IRC rules shall apply. In this
connection reference is made to ‘IRC 46: 1972 A policy on road advertisements*.

X-
2 NATIONAL. BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
I. SCOPE
1.1. This part covers the requirements with
regard to public safety, structural safety and
fire safety of all signs and outdoor display
structures.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.0 For the purpose of this part, the following
definitions shall apply.
2.1 Signs
A D V E R T I S I N G S IGN - A n y surface or
structure with characters, letters or
illustrations applied thereto and displayed in
any manner whatsoever out of doors for
purposes of advertising or to give information
regarding or to attract the public to any place,
person, public performance, article or
merchandise whatsoever, and which surface
or structure is attached to, forms part of or is
connected with any building, or is fixed to a
tree or to the ground or to any pole, screen,
fence or hoarding or displayed in space.
C LOSED S IGN- An advertising sign in which
at least more than fifty percent of the area is
solid or tightly enclosed or covered.
E LECTRIC S IGN -An advertising sign in
which electric fittings, which are an integral
part of the signs, are used.
G R O U N D S IGN -An advertising sign
detached from a building, and erected or
painted on the ground or on any pole, screen,
fence or hoarding and visible to the public.
I LLUMINATED S IGN -An advertising sign,
permanent or otherwise, the functioning of
which depends upon its being illuminated by
direct or indirect light, and other than an
electric sign.
M ARQUEE S IGN - An advertising sign
attached to or hung from a marquee canopy
or other covered structure projecting from
and supported by the building and extending
beyond the building wall, building line.
O PEN S IGN -An advertising sign in which at
least fifty percent of the enclosed area is
uncovered or open to the transnission of
wind.
P R O J E C T I N G S IGN -An advertising sign
affixed to any building element and projecting
more than 30 cm therefrom.
R OOF S IGN -An advertising sign erected or
placed on or above the parapet or any portion
of a roof of a building including signs painted
on the roof of a building.
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES
S KY S IGN -An advertising sign displayed in
space like:
a) a gas filled balloon anchored to a point on
the ground and afloat in the air with or
without a streamer of cloth, etc; or
b) sky-writing, that is, a sign or word traced
in the atmosphere by smoke discharged
from an aeroplane.
T E M P O R A R Y S IGN -An advertising sign,
banner or other advertising device
constructed of cloth, canvas, fabric or any
other light material, with or without a
structural frame, intended for a limited period
of display; including decorative displays.for
holidays or public demonstrations.
V E R A N D A H S IGN -An advertising sign
attached to, posted on or hung from a
verandah.
WALL SIGN - An advertising sign, other than
a projecting sign, which is directly attached to
or painted or pasted on the exterior surface of
or structural element of any building.
2.2 General
A PPROVED -Approved by the Authority
having jurisdiction.
A REA OF S P E C I A L C O N T R O L -Any area
declared an area of special control by the
Authority in respect of the display of
advertising signs, where the requirements for
such display are more restrictive than
elsewhere in the area controlled by the
Authority.
A UTHORITY H AVING J URISDICTION -- The
Authority which has been created by a statute
and which for the purpose of administering
the Code/ Part, may authorize a committee or
an official to act on its behalf; hereinafter
called the ‘Authority’.
B UILDING L INE -The line up to which the
plinth of a building adjoining a street or an
extension of a street or on a future street may
lawfully extend. It includes the lines
prescribed, if any, in any scheme.
C O M B U S T I B L E M A T E R I A L -A material is
combustible, if it burns or adds heat to a fire
when tested for combustibility in accordance
with good practice [X(l)]*.
O WNER - The person who receives the rent
for the use of the land or building or would be
* In this Dart where reference is made to’eood oractice’in
Y .
relation IO design or testing and construction
procedures. the appropriate document listed at the end
of this part may be used as a guide to the interpretation
of this term.
X-
3
entitled to do so if they were let. It also
includes:
a) an agent or trustee who receives such rent
on behalf of the owner;
b) a receiver, executor or administiar:>r or a
manager appointed by any court of
competent jurisdiction to have the charge
of, or to exercise the rights of the owner;
c) an agent or trustee who receives the rent
of or is entrusted with or is concerned
with any building devoted to religious or
charitable purposes; and
d) a mortgagee in possession.
S TREET L INE -The line defining the side
limits of a street.
3. PERMITS
3.1 Application
3 . 1 . 1 CoNDl-rioNs FOR GR A N T O F
PERMIT - No sign shall be erected, altered or
maintained without first obtaining a permit
for the same from the Authority and shall be
subject to the following conditions:
a) The written permission shall not be
granted or renewed at any one time, for a
period exceeding three years from the
date of grant of such permission or
renewal.
b) The written permission or the renewal
granted by the Authority shall become
void:
1) if any sign or the part thereof falls
either through an accident or any other
causes;
2) if any addition is made except for the
purpose of making it secure under the
direction of the Authority;
3) ik:eYocfhange is made in the sign or part
4) if any addition or alteration is made to
the building or structure upon or over
which the sign is erected and if such
addition or alteration involves
disturbance of the sign or any part
thereof; and
5) if the building or structure upon or
over which the sign is erected fixed or
restrained becomes demolished or
destroyed.
c) Light and ventilation of buildings,if any
situated near the signs and hoardings
shall not be obstructed in any way;
4 Advertisements displayed shall not be of
any objectionable or obscene nature
gILen under 3.3;
e) In the public interest the Authority shall
have the right to suspend the licence even
before the expiry period, upon which the
licencee shall remove the signs;
The licencee shall be responsible for the
observance of all the rules and regulations
laid down by the Authority;
iz) The signs should not mar the aesthetic
beauty of the locality;
h) Tlie signs other than pertaining to
building shall not be permitted to come in
front of buildings such as hospitals,
educational institutions, public offices,
museums, buildings devoted to religious
worship and buildings of national
importance;
j) Maintenance and inspection of
advertising signs and their suppqrts shall
be ris given under 4.
k) No hoarding sign on the highways shall
be put without the permission of the
Authority maintaining/ incharge of
highways/ roads; and
ml In addition all signs shall conform to the
general requirements given under 6.
3.1.2 A PPLICATION F O R LICENCE O R
PERMIT AND R EQUIRED D RAWINGS - Every
person- intending to erect, alter or display an
advertising sign for which a permit or licence
is re‘quired, shall make application to the
Authority on the prescribed form containing
such particulars as the Authority may require.
Such a form (see Appendix A) shall be signed
by the applicant and by the owner of the site
upon which such sign is or is to be situated and
shall include the following infoimation:
a) Full specifications showing the length,
height and weight of the sign, the location
where it is to be erected, the
manufacturer’s name and address and
where applicable, the number of lights
and electrical details of the same.
b) Such form shall be accompanied by a
location plan indicating the position of
the sign on the site drawn to,a.scale of
I:500 and by full detail drawing drawn to
a scale of 1:20 or an exact multiple thereof
in ink or on prints including, if required
by ‘the Authority, an elevation showing
the sign in relation to the facade.
cl In the case of roof signs, projecting signs
or ground signs in addition to the
foregoing, the size of all members of
supporting frameworks and anchorages,
and, if required by the Authority, the
necessary design calculations shall ,be
furnished with the application.
d) Any other particulars as may be desired
by the Authority coxered in 6 and its sub-
clauses.
e) In the case of sky signs, necessary
information as desired by the Authority
may be supplied.
3.1.3 The Authority may, on the receiptofan
ap lication for permit, either sanction or
rePuse ‘such a permit or sanction with
modifications as deemed necessary andshall
communicate decision to the applicant. If
within 30 days of receiving an application for
a permit the Authority fails to intimate in
writing to the applicant, the permit along with
the plans shall be deemed as sanctioned.
3.1.4 When a sign has to be altered,
information only on such plans and
statements, as may be necessary, shall be
included in the form. However, the changing
of movable harts of an approved sign that is
designed for such changes, shall not be
deemed an alteration provided the conditions
of the original approval and the requirements
of this Dart are not violated.
3.1.5 E XISTING A DVERTISING S IGNS -
Advertising signs in existence at the date of
promulgation of the Code and covered by a
vaild licenct or permit issued by the Authority
shallnot require to be licensed under the Code
until such -1icence or permit has expired,
provided it is maintained in a good and safe
condition.
3.1.6 For advertising signs application shall
be submitted through a structural engineer
along with necessary drawings and structural
calculations. The wind load taken in the
design calculations shall be in accordance
with Part IV Structural design, Section I
Loads.
3.2 Exemptions
3.2.1 No permit shall be required for signs
and outdoor display structures of the
following types:
a) If the signs are exhibited within the
window of any building provided it does
not affect light and ventilation of the
building.
b) If it relates to the trade or business carried
on within the land or building upon which
such advertisement is exhibited or to any
sale, entertainment or meeting or
Iettering of such land or building or any
effects therein; or to the trade or business
carried on by the owner of any tramcar,
omnibus or other vehicle upon which
such advertisements is exhibited.
p&#kT X SIGNS A N D Ot’TDOOR DISPLAI STRt (It Rt4
c) In addition no permission shall be
required for the signs covered by the
provisions3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4 and 3.2.5.
Such exemptions, however shall not
construed to relieve the owner of the sign
from the responsibility of erection and
maintenance in compliance with the
Code.
3.2.2 WALL SIGNS-The wall signs listed
in 3.2.2. I to 3.2.2.4 shall not require a permit.
3.2.2. I STORE SIGNS -Non~illuminated
signs erected over a show window or over the
door of a store or business establishment
which announce the name of the proprietor
and the nature of the business conducted
therein; the sign shall not be more thanI m in
height.
3.2.2.2 GOVERNMENT BUILDINGSIGNS -
Signs erected on a municipal, state or central
government building which announce the
name, nature of the occupancy and
information.
3.2.2.3 NAME PLATES-Any wall sign
erected on a building or structure indicating
the name of the occupant of building, which is
not more than 0.5 m m area.
3.2.2.4 FENCE SIGNS-Signs painted on the
surface of enclosure or division fences, or on
picket or other- ornamental fences.
32.3 GROUND SiGNs
3.2.3.1 TRANSIT DIRECTIONS-The erection
or maintenance of a sign designating the
location ofa transit line, a rail track, station or
other public carrier when not more than
0.5m’ in area.
3.2.3.2 HIGHWAY SIGNS - In general,
advertisements of the following classes are
permissible without permission though these
should reasonably conform to the principles
set out in 3.5.f:
Class (I) Functional Advertisements:
a) Official warning signs, traffic directions,
sign posting and notices or
advertisements posted or displayed by or
under the directions of any public or
court officer in the performance of his
official or directed duties:
Example:
DIVEKSION AHEAD
b) Direction signs to places of public
amenity, such as petrol filling stations,
hospitals, first-aid posts, police stations
and fire stations:
Example:
C) Signs relating sole1 to any city, town,
village or historic p7 ace, shrine, place of
tourist interest:
Example:
d) Signs, notices, etc, erected by the Defence
Department for information of members
of the armed forces or the public.
Example:
1 ARTlLLERY RANGE AHEAD 1
e). Signs restricting tresspass Of property,
limited to 0.2m’ in area or less.
Examples:
f) Signs or notices, 0.2 m2 in area or less,
placed so as to show direction to a
residence and planted sufficiently away
from the carriageway.
Class . (2)
, Advertisements Relating to the
Premises on Which ihese are
Displayed:
4 Advertisements for the purpose of
identification, direction or warning with
respect to the land or building on which
they are displayed, provided not
exceeding 0.2 m in area in the caseof any
such advertisement.
Examples:
h ,
X-
6 NATIONtL
b) Advertisements relating to any person,
partnership or company separately
carrying on a profession, business trade at
the premises where any such
advertisement is displayed; limited to one
advertisement not exceeding 0.3m2 in
area in respect of each such person,
partnership or company.
Examples:
RAM LAL & COMPANY
c) Advertisements relating to any institution
of a religious, educational, cultural,
recreational, medical or similar character
or any hotel, public house, dak bungalow,
block of flats, club, boarding house or
hostel situated on the land on which any
such advertisement is displayed; limited
to one advertisement not exceeding
1.2 m2 in area in respect of each such
premises.
Exampless:
I
I
COLLEGE OF
ENGINEERING I I
1-1
HOLIDAY
HOME I
I ROTARY
I
CLUB I
Class (3) Advertisements of Temporary
Nature
4 Advertisements relating to the sale. or
letting of the land on which they are
displayed; limited in respect of each such
sale or letting) to one advertisement not
exceeding 2m in area.
Examples:
I
1 TO LET 1 1 HOUSE FOR SALE 1
1 I I 1
b) Advertisements announcing sale of goods
or livestock, and displayed on the land
where such goods or livestock are situated
or where such sale is held, limited to one
advertisement not exceeding 1.2m2 in
area.
Examples:
,,,,,,I
pizEzq
BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
c) Advertisements relaiing to the carrying
out of building or similar work on the
land on which they are displayed not
exceeding 2 m* in area.
Examples:
I-ZZKI
1 IN PROGRESS]
Advertisements announcing any local
event of a religious, educational, cultural,
political, social or recreational character,
not being an activity promoted or carried
on for commercial purposes; limited to a
display of advertisements ocfupying an
area not exceeding 0.6m on any
premises.
Examples:
DIWALI MELA FLOWER SHOW
3.2.4 T EMPORARY S I G N S
3.2.4.1 CONSTRUCTION SITE SIGNS -Cons-
truction signs, engineers’and architects’signs
and other similar signs which may be
authorized by the Authority in connection
with construction operations (see TableI).
3.2.4.2 S P E C I A L D I S P L A Y S slcNs-Special
decorative displays used for holidays, public
demonstrations or promotion of civic welfare
or charitable purposes, on which there is no
commercial advertising, provided that the
Authority is not held responsible for any
resulting damage (see 15.2.2).
3.2.5 The qualitative requirements of signs
given in Table 1 shall not require any permit.
3.3 Unsafe and Unlawful Signs
3.3.1 N OTICE OF U NSAFE AND U NLAWFUL
SIGNS- When any sign becomes insecure, or
in danger of falling, or otherwise unsafe, or if
any sign shall be unlawfully installed, erected
or maintained in violation of any of the
provisions of the Code, the-owner thereof, or
the person or firm maintaining the same, shall
upon written notice of the Authority,
forthwith in the case of immediatedanger and
in any case within not more than three days,
make such sign conform to the provisions of
this part or shall remove it. If within three
days the order is not complied ‘with, the
Authority may remove such sign at the
expense of the owner.
3.3.1.1 Notwithstanding the above, it shall be
the responsibility of the owner to ensure the
safety of the advertising signs, even without a
rekrence from the Authority.
3.3.2 The followmg s i g n s m a y n o t b e
permitted under any circumstances:
Any sign which in the opinion of the
Authority is an obscene, repulsive, revolting,
or objectionable character or prejudicial to
the municipality or savouring political
propaganda or of a nature calculated to
produce pernicious or injurious effect on
public or any particular class of persons, or is
displayed in such a place, in such a manner or
by any such means as, in the opinion of the
Authority, could be likely to affect injuriously
ihe amenities of, or to disfigure shy
neighbourhood.
3.4 Area of Special Control
3.4.1 Whenever in the opinion of the
Authority it is likely that any advertising
device otherwise permitted in terms of the
Code may affect injuriously or disfigure any
particular area within the jurisdiction of the
Authority it may proclaim such area as an
area of special control. Parks and land for
public use may also be included as areas of
special control.
3.4.2 Subject to the provisions of3.4. J within
such area, the erection and display of any
advertising sign shall be prohibited or
restricted in any manner deemed necessary by
the Authority. The Authority shall publish its
intention of proclaiming such an area in one
or more newspapers circulating in the area of
jurisdiction of the Authority. Any owner of
property within such area who may feel
aggrieved bp such proclamation may appeal
within one month from such publication
against proclamation of such an area to the
Authority whose decision shall be final.
3.4.3 The wording on ,any verandah sign,
permitted by the Authority, in any area of
special control, shall be restricted to the name
of the proprietor or firm occupying the
premises, the name of the building or
institution, the genera1 business or trade
carried on, such as ‘IEWELLER’, ‘CAFE’,
‘DANCING’, or information regarding the
location of the building entrance, box office
or regarding the theatre programme or similar
inform&ion. No verandah sign in any area of
special control shall advertise any particular
article of merchandise nor shall any such sign
refer to price or reduction in price.
3.4.3.1 Normally no other advertising sign
shall, except as for 3.4.3, be within a distance
of 30m from the area of special control.
3.5 Prohibition of Advertising Signs on
Certain Sites- Where the Authority is of the
opinion that liny site is unsuitable for display
of advertising signs by virtue of the general
characteristics of the locality in regard to
historic, architectural, cultural or similar
interest, or by virtue of its position, the display
7
 L
b) Signs relating to the THIS FACTORY I! Not more than Not more than None (Ine for each road iot more than May be displayed
carrying out of build- BEING ERECTED 4 m’ 5 m (in area of irontage for each 50 mm (in area only while such
ing or similar opera- special control c,ontractor or sub- If special control works are in progress
tions on the land where X Y Z C&TRW 4 m) Crontractor 100 mm)
sign is displayed TION CO
Building and
Engineering
Contractor

c) Signs announcing Not more than Not more than None 2ny number but dot more than Shall not be displayed
any local event in I.5 m’ (in aggrc 5 m (in area of aggregate area not ‘50 mm (in area earlier than 28 days
connection wieh an gate area 4 m) 5pecial control o exceed that )f special control before the event is
activitv uromoted for 4 m) given in co1 2 00 mm) due to start and shall
non-commercial pm- I m any premises be removed within I4
poses by various local days of its conclusion
organizations
d) Signs and business Not to exceed one- Not more than Only to indicate 9ny number but riot more than Area to-be computed
twelfth of area of 4m that medical or aggregate are not lOtI mm as if the advertise-
each face up to a similar services or o exceed that ment were laid flat
on business premi&s height of 4 m supplies are avail- given in co1 2 agamst the face of
with reference to the able where adver- the building
business. the goods tisment is dts-
sold.or the services played*
provided. etc, In
these premtres and IRANK
the name and qualifi-
cations of the person
carrying on such activity
of such signs is likely to affect in any way the
safety of any form of transport, erection of
advertising signs on such a site shall be
prohibited.
3.5.1 HIGHWAYS AND ROADS-In general
the following advertisements should not be
permitted:
a) At or within 100 m of any road junction,
bridge or railway crossing or another
crossing. In urban areas, this distance
may be reduced to 50 m, provided there is
no conflict with the requirements stated
further on;
N~IE-l-he safe stoooine distance for a vehicle
travelling at a speed oi 50 km, h is 60 m. This should
be the ‘uninfluenced distance’ for a driver
approaching a junction. Assuming that 3 seconds is
the time during which the influence of an
advertisement board persists, the distance travelled
in this time will be about 40m. The’sign should.
therefore, be more than IOOm away from the
junction Hence 100 m is suggested.
b) In such manner and at such places as to
obstruct or interfere with the visibility of
approaching, merging or intersecting
traffic;
c) Within 10 m of the edge of a carriageway;
Nor E-A distance of IOtn may be taken as the normal
minimum setback from the edge of the carriageway,
the maximum area ofthe advertisement being0.3 rn-
for every metre of setback.
4 Within 50 m along the road, of any sign
board erected for the regulation of traffic
under the orders of a Public Authority,
such as a Traffic Authority, a Public
Transport Authority, or a Local
Authority;
e) In such a form as will obscure or hinder
interpretation of any sign, signal or o:her
device erected for traffic control by the
Public ‘Authorities. For instance, the
advertisements should not imitate or
resemble, in colour or shape, the standard
legal traffic signs, or employ such words
as ‘STOP’ in the same manner as used on
traffic signs;
f-l On boards, placards, cloth banners or
sheets (except traffic signs) hung across a
road as they distract the attention of the
driver and are, therefore, hazardous;
NOTF -Any advertisement allowed on the sides ofa
foot over bridge or flyover across the carriage-ways
shall be restricted in size and shape such that no part
of the advertisement board projects beyond the top,
bottom and sides of the parapet of foot over bridge
or flyover.
g) In such form as will obstruct the path of
pedestrians and hinder their visibility at
crossmgs;
h) Within right-of-way of the road; and
j) When these will affect local amenity.
3.5.2 Illuminated advertisements of the
following description are objectionable from
the angle of traffic safety and should not be
allowed:
4 Advertisements which contain, include or
are illuminated by any flashing,
intermittent or moving light or lights
except those giving public service
information, such as time, temperature,
weather or date;
b) Illuminated advertisements of such
intensity or brilliance as to cause glare or
impair vision of the driver or pedestrians,
or which otherwise interfere with any
operations of driving; and
Cl Advertisements illuminated in such a way
as to obscure or diminish effectiveness of
any official sign, device or signal.
4. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
4.1 Maintenance-All signs for which a
permit is required, together with all their
supports, braces, guys and anchors shall be
kept in good repair, both structurally and
aesthetically, and when not galvanized or
constructed of approved corrosion-resistive
non-combustible materials, shall be painted
when necessary to prevent corrosion.
4.2 Housekeeping-It shall be the duty and
responsibility of the owner of every sign to
maintain the immediate premises occupied by
the sign, in a clean, sanitary and healthy
condition.
4.3 Inspecrion- Every sign for which a
permit has been issued and every existing sign
for which a permit is required shall be
inspected by the Authority at least once in
every calendar year.
5. TYPES OF SIGNS
5.1 Types of Signs-In this part, the
following types of signs are covered:
a) Electr’c and illuminated signs (see 7);.
b) Ground signs (see 8);
cl Roof signs (see 9);
4 Verandah signs (see 10);
e) Wall signs (see II);
0 Projecting signs (see 12);
.!a Marquee signs (see f3);
NATIONAL BIXLDINC. C(?DE OF IND’4
h) Sky signs (see 14); and
3 Miscellaneous and temporary signs
(see 15).
6. GENERAL REQIJIREMF.NTS FOR
ALL SIGNS
6.1 Loads --- Every advertising sign shall be
designed so as to withstand safely the wind,
dead, seismic and other loads as set out in
Part VI Structural design, Section I Lo:ids.
6.2 I l l u m i n a t i o n - N o sign shall be
illuminated by other than electrical means and
electrical devices and wiring shall be installed
in accordance with the requirements of Part
VIII Building services, Section 2 Electrical
installations. In no case shall any open spark
or flame be used for display purposes unless
specifically approved by the Authority.
6.3 Location of Advertising Signs
a) No advertising signs shall be erected.
constructed and maintained so as to
obstruct any pedestrain movement or fire
escape or any window or door, or opening
used as a means for egress or for fire
fighting purposes or so as to prevent free
passage from one part of a roof to any
other part thereof.
b) No sign shall be erected in any form or
shape or manner which will interfere with
any opening required for lighting and
ventilation.
6.4 C/se qf Combustibles
6.4.1 O R N A M E N T A L F E A T U R E S - W o o d o r
plastic or other materials of combustible
characteristics similar to wood may be used
for mouldings, cappings, nailing blocks,
letters and latticing where permitted and for
other purely ornamental features of signs.
6.4.2 SIGN FACINGS -Sign facings may be
made of approved combustible materials
provided the area of each face is not more than
10m’ and the wiring for electric lighting is
entirely enclosed in metal conduit and
installed with a clearance of not less than 5 cm
from the facing material.
6.5 Damage or Defacement by Removal of
Advertising Signs- Whenever_ any
advertising sign is removed, whether in
consequence of a notice or order under the
Code or otherwise, any damage or defacement
to the building or site on or from which such
sign was displayed, shall be made good to the
satisfaction of the Authority.
6.6 Alteration to Ground Level-- Whenever
any alteration is made to the ground level
P A R T X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR ‘ D I S P L A Y STRIICTI’RES
adjacent to any advertising sign, the owner of
the site on which sign is erected. shall be
responsihle for the alteration of the height of
such sign so as to conform to the requirements
of this part.
6.7 Trqffic Control Inte[f:ference
6.7.1 No advertising sign shall be erected or
maintained which interferes with or is likely to
interfere with any sign or signal for the control
of traffic.
6.7.2 No advertising sign shall be placed
particularly in bends and curves so as to
obstruct the view of traffic at intersecting
streets.
6.8 Draining of Signs- Adequate provision
for drainage shall be made in every advertising
sign, where the possibility of collection of
moisture exists.
6.9 Glass in Signs- All glass used in
advertising signs, other than glass tubing used
in gas discharge or similar signs. shall be of
safety glass conforming to accepted standards
[X(2)]* at least 3mm thick. Glass panels in
advertising signs shall not exceed 6 m’ in area,
each panel being securely fixed in the body of
the sign independently of all other panels.
Glass signs shall be properly protected from
the possibility of damage by falling objects by
the provisions of suitable protecting metal
canopies, or by other approved means. Use of
glass may be discouraged or avoided wherever
possible for signs placed overhead.
6. IO Intecference to Fire Hydrants - Adver-
tising signs shall be so placed as not to
obstruct the use of the hydrants or other fire
fighting appliances.
6. I1 Serving Devices- Ladders, platforms.
hooks, rings and ail other devices for the use
of servicing personal shall have safety devices
and suitable design loadings. (In this
connection reference may also be made to part
VII Constructional practices and safety).
6.12 Animated Devices- S i g n s w h i c h
contain moving section or ornaments shall
have fail-safe provisions to prevent the section
or ornaments from releasing and falling or
shifting its centre of gravity more than 45 cm.
The fail-safe device shall be in addition to the
mechanism and its housing which operate the
movable section or ornament. The fail-safe
device shall be capable of supporting the full
dead weight of the section or ornament when
moving mechanism releases.
__._-----
* In this part where reference is made to ‘accepted
standards’ m relation to material specification, the
appropriate document listed at the end of this part may
he used as a guide to the interpretation of this term.
7. ELECTRIC SIGNS AND
ILLUMINATED,SIGNS
7. I Material.Y fbr Ekclric Signs - E v e r y
electric sign shall be constrllcteti of non-
combustible material except where the sign is
purely a flood-lit sign.
7.2 Installation of Electric Signs and
Illuminated Signs-- Every electric sign and
illumi.nated s i g n s h a l l b e i n s t a l l e d i n
accordance with Part VllI Bui!ding services,
Section 2 Electrical installations.
7.3 No. illuminated sign in red, amber or
green colours shall be erected or maintained
within a horizontal dist.ance of 10m of any
illuminated traffic sign.
7.4 All advertising signs illuminated by light
other than a white light at a height of less than
two storeys or 6m above the fooipath,
whichever be the greater height, shall be
suitably screened so as to satisfactorily
prevent any interference with any sign or
signal for the control of traffic.
7.5 Intense Illumination-No person shall
erect any sign which is of such intense
illumination as to disturb the residents in
adjacent or nearby residential buildings.
Notwithstanding any permission given for
such erection, any such sign which after
erection is, in the opinion of the Authority, of
such intense illumination as to disturb the
occupants of adjacent or nearby buildings
shall, on the order of the Authority, be
suitably altered or removed by the owner of
the sitk concerned within such reasonable
period as the Authority may specify.
7.6 Hours qf Opration--No electric sign,
other than those necessary in the opinion of.
the Authority in the interest of public
amenity. health and safety. shall be operated
between midnight and sunrise.
7.7 FlashinK, O c c u l t i n g a n d Animared
Sip--No flashing, occulting or animated
advertising’ signs. the periodicity of which
exceeds 30 flashes to the- minute. shall be
erected so that the lowest point of such signs is
less than 9m above the ground level.
7.8 For illuminated signs in the vicinity of
airports. the Directorate General of Civil
Aviation should be consulted.
8. GROUND SIGNS
8.1 Material- Every ground sign exceeding
6 m in height together with frames, supports
and braces shall he constructed of non-
combustible material except as in 6.4.
8.2 Dimensions---No ground sign shall be
erected to a height exceeding 9m above the
x_12
ground. Lighting reflectors may extend
fieyond the &p or face of the sign.-
8.3 Supporrs a n d A n c h o r a g e - - E v e r y
ground sign shall be firmly supported and
anchored to the ground. Supports and
anchors shall be of treated timber in
accordance with good practice [X(3)], or
metal treated for corrosion resistance or
masonry or concrete.
8.4 Site Cleaning--The owner of any site on
which a ground sign is erected shall be
responsible for keeping such part of the site as
is visible from the street, clean, sanitary,
unoffensive and free of all obnoxious
substances and unsight,ly conditions to the
approval of the Authority.
8.5 Ohsrruction ta TtwJic - No ground sign
shall be erected so as to obstruct free access to
or egress from anv builrling..
8.6 Set Back---No ground sign shall be set
nearer to the street line than the established
building line.
8.7 Bottom Clenmnce---The bottom line of
all ground signs shall be at least 0.6m above
the ground, but t.he intervening space may be
filled with open lattice work or platform
decorative trim.
8.8 Ground painted signs sh:*ll conform to
the requirements of fi and 7v here applicable.
9. ROOF SIGNS
9.1’ Material-- Every roof sien together with
its frames, supports and braces, sha!l be
constructed of non-combustible material,
except as in 6.4. Provision shall be made for
electric grounding of all metallic parts; and
where combustible materials are permitted in
letters or other ornamental features, all wiring
and tubinn shall be kent free and insulated
therefrom.
9.2 Dirnencion.~+- No roof sign shall exceed
the following heights on buildings of heights:
He&h f of
Sip. Max
a) Not exceeding four storeys 2m
or 18 m
b) Five to eight storeys or ex- 3m
ceeding 18 m but not exceed-
ing 36 m
cl Exceeding eight storeys or 5m
36 m. provided that in cal-
culating the height of such
signs, signs placed one above
the other. or on planes at
different levels of the same
building shall be deemed to
be one sign. whether or not
such signs belong to
different owners
NATlON.AL RI:II.I)INC CODE OF INDIA
Y.3 Locurivn
3) No roof sign shall be so placed on the roof
of any building as to prevent free passage
from one part of the roof to another.
b) No roof sign shaii be piaceu on or over the
root’ofany building, unless the entrre roof
construction is of non-combustible
material.
9.4 Projrcfion -~ No root sign shall project
b e v o n d t h e cxistrng ouilding line ot‘ the
busilding on which it is erected or shall extend
beyond the root’ in any direction.
9.5 Supports and Anchoruge~-- Every roof
sign shall be thoroughly secured and anchored
to the building on or over which it is erected.
All loads shall be safely distributed to the
structural members of the building.
9.6 For roof signs near the airports the
Directorate General of Civil Aviation should
be consulted.
9.7 Painted roof signs shall conform to the
requirements of 6 and 7, where applicable.
10. VEKANDAH SIGNS
10.1 Material --- Every verandah srgn shall be
constructed entirely of non-comoustible
material except as in 6.4.
10.2 Dimensions --- No verandah sign shall
exceed 1 m in height. No verandah sign
hanging from a verandah shall exceed 2.5 m in
length and 5crn in thickness, except that
verandah box signs measuring not rnore than
20cm in thickness, measured between the
principal faces of the sign and constructed
entirely of metal wired glass may be erected.
10.3 Alignmtwt --- Every verandah srgn shall
be set parallel to the building line, except that
any such sign hanging from a verandah shall
be set at right angles to the building line.
10.4 Location-Verandah signs, other than
hanging signs only, shall be placed in the
following locations:
4 Immediately above the eaves of the
verandah roof in such a manner as not to
project beyond the rear of the roof gutter;
b) Against but not above or below the
verandah parapet or balustrade provided
such parapet or balustrade is solid and the
sign does not project more than 20cm
from the outside face of such parapet or
balustrade; or
Un the veranMn&ams OX pa~apets\n\\ne
c&of painted signs.
10.5 Height of Hunging Verandah Signs-
Every verandah sign hanging from a verandah
shall be fixed in such a manner that the lowest
point of such sign is not Less than 2.5 m above
the pavement.
10.6 Pmjecriqn -- Except as provided for
in 10.4, no verandah sign shall extend outside
the line of the verandah to which rt is attached.
Il. WALL SIGNS
Il. I Material--- Every wail sign exceeding
4m’ in area shall be constructed of non-
combustible material except as in 6.4.
1 I .? Dinlensions
a) T he total area .ot’ any wall sign shall not
exceed 20 m’ fog, every IS m of building
frontage to the street to which such sign
faces; except that in the caseof a wall sign,
consisting only of’the name of a theatre or
cinema, the total area of such sign shall
not exceed 200m’.
b) No wall sign which exceeds 30 m* in area
shall be located on any wail not directly
facing the road; provided that any such
sign or signs shall not exceed 25 percent of
the side wall area visible from the street.
iI,3 Projecrion-NNo wail sign shall extend
above the top of’the wall or beyond the ends 01.
the wail to which it is attached. At any place
where pedestrians may pas5 along a wall, any
wail sign attached thereto shaU not project
more than 7.5 cm therefrom within a height 01
2.5 m measured fron1 the level of such place.
11.4 Supports and Attac~hnrent- Ever-y.wall
sign attached to walls shalt be securely
attached. Wooden blocks or anchorage with
wood used in connection wrth screws. staples
or nails shall not be considered proper
anchorage, except in the case of wall signs
attached to walls of wood.
12. PROJECTING SIGNS
12. I Material- Every projectmg sign and its
support and framework shall be constructed
entirely of non-combustible material.
12.2 Projection und Height--No projecting
sign or any part of its supports or framework
shall project more than 2m beyond the
building; however it shall not project beyond
the plot line tacing the street; when it projects
into the street it shall be at’ clear height of
2.5 m from the road (see Part III):
a) The axes of ail projecting signs shall be at
right angles to the main face of the
b\i&<& W he~e a V -c~ns\Kucti~\n i s
employed for the faces, the base of the
 sign against the building shall not exceed
the amount of the overall projection.
b) No projecting signs shall extend above
the eaves of a roof or above that part of
the building face to which it is attached.
c) The maximum height of .a projecting sign
shall be related to the height of the
building to which it is attached in the
following manners:
Height of Building Height of
Sign, Max
1) Not exceeding *four 9
s t o r e y s o r 18m
2) Five to eight storeys 12 m
or not exceeding 36m
3) E x c e e d i n g e i g h t 15 m
storeys or 36 m
12.3 Supports and Attachment - Every
projecting sign shall be securely attached to a
building so that movement in any direction is
prevented by corrosion-resistant metal
brackets, rods, anchors, supports, chains or
wire ropes so designed and arranged that half
the number of such fixing devices may safely
support the sign under all circumstances.
12.3.1 Staples or nails shall not be used to
secure any projecting sign to any building.
12.4 Additional Loads- Projecting sign
structures which could be used to support an
individual on a ladder or other servicing
device whether or not specifically designed for
the servicing device shall be capable of
supporting the anticipated additional load but
in no case less than 500 kg concentrated
horizontal load and 1500 kg vertical
concentrated load appiied at the point of
assumed loading or point of most eccentric
loading. The buildingcomponent to which the
projecting sign is attached shall also be
designed to support the additional loads.
13. MARQUEE SIGNS
13.1 Materials- Marquee signs shall be
constructed entirely of metal or other
approved non-combustible materials.
13.2 Height- Such signs shall not exceed 2 m
in height nor shall they project below the
fascia of the marquee nor lower than 2.5m
above the footpath.
13.3 Length - Marquee signs may extend the
full length but in no case shall they project
beyond the ends of the marquee.
14. SKY SIGNS
14.1 In the case of the sky signs, the
x-l4
regulations laid down by the Authority
concerned shall apply.
1.5. T E M P O R A R Y A D V E R T I S I N G
SIGNS, TRAVELLING C I R C U S
SIGNS, FAIR SIGNS AND DECORA-
TIONS DURING PUBLIC
REJOICING
15.1 Types-None of the following
advertising signs shall be erected or
maintained, other than as temporary signs
erected in accordance with 15.2:
a) Any advertising sign which is painted on
or fixed on to or between the columns of a
verandah;
b) Any advertising sign which projects
above or below any fascia, bearer, beam
or balustrade of a verandah or balcony;
c) Any advertising sign which is luminous or
illuminated and .which is fixed to any
fascia bearer, beam or balustrade of any
splayed or rounded corner of a verandah
or balcony;
4 Any streamer sign erected across a road;
e) Any sign not securely fixed so as to
prevent the sign swinging from side to
side;
Any advertising sign made of cloth,
papier mache, or similar or like material
.but excluding licensed paper signs on
hoardings or fences;
ia Any advertising sign on a plot used or
intended to be used exclusively for
residential purposes, other than a brass
plate or board preferably not exceeding
60 X 45 cm in size, affixed to the fence or
entrance door or gate of a dwelling, and in
the case of a block of flats, affixed to the
wall of the entrance hall or entrance door
of any flat; and
h) Any sign on trees, rocks, hillsides and
similar natural features.
15.2 Requirements for Temporary Signs
1.5.2.1 All temporary advertising, travelling
circus and fair signs and decorations during
public rejoicing shall be subject to -the
approval of the Authority and shall be erected
so as not to obstruct any opening and -to
minimize fire risk.
f5.2.2 The advertisement contained on any
such sign shall pertain only to the business,
industry or other pursuit conducted on or
within the premises on which such sign is
erected or maintained. Temporary advertising
signs shall be removed as soon as torn or
damaged and in any case within 60 days after
erection unless extended.
N A T I O N A L B U I L D I N G C O D E O F IkDIA
15.2.3 The Authority shall be empowered to
order the immediate removal of any
temporary advertising sign or decoration.
where, in its opinion such action is necessary
in the interests of public amenity and safety.
15.2.4 POLE SIGNS ---Pole signs shall be
constructed entirely of non-combustible
materials and shall conform to the
requirements for ground or roof signs as the
case may be (sre 8 and Y). Such signs may
extend beyond the street line if they comply
with the provisions for projecting srgns (sue
12)
15.25 BANNER A N D CLOI H SIC;%S Temo-
rary signs and banners attached to or
suspended from a building. constructed of
cloth or other combustible material shall be
strongly constructed and shall be securely
attached to their supports. They shall be
removed as soon as torn or damaged. and in
no case later than 60 days after erection;
except. that permits for temporary signs
suspended from or attached to a canopy or
marquee shall be limited to a period of IO
days.
1 5 . 2 . 6 MA X I M U M S IZE -7.emporary signs
shall not exceed torn’ in area.
PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRUCTURES
1 5 . 2 . 7 PROJEC~~ION ---1‘emporary stgns of
cloth and similar combustible construction
shall not extend more than,JOcm over or into
a street or other public space except that such
signs when constructed without a frame may
be supported flat against the face of a canopy
or marquee or may be suspended from the
lower fascia thereof but shall not extend closer
to the footpath than 2.5m.
15.2.8 SP E C I A L P E R M I T S --All temporary
banners suspended from building or hung on
poles, which extend across streets or other
public spaces shall be subject to special
approval of the Authority.
15.2.9 Bill boards set up by the Authority
shall be used for temporary signs, symbols,
bills’for entertainment, etc. so that other walls
of the city are not defaced.
15.2.9.1 Bills for entertainment and other
functions shall not be affixed on to building
walls other than the bill boards (see 15.2.9).
The organization responsible for such bills
and posters shall be held responsible for any
such defacement and non-removal of signs.
 APPENDIX A
( CIuuse 3. I .2)

SPEClMEN FORM FOR APPLlCATlON FOR PERMIT

TO ERECT, RE-ERECT OR ALTER IN ADVERTISING SIGN
1. Type of sign..................~..i..................................................................................................
2. *Location...........................................................................................................................
a) Building/ premises..........................................................................................................
b) Location.of building/premises with respect to neighbouring streets.................................
3. *Dimensions and details of the sign.....................................................................................
4. Materials used for different parts.......................................................................................
*Electrical and lighting details.. .......................................................................................
ii: *Structural details showing also supporting framework and anchorages..............................
7. Mode of operation.............................................................................................................
*Plans as desired in 3.1.2(b) are enclosed

Name and address of the applicant Name and address of the owner
......................................... of the building/ premises
......................................... .........................................

Signature.. ........................ Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date ................................. Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 LIST OF STANDARDS

The following list records those standards which are acceptable as ‘good practice’ and
‘accepted standards’ in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The latest version of a
standard shall be adopted at the time of the enforcement of the Code. The standards listed ma)
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance with the requirements qf the referred clauses
in the Code.
In the following list, the number appearing in the jirst column brithin parentheses indicates
the number of the reference in this Part 11.

(I) IS : 380X-l 966 Method ot‘ test for non- g l a s s (src~~nd revi.\ion)
combustibility of’buil&n~ materials (first (3) iS:401-1967 Code of’ p r a c t i c e for
revision) preservation o f timber (.WWd
(2) IS: 2553-1971 S p e c i f i c a t i o n l’or safktj lIJ\Y\iOIl)

PART X SIGNS AND OUTDOOR DISPLAY STRL’CTURES 2’

 (Continued from flap I)

ail governmental and private agencies

controlling building activities. in preparing
the Code expertise has been drawn upon
from ail over the country-the Wnion
Government, States, local bodres and
learned societies like the Institution of
Engineers and the institution of
Architects.
Since the first versibn of the Code was in
use for more than a decade, large number
of comments and useful suggestions for
modifications to the Code had been
received. ISI organised implementation
conferences on the National Building Code
in most of the States and Union Territories.
Direct aesistance was also provided in
re-writing the building byelaws ofmunicipal
corporations, municipalities and other
local bodies to bring them in line with the
provisions of the Code. As a result of these
efforts, considerable feidback data was
received. In addition many Indian Standards
in the field of building activities have been
revised and new standards formulated.
Ail these have led to the revision of the
National Building Code.
in spite of the best efforts by ail concerned
to implement the Code, the revised
building byelaws, finalized in many states
have not been adopted by the concerned
Governments due to procedural bottlenecks.
Efforts are necessary at Government level
to overcome the difficulties in ,revising
building byeiaws and PWD specifications
and adoptin,g them in practice.

This publication forms part of the National

Building Code of India 1’983 and contains
Part IX Plumbing Services with ail its
sections dealing with water supply.
drainage and sanitation, and gas supply.
The information contained in this
publication will essentially ‘serve the public
health/plumbing engineer.
 AMENDMENT NO. 3 JANUARY 1997
TO
SP 7:1983 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA, 1983

(Part IV Fire Protection) — Substitute the followin q? a g es IV-l to IV-W

for the existing pages IV-l to IV- :

CONTENTS
0. FOREWORD
1. SCOPE
2! REFERENCES
3. TERMINOLOGY
4. CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS B+ED ON OCCUPANCY
5. TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION
6. FIRE ZONES
Z GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF ALL INDIVIDUAL OCCUPANCIES
8. EXIT REQUIREMENTS
9. REQUIREMENTS OF RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS (GROUP A) .
10. REQUIREMENTS OF EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS (GROUP B)
11. REQUIREMENTS OF INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS (GROUP C)
12. REQUIREMENTS OF ASSEMBLY BUILDINGS (GROU~-D)
13. REQUIREMENTS OF BUSINESS BUILDINGS (GROUP E)
14. REQUIREMENTS OF MERCANTILE BUILDINGS (GROUP F)
15. REQUIREMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS (GROUP G)
16. REQUIREMENTS OF STORAGE BUILDINGS (GROUP H)
1 Z REQUIREMENTS OF BUILDINGS FOR HAZARDOUS USES (GROUP J)
APPENDIX A LIST OF REFERRED INDIAN STANDARDS
APPENDIX B CALORIFIC VALUES OF COMMON MATERIALS AND TYPICAL
VALUES OF FIRE LOAD DENSITY
APPENDIX C LIST OF OCCUPANCIES
APPENDIX D FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH RISE BUILDINGS
—15 m IN HEIGHT OR ABOVE
APPENDIX E FIRE PROTECTION CONSIDERATION FOR VENTING IN IN-
DUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
APPENDIX F GUIDELINES FOR FIRE DRILL AND EVACUATION PROCEDURES
FOR HIGH RISE BUILDINGS (ABOVE 15 m IN HEIGHT)
APPENDIX G COMMITTEE COMPOSITION

PARTIVFIRE PROTECTION Iv.i

PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
0. FOREWORD

0.1 This part of the Code deals with safety from fire and explosion. It specifies the demarcation
of fire zones, restrictions on construction of buildings in each fire zone, classification of buildings
based on occupancy, types of building construction according to fire resistance of the structural
and non-structural components and other restrictions and requirements necessary to minimize
danger to life from fire, smoke, fumes or panic before the buildings can be evacuated. The code
recognizes that safety of life is more than a matter of means of exits and accordingly deals with
various matters which are considered essential to the safety of life.

0.2 Fire protection techniques have to be based on the fire behaviour characteristics of different
materials and structural elements of buildings. The activities pursued by the occupants of buildings
must also be taken into consideration for assessing the extent of hazards, and methods should then .
be devised by which the hazards could be minimized. An indefinite combination of variables is
involved in the phenomenon of fire, all of which cannot be quantified. The requirements of this
Code should, therefore, be taken as a guide and an engineering design approach should be adopted
for ensuring afire safe design for buildings. It would also be necessary for this purpose to associate *
qualified and trained fire protection engineers with the planning of buildings, so that adequate fire
protection measures could be incorporated in the building design right from the beginning.

0.3 Absolute safety from fire is not attainable in practice. The objective of this part is to specify
measures which will provide that degree of safety from fire which can be reasonably achieved. The
Code endeavors to avoid requirements which might involve unreasonable hardships or unneces-
sary inconvenience or interference with normal use and occupancy of buildings, but insists upon
compliance with minimum standards for fire safety necessa~ in public interest.

0.4 This part does not cover general fire prevention. Nor does it cover the prevention of accidental
personal injuries during the course of normal occupancy of buildings.

0.5 This part while recognizing that panic in a building on fire maybe uncontrollable, deals with
the potential panic hazard through measures designed to prevent the development of panic.
Experience indicates that panic seldom develops even in the presence of potential danger, so ~ong
as occupants of buildings are moving towards exits which they can see within a reasonable distance
and with no obstruction or undue congestion in the path of travel. However, any uncertainty as to
the location or adequancy of means of egress, the presence of smoke or fumes and the stoppage
of travel towards the exit, such as may occur when one person stumbles artd falls on stairs, maybe
conducive to panic. Danger from panic is greater when a large number of people are trapped in a
confined area.

0.6 Experience has shown that concealed spaces within a building such as space between ceiling
and false ceiling, horizontal and vertical ducts, etc, tend to act as flues/tunnels during a fire.
Provision should, therefore, be made to provide fire stopping within such spaces. .

0.7 Nothing in this part of the Code shall be construed to prohibit better types of building
construction, more exits or otherwise safer conditions than the minimum requirements specified
in this part.

0.8 Compliance with this part shall not be construed as eliminating or reducing the necessity for
other provisions for safety of persons using a building or structure under normal occupancy
conditions. Nor shall any provision of this Code be construed as requiring or permitting any
addition that may be hazardous under normal occupancy conditions.

0.9 One of the major points brought out in this part is the limitation of heights and areas of
buildings based on fire safety of the occupants. Individual municipal corporations are free to alter
Table 19 based on local conditions, but the ratios of areas as maintained in the table for different
occupancies and types of construction shall be adhered to.

~.2
NATtONALBUILDtNGCODEOF INDtA
0.10 Advantage has been taken of the developments, particularly in fire resistance rating of
materials, designating types of construction in a rational manner and relating the area limitations
of different occupancies to different types of construction.
0.21 HaIons (Halogenated hydrocarbons) which exhibit exceptional fire fighting and explosion’
prevention/suppression characteristics have been found to possess high ozone depleting potential.
They come under Group II of Appendix A of the Montreal Protocol, the international environ-
mental agreement for phasing out ozone depleting substances which came into force on 1 January
1989. Due to increasing evidence that the ozone layer is getting depleted at a faster rate than
thought earlier, the developed countries accelerated their phase-out schedule with a view to
achieving 100 percent phase-out of halons by 1 January 1994, instead of the earlier target date of
1 January 2000 after which only essential use of halon will be allowed. For developing countries
like India, the total phase-out of halons is to be achieved by 1 January 2010, as per Montreal
Protocol, unless a decision is taken in between to hasten up the phase-out of ozone depleting
substances. India, having become a signatory to the Protocol in June 1992, is committed to abide
by the Montreal Protocol decisions. Meanwhile, the practical implications of the phasing out of
the halons will cover, by and large, the following aspects:
a) Availability of halons will be restricted;
b) Non-standard halon extinguishers, like aerosol type, shall not be permitted;
c) Discharge of halons for training/testing, etc, shall not be permitteq
d) All efforts shall be made for avoiding/minimising halon emissions at various levels such as
production, fire equipment manufacture, user, service and maintenan=,
e) Since ‘drop-in’ substitutes for halons are not likely to be available on a commercial scale
in the near future, wherever possible, instead of halon, use of suitable alternative extin-
guishing media/methods will be resorted to, even accepting some trade-offs, if necessay,
f) Halons shall be restricted for ‘essential uses’ only, for protection of critical fire explosion
risk areas which would otherwise result in serious impairment of an essential service to
society, or pose an unacceptable threat to life, the environment, or national security, and
all other appropriate fire protection measures have been taken.
Nom —Detailedinstructionswhichwillbe issuedbythe Governmentof Indiafromtimeto timefor implementation
ofthe CountryProgrammeforthephasingoutofozonedepletingsubstance(ODS)shal[haveto be compliedwith.
0.12 The first version of this part was prepared in 1970 and subsequently revised in 1983. As a
result of implementation of this part, some useful suggestions have emerged. These have been
intirporated in this revision to the extent possible. The major changes in this revision are:
a) Few tables for the fire resistance ratings of various building components such as walls,
columns, beams and floors have been included. These fire ratings are helpful for ensuring
adherence during construction of the building to assess fire damage, for post fire structural
safety assessment of various structural elements, and adequacy of structural repairs.
b) The requirements for wet riser, downcomer, automatic sprinkler installation, high velocity
(10-15 m/see) water spray or foam generating system, etc, for buildings have been modified.
c) Appendix giving guidelines for selection of fire detectors has been deleted and relevant
Indian Standards on fire alarm system and smoke detectors have been referred.
d) Appendix for determination of fire loads and fire load density for arriving at the classifica-
tion of occupancy hazard and calorificvalues of some common materials has been included.
e) Appendix for broad classification of industrial and non industrial occupancies into low,
moderate and high hazard has also been included.

0.13 The requirements given for industrial buildings (Group G) given in the code are for small
scale units in the urban areas. For other industries the requirement will have to be worked out on
the basis of relevant Indian Standards and also in consultation with local fire authority.

0.24 The composition of the Technical Committee responsible for the formulation of this part is
given at Appendix G.

PARTIVFIRE PROTECTION IV-3

1. SCOPE
1.1 This part covers the requirements of fire
protection of buildings through classification
of buildings based on occupancy, type of con-
struction, and their requirements.
1.2 This part also covers the exit require-
ments for all occupancies.
2. REFERENCES
Indian Standards listed at Appendix A are
necessary adjuncts to this part.
3. TERMINOLOGY
3.0 For the purpose of this part, the following
definitions shall apply.
AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTIONAND ALARM
SYSTEM—Fire alarm system comprising com-
ponents for automatically detecting a fire, in-
itiating an alarm of fire and initiating other
actions as appropriate.
NOTE — The system mayalso includemanualfire
alarmcall.
AtJTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM— Auto-
matic system of water pipes fitted with
sprinkler heads at suitable intervals and
heights, and designed to detect, control or
extinguish a fire by the discharge of water.
BtJILDING — Any structure for whatsoever
purpose and of whatsoever materials con-
structed and every part thereof whether used
as human habitation or not and includes foun-
dation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs, chimneys,
plumbing and building services, fixed plat-
forms, varandah, balcony, cornice or projec-
tion, part of a building or anything affixed
thereto or any wall enclosing or intended to
enclose any land or space and signs and out-
door display structures. Tents, shamianahs,
tarpaulin shelters, etc, erected for temporary
and ceremonial occasions with the permission
of the Authority shall not be considered as
building.
BLJILDING,HEIGHT OF — The vertical dis-
tance measured in the case of flat roofs, from
the average level of the ground around and
contiguous to the building or as decided by the
Authority to the terrace of the last livable floor
of the building adjacent to the external wall;
and in the case of pitched roofs, up to the point
where the external surface of the outer wall
intersects the finished surface of the sloping
roofi and in the case of gables facing the road,
lV.4
the mid-point between the eaves level and the
ridge. Architectural features serving no other
function except that of decoration, shall be
excluded for the purpose of measuring
heights.
COMBUSTIBLEMATERIAL — A material is
combustible if it burns or adds heat to a fire
when tested for non-combustibility in accord-
ance with Indian Standard given at (1) of
Appendix A.
COVEREDAREA — Ground area covered by
the building immediately above the plinth
level. The area covered by the following in the
open spaces is excluded from covered area
(see Table 19) :
a) garden, rockery, well and well struc-
tures, plant nursery, waterpool, swim-
ming pool (if uncovered), platform
round a tree, tank, fountain, bench,
chabutara with open top and un-
enclosed on sides by walls and the like;
b) drainage culvert, conduit, catch-pit,
gully pit, chamber, gutter and the lik~
c) compound wall, gate, unstoreyed
porch and portico, slide, swing, un-
covered staircases, ramp areas covered
by chhajja and the lik~ and
d) watchman’s booth, pumphouse, gar-
bage shaft, electric &bin or sub-sta-
tions, and such other utility structures
meant for the services of the building
under consideration.
NOTE — For the purposeof this part, covered area
equals the plot area minus the area due foropenspaces
in the plot.
DOWNCOMER—An arrangement of fire fight-
ing within the building by means of
downcomer pipe connected to terrace tank
through terrace pump, gate valve and non-
return valve and having mains not less than
100 mm internal diameter with, landing valves
on each floor/landing. It is also fitted with inlet
connections at ground level for charging with
water by pumping from fire service appliances
and air release valve at roof level to release
trapped air inside.
DRY RISER— An arrangement of fire fighting
within the building by means of vertical rising
mains not less than 100 mm internal diameter
with landing valves on each floor/landing
which is norm’ally dry but is capable of being
charged with water usually by pumping from
fire service appliances.
NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOF iNDIA
EMERGENCYLIGHTING— Lighting provided
for use when the supply to the normal lighting
fails.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM— A com-
plete but discrete emergency lighting installa-
tion from the standby power source to the
emergency lighting lamp(s), for example, self-
contained emergency luminaire or a circuit
from central battery generator connected
through wiring to several escape lurninaires.
ESCAPELIGHTING— That part of emergency
lighting which is provided to ensure that the
escape route is illuminated at all material
times, for example, at all times when persons
arc on the premises, or al times the main
lighting is not available, either for the whole
building or for the escape routes.
FIRE EXIT — Away out leading to an escape
route.
FIRE LOAD — Calorific energy, of the whole
contents contained in a space, including the
facings of the walls, partitions, floors and ceil-
ings.
FIRE LOAD DENSITY— Fire load divided by
floor area.
FIRE RESISTANCE(CRITERIA OF) — Fire
resistance is a property of an element of build-
ing construction and is the measure of its
ability to satisfy for a stated period some or all
of the following criteria:
a) resistance to collapse,
b) resistance to flame penetration, and
c) resistance to excessive temperature
rise on the unexposed face.
FIRI; SEPARATION— The (.listancc in metrcs
measured from any other building on the site,
or from other site, or from the opposite side
of street or other public space to the building
for the purpose of preventing the spread of
fire.
FIRE TOWER — An enclosed staircase which
can only be approached from the various
floors through landings or lobbies separated
from both the floor areas and the staircase by
fire-resisting doors, and open to the outer air.
FIRE RESISTIN(; WALL — A fire resistance
rated wall, having protcctccl openings, which
restricts the spread of fire and extends con-
tinuously from the foundation to at least 1 m
above the roof.
PART IV I: II<Ii PROTECTION
FLOOR AREA RA’r!o (FAR) — The quotient
obtained by dividing the total covered area
(plinth area) on all floors by the area of the
plot
Total covered area of all floors
FAR =
Plot area
HIGH RISE BUILDING— For the purpose of
this part, all buildings 15 m or above in height
shall be considered as high rise buildings.
HORIZONTALExrr — An arrangement which
allows alternative egress from a floor area to
another floor at or near the same level in an
adjoining building or an adjoining part of the
same building with adequate fire separation.
OCCUPANCYOR USE GROUP —The principal
occupancy for which a building or a part of a
building is used or intended to be used; for the
purpose of classification of a building accord-
ing to the occupancy, an occupanq shall be
deemed to include subsidiary occupancies
which are contingent upon it.
PLINrH AREA — The built-up covered area
measured at the floor level of the basement or
of any storey.
PRESSURISATION— The establishment of a
pressure difference across a barrier to protect
a staixway, lobby, escape route or room of a
building from smoke penetration.
PRESSURISATIONLEVEL — The pressure dif-
ference bctwccn the pressurised space and the
area sc’kvcd by the pressurised escape route
[expressed in pascals (Pa)].
ROOF Ext’rs — A means of escape on to the
roof of a building, but acceptable only where
the roof has access to it from the ground. The
exit shall have adequate cut-off within the
building from staircase below.
SEPARATINGWALL—The wall provides com-
plete separation of one building from another
or part of a building from imothcr part of the
same building to prevent any communication
of fire or any access or heat transmission to
wall itself which may cause or assist in the
combustion of materials of the side opposite
to that portion which maybe on fire.
Srr~ P1.or — A parcel (piece ) of land
cncloscd by definite boundaries.
sTACK pRIWStJRE — f%XUre difference
caused by a tcmpcraturc diffcrcncc creating an
Iv.s
air movement within a duct, chimney or
enclosure.
TRAVEL DISTANCE — The distance to be
travelled from any point in a building to a
protected escape route, external escape route
or final exit.
VENTILATION— Supply of outside air into, or
the removal of inside air from an enclosed
space.
VENTING FIRE — The process of inducing
heat and smoke to leave a building as quickly
as possible by such paths that lateral spread of
fire and heat is checked, fire fighting opera-
ticms+re=facilitated and minimum fire damage
is caused.
VOLUME TO PLOT AREA RATIO (VPR) —
The ratio of volume of building measured in
cubic metres to the area of the plot measured
in square metres and expressed in metres.
WET RISER — An arrangement for fire fight-
ing within the building by means of vertical
rising mains of not less than 100 mm internal
diameter with landing valves on each
floorflanding for fire fighting purposes and
permanently charged with water from a pres-
surized supply.
NOTE— For definitions of other terms,referenceshall
bemadeto IndianStandardagivenat(2)ofAppendix
4. CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS
BASED ON OCCUPANCY
4.1 General Classification — All buildings,
whether existing or hereafter erected shall be
classified according to the use or the character
of occupancy in one of the following groups:
Group A Residential
Group B Educational
Group c Institutional
Group D Assembly
Group E Business
Group F Mercantile
Group G Industrial
Group H Storage
Group J Hazardous
NOTE— The occupanciessuch as underground construc-
tions like raifwaystations and powerhouses havenot been
included in this code and shall be dealt separately.
4.2.1 Minor occupancy incidental to opera-
tions in another type of occupancy shall be
considered as part of the main occupancy and
shall be classified under the relevant group for
the main occupancy.
Examples of buildings in each group are given
in 4.1.1.1 to 4.1.1.9.
IV-6
4.~.~.~ GROUPA RESIDENTIALBUILDINGS—
These shall include any building in which
sleeping accommodation is provided for nor-
mal residential purposes with or without
cooking or dining or both facilities, except any
building classified under Group C.
Buildings and structures under Group A shall
be further subdivided as follows:
Subdivision A-1 Lodging or rooming
houses
Subdivision A-2 One- or two-family private
dwellings
Subdivision A-3 Dormitories
Subdivision A-4 Apartment houses (flats)
Subdivision A-5 Hotels
a) SUBDIVISIONA-1 LODGINGOR ROOM-
ING HOUSES — These shall include any
building or group of buildings under
the same management, in which
separate sleeping accommodation for a
total of not more than 40 persons
(beds), on transient or permanent
basis, with or without dining facilities
but without cooking facilities for in-
dividuals is provided. This includes
A. inns, clubs, motels.
A lodging or rooming house shall bc
classified as a dwelling in Subdivision
A-2 if no room in any of its private
dwelling units is rented to more than
three persons.
b) SUBDIVISION A-2ONE-OR TWO-FAMILY
PRIVATE DWELLING — These shall in-
clude any private dwelling which is oc-
cupied by members of one or two
families and has a total sleeping accom-
modation for not more than 20 pcr-
scms.
If rooms in a private dwelling arc
rented to outsiders, these shall be for
accommodating not more than three
persons per room.
If sleeping accommodation for more
than 20 persons is provided in any one
residential building, it shall bc clas-
sified as a building in Subdivision A- 1,
A-3 or A-4 as the case may be.
c) SUBDIVISION A-3 DORMITORIES —
These shall include any building jn
which group sleeping accommodation
is provided, with or without dining
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

facilities for persons who are not mem-
bers of the same family, in one room or
a series of closely associated rooms
d)
under joint occupancy and single
management, for example, school and
college dormitories, students, and
other hostels and militaV barracks,
SUBDIVISIONA-4 APARTMENT HOUSES
(FLATS) — ~ese shall include any
building or structure in which living
quarters are provided for three or
more families, living independently of
each other and with independent
cooking facilities, for example,
apartment houses, mansions and
chawls.
e) SUBDIVISION A-5 HOTELS— These shall
include any building or group of build-
ings under single management, in
which sleeping accommodation, with
or without dining facilities, is provided
for hire to more than 40 persons who
are primarily transient. - SANATORIA — This subdivision
4.1.1.2 GROUP B EDUCATIONALBUILDINGS
— These shall include any building used for
school college or day-care purposes involving
assembly for instruction, education or recrea-
tion for not less than 20 students.
Buildings and structures under Group B shall
be further subdivided as follows:
Subdivision B-1 School upto higher secon-
dary level
Subdivision B-2 All others/training institu-
tions
a) SUBDIVISION B-1 SCHOOLS UP TO
HIGHER SECONDARYLEVEL — This
subdivision shall include any building
or a group of buildings under single
management which is used for students
not less than 20 in number.
b) SUBDIVISIONB-2 ALL OTHER/ll?AIN-
ING INSTITUTIONS — This subdivisions
shall include any building or a group of
buildings under single management
which is used for students not less than
100 in number.
In the case of ‘temporaty buildings/structures
which are utilized for educational purposes,
the requirements shall be as per the provisions
contained in Indian Standard given at (20) of
Appendix A as well as the local regulations.
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
f,
-.—
If residential accommodation is provided in
y
the schools/institutions, if shall be classified as -...
..A
a building in Subdivision A-3.
4.~.~.3 GROUP C INSTITUTIONALBUILDINGS
— These shall include any building or part
thereof, which is used for purposes, such as
medical or other treatment or care of persons
suffering from physical or mental illness, dis-
ease or infirmity care of infants, convalescents
4,!:
or aged persons and for penal or correctional
detention in which the liberty of the inmates
is restricted. Institutional buildings ordinarily
provide sleeping accommodation for the oc-
cupants.
Buildings and structures under Group C shall
be further subdivided as follows:
Subdivision C-1 Hospitals and sanatoria
Subdivision C-2 Custodial institutions
Subdivision C-3 Penal and mental institutions
a) SUBDIVISION C-1 HOSPITALS AND
shall
include any building or a group of
buildings under single management,
which is used for housing persons suf-
fering from physical limitations be-
cause of health or age, for example,
hospitals, infirmaries, sanatoria ‘and
nursing homes.
b) SUBDIV1S1ON C-2 CUSTODIALINSTITU-
TIONS— This subdivision shall include
any building or a group of buildings
under single management, which is
used for the custody and care of per-
sons, such as children, convalescents
and the aged, for example, homes for
the aged and infirm, convalescent
homes and orphanages.
c) SUBDIVISIONC-3 PENAL AND MENTAL
INSTITUTIONS — This subdivision shall
include any building or a group of
buildings under single management,
which is used for housing p“ersons
under restraint, or who are detained
for penal or corrective purposes, in
which the liberty of the inmates is
restricted, for example, jails, prisons,
mental hospitals, mental sanatoria and
reformatories.
4.1.1.4 GROUP D ASSEMBLYBUILDINGS— ●
These shall include any building ,or part of a “
building, where number of persons not less
than 50 congregate or gather for amusement,
lV.7
 recreation, social, religious, patriotic, civil,
travel and similar purposes, for example,
theaters, motion picture houses, assembly
halls, auditoria, exhibition halls, museums,
skating rinks, gymnasiums, restaurants, places
of worship, dance halls, clubrooms, passenger
stations and terminals of air, surface and
marine public transportation services, recrea-
tion piers and stadia, etc.
Buildings under Group D shall be firther sub-
divided as follows:
Subdivision D-1 Buildings having a theatri-
cal or motion picture or any other stage and
fixed seats for over 1000 persons
Subdivision D-2 Buildings having a theatri-
cal or motion picture or any other stage and
fixed seats upto 1000 persons
Subdivision D-3 Buildings without a per-
manent stage having accommodation for
300 or more persons but no permanent
seating arrangement.
Subdivision D-4 Buildings without a per-
manent stage having accommodation for
less than 300 persons with no permanent
seating arrangement.
Subdivision D-5 All other structures in-
cluding temporaxy structures designed for
assembly of people not covered by sub-
divisions D-1 to D-4.
a) SUBDIVISION D-I — This subdivision
shall include any building primarily
meant for theatrical or operatic perfor-
mances and exhibitions and which has
a raised stage, proscenium curtain,
fixed or portable scenery or scenery
loft, lights, motion picture houses,
mechanical appliances or other
theatrical accessories and equipment
and which is provided with fixed seats
for over 1000 persons.
b) SUBDIVISION D-2 — This subdivision
shall include any building primarily
meant for use as described for Sub-
division D-1, but with fixed seats up to
1000 persons.
c) SUBDIVISION D-3 — This subdivision
shall include any building, its lobbies,
rmms and other spaces connected
thereto, primarily intended for as-
sembly of people, but which has no
theatrical stage or permanent theatri-
Iv-s
cd and/or cinematographic accessories
and has accommodation for 300 per-
sons or more, for example, dance halls,
night clubs, halls for incidental picture
shows, dramatic, theatrical or educa-
tional presentation, lectures or other
similar purposes having no theatrical
stage except a raised platform and used
without permanent seating arrange-
ment; art galleries exhibition halls,
community halls, marriage halls,
places of worship, museums, lecture
halls and passenger terminals.
d) SUBDIVISIOND-4 — This subdivision .
shall include any building primarily in-
tended for use as described in Sub-
division D-3, but with accommodation
for less than 300 persons with no per-
manent seating arrangements.
e) SUBDIVISIOND-5 — This subdivision
shall include any building or structure
permanent or temporary meant for as-
sembly of people not covered by Sub-
divisions D-1 to D-4, for example,
grandstands, stadia, amusement park
structures, reviewing stands and circus
tents.
4.~.~.5 GROUP E BUSINESS BUILDINGS —
These shall include any building or part of a
building which is used for transaction of busi-
ness (other than that covered by Group F and
part of buildings covered by4.1.l); for keeping
of accounts and records and similar purposes,
professional establishments, service facilities,
etc. City halls, town halls, court houses and
libraries shall be classified in this group so far
as the principal function of these is transaction
of public business and keeping of books and
records.
Business buildings shall be further sub-clas-
sified as follows:
Subdivision E-1 Offices, banks, profes-
sional establishments, like offices of ar-
chitects, engineers, doctors, lawyers and
police siations.
Subdivision E-2 Laboratories, research es-
tablishments, libraries and test houses.
Subdivision E-3 Computer installations.
Subdivision E-4 Telephone exchanges.
Subdivision E-5 Broadcasting stations.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
4.2.2.6 GROUP F Mercantile BUILDINGS—
These shall include any building or part of a
building, which is used as shops, stores,
market, for display and sale of merchandise,
either wholesale or retail.
Mercantile buildings shall be further subclas-
sified as follows:
Subdivision F-1 Shops, stores, departmen-
tal stores markets with area up to 500 m2.
Subdivision F-2 Shops, stores, departmen-
tal stores, markets with area more than
500 m2.
Subdivision F-3 Underground shopping
centers.
Storage and service facilities incidental to
the sale of merchandise and located in the
same building shall be included under this
group.
4.2.1.7 GROUPG INDUSTRIALBUILDINGS—
These shall include any building or part of a
building or structure, in which products or
materials of all kinds and properties are fabri-
cated, assembled, manufactured or processed,
for example, assembly plants, industrial
laboratories, dry cleaning plants, power
plants, generating units, pumping stations,
fumigation chambers, laundries, buildings or
structures in gas plants, refineries, dairies and
saw-mills, etc.
Buildings under Group G shall be further sub-
divided as follows:
Subdivision G-1 Buildings used for low
hazard industries.
Subdivision G-2 Buildings used for
moderate hazard industries.
Subdivision G-3 Buildings used for high
hazard industries.
Tle hazard of occupancy, for the purpose of
the Code, shall be the relative danger of the
start and spread of fire, the danger of smoke
or gases generated, the danger of explosion or
other occurrences potentially endangering the
lives and safety of the occupants of the build-
ings.
Hazard of occupancy shall be determined by
the Authority on the basis of the fire loads of
the contents, and the processes or operations
conducted in the building, provided, however,
PART tv FIRE PROllWt’tON
that where the combustibility of the building, ‘
the flame spread rating of the interior finish
or other features of the building or structure
are such as to involve a hazard greater than the
occupancy hazard, the greater degree of
hazard shall govern the classification.
For determination of fire loads and fire load
density for arriving at the classification of oc-
cupancy hazard, guidance material including
the c.alorificvalues of some common materials
are given at Appendix B.
A broad classification of industrial and non-
industrial occupancies into low, moderate and
high hazard classes is given at Appendix C, for
guidance, Any occupancy not covered in Ap-
pendix C, shall be classified in the most ap-
propriate class depending on the degree of
hazard.
Where different degrees of hazard of occupan-
cy exist in different parts of a building, the
most hazardous of those shall govern the clas-
sification for the purpose of this Code, except
in cases where hazardous areas are segregated
or protected as specified in the Code.
a) SUBDIVISION G-1 — This subdivision
shall include any building in which the
contents are of such comparative low
combustibility and the industrial
processes or operations conducted
therein are of such a nature that there
are hardly any possibilities for any self
propagating fire to occur and the only
~ consequent danger to life and property
may arise from panic, fumes or smoke,
or fire from some external source.
b) SUBDIVISIONG-2 — This subdivision
shall include any building in which the
contents or industrial processes of
operations conducted therein are li-
able to give rise to a fire which will burn
with moderate rapidity or result in
other hazardous situation and may give
off a considerable volume of smoke,
but from which neither toxic fumes nor
explosions are to be feared in the event
of fire.
c) SUBDIVISIONG-3 - This subdivision
shall include any building in which the
contents or industrial processes or
operations conducted therein are li-
able to give rise to a fire which will burn
with extreme rapidity or result in other
hazardous situation or from which
Iv-’
 poisonous fumes or explosions arc 10
bc fearer.f in the event of a fire.
4.1.1.8 GROIJP 11 STORAG1{ IIIJ1l.DINGS —
These shall include any building or part of a
building, used primarily for [hc storage or
sheltering (including scrvici,ng, proccssirtg or
repairs incidental to storage) of goods, wares
or merchandise (cxccpt those that involve
combustible or explosive products or
materials) vchiclcs or animals, for example,
warehouses, cold storage, freight depots, tran-
sit sheds, storehouses, truck and marine ter-
minals, garages, hangers, grain elevators,
barns and stables.
Smragc properties arc characterized by the
prcscncc of relatively small number of persons
in proportion to the area. Any new use which
increases the number of occupants to a figure
comparable with other classes of occupancy
shall change the classification of the building
to that of the ncw USC,for example, hangars
used for assembly purposes, warehouses used
for office purposes, garage buildings issued for
manufacturing.
4.1.1.9 GROUP J IIAZARDOUSMJILDINGS—
These shall include any building or part of a
building which is used for the storage, han-
dling, manufacture or processing of highly
combustible or explosive materials or
products which arc liable to burn with extreme
rapidity and or which may produce poisonous
fumes or explosions for storage, handling,
manufacturing or processing which involve
highly corrosive, toxic or noxious alkalis, acids
or other liquids or chemicals producing flame,
fumes and explosive, poisonous, irritant or
corrosive gases; and for the storage, handling
or processing of any material producing ex-
plosive mixtures of dust which result in the
division of matter into fine particles subject to
spontaneous ignition. Examples of buildings
in this class arc those buildings which are used
foc
a) Storage, under pressure of more
than 0.1 N/mm2 and in quantities ex-
ceeding 70 m3, of acetylene,
hydrogen, illuminating and natural
gases, ammonia, chlorine, phosgene,
sulphur dioxide, carbon dioxide,
methyloxide and all gases subject to
explosion, fume or toxic hazard,
cryogenic gases, etc.
]V.lo
b) Storage and hanttling of hazmlous and
highly ffammablc liquids, Iiquifiablc
gases Iikc LPG, rocket propellants, etc.
c) Storage and handling of hazardous and
highly flammable or explosive
materials, other than liquids; and
d) Manufacture of artificial flowers, syn-
thetic leather, ammunition, explosives
and fireworks.
NcrTE— A list of hazardous substances giving quan-
tities, for whichor exceedingwhichownershandling
such substances are required to be covered under the
Public Liability Insurance Act, has been notified under
Govt of India, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Notification No. S.0. 227 (E) dated 24th March 1992.
4.2 Any building not covered by Appendix C
or 4.1.1. 7shall be classified in the group which
most nearly resembles its existing or proposed
use.
4.3 Where change in the occupancy of any
building places it in a different group or”in a
different subdivision of the same group, such
building shall be made to comply with the
requirements of the Code for the new group
or its subdivision.
4.4 Where the new occupancy of a building is
less haixtrdous, based on life and fire risk, than
its existing occupancy, it shall not bc nccessa~
to conform to the requirements of the Code
for the ncw group or its subdivision.
4.5 A certificate of occupanq shall bc ncccs-
sary, as required under Part II Administration,
before any change is effected in the character
or occupanq of any building.
5 TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION
5.0 General — The design of any building and
the type of materials used in its construction
are important factors in making the building
resistant to a complete burn-out and in
preventing the rapid spread of fire, smoke or
fumes, which may otherwise contribute to the
loss of lives and property.
The fire resistance of a building or its struc-
tural and non-structural elements is expressed
in hours against a specified test load which is
expressed in k cal/m2, and against a certain
intensity of fire. The fire-resistance test for
structure shall be done in accordance with
Indian Standard given at (3) of Appendix A.
For the purpose of the Code, the types of
construction according to fire resistance shall
be classified into four categories, namely,
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
~pc 1 construction, Type 2 Construction,
Type 3 Construction and Type 4 Construction.
The fire resistance ratings for various types of
construction for structural and non-structural
members shall be as given in Table 1.
For buildings 15 m in height or above noncom-
bustible materials should bc used for con-
struction and the internal walls of staircases
should be of brick work or reinforced concrctc
or any other material of construction with
minimum of 2 hours rating. The walls for the
chimney shall bc of Type 1 and Type 2 Con-
struction (Jcpcnding on whether the gtis
tcmpcraturc is above 2000C”or kxs.
5.1 The fire resistance ratings of various
building components such as walls, columns,
beams and floors arc given in Table 2 to Table
18, Fire damage assessment, post fire struc-
tural safety assessment of various structural ,
clcmtmts of the building and adequacy of the
structural repairs can bc done by the fire resis-
tance ratings mentioned in the tables.

TABLE 1 FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS 01: STR[JCWJRAL AND NON-STRLJCI’LJRAI.

l; I.EMENfS (IN 110LJRS)
(Claus; 5.0) ‘

SL No. STNJCTURALtlmkttm TYPE OF ~OMTRIJCHON

f \
‘Iypc 1 Tyw 2 .r~p~ 3 ‘Iypc 4
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
1) EWrior walls:
a) Fire separation less than 3.7 m O Bearing 4 2 2 1
ii) Non-bearing 2 1; 1 1
b) Flrc separation of 3.7 m or i) Bearing 4 2 2
more but Icss than 9 m ii) Non-bearing 1; 1 1
c) Fbe separation of 9 m or more i) Bearing 4 2 2 t
ii) Non-bearing 1 1 1 1
2) Fire resisting walls 4 2 2 2
3) Fire separation assemblies (Iikc 4 2 2 2
fire check doors)
4) Fke enclosures of exitways, exit- 2 2 2 2
way, hallways and s:airways
5) Shaft other than exitways, elevator 2 2 2 2 ,,
and hoistways
6) Exitway access corridors 1 1 1 1
7) Vertical separation of Icnant 1 1 1 1
spaces
8) Dwelling unit separation 1 1 1 1
Non-load bearing partitions + At least half an hour+
9) Interior bearing walls, bearing i) Supporting more 4 2 2 2
partitions, columns, girders, trusses than one floor
(other than rooftrusses)and ii) Supporting one 3 1; 1 1
framing floor only
iii) Supporting a roof 3 1+ 1 1
only
10) Structural membcra support walls 3 1+ 1 1
11) Floor construction including walls 3 1; 1 1
12) Roof construction i) 5m or less in height 2 1+ 1 1
to lowest member
ii) More than 5m but 1 1 1 1
less than 6.7 m in
height to lowest
member
iii) 6.7 m or more in o 0 0 o
height to lowest member

PART IV FIRE PROTECTION ]V.11

 TABLE2 MASONRYWALLS:SOLID(REQUIREDTO RESISTFfRE FROM ONESIDEATA TIME)
(c&luc5.1)

NA’KJREOF COWtIUJtXION AND MATSRWA MINIMUMTNICKM?SSfMIUhEXCLUDINGANY FINISH,

FORA FtRE RSSI.WANCE
(HOURS) OF

‘ Load ~ring \ 8
Non-@ad Bearin~
●
d
1 1 1+ 2 3 4
lZ 2 3 4 &
1 Reinforced” cement catcrete 1201401602tN12to
(25)t (25)t (25)t (25)t (25)t
2 Unreinforced cement concrete 150 175 — — —
3 No-fines concrete with:
a) 13 mm cementhand or ~umknd 150 150 150 150 150
b) 13 mm light w@ght aggregate gypsum 150 150 150 150 150
plaater
4 Bricks of C~ : .
a) Whhout finish 90 100 100 170 170 75 90 100 170 170
b) Wtth 13 mm lightweight aggregate W90 90 100 100 75 9090 90 100
gypsum plaster
5 Bricks of aand lime:
a) Wkhout finish 90 100 100 190 190 75 90 100 170 170
b) With 13 mmlightweight aggregate 9090 90 100 100 75 9090 90 100
gypsum plaater
6 Bfocka of concrete:
a) Without finish 90 100 100 — — 75 90 100 140 150
b) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 9090 90 100 100 75 75 75 90 100
~um plaster
c) With 13 mm cementhand or gypaturd 75 90 90 100 140
aand
7 Blocks of lightweight concrete:
a) W:thout finish 90 100 100 140 150 75 75 75 125 140
b) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 9090 90 100 100 50 63 75 75 75
gypsum pfaater
c) Whh 13 mm ament/sand or gypmrd 75 75 75 90 100
aand
8 Blocks of aerated concrete:
a) Whhout finish 90 100 100 140 180 50 63 63 75 lm)
b) With 13 mm fightweight aggregate 90 90 100 100 150
gypsum plaater
●Walfa containing at leaat1 Pementof vertica] reinforcement.
t Wlmum thi* of actual cover to reinforcement.

TABLE 3 MASONRY WALLS: HOLLOWS (REQUIRED TO RESIST FIRE FROM ONE SIDE AT A TIME)
(Cfaw 5.1)

NATUREOQCONSTRUCTIONAND MAmUALS MINIMUM‘IMICKNSS (mm),EXCLUDINGANY FINISH,

FORAFIRE RSSSTANCE(HOURS)OF
# \
Load Bearing Non-Load Bearing .
1 %
5 l;2341/2’~1
1 Briekaofcfay 12 2 3 4
a) Without fmiah 170 170 170 200 200 75 100 100 170 170 200
b) With 13 mm fightwwightaggregate 100 100 .170 170 170 75 75 90 100 100 170
gypsum plaater
2 Block’sof concrete:
a) Without finish 90 125 125 140 140 150
b) With 13 mm cementktuf or gypmud 90 125 125 140 140 140
sand
c) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 190 200 200 — — 75 90 90 100 125 125
gypsum ptaater
3 Bktcks of lightweight concrete:
a) Without finish 100 100 ltm — — 75 90 90 100 140 150
b) With 13 mm cement/sand or gypsum/ 75 75 75 100 140 140
sand
c) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 63 63 75 75 90 100
~um pfaater

jv.ti
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 f ...,
.—.

.. d

TABLE 4 FRAMED CONSTRUCTION, LOAD BEARfNG (REQUIRED ’10 RESfST FfRE

FROMONESIDE AT A TfMf3
(clause 5.1) -

NATUREOFCONSITUX370NAND MATERL4@ MINIMUMTHICKNESS O@ OF PROTBCTtON

TIMBERSTUOSATGWrRES NUTEXCEEDING FORA FtRB R@StSGW4CE
OF1h
6U0 mm,FACEDONEACH SIDEUJmi
1 Plasterboardlayerswith jointsstaggered,jointain outer fayer 25
taped and filled — Totalthicknessforeachface
2 Onelayerof 12.7mmplasterboard with .afinish of lightweight i3
aggregate gypsum plaster
3 Metallathandplaster,thicknessof plaster:
a) Sanded gypsum pfaatcr (metaf fathing grade) 22
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13

TABLE 5 FRAMED CONSTRUCTiON, NON-LOAD BEARING (REQUIRED TO RESIST FIRE

FROM ONE SIDE AT A TIME)
(Cklu.re5.1)

NATUREOFCONSTRUCTION ANDMATERIAWSTBBL STUD MINIMUMTHICKNESS(MM)OF

ORTIMBERFRAMEAT CmrIERSNUTExc~DINO CONSIKJCfTON PROTECTION
FORA FIRE
600 mm,FACINGSONBOTN SIDESOF RES~ANCE OF
f \
$h lh l+h 2h
A) ~ lining withmaterialr@ed direct to stua%
(without plaster finish):
1 One layer of plasterboard with taped and Timber or steel 12.7
filled joints
2 ‘llvo layers of plasterboard with joints Timber or steel 19 25
staggered, joints in outer layer taped and
filled-Total thickness for each face
3 One fayer of aabeatos insulating board Timber 9
with transveme joints backed by fillers of steel 12
asbestos insulating board not leas than
9 mm thick, or by timber
4 One fayer of wood wool slabs Timber 25
5 One layer of chipboard or of pfywood Timber or steel 18
B) Lining with matm’alr+d dkct to SW with
plaster jinish:
1 Plasterboard of thickness:
a) With not leas than 5 mm ~um plaster 9.5
finish
b) With not less than 13 mm gypsum plaster
finish
c) I’v-ctjhish
:
1 Metal lath and plaster, thickness of plaster:
1
Timber or steel
12.7

a) Sanded gypsum plaster Timber or steel 13

b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster Timber 13 19 25
steel 13

TABLE 6 FRAMED EXTERNAL WALLS LOAD BEARING (REQUIRED TO RESIST FfRE

FROM ONE SIDE AT A TIME)
(clause 5.1)

NATUREOFCON.SIRUCTION
AND MATERIALS MtNIMUMllmxNt?ss (MM)OFPRO’IWYON
FORA~RB-ANCBOFth
Timber studs at ccntres not acceahg 600 nun
with internal linings ofi
1 Plasterboard Iayem with jointa in outer fayer
taped and filled, total thickness of plasterboard ,, 31

PART fV FIRE PROTECTION ~-u

 ‘rAf3LE 7 FRAMED EXTERNAL WALLS NON-LOAD BEARING REQUIRED TO RESIST FIRE ONLY
FROM INSIDE THE BUILDING (A)
(Clause 5.1)

NATUREOFCONWWXTION AND MATERIAM MINIMUMTHICKNESS (mm) OFPROTECTION

FORA MODIFIEDFIRERSSISCANCEOF
R 3
;h lh 1; h 2h 3h 4h “
A) Sleel@tne with an external cladding of non-com-
bustible sheets (excluding sheet steel), with a steel
supporting fiamewark and intend Iirthrg of:
1 Metal lath and plaster, thickness of plaster:
a) Sanded gypsum plaster (metal lathing grade) 13 13
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum Plaster- 10 13 15 15 15 19
2 ~o layer of plasterboard with joints staggered
joints in outer layer taped and filled — Total 21 32
.
thickness
3 Plasterboard of thickness:
a) With not less than 5 mm gypsum plaster finish 12.7
b) Whh not leas than 13 mm gypsum plaster finish 9.5 .
c) With not less than 10 mm lightweight aggre- 9.5
gate gypsum plaster
4 One layer of asbestos insulating board with trans- 9 9 12 12 12 12
verse joints backed by fillers of asbestos insula-
ting board not less than 9 mm thick, or by timber
5 One layer of wood/wool slabs without finish 50
6 One layer of compressed straw building slabs:
a) Without finish 50
b) With not less than 5 mm gypsum plaster finish 50
7 Aerated concrete blocks 50 50 63 63 75 100
8 Bricks of clay:
a) Whhout finish 75 75 90 90 100 100
b) With not leas than 13 mm lightweight
aggregate gypsum plaster 75 75 90 90

TABLE 8 FRAMED EXTERNAL WALLS NON-LOAD BEARING REQUIRED TO RESIST FIRE ONLY
FROM INSIDETHEBUILDING(B)
. .
(Clause 5.1)

NATUREOFCONSTRUCX’tON
AND MATERIAIS MINIMUMTHICRNSL%S(mm) OFPROTSCIION
TO PROVIDESUFFICIENT
InSUlatiOn TO ACHIEVE
A MODIFIEDFIRERSSI~ANCE OFUPTO 4h
B) Steeljhrrse with an external cladding of sheet
steel ji.dly lappe~ steel bolted artdji.red to steel
sheeting rails, with timber or steel mpporting
framework and internal liningofi
1 Metal lath and plaster, thickness of plaster: ,
a) Sanded gypsum plaster (metal lathing grade) 13
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 10
2 One layer of plasterboard with joints taped and filled 12,7
3 Plasterboard of thickness, with not leas than 5 mm gypsum plaster 9,5
finish
4 One layer of asbestos insulating board with transverse joints backed 9
by fillers of asbestos insulating board not less than 9 mm thick, or
by timber
5 One layer of woodAvoolslabs 25
6 One layer of compressed straw building slabs 50
7 One layer of cbiplmard or of plywood 18
8 Aerated concrete blocks 50
9 Bricks of clay 75
10 Any internal decorative lining with a cavity fill independently 50
Suppofiedand Rtain@ in position of mineral fib$e insulating
material (excluding glass) at a density of 48 kg/m

IV-14 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 TABLE 9 FRAMED WALLS NON-LOAD BEARING REOUIRED TO RESIST FIRE ONLY FROM INSIDE
THEBUILDING(C)
(Clause5.1)

NATUREOFCONSTRUCTION
AND MATERIAB MINIMUMTHICKNESS(mm)OF PROpTION
FORA FIRERESISTANCEOF 12 h
c) Timber fkwne with cnemal cladding of weather
boarding or cxternalpiywoo~ 9.5 mm with an
buemal lining of:
1 Plasterboard not less than 9.5 mm thick, finished with:
a) Gypsum plaster 13
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 10
2 Plasterboard not less than 12.7 mm thick, finished with:
a) Gypsum plaster 10
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 10
3 One layer of asbestos insulating board with transverse joints
backed by fillers of asbestos insulating board not less than 9
9 mm thick, or by timber 12

TABLE10 REINFORCEDCONCRETECOLUMNS
(Clau.re5.1)

NATUREOFCONSTRUCTION
ANDMATERIALS MINIMUMDIMENSIONS
(mm),EXCLUDINGANY
FINISH,FORAFIRE RESISTANCEOF
t h
;h lh l+h 2h 3h 4h
1 Fully exposed Width 150 200 250 300 400 450
Cover 20 25 30 35 35 35
2 50 percent exposed Width 125 160 200 200 300 350
Cover 20 25 25 25 30 35
3 One face exposed Thickness 100 120 140 160 200 240
Cover 20 25 25 25 25 25

TABLE 11 CONCRETE BEAMS

(Clause 5.1)

NATUREOF CONSTRUCTION
AND MATERIALS MINIMUMDIMENSIONS (mm),EXCLUDINGANY
FINISH.FORAFIRE RESISANCE OF
A
# \
;h lh l;h 2h 3h 4h
1 Reinforced eotrcrete (simply supported) Width 80 120 150 200 240 280
Cover 20 30 40 60 70 80
2 Reinforced concrete (continuous) Width 80 80 120 150 200 240
Cover 20 20 35 50 60 70
3 Prestressed concrete (simply supported) W]dth 100 120 150 200 240 280
Cover 25 40 55 70 80 90
4 Prestressed concrete (continuous) Width 80 100 120 150 200 240
Cover 20 30 40 55 70 80

TABLE 12 CONCRETE FLOORS

(Clame 5.1)

NATUREOF CONSTRUCITON
AND MATSRIALS MINIMUMDIMENSION(mm),EXCLUDINGANY
FINISH,FORAFIRE RESISTANCEOF
r \
+h lh l;h ,2h 3h 4h
1 Reinforced concrete (simply supported) Thickness 75 95 110 125 150 170
Cover 15 20 25 35 45 55
2 Reinforced concrete (continuous) Thickness 75 95 110 125 150 170
Cover 15 20 20 25 35 45

PART IV FIRE PROTECTION ~-ls

 TABLE 13 CONCRETE FLOORS: RIBBED OPEN SOFFIT
(Clou.re 5.1)

NATUREOFCONSTRUCIIONANDMATIUUALS MINIMUMDIMENSIONS
(MID).EXCLUDINGANY
FINISH.FORA FIRS RSSI.STANCE
OF
t 3
;h lh l;h 2h 3h 4h
1 Reinforced concrete (simply supported) TMcfmeds 70 90 105 115 135 150
Width 75 90 110 125 150 175
cover 15 25 35 45 55 65
2 Reinforcedconcrete(continuous) TMckneas 70 90 105 115 135 150
Width 75 so 90 110 125 150
Cover 15 20 — 35 45 55

TABLE14 ENCASEDSTEELCOLUMNS,203mmx 203mm(PROTECTIONAPPLIEDONFOURSIDES)

(clause 5.1) ‘

NATUREOFCGNSIRUCIIONAND MATIWAIS MINIMUMTHICKNESS(MM)OFPROTECTION

FORAFIRE RESISTANCE
OF
-. . .\
“lh 1; h 2h 5n 4n
A) Hollowprotection (without on air cavi~ over thejlangtx) :
1 *Metal lathhg with txcnvelledlightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13 15 m 32

2 Plasterlmard with 1.6 mm wire binding at 100 mm pitch, finished with

lightweight aggregate gypsum plaate; not less t& the thlcknesa
specified:
a) 9.5 mm plaster board 10 15
b) 19 mm plaster hoard 10 13 20
3 Aabeatos insulating boards, thicfmeaa of board:
a) Single tbicfmess of board, with 6 mm cover fillets at transveme 19 25
joints
b) ‘IWOlayers, of total thickness 3s 50
4 Solid bricks of clay, composition or aand lime, reinforced in every 50 50 50 75 100
horizontal joint, unplastered
5 Aerated concrete blocks 60 60 ,60
6 Solid blocks of lightweight concrete 50 50 50 60 75
Hollow protection (with an air cavity over the flanges)
B) Asbestos insulating board scrswcd to 25 mm asbestos battens 12 19

c) Solidprotections

1 Concrete, not leaner than 1:2:4 mix (unplastered):

a) Concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforced 25 25 25 50 75
b) Concrete assumed to be load bearing 50 50 50 75 75
2 Lightweight concrete, not leaner than 1:2:4 mix (unplastered) 25 25 25 40 60
concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforced t

*So fried or designed, as to allow full penetration for mechanical bond.

t Reinforcement shall consist of steel binding wire not leas than 2.3 mm in thickness, or a steel mesh weighing not leas
than 0.5 @/mz. In concrcle protection, the spacing of that reinforcement shall not exceed 200 mm in any direction.

~-u NATIONAL BUfLDfNG CODE OF INDfA

 TABLE 15 ENCASED STEEL BEAMS,406mm x 176 mm (PROTECTION APPLIED ON THREE SIDES)
(Clause 5.1)

NATUREOF CONSTRUCTION
AND MATERIAtS MINIMUMTHICRNESS(mm) OFPROTtt~ON
FORA FIRERESIWANCEOF
r %
+h lh l+h 2h 3h 4h
A) Hollow protection (without an air cavity beneath the lower
j?ange) :
1 *Metal lathing with trowelled lightweight aggregate 13 13 15 20 25
gypsum plaster (metal lathing grade)
2 Plasterboard with 1.6 mm wire binding? at 100 mm pitch,
finished with lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster
not less than the thickness specified :
a) 9.5 mm plasterboard 10 10 15
b) 19 mm plasterboard 10 10 13 20
3 Asbestos insulating board, thickness of board :
a) Single thickness of board, with 6 mm cover fillets at
transverse joints 19 25
b) Tk’o layers, of total thickness 38 50
B) Hollow protection (with an air cavity below the lower
jlange) :
1 Asbestos insulating board screwed to 25 mm asbestos
battens 9 12
C) Solidprotection :
1 Concrete, not leaner than 1:2:4 mix (unplastered) :
a) Concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforeed$ 25 25 25 25 50 ’75
b) Concrete assumed to be load bearing 50 50 50 50 75 75
2 Lightweight concretes not leaner than 1:2:4 (mix) 25 25 25 25 40 60
unplastered
*So freed, or designed, as to allow full penetration for rnechanieal bond.
TWhere wire binding cannot be used, expert advice should be sought regarding alternative methods of support to enable
the lower edges of the plasterboard to be fixed together and to the lower flange, and for the top edge of the plasterboard
to be held in position.
$Reinforcement shall consist of steel binding wire not less than 2.3 mm in thickness or a steel mesh weighing not less
than 0.5 kg/m2. In concrete protection, the spacing of that reinforcement shall not exeeed 200 mm in any direction.
SConcrete not assumed to he load bearing, reinforced.

TABLE 16 TIMBER FLOORS — TONGUED AND GROOVED BOARDING, OR SHEETS OF TONGUED

AND GROOVED PLYWOOD OR WOOD CHIPBOARD, OF NOT LESS THAN 21 mm FINISHED THICKNESS
(Clause 5.1)

NATUREOF CONStW.JCtION AND MATEatAts kflNtMUM THICKNFSS (mm)OF PROTIX’HON

FORA F7RERESISTANCE
OF
/ \
37 mm (minimum) timber joirti with a ceiling of; ;h lh 2h
1 Timber lathing and plaster, p[aster of thickness 15
2 Metal lathing and plaster, thickness of plaster:
a) Sanded gypsum plaster (metal lathing grade) 15
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13 13 25
3 One layer of plasterboard with taped and filled joints 12.7
4 Two layers of plasterboard with joints staggered, joints in outer layer taped 19 31
and filled total thickness
5 One layer of plasterboard not less than 9.5 mm thick, finished with:
a) Gypsum plaster 5
b) Sanded gypsum plaster 13
c) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13
6 One layer of plasterboard not less than 12.7 mm thick,finished with:
a) Gypsum plaster 5
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 10
7 One layer of asbestos insulating board with any transverse joints backed by 9 12
fillets of asbestos insulating hoard not less than 9 mm thick, or by timber

PART IV FIRE PROTECTION IV.17

.
 ‘rAf31.I; 17 ‘flM131iR FLOORS — TONGUED AND GROOVED BOARDING, OR SHEETS OF TONGUED
ANO GROOVIID PLYWOOD OR WOOD CHIPBOARD, OF NOT LESS THAN 15 mm FINISHED THICKNESS
(Clau.re 5.1)

NATUREOF CONStItUCIIONAND MATERIALS MINIMUMTHICKNESS (mm) OF

PROTECTIONFORAFIRE RESIWANCEOF

37 mm (minimum) timber joisrs with a ceiling of:

1 Timber lathing and plaster, plaster of thickness 15

2 Metal lathing and plaster, thickness of plaster for:

a) Sanded gypsum plaster (metal lathing grade) 15
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13 13 25

3 One layer of plasterboard with taped and filled joints 12.7

4 TVo layers of plasterboard with joints staggered, joints in outer layer taped 22 31
and filled total thickness

5 One layer of plasterboard not less than 9.5 mm thick, finish with:
a) Gypsum plaster 5
b) Sanded gypsum plaster 15
c) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13

6 One layer of plasterboard not less than 12.7 mm thick, finished with:
a) Gypsum plaster 5
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsu”mplaster 10

7 One layer of asbestos insulating board, with any transverse joints backed by
fillets of asbestns insulating board not less than 9 mm thick, or by timber 9 12*
*Finished on top with 25 mm minimum thick glass fibre or mineral wool laid between joints

TABLE18 TIMBERFLOORS—ANYSTRUCTURALLY SUITABLEFLOORINGOFTIMBEROR

LIGNOCELLULOSIC
BOARDS
(Clause 5.1)

NATUREOF CONSTRUCTION
AND MATERIAE MINIMUMTHICKNESS (mm) OF
PROTIHION FORA FIRERESISMNCEOF
f \
37 mm (minimum) tirnberjoists with a ceiling of: ;h lh

1 Timber lathing and plaster, plaster of thickness 15

2 Metal lathing and plaster, thickne$s of plaster for:

a) Sanded gypsum plaster (metal lathing grade) 15
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13 19

3 One layer of plasterboard with joints taped and filled and backed by timber 12.7

4 Two layers of plasterboard with joints staggered, joints in outer layer taped
and filled total thickness 25

5 ‘IWOlayers of plasterboard, each not less than 9.5 mm thick, joints between 5
boards staggered and outer layer finished with gypsum plaster

6 One layer of plasterboard not less than 9.5 mm thick, finished with:
a) Sanded gypsum plaster 13
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 15

7 One layer of plasterboard not leas than 12,7 mm thick, finished with:
a) Sanded gypsum plaster 15
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13

8 One layer of asbestos insulating board with any transverse joints backed by
fillets of asbestos insulating board not less than 9 mm thick, or by timber 12

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

6 FIRE ZONES
6.1 Denzarcaticm — The city or area under the
jurisdiction of the Authority shall for the pur-
pose of the Code, be demarcated into distinct
zones, based on fire hazard inherent in the
buildings and structures according to oc-
cupancy (see 4), which shall be called as ‘Fire
Zones’.
6.2 Number and Designation of Fire Zones
6.2.1 The number of fire zones in a ci~ or area
under the jurisdiction of the Authority
depends upon the existing layout, types of
building construction (see 5), classification of
existing buildings based on occupancy (see 4)
and expected future development of the city or
area. In large cities or areas, three fire zones
may be necessaty, while in smaller ones, one
or two maybe adequate.
6.2.2 The fire zones shall be made use of in
land use development plan and shall be desig-
nated as follows:
a) Fire Zone No. 1,
b) Fire Zone No. 2, and
c) Fire Zone No. 3
6.2.2.1 FIRE-ZONE No. 1 — This shall com-
prise areas having residential (Group A),
educational (Group B), institutional (Group
C), and assembly (Group D), small business
(Subdivisions E-1) and retail mercantile
(Group F) buildings, or areas which are under
development for such occupancies.
6.2.2.2 FIRE ZONE No. 2 — This shall com-
prise business (Subdivisions E-2 to E-5) and
industrial buildings (Subdivision G-1 and G-
2), except high hazard industrial buildings
(Subdivision G-3) or areas which are under
development for such occupancies.
6.2.2.3 FIRE ZONE No. 3 — This shall com-
prise areas having high hazard industrial
buildings (Subdivision G-3), storage buildings
(Group H) and buildings for hazardous uses
(Group J) or areas which are under develop-
ment for such occupancies.
6.3 Change in the Fire Zone Boundaries —
When the boundaries of any fire zone are
changed, or when it is intended to include
other areas or types of occupancies in any fire
zone, it shall be done by following the same
procedure as for promulgating new rules or
ordinances or both.
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
6.4 Overlapping Fire Zones
6.4.1 When any ’building is so situated that it
extends to more than one fire zone, it shall be
deemed to be in the fire zone in which the major
portion of the building or structure is situated.
6.4.2 When any building is so situated that it
extends equally to more than one fire zone, it
shall be deemed to be in the fire zone having
more hazardous occupancy buildings.
6.5 Tempora~ Buildings or Structures
6.5.1 Temporary buildings and structures
shall be permitted only in Fire Zones No. 1
and 2 as the case may be, according to the
purpose for which these are to be used, by
special permit from the Authority for a limited
period and subject to such conditions as may
be imposed in the permit.
6.5.2 Such buildings and temporary struc-
tures shall be completely removed on the ex-
piry of the period specified in the permit.
6.6 Resm”ctionson the Type of Construction for
New Buildings
6.6.1 Buildings erected in Fire Zone No. 1
shall conform to construction of Type 1, 2, 3
or 4.
6.6.2 Buildings erected in Fire Zone No. 2
shall conform to construction of me 1,2 or 3.
6.6.3 Buildings erected in Fire Zone No. 3
shall conform to construction of Type 1 or 2.
6.7 Restrictions on Eristing Buildings — The
existing buildings in any fire zone shall not be
required to comply with the requirement of
the Code unless these are altered, or in the
opinion of the Authority, such building con-
stitutes a hazard to the safety of the adjacent
property or theoeeupants of the building itself
or is an unsafe building. In the event of altera-
tion, it shall be necessary to obtain permission
of the Authority for such alteration consistent
with fire hazard (see Part II Administration).
Alterations, modifications renovations shall
be accomplished so as to ensure conformity
with all the safety requirements of the new
buildings. Such alterations shall not in anyway
bring down level of fire and life safety below
that which existed earlier. Any addition or
alterations or construction of cubicles par-
titioning for floor area exceeding 500 m~ shall
be with approval of local fire authority for all
high rise buildings with an exception of
residential buildings.
IV.19
 7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF ALL
INDIVIDUAL OCCUPANCIES
7.1 General — All buildings shall satis~ cer-
tain requirements which contribute, in-
dividually and collectively, to the safety of life
from fire, smoke, fumes and panic arising from
these or similar causes. There are, however,
certain general principles and common re-
quirements which are applicable to all or most
of the occupancies. They are given in 7.2
to 7.18.
7.1.1 EXCEPTIONSAND DEVIATIONS— Ex-
ceptions and deviations to the general
provisions of requirements of individual oc-
cupancies are given as applicable to each type of
occupancy in 9 tol Z In case of practical difficul-
ty or to avoid unnecessary hardship, without
sacrificing reasonable safety, the Authority may
grant exemptions from the Code.
7.1.2 OCCUPATION OF BUILDINGS UNDER
CONSTRUCTION
71.2.1 A building or portion of the building
may be occupied during construction, repairs,
alterations or additions only if all means of exit
and fire protection measures are in place and
continuously maintained for the occupied part
of the building.
7.1.2.2 A high rise building during construction
shall be provided with the following fire protec-
tion measures, which shall be maintained in
good working condition at all the times:
a) Dry riser of minimum 100 mm
diameter pipe with hydrant outlets on
the floors constructed with a fire ser-
vice inlet to boost the water in the dry
riser and maintenance should be as per
the requirements laid down in Indian
Standard given in (24) of Appendix A.
b) Drums filled with waterof2000 litres
capacity with two fire buckets on each
flooc
c) A water storage tank of minimum 20000
litrcs capacity, which may be used for
other construction purposes also.

TABLE19 COMPARATIVEFLOORAREARATIOSFOR OCCUPANCIESFAcING ONE PUBLIC STREET

AT LEAST 9 m WIDE
(Clause 7.3)

OCCUPANCYCLASSIFICATION TYPEOFCONStWCtION
\
“Fwpe 1 Type 2 V(T 3 Type 4
(1) (2) (3) (5)
Residential UL 2.0 1.4 1.0
Educational UL 2.0 1.4 1.0
Institutional UL 1.5 0.8
A+sembly UL k! 0.5
Business UL ;! 2.3 1.6
Mercantile 8.0 1.8 1.4 1.0
Industrial 1.9 1.6 1.3
Storage(seeNote4) ;; 1.5 1.0
Hasardous(seeNote4) 2.8 1.1 & NP
UL— Unlimited.
NP — Not permitted,
N-1 — The FAR values given in this table are subject to overall restrictions on the heights of buildings in the case
of educational, institutional, assembly, storage and hzmrdous occupancies as specified in cd 2 of Table 20.
NOTE2 — This table has been prepared, taking into account the combustible content in the different occupancies as
well as the fire resistance offered by the type of construction.
N~ 3 — This table should be modified by the Authority, taking into account the other aspects as given below:
a) Density in terms of dwelling units per hectarty
b) Traffic consideration~
c) Parking spa-
d) Local tire fighting facilities+and
e) Water supply, drainage and sanitation requirements.
NOTE4 — The FAR values specified in this table maybe increased by 20 percent for the following services:
a) Abasement or cellar space under a building constructed on stilts and used as a parking space and air-conditioning.
plant room used as acceaso~ to the principal UW,
b) Watchman’s booth, pumphousc, garbage shaft, electric cabin or substation and other utility structures meant for
the services of the building under consideration;
c) Projections and accessory buildings as specifically exempted under the Co@ and
d) Staircase room and lift rooms above the topmost stoq architectural featu~ and chimneys and elevated tanks
of dimensions as permissible under the Code; the area of the lift shaft shall be taken only on one floor.
NUIE 5 — In so far as single storey storage and hazardous occupancies are concerned, they would be further governed
by volume to plot area ratio (VPR) to he decided by the Authority.

[V.m NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

,

7.2 Maximum Height — Every building shall
be restricted in its height above the ground
level and the number of storeys, depending
upon its occupancy and the type of construc-
tion. The height shall be measured as specified
in Part IIT Development control rules and
general building requirements. The maximum
permissible height for any combination of oc-
cupancy and types of construction should
necessarily be related to the width of street
fronting the building, or floor area ratios and
the local fire fighting facilities available.
%3 FloorArea Ratio —The comparative floor
area ratios for different occupancies and types
of construction are given in Table 19 (see also
Part III Development Control Rules and
General Building Requirements).
73.1 Each portion of a building, which is
separated by one or more continuous fire
resisting walls, having a fire resistance of not
less than 2 h, extending from the foundation
to 1 m above the roof at all points, may be
considered to be a separate building for the
calculation of maximum permissible height
and floor area, provided openings, if any, in
the separating wall are also protected by fire
assemblies of 4 h.
%4 Open Spaces — The open spaces around
or inside a building shall conform to the re-
quirements of Part III Development Control
Rules and General Building Requirements.
7.4.1 For high rise buildings, the following
additional provisions of means of access to the
building shall be ensured (see Part III
Development Control Rules and General
Building Requirements):
a) The width of the main street on which the
building abuts shall not be less than 12 m
and one end of this $treet .. shall join
another street not less than 12m inwidti,
b) The road shall not terminate in a dead
end; except in the case of residential
building, up to a height of 30 m.
c) The compulsory open spaces around the
building shall not be used for parking and
d) Adequate passageway and clearances
required for fire fighting. vehicles to
enter the premises shall be provided at
the main entrance; the width of such
entrance shall be not less than 4.5 m. If
an arch or covered gate is constructed,
it shall have a clear head-room of not
less than 5 m.
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
,<
- .-Q.-
.,. -4
%5 Mixed Occupancy — When any building is
used for more than one type of occupancy, it
shall conform to the requirements for the oc-
cupancies of higher hazard. Unless the high
hazard area is separated by separating walls of
4 h rating, the occupancies shall not be treated
individually.
76 Openings in Separating Walls and Floors —
At the time of designing openings in separat-
ing walls and floors, particular attention shall
be paid to all such factors as will limit fire
spread through these openings.
Z6.I For ~es 1 to 3 construction, a door-
way or opening in a separating wall on any
floor shall be limited to 5.6 m2 in area with a
maximum height of 2.75 m and a maximum
width of 2.1 m. Every wall opening shall be
protected with fire-resisting doors or steel
rolling shutters having the fire rating of not
less than 2 h, conforming to Indian Standards
at [IV(5)] of Appendix A All openings in the
floors shall be protected by vertical enclosures
extending above and below such openings, the
walls of such enclosures having a fire resis-
tance of not less than 2 h and all openings
therein being protected with a fire-resisting
assembly having a fire-resistance rating as
specified in 7.8.
Z6.2 For me 4 Construction, openings in
the separating walls or floors shall be fitted
with 2 h fire-resisting assemblies.
%6.3 Openings in walls or floors which are
necessa~ to be provided to allow passages of
all building services like cables, electrical .
wirings, telephone cables, plumbing and fix-
tures, etc, shall be protected by enclosure in
the form of ducts/shafts having a fire resistance
not less than 2 h. The inspection door of all
service shafts shall have fire resistance not less
than 1 h. Medium and low voltage wiring run-
ning in shafts/ducts, shall either be armoured
type or run through metal conduits. Further,
the space between the conduits and the walls
shall be filled in by a filler material, com-
pressed asbestos, fibre glass wool, rockwool,
ceramic wool, etc, mixed with cement or any
other material having fire resistance rating of
not less than one hour.
Nom — Inthe easeof buildingswhereit is nwessary
to loweror lift heavymachine~or goodsfromone
floortotheother,itmaybenecessarytoprovidelarger
openings in the floor. Such openings shall be provided
with removable covers which shall have the same
strength and fire resistance as the floor.
 7.7 Elecm”calInstallations — For requirements
regarding electrical installations from the
point of view of fire safety, referenee may be
made to Indian Standards at IV(6) of Appen-
dix A (see also Part VIII Building Service$,
Section 2 Electrical Installations).
7.8 Fire Stop or Enclosure of all Openings —
Where openings are permitted, they shall not
exceed three-fourths the area of the wall in the
case of an external wall and they shall be
protected with fire resisting assemblies or
enclosures having a fire resistance equal to
that of the wall or floor in which these are
situated. Such assemblies and enclosures
shall also be capable of preventing the spread
of smoke or fumes through the openings so as
to facilitate the safe evacuation of building in
ease of a fire [see also Indian Standard given at
(25) of Appendix A].
79 Fire Detection/Extinguishing ~stem — ln
buildings of such size, arrangement or oc-
cupancy that a fire may not itself provide ade-
quate warning to oeeupants, automatic fire
detection and alarm facilities shall be
provided, where neeessary, to warn occupants
early of the existance of fire, so that they may
escape, or to facilitate the orderly conduct of
! fire exit drills
%9.1 The fire detection and extinguishing
system shall conform to aeeepted standards as
given in Appendix A. Guidelines for selection
of various types of fire detectors for different
occupancies shall conform to Indian Stand-
ards given at (8) of Appendix A.
Nom — Fire detectom for use in an ‘automatic fire
alarm system shall conform to Indian Standards given
at (7) and (19) and the automatic fire alarm system
using such detectors shall be installed in accordance
with Indian Standards at (8) of Appendix A.
7.9.2 The requirements of fire detection and
alarm systems are covered for each oeeupaney
under 9 to 17, attention is also drawn to such
requirements in ease of high rise buildings
(15 m or more in height) as given in Ap-
pendix D.
7.10 Fired Fire FightingInstallations
Z10.1 All buildings depending upon the oc-
cupancy use and height shall be protected by
wet riser, downcomer, automatic sprinkler
installation, high/medium velocity water
spray, foam, gaseous or dry powder system in
accordance with the provisions of 7J0.2
to ZIO.9.
IV.22
7.10.2 These fixed installations shall eonfrom
to accepted standards. The typical require-
ments of wet riser/downcomer installation and
capacity of water storage tanks and fire pumps
shall be as specified in Table 20. The typical
arrangements of downcomer and wet riser in-
stallations are shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2. The
wet riser shall be designed for zonal distribu-
tion ensuring that unduly high pressures are
not developed in risers and hose pipes.
7.10.3 In situations where one oeeupaney is
provided with all the required fire protection
arrangements but due to proximity of un-
protected buildings around, causing exposure
hazard to the protected building, the
protected building walls facing the un-
protected building shall be provided with
water curtain/drencher system which can be
actuated, when necessaqf.
ZIO.4 First-aid fire fighting appliances shall
be provided and installed in accordance with
Indian Standards given at (9) of Appendix A.
The fire fighting equipment and accessories to
be installed in buildings for use in fire fighting
shall conform to appropriate Indian Stand-
ards given at (10) of Appendix A and shall be
maintained periodically so as to ensure their
perfect serviceability at all times.
ZIO.5 In addition to wet riser or downeomer,
first-aid hose reels shall be installed on all the
floors of buildings of 15 m in height or more
and shall conform to standards given at (11) of
Appendix A. The first-aid hose reel shall be
connected directly to the riser/downeomer
main and diameter of the hose reel shall not
be less than 19 mm.
7J0.6 STATICWATER STORAGETANKS
A satisfactory supply of water for the purpose
of fire fighting shall always be available in the
form of underground/terraee level static
storage tank with capacity speeified for each
building with arrangements of replenishment
by mains or alternative source of supply at the
rate of 1000 litres per minute. When this is
not practicable, the capacity of static storage
tank(s) shall be increased proportionately in
consultation with the local fire brigade.
The static storage water supply required for
the above-mentioned purpose shall entirely
be accessible to the fire engines of the local fire
serviee. Provision of suitable number of man-
holes shall be made available for inspection
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 AR
f r
,5LUCE AND
/ hlR VALVE
/ ‘
/’
/ , ~wd
. . ... ...
3-WAY FIRE
SERVICE INLH
Fig. 1 TypicalAtrangement of Down-comer for Building above 15 m but not
Exceeding 30 m in Height
repairs, insertion of suction hose, etc. The
covering slab shall be able to withstand the
vehicular load of 22.5 tonnes at any given
point when the slab forms a part of pathway/
driveway.
The domestic suction tank connected to the
static water storage tank shall have an over-
flow capable of ct%charging 2250 litres per
minute to a visible drain point from which by
a separate conduit, the overflow shall be eon-
veyed to a storm water drain.
a) To prevent stagnation of water in the
static water storage tank, the suction
tank of the domestic water supply shall
be fed only through an overllowarrange-
ment to maintain the level therein at the
minimum specified capacity (see Fig. 3).
b) The static water storage tank shall be
provided with a fire brigade collecting
head with 4 number 63 mm diameter (2
number 63 mm diamettx for pump with
capacity 1 400 l/rein) instantaneous
male inlets arranged in a valve box at
a suitable point at street level and con-
nected to the static tank by a suitable
PARTIVFIRE PROTECTION
RELEASE
fixed pipe nbt less than 150 mm in
diameter to discharge water into the
tank when required at the rateof2250
Iitrca per minute, iftankis inthebasement
or not approachable for the fire engines.
710.7 AUTOMATICSPRINKLERS
Automatic sprinklers shall be installed in:
a) basements used as ear parks or stora~e
occupancy, if the area exeeeds 200 m ;
b) multi-level basements, covered upper
floors used as car parks, and for hous-
ing essential services ancillary to a par-
ticular occupancy or for storage
occupan~, excluding any area to be
used for sub-station, A.C. plant and
DG set;
c) any room or other compartment of a
building exceeding 1125 m2 in area ex-
cept as in (g) (see Note), if so advised by
local authority
d) departmental stores or shops, if the
aggregate covered area exeeeds 750 m2;
e) all non-domestic floors of mixed oc-
cupancy which constitute a hazard and
are not provided with staircases inde-
Iv.n

Fig. 2 QpicalAnangement of Wet Riser and total Sprinkler $trtem of Building Other than
Apartment Exceeding 30 m in Height
pendent of the remainder of the build-
ings;
0 godowns and warehouses, as con-
sidered necessary
!3) on all floors of the buildings other than
residential buildings, if the height of
the building exceeds 30 m (45 m in case
of group housing and apartments) (see
Note);
h) dressing room, scenery docks, stages
and stage basements of ~heatres;
j) in hotels, hospitals, industries low and
moderate hazard mercantile buildings
of height 15 m or abov~
k) in hotels below 15 m, if covered area at
each floor is more than 1000 m2;
lV.24
#
m) false ceiling voids which are used for
storage or as return air plenums ex-
ceding 800 mm in height in
sprinklered buildings; and
n) canteen provided in upper floors of
D-1 and D-2 occupancies shall be
sprinklered.
Nom — lt is desirable that all high rise buildings
should be fully sprinklered irrespective of their height
and occupan~. If selectivespnnfdenng is adopted,
there is a real dangerof a firestartingon one of the
lower unsprinkleredfloors gathering momentum,
spreadingupwardsfrom floor to floor through the
unsprinkleredfloorand reachingthe firstspnnfdered
ffooras a fullydeveloped fire. In such an event, the
sprinklemcanbe rendereduselessor ineffective.
NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOF INDIA
 .
‘/
.

!$!.~,
M j,

ER

E~)

~FOOT VALVES

3A W1TH NEGATIVE SUCTION

OVERFLOW
AND VENTh ~MANHOLE

‘~

kirl
DOMESTIC WATER
SUPPLY TANK
(oTHER THAN
DRINKING WATER) FIRE
FIGHTING
SEPARATION TANK
WALL /-SLUICE VALVE
TO —
DOMESTIC
FIRE PUMP
SUCTION

PRIME
VALVE MOVER

3B WITH POSITIVE SUCTION

Fig. 3 Typical Arrangement for Providing Combined Fire Fighting and Domestic
Water Storage Tank

Iv.s
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
 TABLE 20 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
(Cluuse 7.10. 2)

SL No. TYPEOF BUILOING TYPE OF INSTALLATION WATER SUPPLY.LITRES PUMPCAPACtTV,LtTRES

OCCUPANCY A & A
r - f \ r \

Hous& Wet Riser Down Yard Auto- Mrmually Auto- ‘Under- Termce Near the LUG Static At the Terrace Level
Reel “ comer Hydrant matic Operated matic ground Static Tank Tank (Fk pump) with Mhimum Pres-
Sprinkler Electric Detection Water witb Minimum Pres- sure of 0.3 Nhrrr
System Fire and Stomge Tank sure of 0.3 N/mm (3 kg/cm)
Alarm Alarm (3 kglcm) at Terrace
Systems System Level

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13)

I RESIDENTIAL
BUILDINGS (A)
a) Lodging or Rooming
Houses (A-1)
1) Less than 15 m in height
. (i) For 10 rooms and up to NP NP NP NP p* NP NP NP Nil NP 90tMnin*
20 beds (lo 000*)
ii) For moms more than 10 P NP P NP p* NP NP NP 2500 NP 900hnin
and beds more (10000*) (1 62tMnin*)
20 and UP to 40

NOTE — Buildings above 15 m in height not to be permitted.

b) One or two family

Private Dwellings (A-2)
Dormitories (A-3)
Apmtment Houses (A-4)
O Less than 15 m in height Same as I(a)i(ii)

NOTE — Buildings of A-2 occupancy above 15 m in height not to be permitted.

* indicates basement area 200 m and more.

P indicates ‘provided’.
NP indicates ‘Not to be provided’.

. .
 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13)

ii) 15 m and above but not P P P NP p* P (for NP 50000 10000 One electric pump 450hnin
exceeding 30 m above (20 000 in and one diesel pump (900hnin*)
24 m) case of) of capacity 1 620hnin
arrd one electric pump
of capacity 180/min
iii) Above 30 m in height but P P NP P p* P P 100000 20000 One electric pump NP
notexceeding45 m (30 000*) and one diesel pump
of capacity 2 85CU
min and one electric
pump of capacity
18Wmin
iv) Above 45 m in IAght P P Np P P P P 200000 40000 One ekcticd and NP
one diesel pump of
capacity 2 85Wmin
and one electrical
pump of capacity
18Wmin
NOTE — Buildings of A-3 & A-4 mcupaocy above 60 m in height not to be permitted.

c) Hotels (A-5)
i) Leasthan 15minheightwith P NP P NP p* NP NP NP 5000 NP 45Wmin (9M)/min*)
mwredareanot exceeding (lo 000*)
3(Dm20neach floor
ii) Less than 15 m in height P P (above NP NP p* P P 10OCKl for 10000 One electric and one NP
with covered area ex- two every 100 mz diesel pump of
ceexhng 300 m2 but not floors) covered area capacity 2 280/min
more 1 000 m2 covered subject to and one electric pump
area on each floor minimum of of capacity 180/min
50000
iii) Less than 15 m in height P P(if more NP P P (in P P (if 100000 10000 do. NP
with covered area ex- than entire building
ceding 1000 mz on each ground building) is not
floor floor) sprinkled

* indicates basement area 200 m and more.

? P indicates Provided’.
‘S NP indicates ‘Not to be provided’.
 TABLE 20 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS — Corrtri.
(Clause 7. 10.2)
T= OF BUWCXNG TYPE OF INSTALLATION WATER SUPPLY. LSTRES PUMPCAPACITY,
LSTRES
A 3
OCCUPANCY & \ v \ f
House Wet Riser Down Yard Auto- Manually Auto- Underground Terrace Near the U/G Static At the Terrace Level
Reel coma Hydrant matic Operated rnatic Static Water Tank Tank (Pire pump) with Minimum Pres-
Sprinkler Elecltic Detection Storage Tank with Minimum Pres- sure of 0.3 N/mm
System Fuv and sum of 0.3 N/ mm (3 @/cm)
Alarm SYS- Alarm SYS- (3 kglcmJ;:lTerrace
tems tern

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13)

iv) 15 m and above but not P P NP P P (in en- P P 150000 20000 One electrical and NP
exceeding 30 m tire build- one diesel pump of
ing) capacity 2 850/min
and one electrical
pure; ;J:yity

v) Above 30 m P P NP P P P P 200000 20000 One electrical and NP

one dkeal pump of
capacity 2 850/min
and one electrical
pure; ~;o~ity

H EDUCATIONAL (B)
AND INSTITUTION-
AL (C) BUILDINGS
Buildings Other Than
Hospitals and Nursing
HOIO12S (B-1, B-2, C-2 &
c-3)
Less than 15 m in height P (for NP P NP P* (for NP NP 50000 if 10000 in Same as in I (b) (ii) 45Wnin in case of
more educa - total covered case of hose hose reel (900hnin in
than two tional area exceeds case of hose met and*)
Storycd only) 1500 m2 (20%”)
bldgs and
covered
area ex-
cedn
1000m)$

5? * indicates basement area 200 m and more.

u
P indicates Provided’.
s
NP indicates ‘Not to he provided’.

.
 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13)

ii) 15 m and above but not P P (in case P P P’ (for P P (except 10000 for 20Oal Same as in I (c) (iv) 900/nrin (1 62tYmin*)
exceedng 30 m of institu- education - education - every 100 mz (30 000’)
tionrd al only) al) with a mini-
buildings mum of
50000 up to
maxm. of
100000
NOTE — Buildings above 30 m in It@tt not to be permitted.
b) Hospitals, Sanatoria and
Nursing Homes (C-1)
i) Lcssthan 15minheigbt P P (for tWO P (if bldg NP NP P(iftbe Sameas 10a)o Jlp to :fm30 clXJ Same as in I (c) (iv) 900/min
Storeys is G.F., bldg is in 11(b) 750 m2 + above
aad F.F. md 1000ofor 2oo(N)in
above) the ~%.F. CO:):f 6 every wldi- case of down
covered F.F. & tional 250 m2 comer
am.aex- total
ceeds covered
300 m2 area ex-
per flmr) ceeds
1540 m2)
ii) 15m and above but not “ P P NP P P P P 200 Ooa 20000 Same as in I (c) (iv) NP
exceeding 30 m above
NOTE — Buildings above 30 m in Klght not to be permitted.
III ASSEMBLY BUILD-
INGS (D) (DI to D5)
i) Less thaa15minhe@ht P P P NP P (in case NP P 50000 500 for Sameas in If (a) (i) 45tYminin case of
(for two (if seating (wherever hosereel H.R. (hosereel)
Storeys capxity capacity sprinklers 10000 in 90Wnin in case of
and exceeds isl COO are not in- C&lCOF and downcomer knd
above) 1000 per- Stalfed) downcorner 162Wninincaseof
sons) min.or spirdder

above
1500m2
or in case
OP)

y * indicates basement area 200 mz and more.

# P indicates provided’.
NP indii ‘Not to be provided’.
 TABLE 20 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS — Corrtd.
(Clause 7. 10.2)
SL No. TYPSOF BU[LDiNG TYPE OF INSTALLATION WATER SUPPLY. LITRES PUMP CAPACtTY. LITRES
A A
OCCUPANCY f > - { \
House Wet Riser Down Yard Auto- Manually Autrs- Underground Near the U/G Static At the Terrhce Level
Reel Comer Hydrant matic Operated matic Static Water Tank Tank (Fire. Pump) with Minimum Pres-
Sprinkler Electric Detection Storage Tank with Minimum Pres- sure of 0.3 N/mm
System Fire and sure of 0.3 N/ mm (3 kg/cm)
Akmtr Sys- Alarm Sys- (3 kg/cmJ::lTerrace
tems tern

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13)

ii) 15 m and above but not P P NP P P (in case P P 100000 10 w“ Same as in I (c) (iv) NP
.exceedlng 30 m seating
capacity
exceeds
1000 persons
or area above
1 5(U m2 or in
case OF)
NOTE — Buildings above 30 m in height not to be permitted.
Iv) BUSINESS BUILD-
INGS (E)
O Less than 15 m in height P P P NP P in case NP P (for E4 10000 for 2500 in case Same as in (b) (ii) 900/min* 450/min in
0~ and & E5) every of hosereel case of H./R.
for E4 & 1000 m2 (in (10 000/min
E5 case total in case of9
coveted area
exceeds
w 1500 m2)
c
F
o 50000 in
i
c) case of
sprinkler sys-
tem & for E4
& E5

* indicates basement area 200 m2 and more.

P indicates ‘Protided’.
NP indicates ‘Not to be provided’.

.
 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo)” (11) (12) (13)

ii) 15 m and above but not P P (if P (if P P (for E4 P P (for E4 100000 10000 in case Same as in I (c) (iv) 900/min in case of
exceedkrg 30 m covered covered &E5 and & E5 not (50 000 if OF (20Ooo above downcomer
area on area on hazard - reqd if covered am.a in case down-
each floor each floor Ous areas bldg. is on G.F. is comer is
exceeds does not. &.in case f@ less t@r 300 provided)
300 m2) exceed Or) sprinklered) m’)
300 m2)

iii) Above 30 m in Wlght and P P P P P P P (for El 200000 mm Same as in I (c) (iv) 450hnin
up to 45 m and E5) above

iv) Above 45m in he@t P P P P P P P (for E4 250000 50000 -do- -do-

and E5 )

v) MERCANTILE
BUILDINGS(F) F1 &F2

i) Leas than 15 m in height P NP P P fodl P for# P for# P for# 100000 5000incase Same as in I (c) (iv) 45Wnin in case of
total covered area not ex- (if bldg. and base- of hosereel, above (if bldg is more H.R. 900/min in case
uding 500 m2 of mote ments 10(XXIin than one floor or of H.R. & spirdder sys-
than one case of forll) tem
floor or spinlder
for’11 system

ii) Leas than 15 m in tilgh~ P P (above NP P P P P 250 C@) 20000 450Wnin if covered NP
covered area exceeding one Uptolooo area exceeds 1500 mz
S20 m2 mz covered I (c) (iv) if covered
area. For area is less than
each addl- 1500m2
tional 500 mz
or part there
of low
.,.
iii) 15 m and above but not P P ‘NP P P P P do- 30 m -do- NP
exceeding 30m

* indicr@esbasement area 2C4)mz and more.

# indi- ~ *P~g -.
P indties ‘Provided’.
NP indbtca ‘Not to lie provided’.

‘“~ ! \-

. . ..
 TABLE 20 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATIONS — Cord,
(Clause 7. 10.2)
SL No. TYPEcw BUSSDING TYPE OF lNSTALLATSON WATER SUPPLY.LtTRES PUMPCAPACtTY.LtTRES
OCCUPANCY A A

‘House Wet Riser Down Yard Auto- Manually Auto- ‘ ‘Underground Termcc > ‘Near the U/G Static At the Terrace Level=
Reel Comer Hydrant matic (lpe~)pe ~~i:~ Static Water Tank Tank (Fii PumD) with Minimum Pres-
Sprinkler Storage Tank with M~nimum P&s- sure of 0.3 N/mm
System l% and sure of 0.3 N/mm (3 kg/cm)
Alarm $%- Alarm $IS-
tems tern

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
2) Underground shopping same as V(a) (iii) NP do- do-
complex (F3)
NOTE 1 — Buildings above 30 m in height not to be permitted.
NOTE 2 — All undergrmsnd shopping areas should be fully airconditioned.
VI) INDUSTRIAL BUILD-
INGS (G)
.0 LOW H=ud (G-1)
0 Lesathan15mintil
(1) Pfc4aseaupto250m P NP NP NP NP NP NP NP NP NP NP NP
(2) Plot area 251 m2 to XXl P NP P (for NP P (in case P NP NP 5tXM &inte as I (C) (h/) 450/min (for more
m’ OF) (10000in above thass one Storey)
tim:ne case of 9Wkhninin case o~
Storey) sprinkler
system)
3) Plot area 501 m’ to P P (for P (for P P (in case P NP 10(K3O 5ofn) Sa!ne as in I (b) (ii) -do.
1000m2 more niole Ofq (15 O(H)in
than one than one case of
Storey) Storey) sprinkler
system)
4) Plot area 1001 m2 and P -do- -do- P P(incaae P P 25 (KKl 20000 in do- do-
ahove < otW (depend - (50 000 if Case of
ing upon plot area ex- spinkler sys-
the risk) cea?ds2000 tems
mz)

* indicates basement area 200 m2 and more.

P Jndicates Provided’.
NP indicates ‘Not to be provirkd’.

. .
 ii) 15 m and above but not P P P P P (in cme P P 100000 20000 .Rmem in (c) (iv) -do-
exceeding 18 m of*)
NOTE — Building above 18 m in height not to be permitted.
3) MODERATE
HAZARD (G-2)
i) Less than 15 m
1) Plot area up to 250 m2 P NP P (for NP NP P NP NP 5 CN30for NP 450/min for hose reel
hose reel
than one
Storey)
2) Plot area 251 m2 to 500 P NP 40- NP P (in case P NP 25000 5000 for Same as in 1 (b) (ii) 450/min (900/min*)
m’ Or) hose reel
(15 000*)
3) Plot area 501 mz to I 000 P P (for -do- NP P (in case P NP 25000 -do- -do- -do-
m’ more OF)
than one
Storey)
4) Plot area 1001 m2 and P -do- -do- P P (in case P P 35000 10 WJOfor -do- -do-
above or) (depend - (50 000 if hose reel
ing upon G.F. covered (30000*)
the risk) area exceeds
I 000 m’)
ii) 15 m and above but not P P P P P P P 1000oou to 2000o Same as in I (c) (iv) -do-
exceeding 18 m 500 m1’ above
covered area
per floor
(150000if
covered area
exceeds 500
m2)
NOTE — Buildings above 18 m in height not to be permitted.

* indicates basement area 200 m2 and more

P indicates %ovided’.
NP indicates ‘Not to be provided’.
 i!
&
&
I
IV-M NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
,.
? (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13)
!a
-1
VII) STORAGE BUILD-
INGS (H)
i) Less than 15 m
1) Single Storey Building P NP NP P P (if ag- P P 10000 for NP Minimum 1 620/min NP
gregate every 100 m2 for U/G tanks of
covered covered area 50000 capacity &
area ex- or part there- pump capacity to be
ceeds of or up to proportionately in-
200 mz) maximum of creased as per tank
150000 capacity
2) More than one floor P P P P P P P 15000 for 20m -do- 900hnin
building every 100 m2
of part therc-
Of
NOTE — Buildings above 15m in height not to be permitted
VIII) HAZARDOUS
BUILDINGS (J)
il Single Storey Building P NP NP P P P P Minimum 4 h NP As per Standard NP
fire fighting specification
requirements
ii) More than one floor P P P P P P P -do- 50000 -do- 900hnin
building but not exceed-
ing 15 m
NOTE — Building above 15 m in height not to be permitted.

* indicates basement area 200 mz and more.

2 P indicates ‘Provided’.
‘g NP indicates ‘Not to be provided’.

~.: 1-
..-.
..
—. &
 TABLE21 SIZEOF MAINS
(Table 20)

SIZEOF‘IWEMAINS ‘lYPE OF BUILOING HEtGHTOFBUILOING

(1) (2) (3)

150 mm as single outlet landing I) Residential buildings (A)

valves
O *Lodging or rooming houaea
ii) Dormitories
iii) One or two famify private 15 m or above and not exeeedksg 45 m
dwellings
iv) Apartment housea (flats)
v) With shopping area not
exeeeding 500 m2 Lesstftan15m
vi) Hotels 15 m or above in height but not
exceedbtg 30 m and area not
exceeding 600 m2 per floor

-do- H) Educational buildings (B) 15 m or above but not exeedng 30 m

do- III) Institutional buildings (C)

a) For hospitals and sana-
torium 15 m or above but not cxeeding 30 m
b) For custodial institu- 15 m or above but not exeeecfing 30 m
tions and mental institutions

-do- IV) Assembfy buildings (D) 15 m or above but not exeeeding 30 m

and to~al floor area not exeeeding ,
500 m /floor (above 30 m, not to b
permitted)

-do- v Businessbuildings (E) 15 m or above but not exeeeding 30 m

-dr)- w) Mercantile buildings (F) 15 m or above but not exceeding 30 m

(above 35 m, not to be permitted) (above 30 m, not to be permitted)

-do- VII) [ndustrial buildings (G) 15 m or above but not exceeding 18 m2

150 mm with twin outlet VIII) All buildings classified Above 45 m

Lsndingvalves under (i) to (iv)

-do- 1X) All buildings classified Above 15 m

under (v) above with sho p-
ing area exceeding 500 m?

-do- X) All buildings classified Above 30 m and area exceeding

under I (v) above 500 m2

150 mm with twin outlet XI) Hotels Above 30 m

landing valves

-do- XII) All buildings classified Above 30 m

under H and 111above

-dc)- XIII) Afl buildings classified Above 30 m

under V above

-do- XIV) Afl storage buildings (H) Above 10 m but not exceeding 15 m

-do- xv) Afl Hazardous buildings (J) Above 10 m but not exceeding 15 m

● Buildings above 15 m in height not permitted in ease of high hazard industrial buildings.

NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOF INDIA
7V0.8 AUTOMATICHIGH VELOCITYWATER ZII.2 Air-conditioning and ventilating sys-
SPRAY OR EMULSIFYINGSYSTEM — Auto- tems circulating air to more than one floor or
matic high velocity water spray or emulsifying fire area shall be provided with dampers
system shall be provided for protection of in- designed to close automatically in case of fire
door transformers as applicable in accordance and thereby preventing spread of fire or
with D-1. 16 and of accepted standards given at smoke. Such a system shall also be provided
(12) of Appendix A. with automatic controls to stop fans in case of
fire, unless arranged to remove smoke from a
Z10.9 FIXED FOAM INSTALLATION— Fixed
fire, in which case these shall be designed to
foam generating system shall be provided for
remain in operation.
protection of oil storage area for boilers with
its ancilla~ storage of furnace oils in base-
711.3 Air-conditioning system serving large
ment. Fixed foam installations can be low,
places of assembly (over 1000 persons), large
medium or high expansion types, which can
departmental stores or hotels with over 100
cover fire risks in oil storage areas generally.
rooms in a single block shall be provided with
High expansion foams are used for cable tun-
effective means for preventing circulation of
nels and other confined areas.
smoke through the system in the case of a fire
7.10.10 CARBON “DIOXIDE FIRE EXTIN- in air filters or from other sources drawn into
GUISHING SYSTEM — Fixed carbon dioxide the system and shall have of approved smoke
fire extinguishing installation shall be sensitive devices for actuation.
provided in accordance with Indian Standard
given at (13) of Appendix A on premises 7.11.4 From fire safety point of view, it will be
where water or foam can not be used for fire preferable to provide separate air handling
extinguishing because of the special nature of units for the various floors so as to avoid the
the contents of the buildings/areas to be hazards arising from spread of fire and smoke
protected. For some special fire risk, carbon through the AC. ducts. The requirements of
dioxide may not be suitable and it may be A.C. ducts should conform to Indian Standard
necessary to provide BCF (Bromochloro- given at (21) of Appendix A
difluoromethane) — Halon 1211 or BTM
(Bromochloro-trifluoromethane) – Halon 7.11.5 For normal operation, air changes
1301. schedule should be as follows:
However, the use of halons shall be dis- Space to be Ventilated Air Changes per
couraged, as halons are ozone depleting sub- Hour
stances (ODS) and their use is being phased
*Assembly Hall Auditoria 3-6 .
out throughout the world.
*Bed Rooms /Living ooms 3-6
7.10.11 Fire fighting equipment shall be Bath Roomsfloile@ 7 6-12
suitably located and clearly marked by *Cafes/Restaurants “a{ 12 - 15
luminous signs. Cinemas/I’heatr#’ 6-9
NOTE —‘fltisprovisionshallnotapplyto occupancies (Non-Smoking)j
A-2 and A-4 less than 15 m in height.
Class Rooms :“ 3 -6
7.11 Air-conditioning and Ventilation — tir- *Factories 3 -6
conditioning and ventilation requirements of (Medium metal Work)
different rooms or areas in any occupancy *Garages ,, 12 - 15
shall be as given in Part VIII Building services:
*Hospital R#ards ,3-6
Section 1 Lighting and ventilation and Section
3 Air-conditioning and heating. *Kitchens (common) 6-9
*Kitchens/Domestic 3-6
7.11.1 Air-conditioning and ventilating sys-
tems shall be so installed and maintained as to Laboratories 3-6
minimize the danger of spread of fire, smoke * offices 3-6
or fumes thereby from one floor or fire area to *Contaminants for normal operation of ventilating system
another, or from outside into any occupied such as heat, smoke and fumes shall be collected separate-
building or structure (see D-1.17). ly by local exhaust ventilation.

PARTIVFIREPROTECTION IV.37
%12 Smoke Venting
7,12.1 Smoke venting facilities, where re-
quired forsafeuseofexits inwindowlessbuild-
ings, underground structures, large area
factories shall be automatic in action with
manual controls in addition.
7.12.2 Natural draft smoke venting shall util-
ize roof vents or vents in walls at or near the
ceiling leveb such vents shall be normally
open, or, if closed, shall be designed for auto-
matic opening in case of fire, by release of
smoke sensitive devices.
Z12.3 Where smoke venting facilities are in-
stalled for purposes of exit safety, these shall
be adequate to prevent dangerous accumula-
tion of smoke during the period of time neces-
sary to evacuate the area served, using
available exit facilities with a margin of safety
to allow for unforeseen contingencies. It is
recommended that smoke exhaust equipment
should have a minimum capacity of ap-
proximately a 5-rein air change. Where
mechanical venting is employed, it shall be
firesafe.
7.12.4 The discharge apertures of all natural
draft smoke vents shall be so arranged as to be
readily susceptible to opening by fire service
personnel.
Z12.5 Power operated smoke exhausting sys-
tems may be substituted for natural draft vents
only by specific permission of the’Authority.
713 Heating — Installation of chimney and
heating apparatus shall conform to Indian
Standards given at (14) of Appendix A.
7.14 Additional Precautions — In addition to
the factors coverd by Z2 to Z13 there are
certain aspects, applicable to particular oc-
cupancies only, which may affect the spread of
fire, smoke or fumes and thus the safe evacua-
Class 1
May be used in any situation May be used in any situation,
except on walls, facade of the
building and ceiling of stair-
case and corridors.
NOTE— Panelling (lining) shall be permitted in a limited area. It shall not be permitted in a vestibule.
Iv-m
tion of the building in case of fire. Some such
aspects are
a) Interior finish and decoratiory
b) seating, aisles, railings and turnstiles in
places of assembly
c) service equipment ‘and storage
facilities in buildings other than .
storage buildings; and
d) hazards on stage, in waiting spaces,
projection booths, etc, in theatres and
cinemas.
%15 Suflace Interior Finishes
8
Z15.I The use of flammable surface finishes
on walls (including external facade of the
building) and ceilings affects the safety of the
occupants of a building. Such finishes tend to 3
spread the fire and even though the structural
elements may be adequately fire resistant,
serious danger to life may result. It is, there-
fore, essential to have adequate precautions to
minimize spread of flame on wall, facade of
building and,ceiling surfaces.
The finishing materials used for various sur-
faces and decor shall be such that it shall not
generate toxic smoke/fumes.
Z 15.2 The susceptibility to fire of various
types of wall surfaces is determined in terms of
the rate of spread of fire. Based on the rate of
spread of fire surfacing material shall be con-
sidered as divided into four classes as follows
[see Indian Standard givenat (22) ofAppendix
A]:
Class 1 Surfaces of very low flame spread
Class 2 Surfaces of low flame spread
Class 3 Surfaces of medium flame spread
Clas 4 Surfaces of rapid flame spread
7.15.3 The uses for which surface materials
falling into vario~ classes shall be adopted in
building construction are giveit below
Class 2 class 3
Should be used only in living
rooms and bed rooms (but
not in rooms on the roof)
and only as a lining to solid
walk and partitions; not on
staircases or corridors or
facade of the building.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

7.15.4 Materials of Class 4 which include un-
treated wood fibreboards maybe used as ceil-
ing lining, provided the ceiling is at least 2.4 m
from the top surface of the floor below, and
the wall surfaces conform to requirements of
class [see Note under Z15.3]. Class 4 materials
shall not be used in kitchens, corridotx and
staircases. Some types contain bitumen and, in
addition to risk from spread of fire, emit dense
smoke on burning such materials shall be
excluded from use under these conditions and
shall also not be used for construction of ceil-
ing where the plenum is used for return air in
air-conditioned buildings.
715.5 When frames, walls, partitions or
floors are lined with combustible materials,
the surfaces on both sides of the materials
shall conform to the appropriate class, be-
cause theme is considerable danger from fire
starting and rapidly spreading within the con-
cealed cavity unknown to the occupants whose
escape may be hampered there by. For
detailed information on materials and details
of construction with their fire-resistance
rating, reference may be made to Indian
Standards given at (4) of Appendix A.
7.16 Glazing
7.16.1 Building of ~pes 1 to 4 construction
shall employ one of the two types of glazing
described in Z16.2 and 7V6.3 except that we
4 c~nstruction may have the alternative of
hardwood sashes or frames or both.
7.16.2 Wired glass shall comply with the fol-
lowing requirements:
a) THICKNESSOF GLASS— The thickness
of glass shall be not less than 6.0 mm.
b) EMBEDDED WIRE NETHNG — Em-
bedded wire netting shall be not larger
than 10 mm mesh.
c) SIZEOFSQUARESOFGLASS— ‘f’hearea
shall not exceed 0.25 m2.
d) SASHESANDFRAMES— The sashes or
frames or both shall be entirly of iron
or other suitable metal securely bolted
or keyed into the wall, except in the
case of panels in internal doors.
e) SETTING OF GLASS — me Piitleh Of
glass shall be set in rebates or grooves
not less than 6.0 mm in width or depth,
with due allowance for expansion, and
shall be secured by hard metal fasten-
ings to the sashes or frames inde-
pendently of any lead, cement or putty
used for weather-proofing purposes.
PARTIVFIRE PROTECTtON
. ..
Zl(i3 Electro-copper glazing shall comply
with the following requirements: :+
a) Thickness of glass shall be not less than
6.5 mm.
b) Size of squares of glass shall not exceed
100 Cmz”
SECTtONALLIGHTS— The square glas~
c)
sea to be formed by electro-copper
glazing into sectional lights shall not
exceed 0.37 m2 in area.
d) SASHESANDFRAMES— The sashes or
frames or both shall be entirly of iron
or other hard metal, securely bolted or
keyed into the wall, except when in
panels in inteqtal doors.
e) FDCING OF SECTIONAL LIGHTS — ~t?.
sectional lights shall beset in rebate or
grooves not less than 6.5 mm in width
&depth, with due allowance for expan-
sion and shall be secured by hard metal
fastenings to the sashea or frames inde-
pendently of any lead, cement or putty
used for weather-proofing purposes.
Z16,4 Maximum permissible area shall be
5 m2 for protection by wired glass or electro-
copper glazing.
Z16.5 CXEMENT — Hard metal casements,
not exceeding 0.8 m2 fitted with wired glass or
electro-copper glazing in accordance
with 7V6.2 and H6.3, secured to the framea
by hard metal hinges not more than 60 cm
apart and by fastening at top, centre and bet-
tom shall be permissible.
7.17 Skylights
72 ZI Wired glass for skylights or monitor
lights shall comply witlt the following require-
ments:
a) Thickness of glass shall be not less than
6.0 mm,
b) Embedded wire netting shall M not
, larger than 10 mm mesh;
C) FRAMESAND GLAZING — ‘f’he frMIle
shall be continuous and divided by bars
spaced at not more than 70 cm centres.
The frame and bars shall be of iron or
other hard metal, and supported on a
curb either of metal or of wood covered
with sheet metal. The glass shall be
secured by hard metal fastenings to the
frame and bars independently of any
lead, cement or putty used for weather-
proofing purposes.
tv-=
7.17.2 Maximum permissible area shall be
5 m2 for protection by wired glass.
7.18 Fire L@s — Where applicable, fire lifts
shall be provided with a minimum capacity for
8 passengers and fully automated with emer-
gency switch on ground level. In general,
buildings 15 m in height or above shall be
provided with fire lifts [see D-1.5 (q)].
7.18.1 1:1 case of fire, only fireman shall
operate fire lifts. In normal course, it may be
used by other persons.:
7.18.2 Each fire lift shall be equipped with
suitable inter-communication equipment for
communicating with the control room on the
ground floor of the building.
7.18.3 The number and location of fire lifts in
a building shall be decided after taking into
consideration various factors like building
population, floor area, section of building
(compartmentation), etc.
8 EXIT REQUIREMENTS
8.1 An exit maybe a doorway corridor; pas-
sageway(s) to an internal staircase, or external
staircase, or to a verandah or terrace(s), which
have access to the street, or to the roof of a
building or a refuge area. An exit may also
include a horizontal exit leading to an adjoin-
ing building at the same level.
8.1.1 Lifts and escalators shall not be con-
sidered as exits.
8.2 General
8.2.1 Every building meant for human oc-
cupancy shall be proviled with exits sufficient
to permit safe escape of occupants, in case of
fire or other emergency.
8.2.2 In every building exists shall comply
with the minimum requirements of this part,
except those not accessible for general public
use.
8.2.3 All exits shall be free of obstructions.
8.2.4 No building shall be so altered as to
reduce the number width or protection of exits
to less than that required.
8.2.5 Exits shall be clearly visible and the
routes to reach the exit shall be clearly marked
and sign ,posted to.guide the population of the
floor co”n~rned. Signs shall be illuminated
and wired to an independent electrical circuit
on an alternative source of supply. The sizes
and colours of the exit signs shall be in accord-
ance with ‘Indian Standards given at (23) ‘of
Appendix A.
NOTE —Thisprovisionshallnotapplyto A-2andA-4
occupanciesleasthan15m in height.
8.2.6 The floors of at%as covered for the
means of exit shall be illuminated to values not
less than 1 ft candle (10 lUX)at floorlevel. In
auditoriums, theatres, concert halls and such
other places of assembly, the illumination of
floor exit/access may be reduced during
periods of performances to values not less
than 1/5 ft candle (2 lux).
8.2.7 Fire-check doors for fire resistance of
1 h shall be provided at appropriate places
along the escape routes to prevent spread of
fire and smoke, and particularly at the
entrance to lifts and stairs where a ‘funnel or
flue effect’ may be created, inducing an up-
ward spread of fire.
8.2.8 All exits shall provide continuous
means of egress to the exterior of a building or
to an exterior open space leading to a street.
8.2.9 Exits shall be so arranged that they may
be reached without passing through another
occupied unit.
8.3 Occupant Load — For determining the
exits required, the number of persons within
any floor area or the occupant load shall be
based on the actual number of occupants, but
in no case less than that specified in Table 22.
8.3.1 MEZZANINE— The occupant load of a
mezzanine floor discharging to a floor below
shall be added to that floor occupancy and the
capacity of the exits shall be designed for the
total occupancy load thus established.
k
8.4 Capaci~ of Erits
8.4.1 The unit of exit width, used to measure
the capacity of any exit, shall be 50 cm. A clear
width of 25 cm shall be counted as an addition-
al half unit. Clear widths less than 25 cm shall
not be counted for exit width.
NOTE— Thetotal occupantsfroma particularfloor
mustevacuatewithin~ minutcaforUPCI construc-
tion,l; minutesfor-II constructionand1minute
for~pe 111construction.Sizeoftheexhdoorkxhway
shall be calculatedaccordinglykeepingin viewthe
traveldistanceasperTable24.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 TABLE 22 OCCUPANT LOAD
(Clause 8.3)

SL No. GROUPOF OCCUPANCY OccuPA~ LOAD,

FLOORArc+%IN
mz /PERSON
(1) (2) (3)

i) Residential (A) 12.5

ii) Educational (B) 4

iii) Institutional (C) 15*

iv) Assembly (D)

a) With f~ed or loose seats and dance floors 0.6”
b) Without seating facilities including dining rooms l.st

v) Mercantile (F)
a) Street floor and sales basement 3
b) upper sale floors 6

vi) Business and industrial (E&G) 10

vii) Storage (H) 30

viii) Hazardous (J) 10

*Occupant load in dormitory portions of homes for the aged, o hanages, insane asylums, etc, where sleeping
accommodation is provided, shall be calculated at not less than 7.5 mYgross floor area/person.

tThe gross floor area shall include, in addition to the main assembly room or space, any occupied connecting room or
space in the same storey or in the storeys above or below, where entrance is common to such rooms and spaces and they
are available for use by the occupants of the assembly place. No deductions shall be made in the gross area for corridors,
closets or other subdivisions; the area shall include all space serving the particular assembly occupancy.

8.4.2 Occupants per unit exit width shall be in assembly occupancies, the capacity per storey
accordance with Table 23. per unit width of exit of stairways in Table 23
may be increased by 50 percent; and in build-
8.4.3 HORIZONTAL EXIT ALLOWANCE —
ings of institutional occupancy it may be in-
When horizontal exit is provided in buildings
creased by 100 percent.
of mercantile, storage, industrial, business and
.

TABLE 23 OCCUPANTS PER UNIT EXITWIDTH

(Clause 8.4.2)

SL No. GROUPOF NUMBEROF.OCCUPANTS

OCCUPANCY ‘Stairways Ramps Doors >
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

9 Residential (A) 25 50 75
ii) Educational (B) 25 50 75
iii) Institutional(C) 25 50 75
iv) Assembly (D) 40 50 60
v Business (E) 50 60 75
vi) Mercantile (F) 50 60 75
vii) Industrial (G) 50 60 75
viii) Storage (H) 50 60 75
w Hazardous (J) 25 30 40

PART IV FIRE PROTECTION IV-41

*
8.5 Arrangement of Exits space or to an open place of safety. Further,
the provision or otherwise of alternative stair-
8.5.1 Exits shall be so located that the travel case shall be subject to the requirements of
distance on the floor shall not exceed the dis- travel distance being complied with.
tance given ~ Table 24.
8.7 DOOrWayS
TABLE24 TRAVELDISTANCEFOR
OCCUPANCYAND TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION 8.7.1 Every exit doorway shall open into an
SLNo. GROUPOF MAXIMUMTRAVEL
enclosed stairway or a horizontal exit of a
OCCUPANCY DISI’ANCECONSITtUCTtON corridor or passageway providing continuous
f Types y.. 1 and protected means of egress.
l&2
(1) (2) (3) (4) 8.7.2 No exit doorway shall be less than 100
m m cm in width except assembly buildings where
i) Residential (A) 22.5 22.5 door width shall be not less than 200 cm.
ii) Educational (B) 22.5 22.5 Doorways shall be not less than 200 cm in
iii) Institutional (C) 22.5 22.5 bight.
iv) Assembly (D) 30.0 30.0
v) Business (E) 30.0 30.0 8.7.3 Exit doorways shall open ouhvards, that
vi) Mercantile (F) 30.0 30.0 is, away from the room, but shall not obstruct
vii) Industrial (G) 45.0 “
the travel along any exit. No door, when
viii) Storage (H) 30.0 ●

Hanrdous (J) 22.5 *

w
NOTE1 — For the sprinkler system, the travel distance
may be increased by 50 percent of the values specified.
NOTE2 — In so far as basements are concerned, the
travel distance will reckon half the value as prescribed
in Table 24. Ramps shall also be counted as one of the
means of escape.
* Construction of type 3 or 4 is not permitted.
8.5.2 The travel distance to an exit from the
dead end of a corridor shall not exceed half the
distance specified in Table 24, except in as-
sembly and institutional occupancies in which
case it shall not exceed 6 m.
8.5.3 Whenever more than one exit is re-
quired for any room space or floor of a build-
ing, exits shall be placed as remote from each
other as possible and shall be arranged to
provide direct access in separate directions
from any point in the area served.
8.6 Number of Exits
8.6.1 GENERAL — The general requirements
of number of exits shall supplement the re-
quirement of different occupanciesin910 17.
8.6.2 All buildings which are 15 m in height
or above and all buildings used as educational,
assembly, institutional, industrial, storage and
hazardous occupancies, and mixed occupan-
cies with any of the aforesaid occupancies,
having area more than 500 m2 on each floor
shall have a minimum of two staircases. They
shall be of enclosed type; at least one of them
shall be on external walls of buildings and shall
open directly to the exterior, interior open
opened, shall reduce the required width of
stairway or landing to less than 90 cm; over-
head or sliding doors shall not be installed.
NOTE — In the case of buildings where there is a
central corridor, the doors of rooms shall open inwards
to permit smooth flow of traffic in the corridor.
8.7.4 Exit door shall not open immediately
upon a flight of stairs; a landing equal to at
least the width of the door shall be provided in
the stairway at each doorway the level of land-
ing shall be the same as that of the floor which
it serves.
8. 7!5 Exit doorways shall be openable from
the side which they serve without the use of a
key.
8.7.6 Mirrors shall not be placed in exit ways
or exit doors to avoid confusion regarding the
direction of exit.
8.8 Corridors and Passageways
8.8.1 Exit corridors and passageways shall be
of width not less than the aggregate required
width of exit doorways leading from them in
the direction of travel to the exterior.
8.8.2 Where stairways discharge through cor-
ridors and passageways, the height of cor-
ridors and passageways shall be not less than
2.4 m.
8.8.3 All means of exit including staircases,
lift lobbies and corridors shall be adequately
ventilated.

IV-42 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 . =4

8.9 Internal Staircases population on each floor for the purpose of

8.9.1 Interior stairs shall be constructed of design of staircase.
non-combustible materials throughtout. a) The minimum headroom in a passage
under the landing of a staircase and
8.9.2 Interior stairs shall be constructed as a
under the staircase shall be 2.2 m.
self-contained unit with an external wall con-
b) For building 15 m in height or more,
stituting at least one of its sides and shall be
access to main staircase shall be
completely enclosed.
through a fire/smoke check door of 1
8.9.3 A stairease shall not be arranged round hour fire resistance rating. Fire resis-
a lift shaft. tance rating may be reduced to half an
8.9.4 Hollow combustible construction shall hour forresidential buildings.
not be permitted. c) No living space, store or other fire risk
shall open directly into the staircase or
8.9.5 No gas piping shall be laid in the stair- staircases.
way.
d) External exit door of staircase
8.9.6 Notwithstanding the detailed provision enclosure at ground level shall open
for exits in accordance with 8.3,8.4 and 8.5, the directly to the open spaces or through
following minimum width shall be provided a draught lobby, if neeessary.
for staircases: e) The main staircase and external stair-
a) Residential buildings (dwell- 1.0 m case shall be continuous from ground
ings) floor to the terrace level.
b) Residential hotel buildings 1.5 m f) No electrical shafts/AC ducts or gas
c) Assembly buildings like 2.Om pipe, etc, shall pass through the stair-
auditorium, theatres and cases. Lift shall not open in staircase.
cinemas g) No combustible material shall be used
d) Educational buildings up to 1.5 m for decorationhvall panelling in the
30 m in height staircase.
e) Institutional buildings like h) Beams/columns and other building
hospitals feature shall not reduce the head
i) Up to 10 beds 1.5 m room/width of the staircase.
ii) More than 10 beds 2.0 m 0 The exit sign with arrow indicating the
f) All other buildings 1.5 m way to the escape route shall be
provided at a suitable height from the
8.9.7 The minimum width of tread without floor level on the wall and shall be
nosing shall be 250 mm for internal staircase illuminated by electric light connected
of residential buildings. This shall be 30 cm for to corridor circuits. All exit way mark-
assembly, hotels, educational, institutional, ing signs should be flush with the wall
business and other buildings. The treads shall and so designed that no mechanical
be constructed and maintained in a manner to darnage shall occur to them due to
prevent slipping. moving of furniture or other heavy
8.9.8 The maximum height of riser shall be 19 equipments. Further, all landings of
cm for residential buildings and 15 cm for floor shall have floor indicating boards
other buildings and the number shall be prominently indicating the number of
limited to 15 per flight. floor as per bye-laws.
8.9.9 Hand rails shall be provided at a height The floor indication board shall be
of 100 cm to be measured from the base of the placed on the wall immediately facing
middle of the treads to the top of the hand the flight of stairs and nearest to the
rails. Further, the gap between the two ver- landing. It shall be of siz,e not less than
ticles shall not exceed 30 cm. This gap shall be 0.5x0.5 m.
reduced to 15 cm, where children are likely to k) Individual floors shall be prominently
use the staircase. indicated on the wall facing the stair-
cases.
8.9.10 The number of people in,between floor
m) In case of single staircase it shall ter-
landings in staircase shall not be less than the
minate at the ground floor level and the

PART N FIRE PROTECTION ~.43

 access to the basement shall be by a
separate staircase. However, the
second staircase may lead to basement
levels provided the same is separated at
ground level by ventilated lobby with
discharge points to two different ends
through enclosures.
8.10 Pressurisation of Staircases (Protected
Escape Routes)
8.10.1 Though in normal building design,
compartmentation plays a vital part in limit-
ing the spread of fire, smoke will readily
spread to adjacent spaces through the various
leakage openings in the compartment
enclosure, such as cracks, openings around
pipes ducts, airflow grills and doors, as perfect
sealing of all these openings is not possible. It
is smoke and toxic gases, rather than flame,
that will initially obstruct the free movement
of occupants of the building through the
means of escape (escape routes). Hence the
exclusion of smoke and toxic gases from the
protected routes is of great importance.
8.10.2 Pressurisation is a method adopted for
protecting escape routes against ingress of
smoke, especially in high-rise buildings. In
pressurisation, air is injected into the
protected escape routes, i.e. into the stair-
cases, lobbies or corridors, to raise their pres-
sure slightly above the pressure in adjacent
parts of the building. As a result, ingress of
smoke or toxic gases into the escape routes
will be prevented.
8.10.3 The pressurisation levels for staircases
should be as under:
Building Height Pressurisation Level
Emergency Reduced operation
Operation for stage 1 of a
2-stage system
(Pa) (Pa)
Less than 15 m 50 .8
15 m or above 50 15
If possible, the same levels shall be used for
lobbies and corridors, but levels slightly lower
may be used for these spaces if desired. The
difference in pressurisation levels between
staircase and lobbies (or corridors) shall not
be greater than 5 Pa.
8.10.4 Pressurisation system can be of two
types:
W-4
i) Single-stage, designed for operation
only in the event of an emergency, and
ii) Two-stage, where normally a level of
pressurisation is maintained in the
protected escape routes, and an in-
creased level of pressurisation can be
brought into operation in an
emergency.
8.10.5 The normal air-conditioning system
and the pressurisation system shall be treated
as an integral one, especially for a two-stage
system. When the emergency pressurisation is
brought into action, the following changes in
the normal air-conditioning system shall be
effected:
a) Any recirculation of air shall be
stopped and all exhaust air vented to
atmosphere;
b) Any air supply to the spaces/areas
other than escape routes shall be
stopped;
c) The exhaust system maybe continued
provided:
i) the positions of the extraction
grills permit a general air flow
away from the protected escape
route entry
ii) the construction of the ductwork
and fans is such that, it will not be
rendered inoperable by hot gases
and smoke;
iii) there is no danger of spread of
smoke to other floors by the path
of the extraction system which
can be ensured by keeping the
extraction fans running.
8.10.6 The pressurisation system can be inter-
connected with the automatic/manual fire
alarm system for actuation.
8.10.7 It will be desirable to have all the stair-
cases in a building pressurised, if pressurisa-
tion system is to be resorted to. Otherwise, the
use of pressurised and naturally ventilated
staircases in the same building may introduce
difficulties and hence shall be avoided. Under
no circumstances shall a pressurised staircase
be connected by a corridor or lobby to an
unpressurised staircase.
8.11 Erternal Stairs — External stairs, when
provided shall comply the following.
8.11.1 External stairs shall always be kept in
sound operable conditions.
NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOF INDIA

8.11.2 All external stairs shall lx! directly con-
ncctcd m the ground.
8.11..? Entrance 10 the external stairs shall be
separate and rcrnotc from the internal stair-
case.
8.11.4 Care shall be taken to ensure that no
wall opening or window opens on to or close
to a external stairs.
8.11.5 The route to the external stairs shall be
free of obstructions at all times.
8.11.6 The external stairs shall be constructed
of noncombustible materials, and any door-
way leading to it shall have the required fire
resistance.
8.11.7 No external staircase, used as a fire
escape, shall be inclined at an angle greater
than 45° from the horizontal.
8.11.8 External stairs shall have straight flight
not less than 100 cm wide with 20 cm treads
and risers not more than 19 cm. The number
of risers shall be limited to 15 per flight.
8.11.9 Hand rails shall be of a height not less
than 100 cm and not exceeding 120 cm,
8.11.10 SPIRAL FIRE ESCAPE — The use of
spiral staircase shall be limited to low oc-
cupant load and to a building not exceeding 9
m in height.
A spiral fire escape shall be not less than 150
cm in diameter and shall be designed to give
adequate headroom.
8.12 Horizontal Erits
8.12.1 The width of horizontal exit shall be
same as for the exit doorways (see 8. 7).
8.12.2 A horizontal exit shall be equipped
with at least one fire door of self-closing type.
8.12.3 Unless fully sprinkled, in case of build-
ings more than 24 m in height, refuge area of
15 m2 or an area equivalent to 0.3 m2 per
person to accommodate the occupants of two
consecutive floors, whichever is higher, shall
be provided as under:
The refuge area shall be provided on the
periphery of the floor and open to air atleast
on one side protected with suitable railings.
a) FOR FLOORS ABOVE 24 m AND UPTO
39 m — One refuge area on the floor
immediately above 24 m.
b) FOR FLOORS ABOVE 39 m — One
refuge area on the floor immediately
PARTIVFIRE PROTECTION
!*
.. —-
above 39 m and soon after every 15 m.
Refuge area provided in excess of the
rcquircmcnts shall be counted towards
FAR.
Nom — I%sphals shall followthe above norms,
whethersprinkledor not.
8.12.4 Where there is a difference in level
between connected areas for horizontal exits,
ramps, not more than 1 in 10 m slope shall be
provided; steps shall not be used.
8.22.5 Doors in horizontal exits shall be
openable at all times from both sides.
8.13 Fire Tower — Fire towers are the
preferred type of escape route for storeyed
buildings and their application shall be con-
sidered as the safest route for escape. Their
number, location and size shall depend on the
building concerned, and its associated escape
routes.
8.13.1 In every mercantile, business or as-
sembly building, theatres, and institutional
buildings except residential buildings, over 8
storeys or 24 m in height, at least one required
means of egress shall preferably be a fire
tower.
8.13.2 The enclosure of fire towers shall be
constructed of walls with a 2 h fire-resistance
rating without openings other thari the exit
doorways, with platforms, landings and bal-
conies having the same fire-resistance rating.
8.14 Ramps
8.14.1 Ramps shall comply with all the ap-
plicable requirements for stairways regarding
enclosure, capacity and limiting dimensions
except where specified in 9 to 17 for special
uses and occupancies.
8.14.2 The slope of a ramp shall not exceed 1
in 10. In certain cases steeper slopes may be
permitted but in no case greater than 1 in 8.
8.14.3 For all slopes exceeding 1 in 10 and
wherever the use is such as to involve danger
of slipping, the ramp shall be surfaced with
approved non-slipping material.
8.15 Emergency and Escape Lighting
8.15.1 Emergency lighting shall be powered
from a source independent of that supplying
the normal lighting.
12xape lighting shall be capable ofi
a) indicating clearly and unambiguously
the escape routes,
IV-*
 b) Providing adequate illumination along
such routes to alIow safe movement of
persons towards and through the exits,
c) ensuring that fire alarm call points and
fire-fighting equipments provided
along the cscapc routes can be readily
Iocatcd.
8.15.2 The horizontal illuminartce at floor
level on the ccntre line of an escape route shall
be not less than 0.2 lUX.ht addition, for escape
routes up to 2 m wide, 50% of the route width
shall be lit to a minimum of 0.1 lUX.The recom-
mended illuminance shall be achieved with a
unfiormity of not less than 0.025.
8.15.3 The emergency lighting shall bc
provided to be put on within 5 seconds
(preferably within 1 seconds of the failure of
the normal lighting supply.
8,15.4 Escape lighting luminaires should be
sited to cover the following locations:
a) near each intersection of corridors,
b) at each exit door,
Cj near each change of direction in the
escape route,
d) near each staircase so that each flight
of stairs receives direct light,
e) near any other change of floor level,
f) outside each final exit and close to it,
g) near each fire alarm call point,
h) near fire-fighting equipment,
j) to illuminate exit and safety signs as
required by the enforcing authority.
NOTE — For the purposes of this clause ‘near’ is
normally considered to be within 2 m measured
horizontally.
8.15.5 Emergency lighting systems shall be
designed to ensure that a fault or failure in any
one luminaire does not further reduce the
effectiveness of the system.
8.15.6 The luminaires shall be mounted as
low as possible, but at least 2 m above the floor
level measured to the underside of the
luminaires.
8.15.7 Signs are required at all exits, emergen-
cy exits and escape routes, which should com-
ply with the graphic requirements of the
relevant Indian Standards.
8.25.8 Emergency lighting luminaires and
their fittings shall be non-flammable.
8.15.9 It is essential that the wiring and instal-
lation of the emergency lighting systems are of
Iv.*
high quality so as to ensure their perfect serv-
iceability at all times.
8.15.10 The cmcrgcrtcy lighting systcm shall
bc capable of continuous operation for a min-
imum duration of 1 hour and 30 minutes even
for the smallest premises.
8.25.11 Itshall bc ensured that the emergency
lighting system is well maintained by peri-
odical inspections and tests so as to ensure
their perfect serviceability at.zdl times.
9 REQUIREMENTS OF RESIDENTIAL
BUILDINGS (GROUP A)
9.1 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 7 for the type of construction and
occupancy group and the exit requircmcmts
given in 8, the requirements given in 9.2
to 9.4.10 shall be complied with. The capacity
of any open mcuanine or balcony shall be
added to the capacity of the floor below for the
purpose of determining exit capacity.
9.2 Fire Detectwn/Extinguishing Sjmtern —
The requirements for occupaneysub-divisions
A-1 to A-5 as specified in Table 20 and Appen-
dix D (for high rise buildings) shall apply.
Information regarding alarm system shall con-
form to Indian Standards at (19) of Appendix A.
9.3 &kit Facilities
9.3.2 In addition to requirements for oc-
cupancy Subdivision A-2 (see 9.3.2) the fol-
lowing shall be provided for occupancy
Sub-division A-1:
a) Every sleeping room above the street
floor shall have access to two separate
means of exits, at least one of which b’
$
shall consist of an enclosed interior
stairway or an exterior stairway, or a
fire escape or horizontal exit all so ar-
ranged as to provide a safe path of
travel “to the outside of the building
without traversing any corridor or
space exposed to an unprotected verti-
cal opening.
9.3.2 For occupancy Subdivision A-2 of more
than two rooms, every occupied room, exclud-
ing areas used solely for storage shali have at
least two means of exit, at least one of which
shall be a door or a stairway providing a means
of unobstructed travel to the outside of the
building or street or grade level and not more
than one of which maybe a window. No room
or space shall be occupied which is accessible
only by a ladder, folding chairs or through a
trap door.
NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOF INDIA

The following further provisions shall be
made:
a) All locking devices which would im-
pedeor prohibit exit, such as chain type
bolts, limited opening sliding type
locks and burglar locks which are not
disengaged easily by quick-releasing
catches, shall be prohibited. All closet
door latches shall be such that even
children may open the doors from in-
side. All bathroom door locks or fas-
teners shall be designed to permit the
opening of the locked or closed door
from the outside in an emergency
without the use of a special key.
9.3.3 For occupancy Subdivision A-3, the fol-
lowing provisions shall apply
a) All dormitories, except those men-
tioned at 9.3.5, shall have exits so ar-
ranged that from any sleeping room or
open dormitory sleeping area, there
shall be access to two separate and dis-
tinct exits in different directions with
no common path of travel unless the
room or space is subject to occupancy
by not more than 10 persons and has a
door opening directly to the outside of
the building at street or grade level, or
to an outside stairway in which case one
means of exit maybe accepted.
9.3.4 For occupancy Subdivision A-4, the fol-
lowing provisions shall apply.
a) Every individual living unit covered by
occupancy Subdivision A-4 shall com-
ply with the requirements for occupan-
cy Subdivision A-2 in respect of exit.
b) Every living unit shall have access to at
least two separate exits which are
remote from each other and are
reached by travel in different direc-
tions, except that a common path of
travel may be permitted for the first
6 m (that is, a dead-end corridor up to
6 m long maybe permitted) provided
that single exit may be permitted under
any of the conditions given under(c).
c) Any building not more than two
storeys in height with no basement, or
in case there is a basement and with
street floor level not more than 2.5 m
above grade at any point next to the
building, excluding driveways, not
more than 10 percent of the perimeter,
PARTIVFIRE PROTECTION
=
shall be subject to the condition that
the access to the basement is only from
the exterior of the building if the base-
ment contains a heating plant, group
storage, incinerator room or paint
shop or other hazardous occupancy.
d) At least half of required exits shall dis-
charge direct to the outside of the
buildings; any other exits shall be the
same as required for hotels.
9.3.5 For occupancy Subdivision A-5, the fol-
lowing provisions shall apply:
a) Not less than two exits, as remote from
each other as practicable, shall be ac-
cessible from every floor, including
basements occupied for hotel pur-
poses, except as a single exit as per-
mitted in (b) below. Exits and ways of
access there to shall be so arranged that
they are accessible in at least two dif-
ferent directions from every point in
any open area, or from any room door.
b) Any room or section with an outside
door at street or grade level may have
such outside door as a single exit,
provided no part of the room or area is
more than 15 m from the door
measured along :!x natural path of
travel.
9.3.5.1 Where stairways or other exits serve
two or more upper floors, the same stairway or
other exit required to serve any one upper
floor may also serve other upper floors, except
that no inside open stairway or ramp may save
as a required egress facility from more than
one floor (see a/so Indian Standard at (26) of
Appendix A)
N~ —Underthisprovision, if the second and third
floors were each required to have three stairways, the
second floor may use the staitways serving Ihc third
floor, so that the total number of staitways required is
three, not six.
9.3.6 BASEMENTEXITS
9.3.6.1 Basements occupied for hotel pur-
poses shall have exits arranged in accordance
with 9.3.5.
9.3.6.2 Basement exits shall be sufficient to
provide for the capacity of the basement as
determined in accordance with 9.1; in no case
shall there be less than two independent base-
ment exits.
9.3.6.3 Basement or sub-basements not open
to the public and used only for heating
Iv.m

equipment, storage and service operations
(other than kitchens which are considered
part of the hotel occupancy) shall have exits
appropriate to the actual occupancy, in ac-
cordance with other applicable provisions of
the Code, or in case of mixed occupancy where
there may be doubt as to which other section
is applicable, such basements shall have exits
determined on the basis of lesser exit capacity.
9.4 Additional Precautions
9.4.1 Flammable ljquids for household pur-
poses shall be kept in tightly stoppered or
sealed containers, For the limits of quantities
of flammable liquids to be allowed in various
occupancies, reference may be made to ap-
propriate regulations.
9.4.2 No stove or combustion heater shall be
located directly under or immediately at the
foot of stairs or otherwise so located as to
block escape in case of malfunctioning of the
stove or heater.
9.4.3 All kitchen exhaust fans, where
provided, shall be fixed to an outside wall or
to a duct of non-combustible material which
leads directly to the outside. The ducts must
not pass through combustible materials.
9.4.4 All wiring shall be done in awrdance
with Part VIII Building services, Section 2
Electrical installations, Indian Standard at (6)
of Appendix A, and National Electric Code.
9.4.5 Where television is installed, all out-
door antennae shall be properly grounded and
protected from lighting (see Part VIII
Building services, Section 2 Electrical in-
stallations).
9.4.6 Doors leading into rooms in which
flammable liquids are stored or used shall be
as in 8.7. Such assembly shall be self-closing
and shall be posted with a sign on each side of
the door in 25 mm high block letters stating
‘FIRE DOOR — lQ3EP CLOSED.
9.4.7 Where a boiler room is provided or a
central heating plant is installed, which uses
solid or liquid fuel, it shall be seprated from
the rest of the building by a separation wall
with all openings protected as in Z 6.
9.4.8 Rooms containing high pressure
boilers, refrigerating machinery, transformers
or other service equipment subject to possible
explosion shall not be located directly under
or adjacent to exits. All such rooms shall be
,’
.!_&
‘
effectively cut off from other parts of the
.’
building and shall be provided with adequate
vents to the outside air,
9.4.9 All rooms or areas of high hazard in
p.- .
additions to those here in before mentioned,
shall be segregated or shall be protected as
may be directed by the enforcing Authority
where, in the opifiion of the enforcing
Authority, fire, explosion or smoke therefrom
is likely to interfere with safe egress from the
I
building.
9.4.10 For detailed information regarding
fire safety requirements for hazardous
petroleum products, reference maybe made to
the Petroleum Act 1934 and the Rules thereof.
10 REQUIREMENTS OF EDUCATIONAL
BUILDINGS (GROUP B)
10.1 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 7 for type of construction and
occupancy group and exit requirements given
in 8, the requirements in 10.2 to 10.4.5 shall be
complied with.
1(?.2 Buildings intended for educational
occupancy shall not be used for any hazardous
occupancy.
10.3 Fire DetectionlErtinguishing System —
The requirements for occupancy sub-divisions
B-1 and B-2 as specified in Table 20 and Ap-
pendix D (for high rise buildings) shall apply.
10.4 Exit Facilities — In addition to the
provisions in 8, the following shall be
provided. ●
10.4.1 Exits, in accordance with 8, shall be so
arranged that at least two separate exits are
available in every floor area. Exits shall be as
remote from each other as practicable and so
arranged that there are no pockets or dead
ends of appreciable size in which occupants
may be trapped.
10.4.2 Eve~ room with a capacity of over 45
persons in area shall have at least two door-
ways.
10.4.3 Exterior doors shall be operated by
bars or some other panic hardware device,
except that doors leading from classrooms
directly to the outside maybe equipped with
the same type, of lock as is used on classroom
doors leading to corridor, with no provision
whatsoever for locking against egress from the
classroom.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODEOF INDIA

10.5 Additional Precautions
10.5.1 Storage of volatile flammable liquids
shall be prohibited and the handling of such
liquids shall be restricted to science
laboratories only.
10.5.2 Each building shall be provided with an
approved outside gas shut-off valve con-
spicuously marked, where applicable. The
detailed requirements regarding safe use of
gas shall be as specified in Part IX Plumbing
services, Section 3 Gas supply.
10.5.3 All exterior openings in a boiler room
or rooms containing central heating equip-
ment, if located below opening in another
storey or if less than 3 m from other doors or
windows of the same building, shall be
protected by a fire assembly as in 7.8. Such
assemblies shall be fixed, automatic or self-
closing. Provisions of 9.4.7 shall also apply to
this group of occupancy.
10.6 Exception and Deviation
10.6.1 Gymnasiums, indoor stadiums and
similar occupancies may have floors/running
tracks of wood, cinder, synthetic or un-
protected steel or iron.
10.6.2 In gymnasiums and in multi-purpose
school rooms having an area not greater than
300 m2, 25-mm nominal tight tongue-and-
grooved or 20-mm plywood wall covering may
be used in the inner side in lieu of fire-resis-
tance plaster.
10.6.3 A building which will have only the
first floor accessible to not more than 20
pupils at any time, may be used for school
purposes with the following exceptions:
a) Exterior walls or parts of walls which
are less than 90 cm from adjacent
property lines shall have no openings
therein,
b) Classrooms may have only one exit not
less than 90 cm wide.
11 REQUIREMENTS OFINSTITUTIONAL
BUILDINGS (GROUP C)
11.1 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 7 for type of construction and
oeeupaney group and the exit requirements
given in 8, the following requirements shall be
complied with.
11.2 Fire Detection/Ektinguzkhing System —
The requirements for oeeupaney sub-divisions
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
.-.—#,
as speeified in Table 20 and Appendix D (for
high rise buildings) shall apply.
11.3 Exit Facilities — In addition to the i
provisions of 8, the following requirements .
shall be complied with.
11.3.1 In buildings or sections occupied by
bed-ridden atients where the floor area is
! -{
over 280 m , facilities shall be provided to
move patients in hospital beds to the other
side of a smoke barrier from any part of such
building or section. not directly served by ap-
proved horizontal exits or exits from the first
floor (floor 2) of a building to the outside.
11.3.2 Not less than two exits of one or more
of the following types shall be provided for
every floor, including basement, of every
building or section:
a) Doors leading directly outside the
building
b) Stairways;
c) Ramps; and
d) Horizontal exits.
11.3.3 All required exits which serve as egress
from hospital or infirmaV sections shall be
not less than 150 cm in clear wi~;h including
patient bedroom doors to permit transporta-
tion of patients on beds, litters, or mattresses.
The minimum width of corridors serving
patients bedrooms in buildings shall be 240
cm. For detailed information on recommen-
dations for buildings and facilities for the
physically handicapped, referenee may be
made to Indian Standards given at (15) of
Appendix A.
11.3.4 Elevators constitute a desirable sup-
plementary facility, but are not counted as
required exits.
11.3.5 Any area exceeding 500 m2 shall be
divided into compartments by fire resistance
walls and the Authority may require storeys
housing a lesser number of patients to be
divided into compartments when, in its judg-
ment, such division is essential to the protec-
tion of the patients.
11.3.6 Doors in fire resistance walls shall be
so installed that these may normally be kept in
open position, but will close automatically or
may be released manually to self-closing ac-
tion. Corridor door openings in smoke bar-
riers shall be not less than 150 em in width.
Provision shall also be made, for double swing
single/double leaf type door.
w-e
11.3.7 Exits and other features for penal and
mental Institutions, and custodial institutions
shall be the same as specified for hospitals, in
so far as applicable. Reliable means shall be
provided to permit the prompt release of in-
mates from any locked section in case of fire
or other emergency.
11.3.8 Wherever any inmates are confined in
any locked rooms or spaces, adequate guards
or other personnel shall be continuously on
duty or immediately available to provide for
release of inmates or for such other action as
may be indicated in case of fire or other emer-
gency.
11.3.9 No building constructed in whole or in
part of combustible materials shall be used to
combine inmates in cells or sleeping quarters,
unless automatic sprinkler protection is
provided.
11.3.10 All buildings or sections of buildings
in penal and mental institutions used for
manufacturing, storage or office purposes
shall have exits in accordance with the
provisions of the ~de for those occupancies,
11.4 Aaliitional Precautions
11.4.1 No combustible material of any kind
shall be stored or used in any building or sec-
tion thereof used for institutional occupancy,
except as necessary to normal occupancy and
use of the building.
11.4.2 Bare minimum flammable quantities
may be allowed to be stored and handled such
as chloroform, ethyl alcohol, spirit, etc. The
handling of such liquids shall not be permitted
by unauthorized persons. Bulk storage of
these items, will be governed by other rules
and safe practices.
11.5 Exception and Deviation, — It is recog-
nized that in institutions or part of buildings
housing various types of psychiatric patients,
or used as penal and mental institutions, it is
necessaty to maintain locked doors and barred
windows_; and to such extent the necessary
provision in other sections of the tide requir-
ing the keeping of exits unlocked may be
waived. It is also recognized that cert,ain types
of psychiatric patients are not capable of seek-
ing safety without adequate guidance. In
buildings where this situation prevails, reli-
able means for the rapid release of occupants
shall be provided, such as remote control of
Iv-so
locks, or by keying all loch to keys commonly
used by attendants.
12 REQUIREMENTS OF ASSEMBLY
BUILDINGS (GROUP D)
12.1 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 7 for type of construction and
occupancy group and the exit requirements
given in 8, the requirements in 12.2 to 12.7.4
shall be complied with.
12.2 Mired occupanq — Places of assembly in
buildings of other occupancy, such as
ballrooms in hotels, restaurants in stores and
assembly rooms in schools, shall be so located
separated or protected as to avoid any undue
danger to the occupants of the place of as-
sembly from a fire originating in the other
occupancy or smoke therefrom.
12.3 Fire Detection/Extinguishing System —
The requirements for occ{pancy ~ub-divisions
D-1 to D-5 as specified in Table 20 and Appen-
dix D (for high rise buildings) shall apply.
NOTE — Thecanteensshallnot be providedin base-
ments, if provided in the upper floors, it shall be.
sprintdered.
12.4 Erit Facilities
12,4.1 Every place of assembly, every tier or
balcony, and every individual room used as a
place of assembly shall have exits sufficient to
provide for the total capacity thereof as deter-
mined in accordance with 8. Door width for
assembly buildings shall not be less than 200
cm.
.
12.4.1.1 Every place of assembly of sub-
dkision D-1 shall have at least four separate
exits as remote from each other as practicable.
12.4.1.2 Every place of assembly of Sub-
division D-2 shall have at least two separate
exits as remote from each other as practicable
and if of capacity over 600 at least three exits
shall be provided with each exit not less than
of 200 cm width.
12.4.2 Clear aisles not less than 1.2 m in width
shall be formed at right angles to the line of
seating in such number and manner that no
seat shall be more than seven seats away from
an, aisle. Rows of seats opening on to an aisle
atone end only shall have not more than seven
seats. Under the conditions, where all these
aisles do not directly meet the exit doors,
cross-aisles shall be provided parallel to the
NATIONALBUILDING CODE OF INDIA
line of seating so as to provide direct access to
the exit, provided that not more than one cross
aisle for every 10 rows shall be required. The
width of cross-aisles shall be minimum of 1 m.
Steps shall not be placed in aisles to overcome
differences in levels, unless the gradient ex-
ceeds 1 in 10.
12.4.3 The fascia of boxes, balconies and gal-
leries shall have substantial railings not less
than 65 cm high above the floor. The railings
at the end of aisles extending to the fascia shall
be not less than 75 cm high for the width of the
aisle or 90 cm high at the foot of steps.
12.4.4 Cross-aisles except where the backs of
seats on the front of the aisle project 60 cm or
more above the floor of the aisle, shall be
provided with railings not less than 90cmhigh.
12.4.5 No turnstiles or other devices to
restrict the movement of persons shall be in-
stalled in anyplace of assembly in such a man-
ner as to interfere in anyway with the required
exit facilities.
22.4.6 In theatres and similar places of public
assembly where persons are admitted to the
building at a time when seats are not available
for them and are allowed to wait in a lobby or
similar space until seats are available, such use
of lobby or similar space shall not encroach
upon the required clear width of exits. Such
waiting shall be restricted to areas separated
from the required exitways by substantial per-
manent partitions or fixed rigid railing not less
than 105 cm high. Exits shall be provided for
- such waiting spaces on the basis of one person
for each 0.3 m2 of waiting space area. Such
exits shall be in addition to the exits specified
for the main auditorium area and shall con-
form in construction and arrangement to the
general rules of exits given above.’
12.4.7 No display or exhibit ,s~all be so in-
stalled or operated as to interfere in any way
with access to any required exit, or with any
required exit sign.
All displays or exhibits of combustible
material or construction and all booths and
temporary construction in connection there-
with shall be so limited in combustibility or
protected as to avoid any undue hazard of fire
which might endanger occupants before they
have opportunity to use the available exits, as
determined by the authority.
12.4.8 Places of assembly in buildings of other
occupanq may use exits uommon to the place
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
of assembly and the other occupancy, provided
the assembly area and the other occupancy are
considered separately, and each has exits suf-
ficient to meet the requirements of the Code.
12.4.9 Exits shall be sufficient for simul-
taneous occupancy of both the places of as-
sembly and other parts of the building, unless
the Authority determines that the conditions
are such that simultaneous occupancy will not
occur.
12.4.10, For any place of assembly under Sub-
division D-1, at least half the required means
of exits shall lead directly outdoors or through
exhvays completely separated from exits serv-
ing other parts of the building.
12.4.21 For detailed information regarding
cinema buildings, reference may be made to
Indian Standards given at (16) of Appendix A.
12.5 Lighting — No open flame lighting
devices shall be used in any place of assembly,
except in the following cases:
a) Where necessary for ceremonial pur-
poses, the enforcilig .Authority may
permit open flame lighting under such
restrictions as are necewary to avoid
danger of ignition of combustible
materials or injury to occupants.
b) Candles may be used on restaurant
tables if securely supported on nonc-
ombustible bases and so located as to
avoid danger of ignition bf combustible
materials.
c) Open flame devices may bq used on
stages where they are a necessa~’part
of theatrical performance, provided
adequate precautions, satisfactory to
the Authority are taken to prevent
ignition of combustible materials.
12.6 Additional Precautwns
12.6.1 The decorations of places of assembly
shall be of nonflammable materials. Fabrics
and papers used for such purpose shall be
treated with an effective flame-retardant
material. Stage settings made of combustible
materials shall likewise be treated with fire
retardant materials of Class 1 flame spread.
12.6.2 Seats in places of public assembly, ac-
commodating more than 300 persons, shall be
securely fastened to the floor, except as per-
mitted in 12.6.3. All seats in balconies and
galleries shall be securely fastened to the floor,
except that in nailed-in enclosures, boxes with
Iv.sl
lCVC1floors and having not more than 14 seats,
the seats need not be fastened.
12.6.3 Chairs not secured to the floor maybe
permitted in restaurants, nightclubs and other
occupancies where the fastening of seats to the
floor may be impracticable, provided that in
the area used for seating, excluding dance
floor, stage, etc, there shall be not more than
one seat for each 1.4 m2 of floor area and
adequate aisles to reach exits shall be main-
tained at all times.
12.6.3.1 Rows of seats between aisles shall
have not more than 14 seats.
12.6.3.2 Rows of seats opening on to an aisle
at one end only shall have not more than 7
seats.
12.6.3.3 Seats without dividing arms shall
have their capacity determined by allowing 45
cm per person.
22.6.4 The spacing of rows of seats from back
to back shall be neither less than 85 cm nor less
than 70 cm plus the sum of the thickness of the
back and inclination of the back. There shall
be a space of not less than 35 cm between the
hack of one seat and the front of the seat
immediately behind it as measured between
plumb lines.
12.6.5 Rooms containing high pressure
boilers, refrigerating machinery of other than
domestic refrigerator type, large transformers
or other service equipment subject to possible
explosion shall not be located directly under
or adjacent to the required exits. All such
rooms shall be effectively cut off from other
parts of the building and provided with ade-
quate vents to the outer air.
12.6.6 All rooms or areas used for storage of
any combustible materials or equipment, or
for painting, refinishing, repair or similar pur-
poses shall be effectively cutoff from assembly,
areas or protected with a standard system of
automatic sprinklers. They shall be located
away from staircases.
12.6.7 Every stage equipped with fly galleries,
grid irons and rigging for movable theatre-
type scenery, shall have a system of automatic
sprinklers over and under such stage areas or
spaces and auxilia~ spaces, such as dressing
rooms, store rooms and workshops, and the
proscenium opening shall be provided with a
fire-resisting curtain, capable of withstanding
a lateral pressure of 4 kn/m2”over the entire
area. The curtain shall have an emergency
closing device capable of causing the curtain
to close without the use of power and wlrkxtso
closed, it shall be reasonably tiglp against the
passage of smoke.
12.6.8 The stage roof of every theatre using
movable scenery or having a motion picture
screen of highly combustible construction
shall have a ventilator or ventilators in or
above it, openable from the stage floor by
hand and also opening by fusible links or some
other approved automatic heat/smoke ac-
tuated device, to give a free opening equal to
at least one-eighth the area of the floor of the
stage.
12.6.9 The proscenium wall of every theatre
using movable scenery of decorations shall
have, exclusive of the proscenium opening,
not more than two openin ~ entering the
stage, each not to exceed 2 m and fitted with
self-closing fire resistant doors.
12.6.10 Every place of assembly in which
projection of motion pictures by light is made
shall have the projection apparatus enclosed
in a fire-resisting fixed booth according to In-
dian Standard given at [IV (16)], except that
such booth shall not be required where no
nitrocellulose motion picture film is used.
12.6.11 Automatic smoke vents actuated by-
smoke detectors shall be installed above the
auditorium or theatres, including motion pic-
ture houses, with vent area equal to not less
than ~ percent of the floor area of the
auditorium, including the sum of the floor
areas of all balconies, galleries, boxes and
tiers. It may be desirable to provide a large
number of small vents rather than a small
number of large vents.
12.7 Exception and Deviation
12.7.1 Where boilers or central heating
plants using liquid or solid fuel are located at
grade level, these may be separated from the
remainder of the building by a separating wall
with openings protected.
12.72 Gymnasiums, indoor stadiums and
similar occupancies may have floors/mnning
tracks of wood, cinder, synthetic or un-
protected steel or iron.
12.7.3 The underside of continuous steel deck
grand stands when erected outdoors need not
be fire-protected when occupied for public
toilets.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
12.7.4 A fire-resistive ceiling is not rcquitxxl
in a onc-storcy building having an open-frame
roof.
13 REQUIREMENTS OF BUSINESS
BUILDINGS (GROUP E)
13.1 In addition to the general requirements
spccificd in 7 for type of construction and
1.?.2.1 OCCXJPM-CYSUBDIVISIONE-1 (EXCEPT Ormc~ BUILDINGS)
occupanq group and the exit requirements
given in 8, the requirements in 23.2 to 13.5.1
shall be complied with.
13.2 Fire DetectionlErtinguishing System
The requirements specified in 13.2.1 to 13.2.3,
Table 20 and Appendix D (for high rise bUild-
ings) shall apply.
-{

Details of Occupancy Fire Detection/EWinguishing System

E-1 (Except Office Buildings) Automatic fire alarm system [refer (19)
of Appendix A and Table 20]

1.?.2.2 OCXXJPANCY
SUBDIVISIONE-2

Details of Occupancy Fire Detection/ fitinguishing $wtem

a) Laboratory with delicate instru- Fixed automatic C02 fire extinguishing
ments system or automatic fire alarm system
[refer (19) of Appendix A and Table 20]
b) Solvent storage and/or flammable Automatic foam installation or automatic
liquid C02 fire extinguishing system

13.2.3 OCCUPANCYSUBDIVISIONE-3

Details of Occupancy Fire Detection/Extinguishing System

a) Area of computer installations Automatic fire alarm system [refer (19) of
Appendix A and Table 20] Halon or any
other suitable fire extinguishing installa-
tion
b) Space under false ceiling (floor) Automatic fire alarm system [refer (19) of
Appendix A and Table 20]
c) Space above false ceiling and Automatic fire alarm system [refer (19) of
below false floor Appendix A and Table 20]
d) Electrical switch board Automatic fire alarm system [refer (19) of
Appendix A and Table 20] C02 fire ex-
tinguishing installation

13.2.4 OCCUPANCYSUBDIVISIONE-4

Details of Occupancy Fire DetectionlExtinguishing @stem

a) Telephone exchanges Halon system and/or automatic sprinkler
system as per requirement (see also
Table 20)
13.2.5 OCCUPANCYSUBDIVISIONE-5

Details of Occupancy Fire DetectionliWinguishing System

a) Broadcasting stations Automatic fire alarm system based on
smoke detectors and sprinkler system
(see also Table 20)

PART IV FIRE PROTECTION IV-53

‘“23.3 Exit Facilities -—-In addition to the
provisions of 8, the requirements given
under 13.3.1 and 13.3.2 shall be complied with.
13.3.1 In the case of mezzanines or balconies
open to the floor below, or other unprotected
vertical openings between floors, the popula-
tion of the mezzanine or other subsidiary floor
for level shall be added to that of the main
floor the purpose of determining the required
exits, provided, however, that in no case shall
the total number of exit units be less than that
required if all vertical openings were enclosed.’
.
23.3.2 Not less than two exits shall be
provided for every floor, including basements
occupied for office purposes or uses incidental
thereto.
13.4 Additional Requirements
1.?.4.1 The handling and use of gasoline, fuel
oil and other flammable liquids shall not be
permitted, unless such use and handling com-
plies with the appropriate regulations.
13.4.2 Every boiler room or room containing
a central heating plant using solid or liquid
fuel shall be separated from the rest of the
building by a s~parating wall. Every boiler
room or room containing a central heating
plant which burns gas as a fuel shall be
adequately separated from the rest of the
building.
13.5 Elception and Deviation
13.5.1 Basements used only for storage, heat-
ing, any other service equipment, and not for
office occupancy, shall conform to exit re-
quirements for Group H occupancies in all
respects.
14 REQUIREMENTS OF MERCANTILE
BUILDINGS (GROUP F)
14.2 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 7 for types of construction and
occupancy group and the exit requirements
given in 8, the additional requirements in 14.2
to 14.5 shall be complied with.
14.1.1 MIXED OCCUPANCY— No dwelling
unit shall have its sole means of exit through
any mercantile occupancy in the same building
except in the case of a single family unit where
the family operates the store.
14.2 Fire Detection/Extinguishing System —
The requirements for occupancy sub-divisions
IT/.54
F-1 to F:3 as spccificd in Table 20 and Appen-
dix D (for high rise buildings) shall apply.
14.3 Erit Facilities — In addition tb the
provisions of 8, the following requirements
shall be complied with.
14.3.1 In the case of mezzanines or balconies
open to the floor below, or other unprotected
vertical openings between floors, the popula-
tion or area of the mezzanine or other sub-
sidiary floor level shall be added to that of the
main floor for the purpose of determining the
required exits, provided, however, that in no
case shall the total number of exit units be less
than that required if all vertical openings were
enclosed.
14.3.2 At least two separate exits shall be ac-
cessible from every part of eve~ floor, inclttd-
ing basements; such exits shall be as remote
from each other as practicable and so arranged
as to be reached by different paths of travel in
different directions, except that a common
path of travel may be permitted for the first
15 m from any point.
14.4 Additional Precautions
. 14.4.1 Requirements sDecified in 13.4.1 shall
be applicable to all Gro~p F occupancies also,
14.4.2 Hazardous areas of mercantile oc-
cupancies shall be segregated or protected.
14.4.3 In self-service stores, no check-out
stand or associated railings or barriers shall
obstruct exits or required aisles or approaches
thereto.
14.4.4 Open-air mercantile operations, such
as open-air markets, gasoline filling stations,
roadside stands for the sale of a farm produce
and other outdoor mercantile operations shall
be so arranged and conducted as to maintain
free and unobstructed ways of travel at all
times to permit prompt escape from any point
of danger in case of fire or other emergency,
but no dead-ends in which persons might be
trapped due to display stands, adjoining build-
ings, fences, vehicles or other obstructions.
14.4.5 If mercantile operations are conducted
in roofed-over areas, these shall be treated as
mercantile buildings, provided canopies over
individual small stands to protect merchan-
disc from the weather shall not be constructed
to constitute buildings for the purpose of the
Code.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

14.5 Exception and Deviation — Any mercan-
tile oeeupaney, where goods of a highly haz-
ardous nature are predominant, shall be
emsidered under Group J occupancy for the
purpose of the Code.
25 REQUIREMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL
BUILDINGS (GROUP G)
25.1 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 7 for type of construction arid
oeeupaney group and the exit requirements
given in 8, the requirements in 15.2 to 15.5
shall be compli$xl with.
15.2 Fire Detection/&tinguishing System —
The requirements for oeeupaney sub-divisions
G-1 to G-3 as specified in Table 20 and Ap-
pendix D (for high buildings) shall apply.
25.3 Exit Facilities — In addition to the
provision of 8, the following requirements
shall also be complied with.
15.3.1 Not less than two exits shall be
provided for every floor or section, including
basements used for industrial purposes or uses
incidental thereto.
,,
25.3.2 In buildings used for aircraft assembly
or other oecupaney requiring undivided floor
areas so large that the distances from points
within the area to the nearest outside walls
where exit doors could be provided are in ex-
eess of 45 m, requirements for distance to exits
may be satisfied by providing stairs leading to
exit tunnels or to overhead passageways.. In
eases where such arrangements are not .prac-
tieable, the Authority may, by special ruling,
permit other exit arrangements for one storey
buildings with distances in exeess of the maxi-
mum distances specified in 8, if completely
automatic sprinkler protection is provided
and if the heights of ceiling curtain boards and
roof ventilation are such as to minimize the
possibility that ernployeeswillbe overtaken by
the spread of ~re or smoke within 180 cm of
the floor level before they have time to reach
exits, provided, however, that in no ease may
the distance of travel to reach the nearest exit
exeeed 45 m where smoke venting is required
as a condition for permitting distances of
travel to exits in excess of the maximum other-
wise allowed.
15.3.3 ADDITIONALPRECAUTIONS
15.3.3.1 In any room in which volatile flam-
mable substances are used or stored,”no deviee
PmT IVFIREPROTECTION
f,
. -.——
.*
generating aglow or flame capable of ighitirq-
flammable vapour shall be installed or used.
Such a room shall be provided with a suitably
designed exhaust ventilation system (see
Appendix E). To ensure safety from fire due
to short circuit, faulty electrical connection
or some similar cause, proper care shall be
taken in designing electrical installations in
such room (see Part VIII Building serviees,
Section 2 Electrical installations).
15.3.3.2 The storage, use ‘and handling of
gasoline, fuel oil and other flammable liquids
shall not be permitted in any Group G oc-
cupancy unless it complies with regulations
pertaining to Petroleum Act 1934 and Rules
thereunder.
15.3.3.3 Every boiler room or room below the
first floor containing heating plant shall be
adequately separated from the rest of the
buildings.
15.3.3.4 For requirements regarding electri-
cal generating and distribution stations, refer-
,enee maybe made to Indian Standard given at
(12) of Appendix A.
25.3.4 EXCEPTIONANDDEVIATION
15.3.4.1 Basements used only for storage,
heating and other servick equipment, and not
subject to industrial oeeupaney, shall have
exits in aeeordanee with the requirements of
Group H occupancies.
15.3.4.2 The following exceptions shall apply
to special purpose industrial occupancies:
a) Exits need be provided only for the
persons actually employed; spaces not
subject to human oeeupaneybeeause of
the prewmee bf m“achine~ or equip-
ment may be exeluded from eonsidera-
~ion+
b) Where unprotected vertieal openings
are neeessary to manufacturing opera-
tions, these may be permitted beyond
the limits specified for industrial oc-
cupancy, provided eve~ floor level has
direet access to one or more enclosed
stairways or other exits protected
against obstruction by any fire in the
open areas connected by the un-
protected vertical openings or smoke
therefrom.
Iv.ss

c) Industrial buildings of low and
moderate hazard are permitted only up
to 18 m height.
15.3.4.3 The following exceptions shall apply
to high hazard industrial occupancies:
a) Exits shall be so located that it will not
be necessary to travel more than 22.5 m
from any p~int to reach the nearest
exit.
b) From every point in every floor area,
there shall be at least two exits acces-
sible in different directions; where
floor areas are divided into rooms,
there shall be at least two ways of es-
cape from every room, however small,
except toilet rooms, so located that the
points of access thereto are out of or
suitably shielded from areas of high
hazard.
c) In addition to types of exits for upper
floors specified for Group G occupan-
cies, slide escapes may be used as re-
quired exits for both new and existing
buildings.
d) All high hazard industrial occupancies
shall have automatic sprinkler protec-
tion or such other protection as maybe
appropriate to the particular hazard,
including explosion, venting for any
area subject to explosion hazard,
designed to minimize danger to oc-
cupants in case of fire or other emer-
gency before they have time to utilize
exits to escape.
e) Industrial buildings of high hazard are
permitted only up to 15 m height.
15.4 For detailed information on fire safety of
certain individual (specific) industrial oc-
cupancies reference may be made to Indian
Standard given at <.17)of Appendix A.
15.5 Fire protection considerations for vent-
ing industrial occupancies shall be as in Ap-
pendix E.
16 llEQUIREMENTS OF STORAGE
BUILDINGS (GROUP H)
16.2 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 7 for type of construction and
occupancy group and the exit requirements
given in 8, the requirements in 16.2 to 16.5
shall be complied with.
IV-56
,’”
, ,A,-
16.2 Fire DetectionlExtinguishing System —
The requirements for occupancy, Group H, as
specified in Table 20 and Appendix D (for high
rise buildings) shall apply.
NOTE— Automatic sprinklers are prohibited where
water reactive materials are kept. Instead, automatic
tire alarm system coupled with suitable fire extinguish-
ing system shall be provided.
16.3 Exit Facilities — In addition to the
provisions of 8, the following requirements
shall also be complied with.
16.3.1 Every building or structure used for
storage and every section thereof considered
separately, shall have access to at least one exit
so arranged and located as to provide a
suitable means of escape for any person
employed therein and in any room or space
exceeding 1400 m2 gross area, or where more
than 10 persons maybe normally present, at
least two separate means of exit shall be avail-
able, as remote from each other as practicable.
16.3.2 Every storage area shall have access to
at least two means of exit, which can be readily
opened. This shall not be subject to locking so
long as any persons are inside and shall not
depend on power operation.
16.3.3 The following special provisions shall
apply to parking garages of closed or open
type, above or below ground, but not to
mechanical parking facilities where
automobiles are moved into and out of storage
mechanically which are not normally occupied
by persons and thus require no exit facilities.
Where repair operations are conducted, the
.
exits shall comply with the requirements of
Group G occupancies in addition to com-
pliance with the following
a) Where both parking and repair opera-
tions are conducted in the same build-
ing, the entire building shall comply
with the requirements for Group G
occupancies, unless the parking and
repair sections are effectively
separated by separation walls.
b) Every floor of every closed parking
garage shall have access to at least two
separate means of exit, so arranged
that from any point in the garage the
paths of travel to the hvo means of exit
shall be in different directions, except
that a common path of travel may be
permitted for the first 15 m from any
point.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

c) On the street floor, at least two
separate exit doors shall be provided,
except that any opening for the passage
of automobiles may serve as a means of
exit, provided no door or shutter is
installed thereon. Street floor exits in
closed garages shall be so arranged that
no point in the area is more than 30 m
from the nearest exit, or 45 m in the
case of garages protected by automatic
sprinklers, distance being measured
along the natural path of travel.
d) On floors above the street, at least two
means of exit shall be provided, one of
which shall be an enclosed stairway.
The other means of egress may be a
second exit of any of the types, or in a
ramp type garage with open ramps not
subject to closure, the ramp may serve
as the second means of exit.
e) Upper floor exits in closed garages
shall be so arranged that no point in the
area shall be more than 30 m from the
nearest exit other than a ramp on the
same floor level or 45 m in the case of
garages protected by automatic
sprinklers.
f) On floors below the street (either base-
ment or outside underground garages)
at least two exits shall be provided, not
counting any automobile ramps, ex-
cept that for garages extending only
one floor level below the street, a ramp
leading direct to the outside may con-
stitute one required means of exit. In
garages below street level, exits shall be
so arranged that no part of the area
shall be more than 30 m from the
nearest stair exit.
If any gasoline pumps are located
g)
within any closed parking garage, exits
shall be so located that travel away
from the gasoline pump in any direc-
tion shall lead to an exit, dth no dead-
end in which occupants might be
trapped by fire or explosion at any
gasoline pump. Such exit shall lead to
the outside on the building on the same
level, or downstairs; no upward travel
shall be permitted unless direct outside
exits are available from that floor and
any floor below (as in the case of a
‘basement garage where the grade is
one storey or more lower at the rear
than at the street).
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
.
16.3.4 Exits from aircraft hangars (storage or
servicing areas) shall be provided at intervals
of not more than 45 m on aIl exterior walls of
aircraft hangars. There shall be a minimum of
two exits serving each aircraft storage or ser-
vicing area. Horizontal exits through interior
fire walls shall be provided at intervals of not
more than 30 m. ‘Dwarf or ‘smash’ doors ac-
commodating aircraft may be used to comply
with these requirements. All doors designated
as exits shall be kept unlocked in the direction
of exit travel while the area is occupied.
26.3.5 Exits from mezzanine floors in aircraft
storage or servicing areas shall be so arranged
that the maximum travel to reach the nearest
exits from any point on the mezzanine shall
not exceed 22.5 m. Such exits shall lead directly
to a properly enclosed stairwell discharging
directly to the exterior or to a suitably cut-off
area or to outside fire escape stairs.
16.3.6 The following special provisions shall
apply to grain elevators:
a) There shall beat least one stair tower
from basement to fhi floor and from
the first floor” to the top floor of
workhouse enclosed in a dust-tight
non-combustible shaft.
b) Non-combustible doors of sqlf-closing
type shall be provided at each floor
landing.
c) An exterior fire escape of the stair-or
basket ladder type shall be provided
from the roof of the workhouse to
ground level or to the roof of an adjoin-
ing annexe with access from all floors
above the first.
d) An exterior fire escape of either the
stair or basket ladder type shall be
provided from the roof of each storage
annexe to ground level.
16.4 Additiona!lkcautions — Requirements
specified in 15.3.3 to 15.3.3.4 shall apply to
Group H occupancies also.
16.5 Exception and Deviation — Every area
used for the storage of hazardous com-
modities shall have an exit within 22.5 m of any
point in the area where persons may be
present or 35 m where automatic sprinkler
protection is provided.
17 REQUIREMENTS OF BUILDINGS
FOR HAZARDOUS USES (GROUP J)
17.1 In addition to the general requirements
specified in 7 for type of construction and
~-57
occupancy group and the exit requirements
given in 8, the requirements in 17.2 to 17.4
shall be complied with.
1Z 2 Fire Detection/Extinguishing System —
The requirements for occupancy group J as
specified in Tabie 20 and Appendix B (for high
rise buildings) shall apply.
NOTE—Hazardousbuildingsshallhavecombustible,
vapourdetectots/explosion suppressionsystems/auto-
matic sprinklers,tildes hydrantsystem,wet risers
andautomaticfirealarmsystemdependingon the type
of fire hazard involved.
173 Exit Facilities — Requirements specified
in 8 and 15.3.4.3 shall apply to Group J
occupancies also.
17.4 Additional Precautions — The following
requirements shall apply to all Group J
occupancies, as applicable:
a) Each building where gas is employed
for any purpose shall be provided with
an approved outside gas shut-off valve
conspicuously marked. The detailed
requirements regarding safe use of gas
shall be as specified in Part IX Plumb-
ing services, Section 3 Gas supply.
b) Each boiler room or room containing
a heating plant shall be separated from
the rest of the building by a separating
wall.
c) In any room in which volatile flam-
mable substances are used or stored, no
device generating a spark, or glow
flame capable of igniting gasoline
vapour shall be installed or permitted
unless it is enclosed in a flameproof
enclosure.
d) The use, handling, storage and sale of
gasoline, fuel oil and other flammable
liquids shall not be permitted in Group
J occupancies unless such use, han-
dling, storage and sale is in accordance
with appropriate legislation in force.
e) All openings in exterior walls except
wall vents shall be protected by a fire
stop assembly as in %6and they shall be
fixed, automatic or self-closing. Wall
vents having an area of not less than
100 cmz each shall be placed in the
exterior walls near the floor line, not
more than 180 cm apart horizontally.
Each building shall be provided with a
power driven fan exhaust system of
ventilation which shall be arranged and
operated so as to produce a complete
change of air in each room every 3 min.
f) Each machine in dry-cleaning estab-
lishments which uses flammable liquid
shall have an adequate steam line or
any other suitable extinguishing agent
directly connected to it, so arranged as
to have the agent automatically
released to the inside of each machine
should an explosion occur in the
machine.
g) Equipment or machinery which
generates or emits combustible or ex-
plosive dust or fibres shall be providii%l .
with an adequate dust collecting and
exhaust system, unless the building or
portion thereof housing such
machinefy is provided with an auto- .
matic fire extinguishing system.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 APPENDIX
(Clause 2)
LIST OF REFERRED
In the following list the number appearing in
the first column within parentheses indicates
the number of the reference in this part:
(1) IS 3808:1979 Method of test for non-
combustibility of building materials
(first revision) (Reaffirmed February
1996)
(2) IS 8757: 1978 Glossa~ of terms as-
sociated with fire safety (Reaffirmed
February 1996)
IS 7673:1975 Glossary of terms for fire
fighting equipment (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
(3) IS 3809:1979 Fire resistance test of
structure (&st revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1992)
IS 1641:1988 Code of practice for fire
safety of buildings (general): General
principles of fire grading and classifica-
tion (first revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1993)
(4) IS 1642:1989 Code of practice for fire
safety of buildings (general): Details of
construction (first revision) (Reaf-
firmed August 1994)
IS 1643:1988 Code of practice for fire
safety of buildings (general): Exposure
hazard (first revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1993)
IS 1644:1988 Code of practice for fire
safety of buildings (general) : Exit re-
quirements and personal hazard (first
revision) (Reaffirmed Februa~ 1993)
(5) IS 3614 (Part 1): 1966 Specification for
fire check doors : Part 1 plate, metal
covered and rolling type (Reaffirmed
December 1990)
(6) IS 1646:1982 Code of practice for fire
safety of buildings (general): Electrical
installations (/lrst revision) (Reaf-
firmed December 1990)
IS 2309 : 1989 Code of practice for
protection of building and allied struc-
tures against lighting (second revision)
(7) IS 2175: 1988 Specification for heat
sensitive fire detectors for use in auto-
matic fire alarm system (second
revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
PARTtv FIREPROTECIION
A
INDIAN STANDARDS
IS 884:1985 Specification for first-aid
hose reel for fire fighting (@t revision)
(Reaffirmed November 1995, Amend-
ment No. 1)
IS 901 : 1988 Specification for cou-
plings, double male and double female
instantaneous pattern for fire fighting
(third revision) (Reaffirmed April
1993)
IS 902:1992 Specification for suction
hose couplings for fire fighting pur-
poses (third revziion)
IS 903:1993 Specification for fire hose
delivery couplings, branch pipe, noz-
zles and nozzle spanner (@urfh
revision)
IS 904:1983 Specification for two-way
and three-way suction twlkcting heads
for fire fighting purposes (second
revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995,
Amendment No. 1)
IS 905:1980 Specification for aelivery
breechings, dividing and collecting, in-
stantaneous pattern for fire fighting
purposes (second revision) (Reaf-
firmed February 1992)
IS 906:1988 Specification for revolv-
ing branch pipe for fire fighting (third
revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995) .
(8) IS 2189: 1988 Code of practice for
selection, installation and main-
tenance of automatic fire detection and
alarm system (second revision)
(Amendment No. 1)
(9) IS 2190 : 1992 Code of practice for
selection, installation and. main-
tenance of portable first-aid fire extin-
guishers (third revision)
(10) IS 636:1988 Non-percolating flexible
fire fighting delivexyhose (third revirion)
IS 933:1989 Specification for portable
fire extinguisher chemical foam (third
revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995,
Amendment No. 1)
IS 934:1989 Specification for portable
fire extinguisher, water type (soda
acid) fourth revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
IV-S9
IS 937:1981 Specification for washers
for water fittings for fire fighting pur-
poses (second revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1992, Amendment No. 1)
IS 939:1977 Specification for snatch
block for use with fibre rope for fire
brigade use (@t revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1992)
IS 940:1989 Specification for portable
fire extinguisher, water type (gas
cartridge) (third revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
IS 941:1985 Specification for blowers
and exhauster for fire fighting (second
rewkion) (Reaffirmed November 1995,
Anendment No. 2)
1S942:1982 Functional requirements
for 275-l/rein portable pump set for fire
fighting (secon$ revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
IS 907:1984 Specification for suction
strainers, cylindrical type for fire fight-
ing purpose (second revision) (Reaf-
firmed November 1995)
IS 908 : 1975 Specification for fire
hydrant, stand post type (second
revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995,
Amendment No. 1)
IS 909:1992 Specification for under-
ground fire hydrant : Sluice valve type
(third revision)
IS 910: 1980 Specification for com-
bined key for hydrant, hydrant cover
and lower vaive (second revision)
(Reaffirmed’ February 1992, Amend-
ment No. 1)
IS 926 : 1985 Specification for
fireman’s axe (second revision) (Reaf-
firmed November 1995)
IS 927 : 1981 Specification for fire
hooks (second revision) (Reaffirmed
Februaty 1992, Amendment No. 1)
IS 928:1984 Specification for fire bells
(second revision) (Reaffirmed Novem-
ber 1995)
IS 930:1977 Specification for wooden
extension ladders for fire brigade use
(@t revision) (Reaffirmed February
1992, Amendment No. 1)
IS 931:1973 Specification for wheeled
fire escape (first revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1992)
IS 943:1979 Functional requirement
for 680-1/min trailer pump for fire
brigade use (secondrevirion) (Reaffirmed
February 1992,Amendment No. 2)
IS 944:1979 Functional requirement
for 1800-1/min trailer pump for fire
brigade use (second revision) (Reaf-
firmed February 1992, Amendment
No. 1)
IS 946:1977 Functional requirement
for. motor fire engine @st revision)
(Reaffirmed February 1992)
IS 947:1985 Functional requirement
for towing tender for trailer fire pump
for fire brigade use (first revision)
(Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 948:1983 Functional requirement
for water tender, Type A, for fire
brigade use (second revision) (Reaf-
firmed November 1995, Amendment
No.1)
IS 949:1985 Functional requirement
for emergency (rescue) tender for fire
bridge use (second revision) (Reaf-
firmed November 1995)
IS 950:1980 Functional requirements
forwater tender, me B for fire brigade
use (second revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1992, Amendment No. 2)
IS 952:1986 Specification for foghnoz-
zle for fire brigade use (fiixt revision)
(Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 954:1989 Functional requirements
for carbon-dioxide tender for fire
brigade use (second revision) (Reaf-
firmed November 1995)
IS 955:1980 Functional requirements
for dry power tender for fire-brigade
use (150 kg capacity) @st revtiion)
(Reaffirmed February 1992, Amend-
ment No. 1)
IS 957: 1%7 Specification for control
van for fire brigade (Reaffirmed
November 1995, Amendment No. 3)
IS 1941 (Part 1) :1976 Functional re-
quirements for electric motor sirens :
Part 1AC3 phase 50 Hz. 415 Volts type
(second revision) (Reaffirmed
Februaxy 1992)
IS 2097:1983 Specification for foam
making branch pipe (first revision)
(Reaffirmed November 1995)
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 IS 2171 :1985 Spccifieation for porl-
ablc fire extinguishers, dry powder
(carwi(lge type) (third revision) (Rcaf-
firmcxt November 1995, Amendment
No. 2) ‘ powder for fighting fires in burning
IS 2175: 1988 Specification for heat
sensitive fire detectors for use in auto-
matic detectors for usc in automatic
fire alarm systcm (second revision)
(Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 2298:1977 Spccifieation for single-
barrcl stirrup pump for fire fighting
purposes (second revision) (Reaf-
firmed February 1992)
1S 2546: 1974 specification for gal-
vanized mild steel fire bucket (@t
revision) (Reaffirmed November
1995, Amendment No. 1)
IS 2696 : 1974 Functional require-
ments for 1125 l/rein light fire engine
(@f revision) (Reaffirmed Fcbruaxy
1992, Amendment No. 2)
IS 2745: 1983 Specification for non-
metal helmet for firemen and civil def-
fcncc personnel (second revision)
(Reaffirmed November 1995, Amend-
ment No. 2)
IS 2871:1983 Specification for branch
pipe, universal for fire fighting pur-
poses (first revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
1S 2878 : 1986 Specification for fire
cxtinghishcr, carbon-dioxide type
(portable and trolley mounted)
(second revision) (Reaffirmed Novem-
ber 1995), Amendment No. 1)
IS 2930 : 1980 Functional require-
ments for hose laying tender for fire
brigddc use (jlrst revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1992, Amendment No. 1)
IS 3582:1984 Specification for basket
strainers for fire fighting purposes
(c!!lindrieal type) (@ revision) (Reaf-
firmed November 1995)
IS 4308 : 1982 Specification for dry
powder for fire fighting @st revision)
(Reaffirmed January 1989) (Amend-
ment No.. 3)
Is 4571: 1977 Specification for
aluminium extension ladders for fire
brigade usc (@t revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995, Amendment No. 5)
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
1S4643:1984 Spccifieation for suction
wrcnchcs for fire brigade usc @sI
revi.$ron)(Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 4861 : 1984 Specification for dry
metals (first revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995, Amendment No. 1)
IS 4927:1992 Specification for unlined
flax canvas hose for fire fighting (@st
revision)
IS 4928 : 1986 Specification for
delivery valve for centrifugal pump
outlets (first revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
IS 4947 : 1985 Specification for gas
cartridges for use in fire extinguishers
(second revision) (Reaffirmed Novem-
ber 1995, Amendment No.4)
IS 4989 Specification for foam con-
centrate (compound) for producing
mechanical foam for fire fighting
(Parts 1 to 3):
Part 1 : 1985 Protein foam (second
revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995,
Arncndment No. 1)
Part 2: 1984 Aqueous film forming
foam (AFFF) (Reaffirmed November
1995, Amendment No.2)
Part 3 : 1987 Fluoro protein foam
(Reaffirmed February 1992)
IS 5131:1986 Specification for divid-
ing breeching with control, for fire
brigade use @’st revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
IS 5290:1993 Specification for landing
valve (third revision)
1S 5486:1985 Specification for quick
release knife (@r revision) (Reaf-
firmed November 1995)
IS 5490 Specification for refills for
portable fire extinguishers and chemi-
cal fire engines:
Part 1:1977 For soda acid portable fire
extinguishers (/irst revision) (Reaf-
firmed February 1992, Amendment
No. 2)
Part 2:1977 For foam type portable fire
extinguishers (@t revision) (Reaffirmed
Februaty 1992, Amendment No. 2)
Part 3:1979 For soda acid chemical
fire engines, 50 litre capacity (@t
IV.61

(Reaffirmed
revision) Fcbrua~ 1992,
Amendment No. 1)
Part 4: 1979 For foam chemical fire
engines, 50 litrc capacity (@l revision)
(Reaffirmed February 1992, Amend-
ment No. 3)
IS 5505:1985 Specification for multi-
edged rescue axe (non-wedging) (@
revirion) (Reaffirmed November 1995)
IS 5506:1979 Specification for 50-1
capacity chemical fire engine, soda acid
type (first revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1992, Amendment No. 1)
IS 5507: 1979 Specification for 50-1
capacity chemical fire engine, foam
type (firs[ revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1992, Amendment No. 3)
IS 5612 Specification for hose-clamps
and hose-bandages for fire brigade use
Part 1 : 1977 Hose clamps ~rst
revision) (Reaffirmed February 1992,
Amendment No. 1)
Part 2 : 1977 Hose bandages (@t
revision) (Reaffirmed February 1992)
IS 5714:1981 Specification for hydrant,
stand-pipe for fire fighting (@t revision)
(Reaffirmed February 1992)
IS 6026:1985 Specification for hand
operated sirens fjirst revtiion) (Reaf-
firmed November 1995)
IS 6067 : 1983 Functional require-
ments for water tender, Type ‘X’ for
fire brigade use (@t revision) (Reaf-
firmed November 1995)
IS 6234:1986 Specification for portable
fire extinguishers, water ~pe (stored
pressure) (@t revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995, Amendment No. 1)
1S 8090: 1992 Specification for cou-
plings, branch pipe, nozzle, used in
hose reel tubing for fire fighting
~rst revision) (Reaffirmed November
1995)
IS 8096 : 1992 Specification for fire
beaters (first revtiibn)
IS 8149 : 1994 Functional require-
ments for twin C02 fire extinguishers
(trolley mounted) (/hxt revision)
IS 8423: 1994 Specification for con-
trolled percolating hose for fire fight-
ing (@t revision)
IV.62
.
, ..@_
‘
IS 8442:1977 Specification for stand
post type water monitor for fire fight-
ing (Rcaffirmccl November 1995, .’
Amendment No. 3)
IS 9972:1981 Specification for auto- p’.:,
matic sprinkler heads (Reaffirmed ! ~,
,,
February 1992, Amendment No. 1)
IS 10204:1982 Specification for port-
able fire cxtingulshcr mechanical foam
type (Reaffirmed November 1995,
Amendment No. 3) \
IS 10460 : 1983 Functional require-
ments for small foam tender for fire
brigade use (Reaffirmed November
1995, Amendment No. 1)
IS 10474:1983 Specification for 150
litre capacity chemical fire engine,
foam type (Reaffirmed November
1995)
IS 10658:1983 Specification for higher
capacity dry powder fire extinguisher
(trolley mounted) (Reaffirmed
November 1995, Amendment No. 1)
IS 11101 : 1984 Specification for ex-
tended branch pipe for fire brigade use
(Reaffirmed February 1992)
IS 11108:1984 Specification for port-
able fire extinguisher halon-1211 type
(Reaffirmed November 1995, Amend-
ment No. 3)
IS 10993 : 1984 Functional require-
ments for 2000 kg dry powder tender
for fire brigade use (Reaffirmed
November 1995, Amendment No. 1)
IS 11070 : 1984 Specification for
bromochloro difluoromethane
(Halon-1211) for fire fighting (Reaf-
firmed November 1995)
(11) IS 884:1985 Specification for first aid
hose reel for fire fighting (@t revision)
(Reaffirmed November 1995, Amend-
ment No. 1)
(12) IS 3034:1981 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings: Electrical
generating and distributing stations
(@t revision)
(13) IS 6382:1984 Code of practice for
design and installation of fixed carbon
dioxide fire extinguishing system (/irst
revision) (Reaffirmed November 1995,
Amendment No. 1)
(14) IS 1649:1962 Code of practice for
design and construction of flues and
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 chimneys for domestic heating applian-
ces (@t revision) (Reaffirmed 1992)
IS 1642 : 1989 Code of practice for
safety of buildings (general): Details of
construction (@f revision) (Reaf-
firmed August 1994)
(15) IS 4963:1987 Recommendations for
buildings and facilities for the physical-
ly handicapped (@ revision) (Reaf-
firmed October 1992)
(16) IS 4878:1986 Byelaws for construction
of cinema buildings (first revision)
(Reaffirmed 1991)
(17) 1S 1646:1982 Code of practice for fire
safety of buildings (general): Electrical
installations (first revision) (Reaf-
firmed December 1990)
IS 2726:1988 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings : Cotton
ginning and pressing (including cotton
seed delintering) factories (/irst
revision) (Reaffirmed February 1993)
IS 3034:1993 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings : Electri-
cal generating and distributing stations
(second revision)
IS 3058:1981 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings : Viscose
rayon yam and/or staple fibre plants (first
revirion) (Reaffirmed Februaty 1996)
IS 3079:1990 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings : Cotton
textile mills (jirst revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1996)
IS 3594:1991 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings: General
storage and warehousing including
cold storage (@f revision) (Reaf-
firmed February 1996)
IS 3595:1984 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings: Coal pul-
verizers and associated equipment (first
revision) (Reaffirmed February 1996)
IS 3836:1979 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings : Jute
mi 11s (first revision) (Reaffirmed
February 1992)
IS 4209:1987 Code of safety in chemi-
cal laboratories @rst revision) (Reaf-
firmed February 1993)
IS 4226:1988 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings
Aluminium/Magnesium powder tktories
(fintrwirim) (ReaftirmedFebruary 1993)
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
IS 4886:1991 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings : Tca fac-
tories (first revision) (Reaffirmed
Februa~ 1996)
1S6329:1971 Codeofpmticeforfi resafety
of industrial buildings: Saw milk and wood
works (Rcaflirmcd February 1996)
1S9109:1979 Code of practice for fire
safety of industrial buildings : Paint
and Varnish factories (Reaffirmed
February 1996)
(18) 1S655:1963 Specification for metal air
ducts (revised) (Reaffirmed December
1991 Amendment No. 3)
(19) IS 2189 : 1988 Code of practice for
selection, installation and main-
tenance of automatic fire detection and
alarm system (second revision )
IS 11360:1985 Specification for smoke
detectors for use in automatic electri-
cal fire alarm systcm (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
(20) 1S 8758:1993 Rccomrncndations for
fire precautionary measures in the con-
struction of temporary structures and
pandals (/7rstrevision)
(21) 1S 659:1964 Safety code for air con-
ditioning (Reaffirmed 1991, Amend-
ment No. 1)
(22) IS 12777 : 1989 Fire safety-flame-
spread of products—Method for clas-
sification (Reaffirmed August 1994)
(23) IS 9457:1980 Safety colours and safety
signs (Reaffirmed 1992)
IS 12349 : 1988 Fire protection —
Safety sign (Reaffirmed February 1993)
IS 12407: 1988 Graphic symbols for
fire protection plan (Reaffirmed
February 1993)
(24) IS 9668 : 1990 Code of practice for
provision and maintenance of water
supplies and fire fighting (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
(25) IS 12458:1988 Method of test for fire
resistance test for fire stops (Reaf-
firmed February 1993)
(26) IS 13716:1993 Code of practice for fire
safety in hotels
(27) IS 3844: 1989 Code of practice for
installation and maintenance of inter-
: nal fire hydrants and hose reel on
premises (/list revision) (Reaffirmed
November 1995)
 APPENDIX B
(Clause 4.1.1.7)
CALORIFIC VALUES OF COMMON MATERIALS AND TYPICAL
VALUES OF FIRE LOAD DENSITY

B-1 The calorific values of some common MA’rERtAL CALORIFIC WOOD

VALUE EouNAU2NT
materials are given in Table 25 for guidance. (103 kJ/kg-l)* (kg/kg)
TABLE25C&ORIFIC VALUESOF COMMON Pitch 33.0 1.88
“ MATERIALS Rubbez 37.4 2.13
Straw 13.2 0.75
MATERIAL CALORtFIC WOOD
Tallows 37.6 2.14
VALUE EQUIVALENT 20.9 1.19
Tan bark
(103kJ/kg-j* ‘- -
(kg/kg) Tar (bituminous) 35.2 2.00
Solid Fuels WOOI(raw) 21.6 1.23
Anthracite 28.6 1.66 wool (scoured) 19.6 1.11
Bituminous Coal 30.8 1.75 Foodrtufi
Charmal 28.4 1.61 Barely 14.1 0.80
Coke (average) 27.5 1.56 Bran 11.0 0.63
Peata 20.9 1.19 Bread 9.9 0.56
Sub-bituminous Ceal 22.0 1.25 Butter 29.5 1.68
Woods (hard or softwood) 17.6 1.00 Cheese (Cheddar) 18.1 1.03
Hydrocarbons Corn meal 14.1 0.80
Benzene 39.6 2.25 Ffour 14.1 0.80
Butane 47.1 2.68 Margarine 29.5 1.68
Ethane 49.1 2.79 Oatmeal 15.8 0.90
Ethylene 47.7 2.71 Rice 13.9 0.79
Fuel Oil 41.6 2.36 Soya been flour 16.1 0.91
Gas Oil 42.9 2.44 Sugar 15.4 0.88
Hexane 44.9 2.55 WholeWheat 14.3 0.81
Methane (natural gas) 52.8 3.00 Miscellaneous
Octane 45.3 2.58 Acetone 29.7 1.69
Paraffin 39.6-44.0 2.3-2.5 Acetafdehyde 25.1 1.43
Pentane 46.0 2.61 Formaldehyde 17.6 1.00
Propane 47.3 2.69 Hydrogen 134.2 7.63
PropyIene 46.2 2.63 Magnesium 24.0 1.36
AkohoI!~ ..
Ethyl Afeohol 28.4 1.61 *1 kJ is approximately equal to 1 Btu so the figures in
Methyl Afcohol 21.1 1.20 the tables are alao equivalent to Btulkg.
Propyl Afcohol 31.9 1.81
Po~mers
Casein 23.1 1.31
B-2 The typical values fire load density for
Cellulose 16.5 0.94 arriving at the classification of occupancy
Cellulose Acetate 17.8 1.01 hazard is given in Table 26 for guidance.
Polyethylene 48.4 2.75
Polypropylene 48.4 2.75 TABLE26 TYPICALVALUESOF FfRE LOAD
Polystyrene 41.8 2.38 DENSITY
Pofyvinylchloride 20.9 1.19
Pofymethylmethacrylate 24.6 1.40
Polyurethane 35.2 2.00 BUILDING
TYPE FIRELCMODENStTY(EXPRESSED
AS
Polyamide (nylon) 22.0 1.25 WOODEqUiValent I&xtAMs PER
Polyester 22.0 1.25 SQUARE
Mmtts
Common Soliak 1. Residential (A-1 & A-2) 25
Asphalt 38.3 2.13 2. Residential (A-3 to A-5) 25
Bitumen 33.4 1.90
carbon 32.1 1.83 3. Institutional and Educational
Cotton (dry) 15.8 0.90 (B& C) 25
Flax 14.3 0.81 4. Assembfy (D) 25-50
Furs & skins 18.7 1.06 5. Business (E) 25-50
Hair (animal) 20.9 1.19
Leather 17.6 1.00 6. Mercantile (F) up to 250
Ozokerite (wax) 43.3 2.46 7. Industrial (G) up to 150
Paper (average) 15.4 0.88 8. Storage and Hazardous (H& J) up to 500
Paraffin wax 40.9 2.33

NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
 i.,
—.—

‘+

APPENDIX C
(Clause 4.1.1.7)
LIST OF OCCUPANCIES

LOW H4.ZARD OCCUPANCIES

Assembly buildings small (D-4 & D-5) Mica products manufacturing

Abrasive manufacturing premises Office premises
Aerated water factories Pottery works
Agarbatti manufacturing premises Places of worship
Analytical and /or Q.C. Laboratories Poultry farms
Arecanut slicing and/or Betelnut factories Residential buildings (A-1 to A-4) (except
Asbestos steam packing and lagging manufac- hotels A-5)
turers Salt crushing factories/refineries stables
Battery charging And service stations Sugar candy manufacturing
Battery manufacturing Sugar factories and refineries
Breweries Tanneries
BrickWorks Umbrella assembling factories
Canning factories Vermicelli factories
Cardamom factories Water treatment/filtration plants and water
Cement factories and /or asbestos or concrete pump houses
products manufacturing premises Zinc/copper factories
Ceramic factories, crockery, stoneware pipe MODERATE HAZARD OCCUP~CIES
manufacturing
Clay works Airport and other transportation terminal
buildings
Clock and watch manufacturing
Aluminium factories
Clubs
Assembly buildings (D-1, D-2, and D-3)
Coffee curing, roasting and grinding factories
Atta and cereal grinding
Condensed milk factories, milk pasturising
plants and dairies Bakeries and biscuit factories
Confectionery manufacturing Beedi factories
.
Dwellings, lodges, dormitories, etc Bobbin factories
Educational and research institutions Book-binders, envelopes and paper bag
manufacturing
Electric lamps (incandescent and fluorescent)
and T.V. tube manufacturing Camphor boiling
Electroplating works Candle works
Engineering workshops Carbon paper/typewriter ribbon makers
Fruits and vegetables dehydrating and drying Card board box manufacturing
factories Carpenters, wood wool and firniture makers
Fruits products and condiment factories Carpet and durries factories
Glass and glass fibre manufacturing Cashewnut factories
Godowns and warehouses (non-combustible Chemical manufactures (using raw materials
goods) having F.P > 23°C)
Gold thread/gilding factories Cigar and cigarette factories
Gum and/or glue and gelatine manufactur- Coir factories
ing Cold storage premises
Ice candy and ice-cream and ice factories computer installations
Ink (excluding printing ink) factories Cork products manufacturing

PARTIVFIREPROTECTION Iv-d
 :...d
,’
(coir, carpets, rugs and tobacco) (hides and Soaps and glycerine factories ‘?.
.
skin presses) Spray painting _ -,..,,
..
‘Dry cleaning, dyeing and laundries, cable Starch factories
manufacturing Tea factories (including blending packing of
Electric substations/distribution stations tea) ,~:
‘.1*
Electrical generating stations except u/g Telephone exchanges, garages r,’
powerhouses Textile mills
Enamelware factories Tobaeeo chewing and pan masala making
,!
Filler and wax paper manufacturing Tobaeeo rediying factories
Flour mills Woollen mills \
Garment makers
HIGH IL4ZARD OCCUPtiCIES 1
Ghee factories (other than vegetable) i
Godowns and warehouses (other than non- A) Aircraft hangars
combustible goods) Aluminium/magnesium powder plants
Grains and seed disintegrating or crushing Bitumanised paper/hessian cloth/tar felt
manufacturing
Grease manufacturing
Bulk storage of flammable liquids (tank j
Hosiery, lace, embroidery and thread
farm, etc)
Hospitals including ‘X’ ray and other ,{
Celluloid goods making
diagonastic clinics (institutional buildings)
Chemical manufacturers (where raw
Incandescent Gas Mantle manufacturers materials have a F.P. <23 “C) \
Industrial gas manufacturing (only Cigarette filter manufacturing ~
halogenated hydroearbons/inert gases) Cinema films and T.V. production
Man made yarn/fibre (except acrylic studios
fibre~arn) Coal, coke and charcoal ball and briquet-
Manure and fertilizer works (blending, mixing tes making
and granulating only) Collieries, steel plants
Mercantile occupancies (departmental stores, Cotton seeds cleaning and delinting fac-
‘shopping complex, etc) tories
Mineral oil blending and processing Cotton waste factories
Museums, archieves, record rooms Distilleries
Oil and leather cloth factories Duplicating/stencil paper making
Fire works manufacture -:
Open storage of flammable liquids (in drums, .
cans, etc) Foamed plastic and/or converting plants
Oxygen plants Godowns of warehouses (combus-
tible/hazardous goods) (H)
Plastic goods manufacturing
Grass, hay, fodder and bhoosa (chaff)
Paper and cardboard mills (except raw
material yard) Hazardous oeeupancy buildings (J)
Industrial gas manufacturing (except
Piers, wharves, dockyards
halogenated hydrocarbon gases/inert
Plywood/wood veneering factories gases)
Printing press premises Industrial units (G3 occupancies)
Pulverizing and crushing mills Jute mills and Jute presses
Residential apartments, hotels, cafes, res- Linoleum factories
taurants Man made fibres (only acrylic fibre/yam
Rice mills making)
Rope works Match factories
Rubber goods manufacturing Mattress and pillow makings (foam plastics)
Rubber tyres and tubes manufacturing Metal or tin printers (if more than 50%
is engineering, shift to ordina~
Shellac factories
hazard)
Silk filiatures

Iv.ti NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 Oil mills
Oil extraction plants
Oil terminals/depots
Paints /varnish factories
Paper and cardboard mills (only raw
material yard)
Pressing factories
Printing ink making
Resin,lamp black and turpentine
manufacture
Saw mills
Surgical cotton manufacturing
Tarpaulin and canvas proofing factories
APPENDIX
(Clauses 7.9.2,7.11.1,7.18,9.2, 10.3,11.2,13.2,14.2,
FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH RISE BUILDINGS
— 15 m IN HEIGHT OR ABOVE
D-O GENERAL
D-O.l In addition to the provisions of Part IV
Fire protection, the Authority may insist on
suitable protection measures in a building
15 m in height or above.
D-1 CONSTRUCTION
D-1.l All materials of constructions in load
bearing elements, stainvays and corridors and
facades shall be non-combustible.
D-1.2 The interior finish materials shall not
have a flame spreadability rating exceeding
Class 1 (see 7.15.2).
D-1.3 The internal walls or staircase shall be
of brick or reinforced concrete with a mini-
mum of 2 h fire rating.
D-1. 4 The staircase shall be ventilated to the
atmosphere at each landing and a vent at the
top; the vent openings shall be of 0.5 mz in the
external wall and the top. If the staircase can-
not be ventilated, because of location or other
reasons, a positive pressure 50 Pa shall be
maintained inside. The mechanism for pres-
surizing the staircase shall operate automat-
ically with the fire alarm. The roof of the shaft
Shall be 1 m above the surrounding roof. Glaz-
ing or glass bricks shall not be used in the
staircase.
D-1.5 Lijlts
General requirements of lifts shall be as fol-
lows :
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
Turpentine and resin distilleries
~pe retreading and resoling factories
Underground shopping complexes (F-3)
B) Ammonia and urea synthesis plants
Explosive factories
LPG bottling plants
Petrochemical plants
Petroleum refineries
NOTE — Incaseof complexes having segregated plants
with varying degrees- of hazards, the competent
authoritv havine jurisdictions shall he consulted to
decidetie level~~protectionsto be provided.
D
15.2,16.2 and 17.2)
a) Walls of lift enclosures shall have a fire
rating of 2 h, lifts shafts shall have a vent
at the top of area not less than 0.2 m2.
b) Lift motor room shall be located
preferably on top of the shaft and
separated from the shaP hy the floor of
the room,
c) Landing doors in lift enclosures shall
have a fire resistance of not less than
half an hour.
d) The number of lifts in one lift bank
shall not exceed 4. Individual shafts in
a bank shall be separated by a wall
of 2 h fire rating. .,
e) Lift car door shall have afire resistance
rating of half an hour.
f) For buildings 15 m in height or above
collapsible gates shall not be permitted
for lifts and shall have solid doors with
fire resistance of at least 1 h.
g) If the lift shaft and lobby is in the core
of the building, a positive pressure be-
tween 25 and 30 Pa shall be maintained
in the lobby and a positive pressure of
50 Pa shall be maintained in the lift
shaft. The mechanism for pressurisa-
tion shall act automatically with the
fire alarm; it shall be possible to
operate this mechanically also.
h) Exit from the lift lobby, if located in the
cdre of the building, shall be through a
self-closing smoke stop door of half an
hour fire resistance.
IV-67
 ]) Lifts shall not normally communicate
with the basement: if, however, lifts are
in communication, the lift lobby of the
basements shall be pressurised as in
(g), with self-closing door as in (h).
k) Grounding switch, at ground floor
level, shall be provided on all the lifts
to enable the fire serviee to ground the
lifts.
m) Telephone or other communication
facilities shall be provided in lift ears
for building of 30 m in height and
above. Communication system for lifts
shall be connected to fire control room
for the building.
n) Suitable arrangements such as provid-
ing slope in the floor of lift lobby, shall
be made to prevent water used during
fire fighting, etc, at any landing from
entering the lift shafts.
A sign shall be posted and maintained
P)
on every floor at or near the lift indicat-
ing that in ease of fire, occupants shall
use the stairs unless instructed other-
wise. The sign shall also contain a plan
for each floor showing the locations of
the stairways.
Alternate source of power supply shall
be provided for all the lifts through a
manually operated changeover switch.
q) FIRE LIms — Following details shall
apply for a fire lift:
i) To enable fire sefiees personnel
to reach the upper floors with the
minimum delay, one fire lift per
1200 m2 of floor area shall be
permitted and shall be available
for the exclusive use of the
firemen in an emergeney.
ii) The lift shall have a floor area of
not less than 1.4 m2, It shall have
loading capacity of not less than
545 kg (8 persons lift) with auto-
matic closing doors of minimum
0.8 m width.
iii) The electric supply shall be on a
separate service from electric
supply mains in a building and the
cables run in a route safe from fire,
that is, within the lift shaft. Lights
and fans in the elevators having
wooden panelling or sheet steel
construction shall be operated
on 24 volt supply.
Iv.@
iv) Fire fighting ift should be
provided with a ~eiling hatch for
use in ease of emergeney, so that
when the ear gets stuck up, it shall
be easily openable.
v) In case of failure of normal
electric supply, it shall automat-
ically trip over to alternate supp-
ly. For apartment houses, this
changeover of supply could be
done through manually operated
changeover switch. Alternative-
ly, the lift shall be so wired that in
ease of power failure, it comes
down at the ground level and
comes to stand-still with door
open.
vi) The operation of a fire lift is by a
simple toggle or two-button
switch situated in a glass fronted
box adjacent to the lift at the
entrance level. When the switch
is on, landing call-points will be-
come inoperative and the lift will
be on ear control only or on a
priority control deviee. When the
switch is off, the lift will return to
normal working. This lift can be
used by the occupants in normal
times.
vii) The words ‘FIRE LIFT’ shall be
conspicuously displayed in
fluorescent paint on the lift land-
ing doors at each floor level.
viii) The speed of the fire lift shall be
such that it ean reach the top
floor from ground levsl within 1
min.
D-1. 6 Basements
D-1.6.1 Each basement shall be separately
ventilated. Vents with cross-sectional area
(aggregate) not less than 2.5 pereent of the
floor area spread evenly round the perimeter
of the basement shall be provided in the form
of grills, or breakable stallboard lights or pave-
ment lights or by way of shafts. Alternatively,
a system of air inlets shall be provided at base-
ment floor level and smoke outlets at base-
ment ceiling level. Inlets and extracts may be
terminated at ground level with stallboard or
pavement lights as before, but ducts to convey
fresh air to the basement floor level have to be
laid. Stallboard and pavement lights should be
in positions easily accessible to the fire brigade
NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOF INDIA

and dearly marked ‘SMOKE OUTLET’ or
‘AIR INLET’ with an indication of area served
at or near the opening.
D-1.6.2 The staircase of basements shall be of
cncloscd type having fire resistance of not less
than 2 h and shall bc situated at the periphery
of the basement to be entered at ground level
only from the open air and in such positions
that smoke from any fire in the basement shall
not obstruct any exit serving the ground and
upper stores of the building and shall com-
municate with basement through a lobby
provided with fire resisting self closing doors
of the 1 h resistance. For travel distance
refer 8.5.1. If the travel distance exceeds as
given in Table 23, additional staircases shall be
provided at proper places.
D-1.6.3 ln multi-storcy basements, intake
ducts may serve all basement levels, but each
basement and basement compartment shall
have separate smoke outlet duct or ducts.
D-1.6.4 Mechanical extractors for smoke
venting systcm from .lowcr basement levels
shall also bc provided. The systcm shall be of
such design as to operate on actuation of
heat/smoke sensitive detectors or sprinklers,
if installed, and shall have a considerably su-
perior pcrforrnancc compared to the standard
units. It shall also have an arrangement to start
it manually.
D-1. 6.4.1 Mechanical extractors shall have an
internal locking arrangement, so that extrac-
tors shall continue to operate and supply fans
shall stop automatically with the actuation of
fire detectors.
D-1.6.4.2 Mechanical extractors shall be
designed to permit 30 air changes per hour in
case of fire or distress call. However, for nor-
mal operation, air changes schcdulc shall be as
given in 7.11.5.
D-1. 6.4.3 Mechanical extractors shall have an
alternative source of supply.
D-1.6.4.4 Ventilating ducts shall be in-
tegrated with the structure and made out of
brick masonry or RCC as far as possible and
when this duct crosses the transformer area or
electrical switch board, fire dampers shall be
provided.
D-1. 6.5 Use of basements for kitchens work-
ing on gas fuel for departmental stores, shops,
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
4
—U_
. d
storage of flammable oils and gases, banquet
hall, auditorium, discotheque, restaurants,
ctc, shall not be permitted
The basement shall not be premitted below
the ward block of a hospital/nursing home
unless it is fully sprinkled.
Building services such as electrical substa-
tions, boiler rooms shall not be used below
first basement if more than one basement is
provided.
D-1. 6.6 If cut outs are provided from base-
ments to the upper floors or to the atmos-
phere, all sides cut out openings in the
basements shall be protected by sprinkler
head at close spacing so as to form a water
curtain in the event of a fire.
D-1. 7 Openable windows on external walls
shall be fitted with such locks which can be
opened by a fireman’s axe.
D-1.8 All floors shall be compartmented with
area not exceeding 750 m2 by a separation wall
with 2 h fire rating, for floors with sprinklers
the area may be increased by 50 percent. In
long building, the fire separation walls shall be
at distances not “exceeding 40 m. For
departmental stores, shnpping centres and
basements, the area may be reduced to 500 m2
for compartmentation. Where this is not pos-
sible, the spacings of the sprinklers shall be
suitably reduced.
D-1.8.1 h is essential to make provisions for
drainage of any such water on all floors to
prevent or minimise water damage of the con-
tents. The drain pipes should be provided on
the external wall for drainage of water from all
floors. On large area floors several such pipes
may be necessa~ which should be spaced 30 m
apart,
D-1. 9 Service DuctslShajix
a) Service ducts and shafts shall be
enclosed by walls of 2 h and doors of
1 h, fire rating. All such ducts/shafts
shall be properely sealed and fire
stopped at all floor levels.
b) A vent opening at the top of the service
shaft shall be provided having between
one-fourth and one-half of the area of
the shaft.
D-I.10 Refuse chutes shall have opening at
least 1 m above roof level or renting purpose
and they shall have an enclosure wall of non-

combustible material with fire resistance of
not ICSSthan 2 h. They shall not bc Iocatcd
within the staircase cnclosurc or service shafts,
or air-conditioning shafts inspection panel
and doors shall bc tight fitting with 1 h fire
resistance; the chutes should bc as far away as
possible from exits.
D-1. 11 Refuge Area
Provisions contained in 8.12.3 shall apply for
all buildings except multi-family dwellings,
refuge area of not lCSSthan 15 m2 shall bc
provided on the external walls.
D-1.12 Electrical services shall conform to
the following:
a) The electric distribution cableshviring
shall bc laid in a separate duct. The
duct shall be sealed at every floor with
non-combustible materials having the
same fire resistance as that of the duct.
Low and medium voltage wiring run-
D-1.13 Gas supply shall conform to the fol-
ning in shaft and in false ceiling shall
lowing:
run in separate conduits;
b) Water mains, telephone lines, inter-
com lines, gaspipes or any other service
line shall not be laid in the duct for
electrical cables: Use of bus ducts/solid
rising mains instead of cables is
prefered.
c) Separate circuits for fire fighting
pumps, lifts, staircases and corridor
lighting and blowers for pressurizing
system shall be provided directly from
the main switch gear panel and these
circuits shall be laid in separate conduit
pipes, so that fire in one circuit will not
affect the others. Master switches con-
trolling essential service circuits shall
be clearly Iabelled;
d) The inspection panel doors and any
other opening in the shaft shall be
provided with air-tight fire doors having
fire resistance of not less than 2 m
e) Medium and low voltage wiring run-
ning in shafts, and within false ceiling
shall run in metal conduit. Arty 230 V
wiring for lighting or other services,
above false ceiling, shall have 660 V
grade insulation. The false ceiling, in-
cluding all fbttures used for its suspen-
sion, shall be of non-combustible
material;
f) An independent and well ventilated
service room shall be provided on the
IV.70
..&,
ground Icvcl or first basement with
direct access from outside or from the
corridor for the purpose of termina-
tion of electric supply from the
licensees’ service and alternative supp-
ly cables. The doors provided for the
service room shall have fire resistance
of not less than 2 h; and
NOTE— If scrviccroom is located at the first
basement, it should have automatic fire cxtin-
gushing system.
g) If the licensees agree to provide meters
on upper floors, the licensees’ cables
shall be scgrcgatcd from consurncrs’
cables by providing a partition in the
duct. Meter rooms on upper floors
shall not open into stair case
enclosures and shall bc ventilated
dircclly to open air outside; and
h) Suitable circuit breakers shall bc
provided at the appropriate points.
a) TOWN GAS/L.P. GAS SUPPLY PIPIiS—
Where gas pipes are run in buildings,
the same shall bc run in separate shafts
exclusively for this purpose and these
shall be on external walls, away from
the staircases. There shall no intercon-
nection of this shaft with the rest of the
floors. LPG distribution pipes shall al-
ways be below the false ceiling. The .--J
length of these pipes shall bc as short
as possible. In the case of kitchen cook-
ing range area, apart from providing
hood, covering the entire cooking
range, the exhaust system should be
designed to take care of 30 m3 per
minute per m2 of hood projected area.
It should have grease filters using
metallic grill to trap oil vapours escap-
ing into the fume hood.
NOTE— For detailed information on gas pipe
installations, reference may be made to Part IX
Plumbing Semites, Section 3 Gas supply.
b) All wiring in fume hoods shall be of
fibre glass insulation. Thermal detec-
tors shall be installed htto fume hoods
of large kitchens for hotels, hospitals,
and similar areas located h’t high rise
buildings. Arrangements shall be made
for automatic tripping of the exhaust
fan in case of fire. If LPG is used, the
same shall be shut off. The voltage
shall be 24 V or 100 V dc operated with
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
 cxtkrnal rectifier. The valve shall be of
the hand re-set type and shall be lo-
cated in an area segregated from cook-
ing ranges. Valves shall be easily
accessible. The hood shall have manual
facility for steam or carbon dioxide gas
injection, depending on duty condi-
tion;
c) Gas meters shall be housed in a suitab-
ly constructed metal cupboard located
in a well ventilated space, keeping in
view the fact that LPG is heavier than
air and town-gas is lighter than air.
D-1.14 Illumination of Means of Exit
Staircase “and corridor lights shall conform to
the following:
a) The staircase and ,corridor lighting
shall be on separate circuits and shall
be independently connected so as it
could be operated by one switch instal-
lation on the ground floor easily acces-
sible to fire fighting staff at any time
irrespective of the position of the in-
dividual control of the light points, if
any. It should be of miniature circuit
breaker type of switch so as to avoid
replacement of fuse in case of crisis;
b) Staircase and corridor lighting shall
also be connected to alternative supp-
ly. ‘Ile alternative source of supply may
be provided by battery continuously
trickle charged from the electric mains;
c) Suitable arrangements shall be made
by installing double throw switches to
ensure that the lighting installed in the
staircase and the corridor does not get
connected to two sources of supply
simultaneously. Double throw switch
shall be installed in the service room
for terminating the stand-by supply
and
d) Emergency lights shall be provided in
the staircase and corridor.
D-1.15 A stand-by electric generator shall be
installed ‘to supply power to staircase and cor-
ridor lighting circuits, fire lifts, the stand-by
fire pump, pressurisation fans and blowers,
smoke extraction and damper systems in case
of failure of normal electric supply. The gen-
erator shall be capable of taking starting cur-
reip of all the machines and circuits stated
above simultaneously. If the stand-by pump is
driven by diesel engine, the generator supply
PARTIVFIREPROTECTION
need not be conncctcd to the stand-by pump.
Where parallel HV/LV supply from a separate
sub-station is provided with appropriate
transformer for emergency, the provision of
generator may be waived in consultation with
the Authority.
D-1.16 Transformers shall conform to the
following .
a) A sub-station or a switch-station with
apparatus having more than 2 000
litrcs of oil shall not ordinarily be lo-
cated in the basement. If transformers
are housed in the building below the
ground lCVC1 they shall necessarily bc in
the first basement in a separate fire
resisting room of 4 h rating. The room
shall necessarily beat the periphe~ of
the basement. The entrance to the
room shall be provided with a fire
resisting door of 2 h fire rating. A curb
(sill) of a suitable height shall bc
provided at the entrance in order to
prevent the flow of oil from a ruptured
transformer into other parts of the
basement, Direct access to the trans-
former room shall be provided,
preferably from outside. The switch
gears shall be housed in a room
separated from the transformer bays by
a fire resisting wall with fire resistance
of not less than 4 h.
b) The oil filled transformers, if housed in .“
basement shall be protected by an
automatic high velocity water spray
system.
c) In case the transformer are housed in
the basement, totally segregated from
other areas of the basements by 4 h fire
resisting walls with an access directly
from outside, they may be protected by
carbon dioxide or any other suitable
system,
d) When housed at ground floor level, if
they shall be cut off from the other
portion of premises by fire resisting
walls of 4 h fire resistance.
e) Oil filled transformers shall not be
housed on any floor above the ground
floor.
o Soak pit of approved design shall be
provided where the aggregate oil
capacity of the apparatus does not ex-
ceed 2000 litres. Where the oil capacity
exceeds 2000 liters, a tank of RCC
 construction of capacity capable of ac- 2) When the automatic fire alarm
commodating the entire oil of the operates, the respective airhan-
transformers shall be provided at a dling units of the air-condition-
lower level to collect the oil from the ing system shall automatically be
catch-pit to the tank shall be of non- switched off.
combustible construction and shall be NOTE
— Fusible link operatea on heat detection
provided with a flame-arrester. system.
m) The vertical shaft for treated fresh air
D-1.1 7 Air-conditioning shall conform to the shall be of masonry construction.
following: n) The air filters of the air-handling units
a) Escape routes like staircases, common shall be of non-combustible materials.
corridors, lift lobbies, etc, shall not be P) The air-handling unit room shall not
used as return air passage. be used for storage of any combustible
b) The ducting shall be constructed of materials.
substantial gauge metal in accordance q) Inspection panels shall be provided in
with good practice IV (18). the main trunking to facilitate the
c) wherever the ducts pass through fire cleaning of ducts of accumulated dust
walls or floors, the opening around the and to obtain access for mahttenance of
ducts shall be sealed with fire resisting fire dampers.
materials, such as asbestos rope, ver- r) No combustible material shall be fixed
miculite concrete, or other suitable nearer than 15 cm to any duct unless
sealing materials. such duct is properly enclosed and
d) As far as possible, metallic ducts shall protected with non-combustible
be used even for the return air instead material (glass wool or spunglass with
of space above the false ceiling. neoprene facing enclosed and wrapped
e) Where plenum is used for return air with aluminium sheeting) at least 3.2
passage, ceiling and its fixtures shall be mm thick and which would not readily
of non-combustible material. conduct heat.
f) The materials used for insulating the s) Fire Dampers
duct system (inside or outside) shall be 1) These shall be located in condi-
of non-combustible materials. Glass tioned air ducts and return ah
wool shall not be wrapped or secured ducts/passages at the following
by any material of combustible nature. points:
g) Area more than 750 m2 on individual i) At the fire separation wall.
floor shall be segregated by a fire wall ii) Where ductslpassages
and automatic fire dampers for isola- enter the central vertical
tion shall be provided [see (h)]. shaft.
h) Air ducts serving main floor areas, cor- iii) Where the ducts pass
ridors, etc, shall not pass through the through floors, and
staircase enclosure. iv) At the inlet of supply air
j) The air-handing units shall be separate duct and the return air duct
for each floor and air ducts for every of each compartment on
floor shall be separated in no way inter- every floor.
connected with the ducting of any 2) The dampers shall operate auto-
other floor. matically and shall simultaneously
k) If the air-handling unit serves more switch off the air-handling fans.
than one floor, the recommendations Manual operation facilities shall
given above shall be complied with in also be provided.
addition to the conditions given below
NOTE— For blowers, where extraction
1) Proper arrangements by way of system and dust accumulators are used,
automatic fire dampers working dampemshallbeprovided.
on fusible linldor smoke detector 3) Fire/smoke dampers (for smoke
for isolating all ducting at every extraction shafts) for buildings
floor from the main riser shall be more than 24 m in height.
made.

IV-’* NATIONAL BUILDING CODEOF INDIA

 For In non-ventilated
apartment lobbies/corridors
houses operated by fusible
link/smoke detec-
tors and with
manual control.
For other On operation of
buildings smoke- detection
system and with
manual control.
4) Automatic fire dampers shall be
so arranged as to close by gravity
in the direction of air movement
and to remain tightly closed on
operation of a fusible linidsmoke
detector.
D-1.18 Provisions of boiler and boiler rooms
shall conform to Indian Boiler Act. Further,
the following additional aspects may be taken
into accnunt in the location of boiler room:
a) The boilers shall not be allowed in sub-
basement, but may be allowed in the
basements away from the escape
routei.
b) The boilers shall be installed in a fire
resisting room of 4 h fire resistance
rating, and this room shall be situated
on the periphery of the basement.
Catch-pits shall be provided at the low
level.
c) Entry to this room shall be provided
with a composite door of 2 h fire resis-
tance.
d) The boiler room shall be provided with
fresh air inlets and smoke exhausts
directly to the atmosphere.
e) The furnace oil tank for the boiler, if
located in the adjoining room shall be
separated by fire resisting wall of 4 h
rating. The entrance to this room shall
be provided with double composite
doors. A curb of suitable height shall
be provided at the entrance in order to
prevent the flow of oil into the boiler
room in case of tank rupture.
Q Foam inlets shall be provided on the
external walls of the building near the
ground level to enable the fire services
to use foam in case of fire. , to detect the fire on any floor through in-
D-2. PROVIS1ON OF FIRST-AID FIRE
FIGHTING APPLIANCES
D-2.1 The first-aid fire fighting equipment
shall be provided on all floors, including base-
PARTtV FIREPROTECTION
ments, lift rooms, etq in accordance with good
practice IV (9) Appendix A in consultation
with the Authority.
D-3. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
D-3.1 ~1 buildings with heights of 15 m or
above shall be equipped with manually
operated electrical fire alarm (MOEFA) sys-
tem and automatic fire atarm system [refer IV
(19) of Appendix A]. However, apartment
buildings between 15 m and 30 m in height may
be exempted from the installation of automat-
ic fire alarm system provided the local fire
brigade is suitably equipped for dealing with
fire 15 m in height or above and in the opinion
of the Authority, such building does not ccm-
stitute a hazard to the safety of the adjacent
property or occupants of the building itself.
D-3.1.1 Manually operated electrical fire
alarm system shall be installed in a building
with one or more call boxes located at each
floor. The call boxes shall conform to IV (19)
of Appendix A
D-3.1.2 The installation of call boxes in hos-
tels and such other places where these are
likely to be misused shall as far as possible be
avoided. Location of call boxes in dwelling
units shall preferably be inside the building.
D-4. LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF
BUILDINGS
D-4.1 The lightning protection for buildings
shall be provided as given in Part VIII Building
services, Section 2 Electrical installations.
D-5. FIRE CONTROL ROOM
D-5.1 For all buildings 15 m in height or
above and apartment buildings with a height
of 30 m and above, there shall be a control
room on the entrance floor of the building
with communication system (suitable public
address system) to aid floors and facilities for
receiving the message from different floors.
Details of all floor plans along with the details
of fire fighting equipment and installations
shall be maintained in the fire control room.
The fire control room shall also have facilities
dicator boards connectio~ fire detection and
alarm systems on all floors. The fire staff in-
charge of the fire control room shall be
responsible for the maintenance of the various
services and fire fighting equipment and
N-73
installations in co-ordination with security,
electrical and civil staff of the building.
D-6. FIRE OFFICER/SUPERVISOR FOR
HOTELS, BUSINESS AND MERCANTILE
BUILDINGS WITH HEIGHT MORE
THAN 30 m
D-6.1 A qualified Fire Officer with ex-
perience of not less than 3 years shall be
appointed who will be available on the
premises.
D-6.2 The Fire Officer shall:
a) maintain the fire fighting equipment in
good working condition at all times,
b) prepare fire orders and fire operational
plans and get them promulgated,
c) impart regular training to the oc-
cupants of the buildings in the use of
fire fighting equipments provided on
the premises and keep them informed
about the fire emergency evacuation
plan,
d) keep proper liaison with city Fire
Brigade, and
e) ensure that all fire precautionary
measures are observed at the times.
Nom —Competentauthorityhavingjurisdictionmay
insist on complianceof the aboverules in ease of
buildingshavingverylargeareas,evenif the heightis
lessthan30m.
D-7. HOUSE ~“EPING
D-71 To eliminate fire hazards, good house
keeping, both inside and outside the building,
APPENDIX
(Clauses 15.3.3.1 and 15.5)
FIRE PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS FOR VENTING IN INDUSTRIAL
E-1. APPLICATION AND SCOPE
E-1.l The provisions given below are ap-
plicable only to single-storey industrial build-
ings (factories and storage buildings) covering
large floor areas without subdividingheparat-
ing walls which are usually designed to meet
medern production methods.
E-1.2 The requirements of fire and explosion
venting of industrial buildings, as dealt within
this section, fall under two categories:
a) Smoke and fire venting, and
b) Explosion relief vents.
IV.74
shall be strictly maintained by the occupants
and/or the owner of the building.
D-8. FIRE DRILLS AND FIRE ORDERS
D-8.1 Fire notices/orders shall be prepared to
fulfil the requirements of fire fighting and
evacuation from the buildings in the event of
fire and other emergenq. The occupants shall
be made thoroughly conversant with their ac-
tion in the event of emergency, by displaying
fire notices at vantage points and also through
regular training. Such notices should be dis-
played prominently in broad lettering.
For guidelines for fire drills and evacuation
procedures for high rise buildings, see Appen-
dix F.
D-9. COMPARTMENTATION
D-9.1 The building shall be suitably com-
partmentalised so that fire/smoke remain con-
fined to the area where fire incident has
occured and does not spread to the remaining
part of the building.
D-10. HELIPAD
D-10. I For high rise buildings above 60 m in
height, provisi& for helipad~hould be made.
D-11. MATERIALS FOR INTERIOR
DECORATION/FURNISHING
~-11,1 The use of materials which are com-
bustible in nature and may spread toxic
fume/gases should not be used for interior
decoration/furnishing, etc.
.
E
BUILDINGS
E-2. SMOKE AND FIRE VENTING
E-2.1 The basic considerations to be kept in
mind while formulating the design and other
requirements for smoke and fire vents are as
given in E-2.1.1 to E-2.1.20.
E-2.1.1 The smoke and hot combustion
products from a fire, being lighter than the
surrounding air, tend to rise and on reaching
the roof or ceiling spread out (mushroom) on
all sides and form a layer which floats on top
of the cold air beneath. In the absence of vents,
this layer becomes progressively deeper until
the whole building is filled with hot smoky
NATION& BUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
gases. The time consumed for this to happen
may be only a few minutes, depending on vari-
ables like, type of materials on fire, process/
storage conditions involved, etc.
E-2.1.2 The hot gases at the roof level moved
by convection currents contribute to rapid
lateral spread of fire.
E-2.1.3 The provision of properly designed
and suitably located vents inadequate number
helps the speedy removal of smoke and hot
gases, therby preventing spread of fire, besides
reducing risks of explosion of unburnt gases
and reducing damage to the contents and struc-
ture of the building by heat and smoke. In addi-
tion, they facilitate fire fighting operations, and
minimise personal hazards to the firemen.
E-2.1.4 The time taken for accumulation of
smoke and hot gases within a building on fire
being very short, the venting devices installed
shall be designed to operate in the early stage
of the fire and must be automatic so as to
ensure speed and efficiency in their operation.
E-2.1.5 The smoke and fire venting system
shall be designed in such a manner as to keep
the temperature of the combustion products
from the fire as low as possible, preferably
below approximately 150°C.
E-2.1.6 Automatic venting systems are com-
plementary to the fire extinguishing systems,
and automatic sprinklers, where provided,
should operate before the operation of the
vents; otherwise, venting may delay sprinkler
operation.
E-2.1. 7 It is easier to vent a building of smoke
than clear it of smoke once it has been filled.
E-2.1.8 Venting is particularly desirable in
large area industrial buildings or warehouses,
windowless buildings, underground structures
or in areas housing hazardous operations.
Automatic fire vents shall be provided for all
industrial occupancies (including storage
buildings) classified as medium hazard or
above having floor areas exceeding 750 m2,
irrespective of whether they are compartmen-
talized or not,
E-2,1.9 These provisions do not cover other
aspects, of ventilation (or lighting) designed for
regulation of temperature within a building for
personal comfort or meeting process needs.
E-2.1.1 0 Similarly, fire and smoke venting re-
quirements as given here under are also not
PARTIV FIRE PROTECTION
applicable to multi-storey buildings, as their
.,
requirements are different and more complex. -?
E-2. 1.11 It is difficult to determine precise
venting requirements on account of the many
variables involved. For instance, the rate of
combustion varies appreciably according to
the nature, shape, size and packaging of the
combustible materials as well as the size,
height and disposition of the stacks of
materials.
E-2.1.12 In industrial buildings of floor area
less than 750 m2 and used as low fire hazard
occupancies, conventional ventilators fitted
high up near the eaves of the external walls
may serve as vents for smoke and hot gases,
provided care is taken to ensure that they are
kept open at all times or are designed to open
automatically in case of fire.
E-2.1.13 Extinction of fires by closing the
doors and windows is not likely in the case of
industrial buildings because of their large size,
where sufficient air to sustain the fire at least
in the initial stages can be expected to be
present.
E-2.1.14 Of the two types of tdlding ventila-
tion, namely, vertical and horizcmtal, vertical
ventilation is the one commonly adopted in
the case of single-storey industrial buildings.
E-2.1.15 Since 70 to 80 percent of heat
produced in a fire is convective heat, the ven-
tilation system has to be suitably designed to
ensure early outflow of the heat and thereby
minimize fire spread.
E-2.1.16 Combustible roof linings shall be
avoided, as they themselves will contribute to
the spread of fire, thereby multiplying the
venting problems.
E-2.1.1 7 A wind blowing across a flat roof or
a roof with a pitch under 4(P produces a nega-
tive pressure,.~hat is, it tends to draw gases out
of the building and so aids venting of hot gases.
Wind blowing across a roof of pitch greater
than 40° will draw gases out on the leeward
side, but oppose outward flow on the
windward side of the roof.
E-2.1.18 For vents to work at full efficiency,
the area of the inlets for cold air entering the
compartment must equal at least the total area
of the vents. Ideally, the inlets shall be as close
to the ground as possible.
IV-75
E-2.1.19 Where roof vents are installed in a
single-storey building any neighboring build-
ings, particularly those of more than one
storey, will be subject to some degree of ex-
posure hazard either from flying birds or
radiation, or both, as a result.
E-21.20 If vents are to be installed, the size,
deiiign, number and disposition-of the vents
and the associated roof screens/curtain boards
have to be assessed after careful analysis of the
various factors stated under E-2. 1.11 above, as
well as other related factors like type of build-
ing construction, nature and height of roof,
process hazards, exposure hazard, etc.
E-2.2 VentingArea
E-221 The estimated requirements for ven-
tilation are largely based on the assumed
build-up of the fire from the time of initial
outbreak to the time of effective fire fighting
action by fire brigade.
E-22.2 The vent area required to be provided
shall be approximately proportional to the
perimeter of the fire ara because the entrained
air forms the bulk of the vent~ gases.
E-22.3 The effective area shall be the mini-
mum cross-sectional area throu h which the
4 E-2.3.8 Lik@e, exterior wall windows shall
hot gases must flow out to the atmosphere.
E-22.4 No consideration shall be given to the
increased air movement obtained by power-
operated fans, since it must be assumed that in
the event of fire, power will be interrupted, or
fans damaged by heat.
E-2.2.5 The total vent areas to be provided
shall be as per the following ratios of effective
area of vent openings t,o floor area for various
occupancy classifications indicated:
a) Low heat release content 1:150
(Subdivision G-1)
b) Moderate heat release cm- 1:100
tent (Subdivision G-2)
c) High heat release content 1:30 to 1:50
(Subdivision G-3)
E-2.3 Types of Vents
E-2.3.1 Venting shall be accomplished by any
of the types such as monitors continuous
gravity vents, unit type vents or sawtooth roof
skylights.
E-2.3.2 Where monitor type vents are in-
stalled, wire glass or metal panels shall be used
only if the sash is arranged to open automat-
ically.
~-m
E-2.3.3 The use of plain thin glass for venting
shall be avoided on account of its unpre-
dictable behaviour during fire. However if
glass or other suitable plastic sheet materials
with early disintegration characteristic are
used, they should be designed for automatic
operation.
E-2.3.4 Where monitors or unit typevents are
used, the panels shall be hinged at the bottom
and designed to open automatically. Both
sides of the vents shall be designed to vent
simultaneously to ensure that their effective-
ness at the time of fire is not in any way im-
peded by wind direction.
E-2.3.5 Where movable shutters are provided
for continuous gravity vents, these shall open
automatically in the event of fire.
E-2.3.6 Unit type vents shall be of relatively
small area, ranging between 1 and 9 m2, having
light weight metal frames and housing with
hinged dampers which shall be designed for
both manual and automatic operation.
E-2.3. 7 Sawtooth roof skylight shall be con-
sidered as satisfactory for venting purpoaea
only when designed for automatic operation.
not be reckoned as satisfactory means for vent-
ing of fire gases and smoke in industrial build-
ings. However, they may be reckotted as
additional means of venting when, they are
located close to the caves and are provided
with ordinary glass or movable sash arranged
for both manual and automatic operation.
E-2.3.9 Baffles shall not be installed inside
vents, as they greatly reduce the effective area
for venting.
E-2.4 Vent Operation
E-2.4.1 The vents shall beautomaticin opera-
tion, unless where specified in these
provisions that they shall be designed for both
manual and automatic operation.
E-24.2 The release mechanism shall be
simple for operation and independent of
electrical power, since electrical services may
be interrupted by fire.
E-2.4.3 The automatic operation of vents
shall be achieved by actuation of fusible links-
or other types of heat and smoke detectors, or
by interlocking with operation of sprinkler
system or any other automatic fire extinguish-
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

ing systcm covering the area. Following their
release, the vents shall be designed to open by
a system of counterweights and associated
equipment utilizing the force of gravity or
spring loaded levers.
E-2.4.4 Automatic fire alarm system, where
instaIled, shall be coupled to the automatic
vents to ensure simultaneous operation.
E-2.4.5 Automatic sprinklers, where in-
stalled, shall operate before the vents open
order to avoid any likely delay in sprinkler
operation. However, heat actuated devices
used for vent release shall be suitably shielded
from sprinkler discharge so that water does
not delay their action.
E-2.4.6 Premises where height of roof apex is
10 m or more or where the materials handled
or stored have high smoke producing charac-
teristics, in addition to fusible links, the vent
release mechanism shall be interlinked to
smoke actuated automatic fire detectors to
ensure early operation of vents.
E-2.4. 7 Non-corrosive materials shall be used
for hinges, hatches and other related parts to
ensure long fail-safe operation of the vents.
E-2.4.8 In case of any doubts regarding the
types of vents required to be installed for any
particular occupancy, authorities having juris-
diction shall be consulted.
E-2, 5 Size, Spacing and Disposition of Vents
E-2.5. 1 Vents shall be correctly sited to en-
sure their functional efficiency. Ideally, they
shall be sited at the highest point in each area
to be covered.
E-2.5.2 They shall, as far as possible, be lo-
cated immediately above the risk to be
protected so as to allow free and speedy
removal of smoke and other combustion
products in the event of fire.
E-2.5.3 The minimum dimension for an effec-
tive vent opening shall be not less than 1.25 m
in any direction.
E-2.5.4 The spacing of the individual vent
shall be based on the principle that more num-
ber of well distributed smaller vents are more
effective than less number of badly located
larger vents.
E-2.5.5 The maximum spacing between vents
for the three occupancy classifications shall be
as follows:
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
f,
——
a) Low heal release content — 45 m be-
tween centres
b) Moderate heat release content — 36 to
37 m between centres
c) High heat release content — 22.5 to
30 m between centres, depending on
the severity of fire potential.
E-2.5,6 Vents shall be placed in a sheltered
situation where advantage can be taken of the
prevailing wind. The design of the vent shall
be such as to produce a,suction effect. A wind
blowing across a flat roof or one with a pitch
below 40° produces a negative pressure, that
is, it tends to draw gases out of the building
and so aids venting of hot gases. Wind blowing
across a roof of pitch greater than 40” will draw
gases out on the leeward side, but oppose out-
ward flow on the windward side of the roof.
E-2.5. 7 Low level inlets, with total area not
1+s than the total area of vents, shall be
provided to premit outside air to be drawn in
to aid automatic venting. These inlets, which
may be in the form of doors, windows or such
other openings, shall be designed for manual
operation when desired.
E-2.6 Roof Screens or Curtain Boards
E-2.6.1 Industrial buildiz~s with large areas
and having no subdivision/separating W@
limiting the area of individual compartments
to 750 m2 or less, shall be provided with roof
screens or curtain boards.
These screens which extend from the roof
downwards at specific intervals not only
prevent lateral spread of heat and smoke in the
event of tire below, but substantially assist in early
operation of automatic spri.nldem and vents.
E-2.6.2 They shall be of sheet metal or may
other substantial non-combustible material
strong enough to withstand damage by heat or
impact.
E-2.6.3 They shall be resonably gas-tight, al-
though small openings for passage of pipea,
conduits, etc, shall be permitted.
E-2.6.4 They shall extend down from the
roof/ceiling for a minimum depth of 2.2 m.
Around specific hazards, the depth shall be
4 m. Where roofkeiling height exceeds 15 m
they shall extend down to within 3 m of the
floor. For pitched sawtoothed roofs, they shall
extend down to truss level dividing the roof
into compartments.
Iv.n
E-2.6.5 In moderate hazard occupancies, the
distance between the screens/curtain boards
shall not exceed 75 m and the curtained areas
shall be limited to a maximum of 4500 m2.
E-2.6.6 ln high hazard occupancies, the dis-
tance between screens shall not exceed
30 m and the curtained area shall be limited to
750 m2.
E-2.6. 7 The curtained roof area shall be so
arranged that they effectively aid in the vent-
ing of smoke and hot gases through the auto-
matic vents provided in each area.
E-2.6.8 In sprinklered buildings, the screens
shall preferably be so located as to coincide
with the individual sprinkler system areas.
E-3. EXPLOS1ON RELIEF VENTS
E-3.1 Industrial premises where combustible
dusts ca~ accumulate or where flammable
gases, vapours or mists in explosive concentra-
tions may be present are constantly exposed to
explosion hazards. Pressures developed by such
explosions may be of the order of 7x 105 Pa
and ordinary buildings will not be able to
withstand the shock of such pressures. Hence,
such buildings require explosion relief vents
for preventing structural damage.
E-3.2 Basic PrinciplelCons&ierations
E-3.2.1 Most ordinary building walls will not
withstand a sustained internal pressure as
great as 6.9x 103 Pa. Hence, explosion relief
vents for buildings must be designed to
operate at pressures well below those at which
the building walls will fail.
E-3.2.2 There is a rise in pressure during an
explosion within an enclosure even with open,
unobstructed vents, and any delay in opening
the venting devices increases that pressure.
E-3.2.3 Structural damage can be minimized
by locating hazardous operations or equip-
ment outside buildings and cut off from other
operations by a pressure resisting wall. Such
isolated processes or equipment shall be
housed in single-storey buildings properly
vented and a device provided at the inlet of the
collector which will prevent an explosion from
blowing back through the duct work and into
the building.
E-3.2.4 Where highly hazardous operations
cannot be located outside of main buildings,
they shall be segregated by pressure resisting
walls and each such unit shall be ventilated
outdoors. External walls may be of heavy con-
struction if equipped with suitable vents or
high-weight panels which blow out easily.
E-3.2.5 Operations or equipment involving
explosion hazards shall not be permitted in
basements or areas partially below grade.
E-3.2.6 Fire can be expected to follow an ex-
plosion in most occupancies, so that any fixed
fire extinguishing equipment, like sprinklers,
if installed, shall be such that only the mini-
mum damage is caused to it.
E-3.2. 7 For a given material, the finer the
particle size of the dust, the more violent is the
explosion. Some materials, such as aluminium
powder, hydrogen, and acetylene, are difficult
to vent effectively due to the rapid rate of
pressure rise. Some S1OWburning materials,
such as coal dust in a confined space, may do
much damage because of the longer duration
of their presence. Some dusts, such as mag-
nesium, titanium and zirconium and several
metal hydrides may react with and ignite in
some common inert gases, such as nitrogen
and carbon dioxide.
E-3.2.8 The maximum explosion pressure in
a vented structure decreases as the size of the
vent increases, but is independent of the rup-
turing pressure of a diaphragm.
E-3.2.9 The most effective vent for the release
of explosion pressures is an unobstructed vent
opening. ----
E-3.2.10 Pressure required to rupture I
diaphragms of the same area and material
directly varies with the thickness of the
material.
E-3.2.11 The slower the rate of pressure rise,
the more easily can the explosion be vented.
E-3.2.12 The degree of venting required is
directly proportional to the degree of ex-
plosion hazard.
E-3.2.13 Experience has shown that most ex-
plosions of dusts, vapours and gases do not
involve a large part of the total volume of the
enclosure, and frequently occur near the
upper or lower limits of the explosive range.
Consequently, such explosions are relatively
weak compared with the optimum.
E-3.2.14 Rectangular unrestricted vents are
as effective as square vents of equal area.
E-3.3 Types of Erplosion Relief Vents
E.3.3.1 The explosion relief vents shall be any
one or more of the following types, depending
NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOF INDIA

on individual requirements as assessed by the
Authority. Open or unobstructed vents, louv-
res, open roof vents, hanger-type doors, build-
ing doors, windows, roof or wall panels or
movable fixed sash.
E-3.3.2 The effect or external wind pressure
or suction on these devices shall be taken into
consideration while designing and selecting
the type of vents, since wind pressures may
reach over 2x 105Pa in severe windstorms.
E-3.3.3 The type of vent for explosion relief
for any occupancy shall be selected with life
safety as the primary aim followed by mini-
mum damage to property.
E-3.3.4 Where large hanger type doors or
metal curtain doors in side walls are used as
vents care shall be taken to ensure that they
are kept wide open during operations.
E-3.3.5 Where weather hoods are used to
cover roof vents, they shall be as light as pos-
sible and lightly attached so as to enable them
to be blown off quickly when an explosion
occurs.
E-3.3.6 Doors and windows when used as ex-
plosion vents shall be installed to swing out-
wards. Doors shall have friction, spring or
magnatic latches that will function automat-
ically to permit the door to open under slight
internal pressure.
E-3.3. 7 Movable sash shall be of the top or
bottom hinged or projected type. These shall
be equipped with a latch or friction device to
prevent accidental opening due to wind action
or intrusion. Such latches or locks shall be well
maintained.
E-3.3.8 Fixed sash shall be set in place with
very light wall anchorages, or, if tight, shall be
securely fitted and glazed with plastic panes in
plastic putty.
E-3.3.9 Where the process is such that the
whole of a building or a room maybe involved,
it may be desirable to arrange for a lightly
constructed wall or roof to collapse and thus
avert the worst effects of an explosion.
E-3.4 Design, Sue and Disposition of Vents
E-3.4.1 The required area of explosion vents
shall ordinarily depend on the expected maxi-
mum intensity of an explosion in the occupan-
cy, the strength of the structure, the type of
vent closure and other”factors.
PARTIVFIREPROTECTION
~’ ,
. . ..—
E-3.4.2 Venting shall be planned in such a
manner as to prevent injury to personnel and .- ,..
damage to exposures. In congested locations,
substantial ducts or diverters shall be provided i
to direct the blast.
E-3.4.3 When ductwork is used, the ducts
shall be of sufficient strength to withstand the
maximum expected explosion pressure.
E-3.4.4 Where explosions are likely within
duct and piping systems, they shall be vented
by the use of suitable diaphragms designed to
blow out at a predetermined pressure. There
shall be no physical connection between
ductwork system for more than one collector.
E-3.4.5 In large structures, the position of
vents shall be relative to the point of origin of
explosion, when it can be determined.
E-3.4.6 Where relatively slow explosions in-
volving coal dust, chlorinated solvents, etc, are
involved, light, hinged swinging panels may be
preferred to diaphragm type of vents.
E-3.4. 7 Obstructions of any kind blocking the
vents from the risk covered shall be avoided,
particularly where risks of rapid violent ex-
plosions are present.
E-3.4.8 Counter-weights add to the inertia of
the vents and so shall be avoided.
E-3.4.9 Various relieving devices, including
devices actuated by detonators, shall start to
open at as low a pressure as possible. They
shall be of light construction, so that full
opening can be quickly attained.
E-3.4.1O Vents shall be of such size and
design as to prevent rupture of the protected
device or apparatus.
E-3.4.11 Skylights or monitors with movable
sash that will open outwards, or fixed sash
containing panes of glass or plastic that will
blow out readily under pressure from within,
can be used to supplement wall vents or win-
dows, provided resistance to their displace-
ment or opening is kept as low as consistent
with the requirements for structural strength.
E-3.4.12 Flexible plastic sheets when used for
vent closures shall be installed in slotted
frames in such a way that pressure from within
bulges the sheeti and releases them from the
holding frame.
E-3.4.13 Fragile sheets made of plastic, when
used for vent closures, shall be thin sheets that
Iv-m

will crack or rupture under less pressure than
single strength glass. For this reason usq of
transparent or translucent plastic sheets is
more advantageous instead of glass in window
sash.
E-3.4.14 If closed vents are used they shall be
larger in area than unenclosed vents to pro-
vide equivalent explosion pressure relief.
E-3.4.15 Small enclosures, such as machines,
shall be vented more generously than build-
ings, because if an explosion occurs in a
machine, its entire volume may be involved.
E-3.4.16 Vents for the protection of buildings
and equipment shall be installed on the fol-
lowing basis.
E-3.4,16.1 Small enclosures of less than 30
m3, machines and ovens of light construction
— 1000 cm2 for each 0.3 to 0.9 m3”
E-3.4.162 For small enclosures of more sub-
stantial construction having reasonably hi h
bursting strength — 1000 cm2 for each 0.9 m%.
E-3.4.16.3 Fairly large enclosurq of 30 to 700
m3, such as bins, silos, rooms, storage tanks,
etc— 1000 cm2 for each 0.9 to 1.5 m3. In these
cases, attempt shall be made to the extent
possible to predict the likely point of origin of
the explosion in relation to the vent.
E-3.4.16.4 Large rooms and build,tigs over
700 m3 containing hazardous equipment
APPENDIX
(Clause D-8.1)
GUIDELINES FOR FIRE DRILL AND’ EVACUATION PROCEDU*
BUILDINGS (ABOVE 15 m IN HEIGHT)
F-2. INTRODUCTION
F-1.l In case of fire ina high rise building, safe
evacuation of its occupants may present
serious problems unless a plan for orderly and
systematic evacuation is prepared in advance
and all occupants are well drilled in the opera-
tion of such plan. These guidelines are in-
tended to assist them in this task.
F-2. ALARMS
F-2.1 Any person discovering fire, heat or
smoke shall immediately report such condi-
tion to the fire brigade, unless he has personal
knowledge that such a report has been made.
No person shall make, issye, poit or maintain
_.&.
comprising a small fraction of the entire
volume:
a) For heavy reinforced concrete; walls —
100 cmz for each 2.25 m3.
b) For light reinforced concrete, brick or
wood construction — 1 000 cm2 for
each 1.65 to 2.25 m3.
c) For lightweight construction such as
prefabricated panels — 1000 cm2 for
each 1.5 to 1.65 m3.
E-3.4.16.5 Large rooms or building over %30
m3 containing hazardous equipment compris-
ing a large part of the entire volume of a room
or building shall be vented ai generoush+ as
possible 1000 cm2 for each 0.3 to 1.05 m .
E-3.4.16.6 horder to obtain these ratios, the
size of the building or room must be limited.
For some hazardous materials, such as
hydrogen, acetylene, carbon disulphide, etc,
these limits are extremely low.
E-3.4.1 7 Emphasis shall always be placed on
segregating hazardous areas by means of
firewalls or separating walls to prevent spread
of fire.
E-3.4.18 Interior walls of light construction,
such as tile, shall be avoided in hazardous
locations, since they can cause injuries to per-
sonnel in the event of an explosion.
F
FOR HIGH RISE
any regulation or order, written or verbal, that
would_&quire any person to take any unneces-
sary delaying action prior to reporting such
condition to the fire brigade.
F-3. DRILLS
F-3.1 Fire drills shall be conducted, in accord-
ance with the”Fire Sat%ty Plan, at least once
every “three month: fo~ qxisting buildings
during the first two years after the effective
date of these rules, or for new buildings during
the first two years after the issuance of the
certificate of occupancy. Thereafter, fire drills
shall be conducted at least once every six
months.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
F-3.2 Alloccupants of the building shall par-
ticipate in the fire drill. However, occupants of
the building, other than building service
employees, are not required to leave the floor
or use the exits during the drill.
F-3.3 A written record of such drills shall be
kept on the premises for a three years period
and shall be readily available for Fire Brigade
inspection.
F-4. SIGNS AND PLANS
F-4.1 Signs at L~t Landings — A sign shall be
posted and maintained in a conspicuous place
on every floor at or near the lift landing in
accordance with the requirements, indicating
that in case of fire, occupants ‘shall use the
stairs unless instructed otherwise. The sign
shall contain a diagram showing the location
of the stairways except that such diagram may
be omitted, provided signs containing such
diagram are posted in conspicuous places on
the respective floor.
A sign shall read “IN CASE OF FIRE, USE
STAIRS UNLESS INSTRUCTED
OTHERWISE”. The lettering shall be at
least 1.25 cm block letters in red and white
background. Such lettering shall be properly
spaced to provide good legibility. The sign
shall beat least 25x 30 cm, where the diagram
is also incorporated in it and 6.25 x 25 cm
where the diagram, is omitted. In the latter
case, the diagram sign shall beat least 20 x 30
cm. The sign shall be located directly above a
call-button and squarely attached to the wall
or partition. The top of the sign shall not be
above 2 m from the floor level.
F-4.2 FloorNumberingSigns —Asignshallbe
posted and maintained within each stair
enclosure on every floor, indicating the num-
ber of the floor, in accordance with the re-
quirements given below.
The numerals shall be of bold type and at least
7.5 cm high. The numerals and background
shall be in contrasting colours. The sign shall
be securely attached to the stair side of the
door.
F-4.3 Stair and Elevator Identi~cation Signs —
Each stairway and each elevator back shall be
identified by an alphabetical letter. A sign in-
dicating the letter of identification shall be
posted and maintained at each elevator land-
ing and on the side of the stairway door from
PART IV FIRE PROTECTION
which egress is to be made, in accordance with
the requirements given below.
The lettering on the sign shall be at least
7.5 cm high, of bold type and of contrasting
colour from the background. Such signs shall
be securely attached.
F-4.4 Stair Re-entry Signs — A sign shall be
posted and maintained on each floor within
each stairway and on the occupancy side of the
stairway where required, indicating whether
re-entry is provided into the building and the
floor where such re-entry is provided, in ac-
cordance with the requirements given below.
The lettering and numerals of the signs shall
be at least 1.25 cm high of bold type. The
lettering and background shall be of contrast-
ing colours and the signs shall be securely
attached approximately 1.5 m above the floor
level.
F-4.5 Fire command station shall be provided
with floor plan of the building and other per-
tinent information relative io the service
equipment of the building.
F-5. FIRE SAFETY PLAN
F-5.1 A format for the Fire Safety Plan shall
be as given in D-8.
F-5.2 The applicable parts of the approved
Fire Safety Plan shall be distributed to all
tenants of the building by the building
management when the Fire Safety Plan has
been approved by the Chief Fire Officer. “
F-5.3 The applicable parts of the approved
Fire Safety Plan shall then be distributed by
the tenants to all their employees and by the
building management to all their building
employees.
F-5..4 Where the owner of the building is also
an occupant of the building, he shall be
responsible for the observance of these rules
and the Fire Safety Plan in the same manner
as a tenant.
F-5.5 In the event there are changes from
conditions existing at the time the Fire Safety
Plan for the building was approved, and the
changes are such so as to require amending the
Fire Safety Plan, within 30 days after such
changes, an amended Fire Safety Plan shall be
submitted to the fire brigade for approval.
IV-81
 h-

F-6. FIRE COMMAND STATION b) Regularly assigned employment —

F-6.1 A Fire Command Station shall be es-
Title “. . ...
tablished in the lobby of the building on the c) Regularly assigned location
entrance floor. Such command station shall be d) How is he notified when at regular
adequately illuminated. location? ,,,q
e) How is he notified when not at regular ,*
F-7. COMMUNICATIONS AND FIRE r
location?
ALARM
f) Normal working hours ~
F-7.1 A means of communication and fire g) Duties of Deputy Fire Safety Director
alarm for use during fire emergencies shall be — see F-9.2.
provided and maintained by the owner or per-
F-8.5 Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire Wardens
son in charge of the building.
a) Are their names on Organisation
F-8. FIRE SAFETY PLAN FORMAT
Charts for each floor and/or tenancy?
F-8.1 BuildingAddress b) Submit typical completed Organisa-
tion Chart for Fire Drill and Evacua-
Street and Pin Code Number ....
tion Assignment.
Telephone Number ....
c) Duties of Fire Wprdens and Deputy
F-8.2 Puqoose and Objective Fire Wardens — see D-9.3.
F-8.2.1 PURPOSE — To establish method of F-8.6 Building Evacuation Supervisor
systematic, safe and orderly evacuation of an
a) Name
area or building by and of its occupants in case
b) Regularly assigned employment —
of fire or other emergency, in the least possible
Title
time, to a safe area by the nearest safe means
of egress; also the use of such available fire c) Regularly assigned loc&tion
appliances (including sounding of alarms) as d) How is he notified when at regular
may have been provided for controlling or location?
extinguishing fire and safeguarding of human e) How is he notified when not at regular
life. location?
f) Normal working hours
F-8,2.2 OBJECI’JVE— To provide proper
0 Duties of Building Evacuation Super-
education as a part of continuing employee
visor — see D-9.4. -.
indoctrination and through a continuing writ-
ten programme for all occupants, to ensure F-8. 7 Fire Party
prompt reporting of fire, the response of fire a) Submit a completed Organization
alarms as designated, and the immediate in- Chart for Fire Parties naming person
itiation of fire safe~ procedures to safeguard in charge, and his title in the building.
life and contain fire-until the arrival of the Fire b) Indicate standards of selection froin
Brigade. building employees based on back-
F-8.3 Fire Safep Director gound and availability.
c) How are they notified?
a) Name How are they notified when they are
d)
b) Regularly assigned employment — not at their regular locations? ,.
Title
e) Means of responding
c) Regularly assigned location
f) Duties of each member of Fire Party—
d) How is he notified when at regular see D-9.5.
location?
e) How is he notified when not at regular F-8.8 Occupants Instructions — Distribution
..
location? of instructions to all tenents, tenents’
f) Normal working hours employees and building employees —
Duties of Fire Safety Director — see see D-9. 6.
g)
F-9.1.
F-8.9 Evacuation Drills
F-8.4 Deputy Fire Safety Director a) Frequen~ of drills ,
a) Name b) How conducted? “

Iv.sz NATIONALBUILDJNGCODEOF IF:DJA

 d

c) Participation. Who participated? F-9.1.5 Be responsible for the designation

How? and training of a Fire Warden for each floor,
d) Controls and supervision and sufficient Deputy Fire Wardens for each
e) Recording of details of drills tenancy in accordance with orders on the sub-
ject.
F-8.10 Fire Command Statwn
F-9.1.6 Be responsible for a daily check for
a) Location the availability of the Fire Warden and Deputy
b) Requirements Wardens, and see that up-to-date organiza-
1) - Adequate illumination tion charts are posted.
2) Adequate communication to No’rE— Ifthe numberof FireWardensandDeputy
mechanical equipment room and FireWardensin the building is such that it is imprac-
elevator control room on each tical to individurdfycontact each one daily, a suggested
method to satis~ the requirements is to make
floor provisions for the Fire Warden, or a Deputy Fire
3) Copy of Fire Safety Plan Warden in the absence of the Fire Warden, to noti~
4) Copy of Buiiding Information the Fire Safety Director when the Fire Warden or
required number of Deputy Fire Wardens are not
Form available. In order to determine the compliance by the
5) Representative floor plans show- Fire Warden and Deputy Fire Wardens, when this
ing location of signs, floor method is used, the Fhe Safety Director shall make a
remote station, communications, spot check of several different floors each day.
etc. F-9.1. 7 Noti& the owner or some other per-
son having charge of the building when any
F-8.11 Signs
designated individual is neglecting his respon-
a) Signs at elevator landings. Floor sibilities contained in Fire Safety Plan. The
diqgrams owner or the other persu~l in-charge of the
b) “Floor numbering building shall bring the matter to the attention
c) Stairway identification of the firm employing the ir~ividual. If the
d) Elevator identification firm fails to correct the conditixt, the Fire
e) Stair re-entry Department shall be notified by the
owner/person in charge of the building.
F-8.12 Fire Presentation and Fire Protection
Programme — See 9.7 F-9.1.8 In the event of fire, shall report to the
Fire Command Station to supervise, provide
F-8.13 Building Information Form — .
for and coordinate
See D-9.8 a) Ensure that the Fire Department has
F-8.14 Representative Floor Plan — See D-9.9 been notified of any fire or fire alarm. J

b) Manning of the Fire Command Sta-

F-8.15 Fire Safety Plan Prepared by —
tion.
See F-9.1O
c) Direction of evacuatixig procedures as
a) Date when prepared provided in the Fire Safety Plan.
b) Date when revised d) Reports on conditions on fire floor for
F-9. DUTIES information of Fire Department on
their arrival.
F-9.1 Fire Safety Director)s Duties e) Advise the Fire Department Officer in
F-9.1.1 Be familiar with the written Fire charge in the operation of the Fire
Safety Plan providing for fire drill and evacua- Command Station.
tion procedure in accordance with orders on F-9.1.9 Be responsible for the training and
the subject. activities of the Building Evacuation Super-
F-9.1.2 Select qualified building service visor.
employees for a Fire Party and organize, train F-9.2 Deputy Fire Safety Director> Duties
and supervise such Fire Brigade.
F-9.2.1 Subordinate to the Fire Safety
F-9.1.3 Be responsible for the availability and Director
state of readiness of the Fire Party.
F-9.2.2 “Perform duties of Fire Safety Director
F-9. 1.4 Conduct fire and evacuation drills. in his “absence.

PARTIV FIRE PROTECf’ION ~.83

F-9.3 Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire Wardens
Duties — The tenant or tenants of each floor
shall, upon request of the owner or person in
charge of buildings, make responsible and de-
pendable employees available for designation
by the Fire Safety Director as Fire Warden and
Deputy Fire Wardens.
F-9.3.1 Each floor of a building shall be under
the direction of a designated Fire Warden for
the evacuation of occupants in the event of
fire. He shall be assisted in his duties by the
Deputy Fire Wardens. A Deputy Fire warden
shall be provided for each tenancy. When the
floor area of a tenancy exceeds 700 mz of
oceupiable space, a Deputy Fire Warden shall
be assigned for each 700 m2 or part thereof.
F-9.3. 2 Each Fire Warden and Deputy Fire
Warden shall be familiar with the Fire Safety
Plan, the location of exits and the location and
operation of any available fire alarm system.
F-9.3.3 In the event of fire, or fire alarm the
Fire Warden shall ascertain the location of the
fire, and direct evacuation of the floor in ac-
cordance with directions received and the fol-
lowing guidelines:
a) The most critical areas for immediate
evacuation are the fire floor and floors
immediately above.
Evacuation from the other floors shall
be instituted when instructions from
the Fire Command Station or condi-
tions indicate such action. Evacuation
shall be via uncontaminated stairs.
The Fire Warden shall try to avoid
stairs being used by the Fire Depart-
ment. If this is not possible, he shall try
to attract the attention of the Fire
Department Personnel before such
personnel open the door to the fire
floor.
b) Evacuation to two or more levels
below the fire floor is generally ade-
quate. He shall keep the Fire Com-
mand Station informed regarding his
location.
c) Fire Wardens and their Deputies shall
see that all occupants are notified of
the fire, and that they proceed im-
mediately to execute the Fire Safety
Plan.
d) The Fire Warden on the fire floor
shall, as soon as practicable, noti& the
Iv.U
Fire Command Station of the par-
‘i
ticulars.
e) Fire Wardens on floors above the fire
shall, after executing the Fire Safety
Plan, noti~ the Fire Command Station
of the means being used for evacuation
and any other particulars.
f) In the event that stairways serving fire
floor and/or floors above are unusable
due to contamination or cut off by fire
and/or smoke or that several floors
above fire involve large numbers of oc-
cupants who must be evacuated, con-
sideration may be given to using
elevators in accordance with the fol-
lowing:
1) If the elevators servicing his floor
also service the fire floor, they
shall not be used. However,
elevators may be used if there is
more than one bank of elevators,
and he is informed from the Fire
Command Station that one bank
is unaffected by the fire.
2) If elevators do not service the fire
floor and their shafts have no
openings on the fire floor, they
may be used, unless directed
otherwise.
3) Elevators manned by trained
building personnel or firemen
may also be used.
..
4) In the absence of a serviceable
elevator, the Fire Warden shall
select the safest stairway to use
for evacuation on the basis of the
location of the fire and any infor-
mation received from the Fire
Comrhand Station. The Fire
Warden shall check the environ-
ment in the stairs prior to entry
for evacuation. If it is affected by
smoke, alternative stair shall be
selected, and the Fire Command
Station notified.
5) The Fire Warden shall keep the
Fire command Station informed
of the m&ms being employed for
evacuation by the occupants of
his floor.
a Ensure that an alarm has been trans-
mitted.
F-9.3.4 ORGANISATION CHART FOR FIRE
DRILL AND EVACUATION ASSIGNMENT — A
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
chart designating employees and their assign-
ments shall be prepared and posted in a con-
spicuous place in each tenancy and on each
floor of a tenancy that occupies more than one
floor and a copy shall be in the possession of
the Fire Safety Director.
F-9.3.5 Have available an updated listing of
all personnel with physical disabilities who
cannot use stairs unaided. Make arrange-
ments to have these occupants assisted in
moving down the stairs to two or more levels
below fire floor. If it is necessary to move such
occupants to a still lower level during the fire,
move them down the stairs to the uppermost
floor served by an uninvolved elevator bank
and then remove the street floor by elevator.
Where resistance is required for such evacua-
tion, noti~ Fire Safety Director.
F-9.3.6 Provide for Fire Warden identifica-
tion during fire drills and fires, such as using
armband, etc.
F-9.3. 7 Ensure that all persons on the floor
are notified of fire and all are evacuated to safe
areas. A search must be conducted in the
lavatories to ensure all are out. Personnel as-
signed as searchers can promptly and efficient-
ly perform this duty.
F-9.3.8 Check availability of applicable per-
sonnel on Organisation Chart and provide for
a substitute when the position on a chart is not
covered.
F-9.3.9 After evacuation, perform a head
count to ensure that all regular occupants
known to have occupied the floor have been
evacuated.
F-9.3.1O When alarm is received, the Fire
Warden shall remain at a selected positon in
the civinity of the communication station on
the floor, in order to maintain communication
with the Fire Command Station and to receive
and give instructions.
F-9. 4 Building Evacuation Supervisor’s Duties
— A building Evacuation Supervisor is re-
quired at all times other than normal working
or business hours when there are occupants in
the building and there is no Fire Safety Direc-
tor on duty in the building.
F-9.4.1 He should be capable of directing the
evacuation of the occupants as provided by the
Fire Safety Plan.
PAR’rIVFIRE PROTECTION
F-9.4.2 During fire emergencies, the primary
responsibility of the Building Evatmation Su-
pervisor shall be to man the Fire Command
Station, and the$iirection and execution of the
evacuation as provided in the Fire Safety Plan.
The Building Evacuation Supervisor’s train-
ing and related activities shall be under the
direction of the Fire Safety Director in accord-
ance with these rules, and the Fire Safety Plan.
Such activities shall be subject to Fire Depart-
ment control.
F-9.5 Fire Party Duties — On receipt of an
alarm for fire the Fire Party shall:
a) report to the floor below the fire to
assist in evacuation and provide infor-
mation to the Fire Command Station.
b) after evacuations of fire floor, en-
deavour to control spread of fire by
closing doors, etc.
c) attempt to control the fire until arrival
of the Fire Department, if the fire is
small and conditions do not pose a per-
sonal threat.
d) leave one member on the floor below
the fire to direct_the Fire Department
to the fire location and to inform them
of conditions.
e) on arrival of the Fire Department, the
Fire Party shall fqmrt to the Fire Com-
mand Station for additional instruc-
tions.
9 have a member designated as runner, -
who shall know the location of the
nearest telephone, and be instructed in
its use. Such member shall immediately ..
upon receipt of information that there
is a fire or evidence of fire, go to the
telephone, transmit an alarm and await
the arrival of the Fire Department and
direct such department to the fire.
NOTE — A chart designating employees and their as-
signmentsshall be prepared.
F-9. 6 Occupant 5 Instructions
a) The applicable parts of the approved
Fire Safety Plan shall be distributed to
all tenants of the building by the build-
ing management when the Fire Safety
Plan has been approved by the Fire
Commisssioner.
b) The applicable parts of the approved
Fire Safety Plan shall then be dis-
tributed by the tenents to all their
 employees and by the building
management to all their building
employees.
c) All occupants of the building shall par-
ticipate and cooperate in carrying out
the provisions of the Fire Safety Plan.
F-9. 7 Fire Prevention and Fire Protection
Programme
a) A plan for periodic formal inspections
of each floor area, including exit
facilities, fire extinguishers and house
-, keeping shall be developed. A copy of
such plan be submitted.
b) Provision shall be made for the month-
ly testing of communication and alarm
systems.
F-9. 8 Building Information Form — It shall
include the following information:
a) Building address ......Pin Code .....
b) Owner or person in-charge of building
— Name, Address and Telephone
Number.
c) Fire Safety Director and Deputy Fire
Safety Director’s Name, and
Telephone Number.
d) Certificate of occupancy. Location
where posted, or duplicate attached.
e) Height, area, class of construction.
Number type and location of fire stairs
f)
and/or fire towers.
@ Number, type and location of horizon-
tal exits or other areas of refuge.
h) Number, type, location and operation
of elevators and escalators.
j) Interior fire alarms, or alarms to
central stations.
k) Communications systems and/or
walkie talkie, telephones, etc.
m) Standpipe system, size and location of
risers, gravity or pressure tank, fire
pump, location of siamese connec-
tions, name of employee with certifi-
cate of qualification and number of
certificate.
n) Sprinkler system, name of employee
with Certificate of Fitness and certifi-
cate number. Primary and secondary
water supply, fire pump and areas
protected.
P) Special extinguishing system if any,
components and operation.
q) Average number of persons normally
Iv-=
employed in building. Daytime and
night time.
r) Average number of handicapped
people in building. Location. Daytime
and night time.
s) Number of persons normally visiting
the building. Daytime and night time.
t) Service equipment such as:
1) Ele~t~ic power, primary,
auxiliary
2) Lighting, normal, emergency,
type and locatiou
3) Heating, type, fuel, location of
heating uniq
4) Ventilation — with fixed win-
dows, emergency means of ex-
hausting heat and smoke;
5) Air Conditioning Systems —
Brief description of the system,
including ducts and floors ser-
viced;
6) Refuse storage and disposal;
7) Fire fighting equipment and ap-
pliances, other than standpipe
and sprinkler system;
8) Other pertinent building equip-
ment.
u) Alterations and repair operations, if
any, and the protective and preventive
measures necessary to safeguard-such
operations with attention to torch
operations.
v) Storage and use of flammable solids,
liquids and/or gases.
w) Special occupancies in the building
and the proper protection and main-
tenance thereof. Places of public as-
sembly, studios, and theatrical
occupancies.
D-9.9 Representative Floor Plan — A floor
plan, re~resentative of the majority or the
floor designs of the entire building, shall be at
the Command Post, in the main lobby, under
the authority of the Fire Safety Director. One
copy of a- representative floor plan shall be
submitted to the Fire Department with the
Fire Safety plan.
D-9.1O Fire Safety Plan — In planning,
evaluate the individual floor layouts, the
population of floors, the number and kinds of
exits, the zoning of the floor by area and oc-
cupants. Determine the movement of traffic
by the most expeditious route to an ap-
NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
propriate exit and alternative route for each
zone, since under fire conditions one or more
exits may not be usable. This format is to be
used in the preparation of the Fire Safety Plan.
Nothing contained in this Fire Safely Plan
fortmit is to be construed as all inclusive. All
rules and other requirements are to be fully
complied with. -
F-9.11 Personal Fire Insbucirlm Card — All
the occupants of the building shall be given a
Personal Fire Instruction Card giving the
details of the floor plan and exit routes along
with the instruction to be followed in the event
of fire. A typical Personal Fire Instruction
Card shall be-as follows:

PERSONAL FIRE
INSTRUCTION CARD

El SEAL

NAME OF THE ORGANIZATION

ADDRESS OF THE ORGANIZATION

NAME:

DESIGNATION:

FIRE WARDEN

INSTRUCTIONS 3. The nearest exit from your table.

FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY YOU SHOULD 4. Your assembly point on ground floor
KNow (checkwith your Fire/Dy. Fire Warden).
5. FOR YOUR OWN PROTECTION
1. .’lko push button fire alarm boxes are YOU SHOULD REPORT TO
provided. per floor. You should read YOUR FIRE/DEPUTY FIRE WAR-
the operating instructions. DEN
2. You should read the operating instruc- a) If any exit door/route is
tions on the body OF the fi~e extin- obstructed by loose materials,
guishers provided on your floor. goods, boxes, etc.

PART IV FIRE PROTECI’ION

 b) If any staircase door, lift lobby IF YOU HEAR EVACUATION INSTRUC-
door does not close automat- TIONS
ically, or does not close com-
1. Leave the floor immediately by the
pletely.
south/north staircase.
c) If any push button fire alarm
2. Report to your Warden, at your
point, or fire extinguisher is
predetermined assembly point outside
obstructed, damaged or ap-
the building.
parently out of order.
3. Do not try to use lifts.
IF YOU DISCOVER A FIRE 4. Do not go to cloakroom.
1. Break the glass of the nearest push 5. Do not run or shout.
button fire alarm and push the button. 6. Do not stop to collect personal belong-
2. Attack the fire with extinguishers ings.
provided on your floor. Take guidance 7. Keep the lift lobby and staircase doors
from your Wardens. shut.
3. Evacuate if your Warden asks you to do YOUR ASSEMBLY POINT IS................
so.

NORTH

19 18 17 16

0
BLOCKNO. 2
●

0
00
BLOCK NO. 1
●

r-

6 5 4 3 2 I M

SOUTH

(*To indicate appropriate plan of building concerned)

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA

 f,
.. .. —__

. .4

APPENDIX G
(Foreword )
COMMITTEE COMPOSITION

Fire Safety Sectional Committee, CED 36

Chairman Representing
SHRIJ. N. VAKtL Tariff Advisory Committee, Mumbai

Members
SHRIK RAVI (Alternate to
SHRIJ.N. VAKIL)
DR A. K. BHALLA Ministry of Defence, New Delhi
DR K. S. UPPAL (Alternate)
DR R. K. BHANDARI Institution of Engineers (India), Calcutta
SHRIR. P. BHATLA Engineem India Limited, New Delhi
SHRI M.M. KAPOOR(Alternate)
SHRIS. N CHAKRABORTY Tariff Advisoty Committee, Madras
SHRIP.K. MAIUMDAR (Alternate)
SHRIP. K. CHATI’ERJEE Ministry of Defence (DR & DO), New Delhi
ASSIWANT FIREADVISER (Alternate)
CHIEFFIRE OFFICER Municipal Corporation of Mumbai (Mumbai Fke Brigade),
Mumbai
SHRIS. M. DESAI ]n personal Capacity (h CFO, State Bank oftrrdi~B-415
~Ur@al
Of/icers Qrts, Abdul Gaflar Khan Road Worli, Mumbai 400018)
SHRIRAMESH R. DHOBLEY Bhabha Atomic Research Ccntre, Mumbai
SHRIS. K. DHERI Municipal Corporation of Delhi
SHRIR. C. SHARMA (Alternate)
SHRIK. P. SHARMA Northern Railway, New Delhi
Assm SECURtTYCOMMISSIONER(Alternate)
FIREADVISOR Ministty of Home Affairs, New Delhi
SHRIJ. S. GAHLAUT State Bank of India, Mumbai
SHRIP. N. GHOSH In personal capacity (J-1916, Chiuranjan Park New Delhi 110019)
SHRIC. P. GOSAIN Central Public Works Department, New Delhi
SHRIS. C. GUnA Lloyd Insulations (India) Pvt Ltd, New Delhi
SHRi SANIEEVANGRA (Alternate)
SHRf M. M. MEHTA Engineer-in Chief’s Branch, New Delhi
SHRIT.K. MITTAL (Alternate)
GENERALMANAGER Mather and Platt Limited, Mumbai
SHRf K. R. EASWARAN (Alternate)
SHRID. N. KULKARNI Bombay Fire Brigade, Mumbai \ .
SHRI V. M. MADGE The Hindustan Construction Co Ltd, Mumbai
SHRIA. B, PHADKE(Alternate)
SHRIG. B. MENON In personal capacity (House No. 33/238, A-5 Puzha!&ra, Padam
Venrrala, Cochin 28)
MEMBER(HYDRO-CONSIUJCHON MONITORING) Central Electricity Authority, New Delhi
CHIEFENGINEER(HTO-11) (Akrnate)
SHRIV. B. NIKAM In Personal Capacity@ CFO, Bombq, Flal No. 34, B[dg No. 4,
Municipal Officers Co-op Housing Society, Keshavrao Khadye
Marg HaziAli, Mumbai 400034
SHRID. PAtiMANABHA Tata Consulting Engineers Mumbai
SHRIG.P. MONNAIH(Alternate)
SHRIP. N. PANCHAL Ministry of 1-IomcAffairs, New Delhi
GENERALFIRE(Ahemure)
Assrr INSPECTOW
PRESIDENT Institution of Fire Engineers (India), New Dethi
SHRI V. M. RANALRAR Ministry of Petroteum and Natural Gas
SHRIR. N. CHACHRA Metallurgical and Engineering Consultants (India) Ltd, Bihar
SHRIHARISH R. SALOT Vijay Fire Protection Systems Pvt Ltd, Mumbai
SHRi R.WESH K. SALOT (Alternate)
SHRIN. L. N. SHARMA Bharat Heavy Electrical Ltd, Bhopal
SHRIM. L. KHURANA (Alternate)
DR T. P. SHARMA Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee
DR GOPAL KRISHAN(Alternate)
SHRIR. SUNDARAIAN National ‘f’hermat Power Corporation Ltd, New Delhi
SHRIS. K. CHATrOPADHAYAY(Ahemare)

PART IV FIRE PROTECTION” IV-89

 Members Representing
SHRI M. S. TYAGI Minist~ of Labour (Regional Labour Institute, Kanpur),
SHRIP. K. SAKSENA(Alremate) Ncw Delhi
MANAGINGDIRE~OR
SHRIT. V. MADHUMANI(Alternate)
Loss Prevention Association of India Ltd, Mumbai
..
!i“
,\
SHRIJ. VENKATARAMAN, Director General BIS (l%oficio-Wrnber)
Director (Civ Engg)
Member Secretaries

SHRIHEMANTKUMAR
Joint Director (CN Engg), BIS
SMTN~ETA SHARMA
Deputy Director (Civ Engg), BIS
SHRI S. CHATURVEDI
Deputy Direetor (Civ Eng), BIS
Adhoc Panel for Revision of Part 4 of National Building Code, CED 36/AP

Convener Representing
SHRIG. B. MENON In Personal Capacity (House No. 33/238, A-5 Puzhakkara,
Padam Vennalg Cochin 28)
Members
SHRIR. P. BWATIA Engineers India Limited, New Delhi
SHRIP. K. CHATIWLRX Ministry of Defence, New Delhi
SHRI S, K. DHERI Delhi Fire Semites, Ncw Delhi
SHRIP. N. GHOSH In Personal Capacity (J-191t$ ChiIfronjan Par% New Delhi)
SHRIT. R. A. KRISHNAN Tariff Advisory Committee, NW Delhi
SHRI P. N. PANCHAL Ministry of [-fome Affaits, New Delhi
SHRIT. P. SHARMA Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee

NA”floNA1. IIIJII.DING {:0111; 01’ INDIA